summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.dtx38
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.dtx65296
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.ins2179
3 files changed, 0 insertions, 67513 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 9014b56cbae..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `minitoc-fr.dtx',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% minitoc.dtx (with options: `minitoc-fr')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%%
-%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
-%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 of this license
-%% or (at your option) any later version. The latest version of this
-%% license is in:
-%%
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%%
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
-%% 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained".
-%%
-%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD).
-%%
-%% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l'
-%% distributed with it.
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000
-%% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008
-%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert
-%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr>
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\ProvidesFile{minitoc-fr.dtx}%
- [2008/07/16 minitoc v60 french documentation start file]
-\input{minitoc.dtx}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `minitoc-fr.dtx'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 2957e0e9ccd..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,65296 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000
-%% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008
-%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert
-%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr>
-%
-% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in:
-%
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained".
-%
-% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert.
-%
-% This work consists of all the files listed in the file minitoc.l
-% distributed with it.
-%
-% \fi
-%
-% \iffalse
-%<*driver>
-\ProvidesFile{minitoc.dtx}%
-%</driver>
-%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/05]
-%<package>\ProvidesPackage{minitoc}
-%<*package>
- [2008/07/16 v60 minitoc.dtx file]
-%</package>
-%<package>\RequirePackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14]
-%<*driver>
-\listfiles
-\documentclass[10pt,a4paper,titlepage,oneside,openright]{book}
-%\documentclass[10pt,a4paper,titlepage,twoside,openright]{book}
-\newlength{\iwidth}
-\newlength{\awidth}
-\newlength{\bwidth}
-\newlength{\cwidth}
-\newlength{\dwidth}
-\newlength{\wkdim}
-\setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-\addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-%
-% To add a kind of minitoc in the index
-%
-%\newcommand{\xhead}[1]{\section*{#1}\relax\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}\phantomsection}
-\newcommand{\xhead}[1]{\phantomsection\textbf{#1}\relax\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}}
-%
-% To frame a flag.
-\newlength{\flagframethickness}
-\setlength{\flagframethickness}{.1pt}
-\newcommand{\flagbox}[1]{\begingroup\fboxrule=\flagframethickness\fboxsep=0pt\textcolor{black}{\fbox{\protect#1}}\endgroup}
-\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\flagframethickness}{1mm}}
-\AtBeginDocument{\definecolor{FBcolor}{gray}{.93}}
-\AtBeginDocument{\renewcommand{\flagbox}[1]{\begingroup\fboxrule=\flagframethickness\fboxsep=0pt\textcolor{FBcolor}{\fbox{\protect#1}}\endgroup}}
-\newcommand{\flagboxa}[1]{\raisebox{-2mm}{\flagbox{\protect#1}}}
-\newcommand{\flagboxu}[1]{\raisebox{2mm}{\flagbox{\protect#1}}}
-%
-\def\ATOC#1{{#1}\stepcounter{section}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}#1}}
-\newlength{\widthinc}\setlength{\widthinc}{3.5cm}
-\makeatletter\@mparswitchfalse\makeatother % les notes marginales à gauche!
-\makeatletter
-\def\mydotfill#1{% Filling dots; #1 = separation (dimension)
- \leavevmode
- \cleaders \hb@xt@ #1{\hss\ensuremath{\cdot}\hss}\hfill
- \kern\z@}
-\def\mysymbfill#1#2{% Filling symbols; #1 = separation (dimension) #2 = symbol;
- \leavevmode
- \cleaders \hb@xt@ #1{\hss\ensuremath{#2}\hss}\hfill
- \kern\z@}
-\makeatother
-\let\RR\raggedright % or \RaggedRight ?
-\IfFileExists{\jobname.lan}{\input{\jobname.lan}}{\typeout{WARNING: \jobname.lan NOT FOUND}\def\LANG{0}}
-\IfFileExists{marvosym.sty}{\usepackage{marvosym}\def\myCoffeecup{~\Coffeecup}}{\let\myCoffeecup\relax}
-\IfFileExists{mparhack.sty}{\usepackage{mparhack}}{} % not used if oneside.
-\usepackage{chngpage} % to enlarge the biblio
-\IfFileExists{natbib.sty}{\usepackage[sort&compress,comma,numbers,square]{natbib}\citeindextrue}{}
-\IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{\usepackage[tight]{shorttoc}}{}
-\IfFileExists{fnbreak.sty}{\usepackage{fnbreak}}{} % Checks split footnotes
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\usepackage{ifthen}
-\newcounter{currlevel}\setcounter{currlevel}{-1}
-\makeatletter
-\gdef\@idxitem#1{%
- \par
- \hangindent 40\p@
- \ifthenelse{#1 > \value{currlevel}}{{%
- \nobreak
- }{\ifthenelse{#1 = \value{currlevel}}{%
- \pagebreak[0]%
- }{%
- \pagebreak[2]%
- }}%
- \setcounter{currlevel}{#1}%
- \hangindent 40pt
-}}%
-\makeatother
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\makeatletter
-\providecommand*{\toclevel@chaptersom}{0}
-\makeatletter\providecommand*{\toclevel@sectionsom}{0}
-\let\nouppercase\relax
-\def\Shorttableofcontents#1#2{\bgroup\c@tocdepth=#2\@restonecolfalse
- \if@tightshtoc
- \parsep\z@
- \fi
- \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn\fi
- \@ifundefined{chapter}%
- {\section*{{#1}
- \@mkboth{\nouppercase{#1}}{\nouppercase{#1}}}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{sectionsom}{#1}}%
- {\chapter*{{#1}
- \@mkboth{\nouppercase{#1}}{\nouppercase{#1}}}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chaptersom}{#1}}%
- \@startshorttoc{toc}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi\egroup}
-\def\l@chaptersom{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1em}{2.3em}}
-\makeatother
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% \IfFileExists{repeatindex.sty}{\usepackage{repeatindex}}{}% To improve the index; DOES NOT WORK %%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\IfFileExists{sectsty.sty}{\usepackage[garrulous]{sectsty}% To fix long sectionning titles...
- \partfont{\RR}%
- \chapterfont{\RR}%
- \sectionfont{\RR}%
- \subsectionfont{\RR}%
- \subsubsectionfont{\RR}}{} % NOT \paragraph or \subparagraph !
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% \usepackage[space,sort]{cite} % cite does not work well with hyperref...
-%\RequirePackage[nocompress,sort]{cite}[2003/11/04] % cite[compress] or cite[sort] does not work well with hyperref;
-% use a recent recent version of cite.sty to use its sort option.
-% In fact, I use (above): \IfFileExists{natbib.sty}{\usepackage[sort,comma,numbers,square]{natbib}}{}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\providecommand\citedash{\mbox{--}\nolinebreak}
-\providecommand\citemid{,\nolinebreak[1]}
-\providecommand\citepunct{,\nolinebreak[1]\hspace{.13em plus .1em minus .1em}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\renewcommand\citedash{\mbox{--}\nolinebreak}
-\or\relax
-\renewcommand\citedash{\mbox{-}\nolinebreak}
-\fi
-\let\bibpreamble\relax
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\long\def\bibpreamble{\noindent {\bfseries This bibliography contains many URLs; you must be aware that
-some of them might be inaccessible because they are obsolete, or because their site is down or encounters
-some unexpected problem. Note also that the response of some sites may be slow (several seconds).
-For instance, the entries
-\cite{latex-fonts-ki-joo-kim,bibtex-ki-joo-kim,pdf-ki-joo-kim}, from the \url{http://www.geocities.com/kijoo2000/}
-site, are very difficult to contact.
-
-The URLs beginning with ``\texttt{https:}'' to the TUGboat site may have a restricted access to the TUG members during
-one year after publication. Being a member of TUG is useful and cheap!
-
-Some URLs may contain an extension not supported by your Web browser; in such cases, you should try to access to the
-document manually. An example is~\cite{JMPL1}, whose extension is \suffix{.ps.gz}.
-
-Some URLs are too long for some tools; when possible, I shortened the URL to display only the contents the
-directory, as for~\cite{pdftex}, or by using an URL to the catalogue entry (as for~\cite{arabi}
-and~\cite{antomega}); when not possible, you should try
-to access to the document manually.\par\lneed{12}%
-}}
-\or\relax
-\long\def\bibpreamble{\noindent {\bfseries Cette bibliographie contient de nombreux URLs; vous devez être
-avertis que certains d'entre eux pourraient être inaccessibles parce qu'ils sont obsolètes, parce que leur site
-est inactif ou subit un problème inattendu. Notez aussi que certains sites peuvent être lents à~répondre (quelques
-secondes).
-Par exemple, les entrées
-\cite{latex-fonts-ki-joo-kim,bibtex-ki-joo-kim,pdf-ki-joo-kim}, depuis le site \url{http://www.geocities.com/kijoo2000/},
-sont très difficiles à~atteindre.
-
-Les URLs commençant par {\froff\og{} \texttt{https:}~\fg{}} vers le site de TUGboat peuvent avoir leur accès restreint
-aux membres du TUG pendant un an après leur publication. Être membre du TUG est utile et n'est pas très cher!
-
-Certains URLs peuvent contenir un suffixe non supporté par votre navigateur Web; dans un tel cas, vous devriez
-essayer d'accéder au document manuellement. Un exemple est~\cite{JMPL1}, dont le suffixe est \suffix{.ps.gz}.
-
-Certains URLs sont trop longs pour certains logiciels; lorsque c'était possible, j'ai raccourci l'URL pour
-n'afficher que le contenu du répertoire, ainsi par exemple pour~\cite{pdftex}, ou en utilisant un URL vers
-l'entrée dans le catalogue (comme pour~\cite{arabi} and~\cite{antomega}); lorsque ce n'était pas possible,
-vous devrez essayer d'accéder manuellement au document.\par\lneed{12}%
-}}
-\fi
-% inclusion graphique centrée verticalement
-% #1=hauteur apparente [0pt] optionnelle, #2=largeur, #3=fichier image
-% \newlength{\hivc}\setlength{\hivc}{0pt}
-% \newcommand{\IVC}[3][0pt]{\parbox[c][#1][c]{#2}{\setlength{\hivc}{#1}\leavevmode\rule[-.5\hivc]{0pt}{\hivc}\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=#2]{#3}}}
-\newcommand{\IVC}[3][0pt]{\parbox[c][#1][c]{#2}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=#2]{#3}}}
-%
-\renewcommand\citemid{,\nolinebreak[1]}
-\renewcommand\citepunct{,\nolinebreak[1]\hspace{.13em plus .1em minus .1em}}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\usepackage[english2,tight,hints,listfiles]{minitoc}
-\or\relax
-\usepackage[french2,tight,hints,listfiles]{minitoc}
-\fi
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\providecommand{\seename}{\protect\emph{see}}
-\gdef\see#1#2{\protect\emph{see}~#1}
-\or\relax
-\providecommand{\seename}{\protect\textit{voir}}
-\gdef\see#1#2{\protect\emph{voir}~#1}
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% NEW INDEX COMMANDS
-% -- packages
-\newcommand{\pack}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}\ipack{#1}}
-\newcommand{\upack}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand{\ipack}[1]{\ipackA{#1}\ipackB{#1}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\ipackA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (package)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ipackB}[1]{\index{Packages=\protect\leavevmode Packages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\ipackA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (paquetage)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ipackB}[1]{\index{Paquetages=\protect\leavevmode Paquetages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}}
-\fi
-% -- packages with special names (#1=real name, #2=sort)
-\newcommand{\packa}[2]{\protect\textsf{#1}\ipacka{#1}{#2}}
-\newcommand{\upacka}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand{\ipacka}[2]{\ipackaA{#1}{#2}\ipackaB{#1}{#2}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\ipackaA}[2]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (package)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ipackaB}[2]{\index{Packages=\protect\leavevmode Packages\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\ipackaA}[2]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (paquetage)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ipackaB}[2]{\index{Paquetages=\protect\leavevmode Paquetages\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}}}
-\fi
-% -- classes
-\newcommand{\class}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}\iclass{#1}}
-\newcommand{\uclass}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand{\iclass}[1]{\iclassA{#1}\iclassB{#1}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\iclassA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (class)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\iclassB}[1]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\iclassA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (classe)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\iclassB}[1]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}}
-\fi
-% -- scripts
-\newcommand{\scrp}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\iscrp{#1}}
-\newcommand{\uscrp}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\iscrp}[1]{\iscrpA{#1}\iscrpB{#1}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\iscrpA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (script)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\iscrpB}[1]{\index{Scripts=\protect\leavevmode Scripts\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\iscrpA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (script)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\iscrpB}[1]{\index{Scripts=\protect\leavevmode Scripts\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\fi
-% -- tools
-\newcommand{\tool}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}\itool{#1}}
-\newcommand{\utool}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand{\itool}[1]{\itoolA{#1}\itoolB{#1}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\itoolA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (tool)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\itoolB}[1]{\index{Tools=\protect\leavevmode Tools\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\itoolA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (outil)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\itoolB}[1]{\index{Outils=\protect\leavevmode Outils\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}}
-\fi
-% -- examples
-\newcommand{\exam}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\iexam{#1}}
-\newcommand{\uexam}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\iexam}[1]{\iexamA{#1}\iexamB{#1}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\iexamA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(example document)}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\iexamB}[1]{\index{Examples=\protect\leavevmode Examples\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\iexamA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(exemple de document)}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\iexamB}[1]{\index{Exemples=\protect\leavevmode Exemples\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\fi
-% -- old examples
-\newcommand{\oexam}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ioexam{#1}}
-\newcommand{\uoexam}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\ioexam}[1]{\ioexamA{#1}\ioexamB{#1}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\ioexamA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(old example document)}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ioexamB}[1]{\index{Old Examples=\protect\leavevmode Old Examples\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\ioexamA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(ancien exemple de document)}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ioexamB}[1]{\index{Anciens exemples=\protect\leavevmode Anciens exemples\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\fi
-% -- features
-\newcommand{\feat}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ifeat{#1}}
-\newcommand{\ufeat}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\ifeat}[1]{\ifeatA{#1}\ifeatB{#1}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\ifeatA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (feature)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ifeatB}[1]{\index{Features=\protect\leavevmode Features\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\ifeatA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (dispositif)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ifeatB}[1]{\index{Dispositifs=\protect\leavevmode Dispositifs\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% -- extensions/suffixes
-\newcommand{\suffix}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\isuffix{#1}}
-\newcommand{\usuffix}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\isuffix}[1]{\isuffixA{#1}\isuffixB{#1}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\isuffixA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode\protect\texttt{#1} (extension)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\isuffixB}[1]{\index{Extensions=\protect\leavevmode Extensions\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\isuffixA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode\protect\texttt{#1} (suffixe)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\isuffixB}[1]{\index{Suffixes=\protect\leavevmode Suffixes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% -- options (minitoc)
-\newcommand{\opt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\iopt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\optd}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ioptd{#1}}
-\newcommand{\uopt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\iopt}[1]{\ioptA{#1}\ioptB{#1}}
-\newcommand{\ioptd}[1]{\ioptdA{#1}\ioptdB{#1}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\ioptA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (option)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ioptB}[1]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\newcommand{\ioptdA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} \hbox{(default option)}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ioptdB}[1]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} (default)}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\ioptA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (option)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ioptB}[1]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\newcommand{\ioptdA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} \hbox{(option par défaut)}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ioptdB}[1]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} (défaut)}}
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% -- options (other packages)
-% \newcommand{\optp}[2]{\protect\texttt{#1}~\protect\textsf{(#2)}\ioptp{#1}{#2}}
-\newcommand{\optp}[2]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ioptp{#1}{#2}}
-%\newcommand{\uoptp}[2]{\protect\texttt{#1}~\protect\textsf{(#2)}}
-\newcommand{\uoptp}[2]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\ioptp}[2]{\ioptpA{#1}{#2}\ioptpB{#1}{#2}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\ioptpA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(\protect\textsf{#2} package)}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ioptpB}[2]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1#2=\protect\texttt{#1}~\textsf{(#2)}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\ioptpA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(paquetage \protect\textsf{#2})}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ioptpB}[2]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1#2=\protect\texttt{#1}~\textsf{(#2)}}}
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% -- language options
-\newcommand{\lopt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ilopt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\loptd}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\iloptd{#1}}
-\newcommand{\ulopt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\ilopt}[1]{\iloptA{#1}\iloptB{#1}}
-\newcommand{\iloptd}[1]{\iloptdA{#1}\iloptdB{#1}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\iloptA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(language option)}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\iloptB}[1]{\index{Language options=\protect\leavevmode Language options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\newcommand{\iloptdA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} \hbox{(default language option)}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\iloptdB}[1]{\index{Language options=\protect\leavevmode Language options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} (default)}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\iloptA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(option de langue)}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\iloptB}[1]{\index{Options de langue=\protect\leavevmode Options de langue\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\newcommand{\iloptdA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} \hbox{(option de langue par défaut)}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\iloptdB}[1]{\index{Options de langue=\protect\leavevmode Options de langue\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} (défaut)}}
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% -- names
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\oinameA}[2]{\relax}
-\newcommand{\oinameB}[2]{\relax}
-\newcommand{\inameA}[2]{\index{#2 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\inameaA}[3]{\index{#3 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\inameB}[2]{\index{People=\protect\leavevmode People\hfil\null>#2 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}}}
-\newcommand{\inameaB}[3]{\index{People=\protect\leavevmode People\hfil\null>#3 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\oinameA}[2]{\relax}
-\newcommand{\oinameB}[2]{\relax}
-\newcommand{\inameA}[2]{\index{#2 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\inameaA}[3]{\index{#3 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\inameB}[2]{\index{Personnes=\protect\leavevmode Personnes\hfil\null>#2 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}}}
-\newcommand{\inameaB}[3]{\index{Personnes=\protect\leavevmode Personnes\hfil\null>#3 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}}}
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% -- authors names in bib
-\newcommand{\bname}[3]{\bnameA{#1}{#2}{#3}\bnameB{#1}{#2}{#3}}
-\newcommand{\bnamea}[4]{\bnameaA{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}\bnameaB{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}
-
-\newcommand\sksep{\ensuremath{\hookrightarrow}}% % put before the bib. refs in the index
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\skname}[2]{\sksep\protect\cite{#1}}
-\newcommand{\bnameA}[3]{\index{#2 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null|skname{#3}}}
-\newcommand{\bnameaA}[4]{\index{#3 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null|skname{#4}}}
-\newcommand{\bnameB}[3]{\index{People=\protect\leavevmode People\hfil\null>#2 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}|skname{#3}}}
-\newcommand{\bnameaB}[4]{\index{People=\protect\leavevmode People\hfil\null>#3 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}|skname{#4}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\skname}[2]{\sksep\protect\cite{#1}}
-\newcommand{\bnameA}[3]{\index{#2 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null|skname{#3}}}
-\newcommand{\bnameaA}[4]{\index{#3 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null|skname{#4}}}
-\newcommand{\bnameB}[3]{\index{Personnes=\protect\leavevmode Personnes\hfil\null>#2 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}|skname{#3}}}
-\newcommand{\bnameaB}[4]{\index{Personnes=\protect\leavevmode Personnes\hfil\null>#3 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}|skname{#4}}}
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% -- tool names in bib
-\newcommand{\btool}[2]{\btoolA{#1}{#2}\btoolB{#1}{#2}}
-\newcommand{\btoola}[3]{\btoolaA{#1}{#2}{#3}\btoolaB{#1}{#2}{#3}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\btoolA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (tool)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}}
-\newcommand{\btoolB}[2]{\index{Tools=\protect\leavevmode Tools\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}}
-\newcommand{\btoolaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (tool)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}}
-\newcommand{\btoolaB}[3]{\index{Tools=\protect\leavevmode Tools\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\btoolA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (outil)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}}
-\newcommand{\btoolB}[2]{\index{Outils=\protect\leavevmode Outils\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}}
-\newcommand{\btoolaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (outil)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}}
-\newcommand{\btoolaB}[3]{\index{Outils=\protect\leavevmode Outils\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}}
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% -- pack names in bib
-\newcommand{\bpack}[2]{\bpackA{#1}{#2}\bpackB{#1}{#2}}
-\newcommand{\bpacka}[3]{\bpackaA{#1}{#2}{#3}\bpackaB{#1}{#2}{#3}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\bpackA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (package)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}}
-\newcommand{\bpackB}[2]{\index{Packages=\protect\leavevmode Packages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}}
-\newcommand{\bpackaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (package)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}}
-\newcommand{\bpackaB}[3]{\index{Packages=\protect\leavevmode Packages\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\bpackA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (paquetage)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}}
-\newcommand{\bpackB}[2]{\index{Paquetages=\protect\leavevmode Paquetages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}}
-\newcommand{\bpackaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (paquetage)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}}
-\newcommand{\bpackaB}[3]{\index{Paquetages=\protect\leavevmode Paquetages\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}}
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% -- class names in bib -- nom, [ nom-tri ], clé-bib
-\newcommand{\bclass}[2]{\bclassA{#1}{#2}\bclassB{#1}{#2}}
-\newcommand{\bclassa}[3]{\bclassaA{#1}{#2}{#3}\bclassaB{#1}{#2}{#3}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\bclassA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (class)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}}
-\newcommand{\bclassB}[2]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}}
-\newcommand{\bclassaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (class)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}}
-\newcommand{\bclassaB}[3]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\bclassA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (classe)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}}
-\newcommand{\bclassB}[2]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}}
-\newcommand{\bclassaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (classe)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}}
-\newcommand{\bclassaB}[3]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}}
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% -- environments
-\newcommand{\env}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ienv{#1}}
-\newcommand{\uenv}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\ienv}[1]{\ienvA{#1}\ienvB{#1}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\ienvA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (environment)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ienvB}[1]{\index{Environments=\protect\leavevmode Environments>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\ienvA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (environnement)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ienvB}[1]{\index{Environnements=\protect\leavevmode Environnements>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% -- files
-\newcommand{\xfile}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ixfile{#1}}
-\newcommand{\uxfile}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\ixfile}[1]{\ixfileA{#1}\ixfileB{#1}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\ixfileA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (file)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ixfileB}[1]{\index{Files=\protect\leavevmode Files\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\ixfileA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (fichier)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ixfileB}[1]{\index{Fichiers=\protect\leavevmode Fichiers\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% -- graphic files
-\newcommand{\xgrf}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ixgrf{#1}}
-\newcommand{\uxgrf}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\ixgrf}[1]{\ixgrfA{#1}\ixgrfB{#1}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\ixgrfA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(graphic file)}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ixgrfB}[1]{\index{Graphic files=\protect\leavevmode Graphic files\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\ixgrfA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(fichier graphique)}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ixgrfB}[1]{\index{Fichiers graphiques=\protect\leavevmode Fichiers graphiques\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% -- flags (graphic) files
-\newcommand{\xgrfl}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ixgrfl{#1}}
-\newcommand{\uxgrfl}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\ixgrfl}[1]{\ixgrflA{#1}\ixgrflB{#1}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\ixgrflA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(flag file)}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ixgrflB}[1]{\index{Flags files=\protect\leavevmode Flags files\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\ixgrflA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(fichier drapeau)}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\ixgrflB}[1]{\index{Fichiers drapeaux=\protect\leavevmode Fichiers drapeaux\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% -- .mld /mlo couples
-\newcommand{\xmldo}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1.ml[d{\BAR}o]}\ixfile{#1.mld}\ixfile{#1.mlo}}
-\newcommand{\ixmldo}[1]{\ixfile{#1.mld}\ixfile{#1.mlo}}
-\newcommand{\uxmldo}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1.ml[d{\BAR}o]}}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% -- depth counters
-\newcommand{\dcnt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\idcnt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\udcnt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\idcnt}[1]{\idcntA{#1}\idcntB{#1}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\idcntA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(depth counter)}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\idcntB}[1]{\index{Depth counters=\protect\leavevmode Depth counters\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\idcntA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(compteur de profondeur)}\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\idcntB}[1]{\index{Compteurs de profondeur=\protect\leavevmode Compteurs de profondeur\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% -- counters
-\newcommand{\cnt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\icnt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\ucnt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\icnt}[1]{\icntA{#1}\icntB{#1}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\icntA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (counter)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\icntB}[1]{\index{Counters=\protect\leavevmode Counters\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\icntA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (compteur)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\icntB}[1]{\index{Compteurs=\protect\leavevmode Compteurs\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% -- commands
-\newcommand{\lit}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} % literal string
-\newcommand{\clit}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs #1}} % literal command string
-\newcommand{\com}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs #1}\icom{#1}}
-\newcommand{\ucom}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs #1}}
-\newcommand{\icom}[1]{\icomA{#1}\icomB{#1}}
-\newcommand{\fkcom}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs[fake]#1}\icom{#1}\icom{fake#1}}
-\newcommand{\ncom}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs[no]#1}\icom{#1}\icom{no#1}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\icomA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bs #1} (command)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\icomB}[1]{\index{Commands=\protect\leavevmode Commands\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bs #1}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\icomA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bs #1} (commande)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\icomB}[1]{\index{Commandes=\protect\leavevmode Commandes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bs #1}}}
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% -- messages
-%\newcommand{\mess}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\imess{#1}}
-%\newcommand{\umess}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
-% \let\Buttonbox\Ovalbox % to be changed easily
-\def\Buttonbox#1{\fbox{\mbox{#1}}} % to be changed easily
-% \def\Buttonbox#1{\keystroke{\mbox{#1}}} % to be changed easily
-\newcommand{\lmess}[1]{\imessA{#1}\imessB{#1}\footnotesize
- \hyperlink{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}}
-\newcommand{\phmess}{\footnotesize
- \item[]{\textcolor{white}{\Buttonbox{\phantom{\texttt{M0000}}}}}}
-\newcommand{\RMP}[1]{\reversemarginpar
- \marginpar[{\raggedleft\strut\footnotesize\hyperlink{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}\texttt{~~}}]{{\raggedright\strut\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\hyperlink{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}}%
- }\normalmarginpar}
-\newcommand{\NMP}[1]{\normalmarginpar
- \marginpar[{\raggedleft\Strutt\footnotesize\hypertarget{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}\texttt{~~}}]{{\raggedright\strut\footnotesize\hypertarget{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}\texttt{~~}}%
- }\normalmarginpar}
-\newcommand{\imess}[1]{\imessA{#1}\imessB{#1}\RMP{#1}}
-\newcommand{\jmess}[1]{\imessA{#1}\imessB{#1}\NMP{#1}}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\newcommand{\imessA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (message)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\imessB}[1]{\index{Messages=\protect\leavevmode Messages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\or\relax
-\newcommand{\imessA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (message)\hfil\null}}
-\newcommand{\imessB}[1]{\index{Messages=\protect\leavevmode Messages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
-\fi
-\newcommand{\HPH}{\footnotesize\hphantom{\fbox{\texttt{M0000}}}}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% -- Stacked Messages in Margin \SMM{\lmess{W0054}\\ \lmess{W0055}}
-\newcommand{\SMM}[1]{\bgroup%
- \let\imess\lmess % local redefinition, to avoid stupid errors.
- \marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}%
- \protect #1%
- \end{tabular}}\egroup}
-% -- idem. plus a Z dangerous bend above
-\newcommand{\SMMZ}[1]{\bgroup%
- \let\imess\lmess % local redefinition, to avoid stupid errors.
- \marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}%
- \null\hfill\Strutt\hbox{\manfnt\char127}\hfill\null\\*[3ex]
- \protect #1%
- \end{tabular}}\egroup}
-% -- idem. plus a ZZ double dangerous bend above
-\newcommand{\SMMZZ}[1]{\bgroup%
- \let\imess\lmess % local redefinition, to avoid stupid errors.
- \marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}%
- \null\hfill\Strutt\hbox{\manfnt\char127\kern2pt\char127}\hfill\null\\*[3ex]
- \protect #1%
- \end{tabular}}\egroup}
-% Redefine \virage and \Virage (beware to the braces!)
-\AtBeginDocument{%
-\renewcommand{\virage}{%
- \reversemarginpar{\marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}%
- \null\hfill\Strutt\hbox{\manfnt\char127\kern2pt}\hfill\null\\
- \HPH
- \end{tabular}}}\normalmarginpar}
-\renewcommand{\Virage}{%
- \reversemarginpar{\marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}%
- \null\hfill\Strutt\hbox{\manfnt\char127\kern2pt\char127}\hfill\null\\
- \HPH
- \end{tabular}}}\normalmarginpar}%
-} %%% ATBEGINDOCUMENT
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\gdef\envname{environment}
-\gdef\envsname{environments}
-\gdef\Envsname{Environments}
-\gdef\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Change history}}%
- \markboth{{Change history}}{{Change history}}}
-%\def\generalname{General}
-\gdef\generalname{}
-\or\relax
-\gdef\envname{environnement}
-\gdef\envsname{environnements}
-\gdef\Envsname{Environnements}
-\def\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Historique des modifications}}%
- \markboth{{Historique des modifications}}{{Historique des modifications}}}
-%\def\generalname{G\'en\'eral}
-\gdef\generalname{}
-\fi
-\gdef\generalname{} %ESSAI
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\setlength{\ptcindent}{0pt}
-\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt}
-\makeatletter
-\InputIfFileExists{ltxdoc.cfg}%
-{\typeout{*************************************^^J%
- * Local config file ltxdoc.cfg used^^J%
- *************************************}}
-{}
-\RequirePackage{doc}
-\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
-\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi
-\columnseprule \z@ \columnsep 35\p@
-% \twocolumn[\glossary@prologue]%
-\onecolumn \glossary@prologue%JPFD
-\raggedright
-\GlossaryParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}
-{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
-\AtBeginDocument{\MakeShortVerb{\|}}
-\AtBeginDocument{\providecommand{\phantomsection}{}}
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{bx}{n}{<-> ssub * cmtt/m/n}{}
-\DeclareFontFamily{OMS}{cmtt}{\skewchar\font 48} % '60
-\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmtt}{m}{n}{<-> ssub * cmsy/m/n}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmtt}{bx}{n}{<-> ssub * cmsy/b/n}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{m}{it}{<->ssub*cmss/m/sl}{}
-\CodelineNumbered
-\DisableCrossrefs
-\setlength{\textwidth}{375pt} % was 355pt
-\newlength{\winf}\setlength{\winf}{\textwidth} % width in frame
-\newlength{\winp}\setlength{\winp}{\textwidth} % width in minipage
-\addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxrule}
-\addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxsep}
-\addtolength\marginparwidth{30pt}
-\addtolength\oddsidemargin{20pt}
-\addtolength\evensidemargin{20pt}
-\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
-\def\cmd#1{\cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}}
-\def\cmd@to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
-\providecommand\marg[1]{%
- {\ttfamily\char`\{}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\char`\}}}
-\providecommand\oarg[1]{%
- {\ttfamily[}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily]}}
-\providecommand\parg[1]{%
- {\ttfamily(}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily)}}
-\def\oc@scan#1{%
- \ifx\oc@bslash#1%
- \egroup\let\next\oc@bslash\else
- \ifcat a\noexpand#1%
- #1\let\next\oc@scan\else
- \ifx\oc@percent#1%
- \def\next{\char`\%\egroup}%
- \else
- #1\let\next\egroup
- \fi\fi\fi\next}
-\def\oc@bslash{\bgroup\oc@ttf\char`\\\oc@scan}%
-\def\oc@verb#1{%
- \catcode`#1\active
- \uccode`\~`#1%
- \uppercase{\def~{{\oc@ttf\char`#1}}}}
-\begingroup
- \obeyspaces%
- \catcode`\/=\catcode`\\
- /catcode`/\/active
- /catcode`<=/catcode`{%
- /catcode`>=/catcode`}%
- /catcode`/{/active%
- /catcode`/}/active%
- /gdef/oldc< \end{oldcomments}>%
- /gdef/begmac< \begin{macrocode}>%
- /gdef/obs</def <</oc@ttf/ >>>%
-/endgroup%
-\begingroup
- \catcode`\/=\catcode`\\
- \catcode`\\=13
- /catcode`/|=/catcode`/%
- /catcode`/%=13
- /gdef/oldcomments{|
- /makeatletter
- /let/do/oc@verb/dospecials
- /frenchspacing/@vobeyspaces/obs
- /raggedright
- /oc@verb/>|
- /oc@verb/<|
- /let\/oc@bslash
- /let%/oc@percent
- /obeylines
- /parindent/z@
- /ttfamily/expandafter/let/expandafter/oc@ttf/the/font
- /rmfamily
- /hfuzz/maxdimen
- }
-/endgroup
-\begingroup
- \sloppy%
- \obeylines%
- \gdef\oc@percent#1^^M{%
- \ifvmode%
- \def\commentline{#1}%
- \ifx\commentline\oldc%
- \end{oldcomments}%
- \else%
- \ifx\commentline\begmac%
- \begin{macrocode}%
- \else%
- \leavevmode%
- #1^^M%
- \fi\fi%
- \else%
- {\oc@ttf\char`\%}#1^^M%
- \fi}%
-\endgroup%
-% \@addtoreset{CodelineNo}{part}
-\def\partname{File}
-\newcommand*{\DocInclude}[1]{%
- \relax
- \clearpage
- \docincludeaux
- \IfFileExists{#1.fdd}{\def\currentfile{#1.fdd}}{\def\currentfile{#1.dtx}}%
- \ifnum\@auxout=\@partaux\relax
- \@latexerr{\string\include\space cannot be nested}\@eha
- \else \@docinclude#1 \fi}
-\def\@docinclude#1 {\clearpage
-\if@filesw \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\@input{#1.aux}}\fi
-\@tempswatrue\if@partsw \@tempswafalse\edef\@tempb{#1}\@for
-\@tempa:=\@partlist\do{\ifx\@tempa\@tempb\@tempswatrue\fi}\fi
-\if@tempswa \let\@auxout\@partaux \if@filesw
-\immediate\openout\@partaux #1.aux
-\immediate\write\@partaux{\relax}\fi
-\let\@ltxdoc@PrintIndex\PrintIndex
-\let\PrintIndex\relax
-\let\@ltxdoc@PrintChanges\PrintChanges
-%\let\PrintChanges\relax
-\let\@ltxdoc@theglossary\theglossary
-\let\@ltxdoc@endtheglossary\endtheglossary
-\part{\currentfile}%
- {\let\ttfamily\relax
- \xdef\filekey{\filekey, \thepart={\ttfamily\currentfile}}}%
-\DocInput{\currentfile}%
-\let\PrintIndex\@ltxdoc@PrintIndex
-\let\PrintChanges\@ltxdoc@PrintChanges
-\let\theglossary\@ltxdoc@theglossary
-\let\endtheglossary\@ltxdoc@endtheglossary
-\clearpage
-\@writeckpt{#1}\if@filesw \immediate\closeout\@partaux \fi
-\else\@nameuse{cp@#1}\fi\let\@auxout\@mainaux}
-\gdef\codeline@wrindex#1{\if@filesw
- \immediate\write\@indexfile
- {\string\indexentry{#1}%
- {\filesep\number\c@CodelineNo}}\fi}%
-\let\filesep\@empty
-\def\aalph#1{\@aalph{\csname c@#1\endcsname}}
-\def\@aalph#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or
- j\or k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or
- t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or y\or z\or A\or B\or C\or
- D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or K\or L\or M\or
- N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or
- X\or Y\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}
-\def\docincludeaux{%
- \def\thepart{\aalph{part}}\def\filesep{\thepart-}%
- \let\filekey\@gobble
- \g@addto@macro\index@prologue{%
- \gdef\@oddfoot{\parbox{\textwidth}{\strut\footnotesize
- \raggedright{\bfseries File Key:} \filekey}}%
- \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}%
- \global\let\docincludeaux\relax
- \gdef\@oddfoot{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname ver@\currentfile\endcsname\relax
- File \thepart: {\ttfamily\currentfile} %
- \else
- \GetFileInfo{\currentfile}%
- File \thepart: {\ttfamily\filename} %
- Date: \filedate\ %
- Version \fileversion
- \fi
- \hfill\thepage}%
- \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}%
-\def\task#1#2{}
-% ``Change History'' in TOC
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\gdef\envname{environment}
-\gdef\envsname{environments}
-\gdef\Envsname{Environments}
-\gdef\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Change history}}%
- \markboth{{Change history}}{{Change history}}}
-%\def\generalname{General}
-\gdef\generalname{}
-\or\relax
-\gdef\envname{environnement}
-\gdef\envsname{environnements}
-\gdef\Envsname{Environnements}
-\def\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Historique des modifications}}%
- \markboth{{Historique des modifications}}{{Historique des modifications}}}
-%\def\generalname{G\'en\'eral}
-\gdef\generalname{}
-\fi
-\gdef\generalname{} %ESSAI
-\let\sv@glossary@prologue\glossary@prologue
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\def\glossary@prologue{\sv@glossary@prologue\relax\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Change History}}
-\or\relax
-\def\glossary@prologue{\sv@glossary@prologue\relax\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Historique des modifications}}
-\fi
-%% redefine \glossaryentry
-\def\nouse#1{\mbox{}}
-%%%
-% morefloats.sty ...
-% \iffalse
-%% This is morefloats.sty as of 27-July-1990
-%% Don Hosek, Quixote <dhosek@ymir.claremont.edu>
-% \fi
-%
-% The task at hand is to increase \LaTeX's current limit of 18 unprocessed
-% floats in memory at once to 36. An examination of latex.tex reveals that
-% this is accomplished by allocating an insert register for each unprocessed
-% float. A quick check of lplain.lis reveals that there is room, in fact,
-% for 230 additional unprocessed floats, but \TeX's main memory would be
-% exhausted long before that happened.
-%
-% First we allocate the additional insert registers needed:
-\newinsert\bx@S
-\newinsert\bx@T
-\newinsert\bx@U
-\newinsert\bx@V
-\newinsert\bx@W
-\newinsert\bx@X
-\newinsert\bx@Y
-\newinsert\bx@Z
-\newinsert\bx@AA
-\newinsert\bx@BB
-\newinsert\bx@CC
-\newinsert\bx@DD
-\newinsert\bx@EE
-\newinsert\bx@FF
-\newinsert\bx@GG
-\newinsert\bx@HH
-\newinsert\bx@II
-\newinsert\bx@JJ
-\newinsert\bx@KK
-\newinsert\bx@LL
-\newinsert\bx@MM
-\newinsert\bx@NN
-\newinsert\bx@OO
-\newinsert\bx@PP
-\newinsert\bx@QQ
-\newinsert\bx@RR
-\newinsert\bx@SS
-\newinsert\bx@TT
-\newinsert\bx@UU
-\newinsert\bx@VV
-\newinsert\bx@WW
-\newinsert\bx@XX
-\newinsert\bx@YY
-\newinsert\bx@ZZ
-\newinsert\bx@AAA
-\newinsert\bx@BBB
-%
-% That accomplished, the next step is to define the macro \verb+\@freelist+
-% which is merely a list of the box registers each preceded by \verb+\@elt+.
-% This approach allows processing of the list to be done far more efficiently.
-% A similar approach is used by Mittelbach \& Sch\"opf's \texttt{doc.sty}~\cite{doc} to
-% keep track of control sequences which should not be indexed.
-\gdef\@freelist{\@elt\bx@A\@elt\bx@B\@elt\bx@C\@elt\bx@D\@elt\bx@E
- \@elt\bx@F\@elt\bx@G\@elt\bx@H\@elt\bx@I\@elt\bx@J
- \@elt\bx@K\@elt\bx@L\@elt\bx@M\@elt\bx@N
- \@elt\bx@O\@elt\bx@P\@elt\bx@Q\@elt\bx@R
- \@elt\bx@S\@elt\bx@T\@elt\bx@U\@elt\bx@V
- \@elt\bx@W\@elt\bx@X\@elt\bx@Y\@elt\bx@Z
- \@elt\bx@AA\@elt\bx@BB\@elt\bx@CC\@elt\bx@DD
- \@elt\bx@EE\@elt\bx@FF\@elt\bx@GG\@elt\bx@HH
- \@elt\bx@II\@elt\bx@JJ\@elt\bx@KK\@elt\bx@LL
- \@elt\bx@MM\@elt\bx@NN\@elt\bx@OO\@elt\bx@PP
- \@elt\bx@QQ\@elt\bx@RR\@elt\bx@SS\@elt\bx@TT
- \@elt\bx@UU\@elt\bx@VV\@elt\bx@WW\@elt\bx@XX
- \@elt\bx@YY\@elt\bx@ZZ\@elt\bx@AAA\@elt\bx@BBB}
-\makeatother
-%%%
-\EnableCrossrefs
-\CodelineIndex
-% \PageIndex
-% \RecordChanges
-\input{minitoc.pre}
-\providecommand{\capstart}{\empty}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\usepackage{fancybox}
-% \usepackage[english]{keystroke} % ERRORS
-\or\relax
-\froff\usepackage{fancybox}\fron
-% \usepackage[french]{keystroke} % ERRORS
-\fi
-%
-%%%% FANCYHDR
-% \usepackage{fancyhdr}
-%%%% FANCYHDR
-\renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{%
- \markboth{[\thechapter]~---~#1}{[\thechapter]~---~#1}}
-\providecommand{\hyperlink}[2]{\empty}
-\providecommand{\hypertarget}[2]{\empty}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% \makeatletter
-% \def\SpecialIndex#1{\@bsphack\special@index{\expandafter\@gobble
-% \string#1\actualchar
-% \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar\string#1\verbatimchar}%
-% \@esphack}
-% \def\SpecialMainIndex#1{\@bsphack\SpecialIndex@{#1}{\encapchar \string\main}%
-% \@esphack}
-% \def\SpecialIndex@#1#2{%
-% \@SpecialIndexHelper@#1\@nil
-% \def\@tempb{ }%
-% \ifcat \@tempb\@gtempa
-% \special@index{\quotechar\space\actualchar
-% \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar
-% \quotechar\bslash\quotechar\space\verbatimchar#2}%
-% \else
-% \def\@tempb##1##2\relax{\ifx\relax##2\relax
-% \def\@tempc{\special@index{\quotechar##1\actualchar
-% \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar
-% \quotechar\bslash\quotechar##1\verbatimchar#2}}%
-% \else
-% \def\@tempc{\special@index{##1##2\actualchar
-% \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar
-% \bslash##1##2\verbatimchar#2}}%
-% \fi}%
-% \expandafter\@tempb\@gtempa\relax
-% \@tempc
-% \fi}
- \makeatletter
- \def\SpecialMainEnvIndex#1{\@bsphack\special@index{%
- #1\actualchar
- {\string\ttfamily\space#1}
- (\envname)%
- \encapchar \string\main}%
- \special@index{\Envsname\levelchar{%
- \string\ttfamily\space#1}\encapchar
- \string\main}\@esphack}
- \def\SpecialUsageIndex#1{\@bsphack
- {\let\special@index\index\SpecialIndex@{#1}{\encapchar \string\usage}}%
- \@esphack}
- \def\SpecialEnvIndex#1{\@bsphack
- \index{#1\actualchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}
- (\envname)\encapchar \string\usage}%
- \index{Envsname\levelchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}\encapchar
- \string\usage}\@esphack}
-% %\@ifundefined{main}{\def\main#1{\underline{#1}}}{}
-% %\@ifundefined{usage}{\def\usage#1{\textit{#1}}}{}
-\gdef\main#1{\textsf{#1}}
-\gdef\usage#1{\textit{#1}}
-% \gdef\hyperpage#1{\textbf{#1}}
- \makeatother
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% NEW ENV
- \makeatletter
- \def\SpecialMainEnvIndex#1{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode\protect\texttt{#1} (\envname)\hfil\null}%
- \index{\Envsname=\protect\leavevmode\Envsname>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}%
- }
-%
- \def\SpecialUsageIndex#1{\@bsphack
- {\let\special@index\index\SpecialIndex@{#1}{\encapchar \string\usage}}%
- \@esphack}
- \def\SpecialEnvIndex#1{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode\protect\texttt{#1} (\envname)\hfil\null}%
- \index{\Envsname=\protect\leavevmode\Envsname>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}%
- }
-% %\@ifundefined{main}{\def\main#1{\underline{#1}}}{}
-% %\@ifundefined{usage}{\def\usage#1{\textit{#1}}}{}
-\let\ohyperpage\hyperpage
-\gdef\main#1{\textbf{#1}}
-\gdef\usage#1{\textsf{#1}}
-\gdef\hyperpage#1{\textit{\ohyperpage{#1}}}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
- \includecomment{ENGLISH}
- \excludecomment{FRENCH}
- \typeout{ENGLISH DOC}
-\or\relax
- \excludecomment{ENGLISH}
- \includecomment{FRENCH}
- \typeout{FRENCH DOC}
-\else\relax
- \includecomment{ENGLISH}
- \excludecomment{FRENCH}
- \typeout{BAD LANGUAGE: ENGLISH DOC BY DEFAULT}
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
- \setcounter{GlossaryColumns}{1}
-\def\ABK{\penalty-1\xspace}
-\def\NL{\mbox{}\hfill\mbox{}\\}
-\def\NC{\penalty-1\hspace{2em}\P~}
-\let\origdoublepage\cleardoublepage
-\newcommand{\clearemptydoublepage}{%
- \clearpage
- {\pagestyle{empty}\origdoublepage}%
- }
-\let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage
-\interfootnotelinepenalty=9999
-\let\svfinalhyphendemerits\finalhyphendemerits
-\finalhyphendemerits=\maxdimen
-\lefthyphenmin=3
-\righthyphenmin=3
-%%% pb \envname
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\gdef\envname{environment}
-\gdef\envsname{environments}
-\gdef\Envsname{Environments}
-\gdef\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Change history}}%
- \markboth{{Change history}}{{Change history}}}
-%\def\generalname{General}
-\gdef\generalname{}
-\or\relax
-\gdef\envname{environnement}
-\gdef\envsname{environnements}
-\gdef\Envsname{Environnements}
-\def\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Historique des modifications}}%
- \markboth{{Historique des modifications}}{{Historique des modifications}}}
-%\def\generalname{G\'en\'eral}
-\gdef\generalname{}
-\fi
-%%% fixed notes
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FZ}{\texttt{O}~and~\texttt{o} are the letter~\texttt{O}, \texttt{0}~is the zero digit.}
-\or\relax
-\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FZ}{\texttt{O}~et~\texttt{o} sont la lettre~\texttt{O}, \texttt{0}~est le chiffre zéro.}
-\fi
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FAC}{Spoken in Acadia (see figure~\vref{f+acadien}) and some parts of the south
-of the USA, like Louisiane; see~\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cajun_French}\,.}
-\or\relax
-\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FAC}{Parlée en Acadie (voir la figure~\vref{f+acadien}) et dans certaines parties du
-sud des États-Unis, comme la Louisiane; voir~\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Français_cadien}\,.}
-\fi
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FARSINOTE}{By \protect\name{Mohammad}{Ghodsi} (\texttt{ghodsi@rose.ipm.ac.ir}) and the
-\upack{Farsi\TeX} Project Group. See the \upack{Farsi\TeX} site at~\url{http://www.farsitex.org}}
-\or\relax
-\froff\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FARSINOTE}{Par \protect\name{Mohammad}{Ghodsi} (\texttt{ghodsi@rose.ipm.ac.ir}) et le
-\upack{Farsi\TeX} Project Group. Voir le site de \upack{Farsi\TeX} à~\url{http://www.farsitex.org}}\fron
-\fi
-\ifx\KOMAScript\undefined%
- \DeclareRobustCommand{\KOMAScript}{\textsf{K\kern.05em O\kern.05em M\kern.05em A\kern.1em-\kern.1em Script}}
-\fi
-\ifx\PLaTeX\undefined
-\makeatletter
-\DeclareRobustCommand\PLaTeX{% after latex.dtx
- P\kern-.08em L\kern-.36em
- {\setbox0\hbox{T}%
- \vbox to\ht0{\hbox{%
- \csname S@\f@size\endcsname
- \fontsize\sf@size\z@
- \math@fontsfalse\selectfont
- A}
- \vss}%
- }%
- \kern-.15em
- \TeX\@}%
-\makeatother
-\fi
-\def\PLaTeXe{P\LaTeXe}
-\def\quocngu{Qu\'{\^o}c Ng\~u\kern-.42ex\raisebox{.07ex}{\footnotesize'}}
-%%%% Strings by language
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\def\LLL{\mbox{LANGUAGE}}
-\def\OFFSET{\mbox{OFFSET}}
-\def\NB{\mbox{NUMBER}}
-\def\NNN{\mbox{LINE}}
-\def\PREPA{\mbox{PREPARATION}}
-\def\CCC{\mbox{CLASS}}
-\def\INAME{\mbox{INTERNAL\_NAME}}
-\def\SEQ{\mbox{SEQUENCE}}
-\def\NTITLE{\mbox{NEW\_TITLE}}
-\def\FILE{\mbox{FILE}}
-\def\CTR{\mbox{COUNTER}}
-\def\VAL{\mbox{VALUE}}
-\def\EXTEN{\mbox{EXTENSION}}
-\def\STRING{\mbox{STRING}}
-\def\COMMAND{\mbox{COMMAND}}
-\def\PACK{\mbox{PACK}}
-\or\relax
-\def\LLL{\mbox{LANGUE}}
-\def\OFFSET{\mbox{DÉPLACEMENT}}
-\def\NB{\mbox{NOMBRE}}
-\def\NNN{\mbox{LIGNE}}
-\def\PREPA{\mbox{PRÉPARATION}}
-\def\CCC{\mbox{CLASSE}}
-\def\INAME{\mbox{NOM\_INTERNE}}
-\def\SEQ{\mbox{SÉQUENCE}}
-\def\NTITLE{\mbox{NOUVEAU\_TITRE}}
-\def\FILE{\mbox{FICHIER}}
-\def\CTR{\mbox{COMPTEUR}}
-\def\VAL{\mbox{VALEUR}}
-\def\EXTEN{\mbox{SUFFIXE}}
-\def\STRING{\mbox{CHAÎNE}}
-\def\COMMAND{\mbox{COMMANDE}}
-\def\PACK{\mbox{PAQUETAGE}}
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% On float pages, push the floats to the top
-\makeatletter
-\setlength{\@fptop}{\topskip}
-\addtolength{\@fptop}{-10pt}
-\setlength{\@fpsep}{1.5\baselineskip plus 0fil}
-\setlength{\@fpbot}{0pt plus 1fill}
-\makeatother
-\usepackage{dblaccnt} % here!
-\def\magicminitoc{\columnwidth=\linewidth\null\hfilneg\hspace*{-\itemindent}\hspace*{-\leftmargin}\hspace*{-\labelwidth}\minitoc\hfill\null}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\newsavebox{\Citname}% See TLC2 p 849
-\newenvironment{Citation}[1]%
- {\sbox\Citname{#1}\unskip\noindent}%
- {\null\hspace*{\fill}\nolinebreak[1]%
- \quad\hspace*{\fill}%
- \finalhyphendemerits=0\relax
- \usebox{\Citname}}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\newsavebox{\BMTC}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% Load hypernat.sty to compress citations; beware to the catcode of ``:''.
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\IfFileExists{hypernat.sty}{\usepackage{hypernat}}{}
-\or\relax
-\froff\IfFileExists{hypernat.sty}{\usepackage{hypernat}}{}\fron
-\fi
-\begin{document}
-\pagestyle{headings}
-% \setcounter{lofdepth}{2}
-% \mtcsetdepth{minilof}{2}
-\raggedbottom
-\addtolength{\marginparsep}{.5em}%ESSAI
-\setlength{\marginparpush}{1.0ex}%
-% % FANCYHDR
-% \renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{%
-% \markboth{[\thechapter]~---~#1}{[\thechapter]~---~#1}}
-% \pagestyle{fancy}
-% \fancyhf{} % RAZ
-% %\newlength{\fancyoff}\setlength{\fancyoff}{\marginparwidth}\addtolength{\fancyoff}{\marginparsep}
-% \newlength{\fancyoff}\setlength{\fancyoff}{\leftmargin}
-% \fancyheadoffset[RO,LE]{\fancyoff}
-% \fancyhead[RO]{\large\bfseries\upshape\thepage}
-% \fancyhead[RE]{\large\bfseries\upshape\thepage}
-% \fancyhead[LO]{\large\bfseries\upshape\leftmark}
-% \fancyhead[LE]{\large\bfseries\upshape\leftmark}
-% \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0.4pt}
-% \renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{0pt}
-% \addtolength{\headheight}{2pt}
-% % FANCYHDR
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\let\fron\relax
-\let\froff\relax
-\selectlanguage{english}\nonfrenchspacing
- \def\reftextfaceafter {on the \reftextvario{facing}{next} page}%
- \def\reftextfacebefore{on the \reftextvario{facing}{preceding} page}%
- \def\reftextafter {on the \reftextvario{next}{following} page}%
- \def\reftextbefore {on the \reftextvario{page before}{preceding page}}%
- \def\reftextcurrent {on \reftextvario{this}{this} page}%
-%% \def\reftextcurrent {\relax}%
- \def\reftextfaraway#1{on page~\pageref{#1}}%
- \def\reftextpagerange#1#2{on pages~\pageref{#1}--\pageref{#2}}%
- \def\reftextlabelrange#1#2{\ref{#1} to~\ref{#2}}%
-\or\relax
-\fron\selectlanguage{french}\frenchspacing
- \renewcommand{\listfigurename}{Liste des figures}%
- \renewcommand{\listtablename}{Liste des tableaux}%
- \renewcommand\figurename{{\scshape Figure}}% JPFD (je n'aime pas Fig.)
- \renewcommand\tablename{{\scshape Tableau}}% JPFD (je n'aime pas Tab.)
- \def\reftextfaceafter {page \reftextvario{ci-contre}{ci-contre}}%
- \def\reftextfacebefore{page \reftextvario{ci-contre}{ci-contre}}%
- \def\reftextafter {page suivante}%
- \def\reftextbefore {page pr\'ec\'edente}%
- \def\reftextcurrent {sur cette page}%
-%% \def\reftextcurrent {\relax}%
- \def\reftextfaraway#1{page~\pageref{#1}}%
- \def\reftextpagerange#1#2{pages~\pageref{#1}--\pageref{#2}}%
- \def\reftextlabelrange#1#2{\ref{#1} \`a~\ref{#2}}%
-\fi
-%% small in index
-\let\svtheindex\theindex
-%% preface of index
- \setlength{\IndexMin}{.95\textheight}%
- \addtolength{\IndexMin}{-5pt}%
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\long\def\Indexhead{In this index, italic style numbers (\textcolor{red}{\textit{123}}) are page numbers
-(and hyperlinks, thanks to~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}), normal roman numbers
-(123) are code line
-references for usage, bold roman numbers (\textbf{123}) are code line references for definitions;
-colored numbers in square brackets, like this:~{\sksep}\cite{minitoc}, are bibliographic references, eventually
-sorted and compressed.
-
-The names of commands, environments, files, suffixes, options, features, messages identifiers\,\footnote{The
-messages identifiers appear in the right margin of the text, near the points of usage.}, and languages,
-are in \texttt{typewriter} font
-(\textbf{\texttt{bold}} for default options or the default language).
-The names of tools, packages and classes are in \textsf{sans serif} font.
-The people names are in \textrm{roman} for the first names, in \textsc{Small Caps} for the family names,
-separated by a comma, the
-family name first\,\footnote{For some oriental names (like japanese, korean, vietnamese or indian names),
-it is sometimes difficult to know which is the first or the last
-name.}, like in ``\textsc{Lamport},~Leslie'' in the index.%
-
-Some commands (like the internal names of language specific letters) are not indexed.
-
-\noindent{\makeatletter\usebox{\BMTC}}
-%
-\par\bigskip}%
-\or\relax
-\long\def\Indexhead{Dans cet index, les nombres en italique (\textcolor{red}{\textit{123}}) sont des numéros de pages
-(et des hyperliens, grâce à~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}),
-les nombres en fonte romaine normale (123) sont des références à~des lignes de code d'utilisation,
-les nombres en fonte romaine grasse (\textbf{123}) sont des références à~des lignes de code de définition;
-les nombres colorés entre crochets carrés, comme ceci:~{\sksep}\cite{minitoc-fr}, sont des références bibliographiques,
-éventuellement triées et compressées.
-
-Les noms des commandes, environnements, fichiers, suffixes, options, dispositifs, identificateurs de messages\,\footnote{Les
-identificateurs de messages apparaissent dans la marge droite du texte, près des points d'utilisation.} et
-langues sont en fonte de \texttt{machine à~écrire} (\textbf{\texttt{grasse}} pour les options et la langue par défaut).
-Les noms des outils, des paquetages et des classes sont en fonte \textsf{sans empattement}.
-Les noms de personnes sont en \textrm{romain} pour les prénoms, en \textsc{Petites Capitales}
-pour les noms de familles, séparés par
-une virgule, le nom de famille en premier\,\footnote{Pour certains noms orientaux (par exemple, japonais, coréens,
-vietnamiens ou indiens), il est parfois difficile de savoir quel est le prénom ou le nom de famille.},
-comme dans «~\textsc{Lamport},~Leslie~» dans l'index.%
-
-Certaines commandes (comme les noms internes de lettres spécifiques de certaines langues) ne sont pas indexées.
-
-\noindent{\makeatletter\usebox{\BMTC}}
-%
-\par\bigskip}%
-\fi
-\makeatletter
- \def\subitem{\@idxitem{1}\hspace*{15pt}}%
- \def\subsubitem{\@idxitem{2}\hspace*{30pt}}%
-\makeatother
-%% \def\theindex{\svtheindex\small\setlength{\columnseprule}{0pt}\setlength{\columnsep}{45pt}\sloppy}
-\makeatletter
-\renewenvironment{theindex}{%
- \columnsep=2.1em%
- \def\item{\@idxitem{0}\relax}%
- \def\subitem{\@idxitem{1}\relax\hspace*{15pt}}%
- \def\subsubitem{\@idxitem{2}\relax\hspace*{30pt}}%
- \begin{multicols}{2}[\chapter*{\indexname}\Indexhead][10\baselineskip]%
- \mtcaddchapter[\indexname]%
- \@mkboth{\indexname}{\indexname}%
- \small\setlength{\columnseprule}{0pt}%
- \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}%
- \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}%
- \setlength{\columnsep}{2.1em}%
- \sloppy\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}\thispagestyle{plain}\pagestyle{myheadings}\def\item{\@idxitem{0}}%
-%% \raggedcolumns
- \setcounter{collectmore}{-1}% Not perfect, but acceptable.
- \raggedbottom}%
- {\end{multicols}}
-\makeatother
-\nonfrenchspacing
-\mtcsetformat{minitoc}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}
-\mtcsetformat{minilof}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}
-\mtcsetformat{minilot}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}
-\raggedbottom
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% \def\MakePrivateLetters{\catcode`\^^?=11}
- \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
- \setcounter{GlossaryColumns}{1}
- \setlength{\IndexMin}{.95\textheight}
- \addtolength{\IndexMin}{-5pt}
- \IndexPrologue{\section*{Index}%
- \markboth{Index}{Index}%
- Numbers written in italic refer to the page
- where the corresponding entry is described;
- numbers underlined refer to the
- code line of the
- definition; numbers in roman refer to the
- code lines
- where the entry is used.}
- \DocInput{minitoc.dtx}
- \clearpage
-%% \begin{SMOOTH}
- \xspaceskip=0.6em plus 0.1em minus .2em % tiny extensible
-\def\pfill{\unskip\hspace*{1ex}\dotfill\penalty500\strut\nobreak
- \dotfil\hspace*{1ex}\ignorespaces}%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% \begin{RaggedRight}
-% \PrintChanges
-% \end{RaggedRight}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% \end{SMOOTH}
- \flushbottom
- \IfFileExists{natbib.sty}{\citeindexfalse}{}
- \setcounter{secnumdepth}{0}
- \mtcsetrules{minitoc}{on}
- \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\kern1sp\vspace*{-.5ex}\relax\begin{multicols}{4}[\kern-2.ex]\raggedcolumns}%
- \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\relax\vspace{-1.5ex}}%
- \setlength{\mtcindent}{-0.75em}%
- \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-0.75em}%
- \setlength{\awidth}{\textwidth}
- \addtolength{\awidth}{-1pt}
-% \addtolength{\awidth}{2\fboxrule}
-% \addtolength{\awidth}{2\fboxsep}
-% \def\kernafterminitoc{\kern-.5\baselineskip\kern.5ex}
- \def\kernafterminitoc{\kern-1\baselineskip\kern.5ex}
- \makeatletter\savebox{\BMTC}{\relax{\begin{minipage}[t]{\awidth}\minitoc[l]\end{minipage}}}\makeatother%
- \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty}%
- \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty}%
- \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt}%
- \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{0pt}%
- \begin{mtchideinmaintoc}[0]
- \PrintIndex
- \end{mtchideinmaintoc}
- \AtEndDocument{\setcounter{tocdepth}{6}}
- \mtcfixindex[chapter]
-\end{document}
-%</driver>
-% \fi
-%
-% \CheckSum{0}
-%
-% \CharacterTable
-% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%
-%
-% \lefthyphenmin=3
-% \righthyphenmin=3
-% \hyphenation{Mittelbach}
-% \hyphenation{Jackowski}
-% \hyphenation{Impatient}
-% \hyphenation{make-index}
-% \hyphenation{hyper-link}
-%
-% \DoNotIndex{\@,\@@par,\@beginparpenalty,\@empty}
-% \DoNotIndex{\@flushglue,\@gobble,\@input}
-% \DoNotIndex{\@makefnmark,\@makeother,\@maketitle}
-% \DoNotIndex{\@namedef,\@ne,\@spaces,\@tempa}
-% \DoNotIndex{\@tempb,\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue}
-% \DoNotIndex{\@thanks,\@thefnmark,\@topnum}
-% \DoNotIndex{\@@,\@elt,\@forloop,\@fortmp,\@gtempa,\@totalleftmargin}
-% \DoNotIndex{\",\/,\@ifundefined,\@nil,\@verbatim,\@vobeyspaces}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\|,\~,\ ,\active,\advance,\aftergroup,\begingroup,\bgroup}
-% \DoNotIndex{\|,\~,\ ,\active,\advance}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\mathcal,\csname,\def,\documentstyle,\dospecials,\edef}
-% \DoNotIndex{\mathcal,\csname,\def,\documentstyle,\dospecials}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\egroup}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\else,\endcsname,\endgroup,\endinput,\endtrivlist}
-% \DoNotIndex{\else,\endcsname,\endinput,\endtrivlist}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\fi,\fnsymbol,\futurelet,\gdef,\global}
-% \DoNotIndex{\fi,\fnsymbol,\futurelet}
-% \DoNotIndex{\hbox,\hss,\if,\if@inlabel,\if@tempswa,\if@twocolumn}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\ifcase}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\ifcat,\iffalse,\ifx,\ignorespaces,\index,\input,\item}
-% \DoNotIndex{\ifcat,\ignorespaces,\index,\item}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\jobname,\kern,\leavevmode,\leftskip,\let,\llap,\lower}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\leavevmode,\leftskip,\let,\llap,\lower}
-% \DoNotIndex{\let,\llap,\lower}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\m@ne,\next,\newpage,\nobreak,\noexpand,\nonfrenchspacing}
-% \DoNotIndex{\m@ne,\next,\newpage\nonfrenchspacing}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\obeylines,\or,\protect,\raggedleft,\rightskip,\rm,\sc}
-% \DoNotIndex{\obeylines,\or,\raggedleft,\rm,\sc}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\setbox,\setcounter,\small,\space,\string,\strut}
-% \DoNotIndex{\setbox,\small,\space,\string,\strut}
-% \DoNotIndex{\strutbox}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\thefootnote,\thispagestyle,\topmargin,\trivlist,\tt}
-% \DoNotIndex{\thefootnote,\topmargin,\trivlist,\tt}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\twocolumn,\typeout,\vss,\vtop,\xdef,\z@}
-% \DoNotIndex{\twocolumn,\typeout,\vss,\vtop,\z@}
-% \DoNotIndex{\,,\@bsphack,\@esphack,\@noligs,\@vobeyspaces,\@xverbatim}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\`,\catcode,\end,\escapechar,\frenchspacing,\glossary}
-% \DoNotIndex{\`,\end,\escapechar,\frenchspacing,\glossary}
-% \DoNotIndex{\hangindent,\hfil,\hfill,\hskip,\hspace,\ht,\it,\langle}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\leaders,\long,\makelabel,\marginpar,\reversemarginpar,\markboth,\mathcode}
-% \DoNotIndex{\leaders,\long,\makelabel,\marginpar,\reversemarginpar,\mathcode}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\mathsurround,\mbox,\newcount,\newdimen,\newskip}
-% \DoNotIndex{\mathsurround,\mbox}
-% \DoNotIndex{\nopagebreak}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\parfillskip,\parindent,\parskip,\penalty,\raise,\rangle}
-% \DoNotIndex{\parfillskip,\parindent,\parskip,\raise,\rangle}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\section,\setlength,\TeX,\topsep,\underline,\unskip,\verb}
-% \DoNotIndex{\section,\TeX,\underline,\verb}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\vskip,\vspace,\widetilde,\\,\%,\@date,\@defpar}
-% \DoNotIndex{\widetilde,\\,\%,\@date,\@defpar}
-% \DoNotIndex{\[,\{,\},\]}
-% \DoNotIndex{\count@,\ifnum,\loop,\today,\uppercase,\uccode}
-% \DoNotIndex{\baselineskip,\begin,\tw@}
-% \DoNotIndex{\a,\b,\c,\d,\e,\f,\g,\h,\i,\j,\k,\l,\m,\n,\o,\p,\q}
-% \DoNotIndex{\r,\s,\t,\u,\v,\w,\x,\y,\z,\A,\B,\C,\D,\E,\F,\G,\H}
-% \DoNotIndex{\I,\J,\K,\L,\M,\N,\O,\P,\Q,\R,\S,\T,\U,\V,\W,\X,\Y,\Z}
-% \DoNotIndex{\1,\2,\3,\4,\5,\6,\7,\8,\9,\0}
-% \DoNotIndex{\!,\#,\$,\&,\',\(,\),\+,\.,\:,\;,\<,\=,\>,\?,\_}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\discretionary,\makeatletter,\makeatother}
-% \DoNotIndex{\discretionary}
-% ^^A % \DoNotIndex{\discretionary,\immediate,\makeatletter,\makeatother}
-% \DoNotIndex{\meaning,\par,\relax,\renewenvironment}
-% ^^A % \DoNotIndex{\meaning,\newenvironment,\par,\relax,\renewenvironment}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\repeat,\scriptsize,\selectfont,\the,\undefined}
-% \DoNotIndex{\repeat,\scriptsize}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\arabic,\do,\makeindex,\null,\number,\show,\@ehc}
-% ^^A % \DoNotIndex{\arabic,\do,\makeindex,\null,\number,\show,\write,\@ehc}
-% \DoNotIndex{\do,\makeindex,\null,\number,\show,\@ehc}
-% \DoNotIndex{\@author,\@ehc,\@ifstar,\@sanitize,\@title,\everypar}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\if@minipage,\if@restonecol,\ifeof,\ifmmode}
-% \DoNotIndex{\if@minipage,\if@restonecol,\ifmmode}
-% \DoNotIndex{\lccode,\onecolumn,\openin,\p@,\SelfDocumenting}
-% ^^A % \DoNotIndex{\newtoks}
-% \DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\@resetonecoltrue,\@resetonecolfalse,\bf}
-% \DoNotIndex{\clearpage,\closein,\lowercase,\@inlabelfalse}
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\selectfont,\mathcode,\newmathalphabet,\rmdefault}
-% \DoNotIndex{\mathcode,\newmathalphabet,\rmdefault}
-% \DoNotIndex{\bfdefault}
-% \DoNotIndex{\*}
-% \DoNotIndex{\ }
-% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\MessageBreak}
-% ^^A lettres de l'hébreu
-% \DoNotIndex{\alef,\ayin,\bet,\finalmem,\finalnun,\kaf,\lamed,\mem,\nun,\resh,\shin,\tav,\tet,\vav,\yod}
-% ^^A lettres hebrew2
-% \DoNotIndex{\hebalef}
-% \DoNotIndex{\hebayin}
-% \DoNotIndex{\hebbet}
-% \DoNotIndex{\hebfinalmem}
-% \DoNotIndex{\hebfinalnun}
-% \DoNotIndex{\hebkaf}
-% \DoNotIndex{\heblamed}
-% \DoNotIndex{\hebmem}
-% \DoNotIndex{\hebnun}
-% \DoNotIndex{\hebresh}
-% \DoNotIndex{\hebshin}
-% \DoNotIndex{\hebtav}
-% \DoNotIndex{\hebtet}
-% \DoNotIndex{\hebvav}
-% \DoNotIndex{\hebyod}
-% ^^A lettres arabi
-% \DoNotIndex{\T}
-% \DoNotIndex{\alef}
-% \DoNotIndex{\alefhamza}
-% \DoNotIndex{\dal}
-% \DoNotIndex{\fa}
-% \DoNotIndex{\ha}
-% \DoNotIndex{\jeem}
-% \DoNotIndex{\kaf}
-% \DoNotIndex{\lam}
-% \DoNotIndex{\meem}
-% \DoNotIndex{\qaf}
-% \DoNotIndex{\ra}
-% \DoNotIndex{\seen}
-% \DoNotIndex{\sheen}
-% \DoNotIndex{\waw}
-% \DoNotIndex{\yahamza}
-% ^^A lettres bulgares
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRF}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRS}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRT}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyra}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrb}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrc}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrd}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyre}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrf}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrg}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrhrdsn}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyri}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrk}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrn}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrp}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrs}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrt}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyru}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh}
-% ^^A lettres du cyrillique
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRA}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRF}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRG}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRH}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRO}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRP}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRS}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRT}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRZ}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRa}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRb}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRc}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRe}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRg}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRi}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRishrt}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRk}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRl}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRn}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRo}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRp}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRr}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRs}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRt}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRv}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRyu}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyra}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrb}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrc}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrch}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrd}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyre}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrerev}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrf}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrg}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrhrdsn}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyri}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrii}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrishrt}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrje}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrk}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrm}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrn}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyro}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrp}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrs}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrsftsn}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrt}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyru}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyry}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyryu}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh}
-% ^^A lettres farsi3
-% \DoNotIndex{\alef}
-% \DoNotIndex{\dal}
-% \DoNotIndex{\fa}
-% \DoNotIndex{\ha}
-% \DoNotIndex{\jeem}
-% \DoNotIndex{\kaf}
-% \DoNotIndex{\lam}
-% \DoNotIndex{\meem}
-% \DoNotIndex{\nun}
-% \DoNotIndex{\ra}
-% \DoNotIndex{\seen}
-% \DoNotIndex{\sheen}
-% \DoNotIndex{\taa}
-% \DoNotIndex{\waw}
-% \DoNotIndex{\ya}
-% ^^A lettres mongolb
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRA}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRG}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRH}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRZ}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyra}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrch}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrerev}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrg}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyri}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrishrt}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrn}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrs}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrt}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyru}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyry}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh}
-% ^^A lettres russianb
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRO}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRS}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRa}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRb}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRc}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRe}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRg}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRi}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRishrt}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRk}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRl}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRn}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRo}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRp}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRr}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRs}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRt}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRv}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRyu}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyra}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrd}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyre}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyri}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrn}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyro}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh}
-% ^^A lettres serbianc
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRS}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRT}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyra}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrb}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrc}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrd}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyre}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyri}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrje}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrk}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh}
-% ^^A lettres ukrainian
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRP}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CYRZ}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyra}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrb}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrc}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyre}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyri}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrii}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrishrt}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrk}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrm}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrs}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrsftsn}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyrt}
-% \DoNotIndex{\cyryu}
-% ^^A not true macros
-% \DoNotIndex{\PTC@,\MTC@,\STC@}
-%
-% \GetFileInfo{minitoc.dtx}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \title{{\Large The \textsf{minitoc} package}\thanks{This document
-% corresponds to \textsf{minitoc}~\fileversion, dated \filedate.}}
-% \author{Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert \\ \url{mailto:jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr}}
-% \or\relax
-% \title{{\Large Le paquetage \textsf{minitoc}}\thanks{Ce document
-% correspond à~\textsf{minitoc}~\fileversion, daté \filedate.}}
-% \author{Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert \\ {\froff\url{mailto:jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr}}}
-% \fi
-% \makeatletter
-% \let\SVtitle\@title
-% \let\SVdate\@date
-% \let\SVauthor\@author
-%
-% \def\@maketitle{%
-% \newpage
-% \null
-% \vskip 2em%
-% \begin{center}%
-% \let \footnote \thanks
-% {\LARGE \SVtitle \par}%
-% \vskip 1.5em%
-% {\large
-% \lineskip .5em%
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{c}%
-% \SVauthor
-% \end{tabular}\par}%
-% \vskip 1em%
-% {\large \SVdate}%
-% \end{center}%
-% \par
-% \vskip 1.5em}
-% \makeatother
-% \maketitle
-% \doparttoc
-% ^^A \dopartlof \dopartlot
-% \dominitoc \dominilof \dominilot
-% {\parskip=0pt
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{\clearpage\Shorttableofcontents{Summary}{0}}{}
-% \renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of contents}
-% \renewcommand{\listfigurename}{List of figures}
-% \renewcommand{\listtablename}{List of tables}
-% \or\relax
-% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{\clearpage\Shorttableofcontents{Sommaire}{0}}{}
-% \fi
-% \setcounter{tocdepth}{6}
-% \makeatletter
-% \let\l@chaptersom\l@chapter
-% \makeatother
-% \setcounter{tocdepth}{6}
-% \tableofcontents
-% \mtcaddchapter
-% \setcounter{tocdepth}{6}
-% \listoffigures
-% \mtcaddchapter
-% \setcounter{tocdepth}{6}
-% \listoftables
-% \mtcaddchapter
-% }
-% ^^A FIX INDEX?
-% \let\svmacro\macro
-% \let\svendmacro\endmacro
-% \let\svenvironment\environment
-% \let\svendenvironment\endenvironment
-% ^^A \renewenvironment{macro}[1]{\bgroup\DescribeMacro{#1}}{\egroup}
-% ^^A \renewenvironment{environment}[1]{\bgroup\DescribeEnv{#1}}{\egroup}
-% ^^A FIX INDEX?
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \chapter*{About this document\markboth{About this document}{About this document}}
-% \markboth{About this document}{About this document}
-% \mtcaddchapter[About this document]
-% This document is rather thick, but please, be not afraid: you do not need to read every page.
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item The most useful chapters are in the first part (``{User's Manual}'', page~\pageref{p+UM}):
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item the chapter~``The \upack{minitoc} package'', page~\pageref{o+minitoc}, describes the essential commands to use
-% the package;
-% \item the chapter ``Frequently Asked Questions'', page~\pageref{FAQ}, may help you to solve some
-% specific problems;
-% \item the chapter ``Memento'', page~\pageref{c+memento}, is a set of tables to be used as a
-% remainder of the commands of this package;
-% \item the chapter ``Examples of documents'', page~\pageref{c+exdocs}, gives the code of some documents showing the
-% basic usage of the \upack{minitoc} package and some interesting situations;
-% \item the chapter ``Messages'', page~\pageref{c+messages}, is certainly boring, but it should be searched if you get some
-% warning or error messages from the \upack{minitoc} package, because it explains them and also the informative
-% messages (table~\vref{t+allmess} will help you to find the meaning of a message);
-% \item the chapter ``Jargon'', page~\pageref{c+jargon}, attemps to explain
-% most of the technical terms used here;
-% \item the chapter ``Installation'', page~\pageref{c+installation}, describes
-% all the files included in the distribution of the package;
-% \item the chapter ``Postface'', page~\pageref{c+postface},
-% gives an abbreviated history of the package.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item The second part, ``Implementation'', page~\pageref{p+ID}, is much more technical; you can read it if you are
-% interested in the details of the coding of the package.
-% The chapter ``Language definition (\suffix{.mld}) and object
-% (\suffix{.mlo}) files'', page~\pageref{c+code+mld.files}, may be useful if you are interested by some language.
-% This chapter contains many maps and illustrations.
-% \item The third part, ``Complements'', page~\pageref{p+complements}, contains a bibliography, a detailed history of
-% the package, a list of acknowlegments, and an index.
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \bigskip
-%
-% For this document, I have used:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{%
-% \item a short table of contents (summary), with the \com{shorttoc} command from my \pack{shorttoc}
-% package~\cite{shorttoc}, displaying only parts and chapters;}{\relax}
-% \item a main table of contents (\com{tableofcontents}), with a maximum depth~(6);
-% \item a main list of figures (\com{listoffigures}) and a main list of tables (\com{listoftables});
-% \item for each part, a table of contents displaying only the chapters (\com{parttoc} with
-% \dcnt{parttocdepth} equal to~1);
-% ^^A \item for each part, a list of figures (\com{partlof}) and a list of tables (\com{partlot}) when useful;
-% \item for each chapter, a complete table of contents (\com{minitoc} with \dcnt{minitocdepth} equal to~6);
-% \item for each chapter, a list of figures (\com{minilof}) and a list of tables (\com{minilot}) when useful;
-% \item customized parameters for the layout of the mini-tables; as the PDF version of the documentation uses hyperlinks
-% (with the help of the \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web}),
-% these mini-tables should help you to navigate within the document;
-% \item some hyperlinks, placed in the right margin, contain a message identifier; the link points to the description
-% of the message in the ``Messages'' chapter; try this one:~\rightarrowfill\null\imess{I0001}
-% \item some flags, with hyperlinks to articles (mainly in Wikipedia) about countries or languages;
-% \item the \pack{calc} package~\cite{calc} to make some computations with comfort;
-% \ifBT\relax
-% \item the \pack{booktabs} package~\cite{booktabs} to format the tables;
-% \else\fi
-% \item the \pack{doc}~\cite{doc} and \pack{docstrip}~\cite{docstrip} packages to document the code;
-% \item many other packages to improve the presentation of the documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \or\relax
-% \chapter*{À~propos de ce document\markboth{À~propos de ce document}{À~propos de ce document}}
-% \markboth{À~propos de ce document}{À~propos de ce document}
-% \mtcaddchapter[À~propos de ce document]
-% Ce document est assez épais, mais s'il vous plaît, n'en soyez pas effrayés: vous n'avez pas besoin de lire toutes
-% les pages.
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Les chapitres les plus utiles sont dans la première partie («~{Manuel de l'utilisateur}~», page~\pageref{p+UM}):
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item le chapitre~«~Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}~», page~\pageref{o+minitoc}, décrit les commandes essentielles
-% pour utiliser le paquetage;
-% \item le chapitre «~Questions fréquemment posées~», page~\pageref{FAQ}, peut vous aider à~résoudre certains
-% problèmes spécifiques;
-% \item le chapitre «~Mémento~», page~\pageref{c+memento}, est un ensemble de tableaux à~utiliser
-% comme aide-mémoire des commandes de ce paquetage;
-% \item le chapitre «~Exemples de documents~», page~\pageref{c+exdocs}, donne le code de quelques documents montrant
-% l'utilisation basique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et quelques situations intéressantes;
-% \item le chapitre «~Messages~», page~\pageref{c+messages}, est certainement
-% fastidieux, mais il faut le consulter lorsque vous recevez des messages d'avertissement ou d'erreur du paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc}, parce qu'il les explique ainsi que les messages informatifs (le tableau~\vref{t+allmess}
-% vous aidera à~trouver la signification d'un message);
-% \item le chapitre «~Jargon~»,
-% page~\pageref{c+jargon}, essaye d'expliquer la plupart des termes techniques utilisés ici;
-% \item le chapitre «~Installation~»,
-% page~\pageref{c+installation}, décrit tous les fichiers inclus dans la distribution du paquetage;
-% \item le chapitre «~Postface~», page~\pageref{c+postface}, donne un historique abrégé du paquetage.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item La deuxième partie, «~Implantation~», page~\pageref{p+ID}, est bien plus technique; vous pouvez la lire si vous êtes
-% intéressés par les détails du codage du paquetage.
-% Le chapitre «~Fichiers de définition (\suffix{.mld}) et objets (\suffix{.mlo}) de langue~»,
-% page~\pageref{c+code+mld.files}, peut être utile si vous êtes intéressés par une certaine langue.
-% Ce chapitre contient de nombreuses cartes et illustrations.
-% \item La troisième partie, «~Compléments~», page~\pageref{p+complements}, contient une bibliographie, un historique
-% détaillé du paquetage, une liste des remerciements et un index.
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \bigskip
-%
-% Pour ce document, j'ai utilisé:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{%
-% \item une table des matières abrégée (sommaire), avec la commande \com{shorttoc} de mon
-% paquetage \pack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc}, n'affichant que les parties et chapitres;}{\relax}
-% \item une table des matières principale (\com{tableofcontents}), avec une profondeur maximale~(6);
-% \item une liste principale des figures (\com{listoffigures}) et une liste principale des tableaux
-% (\com{listoftables});
-% \item pour chaque partie, une table des matières ne montrant que les chapitres (\com{parttoc} avec
-% \dcnt{parttocdepth} égale à~1);
-% ^^A \item pour chaque partie, une liste des figures (\com{partlof})
-% ^^A et une liste des tableaux (\com{partlot}) lorsque c'est utile;
-% \item pour chaque chapitre, une table des matières complète (\com{minitoc} avec \dcnt{minitocdepth} égale à~6);
-% \item pour chaque chapitre, une liste des figures (\com{minilof}) et une liste des tableaux (\com{minilot})
-% lorsque c'est utile;
-% \item des paramètres adaptés pour la mise en page mini-tables; comme la version PDF de la documentation utilise
-% des hyperliens, (à~l'aide du paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}), ces mini-tables devraient
-% vous aider à~vous déplacer dans le document;
-% \item quelques hyperliens, placés dans la marge de droite, contiennent un identificateur de message; le lien
-% renvoie à~la description du message dans le chapitre «~Messages~»;
-% \item quelques drapeaux avec des hyperliens vers des articles (principalement de Wikipedia) sur des pays ou des langues;
-% essayez celui-ci:~\rightarrowfill\null\imess{I0001}
-% \item le paquetage \pack{calc}~\cite{calc} pour faire certains calculs plus confortablement;
-% \ifBT\relax
-% \item le paquetage \pack{booktabs}~\cite{booktabs} pour formater les tableaux;
-% \else\fi
-% \item les paquetages \pack{doc}~\cite{doc} et \pack{docstrip}~\cite{docstrip} pour documenter le code;
-% \item de nombreux autres paquetages pour améliorer la présentation de la documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \part{User's Manual}\label{p+UM}
-% \or\relax
-% \part{Manuel de l'utilisateur}\label{p+UM}
-% \fi
-% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{open}{\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns}
-% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
-% \parttoc
-% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{open}{\empty}
-% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{close}{\empty}
-% ^^A \partlof
-% ^^A \partlot
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \chapter{The \upack{minitoc} package}\label{o+minitoc}\ipack{minitoc}
-% \or\relax
-% \frenchspacing
-% \chapter{Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}}\label{o+minitoc}\ipack{minitoc}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \pagestyle{headings}
-% \minitoc
-% \lsneed{5}
-% \mtcskip
-% \minilof
-% \lsneed{5}
-% \mtcskip
-% \minilot
-% \section{Introduction}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \upack{minitoc} package, initially written by \name{Nigel}{Ward} and \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}, has been
-% almost completely redesigned by \name{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert} (ONERA/Centre de Toulouse).
-% A summary of the evolution of this package is given in the chapter~\vref{c+postface}.
-% This package creates a mini-table of contents
-% (a ``minitoc''\,\footnote{The \upack{minitoc} package introduces
-% its own jargon, explained in this document.
-% It should not be too difficult, however, to learn and use; it will be used here, of course.})%
-% at the beginning of each chapter of a document.
-% It is also possible to have a mini-list of
-% figures (a ``minilof'') and a mini-list of tables (a ``minilot'').
-% The document class should of course define chapters
-% (classes like \class{book} or \class{report}~\cite{classes}) or sections
-% (classes like \class{article}\,\footnote{As the standard \class{proc} class~\cite{proc}, and the \class{ltxdoc}~\cite{ltxdoc} and
-% \class{ltnews}~\cite{ltnews} classes, load the standard
-% \class{article} class, these classes will be just considered as variants of the \class{article} class.})~\cite{classes}.
-% Thus, this package should not be used with
-% document classes without standard sectionning commands (like \class{letter}).
-% When the document class defines a ``part'' sectionning level
-% (i.e.,~classes like \class{book}, \class{report} and \class{article}),
-% you can create a ``partial'' table of contents
-% (a ``parttoc'') at the beginning of each part of a document.
-% It is also possible to have a partial list of figures (a ``partlof'')
-% and a partial list of tables (a ``partlot'').
-% When the document class has no \com{chapter} command
-% but has a \com{section} command, you may use section
-% level tables of contents (``secttocs'') at the beginning of each section; and you can also have section level
-% lists of figures (``sectlofs'') or of tables (``sectlots'').
-%
-% All these tables (``minitocs'', ``partlots'', ``sectlofs'', etc.) are collectively referenced as ``mini-tables''
-% (or sometimes ``mini-lists'').
-% \or\relax
-% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, écrit initialement par \name{Nigel}{Ward} et \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}, a été presque
-% complètement reconstruit par \name{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert} (ONERA/Centre de Toulouse).
-% Un résumé de l'évolution de ce paquetage est donné dans le chapitre~\vref{c+postface}.
-% Ce paquetage crée une mini-table des matières (une «~minitoc~»\,\footnote{Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}
-% introduit son propre jargon, expliqué dans ce document. Il ne devrait, cependant, pas être trop difficile de
-% l'apprendre et de l'utiliser; il sera évidemment utilisé ici.}) au début de chaque chapitre d'un document.
-% Il est aussi possible d'avoir une
-% mini-liste des figures (une «~minilot~») et une mini-liste des tableaux (une «~minilot~»). La classe de document
-% devrait, bien sûr, définir des chapitres (classes telles que \class{book} ou \class{report}) ou des sections
-% (classes telles que \class{article}\,\footnote{Puisque la classe standard \class{proc}~\cite{proc}, ainsi que les classes
-% \class{ltxdoc}~\cite{ltxdoc} et \class{ltnews}~\cite{ltnews}, chargent la classe
-% standard \class{article}, ces classes seront simplement considérées comme des variantes de la classe \class{article}.})~\cite{classes}.
-% Donc, ce paquetage ne devrait pas être utilisé avec des classes de document ne possédant pas les commandes de
-% sectionnement standard (classes telles que \class{letter}).
-% Lorsque la classe de document définit un niveau de sectionnement «~partie~» (c'est-à-dire des classes telles
-% que \class{book}, \class{report} et \class{article}), vous pouvez créer une table des matières
-% «~partielle~» (une «~parttoc~») au début de chaque partie d'un document. Il est aussi possible d'avoir une liste
-% des figures partielle (une «~partlof~») et une liste des tableaux partielle (une «~partlot~») au début de chaque
-% partie d'un document. Lorsque la classe de document ne possède pas de commande \com{chapter} mais a une
-% commande \com{section}, vous pouvez utiliser des tables des matières au niveau section («~secttocs~») au
-% début de chaque section; et vous pouvez aussi avoir des listes des figures («~sectlofs~») ou des tableaux («~sectlots~»)
-% au niveau section.
-%
-% Toutes ces tables («~minitocs~», «~partlofs~», «~sectlots~», etc.) sont collectivement référencées sous le terme de
-% «~mini-tables~» (ou parfois «~mini-listes~»).
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \noindent
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Important restrictions}\label{note+sectionning}%
-% \textbf{Note}\virage: you cannot use chapter level and section level mini-tables in the same document.
-% This restriction is intented to avoid documents with full of local
-% tables of contents, lists of figures and tables at every sectionning level.
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Restrictions importantes}\label{note+sectionning}%
-% \textbf{Note}\virage: vous ne pouvez pas utiliser des mini-tables au niveau chapitre et au niveau section dans
-% le même document. Cette restriction est destinée à~éviter des documents pleins de mini-tables des matières,
-% listes de figures et listes de tableaux locales à~chaque niveau de sectionnement.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \noindent
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \textbf{Note}\virage: the commands relative
-% to the part level are defined only if the document class defines \com{part}.
-% The commands relative
-% to the section level are defined only if the document class
-% defines \com{section} but does not define \com{chapter}.
-% \or\relax
-% \textbf{Note}\virage: les commandes relatives au niveau partie ne sont définies que si la classe de document
-% définit \com{part}.
-% Les commandes relatives au niveau section ne sont définies que si la classe de document définit \com{section}
-% mais ne définit pas \com{chapter}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Version}
-% The current version of this package is~\#60. You will find a resumed history of the package in the ``Postface''
-% chapter (chapter~\vref{c+postface}) and a more detailed history in ``Changes History'', page~\pageref{c+history}.
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Version}
-% La version courante de ce paquetage est~\#60. Vous trouverez un historique résumé de ce paquetage dans le
-% chapitre «~Postface~» (chapitre~\vref{c+postface}) et un historique plus détaillé dans «~Historique des
-% modifications~», page~\pageref{c+history}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{License}
-% This package must be distributed and/or may be modified under the
-% conditions of the \textbf{\LaTeX{} Project Public License}, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (as convenient) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% \begin{quote}
-% \url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt}
-% \end{quote}
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of \LaTeX{}
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% But please don't bother me about hacked versions; they will not be supported.
-% However, suggestions for corrections and reasoned improvements are welcome.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Licence}
-% Ce paquetage doit être distribué et/ou peut être modifié sous les conditions de la
-% \textbf{\LaTeX{} Project Public License}, soit la version~1.3 de cette licence soit (au choix) toute version
-% ultérieure. La plus récente version de cette licence est dans
-% \begin{quote}\froff
-% \url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt}
-% \end{quote}
-% et la version~1.3 ou ultérieure fait partie de toutes les distributions de \LaTeX{} version 2003/12/01 ou
-% ultérieure.
-%
-% Mais, s'il vous plaît, ne me parlez pas de versions bricolées; elles ne seront pas maintenues.
-% Cependant, les suggestions de corrections et d'améliorations raisonnables sont les bienvenues.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Using the \upack{minitoc} package}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Utiliser le paquetage \upack{minitoc}}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Loading the package and creating the mini-tables}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Charger le paquetage et créer les mini-tables}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\usepackage}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% To use the \upack{minitoc} package, you must insert a command:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour utiliser le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, vous devez insérer une commande:
-% \fi
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{usepackage}\verb|[...options...]{minitoc}|
-% \end{verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% in the preamble of the document\,\footnote{This command must
-% be placed \emph{after} any modification done on the sectionning
-% commands; if you modify some sectionning commands after loading the
-% \upack{minitoc} package, this one might not work properly.}.
-% The mini-table of contents will be in the chapter,
-% after the \com{chapter} command, at the point of the \com{minitoc}
-% command. The \com{minitoc} command may occur \emph{almost anywhere}\,\footnote{``Almost anywhere'' means
-% ``in a normal place'', like between two paragraphs of normal text, or in a (wide enough) minipage, but not in a
-% too strange position (like a marginal note or a footnote). Even a multicolumn or a floating environment can be used,
-% but with care. But note that a minitoc can be rather long, if the chapter is complex and if you are asking for
-% details with a high value for \dcnt{minitocdepth}.
-% As an example, I~once used a \com{afterpage} command
-% (\pack{afterpage} package~\cite{afterpage}) to place the long
-% minilof of chapter~\vref{c+code+mld.files} (so the minilof was forced to begin at the top of the next page).} inside a chapter.
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% Of course, it is better
-% to put it at the beginning of the chapter, eventually after some introductory material. But you can also decide
-% to put it at the end of the chapter. You should use the same conventions in all chapters. If you want to add the
-% mini-table of contents for a chapter, you must use the sequence given in table~\vref{mtc+minitoc}.
-% \or\relax
-% dans le préambule du document\,\footnote{Cette commande doit être placée \emph{après} toute modification faite sur
-% les commandes de sectionnement; si vous modifiez des commandes de sectionnement après le chargement du paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc}, celui-ci pourrait ne pas fonctionner correctement.}.
-% La mini-table des matières sera dans le chapitre, après la commande \com{chapter}, à~l'emplacement de la
-% commande \com{minitoc}. La commande \com{minitoc} peut se placer \emph{presque
-% n'importe~où}\,\footnote{<<~Presque n'importe~où~>> signifie <<~en un endroit normal~>>, comme entre deux alinéas
-% de texte normal, ou dans une minipage (suffisamment large), mais pas dans une position trop bizarre (comme une
-% note marginale ou infrapaginale). Même un environnement multi-colonnes ou flottant peut être utilisé, mais avec
-% soin. Mais notez qu'une minitoc peut être assez longue, si le chapitre est complexe et si vous demandez des
-% détails avec une valeur élevée de \dcnt{minitocdepth}.
-% Par exemple, il m'est arrivé d'utiliser une commande \com{afterpage} (paquetage \pack{afterpage}~\cite{afterpage})
-% pour placer la longue minilof du chapitre~\vref{c+code+mld.files} (pour forcer la minilof à~commencer en haut de la
-% page suivante).} à~l'intérieur d'un chapitre.
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% Bien sûr, il est préférable de la placer au début du chapitre, éventuellement
-% après un texte introductif. Mais vous pouvez aussi décider de la placer à~la fin du chapitre. Vous devriez
-% utiliser les mêmes conventions dans tous les chapitres. Si vous souhaitez ajouter la mini-table des matières pour
-% un chapitre, vous devez utiliser la séquence donnée dans le tableau~\vref{mtc+minitoc}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[ht]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Commands for a \texttt{minitoc}}\label{mtc+minitoc}
-% \centering
-% {\small\ttfamily
-% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}}
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}\texttt{[...]\{book\}}}&\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}\texttt{[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}}&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \com{setlength}\{\com{mtcindent}\}\{24pt\}&\emph{default}&\\
-% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\
-% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{minitoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\
-% \com{setlength}\{\com{mtcskipamount}\}\{\com{bigskipamount}\}&\emph{default}&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{minitocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{default}&\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcSfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
-% \emph{or:}&&\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{minitoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{default}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{minitoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{minitoc\}\{section\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
-% \ldots&\\
-% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \com{dominitoc}&&\\
-% \com{dominilof}&&\\
-% \com{dominilot}&&\\
-% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{or} \com{faketableofcontents}\hspace*{-3cm}\\
-% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoffigures}\hspace*{-3cm}\\
-% \com{listoftables}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoftables}\hspace*{-3cm}\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \com{chapter}\{...\}&&\\
-% \com{minitoc}&\emph{if you want one}&\\
-% \com{mtcskip}&&\\
-% \com{minilof}&\emph{if you want one}&\\
-% \com{mtcskip}&&\\
-% \com{minilot}&\emph{if you want one}&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \end{tabularx}}}
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{table}[ht]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Commandes pour une \texttt{minitoc}}\label{mtc+minitoc}
-% \centering
-% {\small\ttfamily
-% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}}
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}\texttt{[...]\{book\}}}&\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}\texttt{[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}}&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \com{setlength}\{\com{mtcindent}\}\{24pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
-% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
-% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{minitoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
-% \com{setlength}\{\com{mtcskipamount}\}\{\com{bigskipamount}\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{minitocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcSfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
-% \emph{ou:}&&\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{minitoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{minitoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{minitoc\}\{section\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \com{dominitoc}&&\\
-% \com{dominilof}&&\\
-% \com{dominilot}&&\\
-% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{ou} \com{faketableofcontents}\hspace*{-3cm}\\
-% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoffigures}\hspace*{-3cm}\\
-% \com{listoftables}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoftables}\hspace*{-3cm}\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \com{chapter}\{...\}&&\\
-% \com{minitoc}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\
-% \com{mtcskip}&\\
-% \com{minilof}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\
-% \com{mtcskip}&\\
-% \com{minilot}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \end{tabularx}}}%
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For each mini-table of contents, an auxiliary file will be
-% created with a name of the form \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N},
-% where \meta{N} is the absolute chapter number.
-% ``Absolute'' means that this number is unique,
-% and always increasing from the first chapter\,\footnote{The concept of an ``absolute'' counter for the
-% mini-tables has solved some obscure problems, and also made obsolete some commands, like \com{firstpartis},
-% \com{firstchapteris}, and \com{firstsectionis}.}.
-% The suffix is \suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} for mini-lists of figures and
-% is \suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} for mini-lists of tables.
-% (If under MS-DOS or any operating system with short extensions to filenames, see section~\vref{MS-DOS} and
-% section~\vref{.8+3}). There are similar commands for mini-tables at the part or section level, depending on the
-% document class.
-% \or\relax
-% Pour chaque mini-table des matières, un fichier auxiliaire sera créé avec un nom de la forme
-% \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu du chapitre. «~Absolu~» signifie que ce numéro est
-% unique, et croit toujours depuis le premier chapitre\,\footnote{Le concept d'un compteur <<~absolu~>> pour les
-% mini-tables a résolu certains problèmes ténébreux, et aussi frappé d'obsolescence certaines commandes, telles que
-% \com{firstpartis}, \com{firstchapteris} et \com{firstsectionis}.}.
-% Le suffixe est \suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} pour les mini-listes de figures et \suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} pour
-% les mini-listes de tableaux.
-% (Si vous travaillez sous MS-DOS ou tout autre système d'exploitation utilisant des suffixes courts pour les
-% noms de fichiers, voyez la section~\vref{MS-DOS} et la section~\vref{.8+3}). Il y a des commandes similaires aux
-% niveaux partie ou section, selon la classe du document.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Preparing the mini-tables}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Préparation des mini-tables}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The commands\,\footnote{The code of these \clit{do.{}.{}.{}} commands is directly derived from that of
-% the \pack{xr} package~\cite{xr}, by \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}, with his permission.}
-% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, and \com{dominilot} (for mini-tables at the chapter level),
-% take respectively the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}, \emph{document}\suffix{.lof}, and \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} files,
-% and cut slices from them to create the
-% \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}, \emph{document}\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N}, and \emph{document}\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} files.
-% \or\relax
-% Les commandes\,\footnote{Le code de ces commandes \clit{do.{}.{}.{}} est directement dérivé de celui du
-% paquetage \pack{xr}~\cite{xr}, de \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}, avec sa permission.}
-% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof} et \com{dominilot} (pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre, prennent
-% respectivement les fichiers \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}, \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} et \emph{document}\suffix{.lot},
-% et en
-% prélèvent des tranches pour créer les fichiers \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}, \emph{document}\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N}
-% et \emph{document}\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The commands \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, and \com{dosectlot} (for mini-tables at the section level)
-% and \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, and \com{dopartlot} (for mini-tables at the part level) are analog.
-%
-% The\virage{} \com{mtcprepare} command invokes (and replaces) all these preparation commands when they are available
-% with the document class and if the adequate contents file exists.
-% This command accepts also an optional argument to set the default position of the title
-% for \emph{all} the mini-tables.
-%
-% All\SMMZ{\lmess{W0098}}\label{x+W0098} the preparation commands are \emph{ignored} if the \com{nofiles} command is invoked
-% in the preamble, to avoid to overwrite the mini-table auxiliary files.
-%
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% To\virage{} obtain a satisfactory result (i.e.,~non empty), please note that all these commands must
-% \emph{imperatively be put before} any command analog to the \com{tableofcontents}, \com{listoffigures},
-% and \com{listoftables} commands, or their \verb|\fake...| siblings.
-%
-% It\virage{} is also \emph{strongly} recommended to put these commands \emph{before} any sectionning command producing an
-% entry in the table of contents (for the \verb|\do...toc| commands), and \emph{before}
-% any \com{caption}-like command
-% producing an entry in the list of figures (for the \verb|\do...lof| commands) or in the list of tables
-% (for the \verb|\do...lot|) commands; else disorder in the mini-tables might result.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \or\relax
-% Les commandes \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof} et \com{dosectlot} (pour les mini-tables au niveau section),
-% et \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof} et \com{dopartlot} (pour les mini-tables au niveau partie) sont
-% analogues.
-%
-% La\virage{} commande \com{mtcprepare} invoque (et remplace) toutes ces commandes de préparation lorsqu'elles sont
-% disponibles pour la classe du document et si le fichier de contenu adéquat existe.
-% Cette commande accepte aussi un argument optionnel pour établir la position par défaut du titre
-% pour \emph{toutes} les mini-tables.
-%
-% Toutes\SMMZ{\lmess{W0098}}\label{x+W0098} les commandes de préparation sont \emph{ignorées} si
-% la commande \com{nofiles} est invoquée dans le préambule, pour éviter d'écraser les fichiers auxiliaires des mini-tables.
-%
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Pour\virage{} obtenir un résultat satisfaisant (c'est-à-dire, non vide), veuillez noter que toutes ces commandes doivent
-% \emph{impérativement être placées avant} toute commande analogue aux commandes \com{tableofcontents},
-% \com{listoffigures} et \com{listoftables}, ou leurs cousines \verb|\fake...|!
-%
-% Il\virage{} est aussi \emph{fortement} recommandé de placer ces commandes \emph{avant} toute commande de
-% sectionnement produisant une entrée dans la table des matières (pour les commandes \verb|\do...toc|), et
-% \emph{avant} toute commande analogue à~\com{caption} produisant une entrée dans la liste des figures (pour les
-% commandes \verb|\do...lof|) ou dans la liste des tableaux (pour les commandes \verb|\do...lot|); sinon les
-% mini-tables pourraient être dans le désordre.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Placing the mini-tables}\label{s+placing}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Placement des mini-tables}\label{s+placing}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcskipamount}
-% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mtcskip} command may be used to add a vertical
-% skip between two mini-tables. Its height is
-% \com{mtcskipamount} (equal to \com{bigskipamount} by default).
-% \com{mtcskip} eliminates any immediate previous vertical
-% skip, to not accumulate vertical space when a mini-table is
-% empty and skipped by the \optd{checkfiles} option.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{mtcskip} peut être utilisée pour ajouter un saut vertical entre deux mini-tables. Sa hauteur
-% est \com{mtcskipamount} (égale à~\com{bigskipamount} par défaut). \com{mtcskip} élimine tout saut vertical
-% qui précède immédiatement, afin de ne pas accumuler des espaces verticaux lorsqu'une mini-table est vide et donc
-% ignorée par l'option \optd{checkfiles}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The section-level table of contents will be in the section,
-% after the \com{section} command, at the point of the \com{secttoc} command. The \com{secttoc} command
-% may occur \emph{almost anywhere} inside a section. It is often better to put it at the beginning of the section,
-% or after some short introductory material. You should use the same conventions in all sections. If you want to add
-% a~section-level table of contents for a section, you must use the sequence given in Table~\vref{mtcsecttoc}.
-% \or\relax
-% La table des matières au niveau section sera dans la section, après la commande \com{section}, à~l'emplacement
-% de la commande \com{secttoc}. La commande \com{secttoc} peut être placée \emph{presque n'importe~où}
-% à~l'intérieur d'une section. Bien sûr, il est préférable de la placer au début de la section, ou éventuellement
-% après un texte introductif. Vous devriez utiliser les mêmes conventions dans toutes les sections. Si vous
-% souhaitez ajouter la table des matières au niveau section pour une section, vous devez utiliser la séquence
-% donnée dans le tableau~\vref{mtcsecttoc}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[!t]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Commands for a \texttt{secttoc}}\label{mtcsecttoc}
-% \centering{\small\ttfamily
-% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}}
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}\texttt{[...]\{article\}}}&\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \com{setlength}\{\com{stcindent}\}\{24pt\}&\emph{default}&\\
-% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\
-% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{secttoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{secttocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{default}&\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcSSfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
-% \emph{or:}&&\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{secttoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{default}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{secttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{secttoc\}\{subsection\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \com{dosecttoc}&&\\
-% \com{dosectlof}&&\\
-% \com{dosectlot}&&\\
-% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{or} \com{faketableofcontents}&\\
-% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoffigures}&\\
-% \com{listoftables}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoftables}&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \com{section}\{...\}&&\\
-% \com{secttoc}&\emph{if you want one}&\\
-% \com{sectlof}&\emph{if you want one}&\\
-% \com{sectlot}&\emph{if you want one}&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \end{tabularx}}}
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{table}[t!]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Commandes pour une \texttt{secttoc}}\label{mtcsecttoc}
-% \centering{\small\ttfamily
-% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}}
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}\texttt{[...]\{article\}}}&\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \com{setlength}\{\com{stcindent}\}\{24pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
-% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
-% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{secttoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{secttocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcSSfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
-% \emph{ou:}&&\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{secttoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{secttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{secttoc\}\{subsection\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \com{dosecttoc}&&\\
-% \com{dosectlof}&&\\
-% \com{dosectlot}&&\\
-% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{ou} \com{faketableofcontents}&\\
-% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoffigures}&\\
-% \com{listoftables}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoftables}&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \com{section}\{...\}&&\\
-% \com{secttoc}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\
-% \com{sectlof}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\
-% \com{sectlot}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \end{tabularx}}}
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For each section-level table of contents, an auxiliary file will be
-% created with a name of the form \emph{document}\suffix{.stc}\meta{N},
-% where \meta{N} is the absolute section number.
-% The suffix is \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} for section-level lists of figures and
-% is \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} for section-level lists of tables.
-% (If under MS-DOS or any operating system with short extensions to filenames, see section~\vref{MS-DOS} and
-% section~\vref{.8+3}).
-% \or\relax
-% Pour chaque table des matières au niveau section, un fichier auxiliaire sera créé avec un nom de la forme
-% \emph{document}\suffix{.stc}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de section.
-% Le suffixe est \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} pour les
-% listes de figures au niveau section et \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} pour les listes de tableaux au niveau section.
-% (Si vous travaillez sous MS-DOS ou tout autre système d'exploitation utilisant des suffixes courts pour les
-% noms de fichiers, voyez la section~\vref{MS-DOS} et la section~\vref{.8+3}).
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\usepackage}
-% \begin{macro}{\FloatBarrier}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \label{rem+FB}As\imess{W0056} floats (figures and tables) could drift\footnote{%
-% \begin{Citation}{\name{Donald}{Arseneau}}%
-% \noindent\textsl{A float is like a ship in harbor.
-% There is a place in the text which is the anchor location. The figure or ``ship'' can float around to various places
-% relative to the anchor, but always downstream or downwind. A float with bad placement parameters is like a ship
-% that slips its anchor and eventually crashes on the rocks at the end of a chapter.}\end{Citation}}
-% somewhere outside the printing area of the text of the section, the sectlofs and
-% sectlots can be rather strange. In order to have a better
-% behaviour of these mini-tables, it may be useful to add the
-% \opt{insection} option in the \com{usepackage} command:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{usepackage}\verb|[insection]{minitoc}|
-% \end{verse}
-% if you want more consistent sectlofs and sectlots.
-% The \opt{insection} option loads the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} with its \optp{verbose}{placeins}
-% and \optp{section}{placeins} options.
-% Sometimes, it might be necessary to use the \com{FloatBarrier} command of this package to correctly place the
-% figure or table and have a correct mini-table.
-% The options \optp{above}{placeins} or \optp{below}{placeins} options should not be used, because they allow
-% floats to drift above
-% or below a \com{FloatBarrier} (or a section limit): the barrier becomes ``porous'' upwards\footnote{But a float
-% can not drift upwards beyond the top of the current page.}~($\uparrow$) or
-% downwards~($\downarrow$), or both~($\updownarrow$). The \optp{section}{placeins} option makes a more ``watertight''
-% barrier~($\equiv$). This is illustrated by the figure~\vref{f+barrier}.
-%
-% The \pack{placeins} package, by \name{Donald}{Arseneau}, is available
-% on CTAN archives; note that the file \xfile{placeins.sty} contains its own
-% documentation, with a copy in \xfile{placeins.txt}. You need a version whose date is at least 2005/04/18.
-% \begin{figure}[p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}}
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{With the \optp{section}{placeins} option\strut}}\\
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Action}\\
-% \midrule
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Forbidden Area}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\
-% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Floats inserted here}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
-% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Forbidden Area}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-%
-% \bigskip
-%
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}}
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{With the \optp{above}{placeins} option\strut}}\\
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Action}\\
-% \midrule
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
-% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\uparrow}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Floats inserted here}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
-% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Forbidden Area}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-%
-% \bigskip
-%
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}}
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{With the \optp{below}{placeins} option\strut}}\\
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Action}\\
-% \midrule
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Forbidden Area}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\
-% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Floats inserted here}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
-% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\downarrow}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-%
-% \bigskip
-%
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}}
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{With the \optp{above}{placeins} and \optp{below}{placeins} options\strut}}\\
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Action}\\
-% \midrule
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
-% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\updownarrow}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Floats inserted here}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
-% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\updownarrow}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \caption{Float barriers}\label{f+barrier}
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-%
-% Since version~\#45, this option also loads the \pack{flafter} package (described in~\cite{ltoutput}
-% and~\cite[page~286]{TLC2}) to force a float to appear \emph{after} its reference.
-% The \optp{above}{placeins} and \optp{below}{placeins} options of the \pack{placeins} package are no more used,
-% because they allowed the floats to move out of the section.
-%
-% In\virage{} all cases, it is \emph{strongly} recommended to verify the position of
-% the floats and, if necessary, to look at the messages of the \pack{placeins} package
-% in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file.
-% The placement of floats is a very complex problem, so some manual intervention may be necessary, like the use
-% of the \pack{float} package~\cite{float} or, better, of the \pack{floatrow} package~\cite{floatrow}.
-% \or\relax
-% \label{rem+FB}Comme\imess{W0056} les éléments flottants (figures et tableaux) pourraient
-% dériver\,\footnote{\selectlanguage{english}%
-% \begin{Citation}{\name{Donald}{Arseneau}}%
-% \noindent\textsl{A float is like a ship in harbor. There is
-% a place in the text which is the anchor location. The figure or ``ship'' can float around to various places relative to
-% the anchor, but always downstream or downwind. A float with bad placement parameters is like a ship that slips
-% its anchor and eventually crashes on the rocks at the end of a chapter.}\end{Citation}}
-% quelque part en dehors de la zone d'impression
-% du texte de la section, les sectlofs et sectlots peuvent être assez étranges. Afin d'avoir un meilleur
-% comportement de ces mini-tables, il peut être utile d'ajouter l'option
-% \opt{insection} dans la commande \com{usepackage}:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{usepackage}\verb|[insection]{minitoc}|
-% \end{verse}
-% si vous désirez des sectlofs et sectlots plus cohérentes.
-% L'option \opt{insection} charge le paquetage
-% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} avec ses options \optp{verbose}{placeins} et \optp{section}{placeins}.
-% Les options \optp{above}{placeins} ou \optp{below}{placeins} ne devraient pas être utilisées, car elles permettent aux éléments
-% flottants de dériver au-dessus ou en dessous d'une \com{FloatBarrier} (ou d'une limite de section):
-% la barrière devient «~poreuse~» vers l'amont\,\footnote{Mais un élément flottant ne peut pas dériver vers
-% l'amont au-delà du sommet de la page courante.}~($\uparrow$) ou vers l'aval~($\downarrow$), ou dans les
-% deux sens~($\updownarrow$).
-% Il peut même être nécessaire d'utiliser la commande \com{FloatBarrier} de ce paquetage pour placer
-% correctement la figure ou la table et avoir une mini-table correcte.
-% L'option \optp{section}{placeins} place une barrière plus étanche~($\equiv$).
-% Ceci est illustré par la figure~\vref{f+barrier}.
-%
-% Le paquetage \pack{placeins}, de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}, est disponible sur les archives CTAN;
-% notez que le fichier \xfile{placeins.sty}
-% contient sa propre documentation, dont une copie est dans \xfile{placeins.txt}. Il vous faut une version plus
-% récente que 2005/04/18.
-% \begin{figure}[p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}}
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Avec l'option \optp{section}{placeins}\strut}}\\
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Action}\\
-% \midrule
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Zone interdite}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\
-% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Flottants insérés ici}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
-% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Zone interdite}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-%
-% \bigskip
-%
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}}
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Avec l'option \optp{above}{placeins}\strut}}\\
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Action}\\
-% \midrule
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
-% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\uparrow}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Flottants insérés ici}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
-% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Zone interdite}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-%
-% \bigskip
-%
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}}
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Avec l'option \optp{below}{placeins}\strut}}\\
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Action}\\
-% \midrule
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Zone interdite}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\
-% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Flottants insérés ici}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
-% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\downarrow}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-%
-% \bigskip
-%
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}}
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Avec les options \optp{above}{placeins} et \optp{below}{placeins}\strut}}\\
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Action}\\
-% \midrule
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
-% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\updownarrow}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Flottants insérés ici}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
-% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\updownarrow}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \caption{Barrières pour les flottants}\label{f+barrier}
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-%
-% Depuis la version~\#45, cette option charge aussi le paquetage \pack{flafter} (décrit dans~\cite{ltoutput}
-% et~\cite[page~292]{TLC2F}) pour forcer un élément flottant à~n'apparaître qu'\emph{après} sa référence.
-% Les options \optp{above}{placeins} et \optp{below}{placeins} du paquetage \pack{placeins} ne sont plus utilisées,
-% car elles permettaient aux éléments de sortir de la section.
-%
-% Dans\virage{} tous les cas, il est \emph{fortement} recommandé de
-% vérifier la position des éléments flottants et, si nécessaire, de regarder les messages du paquetage \pack{placeins}
-% dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}.
-% Le placement des éléments flottants est un problème très complexe, donc une intervention manuelle peut être nécessaire,
-% comme l'utilisation du paquetage \pack{float}~\cite{float}, ou, mieux, du paquetage \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If you want to add the partial table of contents for a part,
-% you must use the sequence given in Table~\vref{mtc+parttoc}.
-% \or\relax
-% Si vous voulez ajouter une table des matières partielle pour une partie, vous devez utiliser la séquence donnée
-% dans le tableau~\vref{mtc+parttoc}.
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[t!]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Commands for a \texttt{parttoc}}\label{mtc+parttoc}
-% \centering{\small\ttfamily
-% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}}
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\com{documentclass}[...]\{book\}}&\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\com{usepackage}[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}&\\
-% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\
-% \com{setlength}\{\com{ptcindent}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\
-% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\
-% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{parttoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\
-% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\
-% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{parttocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{default}&\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcCfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcSfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
-% \emph{or:}&&\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{parttoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{default}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{chapter\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{section\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \com{doparttoc}&&\\
-% \com{dopartlof}&&\\
-% \com{dopartlot}&&\\
-% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{or} \com{faketableofcontents}&\\
-% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoffigures}&\\
-% \com{listoftables}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoftables}&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \com{part}\{...\}&&\\
-% \com{parttoc}&\emph{if you want one}&\\
-% \com{partlof}&\emph{if you want one}&\\
-% \com{partlot}&\emph{if you want one}&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \end{tabularx}}}
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{table}[t]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Commandes pour une \texttt{parttoc}}\label{mtc+parttoc}
-% \centering{\small\ttfamily
-% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}}
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}[...]\{book\}}&\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}&\\
-% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\
-% \com{setlength}\{\com{ptcindent}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
-% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
-% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{parttoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\
-% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\
-% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{parttocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcCfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcSfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
-% \emph{ou:}&&\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{parttoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{chapter\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{section\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \com{doparttoc}&&\\
-% \com{dopartlof}&&\\
-% \com{dopartlot}&&\\
-% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{ou} \com{faketableofcontents}&\\
-% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoffigures}&\\
-% \com{listoftables}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoftables}&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \com{part}\{...\}&&\\
-% \com{parttoc}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\
-% \com{partlof}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\
-% \com{partlot}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\
-% \ldots&&\\
-% \end{tabularx}}}
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For each partial table of contents, an auxiliary file will be
-% created with a name of the form \emph{document}\suffix{.ptc}\meta{N},
-% where \meta{N} is the absolute part number.
-% The suffix is \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} for partial lists of figures and
-% is \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} for partial lists of tables.
-% (If under MS-DOS or any operating system with short
-% extensions to filenames, see section~\vref{MS-DOS} and section~\vref{.8+3}).
-% \or\relax
-% Pour chaque table des matières au niveau partie, un fichier auxiliaire sera créé avec un nom de la forme
-% \emph{document}\suffix{.ptc}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de partie.
-% Le suffixe est \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} pour les
-% listes de figures au niveau partie et \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} pour les listes de tableaux au niveau partie.
-% (Si vous travaillez sous MS-DOS ou tout autre système d'exploitation utilisant des suffixes courts pour les
-% noms de fichiers, voyez la section~\vref{MS-DOS} et la section~\vref{.8+3}).
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \noindent
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \textbf{Note}\virage: the user is responsible of asking or not asking
-% a mini-table (mini-toc, -lof or -lot) for some chapter. Asking a minilof for a
-% chapter without any figure would result in an empty and ugly mini-list
-% of figures (i.e.,~the title and two horizontal rules).
-% He is also responsible of requiring or not requiring
-% a partial toc (lof or lot) for some part. Asking a partlof for a
-% part without any figure would result in an empty and ugly part
-% list of figures (i.e.,~the title alone on a page). Analogous remarks
-% apply to section-level mini-tables (secttoc, sectlof, and
-% sectlot) and to the part-level mini-tables (parttoc, partlof, and partlot).
-% \or\relax
-% \textbf{Note}\virage: l'utilisateur est responsable de demander ou non une mini-table (mini-lof, -lof ou -lof) pour
-% un certain chapitre. Demander une minilof pour un chapitre sans aucune figure aura pour résultat une mini-liste
-% des figures vide et laide (c'est-à-dire le titre et deux filets horizontaux). Il est aussi responsable de demander
-% ou non une table des matières partielle (ou une liste partielle des figures ou des tableaux) pour une certaine
-% partie. Demander une partlot pour une partie sans aucune figure aura pour résultat une liste partielle des figures
-% vide et laide (c'est-à-dire le titre seul sur une page). Des remarques analogues s'appliquent aux mini-tables
-% au niveau section (secttoc, sectlof et sectlot) et aux mini-tables au niveau partie (parttoc, partlof et partlot).
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% But since version \#35, empty mini-tables are just ignored and
-% this problem should disappear in normal circumstances. Nevertheless, it is recommended
-% to put no \com{minitoc} command in
-% a chapter without sections and no \com{minilof} or
-% \com{minilot} command in a chapter without figures or tables.
-% The \optd{checkfiles} (see section~\vref{s+placing}) package option
-% (default) skips empty mini-tables (with a note in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file);
-% the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option restores
-% the old behaviour (empty mini-tables are displayed).
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Mais depuis la version~\#35, les mini-tables vides sont simplement ignorées et ce problème devrait disparaître
-% dans des circonstances normales. Néanmoins, il est recommandé de ne pas mettre de commande \com{minitoc} dans un
-% chapitre sans sections ni de commande \com{minilof} ou \com{minilot} dans un chapitre sans figures ou sans
-% tableaux. L'option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles} (voir la section~\vref{s+placing}), active par
-% défaut, saute les mini-tables vides (avec un note dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}); l'option de paquetage
-% \opt{nocheckfiles} rétablit l'ancien comportement (les mini-tables vides sont imprimées).
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% By default, the mini-tables and partial tables of contents
-% contain only references higher and to sections and
-% subsections. The counters \dcnt{parttocdepth},
-% \dcnt{minitocdepth} and \dcnt{secttocdepth},
-% similar to \dcnt{tocdepth}, allow the user to modify this behaviour. Mini or partial
-% lists of figures or tables are not affected by the value of
-% these counters, but if there are depth counters for these lists (\dcnt{lofdepth} and
-% \dcnt{lotdepth}), as done by the \pack{subfigure} and
-% \pack{subfig} packages~\cite{subfigure,subfig}\label{h.subfig} from
-% \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}, new depth counters are created if necessary, with obvious names like
-% \dcnt{partlofdepth}, \dcnt{partlotdepth}, \dcnt{minilofdepth}, \dcnt{minilotdepth}, \dcnt{sectlofdepth},
-% and \dcnt{sectlotdepth}.
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Par défaut, les mini-tables et tables des matières partielles ne contiennent que les références jusqu'aux sections et
-% sous-sections. Les trois compteurs \dcnt{parttocdepth}, \dcnt{minitocdepth}
-% et \dcnt{secttocdepth}, similaires à~\dcnt{tocdepth}, permettent à~l'utilisateur de
-% modifier ce comportement. Les mini-listes des figures ou des tableaux ne sont pas affectées par ces compteurs, mais
-% s'il existe des compteurs de profondeur pour ces listes (\dcnt{lofdepth} et
-% \dcnt{lotdepth}), comme cela est fait par les paquetages\label{h.subfig}
-% \pack{subfigure}~\cite{subfigure} et
-% \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig} de \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}, de nouveaux compteurs sont créés si
-% nécessaire, portant des noms évidents tels que \dcnt{partlofdepth}, \dcnt{partlotdepth},
-% \dcnt{minilofdepth}, \dcnt{minilotdepth}, \dcnt{sectlofdepth} et \dcnt{sectlotdepth}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Starred chapters, parts and sections}\label{s+starred.chap}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Chapitres, parties et sections étoilés}\label{s+starred.chap}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\addstarredpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection}
-% \noindent
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \textbf{NOTE}: if using \com{chapter*} and a
-% \or\relax
-% \textbf{NOTE}: si vous utilisez \com{chapter*} et une commande
-% \fi
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% command\Virage{} to add something in the
-% table of contents, the numbering of the \upack{minitoc} auxiliary files would be altered.
-% To avoid that problem, a first method is to say:
-% \or\relax
-% pour\Virage{} ajouter quelque chose dans la table des matières, la numérotation des fichiers auxiliaires de
-% \upack{minitoc} serait altérée. Pour éviter ce problème, une première méthode est de dire:
-% \fi
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{addstarredpart}\verb|{...}|\\
-% \com{addstarredchapter}\verb|{...}|\\
-% \com{addstarredsection}\verb|{...}|
-% \end{quote}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% These commands apply only for the level of a part-, mini- or
-% sect-toc; for lower levels, the usual command is sufficient:
-% \or\relax
-% Ces commandes ne s'appliquent que pour le niveau d'une part-, mini- ou
-% sect-toc; pour des niveaux inférieurs, utilisez, comme d'habitude:
-% \fi
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}|
-% \end{quote}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% So, to add a section-level entry in the global toc and in the
-% minitoc of a starred chapter:
-% \or\relax
-% Donc, pour ajouter une entrée de niveau section dans la table des matières globale et dans la minitoc
-% d'un chapitre étoilé:
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{chapter*}\verb|{Title of chapter}|\\
-% \com{addstarredchapter}\verb|{Title of chapter}|\\
-% \com{minitoc}\\
-% \com{section*}\verb|{First section}|\\
-% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{First section}|\\
-% \com{section*}\verb|{Second section}|\\
-% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{Second section}|
-% \end{verse}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{chapter*}\verb|{Titre du chapitre}|\\
-% \com{addstarredchapter}\verb|{Titre du chapitre}|\\
-% \com{minitoc}\\
-% \com{section*}\verb|{Première section}|\\
-% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{Première section}|\\
-% \com{section*}\verb|{Seconde section}|\\
-% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{Seconde section}|
-% \end{verse}
-% \fi
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc}
-% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% There is sometimes a problem with mini-tables when
-% you use \com{chapter*} (or \com{section*}): the minitocs
-% appear in the wrong chapter. You can add a \com{adjustmtc}
-% (or \com{adjuststc} or \com{adjustptc}) command at the end
-% of the starred chapter (or section or part) to increment the
-% corresponding counter. Do not use commands like \com{stepcounter}\verb|{mtc}| or \com{addtocounter}\verb|{mtc}{...}|
-% (which should work, but it is cheating), because the \pack{mtcoff} package (see section~\vref{o+mtcoff}) knows
-% what to do about \com{adjustmtc} (and others), but can do
-% nothing about \com{stepcounter} or \com{addtocounter}, as they are a standard basic commands
-% of \LaTeX, not \upack{minitoc} specific commands. Syntax:\nopagebreak
-% \or\relax
-% Il y a parfois un problème avec des mini-tables lorsque vous utilisez \com{chapter*} (ou \com{section*}):\ les
-% minitocs apparaissent dans le mauvais chapitre. Vous pouvez ajouter une commande \com{adjustmtc} (ou
-% \com{adjuststc}, ou \com{adjustptc}) à~la fin du chapitre étoilé (ou de la section ou partie étoilée) pour
-% incrémenter le compteur correspondant. N'utilisez pas de commandes telles que \com{stepcounter}\verb|{mtc}|
-% ou \com{addtocounter}\verb|{mtc}{...}| (ceci
-% devrait marcher, mais c'est de la triche), parce que le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} (voir la section~\vref{o+mtcoff})
-% sait quoi faire avec \com{adjustmtc} (et autres), mais ne sait pas quoi faire de \com{stepcounter} ou
-% \com{addtocounter}, car ce sont des
-% commandes \LaTeX{} basiques standard, pas des commandes spécifiques de \upack{minitoc}. Syntaxe:\nopagebreak
-% \fi
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{adjustptc}\verb|[|\emph{n}\verb|]|\qquad
-% \com{adjustmtc}\verb|[|\emph{n}\verb|]|\qquad
-% \com{adjuststc}\verb|[|\emph{n}\verb|]|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% where \emph{n} is the increment (default:~1).
-% \or\relax
-% où \emph{n} est l'incrément (défaut:~1).
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\decrementptc}
-% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\decrementstc}
-% \begin{macro}{\incrementptc}
-% \begin{macro}{\incrementmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\incrementstc}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% There are similar commands to \emph{decrement} or \emph{increment} by~1 these counters:
-% \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, \com{decrementstc},
-% \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc}, and \com{incrementstc};
-% the same remarks as above apply. These commands have no argument.
-% But a more clever way to solve this problem would be using commands similar to:
-% \or\relax
-% Il y~a des commandes similaires pour \emph{décrémenter} ou \emph{incrémenter} de~1 ces compteurs:
-% \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, \com{decrementstc},
-% \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc} et \com{incrementstc};
-% les mêmes remarques que ci-dessus s'appliquent. Ces commandes n'ont pas d'argument.
-% Mais une manière plus élégante de résoudre ce problème serait d'utiliser des commandes similaires~à:
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|
-% \end{quote}
-% This\virage{} command adds an entry in the table of contents (and adjusts the
-% counter, because it calls \com{adjustmtc}). The
-% table~\vref{t+mtcadd} summarizes these commands, that you put
-% \emph{after} \com{chapter*}, etc.\
-% If the optional argument is omitted or empty or blank, no entry will
-% be visible in the table of contents nor in the minitocs.
-% If the optional argument is something invisible
-% (like~\verb|~|, \com{space} or \com{quad}), the result will be strange
-% but still logically correct. See also section~\vref{faq.30} for the problems with \com{mtcaddpart}.
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|
-% \end{quote}
-% Cette\virage{} commande ajoute une entrée dans la table des matières (et ajuste le compteur,
-% car elle appelle \com{adjustmtc}).
-% Le tableau~\vref{t+mtcadd} liste ces commandes, que vous placez \emph{après} \com{chapter*}, etc.\ Si
-% l'argument optionnel est omis, ou est vide ou blanc, aucune entrée ne sera visible dans la table des matières ni
-% dans les minitocs. Si l'argument optionnel est quelque chose d'invisible (comme~\verb|~|, \com{space} ou \com{quad}),
-% le résultat sera étrange mais cependant logiquement correct. Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq.30} pour les
-% problèmes avec \com{mtcaddpart}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[th]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Adding an entry in the ToC for
-% a starred part, chapter, or section}\label{t+mtcadd}
-% \centering
-% \ifBT
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Level}&%
-% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{With title}}\\
-% \midrule
-% part&\com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\
-% chapter&\com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\
-% section&\com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \else
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
-% \thickline
-% \textbf{Level}&%
-% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{With title}}\\
-% \hline
-% part&\com{mtcaddpart}\verb[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\
-% chapter&\com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\
-% section&\com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\
-% \thickline
-% \end{tabular}
-% \fi
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{table}[th]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption[Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour une partie, un chapitre ou une
-% section étoilés]{Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour une partie, un chapitre ou une
-% section étoilés}\label{t+mtcadd}
-% \centering
-% \ifBT
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Niveau}&%
-% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{Avec titre}}\\
-% \midrule
-% partie&\com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\
-% chapitre&\com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\
-% section&\com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \else
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
-% \thickline
-% \textbf{Niveau}&%
-% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{Avec titre}}\\
-% \hline
-% partie&\com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\
-% chapitre&\com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\
-% section&\com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\
-% \thickline
-% \end{tabular}
-% \fi
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Typesetting of the mini-tables}
-% The mini-tables are typeset in a \env{verse}-like environment, and can be split over several pages.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Composition des mini-tables}
-% Les mini-tables sont composées dans un environnement analogue à~\env{verse}, et donc peuvent s'étendre sur
-% plusieurs pages.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Chapter-level mini-tables}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Mini-tables au niveau chapitre}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% The mini-table of contents is typeset in the \com{mtcfont}
-% font, which is \verb|\small\rmfamily| by default.
-% In fact, the font \com{mtcfont} is selected at the beginning of a minitoc, minilof or minilot. More
-% selective choices are made with the following fonts.
-% Section entries are typeset
-% in the \com{mtcSfont} font, which is \verb|\small\bfseries| by default.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \or\relax
-% La mini-table des matières est composée dans la fonte \com{mtcfont}, qui est
-% \verb|\small\rmfamily| par défaut.
-% En fait, la fonte \com{mtcfont} est sélectionnée au début d'une minitoc, minilof ou minilot. Des choix
-% plus sélectifs sont faits avec les fontes suivantes.
-% Les entrées de type section sont composées dans la fonte
-% \com{mtcSfont}, qui est \verb|\small\bfseries| par défaut.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlffont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlfSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltSfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For subsections, subsubsections, paragraphs and subparagraphs, the
-% commands \com{mtcSSfont}, \com{mtcSSSfont},
-% \com{mtcPfont} and \com{mtcSPfont} are available
-% (by default, \verb|\small\rmfamily|) to enable the use of various fonts. Mini lists of figures and tables are
-% typeset in the fonts \com{mlffont} and \com{mltfont}, which are \verb|\small\rmfamily| by default.
-% There are also \com{mlfSfont} and \com{mltSfont} for sub-figures and sub-tables entries.
-% See tables~\vrefrange{t+mtc+f1}{t+mtc+f2}\,\footnote{Thanks to \name{Stefan}{Ulrich},
-% who contributed these tables initially.}.
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les sous-sections, sous-sous-sections,
-% paragraphes et sous-paragraphes, les commandes \com{mtcSSfont}, \com{mtcSSSfont},
-% \com{mtcPfont} et \com{mtcSPfont} sont disponibles (par défaut, \verb|\small\rmfamily|) pour permettre
-% l'utilisation de fontes diverses. Les mini-listes de figures et de tableaux sont composées dans les fontes
-% \com{mlffont} et \com{mltfont}, qui sont \verb|\small\rmfamily| par défaut.
-% Il y a aussi \com{mlfSfont} et \com{mltSfont} pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tableaux.
-% Voir les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+mtc+f1}{t+mtc+f2}\,\footnote{Merci à~\name{Stefan}{Ulrich},
-% qui a fourni ces tableaux initialement.}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Note\Virage{} that the default choice of fonts is certainly not perfect and hence it is not definitive. A~symptom of this
-% imperfection is the presence of poor alignments in the mini-tables, if bold and non-bold fonts are mixed\,\footnote{This
-% appears, e.g., if you are using the Computer Modern Roman (CMR) fonts~\cite{cmt}.
-% The symptom disappears if you do not use bold
-% CMR fonts or if you use the TX fonts (\pack{txfonts} package~\cite{txfonts}),
-% for instance\IfFileExists{txfonts.sty}{, like in this document}{\relax}. See also section~\vref{faq.29}.}
-% (the true length of
-% \texttt{1em} is not the same for the fonts). This can often be adjusted by changing some fonts.\par
-% \or\relax
-% Notez\Virage{} que le choix de fontes par défaut n'est certainement pas parfait et n'est donc pas définitif.
-% Un symptôme de
-% cette imperfection est la présence d'alignements imprécis dans les mini-tables, si des fontes grasses et non-grasses
-% sont mélangées\,\footnote{Ceci apparaît notamment si vous utilisez les fontes Computer Modern Roman (CMR)~\cite{cmt}.
-% Le symptôme disparaît si vous n'utilisez plus de fontes CMR grasses ou si vous utilisez les fontes TX (paquetage
-% \pack{txfonts}~\cite{txfonts}), par exemple\IfFileExists{txfonts.sty}{, comme dans ce document}{\relax}.
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq.29}.}
-% (la longueur effective de \texttt{1em} n'est pas la même pour ces fontes).
-% Ceci peut souvent être corrigé en changeant quelques fontes.
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \footnotesize
-% \caption{Fonts and titles for the mini-table commands}\label{t+mtc+f1}
-% \centering
-% \ifBT
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% Command
-% &\FontDefault{Font}{default setting}
-% &\FontDefault{Title string}{default setting}
-% &\FontDefault{Title font}{default setting}\\[1ex]
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\part...} commands:}\\[1ex]
-% \com{parttoc}%
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptcfont}}{\com{normalsize}\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{ptctitle}}{Table of Contents\Lang}
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% \com{partlof}%
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{plffont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{plftitle}}{List of Figures\Lang}
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{plfSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \com{partlot}%
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{plttitle}}{List of Tables\Lang}
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\mini...} commands:\Chap}\\[1ex]
-% \com{minitoc}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mtcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mtctitle}}{Contents\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% \com{minilof}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mlffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mlftitle}}{Figures\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mlfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \com{minilot}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mlttitle}}{Tables\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\sect...} commands:\Sec}\\[1ex]
-% \com{secttoc}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{stcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{stctitle}}{Contents\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% \com{sectlof}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{slffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{slftitle}}{Figures\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontDefault{\com{slfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \com{sectlot}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{sltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{slttitle}}{Tables\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontDefault{\com{sltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with
-% \com{chapter} level (e.g., \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with
-% no \com{chapter} level (e.g., \class{article}).}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang default for english;
-% changed by the language definition files or
-% \com{renewcommand}.}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{All these fonts use \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape, and \V\mdseries\ by default.}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \else
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}}
-% \thickline
-% Command
-% &\FontDefault{Font}{default setting}
-% &\FontDefault{Title string}{default setting}
-% &\FontDefault{Title font}{default setting}\\[1ex]
-% \hline
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\part...} commands:}\\[1ex]
-% \com{parttoc}%
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptcfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{ptctitle}}{Table of Contents\Lang}
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% \com{partlof}%
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{plffont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{plftitle}}{List of Figures\Lang}
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{plfSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \com{partlot}%
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{plttitle}}{List of Tables\Lang}
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \hline
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\mini...} commands:\Chap}\\[1ex]
-% \com{minitoc}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mtcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mtctitle}}{Contents\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% \com{minilof}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mlffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mlftitle}}{Figures\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% \com{minilot}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mlttitle}}{Tables\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \hline
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\sect...} commands:\Sec}\\[1ex]
-% \com{secttoc}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{stcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{stctitle}}{Contents\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% \com{sectlof}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{slffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{slftitle}}{Figures\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontDefault{\com{slfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \com{sectlot}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{sltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{slttitle}}{Tables\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontDefault{\com{sltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \thickline
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with
-% \com{chapter} level (e.g., \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with
-% no \com{chapter} level (e.g., \class{article}).}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang default for english;
-% changed by the language definition files or
-% \com{renewcommand}.}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{All these fonts use \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape, and \V\mdseries{} by default.}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \fi
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \footnotesize
-% \caption{Fontes et titres pour les commandes de mini-tables}\label{t+mtc+f1}
-% \centering
-% \ifBT
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% Commande
-% &\FontDefault{Fonte}{choix par défaut}
-% &\FontDefault{Chaîne titre}{choix par défaut}
-% &\FontDefault{Fonte du titre}{choix par défaut}\\[1ex]
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\part...}:}\\[1ex]
-% \com{parttoc}%
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptcfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{ptctitle}}{Table of Contents\Lang}
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% \com{partlof}%
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{plffont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{plftitle}}{List of Figures\Lang}
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{plfSfont}}{\com{normalsize}\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \com{partlot}%
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{plttitle}}{List of Tables\Lang}
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\mini...}:\Chap}\\[1ex]
-% \com{minitoc}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mtcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mtctitle}}{Contents\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% \com{minilof}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mlffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mlftitle}}{Figures\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mlfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \com{minilot}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mlttitle}}{Tables\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\sect...}:\Sec}\\[1ex]
-% \com{secttoc}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{stcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{stctitle}}{Contents\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% \com{sectlof}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{slffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{slftitle}}{Figures\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontDefault{\com{slfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \com{sectlot}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{sltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{slttitle}}{Tables\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontDefault{\com{sltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau
-% \com{chapter} (par~ex. \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau
-% \com{chapter} (par~ex. \class{article}).}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang par défaut pour l'anglais;
-% changé par les fichiers de définition de langue ou
-% \com{renewcommand}.}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{Toutes ces fontes utilisent \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape\ et \V\mdseries\ par défaut.}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \else
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}}
-% \thickline
-% Commande
-% &\FontDefault{Fonte}{choix par défaut}
-% &\FontDefault{Chaîne titre}{choix par défaut}
-% &\FontDefault{Fonte du }{choix par défaut}\\[1ex]
-% \hline
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\part...}:}\\[1ex]
-% \com{parttoc}%
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptcfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{ptctitle}}{Table of Contents\Lang}
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% \com{partlof}%
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{plffont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{plftitle}}{List of Figures\Lang}
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{plfSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \com{partlot}%
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{plttitle}}{List of Tables\Lang}
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \hline
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\mini...}:\Chap}\\[1ex]
-% \com{minitoc}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mtcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mtctitle}}{Contents\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% \com{minilof}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mlffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mlftitle}}{Figures\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mlfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \com{minilot}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mlttitle}}{Tables\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontDefault{\com{mltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \hline
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\sect...}:\Sec}\\[1ex]
-% \com{secttoc}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{stcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{stctitle}}{Contents\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% \com{sectlof}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{slffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{slftitle}}{Figures\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontDefault{\com{slfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \com{sectlot}%
-% &\FontDefault{\com{sltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{slttitle}}{Tables\Lang}
-% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
-% &\FontDefault{\com{sltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
-% &
-% &\\[1ex]
-% \thickline
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau
-% \com{chapter} (par~ex. \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau
-% \com{chapter} (par~ex. \class{article}).}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang par défaut pour l'anglais;
-% changé par les fichiers de définition de langue ou
-% \com{renewcommand}.}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{Toutes ces fontes utilisent \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape\ et \V\mdseries\ par défaut.}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \fi
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \small
-% \caption{Fonts for the mini-table entries}\label{t+mtc+f2}
-% \centering
-% \ifBT
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% Level&Font&Default setting\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{parttoc} entries:}\\
-% \Strut
-% Chapter\Chap
-% &\com{ptcCfont}\Chap
-% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\
-% Section
-% &\com{ptcSfont}
-% &\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\
-% \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\
-% Subsection
-% &\com{ptcSSfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\
-% Subsubsection
-% &\com{ptcSSSfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\
-% Paragraph
-% &\com{ptcPfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\
-% Subparagraph
-% &\com{ptcSPfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\[1ex]
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{minitoc} entries:\Chap}\\
-% \Strut
-% Section
-% &\com{mtcSfont}
-% &\V\small\V\bfseries\\
-% Subsection
-% &\com{mtcSSfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\
-% Subsubsection
-% &\com{mtcSSSfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\
-% Paragraph
-% &\com{mtcPfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\
-% Subparagraph
-% &\com{mtcSPfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\[1ex]
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{secttoc} entries:\Sec}\\
-% \Strut
-% Subsection
-% &\com{stcSSfont}
-% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\
-% Subsubsection
-% &\com{stcSSSfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\
-% Paragraph
-% &\com{stcPfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\
-% Subparagraph
-% &\com{stcSPfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\[1ex]
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with \com{chapter}
-% level (e.g., \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with no \com{chapter}
-% level (e.g., \class{article}).}\\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \else
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
-% \thickline
-% Level&Font&Default setting\\
-% \hline
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{parttoc} entries:}\\
-% \Strut
-% Chapter\Chap
-% &\com{ptcCfont}\Chap
-% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\
-% Section
-% &\com{ptcSfont}
-% &\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\
-% \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\
-% Subsection
-% &\com{ptcSSfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\
-% Subsubsection
-% &\com{ptcSSSfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\
-% Paragraph
-% &\com{ptcPfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\
-% Subparagraph
-% &\com{ptcSPfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\[1ex]
-% \hline
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{minitoc} entries:\Chap}\\
-% \Strut
-% Section
-% &\com{mtcSfont}
-% &\V\small\V\bfseries\\
-% Subsection
-% &\com{mtcSSfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\
-% Subsubsection
-% &\com{mtcSSSfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\
-% Paragraph
-% &\com{mtcPfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\
-% Subparagraph
-% &\com{mtcSPfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\[1ex]
-% \hline
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{secttoc} entries:\Sec}\\
-% \Strut
-% Subsection
-% &\com{stcSSfont}
-% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\
-% Subsubsection
-% &\com{stcSSSfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\
-% Paragraph
-% &\com{stcPfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\
-% Subparagraph
-% &\com{stcSPfont}
-% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\[1ex]
-% \thickline
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with \com{chapter}
-% level (e.g., \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with no \com{chapter}
-% level (e.g., \class{article}).}\\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \fi
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \small
-% \caption{Fontes pour les entrées des mini-tables}\label{t+mtc+f2}
-% \centering
-% \ifBT
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% Niveau&Fonte&Choix par défaut\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{parttoc}:}\\
-% \Strut
-% Chapitre\Chap
-% &\com{ptcCfont}\Chap
-% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\
-% Section
-% &\com{ptcSfont}
-% &\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\
-% \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\
-% Sous-section
-% &\com{ptcSSfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\
-% Sous-sous-section
-% &\com{ptcSSSfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\
-% Paragraphe
-% &\com{ptcPfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\
-% Sous-paragraphe
-% &\com{ptcSPfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\[1ex]
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{minitoc}:\Chap}\\
-% \Strut
-% Section
-% &\com{mtcSfont}
-% &\V\small\V\bfseries\\
-% Sous-section
-% &\com{mtcSSfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\
-% Sous-sous-section
-% &\com{mtcSSSfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\
-% Paragraphe
-% &\com{mtcPfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\
-% Sous-paragraphe
-% &\com{mtcSPfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\[1ex]
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{secttoc}:\Sec}\\
-% \Strut
-% Sous-section
-% &\com{stcSSfont}
-% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\
-% Sous-sous-section
-% &\com{stcSSSfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\
-% Paragraphe
-% &\com{stcPfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\
-% Sous-paragraphe
-% &\com{stcSPfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\[1ex]
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau \com{chapter}
-% (par~ex. \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau \com{chapter}
-% (par~ex. \class{article}).}\\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \else
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
-% \thickline
-% Niveau&Fonte&Choix par défaut\\
-% \hline
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{parttoc}:}\\
-% \Strut
-% Chapitre\Chap
-% &\com{ptcCfont}\Chap
-% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\
-% Section
-% &\com{ptcSfont}
-% &\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\
-% \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\
-% Sous-section
-% &\com{ptcSSfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\
-% Sous-sous-section
-% &\com{ptcSSSfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\
-% Paragraphe
-% &\com{ptcPfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\
-% Sous-paragraphe
-% &\com{ptcSPfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\[1ex]
-% \hline
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{minitoc}:\Chap}\\
-% \Strut
-% Section
-% &\com{mtcSfont}
-% &\V\small\V\bfseries\\
-% Sous-section
-% &\com{mtcSSfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\
-% Sous-sous-section
-% &\com{mtcSSSfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\
-% Paragraphe
-% &\com{mtcPfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\
-% Sous-paragraphe
-% &\com{mtcSPfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\[1ex]
-% \hline
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{secttoc}:\Sec}\\
-% \Strut
-% Sous-section
-% &\com{stcSSfont}
-% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\
-% Sous-sous-section
-% &\com{stcSSSfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\
-% Paragraphe
-% &\com{stcPfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\
-% Sous-paragraphe
-% &\com{stcSPfont}
-% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\[1ex]
-% \thickline
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau \com{chapter}
-% (par~ex. \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau \com{chapter}
-% (par~ex. \class{article}).}\\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \fi
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \ifFLP\floatpagestyle{plain}\fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Available languages}\label{t+languages}
-% \ilopt{afrikaan}%
-% \ilopt{afrikaans}%
-% \ilopt{albanian}%
-% \ilopt{arab}%
-% \ilopt{arabic}%
-% \ilopt{arab2}%
-% \ilopt{arabi}%
-% \ilopt{armenian}%
-% \ilopt{bahasai}%
-% \ilopt{bahasa}%
-% \ilopt{indon}%
-% \ilopt{indonesian}%
-% \ilopt{bahasam}%
-% \ilopt{malay}%
-% \ilopt{meyalu}%
-% \ilopt{bangla}%
-% \ilopt{basque}%
-% \ilopt{bengali}%
-% \ilopt{bicig}%
-% \ilopt{uighur}%
-% \ilopt{bicig2}%
-% \ilopt{uighur2}%
-% \ilopt{bicig3}%
-% \ilopt{uighur3}%
-% \ilopt{bithe}%
-% \ilopt{manju}%
-% \ilopt{brazil}%
-% \ilopt{brazilian}%
-% \ilopt{breton}%
-% \ilopt{bulgarian}%
-% \ilopt{bulgarianb}%
-% \ilopt{buryat}%
-% \ilopt{buryat2}%
-% \ilopt{catalan}%
-% \ilopt{chinese1}%
-% \ilopt{chinese2}%
-% \ilopt{croatian}%
-% \ilopt{czech}%
-% \ilopt{danish}%
-% \ilopt{devanagari}%
-% \ilopt{hindi}%
-% \ilopt{dutch}%
-% \iloptd{english}%
-% \ilopt{american}%
-% \ilopt{australian}%
-% \ilopt{british}%
-% \ilopt{canadian}%
-% \ilopt{newzealand}%
-% \ilopt{UKenglish}%
-% \ilopt{USenglish}%
-% \ilopt{english1}%
-% \ilopt{english2}%
-% \ilopt{esperant}%
-% \ilopt{esperanto}%
-% \ilopt{estonian}%
-% \ilopt{ethiopia}%
-% \ilopt{ethiopian}%
-% \ilopt{ethiopian2}%
-% \ilopt{farsi1}%
-% \ilopt{farsi2}%
-% \ilopt{farsi3}%
-% \ilopt{finnish}%
-% \ilopt{finnish2}%
-% \ilopt{french}%
-% \ilopt{frenchb}%
-% \ilopt{frenchle}%
-% \ilopt{frenchpro}%
-% \ilopt{francais}%
-% \ilopt{acadien}%
-% \ilopt{canadien}%
-% \ilopt{french1}%
-% \ilopt{french2}%
-% \ilopt{galician}%
-% \ilopt{german}%
-% \ilopt{austrian}%
-% \ilopt{germanb}%
-% \ilopt{germanb2}%
-% \ilopt{greek}%
-% \ilopt{greek-mono}%
-% \ilopt{greek-polydemo}%
-% \ilopt{greek-polykatha}%
-% \ilopt{guarani}%
-% \ilopt{hangul1}%
-% \ilopt{hangul2}%
-% \ilopt{hangul3}%
-% \ilopt{hangul4}%
-% \ilopt{hangul-u8}%
-% \ilopt{hanja1}%
-% \ilopt{hanja2}%
-% \ilopt{hanja-u8}%
-% \ilopt{hebrew}%
-% \ilopt{hebrew2}%
-% \ilopt{hindi-modern}%
-% \ilopt{icelandic}%
-% \ilopt{interlingua}%
-% \ilopt{irish}%
-% \ilopt{italian}%
-% \ilopt{italian2}%
-% \ilopt{japanese}%
-% \ilopt{japanese2}%
-% \ilopt{japanese3}%
-% \ilopt{japanese4}%
-% \ilopt{japanese5}%
-% \ilopt{japanese6}%
-% \ilopt{kannada}%
-% \ilopt{latin}%
-% \ilopt{latin2}%
-% \ilopt{latinc}%
-% \ilopt{latinc2}%
-% \ilopt{latvian}%
-% \ilopt{latvian2}%
-% \ilopt{letton}%
-% \ilopt{letton2}%
-% \ilopt{lithuanian}%
-% \ilopt{lithuanian2}%
-% \ilopt{lowersorbian}%
-% \ilopt{lsorbian}%
-% \ilopt{magyar}%
-% \ilopt{hungarian}%
-% \ilopt{magyar2}%
-% \ilopt{magyar3}%
-% \ilopt{malayalam-b}%
-% \ilopt{malayalam-keli}%
-% \ilopt{malayalam-keli2}%
-% \ilopt{malayalam-mr}%
-% \ilopt{malayalam-omega}%
-% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana}%
-% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana2}%
-% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana3}%
-% \ilopt{manju}%
-% \ilopt{mexican}%
-% \ilopt{mongol}%
-% \ilopt{mongolb}%
-% \ilopt{mongolian}%
-% \ilopt{ngermanb}%
-% \ilopt{ngerman}%
-% \ilopt{naustrian}%
-% \ilopt{ngermanb2}%
-% \ilopt{norsk}%
-% \ilopt{norsk2}%
-% \ilopt{nynorsk}%
-% \ilopt{nynorsk2}%
-% \ilopt{occitan}%
-% \ilopt{occitan2}%
-% \ilopt{polish}%
-% \ilopt{polish2}%
-% \ilopt{polski}%
-% \ilopt{portuguese}%
-% \ilopt{portuges}%
-% \ilopt{romanian}%
-% \ilopt{romanian2}%
-% \ilopt{romanian3}%
-% \ilopt{russian}%
-% \ilopt{russianb}%
-% \ilopt{russianc}%
-% \ilopt{russian2m}%
-% \ilopt{russian2o}%
-% \ilopt{russian-cca}%
-% \ilopt{russian-cca1}%
-% \ilopt{russian-lh}%
-% \ilopt{russian-lhcyralt}%
-% \ilopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}%
-% \ilopt{russian-lhcyrwin}%
-% \ilopt{samin}%
-% \ilopt{scottish}%
-% \ilopt{serbian}%
-% \ilopt{serbianc}%
-% \ilopt{slovak}%
-% \ilopt{slovene}%
-% \ilopt{spanish}%
-% \ilopt{castillan}%
-% \ilopt{castillian}%
-% \ilopt{spanish2}%
-% \ilopt{spanish3}%
-% \ilopt{spanish4}%
-% \ilopt{swahili}%
-% \ilopt{swedish}%
-% \ilopt{swedish2}%
-% \ilopt{thai}%
-% \ilopt{turkish}%
-% \ilopt{ukrainian}%
-% \ilopt{ukraineb}%
-% \ilopt{uppersorbian}%
-% \ilopt{usorbian}%
-% \ilopt{vietnam}%
-% \ilopt{vietnamese}%
-% \ilopt{welsh}%
-% \ilopt{xalx}%
-% \ilopt{khalkha}%
-% \ilopt{xalx2}%
-% \ilopt{xalx3}%
-% \centering
-% \hspace*{-.5\widthinc}\begin{minipage}{\textwidth+\widthinc}\raggedright\small
-% \selectlanguage{french} ^^A to get better spacing
-% \begin{multicols}{4}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% ^^A \leftmargin=-1em \itemindent=-1em
-% ^^A \def\labelitemi{--}
-% \item afrikaan (afrikaans)
-% \item albanian
-% \item arab (arabic)\,$^{c}$
-% \item arab2\,$^{a,c}$
-% \item arabi\,$^{c,j}$
-% \item armenian\,$^c$
-% \item bahasai (bahasa, indon, indonesian)\,$^c$
-% \item bahasam (malay, meyalu)\,$^c$
-% \item bangla (bengali)\,$^c$
-% \item basque
-% \item bicig (uighur)\,$^{c,i}$
-% \item bicig2 (uighur2)\,$^{c,i}$
-% \item bicig3 (uighur3)\,$^{c,i}$
-% \item bithe (manju)\,$^c$
-% \item brazil (brazilian)
-% \item breton
-% \item bulgarian\,$^c$
-% \item bulgarianb\,$^c$
-% \item buryat\,$^c$
-% \item buryat2\,$^c$
-% \item catalan
-% \item chinese1\,$^{c,g}$
-% \item chinese2\,$^{c,g}$
-% \item croatian
-% \item czech
-% \item danish
-% \item devanagari (hindi)$^c$
-% \item dutch
-% \item english$^{\dagger}$ (american, australian, british, canadian, newzealand, UKenglish, USenglish)
-% \item english1
-% \item english2
-% \item esperant (esperanto)
-% \item estonian
-% \item ethiopia (ethiopian)\,$^c$
-% \item ethiopian2\,$^{c,e,h}$
-% \item farsi1\,$^{c,f,g}$
-% \item farsi2\,$^{c,f,g}$
-% \item farsi3\,$^{c,j}$
-% \item finnish
-% \item finnish2
-% \item french (frenchb, frenchle, frenchpro, francais, acadien, canadien)
-% \item french1
-% \item french2
-% \item galician
-% \item german (austrian)
-% \item germanb
-% \item germanb2
-% \item greek\,$^c$
-% \item greek-mono\,$^{c,e}$
-% \item greek-polydemo\,$^{c,e}$
-% \item greek-polykatha\,$^{c,e}$
-% \item guarani\,$^h$
-% \item hangul1\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item hangul2\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item hangul3\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item hangul4\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item hangul-u8\,$^{c,e,f,g,h}$
-% \item hanja1\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item hanja2\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item hanja-u8\,$^{c,e,f,g,h}$
-% \item hebrew\,$^{c,h}$
-% \item hebrew2\,$^{c,h}$
-% \item hindi-modern\,$^c$
-% \item icelandic\,$^f$
-% \item interlingua
-% \item irish
-% \item italian
-% \item italian2
-% \item japanese\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item japanese2\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item japanese3\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item japanese4\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item japanese5\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item japanese6\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item kannada\,$^c$
-% \item latin
-% \item latin2
-% \item latinc
-% \item latinc2
-% \item latvian (letton)\,$^e$
-% \item latvian2 (letton2)\,$^c$
-% \item lithuanian
-% \item lithuanian2\,$^{c,h}$
-% \item lowersorbian (lsorbian)
-% \item magyar (hungarian)
-% \item magyar2
-% \item magyar3
-% \item malayalam-b\,$^c$
-% \item malayalam-keli\,$^c$
-% \item malayalam-keli2\,$^c$
-% \item malayalam-mr\,$^c$
-% \item malayalam-omega\,$^{c,e,g,h}$
-% \item malayalam-rachana\,$^c$
-% \item malayalam-rachana2\,$^c$
-% \item malayalam-rachana3\,$^c$
-% \item mexican
-% \item mongol\,$^c$
-% \item mongolb (mongolian)\,$^{c,f,h}$
-% \item ngermanb (ngerman, naustrian)
-% \item ngermanb2
-% \item norsk
-% \item norsk2
-% \item nynorsk
-% \item nynorsk2
-% \item occitan
-% \item occitan2
-% \item polish
-% \item polish2\,$^{c,e}$
-% \item polski\,$^c$
-% \item portuguese (portuges)
-% \item romanian
-% \item romanian2
-% \item romanian3
-% \item russian\,$^{b,c}$
-% \item russianb\,$^{b,c}$
-% \item russianc\,$^{b,c}$
-% \item russian2m\,$^{c,e}$
-% \item russian2o\,$^{c,e}$
-% \item russian-cca\,$^{c,g,h}$
-% \item russian-cca1\,$^{c,g,h}$
-% \item russian-lh\,$^{c,g,h}$
-% \item russian-lhcyralt\,$^{c,g,h}$
-% \item russian-lhcyrkoi\,$^{c,g,h}$
-% \item russian-lhcyrwin\,$^{c,g,h}$
-% \item samin
-% \item scottish
-% \item serbian
-% \item serbianc\,$^c$
-% \item slovak
-% \item slovene
-% \item spanish (castillan, castillian)
-% \item spanish2
-% \item spanish3\,$^{e,f}$
-% \item spanish4
-% \item swahili
-% \item swedish
-% \item swedish2
-% \item thai\,$^{c,d,f,g}$
-% \item turkish
-% \item ukrainian (ukraineb)\,$^{b,c}$
-% \item uppersorbian (usorbian)
-% \item vietnam (vietnamese)\,$^{c,d}$
-% \item welsh
-% \item xalx (khalkha)\,$^c$
-% \item xalx2\,$^c$
-% \item xalx3\,$^c$
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{multicols}
-% \hrule
-% \begin{multicols}{2}\footnotesize
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item[()]The languages between parentheses are aliases of a main language
-% and their \suffix{.mld} files will load the \suffix{.mld} file
-% of that main language.
-% \item[$^{\dagger}$] The presence of the \xfile{english.mld} file is mandatory.
-% \item[$^a$] The \ulopt{arab(ic)}\ilopt{arab}\ilopt{arabic} and \lopt{arab2} languages require the use of the
-% \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX} package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}).
-% \item[$^b$] The \ulopt{russian} language is not yet supported
-% by the \pack{babel} system~\cite{babel,babel-user}, but
-% \lopt{russianb}~\cite{russianb} is supported if you use
-% babel-3.6 or a higher version; \lopt{russianc} is an extra. Look also at other \suffix{.mld} files for russian.
-% \item[$^c$] Some languages may require specific fonts.
-% \item[$^d$] Requires the \pack{CJK} package~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}.
-% \item[$^e$] Requires \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), the version of \LaTeX\ for Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$).
-% \item[$^f$] Requires a 8-bits input encoding.
-% \item[$^g$] Uses also a \suffix{.mlo} file.
-% \item[$^h$] Requires a specific input encoding.
-% \item[$^i$] The \lopt{bicig} language is also known as \lopt{uighur}.
-% \item[$^j$] The \lopt{arabi} and \lopt{farsi3} languages require the use of the
-% \packa{\Arabi}{arabi} package~\cite{arabi}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{multicols}
-% \end{minipage}
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{table}
-% ^^A \ifDP\else\afterpage{\clearpage}\fi
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{table}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \changeskips
-% ^^A \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
-% \caption{Langues disponibles}\label{t+languages}
-% \ilopt{afrikaan}%
-% \ilopt{afrikaans}%
-% \ilopt{albanian}%
-% \ilopt{arab}%
-% \ilopt{arabic}%
-% \ilopt{arab2}%
-% \ilopt{arabi}%
-% \ilopt{armenian}%
-% \ilopt{bahasai}%
-% \ilopt{bahasa}%
-% \ilopt{indon}%
-% \ilopt{indonesian}%
-% \ilopt{bahasam}%
-% \ilopt{malay}%
-% \ilopt{meyalu}%
-% \ilopt{bangla}%
-% \ilopt{basque}%
-% \ilopt{bengali}%
-% \ilopt{bicig}%
-% \ilopt{uighur}%
-% \ilopt{bicig2}%
-% \ilopt{uighur2}%
-% \ilopt{bicig3}%
-% \ilopt{uighur3}%
-% \ilopt{bithe}%
-% \ilopt{manju}%
-% \ilopt{brazil}%
-% \ilopt{brazilian}%
-% \ilopt{breton}%
-% \ilopt{bulgarian}%
-% \ilopt{bulgarianb}%
-% \ilopt{buryat}%
-% \ilopt{buryat2}%
-% \ilopt{catalan}%
-% \ilopt{chinese1}%
-% \ilopt{chinese2}%
-% \ilopt{croatian}%
-% \ilopt{czech}%
-% \ilopt{danish}%
-% \ilopt{devanagari}%
-% \ilopt{hindi}%
-% \ilopt{dutch}%
-% \iloptd{english}%
-% \ilopt{american}%
-% \ilopt{australian}%
-% \ilopt{british}%
-% \ilopt{canadian}%
-% \ilopt{newzealand}%
-% \ilopt{UKenglish}%
-% \ilopt{USenglish}%
-% \ilopt{english1}%
-% \ilopt{english2}%
-% \ilopt{esperant}%
-% \ilopt{esperanto}%
-% \ilopt{estonian}%
-% \ilopt{ethiopia}%
-% \ilopt{ethiopian}%
-% \ilopt{ethiopian2}%
-% \ilopt{farsi1}%
-% \ilopt{farsi2}%
-% \ilopt{farsi3}%
-% \ilopt{finnish}%
-% \ilopt{finnish2}%
-% \ilopt{french}%
-% \ilopt{frenchb}%
-% \ilopt{frenchle}%
-% \ilopt{frenchpro}%
-% \ilopt{francais}%
-% \ilopt{acadien}%
-% \ilopt{canadien}%
-% \ilopt{french1}%
-% \ilopt{french2}%
-% \ilopt{galician}%
-% \ilopt{german}%
-% \ilopt{austrian}%
-% \ilopt{germanb}%
-% \ilopt{germanb2}%
-% \ilopt{greek}%
-% \ilopt{greek-mono}%
-% \ilopt{greek-polydemo}%
-% \ilopt{greek-polykatha}%
-% \ilopt{guarani}%
-% \ilopt{hangul1}%
-% \ilopt{hangul2}%
-% \ilopt{hangul3}%
-% \ilopt{hangul4}%
-% \ilopt{hangul-u8}%
-% \ilopt{hanja1}%
-% \ilopt{hanja2}%
-% \ilopt{hanja-u8}%
-% \ilopt{hebrew}%
-% \ilopt{hebrew2}%
-% \ilopt{hindi-modern}%
-% \ilopt{icelandic}%
-% \ilopt{interlingua}%
-% \ilopt{irish}%
-% \ilopt{italian}%
-% \ilopt{italian2}%
-% \ilopt{japanese}%
-% \ilopt{japanese2}%
-% \ilopt{japanese3}%
-% \ilopt{japanese4}%
-% \ilopt{japanese5}%
-% \ilopt{japanese6}%
-% \ilopt{kannada}%
-% \ilopt{latin}%
-% \ilopt{latin2}%
-% \ilopt{latinc}%
-% \ilopt{latinc2}%
-% \ilopt{latvian}%
-% \ilopt{latvian2}%
-% \ilopt{letton}%
-% \ilopt{letton2}%
-% \ilopt{lithuanian}%
-% \ilopt{lithuanian2}%
-% \ilopt{lowersorbian}%
-% \ilopt{lsorbian}%
-% \ilopt{magyar}%
-% \ilopt{hungarian}%
-% \ilopt{magyar2}%
-% \ilopt{magyar3}%
-% \ilopt{malayalam-b}%
-% \ilopt{malayalam-keli}%
-% \ilopt{malayalam-keli2}%
-% \ilopt{malayalam-mr}%
-% \ilopt{malayalam-omega}%
-% \ilopt{malayalam-keli}%
-% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana}%
-% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana2}%
-% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana3}%
-% \ilopt{manju}%
-% \ilopt{mexican}%
-% \ilopt{mongol}%
-% \ilopt{mongolb}%
-% \ilopt{mongolian}%
-% \ilopt{ngermanb}%
-% \ilopt{ngerman}%
-% \ilopt{naustrian}%
-% \ilopt{ngermanb2}%
-% \ilopt{norsk}%
-% \ilopt{norsk2}%
-% \ilopt{nynorsk}%
-% \ilopt{nynorsk2}%
-% \ilopt{occitan}%
-% \ilopt{occitan2}%
-% \ilopt{polish}%
-% \ilopt{polish2}%
-% \ilopt{polski}%
-% \ilopt{portuguese}%
-% \ilopt{portuges}%
-% \ilopt{romanian}%
-% \ilopt{romanian2}%
-% \ilopt{romanian3}%
-% \ilopt{russian}%
-% \ilopt{russianb}%
-% \ilopt{russianc}%
-% \ilopt{russian2m}%
-% \ilopt{russian2o}%
-% \ilopt{russian-cca}%
-% \ilopt{russian-cca1}%
-% \ilopt{russian-lh}%
-% \ilopt{russian-lhcyralt}%
-% \ilopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}%
-% \ilopt{russian-lhcyrwin}%
-% \ilopt{samin}%
-% \ilopt{scottish}%
-% \ilopt{serbian}%
-% \ilopt{serbianc}%
-% \ilopt{slovak}%
-% \ilopt{slovene}%
-% \ilopt{spanish}%
-% \ilopt{castillan}%
-% \ilopt{castillian}%
-% \ilopt{spanish2}%
-% \ilopt{spanish3}%
-% \ilopt{spanish4}%
-% \ilopt{swahili}%
-% \ilopt{swedish}%
-% \ilopt{swedish2}%
-% \ilopt{thai}%
-% \ilopt{turkish}%
-% \ilopt{ukrainian}%
-% \ilopt{ukraineb}%
-% \ilopt{uppersorbian}%
-% \ilopt{usorbian}%
-% \ilopt{vietnam}%
-% \ilopt{vietnamese}%
-% \ilopt{welsh}%
-% \ilopt{xalx}%
-% \ilopt{khalkha}%
-% \ilopt{xalx2}%
-% \ilopt{xalx3}%
-% \centering
-% \hspace*{-.5\widthinc}\begin{minipage}{\textwidth+\widthinc}\raggedright\small
-% \selectlanguage{french} ^^A to get better spacing
-% \begin{multicols}{4}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item afrikaan (afrikaans)
-% \item albanian
-% \item arab (arabic)\,$^{a,c}$
-% \item arab2\,$^{a,c}$
-% \item arabi\,$^{c,j}$
-% \item armenian\,$^c$
-% \item bahasai (bahasa, indon, indonesian)\,$^c$
-% \item bahasam (malay, meyalu)\,$^c$
-% \item bangla (bengali)\,$^c$
-% \item basque
-% \item bicig (uighur)\,$^{c,i}$
-% \item bicig2 (uighur2)\,$^{c,i}$
-% \item bicig3 (uighur3)\,$^{c,i}$
-% \item bithe (manju)\,$^c$
-% \item brazil (brazilian)
-% \item breton
-% \item bulgarian\,$^c$
-% \item bulgarianb\,$^c$
-% \item buryat\,$^c$
-% \item buryat2\,$^c$
-% \item catalan
-% \item chinese1\,$^{c,g}$
-% \item chinese2\,$^{c,g}$
-% \item croatian
-% \item czech
-% \item danish
-% \item devanagari (hindi)$^c$
-% \item dutch
-% \item english\,$^{\dagger}$ (american, australian, british, canadian, newzealand, UKenglish, USenglish)
-% \item english1
-% \item english2
-% \item esperant (esperanto)
-% \item estonian
-% \item ethiopia (ethiopian)\,$^c$
-% \item ethiopian2\,$^{c,e,h}$
-% \item farsi1\,$^{c,f,g}$
-% \item farsi2\,$^{c,f,g}$
-% \item farsi3\,$^{c,j}$
-% \item finnish
-% \item finnish2
-% \item french (frenchb, frenchle, frenchpro, francais, acadien, canadien)
-% \item french1
-% \item french2
-% \item galician
-% \item german (austrian)
-% \item germanb
-% \item germanb2
-% \item greek\,$^c$
-% \item greek-mono\,$^{c,e}$
-% \item greek-polydemo\,$^{c,e}$
-% \item greek-polykatha\,$^{c,e}$
-% \item guarani\,$^h$
-% \item hangul1\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item hangul2\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item hangul3\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item hangul4\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item hangul-u8\,$^{c,e,f,g,h}$
-% \item hanja1\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item hanja2\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item hanja-u8\,$^{c,e,f,g,h}$
-% \item hebrew\,$^{c,h}$
-% \item hebrew2\,$^{c,h}$
-% \item hindi-modern\,$^c$
-% \item icelandic\,$^f$
-% \item interlingua
-% \item irish
-% \item italian
-% \item italian2
-% \item japanese\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item japanese2\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item japanese3\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item japanese4\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item japanese5\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item japanese6\,$^{c,d,g}$
-% \item kannada\,$^c$
-% \item latin
-% \item latin2
-% \item latinc
-% \item latinc2
-% \item latvian (letton)\,$^e$
-% \item latvian2 (letton2)\,$^c$
-% \item lithuanian
-% \item lithuanian2\,$^{c,h}$
-% \item lowersorbian (lsorbian)
-% \item magyar (hungarian)
-% \item magyar2
-% \item magyar3
-% \item malayalam-b\,$^c$
-% \item malayalam-keli\,$^c$
-% \item malayalam-keli2\,$^c$
-% \item malayalam-mr\,$^c$
-% \item malayalam-omega\,$^{c,e,g,h}$
-% \item malayalam-rachana\,$^c$
-% \item malayalam-rachana2\,$^c$
-% \item malayalam-rachana3\,$^c$
-% \item mexican
-% \item mongol\,$^c$
-% \item mongolb (mongolian)\,$^{c,f,h}$
-% \item ngermanb (ngerman, naustrian)
-% \item ngermanb2
-% \item norsk
-% \item norsk2
-% \item nynorsk
-% \item nynorsk2
-% \item occitan
-% \item occitan2
-% \item polish
-% \item polish2\,$^{c,e}$
-% \item polski\,$^c$
-% \item portuguese (portuges)
-% \item romanian
-% \item romanian2
-% \item romanian3
-% \item russian\,$^{b,c}$
-% \item russianb\,$^{b,c}$
-% \item russianc\,$^{b,c}$
-% \item russian2m\,$^{c,e}$
-% \item russian2o\,$^{c,e}$
-% \item russian-cca\,$^{c,g,h}$
-% \item russian-cca1\,$^{c,g,h}$
-% \item russian-lh\,$^{c,g,h}$
-% \item russian-lhcyralt\,$^{c,g,h}$
-% \item russian-lhcyrkoi\,$^{c,g,h}$
-% \item russian-lhcyrwin\,$^{c,g,h}$
-% \item samin
-% \item scottish
-% \item serbian
-% \item serbianc\,$^c$
-% \item slovak
-% \item slovene
-% \item spanish (castillan, castillian)
-% \item spanish2
-% \item spanish3\,$^{e,f}$
-% \item spanish4
-% \item swahili
-% \item swedish
-% \item swedish2
-% \item thai\,$^{c,d,f,g}$
-% \item turkish
-% \item ukrainian (ukraineb)\,$^{b,c}$
-% \item uppersorbian (usorbian)
-% \item vietnam (vietnamese)\,$^{c,d}$
-% \item welsh
-% \item xalx (khalkha)\,$^c$
-% \item xalx2\,$^c$
-% \item xalx3\,$^c$
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{multicols}
-% \hrule
-% \begin{multicols}{2}\footnotesize
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item[()] Les langues entre parenthèses sont des alias d'une langue principale et leurs fichiers \suffix{.mld}
-% chargeront le fichier \suffix{.mld} de celle-ci.
-% \item[$^{\dagger}$] La présence du fichier \xfile{english.mld} est obligatoire.
-% \item[$^a$] Les langues <<~\ulopt{arab(ic)}~>>\ilopt{arab}\ilopt{arabic} et <<~\lopt{arab2}~>> requièrent l'utilisation du paquetage
-% \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}).
-% \item[$^b$] La langue <<~\uopt{russian}~» n'est pas encore supportée par le
-% système \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user},
-% mais <<~\lopt{russianb}~>>~\cite{russianb} est supportée si vous utilisez
-% babel-3.6 ou une version supérieure; <<~\lopt{russianc}~>> est un supplément. Regardez aussi les autres
-% fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour le russe.
-% \item[$^c$] Certaines langues peuvent requérir des fontes spécifiques.
-% \item[$^d$] Requiert le paquetage \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}.
-% \item[$^e$] Requiert \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), la version de \LaTeX\ pour Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$).
-% \item[$^f$] Requiert un codage en entrée sur 8~bits.
-% \item[$^g$] Utilise aussi un fichier \suffix{.mlo}.
-% \item[$^h$] Requiert un codage en entrée spécifique.
-% \item[$^i$] La langue \lopt{bicig} est aussi connue sous le nom de ouïghour (\emph{\lopt{uighur}}).
-% \item[$^j$] Les langues <<~\lopt{arabi}~>> et <<~\lopt{farsi3}~>> requièrent l'utilisation du paquetage
-% \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{multicols}
-% \end{minipage}
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% ^^A \vspace*{-2\baselineskip}
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \ifDP\else\afterpage{\clearpage}\fi
-% ^^A \afterpage{\clearpage}
-% \lneed{9}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Titles for chapter-level mini-tables}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Titres pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtifont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Titles are typeset in the \com{mtifont} (\verb|\large\bfseries| by
-% default) font and the text strings of the titles are defined by
-% \com{mtctitle}, \com{mlftitle}
-% and \com{mlttitle}, which
-% are the strings ``Contents'', ``Figures'' and ``Tables'' by default.
-% These title commands should be redefined by \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} for
-% languages other than english.
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% The language definition files like
-% \xfile{french.mld} and \xfile{english.mld} (the suffix
-% \suffix{.mld} means ``minitoc language definition (file)'')
-% (and many others, see the list in table~\vref{t+languages} and section~\vref{fo+lang}) are available.
-% You can easily prepare a similar file for a preferred language (see section~\vref{faq.26}).
-% You can change the language of these titles by using the
-% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}} macro.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres sont composés dans la fonte \com{mtifont} (\verb|\large\bfseries| par défaut) et les textes des
-% titres sont définis par \com{mtctitle}, \com{mlftitle} et \com{mlttitle}, qui sont les
-% chaînes «~Contents~», «~Figures~» et «~Tables~» par défaut. Ces titres devraient être redéfinis
-% par \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} pour les langues autres que l'anglais.
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% Les fichiers de définition de langue tels que \xfile{french.mld}
-% et \xfile{english.mld} (le suffixe \suffix{.mld} signifie «~\emph{minitoc language definition
-% (file)}~») (et bien d'autres, voir la liste dans le tableau~\vref{t+languages} et la section~\vref{fo+lang}) sont
-% disponibles. Vous pouvez facilement préparer un fichier similaire pour votre langue préférée
-% (voir la section~\vref{faq.26}).
-% Vous pouvez changer la langue de ces
-% titres en utilisant la macro \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{7}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Part-level mini-tables}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Mini-tables au niveau partie}
-% \fi
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcCfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The partial table of contents is typeset in the \com{ptcfont}
-% font, which is defined as \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default.
-% In fact, the font \com{ptcfont} is selected at the beginning of a parttoc, partlof or partlot. More
-% selective choices are made with the following fonts.
-% Chapter entries are typeset in the \com{ptcCfont} font,
-% which is \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| by default.
-% Section entries are typeset in the \com{ptcSfont} font,
-% which is \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default.
-% \or\relax
-% La table des matières au niveau partie est composée dans la fonte \com{ptcfont}, qui est définie comme
-% étant \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut.
-% En fait, la fonte \com{ptcfont} est sélectionnée au début d'une parttoc, partlof ou partlot. Des choix
-% plus sélectifs sont faits avec les fontes suivantes.
-% Les entrées de type chapitre sont composées dans la fonte
-% \com{ptcCfont}, qui est \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| par défaut.
-% Les entrées de type section sont composées dans la fonte \com{ptcSfont}, qui est
-% \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{4}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For subsections, subsubsections, paragraphs and subparagraphs, the
-% commands \com{ptcSSfont}, \com{ptcSSSfont},
-% \com{ptcPfont}, and \com{ptcSPfont} are available
-% (by default, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) if you
-% want to use various fonts.
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les sous-sections, sous-sous-sections, paragraphes et
-% sous-paragraphes, les commandes \com{ptcSSfont}, \com{ptcSSSfont}, \com{ptcPfont} et \com{ptcSPfont} sont
-% disponibles (par défaut, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) si vous souhaitez utiliser diverses fontes.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{4}
-% \begin{macro}{\plffont}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Partial lists of figures and tables are
-% typeset in the fonts \com{plffont} and \com{pltfont}, which are
-% \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default.
-% There are also \com{plfSfont} and \com{pltSfont} for sub-figures and sub-tables entries.
-% \or\relax
-% Les listes de figures et de tableaux au niveau partie sont composées dans les fontes \com{plffont} et \com{pltfont}, qui
-% sont \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut.
-% Il y a aussi \com{plfSfont} et \com{pltSfont} pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tableaux.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{9}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Titles for part-level mini-tables}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Titres pour les mini-tables au niveau partie}
-% \fi
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\plftitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\plttitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Titles are typeset in the \com{ptifont} (\verb|\LARGE\bfseries| by
-% default) font and the text strings of the titles are defined by
-% \com{ptctitle}, \com{plftitle}
-% and \com{plttitle}, which
-% are the strings ``Table of Contents'',
-% ``List of Figures'' and ``List of Tables'' by default.
-% These title commands should be redefined by \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} for
-% languages other than english.
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% The language definition files like
-% \xfile{french.mld} and \xfile{english.mld} (and many others; for a complete list, see
-% table~\vref{t+languages}) are available. Read also section~\vref{fo+lang}.
-% You can easily prepare a similar file for a preferred language (see section~\vref{faq.26}).
-% You can change the language of these titles by using the
-% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}} macro.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres sont composés dans la fonte \com{ptifont} (\verb|\LARGE\bfseries| par défaut) et les textes des
-% titres sont définis par \com{ptctitle}, \com{plftitle} et \com{plttitle}, qui sont les
-% chaînes «~Table of Contents~», «~List of Figures~» et «~List of Tables~» par défaut.
-% Ces commandes de titres devraient être redéfinies par \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle}
-% pour les langues autres que l'anglais.
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% Des fichiers de définition de langue tels que \xfile{french.mld} et \xfile{english.mld} (et de
-% nombreux autres; pour une liste complète, voir le tableau~\vref{t+languages}) sont disponibles. Lire aussi
-% la section~\vref{fo+lang}.
-% Vous pouvez facilement préparer un fichier similaire pour votre langue préférée (voir la section~\vref{faq.26}).
-% Vous pouvez changer la langue de ces titres
-% en utilisant la macro \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Section-level mini-tables}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Mini-tables au niveau section}
-% \fi
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcSSSfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The section-level table of contents
-% is typeset in the \com{stcfont}
-% font, which is defined as \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default.
-% In fact, the font \com{stcfont} is selected at the beginning of a secttoc, sectlof or sectlot.
-%
-% More selective choices are made with the following fonts.
-% Subsection entries are typeset in the \com{stcSSfont} font,
-% which is \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| by default.
-% Subsubsection entries are typeset in the \com{stcSSSfont} font,
-% which is \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default.
-% \or\relax
-% La table des matières au niveau section est composée dans la fonte \com{stcfont}, qui est définie comme
-% étant \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut.
-% En fait, la fonte \com{stcfont} est sélectionnée au début d'une secttoc, sectlof ou sectlot.
-%
-% Des choix plus sélectifs sont faits avec les fontes suivantes.
-% Les entrées de sous-section sont composées dans la fonte \com{stcSSfont}, qui est
-% \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| par défaut.
-% Les entrées de sous-sous-section sont composées dans la fonte \com{stcSSSfont}, qui est
-% \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcSPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\slffont}
-% \begin{macro}{\sltfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\slfSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\sltSfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For paragraphs and subparagraphs, the
-% commands \com{stcPfont} and \com{stcSPfont}
-% are available (by default, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) if you
-% want to use various fonts. Section-level lists of figures and tables are
-% typeset in the fonts \com{slffont} and \com{sltfont}, which are
-% defined as \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default.
-% There are also \com{slfSfont} and \com{sltSfont} for sub-figures and sub-tables entries.
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les paragraphes et sous-paragraphes, les commandes \com{stcPfont} et \com{stcSPfont} sont disponibles
-% (par défaut, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) si vous désirez utiliser diverses fontes. Les listes de figures et de
-% tableaux au niveau section sont composées dans les fontes \com{slffont} et \com{sltfont}, qui sont définies
-% comme étant \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut.
-% Il y a aussi \com{slfSfont} et \com{sltSfont} pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tableaux.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \lneed{9}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Titles for section-level mini-tables}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Titres pour les mini-tables au niveau section}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\stifont}
-% \begin{macro}{\stctitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\slftitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\slttitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Titles are typeset in the \com{stifont} (\verb|\normalsize\bfseries| by
-% default) font and the text strings of the titles are defined by
-% \com{stctitle}, \com{slftitle}
-% and \com{slttitle}, which are the strings ``Contents'', ``Figures'' and ``Tables'' by default.
-% These title commands should be redefined by \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} for
-% languages other than english.
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% The language definition files like \xfile{french.mld} and \xfile{english.mld} (and also many others, as listed in
-% table~\vref{t+languages} and explained in section~\vref{fo+lang}) are available.
-% You can easily prepare a similar file for your preferred language (see section~\vref{faq.26}).
-% You can change the language of these titles by using the
-% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}} macro.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres sont composés dans la fonte \com{stifont} (\verb|\normalsize\bfseries| par défaut) et les textes des
-% titres sont définis par \com{stctitle}, \com{slftitle} et \com{slttitle}, qui sont les
-% chaînes «~Contents~», «~Figures~» et «~Tables~» par défaut.
-% Ces commandes de titres devraient être redéfinies par \com{renewcommand} ou \com{mtcsettitle}
-% pour les langues autres que l'anglais.
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% Des fichiers de définition de langue tels que \xfile{french.mld} et \xfile{english.mld} (et de
-% nombreux autres, voir le tableau~\vref{t+languages} et la section~\vref{fo+lang}) sont disponibles. Vous pouvez
-% facilement préparer un fichier similaire pour votre langue préférée (voir la section~\vref{faq.26}).
-% Vous pouvez changer la langue de ces titres
-% en utilisant la macro \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Position of the titles}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Position des titres}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{For mini-tables at the part level}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Pour les mini-tables au niveau partie}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% By default, titles are on the left. The preparation commands \com{doparttoc},
-% \com{dopartlof} and \com{dopartlot} accept an optional argument
-% to change the default position of the
-% corresponding title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center,
-% \texttt{[r]} for right, or \texttt{[e]} (or \texttt{[n]}) for empty (no title).
-% The change is global for all the document.
-% If you want to change the position of the title for only one parttoc
-% (or partlof or partlof), just use such an optional argument with the
-% command \com{parttoc} (or \com{partlof} or \com{partlot}).
-% \or\relax
-% Par défaut, les titres sont cadrés à~gauche. Les commandes de préparation \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof} et
-% \com{dopartlot} acceptent un argument optionnel pour changer la position par défaut du titre correspondant:
-% \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{[c]} pour centré, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, ou \texttt{[e]} (ou
-% \texttt{[n]}) pour vide (pas de titre). La modification est globale pour le document.
-% Si vous souhaitez changer la position du titre pour une seule parttoc (ou partlof ou partlot), il vous suffit
-% d'utiliser un tel argument optionnel avec la commande
-% \com{parttoc} (ou \com{partlof} ou \com{partlot}).
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{For mini-tables at the chapter level}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% By default, titles are on the left. The preparation commands \com{dominitoc},
-% \com{dominilof} and \com{dominilot} accept an optional argument
-% to change the default position of the
-% corresponding title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center,
-% \texttt{[r]} for right, or \texttt{[e]} (or \texttt{[n]}) for ``empty'' (``no'' title).
-% The change is global for all the document.
-% If you want to change the position of the title for only one minitoc
-% (or minilof or minilof), just use such an optional argument with the
-% command \com{minitoc} (or \com{minilof} or
-% \com{minilot}).
-% \or\relax
-% Par défaut, les titres sont cadrés à~gauche. Les commandes de préparation \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof} et
-% \com{dominilot} acceptent un argument optionnel pour changer la position par défaut du titre correspondant:
-% \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{[c]} pour centré, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, ou \texttt{[e]} (ou
-% \texttt{[n]}) pour vide (pas de titre). La modification est globale pour le document.
-% Si vous souhaitez changer la position du titre pour une seule minitoc (ou minilof ou minilot), il vous suffit
-% d'utiliser un tel argument optionnel avec la commande
-% \com{minitoc} (ou \com{minilof} ou \com{minilot}).
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{For mini-tables at the section level}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Pour les mini-tables au niveau section}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% By default, titles are on the left. The preparation commands \com{dosecttoc},
-% \com{dosectlof} and \com{dosectlot} accept
-% an optional argument to change the default position of the
-% corresponding title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center,
-% \texttt{[r]} for right, or \texttt{[e]} (or \texttt{[n]}) for empty (no title).
-% The change is global for all the document.
-% If you want to change the position of the title for only one secttoc
-% (or sectlof or sectlof), just use such an optional argument with the
-% command \com{secttoc} (or \com{sectlof} or
-% \com{sectlot}).
-% \or\relax
-% Par défaut, les titres sont cadrés à~gauche. Les commandes de préparation \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof} et
-% \com{dosectlot} acceptent un argument optionnel pour changer la position par défaut du titre correspondant:
-% \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{[c]} pour centré, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, ou \texttt{[e]} (ou
-% \texttt{[n]}) pour vide (pas de titre). La modification est globale pour le document.
-% Si vous souhaitez changer la position du titre pour une seule secttoc (ou sectlof ou sectlot), il vous suffit
-% d'utiliser un tel argument optionnel avec la commande
-% \com{secttoc} (ou \com{sectlof} ou \com{sectlot}).
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{12}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Summary of the positionning of titles}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Résumé du positionnement des titres}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% To summarize: by default, all titles are on the left. However, each one of the
-% following preparation commands:
-% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}
-% \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, \com{dopartlot},\\
-% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, \com{dominilot},\\
-% \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, \com{dosectlot},\\
-% \com{mtcprepare}\\
-% \end{tabular}\par\noindent
-% accepts an optional argument to change the positionning of the
-% title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center,
-% \texttt{[r]} for right, \texttt{[e]} or \texttt{[n]} for empty (no
-% title), for all the corresponding mini-tables (for all mini-tables in the case of \com{mtcprepare}).
-% \or\relax
-% Pour résumer, par défaut, tous les titres sont sur la gauche. Cependant, chacune des commandes de préparation
-% suivantes:
-% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}
-% \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, \com{dopartlot},\\
-% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, \com{dominilot},\\
-% \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, \com{dosectlot},\\
-% \com{mtcprepare}\\
-% \end{tabular}\par\noindent
-% accepte un argument optionnel pour modifier le positionnement du titre: \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (défaut),
-% \texttt{[c]} pour centré, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, \texttt{[e]} ou \texttt{[n]} pour vide (pas de
-% titre), pour toutes les mini-tables correspondantes (de toutes les mini-tables dans le cas de
-% \com{mtcprepare}).
-% \fi
-% \lneed{9}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The following insertion commands:
-% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}
-% \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof}, \com{partlot},\\
-% \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}, \com{minilot},\\
-% \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof}, \com{sectlot}
-% \end{tabular}\par\noindent
-% accept the same optional arguments, but these options change the
-% positionning only for the title of the current mini-table.
-% \or\relax
-% Les commandes d'insertion suivantes:
-% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}
-% \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof}, \com{partlot},\\
-% \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}, \com{minilot},\\
-% \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof}, \com{sectlot}
-% \end{tabular}\par\noindent
-% acceptent les mêmes arguments optionnels, mais ces options changent le positionnement seulement pour le
-% titre de la mini-table courante.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Line spacing in the mini-tables}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Espacement des lignes dans les mini-tables}
-% \fi
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tightmtctrue}
-% \begin{macro}{\tightmtcfalse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% With the commands \com{tightmtctrue} (or the \opt{tight}
-% package option) and \com{tightmtcfalse} (or the \optd{loose}
-% package option, which is the default), the mini-tables will have less (tight) or more (loose) space
-% between contents lines.
-% \or\relax
-% Avec les commandes \com{tightmtctrue} (ou l'option de paquetage \opt{tight}) et
-% \com{tightmtcfalse} (ou l'option de paquetage \optd{loose}, qui est le choix par défaut), les
-% mini-tables auront moins (\emph{tight}) ou plus (\emph{loose}) d'espacement entre les lignes de leurs entrées.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\parsep}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% But\imess{I0043} with the \KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} (\class{scrartcl},
-% \class{scrbook} and \class{scrreprt}), it may sometimes be necessary
-% to use the following options or commands, because we need to set \com{parskip} to zero in place of
-% \com{parsep} to tighten the mini-table. The efficiency of the following options depends on the options given
-% to these \KOMAScript{} classes (\optp{parindent}{KOMA-Script} option, \optp{parskip}{KOMA-Script} option and variants).
-% \or\relax
-% Mais\imess{I0043} avec les classes \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} (\class{scrartcl},
-% \class{scrbook} et \class{scrreprt}), il peut être
-% nécessaire d'utiliser les options ou commandes suivantes, car il nous faut forcer à~zéro \com{parskip} au lieu
-% de \com{parsep} pour resserrer la mini-table. L'efficacité des options ci-dessous dépend des options données
-% à~ces classes \KOMAScript{} (options \optp{parindent}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{parskip}{KOMA-Script} et variantes).
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\ktightmtctrue}
-% \begin{macro}{\ktightmtcfalse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For the \KOMAScript{} classes, with the commands \com{ktightmtctrue} (or the \opt{k-tight}
-% package option) and \com{ktightmtcfalse} (or the \optd{k-loose}
-% package option, which is the default), the mini-tables will have less (tight) or more (loose) space
-% between contents lines.
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les classes \KOMAScript, avec les commandes \com{ktightmtctrue} (ou l'option de
-% paquetage \opt{k-tight}) et
-% \com{ktightmtcfalse} (ou l'option de paquetage \optd{k-loose}, qui est le choix par défaut), les
-% mini-tables auront moins (\emph{tight}) ou plus (\emph{loose}) d'espacement entre les lignes de leurs entrées.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Simplified commands for fonts}\label{s+simp-font-commands}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Commandes simplifiées pour les fontes}\label{s+simp-font-commands}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% To simplify the redefinition of the fonts for mini-tables, there are two
-% useful commands:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{sectionning-level}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}|\\
-% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}|
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% For instance,
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minitoc}{subsection}%|\\
-% \verb| {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}|
-% \end{quote}
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minilof}{subfigure}%|\\
-% \verb| {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}|
-% \end{quote}
-% will redefine \com{mtcSSfont} and \com{mlfSfont} with the given font commands.
-%
-% Note that \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{*}{...}| allows also to redefine \com{ptcfont}, etc.
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% Moreover,
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|{parttoc}{\Large\rmfamily\itshape\mdseries}|
-% \end{quote}
-% will redefine \com{ptifont} (for titles in the parttocs, partlofs and partlofs) with the given font commands.
-% \or\relax
-% Pour simplifier la redéfinition des fontes des mini-tables, il y~a deux commandes utiles:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{niveau-sectionnement}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}|\\
-% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}|
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% Par exemple:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minitoc}{subsection}%|\\
-% \verb| {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}|
-% \end{quote}
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minilof}{subfigure}%|\\
-% \verb| {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}|
-% \end{quote}
-% redéfinira \com{mtcSSfont} et \com{mlfSfont} avec les commandes de fontes données.
-%
-% Notez que \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{*}{...}| permet aussi de redéfinir \com{ptcfont}, etc.
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% De plus,
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|{parttoc}{\Large\rmfamily\itshape\mdseries}|
-% \end{quote}
-% redéfinira \com{ptifont} (pour les titres dans les parttocs, partlofs et partlofs) avec les commandes de fontes
-% données.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Simplified command for mini-table titles}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Commande simplifiée pour les titres des mini-tables}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% To simplify the redefinition of the titles for mini-tables, the
-% \com{mtcsettitle} command is also available:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsettitle}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{title string}\verb|}|
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% For instance,
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsettitle}\verb|{minitoc}{Description of contents}|
-% \end{quote}
-% will redefine \com{mtctitle} with the given string. This command checks that you redefine a title for a
-% mini-table type available in your document class.
-% \or\relax
-% Pour simplifier la redéfinition des titres des mini-tables, la commande
-% \com{mtcsettitle} est aussi disponible:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsettitle}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{chaîne titre}\verb|}|
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% Par exemple,
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsettitle}\verb|{minitoc}{Description du contenu}|
-% \end{quote}
-% redéfinira \com{mtctitle} avec la chaîne donnée. Cette commande vérifie que vous redéfinissez un titre pour un
-% type de mini-table disponible dans votre classe de document.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Simplified command for mini-table depths}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Commande simplifiée pour les profondeurs des mini-tables}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% To simplify the redefinition of the depths for mini-tables, the
-% \com{mtcsetdepth} command is also available:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetdepth}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{depth}\verb|}|
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% For instance,
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetdepth}\verb|{minitoc}{4}|
-% \end{quote}
-% will set the counter \dcnt{minitocdepth} with the given value. This command checks that you set a depth for a
-% mini-table type available in your document class (and that it is possible to change its depth).
-% \or\relax
-% Pour simplifier la redéfinition des profondeurs des mini-tables, vous disposez de la commande
-% \com{mtcsetdepth}:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetdepth}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{profondeur}\verb|}|
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% Par exemple:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetdepth}\verb|{minitoc}{4}|
-% \end{quote}
-% forcera le compteur \dcnt{minitocdepth}~la valeur donnée. Cette commande vérifie que vous forcez une profondeur
-% pour un type de mini-table disponible dans votre classe de document (et qu'il est possible de changer sa
-% profondeur).
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Simplified command for mini-table offsets}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Commande simplifiée pour les déplacements des mini-tables}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% To simplify the redefinition of the offsets for mini-tables, the
-% \com{mtcsetoffset} command is also available:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetoffset}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{offset}\verb|}|
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% For instance,
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetoffset}\verb|{minitoc}{-4em}|
-% \end{quote}
-% will set the macro \com{mtcoffset} to the given value. This command checks that you set a offset for a
-% mini-table type available in your document class (and that it is possible to change its offset).
-% \or\relax
-% Pour simplifier la redéfinition des déplacements des mini-tables, vous disposez de la commande
-% \com{mtcsetoffset}:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetoffset}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{déplacement}\verb|}|
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% Par exemple:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetoffset}\verb|{minitoc}{-4em}|
-% \end{quote}
-% forcera la macro \com{mtcoffset} à~la valeur donnée. Cette commande vérifie que vous forcez un déplacement
-% pour un type de mini-table disponible dans votre classe de document (et qu'il est possible de changer son
-% déplacement).
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \noindent
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \textbf{NOTE:}\Virage{} the argument of \com{mtcsetoffset} is \emph{not} verified. It must be a length value,
-% without shrink nor stretch part. A positive offset is towards the right, a negative one towards the left.
-% \or\relax
-% \textbf{NOTE:}\Virage{} l'argument de \com{mtcsetoffset} \emph{n'est pas} vérifié. Ce doit être une valeur de
-% longueur, sans partie compressible ou extensible. Un déplacement positif se fait vers la droite, un déplacement
-% négatif se fait vers la gauche.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Polymorphic entries in the mini-tables}\label{ss+polym}\index{polymorphic entry}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Entrées polymorphes dans les mini-tables}\label{ss+polym}\index{entree polymorphe=entrée polymorphe}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The title of a sectionning command can appear in several places:
-% a)~at the beginning of the section, of the chapter or of the part;
-% b)~in the page header;
-% c)~in the main TOC;
-% d)~in the minitoc of the chapter (for a section title or lower);
-% e)~in the parttoc of the part (for a chapter title or lower).
-% A sectionning command has two arguments: an optionnal one, \textsl{OA}, and a mandatory one, \textsl{MA}, like in:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|\section[|\textsl{OA}\verb|]{|\textsl{MA}\verb|}|
-% \end{quote}
-% \textsl{OA} is taken as \textsl{MA} if omitted. Normaly, \textsl{OA} is used in the TOC and in the minitables, as in
-% the page headers when necessary. \textsl{MA} is used as title for the sectionning unit and is the default for
-% \textsl{OA}. But, some times, you may need to have a different version (a~variant) for a sectionning unit title
-% in a minitable. So, it is now possible to define such variants by detecting if that title is used inside some
-% minitable: the following flags are defined (when meaningful):
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Level}&\textbf{Flag:}&\textbf{for tocs,}&\textbf{for lofs,}&\textbf{for lots.}\\
-% \midrule
-% \textbf{Part}&&\com{ifinparttoc}&\com{ifinpartlof}&\com{ifinpartlot}\\
-% \midrule
-% \textbf{Chapter}&&\com{ifinminitoc}&\com{ifinminilof}&\com{ifinminilot}\\
-% \midrule
-% \textbf{Section}&&\com{ifinsecttoc}&\com{ifinsectlof}&\com{ifinsectlot}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-% But these flags are used to build three new commands, to be called from inside the optionnal argument
-% (\textsl{OA}) of a
-% sectionning command or that of a caption:
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}llllll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{From \textsl{OA} of}:&\textbf{Command}&\textbf{Arg.~1}&\textbf{Arg.~2}&\textbf{Arg.~3}&\textbf{Arg.~4}\\
-% \midrule
-% sect. command&\com{mtcpolymtoc}&\{$\rightarrow$parttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$minitoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$secttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~toc\}\\
-% figure caption&\com{mtcpolymlof}&\{$\rightarrow$partlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilof\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lof\}\\
-% table caption&\com{mtcpolymlot}&\{$\rightarrow$partlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilot\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lot\}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-% Such entries are ``polymorphic''.
-% See the example~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}, for a short demonstration.
-% \or\relax
-% Le titre d'une commande se sectionnement peut apparaître en plusieurs endroits:
-% a)~au début de la section, du chapitre ou de la partie;
-% b)~dans l'en-tête de page;
-% c)~dans la table des matières principale;
-% d)~dans la minitoc du chapitre (pour un titre de section ou inférieur);
-% e)~dans la parttoc de la partie pour un titre de chapitre ou inférieur).
-% Une commande de sectionnement a deux arguments: un facultatif, \textsl{AF}, et un obligatoire, \textsl{AO}, comme dans:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|\section[|\textsl{AF}\verb|]{|\textsl{AO}\verb|}|
-% \end{quote}
-% \textsl{AF} est pris égal à~\textsl{AO} si omis. Normalement, \textsl{AF} est utilisé dans la table des
-% matières principale et dans les minitables, ainsi que dans les en-têtes de page si nécessaire.
-% \textsl{AO} est utilisé comme titre de l'unité de sectionnement est la valeur par défaut pour~\textsl{OA}.
-% Mais, parfois, vous pouvez vouloir une version différente (une variante) comme titre d'unité de
-% sectionnement dans une minitable. Donc, il est maintenant possible de définir de telles variantes en détectant
-% si ce titre est utilisé à~l'intérieur d'une minitable: les indicateurs suivants sont définis (lorsqu'ils ont un sens):
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Niveau}&\textbf{Indicateur:}&\textbf{pour TdMs,}&\textbf{pour~LdFs,}&\textbf{pour~LdTs.}\\
-% \midrule
-% \textbf{Partie}&&\com{ifinparttoc}&\com{ifinpartlof}&\com{ifinpartlot}\\
-% \midrule
-% \textbf{Chapitre}&&\com{ifinminitoc}&\com{ifinminilof}&\com{ifinminilot}\\
-% \midrule
-% \textbf{Section}&&\com{ifinsecttoc}&\com{ifinsectlof}&\com{ifinsectlot}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-% Mais ces indicateurs sont utilisés pour construire trois nouvelles commandes, devant être appelées depuis
-% l'intérieur de l'argument optionnel
-% (\textsl{AO}) d'une commande de sectionnement ou de celui d'un caption:
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}llllll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Depuis l'\textsl{AO} de}:&\textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Arg.~1}&\textbf{Arg.~2}&\textbf{Arg.~3}&\textbf{Arg.~4}\\
-% \midrule
-% commande sect.&\com{mtcpolymtoc}&\{$\rightarrow$parttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$minitoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$secttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~toc\}\\
-% caption figure&\com{mtcpolymlof}&\{$\rightarrow$partlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilof\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lof\}\\
-% caption table&\com{mtcpolymlot}&\{$\rightarrow$partlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilot\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lot\}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-% De telles entrées sont dites «~polymorphes~».
-% Voir l'exemple~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}, pour une courte démonstration.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Languages for the titles}\label{fo+lang}
-% Most of the strings defined in the language definition files (\suffix{.mld}) were taken from the
-% superb \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} of \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams},
-% some were adapted, others were made available by gentle users
-% or taken from specific packages, like \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex},
-% \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi},
-% \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX} (armenian)~\cite{armtex}, \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} (bangla, bengali)~\cite{bangtex},
-% \packa{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX} (spanish)~\cite{spanish4}.
-% \devnag\ipacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} for \TeX~\cite{devanagari},
-% \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop},
-% \pack{guarani}~\cite{guarani},
-% \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} and \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o},
-% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} (mongol)~\cite{mlsquick,montex}, \pack{CJK} (chinese,
-% korean-hangûl/hanja, japanese, thai)~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega},
-% \pack{polski}~\cite{polski,platex-pl} (polish),
-% \packa{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX}~\cite{slatex} (swedish),
-% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi} (farsi or iranian), or \pack{vietnam}~\cite{vietnam}
-% --- latvian (letton),
-% \lopt{greek-mono}, \lopt{greek-polydemo}, \lopt{greek-polykatha}, \lopt{polish2}, \lopt{russian2m}, \lopt{russian2o} and \lopt{spanish3}
-% need \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), i.e.,~the Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$) version of \LaTeX, (see~\cite{antomega}),
-% or even found by searching on the Web (\xfile{bulgarianb.mld} for upper cyrillic bulgarian,
-% \xfile{japanese.mld} for japanese, \xfile{serbianc.mld} for cyrillic serbian).
-% Other languages are welcome\,\footnote{I~am searching for the titles in corsican, in
-% particular.}. See table~\vref{t+languages}.
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Langues pour les titres}\label{fo+lang}
-% La plupart des chaînes définies dans les fichiers de définition de langue (\suffix{.mld}) ont été prises
-% dans le superbe paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, certaines ont été adaptées,
-% d'autres ont été mises à~disposition par d'aimables utilisateurs ou prises dans des paquetages spécifiques, tels
-% que \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}, \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}
-% (arménien)~\cite{armtex}, \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} (bânglâ, bengalî)~\cite{bangtex},
-% \packa{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX} (espagnol)~\cite{spanish4}.
-% \devnag\ipacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} pour \TeX~\cite{devanagari},
-% \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}, \pack{guarani}~\cite{guarani}, \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} and
-% \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o},
-% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} (mongol)~\cite{mlsquick,montex}, \pack{CJK} (chinois,
-% coréen-hangûl/hanja, japonais, thaï)~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega},
-% \pack{polski}~\cite{polski,platex-pl} (polonais),
-% \packa{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX}~\cite{slatex} (suédois),
-% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi} (farsi ou iranien)
-% \pack{vietnam}~\cite{vietnam} --- le latvien (letton), des variantes de grec
-% (\lopt{greek-mono}, \lopt{greek-polydemo}, \lopt{greek-polykatha}), de polonais (\lopt{polish2}), de russe (\lopt{russian2m}, \lopt{russian2o}) et
-% d'espagnol (\lopt{spanish3}) ont besoin
-% de \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), c'est-à-dire de la version de \LaTeX\ pour Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$),
-% (voir~\cite{antomega}), --- ou ont même été trouvées en
-% cherchant sur le Web (\xfile{bulgarianb.mld} pour le haut bulgare cyrillique, \xfile{japanese.mld} pour le
-% japonais, \xfile{serbianc.mld} pour le serbe cyrillique). D'autres langues sont les bienvenues\,\footnote{Je recherche
-% notamment les titres pour le corse (\emph{corsican}).}.
-% Voir le tableau~\vref{t+languages}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% But\Virage{} for some oriental languages\,\footnote{Mainly for chinese, farsi, hangûl (korean), hanja (korean), japanese,
-% \lopt{malayalam-omega}, thai and some variants of russian.}, the sources of the titles use some exotic encodings which
-% are difficult to manipulate in a
-% \suffix{.dtx} file, hence the \suffix{.mld} file is then just a wrapper which loads a special file,
-% nicknamed a \suffix{.mlo}
-% file\,\footnote{The extension \suffix{.mlo} means \emph{minitoc language object}.}, not generated by the
-% \suffix{.dtx} file in the current version of \upack{minitoc} package, but via \env{filecontents}
-% environments in the \xfile{minitoc.ins} file, and playing with the ``catcode'' of
-% the ``delete'' character.
-% \or\relax
-% Mais\Virage{} pour certaines langues orientales\,\footnote{Principalement pour le chinois, le farsi, le coréen (hangûl et
-% hanja), le japonais, le \lopt{malayalam-omega}, le thaï et certaines variantes du russe.}, les sources des titres
-% utilisent quelques
-% codages exotiques qu'il est difficile de manipuler dans un fichier \suffix{.dtx}, donc le fichier \suffix{.mld} est alors
-% un simple emballage qui charge un fichier spécial, surnommé fichier \suffix{.mlo}\,\footnote{Le
-% suffixe \suffix{.mlo} signifie \emph{minitoc language object} (objet de langue pour minitoc).}, qui n'est pas
-% engendré par le fichier \suffix{.dtx} dans la version actuelle du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, mais via des
-% environnements \env{filecontents} dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.ins},
-% et en jouant sur le «~catcode~» du caractère «~delete~».
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Altering the layout of the mini-tables}\label{s+alt+layout}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Modifier la mise en page des mini-tables}\label{s+alt+layout}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The layout of a mini-table is described in the figure~\vref{fig+ltoc} (this figure is adapted from~\cite{tocloft}),
-% which defines some internal commands (these are not \emph{dimensions}, but \LaTeX{} commands, created by
-% \com{newcommand}, modifiable via \com{renewcommand}).
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \relax\com{@dotsep}, which is the separation between the dots in the dotted line. It is a pure number
-% expressing \emph{math units}; 18~math units make \texttt{1em} (one quad), which is about the width of a~``m''
-% in the current font. As the real size of \texttt{1em} is font dependent, the separation between the dots
-% may vary if you use different fonts for different types of entries in the mini-tables.
-% \item \relax\com{@pnumwidth}, is the width of the space reserved for the page number. It is a \LaTeX\ command
-% containing the representation of a length (e.g.,~\texttt{1.55em}).
-% \item \relax\com{@tocrmarg}, is the distance (margin) between the right border of the table and the end of the
-% dotted line. It should be larger than \com{@pnumwidth}, and can be a rubber length (i.e.,~contain
-% some glue, like \texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil}); if you specify the ``\texttt{...~plus~1fil}'' portion,
-% the text of the entry will be ragged on right; it is useful if you have long entries, and it can avoid
-% most hyphenations.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \or\relax
-% La mise en page est décrite dans la figure~\vref{fig+ltoc} (cette figure a été adaptée de~\cite{tocloft}), qui
-% définit certaines commandes internes (ce ne sont pas des \emph{dimensions}, mais des commandes \LaTeX, crées par
-% \com{newcommand}, modifiables via \com{renewcommand}).
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \relax\com{@dotsep}, qui est la séparation entre les points de conduite dans une ligne de points. C'est un
-% nombre pur exprimant des \emph{unités mathématiques}; 18~unités mathématiques font \texttt{1em} (un
-% cadratin), qui est à~peu près la largeur d'un~«~m~» dans la fonte courante. Comme la taille effective de
-% \texttt{1em} dépend de la fonte, la séparation entre les points peut varier si vous utilisez des fontes
-% différentes pour des types différents d'entrées dans les mini-tables.
-% \item \relax\com{@pnumwidth}, qui est la largeur de l'espace réservé pour le numéro de page. C'est une commande
-% \LaTeX\ contenant la représentation d'une longueur (par~ex., \texttt{1.55em}).
-% \item \relax\com{@tocrmarg}, est la distance (marge) entre le bord droit de la table et la fin de la ligne de
-% points de conduite. Elle devrait être plus grande que \com{@pnumwidth}, et peut être une longueur
-% élastique (c'est-à-dire contenir de la glu, comme \texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil}); si vous spécifiez la
-% portion «~\texttt{...~plus~1fil}~», le texte de l'entrée sera en déchiqueté sur la droite; ceci est utile si
-% vous avez des entrées longues, et peut éviter la plupart des coupures de mots.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \fi
-% \newcommand{\maxx}{120} ^^A picture width
-% \newcommand{\maxxm}{118} ^^A \maxx - 2\
-% \newcommand{\maxy}{55} ^^A picture height
-% \newcommand{\maxym}{53} ^^A \maxy - 2
-% \newcommand{\maxyp}{57} ^^A \maxy + 2
-% \newcommand{\findent}{20} ^^A indent
-% \newcommand{\findentp}{22} ^^A \findent + 2
-% \newcommand{\fnumwidth}{10} ^^A numwidth
-% \newcommand{\ftocrmarg}{30} ^^A \@tocrmarg
-% \newcommand{\fpnumwidth}{20} ^^A \@pnumwidth
-% \newcommand{\fipn}{30} ^^A \findent + \fnumwidth
-% \newcommand{\frmarg}{90} ^^A \maxx - \ftocrmarg
-% \newcommand{\frnum}{100} ^^A \maxx - \fpnumwidth
-% \newcommand{\fyi}{10} ^^A 1st y height
-% \newcommand{\fyim}{8} ^^A \fyi - 2
-% \newcommand{\fyii}{20} ^^A 2nd y height
-% \newcommand{\fyiii}{25} ^^A 3rd y height
-% \newcommand{\fyiv}{30} ^^A 4th y height
-% \newcommand{\fyv}{40} ^^A 5th y height
-% \newcommand{\fyvp}{42} ^^A \fyv + 2
-% \newcommand{\flin}{4} ^^A length of leader lines
-% \newcommand{\frmargm}{89} ^^A \frmarg (90) - a little bit
-% \begin{figure}[tp]
-% \centering
-% \setlength{\unitlength}{\linewidth}
-% \divide \unitlength by \maxx
-% \icom{mtcindent}\icom{@pnumwidth}\icom{@tocrmarg}\icom{numwidth}\icom{@dotsep}%
-% \icom{linewidth}\icom{mtcindent}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{picture}(\maxx,\maxyp)
-% \put(0,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}}
-% \put(\maxx,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}}
-% \put(0,\maxy){\vector(1,0){\maxx}}
-% \put(2,\maxym){\makebox(0,0)[tl]{\texttt{\bs linewidth-2\bs mtcindent}}}
-% \put(\maxx,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\fpnumwidth}}
-% \put(\maxxm,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @pnumwidth}}}
-% \put(\frnum,\fyi){\line(0,1){\flin}}
-% \put(\maxx,\fyv){\vector(-1,0){\ftocrmarg}}
-% \put(\maxxm,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\texttt{\bs @tocrmarg}}}
-% \put(\frmarg,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}}
-% \put(0,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\findent}}
-% \put(2,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{indent}}}
-% \put(\findent,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}}
-% \put(\findent,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\fnumwidth}}
-% \put(\findentp,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{numwidth}}}
-% \put(\fipn,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}}
-% \put(\maxx,\fyii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{487}}
-% \put(\fipn,\fyii){title end}
-% \put(\fipn,\fyiii){continue\ldots}
-% \put(\frmarg,\fyiii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ title}}
-% \put(\findent,\fyiv){\textbf{3.5}}
-% \put(\fipn,\fyiv){Heading\ldots}
-% \put(\frmarg,\fyiv){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ title}}
-% \multiput(\frmargm,\fyii)(-\flin,0){12}{.}
-% \multiput(\frmarg,\fyi)(-\flin,0){2}{\line(0,1){\flin}}
-% \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\flin}}
-% \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(1,0){0}}
-% \put(\frmarg,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @dotsep}}}
-% \end{picture}
-% \caption{Layout of a ToC (LoF, LoT) entry}\label{fig+ltoc}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{picture}(\maxx,\maxyp)
-% \put(0,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}}
-% \put(\maxx,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}}
-% \put(0,\maxy){\vector(1,0){\maxx}}
-% \put(2,\maxym){\makebox(0,0)[tl]{\texttt{\bs linewidth-2\bs mtcindent}}}
-% \put(\maxx,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\fpnumwidth}}
-% \put(\maxxm,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @pnumwidth}}}
-% \put(\frnum,\fyi){\line(0,1){\flin}}
-% \put(\maxx,\fyv){\vector(-1,0){\ftocrmarg}}
-% \put(\maxxm,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\texttt{\bs @tocrmarg}}}
-% \put(\frmarg,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}}
-% \put(0,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\findent}}
-% \put(2,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{indent}}}
-% \put(\findent,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}}
-% \put(\findent,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\fnumwidth}}
-% \put(\findentp,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{numwidth}}}
-% \put(\fipn,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}}
-% \put(\maxx,\fyii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{487}}
-% \put(\fipn,\fyii){fin du titre}
-% \put(\fipn,\fyiii){suite\ldots}
-% \put(\frmarg,\fyiii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ titre}}
-% \put(\findent,\fyiv){\textbf{3.5}}
-% \put(\fipn,\fyiv){En-tête\ldots}
-% \put(\frmarg,\fyiv){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ titre}}
-% \multiput(\frmargm,\fyii)(-\flin,0){12}{.}
-% \multiput(\frmarg,\fyi)(-\flin,0){2}{\line(0,1){\flin}}
-% \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\flin}}
-% \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(1,0){0}}
-% \put(\frmarg,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @dotsep}}}
-% \end{picture}
-% \caption{Mise en page d'une entrée dans une table des matières (liste des figures, liste des tableaux)}\label{fig+ltoc}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% As these commands are internal (their names contain the ``\texttt{@}'' character) and must have a local effect only
-% on the specified kinds of mini-tables, you should alter them indirectly via the \com{mtcsetformat} command:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{parameter}\verb|}{|\emph{value}\verb|}|
-% \end{quote}
-% where \emph{mini-table} is one of the \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc},
-% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} or \texttt{sectlot} keywords; \emph{parameter} is
-% one of the \texttt{dotinterval} (for \com{@dotsep}), \texttt{pagenumwidth} (for \com{@pnumwidth}), or
-% \texttt{tocrightmargin} (for \com{@tocrmarg}) keywords; so:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{partlof}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}|
-% \end{quote}
-% will set the right margin to \texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil} in the lists of tables at the part level. The elasticity
-% (\texttt{plus~1fil}) is useful if the table captions are long (it prevents most hyphenations).
-% \or\relax
-% Puisque ces commandes sont internes (leurs noms contiennent le caractère «~\texttt{@}~») et doivent avoir un
-% effet local seulement sur les types spécifiés de mini-tables, vous devriez les modifier indirectement via la commande
-% \com{mtcsetformat}:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{paramètre}\verb|}{|\emph{valeur}\verb|}|
-% \end{quote}
-% où \emph{mini-table} est l'un des mots-clés \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc},
-% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}; \emph{paramètre} est
-% l'un des mots-clés \texttt{dotinterval} (pour \com{@dotsep}), \texttt{pagenumwidth} (pour \com{@pnumwidth})
-% ou \texttt{tocrightmargin} (pour \com{@tocrmarg}); ainsi:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{partlof}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}|
-% \end{quote}
-% établira la marge de droite à~\texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil} dans la liste des tableaux au niveau partie. L'élasticité
-% (\texttt{plus~1fil}) est utile si les captions des tableaux sont longs (elle évite bien des coupures de mots).
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Note that the \texttt{tocrightmargin} (for \com{@tocrmarg}) parameter should obviously be greater than the
-% \texttt{pagenumwidth} parameter (this appears in the figure~\vref{fig+ltoc}).
-%
-% If the \texttt{dotinterval} parameter (for \com{@dotsep}) is large enough (try 450, then increase or decrease),
-% the dots of leaders will be so much spread out that they will disappear.
-% \or\relax
-% Notez que le paramètre \texttt{tocrightmargin} (pour \com{@tocrmarg}) devrait manifestement être plus grand que
-% le paramètre \texttt{pagenumwidth} (ceci est visible dans la figure~\vref{fig+ltoc}).
-%
-% Si le paramètre \texttt{dotinterval} (pour \com{@dotsep}) est suffisamment grand (essayez 450, puis augmentez ou
-% diminuez), les points de conduite seront tellement espacés qu'ils disparaîtront.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \centering
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Horizontal rules}\label{t+horiz}
-% \ifBT
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{defaults for}\\
-% \cmidrule(l){5-7}
-% &rules in&&no rules in&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{ptcrule}&parttocs&\com{noptcrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\
-% \com{plfrule}&partlofs&\com{noplfrule}&partlofs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\
-% \com{pltrule}&partlots&\com{nopltrule}&partlots&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\
-% \com{mtcrule}&minitocs&\com{nomtcrule}&minitocs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\
-% \com{mlfrule}&minilofs&\com{nomlfrule}&minilofs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\
-% \com{mltrule}&minilots&\com{nomltrule}&minilots&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\
-% \com{stcrule}&secttocs&\com{nostcrule}&secttocs&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\
-% \com{slfrule}&sectlofs&\com{noslfrule}&sectlofs&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\
-% \com{sltrule}&sectlots&\com{nosltrule}&sectlots&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{7}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{(NA)}~=~not available.}
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \else
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}}
-% \thickline
-% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{defaults for}\\
-% &rules in&&no rules in&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\
-% \hline
-% \com{ptcrule}&parttocs&\com{noptcrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\
-% \com{plfrule}&partlofs&\com{noplfrule}&partlofs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\
-% \com{plfrule}&partlots&\com{noplfrule}&partlots&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\
-% \com{mtcrule}&minitocs&\com{nomtcrule}&minitocs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\
-% \com{mlfrule}&minilofs&\com{nomlfrule}&minilofs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\
-% \com{mltrule}&minilots&\com{nomltrule}&minilots&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\
-% \com{stcrule}&secttocs&\com{nostcrule}&secttocs&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\
-% \com{slfrule}&sectlofs&\com{noslfrule}&sectlofs&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\
-% \com{sltrule}&sectlots&\com{nosltrule}&sectlots&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\
-% \thickline
-% \multicolumn{7}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{(NA)}~=~not available.}
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \fi
-%
-% \bigskip
-%
-% \medfigrule
-%
-% \bigskip
-%
-% \caption{Page numbers}\label{t+pn}
-% {\ttfamily%
-% \ifBT
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Page numbers (Default)\hfill}&&%
-% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries No page numbers\hfill}\\
-% \midrule
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{ptcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noptcpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{mtcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomtcpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{stcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nostcpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{plfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noplfpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{mlfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomlfpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{slfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noslfpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{pltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nopltpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{mltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomltpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{sltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nosltpagenumbers}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}%
-% \else
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}}
-% \thickline
-% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Page numbers (Default)\hfill}&&%
-% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries No page numbers\hfill}\\
-% \hline
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{ptcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noptcpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{mtcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomtcpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{stcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nostcpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{plfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noplfpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{mlfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomlfpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{slfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noslfpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{pltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nopltpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{mltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomltpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{sltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nosltpagenumbers}\\
-% \thickline
-% \end{tabular}%
-% \fi}
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \centering
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Filets horizontaux}\label{t+horiz}
-% \ifBT
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{défaut pour}\\
-% \cmidrule(l){5-7}
-% &filets dans&&pas de filets dans&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{ptcrule}&parttocs&\com{noptcrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\
-% \com{plfrule}&parttocs&\com{noplfrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\
-% \com{pltrule}&parttocs&\com{nopltrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\
-% \com{mtcrule}&minitocs&\com{nomtcrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\
-% \com{mlfrule}&minitocs&\com{nomlfrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\
-% \com{mltrule}&minitocs&\com{nomltrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\
-% \com{stcrule}&secttocs&\com{nostcrule}&secttocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\
-% \com{slfrule}&secttocs&\com{noslfrule}&secttocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\
-% \com{sltrule}&secttocs&\com{nosltrule}&secttocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{7}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{(ND)}~=~non disponible.}
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \else
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}}
-% \thickline
-% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{défaut pour}\\
-% &filets dans&&pas de filets dans&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\
-% \hline
-% \com{ptcrule}&parttocs&\com{noptcrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\
-% \com{plfrule}&parttocs&\com{noplfrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\
-% \com{plfrule}&parttocs&\com{noplfrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\
-% \com{mtcrule}&minitocs&\com{nomtcrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\
-% \com{mlfrule}&minitocs&\com{nomlfrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\
-% \com{mltrule}&minitocs&\com{nomltrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\
-% \com{stcrule}&secttocs&\com{nostcrule}&secttocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\
-% \com{slfrule}&secttocs&\com{noslfrule}&secttocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\
-% \com{sltrule}&secttocs&\com{nosltrule}&secttocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\
-% \thickline
-% \multicolumn{7}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{(ND)}~=~non disponible.}
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \fi
-%
-% \bigskip
-%
-% \medfigrule
-%
-% \bigskip
-%
-% \caption{Numéros de pages}\label{t+pn}
-% {\ttfamily%
-% \ifBT
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Numéros de pages (défaut)\hfill}&&%
-% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Pas de numéros de pages\hfill}\\
-% \midrule
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{ptcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noptcpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{mtcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomtcpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{stcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nostcpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{plfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noplfpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{mlfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomlfpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{slfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noslfpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{pltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nopltpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{mltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomltpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{sltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nosltpagenumbers}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}%
-% \else
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}}
-% \thickline
-% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Numéros de pages (défaut)\hfill}&&%
-% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Pas de numéros de pages\hfill}\\
-% \hline
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{ptcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noptcpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{mtcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomtcpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{stcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nostcpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{plfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noplfpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{mlfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomlfpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{slfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noslfpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{pltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nopltpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{mltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomltpagenumbers}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{sltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nosltpagenumbers}\\
-% \thickline
-% \end{tabular}%
-% \fi}
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{9}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Special Features}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Dispositifs spéciaux}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Horizontal Rules}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Filets horizontaux}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% By default, most of mini-tables have horizontal rules after their
-% titles and at their ends. The exception is the ``parttoc'' in a \class{book}- or
-% \class{report}-like document (i.e.,~when \com{chapter} is defined). To activate
-% or deactivate these rules, the commands of the table~\vref{t+horiz} are available.
-% But you can also use the following command, which is simpler:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetrules}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+|*}{on|off}+
-% \end{quote}
-% where \emph{mini-table} is one of the \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc},
-% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot} keywords;
-% if the first argument is a star~(\texttt{*}), all mini-tables are affected;
-% the keywords \texttt{on} and \texttt{off} have the following synonyms\,\FZ:
-% \begin{samepage}\lneed{2}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE},
-% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI},
-% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+}, and~\texttt{1};
-% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE},
-% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-}, and~\texttt{0}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{samepage}
-% \or\relax
-% Par défaut, la plupart des mini-tables ont des filets horizontaux après leurs titres et à~leurs fins. L'exception
-% est la «~parttoc~» dans un document de type analogue à~\class{book} ou \class{report} (c'est-à-dire lorsque
-% la commande \com{chapter} est définie). Pour activer ou désactiver ces filets, les commandes du
-% tableau~\vref{t+horiz} sont disponibles. Mais vous pouvez aussi utiliser la commande suivante, plus simple:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetrules}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+|*}{on|off}+
-% \end{quote}
-% où \emph{mini-table} est l'un des mots-clés \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc},
-% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot};
-% si le premier argument est une étoile~(\texttt{*}), toutes les mini-tables sont affectées;
-% les mots-clés \texttt{on} et \texttt{off} ont les synonymes suivants\,\FZ:
-% \begin{samepage}\lneed{2}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE},
-% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI},
-% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+} et~\texttt{1};
-% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE},
-% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-} et~\texttt{0}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{samepage}
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lsneed{4}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Page Numbers, Leaders}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Numéros de pages, points de conduite}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% By default, the page numbers are listed in each minitoc, minilof, etc.\ Some authors want only the section
-% titles (with the section numbers),
-% but without page numbers. Hence the obvious declarations of table~\vref{t+pn} are available.
-% But you can also use the following command:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+|*}{on|off}+
-% \end{quote}
-% where \emph{mini-table} is one of the \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc},
-% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot} keywords;
-% the keywords \texttt{on} and \texttt{off} have the following synonyms\,\FZ:
-% \begin{samepage}\lneed{2}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true},
-% \texttt{TRUE}, \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V},
-% \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+}, and~\texttt{1};\nopagebreak[4]
-% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false},
-% \texttt{FALSE}, \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON},
-% \texttt{-}, and~\texttt{0}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{samepage}
-% If the first argument is a star~(\texttt{*}), all mini-tables are affected.
-% \or\relax
-% Par défaut, les numéros de page sont cités dans chaque minitoc, minilof, etc.\ Certains auteurs désirent avoir
-% seulement les titres des sections (avec les numéros des sections), mais pas les numéros des pages. Donc les
-% déclarations évidentes du tableau~\vref{t+pn} sont disponibles.
-% Mais vous pouvez aussi utiliser la commande suivante:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+|*}{on|off}+
-% \end{quote}
-% où \emph{mini-table} est l'un des mots-clés \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc},
-% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot};
-% les mots-clés \texttt{on} et \texttt{off} ont les synonymes suivants\,\FZ:
-% \begin{samepage}\lneed{2}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true},
-% \texttt{TRUE}, \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V},
-% \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+} et~\texttt{1};\nopagebreak[4]
-% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false},
-% \texttt{FALSE}, \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON},
-% \texttt{-}, et~\texttt{0}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{samepage}
-% Si le premier argument est une étoile~(\texttt{*}), toutes les mini-tables sont affectées.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% In the mini-tables, they are leaders of dots between
-% the section titles and the page numbers. The \opt{undotted}
-% package option removes these dots. The \optd{dotted} package option
-% is the default. See also section~\vref{s+alt+layout}.
-% \or\relax
-% Dans les mini-tables, il y~a des points de conduite entre les titres de sections et les numéros de pages.
-% L'option de paquetage \opt{undotted} supprime ces points de conduite. L'option de paquetage
-% \optd{dotted} est le choix par défaut. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+alt+layout}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Features for parttocs and other mini-tables}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Dispositifs pour les parttocs et autres mini-tables}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% By default, a parttoc (or a partlof or a
-% partlot), in a \class{book}- or \class{report}-class document, is preceded and followed by a
-% \com{cleardoublepage} (which acts like \com{clearpage} in a one-side document), and has a page style of
-% \texttt{empty}. Since version~\#32, you can modify this
-% behaviour by redefining the commands of table~\vref{t+parttoc+features}, whose meaning
-% is often obvious. A feature defined as \com{empty} does nothing.
-% \or\relax
-% Par défaut, une parttoc (ou une partlof ou une partlot), dans un document de classe \class{book} ou
-% \class{report},
-% est précédée et suivie par une \com{cleardoublepage} (qui agit comme \com{clearpage} dans un document en recto),
-% et a un style de page \texttt{empty}. Depuis la version~\#32, vous pouvez modifier ce comportement en
-% redéfinissant les commandes du tableau~\vref{t+parttoc+features}, dont la signification est souvent évidente.
-% Un dispositif défini comme étant \com{empty} ne fait rien.
-% \fi
-% \afterpage{\clearpage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[p]
-% \changeskips
-% \centering
-% \caption{Features for mini-tables}\label{t+parttoc+features}
-% {\small\ttfamily%
-% \let\Strut\relax
-% \ifBT
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllcZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Command \hfill}&&%
-% {\rmfamily\bfseries Default \hfill}\\
-% \midrule
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{beforeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{afterparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{openparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{closeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{thispageparttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{beforepartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{afterpartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{openpartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{closepartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{beforepartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{afterpartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{openpartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{closepartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
-% %%
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{beforeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{afterminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{openminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{closeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{thispageminitocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{beforeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{afterminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{openminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{closeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{thispageminilofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{beforeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{afterminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{openminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{closeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{thispageminilotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% %%
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{beforesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{aftersecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{opensecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{closesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{beforesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{aftersectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{opensectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{closesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{beforesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{aftersectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{opensectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{closesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% %%
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{command}\texttt{\}}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifies the features for a mini-table.}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}%
-% \else
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllcX{1}@{}}
-% \thickline
-% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Command \hfill}&&%
-% {\rmfamily\bfseries Default \hfill}\\\hline
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{beforeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{afterparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{openparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{closeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{thispageparttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{beforepartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{afterpartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{openpartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{closepartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{beforepartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{afterpartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{openpartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{closepartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
-% %%
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{beforeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{afterminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{openminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{closeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{thispageminitocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{beforeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{afterminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{openminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{closeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{thispageminilofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{beforeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{afterminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{openminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{closeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{thispageminilotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% %%
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{beforesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{aftersecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{opensecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{closesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{beforesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{aftersectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{opensectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{closesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{beforesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{aftersectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{opensectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{closesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}|\feat{after}|\feat{open}|\feat{close}|\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{command}\texttt{\}}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifies the features for a mini-table.}\\
-% \thickline
-% \end{tabularx}%
-% \fi}
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{table}[p]
-% \changeskips
-% \centering
-% \caption{Dispositifs pour les mini-tables}\label{t+parttoc+features}
-% {\small\ttfamily%
-% \let\Strut\relax
-% \ifBT
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllcZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Commande \hfill}&&%
-% {\rmfamily\bfseries Défaut \hfill}\\
-% \midrule
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{beforeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{afterparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{openparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{closeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{thispageparttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{beforepartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{afterpartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{openpartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{closepartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{beforepartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{afterpartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{openpartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{closepartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
-% %%
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{beforeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{afterminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{openminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{closeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{thispageminitocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{beforeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{afterminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{openminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{closeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{thispageminilofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{beforeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{afterminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{openminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{closeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{thispageminilotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% %%
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{beforesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{aftersecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{opensecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{closesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{beforesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{aftersectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{opensectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{closesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{beforesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{aftersectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{opensectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{closesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% %%
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{commande}\texttt{\}}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}%
-% \else
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllcZ{1}@{}}
-% \thickline
-% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Commande \hfill}&&%
-% {\rmfamily\bfseries Défaut \hfill}\\\hline
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{beforeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{afterparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{openparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{closeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{thispageparttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{beforepartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{afterpartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{openpartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{closepartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{beforepartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{afterpartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{openpartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{closepartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
-% %%
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{beforeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{afterminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{openminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{closeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{thispageminitocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{beforeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{afterminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{openminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{closeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{thispageminilofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{beforeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{afterminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{openminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{closeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{thispageminilotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% %%
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{beforesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{aftersecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{opensecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{closesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{beforesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{aftersectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{opensectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{closesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{beforesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{aftersectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{opensectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{closesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
-% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}|\feat{after}|\feat{open}|\feat{close}|\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{commande}\texttt{\}}}\\
-% &\multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.}\\
-% \thickline
-% \end{tabularx}%
-% \fi}
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The command:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{keyword}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}|
-% \end{verse}
-% allows you to redefine any of these commands. \emph{mini-table} is one of the mini-table names:
-% \texttt{parttoc}\ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}. \emph{keyword} is one of the followings: \feat{before},
-% \feat{after}, \feat{open}, \feat{close} or \feat{pagestyle}. \emph{commands} is either a sequence of commands like \com{clearpage},
-% \com{cleardoublepage},
-% \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{...}|, etc., either \com{empty} (does nothing).
-% \or\relax
-% La commande:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{mot-clé}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}|
-% \end{verse}
-% vous permet de redéfinir chacune de ces commandes. \emph{mini-table} est l'un des noms de type de mini-table:
-% \texttt{parttoc}\ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}. \emph{mot-clé} est l'un des suivants: \feat{before},
-% \feat{after}, \feat{open}, \feat{close} ou \feat{pagestyle}. \emph{commandes} est soit une séquence de commandes telles que \com{clearpage},
-% \com{cleardoublepage}, \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{...}|, etc., soit \com{empty} (ne fait rien).
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{12}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection[Remark about page styles]{Remark about page styles\,\footnote{This remark is taken and adapted
-% from a draft of the second edition of the JMPL~\cite{JMPL1}, by
-% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}, where he comments the \upack{minitoc} package.}}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection[Remarque sur les styles de page]{Remarque sur les styles de page\,\footnote{Cette remarque est
-% tirée et adaptée d'une version préliminaire de la seconde édition du JMPL~\cite{JMPL1}, par
-% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}, où il commente le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.}}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispagestyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\pagestyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \Virage{}default commands for
-% part-level mini-tables page styles are defined as being simply a standard \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{empty}| command,
-% because in document classes defining the \com{chapter} command (like \class{book} or \class{report}),
-% the part-level mini-tables are on their own pages.
-% If the document is printed
-% recto-verso, the first page is recto. Usually, these pages are not numbered and have no header and no footer. This
-% behaviour is a consequence from the default definitions of the commands of table~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. If you want an
-% other behaviour, you can change these definitions. Note that, by default, only the \emph{first} page of these
-% mini-tables are in the \texttt{empty} page style. You can set the style of this first page by using
-% \com{thispagestyle} and set the style of the following pages by using \com{pagestyle}, but you must not forget
-% to reset the normal style after the mini-table. Look at this short theorical example\,\footnote{This example shows that
-% the third argument can be a \emph{sequence} of commands: we set the style of the current page and the style of the
-% following pages.}:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{before}%|\\
-% \verb| {|\com{cleardoublepage}\verb|}|\\
-% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{pagestyle}%|\\
-% \verb| {|\com{thispagestyle}\verb|{empty}|\com{pagestyle}\verb|{myheadings}}|\\
-% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{after}%|\\
-% \verb| {|\com{cleardoublepage}\com{pagestyle}\verb|{headings}}|
-% \end{verse}
-% where we add a \com{cleardoublepage} before each parttoc, then we set the \texttt{empty} page style for
-% the first page of the parttocs,
-% the \texttt{myheadings} page style for the following pages of the parttocs,
-% and set \texttt{headings} page style for the pages after the mini-table, after a
-% \com{cleardoublepage}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les\Virage{} commandes par défaut pour les styles de page des mini-tables au niveau partie
-% sont définies comme étant simplement \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{empty}|, car
-% dans les classes de document définissant la commande \com{chapter} (comme \class{book} ou \class{report}),
-% les mini-tables au niveau partie sont sur
-% leurs propres pages. Si le document est imprimé recto-verso, la première page est recto. Habituellement, ces pages
-% ne sont pas numérotées et n'ont ni en-tête ni bas de page. Ce comportement est une conséquence des définitions par défaut
-% des commandes du tableau~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. Si vous désirez un comportement différent, vous pouvez changer
-% ces définitions. Notez que, par défaut, seule la \emph{première} page de ces mini-tables est composée dans le
-% style de page \texttt{empty}. Vous pouvez établir le style de cette première page en utilisant
-% \com{thispagestyle} et établir le style des pages suivantes en utilisant \com{pagestyle}, mais vous ne devez
-% pas oublier de rétablir le style normal après la mini-table. Regardez ce court exemple théorique\,\footnote{Cet exemple
-% montre que le troisième argument peut être une \emph{séquence} de commandes: nous établissons le style de la page
-% courante et le style des pages suivantes.}:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{before}%|\\
-% \verb| {|\com{cleardoublepage}\verb|}|\\
-% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{thispagestyle}%|\\
-% \verb| {|\com{thispagestyle}\verb|{empty}|\com{pagestyle}\verb|{myheadings}}|\\
-% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{after}%|\\
-% \verb| {|\com{cleardoublepage}\com{pagestyle}\verb|{headings}}|
-% \end{verse}
-% où nous ajoutons une commande \com{cleardoublepage} avant chaque parttoc, puis nous établissons le style de page
-% \texttt{empty} pour la première page des parttocs, le style de page \texttt{myheadings} pour les pages
-% suivantes des parttocs, et établissons le style de page \texttt{headings} pour les pages après la mini-table,
-% après une commande \com{cleardoublepage}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{The ``Chapter~0'' Problem (solved)}\label{faq.5}
-% Some documents do not begin with chapter number one, but with chapter
-% number zero (or even a weirder number).
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Le problème du <<~Chapitre~0~>> (résolu)}\label{faq.5}
-% Certains documents ne commencent pas par le chapitre numéro~un, mais par le chapitre numéro~zéro (ou même
-% portant un numéro plus bizarre).
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis}
-% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris}
-% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis}
-% \begin{description}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \item[Before version~\#23 (1994/11/08)]
-% \or\relax
-% \item[Avant la version~\#23 (1994/11/08)]
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% To make the \upack{minitoc}
-% package work with such documents, you must insert the command:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{firstchapteris}\texttt{\{}\meta{N}\texttt{\}}
-% \end{quote}
-% before the \com{dominitoc} and analogous commands. \meta{N}~is the number
-% of the first chapter. This command \emph{does not}
-% modify the numbering of chapters, you must use a
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{addtocounter}\verb|{chapter}{-1}|
-% \end{verse}
-% command to get a first chapter
-% numbered~0. The \com{firstpartis} and
-% \com{firstsectionis} commands are similar for parts and sections with
-% a non standard numbering.
-% \or\relax
-% Pour que le paquetage \upack{minitoc} fonctionne avec de tels documents, vous devez insérer la commande:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{firstchapteris}\texttt{\{}\meta{N}\texttt{\}}
-% \end{quote}
-% avant la commande \com{dominitoc} et les commandes analogues. \meta{N}~est le numéro du premier chapitre. Cette
-% commande \emph{ne modifie pas} la numérotation des chapitres, vous devez utiliser une commande
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{addtocounter}\verb|{chapter}{-1}|
-% \end{verse}
-% pour obtenir un premier chapitre numéroté~0. Et les deux commandes \com{firstpartis}
-% et \com{firstsectionis} sont similaires pour des parties et sections avec une numérotation non standard.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \item[Since version~\#23 (1994/11/08)]
-% \or\relax
-% \item[Depuis la version~\#23 (1994/11/08)]
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% These\SMM{\lmess{W0003}\\\lmess{W0004}\\\lmess{W0005}} commands are now obsolete, as this
-% problem has been solved (via the ``absolute'' numbering of the mini-table auxiliary files).
-% Thus now they just produce harmless warnings.
-% \or\relax
-% Ces\SMM{\lmess{W0003}\\\lmess{W0004}\\\lmess{W0005}} commandes sont désormais obsolètes, car ce problème
-% a été résolu (via la numérotation «~absolue~»
-% des fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-tables). Elles produisent désormais seulement des avertissements bénins.
-% \fi
-% \end{description}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% ^^A \subsection{Special Entries for TOC, LOF, LOT, Bibliography and Index}\label{special.entries}
-% \subsection{Special Entries in the TOC}\label{special.entries}
-% \or\relax
-% ^^A \subsection{Entrées spéciales pour la table des matières, la liste des figures, la liste des tableaux, la
-% ^^A bibliographie et l'index}\label{special.entries}
-% \subsection{Entrées spéciales dans la TdM}\label{special.entries}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If\SMMZ{\lmess{I0046}} you want to add entries in the Table of Contents for
-% objects like the Table of Contents itself, the List of
-% Figures, the List of Tables, the Bibliography or the Index,
-% you should use the \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}
-% (package available from the CTAN archives).
-% \or\relax
-% Si\SMMZ{\lmess{I0046}} vous souhaitez ajouter des entrées dans la table des matières pour des objets tels que la table de
-% matières elle-même, la liste des figures, la liste de tableaux, la bibliographie ou l'index, vous devriez
-% utiliser le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson} (paquetage disponible sur les archives CTAN).
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% But these entries are considered as chapters (or sections in
-% an article class document) when the \suffix{.toc} file is
-% scanned to prepare the minitocs (the \com{dominitoc} phase).
-% \or\relax
-% Mais ces entrées sont considérées comme des chapitres (ou des sections dans un document de classe article)
-% lorsque le fichier est analysé pour préparer les minitocs (la phase \com{dominitoc}).
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Note\imess{I0043} that the same problems appear if you use one of the \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} or
-% \class{scrartcl} \KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} with some options (\optp{liststotoc}{KOMA-Script},
-% \optp{liststotocnumbered}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{bibtotoc}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{bibtotocnumbered}{KOMA-Script}, and \optp{idxtotoc}{KOMA-Script}).
-% The solutions are the same ones.
-% \or\relax
-% Notez\imess{I0043} que les mêmes problèmes apparaissent lorsque vous utilisez l'une des classes \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}
-% \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} or \class{scrartcl} avec certaines options (\optp{liststotoc}{KOMA-Script},
-% \optp{liststotocnumbered}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{bibtotoc}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{bibtotocnumbered}{KOMA-Script} et \optp{idxtotoc}{KOMA-Script}).
-% Les solutions sont les mêmes.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% So you must add an \com{mtcaddchapter} command, \emph{without
-% argument}, after each of the involved commands \com{tableofcontents},
-% \com{listoffigures}, and \com{listoftables}.
-% \or\relax
-% Donc vous devez ajouter une commande \com{mtcaddchapter}, \emph{sans argument}, après chacune des commandes
-% \com{tableofcontents}, \com{listoffigures} et \com{listoftables} mises en jeu.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\bibliography}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For the bibliography, you should add a \com{adjustmtc} command after the \com{bibliography} command.
-% \or\relax
-% Pour la bibliographie, vous devriez ajouter une commande \com{adjustmtc} après la commande \com{bibliography}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\printglossary}
-% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixglossary}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For the glossary, it is a bit more complicated, you should add the
-% following commands just after the \com{printglossary} command:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\
-% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\
-% \com{mtcaddchapter}
-% \end{quote}
-% \lneed{3}
-% But\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0001}\\\lmess{W0006}\\\lmess{E0001}\\\lmess{E0026}} this can be done by:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcfixglossary}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+
-% \end{quote}
-% where the optional argument is the level for the glossary entry in the TOC\@.
-% By default, if \com{chapter} is defined, the \texttt{chapter} level is used, else
-% the \texttt{section} level.
-% If neither \com{chapter} or \com{section} are defined, the \texttt{part} level will be used if \com{part} is
-% defined; else an error is reported. You \emph{must} check the result and,
-% if necessary, adjust the optional argument.
-% \or\relax
-% Pour le glossaire, c'est un peu plus compliqué;
-% vous devriez ajouter les commandes suivantes juste après la commande \com{printglossary}:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\
-% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\
-% \com{mtcaddchapter}
-% \end{quote}
-% \lneed{3}
-% Mais\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0001}\\\lmess{W0006}\\\lmess{E0001}\\\lmess{E0026}} ceci peut être remplacé par:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcfixglossary}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+
-% \end{quote}
-% où l'argument optionnel est le niveau de l'entrée du glossaire dans la table des matières. Par défaut, si
-% \com{chapter} est définie, le niveau \texttt{chapter} est utilisé, sinon le niveau \texttt{section}.
-% Si ni \com{chapter} ni \com{section} ne sont définies, le niveau \texttt{part} sera utilisé si \com{part} est
-% définie; sinon une erreur est signalée. Vous \emph{devez} de vérifier le résultat et, si
-% nécessaire, ajuster l'argument optionnel.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\printindex}
-% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For the index, it is like for the glossary, you should add the
-% following commands just after the \com{printindex} command:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\
-% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\
-% \com{mtcaddchapter}
-% \end{quote}
-% \lneed{3}
-% But\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0002}\\\lmess{W0007}\\\lmess{E0002}\\\lmess{E0027}} this can be done by:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcfixindex}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+
-% \end{quote}
-% where the optional argument is the level for the index entry in the TOC\@.
-% By default, if \com{chapter} is defined, the \texttt{chapter} level is used, else
-% the \texttt{section} level.
-% If neither \com{chapter} or \com{section} are defined, the \texttt{part} level will be used if \com{part} is
-% defined; else an error is reported. You \emph{must} check the result and,
-% if necessary, adjust the optional argument.
-% \or\relax
-% Pour l'index, c'est comme pour le glossaire:
-% vous devriez ajouter les commandes suivantes juste après la commande \com{printindex}:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\
-% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\
-% \com{mtcaddchapter}
-% \end{quote}
-% \lneed{3}
-% Mais\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0002}\\\lmess{W0007}\\\lmess{E0002}\\\lmess{E0027}} ceci peut être remplacé par:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcfixindex}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+
-% \end{quote}
-% où l'argument optionnel est le niveau de l'entrée d'index dans la table des matières. Par défaut, si
-% \com{chapter} est définie, le niveau \texttt{chapter} est utilisé, sinon le niveau \texttt{section}.
-% Si ni \com{chapter} ni \com{section} ne sont définies, le niveau \texttt{part} sera utilisé si \com{part} est
-% définie; sinon une erreur est signalée. Vous \emph{devez} vérifier le résultat et, si
-% nécessaire, ajuster l'argument optionnel.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\printnomenclature}
-% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixnomenclature}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For the nomenclature\,\footnote{If you are using the \pack{nomencl} package~\cite{nomencl} or the \pack{nomentbl}
-% package~\cite{nomentbl} (\pack{nomentbl} calls \pack{nomencl}).},
-% it is like for the glossary, you should add the
-% following commands just after the \com{printnomenclature} command:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\
-% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\
-% \com{mtcaddchapter}
-% \end{quote}
-% \lneed{3}
-% But\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0095}\\\lmess{W0096}\\\lmess{E0039}\\\lmess{E0040}} this can be done by:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+
-% \end{quote}
-% where the optional argument is the level for the nomenclature entry in the TOC\@.
-% By default, if \com{chapter} is defined, the \texttt{chapter} level is used, else
-% the \texttt{section} level.
-% If neither \com{chapter} or \com{section} are defined, the \texttt{part} level will be used if \com{part} is
-% defined; else an error is reported. You \emph{must} check the result and,
-% if necessary, adjust the optional argument.
-% \or\relax
-% Pour la nomenclature\,\footnote{Si vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{nomencl}~\cite{nomencl} ou le paquetage
-% \pack{nomentbl}~\cite{nomentbl} (\pack{nomentbl} appelle \pack{nomencl}).}, c'est comme pour le glossaire,
-% vous devriez ajouter les commandes suivantes juste après la commande \com{printnomenclature}:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\
-% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\
-% \com{mtcaddchapter}
-% \end{quote}
-% \lneed{3}
-% Mais ceci peut être remplacé par:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+
-% \end{quote}
-% où l'argument optionnel est le niveau de l'entrée de la nomenclature dans la table des matières. Par défaut, si
-% \com{chapter} est définie, le niveau \texttt{chapter} est utilisé, sinon le niveau \texttt{section}.
-% Si ni \com{chapter} ni \com{section} ne sont définies, le niveau \texttt{part} sera utilisé si \com{part} est
-% définie; sinon une erreur est signalée. Vous \virage\emph{devez} vérifier le résultat et, si
-% nécessaire, ajuster l'argument optionnel.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Of course, in documents were the TOC, LOF, LOT, bibliography
-% and/or glossary (or index or nomenclature) are processed as starred sections, you must
-% modify these additions to use section level commands.
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% And proceed \virage\emph{with extreme care}, tracking in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file the
-% insertion of \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} files (and siblings). They are
-% some examples in the \exam{mtc-add.tex} (see section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}),
-% \exam{mtc-ads.tex} (see section~\vref{mtc-ads.tex}),
-% and \exam{mtc-nom.tex} (see section~\vref{mtc-nom.tex}) files distributed with
-% \upack{minitoc}. The \exam{mtc-ads.tex} example shows how much that problem is difficult.
-% \or\relax
-% Bien sûr, les documents dans lesquels la table des matières, la liste des figures, la liste des tableaux, la
-% bibliographie et/ou le glossaire (ou l'index ou la nomenclature) sont traités comme des sections étoilées,
-% modifiez ces additions pour utiliser des commandes au niveau section.
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% Et procédez \virage\emph{avec grand soin}, en suivant dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} l'insertion des
-% fichiers \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} (et
-% analogues). Il y~a divers exemples dans les fichiers
-% \exam{mtc-add.tex} (voir la section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}),
-% \exam{mtc-ads.tex} (voir la section~\vref{mtc-ads.tex}) et
-% \exam{mtc-nom.tex} (voir la section~\vref{mtc-nom.tex})
-% distribués avec \upack{minitoc}.
-% L'exemple \exam{mtc-ads.tex} montre combien ce problème est difficile.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uopt{notoccite} option}\label{ss+notoccite}\iopt{notoccite}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{L'option \uopt{notoccite}}\label{ss+notoccite}\iopt{notoccite}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\cite}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This option loads the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite} (by \name{Donald}{Arseneau}).
-% It avoids problems with \com{cite} commands in
-% sectionning commands or captions: if you then run \BibTeX{} using the \texttt{unsrt} (unsorted) style, or a
-% similar style, these citations get numbered starting
-% from the page in the table of contents where is the parasite citation, not the number they should have in the main text.
-% The \pack{notoccite} package prevents this. As \upack{minitoc} prints TOCs, it is subject to the same problem.
-% See also \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=bibtocorder}.
-% \or\relax
-% Cette option charge le paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite} (de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}).
-% Elle évite des problèmes avec des commandes \com{cite} situées dans des commandes de sectionnement ou des
-% captions: si vous exécutez alors \BibTeX{} en utilisant le style \texttt{unsrt} (non trié), ou un
-% style similaire, ces citations seront numérotées en commençant à~la page de la table des matières où se trouve la
-% citation parasite, et non avec le numéro qu'elles auraient dans le texte principal. Le paquetage
-% \pack{notoccite} évite ceci. Comme \upack{minitoc} imprime des tables des matières, il est sujet au même
-% problème.
-% Voir aussi \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=bibtocorder}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uopt{listfiles} and \uopt{nolistfiles} options}\label{s+listfiles}\ioptd{listfiles}\iopt{nolistfiles}
-% The \optd{listfiles} package option creates a list of the minitoc auxiliary files into the
-% file \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}\footnote{This package option is now (since version~\#48) the default (list created).}.
-% This feature can help you to remove these auxiliary
-% files which are no more necessary after the \LaTeX\ run.
-% Under Unix or Linux, you can try:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb+cat +\emph{document}\verb+.maf | +\tool{xargs}\verb+ -i -t \rm {}+
-% \end{quote}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Les options \uopt{listfiles} et \uopt{nolistfiles}}\label{s+listfiles}\ioptd{listfiles}\iopt{nolistfiles}
-% L'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles} crée une liste des fichiers auxiliaires minitoc dans le
-% fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}\,\footnote{Cette option de paquetage est désormais (depuis la version~\#48)
-% le choix par défaut (liste créée).}.
-% Ce dispositif peut vous aider à~supprimer ces
-% fichiers auxiliaires qui ne sont plus nécessaires après l'exécution de \LaTeX.
-% Sous Unix ou Linux, vous pouvez essayer:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb+cat +\emph{document}\verb+.maf | +\tool{xargs}\verb+ -i -t \rm {}+
-% \end{quote}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \or\relax
-% \fi
-% ^^A \clearpage
-% ^^A \need{.75\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars.
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uopt{hints} option}\label{s+hints}\ioptd{hints}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{L'option \uopt{hints}}\label{s+hints}\ioptd{hints}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This package option detects some actions and the loading of some packages and classes
-% known as interacting with \upack{minitoc},
-% and also some frequent misuses and errors. This list of interacting packages and classes is, of course, not closed.
-% If a known package is loaded,
-% this option writes some hints in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file and
-% emits a warning. The hints written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file may suggest you to consult the
-% present document or
-% the \xfile{minitoc.bug} file. \virage\emph{Your advice about this option will be welcome.}
-% This option is activated by default, but you can inhibit it via the \opt{nohints} option.
-% The following (potential) problems are currently detected:
-% \or\relax
-% Cette option du paquetage détecte certaines actions et le chargement de certains paquetages et classes connus pour
-% interagir avec \upack{minitoc}, ainsi que certaines mauvaises utilisations et erreurs fréquentes. La liste des
-% paquetages et classes qui interagissent n'est évidemment pas close. Si un tel paquetage (ou classe) est chargé,
-% cette option écrit quelques indications (\emph{hints}) dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}
-% et émet un avertissement. Les
-% indications écrites dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} peuvent vous suggérer de consulter
-% le présent document ou le
-% fichier \xfile{minitoc.bug}. \virage\emph{Votre avis sur cette option sera le bienvenu.} Cette
-% option est activée par défaut, mais vous pouvez l'inhiber via l'option \opt{nohints}.
-% Les problèmes (potentiels) suivants sont actuellement détectés:
-% \fi
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \lneed{11}
-% \item
-% \begin{macro}{\part}
-% \begin{macro}{\@part}
-% \begin{macro}{\spart}
-% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\schapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\@schapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Alteration of some of the following commands\,\footnote{The commands containing the ``\texttt{@}'' character
-% in their names are internal commands of \LaTeX{}, of a package or of a class; they are sometimes altered by
-% another packages; reconsider then the loading order of the packages.}:
-% \com{part}, \com{@part}, \com{@spart}, \com{chapter}, \com{@chapter},
-% \com{@schapter}, \com{section}, \com{@sect}, and \com{@ssect}.
-% Note that the \pack{hyperref} (see section~\vref{faq.17}) package alters these commands at
-% \ienv{document}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{document\}}, hence this problem might be reported if you use this package,
-% but these alterations seem harmless. Note that the \pack{hyperref} must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}.
-% \or\relax
-% L'altération de certaines des commandes suivantes\,\footnote{Les commandes contenant le caractère <<~\texttt{@}~>>
-% dans leurs noms sont des commandes internes de \LaTeX{}, d'un paquetage ou d'une classe; elles sont parfois
-% altérées par d'autres paquetages; reconsidérez l'ordre de chargement des paquetages.}:
-% \com{part}, \com{@part}, \com{@spart}, \com{chapter}, \com{@chapter},
-% \com{@schapter}, \com{section}, \com{@sect} et \com{@ssect}.
-% Mais le paquetage \pack{hyperref} (voir la section~\vref{faq.17}) altère ces commandes lors de
-% \ienv{document}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{document\}}, donc ce problème pourrait être signalé si vous utilisez ce paquetage, mais
-% ces altérations semblent bénignes. Notez que le paquetage \pack{hyperref} doit être chargé \emph{avant}
-% \upack{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Presence\virage{} of the following packages or classes, which need some precautions:
-% \class{amsbook} (class),
-% \class{memoir} (class),
-% \pack{appendix},
-% \pack{placeins} (beware to its options and its release date (2005/04/18 at least)),
-% \class{scrbook} (class),
-% \class{scrreprt} (class),
-% \class{scrartcl} (class),
-% \pack{tocbibind}, and
-% \pack{tocloft}.
-% \or\relax
-% Présence\virage{} des paquetages et classes suivants, qui demandent certaines précautions:
-% \class{amsbook} (classe),
-% \pack{appendix},
-% \pack{placeins} (attention à~ses options et à~sa date (au moins 2005/04/18)),
-% \class{scrbook} (classe),
-% \class{scrreprt} (classe),
-% \class{scrartcl} (classe),
-% \pack{tocbibind} et
-% \pack{tocloft}.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{7}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Presence\SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{W0025}\\\lmess{W0097}\\\lmess{W0029}\\\lmess{W0040}\\\lmess{W0099}}
-% of the following packages or classes, which, unfortunately, are \emph{incompatible}
-% with the \upack{minitoc} package:
-% \class{amsart} (class),
-% \class{amsproc} (class),
-% \pack{alphanum}, \pack{flowfram}\,\footnote{This package has its own system for minitocs.}, \class{jura} (class),
-% \pack{titlesec}, and
-% \pack{titletoc}\,\footnote{\label{fn+titlesec}The \upack{titlesec} package redefines
-% the sectionning commands in a way
-% completely alien to the standard \LaTeX\ way; hence \upack{minitoc} and \upack{titlesec}-\upack{titletoc} are
-% fundamentaly \emph{incompatible}, and it is very sad.}.
-% \or\relax
-% Présence\SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{W0025}\\\lmess{W0097}\\\lmess{W0029}\\\lmess{W0040}\\\lmess{W0099}}
-% des paquetages ou classes suivants, qui, malheureusement, sont \emph{incompatibles} avec le paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc}:
-% \class{amsart} (classe),
-% \class{amsproc} (classe),
-% \pack{alphanum}, \pack{flowfram}\,\footnote{Ce paquetage a son propre système de minitocs.}, \class{jura} (classe),
-% \pack{titlesec} et
-% \pack{titletoc}\,\footnote{\label{fn+titlesec}Le paquetage \upack{titlesec} redéfinit les
-% commandes de sectionnement d'une manière complètement étrangère à~la manière standard de \LaTeX;
-% donc \upack{minitoc} et \upack{titlesec}-\upack{titletoc} sont fondamentalement incompatibles,
-% et ceci est fort regrettable.}.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Usage of \com{parttoc} without calling \com{doparttoc}, \ldots~,
-% usage of \com{sectlot} without calling \com{dosectlot};
-% or the reverse.
-% \or\relax
-% Utilisation de \com{parttoc} sans appeler \com{doparttoc}, \ldots~,
-% utilisation de \com{sectlot} sans appeler \com{dosectlot};
-% ou l'inverse.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Usage of \com{parttoc} without calling \fkcom{tableofcontents}, \ldots~, of \com{sectlot}
-% without calling \fkcom{listoftables}.
-% \or\relax
-% Utilisation de \com{parttoc} sans appeler \fkcom{tableofcontents}, \ldots~, de
-% \com{sectlot} sans appeler \fkcom{listoftables}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{8}
-% \item
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Usage of \com{sectlof} and/or \com{sectlot} without
-% using the \opt{insection}\imess{W0056} package option of \upack{minitoc}
-% (or the \pack{placeins} package without
-% its \optp{section}{placeins} option).
-% \or\relax
-% Utilisation de \com{sectlof} et/ou \com{sectlot} sans utiliser l'option de paquetage
-% \opt{insection}\imess{W0056} de \upack{minitoc} (ou le paquetage \pack{placeins}
-% sans son option \optp{section}{placeins}).
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If\SMM{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}}
-% you are using short extensions (because of your operating system or the \opt{shortext}
-% package option, see section~\vref{MS-DOS}) and go beyond the limit of 99~parts, chapters or sections,
-% the \optd{hints} package option displays a warning.
-% \or\relax
-% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}}
-% vous utilisez des suffixes courts (à~cause de votre système d'exploitation ou de l'option de paquetage
-% \opt{shortext}, voyez à~la section~\vref{MS-DOS}) et que vous allez au-delà de la
-% limite de 99~parties, chapitres ou sections,
-% l'option de paquetage \optd{hints} signale un avertissement.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.abstract}
-% If the \pack{abstract}\imess{I0040} package~\cite{abstract} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), is used with its
-% \optp{addtotoc}{abstract} option, a ``{Abstract}'' entry is added to the table of contents,
-% as a starred chapter if the document class defines \com{chapter}, else as a starred section.
-% This is detected and you should add a \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[]| or a \com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[]|
-% command after your \env{abstract} environment.
-% \or\relax\label{h.abstract}
-% Si le paquetage \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), est utilisé
-% avec son option \optp{addtotoc}{abstract}, une entrée «~{Abstract}~» (ou équivalente) est ajoutée
-% à~la table des matières, comme un chapitre étoilé si la classe de document définit \com{chapter}, sinon
-% comme une section étoilée. Ceci est détecté et vous devriez ajouter une commande \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[]| ou
-% \com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[]| après votre environnement \env{abstract}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{3}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.sectsty}
-% If the \pack{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} (by \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) is used,
-% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. The interaction has been pointed out
-% by \name{Bil}{Kleb}.
-% \or\relax\label{h.sectsty}
-% Si le paquetage \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} (de \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) est utilisé,
-% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. L'interaction a été signalée par
-% \name{Bil}{Kleb}.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{3}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.varsects}
-% If the \pack{varsects} package~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038}
-% (by \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}) is used,
-% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \or\relax\label{h.varsects}
-% Si le paquetage \pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038}
-% (de \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}) est utilisé,
-% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{3}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.fncychap}
-% If the \pack{fncychap} package~\cite{fncychap}\imess{W0086}
-% (by \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}) is used,
-% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \or\relax\label{h.fncychap}
-% Si le paquetage \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap}\imess{W0086}
-% (de \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}) est utilisé,
-% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{3}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.hangcaption}
-% If the \pack{hangcaption} package~\cite{hangcaption}\imess{W0092}
-% (by \name{David~M.}{Jones}) is used,
-% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \or\relax\label{h.hangcaption}
-% Si le paquetage \pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption}\imess{W0092}
-% (de \name{David~M.}{Jones}) est utilisé,
-% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{3}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.quotchap}
-% If the \pack{quotchap} package~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087}
-% (by \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}) is used,
-% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \or\relax\label{h.quotchap}
-% Si le paquetage \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087}
-% (de \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}) est utilisé,
-% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{3}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.romannum}
-% If the \pack{romannum} package~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088}
-% (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) is used,
-% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \or\relax\label{h.romannum}
-% Si le paquetage \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088}
-% (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) est utilisé,
-% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{3}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.sfheaders}
-% If the \pack{sfheaders} package~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089}
-% (by \name{Maurizio}{Loreti}) is used,
-% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \or\relax\label{h.sfheaders}
-% Si le paquetage \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089}
-% (de \name{Maurizio}{Loreti}) est utilisé,
-% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{3}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.alnumsec}
-% If the \pack{alnumsec} package~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090}
-% (by \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}) is used,
-% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \or\relax\label{h.alnumsec}
-% Si le paquetage \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090}
-% (de \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}) est utilisé,
-% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{3}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.captcont}
-% If the \pack{captcont} package~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091}
-% (by \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}) is used,
-% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \or\relax\label{h.captcont}
-% Si le paquetage \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091}
-% (de \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}) est utilisé,
-% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{4}
-% \item
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.caption}\label{h.caption2}\label{h.ccaption}\label{h.mcaption}
-% If one of the \pack{caption}~\SMM{\lmess{W0033}\\\lmess{W0034}\\\lmess{W0035}\\\lmess{W0036}}\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung},
-% \pack{caption2}\footnote{This package is obsolete;
-% now use the \upack{caption} package.}~\cite{caption2}, (both written by \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}),
-% \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} (written by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), or
-% \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} (written by \xname{Stephan}{Hennig}), packages is used,
-% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \or\relax\label{h.caption}\label{h.caption2}\label{h.ccaption}\label{h.mcaption}
-% Si l'un des
-% paquetages \pack{caption}~\SMM{\lmess{W0033}\\\lmess{W0034}\\\lmess{W0035}\\\lmess{W0036}}\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung},
-% \pack{caption2}~\cite{caption2}\,\footnote{Ce paquetage est obsolète; utilisez
-% maintenant le paquetage \upack{caption}.}, (tous deux écrits par \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}),
-% \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} (écrit par \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), ou
-% \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} (écrit par \xname{Stephan}{Hennig}), est utilisé,
-% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \lneed{4}
-% \bigskip
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.float}\label{h.floatrow}\label{h.trivfloat}\label{h.rotfloat}
-% If one of the\imess{I0053} \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow},
-% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}, or \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages
-% is used, you must remember that \emph{you can not use} the \upack{minitoc} facilities for preparing
-% mini-tables of floats of the new defined types.
-% \or\relax\label{h.float}\label{h.floatrow}\label{h.trivfloat}\label{h.rotfloat}
-% Si\imess{I0053} l'un des paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow},
-% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} ou \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}
-% est utilisé, vous devez vous souvenir que \emph{vous ne pouvez pas utiliser} les facilités
-% de \upack{minitoc} pour préparer des mini-tables de flottants des types nouvellement définis.
-% \fi
-% \bigskip
-% \lneed{4}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If\imess{I0006} you try to insert empty mini-tables, the \optd{hints} option gives a global warning (except if you
-% used also the \opt{nocheckfiles} option, see section~\vref{s+placing}).
-% \or\relax
-% Si\imess{I0006} vous essayez d'insérer des mini-tables vides, l'option \optd{hints} vous donne un avertissement
-% global (sauf si vous avez aussi utilisé l'option \opt{nocheckfiles}, voyez la
-% section~\vref{s+placing}).
-% \fi
-% \bigskip
-% \lneed{4}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item
-% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis}
-% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris}
-% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If you use\SMM{\lmess{W0003}\\\lmess{W0004}\\\lmess{W0005}} one of the obsolete commands
-% (\com{firstpartis}, \com{firstchapteris}, or \com{firstsectionis}),
-% a warning is issued for each use, of course, but also a global hint as reminder.
-% \or\relax
-% Si vous utilisez\SMM{\lmess{W0003}\\\lmess{W0004}\\\lmess{W0005}} l'une des commandes obsolètes
-% (\com{firstpartis}, \com{firstchapteris} ou
-% \com{firstsectionis}), un avertissement est émis pour chaque utilisation, bien sûr, mais aussi une
-% indication (\emph{hint}) globale comme rappel.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \lneed{2}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If you invoke a same preparation command more than once, an informative hint is issued for each spurious
-% invocation.
-% \or\relax
-% Si vous invoquez une même commande de préparation plus d'une fois, un \emph{hint} informatif est émis pour
-% chaque invocation superflue.
-% \fi
-% \end{itemize}
-% ^^A
-% ^^A \clearpage
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Usage with MS-DOS}\label{MS-DOS}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Utilisation avec MS-DOS}\label{MS-DOS}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Under\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} MS-DOS (and other PC oriented old operating systems),
-% the filename extensions are limited to 3 characters.
-% The \upack{minitoc} package determines dynamically the type of
-% extensions available and will use it.
-% All other modifications will be done automatically.
-% The \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}
-% extensions will become \suffix{.M}\meta{N}, where \meta{N} is the absolute chapter
-% number.
-% The extensions \suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} and \suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} become
-% \suffix{.F}\meta{N} and \suffix{.T}\meta{N}.
-% The \suffix{.ptc}\meta{N}
-% extensions become \suffix{.P}\meta{N}, where \meta{N} is the absolute part number.
-% The extensions \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} and \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} become
-% \suffix{.G}\meta{N} and \suffix{.U}\meta{N}.
-% The \suffix{.stc}\meta{N}
-% extensions become \suffix{.S}\meta{N}, where \meta{N} is the absolute section
-% number.
-% The extensions \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} and \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} become
-% \suffix{.H}\meta{N} and \suffix{.V}\meta{N}. All these extensions are listed in table~\vref{t+suffixes}.
-% Of course, this implies a limit of 99~chapters in a
-% document, but do you really need so many chapters (or sections in an
-% article)? The limit of 99~parts does not seem too serious for
-% most documents, but for sections, it could be tragical.
-% The \optd{hints} option (section~\vref{s+hints}) will report such situations.
-% See also section~\vref{.8+3}.
-% \begin{table}[th]
-% \centering
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Extensions of the auxiliary files}\label{t+suffixes}
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{mini-table}&\textbf{long extensions}&\textbf{short extensions}\\
-% &(UNIX, etc.)&(MS-DOS, etc,)\\
-% \midrule
-% parttoc&\suffix{.ptc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.P}\meta{N}\\
-% partlof&\suffix{.plf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.G}\meta{N}\\
-% partlot&\suffix{.plt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.U}\meta{N}\\
-% \midrule
-% minitoc&\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.M}\meta{N}\\
-% minilof&\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.F}\meta{N}\\
-% minilot&\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.T}\meta{N}\\
-% \midrule
-% secttoc&\suffix{.stc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.S}\meta{N}\\
-% sectlof&\suffix{.slf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.H}\meta{N}\\
-% sectlot&\suffix{.slt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.V}\meta{N}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% Sous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} MS-DOS
-% (et autres vieux systèmes d'exploitation pour PC), les suffixes des noms de fichiers sont
-% limités à~3~caractères. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} détermine dynamiquement le type de suffixes disponible et
-% l'utilisera. Toutes les autres modifications seront faites automatiquement. Les suffixes \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} deviendront
-% \suffix{.M}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de chapitre.
-% Les suffixes \suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} et \suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.F}\meta{N} et \suffix{.T}\meta{N}.
-% Les suffixes \suffix{.ptc}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.P}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de partie.
-% Les suffixes \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} et \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.G}\meta{N} et \suffix{.U}\meta{N}.
-% Les suffixes \suffix{.stc}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.S}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de section.
-% Les suffixes \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} et \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.H}\meta{N} et \suffix{.V}\meta{N}.
-% Tous ces suffixes sont listés dans le tableau~\vref{t+suffixes}.
-% Bien sûr, ceci implique une limite de 99~chapitres dans un document, mais avez-vous vraiment besoin d'autant de
-% chapitres (ou de sections dans un article)? La limite de 99~parties ne semble pas trop grave pour la plupart des
-% documents, mais pour les sections, ceci pourrait être tragique. L'option \optd{hints} (section~\vref{s+hints})
-% signalera de telles situations.
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{.8+3}.
-% \begin{table}[th]
-% \centering
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Suffixes des fichiers auxiliaires}\label{t+suffixes}
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{mini-table}&\textbf{suffixes longs}&\textbf{suffixes courts}\\
-% &(UNIX, etc.)&(MS-DOS, etc,)\\
-% \midrule
-% parttoc&\suffix{.ptc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.P}\meta{N}\\
-% partlof&\suffix{.plf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.G}\meta{N}\\
-% partlot&\suffix{.plt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.U}\meta{N}\\
-% \midrule
-% minitoc&\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.M}\meta{N}\\
-% minilof&\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.F}\meta{N}\\
-% minilot&\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.T}\meta{N}\\
-% \midrule
-% secttoc&\suffix{.stc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.S}\meta{N}\\
-% sectlof&\suffix{.slf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.H}\meta{N}\\
-% sectlot&\suffix{.slt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.V}\meta{N}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Why several \LaTeX{} runs are required?}
-% The mini-tables, at part, chapter and section levels,
-% are using some space on the first pages on each chapter, part or section,
-% thus the page numbers are altered. After the first \LaTeX\ run, the
-% mini-tables and lists, partial tables and lists
-% and section-level tables and lists
-% will be empty (in fact skipped since version \#35);
-% after the second run, they appear (if not empty),
-% but because they modify the page numbering, page numbers
-% are wrong; after the third \LaTeX\ run, the mini, part- and section-level
-% tables and lists should be correct (see figure~\vref{f+mtc+3comp}).
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Pourquoi plusieurs exécutions de \LaTeX\ sont-elles nécessaires?}
-% Les mini-tables, aux niveaux partie, chapitre et section, occupent un certain espace sur les premières pages de
-% chaque partie, chapitre ou section, donc la numérotation des pages est altérée. Après la première exécution de
-% \LaTeX, les mini-tables (aux niveaux partie, chapitre et section) seront vides (et en fait sautées depuis la
-% version~\#35); après la deuxième exécution, elles apparaissent (lorsqu'elles ne sont pas vides), mais puisqu'elles
-% modifient la numérotation des pages, les numéros des pages y~sont faux; après la troisième exécution, les
-% mini-tables devraient être correctes (voir la figure~\vref{f+mtc+3comp}).
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \upack{mtcoff} package}\label{o+mtcoff}\ipack{mtcoff}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le paquetage \upack{mtcoff} }\label{o+mtcoff}\ipack{mtcoff}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If a document has been prepared with the \upack{minitoc} package,
-% it contains many \upack{minitoc} specific commands, most of them being
-% \com{dominitoc},
-% \com{faketableofcontents}, and \com{minitoc} commands (and their
-% equivalents for lists of figures and tables).
-% If you want to typeset
-% this document without any mini-table, you have just to replace the
-% \upack{minitoc} package by the \pack{mtcoff} package (without option), and all these
-% commands will be ignored, eventually writing warning messages in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file.
-% At least two \LaTeX\ runs will be necessary to get a correct page numbering and cross references.
-% It also sanitizes the \suffix{.aux}, \suffix{.toc},
-% \suffix{.lof}, and \suffix{.lot} files from \upack{minitoc} specific
-% commands which are now spurious.
-% \or\relax
-% Si un document a été préparé avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, il contient de nombreuses commandes
-% spécifiques de \upack{minitoc}, dont la plupart sont des commandes \com{dominitoc}, \com{faketableofcontents} et
-% \com{minitoc} (et leurs équivalentes pour les listes de figures et de tableaux).
-% Si vous souhaitez composer ce document sans aucune mini-table, il vous suffit de remplacer le paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc} par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} (sans option), et toutes ces commandes seront ignorées, en
-% écrivant éventuellement des messages d'avertissement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file.
-% Au moins deux exécutions
-% de \LaTeX\ seront nécessaires pour avoir une numérotation des pages et des références croisées correctes.
-% Ceci nettoie aussi les fichiers \suffix{.aux}, \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot} en y~éliminant les
-% commandes spécifiques de \upack{minitoc} devenues superflues.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \cleardoublepage
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \chapter{Frequently Asked Questions}\label{FAQ}
-% \or\relax
-% \chapter{Questions fréquemment posées}\label{FAQ}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns}
-% ^^A \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
-% \minitoc
-% ^^A \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty}
-% ^^A \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty}
-% \mtcskip
-% ^^A \lsneed{5}
-% \lneed{6}
-% ^^A \mtcskip
-% \minilof
-% \mtcskip
-% \minilot
-%
-% \addtocounter{section}{-1} ^^A % Trick to get a section numbered zero
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Introduction}
-% ^^A \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Introduction}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Introduction}
-% ^^A \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Introduction}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Here is a list of problems and frequently asked questions about
-% the \upack{minitoc.sty} package. If the version has a number less than~60, please
-% upgrade to version~\#60. This list is also given in the \xfile{minitoc.bug} file,
-% in pure text form. The numbering of this list is done by date of the first occurrence of the question.
-%
-% If a problem arises, it is often wise to: a)~use the \optd{hints} option (see section~\vref{s+hints}),
-% which is activated by default, and b)~read the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file, which may contain pertinent
-% messages. If you do not find a solution, ask a question on an adequate news group, like \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex}
-% (in french) or \texttt{comp.text.tex} (in english) preferably, groups which I try to follow, or send me a mail
-% in last ressort (please join a minimal but complete example~\cite{talbot-mini,preusse}\,\footnote{See also:
-% \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=minxampl}
-% and \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=askquestion} for good advices.} (or~``MCE'')
-% reproducing the problem; this example should use the \opt{hints} option).
-% \or\relax
-% Voici une liste de problèmes et de questions fréquemment posées («~foire aux questions~») à~propos du paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc}. Si votre version a un numéro plus petit que~60, vous êtes priés de faire une mise à~jour
-% à~la version~\#60. Cette liste est aussi donnée dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.bug}, sous
-% forme de texte pur (et en anglais). La numérotation de cette liste est faite selon la date de la première occurrence
-% de la question.
-%
-% Si un problème survient, il est souvent avisé: a)~d'utiliser l'option \optd{hints} (voir la
-% section~\vref{s+hints}), qui est activée par défaut, et b)~de lire le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, qui
-% peut contenir des messages pertinents. Si vous ne trouvez pas de solution, posez une question sur un groupe de
-% discussion adéquat, tel que \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex} (en français), ou \texttt{comp.text.tex} (en anglais) de préférence,
-% que j'essaye de suivre, ou envoyez moi un courrier en dernier recours (prière de joindre un exemple complet
-% minimal~\cite{talbot-mini,preusse}\,\footnote{Voir aussi: \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=minxampl}
-% et \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=askquestion} pour de bons conseils.} (ou «~ECM~»\/) reproduisant
-% le problème; cet exemple devrait utiliser l'option \opt{hints}).
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (1)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Avoiding a page break near the rules before and after a mini-table}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Éviter une coupure de page près des filets avant et après une mini-table}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\enlargethispage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This problem seemed solved since version~\#8, but version~\#12 added better fixes.
-% You may have to make some final tuning with \com{enlargethispage}.
-% See the \LaTeX\ manual~\cite{latex-manual}.
-% The \pack{needspace} package~\cite{needspace} may also be useful.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce problème semblait résolu depuis la version~\#8, mais la version~\#12 a ajouté de meilleures corrections. Vous
-% pouvez devoir faire quelques ajustements ultimes avec \com{enlargethispage}. Voir le manuel
-% \LaTeX~\cite{latex-manual}. Il peut aussi être utile d'utiliser le paquetage
-% \pack{needspace}~\cite{needspace}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% ^^A (2)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Implementing others layouts for a mini-table}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Implanter d'autres mises en page pour une mini-table}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Suggestions are welcome, but look at the section~\vref{s+alt+layout}.
-% There are yet some examples in chapter~\vref{c+exdocs}, for some layouts, like mini-tables on two or three columns.
-% \or\relax
-% Les suggestions sont les bienvenues, mais voyez la section~\vref{s+alt+layout}.
-% Il y~a quelques exemples dans le chapitre~\vref{c+exdocs}, pour quelques mises en page, comme des mini-tables
-% sur deux ou trois colonnes.
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (3)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{A ``\texttt{\textbackslash\textbackslash}'' command in a contents line makes an error}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Une commande «~\texttt{\textbackslash\textbackslash}~» dans une entrée de contenu provoque une erreur}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\\}
-% \begin{macro}{\protect}
-% \begin{macro}{\linebreak}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Use \com{protect}\com{linebreak}. The \verb|\\| command should be used only in tabular material (\env{tabular}
-% environment and similar, or in the
-% \env{tabbing} environment) and in math arrays and equations, or in the \env{quote}-like environments.
-% \or\relax
-% Utilisez \com{protect}\com{linebreak}. La commande \verb|\\| ne devrait être utilisée que dans du matériel
-% de tableau (environnement \env{tabular} ou similaire, ou dans l'environnement \env{tabbing}) et dans les
-% tableaux (\emph{arrays}) et équations mathématiques, ou dans des environnements similaires à~\env{quote}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% ^^A (4)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Reordering chapters makes havoc}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Changer l'ordre des chapitres crée le chaos}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \emph{If you reorder chapters, havoc follows\ldots\ mini-tables
-% going in wrong chapters.}
-% \or\relax
-% \emph{Si vous changez l'ordre des chapitres, le chaos en découle,\ldots\
-% avec les mini-tables allant dans les mauvais chapitres.}
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The best way seems to make one run with the \pack{mtcoff}
-% package replacing the \upack{minitoc} package, then restore
-% the \upack{minitoc} package and re-execute \LaTeX\ at least three times
-% (yes, it is time consuming\ldots). See figure~\vref{f+mtc+3comp}\footnote{I~used the \pack{pict2e}
-% package~\cite{pict2e}, by \namea{Hubert}{Gäßlein}{Gasslein}, \name{Rolf}{Niepraschk} and \name{Josef}{Tkadlec}, to prepare this figure.}.
-% Running with the \pack{mtcoff} package ensures that the standard auxiliary files
-% are cleared from ``spurious'' commands introduced by \upack{minitoc}.
-% A more radical solution is to delete the \suffix{.aux}, \suffix{.toc},
-% \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files relative to the document, then
-% re-execute \LaTeX\ at least three times.
-% \or\relax
-% La meilleure méthode semble d'effectuer une exécution avec le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} remplaçant
-% le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, puis de rétablir le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et de ré-exécuter \LaTeX\ au
-% moins trois fois (oui, cela prend du temps\ldots). Voir la figure~\vref{f+mtc+3comp}\,\footnote{J'ai utilisé le
-% paquetage \pack{pict2e}~\cite{pict2e}, de \namea{Hubert}{Gäßlein}{Gasslein}, \name{Rolf}{Niepraschk}
-% et \name{Josef}{Tkadlec},
-% pour préparer cette figure.}.
-% Exécuter avec le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}
-% garantit que les fichiers auxiliaires standard seront purgés des commandes «~superflues~» introduites par
-% \upack{minitoc}. Une solution plus radicale est de détruire les fichiers \suffix{.aux}, \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof}
-% et \suffix{.lot} relatifs au document, puis de ré-exécuter \LaTeX\ au moins trois fois.
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{figure}[tp]
-% \centering\bgroup\footnotesize
-% \def\NUM{\meta{N}}
-% \setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
-% \resizebox{1.0\textwidth}{!}{%
-% \begin{picture}(170,60)(-5,0)
-% \thicklines
-% \put(0,0){\line(1,0){30}}
-% \put(0,0){\line(0,1){50}}
-% \put(0,50){\line(1,0){30}}
-% \put(30,0){\line(0,1){50}}
-% \put(60,0){\line(1,0){30}}
-% \put(60,0){\line(0,1){50}}
-% \put(60,50){\line(1,0){30}}
-% \put(90,0){\line(0,1){50}}
-% \put(120,0){\line(1,0){30}}
-% \put(120,0){\line(0,1){50}}
-% \put(120,50){\line(1,0){30}}
-% \put(150,0){\line(0,1){50}}
-% \put(15,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}}
-% \put(75,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}}
-% \put(135,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}}
-% \put(15,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}}
-% \put(75,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}}
-% \put(135,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}}
-% \put(15,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}}
-% \put(75,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}}
-% \put(135,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}}
-% \put(30,35){\vector(1,0){30}}
-% \put(45,35){\line(0,1){10}}
-% \put(45,45){\vector(1,0){15}}
-% \put(90,35){\vector(1,0){30}}
-% \put(105,35){\line(0,1){10}}
-% \put(105,45){\vector(1,0){15}}
-% \put(90,45){\line(1,-1){5}}
-% \put(95,40){\line(0,-1){4}}
-% \put(95,30){\line(0,1){4}}
-% \put(95,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}}
-% \put(150,45){\line(1,-1){5}}
-% \put(155,40){\line(0,-1){10}}
-% \put(155,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}}
-% \put(15,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (1)}}
-% \put(75,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (2)}}
-% \put(135,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (3)}}
-% \put(45,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\suffix{.toc}}}
-% \put(105,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\suffix{.toc}}}
-% \put(97,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\suffix{.mtc}\NUM}}
-% \put(157,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\suffix{.mtc}\NUM}}
-% \put(75,50){\vector(0,1){5}}
-% \put(135,50){\vector(0,1){5}}
-% \put(90,25){\vector(1,0){5}}
-% \put(150,25){\vector(1,0){5}}
-% \put(75,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(A)}}
-% \put(135,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(C)}}
-% \put(92,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(B)}}
-% \put(152,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(D)}}
-% \end{picture}}
-% \egroup
-% \begin{flushleft}
-% \noindent\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize
-% \begin{itemize}\labelsep=1ex\itemindent=0pt
-% \item[(A)] \com{tableofcontents} produces a table of
-% contents, which is likely inaccurate.
-% \item[(B)] \com{minitoc} produces minitocs, which are likely inaccurate.
-% \item[(C)] \com{tableofcontents} produces a table of contents, which is accurate.
-% \item[(D)] \com{minitoc} produces minitocs, which are accurate.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{flushleft}
-% \caption{Three compilations for \upack{minitoc}}\label{f+mtc+3comp}
-% \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{figure}[tp]
-% \centering\bgroup\footnotesize
-% \def\NUM{\meta{N}}
-% \setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
-% \resizebox{1.0\textwidth}{!}{%
-% \begin{picture}(170,60)(-5,0)
-% \thicklines
-% \put(0,0){\line(1,0){30}}
-% \put(0,0){\line(0,1){50}}
-% \put(0,50){\line(1,0){30}}
-% \put(30,0){\line(0,1){50}}
-% \put(60,0){\line(1,0){30}}
-% \put(60,0){\line(0,1){50}}
-% \put(60,50){\line(1,0){30}}
-% \put(90,0){\line(0,1){50}}
-% \put(120,0){\line(1,0){30}}
-% \put(120,0){\line(0,1){50}}
-% \put(120,50){\line(1,0){30}}
-% \put(150,0){\line(0,1){50}}
-% \put(15,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}}
-% \put(75,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}}
-% \put(135,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}}
-% \put(15,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}}
-% \put(75,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}}
-% \put(135,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}}
-% \put(15,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}}
-% \put(75,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}}
-% \put(135,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}}
-% \put(30,35){\vector(1,0){30}}
-% \put(45,35){\line(0,1){10}}
-% \put(45,45){\vector(1,0){15}}
-% \put(90,35){\vector(1,0){30}}
-% \put(105,35){\line(0,1){10}}
-% \put(105,45){\vector(1,0){15}}
-% \put(90,45){\line(1,-1){5}}
-% \put(95,40){\line(0,-1){4}}
-% \put(95,30){\line(0,1){4}}
-% \put(95,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}}
-% \put(150,45){\line(1,-1){5}}
-% \put(155,40){\line(0,-1){10}}
-% \put(155,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}}
-% \put(15,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (1)}}
-% \put(75,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (2)}}
-% \put(135,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (3)}}
-% \put(45,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\suffix{.toc}}}
-% \put(105,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\suffix{.toc}}}
-% \put(97,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\suffix{.mtc}\NUM}}
-% \put(157,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\suffix{.mtc}\NUM}}
-% \put(75,50){\vector(0,1){5}}
-% \put(135,50){\vector(0,1){5}}
-% \put(90,25){\vector(1,0){5}}
-% \put(150,25){\vector(1,0){5}}
-% \put(75,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(A)}}
-% \put(135,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(C)}}
-% \put(92,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(B)}}
-% \put(152,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(D)}}
-% \end{picture}}
-% \egroup
-% \begin{flushleft}
-% \noindent\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize
-% \begin{itemize}\labelsep=1ex\itemindent=0pt
-% \item[(A)] \com{tableofcontents} produit une table matières, qui est probablement inexacte.
-% \item[(B)] \com{minitoc} produit des minitocs, qui sont probablement inexactes.
-% \item[(C)] \com{tableofcontents} produit une table matières, qui est probablement exacte.
-% \item[(D)] \com{minitoc} produit des minitocs, qui sont probablement exactes.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{flushleft}
-% \caption{Trois compilations pour \upack{minitoc}}\label{f+mtc+3comp}
-% \end{figure}
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (5)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Extensions for the names of auxiliary files}\label{.8+3}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Suffixes pour les noms des fichiers auxiliaires}\label{.8+3}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \emph{This package creates auxiliary files with extensions like \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}.
-% Some operating systems allow only 3~characters extensions. What to do?}\par
-% \lneed{3}
-% No\SMM{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} modification is needed: all became automatic since
-% version \#28! If you insist to use 3~characters extensions,
-% even on operating systems allowing more, just use the package
-% option \opt{shortext}. Then you will get first the
-% autoconfiguration messages, then a message saying that you
-% will use short extensions. But then be careful to not have more
-% than 99~mini-tables of the same kind (even empty)!
-% \or\relax
-% \emph{Ce paquetage crée des fichiers auxiliaires ayant des suffixes tels que \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}. Certains
-% systèmes d'exploitation ne permettent que des suffixes limités à~3~caractères. Que faire?}\par
-% \lneed{3}
-% Aucune\SMM{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} modification n'est nécessaire:
-% tout est devenu automatique depuis la version \#28! Si vous voulez vraiment
-% utiliser des suffixes de 3~caractères, utilisez simplement l'option de paquetage \opt{shortext}.
-% Alors vous recevrez d'abord les messages d'autoconfiguration, puis un message disant que vous allez
-% utiliser des suffixes courts.
-% Mais alors faites attention à~ne pas avoir plus 99~mini-tables du même type (même vides)!
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (6)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Playing with the chapter number}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Jouer avec le numéro de chapitre}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \emph{Do not cheat}\virage{} with the ``\texttt{chapter}'' counter, i.e.,~do not write ugly things like:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{setcounter}\verb|{chapter}{6}|
-% \end{verse}
-% The mechanism would break. It is better to add \com{chapter} commands,
-% to create empty (but numbered in a legal way) chapters.
-% Since version~\#10, the \upack{minitoc} package works with appendices.
-% Version \#19 allows to begin with a chapter other that number~1.
-% ^^A And look at~``Special Entries for TOC, LOF, LOT, Bibliography and Index'', section~\vref{special.entries}.
-% And look at~``Special Entries in the TOC'', section~\vref{special.entries}.
-%
-% Since version~\#23 (1994/11/08), the numbering of chapters and that of minitocs are independent, so that problem just
-% vanished.
-%
-% The same remarks apply to the \texttt{part} and \texttt{section} counters.
-% \or\relax
-% \emph{Ne trichez pas}\virage{} avec le compteur «~\texttt{chapter}~», donc n'écrivez pas des horreurs telles que:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{setcounter}\verb|{chapter}{6}|
-% \end{verse}
-% Ceci casserait la mécanique du paquetage. Il vaut mieux ajouter des commandes \com{chapter}, afin de
-% créer des chapitres vides (mais numérotés d'une manière légale). Depuis la version~\#10, le paquetage \upack{minitoc}
-% fonctionne avec les appendices.
-% La version \#19 vous permet de commencer par un chapitre numéroté autrement que un.
-% Et regardez «~Entrées spéciales dans la TdM~», section~\vref{special.entries}.
-%
-% Depuis la version~\#23 (1994/11/08), la numérotation des chapitres et celle des minitocs sont indépendantes,
-% donc ce problème a disparu.
-%
-% Les mêmes remarques s'appliquent aux compteurs \texttt{part} et \texttt{section}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% ^^A (7)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Supported document classes}\label{s+supported+classes}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Classes de document supportées}\label{s+supported+classes}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\imess{W0017} \upack{minitoc} package is restricted to document classes which define
-% chapters in the standard way, like ``\class{book}'' and ``\class{report}'',
-% or sections in the standard way, like ``\class{article}''~\cite{classes}.
-% There are ``parttocs'' if the document class defines the \com{part} command.
-% Note that classes like ``\class{letter}''~\cite{letter}, which have not the classical sectionning structure, cannot be
-% supported. Classes using sectionning commands with other names are not supported\,\footnote{This would be
-% very difficult: any user can create new sectionning commands (often with the help from some packages) with
-% standard or new names; this is only limited by the imagination. The \upack{minitoc} package relies on the
-% names of the standard sectionning commands and on the syntax of these commands.}.
-% See also section~\vref{s+AMS}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le\imess{W0017} paquetage \upack{minitoc} est restreint aux classes de document qui définissent les chapitres
-% de la manière standard, comme «~\class{book}~» et «~\class{report}~», ou les sections de la manière standard,
-% comme «~\class{article}~»~\cite{classes}. Il y~a des «~parttocs~» si la classe de document définit
-% la commande \com{part}. Notez que des classes telles que «~\class{letter}~»~\cite{letter},
-% qui n'ont pas la structure de sectionnement classique, ne
-% peuvent pas être supportées. Les classes utilisant des commandes de sectionnement portant d'autres noms ne sont
-% pas supportées\,\footnote{Ce serait très difficile: tout utilisateur peut créer de nouvelles commandes de
-% sectionnement (souvent à~l'aide de certains paquetages) portant des noms standard ou nouveaux; ceci n'est limité
-% que par l'imagination. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} s'appuie sur les noms des commandes de sectionnement standard
-% et sur la syntaxe de ces commandes.}.
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+AMS}.
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (8)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Compatibility with \LaTeX{} versions}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Compatibilité avec les versions de \LaTeX{}}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some\imess{W0021} users have failed to make \upack{minitoc} to work. They got a message like:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0021|\\
-% \verb|Undefined command ... \@inputcheck ...|\\
-% \verb|Your version of latex.tex is obsolete.|
-% \verb|Trying to continue...|
-% \end{verse}
-% or:\imess{W0022}
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{verse}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0022|\\
-% \verb|Undefined command ... \reset@font ...|\\
-% \verb|Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete.|\\
-% \verb|Trying to continue... crossing fingers.|
-% \end{verse}
-% The \com{reset@font} command has been added to \xfile{latex.tex}
-% on September~29th, 1991 and the \com{@inputcheck} command
-% on March~18th, 1992 and this version of \xfile{latex.tex} has been
-% released on March~25th, 1992. If you get this message, you
-% have an old version of \xfile{latex.tex}. Get a recent one from
-% the archives (or a recent distribution)
-% and regenerate a \xfile{latex.fmt} format via \texttt{initex} (or your configuration tool).
-% \or\relax
-% Certains\imess{W0021} utilisateurs ne sont pas parvenus à~faire fonctionner \upack{minitoc}.
-% Ils ont reçu un message tel que:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0021|\\
-% \verb|Undefined command ... \@inputcheck ...|\\
-% \verb|Your version of latex.tex is obsolete.|
-% \verb|Trying to continue...|
-% \end{verse}
-% ou:\imess{W0022}
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{verse}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0022|\\
-% \verb|Undefined command ... \reset@font ...|\\
-% \verb|Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete.|\\
-% \verb|Trying to continue... crossing fingers.|
-% \end{verse}
-% La commande \com{reset@font} a été ajoutée à~\xfile{latex.tex} le 29~septembre 1991, et la commande
-% \com{@inputcheck} le 18~mars 1992, et cette version de \xfile{latex.tex} a été distribuée le 25~mars 1992. Si
-% vous obtenez un tel message, vous avez une vieille version de \xfile{latex.tex}. Obtenez une version récente
-% depuis les archives (ou une distribution récente)
-% et régénérez un format \xfile{latex.fmt} via \texttt{initex} (ou votre outil de configuration).
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (9)
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Other mini-tables}\label{faq.9}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Autres mini-tables}\label{faq.9}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some demanding users want to have minilof, minilot and
-% minibbl (mini-bibliographies per part, chapter or section). First, ``minibbl'' is another problem, strongly
-% related to the \BibTeX's dealing with \suffix{.aux} files. Look
-% at the \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib}, \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits},
-% \pack{multibib}~\cite{multibib}, \pack{bibtopic}~\cite{bibtopic}, and \pack{splitbib}~\cite{splitbib} packages.
-% Version~\#13 has implemented basic minilofs and minilots.
-% Minibbls are not the aim of this package\footnote{See {\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multbib}}}.
-% \or\relax
-% Certains utilisateurs exigeants désirent avoir des minilofs, minilots et minibbls. Tout d'abord, les «~minibbls~»
-% (mini-bibliographies par partie, chapitre ou section) sont un autre problème,
-% fortement lié au traitement par \BibTeX\ des fichiers \suffix{.aux}.
-% Regardez les paquetages \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib}, \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits},
-% \pack{multibib}~\cite{bibunits}, \pack{bibtopic}~\cite{bibtopic} et \pack{splitbib}~\cite{splitbib}.
-% La version~\#13 a implanté les minilofs et minilots basiques. Les minibbls ne sont pas l'objet de ce
-% paquetage{\froff\,\footnote{Voir~: \froff\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multbib}}}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% ^^A (10)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Why so many auxiliary files?}\label{faq.10}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Pourquoi autant de fichiers auxiliaires?}\label{faq.10}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This package creates a lot of auxiliary files and some users
-% have argued that it is too many. A deep redesign would be
-% necessary to avoid that. Using only one big auxiliary file
-% (or one for all minitocs, one for all minilofs, \ldots)
-% would make the reading of such file very slow, as it would
-% be read for each \ucom{miniXXX} macro!
-% Moreover, this would make the \optd{checkfiles} (see section~\vref{s+placing}) package
-% option impractical to implement.
-% Note that the many files \uxfile{*.mtc*}, etc., may be
-% deleted after the \LaTeX{} run. They are rebuilt by the preparation commands
-% (like \com{dominitoc} and siblings).
-% But, since version \#35,
-% \upack{minitoc} is able to detect and skip empty \uxfile{*.mtc*} files
-% (and siblings) to avoid ugly titles with just two thin rules.
-% It would not be easy to do with only one big auxiliary file.
-% Since version \#44, the \optd{listfiles} package option is available to create a list of these auxiliary
-% files; see section~\vref{s+listfiles}.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce paquetage crée des tas de fichiers auxiliaires et certains utilisateurs ont argué qu'il y en avait trop.
-% Une réorganisation profonde serait nécessaire pour éviter ce grand nombre. Utiliser un seul grand fichier
-% auxiliaire (ou un pour toutes les minitocs, un pour toutes les minilofs, etc.) rendrait la lecture de ce
-% fichier très lente, car il devrait être lu pour chaque commande \ucom{miniXXX}! De plus, ceci
-% rendrait l'implantation de l'option \optd{checkfiles} (section~\vref{s+placing}) pratiquement impossible.
-% Notez que les nombreux fichiers \uxfile{*.mtc*}, etc., peuvent être détruits après l'exécution de \LaTeX.
-% Ils sont reconstruits par les commandes de préparation (comme \com{dominitoc} et ses analogues).
-% Mais, depuis la version \#35, \upack{minitoc} est capable de détecter et sauter les fichiers \uxfile{*.mtc*} (et
-% analogues) vides pour éviter des titres isolés avec seulement deux filets fins.
-% Tout ceci ne serait pas facile à~faire avec un seul gros fichier auxiliaire.
-% Depuis la version \#44, l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles} est disponible pour créer une liste de ces
-% fichiers auxiliaires; voir la section~\vref{s+listfiles}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \lneed{5}
-% These files contain the mini-tables extracted from the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof}, and \suffix{.lot} files.
-% They are no more useful after the \LaTeX\ run. If you run \LaTeX\ via a script or a ``makefile'', it may be
-% useful to add to it a cleaning feature (which should be optional, to allow debugging). The
-% table~\vref{t+suffixes} gives the list of the extensions for these files (note that a \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}
-% auxiliary file is also created as a scratch file).
-%
-% As an example, you can look at the \tool{rubber} tool~\cite{rubber}
-% (written in Python) provided by \xname{Emmanuel}{Beffara}:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \url{http://iml.univ-mrs.fr/~beffara/soft/rubber/}
-% \end{quote}
-% \or\relax
-% Ces fichiers contiennent les mini-tables extraites des fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot}.
-% Ils ne sont plus utiles après l'exécution de \LaTeX. Si vous exécutez \LaTeX\ au moyen d'un script ou
-% d'un «~makefile~», il peut être utile de lui ajouter un dispositif de nettoyage (qui devrait être optionnel,
-% pour permettre la mise au point). Le tableau~\vref{t+suffixes} donne la liste des suffixes pour ces fichiers
-% (notez qu'un fichier auxiliaire \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc} est aussi créé comme fichier de travail).
-%
-% Comme exemple, vous pouvez regarder l'outil \tool{rubber}~\cite{rubber}
-% (écrit en Python) fourni par \xname{Emmanuel}{Beffara}:
-% {\froff\begin{quote}
-% \url{http://iml.univ-mrs.fr/~beffara/soft/rubber/}
-% \end{quote}}
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (11)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Mini-tables at levels other than chapter}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Mini-tables à~des niveaux autres que le chapitre}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Here also, some redesign was needed. From version~\#15, there are parttocs, partlofs and
-% partlots for the part level in \class{book}\texttt{\BAR}\class{report}-like and \class{article}-like documents,
-% secttocs, sectlofs and sectlots for the section level in \class{article}-like
-% documents. Note that you can not have minitocs features at chapter
-% and section level in the same document, because doing so would make
-% an almost unreadable monster. The user must choose the main class of
-% the document according to the size of it (e.g.,~do not write an article
-% of more than 100~sections: this is a report, or even a book!).
-%
-% \begin{center}\ttfamily
-% \ifBT
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries part&\rmfamily\bfseries chapter&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
-% \midrule
-% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
-% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
-% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \else
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}}
-% \thickline
-% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries part&\rmfamily\bfseries chapter&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
-% \hline
-% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline
-% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline
-% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\thickline
-% \end{tabular}
-% \fi
-% \end{center}
-% \or\relax
-% Ici aussi, une reconstruction a été nécessaire. Depuis la version~\#15, il y a des parttocs, partlofs et partlots
-% pour le niveau partie dans les documents dont la classe est similaire
-% à~\class{book}, \class{report} ou \class{article},
-% des secttocs, sectlofs et sectlots pour le niveau section dans les documents dont la classe est similaire
-% à~\class{article}. Notez que vous ne pouvez pas avoir les dispositifs de \upack{minitoc} aux niveaux chapitre et
-% section dans le même document, car cela produirait un monstre presque illisible. L'utilisateur doit choisir la classe de
-% base du document selon la taille de celui-ci (par exemple, ne pas écrire un article de plus de 100~sections: c'est
-% un rapport, ou même un livre!).
-% \begin{center}\ttfamily
-% \ifBT
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries partie&\rmfamily\bfseries chapitre&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
-% \midrule
-% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
-% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
-% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \else
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}}
-% \thickline
-% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries partie&\rmfamily\bfseries chapitre&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
-% \hline
-% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline
-% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline
-% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\thickline
-% \end{tabular}
-% \fi
-% \end{center}
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (12)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Incompatibility with \LaTeX2.09}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Incompatibilité avec \LaTeX2.09}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\protect}
-% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The more recent version of \LaTeXe{} adds \com{protect} before
-% \com{contentsline} in the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lof}
-% files. The version~\#17 of \upack{minitoc} attempts to be compatible with \LaTeXe{} and \LaTeX2.09.
-% This will be the \emph{last}
-% version usable with \LaTeX2.09. Versions~\#18 and later are \LaTeXe{} specific, and no more compatible
-% with \LaTeX2.09, which is completely obsolete.
-% \or\relax
-% La version la plus récente de \LaTeXe{} ajoute \com{protect} avant \com{contentsline} dans
-% les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lof}. La version~\#17 de \upack{minitoc} tente d'être compatible
-% avec \LaTeXe{} et \LaTeX2.09. Ce sera la \emph{dernière} version utilisable avec \LaTeX2.09. Les versions~\#18 et
-% ultérieures sont spécifiques de \LaTeXe, et ne sont plus compatibles avec \LaTeX2.09, qui est totalement obsolète.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% ^^A (13)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Documents resetting the chapter number at each part}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Documents ré-initialisant le numéro de chapitre pour chaque partie}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Since version~\#23, \upack{minitoc} works with document classes resetting
-% chapter (or section) number at each part (or chapter). This is possible because the auxiliary files for the
-% mini-tables have now an \emph{absolute} number.
-% \or\relax
-% Depuis la version~\#23, \upack{minitoc} fonctionne avec les classes de document qui ré-initialisent le numéro de
-% chapitre (ou de section) pour chaque partie (ou chapitre). Ceci est possible car les fichiers auxiliaires pour les
-% mini-tables ont désormais un numéro \emph{absolu}.
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (14)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The mini-tables have too much spaced lines}
-% From version~\#29, you can have tight mini-tables with the \opt{tight} option, and
-% with the \opt{k-tight} option for the \KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} (since version~\#43).
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Les mini-tables ont leurs lignes trop espacées}
-% Depuis la version~\#29, vous pouvez avoir des mini-tables plus resserrées avec l'option \opt{tight},
-% avec l'option \opt{k-tight} pour les classes \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} (depuis la version~\#43).
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (15)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The secttocs are wrong}
-% Secttocs did not work: corrected (version~\#38).
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Les secttocs sont fausses}
-% Les secttocs ne fonctionnent pas: corrigé (version~\#38).
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (16)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Removing the lines of dots}
-% The lines of dots (leaders) between section titles and page numbers are removed by the \opt{undotted}
-% option (\#29). See also section~\vref{s+alt+layout}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Retirer les points de conduite}
-% Les lignes de points (points de conduite) entre les titres de sections et les numéros de pages sont retirés par
-% l'option \opt{undotted} (\#29). Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+alt+layout}.
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (17)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Using the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}}\label{faq.17}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Utiliser le paquetage \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}}\label{faq.17}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Since version~\#31, \upack{minitoc} works correctly with the powerful \pack{hyperref}
-% package~\cite{hyperref.web}, thanks to \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek},
-% using the work of \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne}, \xname{Didier}{Verna} and \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}.
-% \emph{Hence\Virage{} the \pack{minitoc-hyper} package~\cite{minitoc-hyper} is now obsolete and should no more be used.
-% It it still present on the CTAN archives for compatibility with old documents.}
-% If you add the loading of the \pack{hyperref} package to a document yet using \upack{minitoc},
-% you will get error message about spurious closing braces. Just let finish the \LaTeX\ run,
-% then re-\LaTeX\ the document. There will be no problem if you remove the loading of
-% \pack{hyperref} and add it again: the problem occurs only when upgrading from
-% \upack{minitoc}~\#30 to \upack{minitoc}~\#31 (or higher) with a document already processed and adding
-% \pack{hyperref} at the same time! It seems better to process the document with \upack{minitoc}~\#31 (or higher)
-% without \pack{hyperref}, then with \pack{hyperref}, because some internal commands written
-% into the auxiliary files have been modified. If used, the \pack{hyperref} package must be loaded \emph{before}
-% \upack{minitoc}. Note that the documents \xfile{minitoc.dtx} and \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} show (not so) basic examples
-% of the use of the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}.
-% \or\relax
-% Depuis la version \#31, \upack{minitoc} fonctionne enfin correctement avec le puissant paquetage
-% \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}, grâce à~\name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, qui a utilisé les travaux de
-% \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne}, \xname{Didier}{Verna} et \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}.
-% \emph{Donc\Virage{} le paquetage \pack{minitoc-hyper}~\cite{minitoc-hyper} est désormais obsolète et ne devrait plus être
-% utilisé. Il est encore présent sur les archives CTAN pour la compatibilité avec des anciens documents.}
-% Si vous ajoutez le chargement du paquetage \pack{hyperref} à~un
-% document utilisant déjà \upack{minitoc}, vous recevrez un message d'erreur concernant des accolades fermantes en
-% trop. Il suffit de laisser se terminer l'exécution de \LaTeX, puis de ré-exécuter \LaTeX\ sur le document. Il n'y
-% aura aucun problème si vous enlevez le chargement de \pack{hyperref} puis l'ajoutez de nouveau; ce problème ne
-% se produit que lorsque vous passez de \upack{minitoc} version~\#30 à~\upack{minitoc} version~\#31 (ou supérieure)
-% avec un document déjà traité et en ajoutant \pack{hyperref} en même temps! Il semble préférable de traiter le
-% document avec \upack{minitoc} version~\#31 (ou supérieure) sans \pack{hyperref}, puis avec \pack{hyperref},
-% parce que certaines commandes internes écrites dans les fichiers auxiliaires ont été modifiées. S'il est utilisé,
-% le paquetage \pack{hyperref} doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}. Notez que les documents
-% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} et \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} montrent des exemples (qui ne sont pas vraiment) basiques de
-% l'utilisation du paquetage \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (18)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Problem while upgrading \upack{minitoc}}
-% If upgrading from version~\#30 or lower to
-% version~\#31 or higher, you should delete the \suffix{.aux},
-% \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof}, \suffix{.lot} files of the document,
-% else the first \LaTeX{} run with version~\#31 or higher will
-% produce a lot of errors (the next run should be ok). See also the section~\vref{faq.17}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Problème lors de la mise à~jour de \upack{minitoc}}
-% Lors de la mise à~jour de la version~\#30 ou inférieure vers la version~\#31 ou supérieure, vous devriez détruire
-% les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof}, \suffix{.lot} du document, sinon la première exécution de \LaTeX{} avec
-% la version~\#31 ou supérieure produira beaucoup d'erreurs (l'exécution suivante devrait être correcte). Voir aussi
-% la section~\vref{faq.17}.
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (19)
-% \lneed{10}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{A local TOC for the set of appendices}\label{faq.19}%
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Une TdM locale pour l'ensemble des appendices}\label{faq.19}%
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
-% \begin{macro}{\part}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\protect}
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\partbegin}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some users need a table of contents for the appendices,
-% but without putting the entries of it into the main table of
-% contents. The solution is to put the appendices in a \com{part}
-% subdivision of the document and ask for a table of contents at
-% the \com{part} level:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \icom{doparttoc}\verb|\doparttoc % after \begin{document}|\\
-% \verb|. . .|\\
-% \com{tableofcontents}\\
-% \verb|. . .|\\
-% \com{appendix}\\
-% \icom{part}\verb|\part{Appendices} % create a part level subdivision|\\
-% \icom{parttoc}\verb|\parttoc % create a local table of contents|\\
-% \verb|% To suppress the appendix part in the main toc|\\
-% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{setcounter}\idcnt{tocdepth}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{-1}}|\\
-% \icom{chapter}\verb|\chapter{First appendix}|\\
-% \verb|. . .|\\
-% \verb|% Add this at the end of appendices if there is something|\\
-% \verb|% after the appendices (like an index or a bibliography)|\\
-% \verb|% to put a bound to the contents of \parttoc|\\
-% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{partbegin}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}|
-% \end{verse}
-% See also section~\vref{faq.25}.
-% \or\relax
-% Certains utilisateurs ont besoin d'une table des matières pour les appendices, mais sans mettre les entrées de
-% cette table dans la table des matières principale. Une solution est de mettre les appendices dans une subdivision
-% \com{part} du document et de demander une table des matières au niveau de cette partie:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \icom{doparttoc}\verb|\doparttoc % après \begin{document}|\\
-% \verb|. . .|\\
-% \com{tableofcontents}\\
-% \verb|. . .|\\
-% \icom{appendix}\verb|\appendix|\\
-% \icom{part}\verb|\part{Appendices} % crée une subdivision de niveau partie|\\
-% \icom{parttoc}\verb|\parttoc % crée une table des matières locale|\\
-% \verb|% Pour supprimer la partie appendices dans la TdM principale|\\
-% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{setcounter}\idcnt{tocdepth}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{-1}}|\\
-% \icom{chapter}\verb|\chapter{Premier appendice}|\\
-% \verb|. . .|\\
-% \verb|% Ajoutez ceci à la fin des appendices s'il y a quelque chose|\\
-% \verb|% après les appendices (comme un index ou une bibliographie)|\\
-% \verb|% pour placer une borne au contenu de \parttoc|\\
-% \icom{atttocontents}\icom{partbegin}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}|
-% \end{verse}
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq.25}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% ^^A (20)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Use with the \upack{appendix} package}\ipack{appendix}\label{faq+appendix}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{appendix}}\ipack{appendix}\label{faq+appendix}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc}
-% \begin{environment}{appendices}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If you use the \pack{appendix} package~\cite{appendix} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}),\imess{I0042}
-% you will observe a serious problem with minitocs in the \env{appendices} environment
-% (and after it): they do not
-% match with their respective appendices. In fact, the environnement opening \ienv{appendices}\verb|\begin{appendices}| hides a
-% \com{addcontentsline} command for a chapter or a section, putting trouble
-% in the numbering of minitocs or secttocs. Several solutions are available. The first one is to add a
-% \com{adjustmtc} or \com{adjuststc} command
-% (depending on the level of the appendices, chapter or section) after \emph{each}
-% \ienv{appendices}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{appendices\}} command.
-% An other solution is to add the following commands in the preamble
-% \emph{after} the loading of the \pack{appendix} package:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\
-% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjustmtc}|
-% \end{verse}
-% if appendices are at the chapter level, OR:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\
-% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjuststc}|
-% \end{verse}
-% if appendices are at the section level.
-%
-% These two solutions may be modified by replacing \com{adjustmtc} by the sequence:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{chapterend}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\chapterend}|\\
-% OR\\
-% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{sectend}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\sectend}|
-% \end{quote}
-% when it is necessary to delimit the end of the preceding chapter or section\,\footnote{In fact, the commands
-% \com{partend}, \com{chapterend} and \com{sectend} should not be used directly by the user, in normal circumstances.}.
-%
-% A rather more elegant solution is to add an entry into the TOC via the \com{addappheadtotoc} command offered by
-% the \pack{appendix} package. As this entry is a chapter-level (or section-level) entry, it delimits correctly
-% the end of the preceding chapter or section.
-%
-% See also the \exam{mtc-amm.tex} example file (section~\vref{mtc-amm.tex}),
-% which uses the \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3},
-% which includes itself the \pack{appendix} package functionnality (these packages and this class are from the same author).
-% \or\relax
-% Si vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{appendix}~\cite{appendix} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}),\imess{I0042} vous observerez un
-% sérieux problème avec les minitocs dans l'environnement \env{appendices} (et après lui): elles ne correspondent
-% pas avec leurs appendices respectifs. En fait, l'ouverture de l'environnement par \ienv{appendices}\verb|\begin{appendices}| dissimule une
-% commande \com{addcontentsline} pour un chapitre ou une section, semant le trouble dans la numérotation des
-% minitocs ou secttocs. Plusieurs solutions sont disponibles. La première consiste à~ajouter une commande \com{adjustmtc}
-% ou \com{adjuststc} (selon que les appendices sont au niveau chapitre ou section) après \emph{chaque} commande
-% \ienv{appendices}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{appendices\}}. Une autre solution est d'ajouter les commandes suivantes dans le préambule
-% \emph{après} le chargement du paquetage \pack{appendix}:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\
-% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjustmtc}|
-% \end{verse}
-% si les appendices sont au niveau chapitre, OU:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\
-% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjuststc}|
-% \end{verse}
-% si les appendices sont au niveau section.
-%
-% Ces deux solutions peuvent être modifiées en remplaçant \com{adjustmtc} par la séquence:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{chapterend}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\chapterend}|\\
-% OU\\
-% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{sectend}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\sectend}|
-% \end{quote}
-% lorsqu'il est nécessaire de délimiter la fin du chapitre (ou de la section) précédent(e)\,\footnote{En fait, les
-% commandes \com{partend}, \com{chapterend} et \com{sectend} ne devraient pas être appelées directement par
-% l'utilisateur, dans des circonstances normales.}.
-%
-% Une solution plus élégante consiste à~ajouter une entrée dans la table des matières via la
-% commande \com{addappheadtotoc} fournie par le paquetage \pack{appendix}. Comme cette entrée est une entrée
-% au niveau chapitre (ou au niveau section), elle délimite correctement la fin du chapitre (ou de la section)
-% précédent(e).
-%
-% Voir aussi le fichier exemple \exam{mtc-amm.tex} (section~\vref{mtc-amm.tex}),
-% qui utilise la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3},
-% qui inclut elle-même la fonctionnalité du paquetage \pack{appendix} (ces paquetages et cette classe sont du même auteur).
-% \fi
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% ^^A (21)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Use with the \upack{tocloft} package}\ipack{tocloft}\label{faq+tocloft}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{tocloft}}\ipack{tocloft}\label{faq+tocloft}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% (This\imess{I0047} answer is given in the documentation of the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}.)
-% The \pack{tocloft} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) and \upack{minitoc} packages
-% have an unfortunate interaction\,\footnote{Discovered by \name{Lyndon}{Dudding}.}, which fortunately can be fixed.
-% In the normal course of events, when \upack{minitoc} is used in a chaptered
-% document it will typeset section
-% entries in the minitocs in bold font. If \pack{tocloft} is used in
-% conjunction with \upack{minitoc}, then the minitoc section entries are
-% typeset in the normal font, except for the page numbers which are in
-% bold font, while the ToC section entries are all in normal font.
-%
-% One cure, if you want the minitoc section entries to be all in normal small
-% font, is to put:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \icom{renewcommand}\icom{mtcSfont}\verb|\renewcommand{\mtcSfont}{\normalfont\small}|
-% \end{verse}
-% or:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \icom{mtcsetfont}\verb|\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\normalfont\small}|
-% \end{verse}
-% in the preamble.
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% Otherwise, the cure is the following incantation:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \icom{renewcommand}\verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\bfseries}|\\
-% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecleader}{\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftdotsep}}|\\
-% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecpagefont}{\bfseries}|
-% \end{verse}
-% To have the section entries in both the ToC and the minitocs in bold then
-% put the incantation in the preamble. To have only the minitoc section
-% entries in bold while the ToC entries are in the normal font,
-% put the incantation between the \com{tableofcontents}
-% command and the first \com{chapter} command.
-%
-% As \pack{tocloft} is a very powerful and useful package, these cures are worth to be added if you need the
-% benefits of this package. See also section~\vref{faq+memoir}.
-% \or\relax
-% (Cette\imess{I0047} réponse est donnée dans la documentation du paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}.)
-% Les paquetages \pack{tocloft} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) et \upack{minitoc} ont une fâcheuse
-% interaction\,\footnote{Découverte par \name{Lyndon}{Dudding}.}, qui, heureusement, peut être corrigée.
-% Dans le cours normal des choses, lorsque \upack{minitoc} est utilisé dans un document avec chapitres, il
-% composera les entrées de sections dans une fonte grasse. Si \pack{tocloft} est utilisé en conjonction avec
-% \upack{minitoc}, alors les entrées de sections dans les minitocs sont composées dans la fonte normale, sauf pour
-% les numéros de pages qui sont en fonte grasse, tandis que les entrées de sections dans la table des matières
-% principale sont entièrement en fonte normale.
-%
-% Un remède, si vous voulez que toutes des entrées de sections dans les minitocs soient en fonte normale, est de
-% placer:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \icom{renewcommand}\icom{mtcSfont}\verb|\renewcommand{\mtcSfont}{\normalfont\small}|
-% \end{verse}
-% ou:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \icom{mtcsetfont}\verb|\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\normalfont\small}|
-% \end{verse}
-% dans le préambule.
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% Sinon, le remède est l'incantation suivante:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \icom{renewcommand}\verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\bfseries}|\\
-% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecleader}{\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftdotsep}}|\\
-% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecpagefont}{\bfseries}|
-% \end{verse}
-% Pour que les entrées de sections dans la table des matières principale et dans les minitocs soient toutes en gras,
-% placez l'incantation dans le préambule. Pour que ces entrées soient en gras dans les minitocs mais en fonte
-% normale dans la table des matières principale, placez l'incantation entre la commande \com{tableofcontents} et
-% la première commande \com{chapter}.
-%
-% Puisque \pack{tocloft} est un paquetage très puissant et très utile, cela vaut la peine d'ajouter ces remèdes si
-% vous voulez profiter des avantages de ce paquetage. Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq+memoir}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% ^^A (22)
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \lneed{10}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Use with the \uclass{memoir} class}\iclass{memoir}\label{faq+memoir}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Utilisation avec la classe \uclass{memoir}}\iclass{memoir}\label{faq+memoir}
-% \fi
-% \SMMZZ{\lmess{E0028}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0032}\\\lmess{I0044}\\\lmess{M0001}}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} offers basically the functionnalities
-% of the \pack{appendix}, \pack{tocbibind}
-% and \pack{tocloft} packages (this class and these packages have the same author, \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}),
-% hence it has the same problems;
-% see above the available solutions (sections~\vref{faq+appendix},
-% \vref{special.entries}, and~\vref{faq+tocloft} respectively).
-% If your version of the \class{memoir} class is recent, the syntax of the \com{chapter} command is
-% different and the \class{memoir} class \emph{could be no more compatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package, but a
-% patch is inserted to fix the problem. Hopefully, if your version of the \class{memoir} class
-% is more recent than 2005/09/25, the patch is no more necessary.
-%
-% If you are using the \class{memoir} class (or the \pack{tocloft} package),
-% the \com{mtcsetfont} command has no effect (\com{mtcsettitlefont} works); you should use the font
-% commands which are specific of the \class{memoir} class (or of the \pack{tocloft} package).
-%
-% If you still want to use the \com{mtcsetfont} commands while using the \class{memoir} class (or of the
-% \pack{tocloft} package), you must disable the \class{memoir}/\pack{tocloft} font commands. This is done by
-% the following commands:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|\let\cftpartfont\relax|\\
-% \verb|\let\cftchapterfont\relax|\\
-% \verb|\let\cftsectionfont\relax|\\
-% \verb|\let\cftsubsectionfont\relax|\\
-% \verb|\let\cftsubsubsectionfont\relax|\\
-% \verb|\let\cftparagraphfont\relax|\\
-% \verb|\let\cftsubparagraphfont\relax|\\
-% \verb|\let\cftfigurefont\relax|\\
-% \verb|\let\cftsubfigurefont\relax|\\
-% \verb|\let\cfttablefont\relax|\\
-% \verb|\let\cftsubtablefont\relax|
-% \end{quote}
-% \or\relax
-% La classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} offre essentiellement les fonctionnalités des
-% paquetages \pack{appendix}, \pack{tocbibind} et \pack{tocloft} (cette classe et ces paquetages ont
-% le même auteur, \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}),
-% et donc elle a les mêmes problèmes; voir ci-dessus les solutions disponibles (sections~\vref{faq+appendix},
-% \vref{special.entries} et~\vref{faq+tocloft} respectivement).
-% Si votre version de la classe \class{memoir} est récente, la syntaxe de la commande \com{chapter}
-% est différente et la classe \class{memoir} \emph{pourrait n'être plus compatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc},
-% mais une modification est insérée pour corriger le problème. Heureusement, si votre version de la classe \class{memoir}
-% est plus récente que 2005/09/25, la correction n'est plus nécessaire.
-%
-% Si vous utilisez la classe \class{memoir} (ou le paquetage \pack{tocloft}), la commande \com{mtcsetfont}
-% n'a aucun effet (\com{mtcsettitlefont} fonctionne); vous devriez utiliser les commandes de fontes qui
-% sont spécifiques de la classe \class{memoir} (ou du paquetage \pack{tocloft}).
-%
-% Si vous souhaitez quand même utiliser les commandes \com{mtcsetfont} tout en utilisant la classe \class{memoir}
-% (ou le paquetage \pack{tocloft}), vous devez désactiver les commandes de fontes de \class{memoir}/\pack{tocloft}.
-% Ceci peut être fait par les commandes suivantes:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|\let\cftpartfont\relax|\\
-% \verb|\let\cftchapterfont\relax|\\
-% \verb|\let\cftsectionfont\relax|\\
-% \verb|\let\cftsubsectionfont\relax|\\
-% \verb|\let\cftsubsubsectionfont\relax|\\
-% \verb|\let\cftparagraphfont\relax|\\
-% \verb|\let\cftsubparagraphfont\relax|\\
-% \verb|\let\cftfigurefont\relax|\\
-% \verb|\let\cftsubfigurefont\relax|\\
-% \verb|\let\cfttablefont\relax|\\
-% \verb|\let\cftsubtablefont\relax|
-% \end{quote}
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% ^^A (23)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{There are too many commands for fonts, titles, and depths}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Il y a trop de commandes pour les fontes, les titres et les profondeurs}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Since version \#41, the \com{mtcsetfont} and \com{mtcsettitlefont} commands are available. You do not need anymore
-% to know \com{mtcSSSfont}, \com{ptifont}, etc.
-% \or\relax
-% Depuis la version \#41, les commandes \com{mtcsetfont} et \com{mtcsettitlefont} sont disponibles. Vous
-% n'avez plus besoin de connaître \com{mtcSSSfont}, \com{ptifont}, etc.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Since version \#42, the \com{mtcsettitle} command is available.
-% You do not need anymore to know \com{mtctitle}, \com{slttitle}, etc.
-% \or\relax
-% Depuis la version \#42, la commande \com{mtcsettitle} est disponible.
-% Vous n'avez plus besoin de connaître \com{mtctitle}, \com{slttitle}, etc.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Since version \#43, the \com{mtcsetdepth} command is available.
-% You do not need anymore to know the counters \dcnt{minitocdepth}, \dcnt{sectlotdepth}, etc.
-% \or\relax
-% Depuis la version \#43, la commande \com{mtcsetdepth} est disponible.
-% n'avez plus besoin de connaître les compteurs \dcnt{minitocdepth}, \dcnt{sectlotdepth}, etc.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% ^^A (24)
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section[Compatibility with the \texorpdfstring{\AmS}{\emph{AmS}} document classes]%
-% {Compatibility with the {\AmS} document classes}\label{s+AMS}
-% This problem has been pointed out by \name{Henri}{Massias}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section[Compatibilité avec les classes de document de l'\texorpdfstring{\AmS}{\emph{AmS}}]%
-% {Compatibilité avec les classes de document de l'{\AmS}}\label{s+AMS}
-% Ce problème a été signalé par \name{Henri}{Massias}.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Unfortunately, the \SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{I0041}}\class{amsart}
-% and \class{amsproc} document classes are
-% \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}.
-% The \class{amsbook} document class requires the insertion of commands if you want
-% a list of figures and/or a list of tables:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{listoffigures}\\
-% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb| % added|\\
-% \com{listoftables}\\
-% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb| % added|
-% \end{verse}
-% \or\relax
-% Malheureusement, les classes de document \SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{I0041}}\class{amsart}
-% et \class{amsproc} sont \emph{incompatibles} avec \upack{minitoc}.
-% La classe de document \class{amsbook} requiert l'insertion de commandes si vous désirez
-% une liste des figures et/ou une liste des tableaux:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{listoffigures}\\
-% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb| % ajout|\\
-% \com{listoftables}\\
-% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb| % ajout|
-% \end{verse}
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% ^^A (25)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Hiding some entries from the main table of contents}\label{faq.25}%
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Cacher certaines entrées dans la table des matières principale}\label{faq.25}%
-% \fi
-% \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}
-% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% It is a problem similar to that of section~\vref{faq.19}.
-% An example is having a local table of contents for a chapter (\com{minitoc}) whose entries should not appear in
-% the main table of contents. Just use the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{chapter}\texttt{\{}\emph{Title}\texttt{\}}\\
-% \texttt{\bs begin\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{level}\texttt{]}\\
-% \com{minitoc}\\
-% \com{section}\texttt{\{}\emph{sub-title}\texttt{\}}\\
-% .{}.{}.\\
-% \texttt{\bs end\{mtchideinmaintoc\}}
-% \end{quote}
-% This environment accepts an optional numeric argument, which is the depth of hiding in the main toc (default:
-% \texttt{-1}, complete hiding).
-% You can look at the \exam{mtc-apx.tex} example file:\label{mtc-apx.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% C'est un problème similaire à~celui de la section~\vref{faq.19}.
-% Un exemple est d'avoir une table des matières locale pour un chapitre (\com{minitoc}) dont les entrées ne
-% doivent pas apparaître dans la table des matières principale. Utilisez simplement l'environnement
-% \env{mtchideinmaintoc}:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{chapter}\texttt{\{}\emph{Titre}\texttt{\}}\\
-% \texttt{\bs begin\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{niveau}\texttt{]}\\
-% \com{minitoc}\\
-% \com{section}\texttt{\{}\emph{sous-titre}\texttt{\}}\\
-% .{}.{}.\\
-% \texttt{\bs end\{mtchideinmaintoc\}}
-% \end{quote}
-% Cet environnement accepte un argument optionnel numérique, qui est la profondeur de masquage dans la table des
-% matières principale (par défaut: \texttt{-1}, masquage complet). Vous pouvez regarder le fichier d'exemple
-% \exam{mtc-apx.tex}:\label{mtc-apx.tex}
-% \fi
-% \end{environment}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-apx>
-\documentclass[oneside]{book}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-apx.tex}%
- [2007/03/22]%
-\usepackage{lipsum} % provides filling text
-\usepackage{tocbibind} % adds some entries in the main TOC.
-\usepackage[tight,listfiles]{minitoc}
-\setcounter{minitocdepth}{3} \setcounter{parttocdepth}{3}
-\begin{document}
-\doparttoc \dominitoc % prepare the mini-tables
-\tableofcontents
-\mtcaddchapter % because tocbibind adds a chapter entry in the TOC
-\chapter{First}
-\minitoc
-First chapter
-\section{First section} \lipsum[1]
-\section{Second section} \lipsum[2]
-\chapter{Second}
-\minitoc
-Second
-\section{First section of second chapter} \lipsum[3]
-\section{Second section of second chapter} \lipsum[4]
-\appendix % begins the appendices
-\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{Appendices} % adds a part entry in the TOC
-\adjustptc % fixes the parttoc counter ptc
-\mtcsettitle{parttoc}{List of Appendices} % changes the parttoc title
-\parttoc % adds a partial toc for the appendices
-\begin{mtchideinmaintoc}[-1] % hides the details of the appendices in the main TOC,
-% % but chapter-level entries would be still visible in the main TOC
-% % if you use 0 in place of -1 as optional argument.
-\chapter{First appendix}
-\minitoc
-First appendix
-\section{First section} \lipsum[5]
-\section{Second section} \lipsum[6]
-\chapter{Second appendix}
-\minitoc
-Second appendix
-\section{First section of second appendix} \lipsum[7]
-\section{Second section of second appendix} \lipsum[8]
-\end{mtchideinmaintoc} % end of hiding
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-apx>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlof}
-% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Of course, the environments \env{mtchideinmainlof}
-% and \env{mtchideinmainlot} are also available, to hide some entries in the main
-% list of figures or of tables.
-%
-% Note\virage{} that the position of the end of these environments must be adjusted to include a page break (like
-% the one done by a \com{chapter} command), else the restore command might be inserted too early into the
-% \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} or \suffix{.lot} file. There is an example file
-% (\exam{mtc-hi1.tex}):\label{mtc-hi1.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% Bien sûr, les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot} sont aussi disponibles, pour
-% masquer certaines entrées dans la liste principale des figures ou des tableaux.
-%
-% Notez\virage{} que la position de la fin de ces environnements doit être ajustée pour inclure un saut de page
-% (comme celui fait par une commande \com{chapter}), sinon la commande de restauration pourrait être insérée
-% trop tôt dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} ou \suffix{.lot}. Voici un fichier d'exemple
-% (\exam{mtc-hi1.tex}):\label{mtc-hi1.tex}
-% \fi
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{environment}
-% \raggedcolumns
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-hi1>
-\documentclass{report}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-hi1.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]%
-\usepackage%
- [tight,listfiles]{minitoc}
-\begin{document}
-\dominilof \listoffigures
-\dominilot \listoftables
-\chapter{First}
-\minilof \minilot
-\begin{figure}
-\caption{AAAA1}
-\end{figure}
-\begin{figure}
-\caption{AAAA2}
-\end{figure}
-\begin{table}
-\caption{TAAAA1}
-\end{table}
-\begin{table}
-\caption{TAAAA2}
-\end{table}
-\chapter{Second}
-\minilof \minilot
-%%----------------------
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We begin the hiding of figure entries in the list of figures and of table entries in the list of tables.
-% In this document, we use the environment forms.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous commençons le masquage des entrées de figures dans la liste des figures et des entrées de tableaux dans la
-% liste des tableaux. Dans ce document, nous utilisons les formes environnements.
-% \fi
-% \raggedcolumns
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{mtchideinmainlof}
-\begin{mtchideinmainlot}
-\begin{figure}
-\caption{BBBB1}
-\end{figure}
-\begin{figure}
-\caption{BBBB2}
-\end{figure}
-\begin{table}
-\caption{TBBBB1}
-\end{table}
-\begin{table}
-\caption{TBBBB2}
-\end{table}
-\chapter{Third}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \lneed{3}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We terminate the hiding of figure entries in the list of figures and of table entries in the list of tables.
-% In this document, we use the environment forms.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous terminons le masquage des entrées de figures dans la liste des figures et des entrées de tableaux dans la
-% liste des tableaux. Dans ce document, nous utilisons les formes environnements.
-% \fi
-% \raggedcolumns
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\end{mtchideinmainlot}
-\end{mtchideinmainlof}
-%%----------------------
-\minilof \minilot
-\begin{figure}
-\caption{CCCC1}
-\end{figure}
-\begin{figure}
-\caption{CCCC2}
-\end{figure}
-\begin{table}
-\caption{TCCCC1}
-\end{table}
-\begin{table}
-\caption{TCCCC2}
-\end{table}
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-hi1>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \end{multicols}}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtchideinmainlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtchideinmainlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\endmtchideinmainlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\endmtchideinmainlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% But\virage{} it is also possible to use \emph{commands} in place of these environments:
-% you place a \com{mtchideinmainlof}
-% (or \com{mtchideinmainlot}) command in the first figure (or table) to
-% hide, \emph{before} its caption and a \com{endmtchideinmainlof} (or \com{endmtchideinmainlot}) command at the end of
-% the last figure (or table) to hide, \emph{after} its caption, like in this example file
-% (\exam{mtc-hi2.tex}):\label{mtc-hi2.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% Mais\virage{} il est aussi possible d'utiliser des \emph{commandes} à~la place de ces environnements: vous placez une
-% commande \com{mtchideinmainlof} (ou \com{mtchideinmainlot}) dans
-% la première figure (ou table) à~masquer, \emph{avant} son caption et une commande \com{endmtchideinmainlof}
-% (ou \com{endmtchideinmainlot}) à~la fin de la dernière figure (ou table) à~masquer, \emph{après} son caption,
-% comme dans cet exemple de fichier (\exam{mtc-hi2.tex}):\label{mtc-hi2.tex}
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-hi2>
-\documentclass{report}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-hi2.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]
-\usepackage%
- [tight,listfiles]{minitoc}
-\begin{document}
-\dominilof \listoffigures
-\dominilot \listoftables
-\chapter{First}
-\minilof \minilot
-\begin{figure}
-\caption{AAAA1}
-\end{figure}
-\begin{figure}
-\caption{AAAA2}
-\end{figure}
-\begin{table}
-\caption{TAAAA1}
-\end{table}
-\begin{table}
-\caption{TAAAA2}
-\end{table}
-\chapter{Second}
-\minilof \minilot
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\virage{} begin the hiding of figure entries in the list of figures and of table entries in the list of tables.
-% In this document, we use the command forms: a command is inserted \emph{before} the caption of the first ``hidden''
-% entry.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\virage{} commençons le masquage des entrées de figures dans la liste des figures et des entrées de tableaux dans la
-% liste des tableaux. Dans ce document, nous utilisons les formes commandes: une commande est insérée \emph{avant}
-% le caption de la \emph{première} entrée «~masquée~».
-% \fi
-% \raggedcolumns
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{figure}
-\mtchideinmainlof % <--
-\caption{BBBB1}
-\end{figure}
-\begin{figure}
-\caption{BBBB2}
-\endmtchideinmainlof % <--
-\end{figure}
-\begin{table}
-\mtchideinmainlot % <--
-\caption{TBBBB1}
-\end{table}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \lneed{3}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\virage{} terminate the hiding of figure entries in the list of figures and of table entries in the list of tables.
-% In this document, we use the command forms: a command is inserted \emph{after} the caption of the \emph{last} ``hidden''
-% entry.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\virage{} terminons le masquage des entrées de figures dans la liste des figures et des entrées de tableaux dans la
-% liste des tableaux. Dans ce document, nous utilisons les formes commandes: une commande est insérée \emph{après}
-% le caption de la \emph{dernière} entrée «~masquée~».
-% \fi
-% \raggedcolumns
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{table}
-\caption{TBBBB2}
-\endmtchideinmainlot % <--
-\end{table}
-\chapter{Third}
-\minilof \minilot
-\begin{figure}
-\caption{CCCC1}
-\end{figure}
-\begin{figure}
-\caption{CCCC2}
-\end{figure}
-\begin{table}
-\caption{TCCCC1}
-\end{table}
-\begin{table}
-\caption{TCCCC2}
-\end{table}
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-hi2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \flushcolumns
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This method, recommended while more delicate to apply, is much more reliable in delimiting the hiding domain:
-% it solves the problem of the asynchronism between the writing of floats and the writing of the normal text.
-% \or\relax
-% Cette méthode, recommandée bien que plus délicate à~appliquer, est bien plus fiable dans la délimitation du domaine de
-% masquage: elle résout le problème de l'asynchronisme entre l'écriture des éléments flottants et celle du texte normal.
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (26)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Defining your own \usuffix{.mld} file}\label{faq.26}\isuffix{.mld}%
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Définir votre propre fichier \usuffix{.mld}}\label{faq.26}\isuffix{.mld}%
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% First, you should not directly modify one of the distributed \suffix{.mld} and \suffix{.mlo} files.
-% The simplest way to alter some
-% title is to redefine the corresponding command via \com{renewcommand} or better via
-% \com{mtcsettitle}.
-% If you really want to have your own \suffix{.mld} file, you copy an existing \suffix{.mld} file
-% into one with a new name (not
-% the name of a distributed \suffix{.mld} file). Then you modify this new \suffix{.mld} file and you can use it via
-% \com{mtcselectlanguage}. You can always contact me to add this new \suffix{.mld} file to the
-% distribution. These remarks apply also to the \emph{language}\usuffix{[.mld--.mlo]} pairs of language definition files.
-% \or\relax
-% Tout d'abord, vous ne devriez pas modifier directement l'un des fichiers \suffix{.mld} et \suffix{.mlo} de la
-% distribution. La
-% manière la plus simple de modifier un certain titre est de redéfinir la commande correspondante via
-% \com{renewcommand} ou mieux, via \com{mtcsettitle}. Si vous souhaitez vraiment avoir votre propre fichier
-% \suffix{.mld}, vous copiez un fichier \suffix{.mld} existant vers un fichier portant un nouveau nom
-% (pas le nom d'un fichier \suffix{.mld} de la distribution). Puis vous modifiez ce nouveau fichier \suffix{.mld} et
-% vous pourrez l'utiliser via \com{mtcselectlanguage}. Vous pouvez toujours me contacter pour ajouter ce nouveau
-% fichier \suffix{.mld} à~la distribution. Ces remarques s'appliquent aussi aux paires
-% \emph{langue}\isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{[.mld--.mlo]} de fichiers de définition de langues.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% ^^A (27)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Use with the \upack{abstract} package}\label{faq.27}\ipack{abstract}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{abstract}}\label{faq.27}\ipack{abstract}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{environment}{abstract}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If the \pack{abstract} package~\cite{abstract}\imess{I0040} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), is used with its
-% \optp{addtotoc}{abstract} option, a ``{Abstract}'' entry is added to the table of contents,
-% as a starred chapter if the document class defines \com{chapter}, else as a starred section.
-% This problem is detected by the \optd{hints} option and you should add
-% a \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[]| or a \com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[]|
-% command after your \env{abstract} environment.
-% \or\relax
-% Lorsque le paquetage \pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract}\imess{I0040} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), est utilisé avec son option
-% \optp{addtotoc}{abstract}, une entrée «~{Abstract}~» (ou similaire) est ajoutée dans la table des
-% matières, comme un chapitre étoilé si la classe du document définit \com{chapter}, sinon comme une section
-% étoilée. Ce problème est détecté par l'option \optd{hints} et vous devriez ajouter une commande
-% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[]| ou \com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[]| après votre environnement \env{abstract}.
-% \fi
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% ^^A (28)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Use with the \upack{sectsty} package}\label{faq.28}\ipack{sectsty}
-% If the \pack{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} (by \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) is used, it must be loaded \emph{before}
-% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course,
-% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{sectsty}}\label{faq.28}\ipack{sectsty}
-% Si le paquetage \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} (de \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) est utilisé, il doit être chargé
-% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr,
-% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (29)
-% \lneed{15}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Strange alignment in the minitocs}\label{faq.29}
-% \emph{In minitocs, subsections titles are not aligned with sections, as they are in the main table of contents.}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Alignement bizarre dans les minitocs}\label{faq.29}
-% \emph{Dans les minitocs, les titres des sous-sections ne sont pas alignés avec les sections,
-% alors qu'ils le sont dans la table des matières principale.}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\l@part}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@subsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@subsubsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@paragraph}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@subparagraph}
-% \begin{macro}{\renewcommand}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax %
-% The entries of a table of contents are formatted via internal commands like
-% \com{l@part}, \com{l@chapter}, \com{l@section}, etc.
-%
-% The ``part'' and ``chapter'' levels (and ``section'' for an article) use
-% specific commands which are somewhat complex for a more elaborated formatting.
-% For the ``section'' (in the \class{report} and \class{book} classes) and lower levels,
-% these commands are (\class{book} class, \xfile{book.cls}) by default:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \icom{renewcommand*}\icom{l@section}\icom{@dottedtocline}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}|\\
-% \icom{l@subsection}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}}|\\
-% \icom{l@subsubsection}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}}|\\
-% \icom{l@paragraph}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{10em}{5em}}|\\
-% \icom{l@subparagraph}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{12em}{6em}}|
-% \end{quote}
-% which will be applied in the main table of contents and in the minitocs. The
-% arguments of \com{@dottedtocline} are
-% \begin{enumerate}[1)]
-% \item the logical depth (which will be compared to \dcnt{tocdepth} or \dcnt{minitocdepth}).
-% \item the indentation.
-% \item the width reserved for the section/subsection/\ldots\ number.
-% \end{enumerate}
-% In the standard \class{book}, \class{report} and \class{article} classes~\cite{classes}, the dimensions
-% (second and third arguments) are given in ``em'' units, and this unit
-% depends on the current font. In the main table of contents,
-% the section and subsection entries are witten in the \emph{same} font, hence
-% usually the alignment is correct. But in the minitocs, the section entries
-% are written in a bold font while the subsection entries are written in
-% a non bold font (the default font choices are given in table~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), hence one ``em'' has
-% different sizes in these two fonts and the alignement is changed.
-%
-% There are several solutions:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Redefine the \com{l@section} \ldots{} \com{l@subparagraph} commands
-% to use font independent units (pt, mm, pc, etc.). This
-% redefinition must be performed in a package or via a command defined by a package or between \com{makeatletter}
-% and \com{makeatother}, because these commands have a~\verb|@| in
-% their names; you must use \com{renewcommand*} to redefine
-% these commands.
-% \item Use\virage{} the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft} to change the indentation, with
-% font independent units. But then see \emph{also} section~\vref{faq+tocloft}.
-% \item Use the same font for the section and subsection entries
-% in the minitocs, using the \com{mtcsetfont} command (see section~\vref{s+simp-font-commands}) or
-% redefining the \com{mtcSfont}, \com{mtcSSfont}, \com{mtcSSSfont},
-% \com{mtcPfont} and \com{mtcSPfont} commands (see table~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), or similar.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \or\relax
-%
-% Les entrées d'une table des matières sont mises en forme par des commandes internes telles que
-% \com{l@part}, \com{l@chapter}, \com{l@section}, etc.
-%
-% Les niveaux «~partie~» et «~chapitre~» (et «~section~» pour un article) utilisent des
-% commandes spécifiques qui sont assez complexes pour une mise en forme plus élaborée.
-% Pour les niveaux «~section~» (dans les classes \class{report} et \class{book}) et inférieurs,
-% ces commandes sont (class \class{book}, \xfile{book.cls}) par défaut:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \icom{renewcommand*}\icom{l@section}\icom{@dottedtocline}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}|\\
-% \icom{l@subsection}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}}|\\
-% \icom{l@subsubsection}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}}|\\
-% \icom{l@paragraph}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{10em}{5em}}|\\
-% \icom{l@subparagraph}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{12em}{6em}}|
-% \end{quote}
-% qui seront appliquées dans la table des matières principale et dans les minitocs. Les
-% arguments de \com{@dottedtocline} sont
-% \begin{enumerate}[1)]
-% \item la profondeur logique (qui sera comparée à~\dcnt{tocdepth} ou \dcnt{minitocdepth});
-% \item l'indentation;
-% \item la largeur réservée pour le numéro de section/sous-section/\ldots
-% \end{enumerate}
-% Dans les classes standard \class{book}, \class{report} et \class{article}~\cite{classes}, les dimensions
-% (deuxième et troisième arguments) sont données en unités «~em~», et cette unité
-% dépend de la fonte courante. Dans la table des matières principale, les entrées de sections et de sous-sections
-% sont écrites dans la \emph{même} fonte, donc normalement l'alignement est correct. Mais dans les
-% minitocs, les entrées pour les sections sont écrites dans une fonte grasse tandis que celles des sous-sections
-% sont écrites dans une fonte non grasse (les choix par défaut pour ces fontes sont donnés dans
-% le tableau~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), donc un «~em~» a des tailles différentes
-% dans ces deux fontes et l'alignement est altéré.
-%
-% Il y a plusieurs solutions:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Redéfinir les commandes \com{l@section} \ldots{} \com{l@subparagraph} pour utiliser
-% des unités indépendantes de la fonte (pt, mm, pc, etc.). Cette
-% redéfinition doit être effectuée dans un paquetage ou via une commande définie dans un paquetage
-% ou entre \com{makeatletter}
-% et \com{makeatother}, puisque ces commandes contiennent un~\verb|@| dans leurs noms;
-% vous devez utiliser \com{renewcommand*} pour redéfinir ces commandes.
-% \item Utiliser\virage{} le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft} pour changer l'indentation, avec des unités
-% indépendantes de la fonte. Mais alors regardez \emph{aussi} la section~\vref{faq+tocloft}.
-% \item Utiliser la même fonte pour les entrées de sections et de sous-sections dans les minitocs,
-% en utilisant la commande \com{mtcsetfont} (voir la section~\vref{s+simp-font-commands}) ou
-% en redéfinissant les commandes \com{mtcSfont}, \com{mtcSSfont}, \com{mtcSSSfont},
-% \com{mtcPfont} et \com{mtcSPfont} (voir le tableau~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), ou analogues.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Useful precautions with starred sectionning commands}\label{faq.30}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item The\virage{} headers are not modified by \com{part*}, \com{chapter*} or \com{section*};
-% it is \emph{necessary} to use \com{markboth} or \com{markright} to get correct page headers for
-% the current and following pages.
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item If\virage{} you need an entry in the table of contents for a \com{chapter*} or a \com{section*} command, you
-% must use \com{mtcaddchapter}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]} or \com{mtcaddsection}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]}
-% \emph{after} the starred sectionning command.
-% If you need an entry in the table of contents for a \com{part*} command, the page number in the
-% table of contents would be wrong, because \com{part*} implies a \com{clearpage} or a
-% \com{cleardoublepage} before the first page of the part. Use the sequence
-% \begin{quote}\small
-% \com{cleardoublepage}\verb| % \clearpage if openany option.|\\
-% \com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\
-% \com{part*}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|
-% \end{quote}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Précautions utiles avec les commandes de sectionnement étoilées}\label{faq.30}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Les\virage{} en-têtes ne sont pas modifiés par \com{part*}, \com{chapter*} ou \com{section*};
-% il est \emph{nécessaire} d'utiliser \com{markboth} ou \com{markright} pour obtenir des en-têtes de
-% pages corrects pour la page courante et les suivantes.
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item Si\virage{} vous désirez une entrée dans la table des matières pour une commande \com{chapter*} ou
-% \com{section*} command, vous devez utiliser \com{mtcaddchapter}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]} ou
-% \com{mtcaddsection}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]} \emph{après} la commande de sectionnement étoilée.
-% Si vous désirez une entrée dans la table des matières pour une commande pour une commande \com{part*},
-% le numéro de page dans la table des matières serait erroné, car \com{part*} implique une commande
-% \com{clearpage} ou \com{cleardoublepage} avant la première page de la partie. Utilisez la
-% séquence
-% \begin{quote}\small
-% \com{cleardoublepage}\verb| % \clearpage si option openany.|\\
-% \com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\
-% \com{part*}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|
-% \end{quote}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (31)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Use with packages for captions}\label{faq.31}
-% If\SMM{\lmess{W0033}\\\lmess{W0034}\\\lmess{W0035}\\\lmess{W0036}}
-% one of the \pack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung},
-% \pack{caption2}\footnote{This package is obsolete; now use a recent
-% version of the
-% \upack{caption} package.}~\cite{caption2}, (both written by \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}),
-% \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), or
-% \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} (by \xname{Stephan}{Hennig}), packages is used,
-% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package, because such packages alter (redefine) the
-% commands listing figures and tables. Of course, the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Utilisation avec des paquetages pour les captions}\label{faq.31}\ipack{caption}\ipack{caption2}\ipack{ccaption}\ipack{mcaption}
-% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0033}\\\lmess{W0034}\\\lmess{W0035}\\\lmess{W0036}}i
-% l'un des paquetages \pack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung},
-% \pack{caption2}\,\footnote{Ce paquetage est obsolète; utilisez
-% maintenant une version récente du paquetage \upack{caption}.}~\cite{caption2}, (qui ont tous deux été écrits
-% par \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}),
-% \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} (écrit par \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), ou
-% \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} (écrit par \xname{Stephan}{Hennig}), est utilisé,
-% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car de tels paquetages altèrent (redéfinissent)
-% les commandes de listage des figures et tableaux. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (32)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Bad interaction \upack{minitoc/hyperref/memoir}}\ipack{hyperref}\iclass{memoir}\label{faq.32}
-% When the \upack{minitoc} and \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web} packages are used in a document
-% of class \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3},
-% the chapter header ``Chapter'' does not appear on the first page of the chapter.
-%
-% This problem is fixed in version~\#44 of \upack{minitoc}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Mauvaise interaction \upack{minitoc/hyperref/memoir}}\ipack{hyperref}\iclass{memoir}\label{faq.32}
-% Lorsque les paquetages \upack{minitoc} et \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web} sont utilisés dans un document
-% dont la classe est \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}, l'en-tête de chapitre «~Chapitre~» n'apparaît pas
-% sur la première page du chapitre.
-%
-% Ce problème est corrigé dans la version~\#44 de \upack{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (33)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Use with the \upack{varsects} package}\label{faq.33}\ipack{varsects}
-% If the \pack{varsects} package~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} (by \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin})
-% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before}
-% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course,
-% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{varsects}}\label{faq.33}\ipack{varsects}
-% Si le paquetage \pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} (de \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}) est utilisé,
-% il doit être chargé
-% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr,
-% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (34)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Initial font settings}\label{faq.34}
-% The setting of the fonts in the mini-tables is a rather complex problem. If we take the parttocs as an example,
-% there is a \com{ptcfont} font-command which is used for two purposes\footnote{The same remarks apply
-% to the other mini-tables.}:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item First, to be used as default value for some other font-commands (like \com{ptcSPfont}). As its
-% default value is used in the initialization of the \upack{minitoc} package, the value of these other
-% commands is \emph{not altered} if you modify \com{ptcfont}. You must modify these commands one at a
-% time.
-% \item Second, it is invoked at the beginning of each parttoc, partlof or partlot to set an initial font command.
-% Then each entry of the mini-table calls its own font command (like \com{ptcSPfont}). Thus, if you
-% modify \com{ptcfont}, you can obtain a global effect on the fonts in the parttocs, partlofs, and
-% partlots. So you can play with the various parameters of the fonts (family, shape, series, size), if
-% you want fancy mini-tables; but it is rather difficult.
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% In\Virage{} the initialization of the \upack{minitoc} package, we have a sequence of commands:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \icom{let}\icom{ptcfont}\icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont % (subsections)|\\
-% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont % (subsubsections)|\\
-% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|\let\ptcPfont\ptcfont % (paragraphs)|\\
-% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|\let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont % (subparagraphs)|\\
-% \icom{plffont}\verb|\let\plffont\ptcfont % (figures)|\\
-% \icom{plfSfont}\verb|\let\plfSfont\ptcfont % (subfigures)|\\
-% \icom{pltfont}\verb|\let\pltfont\ptcfont % (tables)|\\
-% \icom{pltSfont}\verb|\let\pltSfont\ptcfont % (subtables)|
-% \end{quote}
-% to define some default fonts. But this sequence is executed only once. If you alter \com{ptcfont}, the modification is
-% not applied to these font commands. The command \com{ptcfont} is invoked at the beginning of each parttoc.
-% \com{ptcCfont} is invoked for each chapter entry in a parttoc (\com{ptcSfont} for each section entry, etc.).
-% So \com{ptcfont} can be used to define some global characteristics for the fonts in the parttocs, while
-% \com{ptcCfont} (etc.) can be used to customize the fonts for each level of entries.
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Note that if you say:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \icom{let}\icom{ptcfont}\icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont % (subsections)|\\
-% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont % (subsubsections)|\\
-% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|\let\ptcPfont\ptcfont % (paragraphs)|\\
-% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|\let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont % (subparagraphs)|\\
-% \icom{plffont}\verb|\let\plffont\ptcfont % (figures)|\\
-% \icom{plfSfont}\verb|\let\plfSfont\ptcfont % (subfigures)|\\
-% \icom{pltfont}\verb|\let\pltfont\ptcfont % (tables)|\\
-% \icom{pltSfont}\verb|\let\pltSfont\ptcfont % (subtables)|
-% \end{quote}
-% after loading the \upack{minitoc} package, these font commands will be ``associated'' to \com{ptcfont}, hence if you
-% modify \com{ptcfont} (by via \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{*}{...}| or \com{renewcommand}), they will follow the
-% modification. But if you modify one of these commands via \com{renewcommand} or
-% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{subsection}{...}| (\texttt{subsection} is an example),
-% the association is broken. But you could be more clever by saying something like
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{subsection}{\ptcfont\itshape}|
-% \end{quote}
-% to preserve the association and modify only some parameters of a minitoc font command.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% For levels above subsection (part, chapter and section), the fonts a more specific in general, but you can, of course,
-% say something like \ucom{def}\com{ptcCfont}\verb|{|\com{ptcfont}\verb|}| to make a similar association.
-% You can even make other associations, like this:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|% for high sectionning levels:|\\
-% \icom{def}\verb| \def\highlevelsfont{\rmfamily\bfseries\normalsize\upshape}|\\
-% \verb|% for low sectionning levels:|\\
-% \verb| \def\lowlevelsfont{\rmfamily\mdseries\smallsize\upshape}|\\
-% \verb|% then for each level:|\\
-% \icom{ptcCfont}\verb| \def\ptcCfont{\highlevelsfont}|\\
-% \icom{ptcSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSfont{\highlevelsfont}|\\
-% \icom{ptcSSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSSfont{\lowlevelsfont}|\\
-% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSSSfont{\lowlevelsfont}|\\
-% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb| \def\ptcPfont{\lowlevelsfont\itshape}|\\
-% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb| \def\ptcSPfont{\lowlevelsfont\itshape}|
-% \end{quote}
-% Then you can redefine \verb|\highlevelsfont| or \verb|\lowlevelsfont| to act on several fonts in one step, but you must
-% use \com{renewcommand}. You cannot act on \verb|\highlevelsfont| or \verb|\lowlevelsfont| with \com{mtcsetfont}.
-%
-% Note that only the fonts for parttocs are used in the examples above; but, of course, the situation is the same for
-% minitocs and secttocs. \verb|\highlevelsfont| and \verb|\lowlevelsfont| are macro names that you can choice, they are not
-% part of the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Choix initiaux des fontes}\label{faq.34}
-% Le choix des fontes dans les mini-tables est un problème assez compliqué. Si nous prenons par exemple les
-% parttocs, il y~a une commande de fonte \com{ptcfont} qui est utilisée dans deux buts\,\footnote{Les mêmes
-% remarques s'appliquent aux autres mini-tables.}:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Premièrement, pour être utilisée comme valeur par défaut pour quelques autres commandes de fontes (telles
-% que \com{ptcSPfont}). Comme sa valeur par défaut est utilisée dans l'initialisation du paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc}, la valeur de ces autres commandes \emph{n'est pas modifiée} si vous modifiez
-% \com{ptcfont}. Vous devez modifiez ces commandes une à~la fois.
-% \item Deuxièmement, elle est invoquée au début de chaque parttoc, partlof ou partlot pour établir une commande
-% de fonte initiale. Puis chaque entrée de la mini-table appelle sa propre commande de fonte (comme
-% \com{ptcSPfont}). Donc, si vous modifiez \com{ptcfont}, vous pouvez obtenir un effet global sur les
-% fontes dans les parttocs, partlofs et partlots. Vous pouvez ainsi jouer avec les divers paramètres des
-% fontes (famille, forme, graisse, taille), si vous voulez des mini-tables enjolivées; mais ceci est assez
-% difficile.
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% Dans\Virage{} l'initialisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, nous avons une séquence de commandes:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \icom{let}\icom{ptcfont}\icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont % (subsections)|\\
-% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont % (subsubsections)|\\
-% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|\let\ptcPfont\ptcfont % (paragraphs)|\\
-% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|\let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont % (subparagraphs)|\\
-% \icom{plffont}\verb|\let\plffont\ptcfont % (figures)|\\
-% \icom{plfSfont}\verb|\let\plfSfont\ptcfont % (subfigures)|\\
-% \icom{pltfont}\verb|\let\pltfont\ptcfont % (tables)|\\
-% \icom{pltSfont}\verb|\let\pltSfont\ptcfont % (subtables)|
-% \end{quote}
-% pour définir quelques fontes par défaut. Mais cette séquence n'est exécutée qu'une seule fois. Si vous altérez
-% \com{ptcfont}, la modification n'est pas appliquée à~ces commandes de fontes. La commande \com{ptcfont} est
-% invoquée au début de chaque parttoc. \com{ptcCfont} est invoquée pour chaque entrée de chapitre dans une parttoc
-% (\com{ptcSfont} pour chaque entrée de section, etc.). Ainsi \com{ptcfont} peut être utilisée pour définir
-% quelques caractéristiques globales pour les fontes dans les parttocs, tandis que \com{ptcCfont} (etc.) peuvent
-% être utilisées pour personnaliser les fontes pour chaque niveau d'entrées.
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Notez que si vous dites:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \icom{def}\icom{ptcfont}\icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|\def\ptcSSfont{\ptcfont} % (subsections)|\\
-% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|\def\ptcSSSfont{\ptcfont} % (subsubsections)|\\
-% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|\def\ptcPfont{\ptcfont} % (paragraphs)|\\
-% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|\def\ptcSPfont{\ptcfont} % (subparagraphs)|\\
-% \icom{plffont}\verb|\def\plffont{\ptcfont} % (figures)|\\
-% \icom{plfSfont}\verb|\def\plfSfont{\ptcfont} % (subfigures)|\\
-% \icom{pltfont}\verb|\def\pltfont{\ptcfont} % (tables)|\\
-% \icom{pltSfont}\verb|\def\pltSfont{\ptcfont} % (subtables)|
-% \end{quote}
-% après avoir chargé le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, ces commandes de fontes seront «~associées~» à~\com{ptcfont},
-% donc si vous modifiez \com{ptcfont} (par une commande \com{renewcommand} ou via \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{*}{...}|),
-% elles suivront la modification. Mais si vous modifiez l'une de ces commandes via
-% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{subsection}{...}| (\texttt{subsection} est un exemple) ou \com{renewcommand},
-% l'association est rompue. Mais vous pourriez agir plus subtilement en disant quelque chose comme
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{subsection}{\ptcfont\itshape}|
-% \end{quote}
-% pour préserver l'association et modifier seulement quelques paramètres d'une commande de fonte minitoc.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% Pour les niveaux au-dessus de la sous-section (partie, chapitre et section), les fontes sont plus spécifiques en
-% général, mais vous pouvez, bien sûr, utiliser une définition telle que
-% \ucom{def}\com{ptcCfont}\verb|{|\com{ptcfont}\verb|}| pour faire une
-% association similaire. Vous pouvez même faire d'autres associations, comme ceci:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|% pour les hauts niveaux de sectionnement:|\\
-% \icom{def}\verb| \def\highlevelsfont{\rmfamily\bfseries\normalsize\upshape}|\\
-% \verb|% pour les bas niveaux de sectionnement:|\\
-% \verb| \def\lowlevelsfont{\rmfamily\mdseries\smallsize\upshape}|\\
-% \verb|% puis pour chaque niveau:|\\
-% \icom{ptcCfont}\verb| \def\ptcCfont{\highlevelsfont}|\\
-% \icom{ptcSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSfont{\highlevelsfont}|\\
-% \icom{ptcSSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSSfont{\lowlevelsfont}|\\
-% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSSSfont{\lowlevelsfont}|\\
-% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb| \def\ptcPfont{\lowlevelsfont\itshape}|\\
-% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb| \def\ptcSPfont{\lowlevelsfont\itshape}|
-% \end{quote}
-% Puis vous pouvez redéfinir \verb|\highlevelsfont| ou \verb|\lowlevelsfont| pour agir sur plusieurs fontes en une
-% seule fois, mais vous devez utiliser \com{renewcommand}. Vous ne pouvez pas agir sur \verb|\highlevelsfont| ou
-% \verb|\lowlevelsfont| avec \com{mtcsetfont}.
-%
-% Notez que seules les fontes pour les parttocs ont été utilisées dans les exemples ci-dessus; mais, bien sûr, la
-% situation est la même pour les minitocs et les secttocs. \verb|\highlevelsfont| et \verb|\lowlevelsfont| sont des
-% noms de macros que vous pouvez choisir, ils ne font pas partie du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (35)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Use with the \KOMAScript{} classes}\label{faq.35}
-% If\imess{I0043} a \KOMAScript{} class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, compatible with \upack{minitoc} (\class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} or
-% \class{scrartcl}), is used, some class options may cause problems with the \upack{minitoc} package, because these
-% options add chapter or section entries in the table of contents. See section~\vref{special.entries}. Of course,
-% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Utilisation avec les classes \KOMAScript}\label{faq.35}
-% Si\imess{I0043} une classe \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, compatible avec \upack{minitoc} (\class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} ou
-% \class{scrartcl}), est utilisée, certaines options de la classe peuvent poser des problèmes avec le paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc}, car elles ajoutent des entrées de chapitre ou de section dans la table des matières. Voir la
-% section~\vref{special.entries}. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (36)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Use with the \uclass{jura} class or the \upack{alphanum} package}\label{faq.36}\iclass{jura}\ipack{alphanum}
-% The \class{jura}\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0029}\\\lmess{W0025}} class loads the \pack{alphanum} package,
-% which redefines the sectionning structure in a
-% non-standard way, after the loading of the \class{report} class.
-% This class and this package are \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Utilisation avec la classe \uclass{jura} ou le paquetage \upack{alphanum}}%
-% \label{faq.36}\iclass{jura}\ipack{alphanum}
-% La classe \class{jura}\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0029}\\\lmess{W0025}} charge le paquetage \pack{alphanum},
-% qui redéfinit la structure de sectionnement d'une
-% manière non-standard, après le chargement de la classe \class{report}.
-% Cette classe et ce paquetage sont \emph{incompatibles} avec \upack{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (37)
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \usuffix{.mld} files and the \upack{babel} package}\label{faq.37}\ipack{babel}\isuffix{.mld}
-% If you are using the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}, you can automatize the loading of the
-% \suffix{.mld} file by adding some code in the preamble of your document, like this:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{AtBeginDocument}\verb|{%|\\
-% \icom{addto}\icom{captions}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}\verb| \addto\captions|\emph{language1}\verb|{\mtcselectlanguage{|\emph{language2}\verb|}}}|
-% \end{quote}
-% where \emph{language1} is the language name for \pack{babel} and \emph{language2} the language name for
-% \upack{minitoc}; there are often identical, but there are exceptions (when you use a locally customized \suffix{.mld}
-% file, for instance).
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Les fichiers \usuffix{.mld} et le paquetage \upack{babel}}\label{faq.37}\ipack{babel}\isuffix{.mld}
-% Si vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}, vous pouvez automatiser le chargement du
-% fichier \suffix{.mld} en ajoutant du code dans le préambule de votre document, comme ceci:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{AtBeginDocument}\verb|{%|\\
-% \icom{addto}\icom{captions}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}\verb| \addto\captions|\emph{langue1}\verb|{\mtcselectlanguage{|\emph{langue2}\verb|}}}|
-% \end{quote}
-% où \emph{langue1} est le nom de langue pour \pack{babel} et \emph{langue2} le nom de langue pour \upack{minitoc};
-% ils sont souvent identiques, mais il y~a des exceptions (lorsque vous utilisez un fichier \suffix{.mld} adapté
-% localement, par exemple).
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (38)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Use with the \upack{fncychap} package}\label{faq.38}\ipack{fncychap}
-% If the \pack{fncychap} package~\cite{fncychap}\imess{W0086} (by \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren})
-% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before}
-% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course,
-% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{fncychap}}\label{faq.38}\ipack{fncychap}
-% Si le paquetage \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap}\imess{W0086} (de \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}) est utilisé,
-% il doit être chargé
-% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr,
-% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (39)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Use with the \upack{quotchap} package}\label{faq.39}\ipack{quotchap}
-% If the \pack{quotchap} package~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} (by \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld})
-% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before}
-% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course,
-% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{quotchap}}\label{faq.39}\ipack{quotchap}
-% Si le paquetage \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} (de \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}) est utilisé,
-% il doit être chargé
-% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr,
-% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (40)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Use with the \upack{romannum} package}\label{faq.40}\ipack{romannum}
-% If the \pack{romannum} package~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson})
-% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before}
-% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the numbering of
-% the sectionning commands. Of course,
-% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{romannum}}\label{faq.40}\ipack{romannum}
-% Si le paquetage \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) est utilisé,
-% il doit être chargé
-% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit)
-% la numérotation des commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr,
-% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (41)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Use with the \upack{sfheaders} package}\label{faq.41}\ipack{sfheaders}
-% If the \pack{sfheaders} package~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} (by \name{Maurizio}{Loreti})
-% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before}
-% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the
-% sectionning commands. Of course, the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{sfheaders}}\label{faq.41}\ipack{sfheaders}
-% Si le paquetage \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} (de \name{Maurizio}{Loreti}) est utilisé,
-% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit)
-% les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (42)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Use with the \upack{alnumsec} package}\label{faq.42}\ipack{alnumsec}
-% If the \pack{alnumsec} package~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} (by \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster})
-% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before}
-% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the
-% numbering of the sectionning commands. Of course, the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{alnumsec}}\label{faq.42}\ipack{alnumsec}
-% Si le paquetage \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} (de \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}) est utilisé,
-% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit)
-% la numérotation des commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (43)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Use with the \upack{captcont} package}\label{faq.43}\ipack{captcont}
-% If the \pack{captcont} package~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} (by \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran})
-% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before}
-% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the caption
-% commands. Of course, the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{captcont}}\label{faq.43}\ipack{captcont}
-% Si le paquetage \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} (de \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}) est utilisé,
-% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit)
-% les commandes pour les captions. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (44)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Vertical spaces (gaps) for parttocs, partlofs, and partlots titles}\label{faq.44}\index{gaps}
-% These vertical gaps were hard-coded like for the chapter
-% heads in the \class{book} and \class{report} document classes.
-% The values were 50pt and 40pt, but some users want
-% to adjust them for the titles of the part-level mini-tables.
-% Since version~\#45, these gaps are defined by \com{mtcgapbeforeheads}
-% and \com{mtcgapafterheads}, with these defaults values. These
-% commands apply globally to parttocs, partlofs and partlots.
-% They are \emph{commands}, \virage\emph{not} dimensions, so they must be
-% modified via \com{renewcommand} (but \emph{not} via \com{setlength}).
-% An example of use is given in the \exam{mtc-gap.tex} document file:\label{mtc-gap.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Espacements verticaux (\emph{gaps}) pour les titres des parttocs,
-% partlofs et partlots}\label{faq.44}\index{gaps}
-% Ces sauts verticaux (\emph{gaps}) étaient codés «~en dur~» comme pour
-% les têtes de chapitres dans les classes de document \class{book}
-% et \class{report}. Les valeurs étaient 50pt et 40pt, mais
-% certains utilisateurs désirent les ajuster pour les titres
-% des mini-tables au niveau partie.
-% Depuis la version~\#45, ces sauts sont définis par \com{mtcgapbeforeheads}
-% et \com{mtcgapafterheads}, avec ces valeurs par défaut.
-% Ces commandes s'appliquent globalement aux parttocs, partlofs et partlots.
-% Ce sont des \emph{commandes}, \virage\emph{pas} des dimensions,
-% donc elles doivent être modifiées via \com{renewcommand}
-% (mais \emph{pas} via \com{setlength}).
-% Un exemple d'utilisation est donné dans le fichier document \exam{mtc-gap.tex}:\label{mtc-gap.tex}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-gap>
-\documentclass[a4paper,oneside,12pt]{book}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-gap.tex}[2007/01/04]%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We use the \pack{vruler} package (by \name{Zhuhan}{Jiang}) to display a vertical ruler showing the position of the titles:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous utilisons le paquetage \pack{vruler} (de \name{Zhuhan}{Jiang}) pour placer une échelle verticale montrant la position
-% des titres:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\usepackage{txfonts,vruler} % vertical graduation to note positions (Zhuhan Jiang)
-\usepackage[english2,tight,listfiles]{minitoc}
-\begin{document}
-\setvruler[1cm][0][10][3][0][0pt][0pt][0pt][] % with vruler package
-\doparttoc \faketableofcontents
-\part{First part}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A normal parttoc, with the normal gaps before and after it.
-% \or\relax
-% Une parttoc normale, avec des sauts verticaux normaux avant et après elle.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\parttoc
-\chapter{First chapter of first part} \chapter{Second chapter of first part}
-\part{Second part}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We set large gaps. Note the new position of the parttoc.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous forçons de plus grands sauts. Notez la nouvelle position de la parttoc.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand{\mtcgapbeforeheads}{100pt}
-\renewcommand{\mtcgapafterheads}{80pt}
-\parttoc
-\chapter{First chapter of second part} \chapter{Second chapter of second part}
-\part{Third part}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We set small gaps. Note the new position of the parttoc.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous forçons de plus petits sauts. Notez la nouvelle position de la parttoc.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand{\mtcgapbeforeheads}{20pt}
-\renewcommand{\mtcgapafterheads}{10pt}
-\parttoc
-\chapter{First chapter of third part} \chapter{Second chapter of third part}
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-gap>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% ^^A (45)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Vertical spacing before the bottom rule of a minitable}\label{faq.45}
-% The little spacing between a minitable and its bottom rule is implemented as a vertical kern that should
-% be sufficient to allow the
-% descending parts of the letters of the last entry of the mini-table. The values should depend on
-% the line spacing and of the font size. They are defined as macros that you can adjust by redefining them via
-% \com{renewcommand}. The (empirical) default values are given in table~\vref{t+kernafters}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Espacement vertical avant le filet inférieur d'une minitable}\label{faq.45}
-% Le petit espacement entre une minitable et le filet qui est en-dessous d'elle est réalisé par un crênage
-% vertical qui devrait suffire pour les jambages des lettres de la dernière entrée de la
-% minitable. Les valeurs devraient dépendre de l'interlignage et de la taille de la fonte.
-% Elles sont définies comme des macros que vous pouvez ajuster en les redéfinissant via \com{renewcommand}.
-% La table~\vref{t+kernafters} donne les valeurs par défaut (empiriques).
-% \fi
-% \begin{table}[!htb]
-% \changeskips
-% \centering
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption{Kernings before minitable bottom rules}\label{t+kernafters}
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Default value}\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{kernafterparttoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
-% \com{kernafterpartlof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
-% \com{kernafterpartlot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{kernafterminitoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-.5\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
-% \com{kernafterminilof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern0.ex}\\
-% \com{kernafterminilot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern0.ex}\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{kernaftersecttoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
-% \com{kernaftersectlof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
-% \com{kernaftersectlot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption{Crênage avant le filet inférieur des minitables}\label{t+kernafters}
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Valeur par défaut}\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{kernafterparttoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
-% \com{kernafterpartlof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
-% \com{kernafterpartlot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{kernafterminitoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-.5\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
-% \com{kernafterminilof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern0.ex}\\
-% \com{kernafterminilot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern0.ex}\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{kernaftersecttoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
-% \com{kernaftersectlof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
-% \com{kernaftersectlot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \fi
-% \end{table}
-%
-% ^^A (46)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Another interaction between the \upack{tocloft} and \upack{minitoc} packages}\label{faq.46}\ipack{tocloft}
-% \emph{I~encountered an interaction between \pack{tocloft} and \upack{minitoc}.
-% I want to force \upack{minitoc} to not display the page numbers, but because
-% of \pack{tocloft} it doesn't. Here is an example code:}
-% \else\relax
-% \section{Une autre interaction entre les paquetages \upack{tocloft} et \upack{minitoc}}\label{faq.46}\ipack{tocloft}
-% \emph{J'ai rencontré une interaction entre \pack{tocloft} et \upack{minitoc}.
-% Je veux forcer \upack{minitoc} à~ne pas afficher les numéros de pages,
-% mais, à~cause de \pack{tocloft}, il n'y arrive pas. Voici
-% un exemple de code:}
-% \fi\relax
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{documentclass}\verb|[12pt,a4paper]{book}|\\
-% \com{usepackage}\verb|{tocloft}|\\
-% \com{usepackage}\verb|{minitoc}|\\
-% \ienv{document}\verb|\begin{document}|\\
-% \com{frontmatter}\\
-% \com{dominitoc}\com{tableofcontents}\\
-% \com{mainmatter}\\
-% \com{chapter}\verb|{Chapter}|\\
-% \verb|\section{Section A} \section{Section B}|\\
-% \verb|\chapter{Second Chapter}|\\
-% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minitoc}{section}{\normalfont\small}|\\
-% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\verb|{minitoc}{off}|\\
-% \com{minitoc}\\
-% \verb|\section{Section A} \section{Section B}|\\
-% \verb|\end{document}|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \emph{If I comment the line loading the \pack{tocloft} package,
-% I~will get a minitoc without page numbers as I~wanted.}
-% \else\relax
-% \emph{Si je commente la ligne chargeant le paquetage \pack{tocloft},
-% j'obtiens bien une minitoc sans numéros de pages comme désiré.}
-% \fi\relax
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% When using together \pack{tocloft} and \upack{minitoc}, the \pack{tocloft} package must be
-% loaded first, and its commands take precedence to format the entries
-% in the TOC (and in minitocs). To suppress the page numbers, you should try
-% the \verb|\cftpagenumbersoff{|\emph{XXX}\verb|}| command (from \pack{tocloft}), which is described
-% in the \xfile{tocloft.pdf} documentation~\cite[pages~45-56]{tocloft}; \emph{XXX} is the level
-% of entry (\texttt{chapter}, \texttt{sec}, \texttt{subsec}, etc.). There are similar remarks about
-% font related commands.
-%
-% The \pack{tocloft} package is more specialized in that job than \upack{minitoc}, so if it is
-% loaded, \upack{minitoc} uses the \pack{tocloft} tools.
-% There is the corrected example (\exam{mtc-tlo.tex}\label{mtc-tlo.tex}):
-% \else\relax
-% Lors de l'utilisation simultanée de \pack{tocloft} et \upack{minitoc},
-% le paquetage \pack{tocloft} doit être chargé le premier, et ses
-% commandes prennent le pas pour mettre en forme les
-% entrées dans la table des matières (et les minitocs). Pour
-% supprimer les numéros de pages, vous devriez essayer la
-% commande \verb|\cftpagenumbersoff{|\emph{XXX}\verb|}| (de \pack{tocloft}), qui est décrite dans la documentation
-% \xfile{tocloft.pdf}~\cite[pages~45-56]{tocloft}; \emph{XXX}
-% est le niveau de l'entrée (\texttt{chapter}, \texttt{sec}, \texttt{subsec}, etc.).
-% Il y a des remarques similaires sur les commandes concernant les fontes.
-%
-% Le paquetage \pack{tocloft} est davantage spécialisé dans
-% ce travail que \upack{minitoc}, donc s'il est chargé, \upack{minitoc}
-% se sert des outils de \pack{tocloft}. Voici l'exemple
-% corrigé (\exam{mtc-tlo.tex}\label{mtc-tlo.tex}):
-% \fi\relax
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-tlo>
-\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{book}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-tlo.tex}[2007/06/13]%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We must load \pack{tocloft} \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous devons charger \pack{tocloft} \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}:
-% \fi\relax
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\usepackage{tocloft}
-\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
-\begin{document}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define the global font for the minitoc entries:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons la fonte globale pour les entrées des minitocs:
-% \fi\relax
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{*}{\normalfont\small}
-\frontmatter
-\dominitoc \tableofcontents
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\cftpagenumbersoff}
-% \begin{macro}{\cftsecfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For the section entries in the minitocs, we suppress the page numbers and change the font
-% by using commands from the \pack{tocloft} package:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les entrées de sections dans les minitocs, nous supprimons les numéros de pages et changeons la fonte en
-% utilisant des commandes venant du paquetage \pack{tocloft}:
-% \fi\relax
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\cftpagenumbersoff{sec}
-\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\normalfont\small}
-\mainmatter
-\chapter{First Chapter} \minitoc
-\section{Section A} \section{Section B}
-\chapter{Second Chapter} \minitoc
-\section{Section A} \section{Section B}
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-tlo>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% ^^A (47)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Use with the \upack{hangcaption} package}\label{faq.47}\ipack{hangcaption}
-% If the \pack{hangcaption} package~\cite{hangcaption}\imess{W0092} (by \name{David~M.}{Jones})
-% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before}
-% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course,
-% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{hangcaption}}\label{faq.47}\ipack{hangcaption}
-% Si le paquetage \pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption}\imess{W0092} (de \name{David~M.}{Jones}) est utilisé,
-% il doit être chargé
-% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr,
-% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
-% \fi
-%
-% ^^A (48)
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Use with the \upack{flowfram} package}\label{faq.48}\ipack{flowfram}
-% The \pack{flowfram}\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0097}} package~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}, which
-% has its own system of minitocs, is hence \emph{incompatible}
-% with \upack{minitoc}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{flowfram}}%
-% \label{faq.48}\ipack{flowfram}
-% Le paquetage \SMMZZ{\lmess{W0097}}\pack{flowfram}, qui a son propre
-% système de minitocs, est donc \emph{incompatible}
-% avec \upack{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-%
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \chapter{Memento}\label{c+memento}
-% \or\relax
-% \chapter{Mémento}\label{c+memento}
-% \fi
-% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns}
-% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
-% \minilot
-% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\empty}
-% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\empty}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[!hbtp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Package options}\label{t+OPT}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}llZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Options}&\textbf{Default}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
-% \midrule
-% \opt{shortext}&\texttt{*NO*}&Short extensions for auxiliary files.\\
-% \optd{loose}, \opt{tight}&\optd{loose}&Spacing of lines in mini-tables.\\
-% \optd{k-loose}, \opt{k-tight}&\optd{k-loose}&Spacing of lines in mini-tables (\KOMAScript{} classes).\\
-% \optd{dotted}, \opt{undotted}&\optd{dotted}&Presence of leaders (dotted lines).\\
-% \opt{insection}&\texttt{*NO*}&Keeps floats (figures and tables) from drifting
-% outside of their section. Useful if you use sectlofs/sectlots.\\
-% \opt{notoccite}&\texttt{*NO*}&Useful if you have \com{cite} commands
-% in sectionning titles and use an unsorted bibliographic style.\\
-% \optd{listfiles}, \opt{nolistfiles}&\optd{listfiles}&Lists the minitoc auxiliary files
-% into \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}.\\
-% \optd{hints}, \opt{nohints}&\optd{hints}&Adds hints in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log}
-% file. Useful to detect some problems. Option \opt{nohints} is inadvisable.\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Language options are listed in
-% table~\vref{t+languages}. Default: \loptd{english}.}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{table}[!hbtp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Options du paquetage}\label{t+OPT}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}llZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Options}&\textbf{Défaut}&\textbf{Signification}\\
-% \midrule
-% \opt{shortext}&\texttt{*NON*}&Suffixes courts pour les fichiers auxiliaires.\\
-% \optd{loose}, \opt{tight}&\optd{loose}&Espacement des lignes dans les mini-tables.\\
-% \optd{k-loose}, \opt{k-tight}&\optd{k-loose}&Espacement des lignes dans les mini-tables (classes \KOMAScript).\\
-% \optd{dotted}, \opt{undotted}&\optd{dotted}&Présence de points de conduite.\\
-% \opt{insection}&\texttt{*NON*}&Empêche les éléments flottants (figures et tableaux) de dériver en dehors de
-% leur section. Utile si vous utilisez des sectlofs/sectlots.\\
-% \opt{notoccite}&\texttt{*NON*}&Utile si vous avez des commandes \com{cite} dans les titres de
-% sectionnements et utilisez un style de bibliographie sans tri.\\
-% \optd{listfiles}, \opt{nolistfiles}&\optd{listfiles}&Liste les fichiers auxiliaires de minitoc
-% dans \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}.\\
-% \optd{hints}, \opt{nohints}&\optd{hints}&Ajoute des indications (\emph{hints}) dans le fichier
-% \emph{document}\suffix{.log}.
-% Utile pour détecter certains problèmes. L'option \opt{nohints} est déconseillée.\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Les options de langue sont listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+languages}.
-% Défaut: \loptd{english}.}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{General commands}\label{t+SUC}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{faketableofcontents}&Replaces \com{tableofcontents}
-% if you want mini-tables of contents but no main table of contents.\\
-% \com{fakelistoffigures}&Replaces \com{listoffigures}
-% if you want mini-lists of figures but no main list of figures.\\
-% \com{fakelistoftables}&Replaces \com{listoftables}
-% if you want mini-lists of tables but no main list of tables.\\
-% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Loads \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} to select a language for mini-tables titles.\\
-% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{depth}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Changes the depth for some mini-tables.\\
-% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{offset}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Changes the offset for some mini-tables.\\
-% \com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\emph{commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Modifies the features for a mini-table.\\
-% \com{mtcsetfont}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{sectionning-level}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{font commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Redefines a minitoc font command.\\
-% \com{mtcsetformat}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\texttt{dotinterval\BAR pagenumwidth\BAR tocrightmargin}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{value}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Changes the layout of some mini-tables.\\
-% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Activates/inhibits page numbers in some or all mini-tables.\\
-% \com{mtcsetrules}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Activates/inhibits horizontal rules in some or all mini-tables.\\
-% \com{mtcsettitle}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{title string}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Changes the title for some mini-tables.\\
-% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{font commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Changes the font of the title for some mini-tables.\\
-% \com{mtcskip}&To add a vertical skip between the mini-tables.\\
-% \com{mtcskipamount}&Length of \com{mtcskip}. Default: \com{bigskipamount}.\\
-% \com{tightmtcfalse}&Loose mini-tables. Default.\\
-% \com{tightmtctrue}&Tight mini-tables.\\
-% \com{ktightmtcfalse}&Loose mini-tables. Default. (\KOMAScript{} classes).\\
-% \com{ktightmtctrue}&Tight mini-tables. (\KOMAScript{} classes).\\
-% \com{undottedmtcfalse}&Dotted lines in mini-tables (from entry to page number). Default.\\
-% \com{undottedmtctrue}&No dotted lines in mini-tables (from entry to page number).\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Commandes générales}\label{t+SUC}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{faketableofcontents}&Remplace \com{tableofcontents}
-% si vous souhaitez des mini-tables des matières mais pas de table des matières principale.\\
-% \com{fakelistoffigures}&Remplace \com{listoffigures}
-% si vous souhaitez des mini-listes des figures mais pas de liste des figures principale.\\
-% \com{fakelistoftables}&Remplace \com{listoftables}
-% si vous souhaitez des mini-listes des tableaux mais pas de liste des tableaux principale.\\
-% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Charge \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} pour sélectionner une langue pour les titres des mini-tables.\\
-% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Change la profondeur pour certaines mini-tables.\\
-% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{déplacement}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Change le déplacement pour certaines mini-tables.\\
-% \com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\emph{commandes}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.\\
-% \com{mtcsetfont}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{niveau-sectionnement}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{commandes de
-% fonte}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Redéfinit une commande de fonte minitoc.\\
-% \com{mtcsetformat}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\texttt{dotinterval\BAR pagenumwidth\BAR tocrightmargin}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{valeur}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Change la mise en page de certaines mini-tables.\\
-% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Active/inhibe les numéros de pages dans certaines mini-tables ou toutes.\\
-% \com{mtcsetrules}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Active/inhibe les filets horizontaux dans certaines mini-tables ou toutes.\\
-% \com{mtcsettitle}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{chaîne titre}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Change le titre pour certaines mini-tables.\\
-% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{commandes de fonte}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Change la fonte du titre pour certaines mini-tables.\\
-% \com{mtcskip}&Pour ajouter un saut vertical entre les mini-tables.\\
-% \com{mtcskipamount}&Longueur de \com{mtcskip}. Défaut: \com{bigskipamount}.\\
-% \com{tightmtcfalse}&Mini-tables avec lignes peu serrées. Défaut.\\
-% \com{tightmtctrue}&Mini-tables avec lignes serrées.\\
-% \com{ktightmtcfalse}&Mini-tables avec lignes peu serrées. Défaut. (Classes \KOMAScript).\\
-% \com{ktightmtctrue}&Mini-tables avec lignes serrées. (Classes \KOMAScript).\\
-% \com{undottedmtcfalse}&Points de conduite dans les mini-tables (de l'entrée jusqu'au numéro de page). Défaut.\\
-% \com{undottedmtctrue}&Pas de points conduite dans les mini-tables (de l'entrée jusqu'au numéro de page).\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Part level commands}\label{t+SUC-P-a}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{doparttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{tableofcontents} if you use \com{parttoc}$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{dopartlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoffigures} if you use \texttt{partlof}$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{dopartlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoftables} if you use \com{partlot}$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{parttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{part} command for which a parttoc is needed$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{partlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{part} command for which a partlof is needed$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{partlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}%
-% &After each \com{part} command for which a partlot is needed$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{parttocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{depth}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
-% &Depth of the following parttocs. Analog to \dcnt{tocdepth}. Default:~2.\\
-% &Has no action on partlofs and partlots.\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{or:}}}\\
-% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{depth}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
-% &Idem, but can also act on partlofs and partlots.\\
-% \com{ptcindent}&Left/right indentation of a partial table. Default: \texttt{24pt}.\\
-% \com{ptcoffset}&Horizontal offset for parttocs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\
-% \com{plfoffset}&Horizontal offset for partlofs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\
-% \com{pltoffset}&Horizontal offset for partlots. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\
-% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{offset}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
-% &Idem, but can also act on partlofs and partlots.\\
-% \com{ptcfont}&Font command for parttoc.\\
-% &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (article)\\
-% &or: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (book, report).\\
-% \com{ptcCfont}&Font command for parttoc, chapter entries.\\
-% &Default: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
-% \com{ptcSfont}&Font command for parttoc, section entries.\\
-% &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\\
-% &or: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\\
-% \com{ptcSSfont}&Font command for parttoc, subsection entries$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{ptcSSSfont}&Font command for parttoc, subsubsection entries$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{ptcPfont}&Font command for parttoc, paragraph entries$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{ptcSPfont}&Font command for parttoc, subparagraph entries$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{plffont}&Font for partlof. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{plfSfont}&Font for partlof (subfigures). Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{pltfont}&Font for partlot. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{pltSfont}&Font for partlot (subtables). Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{ptctitle}&Title of parttocs. Default: \texttt{Table of Contents}.\\
-% \com{plftitle}&Title of partlofs. Default: \texttt{List of Figures}.\\
-% \com{plttitle}&Title of partlots. Default: \texttt{List of Tables}.\\
-% \com{ptifont}&Font for partXXX titles.\\
-% &Default: \texttt{\bs Large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\hfill\null\\
-% &or: \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\hfill\null\\
-% \com{mtcgapbeforeheads}&Vertical gap before part-level mini-tables titles. Default: 50pt\\
-% \com{mtcgapafterheads}&Vertical gap after part-level mini-tables titles. Default: 40pt\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} is an optional argument to set the
-% position of the title; the setting is local for the \ucom{partXXX} commands, global for the \ucom{dopartXXX}
-% commands. The values of~\emph{x} are: \texttt{l}~for left (default), \texttt{c}~for centered,
-% \texttt{r}~for right, \texttt{n}~or \texttt{e}~for no title.}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: defaults like \com{ptcfont}.}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Commandes au niveau partie}\label{t+SUC-P-a}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{doparttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{tableofcontents} si vous utilisez \com{parttoc}$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{dopartlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoffigures} si vous utilisez \com{partlof}$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{dopartlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoftables} si vous utilisez \com{partlot}$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{parttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{part} pour laquelle une parttoc est
-% nécessaire$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{partlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{part} pour laquelle une partlof est
-% nécessaire$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{partlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}%
-% &Après chaque commande \com{part} pour laquelle une partlot est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{parttocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{profondeur}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
-% &Profondeur des parttocs ultérieures. Analogue à~\dcnt{tocdepth}. Défaut:~2.\\
-% &N'a aucune action sur les partlofs et partlots.\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{ou:}}}\\
-% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{profondeur}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
-% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les partlofs et partlots.\\
-% \com{ptcindent}&Indentation gauche et droite d'une table partielle. Défaut: \texttt{24pt}.\\
-% \com{ptcoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les parttocs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\
-% \com{plfoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les partlofs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\
-% \com{pltoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les partlots. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\
-% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{déplacement}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
-% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les partlofs et partlots.\\
-% \com{ptcfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs.\\
-% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (article)\\
-% &ou: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (book, report).\\
-% \com{ptcCfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées chapitres.\\
-% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
-% \com{ptcSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées sections.\\
-% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\\
-% &ou: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\\
-% \com{ptcSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées sous-sections$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{ptcSSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées, entrées sous-sous-sections$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{ptcPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées paragraphes$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{ptcSPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées sous-paragraphes$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{plffont}&Fonte pour les partlofs. Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{plfSfont}&Fonte pour les partlofs (sous-figures). Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{pltfont}&Fonte pour les partlots. Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{pltSfont}&Fonte pour les partlots (sous-tables). Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{ptctitle}&Titre des parttocs. Défaut: \texttt{Table of Contents}.\\
-% \com{plftitle}&Titre des partlofs. Défaut: \texttt{List of Figures}.\\
-% \com{plttitle}&Titre des partlots. Défaut: \texttt{List of Tables}.\\
-% \com{ptifont}&Fonte pour les titres des partXXX.\\
-% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs Large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\hfill\null\\
-% &ou: \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\hfill\null\\
-% \com{mtcgapbeforeheads}&Saut vertical avant le titre des mini-tables au niveau partie. Défaut: 50pt.\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
-% \com{mtcgapafterheads}&Saut vertical après le titre des mini-tables au niveau partie. Défaut: 40pt.\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} est un argument optionnel pour établir la
-% position du titre; le choix est local pour les commandes \ucom{partXXX}, global pour les commandes \ucom{dopartXXX}. Les valeurs de~\emph{x} sont: \texttt{l}~pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{c}~pour centré,
-% \texttt{r}~pour droite, \texttt{n}~ou \texttt{e}~pour pas de titre.}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: la valeur par défaut est comme \com{ptcfont}.}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Chapter level commands}\label{t+SUC-C}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{dominitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{tableofcontents} if you use \com{minitoc}$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{dominilof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoffigures} if you use \com{minilof}$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{dominilot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoftables} if you use \com{minilot}$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{minitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{chapter} command for which a minitoc is needed$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{minilof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{chapter} command for which a minilof is needed$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{minilot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}%
-% &After each \com{chapter} command for which a minilot is needed$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{minitocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{depth}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
-% &Depth of the following minitocs. Analog to \dcnt{tocdepth}. Default:~2. Has no action on minilofs and minilots.\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{or:}}}\\
-% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{depth}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
-% &Idem, but can also act on minilofs and minilots.\\
-% \com{mtcindent}&Left/right indentation of a mini-table. Default: \texttt{24pt}.\\
-% \com{mtcoffset}&Horizontal offset for minitocs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\
-% \com{mlfoffset}&Horizontal offset for minilofs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\
-% \com{mltoffset}&Horizontal offset for minilots. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\
-% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{offset}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
-% &Idem, but can also act on minilofs and minilots.\\
-% \com{mtcfont}&Font command for minitoc.\\
-% &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{mtcSfont}&Font command for minitoc, section entries.\\
-% &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
-% \com{mtcSSfont}&Font command for minitoc, subsection entries$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{mtcSSSfont}&Font command for minitoc, subsubsection entries$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{mtcPfont}&Font command for minitoc, paragraph entries$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{mtcSPfont}&Font command for minitoc, subparagraph entries$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{mlffont}&Font for minilof. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{mlfSfont}&Font for minilof (subfigures). Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{mltfont}&Font for minilot. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{mltSfont}&Font for minilot (subtables). Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{mtctitle}&Title of minitocs. Default: \texttt{Contents}.\\
-% \com{mlftitle}&Title of minilofs. Default: \texttt{Figures}.\\
-% \com{mlttitle}&Title of minilots. Default: \texttt{Tables}.\\
-% \com{mtifont}&Font for miniXXX titles.\\
-% &Default: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} is an optional argument to set the
-% position of the title; the setting is local for the \ucom{miniXXX} commands, global for the \ucom{dominiXXX} commands. The values of~\emph{x} are: \texttt{l}~for left (default), \texttt{c}~for centered,
-% \texttt{r}~for right, \texttt{n}~or \texttt{e}~for no title.}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: defaults like \com{mtcfont}.}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Commandes au niveau chapitre}\label{t+SUC-C}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{dominitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{tableofcontents} si vous utilisez \com{minitoc}$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{dominilof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoffigures} si vous utilisez \com{minilof}$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{dominilot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoftables} si vous utilisez \com{minilot}$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{minitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{chapter} pour laquelle une minitoc est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{minilof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{chapter} pour laquelle une minilof est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{minilot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{chapter} pour laquelle une minilot est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{minitocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{profondeur}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
-% &Profondeur des minitocs ultérieures. Analogue à~\dcnt{tocdepth}. Défaut:~2.\\
-% &N'a aucune action sur les minilofs et minilots.\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{ou:}}}\\
-% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{profondeur}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
-% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les minilofs et minilots.\\
-% \com{mtcindent}&Indentation gauche et droite d'une mini-table. Défaut: \texttt{24pt}.\\
-% \com{mtcoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les minitocs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\
-% \com{mlfoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les minilofs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\
-% \com{mltoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les minilots. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\
-% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{déplacement}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
-% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les minilofs et minilots.\\
-% \com{mtcfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs.\\
-% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{mtcSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées sections.\\
-% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
-% \com{mtcSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées sous-sections$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{mtcSSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées sous-sous-sections$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{mtcPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées paragraphes$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{mtcSPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées sous-paragraphes$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{mlffont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilofs.\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{mlfSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilofs (sous-figures).\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{mltfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilots.\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{mltSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilots (sous-tables).\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{mtctitle}&Titre des minitocs. Défaut: \texttt{Contents}.\\
-% \com{mlftitle}&Titre des minilofs. Défaut: \texttt{Figures}.\\
-% \com{mlttitle}&Titre des minilots. Défaut: \texttt{Tables}.\\
-% \com{mtifont}&Fonte pour les titres des miniXXX.\\
-% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} est un argument optionnel pour établir la
-% position du titre; le choix est local pour les commandes \ucom{miniXXX},
-% global pour les commandes \ucom{dominiXXX}.
-% Les valeurs de~\emph{x} sont: \texttt{l}~pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{c}~pour centré,
-% \texttt{r}~pour droite, \texttt{n}~ou \texttt{e}~pour pas de titre.}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: la valeur par défaut est comme \com{mtcfont}.}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Section level commands}\label{t+SUC-S}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{dosecttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{tableofcontents} if you use \com{secttoc}$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{dosectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoffigures} if you use \com{sectlof}$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{dosectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoftables} if you use \com{sectlot}$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{secttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{section} command for which a secttoc is needed$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{sectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{section} command for which a sectlof is needed$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{sectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}%
-% &After each \com{section} command for which a sectlot is needed$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{secttocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{depth}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
-% &Depth of the following secttocs. Analog to \dcnt{tocdepth}. Default:~2. Has no action on sectlofs and sectlots.\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{or:}}}\\
-% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{depth}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
-% &Idem, but can also act on sectlofs and sectlots.\\
-% \com{stcindent}&Left/right indentation of a mini-table. Default: \texttt{24pt}.\\
-% \com{stcoffset}&Horizontal offset for secttocs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\
-% \com{slfoffset}&Horizontal offset for sectlofs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\
-% \com{sltoffset}&Horizontal offset for sectlots. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\
-% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{offset}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
-% &Idem, but can also act on sectlofs and sectlots.\\
-% \com{stcfont}&Font command for secttoc.\\
-% &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{stcSSfont}&Font command for secttoc, subsection entries$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{stcSSSfont}&Font command for secttoc, subsubsection entries$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{stcPfont}&Font command for secttoc, paragraph entries$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{mtcSPfont}&Font command for secttoc, subparagraph entries$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{slffont}&Font for sectlof.\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{slfSfont}&Font for sectlof (subfigures).\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{sltfont}&Font for sectlot.\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{sltSfont}&Font for sectlot (subtables).\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{stctitle}&Title of secttocs. Default: \texttt{Contents}.\\
-% \com{slftitle}&Title of sectlofs. Default: \texttt{Figures}.\\
-% \com{slttitle}&Title of sectlots. Default: \texttt{Tables}.\\
-% \com{stifont}&Font for sectXXX titles.\\
-% &Default: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} is an optional argument to set the
-% position of the title; the setting is local for the \ucom{sectXXX} commands, global for the \ucom{dosectXXX} commands. The values of~\emph{x} are: \texttt{l}~for left (default), \texttt{c}~for centered,
-% \texttt{r}~for right, \texttt{n}~or \texttt{e}~for no title.}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: defaults like \com{stcfont}.}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Commandes au niveau section}\label{t+SUC-S}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{dosecttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{tableofcontents} si vous utilisez \com{secttoc}$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{dosectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoffigures} si vous utilisez \com{sectlof}$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{dosectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoftables} si vous utilisez \com{sectlot}$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{secttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{section} pour laquelle une secttoc est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{sectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{section} pour laquelle une sectlof est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{sectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{section} pour laquelle une sectlot est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\
-% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{secttocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{profondeur}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
-% &Profondeur des secttocs ultérieures. Analogue à~\dcnt{tocdepth}. Défaut:~2.\\
-% &N'a aucune action sur les sectlofs et sectlots.\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{ou:}}}\\
-% \ucom{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{profondeur}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
-% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les sectlofs et sectlots.\\
-% \com{stcindent}&Indentation gauche et droite d'une mini-table. Défaut: \texttt{24pt}.\\
-% \com{stcoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les secttocs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\
-% \com{slfoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les sectlofs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\
-% \com{sltoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les sectlots. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\
-% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{déplacement}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
-% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les sectlofs et sectlots.\\
-% \com{stcfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs.\\
-% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{stcSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entrées sous-sections$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{stcSSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entrées sous-sous-sections$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{stcPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entrées paragraphes$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{mtcSPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entrées sous-paragraphes$^{**}$.\\
-% \com{slffont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlofs.\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{slfSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlofs (sous-figures).\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{sltfont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlots.\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{sltSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlots (sous-tables).\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
-% \com{stctitle}&Titre des secttocs. Défaut: \texttt{Contents}.\\
-% \com{slftitle}&Titre des sectlofs. Défaut: \texttt{Figures}.\\
-% \com{slttitle}&Titre des sectlots. Défaut: \texttt{Tables}.\\
-% \com{stifont}&Fonte pour les titres des sectXXX.\\
-% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} est un argument optionnel pour établir la
-% position du titre; le choix est local pour les commandes \ucom{sectXXX}, global pour les commandes \ucom{dosectXXX}. Les valeurs de~\emph{x} sont: \texttt{l}~pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{c}~pour centré,
-% \texttt{r}~pour droite, \texttt{n}~ou \texttt{e}~pour pas de titre.}\\
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: la valeur par défaut est comme \com{stcfont}.}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Commands for horizontal rules}\label{t+SUC-rules}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
-% \midrule
-% \ncom{ptcrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in parttocs.\\
-% \ncom{mtcrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in minitocs.\\
-% \ncom{stcrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in secttocs.\\
-% \ncom{plfrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in partlofs.\\
-% \ncom{mlfrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in minilofs.\\
-% \ncom{slfrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in sectlofs.\\
-% \ncom{pltrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in partlots.\\
-% \ncom{mltrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in minilots.\\
-% \ncom{sltrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in sectlots.\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{mtcsetrules}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Activates/inhibits horizontal rules in some or all mini-tables.\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{kernafterparttoc}&Vertical kerning between a parttoc and its bottom rule.\\
-% \com{kernafterpartlof}&Vertical kerning between a partlof and its bottom rule.\\
-% \com{kernafterpartlot}&Vertical kerning between a partlot and its bottom rule.\\
-% \com{kernafterminitoc}&Vertical kerning between a minitoc and its bottom rule.\\
-% \com{kernafterminilof}&Vertical kerning between a minilof and its bottom rule.\\
-% \com{kernafterminilot}&Vertical kerning between a minilot and its bottom rule.\\
-% \com{kernaftersecttoc}&Vertical kerning between a secttoc and its bottom rule.\\
-% \com{kernaftersectlof}&Vertical kerning between a sectlof and its bottom rule.\\
-% \com{kernaftersectlot}&Vertical kerning between a sectlot and its bottom rule.\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{By default, parttocs have no rules; minitocs and secttocs have rules. In
-% articles, parttocs have rules.}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Commandes pour les filets horizontaux}\label{t+SUC-rules}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
-% \midrule
-% \ncom{ptcrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les parttocs.\\
-% \ncom{mtcrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les minitocs.\\
-% \ncom{stcrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les secttocs.\\
-% \ncom{plfrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les partlofs.\\
-% \ncom{mlfrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les minilofs.\\
-% \ncom{slfrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les sectlofs.\\
-% \ncom{pltrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les partlots.\\
-% \ncom{mltrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les minilots.\\
-% \ncom{sltrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les sectlots.\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{mtcsetrules}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Active/inhibe les filets horizontaux dans certaines mini-tables ou toutes.\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{kernafterparttoc}&Crênage vertical entre une parttoc et son filet inférieur.\\
-% \com{kernafterpartlof}&Crênage vertical entre une partlof et son filet inférieur.\\
-% \com{kernafterpartlot}&Crênage vertical entre une partlot et son filet inférieur.\\
-% \com{kernafterminitoc}&Crênage vertical entre une minitoc et son filet inférieur.\\
-% \com{kernafterminilof}&Crênage vertical entre une minilof et son filet inférieur.\\
-% \com{kernafterminilot}&Crênage vertical entre une minilot et son filet inférieur.\\
-% \com{kernaftersecttoc}&Crênage vertical entre une secttoc et son filet inférieur.\\
-% \com{kernaftersectlof}&Crênage vertical entre une sectlof et son filet inférieur.\\
-% \com{kernaftersectlot}&Crênage vertical entre une sectlot et son filet inférieur.\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Par défaut, les parttocs n'ont pas de filets; les minitocs et secttocs ont
-% des filets. Dans les articles, les parttocs ont des filets.}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Commands for page numbers}\label{t+SUC-pn}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
-% \midrule
-% \ncom{ptcpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in parttocs.\\
-% \ncom{plfpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in partlofs.\\
-% \ncom{pltpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in partlots.\\
-% \ncom{mtcpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in minitocs.\\
-% \ncom{mlfpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in minilofs.\\
-% \ncom{mltpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in minilots.\\
-% \ncom{stcpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in secttocs.\\
-% \ncom{slfpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in sectlofs.\\
-% \ncom{sltpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in sectlots.\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Activates/inhibits page numbers in some or all mini-tables.\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{By default, the page numbers are present.}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Commandes pour les numéros de pages}\label{t+SUC-pn}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
-% \midrule
-% \ncom{ptcpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les parttocs.\\
-% \ncom{plfpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les partlofs.\\
-% \ncom{pltpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les partlots.\\
-% \ncom{mtcpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les minitocs.\\
-% \ncom{mlfpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les minilofs.\\
-% \ncom{mltpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les minilots.\\
-% \ncom{stcpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les secttocs.\\
-% \ncom{slfpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les sectlofs.\\
-% \ncom{sltpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les sectlots.\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Active/inhibe les numéros de pages dans certaines mini-tables ou toutes.\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{Par défaut, les numéros de pages sont présents.}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Commands for mini-tables features}\label{t+SUC-P-b}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}llZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Default}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{beforeparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before a parttoc.\\
-% \com{beforepartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before a partlof.\\
-% \com{beforepartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before a partlot.\\
-% \com{afterparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after a parttoc.\\
-% \com{afterpartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after a partlof.\\
-% \com{afterpartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after a partlot.\\
-% \com{openparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a parttoc file.\\
-% \com{openpartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a partlof file.\\
-% \com{openpartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a partlot file.\\
-% \com{closeparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a parttoc file.\\
-% \com{closepartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a partlof file.\\
-% \com{closepartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a partlot file.\\
-% \com{thispageparttocstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Page style for a parttoc.\\
-% \com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Page style for a partlof.\\
-% \com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Page style for a partlot.\\
-% \com{beforeminitoc}&\com{empty}&Action before a minitoc.\\
-% \com{beforeminilof}&\com{empty}&Action before a minilof.\\
-% \com{beforeminilot}&\com{empty}&Action before a minilot.\\
-% \com{afterminitoc}&\com{empty}&Action after a minitoc.\\
-% \com{afterminilof}&\com{empty}&Action after a minilof.\\
-% \com{afterminilot}&\com{empty}&Action after a minilot.\\
-% \com{openminitoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a minitoc file.\\
-% \com{openminilof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a minilof file.\\
-% \com{openminilot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a minilot file.\\
-% \com{closeminitoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a minitoc file.\\
-% \com{closeminilof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a minilof file.\\
-% \com{closeminilot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a minilot file.\\
-% \com{thispageminitocstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a minitoc.\\
-% \com{thispageminilofstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a minilof.\\
-% \com{thispageminilotstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a minilot.\\
-% \com{beforesecttoc}&\com{empty}&Action before a secttoc.\\
-% \com{beforesectlof}&\com{empty}&Action before a sectlof.\\
-% \com{beforesectlot}&\com{empty}&Action before a sectlot.\\
-% \com{aftersecttoc}&\com{empty}&Action after a secttoc.\\
-% \com{aftersectlof}&\com{empty}&Action after a sectlof.\\
-% \com{aftersectlot}&\com{empty}&Action after a sectlot.\\
-% \com{opensecttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a secttoc file.\\
-% \com{opensectlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a sectlof file.\\
-% \com{opensectlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a sectlot file.\\
-% \com{closesecttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a secttoc file.\\
-% \com{closesectlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a sectlof file.\\
-% \com{closesectlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a sectlot file.\\
-% \com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a secttoc.\\
-% \com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a sectlof.\\
-% \com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a sectlot.\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{1}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\emph{commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}}&&\\
-% &Modifies the features for a mini-table.\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Commandes pour les dispositifs des mini-tables}\label{t+SUC-P-b}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \null\hspace*{-.35em}\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth+.35em}{@{}llZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Défaut}&\textbf{Signification}\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{beforeparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant une parttoc.\\
-% \com{beforepartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant une partlof.\\
-% \com{beforepartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant une partlot.\\
-% \com{afterparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après une parttoc.\\
-% \com{afterpartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après une partlof.\\
-% \com{afterpartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après une partlot.\\
-% \com{openparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier parttoc.\\
-% \com{openpartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier partlof.\\
-% \com{openpartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier partlot.\\
-% \com{closeparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier parttoc.\\
-% \com{closepartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier partlof.\\
-% \com{closepartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier partlot.\\
-% \com{thispageparttocstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Style de page pour une parttoc.\\
-% \com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Style de page pour une partlof.\\
-% \com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Style de page pour une partlot.\\
-% \com{beforeminitoc}&\com{empty}&Action avant une minitoc.\\
-% \com{beforeminilof}&\com{empty}&Action avant une minilof.\\
-% \com{beforeminilot}&\com{empty}&Action avant une minilot.\\
-% \com{afterminitoc}&\com{empty}&Action après une minitoc.\\
-% \com{afterminilof}&\com{empty}&Action après une minilof.\\
-% \com{afterminilot}&\com{empty}&Action après une minilot.\\
-% \com{openminitoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier minitoc.\\
-% \com{openminilof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier minilof.\\
-% \com{openminilot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier minilot.\\
-% \com{closeminitoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier minitoc.\\
-% \com{closeminilof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier minilof.\\
-% \com{closeminilot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier minilot.\\
-% \com{thispageminitocstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une minitoc.\\
-% \com{thispageminilofstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une minilof.\\
-% \com{thispageminilotstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une minilot.\\
-% \com{beforesecttoc}&\com{empty}&Action avant une secttoc.\\
-% \com{beforesectlof}&\com{empty}&Action avant une sectlof.\\
-% \com{beforesectlot}&\com{empty}&Action avant une sectlot.\\
-% \com{aftersecttoc}&\com{empty}&Action après une secttoc.\\
-% \com{aftersectlof}&\com{empty}&Action après une sectlof.\\
-% \com{aftersectlot}&\com{empty}&Action après une sectlot.\\
-% \com{opensecttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier secttoc.\\
-% \com{opensectlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier sectlof.\\
-% \com{opensectlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier sectlot.\\
-% \com{closesecttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier secttoc.\\
-% \com{closesectlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier sectlof.\\
-% \com{closesectlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier sectlot.\\
-% \com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une secttoc.\\
-% \com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une sectlof.\\
-% \com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une sectlot.\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{1}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\emph{commandes}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}}&&\\
-% &Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Preparation and insertion commands}\label{t+SUC-PI}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1.1}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Type}&\textbf{Phase}&\multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Level}}\\
-% \cmidrule(l){3-5}
-% & &\textbf{part}&\textbf{chapter}&\textbf{section}\\
-% \midrule
-% table of contents&preparation&\com{doparttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosecttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
-% &insertion &\com{parttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{secttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
-% \midrule
-% list of figures &preparation&\com{dopartlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominilof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
-% &insertion &\com{partlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minilof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{sectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
-% \midrule
-% list of tables &preparation&\com{dopartlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominilot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
-% &insertion &\com{partlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minilot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{sectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
-% \midrule
-% all &preparation&\multicolumn{3}{c@{}}{\null\mydotfill{.5ex}\com{mtcprepare}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\mydotfill{.5ex}\null}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{5}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Each of these commands accepts one optional argument~\emph{p},
-% which specifies the position of the
-% title of the mini-table. This argument~\emph{p} has a global effect for the preparation commands, but local for the
-% insertion commands. It is a letter: \texttt{[l]}~for left aligned (default), \texttt{[c]}~for centered,
-% \texttt{[r]}~for right aligned, \texttt{[e]}~or \texttt{[n]}~for empty (no title).}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Commandes de préparation et d'insertion}\label{t+SUC-PI}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1.1}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Type}&\textbf{Phase}&\multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Niveau}}\\
-% \cmidrule(l){3-5}
-% & &\textbf{partie}&\textbf{chapitre}&\textbf{section}\\
-% \midrule
-% table des matières&préparation&\com{doparttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosecttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
-% &insertion &\com{parttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{secttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
-% \midrule
-% liste des figures &préparation&\com{dopartlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominilof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
-% &insertion &\com{partlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minilof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{sectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
-% \midrule
-% liste des tableaux &préparation&\com{dopartlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominilot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
-% &insertion &\com{partlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minilot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{sectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
-% \midrule
-% tous &préparation&\multicolumn{3}{c@{}}{\null\mydotfill{.5ex}\com{mtcprepare}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\mydotfill{.5ex}\null}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{5}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Chacune de ces commandes accepte un argument optionnel~\emph{p},
-% qui spécifie la position du titre de la mini-table. Cet argument~\emph{p} a un effet global dans les commandes de
-% préparation, mais local dans les commandes d'insertion. C'est une lettre: \texttt{[l]}~pour aligné à~gauche
-% (défaut),
-% \texttt{[c]}~pour centré, \texttt{[r]}~pour aligné à~droite, \texttt{[e]}~ou \texttt{[n]}~pour vide (pas de titre).}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Adjustment commands}\label{t+SUC-A}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{adjustptc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Adjusts (increments) the parttoc counter \cnt{ptc} by~\emph{n}.\\
-% \com{adjustmtc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Adjusts (increments) the minitoc counter \cnt{mtc} by~\emph{n}.\\
-% \com{adjuststc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Adjusts (increments) the secttoc counter \cnt{stc} by~\emph{n}.\\
-% \com{decrementptc}&Adjusts (decrements by~1) the parttoc counter \cnt{ptc}.\\
-% \com{decrementmtc}&Adjusts (decrements by~1) the minitoc counter \cnt{mtc}.\\
-% \com{decrementstc}&Adjusts (decrements by~1) the secttoc counter \cnt{stc}.\\
-% \com{incrementptc}&Adjusts (increments by~1) the parttoc counter \cnt{ptc}.\\
-% \com{incrementmtc}&Adjusts (increments by~1) the minitoc counter \cnt{mtc}.\\
-% \com{incrementstc}&Adjusts (increments by~1) the secttoc counter \cnt{stc}.\\
-% \com{mtcaddpart}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]}&Adds the title of a \com{part*} in the ToC.\\
-% \com{mtcaddchapter}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]}&Adds the title of a \com{chapter*} in the ToC.\\
-% \com{mtcaddsection}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]}&Adds the title of a \com{section*} in the ToC.\\
-% \com{mtcfixglossary}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Adjusts the entry for the glossary in the ToC.\\
-% \com{mtcfixindex}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Adjusts the entry for the index in the ToC.\\
-% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Adjusts the entry for the nomenclature in the ToC.\\
-% \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
-% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmaintoc\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}Environment to hide entries in the main ToC.\\
-% \ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlof\}[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
-% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlof\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}Environment to hide entries in the main list of figures.\\
-% \com{mtchideinmainlof}\texttt{[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
-% \com{endmtchideinmainlof}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Pair of commands$^*$ to hide entries in the main list of figures.\\
-% \ienv{mtchideinmainlot}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlot\}[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
-% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlot\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}Environment to hide entries in the main list of tables.\\
-% \com{mtchideinmainlot}\texttt{[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
-% \com{endmtchideinmainlot}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Pair of commands$^*$ to hide entries in the main list of tables.\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{2}{l}{$*$: recommended form.}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Commandes d'ajustement}\label{t+SUC-A}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{adjustptc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Ajuste (incrémente) le compteur de parttocs \cnt{ptc} de~\emph{n}.\\
-% \com{adjustmtc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Ajuste (incrémente) le compteur de minitocs \cnt{mtc} de~\emph{n}.\\
-% \com{adjuststc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Ajuste (incrémente) le compteur de secttocs \cnt{stc} de~\emph{n}.\\
-% \com{decrementptc}&Ajuste (décrémente de~1) le compteur de parttocs \cnt{ptc}.\\
-% \com{decrementmtc}&Ajuste (décrémente de~1) le compteur de minitocs \cnt{mtc}.\\
-% \com{decrementstc}&Ajuste (décrémente de~1) le compteur de secttocs \cnt{stc}.\\
-% \com{incrementptc}&Ajuste (incrémente de~1) le compteur de parttocs \cnt{ptc}.\\
-% \com{incrementmtc}&Ajuste (incrémente de~1) le compteur de minitocs \cnt{mtc}.\\
-% \com{incrementstc}&Ajuste (incrémente de~1) le compteur de secttocs \cnt{stc}.\\
-% \com{mtcaddpart}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]}&Ajoute le titre d'une \com{part*} dans la TdM.\\
-% \com{mtcaddchapter}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]}&Ajoute le titre d'une \com{chapter*} dans la TdM.\\
-% \com{mtcaddsection}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]}&Ajoute le titre d'une \com{section*} dans la TdM.\\
-% \com{mtcfixglossary}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Ajuste l'entrée pour le glossaire dans la TdM.\\
-% \com{mtcfixindex}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Ajoute l'entrée pour l'index dans la TdM.\\
-% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Ajoute l'entrée pour la nomenclature dans la TdM.\\
-% \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
-% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmaintoc\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}Environnement pour cacher des entrées dans la TdM principale.\\
-% \ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlof\}[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
-% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlof\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}Environnement pour cacher des entrées dans la liste des figures principale.\\
-% \com{mtchideinmainlof}\texttt{[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
-% \com{endmtchideinmainlof}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Paire de commandes\,$^*$ pour cacher des entrées dans la liste des figures principale.\\
-% \ienv{mtchideinmainlot}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlot\}[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
-% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlot\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}Environnement pour cacher des entrées dans la liste des tableaux principale.\\
-% \com{mtchideinmainlot}\texttt{[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
-% \com{endmtchideinmainlot}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
-% &Paire de commandes\,$^*$ pour cacher des entrées dans la liste des tableaux principale.\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{2}{l}{$*$: forme recommandée.}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[tpb]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Classes and packages needing some precautions with \upack{minitoc}}\label{t+packs}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup\mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}c@{}clZ{1.5}Z{.7}Z{.8}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% &\textbf{P/C}&\textbf{Names}&\textbf{Author(s)}&\textbf{Page(s)}&\textbf{Reference(s)}\\
-% \midrule
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{abstract}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.abstract}&\cite{abstract}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{alnumsec}&\namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}&\pageref{h.alnumsec}&\cite{alnumsec}\\
-% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{alphanum}&\name{Felix}{Braun}&\pageref{faq.36}&\cite{jura}\\
-% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{amsart}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\
-% &\textbf{C}&\class{amsbook}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\
-% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{amsproc}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{appendix}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+appendix}&\cite{appendix}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{captcont}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.captcont}&\cite{captcont}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{caption}&\name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}&\pageref{h.caption}&\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{caption2}&\name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}&\pageref{h.caption2}&\cite{caption2}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{ccaption}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.ccaption}&\cite{ccaption}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{float}&\name{Anselm}{Lingnau}&\pageref{h.float}&\cite{float}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{floatrow}&\name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}&\pageref{h.floatrow}&\cite{floatrow}\\
-% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{flowfram}&\name{Nicola~L.~C.}{Talbot}&\pageref{faq.48}&\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{fncychap}&\name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}&\pageref{faq.38}&\cite{fncychap}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{hangcaption}&\name{David~M.}{Jones}&\pageref{faq.47}&\cite{hangcaption}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{hyperref}&\name{Sebastian}{Rahtz} and \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}&\pageref{faq.17}&\cite{hyperref-paper,hyperref.web,hyperref,hyperref-o,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf}\\
-% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{jura}&\name{Felix}{Braun}&\pageref{faq.36}&\cite{jura}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{mcaption}&\name{Stephan}{Hennig}&\pageref{h.mcaption}&\cite{mcaption}\\
-% &\textbf{C}&\class{memoir}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+memoir}&\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{notoccite}&\name{Donald}{Arseneau}&\pageref{ss+notoccite}&\cite{notoccite}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{placeins}&\name{Donald}{Arseneau}&\pageref{rem+FB}&\cite{placeins}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{quotchap}&\name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}&\pageref{h.quotchap}&\cite{quotchap}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{romannum}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.romannum}&\cite{romannum}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{rotfloat}&\name{Sebastian}{Rahtz} and \name{Leonor}{Barroca}&\pageref{h.rotfloat}&\cite{rotfloat}\\
-% &\textbf{C}&\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}\class{scrartcl},\\\class{scrbook} and\\\class{scrreprt}\end{tabular}&\name{Frank}{Neukam}, \name{Markus}{Kohm}, \name{Axel}{Kielhorn}, and \name{Jens-Uwe}{Morawski}&\pageref{faq.35}&\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{sectsty}&\name{Rowland}{McDonnell}&\pageref{faq.28}&\cite{sectsty}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{sfheaders}&\name{Maurizio}{Loreti}&\pageref{faq.41}&\cite{sfheaders}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{subfig}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.subfig}&\cite{subfig}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{subfigure}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.subfig}&\cite{subfigure}\\
-% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{titlesec}&\name{Javier}{Bezos}&\pageref{fn+titlesec}&\cite{titletoc}\\
-% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{titletoc}&\name{Javier}{Bezos}&\pageref{fn+titlesec}&\cite{titletoc}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{tocbibind}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{special.entries}&\cite{tocbibind}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{tocloft}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+tocloft}, \pageref{faq.46}&\cite{tocloft}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{trivfloat}&\name{Joseph~A.}{Wright}&\pageref{h.trivfloat}&\cite{trivfloat}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{varsects}&\namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}&\pageref{h.varsects}&\cite{varsects}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{6}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$:~\emph{Incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}.\quad\textbf{C}:~\textbf{C}lass.\quad\textbf{P}:~\textbf{P}ackage.}\\
-% \multicolumn{6}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Any class not defining the main standard sectionning commands is
-% \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}.}\\
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{table}[tpb]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Classes et paquetages nécessitant quelques précautions avec \upack{minitoc}}\label{t+packs}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup\mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}c@{}clZ{1.5}Z{.7}Z{.8}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% &\textbf{P/C}&\textbf{Noms}&\textbf{Auteur(s)}&\textbf{Page(s)}&\textbf{Référence(s)}\\
-% \midrule
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{abstract}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.abstract}&\cite{abstract}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{alnumsec}&\namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}&\pageref{h.alnumsec}&\cite{alnumsec}\\
-% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{alphanum}&\name{Felix}{Braun}&\pageref{faq.36}&\cite{jura}\\
-% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{amsart}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\
-% &\textbf{C}&\class{amsbook}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\
-% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{amsproc}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{appendix}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+appendix}&\cite{appendix}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{captcont}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.captcont}&\cite{captcont}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{caption}&\name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}&\pageref{h.caption}&\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{caption2}&\name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}&\pageref{h.caption2}&\cite{caption2}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{ccaption}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.ccaption}&\cite{ccaption}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{float}&\name{Anselm}{Lingnau}&\pageref{h.float}&\cite{float}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{floatrow}&\name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}&\pageref{h.floatrow}&\cite{floatrow}\\
-% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{flowfram}&\name{Nicola~L.~C.}{Talbot}&\pageref{faq.48}&\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{fncychap}&\name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}&\pageref{faq.38}&\cite{fncychap}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{hangcaption}&\name{David~M.}{Jones}&\pageref{faq.47}&\cite{hangcaption}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{hyperref}&\name{Sebastian}{Rahtz} et \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}&\pageref{faq.17}&\cite{hyperref-paper,hyperref.web,hyperref,hyperref-o,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf}\\
-% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{jura}&\name{Felix}{Braun}&\pageref{faq.36}&\cite{jura}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{mcaption}&\name{Stephan}{Hennig}&\pageref{h.mcaption}&\cite{mcaption}\\
-% &\textbf{C}&\class{memoir}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+memoir}&\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{notoccite}&\name{Donald}{Arseneau}&\pageref{ss+notoccite}&\cite{notoccite}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{placeins}&\name{Donald}{Arseneau}&\pageref{rem+FB}&\cite{placeins}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{quotchap}&\name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}&\pageref{h.quotchap}&\cite{quotchap}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{romannum}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.romannum}&\cite{romannum}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{rotfloat}&\name{Sebastian}{Rahtz} and \name{Leonor}{Barroca}&\pageref{h.rotfloat}&\cite{rotfloat}\\
-% &\textbf{C}&\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}\class{scrartcl},\\\class{scrbook} et\\\class{scrreprt}\end{tabular}&\name{Frank}{Neukam}, \name{Markus}{Kohm}, \name{Axel}{Kielhorn} et \name{Jens-Uwe}{Morawski}&\pageref{faq.35}&\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{sectsty}&\name{Rowland}{McDonnell}&\pageref{faq.28}&\cite{sectsty}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{sfheaders}&\name{Maurizio}{Loreti}&\pageref{faq.41}&\cite{sfheaders}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{subfig}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.subfig}&\cite{subfig}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{subfigure}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.subfig}&\cite{subfigure}\\
-% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{titlesec}&\name{Javier}{Bezos}&\pageref{fn+titlesec}&\cite{titletoc}\\
-% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{titletoc}&\name{Javier}{Bezos}&\pageref{fn+titlesec}&\cite{titletoc}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{tocbibind}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{special.entries}&\cite{tocbibind}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{tocloft}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+tocloft}, \pageref{faq.46}&\cite{tocloft}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{trivfloat}&\name{Joseph~A.}{Wright}&\pageref{h.trivfloat}&\cite{trivfloat}\\
-% &\textbf{P}&\pack{varsects}&\namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}&\pageref{h.varsects}&\cite{varsects}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{6}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$:~\emph{Incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}.\quad\textbf{C}:~\textbf{C}lasse.\quad\textbf{P}:~\textbf{P}aquetage.}\\
-% \multicolumn{6}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Toute classe ne définissant pas les principales commandes de sectionnement standard
-% est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}.}\\
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[tbph]
-% \capstart
-% \caption{Checking if inside a minitable}\label{t+ifinside}
-% \medskip
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Level}&\textbf{Flag}&\textbf{for tocs,}&\textbf{for lofs,}&\textbf{for lots.}\\
-% \midrule
-% \textbf{Part}&&\com{ifinparttoc}&\com{ifinpartlof}&\com{ifinpartlot}\\
-% \midrule
-% \textbf{Chapter}&&\com{ifinminitoc}&\com{ifinminilof}&\com{ifinminilot}\\
-% \midrule
-% \textbf{Section}&&\com{ifinsecttoc}&\com{ifinsectlof}&\com{ifinsectlot}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \begin{table}[tbph]
-% \capstart
-% \caption{Commands for polymorphic entries}\label{t+polym}\index{polymorphic entry}
-% \medskip
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}llllll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{From \textsl{OA} of}:&\textbf{Command}&\textbf{Arg.~1}&\textbf{Arg.~2}&\textbf{Arg.~3}&\textbf{Arg.~4}\\
-% \midrule
-% sect. command&\com{mtcpolymtoc}&\{$\rightarrow$parttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$minitoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$secttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~toc\}\\
-% figure caption&\com{mtcpolymlof}&\{$\rightarrow$partlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilof\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lof\}\\
-% table caption&\com{mtcpolymlot}&\{$\rightarrow$partlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilot\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lot\}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{table}
-% \else\relax
-% \begin{table}[tbph]
-% \capstart
-% \caption{Tester si à~l'intérieur d'une minitable}\label{t+ifinside}
-% \medskip
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Niveau}&\textbf{Indicateur}&\textbf{pour TdMs,}&\textbf{pour~LdFs,}&\textbf{pour~LdTs.}\\
-% \midrule
-% \textbf{Partie}&&\com{ifinparttoc}&\com{ifinpartlof}&\com{ifinpartlot}\\
-% \midrule
-% \textbf{Chapitre}&&\com{ifinminitoc}&\com{ifinminilof}&\com{ifinminilot}\\
-% \midrule
-% \textbf{Section}&&\com{ifinsecttoc}&\com{ifinsectlof}&\com{ifinsectlot}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \begin{table}[tbph]
-% \capstart
-% \caption{Commandes pour des entrées polymorphes}\label{t+polym}\index{entree polymorphe=entrée polymorphe}
-% \medskip
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}llllll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Depuis l'\textsl{AO} de}:&\textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Arg.~1}&\textbf{Arg.~2}&\textbf{Arg.~3}&\textbf{Arg.~4}\\
-% \midrule
-% commande sect.&\com{mtcpolymtoc}&\{$\rightarrow$parttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$minitoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$secttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~toc\}\\
-% caption figure&\com{mtcpolymlof}&\{$\rightarrow$partlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilof\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lof\}\\
-% caption table&\com{mtcpolymlot}&\{$\rightarrow$partlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilot\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lot\}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{table}[btp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Obsolete commands}\label{t+SUC-O}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{firstpartis}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} is the number of the first part.\\
-% \com{firstchapteris}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} is the number of the first chapter.\\
-% \com{firstsectionis}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} is the number of the first section.\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{These commands have no effect (except a harmless warning).}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{table}[btp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Commandes obsolètes}\label{t+SUC-O}
-% \centering
-% \bgroup
-% \mysize
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
-% \midrule
-% \com{firstpartis}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} est le numéro de la première partie.\\
-% \com{firstchapteris}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} est le numéro du premier chapitre.\\
-% \com{firstsectionis}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} est le numéro de la première section.\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{Ces commandes n'ont aucun effet (excepté un avertissement bénin).}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \egroup
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \chapter{Examples of documents}\label{c+exdocs}
-% \or\relax
-% \chapter{Exemples de documents}\label{c+exdocs}
-% \fi
-% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns}
-% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
-% \minitoc
-% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty}
-% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty}
-% \setcounter{columnbadness}{9000}%
-% \raggedcolumns
-% \mtcskip
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This chapter shows the code of some examples of documents.
-% Some are extracted or derived from real documents, others are just demonstrations to illustrate problems or features.
-% The code of some specific example files has been shown earlier:
-% \exam{mtc-apx.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-apx.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-hi1.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-hi2.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-gap.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-gap.tex},
-% and \exam{mtc-tlo.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-tlo.tex},
-% \or\relax
-% Ce chapitre montre le code de quelques exemples de documents.
-% Certains ont été extraits ou inspirés de documents réels, les autres sont de simples démonstrations pour illustrer
-% des problèmes ou des possibilités.
-% Le code de fichiers d'exemples spécifiques a déjà été montré:
-% \exam{mtc-apx.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-apx.tex}),
-% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-hi1.tex}),
-% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-hi2.tex}),
-% \exam{mtc-gap.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-gap.tex}) et
-% \exam{mtc-tlo.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-tlo.tex}).
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Note that the \pack{lipsum} package~\cite{lipsum} is often used to provide filling text.
-% \or\relax
-% Notez que le paquetage \pack{lipsum}~\cite{lipsum} est souvent utilisé pour fournir du texte de bourrage.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-2c.tex} document file}\label{mtc-2c.tex}\iexam{mtc-2c.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-2c.tex}}\label{mtc-2c.tex}\iexam{mtc-2c.tex}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document with a two columns layout.
-% The layout uses the \pack{multicol} standard package~\cite{multicol} and its \env{multicols} environment.
-% We set \com{mtcindent} to zero. We test several combinations. If a minitoc is long enough to be splitted on
-% both columns, the result may be funny.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document avec une mise en page sur deux
-% colonnes.
-% La mise en page utilise le paquetage standard \pack{multicol}~\cite{multicol} et son environnement \env{multicols}.
-% Nous forçons \com{mtcindent} à~zéro. Si une minitoc est assez longue pour se répartir sur les deux colonnes,
-% le résultat peut être bizarre.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-2c>
-\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]%
- {report}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-2c.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]
-\usepackage{multicol}
-\usepackage{lipsum}
-\usepackage%
- [tight,latin,listfiles]{minitoc}
-\usepackage[latin]{babel}
-\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt}
-\begin{document}
-\dominitoc \tableofcontents
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \begin{environment}{multicols}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Two first chapters with a standard chapter head, a minitoc on one full width column, then the body of the chapter
-% on two columns:
-% \or\relax
-% Deux premiers chapitres avec un en-tête standard, une minitoc sur la largeur complète, puis le corps du chapitre sur
-% deux colonnes:
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter{Primum capitulum}
-\begin{multicols}{2}[\minitoc]
-\section{Prima sectio}
-\lipsum[1-2]
-\section{Secunda sectio}
-\lipsum[3-4]
-\end{multicols}
-\chapter{Secundum capitulum}
-\begin{multicols}{2}[\minitoc]
-\section{Prima sectio}
-\lipsum[5-6]
-\section{Secunda sectio}
-\lipsum[7-8]
-\section{Tertia sectio}
-\lipsum[9-10]
-\end{multicols}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \begin{environment}{multicols}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A third chapter entirely on two columns, so the chapter head and the minitoc are in the first column:
-% \or\relax
-% Un troisième chapitre entièrement sur deux colonnes, dont l'en-tête du chapitre et la minitoc sont
-% dans la première colonne:
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{multicols}{2}
-\chapter{Tertium capitulum}
-\minitoc
-\section{Prima sectio}
-\lipsum[11-12]
-\section{Secunda sectio}
-\lipsum[13-14]
-\section{Tertia sectio}
-\lipsum[15-16]
-\end{multicols}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \begin{environment}{multicols}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A fourth chapter, with the chapter head on one column, and the minitoc and the chapter body on two columns (the
-% minitoc is in the first column):
-% \or\relax
-% Un quatrième chapitre, avec l'en-tête de chapitre sur une seule colonne, mais la minitoc et le corps du chapitre
-% sur deux colonnes (la minitoc est dans la première colonne):
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter{Quadrum capitulum}
-\begin{multicols}{2}
-\minitoc
-\section{Prima sectio}
-\lipsum[16-17]
-\section{Secunda sectio}
-\lipsum[18-19]
-\section{Tertia sectio}
-\lipsum[20-21]
-\end{multicols}
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-2c>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-2nd.tex} document file}\label{mtc-2nd.tex}\iexam{mtc-2nd.tex}
-% This document tests the \xfile{french2.mld} minitoc language definition file
-% (section~\vref{s+mld+french2}) and its
-% supporting code in the \upack{minitoc} package. First, the preamble of the document uses the \lopt{french2}
-% minitoc package language option\footnote{The \pack{franc}, \pack{frnew} and \pack{mypatches} packages are local
-% additions, provided with the \upack{minitoc} package documentation sources.}:
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-2nd.tex}}\label{mtc-2nd.tex}\iexam{mtc-2nd.tex}
-% Ce document teste le fichier minitoc de définition de langue \xfile{french2.mld}
-% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french2}) et le code
-% qui en assure le support dans le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Tout d'abord, le préambule du document utilise
-% l'option de langue \lopt{french2} du paquetage \upack{minitoc}\,\footnote{Les paquetages \pack{franc},
-% \pack{frnew} et \pack{mypatches} sont des additions locales, fournies avec les sources de la documentation
-% française du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-2nd>
-%% Test de french2.mld:
-%% « seconde » ou « deuxième » partie?
-%% compilez 3 fois.
-\documentclass{report}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-2nd.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]
-\usepackage[french2,tight,listfiles]{minitoc}
-\usepackage[french]{babel}
-\usepackage{franc,frnew}
-\usepackage[OT1,TS1,T1]{fontenc}
-\usepackage[isolatin]{inputenc}
-\usepackage{mypatches}
-\begin{document}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We test if there is only two parts: if yes, we will use ``seconde''.
-% Else (three or more parts), we will use ``deuxième''.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous testons s'il y a seulement deux parties: si oui, nous utiliserons «~seconde~».
-% Sinon (trois parties ou plus), nous utiliserons «~deuxième~».
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifmtcsecondpart
-Il n'y a que 2 parties: seconde.
-\else
-Il y a une partie ou plus de deux parties: deuxième.
-\fi
-\clearpage
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The body of the document, with two parts:
-% \or\relax
-% Le corps du document, avec deux parties:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\doparttoc
-\faketableofcontents
-\part{P1}
-\parttoc
-\chapter{P1C1}
-\chapter{P1C2}
-\part{P2}
-\parttoc
-\chapter{P2C1}
-\chapter{P2C2}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If you want also a third part, comment out this line and recompile 3~times:
-% \or\relax
-% Si vous voulez aussi une troisième partie, commentez la ligne suivante et recompilez 3~fois:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%% Commentez la ligne suivante puis recompilez 2 ou 3 fois.
-\end{document}
-\part{P3}
-\parttoc
-\chapter{P3C1}
-\chapter{P3C2}
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-2nd>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Observe the titles of the parttocs when the document has two then three parts. Note the changes after each
-% compilation. You can play by adding and removing parts. It would be interesting to add a starred part, with
-% starred chapters, at the beginning of the document, this part and these chapters having their entries in the TOC.
-% For instance, try to add the following lines after \com{faketableofcontents}:
-% \or\relax
-% Observez les titres des parttocs lorsque le document a deux puis trois parties. Notez les changements après
-% chaque compilation. Vous pouvez jouer en ajoutant et enlevant des parties. Il serait intéressant d'ajouter une
-% partie étoilée, avec des chapitres étoilés, au début du document, cette partie et ces chapitres ayant leurs
-% entrées dans la table des matières. Par exemple, essayez d'ajouter les lignes suivantes
-% après \com{faketableofcontents}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{part*}\verb|{Partie étoilée}|\\
-% \com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[Partie étoilée]|\\
-% \com{adjustptc}\verb|[-2] % IMPORTANT <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<|\\
-% \com{parttoc}\\
-% \com{chapter*}\verb|{Premier chapitre étoilé}|\\
-% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[Premier chapitre étoilé]|\\
-% \verb|\chapter*{Second chapitre étoilé}|\\
-% \verb|\mtcaddchapter[Second chapitre étoilé]|
-% \end{verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% and you will see how the parttoc of the new starred part is titled.
-% \or\relax
-% et vous verrez comment la parttoc de la nouvelle partie étoilée est titrée.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-3co.tex} document file}\label{mtc-3co.tex}\iexam{mtc-3co.tex}
-% This document shows how to prepare a minitoc on three columns,
-% with some modifications of the code the \env{mtc@verse} environment.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-3co.tex}}\label{mtc-3co.tex}\iexam{mtc-3co.tex}
-% Ce document montre comment préparer une minitoc sur trois
-% colonnes, grâce à~quelques modifications du code de l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% First, we will use a wide paper format (A3) to set the text
-% on two columns and the main TOC on three columns, with the
-% \pack{multitoc} package~\cite{multitoc} (by \namea{Martin}{Schröder}{Schroder}).
-% \or\relax
-% Tout d'abord, nous utiliserons un format de papier large (A3)
-% pour composer le texte sur deux colonnes et la table des
-% matières principale sur trois colonnes, avec le paquetage
-% \pack{multitoc}~\cite{multitoc} (de \namea{Martin}{Schröder}{Schroder}).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-3co>
-\documentclass[oneside]{book}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-3co.tex}%
- [2007/02/19]
-\usepackage[a3paper]{geometry}
-\usepackage{lipsum}
-\usepackage{multicol}
-\usepackage[toc]{multitoc}
-\renewcommand{\multicolumntoc}{3}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
-% \begin{macro}{\multicolumnmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@verse}
-% \begin{macro}{\endmtc@verse}
-% \begin{environment}{multicols}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then we load the \upack{minitoc} package, set some
-% parameters and define the number of columns for the
-% minitocs. We alter the \env{mtc@verse} environment to add a
-% \env{multicols} environment\footnote{Some vertical adjustments are necessary.}:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc},
-% établissons quelques paramètres et définissons le nombre de
-% colonnes pour les minitocs.
-% Nous altérons l'environnement \env{mtc@verse} pour lui
-% ajouter un environnement \env{multicols}\,\footnote{Quelques ajustements verticaux sont nécessaires.}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
-\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt}
-\mtcsetformat{minitoc}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}
-\newcommand{\multicolumnmtc}{3}
-\makeatletter
-\let\SV@mtc@verse\mtc@verse
-\let\SV@endmtc@verse\endmtc@verse
-\def\mtc@verse#1{\SV@mtc@verse#1\removelastskip%
- \begin{multicols}{\multicolumnmtc}\raggedcolumns\leavevmode\unskip
- \vskip -1.5ex \vskip -1\baselineskip}
-\def\endmtc@verse{\end{multicols}\SV@endmtc@verse}
-\makeatother
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We begin the document, preparing the minitocs and the main TOC.
-% The (first) chapter begins with its minitoc, then the text
-% on two columns. We use the \pack{lipsum} package~\cite{lipsum} to provide filling text;
-% the section number is used to select a \emph{lipsum} paragraph.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous commençons le document, en préparant les minitocs et la
-% table des matières principale. Le (premier) chapitre commence
-% avec sa minitoc, puis le texte sur deux colonnes. Nous
-% utilisons le paquetage \pack{lipsum}~\cite{lipsum} pour
-% fournir du texte de bourrage;
-% le numéro de section est utilisé pour choisir un paragraphe \emph{lipsum}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{document}
-\dominitoc
-\tableofcontents
-\chapter{First chapter}
-\minitoc
-\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We use a lot of sections, to have a minitoc large enough to
-% use the three columns. A subsection with a long title gives
-% a good result (we have used \com{mtcsetformat} to avoid hyphenations).
-% \or\relax
-% Nous utilisons beaucoup de sections, pour avoir une minitoc
-% suffisamment grande pour utiliser les trois colonnes. Une
-% sous-section avec un titre long donne un bon résultat (nous avons utilisé \com{mtcsetformat} pour éviter les
-% coupures).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\section{First section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Second section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Third section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Fourth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Fifth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Sixth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Seventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Eighth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Ninth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Tenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Eleventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Twelfth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Thirteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Fourteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Fifteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Sixteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Seventeenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Eighteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Nineteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Twentieth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Twenty-first section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Twenty-second section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Twenty-third section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Twenty-fourth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\subsection{A very long subsection title, for the fun in
-a multicolumn table of contents} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Twenty-fifth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Twenty-sixth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Twenty-seventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Twenty-eighth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Twenty-ninth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Thirtieth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Thirty-first section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Thirty-second section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Thirty-third section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Thirty-fourth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Thirty-fifth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Thirty-sixth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Thirty-seventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Thirty-eighth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Thirty-ninth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Fortieth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Forty-first section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Forty-second section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Forty-third section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Forty-fourth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Forty-fifth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Forty-sixth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Forty-seventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Forty-eighth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Forty-ninth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Fiftieth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Fifty-first section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Fifty-second section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Fifty-third section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Fifty-fourth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Fifty-fifth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Fifty-sixth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Fifty-seventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Fifty-eighth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Fifty-ninth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\end{multicols}
-\clearpage
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-3co>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-add.tex} document file}\label{mtc-add.tex}\iexam{mtc-add.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-add.tex}}\label{mtc-add.tex}\iexam{mtc-add.tex}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This document shows how to add special entries in the table of contents, and the interaction with the
-% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind}.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce document montre comment ajouter des entrées spéciales dans la table des matières, ainsi que l'interaction avec
-% le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind}.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-add>
-\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{report}
-%% \documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{book}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-add.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]
-\usepackage{url}
-\usepackage{tocbibind}
-\usepackage{makeidx}
-\makeatletter
-\newif\ifscan@allowed
-\scan@allowedtrue
-\makeatother
-\def\dotfil{\leaders\hbox to.6em{\hss .\hss}\hfil}%
-\def\pfill{\unskip~\dotfill\penalty500\strut\nobreak
- \dotfil~\ignorespaces}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Load the \upack{minitoc} package, or \pack{mtcoff}.
-% \or\relax
-% Charger le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, ou \pack{mtcoff}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\usepackage[tight,hints,listfiles]{minitoc}
-%% \usepackage{mtcoff}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\makeindex
-\begin{document}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We call the mini-table preparation commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous appelons les commandes de préparation des mini-tables:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\dominitoc \dominilof \dominilot
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We are using the \pack{tocbibind} package to add special entries in the table of contents, so we must take
-% the precautions specified in section~\vref{special.entries}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous utilisons le paquetage \pack{tocbibind} pour ajouter des entrées spéciales dans la table des matières,
-% donc nous devons prendre les précautions spécifiées dans la section~\vref{special.entries}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\tableofcontents \mtcaddchapter
-\listoffigures \mtcaddchapter
-\listoftables \mtcaddchapter
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For a chapter, we want a minitoc, a minilof and a minitoc:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour un chapitre, nous voulons une minitoc, une minilof et une minitoc:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter{First chapter}\index{chapter!normal}
-\minitoc \mtcskip
-\minilof \mtcskip
-\minilot
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then the text of the chapter, with sections, figures and tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis le texte du chapitre, avec des figures et des tableaux:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\section{First section}
-
-\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{First figure} \end{figure}
-\begin{table}[tp] \caption{First table} \end{table}
-
-\section{Second section}
-A small nice citation from~\cite{dark}:\\
-\index{small}\index{citation}\index{nice}\index{A}\index{a}%
-\index{and}\index{bird}\index{But}\index{cannot}%
-\index{claim}\index{great}\index{he}\index{I}%
-\index{imagine}\index{it}\index{know}\index{land}%
-\index{on}\index{once}\index{that}\index{to}\index{tree}%
-\index{would}\index{yes}%
-\textsf{A bird cannot land once on a great tree and claim to know it.
-But I imagine that he would, yes.}\\
-\hbox{}\hfill
-Iain~M.~\textsc{Banks}~(1993),~\textsl{Against~a~dark~background.}%
-\index{Iain}\index{Banks}\index{Against}\index{dark}\index{background}
-
-\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{Second figure} \end{figure}
-\begin{table} \caption{Second table} \end{table}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter*}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A starred chapter requires a special treatment; three solutions are possible.
-% You can test variations on
-% the \com{mtcaddchapter} command. Just uncomment one (and
-% only one) of the \com{mtcaddchapter} commands after
-% \com{chapter*} in the source code of \exam{mtc-add.tex}.
-% For each case, look at the Table of Contents
-% and the involved chapter.
-% \or\relax
-% Un chapitre étoilé nécessite un traitement spécial; trois solutions sont possibles. Vous pouvez tester des
-% variations sur la commande \com{mtcaddchapter}. Il suffit de décommenter une et une seule des trois
-% commandes \com{mtcaddchapter} après \com{chapter*} dans le code source de \exam{mtc-add.tex}. Pour chaque
-% cas, regardez la table des matières et le chapitre concerné.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter*{Second chapter, starred}
-\index{chapter!starred}
-%% UNCOMMENT ONE AND ONLY ONE OF THE 3 FOLLOWING LINES
-\mtcaddchapter[Second chapter, starred] % OK
-%% \mtcaddchapter[~] % produces a (strange) correct result. OK
-%% \addcontentsline{toc}{xchapter}{}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% \mtcaddchapter[] % BAD SOLUTION
-%% \mtcaddchapter % BAD SOLUTION
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\index{tests}
-
-This is a starred chapter; you can test here variations on
-the \verb|\mtcaddchapter| command. Just uncomment one (and
-only one) of the \verb|\mtcaddchapter| commands after
-\verb|\chapter*| in the source code of \texttt{mtc-add.tex}.
-For each case, look at the \index{Table of Contents}Table of Contents
-and at this chapter.
-\index{a}\index{added}\index{after}\index{also}\index{and}%
-\index{at}\index{can}\index{case}\index{chapter}\index{code}%
-\index{command}\index{commands}\index{Contents}\index{each}%
-\index{entries}\index{For}\index{here}\index{I}\index{in}%
-\index{index}\index{is}\index{Just}\index{just}\index{look}%
-\index{lot}\index{of}\index{on}\index{one}\index{only}%
-\index{source}\index{starred}\index{Table}\index{test}%
-\index{the}\index{This}\index{this}\index{to}\index{uncomment}%
-\index{variations}\index{you}%
-I also added a lot of index entries, just to test.
-
-\chapter{Third chapter}
-\index{chapter!normal}
-\minitoc \mtcskip
-\minilof \mtcskip
-\minilot
-\section{Third section}
-
-\begin{figure} \caption{Third figure} \end{figure}
-\begin{table} \caption{Third table} \end{table}
-
-\section{Fourth section}
-
-\begin{figure} \caption{Fourth figure} \end{figure}
-\begin{table} \caption{Fourth table} \end{table}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\bibliographystyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\bibliography}
-% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% As we want to add an entry for the bibliography in the table of contents, and we use the \pack{tocbibind} package
-% for that, we must add a correction with \com{adjustmtc}:
-% \or\relax
-% Comme nous voulons ajouter une entrée pour la bibliographie dans la table des matières, et que nous utilisons
-% donc le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}, nous ajoutons une correction avec \com{adjustmtc}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\nocite*
-\def\noopsort#1{\relax}
-\bibliographystyle{plain}
-\bibliography{mtc-add}
-\adjustmtc
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\printindex}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% As we want to add an entry for the index in the table of contents, and we use the \pack{tocbibind} package
-% for that, we must add a correction; two solutions are available: use \com{mtcfixindex} or
-% the other given three lines:
-% \or\relax
-% Comme nous voulons ajouter une entrée pour l'index dans la table des matières, et que nous utilisons
-% le paquetage \pack{tocbibind} pour cela, nous devons ajouter une correction; deux solutions sont
-% disponibles: utiliser \com{mtcfixindex} ou les trois autres lignes données:
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\printindex
-\mtcfixindex % use this OR the 3 following lines
-%% \addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{}
-%% \addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{}
-%% \mtcaddchapter
-%%
-
-\appendix
-\chapter{App.~1}
-\index{chapter!appendix}
-\minitoc \mtcskip
-\minilof \mtcskip
-\minilot
-\section{Fifth section}
-
-\begin{figure} \caption{Fifth figure} \end{figure}
-\begin{table} \caption{Fifth table} \end{table}
-
-\section{Sixth section}
-
-\begin{figure} \caption{Sixth figure} \end{figure}
-\begin{table} \caption{Sixth table} \end{table}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The next chapter asks for a minitoc, a minilof and a minilot, but contains no tables; hence
-% the \upack{minitoc} package will give some warnings.
-% \or\relax
-% Le chapitre suivant demande une minitoc, une minilof et une minilot, mais ne contient aucun tableau; donc le
-% paquetage \upack{minitoc} émettra quelques avertissements.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter{App.~2}
-\index{chapter!appendix}
-%% contains no tables but asks for a minilot! No minilot printed.
-\minitoc \mtcskip
-\minilof \mtcskip
-\minilot
-\section{Seventh section}
-\begin{figure} \caption{Seventh figure} \end{figure}
-\begin{figure} \caption{Eighth figure} \end{figure}
-
-\section{Eighth section}
-
-\begin{figure} \caption{Ninth figure} \end{figure}
-\begin{figure} \caption{Eleventh figure} \end{figure}
-
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-add>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And we need also its small bibliographic data base:
-% \or\relax
-% Et nous avons aussi besoin de sa petite base bibliographique:
-% \fi
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \item the english documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package~\cite{minitoc}:
-% \or\relax
-% \item la documentation en anglais du paquetage \upack{minitoc}~\cite{minitoc}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-addbib>
-@MISC{minitoc,
- TITLE="The {\textsf{minitoc}} package",
- AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.",
- ADDRESS="{\url{mailto:drucbert@onera.fr}}",
- NOTE="{\url{http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.pdf}}",
- MONTH=jul,
- YEAR=2008}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \item the french documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package~\cite{minitoc-fr}:
-% \or\relax
-% \item la documentation en français du paquetage \upack{minitoc}~\cite{minitoc-fr}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-@MISC{minitoc-fr,
- TITLE="Le paquetage {\textsf{minitoc}}",
- AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.",
- ADDRESS="{\url{mailto:drucbert@onera.fr}}",
- NOTE="{\url{http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc-fr.pdf}}",
- MONTH=jul,
- YEAR=2008}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \item the documentation of the \upack{shorttoc} package~\cite{shorttoc}:
-% \or\relax
-% \item la documentation du paquetage \upack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-@MISC{shorttoc,
- TITLE="The {\textsf{shorttoc}} package",
- AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.",
- ADDRESS="{\url{mailto:drucbert@onera.fr}}",
- NOTE="{\url{http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/shorttoc/shorttoc.pdf}}",
- MONTH=aug,
- YEAR=2002}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \item a novel~\cite{dark} from which a short citation is taken:
-% \or\relax
-% \item un roman~\cite{dark} d'où une courte citation est extraite:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-@BOOK{dark,
- TITLE="{Against a Dark Background}",
- AUTHOR="Banks, Iain Menzies",
- PUBLISHER="Bantam Books",
- ISBN="0553292240 (pb)",
- YEAR=1993}
-%</mtc-addbib>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% But the database created this way must be trimmed of some spurious lines;
-% on Unix-like systems, do\footnote{Note that we should use no preamble for
-% this file in \xfile{minitoc.ins}; nevertheless, some spurious lines are still generated. This
-% problem is not yet corrected now, so we keep the solution.}:
-% \or\relax
-% Mais la base ainsi créée doit être purgée des lignes superflues;
-% sur les systèmes analogues à~Unix, faites\,\footnote{Notez que nous
-% ne devrions pas utiliser de préambule pour ce fichier dans \xfile{minitoc.ins}; néanmoins, des lignes
-% superflues sont encore produites. Ce problème n'est pas encore corrigé, donc nous conservons cette solution.}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{verse}\small
-% \verb"cat mtc-add.bib | grep -v '^%%' > addbib;mv addbib mtc-add.bib"
-% \end{verse}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-ads.tex} document file}\label{mtc-ads.tex}\iexam{mtc-ads.tex}
-% This document uses the \class{article} class and shows some problems for adding special entries in the
-% table of contents and some problems with floating objects. We need to use the \pack{tocbibind}
-% package~\cite{tocbibind} for the first ones and the \upack{minitoc} \opt{insection} package option to avoid
-% the drift if floating objects outside of their section. That gives the following document preamble:
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-ads.tex}}\label{mtc-ads.tex}\iexam{mtc-ads.tex}
-% Ce document utilise la classe \class{article} et montre quelques problèmes pour ajouter des entrées spéciales
-% dans la table des matières et quelques problèmes avec les objets flottants. Il nous faut utiliser le paquetage
-% \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} pour les premiers et l'option \opt{insection} du
-% paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour éviter la dérive des objets flottants hors de leur section. Ceci donne le
-% préambule suivant:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-ads>
-\documentclass[oneside,12pt,a4paper]{article}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-ads.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]
-\usepackage{url,tocbibind,makeidx}
-\makeatletter \newif\ifscan@allowed \scan@allowedtrue \makeatother
-\def\dotfil{\leaders\hbox to.6em{\hss .\hss}\hfil}%
-\def\pfill{\unskip~\dotfill\penalty500\strut\nobreak
- \dotfil~\ignorespaces}%
-\usepackage[tight,hints,insection]{minitoc}
-%% \usepackage{mtcoff}
-\makeindex
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The preparation commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Les commandes de préparation:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{document}
-\doparttoc \dopartlof \dopartlot
-\dosecttoc \dosectlof \dosectlot
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The commands to prepare the table of contents, the list of figures and the list of tables. As we use the
-% \pack{tocbibind} package, we must add some \com{mtcaddsection} commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Les commandes pour préparer la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux. Comme nous
-% utilisons le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}, nous devons ajouter quelques commandes \com{mtcaddsection}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\setcounter{tocdepth}{6}
-\setcounter{parttocdepth}{6}
-\setcounter{secttocdepth}{6}
-\tableofcontents \mtcaddsection
-\listoffigures \mtcaddsection
-\listoftables \mtcaddsection
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The body of the document: a part with its part-level mini-tables, some sections with their section-level
-% mini-tables. The document has an index and contains figures and tables.
-% \or\relax
-% Le corps du document: une partie avec ses mini-tables au niveau partie, quelques sections leurs mini-tables au
-% niveau section. Le document a un index et contient des figures et des tableaux.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\part{Part~1}
-\parttoc \mtcskip \partlof \mtcskip \partlot
-
-\section{First section}
-\index{section!normal}
-\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot
-\subsection{First subsection}
-
-\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{First figure} \end{figure}
-\begin{table}[tp] \caption{First table} \end{table}
-
-\subsection{Second subsection}
-A small nice citation from~\cite{dark}:\\
-\index{small}\index{citation}\index{nice}\index{A}%
-\index{a}\index{and}\index{bird}\index{But}%
-\index{cannot}\index{claim}\index{great}\index{he}%
-\index{I}\index{imagine}\index{it}\index{know}%
-\index{land}\index{on}\index{once}\index{that}%
-\index{to}\index{tree}\index{would}\index{yes}%
-A bird cannot land once on a great tree and claim to know it.
-But I imagine that he would, yes.\\
-\hbox{}\hfill Iain~M.~\textsc{Banks} (1993), \textsl{Against a dark background.}%
-\index{Iain}\index{Banks}\index{Against}\index{dark}\index{background}
-\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{Second figure} \end{figure}
-\begin{table} \caption{Second table} \end{table}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\section*}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Here, we try a starred section, with its entry in the table of contents. You can try several solutions (good or bad).
-% \or\relax
-% Ici, nous essayons une section étoilée, avec son entrée dans la table des matières. Vous pouvez essayer plusieurs
-% solutions (bonnes ou mauvaises).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\section*{Second section, starred}
-\index{section!starred}
-%% UNCOMMENT ONE AND ONLY ONE OF THE 4 FOLLOWING LINES
-\mtcaddsection[Second section, starred] % OK
-%% \mtcaddsection[] % BAD
-%% \mtcaddsection[~] % produces a (strange) correct result.
-%% \mtcaddsection % BAD
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\index{tests}
-
-This is a starred section; you can test here variations on
-the \verb|\mtcaddsection| command. Just uncomment one (and
-only one) of the \verb|\mtcaddsection| commands after
-\verb|\section*| in the source code of \texttt{mtc-add.tex}.
-For each case, look at the \index{Table of Contents}Table of Contents
-and at this section.
-\index{a}\index{added}\index{after}\index{also}\index{and}%
-\index{at}\index{can}\index{case}\index{section}%
-\index{code}\index{command}\index{commands}%
-\index{Contents}\index{each}\index{entries}\index{For}%
-\index{here}\index{I}\index{in}\index{index}\index{is}%
-\index{Just}\index{just}\index{look}\index{lot}%
-\index{of}\index{on}\index{one}\index{only}\index{source}%
-\index{starred}\index{Table}\index{test}\index{the}%
-\index{This}\index{this}\index{to}\index{uncomment}%
-\index{variations}\index{you}%
-I also added a lot of index entries, just to test.
-
-\section{Third section}
-\index{section!normal}
-\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot
-\subsection{Third subsection}
-
-\begin{figure} \caption{Third figure} \end{figure}
-\begin{table} \caption{Third table} \end{table}
-
-\subsection{Fourth subsection}
-
-\begin{figure} \caption{Fourth figure} \end{figure}
-\begin{table} \caption{Fourth table} \end{table}
-
-\subsubsection{Even a sub-sub-section!}
-\subsubsection{And yet another one}
-
-\part{Part~2}
-\parttoc \mtcskip \partlof \mtcskip \partlot
-
-\section{Fourth section}
-\index{section!normal}
-\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot
-\subsection{Fifth subsection}
-
-\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{Fifth figure} \end{figure}
-\begin{table}[tp] \caption{Fifth table} \end{table}
-
-\subsection{Sixth subsection}
-A small nice citation from~\cite{dark}:\\
-\index{small}\index{citation}\index{nice}\index{A}%
-\index{a}\index{and}\index{bird}\index{But}%
-\index{cannot}\index{claim}\index{great}\index{he}%
-\index{I}\index{imagine}\index{it}\index{know}%
-\index{land}\index{on}\index{once}\index{that}%
-\index{to}\index{tree}\index{would}\index{yes}%
-A bird cannot land once on a great tree and claim to know it.
-But I imagine that he would, yes.\\
-\hbox{}\hfill
-Iain~M.~\textsc{Banks} (1993), \textsl{Against a dark background.}%
-\index{Iain}\index{Banks}\index{Against}\index{dark}\index{background}
-
-\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{Sixth figure} \end{figure}
-\begin{table} \caption{Sixth table} \end{table}
-
-\section*{Fifth section, starred}
-\index{section!starred}
-%% UNCOMMENT ONE AND ONLY ONE OF THE 4 FOLLOWING LINES
-\mtcaddsection[Fifth section, starred] % OK
-%% \mtcaddsection[] % OK
-%% \mtcaddsection[~] % produces a (strange) correct result.
-%% \mtcaddsection % OK
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\index{tests}
-
-This is a starred section; you can test here variations on
-the \verb|\mtcaddsection| command. Just uncomment one (and
-only one) of the \verb|\mtcaddsection| commands after
-\verb|\section*| in the source code of \texttt{mtc-add.tex}.
-For each case, look at the \index{Table of Contents}Table of Contents
-and at this section.\index{a}%
-\index{added}\index{after}\index{also}\index{and}%
-\index{at}\index{can}\index{case}\index{section}%
-\index{code}\index{command}\index{commands}\index{Contents}%
-\index{each}\index{entries}\index{For}\index{here}%
-\index{I}\index{in}\index{index}\index{is}%
-\index{Just}\index{just}\index{look}\index{lot}%
-\index{of}\index{on}\index{one}\index{only}%
-\index{source}\index{starred}\index{Table}\index{test}%
-\index{the}\index{This}\index{this}\index{to}%
-\index{uncomment}\index{variations}\index{you}%
-I also added a lot of index entries, just to test.
-
-\section{Sixth section}
-\index{section!normal}
-\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot
-\subsection{Seventh subsection}
-
-\begin{figure} \caption{Seventh figure} \end{figure}
-\begin{table} \caption{Seventh table} \end{table}
-
-\subsection{Eighth subsection}
-
-\begin{figure} \caption{Eighth figure} \end{figure}
-\begin{table} \caption{Eighth table} \end{table}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\bibliographystyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\bibliography}
-% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The bibliography: as we want an entry for it in the table of contents, we use the
-% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} and a correction with \com{adjuststc}:
-% \or\relax
-% La bibliographie: comme nous voulons une entrée pour elle dans la table des matières, nous utilisons le
-% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} et une correction avec \com{adjuststc}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\nocite*
-\def\noopsort#1{\relax}
-\bibliographystyle{plain}
-\bibliography{mtc-add}
-\adjuststc
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\printindex}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The index: as we want an entry for it in the table of contents, we use the
-% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} and a correction with \com{mtcfixindex}:
-% \or\relax
-% L'index: comme nous voulons une entrée pour lui dans la table des matières, nous utilisons le
-% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} et une correction avec \com{mtcfixindex}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\printindex
-\mtcfixindex % use this OR the 3 following lines
-%% \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{}
-%% \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{}
-%% \mtcaddsection
-
-\appendix
-\section{App.~1}
-\index{section!appendix}
-\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot
-\subsection{Ninth subsection}
-
-\begin{figure} \caption{Ninth figure} \end{figure}
-\begin{table} \caption{Ninth table} \end{table}
-
-\subsection{Tenth subsection}
-
-\begin{figure} \caption{Tenth figure} \end{figure}
-\begin{table} \caption{Tenth table} \end{table}
-
-\section{App.~2}
-\index{section!appendix}
-%% contains no tables but asks for a sectlot! No sectlot printed.
-\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot
-\subsection{Eleventh subsection}
-
-\begin{figure} \caption{Eleventh figure} \end{figure}
-\begin{figure} \caption{Twelfth figure} \end{figure}
-
-\subsection{Twelfth subsection}
-
-\begin{figure} \caption{Thirdteenth figure} \end{figure}
-\begin{figure} \caption{Fourteenth figure} \end{figure}
-
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-ads>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-amm.tex} document file}\label{mtc-amm.tex}\iexam{mtc-amm.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-amm.tex}}\label{mtc-amm.tex}\iexam{mtc-amm.tex}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This example shows the use of the \env{appendices} environment in a \class{memoir} class document when
-% the \upack{minitoc} package is loaded. First, the preamble:
-% \or\relax
-% Cet exemple montre l'utilisation de l'environnement \env{appendices} dans un document de classe \class{memoir}
-% lorsque le paquetage \upack{minitoc} a été chargé. Tout d'abord, le préambule:
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-amm>
-\documentclass[oneside]{memoir}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-amm.tex}%
- [2007/08/29]
-\usepackage{lipsum} % filling text
-\usepackage{hyperref}
-\usepackage{memhfixc}
-\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
-\begin{document}
-\dominitoc \tableofcontents
-\adjustmtc
-\chapter{First chapter}
-\minitoc
-\lipsum[1]
-\section{First section}
-\lipsum[2]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{environment}{appendices}
-% \begin{macro}{\addappheadtotoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The appendices are set in an \env{appendices} environment; we can add an entry in the TOC with
-% \com{addappheadtotoc} (a command from the \class{memoir} class):
-% \or\relax
-% Les appendices sont composés dans un environnement \env{appendices}; nous pouvons ajouter une entrée dans la table
-% des matières avec \com{addappheadtotoc} (une commande fournie par la classe \class{memoir}):
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{appendices}
-\addappheadtotoc
-\adjustmtc %correction!
-\chapter{Afterthoughts}
-\minitoc
-\lipsum[3]
-Afterthoughts appendix
-\section{Further remarks}
-\lipsum[4]
-\chapter{Last wills}
-\minitoc
-\section{Testament}
-\lipsum[5]
-\end{appendices}
-\chapter{Conclusion}
-\minitoc
-\section{Bye}
-\lipsum[6]
-\chapter{Back from Hell}
-\minitoc
-\section{Not dead yet!}
-\lipsum[7]
-\section{I will survive}
-\lipsum[8]
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-amm>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \lneed{9}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-apx.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-apx.tex}\iexam{mtc-apx.tex}
-% The \exam{mtc-apx.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-apx.tex}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-apx.tex}}\label{1mtc-apx.tex}\iexam{mtc-apx.tex}
-% Le document \exam{mtc-apx.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-apx.tex}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-art.tex} document file}\label{mtc-art.tex}\iexam{mtc-art.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-art.tex}}\label{mtc-art.tex}\iexam{mtc-art.tex}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\stcindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This is a basic document using the \upack{minitoc} package. It contains sections but no chapters, so it must use an
-% \class{article}-like document class. You should work on a \emph{copy} of this file and
-% can alter its preamble and its contents to make experiments with parameters. A typical preamble follows:
-% \or\relax
-% C'est un document basique utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Il contient des sections mais pas de chapitres,
-% donc il doit utiliser une classe de document analogue à~\class{article}. Vous devriez travailler sur
-% une \emph{copie} de ce fichier et vous pouvez modifier son préambule et son contenu pour faire des essais avec
-% les paramètres. Voici donc un préambule typique:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-art>
-%% mtc-art.tex
-%% This file contains a set of tests for the minitoc.sty version #60
-%% package. You can alter most of parameters to test.
-%% article (\section must be defined)
-\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{article}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-art.tex}%
- [2007/06/06]
-\usepackage{lipsum} % provides filling text
-%% \usepackage{hyperref} % If used, load it BEFORE minitoc
-\usepackage[tight,insection]{minitoc}
-\setcounter{secnumdepth}{5} % depth of numbering of sectionning commands
-\setcounter{tocdepth}{3} % depth of table of contents
-\setlength{\stcindent}{24pt} % indentation of secttocs, default
-%% % font for secttocs, default
-\renewcommand{\stcfont}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries}%
-%% % font for secttocs, subsections
-%% \renewcommand{\stcSSfont}{\small\sf}%
-%% % you can make experiments with
-%% % \stcSSSfont, \stcPfont and \stcSPfont
-%% % but it is ``fontomania''...
-\raggedbottom % or \flushbottom, at your choice
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If you want to use sections numbered in each part (the section number restarts to~1 at the beginning of each
-% part), uncomment the 3~lines of code below. This demonstrates that the numbering of the secttoc files is
-% independent on the numbering of the sections (it is absolute).
-% \or\relax
-% Si vous voulez utiliser des sections numérotées dans chaque partie (le numéro de section repart à~1 au début de
-% chaque partie), décommentez les 3~lignes de code ci-dessous. Ceci montre que la numérotation des fichiers
-% secttoc est indépendante de celle des sections (elle est absolue).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%%% TEST: uncomment the next line to test
-%%% resetting section number in each part
-%%% \makeatletter \@addtoreset{section}{part} \makeatother
-%%% END TEST
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We begin the body of the document. You can still alter some parameters (presence or absence of rules and page numbers in
-% the mini-tables):
-% \or\relax
-% Nous commençons le corps du document. Vous pouvez encore altérer certains paramètres (présence ou absence de filets et
-% de numéros de pages dans les mini-tables):
-% \fi
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{document}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The preparation commands, with their optional argument if necessary:
-% \or\relax
-% Les commandes de préparation, avec leur argument optionnel si nécessaire:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\dosecttoc
-\dosectlof[c] % center titles of the sectlofs
-\dosectlot
-\doparttoc % test of parttoc/partlof stuff
-\dopartlof % added in version #15
-\dopartlot % added in version #15
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures}
-% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% It is necessary to create the contents files; use the ``fake'' version to not print.
-% \or\relax
-% Il est nécessaire de créer les fichiers de contenu; utilisez la version «~fake~» pour ne pas imprimer.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\faketableofcontents % or \tableofcontents
-\fakelistoffigures % to check compatibility
-\fakelistoftables % to check compatibility
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\part}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% There is the text of the document, with its sectionning commands;
-% we define a part, with a parttoc, a partlof (with the title on the right) and a parttoc:
-% \or\relax
-% Voici le texte du document, avec ses commandes de sectionnement;
-% nous définissons une partie, avec une parttoc, une partlof (avec le titre sur la droite) et une parttoc:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\part{First Part} \parttoc \partlof[r] \partlot
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A section, in two columns mode, with a secttoc (title on the right), and a sectlof; this section contains
-% subsections to make a non-empty secttoc but no figures (to detect an empty sectlof).
-% \or\relax
-% Une section, en mode deux colonnes, avec une secttoc (titre sur la droite), et une sectlof; cette section contient
-% des sous-sections pour que la secttoc ne soit pas vide mais pas de figures (pour détecter une sectlof vide).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\twocolumn\sloppy % the secttoc in twocolumn layout is ugly,
- % but works. Ideas to make it better?
-\section{AAAAA} % a section with a lot of sections
-\secttoc[r] % secttoc title on the right
-\mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED
-\lipsum[1]
-\subsection{S1} \lipsum[2]
-\subsection{S2} \lipsum[3]
-\subsection{S3} \lipsum[4]
-\subsection*{S4}
-%% \addcontentsline{toc}{starsubsection}{*S4*}
-\lipsum[5]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A lot of subsections:
-% \or\relax
-% Un tas de sous-sections:
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\subsection{S5} \lipsum[6]
-\subsection{S6} \lipsum[7]
-\subsection{S7} \lipsum[8]
-\subsection{S8} \lipsum[9]
-\subsection{S9} \lipsum[10]
-\subsection{S10} \lipsum[11]
-\subsection{S11} \lipsum[12]
-\subsection{S12} \lipsum[13]
-\subsection{S13} \lipsum[14]
-\subsection{S14} \lipsum[15]
-\subsection{S15} \lipsum[16]
-\subsection{S16} \lipsum[17]
-\subsection{S17} \lipsum[18]
-\subsection{S18} \lipsum[19]
-\subsection{S19} \lipsum[20]
-\subsection{S20} \lipsum[21]
-\subsection{S21} \lipsum[22]
-\subsection{S22} \lipsum[23]
-\subsection{S23} \lipsum[24]
-\subsection{S24} \lipsum[25]
-\subsection{S25} \lipsum[26]
-\subsection{S26} \lipsum[27]
-\subsection{S27} \lipsum[28]
-\subsection{S28} \lipsum[29]
-\subsection{S29} \lipsum[30]
-\subsection{S30} \lipsum[31]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \begin{macro}{\FloatBarrier}
-% \begin{macro}{\section*}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We return to the one column mode. Then a section with a secttoc and a sectlof (there are subsections and figures).
-% The \opt{insection} package option should ensure that floating objects (like figures) do not drift outside
-% their section.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous revenons au mode une colonne. Puis une section avec une secttoc et une sectlof (il y~a des sous-sections et
-% des figures).
-% L'option de paquetage \opt{insection} devrait garantir que les objets flottants (tels que les figures) ne
-% dérivent pas en dehors de leur section.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\onecolumn\fussy % back to one column
-\section{BBBBB}
-\secttoc
-\mtcskip % put some skip here
-\sectlof % a sectlof
-\lipsum[32]
-\subsection{T1} \lipsum[33]
-\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies
-\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
-\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture}
-\caption{F1} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar)
-\end{figure}
-\FloatBarrier
-\subsubsection[tt1]{TT1} % tests optional arg. of a sectionning command
-\lipsum[34]
-\paragraph{TTT1} \lipsum[35]
-\subparagraph{TTTT1} \lipsum[36]
-\begin{figure}[t]
-\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
-\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture}
-\caption[f2]{F2} % tests optional arg. of a caption
-\end{figure}
-\FloatBarrier
-\subsection{T2} \lipsum[37]
-\section*{CCCCC} % tests a pseudo-section. should have no secttoc
-%% \addstarredsection{CCCCC}
-\mtcaddsection[CCCCC]
-\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED
-\lipsum[38]
-\subsection{U1} \lipsum[39]
-\subsubsection{UU1} \lipsum[40]
-\paragraph{UUU1} \lipsum[41]
-\subparagraph{UUUU1} \lipsum[42]
-\subsection{U2} \lipsum[43]
-\part{Second Part}
-\parttoc
-\partlof[c]
-\partlot
-%% % the following section should have no secttoc,
-\section{DDDDD} % but if you uncomment \secttoc,
-%% \secttoc
-\mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED
-% % the secttoc appears
-\lipsum[44]
-\subsection{V1} \lipsum[45]
-\subsubsection{VV1} \lipsum[46]
-\paragraph{VVV1} \lipsum[47]
-\subparagraph{VVVV1} \lipsum[48]
-\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies
-\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
-\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture}
-\caption{F3} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar)
-\end{figure}
-\FloatBarrier
-\lipsum[49] \subsection{V2} \lipsum[50]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{10}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\FloatBarrier}
-% \begin{macro}{\part}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We change the depth of the secttocs, inside a local group (a pair of braces):
-% \or\relax
-% Nous changeons la profondeur des secttocs, dans un groupe local (une paire d'accolades):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\section{EEEEE} % this section should have a secttoc
-{% % left brace, see below
-\setcounter{secttocdepth}{3} % depth of sect table of contents;
- % try with different values.
-\secttoc
-\mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED
-} % right brace
-%% this pair of braces is used to keep local the change on secttocdepth.
-\lipsum[51]
-\subsection{W1} % with the given depth
-\lipsum[52]
-\subsubsection{WW1} \lipsum[53]
-\paragraph{WWW1} \lipsum[54]
-\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies
-\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
-\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture}
-\caption{F4} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar)
-\end{figure}
-\FloatBarrier
-bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla
-\subparagraph{WWWW1} \lipsum[55]
-\subsection{W2} \lipsum[56]
-\chapter*{}
-\part{Appendices}
-\parttoc \mtcskip
-\partlof \mtcskip
-\partlot
-\FloatBarrier
-\appendix
-\section{Comments} \lipsum[57]
-\secttoc
-\mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED
-\subsection{C1} \lipsum[58]
-\subsection{C2} \lipsum[59]
-\subsection{C3} \lipsum[60]
-\begin{figure}[hb] % tests compatibility with floating bodies
-\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
-\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture}
-\caption{F5} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar)
-\end{figure}
-\FloatBarrier
-\subsection{C4} \lipsum[61]
-\FloatBarrier
-\section{Evolution}
-\secttoc
-\sectlof % empty
-\sectlot % empty
-\lipsum[62]
-\subsection{D1} \lipsum[63] \subsection{D2} \lipsum[64]
-\subsection{D3} \lipsum[65] \subsection{D4} \lipsum[66]
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-art>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-bk.tex} document file}\label{mtc-bk.tex}\iexam{mtc-bk.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-bk.tex}}\label{mtc-bk.tex}\iexam{mtc-bk.tex}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This is a basic document using the \upack{minitoc} package. It contains chapters, so it must use a
-% \class{book}-like or \class{report}-like document class. You should work on a \emph{copy} of this file and
-% can alter its preamble and its contents to make experiments with parameters. A typical preamble follows:
-% \or\relax
-% C'est un document basique utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Il contient des chapitres, donc il doit
-% utiliser une classe de document analogue à~\upack{book} ou à~\class{report}. Vous devriez travailler sur
-% une \emph{copie} de ce fichier et vous pouvez modifier son préambule et son contenu pour faire des essais avec
-% les paramètres. Voici donc un préambule typique:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-bk>
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% A example file (differs from previous versions)
-%% mtc-bk.tex
-%% This file contains a set of tests for the minitoc.sty version #60 package file.
-%% You can alter most of parameters to test.
-%% Class: book/report (\chapter must be defined).
-%% You can use a copy of this file to play with minitoc commands and parameters.
-\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{report} % the report class uses less pages
-%% \documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{book}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-bk.tex}%
- [2007/06/06]
-\usepackage{lipsum} % provides filling text
-%% \usepackage{hyperref} % if used, load it BEFORE minitoc
-%% \usepackage{mtcoff}
-\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} % tight option make shorter mini-tables
-\setcounter{secnumdepth}{5} % depth of numbering of sectionning commands
-\setcounter{tocdepth}{3} % depth of table of contents
-\setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt} % indentation of minitocs, default
-\renewcommand{\mtcfont}{\small\rm} % font for minitocs, default
-\renewcommand{\mtcSfont}{\small\bf} % font for minitocs, sections, default
-%% \renewcommand{\mtcSSfont}{\small\sf} % font for minitocs, subsections
-%% you can make experiments with \mtcSSSfont, \mtcPfont and \mtcSPfont
-%% but it is ``fontomania''...
-\raggedbottom % or \flushbottom, at your choice
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If you want to use chapters numbered in each part (the chapter number restarts to~1 at the beginning of each
-% part), uncomment the 3~lines of code below. This demonstrates that the numbering of the minitoc files is
-% independent on the numbering of the chapters (it is absolute).
-% \or\relax
-% Si vous voulez utiliser des chapitres numérotés dans chaque partie (le numéro de partie repart à~1 au début de
-% chaque partie), décommentez les 3~lignes de code ci-dessous. Ceci montre que la numérotation des fichiers
-% minitoc est indépendante de celle des chapitres (elle est absolue).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%%% TEST: uncomment the next line to test resetting chapter number in each part
-%% \makeatletter \@addtoreset{chapter}{part} \makeatother
-%%% END TEST
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\noptcrule}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We begin the body of the document. You can still alter some parameters (presence or absence of rules and page numbers in
-% the mini-tables):
-% \or\relax
-% Nous commençons le corps du document. Vous pouvez encore altérer certains paramètres (présence ou absence de filets et
-% de numéros de pages dans les mini-tables):
-% \fi
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{document}
-\mtcpagenumbers
-\noptcrule
-%% \nomtcrule % suppresses minitoc rules
-%% \nomtcpagenumbers % suppresses minitoc page numbers
-%% \nomlfpagenumbers % ---------- minilof ---- -------
-%% \nomltpagenumbers % ---------- minilot ---- -------
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The preparation commands, with their optional argument if necessary:
-% \or\relax
-% Les commandes de préparation, avec leur argument optionnel si nécessaire:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\dominitoc
-\dominilof[c] % centers title of minilof's
-\dominilot
-\doparttoc % test of parttoc/partlof stuff
-\dopartlof % added in version #15
-\dopartlot % added in version #15
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
-% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% It is necessary to create the contents files; use the ``fake'' version to not print.
-% \or\relax
-% Il est nécessaire de créer les fichiers de contenu; utilisez la version «~fake~» pour ne pas imprimer.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\tableofcontents % or \faketableofcontents
-\listoffigures % or \fakelistoffigures
-\fakelistoftables % or \listoftables
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Uncomment the following line if the first chapter must be numbered~``0'':
-% \or\relax
-% Décommentez la ligne suivante si le premier chapitre doit être numéroté~«~0~»:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%% \addtocounter{chapter}{-1} % to begin with Chapter 0
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\part}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% There is the text of the document, with its sectionning commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Voici le texte du document, avec ses commandes de sectionnement:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\part{First Part}
-\parttoc \partlof[r] \partlot[r]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A chapter, in two column mode, with a minitoc (title on the right):
-% \or\relax
-% Un chapitre, en mode deux colonnes, avec une minitoc (titre sur la droite):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\twocolumn\sloppy % the minitoc in twocolumn layout is ugly,
-\chapter{AAAAA} % a chapter with a lot of sections
-\minitoc[r] % minitoc title on the right
-\lipsum[1]
-\section{S1} \lipsum[2]
-\section{S2} \lipsum[3]
-\section{S3} \lipsum[4]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\section*}
-% \begin{macro}{\addtocontentsline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A starred section; we want an entry in the TOC, so we add it the normal way:
-% \or\relax
-% Une section étoilée: nous voulons une entrée dans la table des matières, donc nous l'ajoutons de la manière
-% normale:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\section*{S4}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}{S4}}
-\lipsum[5]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A lot of subsections:
-% \or\relax
-% Un tas de sous-sections:
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\section{S5} \lipsum[6]
-\section{S6} \lipsum[6]
-\section{S7} \lipsum[7]
-\section{S8} \lipsum[9]
-\section{S9} \lipsum[10]
-\section{S10} \lipsum[11]
-\section{S11} \lipsum[12]
-\section{S12} \lipsum[13]
-\section{S13} \lipsum[14]
-\section{S14} \lipsum[15]
-\section{S15} \lipsum[16]
-\section{S16} \lipsum[17]
-\section{S17} \lipsum[18]
-\section{S18} \lipsum[19]
-\section{S19} \lipsum[20]
-\section{S20} \lipsum[21]
-\section{S21} \lipsum[22]
-\section{S22} \lipsum[23]
-\section{S23} \lipsum[24]
-\section{S24} \lipsum[25]
-\section{S25} \lipsum[26]
-\section{S26} \lipsum[27]
-\section{S27} \lipsum[28]
-\section{S28} \lipsum[29]
-\section{S29} \lipsum[30]
-\section{S30} \lipsum[31]
-\subsection{SS1} \lipsum[32]
-\section{S31} \lipsum[33]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We return to one column mode. A new chapter, with a minitoc, a minilof and a minilot:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous revenons au mode sur une colonne. Un nouveau chapitre, avec une minitoc, une minilof et une minilot:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\onecolumn\fussy % back to one column
-\chapter{BBBBB}
-\minitoc
-\mtcskip % put some skip here
-\minilof % a minilof
-\mtcskip % put some skip here
-\minilot % a minilot
-\lipsum[34]
-\section{T1} \lipsum[35]
-\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies
-\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
-\begin{picture}(100,50)
-\end{picture}
-\caption{F1} % (tables are similar)
-\end{figure}
-\begin{table}[b] % tests compatibility with floating bodies
-\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
-\begin{picture}(100,50)
-\end{picture}
-\caption{T1} % (tables are similar)
-\end{table}
-\clearpage
-\subsection[tt1]{TT1} % tests optional arg. of a sectionning command
-\lipsum[36]
-\subsubsection{TTT1} \lipsum[37]
-\paragraph{TTTT1} \lipsum[38]
-\begin{figure}
-\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
-\begin{picture}(100,50)
-\end{picture}
-\caption[f2]{F2} % tests optional arg. of a caption
-\end{figure}
-\section{T2} \lipsum[39]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter*}
-% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\section*}
-% \begin{macro}{\paragraph*}
-% \begin{macro}{\part}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A starred chapter with an entry added in the TOC; all subordinate (lower)
-% sectionning commands must also be starred.
-% \or\relax
-% Un chapitre étoilé avec une entrée ajoutée dans la table des matières;
-% toutes les commandes de sectionnement subalternes (plus basses) doivent aussi être étoilées.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter*{CCCCC} % tests a pseudo-chapter; could have a minitoc.
-\addstarredchapter{CCCCC}
-\lipsum[40]
-\section*{U1}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{U1}
-\lipsum[41]
-\subsection*{UU1}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{UU1}
-\lipsum[42]
-\subsubsection*{UUU1}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{subsubsection}{UUU1}
-\lipsum[43]
-\paragraph*{UUUU1}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{paragraph}{UUUU1}
-\lipsum[44]
-\section*{U2}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{U2}
-\lipsum[45]
-\part{Second Part}
-\parttoc
-\partlof[c]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This chapter has no minitoc, but if you uncomment \com{minitoc},
-% the minitoc will appear.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce chapitre n'a pas de minitoc, mais si vous décommentez \com{minitoc},
-% la minitoc apparaîtra.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%% % the following chapter should have no minitoc,
-\chapter{DDDDD} % but if you uncomment \minitoc,
-%% \minitoc % the minitoc appears
-\lipsum[46]
-\section{V1} \lipsum[47]
-\subsection{VV1} \lipsum[48]
-\subsubsection{VVV1} \lipsum[49]
-\paragraph{VVVV1} \lipsum[50]
-\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies
-\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
-\begin{picture}(100,50)
-\end{picture}
-\caption{F3} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar)
-\end{figure}
-\lipsum[51]
-\section{V2} \lipsum[52]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We change the depth of the minitocs, inside a local group (a pair of braces):
-% \or\relax
-% Nous changeons la profondeur des minitocs, dans un groupe local (une paire d'accolades):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter{EEEEE} % this chapter should have a minitoc
-{% % left brace, see below
-\setcounter{minitocdepth}{3} % depth of mini table of contents;
- % try with different values.
-\minitoc
-} % right brace
-%% this pair of braces is used to keep local the change
-%% on minitocdepth.
-\lipsum[53]
-\section{W1} % with the given depth
-\lipsum[54]
-\subsection{WW1} \lipsum[55]
-\subsubsection{WWW1} \lipsum[56]
-\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies
-\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
-\begin{picture}(100,50)
-\end{picture}
-\caption{F4} % (I have not tested tables here, but it is similar)
-\end{figure}
-\lipsum[57]
-\paragraph{WWWW1} \lipsum[58]
-\subparagraph{WWWWW1} \lipsum[59]
-\section{W2} \lipsum[60]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
-% \begin{macro}{\part}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Here, we encounter a classical problem: to make a local table of contents for a set
-% of appendices, while hiding these entries in the main table of contents. First, we
-% create a part, with its parttoc:
-% \or\relax
-% Ici, nous rencontrons un problème classique: faire une table des matières locale pour un ensemble d'appendices,
-% et tout en masquant ces entrées dans la table des matières principale. Tout d'abord, nous créons une partie, avec sa
-% parttoc:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\appendix
-\part{Appendices}
-\parttoc
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then, we begin a \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment, with the hiding depth as optional argument:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis nous commençons un environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}, avec la profondeur de masquage requise:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{mtchideinmaintoc}[-1]
-\chapter{Comments}
-\minitoc
-\section{C1} \lipsum[61]
-\section{C2} \lipsum[62]
-\section{C3} \lipsum[63]
-\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies
-\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
-\begin{picture}(100,50)
-\end{picture}
-\caption{F5} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar)
-\end{figure}
-\section{C4}
-\chapter{Evolution}
-\minitoc
-\minilof %Empty => invisible
-\minilot %Empty => invisible
-\section{D1} \lipsum[64]
-\section{D2} \lipsum[65]
-\section{D3} \lipsum[66]
-\section{D4} \lipsum[67]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% We terminate the part by adding a marker in the TOC file, then we must close this \env{mtchideinmaintoc}
-% environment:
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \or\relax
-% Nous terminons la partie en ajoutant un marqueur dans le fichier table des matières, puis nous devons fermer
-% cet environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%% this line closes the omitted part
-\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}
-%% this line restore the depth in the main TOC
-\end{mtchideinmaintoc}
-\lipsum[68]
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-bk>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-bo.tex} document file}\label{mtc-bo.tex}\iexam{mtc-bo.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-bo.tex}}\label{mtc-bo.tex}\iexam{mtc-bo.tex}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document using a two column layout for some
-% portions and the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}. The aim is to begin a chapter with a special head and a
-% preliminary block containing a minitoc and some indications, on two columns.
-% The preamble loads the \pack{geometry} package~\cite{geometry}, which defines the global page layout,
-% the \pack{multicol} package~\cite{multicol}, the \pack{color} package~\cite{color}, because we want a colored
-% background
-% for the minitoc, the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}, to change some parameters of the minitoc, and, at
-% least, the \upack{minitoc} package itself:
-% \or\relax
-% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document utilisant une mise en page sur
-% deux colonnes pour certaines portions et le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}. Le but est de commencer
-% un chapitre avec un en-tête spécial et un bloc préliminaire contenant une minitoc et quelques indications, sur
-% deux colonnes.
-% Le préambule charge le paquetage \pack{geometry}~\cite{geometry},
-% qui définit la mise en page globale, le paquetage \pack{multicol}~\cite{multicol},
-% le paquetage \pack{color}~\cite{color},
-% car nous voulons un fond coloré pour la minitoc, le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}, pour changer
-% quelques paramètres de la minitoc, et, enfin, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} lui-même:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-bo>
-\documentclass[10pt]{book}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-bo.tex}%
- [2007/04/17]
-\usepackage[paperwidth=8.5in,paperheight=11in,%
- lmargin=1.25in,rmargin=1.25in,tmargin=1in,bmargin=1in]{geometry}
-\usepackage{multicol}
-\usepackage{color}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\setlength}
-% \begin{macro}{\addtolength}
-% \begin{macro}{\cftsecindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\cftsecnumwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecnumwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsubsecindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsubsecnumwidth}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We use the \pack{tocloft} package and its commands to set the indentations in the TOC and the minitoc:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous utilisons le paquetage \pack{tocloft} et ses commandes pour établir les indentations dans la table des
-% matières et la minitoc:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\usepackage{tocloft}
-\setlength{\cftsecindent}{0cm}
-\setlength{\cftsecnumwidth}{15 pt}
-\setlength{\cftsubsecindent}{\cftsecindent}
-\addtolength{\cftsubsecindent}{\cftsecnumwidth}
-\setlength{\cftsubsecnumwidth}{20 pt}
-\setlength{\cftsubsubsecindent}{\cftsubsecindent}
-\addtolength{\cftsubsubsecindent}{\cftsubsecnumwidth}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\cftpagenumbersoff}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Note that if we want to suppress the page numbers in the minitoc, we must use the commands from \pack{tocloft}:
-% \or\relax
-% Notez que si nous voulons supprimer les numéros de page dans la minitoc, nous devons utiliser les commandes
-% de \pack{tocloft}:
-% \fi
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\cftpagenumbersoff{sec}
-\cftpagenumbersoff{subsec}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomtcrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We load the \upack{minitoc} package and change the indentation, suppress the rules and change the minitoc
-% title. The \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref} can also be loaded (\emph{after} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \or\relax
-% Nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et changeons l'indentation, supprimons les filets et changeons le
-% titre. Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref} peut aussi être chargé (\emph{après} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\usepackage[francais,tight]{minitoc}
-\usepackage{hyperref}
-\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt}
-\nomtcrule % pas de filets en haut et en bas de la mini-tdm
-\nomtcpagenumbers % pas de numéro de pages
-% (non fonctionnel avec tocloft)
-\renewcommand{\mtctitle}{Contenu de la rencontre}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We load also some packages for the french language (some are local):
-% \or\relax
-% Nous chargeons aussi quelques paquetages pour la langue française:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\usepackage[francais]{babel}
-\usepackage{franc,frnew}
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-\usepackage[isolatin]{inputenc}
-\usepackage{mypatches}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This code redefines the format of the chapter head:
-% \or\relax
-% Ce code redéfinit le format de l'en-tête de chapitre:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% MACRO POUR AVOIR LE MOT « RENCONTRE » AU LIEU DE « CHAPITRE » %
-% Sans saut de ligne (modification du code qui se trouve dans la FAQ) %
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\makeatletter
-\def\@makechapterhead#1{%
- \vspace*{10\p@}%
- {\parindent \z@ \raggedleft \normalfont
- \interlinepenalty\@M
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \Huge\bfseries\sffamily Rencontre \thechapter\\% \quad
- \fi
- \Huge\bfseries\sffamily #1\par\nobreak
- \vskip 10\p@
-}}
-\def\@makeschapterhead#1{%
- \vspace*{10\p@}%
- {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont
- \interlinepenalty\@M
- \Huge \sffamily #1\par\nobreak
- \vskip 10\p@
-}} \makeatother
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define an environment (\env{pageUn}) for the block placed at the beginning of a chapter. This block
-% contains a minitoc, then a sequence of informations given by the 6~parameters of the environment. The block
-% uses a \env{multicols} environment to typeset on two columns. Some decorations are added: rules, colored
-% background for the minitoc.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons un environnement (\env{pageUn}) pour le bloc placé en début de chapitre. Ce bloc contient
-% une minitoc, puis une séquence d'informations données par les 6~paramètres de l'environnement. Ce bloc utilise
-% un environnement \env{multicols} pour composer sur deux colonnes. Quelques décorations sont ajoutées: des
-% filets, un fond coloré pour la minitoc.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%: ENVIRONNEMENT POUR LA PAGE 1 DES RENCONTRES %
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% param1: date de la rencontre
-% param2: nombre de périodes
-% param3: liste des documents distribués
-% param4: messages
-% param5: lecture
-% param6: exercices
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\newenvironment{pageUn}[6]{%
-\parindent = 0.0in
-\rule{\linewidth}{1pt}
-\begin{multicols}{2}
- {\large \bfseries Math. pour médecine nucléaire\\
- \textit{(#2)}}
- \vfill\columnbreak
- \raggedleft\bfseries Automne 2003\\
- #1
-\end{multicols}
-\vspace{-18pt}
-\rule{\linewidth}{1pt}
-
-\setlength{\columnseprule}{.3pt} \setlength{\columnsep}{1cm}
-\begin{multicols}{2}%
-
-%: TABLE DES MATIÈRES (col. gauche)
-\colorbox[cmyk]{.1,0,0,0}{%
- \parbox{\linewidth}{%
- \setcounter{minitocdepth}{3}%
- \minitoc%
- }}
-%\vfill \columnbreak ~ \vfill
-
-\mtcskip
-
-%: DOCUMENTS DISTRIBUÉS (début col. droite)
-
-{\large \bfseries Documents distribués}
-\begin{itemize} \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\star$} #3 \end{itemize}
-
-%: MESSAGES AUX ÉTUDIANTS
-
-\vspace{12pt}{\large \bfseries Messages}
-\begin{itemize} \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\star$}#4\end{itemize}
-
-%: LECTURE
-\vspace{12pt}{\large \bfseries Lecture}\vspace{-6pt} \par#5 \par
-
-% EXERCICES
-\vspace{12pt}{\large \bfseries Exercices}\vspace{-6pt}\par#6\par
-
-%\newpage
-\end{multicols}%
-}
-%{\newpage}
-{\hrule}
-
-%\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.2} %interligne
-
-%\pagestyle{empty} %pas de # de page
-%\parindent = 0.0in
-\parskip = 0.1in
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%: REDÉFINIR LES SECTIONS %
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\renewcommand{\thesection}{\Alph{section}}
-%\renewcommand{\thesection}{\thechapter-\Alph{section}}
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The body of the document:
-% \or\relax
-% Le corps du document:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%%%%%%%%%%
-%: BEGIN %
-%%%%%%%%%%
-\begin{document}
-\dominitoc \faketableofcontents
-\chapter{Première étape (début)}
-%\minitoc
-\begin{pageUn}
- {%1 Date du cours
- lundi 25 août
- }
- {%2 Durée du cours
- 2 périodes
- }
- {%3 Liste des documents à~distribuer
- \item Plan de cours
- \item Fiche d'identification
- \item Grille horaire
- \item Feuilles d'exercices supplémentaires
- }
- {%4 Ne pas oublier
- \item Acheter le livre de référence
- \item Apporter une disquette
- }
- {%5 Lecture
- Lire les pages ppp à~ppp et ppp à~ppp
- }
- {%6 Exercice
- Faire les exercices nnn de la page ppp
- }
-\end{pageUn}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\section{Titre de la section} %
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-Texte dans la section
-
-%%
-\subsection{Une sous-section}
-%%
-Bla bla bla
-
-%%
-\subsection{Une autre sous-section}
-%%
-Bla bla bla
-
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\section{Titre d'une autre section} %
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-Texte dans la section
-
-%%
-\subsection{Une sous-section}
-%%
-Bla bla bla
-
-%%
-\subsection{Une autre sous-section}
-%%
-Bla bla bla
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\section{Encore une autre section} %
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-Texte dans la section
-
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-bo>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-ch0.tex} document file}\label{mtc-ch0.tex}\iexam{mtc-ch0.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-ch0.tex}}\label{mtc-ch0.tex}\iexam{mtc-ch0.tex}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document using a starred first chapter,
-% inducing the ``Chapter Zero'' problem.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document utilisant un premier chapitre
-% étoilé, induisant le problème du «~Chapitre~zéro~».
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-ch0>
-\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{report}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-ch0.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]
-\usepackage[tight,english]{minitoc}
-\begin{document}
-\dominitoc \tableofcontents
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter*}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The first chapter is starred, but contains real numbered sections. We add an entry in the TOC for this chapter
-% and see that its sections are using ``0'' as chapter number:
-% \or\relax
-% Le premier chapitre est étoilé, mais contient de vraies sections numérotées. Nous ajoutons une entrée pour ce
-% chapitre dans la table des matières et voyons que ses sections utilisent «~0~» comme numéro de chapitre:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter*{Chapter One (starred)}
-\mtcaddchapter[Fake chapter one]
-\minitoc
-\section{Chap 1, section 1}
-That's right, folks -- we're close to the release of Firefox and
-Thunderbird~1.0 and, just like our last 1.0~release, we want to organize
-worldwide parties to celebrate.
-
-Thanks to Dominik 'Aeneas' Schnitzer, we have an all-new and improved
-Mozilla Party Webtool~2.0. You can create your own party, or sign up for
-one already in progress -- and, in an improvement on Webtool~1.0,
-organizers can now edit and update party details. The tool allows you to
-organize a celebration in any of 243~countries, principalities,
-dominions and islands around the world. Never let it be said that we do
-things by halves around here.
-
-\subsection{Chap 1, section 1, subsection 1}
-That's right, folks -- we're close to the release of Firefox and
-Thunderbird~1.0 and, just like our last 1.0~release, we want to organize
-worldwide parties to celebrate.
-
-Thanks to Dominik 'Aeneas' Schnitzer, we have an all-new and improved
-Mozilla Party Webtool~2.0. You can create your own party, or sign up for
-one already in progress -- and, in an improvement on Webtool~1.0,
-organizers can now edit and update party details. The tool allows you to
-organize a celebration in any of 243~countries, principalities,
-dominions and islands around the world. Never let it be said that we do
-things by halves around here.
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The second chapter is normal:
-% \or\relax
-% Le second chapitre est normal:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter{Chapter Two (numbered one)}
-\minitoc
-\section{Chapter 2, section 1}
-That's right, folks -- we're close to the release of Firefox and
-Thunderbird 1.0 and, just like our last 1.0~release, we want to organize
-worldwide parties to celebrate.
-
-Thanks to Dominik 'Aeneas' Schnitzer, we have an all-new and improved
-Mozilla Party Webtool~2.0. You can create your own party, or sign up for
-one already in progress -- and, in an improvement on Webtool~1.0,
-organizers can now edit and update party details. The tool allows you to
-organize a celebration in any of 243~countries, principalities,
-dominions and islands around the world. Never let it be said that we do
-things by halves around here.
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-ch0>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{12}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-cri.tex} document file}\label{mtc-cri.tex}\iexam{mtc-cri.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-cri.tex}}\label{mtc-cri.tex}\iexam{mtc-cri.tex}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\part*}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter*}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document
-% with a starred part and starred chapters. Note the use of the adjustment commands.
-% This example is not commented: just follow the insertion of the mini-tables in the \xfile{mtc-cri.log} file.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document
-% avec une partie étoilée et des chapitres étoilés. Notez l'utilisation des commandes d'ajustement.
-% Cet exemple n'est pas commenté: suivez simplement l'insertion des mini-tables dans le fichier \xfile{mtc-cri.log}.
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-cri>
-\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]%
- {report}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-cri.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]
-\usepackage[francais]{babel}
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
-\usepackage%
- [french2,tight]%
- {minitoc}
-
-\mtcsetdepth{parttoc}{2}
-
-\begin{document}
-\doparttoc \dominitoc
-\tableofcontents
-\part*{Présentation générale}
-\mtcaddpart[Présentation générale]
-\adjustptc[-2]
-\parttoc
-
-Texte de la
-présentation générale\ldots
-
-\chapter*{Les auteurs}
-\mtcaddchapter[Les auteurs]
-Présentation des auteurs\ldots
-
-\chapter*{Les lecteurs}
-\mtcaddchapter[Les lecteurs]
-Présentation des lecteurs\ldots
-
-\part{Première partie}
-\parttoc
-\chapter*{Introduction}
-\mtcaddchapter[Introduction]
-\chapter{Premier chapitre}
-\minitoc
-\section{Première section~A}
-\section{Deuxième section~A}
-\chapter{Deuxième chapitre}
-\minitoc
-\section{Première section~B}
-\section{Deuxième section~B}
-
-\part{Deuxième partie}
-\parttoc
-\chapter{Premier chapitre}
-\minitoc
-\section{Première section~C}
-\section{Deuxième section~C}
-\chapter{Deuxième chapitre}
-\minitoc
-\section{Première section~D}
-\section{Deuxième section~D}
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-cri>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}%
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-fko.tex} document file}\label{mtc-fko.tex}\iexam{mtc-fko.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-fko.tex}}\label{mtc-fko.tex}\iexam{mtc-fko.tex}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This is a document using the \class{scrbook} class. Without any precaution, some entries in the minitocs are
-% not in the right font (bold sans serif) like in the main table of contents; moreover, the language of the
-% minitoc titles is not correct because the options of the \pack{babel} package are not transferred to the
-% \upack{minitoc} package. To solve the language problem, we just set ``\lopt{german}'' as a \emph{global} option in
-% the \com{documentclass} command (\pack{babel} and \upack{minitoc} will hence use this global option).
-% \or\relax
-% C'est un document qui utilise la classe \class{scrbook}. Sans aucune précaution, certaines entrées dans les minitocs ne
-% sont pas dans la fonte correcte (grasse et sans empattements) comme dans la table des matières principale; de
-% plus, la langue des titres des minitocs n'est pas correcte car les options du paquetage \pack{babel} ne sont
-% pas transmises au paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Pour résoudre ce problème de langue, nous mettons
-% simplement «~\lopt{german}~» comme option \emph{globale} dans la commande \com{documentclass} (\pack{babel}
-% et \upack{minitoc} utiliseront donc cette option globale).
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{4}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-fko>
-\documentclass[german,a4paper,oneside]{scrbook}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-fko.tex}%
- [2007/02/19]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then we load the packages and set some parameters:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis nous chargeons les paquetages et établissons quelques paramètres:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\usepackage{babel}
-\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
-\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} % optional
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then we set explicitly the fonts for the entries\footnote{Here we only gave the commands for the section entries in
-% the minitocs, but analog commands may be used for lower entries.} and the font of the titles of the minitocs,
-% knowing that the font command \com{sectfont} is defined in \xfile{scrbook.cls}; we change also the title for
-% the minitocs:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis nous établissons explicitement les fontes pour les entrées\,\footnote{Nous ne donnons ici que les commandes
-% pour les entrées de sections dans les minitocs, mais des commandes analogues peuvent être utilisées pour des
-% entrées inférieures.} et la fonte des titres des minitocs, en sachant que la commande de fonte \com{sectfont}
-% est définie dans \xfile{scrbook.cls}; nous changeons aussi le titre des minitocs:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\sectfont\small}
-\mtcsettitlefont{minitoc}{\sectfont\large}
-\mtcsettitle{minitoc}{Inhalt}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then the body of the document, with a chapter (with a minitoc) containing a section. The section entry did not
-% appear in bold sans serif in the original document (before the corrections).
-% \or\relax
-% Et voici le corps du document, avec un chapitre (et sa minitoc) contenant une section. L'entrée de section
-% n'apparaissait pas en gras sans empattement dans le document original (avant les corrections).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{document}
-\dominitoc \tableofcontents
-%
-\chapter{Ein serifenloses Kapitel}
-\minitoc % Aufruf Minitoc
-\section{Dieser Text ist in minitoc serifenlos}
-Auch der Text \glqq Inhaltsangabe\grqq\ will
-so wie koma es definiert.
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-fko>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-fo1.tex} document file}\label{mtc-fo1.tex}\iexam{mtc-fo1.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-fo1.tex}}\label{mtc-fo1.tex}\iexam{mtc-fo1.tex}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\part}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This document creates several copies of the same parttoc, but with different fonts (for the chapter level
-% entries); you can compare the results.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce document crée plusieurs copies de la même parttoc, mais avec des fontes différentes (pour les entrées du niveau
-% chapitre); vous pouvez comparer les résultats.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-fo1>
-\documentclass{report}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-fo1.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]
-\usepackage{lipsum}
-\usepackage{txfonts}
-\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
-\begin{document}
-\doparttoc \dominitoc \tableofcontents
-\part{Introduction} \clearpage
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A first copy, with default fonts:
-% \or\relax
-% Une première copie, avec les fontes par défaut:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\parttoc \clearpage
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A second copy, roman bold font for chapter entries:
-% \or\relax
-% Une deuxième copie, fonte romaine grasse pour les entrées de chapitres:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{chapter}{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}
-\parttoc \clearpage
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A third copy, typewriter bold font for chapter entries:
-% \or\relax
-% Une troisième copie, fonte bâton grasse pour les entrées de chapitres:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{chapter}{\normalsize\ttfamily\upshape\bfseries}
-\parttoc \clearpage
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A fourth copy, not bold typewriter font for chapter entries:
-% \or\relax
-% Une quatrième copie, fonte bâton non grasse pour les entrées de chapitres:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{*}{\normalsize\ttfamily\upshape\mdseries}
-\parttoc \clearpage
-\chapter{A very short chapter}
-\minitoc
-\lipsum[1]
-\section{First section} \lipsum[2]
-\subsection{Alpha} \lipsum[3]
-\subsection{Beta} \lipsum[4]
-\section{Second section} \lipsum[5]
-\subsection{Gamma} \lipsum[6]
-\subsection{Delta} \lipsum[7]
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-fo1>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-fo2.tex} document file}\label{mtc-fo2.tex}\iexam{mtc-fo2.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-fo2.tex}}\label{mtc-fo2.tex}\iexam{mtc-fo2.tex}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This document creates several copies of the same parttoc, but with different fonts (for the chapter level
-% entries); you can compare the results. As the fonts are not declared the same way, compare the results
-% with those of \exam{mtc-fo1.tex} (see section~\vref{mtc-fo1.tex}).
-% \or\relax
-% Ce document crée plusieurs copies de la même parttoc, mais avec des fontes différentes (pour les entrées du niveau
-% chapitre); vous pouvez comparer les résultats. Comme les fontes ne sont pas déclarées de la même manière,
-% comparez les résultats avec ceux de \exam{mtc-fo1.tex} (voir la section~\vref{mtc-fo1.tex}).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-fo2>
-\documentclass{report}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-fo2.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]
-\usepackage{lipsum}
-\usepackage{txfonts}
-\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \lneed{11}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\plffont}
-% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\part}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We declare the fonts with the old method:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous déclarons les fontes avec l'ancienne méthode:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\ptcSSfont{\ptcfont} % (subsections)
- \def\ptcSSSfont{\ptcfont} % (subsubsections)
- \def\ptcPfont{\ptcfont} % (paragraphs)
- \def\ptcSPfont{\ptcfont} % (subparagraphs)
- \def\plffont{\ptcfont} % (figures)
- \def\plfSfont{\ptcfont} % (subfigures)
- \def\pltfont{\ptcfont} % (tables)
- \def\pltSfont{\ptcfont} % (subtables)
-\begin{document}
-\doparttoc \dominitoc
-\tableofcontents
-\part{Introduction}
-\clearpage
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A first version of the parttoc, with the fonts defined above:
-% \or\relax
-% Une première version de la parttoc, avec les fontes définies ci-dessus:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\parttoc \clearpage
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A second version of the parttoc, with chapter entries in a roman bold font:
-% \or\relax
-% Une deuxième version de la parttoc, avec les entrées de chapitres en fonte romane grasse:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{chapter}{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}
-\parttoc \clearpage
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A third version of the parttoc, with chapter entries in a typewriter bold font:
-% \or\relax
-% Une troisième version de la parttoc, avec les entrées de chapitres en fonte bâton grasse:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{chapter}{\normalsize\ttfamily\upshape\bfseries}
-\parttoc \clearpage
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A fourth version of the parttoc, with chapter entries in a non bold typewriter font:
-% \or\relax
-% Une quatrième version de la parttoc, avec les entrées de chapitres en fonte bâton non grasse:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{*}{\normalsize\ttfamily\upshape\mdseries}
-\parttoc \clearpage
-\chapter{A very short chapter}
-\minitoc
-\lipsum[1]
-\section{First section} \lipsum[2]
-\subsection{Alpha} \lipsum[3] \subsection{Beta} \lipsum[4]
-\section{Second section} \lipsum[5]
-\subsection{Gamma} \lipsum[6] \subsection{Delta} \lipsum[7]
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-fo2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-gap.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-gap.tex}\iexam{mtc-gap.tex}
-% The \exam{mtc-gap.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-gap.tex}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-gap.tex}}\label{1mtc-gap.tex}\iexam{mtc-gap.tex}
-% Le document \exam{mtc-gap.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-gap.tex}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hi1.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-hi1.tex}\iexam{mtc-hi1.tex}
-% The \exam{mtc-hi1.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-hi1.tex}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hi1.tex}}\label{1mtc-hi1.tex}\iexam{mtc-hi1.tex}
-% Le document \exam{mtc-hi1.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-hi1.tex}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hi2.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-hi2.tex}\iexam{mtc-hi2.tex}
-% The \exam{mtc-hi2.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-hi2.tex}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hi2.tex}}\label{1mtc-hi2.tex}\iexam{mtc-hi2.tex}
-% Le document \exam{mtc-hi2.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-hi2.tex}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{12}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hia.tex} document file}\label{mtc-hia.tex}\iexam{mtc-hia.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hia.tex}}\label{mtc-hia.tex}\iexam{mtc-hia.tex}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document where the entries for some tables
-% must be hidden in the main list of tables. The document uses the \class{article} class.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document où les entrées pour certains
-% tableaux doivent être masquées dans la liste des tableaux principale. Le document utilise la classe \class{article}.
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-hia>
-\documentclass%
- [oneside,a4paper]{article}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-hia.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]
-\usepackage{lipsum}
-\usepackage%
- [tight,insection]%
- {minitoc}
-\dosectlot
-\begin{document}
-\listoftables
-\section{First section}
-\sectlot
-\lipsum[1]
-\begin{table}[hb]
-\caption{My first visible table}
-\end{table}
-\lipsum[2]
-\begin{table}[ht]
-\caption{A second visible table}
-\end{table}
-\lipsum[3]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtchideinmainlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For\virage{} the \emph{first} hidden table, we add \com{mtchideinmainlot} \emph{before} its caption:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour\virage{} le \emph{premier} tableau masqué, nous ajoutons \com{mtchideinmainlot} \emph{avant} son caption:
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{table}[hb]
-\mtchideinmainlot
-\caption{My first hidden table}
-\end{table}
-\lipsum[4-6]
-\begin{table}[ht]
-\caption{A second hidden table}
-\end{table}
-\lipsum[7]
-\section{Second section}
-\sectlot
-\lipsum[8]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macro}{\endmtchideinmainlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For\virage{} the \emph{last} hidden table, we add \com{endmtchideinmainlot} \emph{after} its caption:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour\virage{} le \emph{dernier} tableau masqué, nous ajoutons \com{endmtchideinmainlot} \emph{après} son caption:
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{table}[hb]
-\caption{My last hidden table}
-\endmtchideinmainlot
-\end{table}
-\lipsum[9]
-\begin{table}[ht]
-\caption{A third visible table}
-\end{table}
-\lipsum[10]
-\begin{table}[hb]
-\caption{A fourth visible table}
-\end{table}
-\lipsum[11]
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-hia>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hir.tex} document file}\label{mtc-hir.tex}\iexam{mtc-hir.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hir.tex}}\label{mtc-hir.tex}\iexam{mtc-hir.tex}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document where the entries for some tables
-% must be hidden in the main list of tables. The document uses the \class{report} class.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document où les entrées pour certains
-% tableaux doivent être masquées dans la liste des tableaux principale. Le document utilise la classe \class{report}.
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-hir>
-\documentclass[a4paper]{report}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-hir.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]
-\usepackage{lipsum}
-\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
-\dominilot
-\begin{document}
-\listoftables
-\chapter{First chapter}
-\minilot
-\lipsum[1]
-\begin{table}[hb]
-\caption{My first visible table}
-\end{table}
-\lipsum[2]
-\begin{table}[ht]
-\caption{A second visible table}
-\end{table}
-\lipsum[3]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtchideinmainlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For\virage{} the \emph{first} hidden table, we add \com{mtchideinmainlot} \emph{before} its caption:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour\virage{} le \emph{premier} tableau masqué, nous ajoutons \com{mtchideinmainlot} \emph{avant} son caption:
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{table}[hb]
-\mtchideinmainlot % <--
-\caption{My first hidden table}
-\end{table}
-\lipsum[4-6]
-\begin{table}[ht]
-\caption{A second hidden table}
-\end{table}
-\lipsum[7]
-\chapter{Second chapter}
-\minilot
-\lipsum[8]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macro}{\endmtchideinmainlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For\virage{} the \emph{last} hidden table, we add \com{endmtchideinmainlot} \emph{after} its caption:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour\virage{} le \emph{dernier} tableau masqué, nous ajoutons \com{endmtchideinmainlot} \emph{après} son caption:
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{table}[hb]
-\caption{My last hidden table}
-\endmtchideinmainlot % <--
-\end{table}
-\lipsum[9]
-\begin{table}[ht]
-\caption{A third visible table}
-\end{table}
-\lipsum[10]
-\begin{table}[hb]
-\caption{A fourth visible table}
-\end{table}
-\lipsum[11]
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-hir>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hop.tex} document file}\label{mtc-hop.tex}\iexam{mtc-hop.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hop.tex}}\label{mtc-hop.tex}\iexam{mtc-hop.tex}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document of class \class{scrbook}.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de la classe \class{scrbook}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-hop>
-\documentclass[oneside,12pt]{scrbook}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-hop.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]
-\usepackage{lipsum}
-\usepackage[hints]{minitoc}
-\begin{document}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We prepare the minitocs and the minilofs, we print the TOC but not the LOF (while the LOF file is prepared):
-% \or\relax
-% Nous préparons les minitocs et les minilofs, nous imprimons la table des matières mais pas la liste des figures
-% (cependant son fichier est préparé):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\dominitoc \tableofcontents
-\dominilof \fakelistoffigures
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\part*}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A starred part with its entry in the TOC:
-% \or\relax
-% Une partie étoilée avec son entrée dans la table des matières:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\part*{Part 1: Strategic Marketing}
-\mtcaddpart[Part 1: Strategic Marketing]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then two chapters with their minitocs and minitocs:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis deux chapitres avec leurs minitocs et minilofs:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter{Chapter 1}
-\minitoc \minilof
-\section{Section one of first chapter} \lipsum[1]
-\begin{figure}
- \centering Test
- \caption{Picture one of first chapter}
-\end{figure}
-
-\section{Section two of first chapter} \lipsum[2]
-\begin{figure}
- \centering Test
- \caption{Picture two of first chapter}
-\end{figure}
-
-\chapter{Chapter 2}
-\minitoc \minilof
-
-\section{Section one of second chapter} \lipsum[3]
-\begin{figure}
- \centering Test
- \caption{Picture one of second chapter}
-\end{figure}
-\cleardoublepage
-\section{Section two of second chapter} \lipsum[4]
-\begin{figure}
- \centering Test
- \caption{Picture two of second chapter}
-\end{figure}
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-hop>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-liv.tex} document file}\label{mtc-liv.tex}\iexam{mtc-liv.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-liv.tex}}\label{mtc-liv.tex}\iexam{mtc-liv.tex}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document of \class{book} class, with
-% customized TOC and minitocs.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de classe \class{book}, avec
-% une table de matières et des minitocs personnalisées.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-liv>
-\documentclass[10pt,twoside,openright]{book}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-liv.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% First, we want that empty pages be really empty, without page number nor headers,
-% so we redefine \com{cleardoublepage}:
-% \or\relax
-% Tout d'abord, nous souhaitons que les pages vides le soient vraiment, sans numéro de page ni en-tête, donc nous
-% redéfinissons \com{cleardoublepage}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\makeatletter
-\def\ps@chapterverso{\ps@empty}%
-\def\cleardoublepage{\clearpage
- \if@twoside
- \ifodd\c@page\else
- \null\thispagestyle{chapterverso}\newpage
- \if@twocolumn\null\newpage\fi
- \fi
- \fi
- }%
-\def\ps@chapterverso{\ps@empty}%
-\makeatother
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define the encodings, for input and output, because the document is in french and uses accented letters:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons les codages, en entrée et en sortie, car le document est en français et utilise des lettres
-% accentuées:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
-\usepackage[TS1,T1]{fontenc}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We load two packages, \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}, to customize the TOC and the minitocs, and
-% \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}, to customize the sectionning commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous chargeons deux paquetages, \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}, pour adapter la table des matières et les minitocs,
-% et \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}, pour adapter les commandes de sectionnement:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\usepackage{tocloft}
-\usepackage{sectsty}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We load the \upack{minitoc} package then some complementary local packages for the french language:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc} puis quelques paquetages locaux complémentaires pour le français:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\usepackage[french,undotted,tight]{minitoc}
-\usepackage[english,francais]{babel}
-\usepackage{franc,frnew,mypatches}
-\providecommand{\fup}{\textsuperscript}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{9}
-% \begin{macro}{\addtolength}
-% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\cftsetrmarg}
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapterfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\thesection}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectionfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We make some customizations: indentation for the subsection entries in the TOC and the minitocs, depth of the
-% TOC, numerotation depth, depth of the minitocs, some fonts:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous faisons quelques adaptations: indentation pour les entrées de sous-sections dans la table des matières et
-% les minitocs, profondeur de la table des matières, profondeur de la numérotation, profondeur des minitocs,
-% quelques fontes:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addtolength{\cftsubsecindent}{1em} % for tocloft
-\cftsetrmarg{2.55em plus 1fil} % to avoid hyphenations in the ToC (tocloft).
-\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
-\setcounter{secnumdepth}{1}
-\setcounter{minitocdepth}{4}
-\chapterfont{\huge\bfseries\sffamily} % for sectsty
-\renewcommand{\thesection}{\arabic{section}}
-\sectionfont{\Large\raggedright} % for sectsty (to avoid hyphenations in section titles)
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some informations for the title page:
-% \or\relax
-% Des informations pour la page de titre:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\title{Systèmes d'occultation} \author{Laurent~\textsc{Bloch}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\subsection*}
-% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And the document body\footnote{The text has been shortened, so there is an undefined reference; do not worry.}:
-% \or\relax
-% Et le corps de document\,\footnote{Le texte a été abrégé, donc il reste une référence non satisfaite; ne vous
-% inquiétez pas.}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{document}
-
-\maketitle
-
-\dominitoc \tableofcontents
-
-\chapter{Définition et contrôle du travail à~faire}%
-\label{chap+controle}
-\minitoc
-
-\section{Le modèle de la grande industrie et le taylorisme}%
-\index{taylorisme}
-C'est au \textsc{xviii}\fup{e}~siècle que la vision du travail comme
-marchandise est vraiment devenue dominante, pour s'imposer au
-\textsc{xix}\fup{e}~siècle dans l'organisation type de la grande usine
-industrielle.
-
-\subsection*{Après l'usine, le centre d'appel}\index{centre d'appel}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{Après l'usine, le centre d'appel}
-Aujourd'hui le taylorisme\index{taylorisme} au sens
-strict est en déclin parce qu'il n'est plus guère adapté aux
-besoins de la production industrielle contemporaine non plus qu'aux
-nouvelles normes de comportement individuel et collectif.
-
-\section{Tout travail émet de la pensée}
-Le travail a vocation à~produire du sens, pour son auteur comme pour
-son destinataire.
-
-\section{Théorie et pratique de la commande publique}
-En France, les prestations de service commandées par les
-services publics à~des entreprises font l'objet de contrôles
-de leur bonne réalisation selon des procédures et des règles
-qui sont des cas particuliers d'un ensemble plus vaste, la
-réglementation des marchés publics de l'État, dont nous
-allons donner ci-dessous une brève description.
-
-\subsection{Réglementation des marchés publics}
-Le dispositif juridique, réglementaire et comptable qui encadre les
-actes contractuels de la puissance publique en France est très~[...]
-
-\subsubsection{Premier principe: séparation de l'ordonnateur et du comptable}
-Le premier élément du dispositif est le principe de
-séparation de l'ordonnateur et du comptable. Il a été
-instauré en 1319 par l'ordonnance portant création de la~[...]
-
-\subsubsection{Second principe: contrôle \emph{a~priori}}
-Le second élément du dispositif est le principe du contrôle
-\emph{a~priori}. Lorsque le directeur de l'organisme public
-de recherche pris ici comme exemple (l'ordonnateur) décide~[...]
-
-\subsubsection{Le Code des Marchés Publics}
-Le troisième pilier de la commande publique est le Code des Marchés
-Publics (CMP), qui régit tous les contrats, conclus par des organismes
-publics ou des collectivités territoriales, dont le montant excède un~[...]
-
-\subsection{La pratique des marchés publics}
-Lorsque l'administration française fait réaliser un système
-informatique par un prestataire, elle est en position de maître
-d'ouvrage\index{maîtrise d'ouvrage}. Elle rédige (ou fait rédiger) un
-cahier des charges\index{cahier des charges} qui décrit les
-spécifications du système à~réaliser. Ce cahier des charges constitue~[...]
-
-\subsection{Quels sont les services publics «~rentables~»?}
-Pour parler comme les informaticiens, nous pouvons identifier un
-« effet de bord », c'est-à-dire une conséquence non intentionnelle de
-la réglementation des marchés publics: les administrations ne disposent
-d'aucun moyen pour envisager la notion d'investissement. Le~[...]
-
-\section{Projet et cahier des charges}\index{cahier des charges}
-Jean-Pierre~\textsc{Boutinet} nous guidera ici pour ce qui concerne
-l'histoire de la notion de~[...]
-
-\subsection{La frontière entre conception et fabrication}
-La vision classique de la conduite d'un projet informatique de gestion
-est la suivante: le maître d'ouvrage\index{maîtrise d'ouvrage}~[...]
-
-\subsection{Bâtiment, mécanique, programmation}
-Nous y reviendrons au chapitre~\ref{chap+travail}, mais nous savons
-déjà que la mise en {\oe}uvre de l'informatique s'est beaucoup
-inspirée des procédures de travail les plus élaborées du
-\textsc{xx}\fup{e}~siècle~[...]
-
-\chapter{Le travail informatique}
-\minitoc
-
-\section{De la nature de l'informatique}
-
-\subsection{Premières croyances}\label{sub+premcroyances}
-Les premiers ordinateurs, qui entrèrent en fonction à~l'extrême fin
-des années 1940 et durant les années 1950, étaient consacrés à~des
-travaux militaires ou scientifiques puisque, à~cette époque,
-on pensait~[...]
-
-\subsection{Comment l'informatique diffère des mathématiques}
-J'aimerai à~l'occasion de cette analyse attirer l'attention du
-lecteur sur une question qui est une source constante de malentendus
-au sujet de la programmation.
-
-\subsubsection{Les preuves de programme}
-L'écriture de programmes informatiques obéit à~de tout autres principes.
-Il convient de préciser cette affirmation pour la préserver~[...]
-
-\section{Programmation dans le monde réel}
-\subsection{La vraie nature de la programmation des ordinateurs}
-
-Alors, comment s'écrivent les programmes informatiques? Et
-d'ailleurs, qu'est-ce qu'une erreur\index{erreur} de programmation?
-Ces questions sont liées et elles sont, bien sûr, au c{\oe}ur de notre
-préoccupation.
-
-\subsection{Méthodes de programmation}
-Un processeur quelconque est caractérisé par le jeu des actions
-élémentaires qu'il est capable d'effectuer. Ces actions élémentaires
-sont appelées les \emph{primitives} du processeur, ou, si le
-processeur est une machine, les «~instructions machine~». Un~[...]
-
-\subsection{Méthodes de construction de programmes}
-Nous avons décrit ci-dessus le processus élémentaire de la
-programmation, celui qui consiste à~écrire les instructions ou les
-expressions qui vont composer un programme.
-
-\subsubsection{La programmation structurée}
-Le premier courant de pensée qui associa la recherche d'une syntaxe
-claire et expressive à~une organisation logique et commode des unités
-de programme fut la \emph{programmation
-structurée}\index{programmation!structurée} des années 1970, dont~[...]
-
-\subsubsection{La programmation par objets}
-Après la programmation structurée vint un autre courant significatif:
-la programmation par objets\index{programmation!par objets}, inventée
-en Norvège à~la fin des années 1960 par l'équipe de~[...]
-
-\subsubsection{Excès dans la pensée}
-Il y a eu beaucoup de verbiage autour de l'aptitude supposée du
-modèle~[...]
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-liv>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-mem.tex} document file}\label{mtc-mem.tex}\iexam{mtc-mem.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-mem.tex}}\label{mtc-mem.tex}\iexam{mtc-mem.tex}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This example shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a \class{memoir} class document.
-% First, the preamble:
-% \or\relax
-% Cet exemple montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de classe \class{memoir}.
-% Tout d'abord, le préambule:
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-mem>
-\documentclass%
- [oneside]{memoir}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-mem.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]
-\usepackage{lipsum}
-%% \usepackage{hyperref}
-%% \usepackage{memhfixc}
-\usepackage%
- [tight]{minitoc}
-%% \usepackage{mtcoff}
-\begin{document}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents*}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We use the starred form \com{tableofcontents*} specific of the \class{memoir} class. Note that the
-% the \com{chapter} command has \emph{two} optional arguments in the \class{memoir} class.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous utilisons la forme étoilée \com{tableofcontents*} spécifique de la classe \class{memoir}. Notez que la
-% commande \com{chapter} a \emph{deux} arguments optionnels dans la classe \class{memoir}.
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\dominitoc
-\tableofcontents*
-
-\chapter[oneA][oneB]{oneC}
-\minitoc
-\lipsum[1] \newpage \lipsum[2]
-\section{S-1-one} \lipsum[3]
-\section{S-1-two} \lipsum[4]
-
-\chapter[twoA][twoB]{twoC}
-\minitoc
-\lipsum[4] \newpage \lipsum[5]
-\section{S-2-one} \lipsum[6]
-\section{S-2-two} \lipsum[7]
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-mem>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-mm1.tex} document file}\label{mtc-mm1.tex}\iexam{mtc-mm1.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-mm1.tex}}\label{mtc-mm1.tex}\iexam{mtc-mm1.tex}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This example shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a \class{memoir} class document and shows some of
-% the necessary adaptations for fonts.
-% First, the preamble:
-% \or\relax
-% Cet exemple montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de classe \class{memoir} et
-% montre certaines des adaptations nécessaires pour les fontes.
-% Tout d'abord, le préambule:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-mm1>
-\documentclass[oneside]{memoir}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-mm1.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]
-\usepackage{lipsum} % filling text
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\providecommand}
-% \begin{macro}{\cftsecfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\empty}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We inhibit some font commands of the \class{memoir} class:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous inhibons certaines commandes de fontes de la classe \class{memoir}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand{\cftsecfont}{\empty}
-\providecommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\empty}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\renewcommand}
-% \begin{macro}{\cftsecfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then we redefine them:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis nous les redéfinissons:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\normalsize\scshape}
-\renewcommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\normalsize\scshape}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We load the \upack{minitoc} package and try to use some minitoc font
-% commands, but without any success:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et essayons d'utiliser quelques commandes de \upack{minitoc} pour
-% les fontes, mais sans aucun succès:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%% hyperref before minitoc, optional
-%% \usepackage[linktocpage=true]{hyperref}\usepackage{memhfixc}
-\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
-\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\normalsize\scshape} % <- no scshape
-\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{subsection}{\normalsize\scshape}% <- no scshape
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\providecommand}
-% \begin{macro}{\cftsecfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\empty}
-% \begin{macro}{\renewcommand}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% But if we use the font commands of the \class{memoir} class, it works!
-% \or\relax
-% Mais si nous utilisons les commandes de fontes de la classe \class{memoir}, cela marche!
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand{\cftsecfont}{\empty}
-\providecommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\empty}
-\renewcommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\normalsize\rmfamily\scshape}
-\renewcommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\normalsize\rmfamily\scshape}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% But for mini-table titles (font and text), we can use the \upack{minitoc} commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Mais pour les titres des mini-tables (fonte et texte), nous pouvons utiliser les commandes de \upack{minitoc}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\mtcsettitlefont{minitoc}{\Large\scshape}
-%% this is working beautifully ->
-\mtcsettitle{minitoc}{Chapter Contents}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents*}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The document body:
-% \or\relax
-% Le corps du document:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{document}
-\dominitoc \tableofcontents*
-
-\chapter[OneA][OneB]{OneC}
-\minitoc
-\section{This section} \lipsum[1]
-\section{Second section} \lipsum[2]
-\section{Third section} \lipsum[3]
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-mm1>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{9}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-mu.tex} document file}\label{mtc-mu.tex}\iexam{mtc-mu.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-mu.tex}}\label{mtc-mu.tex}\iexam{mtc-mu.tex}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document,
-% the minitoc being inserted in the text with the \pack{wrapfig} package~\cite{wrapfig}.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document,
-% la minitoc étant incrustée dans le texte grâce au paquetage \pack{wrapfig}~\cite{wrapfig}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-mu>
-\documentclass[12pt]{report}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-mu.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]
-\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
-\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt}
-\usepackage{wrapfig}
-\newcommand{\LangSig}[1]{\textsc{[#1]}} % smallcaps
-\begin{document}
-\dominitoc \tableofcontents
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{7}
-% \begin{environment}{wrapfigure}
-% \begin{environment}{minipage}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\linewidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\vspace}
-% \begin{macro}{\baselineskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A chapter, with its minitoc set in a \env{minipage}, included in a \env{wrapfigure} environment on the half
-% of the text width, with some vertical adjustements:
-% \or\relax
-% Un chapitre, avec sa minitoc composée dans une \env{minipage}, incluse dans un environnement \env{wrapfigure}
-% sur la moitié de la largeur du texte, avec quelques ajustements verticaux:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter{Mulspren}\label{chapter+mulspren}
-\begin{wrapfigure}{r}{0.5\linewidth}
-\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
-\vspace{-2.\baselineskip}
-\minitoc
-\vspace{-1.\baselineskip}
-\end{minipage}
-\end{wrapfigure}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{environment}
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The remaining of the text:
-% \or\relax
-% Le reste du texte:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-The previous chapter examined many end-user programming environments
-and found that most contain cognitive programming gulfs.
-These gulfs were often created when programing environments used
-multiple notations, and could manifest themselves in a variety of
-usability problems, ranging from users being unable to understand
-a program representation, to not wanting to execute their programs.
-Conversely, the previous chapter also found circumstances where multiple
-notations helped users understand programs.
-It concluded that there was a place for multiple notation programming
-environments, but developers had to be very careful to avoid creating
-programming gulfs.
-It concluded that there was a place for multiple notation programming
-environments, but developers had to be very careful to avoid creating
-programming gulfs.
-
-This chapter introduces our programming environment, Mulspren.
-Mulspren was designed to avoid these gulfs and gain the potential
-benefits of multiple notations.
-Users program using two notations, one similar to English and one
-similar to conventional code.
-Changes in one notation are immediately reflected in the other notation,
-and users can move rapidly and seamlessly between the notations.
-This is programming using dual notations.
-When the program is executed, both notations are animated.
-Mulspren's language signature is \LangSig{Re/Wr/Wa + Re/Wr/Wa + Wa}.
-
-Papers describing Mulspren have been published in~\cite{Wright02-2}
-and~\cite{Wright03-3}.
-
-\section{section 1}
-\section{section 2 bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla
-bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla}
-\section{section 3}
-\section{section 4}
-\section{section 5 bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla
-bla bla bla bla bla}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{environment}{thebibliography}
-% \begin{macro}{\bibitem}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% I tried to find some articles of the net to fill the citations:
-% \or\relax
-% J'ai essayé de trouver quelques articles pour remplir les citations:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{thebibliography}{1}
-\bibitem{Wright02-2}
-Tim Wright and Andy Cockburn.
-\newblock Mulspren: a multiple language simulation programming
- environment.
-\newblock In {\em HCC '02: Proceedings of the IEEE 2002 Symposia
- on Human Centric Computing Languages and Environments (HCC'02)},
- page 101, Washington, DC, USA, 2002. IEEE Computer Society.
-
-\bibitem{Wright03-3}
-Tim Wright and Andy Cockburn.
-\newblock Evaluation of two textual programming notations for children.
-\newblock In {\em AUIC '05: Proceedings of the Sixth Australasian
- conference on User interface}, pages 55--62, Darlinghurst, Australia,
- Australia, 2005.
- Australian Computer Society, Inc.
-\end{thebibliography}
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-mu>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-nom.tex} document file}\label{mtc-nom.tex}\iexam{mtc-nom.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-nom.tex}}\label{mtc-nom.tex}\iexam{mtc-nom.tex}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This document\,\footnote{It is derived from the example given in the documentation of \pack{nomencl}.} shows
-% the interaction of the \upack{minitoc} package with the \pack{nomencl} package~\cite{nomencl},
-% when this package uses its option \optp{intoc}{nomencl}.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce document\,\footnote{Il est dérivé de l'exemple donné dans la documentation de \pack{nomencl}.} montre
-% l'interaction du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec le paquetage \pack{nomencl}~\cite{nomencl}, lorsque celui-ci
-% utilise son option \optp{intoc}{nomencl}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-nom>
-\documentclass[oneside]{book}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-nom.tex}%
- [2007/04/02]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\makenomenclature}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We load the packages and prepare the nomenclature:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous chargeons les paquetages et préparons la nomenclature:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\usepackage[intoc]{nomencl}
-\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
-\makenomenclature
-\begin{document}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We prepare the minitocs and the table of contents:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous préparons les minitocs et la table des matières:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\dominitoc
-\tableofcontents
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomenclature}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A first chapter, with its minitoc, a section and some
-% entries for the nomenclature:
-% \or\relax
-% Un premier chapitre, avec sa minitoc, une section et
-% quelques entrées pour la nomenclature:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter{Angels}
-\minitoc
-\section{Main equations}
-\begin{equation}
- a=\frac{N}{A}
-\end{equation}%
-\nomenclature{$a$}{The number of angels per unit area}%
-\nomenclature{$N$}{The number of angels per needle point}%
-\nomenclature{$A$}{The area of the needle point}%
-The equation $\sigma = m a$%
-\nomenclature{$\sigma$}{The total mass of angels per unit area}%
-\nomenclature{$m$}{The mass of one angel}
-follows easily.
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\printnomenclature}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixnomenclature}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We print the nomenclature; but that adds a chapter entry in
-% the TOC because of the \optp{intoc}{nomencl} option of the
-% \pack{nomencl}, hence we add a correction with
-% \com{mtcfixnomenclature} (try to remove the correction and
-% look at the result: the next minitocs are wrong):
-% \or\relax
-% Nous imprimons la nomenclature; mais ceci ajoute une entrée
-% de chapitre dans la table des matières à~cause de
-% l'option \optp{intoc}{nomencl} de \pack{nomencl}, donc nous
-% ajoutons une correction avec \com{mtcfixnomenclature} (essayez
-% de retirer correction et regardez le résultat: les minitocs
-% suivantes sont fausses):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\printnomenclature \mtcfixnomenclature
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomenclature}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A second chapter, with its minitoc, a section, and an entry
-% in the nomenclature. This entry will be present in the
-% nomenclature printed above.
-% \or\relax
-% Un second chapitre, avec sa minitoc, une section, et une
-% entrée dans la nomenclature. Cette entrée sera présente dans la
-% nomenclature imprimée plus haut.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter{Demons}
-\minitoc
-\section{False equations}
-\begin{equation} i=\sqrt{-1} \end{equation}
-\nomenclature{$i$}{The imaginary unit}%
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-nom>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-ocf.tex} document file}\label{mtc-ocf.tex}\iexam{mtc-ocf.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-ocf.tex}}\label{mtc-ocf.tex}\iexam{mtc-ocf.tex}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This document shows the use of the \feat{open} and
-% \feat{close} features of the \upack{minitoc} package
-% to prepare a minitoc on three columns.
-% The old package \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} is used to have a wide text area.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce document montre l'utilisation des dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close} du paquetage \upack{minitoc}
-% pour préparer une minitoc sur trois colonnes.
-% Le vieux paquetage \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} est utilisé pour avoir une grande zone de texte.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-ocf>
-\documentclass[oneside]{book}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-ocf.tex}%
- [2007/04/02]
-\usepackage{multicol} % to make multi-columns.
-\usepackage[french]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
-\usepackage[OT1,TS1,T1]{fontenc}
-\usepackage{fullpage}
-% to allow a page breaks before a section
-\let\osection\section \def\section{\penalty-1\relax\osection}
-%
-\usepackage[french,tight]{minitoc}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
-% \begin{environment}{multicols}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\feat{open}'' feature for minitocs opens a \env{multicols}
-% environment, with 3~columns:
-% \or\relax
-% Le dispositif «~\feat{open}~» pour les minitocs ouvre un
-% environnement \env{multicols}, avec 3~colonnes:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{3}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
-% \begin{environment}{multicols}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\feat{close}'' feature for minitocs close the \env{multicols} environment:
-% \or\relax
-% Le dispositif «~\feat{close}~» pour les minitocs ferme l'environnement \env{multicols}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% As the \env{multicols} environment adds some vertical spacing before and after it, we added some corrections.
-%
-% \or\relax
-% Comme l'environnement \env{multicols} ajoute un peu d'espacement avant et après lui, nous avons ajouté quelques
-% corrections.
-
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
-% \begin{macro}{\raggedcolumns}
-% \begin{macro}{\flushcolumns}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% As the number of sections is not a multiple of three (or some entries are long), we cannot always balance the
-% columns nicely, so we use ragged columns, using the ``\feat{before}'' and ``\feat{after}'' features:
-% \or\relax
-% Comme le nombre de sections n'est pas un multiple de trois (ou lorsque certaines entrées sont longues), nous ne
-% pouvons pas toujours équilibrer les colonnes agréablement, donc nous utilisons des colonnes inégales, grâce aux
-% dispositifs «~\feat{before}~» et «~\feat{after}~»:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{before}{\raggedcolumns}
-\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{after}{\flushcolumns}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And the body of the document, a chapter with many sections,
-% listed in a~minitoc:
-% \or\relax
-% Et le corps du document, un chapitre avec beaucoup de
-% sections, listées dans une minitoc:
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{document}
-\dominitoc
-\tableofcontents
-\chapter{Premier chapitre}
-\minitoc
-% A lot of sections
-\section{Alfa}
-\section{Bravo}
-\section{Charlie}
-\section{Delta}
-\section{Echo}
-\section{Fox-Trot}
-\section{Golf}
-\section{Hotel}
-\section{India}
-\section{Juliet}
-\section{Kilo}
-\section{Lima}
-\section{Mike}
-\section{November}
-\section{Oscar}
-\section{Papa}
-\section{Quebec}
-\section{Romeo}
-\section{Sierra}
-\section{Tango}
-\section{Uniform}
-\section{Victor}
-\section{Whiskey}
-\section{X-Ray}
-\section{Yankee}
-\section{Zulu}
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-ocf>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-ofs.tex} document file}\label{mtc-ofs.tex}\iexam{mtc-ofs.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-ofs.tex}}\label{mtc-ofs.tex}\iexam{mtc-ofs.tex}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This document shows the use of the \com{mtcsetoffset} command to shift a minitoc to the left, trying to put it
-% along the left margin of the text. The \feat{open} and \feat{close} features of the \upack{minitoc} package are
-% also used to prepare the minitoc on three columns.
-% The old package \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} is used to have a wide text area.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce document montre l'utilisation de la commande \com{mtcsetoffset} pour décaler vers la gauche une minitoc, en
-% essayant de la placer le long de la marge gauche du texte. Les dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close} du
-% paquetage \upack{minitoc} sont aussi utilisés pour préparer la minitoc sur trois colonnes.
-% Le vieux paquetage \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} est utilisé pour avoir une grande zone de texte.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-ofs>
-\documentclass[a4paper]{book}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-ofs.tex}%
- [2007/04/17]
-\usepackage{lipsum}
-\usepackage{multicol}
-\usepackage{fullpage}
-%\usepackage[a4paper]{geometry}
-\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\setlength}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
-% \begin{macro}{\raggedcolumns}
-% \begin{macro}{\flushcolumns}
-% \begin{environment}{multicols}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We remove the minitoc indentation and set up the \feat{open} and \feat{close} features:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous retirons l'indentation de la minitoc et mettons en place les dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt}
-\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\kern1sp\vspace*{-.1ex}\begin{multicols}{4}[\kern-2.5ex]}
-\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\kern-2.ex}
-\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{before}{\raggedcolumns}
-\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{after}{\flushcolumns}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We begin the document with a chapter and its minitoc:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous commençons le document par un chapitre et sa minitoc:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{document}
-\dominitoc \faketableofcontents
-\chapter{Introduction}
-\minitoc
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% As the minitoc is not aligned on the left margin of the text, we set a negative offset and print again the minitoc:
-% \or\relax
-% Comme la minitoc n'est pas alignée sur la marge gauche du texte, nous établissons un décalage négatif et
-% ré-imprimons la minitoc:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-1.75em}
-\mtcskip \minitoc
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\setlength}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% But then the minitoc does not use the full width of the text; it would be better to modify both the offset and the
-% indentation, each by the half of the total correction:
-% \or\relax
-% Mais alors la minitoc n'utilise pas toute la largeur du texte; il serait mieux de modifier à~la fois le décalage
-% et l'indentation, par moitiés de la correction nécessaire:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-0.875em}
-\setlength{\mtcindent}{-0.875em}
-\mtcskip \minitoc
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then a lot of sections, with some text:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis un tas de sections, avec du texte quelconque:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\section{Alfa} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Bravo} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Charlie} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Delta} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Echo} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Fox-Trot} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Golf} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Hotel} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{India} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Juliet} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Kilo} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Lima} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Mike} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{November} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Oscar} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Papa} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Quebec} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Romeo} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Sierra} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Tango} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Uniform} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Victor} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Whiskey} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{X-Ray} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Yankee} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\section{Zulu} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-ofs>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \textbf{Note:}\virage{} if you add a sub-section in this example, the corresponding entry in the minitoc
-% may stick out if it appears in the last column, and the offset and the indentation should then be corrected again.
-% \or\relax
-% \textbf{Note:}\virage{} si vous ajoutez une sous-section dans cet exemple, l'entrée correspondante dans la minitoc
-% peut dépasser si elle apparaît dans la dernière colonne, et alors le décalage et l'indentation doivent de
-% nouveau être corrigés.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-sbf.tex} document file}\label{mtc-sbf.tex}\iexam{mtc-sbf.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-sbf.tex}}\label{mtc-sbf.tex}\iexam{mtc-sbf.tex}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\l@subfigure}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dottedxxxline}
-% \begin{macro}{\ext@subfigure}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a document containing subfigures (here with the
-% \pack{subfigure} package~\cite{subfigure}). We show how to use minilofs and to adjust their depth.
-%
-% The preamble loads the \pack{subfigure} package and redefines the format of subfigure entries in the list of figures:
-% \or\relax
-% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec un document contenant des sous-figures
-% (ici avec le paquetage \pack{subfigure}~\cite{subfigure}). Nous montrons comment utiliser des minilofs et
-% ajuster leur profondeur.
-%
-% Le préambule charge le paquetage \pack{subfigure} et redéfinit le format des entrées des sous-figures dans la
-% liste des figures:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-sbf>
-\documentclass[12pt]{report}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-sbf.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]
-\usepackage{subfigure}
-\makeatletter
-\renewcommand{\l@subfigure}{\@dottedxxxline{\ext@subfigure}{2}{3.9em}{3.3em}}
-\makeatother
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We load the \pack{varioref}~\cite{varioref} package (to have nice cross-references) and the \upack{minitoc} package:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous chargeons le paquetage \pack{varioref}~\cite{varioref} (pour avoir de meilleures références croisées) et le
-% paquetage \upack{minitoc}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\usepackage{varioref}
-\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\newcommand}
-% \begin{macro}{\goodap}
-% \begin{macro}{\subfigtopskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\subfigbottomskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define some features for the layout of the subfigures, then the depth of the list of figures:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons quelques dispositifs pour la mise en place des sous-figures, puis la profondeur de la liste des
-% figures:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\goodap}{%
- \hspace{\subfigtopskip}%
- \hspace{\subfigbottomskip}}
-\setcounter{lofdepth}{2}
-\begin{document}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define the depth of the mini-lists of figures, then some fonts:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons la profondeur des mini-listes des figures, puis quelques fontes:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\mtcsetdepth{minilof}{2}
-\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}
-\mtcsetfont{partlof}{subfigure}{\small\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries}
-\mtcsetfont{partlof}{figure}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}
-\mtcsetfont{minilof}{subfigure}{\small\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries}
-\mtcsetfont{minilof}{figure}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}
-%% no tables in this document
-%% \mtcsetfont{partlot}{subtable}{\small\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries}
-%% \mtcsetfont{partlot}{table}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}
-%% \mtcsetfont{minilot}{subtable}{\small\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries}
-%% \mtcsetfont{minilot}{table}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We prepare the minilofs, the table of contents and the list of figures:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous préparons les minilofs, la table des matières et la liste des figures:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\dominilof \listoffigures \tableofcontents
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A chapter, with is minilof, twice but with different depths:
-% \or\relax
-% Un chapitre, avec sa minilof, deux fois mais avec des profondeurs différentes:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter{First Chapter}
-\minilof \mtcskip
-\mtcsetdepth{minilof}{1} \minilof
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A figure containing three subfigures and their captions:
-% \or\relax
-% Une figure contenant trois sous-figures et leurs captions:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{figure}
-\centering
- \fbox{%
- \begin{minipage}{3.5in}%
- \raggedright
- \begin{center}
- \subfigure[First]{%
- \fbox{\hbox to 20mm{\vbox to 15mm{\vfil\null}\hfil}}}%
- \hspace{\subfigtopskip}\hspace{\subfigbottomskip}%
- \subfigure[Second Figure]{%
- \fbox{\hbox to 20mm{\vbox to 10mm{\vfil\null}\hfil}}}\\
- \subfigure[Third]{\label{3figs-c}%
- \fbox{\hbox to 20mm{\vbox to 10mm{\vfil\null}\hfil}}}\\
- \caption{Three subfigures.}\label{3figs}%
- \end{center}
- \vspace{4pt}%
- This figure contains two top `subfigures' and
- Figure~\ref{3figs-c}.
- \end{minipage}}
-\end{figure}
-Figure~\vref{3figs} contains two top ``subfigures'' and
-Figure~\vref{3figs-c}.
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-sbf>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-scr.tex} document file}\label{mtc-scr.tex}\iexam{mtc-scr.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-scr.tex}}\label{mtc-scr.tex}\iexam{mtc-scr.tex}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a {\KOMAScript} document class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3},
-% \class{scrreprt}.
-% Some precautions are needed, because these classes have specific interfaces with the TOC (class options and
-% commands).
-% \or\relax
-% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec une classe de document
-% {\KOMAScript}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3},
-% \class{scrreprt}. Certaines précautions sont nécessaires, car ces classes ont des interfaces spécifiques avec la
-% table des matières (options de classe et commandes).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-scr>
-\documentclass[12pt,halfparskip,liststotoc,bibtotoc]{scrreprt}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-scr.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]
-\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4}
-\setcounter{tocdepth}{4}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
-\usepackage{longtable}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \pack{hyperref} package, if used, must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}:
-% \or\relax
-% Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, s'il est utilisé, doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\usepackage{hyperref}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\pagenumbering}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% With a {\KOMAScript} class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, use the \opt{k-tight} package option in place of \opt{tight};
-% as it is a document in german, use also a language package option:
-% \or\relax
-% Avec une classe {\KOMAScript}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, utilisez l'option de paquetage \opt{k-tight} au lieu
-% de \opt{tight}; comme c'est un document en allemand, utilisez aussi une option de langue pour le paquetage:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\usepackage[k-tight,germanb]{minitoc}
-\usepackage[germanb]{babel}
-\begin{document}
-\pagenumbering{Roman} % page number in Roman, reset to 1 (I)
-\dominitoc \tableofcontents
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% In this document class, with the \optp{liststotoc}{KOMA-Script} class option, the \com{listoftables} macro
-% adds a chapter entry in
-% the TOC, so we must add \com{mtcaddchapter} after \com{listoftables}:
-% \or\relax
-% Dans cette classe de document, avec l'option de classe \optp{liststotoc}{KOMA-Script}, la macro \com{listoftables} ajoute une
-% entrée de niveau chapitre dans la table des matières, donc nous devons ajouter \com{mtcaddchapter}
-% après \com{listoftables}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\listoftables \mtcaddchapter
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\pagenumbering}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% With the \optp{bibtotoc}{KOMA-Script} class option, it is necessary to add a \com{adjustmtc} command after \com{bibliography}.
-% This problem is similar to the one of compatibility with the \pack{tocbibind} package.
-% \or\relax
-% Avec l'option de classe \optp{bibtotoc}{KOMA-Script}, il est nécessaire d'ajouter une commande \com{adjustmtc}
-% après \com{bibliography}.
-% Ce problème est similaire à~celui de la compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\clearpage
-\pagenumbering{arabic} % page number in arabic digits
-\setcounter{page}{1} % forced to 1
-
-\chapter{Test 1}\label{cha:test-1}
-
-Text.
-
-\section{Tabelle}\label{sec:tabelle}
-
-\begin{table}
- \centering
- \begin{longtable}[l]{ll}
- \underline{Ausbildungsbetrieb} \hspace{10mm} & Kommanditgesellschaft
-\\
- \underline{Ausbildender} & Hammer \\
- Ausbildungsstätte & XXXXX Ort
- \end{longtable}
- \caption{Ausbildungsbetrieb}
-\end{table}
-
-Text.
-
-\appendix
-\chapter{Dokumente}
-\minitoc % Aufruf Minitoc
-
-\section{Anhang}\label{sec:anhang}
-Text.\\
-Hier sollte nun der Anhang sein, davor das Verzeichnis dafür.
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-scr>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-syn.tex} document file}\label{mtc-syn.tex}\iexam{mtc-syn.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-syn.tex}}\label{mtc-syn.tex}\iexam{mtc-syn.tex}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package when
-% the table of contents is not at the beginning of the
-% document, but is preceded by some starred chapters.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}
-% lorsque la table des matières n'est pas au début du
-% document, mais est placée après quelques chapitres étoilés.
-% \fi
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We have the preamble, then we invoke \com{dominitoc} to
-% prepare the minitocs:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous avons le préambule, puis nous invoquons \com{dominitoc}
-% pour préparer les minitocs:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-syn>
-\documentclass[a4paper,twoside,12pt]{book}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-syn.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]
-\usepackage{minitoc}
-\begin{document}
-\dominitoc
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter*}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some starred chapters, with calls to \com{mtcaddchapter}
-% to synchronize. The optional argument is used when an entry
-% in the ToC is wanted:
-% \or\relax
-% Quelques chapitres étoilés, avec des appels
-% à~\com{mtcaddchapter} pour synchroniser. L'argument
-% optionnel est utilisé lorsque quune entrée dans la table des
-% matières est désirée:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter*{ } % Dedication chapter, no title
-\mtcaddchapter % Added for a starred chapter
- % without entry in the ToC
-Dedication goes here
-
-\chapter*{Abstract}
-\mtcaddchapter[Abstract] % Added for a starred chapter
- % with an entry in the ToC
-Abstract goes here
-
-\chapter*{Declaration}
-\mtcaddchapter[Declaration] % Added for a starred chapter
- % with an entry in the ToC
-Declaration goes here
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The table of contents comes here. Looking at the
-% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file shows that the minitoc files inserted
-% after here are from one chapter to far: we add a correction.
-% \or\relax
-% La table des matières vient ici. En regardant le fichier
-% \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, nous voyons que les fichiers minitoc insérés
-% après ce point correspondent à~un chapitre de trop: nous ajoutons
-% une correction:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\tableofcontents \decrementmtc % Synchro added (look at the .log file)
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The following chapters are normal (unstarred):
-% \or\relax
-% Les chapitres suivants sont normaux (non étoilés):
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter{Chapter One}
-\minitoc
-\section{Section 1} Some text.
-\section{Section 2} Some text.
-
-\chapter{Chapter Two}
-\minitoc
-\section{Another Section 1}
-Some more text.
-\section{Another Section 2}
-Some more text.
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-syn>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-tbi.tex} document file}\label{mtc-tbi.tex}\iexam{mtc-tbi.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-tbi.tex}}\label{mtc-tbi.tex}\iexam{mtc-tbi.tex}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a document using
-% the \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind}.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec un document utilisant le
-% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind}.
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-tbi>
-\documentclass[a4paper]{report}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-tbi.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We dont want an entry for the TOC in the TOC: option \optp{nottoc}{tocbibind} for the \pack{tocbibind} package:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous ne voulons pas d'entrée pour la table des matières dans la table des matières: option \optp{nottoc}{tocbibind} pour
-% le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}:
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\usepackage[nottoc]{tocbibind}
-\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
-\begin{document}
-\dominitoc \tableofcontents
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% As there is no entry for the TOC in the TOC, no correction is necessary; we comment out the usual
-% correction\,\footnote{It is recommended to keep this comment; you could change your mind.}:
-% \or\relax
-% Puisqu'il n'y a pas d'entrée pour la table des matières dans la table des matières, aucune correction n'est
-% nécessaire: nous mettons la correction habituelle en commentaire\,\footnote{Il est recommandé de conserver ce
-% commentaire; vous pourriez changer d'avis.}:
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%% tocbibind compatibility
-%% not used if nottoc option :
-%% \mtcaddchapter[]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter*}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A starred chapter with an entry in the TOC; we add it;
-% \or\relax
-% Un chapitre étoilé avec une entrée dans la table des matières; nous l'ajoutons:
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter*{Introduction}
-\mtcaddchapter[Introduction]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some normal chapters:
-% \or\relax
-% Quelques chapitres normaux:
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter{Title of chapter~1}
-\minitoc
-\section{as1} \section{as2}
-\chapter{Title of chapter~2}
-\minitoc
-\section{bs1} \section{bs2}
-\chapter{Title of chapter~3}
-\minitoc
-\section{cs1} \section{cs2}
-\chapter{Title of chapter~4}
-\minitoc
-\section{ds1} \section{ds2}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{4}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter*}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Another starred chapter, with an entry in the TOC:
-% \or\relax
-% Un autre chapitre étoilé, avec une entrée dans la table des matières:
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter*{Conclusion}
-\mtcaddchapter[Conclusion]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter*}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\section*}
-% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Yet another starred chapter, with an entry in the TOC, but with starred sections, also listed in the TOC:
-% \or\relax
-% Encore un autre chapitre étoilé, avec une entrée dans la table des matières, mais avec des sections étoilées,
-% elles aussi listées dans la table des matières:
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter*{Appendices}
-\mtcaddchapter[Appendices]
-\minitoc
-\section*{first appendix}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{section}%
- {first appendix}
-\section*{second appendix}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{section}%
- {second appendix}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The list of figures has an entry in the TOC (via the \pack{tocbibind} package), so a correction must be applied:
-% \or\relax
-% La liste des figures a une entrée dans la table des matières (via le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}), donc une
-% correction doit être appliquée:
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%% tocbibind compatibility
-\listoffigures \mtcaddchapter
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{environment}{thebibliography}
-% \begin{macro}{\bibitem}
-% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \pack{tocbibind} package adds an entry in the TOC for the bibliography, so we must add the recommended
-% correction:
-% \or\relax
-% Le paquetage \pack{tocbibind} ajoute une entrée dans la table des matières pour la bibliographie, donc nous
-% devons ajouter la correction recommandée:
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{thebibliography}{3}
- \bibitem {s1}{title ...}
-\end{thebibliography}
-%% tocbibind compatibility
-\adjustmtc
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-tbi>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-tlc.tex} document file}\label{mtc-tlc.tex}\iexam{mtc-tlc.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-tlc.tex}}\label{mtc-tlc.tex}\iexam{mtc-tlc.tex}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document of the \class{article} class.
-% It is the example of~\cite[page~58]{TLC2}, modernized.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de classe \class{article}.
-% C'est l'exemple de~\cite[page~58]{TLC2}, modernisé.
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-tlc>
-\documentclass{article}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-tlc.tex}%
- [2007/01/04]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\setlength}
-% \begin{macro}{\textwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\textheight}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Dimensions of the text on the page:
-% \or\relax
-% Dimensions du texte sur la page:
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\setlength{\textwidth}%
- {124.20126pt}
-\setlength{\textheight}%
- {19\baselineskip}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{4}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\setlength}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We load the \upack{minitoc} package and set some parameters (indentation, base font and depth) for the secttocs:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et établissons quelques paramètres (indentation, fonte de base et
-% profondeur) pour les secttocs:
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\usepackage{minitoc}
-\setlength{\stcindent}{0pt}
-\mtcsetfont{secttoc}{*}%
- {\footnotesize}
-\mtcsetdepth{secttoc}{3}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We prepare the secttocs, without title, and the table of contents which is not printed:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous préparons les secttocs, sans titre, et la table des matières qui n'est pas imprimée:
-% \fi
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{document}
-\dosecttoc[e] \faketableofcontents
-
-\section{Afghanistan} \secttoc
-\subsection{Geography}
-\subsubsection{Total area}
- 647,500 km2
-\subsubsection{Land area}
- 647,500 km2
-\subsection{History} \ldots
-
-\section{Albania} \secttoc
-\subsection{Geography}
-\subsubsection{Total area}
- 28,750 km2
-\subsubsection{Land area}
- 27,400 km2
-\subsection{History} \ldots
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-tlc>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{multicols}}%
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-tlo.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-tlo.tex}\iexam{mtc-tlo.tex}
-% The \exam{mtc-tlo.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-tlo.tex}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-tlo.tex}}\label{1mtc-tlo.tex}\iexam{mtc-tlo.tex}
-% Le document \exam{mtc-tlo.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-tlo.tex}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-tsf.tex} document file}\label{mtc-tsf.tex}\iexam{mtc-tsf.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-tsf.tex}}\label{mtc-tsf.tex}\iexam{mtc-tsf.tex}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This document\footnote{It is derived from one of the examples distributed with
-% the \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig}.} shows
-% the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a document containing subfigures (here with the
-% \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig}). We show how to use minilofs and to adjust their depth.
-% The old package \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} is used to have a wide text area.
-%
-% The preamble loads the \pack{subfig} package and redefines the format of subfigure entries in the list of figures:
-% \or\relax
-% Ce document\,\footnote{Il est dérivé de l'un des exemples distribués avec le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}.}
-% montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec un document contenant des sous-figures
-% (ici avec le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}). Nous montrons comment utiliser des minilofs et
-% ajuster leur profondeur.
-% Le vieux paquetage \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} est utilisé pour avoir une grande zone de texte.
-%
-% Le préambule charge le paquetage \pack{subfig} et redéfinit le format des entrées des sous-figures dans la
-% liste des figures:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-tsf>
-\documentclass{report}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-tsf.tex}[2008/04/03]%
-\usepackage{fullpage}
-\usepackage[config=altsf]{subfig}
-\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This is utility code to make graduated rules and a box around a figure.
-% \or\relax
-% Ceci est du code utilitaire pour faire un trait gradué et une boîte autour d'une figure.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newdimen\testtemp
-\newcommand{\ru}[1]{%
- \testtemp #1%
- \advance\testtemp .5pt \divide\testtemp 2%
- \hbox to \testtemp{\leaders\hbox to 1mm{%
- \vrule height1mm depth0pt width.25pt\hfil}\hfil}%
- \hbox to 0pt{\hss\vrule height3mm depth0pt width.25pt\hss}%
- \hbox to \testtemp{\leaders\hbox to 1mm{%
- \hfil\vrule height1mm depth0pt width.25pt}\hfil}}
-%%
-\fboxsep=-\fboxrule
-\newcommand{\figbox}[1]{%
- \fbox{\vbox to 1in{%
- \vfil\hbox to 2in{\parbox{2in}{\centering #1}}\vfil
- \vbox to 0pt{\vss\hbox to 2in{\hfil\ru{1.1in}\hfil}}}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The body of the document. We set the depth of the list of figures and prepare the minilofs and the list of
-% figures:
-% \or\relax
-% Le corps du document. Nous définissons la profondeur de la liste des figures et préparons les minilofs et la liste
-% des figures:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{document}
-\setcounter{lofdepth}{2} \dominilof \listoffigures
-\newpage
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A chapter containing a figure with subfigures. We print its minilof twice, with different depths:
-% \or\relax
-% Un chapitre contenant une figure avec des sous-figures. Nous imprimons sa minilof deux fois, avec des
-% profondeurs différentes:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter{Reference Test}
-\minilof \mtcskip
-\mtcsetdepth{minilof}{1}
-\minilof
-
-\begin{figure}[ht]%
- \centering
- \subfigure{%
- \label{fig+A}\figbox{SUBFIGURE ONE:\\(no opt)}}
- \quad
- \subfigure[]{%
- \label{fig+B}\figbox{SUBFIGURE TWO:\\(empty opt)}}\\
-
- \subfigure[Subfigure Three.]{%
- \label{fig+C}\figbox{SUBFIGURE THREE:\\(opt)}}
- \quad
- \subfigure[][Subfigure Four.]{%
- \label{fig+D}\figbox{SUBFIGURE FOUR:\\(empty opt and opt)}}
- \quad
- \subfigure[][]{%
- \label{fig+E}\figbox{SUBFIGURE FIVE:\\(both empty opt)}}\\
-
- \subfigure[The Sixth Subfigure.][Subfigure Six.]{%
- \label{fig+F}\figbox{SUBFIGURE SIX:\\(both opt)}}
- \quad
- \subfigure[The Seventh Subfigure][]{%
- \label{fig+G}\figbox{SUBFIGURE SEVEN:\\(opt and empty opt)}}
-
- \caption{Optional argument test.}%
- \label{fig+main}%
-\end{figure}
-
-The figure~\ref{fig+main} on page~\pageref{fig+main} is composed
-of the seven subfigures~\subref{fig+A} (aka: \ref{fig+A}),
-\subref{fig+B} (aka: \ref{fig+B}), \subref{fig+C} (aka: \ref{fig+C}),
-\subref{fig+D} (aka: \ref{fig+D}), \subref{fig+E} (aka: \ref{fig+E}),
-\subref{fig+F} (aka: \ref{fig+F}), and \subref{fig+G} (aka: \ref{fig+G}).
-
-\section{Centering Test}
-Note that figures~\ref{fig+B}, \ref{fig+E} and \ref{fig+G} are centered.
-This means that \verb|\subfigcapskip| has been set to zero and is not
-offsetting the simple label to the left. Also the remaining captioned
-subfigures (figures~\ref{fig+C}, \ref{fig+D}, and \ref{fig+F}) should
-have centered labels.
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-tsf>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \flushcolumns
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uexam{mtc-vti.tex} document file}\label{mtc-vti.tex}\iexam{mtc-vti.tex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-vti.tex}}\label{mtc-vti.tex}\iexam{mtc-vti.tex}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \exam{mtc-vti.tex} example shows how to change the sectionnal titles when they appear in a mini-table: a
-% section title (or a chapter title) can have variants in a parttoc or in a minitoc (similar effects are possible
-% with figure ou table titles). Such entries are said ``polymorphic'' (section~\vref{ss+polym}).
-% First, the preamble of the document, with utility packages:
-% \or\relax
-% L'exemple \exam{mtc-vti.tex} montre comment changer des titres de sectionnements lorsqu'ils apparaissent dans
-% une mini-table: un titre de section (ou de chapitre) peut avoir des variantes dans une parttoc ou une minitoc
-% (des effets similaires sont possibles avec des titres de figures ou de tableaux).
-% De telles entrées sont dites «~polymorphes~» (section~\vref{ss+polym}).
-% Tout d'abord, le préambule du document, avec les paquetages utilitaires:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtc-vti>
-\documentclass[10pt,a4paper,oneside]{book}
-\ProvidesFile{mtc-vti.tex}[2008/06/26]%
-\usepackage{lipsum}
-\usepackage{txfonts}
-\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
-\begin{document}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For the demonstration, we will use a parttoc and a minitoc, so we must prepare them:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour la démonstration, nous utiliserons une parttoc et une minitoc, donc nous devons les préparer:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\dominitoc
-\doparttoc
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We will use a multi-form title for the first section: a form to appear in the parttoc (``Alfa in parttoc''),
-% a form to appear in the minitoc of the chapter (``Alfa in minitoc''), a form to appear elsewhere (``Alfa out subtoc''),
-% and a form as title at the beginning othe section (``Alfa the first section''). So we define a command
-% \ucom{alfati} using the flags \com{ifinparttoc} and \com{ifinminitoc} to select which title is used in each of
-% its instances.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous utiliserons un titre multi-forme pour la première section: une forme devant apparaître dans la parttoc
-% («~Alfa in parttoc~»), une forme pour apparaître dans la minitoc du chapitre (<<~Alfa in minitoc~»),
-% une forme pour apparaître ailleurs («~Alfa out subtoc~»), et une forme comme titre en début de la section
-% («~Alfa the first section~»). Donc nous définissons une commande \ucom{alfati} utilisant les
-% indicateurs \com{ifinparttoc} et \com{ifinminitoc} pour sélectionner le titre à~utiliser dans chacune des ses instances.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\alfati{\ifinparttoc Alfa in parttoc
- \else\ifinminitoc Alfa in minitoc
- \else Alfa out subtoc
- \fi
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% But we can define a more general macro, \ucom{varsecti}, with three arguments for the three variants
-% of a section title\,\footnote{You will eventually need to define similar macros for other sectionning commands or for
-% figures or table titles; proceed with care from this model.}:
-% \or\relax
-% Mais nous pouvons définir une macro plus générale, \ucom{varsecti}, avec trois arguments pour les trois variantes
-% d'un titre de section\,\footnote{Vous aurez éventuellement besoin de définir des macros similaires pour d'autres
-% commandes de sectionnement ou pour les titres de figures ou de tableaux; procédez avec soin à~partir de ce modèle.}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\varsecti}[3]%
- {\ifinparttoc{#1}\relax
- \else\ifinminitoc{#2}\relax
- \else{#3}\relax
- \fi
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then the document with a table of contents, a part with its parttoc and a chapter with its minitoc. And an other
-% chapter. You can verify that the entry for the ``Alfa'' section varies in the main toc, the parttoc, the
-% minitoc and the effective title of the section.
-% Note that the variable title (here \ucom{alfati}) should be defined \virage\emph{before} any use, like in the main
-% toc or any minitable.
-% \or\relax
-% Puis le document avec une table des matières, une partie avec sa parttoc et un chapitre avec sa minitoc. Puis un
-% autre chapitre. Vous pouvez vérifier que l'entrée pour la section «~Alfa~» change dans la table des matières
-% principale, la parttoc, la minitoc et dans le titre effectif de la section.
-% Notez que le titre variable (ici \ucom{alfati}) doit être défini \virage\emph{avant} toute utilisation, comme
-% dans la table des matières principale ou dans une des minitables.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\protect}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\tableofcontents
-\part{Part~A}
-\parttoc
-
-\chapter{One}
-\minitoc
-\section[\protect\alfati]{Alfa the first section}
-\lipsum[1]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We can use the more general macro \ucom{varsecti}\,\footnote{This macro is not part of the \upack{minitoc} package, it is
-% just an example.}, with its three arguments given when the section begins; but that macro must
-% be \virage\emph{protected} (or look at the \pack{makerobust}~\cite{makerobust} package by \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}),
-% or declared ``robust'' by \com{DeclareRobustCommand} as above:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous pouvons utiliser la macro plus générale \ucom{varsecti}\,\footnote{Cette macro ne fait pas partie du paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc}, c'est simplement un exemple.}, avec ses trois arguments fournis lors du début de la section;
-% mais cette macro doit être \virage\emph{protégée} (ou regardez le paquetage \pack{makerobust}~\cite{makerobust}
-% de \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}), ou déclarée «~robuste~» par \com{DeclareRobustCommand} comme plus haut:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\section[\varsecti{Bravo in parttoc}%
- {Bravo in minitoc}%
- {Bravo out of subtoc}]% % in maintoc and headers
- {Bravo the second section} % local title
-\lipsum[2]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymtoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% But is is even easier to use a ``polymorphic'' entry in the optionnal argument\,\footnote{They are no secttocs
-% in a book-class document, but all the four arguments of \com{mtcpolymtoc} must be specified, even empty!}:
-% \or\relax
-% Mais il est encore plus facile d'utiliser une entrée «~polymorphique~» dans l'argument optionnel\,\footnote{Il
-% n'y~a pas de secttocs dans un document de classe book, mais les quatre arguments de \com{mtcpolymtoc} doivent
-% tous être spécifiés, même vides!}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\chapter{Two}
-\minitoc
-\section[\mtcpolymtoc%
- {Charlie in parttoc}%
- {Charlie in minitoc}%
- {Charlie in secttoc}% % <- see/voir note
- {Charlie out subtoc}]%
- {Charlie}
-\lipsum[3]
-\end{document}
-%</mtc-vti>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% ^^A %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \chapter{Messages}\label{c+messages}
-% \or\relax
-% \chapter{Messages}\label{c+messages}
-% \fi
-% \minitoc
-% \mtcskip
-% \minilot
-% \mtcskip
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \def\mstrut{\rule[-5pt]{0pt}{5pt}}
-% \centering
-% \changeskips
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Message identifiers]{Message identifiers (click on a message identifier to see its meaning).}\label{t+allmess}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Identificateurs des messages]{Identificateurs des messages (cliquez sur un identificateur de message
-% pour voir sa signification).}\label{t+allmess}
-% \fi\relax
-% ^^A {\footnotesize\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}}
-% {\footnotesize\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \mstrut\lmess{E0001}&&\lmess{E0002}&&\lmess{E0003}&&\lmess{E0004}&&\lmess{E0005}&&\lmess{E0006}&&\lmess{E0007}&&\lmess{E0008}&&\lmess{E0009}&&\lmess{E0010}\\
-% \mstrut\lmess{E0011}&&\lmess{E0012}&&\lmess{E0013}&&\lmess{E0014}&&\lmess{E0015}&&\lmess{E0016}&&\lmess{E0017}&&\lmess{E0018}&&\lmess{E0019}&&\lmess{E0020}\\
-% \mstrut\lmess{E0021}&&\lmess{E0022}&&\lmess{E0023}&&\lmess{E0024}&&\lmess{E0025}&&\lmess{E0026}&&\lmess{E0027}&&\lmess{E0028}&&\lmess{E0029}&&\lmess{E0030}\\
-% \mstrut\lmess{E0031}&&\lmess{E0032}&&\lmess{E0033}&&\lmess{E0034}&&\lmess{E0035}&&\lmess{E0036}&&\lmess{E0037}&&\lmess{E0038}&&\lmess{E0039}&&\lmess{E0040}\\
-% \mstrut\lmess{E0041}&&\lmess{E0042}&&\lmess{E0043}&&&&&&&&&&&&&&\\
-% \midrule
-% \mstrut\lmess{F0001}&&\lmess{F0002}&&\lmess{F0003}&&\lmess{F0004}&&\lmess{F0005}&&\lmess{F0006}&&\lmess{F0007}&&\lmess{F0008}&&\lmess{F0009}&&\\
-% \midrule
-% \mstrut\lmess{I0000}&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&\\
-% \mstrut\lmess{I0001}&&\lmess{I0002}&&\lmess{I0003}&&\lmess{I0004}&&\lmess{I0005}&&\lmess{I0006}&&\lmess{I0007}&&\lmess{I0008}&&\lmess{I0009}&&\lmess{I0010}\\
-% \mstrut\lmess{I0011}&&\lmess{I0012}&&\lmess{I0013}&&\lmess{I0014}&&\lmess{I0015}&&\lmess{I0016}&&\lmess{I0017}&&\lmess{I0018}&&\lmess{I0019}&&\lmess{I0020}\\
-% \mstrut\lmess{I0021}&&\lmess{I0022}&&\lmess{I0023}&&\lmess{I0024}&&\lmess{I0025}&&\lmess{I0026}&&\lmess{I0027}&&\lmess{I0028}&&\lmess{I0029}&&\lmess{I0030}\\
-% \mstrut\lmess{I0031}&&\lmess{I0032}&&\lmess{I0033}&&\lmess{I0034}&&\lmess{I0035}&&\lmess{I0036}&&\lmess{I0037}&&\lmess{I0038}&&\lmess{I0039}&&\lmess{I0040}\\
-% \mstrut\lmess{I0041}&&\lmess{I0042}&&\lmess{I0043}&&\lmess{I0044}&&\lmess{I0045}&&\lmess{I0046}&&\lmess{I0047}&&\lmess{I0048}&&\lmess{I0049}&&\lmess{I0050}\\
-% \mstrut\lmess{I0051}&&\lmess{I0052}&&\lmess{I0053}&&&&&&&&&&&&&&\\
-% \midrule
-% \mstrut\lmess{M0001}&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&\\
-% \midrule
-% \mstrut\lmess{W0001}&&\lmess{W0002}&&\lmess{W0003}&&\lmess{W0004}&&\lmess{W0005}&&\lmess{W0006}&&\lmess{W0007}&&\lmess{W0008}&&\lmess{W0009}&&\lmess{W0010}\\
-% \mstrut\lmess{W0011}&&\lmess{W0012}&&\lmess{W0013}&&\lmess{W0014}&&\lmess{W0015}&&\lmess{W0016}&&\lmess{W0017}&&\lmess{W0018}&&\lmess{W0019}&&\lmess{W0020}\\
-% \mstrut\lmess{W0021}&&\lmess{W0022}&&\lmess{W0023}&&\lmess{W0024}&&\lmess{W0025}&&\lmess{W0026}&&\lmess{W0027}&&\lmess{W0028}&&\lmess{W0029}&&\lmess{W0030}\\
-% \mstrut\lmess{W0031}&&\lmess{W0032}&&\lmess{W0033}&&\lmess{W0034}&&\lmess{W0035}&&\lmess{W0036}&&\lmess{W0037}&&\lmess{W0038}&&\lmess{W0039}&&\lmess{W0040}\\
-% \mstrut\lmess{W0041}&&\lmess{W0042}&&\lmess{W0043}&&\lmess{W0044}&&\lmess{W0045}&&\lmess{W0046}&&\lmess{W0047}&&\lmess{W0048}&&\lmess{W0049}&&\lmess{W0050}\\
-% \mstrut\lmess{W0051}&&\lmess{W0052}&&\lmess{W0053}&&\lmess{W0054}&&\lmess{W0055}&&\lmess{W0056}&&\lmess{W0057}&&\lmess{W0058}&&\lmess{W0059}&&\lmess{W0060}\\
-% \mstrut\lmess{W0061}&&\lmess{W0062}&&\lmess{W0063}&&\lmess{W0064}&&\lmess{W0065}&&\lmess{W0066}&&\lmess{W0067}&&\lmess{W0068}&&\lmess{W0069}&&\lmess{W0070}\\
-% \mstrut\lmess{W0071}&&\lmess{W0072}&&\lmess{W0073}&&\lmess{W0074}&&\lmess{W0075}&&\lmess{W0076}&&\lmess{W0077}&&\lmess{W0078}&&\lmess{W0079}&&\lmess{W0080}\\
-% \mstrut\lmess{W0081}&&\lmess{W0082}&&\lmess{W0083}&&\lmess{W0084}&&\lmess{W0085}&&\lmess{W0086}&&\lmess{W0087}&&\lmess{W0088}&&\lmess{W0089}&&\lmess{W0090}\\
-% \mstrut\lmess{W0091}&&\lmess{W0092}&&\lmess{W0093}&&\lmess{W0094}&&\lmess{W0095}&&\lmess{W0096}&&\lmess{W0097}&&\lmess{W0098}&&\lmess{W0099}&&\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Introduction}
-% This chapter lists and comments the messages given by the \upack{minitoc} package, and is associates,
-% \pack{mtcoff} and \pack{mtcpatchmem}\footnote{The
-% texts of the messages given in this chapter may slighty differ from the real text, because some messages contain
-% variable elements and the layout may vary.}.
-% The table~\vref{t+allmess} lists all messages; in this table, you can click on a message identifier to find quickly its meaning.
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item The first line of each message contains usually the name of the package and an unique identifier (this
-% identifier may be useful to search in this chapter of the documentation, but has no special meaning,
-% except the leading letter: \texttt{I}~for informative, \texttt{W}~for warning, and \texttt{E}~for error).
-% \item Informative messages are written only in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file; the prefix is~\texttt{F}
-% for the warning messages from the \pack{mtcoff} package and~\texttt{M} for the informative message from
-% the \pack{mtcpatchmem} package.
-% \item Warning messages are shown on the screen (but often too quickly to be seen, because normally \LaTeX\ does not stop
-% for warnings) and written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file.
-% \item Error messages are shown on the screen and written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file,
-% but \LaTeX\ stops, so you can ask for help by typing~``\texttt{h}''.
-% \item In this chapter, some words in the messages are typeset in italic characters; they represent the variable
-% parts of the message:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \emph{ARG1}~The first argument of the command.
-% \item \emph{ARG2}~The second argument of the command.
-% \item \emph{ARG3}~The third argument of the command.
-% \item \emph{\CCC}~The name of the class of your document.
-% \item \emph{\COMMAND}~The name of the command.
-% \item \emph{\CTR}~The name of a \LaTeX\ counter.
-% \item \emph{document}~The name of your document, without its \suffix{.tex} extension.
-% \item \emph{\EXTEN}~The extension part of the name of a file.
-% \item \emph{\FILE}~The name of a file (often a minitoc auxiliary file, the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}
-% file, the \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} file, or the \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} file).
-% \item \emph{\INAME}~The name of an internal macro redefined by a \verb|\mtcset...| command.
-% \item \emph{\LLL}~The name of the language (for \com{mtcselectlanguage}).
-% \item \emph{\NNN}~The number of the line in the source file.
-% \item \emph{macro}~The name of a minitoc font command redefined by \com{mtcsetfont}.
-% \item \emph{\NTITLE}~The new value of a title redefined by \com{mtcsettitle}.
-% \item \emph{\NB}~The number of mini-tables of the given type in your document (when you are using short
-% extensions and that number is greater than~99).
-% \item \emph{\OFFSET}~The new value of an offset redefined by \com{mtcsetoffset}.
-% \item \emph{\PREPA}~The name of a minitoc preparation command.
-% \item \emph{\SEQ}~A sequence of commands used to redefine an internal macro via a \verb|\mtcset...| command.
-% \item \emph{\STRING}~A string of characters, often part of a command name.
-% \item \emph{\VAL}~The new value of a counter.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% The messages are produced using macros from the \pack{mtcmess} package, described in chapter~\vref{c+code+mtcmess.sty}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Introduction}
-% Ce chapitre liste et commente les messages émis par le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, et ses associés \pack{mtcoff} et
-% \pack{mtcpatchmem}\,\footnote{Les
-% textes des messages donnés dans ce chapitre peuvent être légèrement différents du texte réel, car certains
-% messages contiennent des éléments variables et la mise en page peut aussi varier.}.
-% Le tableau~\vref{t+allmess} liste tous les messages; vous pouvez cliquer dans ce tableau sur un identifieur de message pour
-% trouver rapidement sa signification.
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item La première ligne de chaque message contient normalement le nom du paquetage et un identificateur unique
-% (il peut être utile pour chercher dans ce chapitre de la documentation, mais n'a aucune signification
-% particulière, sauf la lettre de tête: \texttt{I}~pour informatif, \texttt{W}~pour avertissement (\emph{warning}),
-% et \texttt{E}~pour erreur); le préfixe est~\texttt{F} pour les messages d'avertissement émis par le
-% paquetage \pack{mtcoff} et~\texttt{M} pour le message informatif émis par le paquetage \pack{mtcpatchmem}.
-% \item Les messages informatifs ne sont écrits que dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}.
-% \item Les messages d'avertissement (\emph{warning}) sont affichés sur l'écran (mais souvent trop rapidement pour
-% être vus, car normalement \LaTeX\ ne s'arrête pas pour les avertissements) et sont écrits dans
-% le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}.
-% \item Les messages d'erreur (\emph{error}) sont affichés sur l'écran et écrits dans le fichier
-% \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, mais \LaTeX\ s'arrête, donc vous pouvez demander de l'aide
-% en tapant~«~\texttt{h}~» (\emph{help}).
-% \item Dans ce chapitre, certains mots dans les messages sont écrits en italique; ils représentent les parties
-% variables du message:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \emph{ARG1}~Le premier argument de la commande.
-% \item \emph{ARG2}~Le deuxième argument de la commande.
-% \item \emph{ARG3}~Le troisième argument de la commande.
-% \item \emph{\CCC}~Le nom de la classe de votre document.
-% \item \emph{\COMMAND}~Le nom de la commande.
-% \item \emph{\STRING}~Une chaîne de caractères, faisant souvent partie d'un nom de commande.
-% \item \emph{\CTR}~Le nom d'un compteur \LaTeX.
-% \item \emph{document}~Le nom de votre document, sans son suffixe \suffix{.tex}.
-% \item \emph{\FILE}~Le nom d'un fichier (Souvent un fichier auxiliaire minitoc, le fichier
-% \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}, le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lof},
-% ou le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lot}).
-% \item \emph{\LLL}~Le nom de la langue (pour \com{mtcselectlanguage}).
-% \item \emph{\NNN}~Le numéro de la ligne dans le fichier source.
-% \item \emph{macro}~Le nom d'une commande de fonte minitoc redéfinie par \com{mtcsetfont}.
-% \item \emph{\NTITLE}~La nouvelle valeur d'un titre redéfinie par \com{mtcsettitle}.
-% \item \emph{\NB}~Le nombre de mini-tables du type donné dans votre document (lorsque vous utilisez des
-% suffixes courts et que ce nombre dépasse~99).
-% \item \emph{\INAME}~Le nom d'une macro interne redéfinie par une commande \verb|\mtcset...|.
-% \item \emph{\OFFSET}~La nouvelle valeur d'un déplacement (décalage) redéfinie par \com{mtcsetoffset}.
-% \item \emph{\PREPA}~Le nom d'une commande minitoc de préparation.
-% \item \emph{\SEQ}~Une séquence de commandes utilisée pour redéfinir une macro interne via une commande
-% \verb|\mtcset...|.
-% \item \emph{\EXTEN}~La partie suffixe du nom d'un fichier.
-% \item \emph{\VAL}~La nouvelle valeur d'un compteur.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% Les messages sont produits en utilisant des macros du paquetage \pack{mtcmess},
-% décrit au chapitre~\vref{c+code+mtcmess.sty}.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{15}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Messages from the \upack{minitoc} package}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Messages émis par le paquetage \upack{minitoc}}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Informative messages}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Messages informatifs}
-% \fi
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0000]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package: minitoc 2008/07/16 v60 Package minitoc (JPFD)|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This is the announce message of the \upack{minitoc} package, with its name, date and version. ``JPFD'' are my
-% initials. This message has no real identifier because it is emitted by \com{ProvidesPackage}, but, for indexing it,
-% we use \texttt{I0000}.
-% \or\relax
-% Ceci est le message annonçant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, avec son nom, sa date et sa version. «~JPFD~» sont
-% mes initiales. Ce message n'a pas d'identificateur réel car il est émis par \com{ProvidesPackage}, mais, pour
-% l'indexer, nous utilisons \texttt{I0000}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0001]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0001|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) *** minitoc package, version 60 ***.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Remember the version of the package.
-% \or\relax
-% Rappel de la version du paquetage.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0002]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0002|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Autoconfiguration of extensions.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \upack{minitoc} package tries to determine if short or long extensions for file names are used by the operating
-% system.
-% \or\relax
-% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} essaye de déterminer si des suffixes courts pour les noms de fichiers ou longs sont
-% utilisés par le système d'exploitation.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0003]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0003|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) chapter level macros available.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{chapter} sectionning command is available, so you can use the mini-table commands at the chapter level,
-% but \emph{not} the mini-table commands at the section level.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande de sectionnement \com{chapter} est disponible, donc vous pouvez utiliser les commandes pour des
-% mini-tables au niveau chapitre, \emph{mais pas} les commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau section.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0004]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0004|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) chapter level macros NOT available.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{chapter} sectionning command is \emph{not} available, so you cannot use the mini-table commands at the
-% chapter level, but, if the \com{section} sectionning command is available, you can use mini-table commands at
-% the section level.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande de sectionnement \com{chapter} \emph{n'est pas} disponible, donc vous ne pouvez pas utiliser les
-% commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau chapitre, mais, si la commande de sectionnement \com{section} est
-% disponible, vous pouvez utiliser les commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau section.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0005]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0005|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) compatible with hyperref.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This version of \upack{minitoc} is compatible with the \pack{hyperref} package.
-% \or\relax
-% Cette version de \upack{minitoc} est compatible avec le paquetage \pack{hyperref}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0006]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0006|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.|\emph{\EXTEN}\verb| is empty on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The auxiliary file for a mini-table is found empty (or inexistent) when \upack{minitoc} tries to insert it. If
-% the \optd{checkfiles} option is active, it is skipped.
-% \or\relax
-% Le fichier auxiliaire pour une mini-table est trouvé vide (ou inexistant) lorsque \upack{minitoc} essaye de
-% l'insérer. Si l'option \optd{checkfiles} est active, il est sauté.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0007]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0007|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Horizontal rules are activated|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) for the |\emph{ARG1}\verb|s on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The horizontal rules will be present in the mini-tables of type \emph{ARG1}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les filets horizontaux seront présents dans les mini-tables de type \emph{ARG1}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0008]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0008|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Horizontal rules are inhibited|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) for the |\emph{ARG1}\verb|s on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The horizontal rules will be omitted in the mini-tables of type \emph{ARG1}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les filets horizontaux seront omis dans les mini-tables de type \emph{ARG1}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0009]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0009|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Listing minitoc auxiliary files.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Creating the |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.maf file.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have used the \optd{listfiles} package option. A list of the minitoc auxiliary files is written in the
-% \emph{document}\suffix{.maf} file. It may be helpful to delete these files. See section~\vref{s+listfiles}.
-% This option is the default since version~\#48.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}. Une liste des fichiers auxiliaires pour minitoc est
-% écrite dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. Ceci peut être utile pour détruire ces fichiers.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+listfiles}.
-% Cette option est active par défaut depuis la version~\#48.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0010]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0010|\\
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: The |\emph{\LLL}\verb| language is selected.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} file has been successfully loaded for the \emph{\LLL} language\footnote{The
-% \xfile{english.mld} file is always loaded first, to have english as default language.}
-% by the \com{mtcselectlanguage} command at line~\emph{\NNN}. The titles for the mini-tables are changed.
-% \or\relax
-% Le fichier \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} a été correctement chargé pour la langue \emph{\LLL},\footnote{Le
-% fichier \xfile{english.mld} est toujours chargé d'abord, pour avoir l'anglais comme langue par défaut.} par la commande
-% \com{mtcselectlanguage} à~la ligne~\emph{\NNN}. Les titres pour les mini-tables sont changés.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0011]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0011|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb| language object selected.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mtcselectlanguage} macro has successfully (indirectly) loaded
-% the \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo} minitoc object file.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{mtcselectlanguage} a (indirectement) chargé avec succès le fichier minitoc objet de langue
-% \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0012]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0012|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Long extensions (Unix-like) will be used.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The autoconfiguration has detected that your operating system is able to use long extensions; this will be the
-% default.
-% \or\relax
-% L'autoconfiguration a détecté que votre système d'exploitation est capable d'utiliser des suffixes longs; ce sera
-% le choix par défaut.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0013]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0013|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetdepth redefines the counter|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) "|\mbox{\emph{\CTR}}\verb|" as "|\emph{\VAL}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mtcsetdepth} macro changes the value of the specified depth counter and forces it to \emph{\VAL}.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{mtcsetdepth} change la valeur du compteur de profondeur spécifié et lui donne la \emph{\VAL}
-% demandée.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0014]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0014|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfeature redefines the macro|
-% \verb|(minitoc) "\|\emph{\INAME}\verb|" as|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) "\|\emph{\SEQ}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mtcsetfeature} macro has redefined the internal macro \emph{\INAME} with the given \emph{\SEQ}.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{mtcsetfeature} a redéfini la macro interne \emph{\INAME} par la \emph{\SEQ} donnée.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0015]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0015|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfont redefines the macro|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) "|\mbox{\emph{macro}}\verb|" as "|\emph{\SEQ}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mtcsetfont} command redefines the (old style) \emph{macro} by the given \emph{\SEQ} of font
-% commands.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{mtcsetfont} redéfinit la macro (en ancien style) par la \emph{\SEQ} de commandes de fontes
-% donnée.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0016]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0016|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetformat redefines the macro|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) "\|\emph{\INAME}\verb|" as "|\emph{ARG3}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The macro \com{mtcsetformat} redefines an internal macro with the value given by its third argument.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{mtcsetformat} redéfinit une macro interne avec la valeur de son troisième argument.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0017]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0017|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsettitle redefines the macro|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) "|\emph{\INAME}\verb|" as|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) "|\emph{\NTITLE}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A mini-table title is redefined via the \com{mtcsettitle} macro.
-% \or\relax
-% Un titre de mini-table est redéfini via la macro \com{mtcsettitle}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0018]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0018|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsettitlefont redefines the macro|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) "\|\emph{\INAME}\verb|" as|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) "|\emph{\SEQ}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mtcsettitlefont} macro redefines the (old style) \verb|\|\emph{\INAME} macro which the given sequence
-% \emph{\SEQ}.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{mtcsettitlefont} redéfinit la macro \verb|\|\emph{\INAME} (ancien style) par la séquence \emph{\SEQ}
-% donnée.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0019]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0019|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) No hints have been written|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) in the |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.log file.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \optd{hints} package option has detected no potential problem.
-% \or\relax
-% L'option de paquetage \optd{hints} n'a détecté aucun problème potentiel.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0020]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0020|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) old version of the memoir class.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The version of the \class{memoir} class is old. The \upack{minitoc} package does not need to patch this class.
-% \or\relax
-% La version de la classe \class{memoir} est ancienne. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} n'a pas besoin de corriger
-% cette classe.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0021]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0021|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Page numbers are activated|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) for the |\emph{ARG1}\verb|s on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The page numbers will be present in the mini-tables of type \emph{ARG1}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les numéros de pages seront présents dans les mini-tables de type \emph{ARG1}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0022]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0022|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Page numbers are inhibited|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) for the |\emph{ARG1}\verb|s on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The page numbers will be omitted in the mini-tables of type \emph{ARG1}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les numéros de pages seront omis dans les mini-tables de type \emph{ARG1}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0023]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0023|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) part level macros available.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{part} sectionning command is available, so you can use the mini-table commands at the part level.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande de sectionnement \com{part} est disponible, donc vous pouvez utiliser les commandes pour des
-% mini-tables au niveau partie.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0024]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0024|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING MINITOCS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A \com{dominitoc} command prepares the \upack{minitoc} auxiliary files for minitocs from \emph{\FILE}.
-% \or\relax
-% Une commande \com{dominitoc} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \upack{minitoc} pour les minitocs depuis le \emph{\FILE}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0025]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0025|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING PARTTOCS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A \com{doparttoc} command prepares the \texttt{parttoc} auxiliary files for parttocs from \emph{\FILE}.
-% \or\relax
-% Une commande \com{doparttoc} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{parttoc} pour les parttocs depuis le \emph{\FILE}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0026]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0026|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING SECTTOCS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A \com{dosecttoc} command prepares the \texttt{secttoc} auxiliary files for secttocs from \emph{\FILE}.
-% \or\relax
-% Une commande \com{dosecttoc} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{secttoc} pour les secttocs depuis le \emph{\FILE}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0027]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0027|
-% \verb|(minitoc) recent version of the memoir class.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The version of the \class{memoir} class is recent. The \upack{minitoc} package will try to patch it.
-% \or\relax
-% La version de la classe \class{memoir} est récente. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} va essayer de corriger cette
-% classe.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0028]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0028|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) section level macros available.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{section} sectionning command is available but the \com{chapter} sectionning command is \emph{not}
-% available, so you can use the mini-table commands at the section level.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande de sectionnement \com{section} est disponible mais la commande de sectionnement
-% \com{chapter} \emph{n'est pas} disponible, donc vous pouvez utiliser les commandes pour des mini-tables au
-% niveau section.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0029]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0029|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) section level macros NOT available.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{section} sectionning command is not defined (by the document class), so the section level commands of
-% the \upack{minitoc} package are not available.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande de sectionnement \com{section} n'est pas définie (par la classe du document), donc les commandes au
-% niveau section du paquetage \upack{minitoc} ne sont pas disponibles.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0030]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0030|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) the memoir class is loaded:|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) compatibility attempted.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \class{memoir} document class is used. The \upack{minitoc} package tries to ensure compatibility.
-% \or\relax
-% La classe de document \class{memoir} est utilisée. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} essaye d'assurer la compatibilité.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0031]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0031|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) ==> this version is configured for UNIX-like|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (long extensions) file names.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The autoconfiguration has detected that your operating uses UNIX-like (long extensions) file names.
-% \or\relax
-% L'autoconfiguration a détecté que votre système d'exploitation utilise des noms de fichiers à~la mode UNIX
-% (suffixes longs).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0032]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0032|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) This version of the memoir class uses|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) a version of \chapter which is|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) incompatible with the minitoc package.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) We try to patch.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \class{memoir} class uses a version of the \com{chapter} command which needs to be corrected because its syntax has
-% been changed. A patch is loaded.
-% \or\relax
-% La classe \class{memoir} utilise une version de la commande \com{chapter} qui a besoin d'être corrigée car sa
-% syntaxe a changé. Une correction (\emph{patch}) est chargée.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0033]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0033|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Writing |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.|\emph{\EXTEN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% An auxiliary file for a mini-table is written by a \upack{minitoc} preparation command (like \com{dominitoc}).
-% \or\relax
-% Un fichier auxiliaire pour une mini-table est écrit par une commande \upack{minitoc} de préparation
-% (telle que \com{dominitoc}).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0034]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0034|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING MINILOFS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A \com{dominilof} command prepares the \upack{minilof} auxiliary files for minilofs from \emph{\FILE}.
-% \or\relax
-% Une commande \com{dominilof} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \upack{minilof} pour les minilofs depuis le \emph{\FILE}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0035]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0035|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING PARTLOFS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A \com{dopartlof} command prepares the \texttt{partlof} auxiliary files for partlofs from \emph{\FILE}.
-% \or\relax
-% Une commande \com{dopartlof} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{partlof} pour les partlofs depuis le \emph{\FILE}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0036]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0036|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING SECTLOFS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A \com{dosectlof} command prepares the \texttt{sectlof} auxiliary files for sectlofs from \emph{\FILE}.
-% \or\relax
-% Une commande \com{dosectlof} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{sectlof} pour les sectlofs depuis le \emph{\FILE}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0037]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0037|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING MINILOTS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A \com{dominilot} command prepares the \texttt{minilot} auxiliary files for minilots from \emph{\FILE}.
-% \or\relax
-% Une commande \com{dominilot} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{minilot} pour les minilots depuis le \emph{\FILE}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0038]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0038|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING PARTLOTS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A \com{dopartlot} command prepares the \texttt{partlot} auxiliary files for partlots from \emph{\FILE}.
-% \or\relax
-% Une commande \com{dopartlot} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{partlot} pour les partlots depuis le \emph{\FILE}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0039]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0039|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING SECTLOTS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A \com{dosectlot} command prepares the \texttt{sectlot} auxiliary files for sectlots from \emph{\FILE}.
-% \or\relax
-% Une commande \com{dosectlot} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{sectlot} pour les sectlots depuis le \emph{\FILE}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Informative messages for hints}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Messages informatifs pour les indications (\emph{hints})}
-% \fi
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0040]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0040|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The ``abstract'' package has been|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded with the ``addtotoc'' option.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You need to look at the|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) documentation to adjust.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% As you are using the \pack{abstract} package with its \optp{addtotoc}{abstract} option,
-% you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation
-% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{faq.27}.
-% \or\relax
-% Puisque vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{abstract} avec son option \optp{addtotoc}{abstract},
-% vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{faq.27}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0041]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0041|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The amsbook class is loaded.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% As you are using the \class{amsbook} class, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation
-% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{s+AMS}.
-% \or\relax
-% Puisque vous utilisez la classe \class{amsbook}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{s+AMS}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0042]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0042|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The appendix package is loaded.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% As you are using also the \pack{appendix} package, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation
-% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{faq+appendix}.
-% \or\relax
-% Puisque vous utilisez aussi le paquetage \pack{appendix}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{faq+appendix}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0043]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0043|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The KOMAScript |\emph{\CCC}\verb| class is loaded.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% As you are using also the \emph{\CCC} class, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation
-% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{special.entries}.
-% The classes involved here are \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt}, and \class{scrartcl}, i.e., the \KOMAScript{}
-% classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} compatible with \upack{minitoc}.
-% \or\relax
-% Puisque vous utilisez aussi la classe \emph{\CCC}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{special.entries}.
-% Les classes concernées ici sont \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} et \class{scrartcl}, c'est-à-dire les
-% classes \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} compatibles avec \upack{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0044]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0044|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The memoir class is loaded.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% As you are using the \class{memoir} class, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation
-% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{faq+memoir}.
-% \or\relax
-% Puisque vous utilisez la classe \class{memoir}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{faq+memoir}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0045]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0045|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The |\texttt{\bs}\PREPA\verb| command|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) has been invoked more than once|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A minitoc preparation command has been invoked more than once.
-% \or\relax
-% Une commande minitoc de préparation a été invoquée plus d'une fois.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0046]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0046|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The tocbibind package is loaded.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% As you are using also the \pack{tocbibind} package, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation
-% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{special.entries}.
-% \or\relax
-% Puisque vous utilisez aussi le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{special.entries}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0047]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0047|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The tocloft package is loaded.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% As you are using also the \pack{tocloft} package, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation
-% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{faq+tocloft}.
-% \or\relax
-% Puisque vous utilisez aussi le paquetage \pack{tocloft}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{faq+tocloft}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0048]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0048|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) Using \mtcprepare may induce some|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) hints about the preparation commands,|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) because it invokes ALL the preparation|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) commands allowed by the document class,|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) without any previous check.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mtcprepare} command invoke all the possible preparation commands, depending only on the document class and the
-% available contents files. It does not known exactly what you want, so it can prepare too many mini-tables
-% files.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{mtcprepare} invoque toutes les commandes de préparation possibles, selon la classe du document et
-% les fichiers de contenu disponibles. Elle ne sait pas exactement ce que vous désirez, donc elle peut préparer trop
-% de fichiers de mini-tables.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0049]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0049|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) ==> You requested the hints option.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) Some hints are eventually given below.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% As you have requested the \optd{hints} package option (which is set by default), some ``hints'' are eventually
-% given in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. You can find them easily by searching for the string
-% ``\texttt{minitoc(hints)}'' with a text editor.
-% \or\relax
-% Puisque vous avez demandé l'option de paquetage \optd{hints} (qui est activée par défaut), quelques
-% «~indications~» (\emph{hints}) sont éventuellement écrites dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. Vous
-% pourrez les trouver facilement en recherchant la chaîne «~\texttt{minitoc(hints)}~» avec un éditeur de texte.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0050]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: I0050|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) The required "|\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mld" file is missing.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) The "|\emph{\LLL}\verb|" language option will not be available.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Please install it from a recent distribution|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) or from the CTAN archives.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} file has not been installed on your system. You should take it from a recent distribution or
-% from the CTAN archives to complete your installation, else the \emph{\LLL} language option will not be available.
-% \or\relax
-% Le fichier \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} n'a pas été installé sur votre système. Vous devriez le prendre dans une distribution
-% récente ou depuis les archives CTAN pour compléter votre installation, sinon l'option de langue \emph{\LLL} ne sera pas
-% disponible.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0051]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: I0051|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) The required "|\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mlo" file is missing.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) The "|\emph{\LLL}\verb|" language option will not be available.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Please install it from a recent distribution|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) or from the CTAN archives.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo} file has not been installed on your system. You should take it from a recent distribution or
-% from the CTAN archives to complete your installation, else the \emph{\LLL} language option will not be available.
-% \or\relax
-% Le fichier \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo} n'a pas été installé sur votre système. Vous devriez le prendre dans une distribution
-% récente ou depuis les archives CTAN pour compléter votre installation, sinon l'option de langue ne sera pas
-% disponible.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0052]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0052|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetoffset redefines the offset|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) "|\mbox{\emph{\OFFSET}}\verb|" as "|\emph{\VAL}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mtcsetoffset} macro changes the value of the specified offset and forces it to \emph{\VAL}.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{mtcsetoffset} change la valeur du déplacement spécifié et lui donne la \emph{\VAL}
-% demandée.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[I0053]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0053|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) You have loaded the |\mbox{\emph{\PACK}}\verb| package;|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) please be aware that the minitoc package|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) facilities can not be used for new types|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) of floats defined by the |\mbox{\emph{\PACK}}\verb| package|\\
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \upack{minitoc} package does not manage new types of floats defined via the \pack{float}~\cite{float},
-% \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}
-% and \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages\,\footnote{As the
-% \pack{trivfloat} and \pack{rotfloat} packages load the \pack{float} package, this message will then appear twice!}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} ne traite pas les nouveaux types de flottants définis via les
-% paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow},
-% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages\,\footnote{Comme les paquetages
-% \pack{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat} chargent le paquetage
-% \pack{float}, ce message apparaîtra alors deux fois!}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \lneed{15}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Warning messages}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Messages d'avertissement}
-% \fi
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0001]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0001|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \chapter and \section are undefined.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Cannot use \mtcfixglossary without|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) optional argument [part].|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The sectionning commands \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined (by the document class), hence the
-% \com{mtcfixglossary} macro cannot be used without an optional argument (try \com{part}). This situation is very
-% unlikely to happen, so also verify your document class.
-% \or\relax
-% Les commandes de sectionnement \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies (par la classe du document),
-% donc la macro \com{mtcfixglossary} ne peut pas être utilisée sans son argument optionnel (essayez \verb|[part]|).
-% Il est très improbable que cette situation se produise, donc vérifiez aussi la classe de votre document.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0002]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0002|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \chapter and \section are undefined.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Cannot use \mtcfixindex without|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) optional argument [part].|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The sectionning commands \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined (by the document class), hence the
-% \com{mtcfixindex} macro cannot be used without an optional argument (try \com{part}). This situation is very
-% unlikely to happen, so also verify your document class.
-% \or\relax
-% Les commandes de sectionnement \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies (par la classe du document),
-% donc la macro \com{mtcfixindex} ne peut pas être utilisée sans son argument optionnel (essayez \verb|[part]|).
-% Il est très improbable que cette situation se produise, donc vérifiez aussi la classe de votre document.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0003]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0003|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \firstchapteris is an obsolete (ignored)|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) command on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstchapteris}). You should remove it.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstchapteris}. Vous devriez l'enlever.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0004]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0004|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \firstpartis is an obsolete (ignored)|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) command on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstpartis}). You should remove it.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstpartis}. Vous devriez l'enlever.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0005]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0005|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \firstsectionis is an obsolete (ignored)|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) command on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstsectionis}). You should remove it.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstsectionis}. Vous devriez l'enlever.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0006]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0006|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcfixglossary can only be used|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) with the [part] optional argument,|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) which becomes the default.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mtcfixglossary} macro can only use \texttt{[part]} as optional argument (which becomes the default), because
-% \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{mtcfixglossary} ne peut utiliser que \texttt{[part]} comme argument optionnel (qui devient le choix
-% par défaut), car \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0007]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0007|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcfixindex can only be used|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) with the [part] optional argument,|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) which becomes the default.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mtcfixindex} macro can only use \texttt{[part]} as optional argument (which becomes the default), because
-% \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{mtcfixindex} ne peut utiliser que \texttt{[part]} comme argument optionnel (qui devient le choix
-% par défaut), car \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0008]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0008|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) MINILOFS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dominilof} command. Please check if
-% you have called \com{dominilof} in the correct sequence of commands.
-% \or\relax
-% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dominilof}. Vérifiez si
-% vous avez invoqué \com{dominilof} dans la bonne séquence de commandes.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0009]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0009|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) MINILOTS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dominilot} command. Please check if
-% you have called \com{dominilot} in the correct sequence of commands.
-% \or\relax
-% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dominilot}. Vérifiez si
-% vous avez invoqué \com{dominilot} dans la bonne séquence de commandes.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0010]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0010|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) MINITOCS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dominitoc} command. Please check if
-% you have called \com{dominitoc} in the correct sequence of commands.
-% \or\relax
-% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dominitoc}. Vérifiez si
-% vous avez invoqué \com{dominitoc} dans la bonne séquence de commandes.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0011]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0011|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) PARTLOFS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dopartlof} command. Please check if
-% you have called \com{dopartlof} in the correct sequence of commands.
-% \or\relax
-% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dopartlof}. Vérifiez si
-% vous avez invoqué \com{dopartlof} dans la bonne séquence de commandes.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0012]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0012|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) PARTLOTS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dopartlot} command. Please check if
-% you have called \com{dopartlot} in the correct sequence of commands.
-% \or\relax
-% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dopartlot}. Vérifiez si
-% vous avez invoqué \com{dopartlot} dans la bonne séquence de commandes.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0013]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0013|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) PARTTOCS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{doparttoc} command. Please check if
-% you have called \com{doparttoc} in the correct sequence of commands.
-% \or\relax
-% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{doparttoc}. Vérifiez si
-% vous avez invoqué \com{doparttoc} dans la bonne séquence de commandes.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0014]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0014|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) SECTLOFS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dosectlof} command. Please check if
-% you have called \com{dosectlof} in the correct sequence of commands.
-% \or\relax
-% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dosectlof}. Vérifiez si
-% vous avez invoqué \com{dosectlof} dans la bonne séquence de commandes.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0015]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0015|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) SECTLOTS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dosectlot} command. Please check if
-% you have called \com{dosectlot} in the correct sequence of commands.
-% \or\relax
-% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dosectlot}. Vérifiez si
-% vous avez invoqué \com{dosectlot} dans la bonne séquence de commandes.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0016]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0016|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) SECTTOCS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dosecttoc} command. Please check if
-% you have called \com{dosecttoc} in the correct sequence of commands.
-% \or\relax
-% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dosecttoc}. Vérifiez si
-% vous avez invoqué \com{dosecttoc} dans la bonne séquence de commandes.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0017]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0017|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) no section or chapter level macros available|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) PLEASE VERIFY YOUR MAIN DOCUMENT CLASS.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{chapter} and \com{section} sectionning commands are not defined. Your document class is likely
-% without any sectionning command, so the \upack{minitoc} package is pointless. \emph{Verify your main
-% document class.}
-% \or\relax
-% Les commandes de sectionnement \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies. Votre classe de document
-% est probablement sans aucune commande de sectionnement, donc le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est sans objet. \emph{Vérifiez
-% la classe principale de votre document.}
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0018]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0018|\\
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: part level macros NOT available.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{part} sectionning command is not defined (by the document class), so the part level commands of the
-% \upack{minitoc} package are not available. It is a warning message because most classes with sectionning commands
-% define the \com{part} command, so you should verify which class you are using.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande de sectionnement \com{part} n'est pas définie (par la classe du document), donc les commandes au
-% niveau partie du paquetage \upack{minitoc} ne sont pas disponibles. C'est un message d'avertissement
-% (\emph{warning}) car la plupart des classes ayant des commandes de sectionnement définissent la commande
-% \com{part}, donc vous devriez vérifier quelle classe vous utilisez.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0019]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0019|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Short extensions (MSDOS-like) will be used.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) ==> this version is configured for MSDOS-like|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (8+3) file names.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The autofiguration has found that the operating system uses file names with short extensions (8+3 scheme).
-% \or\relax
-% L'autoconfiguration a trouvé que le système d'exploitation utilise des noms de fichiers avec des suffixes courts
-% (schéma 8+3).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0020]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0020|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) You have forced the use of short extensions.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have used the \opt{shortext} package option to force the use of short extensions (8+3 scheme). This action
-% limits the number of usable mini-tables of each kind and may be problematic if you have more that 99~mini-tables
-% of the same kind. If your operating system allows for long extensions, do not use the \opt{shortext} package
-% option, except for testing purposes.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez spécifié l'option de paquetage \opt{shortext} pour forcer l'utilisation de suffixes courts (schéma
-% 8+3). Cette action limite le nombre de mini-tables utilisables dans chaque sorte et peut poser des problèmes si
-% vous avez plus de 99~mini-tables du même genre. Si votre système d'exploitation permet des suffixes longs,
-% n'utilisez pas l'option de paquetage \opt{shortext}, sauf à~des fins de test.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0021]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0021|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Your version of latex.tex is obsolete.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Trying to continue...|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You\virage{} are using an obsolete version of \LaTeX, but the \upack{minitoc} package will still try to continue. It would be
-% better to update your \LaTeX\ installation.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous\virage{} utilisez une version obsolète de \LaTeX, mais le paquetage \upack{minitoc} va quand même essayer de continuer. Il
-% serait préférable de mettre à~jour votre installation de \LaTeX.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0022]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0022|\\
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Trying to continue... crossing fingers.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Your\Virage{} version of \LaTeX\ is very obsolete, and almost unusable with the \upack{minitoc} package. You can try to
-% continue the compilation, but you are urged to update your \LaTeX\ installation as soon as possible.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous\Virage{} utilisez une version totalement périmée de \LaTeX, presque inutilisable avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Vous pouvez essayer de continuer la compilation, mais vous êtes instamment priés de mettre à~jour votre installation
-% de \LaTeX{} dès que possible.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0093]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0093|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Some "*.mld" or "*.mlo" files are missing|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) in your installation.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Search for the I0050 and I0051 info messages|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) in the \jobname.log file.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) The full list of the missing language files|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) is gigen in the W0094 warning message.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Please install the missing files from|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) a recent distribution|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) or from the CTAN archives.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} files have not been installed on your system.
-% Search for the \texttt{I0050}\imess{I0050} and
-% \texttt{I0051}\imess{I0051} info messages in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file to find which files are missing.
-% You can retrieve them from a recent distribution or from the CTAN archives to complete your installation,
-% else some language options will not be available.
-% The full list of the missing language files is given in the \texttt{W0094}\imess{W0094}
-% warning message.
-% \or\relax
-% Certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} n'ont pas été installés sur votre système. Cherchez les
-% messages informatifs \texttt{I0050}\imess{I0050} et \texttt{I0051}\imess{I0051} dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} pour
-% trouver quels fichiers sont manquants. Vous pouvez les récupérer depuis une distribution récente ou depuis les
-% archives CTAN pour compléter votre installation, sinon certaines options de langue ne seront pas disponibles.
-% La liste complète des fichiers de langue manquants est donnée dans le message d'avertissement \imess{W0094}\texttt{W0094}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0094]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0094|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Missing minitoc language file(s):|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) ...|\\
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} files have not been installed on your system.
-% The list is given in the message.
-% \or\relax
-% Certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} n'ont pas été installés sur votre système.
-% Leur liste est donnée dans le message.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0095]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0095|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \chapter and \section are undefined.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Cannot use \mtcfixnomenclature without|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) optional argument [part].|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The sectionning commands \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined (by the document class), hence the
-% \com{mtcfixnomenclature} macro cannot be used without an optional argument (try \com{part}). This situation is very
-% unlikely to happen, so also verify your document class.
-% \or\relax
-% Les commandes de sectionnement \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies (par la classe du document),
-% donc la macro \com{mtcfixnomenclature} ne peut pas être utilisée sans son argument optionnel (essayez \verb|[part]|).
-% Il est très improbable que cette situation se produise, donc vérifiez aussi la classe de votre document.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0096]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0096|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcfixnomenclature can only be used|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) with the [part] optional argument,|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) which becomes the default.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mtcfixnomenclature} macro can only use \texttt{[part]} as optional argument (which becomes the default), because
-% \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{mtcfixnomenclature} ne peut utiliser que \texttt{[part]} comme argument optionnel (qui devient le choix
-% par défaut), car \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0098]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0098|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) --- You have used the \nofiles command|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) in your preamble; all preparation commands|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) in the body of the document will be ignored.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have used the \com{nofiles} command in the preamble of your document; hence the preparation commands will be
-% ignored in your document. Please verify that the mini-table auxiliary files are in their final state.
-% See page~\pageref{x+W0098}.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez utilisé la commande \com{nofiles} dans le préambule de votre document; veuillez vérifier que les
-% fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-ables sont dans leur état final. Voir page~\pageref{x+W0098}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Warning messages for hints}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Messages d'avertissement pour les indications (\emph{hints})}
-% \fi
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0023]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0023|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- It may be the consequence|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) of loading the ``hyperref'' package.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some sectionning commands have been altered \emph{after} the loading of the \upack{minitoc} package. The
-% \pack{hyperref} package does that, but it is harmless. For other packages or user-made alterations, it is
-% recommended to alter the sectionning commands only \emph{before} loading the \upack{minitoc} package. See
-% section~\vref{faq.17}.
-% \or\relax
-% Certaines commandes de sectionnement ont été modifiées \emph{après} le chargement du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Le paquetage \pack{hyperref} fait cela, mais sans dommages. Pour des altérations faites par d'autres paquetages
-% ou par l'utilisateur, il est recommandé de modifier les commandes de sectionnement seulement \emph{avant} le
-% chargement du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{faq.17}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0024]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0024|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) Some hints have been written|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) in the |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.log file.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \optd{hints} package option has detected some potential problems and written hints into the
-% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. You can search it for the ``\texttt{minitoc(hints)}'' string with a text
-% editor.
-% \or\relax
-% L'option de paquetage \optd{hints} a détecté des problèmes potentiels et écrit des indications (\emph{hints})
-% dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. Vous pouvez l'examiner en y cherchant la chaîne
-% «~\texttt{minitoc(hints)}~» avec un éditeur de texte.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0025]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0025|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The alphanum package is loaded.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You\Virage{} are using the \pack{alphanum} package which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. The
-% compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous\Virage{} utilisez le paquetage \pack{alphanum} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. La
-% compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être insatisfaisant.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0026]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0026|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The amsart class is loaded.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You\Virage{} are using the \class{amsart} document class which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% The compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous\Virage{} utilisez la classe de document \class{amsart} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le
-% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. La compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être insatisfaisant.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0027]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0027|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The amsproc class is loaded.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You\Virage{} are using the \class{amsproc} document class which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% The compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous\Virage{} utilisez la classe de document \class{amsproc} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le
-% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. La compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être insatisfaisant.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0028]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0028|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The \chapter command is altered|\\
-% \verb| after minitoc.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some packages alter the sectionning commands, like \com{chapter}. Most of them should be loaded \emph{before}
-% the \upack{minitoc} package. The \pack{hyperref} package, even if it is loaded \emph{before} the
-% \upack{minitoc} package (as recommended), alters the sectionning commands in an \com{AtBeginDocument}, so this
-% message is always printed when you use the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}, but then it is harmless.
-% \or\relax
-% Certains paquetages modifient les commandes de sectionnement, telles que \com{chapter}. La plupart d'entre-eux
-% devraient être chargés \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, même s'il est
-% chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (comme recommandé), altère les commandes de sectionnement dans
-% un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, donc ce message est toujours émis lorsque vous utilisez le paquetage
-% \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}, mais il est alors bénin.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0029]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0029|\\
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: --- The jura class is loaded.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You\Virage{} are using the \class{jura} document class which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% The compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous\Virage{} utilisez la classe de document \class{jura} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% La compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être insatisfaisant.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0030]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0030|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The \part command is altered|\\
-% \verb| after minitoc.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some packages alter the sectionning commands, like \com{part}. Most of them should be loaded \emph{before}
-% the \upack{minitoc} package. The \pack{hyperref} package, even if it is loaded \emph{before} the
-% \upack{minitoc} package (as recommended), alters the sectionning commands in an \com{AtBeginDocument}, so this
-% message is always printed when you use the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}, but then it is harmless.
-% \or\relax
-% Certains paquetages modifient les commandes de sectionnement, telles que \com{part}. La plupart d'entre-eux
-% devraient être chargés \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, même s'il est
-% chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (comme recommandé), altère les commandes de sectionnement dans
-% un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, donc ce message est toujours émis lorsque vous utilisez le paquetage
-% \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}, mais il est alors bénin.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0031]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0031|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The placeins package is loaded|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) without the section option,|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but minitoc used the insection option|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) which implies it. Try to inverse the|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loading order and use consistent options.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You may have got a message|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) ! LaTeX Error: Option clash for package placeins.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You are using the \pack{placeins} package, but without its \optp{section}{placeins} option, while
-% \upack{minitoc} is called with its \opt{insection} option which implies it. See page~\pageref{rem+FB},
-% near a ``dangerous bend'' symbol\DBEND.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{placeins}, mais sans son option \optp{section}{placeins}, alors que
-% \upack{minitoc} est appelé avec son option \opt{insection} qui l'implique. Voir page~\pageref{rem+FB},
-% près d'un symbole «~virage dangereux~»\DBEND.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0032]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0032|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The placeins package loaded is|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) too old. You should use a version|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) dated of 2005/04/18 at least.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You are using an obsolete version of the \pack{placeins} package. Please update it from the CTAN archives or a
-% recent distribution.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous utilisez une version obsolète du paquetage \pack{placeins}. Vous devriez le mettre à~jour depuis les
-% archives CTAN ou une distribution récente.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0033]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0033|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The caption package should be|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \pack{caption} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% See section~\vref{faq.31}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le paquetage \pack{caption} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{faq.31}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0034]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0034|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The caption2 package should be|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \pack{caption2} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% See section~\vref{faq.31}. Note that the \pack{caption2} package is now obsolete; please use a recent version of
-% the \pack{caption} package.
-% \or\relax
-% Le paquetage \pack{caption2} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{faq.31}. Notez que le paquetage \pack{caption2} est désormais obsolète; veuillez utiliser
-% une version récente du paquetage \pack{caption}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0035]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0035|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The ccaption package should be|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \pack{ccaption} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% See section~\vref{faq.31}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le paquetage \pack{ccaption} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{faq.31}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0036]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0036|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The mcaption package should be|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \pack{mcaption} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% See section~\vref{faq.31}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le paquetage \pack{mcaption} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{faq.31}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0037]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0037|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The sectsty package should be|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \pack{sectsty} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% See section~\vref{faq.28}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le paquetage \pack{sectsty} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{faq.28}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0038]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0038|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The varsects package should be|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \pack{varsects} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% See section~\vref{faq.33}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le paquetage \pack{varsects} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{faq.33}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0039]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0039|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The \section command is altered|\\
-% \verb| after minitoc.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some packages alter the sectionning commands, like \com{section}. Most of them should be loaded \emph{before}
-% the \upack{minitoc} package. The \pack{hyperref} package, even if it is loaded \emph{before} the
-% \upack{minitoc} package (as recommended), alters the sectionning commands in an \com{AtBeginDocument}, so this
-% message is always printed when you use the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}, but then it is harmless.
-% \or\relax
-% Certains paquetages modifient les commandes de sectionnement, telles que \com{section}. La plupart d'entre-eux
-% devraient être chargés \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, même s'il est
-% chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (comme recommandé), altère les commandes de sectionnement dans
-% un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, donc ce message est toujours émis lorsque vous utilisez le paquetage
-% \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}, mais il est alors bénin.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0040]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0040|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The titletoc package is loaded.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You\Virage{} are trying to use also the \pack{titletoc} package, but it is \emph{incompatible} with
-% the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% See note~\vref{fn+titlesec}.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous\Virage{} essayez d'utiliser aussi le paquetage \pack{titletoc}, mais il est \emph{incompatible} avec le
-% paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la note~\vref{fn+titlesec}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0041]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0041|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\
-% \verb| empty minilofs.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have attempted to insert empty minilofs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will
-% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles}
-% package option), you will only get this harmless message.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des minilofs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles},
-% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut
-% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0042]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0042|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\
-% \verb| empty minilots.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have attempted to insert empty minilots. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will
-% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles}
-% package option), you will only get this harmless message.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des minilots vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles},
-% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut
-% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0043]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0043|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\
-% \verb| empty minitocs.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have attempted to insert empty minitocs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will
-% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles}
-% package option), you will only get this harmless message.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des minitocs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles},
-% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut
-% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0044]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0044|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\
-% \verb| empty partlofs.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have attempted to insert empty partlofs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will
-% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles}
-% package option), you will only get this harmless message.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des partlofs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles},
-% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut
-% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0045]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0045|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\
-% \verb| empty partlots.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have attempted to insert empty partlots. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will
-% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles}
-% package option), you will only get this harmless message.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des partlots vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles},
-% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut
-% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0046]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0046|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\
-% \verb| empty parttocs.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have attempted to insert empty parttocs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will
-% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles}
-% package option), you will only get this harmless message.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des parttocs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles},
-% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut
-% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0047]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0047|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\
-% \verb| empty sectlofs.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have attempted to insert empty sectlofs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will
-% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles}
-% package option), you will only get this harmless message.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des sectlofs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles},
-% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut
-% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0048]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0048|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\
-% \verb| empty sectlots.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have attempted to insert empty sectlots. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will
-% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles}
-% package option), you will only get this harmless message.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des sectlots vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles},
-% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut
-% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0049]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0049|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\
-% \verb| empty secttocs.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have attempted to insert empty secttocs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will
-% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles}
-% package option), you will only get this harmless message.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des secttocs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles},
-% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut
-% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0050]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0050|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have invoked an obsolete (ignored)|\\
-% \verb| command: \firstchapteris.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstchapteris}). You should remove it.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstchapteris}. Vous devriez l'enlever.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0051]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0051|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have invoked an obsolete (ignored)|\\
-% \verb| command: \firstpartis.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstpartis}). You should remove it.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstpartis}. Vous devriez l'enlever.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0052]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0052|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have invoked an obsolete (ignored)|\\
-% \verb| command: \firstsectionis.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstsectionis}). You should remove it.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstsectionis}. Vous devriez l'enlever.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0053]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0053|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used short extensions|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) and more than 99 chapters (|\emph{\NB}\verb|).|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have used short extensions (limited to 3~characters) and more than 99~chapters, so the number of the auxiliary
-% file does not fit in the extension. \emph{\NB} is the number of effective chapters in your document. See
-% section~\vref{MS-DOS}.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez utilisé des suffixes courts (limités à~3~caractères) et plus de 99~chapitres, donc le numéro du fichier
-% auxiliaire ne tient plus dans le suffixe. \emph{\NB} est le nombre de chapitres effectifs dans votre document.
-% Voir la section~\vref{MS-DOS}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0054]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0054|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used short extensions|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) and more than 99 parts (|\emph{\NB}\verb|).|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have used short extensions (limited to 3~characters) and more than 99~parts, so the number of the auxiliary
-% file does not fit in the extension. \emph{\NB} is the number of effective parts in your document. See
-% section~\vref{MS-DOS}.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez utilisé des suffixes courts (limités à~3~caractères) et plus de 99~parties, donc le numéro du fichier
-% auxiliaire ne tient plus dans le suffixe. \emph{\NB} est le nombre de parties effectives dans votre document.
-% Voir la section~\vref{MS-DOS}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0055]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0055|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used short extensions|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) and more than 99 sections (|\emph{\NB}\verb|).|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have used short extensions (limited to 3~characters) and more than 99~sections, so the number of the auxiliary
-% file does not fit in the extension. \emph{\NB} is the number of effective sections in your document. See
-% section~\vref{MS-DOS}.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez utilisé des suffixes courts (limités à~3~caractères) et plus de 99~sections, donc le numéro du fichier
-% auxiliaire ne tient plus dans le suffixe. \emph{\NB} est le nombre de sections effectives dans votre document.
-% Voir la section~\vref{MS-DOS}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0056]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0056|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You are using \dosectlof and/or|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \dosectlot, \sectlof and/or \sectlot,|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) hence the ``insection'' package|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) option is recommended.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You are asking for mini-lists of figures or tables at the section level. But as floats (figures and tables) could
-% drift somewhere outside the printing area of the text of the section, the sectlofs and sectlots can be rather strange.
-% In order to have a better behaviour of these mini-tables, it may be useful to add the \opt{insection} package option.
-% See page~\pageref{rem+FB}.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez demandé des mini-listes des figures ou des tables au niveau section. Mais Comme les éléments flottants
-% (figures et tableaux) pourraient dériver quelque part en dehors de la zone d'impression du texte de la section,
-% les sectlofs et sectlots peuvent être assez étranges. Afin d'avoir un meilleur comportement de ces mini-tables,
-% il peut être utile d'ajouter l'option de paquetage \opt{insection}. Voir page~\pageref{rem+FB}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0057]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0057|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minilof,|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dominilof.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have attempted to insert some minilofs (via \com{minilof}), but the minilofs have not been prepared
-% (via \com{dominilof}).
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minilofs (via \com{minilof}), mais les minilofs n'ont pas été préparées
-% (via \com{dominilof}).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0058]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0058|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minilot,|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dominilot.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have attempted to insert some minilots (via \com{minilot}), but the minilots have not been prepared
-% (via \com{dominilot}).
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minilots (via \com{minilot}), mais les minilots n'ont pas été préparées
-% (via \com{dominilot}).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0059]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0059|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minitoc,|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dominitoc.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have attempted to insert some minitocs (via \com{minitoc}), but the minitocs have not been prepared
-% (via \com{dominitoc}).
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minitocs (via \com{minitoc}), mais les minitocs n'ont pas été préparées
-% (via \com{dominitoc}).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0060]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0060|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \partlof,|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dopartlof.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have attempted to insert some partlofs (via \com{partlof}), but the partlofs have not been prepared
-% (via \com{dopartlof}).
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des partlofs (via \com{partlof}), mais les partlofs n'ont pas été préparées
-% (via \com{dopartlof}).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0061]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0061|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \partlot,|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dopartlot.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have attempted to insert some partlots (via \com{partlot}), but the partlots have not been prepared
-% (via \com{dopartlot}).
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des partlots (via \com{partlot}), mais les partlots n'ont pas été préparées
-% (via \com{dopartlot}).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0062]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0062|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \parttoc,|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \doparttoc.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have attempted to insert some parttocs (via \com{parttoc}), but the parttocs have not been prepared
-% (via \com{doparttoc}).
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des parttocs (via \com{parttoc}), mais les parttocs n'ont pas été préparées
-% (via \com{doparttoc}).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0063]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0063|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \sectlof,|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dosectlof.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have attempted to insert some sectlofs (via \com{sectlof}), but the sectlofs have not been prepared
-% (via \com{dosectlof}).
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des sectlofs (via \com{sectlof}), mais les sectlofs n'ont pas été préparées
-% (via \com{dosectlof}).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0064]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0064|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \sectlot,|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dosectlot.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have attempted to insert some sectlots (via \com{sectlot}), but the sectlots have not been prepared
-% (via \com{dosectlot}).
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des sectlots (via \com{sectlot}), mais les sectlots n'ont pas été préparées
-% (via \com{dosectlot}).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0065]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0065|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \secttoc,|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dosecttoc.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have attempted to insert some secttocs (via \com{secttoc}), but the secttocs have not been prepared
-% (via \com{dosecttoc}).
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des secttocs (via \com{secttoc}), mais les secttocs n'ont pas été préparées
-% (via \com{dosecttoc}).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0066]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0066|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minilof,|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \listoffigures nor|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \fakelistoffigures.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have tried to insert some minilofs (via \com{minilof}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} file is not
-% available because you have not invoked \com{listoffigures} nor \com{fakelistoffigures}.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minilofs (via \com{minilof}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} n'est
-% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoffigures}, ni \com{fakelistoffigures}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0067]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0067|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minilot but not|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \listoftables| nor\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \fakelistoftables.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have tried to insert some minilots (via \com{minilot}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} file is not
-% available because you have not invoked \com{listoftables} nor \com{fakelistoftables}.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minilots (via \com{minilot}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} n'est
-% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoftables}, ni \com{fakelistoftables}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0068]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0068|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minitoc but not|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \tableofcontents|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \faketableofcontents.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have tried to insert some minitocs (via \com{minitoc}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} file is not
-% available because you have not invoked \com{tableofcontents} nor \com{faketableofcontents}.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minitocs (via \com{minitoc}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} n'est
-% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{tableofcontents}, ni \com{faketableofcontents}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0069]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0069|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \partlof but not|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \listoffigures|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \fakelistoffigures.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have tried to insert some partlofs (via \com{partlof}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} file is not
-% available because you have not invoked \com{listoffigures} nor \com{fakelistoffigures}.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des partlofs (via \com{partlof}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} n'est
-% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoffigures}, ni \com{fakelistoffigures}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0070]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0070|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \partlot but not|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \listoftables|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \fakelistoftables.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have tried to insert some partlots (via \com{partlot}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} file is not
-% available because you have not invoked \com{listoftables} nor \com{fakelistoftables}.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des partlots (via \com{partlot}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} n'est
-% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoftables}, ni \com{fakelistoftables}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0071]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0071|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \parttoc but not|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \tableofcontents|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \faketableofcontents.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have tried to insert some parttocs (via \com{parttoc}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} file is not
-% available because you have not invoked \com{tableofcontents} nor \com{faketableofcontents}.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des parttocs (via \com{parttoc}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} n'est
-% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{tableofcontents}, ni \com{faketableofcontents}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0072]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0072|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \sectlof but not|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \listoffigures|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \fakelistoffigures.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have tried to insert some sectlofs (via \com{sectlof}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} file is not
-% available because you have not invoked \com{listoffigures} nor \com{fakelistoffigures}.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des sectlofs (via \com{sectlof}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} n'est
-% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoffigures}, ni \com{fakelistoffigures}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0073]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0073|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \sectlot but not|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \listoftables|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \fakelistoftables.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have tried to insert some sectlots (via \com{sectlot}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} file is not
-% available because you have not invoked \com{listoftables} nor \com{fakelistoftables}.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des sectlots (via \com{sectlot}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} n'est
-% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoftables}, ni \com{fakelistoftables}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0074]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0074|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \secttoc but not|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \tableofcontents|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \faketableofcontents.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have tried to insert some secttocs (via \com{secttoc}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} file is not
-% available because you have not invoked \com{tableofcontents} nor \com{faketableofcontents}.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des secttocs (via \com{secttoc}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} n'est
-% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{tableofcontents}, ni \com{faketableofcontents}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0075]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0075|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \doparttoc|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \parttoc.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have prepared some parttocs (via \com{doparttoc}), but you never used one of them.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez préparé des parttocs (via \com{doparttoc}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0076]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0076|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dopartlof|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \partlof.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have prepared some partlofs (via \com{dopartlof}), but you never used one of them.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez préparé des partlofs (via \com{dopartlof}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0077]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0077|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dopartlot|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \partlot.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have prepared some partlots (via \com{dopartlot}), but you never used one of them.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez préparé des partlots (via \com{dopartlot}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0078]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0078|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dominitoc|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \minitoc.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have prepared some minitocs (via \com{dominitoc}), but you never used one of them.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez préparé des minitocs (via \com{dominitoc}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0079]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0079|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dominilof|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \minilof.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have prepared some minilofs (via \com{dominilof}), but you never used one of them.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez préparé des minilofs (via \com{dominilof}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0080]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0080|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dominilot|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \minilot.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have prepared some minilots (via \com{dominilot}), but you never used one of them.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez préparé des minilots (via \com{dominilot}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0081]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0081|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dosecttoc|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \secttoc.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have prepared some secttocs (via \com{dosecttoc}), but you never used one of them.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez préparé des secttocs (via \com{dosecttoc}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0082]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0082|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dosectlof|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \sectlof.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have prepared some sectlofs (via \com{dosectlof}), but you never used one of them.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez préparé des sectlofs (via \com{dosectlof}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0083]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0083|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dosectlot|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \sectlot.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have prepared some sectlots (via \com{dosectlot}), but you never used one of them.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez préparé des sectlots (via \com{dosectlot}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0084]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0084|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The placeins package is loaded|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the above option,|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but minitoc used the insection option|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) which is incompatible with it.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) Try to remove the above option and|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) use consistent options.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You\Virage{} are using the \pack{placeins} package, but with its \optp{above}{placeins} option, while
-% \upack{minitoc} is called with its \opt{insection} option which is \emph{incompatible} with it.
-% See page~\pageref{rem+FB}, near a ``dangerous bend'' symbol.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous\Virage{} utilisez le paquetage \pack{placeins}, mais avec son option \optp{above}{placeins}, alors que
-% \upack{minitoc} est appelé avec son option \opt{insection} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec elle.
-% Voir page~\pageref{rem+FB}, près d'un symbole «~virage dangereux~».
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0085]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0085|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The placeins package is loaded|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the below option,|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but minitoc used the insection option|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) which is incompatible with it.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) Try to remove the below option|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) and use consistent options.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You\Virage{} are using the \pack{placeins} package, but with its \optp{below}{placeins} option, while
-% \upack{minitoc} is called with its \opt{insection} option which is \emph{incompatible} with it.
-% See page~\pageref{rem+FB}, near a ``dangerous bend'' symbol.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous\Virage{} utilisez le paquetage \pack{placeins}, mais avec son option \optp{below}{placeins}, alors que
-% \upack{minitoc} est appelé avec son option \opt{insection} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec elle.
-% Voir page~\pageref{rem+FB}, près d'un symbole «~virage dangereux~».
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0086]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0086|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The fncychap package should be|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \pack{fncychap} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% See section~\vref{faq.38}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le paquetage \pack{fncychap} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{faq.38}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0087]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0087|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The quotchap package should be|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \pack{quotchap} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% See section~\vref{faq.39}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le paquetage \pack{quotchap} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{faq.39}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0088]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0088|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The romannum package should be|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \pack{romannum} package alters the numbering of some sectionning
-% commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% See section~\vref{faq.40}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le paquetage \pack{romannum} altère la numérotation de certaines commandes
-% de sectionnement et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{faq.40}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0089]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0089|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The sfheaders package should be|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \pack{sfheaders} package alters the sectionning
-% commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% See section~\vref{faq.41}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le paquetage \pack{sfheaders} altère les commandes
-% de sectionnement et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{faq.41}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0090]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0090|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The alnumsec package should be|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \pack{alnumsec} package alters the sectionning
-% commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% See section~\vref{faq.42}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le paquetage \pack{alnumsec} altère les commandes
-% de sectionnement et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{faq.42}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0091]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0091|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The captcont package should be|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \pack{captcont} package alters the caption
-% commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% See section~\vref{faq.43}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le paquetage \pack{captcont} altère les commandes pour les captions
-% et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{faq.43}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0092]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0092|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The hangcaption package should be|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \pack{hangcaption} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% See section~\vref{faq.47}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le paquetage \pack{hangcaption} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{faq.47}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0097]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0097|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The flowfram package is loaded.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You\Virage{} are using the \pack{flowfram} package which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package,
-% because it has its own definitions for minitocs. The compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous\Virage{} utilisez le paquetage \pack{flowfram} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc},
-% car il a ses propres définitions pour des minitocs. La compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être
-% insatisfaisant.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[W0099]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0099|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The titlesec package is loaded.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You\Virage{} are trying to use also the \pack{titlesec} package, but it is \emph{incompatible} with
-% the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% See note~\vref{fn+titlesec}.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous\Virage{} essayez d'utiliser aussi le paquetage \pack{titlesec}, mais il est \emph{incompatible} avec le
-% paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la note~\vref{fn+titlesec}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Error messages}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Messages d'erreur}
-% \fi
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0001]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0001|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) But \part is undefined.|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \com{mtcfixglossary}\verb| not usable|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% There are no adequate sectionning command available to use the \com{mtcfixglossary} macro; even \com{part} is
-% undefined. Verify your document class.
-% \or\relax
-% Il n'y a pas de commande de sectionnement adéquate disponible pour utiliser la macro \com{mtcfixglossary};
-% même \com{part} n'est pas définie. Vérifiez la classe de votre document.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0002]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0002|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) But \part is undefined.|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \com{mtcfixindex}\verb| not usable|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% There are no adequate sectionning command available to use the \com{mtcfixindex} macro; even \com{part} is
-% undefined. Verify your document class.
-% \or\relax
-% Il n'y a pas de commande de sectionnement adéquate disponible pour utiliser la macro \com{mtcfixindex};
-% même \com{part} n'est pas définie. Vérifiez la classe de votre document.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0003]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0003|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Imbrication of mtchideinmainlof environments.|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect|\\
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some \env{mtchideinmainlof} environments are incorrectly imbricated (overlapping), so the
-% hiding in the main list of figures will be strange.
-% \or\relax
-% Certains environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} sont imbriqués de manière incorrecte (chevauchement),
-% donc le masquage dans la liste des figures principale sera étrange.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0004]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0004|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Imbrication of mtchideinmainlot environments.|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect|\\
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments are incorrectly imbricated (overlapping), so the
-% hiding in the main list of tables will be strange.
-% \or\relax
-% Certains environnements \env{mtchideinmainlot} sont imbriqués de manière incorrecte (chevauchement),
-% donc le masquage dans la liste des tableaux principale sera étrange.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0005]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0005|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Imbrication of mtchideinmaintoc environments.|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect|\\
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environments are incorrectly imbricated (overlapping), so the
-% hiding in the main table of contents will be strange.
-% \or\relax
-% Certains environnements \env{mtchideinmaintoc} sont imbriqués de manière incorrecte (chevauchement),
-% donc le masquage dans la table des matières principale sera étrange.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0006]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0006|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb| is not a known language,|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mld not found.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Command ignored.|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc documentation.|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source using a valid language name.|\\
-% \verb|Press RETURN|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mtcselectlanguage} macro has attempted to load the \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} minitoc language definition
-% file, but has not found it. First, verify the name of the language (likely to be misspelt), then check if your
-% installation contains \emph{all} the many distributed \suffix{.mld} files of the \upack{minitoc} package,
-% at the right place. If it is a local \suffix{.mld} file, it should be installed in the right place (in a local
-% hierarchy) or be in the working directory.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{mtcselectlanguage} a tenté de charger le fichier minitoc de définition de langue
-% \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld}, mais ne l'a pas trouvé. Tout d'abord, vérifiez le nom de la langue (une faute de
-% frappe est fort possible), puis regardez si votre installation contient bien \emph{tous} les nombreux fichiers
-% \suffix{.mld} de la distribution du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, placés au bon endroit. Si c'est un fichier
-% \suffix{.mld} local, il devrait être installé au bon endroit (dans une hiérarchie locale) ou être dans le
-% répertoire de travail.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0007]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0007|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb| is not a known minitoc|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) language object file (.mlo),|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mlo not found.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Command ignored.|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc documentation.|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source using a valid language name.|\\
-% \verb|Press RETURN|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mtcselectlanguage} macro has attempted to load indirectly the \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo} minitoc language
-% object file, but has not found it. First, verify the name of the language (likely to be misspelt), then check if your
-% installation contains \emph{all} the many distributed \suffix{.mlo} files of the \upack{minitoc} package,
-% at the right place. If it is a local \suffix{.mlo} file, it should be installed in the right place (in a local
-% hierarchy) or be in the working directory.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{mtcselectlanguage} a tenté de charger (indirectement) le fichier minitoc objet de langue
-% \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo}, mais ne l'a pas trouvé. Tout d'abord, vérifiez le nom de la langue (une faute de
-% frappe est fort possible), puis regardez si votre installation contient bien \emph{tous} les nombreux fichiers
-% \suffix{.mlo} de la distribution du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, placés au bon endroit. Si c'est un fichier
-% \suffix{.mlo} local, il devrait être installé au bon endroit (dans une hiérarchie locale) ou être dans le
-% répertoire de travail.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0008]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0008|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetdepth attempts to use|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) an undefined counter (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|depth).|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You are trying to set the depth for an inexistent or undefined type of mini-table. Verify the type given and the
-% document class, and the loaded packages.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous essayez d'établir la profondeur pour un type de mini-table inexistant ou non défini. Vérifiez le type donné et
-% la classe du document, ainsi que les paquetages chargés.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0009]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0009|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetdepth has a wrong first argument|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetdepth} macro is incorrect. It should be a type of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc},
-% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
-% \or\relax
-% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetdepth} est incorrect.
-% Ce devrait être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0010]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0010|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetdepth: Illegal type of table (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetdepth} macro is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type
-% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
-% \or\relax
-% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetdepth} est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table
-% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0011]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0011|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfeature has a wrong first argument|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetfeature} macro is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type
-% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
-% \or\relax
-% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetfeature} est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table
-% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0012]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0012|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfeature has a wrong second argument|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|).|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a feature param|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (before, after, open, close, pagestyle).|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The second argument of the \com{mtcsetfeature} macro is incorrect. It should be \feat{before}, \feat{after},
-% \feat{open}, \feat{close}, or \texttt{thispagestyle}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le deuxième argument de la macro \com{mtcsetfeature} est incorrect. Ce devrait être \feat{before}, \feat{after}
-% \feat{open}, \feat{close} ou \feat{pagestyle}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0013]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0013|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfont has a wrong first argument|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{arg1}\verb|).|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The first argument of \com{mtcsetfont} is incorrect;
-% it should be the type of a mini-table (\texttt{parttoc} \dots, \texttt{sectlot}).
-% \or\relax
-% Le premier argument de \com{mtcsetfont} est incorrect; ce devrait être un type de mini-table
-% (\texttt{parttoc} \dots, \texttt{sectlot}).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0014]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0014|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfont has a wrong second argument|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|).|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a sectionning level|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (part...subparagraph) or * .|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The second argument of \com{mtcsetfont} is incorrect; it should be a sectionning level (i.e., a sectionning
-% command without its backslash), like \texttt{part} \ldots, \texttt{subparagraph}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le deuxième argument de \com{mtcsetfont} est incorrect; ce devrait être un niveau de sectionnement (c'est-à-dire,
-% une commande de sectionnement sans sa contre-oblique), comme \texttt{part} \ldots, \texttt{subparagraph}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0015]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0015|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetformat has a wrong first argument|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The first argument of a \com{mtcsetformat} macro is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type (\texttt{parttoc},
-% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
-% \or\relax
-% Le premier argument d'une macro \com{mtcsetformat} est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table
-% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0016]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0016|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetformat has a wrong second argument|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (|\texttt{ARG2}\verb|).|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a formatting param choosen from:|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) pagenumwidth, tocrightmargin, dotinterval.|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The second argument of the \com{mtcsetformat} macro is wrong. It should be one of the following keywords:
-% \texttt{pagenumwidth}, \texttt{tocrightmargin}, or \texttt{dotinterval}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le deuxième argument de la macro \com{mtcsetformat} est incorrect. Ce devrait être l'un des mots-clés suivants:
-% \texttt{pagenumwidth}, \texttt{tocrightmargin} ou \texttt{dotinterval}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0017]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0017|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetpagenumbers has a wrong first|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) argument (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|)..|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|It should be a mini-table type|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot)|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} macro must be a type of minitable (\texttt{parttoc},
-% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
-% \or\relax
-% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} doit être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc},
-% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0018]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0018|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetpagenumbers has a wrong second|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) argument (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|).|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off, ...)|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The second argument of the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} must be a keyword chosen in the following lists\FZ:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE},
-% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI},
-% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+}, and~\texttt{1};
-% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE},
-% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-}, and~\texttt{0}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \or\relax
-% Le second argument de la macro \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} doit être un mot-clé choisi dans l'une des listes
-% suivantes\,\FZ:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE},
-% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI},
-% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+} et~\texttt{1};
-% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE},
-% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-} et~\texttt{0}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0019]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0019|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetrules has a wrong first argument|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|It should be a mini-table type|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot)|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetrules} is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type (\texttt{parttoc},
-% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
-% \or\relax
-% Le premier argument d'une macro \com{mtcsetrules} est incorrect.
-% Ce devrait être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0020]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0020|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetrules has a wrong second argument|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|).|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off, ...)|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The second argument of the \com{mtcsetrules} must be a keyword chosen in the following lists\FZ:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE},
-% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI},
-% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+}, and~\texttt{1};
-% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE},
-% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-}, and~\texttt{0}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \or\relax
-% Le second argument de la macro \com{mtcsetrules} doit être un mot-clé choisi dans l'une des listes
-% suivantes\,\FZ:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE},
-% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI},
-% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+} et~\texttt{1};
-% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE},
-% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-} et~\texttt{0}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0021]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0021|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsettitle has a wrong first argument|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The first argument of a \com{mtcsettitle} macro is incorrect; it should be a mini-table type (\texttt{parttoc},
-% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
-% \or\relax
-% Le premier argument d'une macro \com{mtcsettitle} est incorrect;
-% ce devrait être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0022]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0022|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsettitlefont has a wrong first argument|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The first argument of the \com{mtcsettitlefont} must be a mini-table type. You likely misspelt it.
-% \or\relax
-% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsettitlefont} doit être un type de mini-table. Vous avez probablement
-% fait une faute de frappe.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0023]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0023|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) The macro \mtcsetfeature has incompatible|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) first (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|) and second (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|) arguments.|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\Virage{} first and second arguments of the \com{mtcsetfeature} macro are \emph{incompatible}. You should verify them.
-% \or\relax
-% Les\Virage{} premier et deuxième arguments de la macro \com{mtcsetfeature} sont \emph{incompatibles}.
-% Vous devriez les vérifier.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0024]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0024|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) The macro \mtcsetfont has incompatible|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) first (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|) and second (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|) arguments.|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mtcsetfont} macro takes a mini-table type as first argument, a sectionning level as second argument (or
-% a star), and a sequence of font commands as third argument. The second argument must have a lower level than the first one
-% (i.e., it is meaningless to specify the font for the chapter level entries for a minitoc or a secttoc).
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{mtcsetfont} prend un type de mini-table comme premier argument (ou une étoile), un niveau de
-% sectionnement comme deuxième argument et une séquence de commandes de fontes comme troisième argument. Le deuxième
-% argument doit être de plus bas niveau que le premier (par exemple, il est absurde de spécifier la fonte pour les
-% entrées de niveau chapitre dans une minitoc ou une secttoc).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0025]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0025|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) The macro \mtcsetformat has incompatible|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) first (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|) and second (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|) arguments.|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\Virage{} first and second arguments of a \com{mtcsetformat} macro are \emph{incompatible}.
-% One is likely to be misspelt.
-% \or\relax
-% Les\Virage{} premier et second arguments d'une macro \com{mtcsetformat} sont \Virage\emph{incompatibles}.
-% Il est probable qu'il y~ait une faute de frappe dans l'un d'eux.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0026]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0026|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) The optional argument of \mtcfixglossary|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) is wrong.|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|It must be omitted (chapter), or be part, chapter or section|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The optional argument of the \com{mtcfixglossary} macro is incorrect: it should be omitted (then it defaults
-% to \texttt{chapter}) or be \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter}, or \texttt{section}.
-% \or\relax
-% L'argument optionnel de la macro \com{mtcfixglossary} est incorrect: il devrait être omis (et alors il est pris
-% par défaut comme \texttt{chapter}) ou être \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter} ou \texttt{section}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0027]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0027|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) The optional argument of \mtcfixindex|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) is wrong.|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|It must be omitted (chapter), or be part, chapter or section|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The optional argument of the \com{mtcfixindex} macro is incorrect: it should be omitted (then it defaults
-% to \texttt{chapter}) or be \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter}, or \texttt{section}.
-% \or\relax
-% L'argument optionnel de la macro \com{mtcfixindex} est incorrect: il devrait être omis (et alors il est pris
-% par défaut comme \texttt{chapter}) ou être \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter} ou \texttt{section}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0028]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0028|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Unable to patch the memoir class.|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|So it remains incompatible. Sorry.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Your\Virage{} version of the \class{memoir} class is really \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package
-% and cannot be automatically patched. Please update the \class{memoir} class and/or the \upack{minitoc} package
-% from the CTAN archives or a recent distribution.
-% \or\relax
-% Votre\Virage{} version de la classe \class{memoir} est vraiment \emph{incompatible} avec le
-% paquetage \upack{minitoc} et ne peut pas être corrigée automatiquement. Vous êtes priés de mettre à~jour
-% la classe \class{memoir} et/ou le paquetage \upack{minitoc} depuis les archives ou une distribution récente.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0029]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0029|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Unbalanced mtchideinmainlof environment.|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A \env{mtchideinmainlof} environment is unbalanced, so the hiding in the main list of figures could be incorrect.
-% \or\relax
-% Un environnement \env{mtchideinmainlof} n'est pas équilibré, donc le masquage dans la liste des figures
-% principale pourrait être incorrect.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0030]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0030|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Unbalanced mtchideinmainlot environment.|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A \env{mtchideinmainlot} environment is unbalanced, so the hiding in the main list of tables could be incorrect.
-% \or\relax
-% Un environnement \env{mtchideinmainlot} n'est pas équilibré, donc le masquage dans la liste des tableaux
-% principale pourrait être incorrect.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0031]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0031|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Unbalanced mtchideinmaintoc environment.|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment is unbalanced, so the hiding in the main table of contents could be incorrect.
-% \or\relax
-% Un environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc} n'est pas équilibré, donc le masquage dans la table des matières
-% principale pourrait être incorrect.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0032]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0032|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) You are using the \mtcloadmlo command|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) outside of a .mld file.|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|It will be ignored|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% It is \emph{forbidden} to use the \com{mtcloadmlo} macro outside of a \suffix{.mld} file (which is loaded via
-% \com{mtcselectlanguage}). The command is ignored.
-% \or\relax
-% Il est \emph{interdit} d'utiliser la macro \com{mtcloadmlo} en dehors d'un fichier \suffix{.mld} (qui est chargé via
-% \com{mtcselectlanguage}). La commande est ignorée.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0033]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0033|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) The macro \mtcsettitle uses|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) an illegal type of table (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The first argument of a minitoc macro is incorrect. It should be a type of mini-table, like
-% \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot},
-% \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le premier argument d'une macro minitoc est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table, comme
-% \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot},
-% \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0034]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0034|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) The macro \mtcsettitlefont uses|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) an illegal type of table (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The first argument of a minitoc macro is incorrect. It should be a type of mini-table, like
-% \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot},
-% \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le premier argument d'une macro minitoc est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table, comme
-% \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot},
-% \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0035]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0035|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) You have used the `insection' option in|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) a document where chapters are defined.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) This is not compatible: option ignored.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|Remove this option.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \opt{insection} package option is intended for \class{article}-like document classes, to prevent floats
-% from drifting out of their section. It is pointless for \class{book}-like or \class{report}-like document
-% classes, where floats are contained in their chapter.
-% \or\relax
-% L'option de paquetage \opt{insection} est destinée aux classes de document analogues à~\class{article},
-% pour empêcher les éléments flottants de dériver en dehors de leur section. Elle est sans objet pour les classes
-% de document analogues à~\class{book} ou \class{report}, où les éléments flottants sont contenus dans leur
-% chapitre.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0036]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0036|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Your minitoc installation is incomplete.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) The minitoc language object file (.mld),|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) english.mld is not found.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) We will try to continue with default values.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc documentation.|\\
-% \verb|Please fix your minitoc installation.|
-% \verb|Type <return> to continue|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \xfile{english.mld} language definition file can not be found. You should verify your installation of the
-% \upack{minitoc} package. As an interim solution, we provide the missing english titles.
-% \or\relax
-% Le fichier \xfile{english.mld} de définition de langue n'a pas pu être trouvé. Vous devriez vérifier votre
-% installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Comme solution provisoire, nous fournissons les titres anglais manquants.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0037]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0037|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) The \|\emph{\COMMAND}\verb| command is incompatible|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) with the document class.|\\
-% \verb||\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb| ... |\\
-% \verb| |\\
-% \verb|l.39 \dominitoc[r]|\\
-% \verb| |\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have used a preparation or insertion command
-% (\verb|\|\emph{\COMMAND}) which is not available for the
-% document class you are using. Please verify that the document
-% class is compatible with \upack{minitoc} and if the level of
-% the mini-table is available in the document class
-% (section-level mini-tables are not available in \class{book}- or
-% \class{report}-like classes, chapter-level mini-tables are not
-% available in \class{article}-like classes, mini-tables are not
-% available in \class{letter}-like classes, etc.).
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez utilisé une commande de préparation ou d'insertion
-% (\verb|\|\emph{\COMMAND}) qui n'est pas disponible pour la
-% classe de document que vous utilisez. Veuillez vérifier que
-% votre classe de document est compatible avec \upack{minitoc}
-% et si le niveau de mini-table est disponible dans la classe de
-% document (les mini-tables au niveau section ne sont pas
-% disponibles dans les classes analogues à~\class{book} ou
-% \class{report}, les mini-tables au niveau chapitre ne sont pas
-% disponibles dans les classes analogues à~\class{article}, les mini-tables
-% ne sont pas disponibles dans les classes analogues à~\class{letter}, etc.).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0038]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0038|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) Your minitoc installation is incomplete.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) A mandatory minitoc language object file,|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mld, is not found.|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) We will try to continue with|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) current/default values.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc documentation.|\\
-% \verb|Please fix your minitoc installation.|
-% \verb|Type <return> to continue|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The mandatory \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} language definition file can not be found.
-% You should verify your installation of the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% As an interim solution, we provide the default english titles.
-% \or\relax
-% Le fichier obligatoire \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} de définition de langue n'a pas pu être trouvé.
-% Vous devriez vérifier votre installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Comme solution provisoire, nous fournissons les titres anglais par défaut.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0039]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0039|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) But \part is undefined.|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\verb| not usable|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% There are no adequate sectionning command available to use the \com{mtcfixnomenclature} macro; even \com{part} is
-% undefined. Verify your document class.
-% \or\relax
-% Il n'y a pas de commande de sectionnement adéquate disponible pour utiliser la macro \com{mtcfixnomenclature};
-% même \com{part} n'est pas définie. Vérifiez la classe de votre document.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0040]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0040|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) The optional argument of \mtcfixnomenclature|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) is wrong.|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|It must be omitted (chapter), or be part, chapter or section|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The optional argument of the \com{mtcfixnomenclature} macro is incorrect: it should be omitted (then it defaults
-% to \texttt{chapter}) or be \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter}, or \texttt{section}.
-% \or\relax
-% L'argument optionnel de la macro \com{mtcfixnomenclature} est incorrect: il devrait être omis (et alors il est pris
-% par défaut comme \texttt{chapter}) ou être \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter} ou \texttt{section}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0041]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0041|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetoffset attempts to use|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) an undefined mini-table type (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You are trying to set the offset for an inexistent or undefined type of mini-table. Verify the type given and the
-% document class, and the loaded packages.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous essayez d'établir la profondeur pour un type de mini-table inexistant ou non défini. Vérifiez le type donné et
-% la classe du document, ainsi que les paquetages chargés.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0042]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0042|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetoffset has a wrong first argument|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetoffset} macro is incorrect. It should be a type of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc},
-% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
-% \or\relax
-% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetoffset} est incorrect.
-% Ce devrait être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[E0043]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0043|\\
-% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetoffset: Illegal type of table (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
-% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
-% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\
-% \verb|? h|\\
-% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
-% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetoffset} macro is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type
-% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
-% \or\relax
-% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetoffset} est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table
-% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \lneed{15}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Messages from the \upack{mtcoff} package}\ipack{mtcoff}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Messages émis par le paquetage \upack{mtcoff}}\ipack{mtcoff}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \pack{mtcoff} package gives only warning messages; their numbers begin with~\texttt{F}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} ne donne que des messages d'avertissement; leurs numéros commencent par~\texttt{F}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{9}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Warning messages}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Messages d'avertissement}
-% \fi
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[F0001]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0001|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) \addstarredchapter{...} should be replaced|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...}|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{addstarredchapter} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff}
-% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}|
-% command.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{addstarredchapter} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée
-% par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}.
-% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}| équivalente.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[F0002]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0002|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) \addstarredpart{...} should be replaced|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...}|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{addstarredpart} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff}
-% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{part}{...}|
-% command.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{addstarredpart} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}.
-% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{part}{...}| équivalente.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[F0003]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0003|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) \addstarredsection{...} should be replaced|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...}|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{addstarredsection} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff}
-% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}|
-% command.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{addstarredsection} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée
-% par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}.
-% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}| équivalente.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[F0004]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0004|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) \mtcaddchapter{...} should be replaced|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...}|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mtcaddchapter} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff}
-% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}|
-% command.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{mtcaddchapter} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée
-% par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}.
-% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}| équivalente.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[F0005]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0005|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) \mtcaddpart{...} should be replaced|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...}|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mtcaddpart} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff}
-% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{part}{...}|
-% command.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{mtcaddpart} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}.
-% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{part}{...}| équivalente.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[F0006]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0006|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) \mtcaddsection{...} should be replaced|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...}|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mtcaddsection} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff}
-% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}|
-% command.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{mtcaddsection} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée
-% par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}.
-% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}| équivalente.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[F0007]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0007|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) You should scan (backwards) your .log|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) file to find some commands needing|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) to be replaced if you decide to|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) DEFINITELY stop using minitoc for this|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) document. It is more wise to keep the|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) \usepackage lines for minitoc and mtcoff|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) and to comment out only one of them.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You have replaced the use of the \upack{minitoc} package by its substitute \pack{mtcoff}.
-% It is recommended to keep the \com{usepackage} lines for both \upack{minitoc} and \pack{mtcoff}
-% and to comment out only one of them. If you decide to \emph{definitely} stop using \upack{minitoc} for this document,
-% it is wise to scan (backwards) the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file (after a compilation using \pack{mtcoff})
-% to locate some commands needing to be replaced.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous avez remplacé l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} par son substitut \pack{mtcoff}.
-% Il est recommandé de conserver les lignes \com{usepackage} à~la fois pour \upack{minitoc} et \pack{mtcoff}
-% et d'en mettre une seule en commentaire. Si vous décidez d'arrêter \emph{définitivement} d'utiliser \upack{minitoc}
-% pour ce document, il est prudent d'examiner (en remontant depuis la fin) le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}
-% (après une compilation utilisant \pack{mtcoff}) pour localiser quelques commandes qu'il faut remplacer.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[F0008]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0008|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) The macro \kernafter|\emph{\STRING}\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) should not be used out of context|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) on line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You are using one of the \verb|\kernafter|\emph{\STRING} macros with the \pack{mtcoff} package.
-% The result may be impredictible. You can only redefine these macros to adjust
-% the position of the bottom rule of a type of minitables. Any other usage is
-% meaningless without the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous utilisez l'une des macros \verb|\kernafter|\emph{\STRING} avec le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}.
-% Le résultat peut être imprévisible. Vous pouvez seulement redéfinir ces macros pour
-% ajuster la position du filet inférieur d'un type de minitables. Tout autre usage
-% sans objet sans le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[F0009]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0009|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) The macro \|\emph{\STRING}\verb|offset|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) should not be used out of context|\\
-% \verb|(mtcoff) on line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You are using one of the \verb|\|\emph{\STRING}\verb|offset| macros with the \pack{mtcoff} package.
-% The result may be impredictible. You can only redefine these macros to adjust
-% the horizontal position of a type of minitables. Any other usage is
-% meaningless without the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous utilisez l'une des macros \verb|\|\emph{\STRING}\verb|offset| avec le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}.
-% Le résultat peut être imprévisible. Vous pouvez seulement redéfinir ces macros pour
-% ajuster la position horizontale d'un type de minitables. Tout autre usage
-% sans objet sans le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \lneed{15}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Message from the \upack{mtcpatchmem} package}\ipack{mtcpatchmem}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Message émis par le paquetage \upack{mtcpatchmem}}\ipack{mtcpatchmem}
-% \fi
-%
-% \begin{xmessage}[M0001]
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|Package mtcpatchmem Info: M0001|\\
-% \verb|Package mtcpatchmem Info: mtcpatchmem package to patch the memoir class.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% You are using a version of the \class{memoir} class which needs a correction. This correction has been
-% automatically loaded if necessary. Very recent versions should not need it anymore. See
-% chapter~\vref{memoir-patch}.
-% \or\relax
-% Vous utilisez une version de la classe \class{memoir} qui nécessite une correction. Cette correction a été
-% chargée automatiquement si nécessaire. Les versions très récentes ne devraient plus en avoir besoin. Voir le
-% chapitre~\vref{memoir-patch}.
-% \fi
-% \end{xmessage}
-%
-% \def\jsection#1{\section*{\null\hspace*{-1cm}\fbox{\mbox{#1}}}}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \chapter{Jargon}\label{c+jargon}
-% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{5}\raggedcolumns}
-% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
-% \setlength{\mtcindent}{-0.75em}
-% \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-0.75em}
-% \minitoc
-% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty}
-% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty}
-% \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt}
-% \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{0pt}
-% \mtcskip
-% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns}
-% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
-% \setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt}
-% \minilot
-% \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt}
-% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\empty}
-% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\empty}
-% This chapter attempts to explain some terms used in this documentation, and describes some useful files and suffixes.
-% Many data come from the documentations of various cited packages (often from the abstract), and
-% from~\cite{malayalam,malayalam-o,mlsquick,montex,HLATEX,komab,classes,usrguide,clsguide,fontsel,lunde1993,lunde,ttb,TLC2,koma,CIL2E,NSSL2E,cyrguide}.
-% \clearpage
-% \begin{mtchideinmaintoc}
-% \jsection{.\vphantom{A}}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{``.''}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\usuffix{.aux}]\isuffix{.aux} The suffix of the name for an \emph{auxiliary} file of a \LaTeX{} document. It carries
-% some information from a \LaTeX{} run to the next.
-% \item[\usuffix{.cls}]\isuffix{.cls} The suffix for the name of a document class file, loaded via \com{documentclass}.
-% \item[\usuffix{.dtx}]\isuffix{.dtx} The suffix of the name for a documented source file of a \LaTeX{} package or class. This file
-% is often associated with a \suffix{.ins} file to generate the package or class. Compiling a \suffix{.dtx}
-% file with \LaTeX{} generates the documentation.
-% \item[\usuffix{.F}]\isuffix{.F} The base suffix of the name for a minilof file when short extensions (suffixes) are used.
-% The full suffix is \suffix{.F}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minilof.
-% \item[\usuffix{.G}]\isuffix{.G} The base suffix of the name for a partlof file when short extensions (suffixes) are used.
-% The full suffix is \suffix{.G}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the partlof.
-% \item[\usuffix{.H}]\isuffix{.H} The base suffix of the name for a sectlof file when short extensions (suffixes) are used.
-% The full suffix is \suffix{.H}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the sectlof.
-% \item[\usuffix{.ins}]\isuffix{.ins} The suffix of the name for an installation file of a \LaTeX{} package or class. When
-% compiled with \LaTeX, it extracts the files of the package or class from an \suffix{.dtx} file.
-% \item[\usuffix{.lof}]\isuffix{.lof} The suffix of the name of the ``list of figures'' file.
-% \item[\usuffix{.log}]\isuffix{.log} The suffix of the name of the log file (compilation report).
-% \item[\usuffix{.lot}]\isuffix{.lot} The suffix of the name of the ``list of tables'' file.
-% \item[\usuffix{.M}]\isuffix{.M} The base suffix of the name for a minitoc file when short extensions (suffixes) are used.
-% The full suffix is \suffix{.M}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minitoc.
-% \item[\usuffix{.maf}]\isuffix{.maf} The suffix of the name of the file generated by the \optd{listfiles} package option. This file
-% contains the list of the minitoc auxiliary files.
-% \item[\usuffix{.mld}]\isuffix{.mld} The suffix for the name of a minitoc language definition file. A minitoc language definition file
-% contains the definitions for the mini-table titles in a given language.
-% \item[\usuffix{.mlf}]\isuffix{.mlf} The base suffix of the name for a minilof file when long extensions (suffixes) are used.
-% The full suffix is \suffix{.mlf}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minilof.
-% \item[\usuffix{.mlo}]\isuffix{.mlo} The suffix for the name of a minitoc language object file. For some exotic languages, the encoding
-% makes not easy to put direcly the titles in a \suffix{.mld} file;
-% hence the \suffix{.mld} file must load a \suffix{.mlo} file.
-% \item[\usuffix{.mlt}]\isuffix{.mlt} The base suffix of the name for a minilot file when long extensions (suffixes) are used.
-% The full suffix is \suffix{.mlt}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minilot.
-% \item[\usuffix{.mtc}]\isuffix{.mtc} The base suffix of the name for a minitoc file when long extensions (suffixes) are used.
-% The full suffix is \suffix{.mtc}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minitoc.
-% \item[\usuffix{.P}]\isuffix{.P} The base suffix of the name for a parttoc file when short extensions (suffixes) are used.
-% The full suffix is \suffix{.P}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the parttoc.
-% \item[\usuffix{.plf}]\isuffix{.plf} The base suffix of the name for a partlof file when long extensions (suffixes) are used.
-% The full suffix is \suffix{.plf}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the partlof.
-% \item[\usuffix{.plt}]\isuffix{.plt} The base suffix of the name for a partlot file when long extensions (suffixes) are used.
-% The full suffix is \suffix{.plt}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the partlot.
-% \item[\usuffix{.ptc}]\isuffix{.ptc} The base suffix of the name for a parttoc file when long extensions (suffixes) are used.
-% The full suffix is \suffix{.ptc}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the parttoc.
-% \item[\usuffix{.S}]\isuffix{.S} The base suffix of the name for a secttoc file when short extensions (suffixes) are used.
-% The full suffix is \suffix{.S}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the secttoc.
-% \item[\usuffix{.slf}]\isuffix{.slf} The base suffix of the name for a sectlof file when long extensions (suffixes) are used.
-% The full suffix is \suffix{.slf}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the sectlof.
-% \item[\usuffix{.slt}]\isuffix{.slt} The base suffix of the name for a sectlot file when long extensions (suffixes) are used.
-% The full suffix is \suffix{.slt}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the sectlot.
-% \item[\usuffix{.stc}]\isuffix{.stc} The base suffix of the name for a secttoc file when long extensions (suffixes) are used.
-% The full suffix is \suffix{.stc}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the secttoc.
-% \item[\usuffix{.sty}]\isuffix{.sty} The suffix for the name of a package file, loaded via \com{usepackage}.
-% \item[\usuffix{.T}]\isuffix{.T} The base suffix of the name for a minilot file when short extensions (suffixes) are used.
-% The full suffix is \suffix{.T}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minilot.
-% \item[\usuffix{.tex}]\isuffix{.tex} The suffix of the name of a \TeX\ or \LaTeX\ normal source file.
-% \item[\usuffix{.toc}]\isuffix{.toc} The suffix of the name of the ``table of contents'' file.
-% \item[\usuffix{.U}]\isuffix{.U} The base suffix of the name for a partlot file when short extensions (suffixes) are used.
-% The full suffix is \suffix{.U}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the partlot.
-% \item[\usuffix{.V}]\isuffix{.V} The base suffix of the name for a sectlot file when short extensions (suffixes) are used.
-% The full suffix is \suffix{.V}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the sectlot.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{A}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{A}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[absolute numbering] The auxiliary files for the mini-tables have a suffix containing an \emph{absolute
-% number}, i.e.,~the number is unique and always increasing from the first part, chapter or section; this has
-% solved some obscure problems, and also made obsolete some commands, like \com{firstpartis},
-% \com{firstchapteris}, and \com{firstsectionis}. The absolute numbering has been introduced in
-% version~\#23.
-% \item[\upack{abstract}] The \pack{abstract} package~\cite{abstract}\imess{I0040} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) needs some
-% precautions if used with its \optp{addtotoc}{abstract} option.
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[adjustment] Some \upack{minitoc} commands and environments are known as ``adjustment commands'' because
-% they are used in
-% some circumstances to ``adjust'' a counter or to alter the displaying of contents files. These commands and
-% environments are
-% \com{adjustptc}, \com{adjustmtc}, \com{adjuststc},
-% \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, \com{decrementstc},
-% \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc}, \com{incrementstc},
-% \com{mtcaddpart}, \com{mtcaddchapter}, \com{mtcaddsection},
-% \com{mtcfixglossary}, \com{mtcfixindex}, \com{mtcfixnomenclature},
-% \env{mtchideinmaintoc},
-% \env{mtchideinmainlof}, and
-% \env{mtchideinmainlot}.
-% It is \virage\emph{strongly recommended} that the user verifies the result of such adjustments in the final document.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\feat{after}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed \emph{after} a given type of mini-table.
-% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
-% \item[\pack{afterpage}] The \pack{afterpage}~\cite{afterpage} package is used to add code to be executed \emph{after} the
-% next page break.
-% \item[\upack{alnumsec}]
-% The \pack{alnumsec} package~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} allows you to use alphanumeric section
-% numbering, e.g. A.~Introduction; III.~International Law. It's
-% output is similar to the \pack{alphanum} package (part of the \class{jura} class~\cite{jura}),
-% but you can use the standard \LaTeX\ sectionning commands. Thus it is possible to switch numbering
-% schemes easily. Greek letters, double letters~(bb) and different delimiters around them are supported.
-% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.alnumsec} and
-% section~\vref{faq.42}).
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\upack{alphanum}] The \pack{alphanum}\imess{W0025} package, which is part of the specialized \class{jura} class~\cite{jura},
-% by \xname{Felix}{Braun}, is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \lneed{3}
-% \item[\AmS] The\SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{I0041}}
-% American Mathematical Society~\footnote{\url{http://www.ams.org}}. This society has developped some document classes:
-% unfortunately, \class{amsart} and \class{amsproc} are \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package;
-% \class{amsbook} is compatible but needs precautions.
-% \item[\uclass{amsart}, \xfile{amsart.cls}]\iclass{amsart} A\imess{W0026} document class for articles~\cite{amslatex},
-% provided by the American Mathematical
-% Society (\AmS). Unfortunately, this class is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \item[\uclass{amsbook}, \xfile{amsbook.cls}]\iclass{amsbook} A\imess{I0041} document class for books~\cite{amslatex},
-% provided by the American Mathematical
-% Society (\AmS). This class is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package, but needs some precautions.
-% See section~\vref{s+AMS}.
-% \item[\uclass{amsproc}, \xfile{amsproc.cls}]\iclass{amsproc} A\imess{W0027} document class for conference
-% proceedings~\cite{amslatex},
-% provided by the American Mathematical Society (\AmS). Unfortunately, this class is
-% \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\upack{Antomega}] \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega} (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
-% is a language support package for \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), based on the original
-% \xfile{omega.sty} file of the Omega project~($\mathbf{\Omega}$). However, it provides some additional useful
-% functionalities.
-% Some languages definition files (\suffix{.mld}) use titles taken from \pack{Antomega}: \xfile{greek-mono.mld},
-% \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld}, \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}, \xfile{latvian.mld}, \xfile{polish2.mld},
-% \xfile{russian2m.mld}, \xfile{russian2o.mld}, and \xfile{spanish3.mld}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\env{appendices}] See \upack{appendix} below.
-% \item[\upack{appendix}] The\imess{I0042} \pack{appendix} package~\cite{appendix} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson})
-% provides various ways of formatting the titles of appendices. Also (\texttt{sub})\env{appendices}\ienv{subappendices}
-% environments\ienv{appendices}\ienv{subappendices}
-% are provided that can be used, for instance, for per chapter/section appendices. If this package
-% is used with \upack{minitoc}, some precautions are needed (see section~\vref{faq+appendix}).
-% \item[\upack{\Arabi}] \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi} is a system (by \name{Youssef}{Jabri}) to prepare \LaTeX{} documents in the
-% \lopt{arabic} or \lopt{farsi} languages. The titles in \xfile{arabi.mld} and \xfile{farsi3.mld} come from the \xfile{arabic.ldf}
-% and \xfile{farsi.ldf} files of this system.
-% \item[\upack{Arab\TeX}] \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} is a package (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}) to prepare \LaTeX{} documents
-% in the \lopt{arabic} or \lopt{hebrew} languages. The titles in \xfile{arab.mld} (or \xfile{arabic.mld}),
-% \xfile{arab2.mld} and
-% \xfile{hebrew.mld} come from \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}, while those of \xfile{hebrew2.mld} come
-% from \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
-% \item[\upack{Arm\TeX}] \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex} is a package (prepared by \name{Sergueï}{Dachian},
-% \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan} and \name{Vartan}{Akopian}) to prepare \LaTeX{}
-% documents in the \lopt{armenian} language. The titles in \xfile{armenian.mld} come from Arm\TeX.
-% \item[\uclass{article}]\iclass{article} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{classes}. It has sectionning commands: \com{part}
-% and \com{section} (and below), but not \com{chapter}. It is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package
-% and you can make mini-tables at the part and section levels (but, of course, not at the unavailable chapter level).
-% \item[\com{AtBeginDocument}]
-% This standard macro allows to add code to be executed at the beginning of the document (if fact, at the very
-% end of its preamble, but inside it, which implies some restrictions), at the point where \verb|\begin{document}| is
-% processed. This allows a package (or a class) to add code without creating any conflicts with other packages
-% trying to do the same.
-% \item[\com{AtEndDocument}]
-% This standard macro allows to add code to be executed at the end of the document, at the point
-% where \verb|\end{document}| is processed. This allows a package (or a class) to add code without creating any
-% conflicts with other packages trying to do the same.
-% \item[\textbf{autoconfiguration}] Since version~\#28, \upack{minitoc} detects automaticaly if the extensions (suffixes)
-% of the file names are limited to 3~characters (like under MS-DOS) or not. This process is named autoconfiguration.
-% The package option \opt{shortext} forces the limitation to 3~characters.
-% \item[auxiliary] During the preparation of a document, the \LaTeX\ system uses some \textbf{auxiliary} files to
-% store information. The standard auxiliary files are \emph{document}\suffix{.aux} (for cross-reference
-% labels, counters, etc.), \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} for the table of contents,
-% \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} for the list of figures, and \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} for the list of
-% tables. The \upack{minitoc} package creates its own auxiliary files, to store the contents of each
-% mini-table. These files are the \emph{minitoc auxiliary files}, whose names are
-% \emph{document}\texttt{.}\emph{extension}, the table~\vref{t+suffixes} lists the possible extensions.
-% See also the \suffix{.maf} extension above.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{B}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{B}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\upack{babel}] The \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} and others) is
-% a large package useful to write \LaTeX\ documents in many languages, not only english.
-% Many titles for mini-tables come directly from the \pack{babel} package.
-% \item[\upack{Bang\TeX}]\ipacka{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} A package for typesetting documents in the \lopt{bangla}
-% (\lopt{bengali}) language using the {\TeX/\LaTeX} systems; see~\cite{bangtex}.
-% \item[\feat{before}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed \emph{before} a given type of mini-table.
-% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
-% \item[\BibTeX] A program by \name{Oren}{Patashnik} to make bibliographies in \LaTeX{} documents. Distributed with \LaTeX.
-% See~\cite{ttb,btxdoc,btxhak,btxfaq}.
-% \item[\upack{bibtopic}]\ipack{bibtopic} A \LaTeX\ package~\cite{bibtopic} for including several bibliographies in a document.
-% These bibliographies might be considered to cover different topics (hence the name) or bibliographic
-% material (e.g., primary and secondary literature) and the like.
-% \item[\upack{bibunits}] The \pack{bibunits} package~\cite{bibunits} allows separate bibliographies for different
-% units or parts of the text. The units can be chapters, sections or \env{bibunit} environments. This
-% package is compatible with a wide variety of packages, including, but not limited to, \pack{natbib}~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes},
-% \pack{overcite}~\cite{overcite} and \KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}.
-% \item[\uclass{book}]\iclass{book} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{classes}. It has sectionning commands: \com{part},
-% \com{chapter}, and \com{section} (and below). It is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package and
-% you can make mini-tables at the part and chapter levels (but not at the section level, to avoid too many
-% auxiliary files).
-% \item[\pack{booktabs}] This nice package~\cite{booktabs} helps to the preparation of better tables, \emph{without}
-% vertical rules nor double rules.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{C}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{C}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\pack{calc}] The \pack{calc}~\cite{calc} package makes easier the numeric computations (on counters and dimensions)
-% when preparing a \LaTeX{} document.
-% \item[cappuccino] See ``minutes'' below.
-% \item[\upack{captcont}] The \pack{captcont} package~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} provides support for retaining
-% a figure or caption number across several float environments --- usually over several pages. It allows
-% control over the contents of the List-of-Figures and the List-of-Tables pages. It should be compatible
-% with all other packages that modify or extend the float environment and with the \pack{subfig}
-% package~\cite{subfig} in particular.
-% \item[\upack{caption}] The \pack{caption} package~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}\imess{W0033} provides many ways to customize the captions
-% in floating environments such \env{figure} and \env{table} and cooperates with many other packages.
-% \item[\upack{caption2}] The\footnote{This text comes from the documentation of the \pack{caption} package.
-% The \pack{caption} and \pack{caption2} packages have the same author, \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}.}
-% \pack{caption2} package~\cite{caption2}\imess{W0034} used to be an experimental side-version
-% of the regular \pack{caption} package~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung} and has been superseed by the new release of
-% the regular \pack{caption} package version~\mbox{3.0} in December 2003. \pack{caption2} is still
-% some kind of supported, that means it will be part of future releases and bugs will still be fixed,
-% so existing documents using this package will still compile. But \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt} will \emph{not} answer
-% questions about this package anymore except questions on migrating to the regular version of
-% the \pack{caption} package. And it will \emph{not} be adapted or enhanced in the future.
-%
-% So please don't use this package for new documents. It's old, it's obsolete and it starts to begin smell bad!
-%
-% Please ignore all hints in books or other documents which try to tell you that the \pack{caption2} package should
-% be used instead of the \pack{caption} package -- these hints are outdated since December 2003.
-% \item[\xfile{CATALOG}] A plain text file which contains basic infos about the \upack{minitoc} package
-% (abstract, date, author, version, licence).
-% \item[catcode] Short for ``category code''. In\footnote{This definition is taken from
-% ``\textsl{The \TeX{}book}''~\cite{texbook,ftb}.}
-% the first place, it's wise to have a precise idea of what your keyboard sends to the machine. There are 256~characters
-% that \TeX\ might encounter at each step, in a file or in a line of text typed directly on your terminal. These
-% 256~characters are classified into 16~categories numbered~0 to~15. See table~\vref{t+J+catcodes}.
-% \begin{table}[!tp]
-% \def?{\phantom{0}}
-% \centering
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Category codes}\label{t+J+catcodes}
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}cll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% &\textbf{Category}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
-% \midrule
-% ?0&Escape character&(\texttt{\bs}~usually)\\
-% ?1&Beginning of group&(\texttt{\{}~usually)\\
-% ?2&End of group&(\texttt{\}}~usually)\\
-% ?3&Math shift&(\texttt{\$}~usually)\\
-% ?4&Alignment tab&(\texttt{\&}~usually)\\
-% ?5&End of line&(\emph{return}~usually)\\
-% ?6&Parameter&(\texttt{\#}~usually)\\
-% ?7&Superscript&(\texttt{\textasciicircum}~usually)\\
-% ?8&Subscript&(\texttt{\_}~usually)\\
-% ?9&Ignored character&(\emph{null}~usually)\\
-% 10&Space&(\texttt{\textvisiblespace}~usually)\\
-% 11&Letter&(\texttt{A}, \dots, \texttt{Z} and~\texttt{a}, \dots, \texttt{z})\\
-% 12&Other character&(none of the above or below)\\
-% 13&Active character&(\texttt{\textasciitilde}~usually)\\
-% 14&Comment character&(\texttt{\%}~usually)\\
-% 15&Invalid character&(\emph{delete}~usually)\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{table}
-% It's not necessary for you to learn these code numbers; the point is only that \TeX\ responds to 16~different
-% types of characters. At first, ``\textsl{The \TeX{}book}'' led you to believe that there were just two types --- the
-% escape character and the others --- and then you were told about two more types, the grouping symbols~\texttt{\{}
-% and~\texttt{\}}. The category code for any character can be changed at any time, but it is usually wise to stick to a
-% particular scheme.
-% \item[\upack{ccaption}] The \pack{ccaption} package~\cite{ccaption}\imess{W0035} provides commands for ``continuation captions'',
-% unnumbered captions, and a legend heading for any environment. Methods are provided to define captions
-% for use outside float environments, and to define new float environments and subfloats. Tools are provided
-% for defining your own captioning styles.
-% \item[\upack{chngpage}] The \pack{chngpage} package (by \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) provides commands to change
-% the page layout in the middle of a document, and to robustly check for typesetting on odd or even pages.
-% \item[Chapter~0]
-% Some documents do not begin with chapter number one, but with chapter number zero (or even a weirder number).
-% This caused a serious problem in old versions of the \upack{minitoc} package: the minitocs appeared in the
-% wrong chapters, and a first correction was the introduction of specific commands (\com{firstchapteris} and
-% co.). With the addition of the absolute numbering of the mini-table auxiliary files (see \emph{absolute} above),
-% the problem was solved in \upack{minitoc} version~\#23, and these commands became obsolete.
-% See section~\vref{faq.5}.
-% \item[\upack{chapterbib}] The \pack{chapterbib} package~\cite{chapterbib} allows multiple bibliographies in a
-% \LaTeX\ document, including items \com{cite}'d in more than one bibliography. Despite the name
-% ``\pack{chapterbib}'', \emph{the bibliographies are for each included file}, not necessarily for each
-% chapter.
-% \item[\uopt{checkfiles}]\ioptd{checkfiles}
-% A package option of \upack{minitoc}. It checks every mini-table to look if it is empty; then empty mini-tables
-% are \emph{not} printed. This is the default. The opposite package option (\opt{nocheckfiles}) prints even the
-% empty mini-tables, which look ugly. See section~\vref{o+checkfiles}.
-% \item[\upack{CJK}] The \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg} and others), is a set of packages and fonts to
-% prepare \LaTeX\ documents in some oriental language, like chinese, japanese, korean (with Hangûl or Hanja fonts),
-% and thai, plus some variants of russian.
-% The titles of mini-tables for these languages come from some \pack{CJK} files and were inserted in
-% \suffix{.mld} files when possible, or in \suffix{.mlo} files when the encoding is incompatible with the
-% \isuffix{.ins}\isuffix{.dtx}\isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{.ins/.dtx} mechanism;
-% then the \suffix{.mld} file must input the corresponding \suffix{.mlo} file.
-% \pack{CJK} implements the GB, Big~5, JIS, SJIS, KS, UTF~8, and CNS encodings (on 16~bits, except UTF~8 on 24~bits).
-% See table~\vref{t+jargon+CJK}.
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Encoding schemes implemented in \upack{CJK}}\label{t+jargon+CJK}\ipack{CJK}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Encoding}&\textbf{1~byte}&\textbf{2~bytes}&\textbf{3~bytes}\\
-% \midrule
-% GB&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF7}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\
-% Big~5&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF9}&\texttt{0x40}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\
-% JIS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF4}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\
-% SJIS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&\texttt{0x40}--\texttt{0xFC}&---\\
-% KS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFD}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\
-% UTF~8&\texttt{0xC0}--\texttt{0xEF}&\texttt{0x80}--\texttt{0xBF}&\texttt{0x80}--\texttt{0xBF}\\
-% CNS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% Some encoding schemes (Big~5, SJIS) have gaps in the range of the second byte.
-% It is difficult to input Big~5 and SJIS encoding directly into \TeX\ since some of the values used for the
-% encodings' second bytes are reserved for control characters: `\texttt{\{}', `\texttt{\}}', and
-% `\texttt{\bs}'. Redefining them breaks a lot of things in \LaTeX; to avoid this, preprocessors are normally
-% used which convert the second byte into a number followed by a delimiter character. For further details,
-% please refer to~\cite{lunde1993,lunde}; \name{Ken}{Lunde} discusses in great detail all \pack{CJK} encodings which are
-% or have been in use.
-% Please note that the \upack{minitoc} package uses the \suffix{.mlo} files as a workaround for this problem;
-% see section~\vref{fo+lang}.
-% \item[class] The \textbf{class}\footnote{This note is extracted from~\cite{NSSL2E}, then adapted.} is the first
-% information \LaTeX{} needs to know when processing an
-% input file; it is the type of document the author wants to create. This
-% is specified with the \com{documentclass} command.
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{documentclass}\verb|[|\emph{options}\verb|]{|\emph{class}\verb|}|
-% \end{quote}
-% \noindent Here \emph{class} specifies the type of document to be created.
-% Table~\vref{t+documentclasses} lists the standard document classes~\cite{classes}. The \LaTeXe{} distribution provides additional
-% classes for other documents, including letters and slides, but the \upack{minitoc} package has not
-% been tested with all these classes. The
-% \emph{options} parameters customize the behaviour of the document
-% class. The options have to be separated by commas.
-% The standard classes supported by the \upack{minitoc} package
-% are listed in section~\vref{s+supported+classes}.
-% \begin{table}[!tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Standard document classes}\label{t+documentclasses}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Class}&\textbf{Usage}\\
-% \midrule
-% \class{article}~\cite{classes}&For articles in scientific journals, presentations, short reports, program documentation,
-% invitations, \ldots\\
-% \class{proc}~\cite{proc}&For preparing conference proceedings; analog to the \class{article} class.\\
-% \class{ltxdoc}~\cite{ltxdoc}&For preparing the documentation of a package or of a class; analog to the \class{article} class.\\
-% \class{ltnews}~\cite{ltnews}&For preparing the announcement of a \LaTeX{} release; analog to the \class{article} class.\\
-% \class{report}~\cite{classes}&For longer reports containing several chapters, small books, PhD theses, \ldots\\
-% \class{book}~\cite{classes}&For real books.\\
-% \class{letter}~\cite{letter}&For letters; as this class has no sectionning commands, do not use \upack{minitoc} with
-% this class.\\
-% \class{slides}~\cite{slides}&For slides; the class uses big sans serif
-% letters. You might want to consider using Beamer\TeX{}$^a$ instead.
-% Do not use \upack{minitoc} with these classes.\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$^a$\phantom{-}\url{http://www.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/beamer/doc/beameruserguide.pdf}\hfill\null}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \end{table}
-% \item[\feat{close}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed immediately after (\emph{close}) the insertion
-% of the auxiliary file for a given type of mini-table.
-% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
-% See the \exam{mtc-ocf.tex} example file, in section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}.
-% \item[\uscrp{cmk}]\iscrp{cmk}
-% An example of shell script to prepare the documentation files in PostScript format from the ones in PDF format.
-% This script should be adapted to your needs.
-% \item[CMR] For ``Computer Modern Roman''. The roman subset of the Computer Modern fonts. See ``Computer Modern''
-% below.
-% \item[\texttt{comp.text.tex}] The Usenet news group about \TeX\ and \LaTeX, in english.
-% \item[Computer Modern] A set of fonts~\cite{cmt} designed by \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth} for \TeX. Initially
-% they were built with {\MF}~\cite{meta-des,metabook} (a program also created by \textsc{Knuth}), but PostScript
-% type~1 (vector) versions
-% exist today, with extensions (for accented characters, mainly): the EC-fonts (European Computer Modern),
-% the cm-super fonts, etc.
-% \item[counter] A \TeX\ register containing an integer value. There are 256 counters (from~0 to~255) in \TeX, but
-% \LaTeX\ uses some of them, and many packages need some counters for their own usage. An extended version
-% derived from \TeX, \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex}, allows more counters. Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$) also offers more counters.
-% \item[CTAN] The \emph{Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network}, a~set of computer archives containing most of
-% the \TeX\ related resources (like fonts, sofware, documentations, packages). They are accessible via
-% Internet. The participating hosts in the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network
-% are\,\footnote{This list may change in the future.}:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \texttt{ftp.dante.de} (Cologne [Köln], Germany)
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item anonymous ftp \texttt{/tex-archive} (\texttt{/pub/tex} \texttt{/pub/archive})
-% \item rsync access on \url{rsync://rsync.dante.de/CTAN/}
-% \item World Wide Web access on \url{http://www.dante.de/}
-% \item Administrator: \url{mailto:ftpmaint@dante.de}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item \texttt{ftp.tex.ac.uk} (Cambridge, England, UK)
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item anonymous ftp \texttt{/tex-archive} (\texttt{/pub/tex} \texttt{/pub/archive})
-% \item rsync access on \url{rsync://rsync.tex.ac.uk/CTAN/}
-% \item NFS mountable from \url{nfs.tex.ac.uk:/tex-archive}
-% \item World Wide Web access on \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/}
-% \item Administrator: \url{mailto:ctan-uk@tex.ac.uk}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item \texttt{tug.ctan.org} (Colchester, Vermont, USA)
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item anonymous ftp \texttt{/tex-archive} (\texttt{/pub/archive})
-% \item World Wide Web access on \url{http://www.ctan.org/}
-% \item Administrator: \url{mailto:tex@ctan.tug.org}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% There are also many sites mirroring these main archives.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{D}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{D}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\pack{dblaccnt}] I~needed to use the \pack{dblaccnt}~\cite{dblaccnt} package to typeset ``The pdf\TeX\ Program''
-% entry~\cite{han} in the bibliography, because its author's first name contains a double
-% accent \mbox{(\namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han})}.
-% \item[\texttt{de.comp.text.tex}] The Usenet news group about \TeX\ and \LaTeX, in german.
-% \begin{table}[!tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Depths for sectionning commands}\label{t+j+depths}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Class:}&\textbf{\class{book}}&\textbf{\class{report}}&\textbf{\class{article}}\\
-% \midrule
-% \dcnt{secnumdepth}&$\phantom{-}2$&$\phantom{-}2$&$3$\\
-% \com{part}&$-1$&$-1$&$0$\\
-% \com{chapter}&$\phantom{-}0$&$\phantom{-}0$&$\times$\\
-% \com{section}&$\phantom{-}1$&$\phantom{-}1$&$1$\\
-% \com{subsection}&$\phantom{-}2$&$\phantom{-}2$&$2$\\
-% \com{subsubsection}&$\phantom{-}3$&$\phantom{-}3$&$3$\\
-% \com{paragraph}&$\phantom{-}4$&$\phantom{-}4$&$4$\\
-% \com{subparagraph}&$\phantom{-}5$&$\phantom{-}5$&$5$\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{table}
-% \item[depth] In the standard documents classes (and in most classes) with sectionning commands, we have a notion of
-% \textbf{depth}. The depth of a sectionning command determines the numbering level in its title (from the value of the
-% \dcnt{secnumdepth} counter), and the entries for a given sectionning command appear in the main table of contents
-% if the depth of this sectionning command is lower than or equal to the value of the \dcnt{tocdepth} counter; see
-% table~\vref{t+j+depths} for the depths of the sectionning commands in the main document classes.
-%
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% The mechanism is analog for the parttocs, minitocs, and secttocs, using the values of the \dcnt{parttocdepth},
-% \dcnt{minitocdepth}, and \dcnt{secttocdepth} counters. If you use sub-figures or sub-tables, the corresponding
-% mini-tables use counters like \dcnt{partlofdepth}, \dcnt{partlotdepth}, \dcnt{minilofdepth},
-% \dcnt{minilotdepth}, \dcnt{sectlofdepth}, and \dcnt{sectlotdepth}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[descriptor] (file descriptor). A software entity describing the interface between a program and a file.
-% For most programs and operating systems, the number of file descriptors is limited. For \TeX{} (and \LaTeX),
-% there are 16~file descriptors for writing and 16~file descriptors for reading.
-% \item[\xfile{devanagari.sty}] The \emph{\devnag{} for \TeX{}} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}) package~\cite{devanagari} provides a
-% way to typeset high-quality \devnag{} text with \TeX{}. \devnag{} is a script used for writing and printing
-% Sanskrit and a number of languages in Northern and Central India such as Hindi and Marathi, as well as Nepali.
-% The \packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} package was originally developed in May 1991 by Frans Velthuis for the University of Groningen,
-% The Netherlands, and it was the first system to provide support for the \devnag{} script for \TeX{}.
-% ^^A \item[\xfile{duplex2v.pro}] A PostScript header file, which tries to activate recto-verso printing. It works
-% ^^A with some HP and Canon PostScript printers.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{E}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{E}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\texttt{em}] A length unit equal (approximatively) to the width of a~``m'' letter in the current font.
-% \item[\uscrp{emk}]\iscrp{emk}
-% An example of shell script to prepare the english documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package. The script
-% \scrp{imk} must have be run previously. See item~\vref{IN10}.
-% \item[\xfile{en-mtc.bst}] A bibliographic style derived from the \xfile{plain.bst}\isuffix{.bst} standard style, but
-% modified with the \tool{urlbst} tool~\cite{urlbst} to add an~\texttt{URL} field. Family names of authors
-% and editors are in small caps, years are in old style digits.
-% \item[encoding] This specifies the order that characters appear in the font (e.g., whether the 65th character is ``A'').
-% The most common value for TeX font encoding is OT1. The other predefined option is T1 (extended \TeX). There's also
-% US~ASCII (7~bit), ISO~Latin-1 (8~bit), Adobe Standard Encoding, UTF8 (Unicode~\cite{chou,unicode-des,unicode}),
-% etc. See table~\vref{t+var-encodings} and ~\cite{encguide,enc-inter}.
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Various encodings}\label{t+var-encodings}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Encoding}&\textbf{Comment}\\
-% \midrule
-% \texttt{ansinew}&Windows~3.1 ANSI encoding, extension of Latin-1.\\
-% \texttt{applemac}&Macintosh encoding.\\
-% \texttt{ascii}&ASCII encoding for the range 32--127.\\
-% \texttt{cp1250}&Windows 1250 (Central and Eastern Europe) code page.\\
-% \texttt{cp1251}&Windows 1251 (Cyrillic) code page.\\
-% \texttt{cp1252}&Synonym for \texttt{ansinew}.\\
-% \texttt{cp1257}&Windows 1257 (Baltic) code page.\\
-% \texttt{cp437}&IBM~437 code page, which is the original
-% American code page and contains letters, digits,
-% mathematical symbols, and some characters useful in the
-% construction of pseudographics.\\
-% \texttt{cp437de}&IBM~437 code page (German version).\\
-% \texttt{cp850}&IBM~850 code page, almost the same as
-% ISO~Latin~1, but character arrangement is not the same.\\
-% \texttt{cp852}&IBM~852 code page.\\
-% \texttt{cp855}&IBM~855 code page (Cyrillic).\\
-% \texttt{cp865}&IBM~865 code page.\\
-% \texttt{cp866}&IBM~866 code page (MS-DOS Cyrillic).\\
-% \texttt{decmulti}&DEC Multinational Character Set encoding.\\
-% \texttt{latin1}&ASCII encoding plus the characters needed
-% for most Western European languages, including Danish,
-% Dutch, English, Faroese, Finnish, Flemish, French,
-% German, Icelandic, Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese,
-% Spanish, and Swedish. Some non-European languages, such as
-% Hawaiian and Indonesian, are also written in this
-% character set.\\
-% \texttt{latin2}&ASCII encoding plus the characters needed
-% for most Central European languages, including Croatian,
-% Czech, Hungarian, Polish, Romanian, Slovak, and Slovenian.\\
-% \texttt{latin3}&ASCII encoding plus the characters needed
-% for Esperanto, Maltese, Turkish, and Galicean. However,
-% \texttt{latin5} is the prefered character set for
-% Turkish.\\
-% \texttt{latin4}&ASCII encoding plus the characters needed
-% for the Baltic languages (Latvian, Estonian, and
-% Lithuanian), Greenlandic, and Lappish (Sámi).\\
-% \texttt{latin5}&Is essentially the same as
-% \texttt{latin1}, except that some Turkish characters replace
-% less commonly used Icelandic letters.\\
-% \texttt{next}&Next encoding.\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \end{table}
-% \item[environment] An environment is a delimited domain in a document, where special rules apply. Such a
-% domain is delimited by \verb|\begin{|\emph{env}\verb|}| \ldots{} \verb|\end{|\emph{env}\verb|}| and may take
-% arguments, like this:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|\begin{minipage}[t]{.5\textwidth}|\\
-% \verb|\end{minipage}|
-% \end{quote}
-% \item[\packa{\eTeX}{etex}] \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex} is an extented version of \TeX, with much more
-% registers and many new primitives; it supports also left-to-right and right-to-left writing.
-% \item[ethiop]\ipack{ethiop} A \LaTeX\ package~\cite{ethiop} giving the \lopt{ethiopian} language support for the \pack{babel}
-% package~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
-% \item[extension] The name of a file is often made of 2~parts: a \emph{base name} and an \emph{entension},
-% separated by a dot. On some old operating systems, the base name is limited to 8~characters and the extension
-% to 3~characters (the ``8+3'' scheme). See also sections~\vref{MS-DOS} and~\vref{.8+3}.
-% It is strongly recommended to not have more than one dot in a file name.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{F}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{F}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\xfile{farsi.sty}] See \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX} below.
-% \item[\upack{Farsi\TeX}]\ipacka{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX} A package~\cite{farsi} to typeset a document in the \lopt{farsi} (iranian, persian) language.
-% See~\url{http://www.farsitex.org}. But this package is today available only for \LaTeX2.09.
-% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+farsi1} and~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}.
-% \item[features] A feature (for the \upack{minitoc} package) is a set of actions executed at each occurrence of
-% a mini-table of a given type. Five features are associated to each mini-table type: a ``\feat{before}'' feature
-% (executed before the whole mini-table), an ``\feat{after}'' feature (executed after the whole mini-table),
-% a ``\feat{open}'' feature, executed just before inserting the mini-table file,
-% a ``\feat{close}'' feature, executed just after inserting the mini-table file,
-% and a
-% ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature, which is executed with the mini-table to set its page style.
-% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
-% \item[\env{filecontents}]
-% A special \LaTeX{} environment. It allows to create a file (whose name is passed as an argument of the
-% environment) by writing the contents of the environment into that file:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \texttt{\bs begin\{filecontents\}\{\emph{file}\}}\\
-% \texttt{\ldots\emph{contents}~~\ldots}\\
-% \texttt{\bs end\{filecontents\}}
-% \end{quote}
-% This environment should be used \emph{before} \com{documentclass}. It is used in \xfile{minitoc.ins}
-% to prepare the \suffix{.mlo} files (see section~\vref{fo+lang}) and some files used in the compilation
-% of the documentation.
-% \item[\com{firstchapteris}] An obsolete command, temporarily used as a workaround for the Chapter~0 problem;
-% see~\textbf{Chapter~0} and \textbf{absolute numbering} above, and section~\vref{faq.5}.
-% \item[\com{firstpartis}] Analog to \com{firstchapteris} above.
-% \item[\com{firstsectionis}] Analog to \com{firstchapteris} above.
-% \item[\pack{float}] This package~\cite{float} (by \name{Anselm}{Lingnau})\imess{I0053} improves the interface for defining floating
-% objects such as figures and tables in \LaTeX{}. It adds the notion of a `float style' that governs appearance
-% of floats. New kinds of floats may be defined using a \com{newfloat} command analogous to \com{newtheorem}.
-% This package also incorporates the functionality of \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}'s package \pack{here},
-% giving floating environments a \texttt{[H]} option which means `PUT IT HERE' (as opposed to the
-% standard \texttt{[h]} option which means `You may put it here if you like').
-% \item[\com{FloatBarrier}]
-% A macro from the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins}. It sets up a ``barrier'' against the drift of
-% floats (like figures or tables).
-% \item[\pack{floatrow}] This package~\cite{floatrow} (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko})\imess{I0053} is an extension of the
-% \pack{float} package~\cite{float} (by \name{Anselm}{Lingnau}), reusing its code, with extensions from
-% the \pack{rotfloat} package~\cite{rotfloat} (by \name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}).
-% \item[\pack{flowfram}] This\imess{W0097} package~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} is designed to enable you
-% to create text \emph{frames}
-% in a document such that the contents of the \env{document} environment flow from one frame to the next in the
-% order that they were defined. This is useful for creating posters or magazines or any other form of document that
-% does not conform to the standard one or two column layout. As this package defines its own system of
-% minitocs, it is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \item[\uscrp{fmk}]\iscrp{fmk}
-% An example of shell script to prepare the french documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package. The script
-% \scrp{imk} must have be run previously. See item~\vref{IN10}.
-% \item[\upack{fncychap}] The \pack{fncychap}\imess{W0086} package~\cite{fncychap} provides a set of commands for changing
-% the format used for some headings (chapters) in the standard \LaTeXe\ document classes:
-% \class{book} and \class{report}.
-% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.fncychap} and
-% section~\vref{faq.38}).
-% \item[\texttt{fr.comp.text.tex}] The Usenet newsgroup about \TeX\ and \LaTeX, in french.
-% \item[\upack{franc.sty}]\ipack{franc} A small package file used to prepare the french documentation.
-% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item[\upack{frbib.sty}]\ipack{frbib} A small package file used to prepare the bibliography of the french documentation.
-% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item[\xfile{fr-mtc.bst}] A bibliographic style file used to prepare the bibliography of the french
-% documentation.
-% It has been updated from the standard \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plain.bst} for french by \name{Ronan}{Keryell}, then I added
-% some adaptations for french (like last names in small caps for authors and editors, years in old style digits),
-% then modified with the \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst} tool to add an \texttt{URL} field.
-% \item[\upack{frnew.sty}]\ipack{frnew} A small package file used to prepare the french documentation.
-% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{G}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{G}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\pack{geometry}] The \pack{geometry} package~\cite{geometry} provides a flexible and complete user interface to page
-% dimensions. You can specify them by using intuitive parameters to get your desired page layout. For instance,
-% if you want to set margins (the left, right, top and bottom margins) to 2cm from each edge of
-% the paper, what you need is just:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|\usepackage[margin=2cm]{geometry}|
-% \end{quote}
-% This powerful (and recommended) package is used in some example documents and in this documentation.
-% \item[\upack{guarani}]\ipack{guarani} A \LaTeX\ package to compose text in \ilopt{guarani}Guaraní,
-% the main language spoken in Paraguay.
-% The file \xfile{guarani.ldf}, included in this package, defines the titles. See~\cite{guarani} and
-% section~\vref{s+mld+guarani}.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{H}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{H}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\upack{hangcaption}] The \pack{hangcaption}\imess{W0092} package~\cite{hangcaption} defines a variant of the
-% \com{caption} command to produce captions with hanging indentation. This package is likely
-% obsolete (1992, \LaTeX2.09).
-% \item[Hindi] For the Hindi language, see the \packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} package~\cite{devanagari} above. The
-% \upack{minitoc} package accepts the \lopt{devanagari} and \lopt{hindi} language options, which are
-% synonyms. A \lopt{hindi-modern} language option is also available.
-% See also~\cite{hindi99} about the Hindi language.
-% \item[hint] An indication, a clue to detect a problem. It is also a message written (into the
-% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file) by the \optd{hints} option (see below).
-% \item[\uopt{hints}]\ioptd{hints} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It verifies the loading order of some
-% packages, the invocation order of some \upack{minitoc} commands, the consistency between main \upack{minitoc}
-% commands, etc., and gaves warnings and other useful hints (mainly in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file). This is
-% a default option (use the \opt{nohints} option to skip these checks).
-% \item[\upack{H\LaTeX}]\ipacka{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} A system to write documents in the Korean language, using \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$) (see below).
-% Written by \name{Un}{Koaunghi}~\cite[in~korean]{HLATEX}. It uses special Hangûl or Hanja fonts and the UTF-8 input
-% encoding.
-% \item[hyperlink] In a document, a reference to another object which is dynamicaly found (via a click with the
-% mouse). This requires a special type of document (PDF, PostScript with hypertext features) and a suitable
-% viewer (PDF viewer, recent PS viewer). This is useful to navigate in a document or in many documents,
-% which can be remote documents.
-% \lneed{4}
-% \item[\upack{hyperref}] The\SMM{\lmess{W0023}\\\lmess{W0028}\\\lmess{W0030}\\\lmess{W0039}}
-% \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web} is used to emend cross-referencing commands in
-% \LaTeX\ to produce some sort of \com{special} commands; there are
-% backends for the \com{special} set defined for \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX} \texttt{dvi} processors,
-% for embedded pdfmark commands for processing by \tool{Acrobat Distiller}
-% (\tool{dvips} and \tool{dvipsone}), for \tool{dviwindo},
-% for \textbf{pdf\TeX}, for \textbf{\TeX4ht}, and for \tool{VTEX}'s pdf and HTML
-% backends.
-%
-% This package derives from, and builds on, the work of the \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}
-% project, described in \cite{hypertex}. It extends
-% the functionality of all the \LaTeX\ cross-referencing commands
-% (including the table of contents, bibliographies, etc.) to produce
-% \com{special} commands which a driver can turn into hypertext links;
-% it also provides new commands to allow the user to write \emph{ad hoc}
-% hypertext links (hyperlinks), including those to external documents and URLs.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{I}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{I}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\upack{ifmtarg}] The \pack{ifmtarg} package~\cite{ifmtarg} provides an if-then-else command
-% for testing if a macro argument is empty (``empty'' meaning zero or more spaces only).
-% \item[\pack{ifthen}] The \pack{ifthen} package~\cite{ifthen} implements an \com{ifthenelse} command for \LaTeXe.
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item [\uscrp{imk}]\iscrp{imk}
-% An example of shell script, which prepares the \upack{minitoc} package from \xfile{minitoc.ins} and
-% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; note that \scrp{imk} must be run before running \scrp{emk} or \scrp{fmk}.
-% See item~\vref{IN10}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\uopt{insection}] The \opt{insection}\imess{W0056} package option loads the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins}
-% with adequate options to avoid the floats (like figures and tables) to drift outside of their sections.
-% This package option is recommended if you use sectlofs or sectlots in your document. See
-% section~\vref{mtcsecttoc}.
-% \item[insertion] The insertion commands of the \upack{minitoc} package insert a mini-table in the document.
-% A~corresponding \emph{preparation} command must have been invoked (only once) before. The insertion commands
-% are (see table~\vref{t+SUC-PI}):
-% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}
-% \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof}, \com{partlot},\\
-% \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}, \com{minilot},\\
-% \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof}, \com{sectlot},\\
-% \com{mtcprepare}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \item[\xfile{INSTALL}] A text file describing the installation of the \upack{minitoc} package. See
-% chapter~\vref{c+installation}.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{J}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{J}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\com{jobname}] A \TeX\ primitive containing the name of the document in preparation, i.e.,~the name of
-% the file read first by \TeX{} (or \LaTeX), without its extension. Very useful to build the names of other
-% files.
-% \item[\uclass{jura}] The \class{jura}\imess{W0029} class~\cite{jura}, by \xname{Felix}{Braun}, is \emph{incompatible} with the
-% \upack{minitoc} package. It is used for german judicial documents.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{K}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{K}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\packa{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX}] A project~\cite{kannadatex} to use \LaTeX{} for typesetting in the
-% Kannada language. See section~\vref{s+mld+kannada}.
-% \item[\uopt{k-loose}]\ioptd{k-loose} A \upack{minitoc} package option useful if your document is written with one of the \KOMAScript{}
-% classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. This option tries to set a loose line spacing in the mini-tables.
-% Analog to the \optd{loose}
-% package option for standard classes.
-% \item[\uopt{k-tight}]\iopt{k-tight} A \upack{minitoc} package option useful if your document is written with one of the \KOMAScript{}
-% classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}.
-% This option tries to set a tight line spacing in the mini-tables. Analog to the \opt{tight}
-% package option for standard classes.
-% \lneed{3}
-% \item[\KOMAScript]
-% {\KOMAScript}\imess{I0043}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} is a very complex bundle. You may see this, because it
-% is not only one class or one package but a bundle of many classes and
-% packages. The classes (\class{scrartcl}, \class{scrbook},
-% \class{scrlettr}, \class{scrlttr2}, and \class{scrreprt})
-% are counterparts to the standard classes but never they come with
-% only the same commands, environments, options and optional possibilities
-% like the standard classes nor they result in the same look-a-like.
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% The \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt}, and \class{scrartcl} classes are compatible with the
-% \upack{minitoc} package, with some precautions (see section~\vref{special.entries}).
-% The \class{scrlettr} and \class{scrlttr2} have no sectionning commands, so
-% the \upack{minitoc} package is pointless with them.
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \KOMAScript{} comes with a lot of classes, packages, commands,
-% environments and possibilities. Some of these you may find also at the
-% standard classes, many of them you wouldn't. Some are even supplements
-% to the \LaTeX{} kernel.
-%
-% The main classes of the {\KOMAScript} bundle are designed as
-% counterparts to the standard {\LaTeX} classes. This means that the
-% {\KOMAScript} bundle contains replacements for the three standard
-% classes \class{book}, \class{report}, and \class{article}.
-% There is also a replacement for the standard class \class{letter}.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{L}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{L}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[Lambda] The \LaTeX{} format (in the \TeX\ meaning of that word) adapted to the special features of
-% Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$) is called ``\emph{Lambda}'' ($\mathbf{\Lambda}$).
-% \item[Lamed] The \LaTeX{} format (in the \TeX\ meaning of that word) adapted to the special features of
-% \pack{Aleph}~($\aleph$) is called ``\emph{Lamed}''~(\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[height=10pt,keepaspectratio]{lamed3.png}}\/).
-% \item[\LaTeX] \LaTeX~\cite{latex-manual} is a typesetting system that is very
-% suitable for producing scientific and mathematical
-% documents of high typographical quality. It is also suitable for
-% producing all sorts of other documents, from simple letters
-% to complete books. \LaTeX{} uses \TeX~\cite{texbook,ftb} as its
-% formatting engine (from~\cite{NSSL2E}).
-%
-% In fact, \LaTeX{} is a macro package that enables authors to typeset and print
-% their work at the highest typographical quality, using a predefined,
-% professional layout. \LaTeX{} was originally written by
-% \name{Leslie}{Lamport}~\cite{latex-manual}. It uses the
-% \TeX{} formatter as its typesetting engine.
-% These days \LaTeX{} is maintained by \name{Frank}{Mittelbach}
-% and his team.
-%
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% In 1994 the \LaTeX{} package was (deeply) updated by the
-% \LaTeX3 team, led \mbox{by~\name{Frank}{Mittelbach}},
-% to include some long-requested improvements, and to re\-unify all the
-% patched versions which had cropped up since the release of
-% \LaTeX2.09 some years earlier. To distinguish the new version from
-% the old, it is called \LaTeXe.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \LaTeX{} is pronounced ``Lay-tech'' or ``Lah-tech.'' If you refer to
-% \LaTeX{} in an \texttt{ASCII} environment, you type \texttt{LaTeX}.
-% \LaTeXe{} is pronounced ``Lay-tech two~e'' and typed \texttt{LaTeX2e}.
-% \item[\LaTeX2.09] An obsolete version of the \LaTeX\ program, before 1994; it is no more supported.
-% Do not use it\footnote{Except in the case of a very old document; if possible, try to convert
-% it.}. Use the current version of \LaTeXe, which is supported and much more efficient.
-% \item[\LaTeXe] The current version of the \LaTeX\ program, after 1994; it is supported.
-% \item[\LaTeX3] The future version of \LaTeX, whose development is still in progress.
-% \item[leaders] A repetitive sequence of dots (or of one another small character), regulary spaced, used to link
-% two objects on the same line (leading from a title to a page number in a table of contents or the like).
-% \item[\uclass{letter}]\iclass{letter} A\Virage{} standard document class~\cite{letter} to prepare letters for postal
-% mail (mail on paper). As such documents have no sectionning commands nor structure, the \upack{minitoc} package
-% is pointless (hence \emph{incompatible}) with them.
-% \item[\upack{lipsum}] The \pack{lipsum} package~\cite{lipsum} allows to easily insert sentences
-% in a test file with a minimum of typing. The sentences are in latin but are modified and made nearly
-% senseless. I have used this package in some of the examples of documents.
-% See also~\url{http://lipsum.com} for the origin of this text (pieces of
-% \emph{De Finibus Bonorum et Malorum} by Marcus \textsc{Tullius Cicero}).
-% \item[\uopt{listfiles}]\ioptd{listfiles} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It creates a list of the minitoc auxiliary
-% files (these files contains the mini-tables and may be removed after the \LaTeX\ run) in the
-% \emph{document}\suffix{.maf} file. Default. See section~\vref{s+listfiles}.
-% \item[LOF, LoF] An acronym for ``list of figures''.
-% \item[\dcnt{lofdepth}] This counter, if it exists, contains the depth of the list of figures.
-% \item[\uopt{loose}]\ioptd{loose} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It gives a loose line spacing in the
-% mini-tables. It is the default. The opposite option is \opt{tight}.
-% \item[LOT, LoT] An acronym for ``list of tables''.
-% \item[\dcnt{lotdepth}] This counter, if it exists, contains the depth of the list of tables.
-% \item[LPPL] The \emph{LaTeX Project Public License}, available at
-% \begin{quote}
-% \url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt}
-% \end{quote}
-% Its current version is 1.3 (2003-12-01). The \upack{minitoc} package is distributed under this license.
-% \item[\uclass{ltxdoc}]\iclass{ltxdoc} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{ltxdoc}, for preparing the documentation of a package or of a class.
-% For the \upack{minitoc} package, it is very similar to the \class{article} document class; see above.
-% \item[\uclass{ltnews}]\iclass{ltnews} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{ltnews}, for preparing the announcement of a \LaTeX{} release. For the
-% \upack{minitoc} package, it is very similar to the \class{article} document class; see above.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{M}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{M}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\com{makeatletter} \textmd{and} \com{makeatother}] Many\footnote{Informations
-% from~\cite[page~843]{TLC2}.} internal commands of \LaTeX{}, of
-% packages and classes contain the \texttt{@}~character in their names. This effectively prevents such names
-% from being used in documents for user-defined commands. However, it also means that they cannot appear in a
-% document, even in the preamble, without taking special precautions. As it is sometimes necessary to have
-% such bits of ``internal code'' in the preamble, the commands \com{makeatletter}
-% and \com{makeatother} make it easy to do: the difficult bit is to remember to add them, failure to do
-% so can result in some strange errors. And these two commands \Virage\emph{should never be used in a package or class file}.
-% \item[makefile] A special text file containing instructions describing the creation and the installation of a
-% piece of software, using the ``\textbf{make}'' utility; \textbf{make} is a nice tool coming from the Unix
-% operating system, but variants exists.
-% \item[\upack{mcaption}] The \pack{mcaption}\imess{W0036} package~\cite{mcaption} provides a \env{margincap}
-% environment for putting captions in the outer document margin with either a top or bottom alignment.
-% \item[\textbf{MCE}] A minimal [complete] example is the smallest possible complete document that illustrates a problem.
-% A minimal example file should not include any packages or code that do not contribute to the problem, but must
-% include a document class and the \env{document} environment (from~\cite{talbot-mini}). See also~\cite{preusse},
-% \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=minxampl} and
-% \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=askquestion} for good advices.
-% \lneed{7}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\uclass{memoir}, \xfile{memoir.cls}]\iclass{memoir} A very%
-% \SMM{\lmess{E0028}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0032}\\\lmess{I0044}\\\lmess{M0001}}
-% general and powerful document class
-% (by \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}, described in~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}); this class
-% is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package (with some precautions) if you use a recent version. See
-% section~\vref{faq+memoir}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[mini-bibliography] See \textbf{minibbl} below.
-% \item[mini-list] Synonym for ``mini-table'' below.
-% \item[mini-lof] See ``minilof'' below.
-% \item[mini-lot] See ``minilot'' below.
-% \item[mini-table] This term refers to a local table of contents (like a table of contents, a list of figures or a
-% list of tables) for a sectionning unit (part, chapter or section), by opposition to a global table (the
-% table of contents, the list of figures or the list of tables for the whole document). The main aim of the
-% \upack{minitoc} package is the creation of such mini-tables. But the term ``minitoc'' is also used to refer
-% to such mini-table, as a generic term, because the first versions of the package allowed only tables of
-% contents for chapters.
-% \item[mini-toc] See ``minitoc'' below.
-% \item[minibbl] Short for ``mini-bibliography'', i.e.,~to have a bibliography per part, chapter or section, or
-% even by theme or subject. This is out of the domain of the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{faq.9}.
-% \item[minilof] A list of figures for a chapter.
-% \item[\dcnt{minilofdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the minilofs.
-% \item[minilot] A list of tables for a chapter.
-% \item[\dcnt{minilotdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the minilots.
-% \item[minitoc] A table of contents for a chapter. Also used as a generic term for any mini-table (see
-% ``mini-table'' above).
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}] A bibliographic data base for the french documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}] The source file for the french documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package. In
-% fact, it just sets \com{jobname} then loads \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, which itself loads
-% \com{jobname}\suffix{.lan}\isuffix{.lan} to select the language used in \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; \xfile{minitoc.dtx} contains
-% both english and french documentation fragments, selected by \com{ifcase} constructs with the
-% \com{LANG} variable, set to~0 by \xfile{minitoc.lan}\isuffix{.lan} or to~1 by \xfile{minitoc-fr.lan} (i.e.,~by
-% \com{jobname}\suffix{.lan}). \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}] \isuffix{.ist}This file contains a style for formating the index in the french documentation. It
-% is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}]\isuffix{.lan} A file used to force the french language in the documentation.
-% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf}] The french documentation in PDF format.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.ps}] The french documentation in PostScript format. No more distributed (but look at the
-% \scrp{cmk} script).
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.bib}] A bibliographic data base for the english documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.bug}] A plain text file containing a list of problems and questions about the \upack{minitoc}
-% package. See chapter~\vref{FAQ}.
-% \item[\dcnt{minitocdepth}] This counter contains the depth of the minitocs.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.dtx}] The file containing the documentation and the commented code of the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc-hyper.sty}]\ipack{minitoc-hyper} A special version~\cite{minitoc-hyper} of the \upack{minitoc} package which has been
-% prepared by \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne},
-% \xname{Didier}{Verna} and \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts} to work with the powerful \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web};
-% \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} has integrated their work so since version \#31, \upack{minitoc} is compatible with
-% \pack{hyperref}.
-% \emph{Hence\Virage{} the \pack{minitoc-hyper} package~\cite{minitoc-hyper} is now obsolete and
-% should no more be used.
-% It it still present on the CTAN archives for compatibility with old documents.}
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ins}] The installation file for the \upack{minitoc} package. Compiling it with \LaTeX\
-% produces most of the files of the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ist}] \isuffix{.ist}This file contains a style for formating the index in the english documentation.
-% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.l}] A text file containing the list of all the files being included in the
-% \upack{minitoc} package. Files not listed in \xfile{minitoc.l} are files used only to install the package or
-% to produce its documentation.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.lan}]\isuffix{.lan} A file used to force the english language in the documentation.
-% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.pdf}] The english documentation in PDF format.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.pre}]\isuffix{.pre} This file contains a \LaTeX{} preamble for the documentation.
-% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ps}] The english documentation in PostScript format. No more distributed (but look at the
-% \scrp{cmk} scripts).
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.sty}] This file contains the main part of the \upack{minitoc} package, with comments removed.
-% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.sum}] A plain text file containing a commented list of the minitoc commands and environments. See
-% chapter~\vref{c+memento}.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}] A ZIP archive of a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy containing all files in the
-% \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \item[\upack{minutes}] The \pack{minutes} package~\cite{minutes} (by \name{Knut}{Lickert}) is used to prepare
-% conference proceedings. The \upack{minitoc} package allows to add ``coffee breaks'' in the table of contents
-% via commands like \com{addcoffeeline} and \com{coffeeline} (and internal commands) whose names contain
-% the string ``\texttt{coffee}'', hence the footnote about ``cappuccino''{\myCoffeecup} in the
-% installation chapter!%
-% \IfFileExists{marvosym.sty}{\footnote{The little cups \myCoffeecup{} come from the \pack{marvosym} package~\cite{marvosym}.}}{}
-% \item[\upack{Mon\TeX}] \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} is a large package to prepare documents in various dialects
-% of the Mongol language (Bicig and Bicig2, Mongol, Bithe and Manju, Buryat, Xalx and Khalkha) and in a
-% dialect of Russian used in Mongolia (Russianc). Bicig is another name for Uighur.
-% You can find many things about Mongolia and Mongolian at the web site~\cite{mongol-web}.
-% See also:
-% {\small\begin{quote}
-% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}\\
-% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_language}\\
-% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_script}\\
-% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Clear_script}\\
-% \url{http://www.indiana.edu/~mongsoc/mong/language.htm}\\
-% \url{http://www.viahistoria.com/SilverHorde/main.html?research/MongolScripts.html}\\
-% \url{http://www.krysstal.com/writing_evolution.html}\\
-% \url{http://mongolxel.webz.cz/qaguchin/index.htm}
-% \end{quote}}
-%
-% The following description is extracted from~\cite{montex}.
-%
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} is a package which offers support for writing documents in
-% Mongolian, Manju, Buryat and Russian.
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% Mongolian\ixgrf{mongolcy.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,height=2.5cm]{mongoltr.png}}}
-% can be represented in traditional Uighur script (also known as Classical or Traditional
-% Script) and Cyrillic. Manju resembles the Traditional Mongolian script
-% (from which it is derived) but uses a rich choice of diacritics in
-% order to eliminate numerous ambiguities of the Mongolian script
-% ancestor. Modern Buryat, like Mongolian in its present form, is written
-% with a Cyrillic alphabet,
-% but both Mongolian (35 letters) and Buryat\ixgrf{mongolcy.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=2.5cm]{mongolcy.png}}}
-% (36 letters) use more letters than Russian (33 letters).
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \begin{description}
-% \item[Mongolian]
-% The word \emph{Mongolian} is actually an umbrella term for
-% several languages rather than the precise name of a single language.
-% Things become more complicated when names of ethnic groups, languages
-% and writing systems are mixed.
-% \begin{description}
-% \item [Xalx] or Khalkha is the name of the Mongolian
-% nationality residing in Mongolia proper. Their
-% dialect forms the basis of Mongolian written with
-% Cyrillic letters. Throughout this text, \emph{Modern
-% Mongolian} is used as a synonym.
-% \item [Buryat]
-% is the name of the Mongolian nationality
-% residing in Buryatia, north of Mongolia, east of
-% Lake Baikal, being a part of the Russian Federation.
-% The Buryat call themselves \emph{Buryaad} while Xalx
-% Mongolians call them \emph{Buriad}. The English name
-% follows the Russian orthography.
-% Linguistically, Xalx and Buryat Mongol are fairly
-% close languages; Buryat has a slightly different
-% sound system in which the phoneme /s/ partially
-% shifted to /h/; the modern Buryat Cyrillic alphabet
-% (virtually identical with the Cyrillic alphabet used
-% for writing Modern Mongolian) has one additional
-% letter (H/h, \verb|\xalx{H/h}|) for marking the difference to /s/.
-% %\enlargethispage*{1ex}
-% \item [Bicig] (literally \emph{script} in Mongolian) denotes
-% text written in the traditional Mongolian script
-% which is also referred to as Uighur. Throughout this
-% document, the term \emph{Bicig} will be used on an
-% equal footing with \emph{Classical} and
-% \emph{Traditional} Mongolian. The latter term is
-% used in the names of the Unicode/ISO10646 character
-% plane U1800 which contains Mongolian, Manju, Sibe
-% and sets of special characters called Ali Gali or
-% Galig. In order to identify Mongolian script related
-% commands distinct for Mongolian and Manju, the
-% Mongolian commands have the name root \lopt{bicig}
-% whereas the Manju commands have the name root
-% \lopt{bithe}.
-% \end{description}
-%
-% Xalx Mongolian, or Modern Colloquial Mongolian, is about as
-% different from the form written in Classical script as modern
-% English in phonetical spelling (assume it be written in Shavian
-% letters) from the highly historical orthography of Standard English.
-% Beyond these differences, Mongolian written in Classical Script
-% usually preserves a substantial amount of historical grammatical
-% features which make it look a bit like Elizabethan English.
-%
-% \item[Manju]
-% Manju is a Tungusic language closely related to Mongolian. Though
-% Manju is virtually not spoken anymore, it has been the official
-% language during 300 years of Manju government in Qing Dynasty China.
-% Vast amounts of official documents survive, as well as some of the
-% finest multilingual dictionaries ever compiled, e.\,g. the
-% Pentaglot, or Mirror in Five Languages, a dictionary with 18671
-% entries in five languages (Manju, Tibetan, Mongolian, Uighur and
-% Chinese). See~\cite{pentaglot} for more details. Manju writing is derived from Uighur Mongolian by adding
-% diacritics in the form of dots and circles (\emph{tongki fuka sindaha hergen}, script with dots and
-% circles).
-% \end{description}
-% \item[MS-DOS] (Microsoft\textsuperscript{\textregistered} Disk Operating System) An old operating system
-% for personnal computers (PCs).
-% From the \upack{minitoc} point of view,
-% its main drawback is the use of filenames with short extensions (the ``8+3'' scheme), which limits to~99 the number
-% of mini-tables for each kind.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-2c.tex}]\iexam{mtc-2c.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a two columns
-% page layout. See section~\vref{mtc-2c.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-2nd.tex}]\iexam{mtc-2nd.tex} An example of document using the \upack{minitoc} package and its \lopt{french2}
-% language option. See section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-add.bib}]\iexam{mtc-add.bib} A small bibliographic data base for the \exam{mtc-add.tex}
-% and \exam{mtc-ads.tex} example documents. See section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-3co.tex}]\iexam{mtc-3co.tex} An example of document using the \upack{minitoc} package to
-% prepare a minitoc on three columns. See section~\vref{mtc-3co.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-add.tex}]\iexam{mtc-add.tex} An example document showing how to use \com{mtcaddchapter} and the
-% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} with \upack{minitoc}. See section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-ads.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ads.tex} An example document showing how to use \com{mtcaddsection} and the
-% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} with \upack{minitoc}. See section~\vref{mtc-ads.tex}.
-% It also shows how it is challenging to manage the mini-lists of floats at the section level.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-amm.tex}]\iexam{mtc-amm.tex} An example file showing the use of the \env{appendices} environment in a
-% \class{memoir} class document with the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{mtc-amm.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-apx.tex}]\iexam{mtc-apx.tex} An example file showing the use of the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment
-% to hide the entries of the appendices in the main TOC and to create a part-level TOC for the appendices. See
-% section~\vref{mtc-apx.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-art.tex}]\iexam{mtc-art.tex} An example of document (\class{article} class) using the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{mtc-art.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-bk.tex}]\iexam{mtc-bk.tex} An example of document (\class{book} or \class{report} class)
-% using the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{mtc-bk.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-bo.tex}]\iexam{mtc-bo.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a two columns
-% page layout and using the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}. See section~\vref{mtc-bo.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-ch0.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ch0.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document with a
-% starred first chapter. See section~\vref{mtc-ch0.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-cri.tex}]\iexam{mtc-cri.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with starred parts
-% and chapters. See section~\vref{mtc-cri.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-fko.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fko.tex} An example file showing the problem of fonts in minitocs when
-% using the \class{scrbook} class. See section~\vref{mtc-fko.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-fo1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fo1.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with changing some fonts. See section~\vref{mtc-fo1.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-fo2.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fo2.tex} Another example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with changing some fonts. See section~\vref{mtc-fo2.tex}.
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-gap.tex}]\iexam{mtc-gap.tex} An example file showing the use of the \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} and
-% \com{mtcgapafterheads} commands. See section~\vref{mtc-gap.tex}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-hi1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hi1.tex} An example file showing the use of the \env{mtchideinmainlof}
-% and \env{mtchideinmainlot} specialized environments. See section~\vref{mtc-hi1.tex}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-hi2.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hi2.tex} An example file showing the use of the following pairs of commands:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \com{mtchideinmainlof} and \com{endmtchideinmainlof},
-% \item \com{mtchideinmainlot} and \com{endmtchideinmainlot}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% See section~\vref{mtc-hi2.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-hia.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hia.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package to hide the entries for
-% some tables in the main list of tables of an \class{article} class document. See section~\vref{mtc-hia.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-hir.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hir.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package to hide the entries for
-% some tables in the main list of tables of a \class{report} class document. See section~\vref{mtc-hir.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-hop.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hop.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the
-% \class{scrbook} document class. See section~\vref{mtc-hop.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-liv.tex}]\iexam{mtc-liv.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a \class{book} with
-% customized table of contents and minitocs. See section~\vref{mtc-liv.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-mem.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mem.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package
-% with the \class{memoir} class. See section~\vref{mtc-mem.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-mm1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mm1.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package
-% with the \class{memoir} class, if you want to change some fonts. See section~\vref{mtc-mm1.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-mu.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mu.tex} A document using a minitoc set in a \env{wrapfigure} environment with the
-% \pack{wrapfig} package~\cite{wrapfig}. See section~\vref{mtc-mu.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-nom.tex}]\iexam{mtc-nom.tex} A document swowing an interaction betwen the \upack{minitoc}
-% package and the \pack{nomencl} package~\cite{nomencl}. See section~\vref{mtc-nom.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-ocf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ocf.tex} A document using the \feat{open} and \feat{close} features to
-% prepare a minitoc on three columns. See section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-ofs.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ofs.tex} A document using the \feat{open} and \feat{close} features to
-% prepare a minitoc on three columns and \com{mtcsetoffset} to shift the minitoc to align it on the left.
-% See section~\vref{mtc-ofs.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-sbf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-sbf.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the
-% \pack{subfigure} package~\cite{subfigure}. See section~\vref{mtc-sbf.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-scr.tex}]\iexam{mtc-scr.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a {\KOMAScript}
-% class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, \class{scrreprt}. See section~\vref{mtc-scr.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-syn.tex}]\iexam{mtc-syn.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package when the table of
-% contents is prededed by some starred chapters. See section~\vref{mtc-syn.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-tbi.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tbi.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the
-% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind}. See section~\vref{mtc-tbi.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-tlc.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tlc.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document of
-% \class{article} class. It is the example of~\cite[page~58]{TLC2}, modernized. See section~\vref{mtc-tlc.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-tlo.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tlo.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the
-% \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft} and their interaction about the page numbers in the mini-tables.
-% See section~\vref{mtc-tlo.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-tsf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tsf.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the
-% \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig}. See section~\vref{mtc-tsf.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-vti.tex}]\iexam{mtc-vti.tex} An example file showing the use of the \com{mtcpolymtoc} command
-% and explaining \index{polymorphic entry}``polymorphic entries''. See section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}.
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\upack{mtcmess}]\ipack{mtcmess} A package used to provide variants of the standard commands
-% \com{PackageInfo}, \com{PackageWarning}, \com{PackageWarningNoLine}, and \com{PackageError}
-% by adding an optional argument for an unique message identifier.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\upack{mtcoff}]\ipack{mtcoff} A package which is used in place of the \upack{minitoc} package to
-% ignore all the commands and environments of the \upack{minitoc} package. In fact, it defines them to
-% do nothing. Useful if you want a version of your document without any mini-table.
-% \item[\upack{mtcpatchmem}]\ipack{mtcpatchmem} A\SMMZ{\lmess{M0001}} small package which is automatically loaded if
-% necessary when you use the \class{memoir} document class with a version \emph{incompatible} with the
-% \upack{minitoc} package, but correctible. It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item[\texttt{mu}] A length unit normaly used in math mode (\texttt{mu} means ``math unit''); 18~math units make
-% \texttt{1em} (one quad), which is about the width of a~``m'' in the current font. So the size of \texttt{1mu}
-% is font dependent. The separation between dots in the dotted lines in the mini-tables is expressed in math units.
-% \item[\upack{multibib}] The \pack{multibib} package~\cite{multibib} allows to create references to multiple
-% bibliographies within one document. It thus provides a complementary functionality to packages
-% like \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits} or \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib}, which allow
-% to create one bibliography for multiple, but different parts of the document.
-% \item[\upack{multicol}] The \pack{multicol} package~\cite{multicol} defines the \env{multicols} environment
-% (with a~``\textbf{s}'') to typeset text on several columns. Used in some example documents.
-% \item[\upack{multitoc}] This package~\cite{multitoc} allows setting only the table of contents, list of
-% figures and/or list of tables in two or more columns (using the \pack{multicol} package~\cite{multicol}, of course).
-% The number of columns can be configured via commands; the
-% multicolumn toc(s) can be selected via package options.
-% The \exam{mtc-3co.tex} example document uses this package; see section~\vref{mtc-3co.tex}.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{N}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{N}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\pack{natbib}] It is a \LaTeXe{} (but with some support for \LaTeX2.09) package~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} to act
-% as generalized interface for standard and non-standard bibliographic style files (\BibTeX).
-% \item[\upack{needspace}] The \pack{needspace} package~\cite{needspace} provides commands to reserve space
-% at the bottom of a page. If there is not enough space on the current page (column) a new page (column) is started.
-% \item[NFSS] The \emph{New Font Selection Scheme}. The \LaTeXe{} font selection system~\cite{fontsel}
-% was first released as the ``New Font Selection Scheme'' (NFSS) in 1989, and then in release~2 in 1993.
-% \LaTeXe{} includes NFSS release~2 as standard.
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% Every text font in \LaTeX{} has five \emph{attributes}:
-% \begin{description}
-% \item[encoding] This specifies the order that characters appear in the
-% font. The two most common text encodings used in \LaTeX{} are
-% \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth}'s ``\TeX{} text'' encoding (OT1), and the ``\TeX{} text extended''
-% encoding (T1) developed by the \TeX{} Users Group members during a \TeX{}
-% Conference at Cork in~1990 (hence its informal name ``Cork encoding'').
-% See~\cite{encguide,enc-inter}.
-% \item[family] The name for a collection of fonts, usually grouped under
-% a common name by the font foundry. For instance, ``Adobe Times'', ``ITC
-% Garamond'', and \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth}'s ``Computer Modern Roman'' are all font families.
-% \item[series] How heavy or expanded a font is. For instance, ``medium
-% weight'', ``narrow'' and ``bold extended'' are all series.
-% \item[shape] The form of the letters within a font family. For
-% instance, ``italic'', ``oblique'' and ``upright'' (sometimes called
-% ``roman'') are all font shapes.
-% \item[size] The design size of the font, for instance ``10pt''.
-% \end{description}
-%
-% \lneed{2}
-% The possible values for these attributes are given short acronyms by
-% \LaTeX. The most common values for the font encoding are given in table~\vref{t+nfss+1}.
-% \begin{table}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Most common font encodings}\label{t+nfss+1}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Encoding}&\textbf{Description}\\
-% \midrule
-% \texttt{T1} &\LaTeX{} extended text (``Cork encoding'')\\
-% \texttt{TS1} &\LaTeX{} symbols (Latin)\\
-% \texttt{T2A}, \texttt{T2B}, \texttt{T2C}&\LaTeX{} text (Cyrillic)\\
-% \texttt{T3} &\LaTeX{} phonetic alphabet\\
-% \texttt{TS3} &\LaTeX{} phonetic alphabet (extra symbols)\\
-% \texttt{T4} &\LaTeX{} text (African languages)\\
-% \texttt{T5} &\LaTeX{} text (Vietnamese)\\
-% \texttt{T7} &\LaTeX{} text (reserved for Greek)\\
-% \texttt{OT1} &\TeX{} text (as defined by \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\
-% \texttt{OT2} &\TeX{} text for Cyrillic languages (obsolete)\\
-% \texttt{OT3} &International phonetic alphabet (obsolete)\\
-% \texttt{OT4} &\TeX{} text with extensions for the Polish language\\
-% \texttt{OT6} &\TeX{} text with extensions for the Armenian language\\
-% \texttt{OML} &\TeX{} math italic (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\
-% \texttt{OMS} &\TeX{} math symbols (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\
-% \texttt{OMX} &\TeX{} math large symbols (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\
-% \texttt{X2} &\LaTeX{} extended text (Cyrillic)\\
-% \texttt{U} &Unknown \\
-% \texttt{L}\meta{xx}&A local encoding\\
-% \texttt{L7x} &Encoding used for the Lithuanian language\\
-% \texttt{LTH} &Encoding used for the Thai language\\
-% \texttt{LV1} &Encoding used with some \texttt{VTeX} fonts\\
-% \texttt{LY1} &Alternative to \texttt{T1} encoding, for Y\&Y software\\
-% \texttt{PD1} &Implements the PDFDocEncoding for use with \LaTeXe's NFSS.\\
-% \texttt{PU} &Implements the Unicode encoding for use with \LaTeX's NFSS.\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-% ^^A \end{table}
-% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}
-% ^^A \begin{table}[!tp]
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}}
-% \begin{minipage}[t]{.54\textwidth}
-% \capstart
-% \caption{Most common font families}\label{t+nfss+2}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Family}&\textbf{Description}\\
-% \midrule
-% \texttt{cmr} &Computer Modern Roman \\
-% \texttt{cmss}&Computer Modern Sans \\
-% \texttt{cmtt}&Computer Modern Typewriter \\
-% \texttt{cmm} &Computer Modern Math Italic \\
-% \texttt{cmsy}&Computer Modern Math Symbols \\
-% \texttt{cmex}&Computer Modern Math Extensions \\
-% \texttt{ptm} &Adobe Times \\
-% \texttt{phv} &Adobe Helvetica \\
-% \texttt{pcr} &Adobe Courier\\
-% \texttt{lazy}&Additional \LaTeX{} symbols\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}%
-% \end{minipage}%
-% &&%
-% \begin{minipage}[t]{.45\textwidth}
-% \capstart
-% \caption{Most common font series}\label{t+nfss+3}
-% \centering
-% \leavevmode\null\hfill\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Series}&\textbf{Description}\\
-% \midrule
-% \texttt{ul}&Ultra light\\
-% \texttt{el}&Extra light\\
-% \texttt{l}&Light\\
-% \texttt{sl}&Semi light\\
-% \texttt{m} &Medium \\
-% \texttt{sb} &Semi bold \\
-% \texttt{b} &Bold \\
-% \texttt{eb} &Extra bold \\
-% \texttt{bx}&Bold extended \\
-% \texttt{ub}&Ultra bold \\
-% \texttt{c} &Condensed\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}\hfill\null
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{table}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% \begin{table}[!tp]
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}}
-% \begin{minipage}[t]{.54\textwidth}
-% \capstart
-% \caption{Most common font shapes}\label{t+nfss+4}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Shape}&\textbf{Description}\\
-% \midrule
-% \texttt{n} &Normal (that is ``upright'' or ``roman'') \\
-% \texttt{it}&Italic \\
-% \texttt{sl}&Slanted (or ``oblique'') \\
-% \texttt{sc}&Caps and small caps\\
-% \texttt{u}&Unslanted (upright italic)\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{minipage}%
-% &&%
-% \begin{minipage}[t]{.45\textwidth}
-% \capstart
-% \caption{Most common font widths}\label{t+nfss+4a}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}lcl@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Width}&\textbf{\%}&\textbf{Description}\\
-% \midrule
-% \texttt{uc}&50.0&Ultra condensed\\
-% \texttt{ec}&50.0&Extra condensed\\
-% \texttt{c}&50.0&Condensed\\
-% \texttt{sc}&50.0&Semi condensed\\
-% \texttt{m}&50.0&Medium\\
-% \texttt{sc}&50.0&Semi extended\\
-% \texttt{c}&50.0&Extended\\
-% \texttt{ec}&50.0&Extra extended\\
-% \texttt{uc}&50.0&Ultra extended\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \end{table}
-% The ``local'' encodings are intended for font encodings which are only
-% locally available, for instance a font containing an organisation's
-% logo in various sizes.
-%
-% \lneed{4}
-% There are far too many font families to list them all, but some common
-% ones are listed in table~\vref{t+nfss+2}.
-% The most common values for the font series are listed in table~\vref{t+nfss+3}.
-% The most common values for the font shape are listed in table~\vref{t+nfss+4}.
-% The most common values for the font width are listed in table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}.
-%
-% The font size is specified as a dimension, for instance \texttt{10pt} or
-% \texttt{1.5in} or \texttt{3mm}; if no unit is specified, \texttt{pt} is assumed. These five
-% parameters specify every \LaTeX{} font, see table~\vref{t+nfss+5}, for instance.
-% \begin{table}[!tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \centering
-% \caption{The five font parameters of some fonts}\label{t+nfss+5}
-% ^^A \begin{tabular}{@{}l@{\,}l@{\,}l@{\,}l@{\,}ll@{}l@{}}
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllllZ{1}l@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l}{\textbf{\LaTeX{} specification}}&
-% \textbf{Font}&\textbf{\TeX{} name}\\
-% \midrule
-% \texttt{OT1}&\texttt{cmr} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{n} & \texttt{10} &
-% Computer Modern Roman 10 point &
-% \texttt{cmr10}\\
-% \texttt{OT1} & \texttt{cmss} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{sl} & \texttt{1pc} &
-% Computer Modern Sans Oblique 1 pica &
-% \texttt{cmssi12} \\
-% \texttt{OML} & \texttt{cmm} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{it} & \texttt{10pt} &
-% Computer Modern Math Italic 10 point &
-% \texttt{cmmi10} \\
-% \texttt{T1} & \texttt{ptm} & \texttt{b} & \texttt{it} & \texttt{1in} &
-% Adobe Times Bold Italic 1 inch &
-% \texttt{ptmb8t at 1in}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \end{table}
-% \begin{table}[!tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \centering
-% \caption{Author commands for fonts}\label{t+nfss+6}
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Author command} &
-% \textbf{Attribute} &
-% \textbf{Value in} \uclass{article} \textbf{class} \\
-% \midrule
-% \com{textrm}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{rmfamily} & family & \texttt{cmr} \\
-% \com{textsf}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{sffamily} & family & \texttt{cmss} \\
-% \com{texttt}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{ttfamily} & family & \texttt{cmtt} \\
-% \com{textmd}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{mdseries} & series & \texttt{m} \\
-% \com{textbf}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{bfseries} & series & \texttt{bx} \\
-% \com{textup}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{upshape} & shape & \texttt{n} \\
-% \com{textit}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{itshape} & shape & \texttt{it} \\
-% \com{textsl}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{slshape} & shape & \texttt{sl} \\
-% \com{textsc}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{scshape} & shape & \texttt{sc} \\
-% \com{tiny} & size & \texttt{5pt} \\
-% \com{scriptsize} & size & \texttt{7pt} \\
-% \com{footnotesize} & size & \texttt{8pt} \\
-% \com{small} & size & \texttt{9pt} \\
-% \com{normalsize} & size & \texttt{10pt} \\
-% \com{large} & size & \texttt{12pt} \\
-% \com{Large} & size & \texttt{14.4pt} \\
-% \com{LARGE} & size & \texttt{17.28pt} \\
-% \com{huge} & size & \texttt{20.74pt} \\
-% \com{Huge} & size & \texttt{24.88pt}\\
-% \com{textnormal} & normal & \textnormal{normal text}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% These five parameters are displayed whenever \LaTeX{} gives an overfull
-% box warning, for instance:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \texttt{Overfull \bs hbox (3.80855pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 314-{}-318}\\
-% \texttt{[]\bs OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Normally [] and [] will be iden-ti-cal,}
-% \end{verse}
-% \lneed{6}
-% The table~\vref{t+nfss+6} lists the author commands for fonts which set these five attributes\footnote{The
-% values used by these commands are determined by the document class.}.
-% \item[\uopt{nocheckfiles}]\iopt{nocheckfiles} A package option of \upack{minitoc}. The opposite of the \optd{checkfiles}
-% package option (see above).
-% \item[\uopt{nohints}]\iopt{nohints} A package option of \upack{minitoc}. The opposite of the \optd{hints}
-% package option (see above).
-% \item[\uopt{nolistfiles}]\iopt{nolistfiles} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It is the opposite of the
-% \optd{listfiles} above. See section~\vref{s+listfiles}.
-% \item[\uopt{notoccite}]\iopt{notoccite} This option of the \upack{minitoc} package loads
-% the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite} (by \name{Donald}{Arseneau}).
-% It avoids problems with \com{cite} commands in sectionning commands or captions. See
-% section~\vref{ss+notoccite}.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{O}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{O}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[Omega] The Omega typesetting system\,\footnote{Most but not all of this note is taken in the Omega documentation
-% \cite{yannis1994b,yannis1994a,yannis1995,omega1996,yannis1998}.
-% See~\url{http://omega.enstb.org/} for more information.}
-% ($\mathbf{\Omega}$) (by \xname{Yannis}{Haralambous} and \xname{John}{Plaice})
-% is an extension of \TeX{} that is aimed primarily at improving \TeX's multilingual abilities.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% When the \TeX{} program was originally developed in the mid seventies [\emph{circa} 1975] by
-% Professor \xname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}
-% it was mainly aimed at typesetting mathematical texts in the english language. Since then \TeX{} has
-% made inroads in broader and broader areas of scientific, literary and other scholarly activities in many
-% countries all over the world. In 1991, \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} froze \TeX, mainly in the interest of stability.
-% However, he allows the \TeX{} code to be used as the basis for further developments, so long as the resulting system is
-% distributed under a different name.
-%
-% In Omega all characters and pointers into data-structures are 31-bit
-% wide, instead of 8-bit, thereby eliminating many of the trivial
-% limitations of \TeX. Omega also allows multiple input and output
-% character sets, and uses programmable filters to translate from one
-% encoding to another, to perform contextual analysis, etc. Internally,
-% Omega uses the universal Unicode/ISO-10646 character set. Omega also
-% includes support for multiple writing directions.
-%
-% These improvements not only make it a lot easier for \TeX{} users to cope
-% with multiple or complex languages, like Arabic, Indic, Khmer, Chinese,
-% Japanese or Korean, in one document, but also form the basis for future
-% developments in other areas, such as native color support and hypertext
-% features.
-%
-% The \LaTeX{} format (in the \TeX\ meaning of that word) adapted to the special features of Omega is called
-% ``\emph{Lambda}''~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$).
-% Extending Omega with the \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex} extensions is a separate
-% project, known as ``\pack{Aleph}'' ($\aleph$)~\cite{aleph,aleph-hagen} and led by \xname{Giuseppe}{Bilotta}.
-% The \LaTeX\ for \pack{Aleph} is known as
-% ``\emph{Lamed}''~(\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[height=10pt,keepaspectratio]{lamed3.png}}\/).
-% There is an experimental system, named \packa{\textsc{Lua}\TeX}{LuaTeX}~\cite{luatex,luatex2007}, which will regroup
-% \textsc{pdf}\TeX, \pack{Aleph}, \packa{\eTeX}{etex} and other developments.
-% A promising development is \packa{\protect\XeTeX}{xetex}~\cite{xetex} by~\name{Jonathan}{Kew}, with
-% \packa{\protect\XeLaTeX}{xelatex}.
-% \begin{table}[tp!]
-% ^^A \changeskips
-% \caption{Some systems derived from \TeX{} and \LaTeX}\label{t+tex-latex}
-% \centering
-% \[ \begin{array}{ccccccc}
-% \mbox{\TeX}&\longrightarrow&\mathbf{\Omega}&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mathbf{\Lambda}\\
-% &&+&&&&+\\
-% \mbox{\TeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\eTeX}&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\eLaTeX}\\
-% &&&&&&\\
-% \cline{3-3}\cline{5-5}\cline{7-7}
-% &&&&&&\\
-% &&\aleph&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,height=10pt]{lamed3.png}}}
-% \end{array} \]
-% \end{table}
-% \item[\feat{open}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed immediately before
-% (\emph{open}) the insertion of the auxiliary file for a given type of mini-table.
-% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
-% See the \exam{mtc-ocf.tex} example file, in section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{P}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{P}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[package] Packages\footnote{This info is taken from~\cite[page~12--13]{kopka} and adapted.} are a very important
-% feature of \LaTeX. These are extensions to the basic \LaTeX{} commands that are written to files with names
-% that end with \suffix{.sty} and are loaded with the command \com{usepackage} in the preamble. Packages can be
-% classified by they origin.
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \textbf{Core} packages (in fact, \textbf{base} and \textbf{required} packages) are an integral part of
-% the \LaTeX{} basic installation and are therefore fully standard.
-% \item \textbf{Tools} packages are a set written by members of the \LaTeX3 Team and should always be in the
-% installation.
-% \item \textbf{Graphics} packages are a standardized set for including pictures generated by other programs
-% and for handling colors; they are at the same level as the tools packages.
-% \item \textbf{\AmS-\LaTeX} packages, published by the American Mathematical
-% Society\footnote{\url{http://www.ams.org}}, should be in any
-% installation\footnote{They are indispensable if you use a lot of mathematics.}.
-% \item \textbf{Contributed} packages have been submitted by actual users; certain of these have established
-% themselves as ``essential'' to standard \LaTeX{} usage, but all are useful.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item[\feat{pagestyle}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed at each occurrence of
-% a given type of mini-table, to force the page style to use for the current page.
-% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
-% \item[partlof] A list of figures for a part.
-% \item[\dcnt{partlofdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the partlofs.
-% \item[partlot] A list of tables for a part.
-% \item[\dcnt{partlotdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the partlots.
-% \item[parttoc] A table of contents for a part.
-% \item[\dcnt{parttocdepth}] This counter contains the depth of the parttocs.
-% \item[PDF] Portable Document Format~\cite{pdfspec}. A descendant of the PostScript language from Adobe,
-% optimized for navigation on the Internet. It adds hypertext, font substitution, and compression features.
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\upack{placeins}] The \pack{placeins}\SMM{\lmess{W0031}\\\lmess{W0032}\\\lmess{W0084}\\\lmess{W0085}}
-% package~\cite{placeins} keeps floats ``in their place'',
-% preventing them from floating past a \com{FloatBarrier} command into another section. To use it, declare
-% \com{usepackage}\texttt{\{placeins\}} in the preamble and
-% insert \com{FloatBarrier} commands at places that floats
-% should not move past, perhaps at every \com{section}. The \opt{insection} package option of the
-% \upack{minitoc} package does that with adequate options, and loads also the \pack{flafter} package
-% (described in~\cite{ltoutput} and~\cite[page~286]{TLC2});
-% see section~\vref{s+placing}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\xfile{placeins.txt}] A plain text file containing the documentation of
-% the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins}.
-% \item[\upack{\PLaTeX}]\ipacka{\PLaTeX}{PLaTeX} A\virage{} version of \LaTeX\ customized
-% for the polish (\lopt{polski}) language. It has been replaced by the \pack{polski} package. See~\cite{polski,platex-pl}.
-% But the \emph{same} name was referring also to a version of \LaTeX\ customized for the japanese language,
-% \packa{\PLaTeXe}{PLaTeX2e}~\cite{platex-jp,kakuto}.
-% \item[\uscrp{pmk}]\iscrp{pmk}
-% An example of shell script to prepare the \upack{minitoc} package
-% and its documentation; you should adapt it to your needs.
-% See item~\vref{IN10}.
-% \item[polymorphic entry] An entry\index{polymorphic entry} in the TOC, LOF or LOT which changes its aspect
-% depending on the place where it appears (main TOC, minitable, etc.); see section~\vref{ss+polym}.
-% \item[PostScript] A page description language, by Adobe. It describes the appearance of a page, including
-% elements such as text, graphics, and scanned images, to a printer or visualization device. Introduced by
-% Adobe in 1985, it has become the language of choice in high quality printing.
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[preamble] In the main file of a \LaTeX{} source document, the part of it between the commands
-% \com{documentclass}\texttt{[.{}.{}.]\{.{}.{}.\}} and \ienv{document}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{document\}}. In the preamble,
-% you can insert global declarations and the loading of packages via \com{usepackage} commands.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[preparation] The preparation commands of the \upack{minitoc} package prepare the auxiliary files for the
-% mini-tables of a given type. A~\emph{preparation} command must have been invoked (only once) before any
-% insertion command for the mini-table type. The preparation commands are (see table~\vref{t+SUC-PI}):
-% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
-% \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, \com{dopartlot},&(part level)\\
-% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, \com{dominilot},&(chapter level)\\
-% \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, \com{dosectlot},&(section level)\\
-% \com{mtcprepare}&(all levels)
-% \end{tabular}
-% \item[\uclass{proc}]\iclass{proc} A standard \LaTeX\ document class, for preparing conference proceedings. For the
-% \upack{minitoc} package, it is very similar to the \class{article} document class; see above.
-% \item[pseudo-chapter]
-% Or starred chapter. A chapter introduced by a \com{chapter*} command. By default, it has no entry in
-% the table of contents. \com{chapter*} needs some precautions with the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% See section~\vref{s+starred.chap}.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{Q}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Q}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\upack{quotchap}] The \pack{quotchap} package~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} provides a set of commands for adding quotations to
-% some headings (chapters) in the standard \LaTeXe\ document classes:
-% \class{book}, and \class{report}.
-% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.quotchap} and
-% section~\vref{faq.39}).
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{R}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{R}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[README] is a plain text file (english) describing briefly the \upack{minitoc} package,
-% plus some useful infos.
-% \item[\uclass{report}]\iclass{report} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{classes}. It has sectionning commands: \com{part},
-% \com{chapter}, and \com{section} (and below). It is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package and
-% you can make mini-tables at the part and chapter levels (but not at the section level, to avoid too many
-% auxiliary files).
-% \item[\uscrp{rmk}]\iscrp{rmk} An example of shell script, which sorts the files
-% of the \upack{minitoc} package into classes (one directory
-% for each class). It should be run after the scripts
-% \scrp{imk} (mandatory) and \scrp{emk} and/or
-% \scrp{fmk}, in that sequence. See item~\vref{IN10}.
-% \item[\upack{romannum}] The \pack{romannum} package~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} changes the numbers (for sectionning commands)
-% generated by \LaTeX{} from arabic digits to roman numerals. This package uses
-% the \pack{stdclsdv} package~\cite{stdclsdv}.
-% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.romannum} and
-% section~\vref{faq.40}).
-% \item[\pack{rotating}] The \pack{rotating}~\cite{rotating} package performs all the different sorts of
-% rotation one might like, including complete figures.
-% \item[\pack{rotfloat}] The pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}\imess{I0053} package provides commands to define new floats
-% of various styles (\texttt{plain}, \texttt{boxed}, \texttt{ruled}, and userdefined ones);
-% the \pack{rotating} package~\cite{rotating} provides new environments (\env{sidewaysfigure}
-% and \env{sidewaystable}) which are rotated by $90^\circ$ or $270^\circ$.
-% But what about new rotated floats, e.g.\ a rotated ruled one?
-% This package makes this possible; it builds a bridge between both packages
-% and extend the commands from the \pack{float} package to define rotated
-% versions of the new floats, too.
-% \item[rubber] \tool{rubber}~\cite{rubber} is a wrapper for \LaTeX\ and companion programs.
-% Its purpose is, given a \LaTeX\ source to process,
-% to compile it enough times to resolve all references, possibly running satellite programs such as \textbf{\BibTeX},
-% \textbf{makeindex}, \textbf{Metapost}, etc., to produce appropriate data files. It has facilities to make
-% some post-processing cleanup actions, like deleting the auxiliary files created by \upack{minitoc}.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{S}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{S}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\uclass{scrartcl}]\iclass{scrartcl} See {\KOMAScript} above.
-% \item[\uclass{scrbook}]\iclass{scrbook} See {\KOMAScript} above.
-% \item[\uclass{scrreprt}]\iclass{scrreprt} See {\KOMAScript} above.
-% \item[sectionning commands] These are the \LaTeX\ commands which specify the logical structure of your document.
-% The main sectionning commands are \com{part}, \com{chapter}, \com{section},
-% \com{subsection}, \com{subsubsection}, \com{paragraph}, or \com{subparagraph}.
-% Some standard document classes have not the \com{chapter} command (like the \class{article} and
-% \class{proc} classes), some have no sectionning commands (like the \class{letter} class). In the later
-% case, the \upack{minitoc} package is pointless. If some of the \com{part}, \com{chapter},
-% or \com{section} commands are not defined, the \upack{minitoc} commands for that level are
-% unavailable. If \com{chapter} is defined, the \upack{minitoc} commands at the section level are not
-% defined in the current and older versions of the \upack{minitoc} package, but if \com{chapter} is
-% not defined and \com{section} is defined, then the \upack{minitoc} commands at the section level are
-% defined. See section~\vref{note+sectionning}.
-% In non-standard document classes, sectionning commands with non-standard names cannot be recognized by the
-% \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \item[sectlof] A list of figures for a section.
-% \item[\dcnt{sectlofdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the sectlofs.
-% \item[sectlot] A list of tables for a section.
-% \item[\dcnt{sectlotdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the sectlots.
-% \item[\upack{sectsty}] The \pack{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} provides a set of commands for changing
-% the font used for the various sectional headings in the standard \LaTeXe\ document classes: \class{article},
-% \class{book}, and \class{report}. This package also works with the {\KOMAScript} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}
-% \class{scrartcl}, \class{scrbook}, and \class{scrreprt}.
-% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.sectsty} and
-% section~\vref{faq.28}).
-% \item[secttoc] A table of contents for a section.
-% \item[\dcnt{secttocdepth}] This counter contains the depth of the secttocs.
-% \item[\upack{sfheaders}] The \pack{sfheaders} package~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} (for \LaTeXe) borrows
-% some definitions from the standard \class{article}/\class{report}/\class{book} classes
-% and modifies them in order to print the part, chapter, section, subsection\ldots{} headers with
-% the Sans-Serif variant of the current font.
-% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.sfheaders} and
-% section~\vref{faq.41}).
-% \item[shell] In the Unix, Unix-like and Linux operating systems, the \textbf{shell} is a program used as an
-% interface between the operating system and the user. It can also be used as a scripting language to write
-% programs or scripts to prepare routinely used sequences of tasks. The main shells are the
-% Bourne shell (\textbf{sh}), the C~shell (\textbf{csh}), the Korn shell (\textbf{ksh}),
-% and their many successors (like \textbf{bash}, \textbf{tcsh}, etc.).
-% \item[\uopt{shortext}]\iopt{shortext} An\imess{W0020} option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It forces the use of short extensions
-% (3~characters) in the names of the minitoc auxiliary files. This option is inactive by default, but is
-% automatically activated if your operating system needs short extensions. See \textbf{autoconfiguration}
-% above and the section~\vref{.8+3}.
-% \item[\upack{shorttoc}] The \pack{shorttoc} package~\cite{shorttoc} allows to create an other table of
-% contents in a document, with an other title and an other depth than the main table of contents.
-% \item[SJIS] The SJIS character encoding (for the japanese language), also known as MS-Kanji (Kanji for
-% Microsoft\textsuperscript{\textregistered}),
-% consists of two overlaid character sets: the so-called halfwidth Katakana (JIS X0201-1976, 1-byte characters
-% encoded in the range \texttt{0xA1} to \texttt{0xDF}) and the (fullwidth) JIS character set (JIS X0208-1990,
-% mapped to the remaining code points). This information is taken from~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}.
-% \item[\upack{\SLaTeX}]\ipacka{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX} A version of \LaTeX\ customized for the swedish language. See~\cite{slatex}.
-% \item[\upack{splitbib}]\ipack{splitbib} A \LaTeX\ package~\cite{splitbib} which allows for sorting a bibliography
-% into categories and
-% subcategories; this is interesting for lists of publications, for grouping references by subject, by year,~...
-% \item[\upack{stdclsdv}] The \pack{stdclsdv} package~\cite{stdclsdv} is intended to be used by the authors
-% of \LaTeX{} packages that need to know about the sectional divisions provided by the document class.
-% \item[strut] A vertical invisible rule used to force a minimal separation between two lines of text.
-% \item[\upack{subfig}] The \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig} provides support for the
-% inclusion of small, ``sub-figures'' and ``sub-tables''. It simplifies the positioning, captioning and labeling of
-% them within a single \env{figure} or \env{table} environment. In addition, this package allows
-% such sub-captions to be written to the List of Figures or List of Tables if desired.
-% \item[\upack{subfigure}] The \pack{subfigure} package~\cite{subfigure} is an obsolete version (by the same
-% author) of the \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig}.
-% \item[suffix] See ``extension'' above.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{T}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{T}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[TDS] \index{TDS}The \TeX~Directory Structure~\cite{ftds,tds}; a directory structure highly recommended to
-% store macros, fonts, and the other implementation-independent \TeX{} system files; it also suggests how to
-% incorporate the rest of the \TeX{} files in a single structure; the \index{TDS}TDS has been designed to work on all
-% modern systems.
-% \item[\TeX] \TeX{} is a computer program created by \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth}~\cite{texbook,ftb}.
-% It is aimed at typesetting text and mathematical formulae.
-% \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} started writing the \TeX{} typesetting
-% engine in 1977 to explore the potential of the digital printing
-% equipment that was beginning to infiltrate the publishing industry at
-% that time, especially in the hope that he could reverse the trend of
-% deteriorating typographical quality that he saw affecting his own
-% books and articles. \TeX{} as we use it today was released in 1982,
-% with some slight enhancements added in 1989 to better support 8-bit
-% characters and multiple languages. \TeX{} is renowned for being
-% extremely stable, for running on many different kinds of computers,
-% and for being virtually bug free. The version number of \TeX{} is
-% converging to $\pi$ and is now at $3.141592$.
-%
-% \TeX{} is pronounced ``Tech,'' with a ``ch'' as in the German word
-% ``Ach'' or in the Scottish ``Loch.'' In an ASCII environment, \TeX{}
-% becomes \texttt{TeX}.
-% \item[\upack{thailatex}] The \pack{thailatex} package~\cite{thailatex} allows to typeset
-% documents in the Thai language. You can also use the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}.
-% \item[\uopt{tight}]\iopt{tight} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It gives a tight line spacing in the
-% mini-tables. The opposite option is \optd{loose}.
-% \item[\upack{titlesec}] The \pack{titlesec}\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0099}} package~\cite{titletoc} allows to change the sectioning titles.
-% Amongst its many features it provides margin titles, different format in left and right pages, rules above
-% and below the title, etc. Unfortunately, it is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \item[\upack{titletoc}] The\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0040}} \pack{titletoc} package is useful for toc entries formatting,
-% providing the possibility of changing the format in the middle of a document, grouping the entries
-% in a single paragraph, pretty free-forms entries, partial tocs, etc.
-% Unfortunately, it is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package.
-%
-% The \xfile{titletoc.sty} file is not part of the \pack{titlesec} package; it's an independent package,
-% but it's described in the \pack{titlesec} package documentation~\cite{titletoc}.
-% \item[\uscrp{tmk}]\iscrp{tmk} A script file which creates a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant
-% hierarchy~\cite{ftds,tds} (to be ajusted to your system).
-% \item[TOC, ToC] Acronym for ``table of contents''.
-% \item[\upack{tocbibind}] The \pack{tocbibind}\imess{I0046} package~\cite{tocbibind} can be used to add the ToC
-% and/or bibliography and/or the index etc., to the Table of Contents listing. But it needs some precautions
-% when used with the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{special.entries}.
-% \item[\dcnt{tocdepth}] This counter contains the depth of the table of contents.
-% \item[\upack{tocloft}] The \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}\imess{I0047} provides means of controlling the
-% typographic design of the Table of Contents, List of Figures and List of Tables.
-% New kinds of ``List of \ldots' can be defined. If you use the \pack{tocloft} package and the
-% \upack{minitoc} package, see section~\vref{faq+tocloft} about fixing some minor compatibility issues.
-% \item[\xfile{TODO}] is a plain text file (english) which lists some suggested developments of the package,
-% not yet implemented. Comments and suggestions are welcome.
-% \item[token] A token\footnote{This definition is taken from ``\textsl{The \TeX{}book}''~\cite{texbook,ftb}.} is either
-% (a)~a single character with an attached category code (see ``catcode'' above), or (b)~a control sequence.
-% \virage{} You \emph{should} remember two chief things about \TeX's tokens: (1)~A~control sequence is considered to be
-% a single object that is no longer composed of a sequence of symbols. Therefore long control sequence names
-% are no harder for \TeX\ to deal with than short ones, after they have been replaced by tokens. Furthermore,
-% spaces are not ignored after control sequences inside a token list; the ignore-space rule applies only in an
-% input file, during the time that strings of characters are being tokenized. (2)~Once a category code has been
-% attached to a character token, the attachment is permanent. For instance, if character `\verb|{|' were
-% suddenly declared to be of category~12 instead of category~1, the characters `\verb|{|$_1$' already inside token
-% lists of \TeX\ would still remain of category~1; only newly made lists would contain `\verb|{|$_{12}$' tokens.
-% In other words, individual characters receive a fixed interpretation as soon as they have been read from a file,
-% based on the category they have at the time of reading. Control sequences are different, since they can change
-% their interpretation at any time. \TeX's digestive processes always know exactly what a character token signifies,
-% because the category code appears in the token itself; but when the digestive processes encounter a control sequence
-% token, they must look up the current definition of that control sequence in order to figure out what it means.
-% \item[\pack{trivfloat}] The \pack{trivfloat} package~\cite{trivfloat} (by \name{Joseph~A.}{Wright})\imess{I0053} provides
-% a quick method for defining new float types in \LaTeX. A single command sets up a new float in the
-% same style as the \LaTeX{} kernel \env{figure} and \env{table} float types.
-% \item[\pack{txfonts}] The \pack{txfonts} package~\cite{txfonts} provides the \texttt{TX} fonts, which consist of
-% \begin{enumerate}\itemsep=0pt
-% \item virtual text roman fonts using Adobe Times (or URW NimbusRomNo9L) with
-% some modified and additional text symbols in OT1, T1, TS1, and LY1 encodings;
-% \item \textsf{virtual text sans serif fonts using Adobe Helvetica (or URW NimbusSanL) with
-% additional text symbols in OT1, T1, TS1, and LY1 encodings};
-% \item {\smooth\texttt{monospaced typewriter fonts in the OT1, T1, TS1, and LY1\linebreak[4] encodings}};
-% \item math alphabets using Adobe Times (or URW NimbusRomNo9L) with modified metrics;
-% \item math fonts of all symbols corresponding to those of Computer Modern math fonts (CMSY, CMMI, CMEX,
-% and Greek letters of CMR);
-% \item math fonts of all symbols corresponding to those of AmS{} fonts (MSAM and MSBM);
-% \item additional math fonts of various symbols.
-% \end{enumerate}
-% All fonts are in the Type~1 format (in \suffix{.afm} and \suffix{.pfb} files).
-% Necessary \suffix{.tfm} and \suffix{.vf} files together with \LaTeXe\ package files and font map files
-% (\suffix{.map}) for \tool{dvips} are provided.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{U}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{U}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[UNIX] A modern operating system, available on many computers and in various flavors. From the
-% \upack{minitoc} point of view, it has the advantage of using filenames with long extensions (the length
-% limit is too high to be a problem with the number of mini-tables).
-% \item[UNIX-like] Operating systems analog to Unix, with the same advantages. Linux is a good example, but others
-% exist.
-% \item[\utool{urlbst}]\itool{urlbst} A PERL script, by \name{Norman}{Gray}~\cite{urlbst},
-% to add a \texttt{webpage} \BibTeX{} entry type,
-% and add support for general \texttt{url} and \texttt{lastchecked} fields, to (most) \BibTeX{} \suffix{.bst} files.
-% Optionally adds basic support for \texttt{eprint} and \texttt{doi} fields, and \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}/\pack{hyperref}
-% support, too. See \cite{hypertex,hyperref.web}.
-% \item[UTF\phantom{-}8] UTF~8 (Unicode Transformation Format~8), also called UTF~2 or FSS-UTF, is a special representation
-% of Unicode (resp. ISO~10\,646). It uses multibyte sequences of various lengths, but only 2-byte and 3-byte
-% sequences are implemented in \pack{CJK}. ASCII characters will be used as-is --- without this property it would be
-% impossible to use UTF~8 with \TeX. See table~\vref{t+jargon+CJK}.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{V}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{V}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\upack{varsects}] The \pack{varsects} package~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} provides a set of commands for changing
-% the font used for the various sectional headings in the standard \LaTeXe\ document classes: \class{article},
-% \class{book}, and \class{report}.
-% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.varsects} and
-% section~\vref{faq.33}).
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{W}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{W}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \par\reversemarginpar
-% \item[Wikipedia] The \index{Wikipedia}Wikipedia\index{Wikipedia}\ixgrf{wiki.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill\raisebox{0cm}[2.5cm][0cm]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=2.5cm]{wiki.png}}}}
-% is a free, multilingual, open content (neutral, verifiable, modifiable and improvable by anyone)
-% encyclopedia project operated by the non-profit Wikimedia Foundation.
-% Its name is a portemanteau of the words \emph{wiki} (a type of collaborative website) and \emph{encyclopedia}.
-% Launched in 2001 by \name{Jimmy}{Wales} and \name{Larry}{Sanger}, it is the largest, fastest growing and most
-% popular general reference work currently available on the Internet.
-% \par\normalmarginpar
-% \item[\upack{wrapfig}] The \pack{wrapfig} package~\cite{wrapfig} provides the \env{wrapfigure} and
-% \env{wraptable} environments to place a figure or table at the side of the page and wrap text around~it.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{X}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{X}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\scrp{xmk}] An example of shell script, which typesets the example document files into PDF documents.
-% \item[\upack{xr}] The \pack{xr} package~\cite{xr} implements a system for eXternal References. I wrote the
-% first version of this package, but it had severe problems. \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle} rewrote it in a much
-% better and more robust way. With his permission, I used some of his code in the \upack{minitoc} package
-% to implement the preparation commands (like \com{dominitoc}). If you use also the \pack{hyperref}
-% package~\cite{hyperref.web}, use \pack{xr-hyper}~\cite{xr-hyper} in place of the \upack{xr} package.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \end{mtchideinmaintoc}
-% \or\relax
-% \chapter{Jargon}\label{c+jargon}
-% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{5}\raggedcolumns}
-% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
-% \setlength{\mtcindent}{-0.75em}
-% \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-0.75em}
-% \minitoc
-% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty}
-% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty}
-% \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt}
-% \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{0pt}
-% \mtcskip
-% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns}
-% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
-% \setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt}
-% \minilot
-% \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt}
-% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\empty}
-% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\empty}
-% Ce chapitre tente d'expliquer certains termes utilisés dans cette documentation et décrit quelques fichiers et suffixes
-% utiles.
-% De nombreuses informations proviennent des documentations de divers paquetages cités (souvent du résumé ou
-% \emph{abstract}), et
-% de~\cite{malayalam,malayalam-o,mlsquick,montex,HLATEX,komab,classes,usrguide,clsguide,fontsel,lunde1993,lunde,ttb,TLC2F,koma,CIL2E,NSSL2E,cyrguide}.
-% \clearpage
-% \begin{mtchideinmaintoc}
-% \jsection{<<~.~>>\vphantom{A}}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{<<~.~>>}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\suffix{.aux}] Le suffixe du nom pour un fichier \emph{auxiliaire} d'un document \LaTeX{}. Il transfère
-% des informations d'une exécution de \LaTeX{} à~la suivante.
-% \item[\usuffix{.cls}]\isuffix{.aux} Le suffixe du nom pour un fichier classe de document,
-% chargé via la commande \com{documentclass}.
-% \item[\usuffix{.dtx}]\isuffix{.dtx} Le suffixe du nom pour le fichier source documenté d'un paquetage ou d'une classe \LaTeX.
-% Ce fichier est souvent associé à~un fichier \suffix{.ins} pour engendrer le paquetage ou la classe.
-% Compiler un fichier \suffix{.dtx} avec \LaTeX{} engendre la documentation.
-% \item[\usuffix{.F}]\isuffix{.F} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minilof lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le
-% suffixe complet est \suffix{.F}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minilof.
-% \item[\usuffix{.G}]\isuffix{.G} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier partlof lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le
-% suffixe complet est \suffix{.G}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la partlof.
-% \item[\usuffix{.H}]\isuffix{.H} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier sectlof lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le
-% suffixe complet est \suffix{.H}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la sectlof.
-% \item[\usuffix{.ins}]\isuffix{.ins} Le suffixe du nom pour un fichier d'installation d'un paquetage ou d'une classe \LaTeX.
-% Lorsque qu'il est compilé avec \LaTeX, il extrait les fichiers du paquetage ou de la classe depuis un
-% fichier \suffix{.dtx}.
-% \item[\usuffix{.lof}]\isuffix{.lot} Le suffixe du nom du fichier \og{} liste des figures\fg.
-% \item[\usuffix{.log}]\isuffix{.log} Le suffixe du nom du fichier rapport de compilation.
-% \item[\usuffix{.lot}]\isuffix{.lot} Le suffixe du nom du fichier \og{} liste des tableaux\fg.
-% \item[\usuffix{.M}]\isuffix{.M} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minitoc lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le
-% suffixe complet est \suffix{.M}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minitoc.
-% \item[\usuffix{.maf}]\suffix{.maf} Le suffixe du nom du fichier engendré par l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}.
-% Option par défaut.
-% Ce fichier contient la liste des fichiers auxiliaires minitoc.
-% \item[\usuffix{.mld}]\isuffix{.mld} Le suffixe pour le nom d'un fichier minitoc de définition de langue. Un fichier minitoc de
-% définition de langue contient les définitions des titres des mini-tables dans une langue donnée.
-% \item[\usuffix{.mlf}]\isuffix{.mlf} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minilof lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le
-% suffixe complet est \suffix{.mlf}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minilof.
-% \item[\usuffix{.mlo}]\isuffix{.mlo} Le suffixe pour le nom d'un fichier minitoc objet de langue. Pour certaines langues
-% exotiques, le codage rend difficile l'insertion directe des titres dans un fichier \suffix{.mld}; donc
-% le fichier \suffix{.mld} doit charger un fichier \suffix{.mlo}.
-% \item[\usuffix{.mlt}]\isuffix{.mlt} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minilot lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le
-% suffixe complet est \suffix{.mlt}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minilot.
-% \item[\usuffix{.mtc}]\isuffix{.mtc} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minitoc lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le
-% suffixe complet est \suffix{.mtc}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minitoc.
-% \item[\usuffix{.P}]\isuffix{.P} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier parttoc lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le
-% suffixe complet est \suffix{.P}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la parttoc.
-% \item[\usuffix{.plf}]\isuffix{.plf} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier partlof lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le
-% suffixe complet est \suffix{.plf}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la partlof.
-% \item[\usuffix{.plt}]\isuffix{.plt} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier partlot lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le
-% suffixe complet est \suffix{.plt}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la partlot.
-% \item[\usuffix{.ptc}]\suffix{.ptc} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier parttoc lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le
-% suffixe complet est \suffix{.ptc}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la parttoc.
-% \item[\usuffix{.S}]\isuffix{.S} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier secttoc lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le
-% suffixe complet est \suffix{.S}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la secttoc.
-% \item[\usuffix{.slf}]\isuffix{.slf} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier sectlof lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le
-% suffixe complet est \suffix{.slf}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la sectlof.
-% \item[\usuffix{.slt}]\isuffix{.slt} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier sectlot lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le
-% suffixe complet est \suffix{.slt}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la sectlot.
-% \item[\usuffix{.stc}]\isuffix{.stc} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier secttoc lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le
-% suffixe complet est \suffix{.stc}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la secttoc.
-% \item[\usuffix{.sty}]\isuffix{.sty} Le suffixe pour le nom d'un fichier paquetage, chargé via \com{usepackage}.
-% \item[\usuffix{.T}]\isuffix{.T} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minilot lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le
-% suffixe complet est \suffix{.T}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minilot.
-% \item[\usuffix{.tex}]\isuffix{.tex} Le suffixe du nom d'un fichier source \TeX\ ou \LaTeX\ normal.
-% \item[\usuffix{.toc}]\isuffix{.toc} Le suffixe du nom du fichier \og{} table des matières\fg.
-% \item[\usuffix{.U}]\isuffix{.U} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier partlot lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le
-% suffixe complet est \suffix{.U}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la partlot.
-% \item[\usuffix{.V}]\isuffix{.V} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier sectlot lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le
-% suffixe complet est \suffix{.V}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la sectlot.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{A}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{A}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[absolue (numérotation)] Les fichiers auxiliaires pour les minitables ont un suffixe contenant un
-% \emph{numéro absolu}, c'est-à-dire un numéro qui est unique et toujours croissant depuis la première
-% partie, le premier chapitre ou la première section; ceci a résolu quelques problèmes obscurs, et aussi
-% frappé d'obsolescence quelques commandes, telles que \com{firstpartis},
-% \com{firstchapteris} et \com{firstsectionis}. La numérotation absolue a été introduite dans
-% la version~\#23.
-% \item[\upack{abstract}] Le paquetage \pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract}\imess{I0040} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) nécessite
-% quelques précautions s'il est utilisé avec son option \optp{addtotoc}{abstract}.
-% \item[\feat{after}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté \emph{après} un type donné de mini-table.
-% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[ajustement] Quelques commandes et environnements de \upack{minitoc} sont dits \og{} commandes
-% d'ajustement\fg{} car ils sont utilisés dans certaines circonstances pour \og{} ajuster\fg{} un compteur ou
-% altérer l'affichage de fichiers de contenu. Ces commandes et environnements sont
-% \com{adjustptc}, \com{adjustmtc}, \com{adjuststc},
-% \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, \com{decrementstc},
-% \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc}, \com{incrementstc},
-% \com{mtcaddpart}, \com{mtcaddchapter}, \com{mtcaddsection},
-% \com{mtcfixglossary}, \com{mtcfixindex}, \com{mtcfixnomenclature},
-% \env{mtchideinmaintoc},
-% \env{mtchideinmainlof} et
-% \env{mtchideinmainlot}.
-% Il est \virage\emph{fortement recommandé} que l'utilisateur vérifie le résultat de tels ajustements dans le
-% document final.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\pack{afterpage}] La paquetage \pack{afterpage}~\cite{afterpage} est utilisé pour ajouter du code qui sera
-% exécuté \emph{après} la prochaine coupure de page.
-% \item[\upack{alnumsec}]
-% Le paquetage \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} vous permet d'utiliser une numérotation alphanumérique des sections,
-% c'est-à-dire: A.~Introduction; III.~Loi internationale. Ce résultat est similaire
-% à~celui du paquetage \pack{alphanum} (qui fait partie de la classe \class{jura}~\cite{jura}),
-% mais vous pouvez utiliser les commandes de sectionnement standard de \LaTeX. Il est donc possible
-% de changer facilement de schéma de numérotation. Lettres grecques, lettres doubles~(bb) et différents
-% délimiteurs autour des numéros sont supportés.
-% Ce paquetage doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.alnumsec} et la
-% section~\vref{faq.42}).
-% \item[\upack{alphanum}] Le\imess{W0025} paquetage \pack{alphanum}, qui fait partie de la
-% classe spécialisée \class{jura}~\cite{jura},
-% de \name{Felix}{Braun}, est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% \lneed{3}
-% \item[\AmS] L'\emph{American Mathematical Society}~\froff\footnote{\url{http://www.ams.org}}\fron.%
-% \SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{I0041}}
-% Cette société savante a développé les classes de document suivantes:
-% \class{amsart} et \class{amsproc} sont, malheureusement, \emph{incompatibles} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc},
-% \class{amsbook} est compatible mais demande des précautions. Voir la section~\vref{s+AMS}.
-% \item[\uclass{amsart}]\iclass{amsart} Une\imess{W0026} classe de document pour des articles~\cite{amslatex},
-% fournie par l'\emph{American Mathematical Society} (\AmS). Malheureusement, cette classe
-% est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\uclass{amsbook}]\iclass{amsbook} Une\imess{I0041} classe de document pour des livres~\cite{amslatex}, fournie par
-% l'\emph{American Mathematical Society} (\AmS). Cette classe est compatible avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc},
-% mais requiert des précautions.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\uclass{amsproc}]\iclass{amsproc} Une\imess{W0027} classe de document pour des comptes-rendus de
-% congrès~\cite{amslatex}, fournie par l'\emph{American Mathematical Society} (\AmS). Malheureusement, cette
-% classe est \emph{incompatible} avec le
-% paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\upack{Antomega}] \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega} (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
-% est un paquetage de support de langues pour \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), fondé sur le
-% fichier \xfile{omega.sty} original du projet Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$). Cependant, il offre quelques
-% fonctionnalités additionnelles utiles.
-% Certains fichiers de définition de langue (\suffix{.mld}) utilisent des titres définis par \pack{Antomega}:
-% \xfile{greek-mono.mld},
-% \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld}, \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}, \xfile{latvian.mld}, \xfile{polish2.mld},
-% \xfile{russian2m.mld}, \xfile{russian2o.mld} et \xfile{spanish3.mld}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\env{appendices}] Voir \upack{appendix} ci-dessous.
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\upack{appendix}] Le\imess{I0042} paquetage \pack{appendix}~\cite{appendix} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson})
-% fournit diverses manières de formater les titres des appendices. Des environnements
-% nommés (\texttt{sub})\env{appendices}\ienv{subappendices}
-% sont aussi fournis pouvant être utilisés, par exemple, pour des appendices par chapitre ou par section. Si
-% ce paquetage est utilisé avec \upack{minitoc}, certaines précautions sont nécessaires (voir la
-% section~\vref{faq+appendix}).
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\upack{\Arabi}] \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi} est un système (de \name{Youssef}{Jabri}) pour préparer des documents \LaTeX{} dans
-% les langues arabe (\lopt{arab}) ou \lopt{farsi}. Les titres dans \xfile{arabi.mld} et \xfile{farsi3.mld} proviennent
-% des fichiers \xfile{arabic.ldf} et \xfile{farsi.ldf} de ce système.
-% \item[\upack{Arab\TeX}] \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} est un paquetage (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}) pour préparer des
-% documents en langue arabe (\lopt{arab}) ou hébraïque (\lopt{hebrew}). Les titres dans \xfile{arab.mld} (ou \xfile{arabic.mld}),
-% \xfile{arab2.mld} et
-% \xfile{hebrew.mld} proviennent d'\packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}, mais ceux donnés par \xfile{hebrew2.mld} proviennent
-% de \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
-% \item[\upack{Arm\TeX}] \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex} est un paquetage (réalisé par \name{Sergueï}{Dachian},
-% \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan} et \name{Vartan}{Akopian}) pour préparer des
-% documents \LaTeX{} en langue arménienne.
-% Les titres dans \xfile{armenian.mld} proviennent du paquetage \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}.
-% \item[\uclass{article}]\iclass{article} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{classes}. Elle offre des commandes de sectionnement:
-% \com{part} et \com{section} (et en dessous), mais pas \com{chapter}. Elle est compatible avec le
-% paquetage \upack{minitoc} et vous pouvez faire des mini-tables aux niveaux partie et section (mais, bien
-% sûr, pas au niveau chapitre indisponible).
-% \item[\com{AtBeginDocument}]
-% Cette macro standard permet d'ajouter du code à~exécuter au début du document (en fait, à~la fin exacte de
-% son préambule, mais à~l'intérieur de celui-ci, ce qui implique quelques restrictions), à~l'endroit
-% où \verb|\begin{document}| est traité. Ceci permet à~un paquetage (ou à~une classe) d'ajouter du code sans
-% créer de conflits avec d'autres paquetages essayant de faire de même.
-% \item[\com{AtEndDocument}]
-% Cette macro standard permet d'ajouter du code à~exécuter à~la fin du document, à~l'endroit
-% où \verb|\end{document}| est traité. Ceci permet à~un paquetage (ou à~une classe) d'ajouter du code sans
-% créer de conflits avec d'autres paquetages essayant de faire de même.
-% \item[\textbf{autoconfiguration}] Depuis la version~\#28, \upack{minitoc} détecte automatiquement si les
-% suffixes des noms de fichiers sont limités à~3~caractères (comme sous MS-DOS). Ce processus se nomme
-% l'autoconfiguration. L'option de paquetage \opt{shortext} force la limitation à~3~caractères.
-% \item[auxiliaire] Pendant la préparation d'un document, le système \LaTeX\ utilise quelques fichiers
-% \textbf{auxiliaires} pour stocker des informations. Les fichiers auxiliaires standard sont
-% \emph{document}\suffix{.aux} (pour les labels de références croisées, les compteurs, etc.),
-% \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} pour la table des matières, \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} pour la liste des figures
-% et \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} pour la liste des tableaux. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} crée ses propres
-% fichiers auxiliaires, pour y~stocker les contenus de chaque mini-table. Ces fichiers sont les
-% \emph{fichiers auxiliaires minitoc}, dont les noms sont de la forme \emph{document}\texttt{.}\emph{suffixe},
-% le tableau~\vref{t+suffixes} liste les suffixes possibles.
-% Voir aussi le suffixe \suffix{.maf} plus haut.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{B}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{B}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\upack{babel}] Le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} et autres) est un
-% vaste paquetage permettant de préparer des documents \LaTeX\ dans de nombreuses langues, et pas seulement en
-% anglais. De nombreux titres pour les mini-tables proviennent directement du paquetage \pack{babel}.
-% \item[\upack{Bang\TeX}]\ipacka{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} Un paquetage pour composer des documents dans la langue \lopt{bangla}
-% (\lopt{bengali}) en utilisant les systèmes {\TeX/\LaTeX}; voir~\cite{bangtex}.
-% \item[\feat{before}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté \emph{avant} un type donné de mini-table.
-% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
-% \item[\BibTeX] Un programme écrit par \name{Oren}{Patashnik} pour produire des bibliographies dans des documents \LaTeX.
-% Distribué avec \LaTeX. Voir~\cite{ttb,btxdoc,btxhak,btxfaq}.
-% \item[\upack{bibtopic}]\ipack{bibtopic} Un paquetage~\cite{bibtopic} \LaTeX{} pour inclure plusieurs bibliographies dans
-% un document. Ces bibliographies pourraient être considérées comme couvrant des sujets différents (d'où le nom)
-% ou du matériel bibliographique (par exemple, documentation de premier et second niveaux), etc.
-% \item[\upack{bibunits}] Le paquetage \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits} permet de faire des bibliographies
-% distinctes pour différentes unités ou partie du texte. Les unités peuvent être des chapitres, des sections ou
-% des environnements \env{bibunit}. Ce paquetage est compatible avec une large variété de paquetages, dont
-% (mais sans y~être limité) \pack{natbib}~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes}, \pack{overcite}~\cite{overcite}
-% et les classes \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}.
-% \item[\uclass{book}]\iclass{book} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{classes}. Elle a des commandes de sectionnement:
-% \com{part}, \com{chapter} et \com{section} (et en dessous).
-% Elle est compatible avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et vous pouvez faire des mini-tables aux niveaux partie et
-% chapitre (mais pas au niveau section, pour éviter de trop nombreux fichiers auxiliaires).
-% \item[\pack{booktabs}] Ce beau paquetage~\cite{booktabs} vous aide à~préparer de plus belles tables, \emph{sans}
-% filets verticaux ni filets doubles.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{C}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{C}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[cadratin] Voir «~em~» ci-dessous.
-% \item[\pack{calc}] Le paquetage \pack{calc}~\cite{calc} facilite les calculs numériques (sur des compteurs et
-% des dimensions) lors le la préparation d'un document \LaTeX.
-% \item[cappuccino] Voir «~minutes~» ci-dessous.
-% \item[\upack{captcont}] Le paquetage \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} fournit un support pour conserver
-% un numéro de figure ou de caption pour plusieurs environnements flottants --- habituellement sur plusieurs pages.
-% Il permet de contrôler le contenu des pages de la liste des figures et de la liste des tableaux. Il devrait
-% être compatible avec tous les autres paquetages qui modifient ou étendent l'environnement flottant et avec
-% le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig} en particulier.
-% \item[\upack{caption}] Le paquetage \upack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}\imess{W0033} offre de nombreuses façons d'adapter les
-% captions (légendes) dans des environnements flottants tels que \env{figure} et \env{table}, et coopère
-% avec de nombreux autres paquetages.
-% \item[\upack{caption2}] Le paquetage\,\footnote{Ce texte provient de la documentation du paquetage \pack{caption},
-% et a été traduit. Les paquetages \pack{caption} et \pack{caption2} ont le même auteur, \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}.}
-% \pack{caption2}~\cite{caption2}\imess{W0034} était considéré comme étant une version expérimentale
-% parallèle du paquetage normal \pack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung} et a été supplanté par la nouvelle version~\mbox{3.0}
-% du paquetage normal \pack{caption} en décembre 2003. \pack{caption2} est encore supporté
-% d'une certaine manière, ce qui signifie qu'il fera partie des prochaines distributions et que les erreurs
-% seront encore corrigées, afin que les documents existants utilisant ce paquetage puissent encore être
-% compilés. Mais \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt} \emph{ne répondra plus} aux questions concernant ce paquetage sauf
-% pour les questions sur le passage à~la nouvelle version du paquetage \pack{caption}. Et ce paquetage
-% \emph{ne sera ni adapté ni amélioré} dans le futur.
-%
-% Vous êtes donc priés de ne pas utiliser ce paquetage pour de nouveaux documents. Il est vieux, il est
-% obsolète et il commence à~sentir mauvais!
-%
-% Vous êtes également priés d'ignorer tous les conseils dans des livres ou autres documents qui essayent de
-% vous dire que le paquetage \pack{caption2} devrait être utilisé à~la place du paquetage \pack{caption} -- ces
-% conseils sont démodés depuis décembre 2003.
-% \item[\xfile{CATALOG}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) qui contient des informations basiques sur le
-% paquetage \upack{minitoc} (résumé, date, auteur, version, licence).
-% \item[catcode] Abréviation de «~code de catégorie~» (\emph{category code}). Tout\,\footnote{Cette définition
-% est tirée du <<~\textsl{The \TeX{}book}~>>~\cite{texbook,ftb}.} d'abord, il est sage d'avoir une idée précise de ce
-% que votre clavier envoie à~la machine. Il y~a 256~caractères que \TeX\ peut rencontrer à~chaque étape, dans un
-% fichier ou dans une ligne de texte frappé directement sur votre terminal. Ces 256~caractères sont classés en
-% 16~catégories numérotées de~0 à~15. Voir la table~\vref{t+J+catcodes}.
-% \begin{table}[!tp]
-% \def?{\phantom{0}}
-% \centering
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Codes de catégorie}\label{t+J+catcodes}
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}clZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% &\textbf{Catégorie}&\textbf{Signification}\\
-% \midrule
-% ?0&Caractère d'échappement&(\texttt{\bs}~habituellement)\\
-% ?1&Début de groupe&(\texttt{\{}~habituellement)\\
-% ?2&Fin de groupe&(\texttt{\}}~habituellement)\\
-% ?3&Début et fin de mode mathématique&(\texttt{\$}~habituellement)\\
-% ?4&Taquet d'alignement&(\texttt{\&}~habituellement)\\
-% ?5&Fin de ligne&(\emph{return}~habituellement)\\
-% ?6&Paramètre&(\texttt{\#}~habituellement)\\
-% ?7&Exposant&(\texttt{\textasciicircum}~habituellement)\\
-% ?8&Indice&(\texttt{\_}~habituellement)\\
-% ?9&Caractère ignoré&(\emph{null}~habituellement)\\
-% 10&Espace&(\texttt{\textvisiblespace}~habituellement)\\
-% 11&Lettre&(\texttt{A}, \ldots, \texttt{Z} et~\texttt{a}, \ldots, \texttt{z})\\
-% 12&Autre caractère&(aucun de ceux ci-dessus ou ci-dessous)\\
-% 13&Caractère actif&(\texttt{\textasciitilde}~habituellement)\\
-% 14&Caractère commentaire&(\texttt{\%}~habituellement)\\
-% 15&Caractère invalide&(\emph{delete}~habituellement)\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \end{table}
-% Il n'est pas nécessaire que vous appreniez ces numéros de code; l'important est que \TeX\ connaisse 16~types
-% différents de caractères. Tout d'abord, «~\textsl{The \TeX{}book}~» vous laisse croire qu'il n'y a que deux
-% types --- le caractère d'échappement et les autres --- puis il vous parle de deux types de plus, les symboles de
-% groupement~\texttt{\{} et~\texttt{\}}. Le code de catégorie pour tout caractère peut être changé à~tout moment,
-% mais il est habituellement prudent de se conformer à~un schéma particulier.
-% \item[\upack{ccaption}] Le paquetage \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption}\imess{W0035} fournit des commandes pour des
-% \og{} captions de continuation\fg, des captions non numérotés, et un en-tête de légende pour tout
-% environnement. Des méthodes sont fournies pour définir des captions à~utiliser en dehors des environnements
-% flottants et pour définir de nouveaux environnements flottants et des sous-flottants. Des outils sont fournis
-% pour définir vos propres styles de captions.
-% \item[\upack{chngpage}] Le paquetage \pack{chngpage} (de \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) fournit des commandes pour changer
-% la mise en page au milieu d'un document et pour tester de manière robuste la mise en page pour les pages
-% paires ou impaires.
-% \item[Chapter~0]
-% Certains documents ne commencent pas par le chapitre numéro un, mais par un chapitre numéroté zéro (ou même
-% avec un numéro plus bizarre). Ceci posait un sérieux problème dans les anciennes versions du paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc}: les minitocs n'apparaissaient plus dans les bons chapitres, et une première correction
-% fut l'introduction de commandes spécifiques (\com{firstchapteris} et analogues). Avec l'ajout de la
-% numérotation absolue des fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-tables (voir \emph{absolue} plus haut), le
-% problème fut résolu dans \upack{minitoc} version~\#23, et ces commandes devinrent obsolètes.
-% Voir la section~\vref{faq.5}.
-% \item[\upack{chapterbib}] Le paquetage \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib} permet d'avoir plusieurs bibliographies
-% dans un document \LaTeX, y~compris des éléments cités (par \com{cite}) dans plus d'une bibliographie.
-% Un dépit du nom \og{}\pack{chapterbib}\fg, \emph{les bibliographies sont pour chaque fichier inclus par
-% \com{include}}, pas nécessairement pour chaque chapitre.
-% \item[\uopt{checkfiles}]\ioptd{checkfiles}
-% Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle teste chaque mini-table pour voir si elle est vide; puis les
-% mini-tables vides \emph{ne sont pas} imprimées. C'est le choix par défaut. L'option contraire
-% (\opt{nocheckfiles}) imprime aussi les mini-tables vides, qui sont laides. Voir la
-% section~\vref{o+checkfiles}.
-% \item[\upack{CJK}] Le système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg} et autres) est un ensemble de paquetages et de
-% fontes pour préparer des documents \LaTeX\ dans certaines langues orientales, telles que le chinois,
-% le coréen (fontes Hangûl ou Hanja), le japonais et le thaï, ainsi que certaines variantes du russe.
-% Les titres des mini-tables pour ces langues
-% proviennent de fichiers du système \pack{CJK} et ont été insérés dans des fichiers \suffix{.mld} lorsque ceci
-% était possible, ou dans des fichiers \suffix{.mlo} lorsque le codage est incompatible avec le mécanisme
-% \isuffix{.ins}\isuffix{.dtx}\isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{.ins/.dtx};
-% le fichier \suffix{.mld} doit alors charger le fichier \suffix{.mlo} correspondant.
-% \pack{CJK} implante les codages GB, Big~5, JIS, SJIS, KS, UTF~8 et CNS (sur 16~bits, sauf UTF~8 sur 24~bits).
-% Voir le tableau~\vref{t+jargon+CJK}.
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Schémas de codage implantés dans \upack{CJK}}\label{t+jargon+CJK}\ipack{CJK}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Codage}&\textbf{1~octet}&\textbf{2~octets}&\textbf{3~octets}\\
-% \midrule
-% GB&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF7}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\
-% Big~5&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF9}&\texttt{0x40}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\
-% JIS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF4}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\
-% SJIS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&\texttt{0x40}--\texttt{0xFC}&---\\
-% KS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFD}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\
-% UTF~8&\texttt{0xC0}--\texttt{0xEF}&\texttt{0x80}--\texttt{0xBF}&\texttt{0x80}--\texttt{0xBF}\\
-% CNS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% Certains schémas de codage (Big~5, SJIS) ont des trous dans le domaine du deuxième octet.
-% Il est difficile de lire avec les codages Big~5 et SJIS directement vers \TeX\ puisque certaines des valeurs
-% utilisées pour les deuxièmes octets des codages sont réservées pour des caractères de contrôle:
-% «~\texttt{\{}~», «~\texttt{\}}~» et «~\texttt{\bs}~». Le fait de les redéfinir casse beaucoup de choses dans
-% \LaTeX; pour éviter ceci, normalement des préprocesseurs sont utilisés pour convertir le deuxième octet en
-% un nombre suivi d'un caractère délimiteur. Pour plus de détails, voir~\cite{lunde1993,lunde}; \name{Ken}{Lunde}
-% y~présente en grand détail tous les codages \pack{CJK} qui sont ou ont été utilisés.
-% Notez que le paquetage \upack{minitoc} utilise les fichiers \suffix{.mlo} pour contourner ce problème;
-% voir la section~\vref{fo+lang}.
-% \item[classe] La \textbf{classe}\,\footnote{Cette note a été extraite de~\cite{NSSL2E}, puis adaptée.}
-% est la première information que \LaTeX{} a besoin de connaître lors du traitement d'un fichier d'entrée;
-% c'est le type de document que l'auteur souhaite produite. Ceci est spécifié par la commande
-% \com{documentclass}.
-% \begin{quote}
-% \com{documentclass}\verb|[|\emph{options}\verb|]{|\emph{classe}\verb|}|
-% \end{quote}
-% \noindent Ici \emph{classe} spécifie le type du document à~produire.
-% Le tableau~\vref{t+documentclasses} liste les classes standard de documents~\cite{classes}. La distribution \LaTeXe{}
-% fournit d'autres classes pour d'autres documents, y~compris des lettres et des transparents,
-% mais le paquetage \upack{minitoc} n'a pas été testé avec toutes ces classes.
-% Les paramètres \emph{options} adaptent le comportement de la classe du document. Les options doivent être
-% séparées par des virgules. Les classes standard supportées par le paquetage \upack{minitoc} sont listées
-% dans la section~\vref{s+supported+classes}.
-% \begin{table}[!tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Classes standard de documents}\label{t+documentclasses}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Classe}&\textbf{Usage}\\
-% \midrule
-% \class{article}~\cite{classes}&Pour des articles dans des journaux scientifiques, des présentations, des rapports courts,
-% de la documentation de programmes, des invitations, \ldots\\
-% \class{proc}~\cite{proc}&Pour préparer les comptes-rendus d'une conférence; analogue à~la classe \class{article}.\\
-% \class{ltxdoc}~\cite{ltxdoc}&Pour préparer la documentation d'un paquetage ou d'une classe; analogue à~la classe
-% \class{article}.\\
-% \class{ltnews}~\cite{ltnews}&Pour préparer l'annonce d'une version de \LaTeX{}; analogue à~la classe \class{article}.\\
-% \class{report}~\cite{classes}&Pour des rapports plus longs contenant plusieurs chapitres, de petits livres, des thèses, \ldots\\
-% \class{book}~\cite{classes}&Pour de vrais livres.\\
-% \class{letter}&Pour des lettres; comme cette classe n'a pas de commandes de sectionnement, n'utilisez pas
-% \upack{minitoc} avec cette classe.\\
-% \class{slides}~\cite{slides}&Pour des transparents; cette classe utilise de grandes lettres sans empattements. Vous
-% pouvez aussi envisager d'utiliser Beamer\TeX{}\,$^a$ à~la place. N'utilisez pas \upack{minitoc} avec ces classes.\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{{\froff$^a$\phantom{-}\url{http://www.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/beamer/doc/beameruserguide.pdf}}\hfill\null}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \end{table}
-% \item[\feat{close}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté immédiatement après
-% (fermeture, \emph{close}) l'insertion du fichier auxiliaire pour un type donné de mini-table.
-% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
-% Voir le fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, dans la section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}.
-% \item[\uscrp{cmk}]\iscrp{cmk}
-% Un exemple de script \emph{shell} pour préparer les fichiers de documentation
-% en format PostScript à~partir de ceux en format PDF.
-% Vous devriez adapter ce script à~vos besoins.
-% \item[CMR] Pour «~Computer Modern Roman~». Le sous-ensemble romain des fontes «~Computer Modern~».
-% Voir «~Computer Modern~» ci-dessous.
-% \item[codage] Un codage (\emph{encoding}) spécifie l'ordre selon lequel les caractères apparaissent dans la
-% fonte (par exemple, si le soixante-quinzième caractère est un «~A~»). Le codage de fonte le plus courant
-% pour \TeX\ est OT1. L'autre option prédéfinie est~T1 (\TeX\ étendu). Il y~a aussi
-% US~ASCII (7~bits), ISO~Latin-1 (8~bits), Adobe Standard Encoding, UTF8 (Unicode~\cite{chou,unicode-des,unicode}),
-% etc. Voir la table~\vref{t+var-encodings} et~\cite{encguide,enc-inter}.
-% \begin{table}[!tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Codages divers}\label{t+var-encodings}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Codage}&\textbf{Commentaire}\\
-% \midrule
-% \texttt{ansinew}&Codage ANSI pour Windows~3.1, extension de Latin-1.\\
-% \texttt{applemac}&Codage Macintosh.\\
-% \texttt{ascii}&Codage ASCII pour l'intervalle 32--127.\\
-% \texttt{cp1250}&Page de code Windows 1250 (Europe centrale et orientale).\\
-% \texttt{cp1251}&Page de code Windows 1251 (cyrillique).\\
-% \texttt{cp1252}&Synonyme de \texttt{ansinew}.\\
-% \texttt{cp1257}&Page de code Windows 1257 (baltique).\\
-% \texttt{cp437}&Page de code IBM~437, qui est la page de code
-% américaine d'origine et contient les lettres, les
-% chiffres, des symboles mathématiques et quelques
-% caractères utiles pour construire des pseudo-graphiques.\\
-% \texttt{cp437de}&Page de code IBM~437 (version allemande).\\
-% \texttt{cp850}&Page de code IBM~850, presque identique à~ISO~Latin~1,
-% mais la disposition des caractères n'est pas la même.\\
-% \texttt{cp852}&Page de code IBM~852.\\
-% \texttt{cp855}&Page de code IBM~855 (cyrillique).\\
-% \texttt{cp865}&Page de code IBM~865.\\
-% \texttt{cp866}&Page de code IBM~866 (MS-DOS cyrillique).\\
-% \texttt{decmulti}&Codage du jeu international de caractères DEC.\\
-% \texttt{latin1}&Codage ASCII plus les caractères nécessaires
-% à~la plupart des langues européennes occidentales, y~compris
-% le danois, le néerlandais, l'anglais, le féroéen, le
-% finnois, le flamand, le français, l'allemand,
-% l'islandais, l'italien, le norvégien, le portugais,
-% l'espagnol et le suédois. Certaines langues non
-% européennes, comme l'hawaïen et l'indonésien, sont aussi
-% écrites avec ce jeu de caractères.\\
-% \texttt{latin2}&Codage ASCII plus les caractères nécessaires
-% à~la plupart des langues d'Europe centrale, y~compris
-% le croate, le tchèque, le hongrois, le polonais, le
-% roumain, le slovaque et le slovène.\\
-% \texttt{latin3}&Codage ASCII plus les caractères nécessaires
-% à~l'espéranto, le maltais, le turc et le galicien.
-% Cependant, \texttt{latin5} est le jeu de caractères
-% préféré pour le turc.\\
-% \texttt{latin4}&Codage ASCII plus les caractères nécessaires
-% pour les langues baltes (latvien ou letton, estonien et
-% lituanien), le groendlandais et le lapon (sâme, sámi).\\
-% \texttt{latin5}&Est essentiellement identique à~\texttt{latin1},
-% excepté que certains caractères turcs remplacent des
-% lettres islandaises moins souvent utilisées.\\
-% \texttt{next}&Codage pour Next.\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \end{table}
-% \item[\texttt{comp.text.tex}] Le groupe de discussion Usenet sur \TeX\ et \LaTeX, en anglais.
-% \item[compteur] Un registre \TeX\ contenant une valeur entière. Il~y a 256 compteurs (de~0 à~255) dans \TeX, mais
-% \LaTeX\ en utilise certains, et de nombreux paquetages ont besoin de quelques compteurs pour leur propre
-% usage. Une version étendue, dérivée de \TeX, \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex}, permet davantage de compteurs.
-% Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$), lui aussi, permet davantage de compteurs.
-% \item[Computer Modern] Pour \og Computer Modern\fg. Un ensemble de fontes~\cite{cmt} conçues
-% par \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth} pour \TeX. Initialement, elles étaient construites avec
-% {\MF}~\cite{meta-des,metabook} (un programme lui aussi créé par \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth}),
-% mais aujourd'hui il en existe des versions PostScript type~1 (vectoriel), avec des extensions (pour les caractères
-% accentués, principalement): les fontes EC (\emph{European Computer Modern}), les fontes cm-super, etc.
-% \item[CTAN] Le \emph{Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network} (réseau d'archives \TeX\ complètes), un ensemble
-% d'archives informatiques contenant la plupart des ressources relatives à~\TeX{} (telles que fontes,
-% logiciels, documentations, paquetages). Elles sont accessibles par Internet. Les sites participant à~ce
-% réseau CTAN sont\,\footnote{Cette liste peut changer dans le futur.}:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \texttt{ftp.dante.de} (Cologne [Köln], Allemagne)
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item FTP anonyme \texttt{/tex-archive} (\texttt{/pub/tex} \texttt{/pub/archive})
-% \item accès \texttt{rsync} sur {\froff\url{rsync://rsync.dante.de/CTAN/}}
-% \item Accès World Wide Web sur {\froff\url{http://www.dante.de/}}
-% \item Administrateur: {\froff\url{mailto:ftpmaint@dante.de}}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item\texttt{ftp.tex.ac.uk} (Cambridge, Angleterre, Royaume Uni)
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item FTP anonyme \texttt{/tex-archive} (\texttt{/pub/tex} \texttt{/pub/archive})
-% \item accès \texttt{rsync} sur {\froff\url{rsync://rsync.tex.ac.uk/CTAN/}}
-% \item montage NFS depuis {\froff\url{nfs.tex.ac.uk:/tex-archive}}
-% \item accès World Wide Web sur {\froff\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/}}
-% \item Administrateur: {\froff\url{mailto:ctan-uk@tex.ac.uk}}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item \texttt{tug.ctan.org} (Colchester, Vermont, USA)
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item FTP anonyme \texttt{/tex-archive} (\texttt{/pub/archive})
-% \item accès World Wide Web sur {\froff\url{http://www.ctan.org/}}
-% \item Administrateur: {\froff\url{mailto:tex@ctan.tug.org}}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% Il y a aussi de nombreux sites \og{} miroirs \fg{} de ces archives principales.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{D}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{D}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\pack{dblaccnt}] J'ai dû utiliser le paquetage \pack{dblaccnt}~\cite{dblaccnt} pour préparer l'entrée
-% <<~The pdf\TeX\ Program~>>~\cite{han} dans la bibliographie, parce que le prénom de son auteur comporte un
-% accent double \mbox{(\namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han})}; I used it also to typeset some other vietnamese words.
-% \item[\texttt{de.comp.text.tex}] Le groupe de discussion Usenet sur \TeX\ et \LaTeX, en allemand.
-% \item[\emph{depth}] Voir \textbf{profondeur} plus loin.
-% \item[descripteur] (de fichier). Une entité logicielle décrivant l'interface entre un programme et un fichier.
-% Pour la plupart des programmes et des systèmes d'exploitation, le nombre de descripteurs de fichiers est
-% limité. Pour {\TeX} et {\LaTeX}, il y a 16~descripteurs de fichiers en écriture et 16~descripteurs de
-% fichiers en lecture.
-% \item[\xfile{devanagari.sty}] Le paquetage \emph{\devnag{} pour \TeX{}} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari})\cite{devanagari}
-% offre un moyen pour composer avec une haute qualité du texte \devnag{} avec \TeX{}. \devnag{} est une
-% écriture utilisée pour écrire et imprimer le sanskrit et de nombreuses langues d'Inde du nord et centrale
-% telles que l'hindi et le marathi, ainsi que le népalais. Le paquetage \packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} a été initialement
-% développé en mai~1991 par \name{Frans}{Velthuis} pour l'Université de Groningen, aux Pays-Bas, et ce fut le
-% premier système à~supporter l'écriture \devnag{} pour \TeX{}.
-% \item[dispositifs] Un dispositif (\emph{feature}) (au sens du paquetage \upack{minitoc}) est un ensemble
-% d'actions qui est exécuté lors de chaque occurrence d'un certain type de mini-table. Cing dispositifs sont
-% associés à~chaque type de mini-table: un dispositif «~\feat{before}~» (exécuté avant la mini-table complète), un dispositif
-% «~\feat{after}~» (exécuté après la mini-table complète),
-% un dispositif «~\feat{open}~» (exécuté juste avant l'insertion du fichier auxiliaire contenant la minitable),
-% un dispositif «~\feat{close}~» (exécuté juste après l'insertion du fichier auxiliaire contenant la minitable),
-% et un dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~», qui est exécuté avec la
-% mini-table pour forcer son style de page.
-% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
-% ^^A \item[\xfile{duplex2v.pro}] Un fichier d'en-tête PostScript, qui essaye d'activer l'impression en recto-verso.
-% ^^A Il fonctionne avec certaines imprimantes PostScript HP et Canon.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{E}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{E}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\textbf{ECM}] Un exemple minimal complet est le plus petit document complet possible qui illustre un
-% problème. Un exemple minimal ne devrait aucun paquetegage ni code qui ne contribue pas au problème, mais
-% il doit contenir une classe de document et l'environnement \env{document} (d'après~\cite{talbot-mini}).
-% Voir aussi~\cite{preusse}, \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=minxampl} et
-% \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=askquestion} pour de bons conseils.
-% \item[\texttt{em}] Une unité de longueur égale (approximativement) à~la largeur de la lettre~\og m\fg
-% dans la fonte courante. En typographie, c'est un \og cadratin\fg.
-% \item[\uscrp{emk}]\iscrp{emk}
-% Un exemple de script \emph{shell} pour préparer la documentation en anglais du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Le script \scrp{imk} doit avoir été exécuté au préalable. Voir le point~\vref{IN10}.
-% \item[\xfile{en-mtc.bst}] Un style bibliographique similaire au style \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plain.bst} standard, mais
-% modifié avec l'outil \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst} pour ajouter un champ \texttt{URL}. Les noms de famille
-% des auteurs et rédacteurs (\emph{editors}) sont en petites capitales, les années en chiffres de style ancien.
-% \item[environnement] Un environnement (\emph{environment}) est un domaine délimité dans un document, où des
-% règles spéciales s'appliquent. Un tel domaine est délimité
-% par \verb|\begin{|\emph{env}\verb|}| \ldots{} \verb|\end{|\emph{env}\verb|}| et peut prendre des arguments,
-% comme ceci:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|\begin{minipage}[t]{.5\textwidth}|\\
-% \verb|\end{minipage}|
-% \end{quote}
-% \item[\packa{\eTeX}{etex}] \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex} est une version étendue de \TeX, avec bien plus de
-% registres et de nombreuses nouvelles primitives; elle supporte aussi l'écriture de gauche à~droite et de
-% droite à~gauche.
-% \item[\upack{ethiop}]\ipack{ethiop} Un paquetage~\cite{ethiop} \LaTeX\ offrant le support de la langue éthiopienne pour
-% le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
-% \item[extension] Voir «~suffixe~» plus loin.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{F}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{F}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\xfile{farsi.sty}] Voir \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX} ci-dessous.
-% \item[\upack{Farsi\TeX}]\ipacka{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX} Un paquetage~\cite{farsi} pour composer un document dans la langue \lopt{farsi} (iranien, persan).
-% Voir~{\froff\url{http://www.farsitex.org}}. Mais ce n'est actuellement disponible que pour \LaTeX2.09.
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+farsi1} et~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}.
-% \item[features] Voir «~dispositifs~» plus haut.
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\env{filecontents}] Un environnement \LaTeX{} spécial. Il permet de créer un fichier (dont le nom est donné
-% en argument de cet environnement) en écrivant le contenu de l'environnement dans ce fichier.
-% \begin{quote}
-% \texttt{\bs begin\{filecontents\}\{\emph{fichier}\}}\\
-% \texttt{\ldots\emph{contenu}~\ldots}\\
-% \texttt{\bs end\{filecontents\}}
-% \end{quote}
-% Cet environnement devrait être utilisé \emph{avant} \com{documentclass}.
-% Il est utilisé dans \xfile{minitoc.ins} pour préparer les fichiers \suffix{.mlo} (voir la
-% section~\vref{fo+lang}) et quelques fichiers utilisés dans la compilation de la documentation.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\com{firstchapteris}] Une commande obsolète, utilisée temporairement pour contourner le problème
-% du Chapitre~0;
-% voir~\textbf{Chapitre~0} et \textbf{absolue (numérotation)} plus haut, et la section~\vref{faq.5}.
-% \item[\com{firstpartis}] Analogue à~\com{firstchapteris} ci-dessus.
-% \item[\com{firstsectionis}] Analogue à~\com{firstchapteris} ci-dessus.
-% \item[\pack{float}] Ce paquetage~\cite{float} (de \name{Anselm}{Lingnau})\imess{I0053} améliore l'interface de définition
-% d'objets flottants tels que figures et tableaux en \LaTeX. Il ajoute la notion de <<~style de flottant~>>
-% qui régit l'aspect des flottants. De nouvelles sortes de flottants peuvent être définies en utilisant une
-% commande \com{newfloat} analogue à~\com{newtheorem}. Ce paquetage incorpore aussi la fonctionnalité du
-% paquetage \pack{here} de \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}, donnant aux environnements flottants une option
-% \texttt{[H]} qui signifie <<~METTEZ-LE ICI~>> (par opposition à~l'option standard \texttt{[h]} qui signifie
-% <<~vous pouvez le mettre ici si vous voulez~>>).
-% \item[\com{FloatBarrier}]
-% Une macro du paquetage \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins}. Elle établit une «~barrière~» contre la dérive
-% des éléments flottants (tels que figures ou tableaux).
-% \item[\pack{floatrow}] Ce paquetage~\cite{floatrow} (de \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko})\imess{I0053} est une extension du paquetage
-% \pack{float}~\cite{float} (de \name{Anselm}{Lingnau}), réutilisant son code, avec des extensions venant du
-% paquetage \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} (de \name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}).
-% \item[\pack{flowfram}] Ce\imess{W0097} paquetage~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} est conçu pour vous permettre de créer des
-% blocs (\emph{frames}) de texte dans un document de manière que le contenu de l'environnement \env{document}
-% coule d'un bloc au suivant dans l'ordre où ils ont été définis. Ceci est utile pour créer des posters ou des
-% magazines ou toute autre forme de document qui n'est pas conforme à~la mise en page standard sur une ou deux colonnes.
-% Comme ce paquetage définit son propre système de minitocs, il est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc}.
-% \item[\uscrp{fmk}]\iscrp{fmk}
-% Un exemple de script \emph{shell} pour préparer la documentation en français du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Le script \scrp{imk} doit avoir été exécuté au préalable. Voir le point~\vref{IN10}.
-% \item[\upack{fncychap}] Le paquetage \imess{W0086}\pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap} fournit diverses commandes pour changer
-% le format utilisé pour certaines en-têtes (chapitres) dans les classes stantard de documents de \LaTeXe:
-% \class{book} et \class{report}.
-% Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.fncychap} et la
-% section~\vref{faq.38}).
-% \item[\texttt{fr.comp.text.tex}] Le groupe de discussion Usenet sur \TeX\ et \LaTeX, en français.
-% \item[\upack{franc}]\ipack{franc} Un petit paquetage utilisé pour préparer la documentation en français. Il est
-% produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item[\upack{frbib}]\ipack{frbib} Un petit paquetage utilisé pour préparer la bibliographie de la documentation en
-% français. Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item[\xfile{fr-mtc.bst}] Un fichier de style bibliographique utilisé pour préparer la bibliographie de la
-% documentation en français.
-% Il a été amélioré pour le français par \name{Ronan}{Keryell} en partant de la version standard
-% \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plain.bst}, puis j'ai ajouté quelques adaptations pour le français (comme les noms de famille en
-% petites capitales pour les auteurs et les éditeurs, les années en chiffres anciens),
-% puis je l'ai modifié avec l'outil \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst}.
-% \item[\upack{frnew.sty}]\ipack{frnew} Un petit paquetage utilisé pour préparer la documentation en français. Il est
-% produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{G}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{G}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\pack{geometry}] Le paquetage \pack{geometry}~\cite{geometry} fournit une interface utilisateur flexible
-% et complète pour les dimensions de la page. Vous pouvez les spécifier en utilisant des paramètres intuitifs
-% pour obtenir votre mise en page désirée. Par exemple, si vous voulez établir des marges (à~gauche, à~droite,
-% en haut et en bas) à~2\,cm de chaque bord du papier, il vous suffit de dire:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|\usepackage[margin=2cm]{geometry}|
-% \end{quote}
-% Ce paquetage puissant (et recommandé) est utilisé dans certains des exemples de documents et dans la présente
-% documentation.
-% \item[\upack{guarani}]\ipack{guarani} Un paquetage \LaTeX\ pour composer du texte guarani, la principale langue parlée
-% au Paraguay.
-% Le fichier \xfile{guarani.ldf}, inclus dans ce paquetage, définit les titres. Voir~\cite{guarani} et la
-% section~\vref{s+mld+guarani}.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{H}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{H}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\upack{hangcaption}] Le paquetage \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption} définit une variante de la
-% commande \com{caption} pour produire des captions (légendes) avec une indentation pendante
-% (\emph{hanging indentation}), c'est-à-dire dont la première ligne déborde sur la gauche. Ce paquetage est
-% sans doute obsolète (1992, \LaTeX2.09).
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[Hindi] Pour la langue hindi, voir le paquetage \packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}~\cite{devanagari} plus haut. Le
-% paquetage \upack{minitoc} accepte les options de langue \lopt{devanagari} et \lopt{hindi}, qui sont
-% synonymes. Une option de langue \lopt{hindi-modern} est également disponible.
-% Voir aussi~\cite{hindi99} sur la langue hindi.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\emph{hint}] Une indication, un indice pour détecter un problème. C'est aussi un message écrit (dans
-% le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}) par l'option \optd{hints} (voir ci-dessous).
-% \item[\uopt{hints}]\ioptd{hints} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle vérifie l'ordre ce chargement de certains
-% paquetages, l'ordre des invocations de certaines commandes de \upack{minitoc}, la cohérence entre les
-% principales commandes de \upack{minitoc}, etc., et produit des avertissements et d'autres indications
-% (\emph{hints}) utiles (principalement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}).
-% C'est une option active par défaut
-% (utilisez l'option \opt{nohints} pour sauter ces vérifications).
-% \item[\upack{H\LaTeX}]\ipacka{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} Un système pour écrire des documents en langue coréenne, en utilisant \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$)
-% (voir plus bas).
-% Écrit par \name{Un}{Koaunghi}~\cite[en~coréen]{HLATEX}. Il utilise des fontes Hangûl
-% ou Hanja spéciales et le codage UTF-8 en entrée.
-% \item[hyperlien] (\emph{hyperlink}) Dans un document, une référence à~un autre objet qui peut être trouvé de
-% manière dynamique (en cliquant avec la souris). Ceci requiert un type spécial de document (PDF, PostScript
-% avec dispositifs d'hypertexte) et un visualisateur adapté (visualisateur PDF, visualisateur PostScript
-% récent). Ceci est pratique pour naviguer dans un document ou plusieurs documents, qui peuvent être des
-% documents distants.
-% \lneed{4}
-% \item[\upack{hyperref}] Le\SMM{\lmess{W0023}\\\lmess{W0028}\\\lmess{W0030}\\\lmess{W0039}}
-% paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web} est utilisé pour modifier les commandes
-% de références croisées de \LaTeX\ afin de produire une certaine sorte de commandes \com{special};
-% elles sont des prémices de l'ensemble de commandes \com{special} définis pour les processeurs de
-% \texttt{dvi} vers \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}, pour les commandes \texttt{pdfmark} incluses pour le traitement par
-% \tool{Acrobat Distiller} (\tool{dvips} et \tool{dvipsone}), pour \tool{dviwindo}, pour \textbf{pdf\TeX},
-% pour \textbf{\TeX4ht} et pour les outils de conversion en PDF et HTML de \tool{VTEX}.
-%
-% Ce paquetage dérive de, et est bâti sur, le travail du projet \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX},
-% décrit dans~\cite{hypertex}. Il étend la fonctionnalité de toutes les commandes de
-% références croisées de \LaTeX\ (y~compris la table des matières, les bibliographies, etc.) pour produire des
-% commandes \com{special} qu'un programme pilote (\emph{driver}) pourra transformer en liens
-% hypertextes; il fournit aussi de nouvelles commandes permettant à~l'utilisateur d'écrire des liens
-% hypertextes (hyperliens) \emph{ad hoc}, y~compris ceux vers des documents externes et des URLs.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{I}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{I}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\upack{ifmtarg}] Le paquetage \pack{ifmtarg}~\cite{ifmtarg} fournit une commande si-alors-sinon
-% (\emph{if-then-else}) pour tester si un argument de macro est vide («~vide~» signifiant seulement zéro espaces ou
-% plus).
-% \item[\pack{ifthen}] Le paquetage \pack{ifthen}~\cite{ifthen} définit une commande \com{ifthenelse} pour \LaTeXe.
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item [\uscrp{imk}]\iscrp{imk} Un exemple de script \emph{shell}, qui prépare le paquetage \upack{minitoc}
-% depuis \xfile{minitoc.ins} et \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; notez que \scrp{imk} doit être exécuté avant
-% de lancer \scrp{emk} ou \scrp{fmk}. Voir le point~\vref{IN10}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\uopt{insection}]\iopt{insection} L'option de paquetage \opt{insection}\imess{W0056} charge le paquetage \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins}
-% avec les options adéquates pour éviter que les éléments flottants (tels que figures et tableaux) dérivent
-% en dehors de leurs sections, et charge aussi le paquetage \pack{flafter} (décrit dans~\cite{ltoutput}
-% et~\cite[page~292]{TLC2F}).
-% Cette option de paquetage est recommandée si vous utilisez des sectlofs ou
-% des sectlots dans votre document. Voir la section~\vref{mtcsecttoc}.
-% \item[insertion] Les commandes d'insertion du paquetage \upack{minitoc} insèrent une mini-table dans le document.
-% Une commande de \emph{préparation} correspondante doit avoir été invoquée (une seule fois) auparavant.
-% Les commandes d'insertion sont (voir la table~\vref{t+SUC-PI}):
-% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}
-% \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof}, \com{partlot},\\
-% \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}, \com{minilot},\\
-% \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof}, \com{sectlot}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \item[\xfile{INSTALL}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) l'installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir le chapitre~\vref{c+installation}.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{J}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{J}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\com{jobname}] Une primitive \TeX\ contenant le nom du document en préparation, c'est-à-dire le nom
-% du fichier lu en premier par \TeX{} (ou \LaTeX), sans son suffixe. Elle est très utile pour construire les
-% noms d'autres fichiers.
-% \item[\uclass{jura}] La classe \imess{W0029}\class{jura}~\cite{jura}, de \name{Felix}{Braun}, est \emph{incompatible} avec le
-% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle est utilisée pour des documents juridiques en allemand.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{K}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{K}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\uopt{k-loose}]\ioptd{k-loose} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc} utile si votre document est écrit avec une des
-% classes de \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. Cette option essaye d'établir un espacement peu serré (\emph{loose})
-% dans les mini-tables. Analogue à~l'option de paquetage \optd{loose} pour les classes standard.
-% \item[\uopt{k-tight}]\iopt{k-tight} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc} utile si votre document est écrit avec une des
-% classes de \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. Cette option essaye d'établir un espacement serré (\emph{tight}) dans les
-% mini-tables. Analogue à~l'option de paquetage \opt{tight} pour les classes standard.
-% \item[\packa{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX}] Un projet~\cite{kannadatex} pour utiliser \LaTeX{} pout la composition
-% dans la langue Kannada language. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+kannada}.
-% \item[\KOMAScript]
-% {\KOMAScript}\imess{I0043}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} est un ensemble très complexe.
-% Vous pouvez le voir, car il n'y a pas seulement
-% une seule classe ou un seul paquetage, mais tout un ensemble de classes et paquetages nombreux. Les
-% classes (\class{scrartcl}, \class{scrbook}, \class{scrlettr}, \class{scrlttr2} et
-% \class{scrreprt}) sont bien les contreparties des classes standard, mais elles n'ont jamais seulement les
-% mêmes commandes, environnements, options et possibilités optionnelles que les classes standard et ne donnent
-% pas un résultat de même aspect.
-%
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Les classes \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} et \class{scrartcl} sont compatibles avec le
-% paquetage \upack{minitoc}, avec certaines précautions (voir la section~\vref{special.entries}).
-% Les classes \class{scrlettr} et \class{scrlttr2} n'ont pas de commandes
-% de sectionnement, donc le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est sans objet avec elles.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \KOMAScript{} offre des tas de classes, paquetages, commandes, environnements et possibilités. Vous en
-% trouverez certains aussi dans les classes standard, mais il y en a beaucoup que vous ne trouverez pas.
-% Certains sont même des ajouts au noyau de \LaTeX.
-%
-% Les classes principales de l'ensemble {\KOMAScript} sont conçues comme des contreparties des classes
-% \LaTeX{} standard. Ceci signifie que l'ensemble {\KOMAScript} contient des remplacements pour les trois
-% classes standard \class{book}, \class{report} et \class{article}. Il y a aussi un remplacement pour la
-% classe standard \class{letter}.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{L}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{L}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[Lambda] Le format (au sens \TeX\ du terme) \LaTeX{} adapté aux capacités spéciales du système
-% Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$) est appelé «~\emph{Lambda}~»~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$).
-% \item[Lamed] Le format (au sens \TeX\ du terme) \LaTeX{} adapté aux capacités spéciales du système
-% \pack{Aleph}~($\aleph$) est appelé «~\emph{Lamed}~»~(\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[height=10pt,keepaspectratio]{lamed3.png}}\/).
-% \item[\LaTeX] \LaTeX~\cite{latex-manual} est un système de préparation de documents qui convient fort bien pour
-% produire des documents scientifiques et mathématiques de haute qualité typographique. Il convient aussi pour
-% produire toutes sortes d'autres documents, depuis de simples lettres jusqu'à des livres complets.
-% \LaTeX{} utilise \TeX~\cite{texbook,ftb} comme moteur de composition (d'après~\cite{NSSL2E}).
-%
-% \LaTeX{} est en fait un ensemble de macros \TeX{} qui permet aux auteurs de
-% composer et d'imprimer leur document avec la plus haute
-% qualité typographique, en utilisant une mise en page
-% prédéfinie professionnelle. \LaTeX{} avait été originellement
-% écrit par \name{Leslie}{Lamport}~\cite{latex-manual}. Il utilise le
-% formateur \TeX{} comme moteur de composition typographique.
-% Aujourd'hui, la maintenance de \LaTeX{} est faite par
-% \name{Frank}{Mittelbach} et son équipe.
-%
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% En 1994, le système \LaTeX{} fut (profondément) mis à~jour par l'équipe de \LaTeX3,
-% conduite par \name{Frank}{Mittelbach}, pour inclure certaines
-% améliorations attendues depuis longtemps, et pour réunifier
-% toutes les versions modifiées qui ont pullulé depuis la sortie
-% de \LaTeX2.09 quelques années plus tôt. Pour distinguer la
-% nouvelle version de l'ancienne, elle est appelée \LaTeXe.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \LaTeX{} se prononce \textbf{[latex]}. Si vous voulez faire référence à~\LaTeX{} dans un environnement
-% \texttt{ASCII}, utilisez \texttt{LaTeX}. \LaTeXe{} se prononce \textbf{[latex d\o{}z\o{}]} et s'écrit
-% \texttt{LaTeX2e}.
-%
-% En anglais, cela donne \textbf{[la\i{}tex]} et \usebox{\latexbox}.
-% ^^A {\selectlanguage{english}\froff\textbf{[la\i{}tex tu:i:]}\selectlanguage{french}}.
-% \item[\LaTeX2.09] Une version obsolète du programme \LaTeX, antérieure à~1994; elle n'est plus supportée.
-% Ne l'utilisez pas\,\footnote{Sauf exceptionnellement, pour un très vieux document; si possible, essayez de le
-% convertir.}. Utilisez la version actuelle de \LaTeXe, qui est supportée et bien plus puissante.
-% \item[\LaTeXe] La version actuelle du programme \LaTeX, après 1994; elle est supportée.
-% \item[\LaTeX3] La future version de \LaTeX, toujours en cours de développement.
-% \item[\uclass{letter}]\iclass{letter} Une\Virage{} classe de documents standard~\cite{letter} pour préparer des
-% lettres postales (courrier papier).
-% Comme de tels documents n'ont ni commandes ni structure de sectionnement, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est
-% sans objet pour eux (et est donc \emph{incompatible} avec cette classe).
-% \item[\upack{lipsum}] Le paquetage \pack{lipsum}~\cite{lipsum} permet d'insérer facilement du
-% texte dans un fichier de test avec un minimum de frappe. Les textes sont en latin mais ont été altérés et
-% rendus incompréhensibles. J'ai utilisé ce paquetage dans certains des exemples de documents.
-% Voir aussi~\url{http://lipsum.com} pour les origines du texte
-% utilisé (des passages du \emph{De finibus bonorum et malorum} de Marcus \textsc{Tullius Cicero} (\textsc{Cicéron})).
-% \item[\uopt{listfiles}]\ioptd{listfiles} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle crée une liste des fichiers minitoc
-% auxiliaires (ces fichiers contiennent les mini-tables et peuvent être éliminés après l'exécution de \LaTeX)
-% dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. Option par défaut. Voir la section~\vref{s+listfiles}.
-% \item[LOF, LoF] Un acronyme pour «~\emph{list of figures}~», ou «~liste des figures~».
-% \item[\dcnt{lofdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur de la liste des figures.
-% \item[\uopt{loose}]\ioptd{loose} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle donne un espacement lache des lignes dans
-% les mini-tables. C'est le choix par défaut. L'option contraire est \opt{tight}.
-% \item[LOT, LoT] Un acronyme pour «~\emph{list of tables}~», ou «~liste des tableaux~».
-% \item[\dcnt{lotdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur de la liste des tableaux.
-% \item[LPPL] La \emph{LaTeX Project Public License}, disponible~à:
-% \begin{quote}
-% {\froff\url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt}}
-% \end{quote}
-% Sa version actuelle est (2003-12-01). Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est distribué sous cette licence.
-% Une traduction en français de cette licence est disponible~à:
-% \begin{quote}
-% {\froff\url{http://www.tug.org/tex-archive/info/french-translations/macros/latex/base/f-lppl.txt}}
-% \end{quote}
-% \item[\uclass{ltxdoc}]\iclass{ltxdoc} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{ltxdoc},
-% pour préparer la documentation d'un paquetage ou d'une
-% classe. Pour le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, elle est
-% très similaire à~la classe de document \class{article}; voir plus haut.
-% \item[\uclass{ltnews}]\iclass{ltnews} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{ltnews},
-% pour préparer l'announce d'une version de \LaTeX.
-% Pour le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, elle est
-% très similaire à~la classe de document \class{article}; voir plus haut.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{M}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{M}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\com{makeatletter} \textmd{et} \com{makeatother}] De\,\footnote{Ces informations proviennent
-% de~\cite[page~857]{TLC2F}.} nombreuses commandes internes de \LaTeX{}, de paquetages et de classes contiennent
-% le caractère~\texttt{@} dans leurs noms. Ceci empêche efficacement que de tels noms soient utilisés dans des
-% documents pour des commandes définies par l'utilisateur. Cependant, ceci signifie aussi qu'ils ne peuvent
-% pas apparaître dans un document, même pas dans le préambule, sans prendre des précautions spéciales. Comme
-% il est parfois nécessaire d'avoir de tels morceaux de «~code interne~» dans le préambule,
-% les commandes \com{makeatletter} et \com{makeatother} permettent de le faire facilement: ce
-% qui est difficile, c'est de se rappeler qu'il faut les ajouter, faute de quoi des erreurs étranges
-% surviennent. Et ces deux commandes \Virage\emph{ne devraient jamais être utilisées dans un fichier de paquetage ou de classe}.
-% \item[makefile] Un fichier de texte particulier contenant des instructions pour construire et installer un
-% logiciel, à~l'aide de l'utilitaire «~\textbf{make}~»; \textbf{make} est un outil pratique provenant du
-% système d'exploitation Unix, mais il en existe des variantes.
-% \item[\upack{mcaption}] Le paquetage \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption}\imess{W0036} fournit un environnement
-% \env{margincap} pour placer les captions (légendes) dans la marge externe du document, avec un alignement
-% par le haut ou par le bas.
-% \lneed{7}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\uclass{memoir}]\iclass{memoir}
-% Une\SMM{\lmess{E0028}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0032}\\\lmess{I0044}\\\lmess{M0001}}
-% très générale et puissante classe de document
-% (de \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}, décrite dans~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3});
-% cette classe est compatible avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (avec quelques précautions) si vous utilisez
-% une version récente. Voir la section~\vref{faq+memoir}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[mini-bibliographie] Voir \textbf{minibbl} ci-dessous.
-% \item[mini-liste] Synonyme de «~mini-table~» ci-dessous.
-% \item[mini-lof] Voir «~minilof~» ci-dessous.
-% \item[mini-lot] Voir «~minilot~» ci-dessous.
-% \item[mini-table] Ce terme désigne une table de contenu locale (comme une table des matières, une liste des
-% figures ou une liste des tableaux) pour une unité de sectionnement (partie, chapitre ou section), par
-% opposition à~une table globale (la table des matières, la liste des figures ou la liste des tableaux pour
-% l'ensemble du document). Le but principal du paquetage \upack{minitoc} est la création de telles
-% mini-tables. Mais le terme «~minitoc~» est aussi utilisé pour désigner une telle mini-table, comme un terme
-% générique, car les premières versions du paquetage ne permettaient que des tables des matières par chapitre.
-% \item[mini-toc] Voir «~minitoc~» ci-dessous.
-% \item[minibbl] Abréviation pour «~mini-bibliographie~», c'est-à-dire avoir une bibliographie par partie, par
-% chapitre ou par section, ou même par thème ou par sujet. Ceci est en dehors du domaine du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{faq.9}.
-% \item[minilof] Une liste des figures pour un chapitre.
-% \item[\dcnt{minilofdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il est défini, contient la profondeur des minilofs.
-% \item[minilot] Une liste des tableaux pour un chapitre.
-% \item[\dcnt{minilotdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il est défini, contient la profondeur des minilots.
-% \item[minitoc] Une table des matières pour un chapitre. Aussi utilisé comme terme générique pour toute mini-table (voir
-% «~mini-table~» plus haut).
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}] Une base de données bibliographiques pour la documentation en français du paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc}.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}] Le fichier source pour la documentation en français du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% En fait, il ne fait que définir \com{jobname} puis charger \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, qui lui-même charge
-% \com{jobname}\suffix{.lan} pour choisir la langue utilisée dans \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; \xfile{minitoc.dtx} contient
-% à~la fois des fragments de documentation en anglais et en français, choisis par des constructions
-% \com{ifcase} avec la variable \com{LANG}, forcée à~0 par \xfile{minitoc.lan} ou à~1 par
-% \xfile{minitoc-fr.lan} (c'est-à-dire par \com{jobname}\suffix{.dtx}). \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} est produit lors de la
-% compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}] \isuffix{.ist}Ce fichier contient un style pour mettre en forme l'index dans la documentation en
-% français. Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}]\isuffix{.lan} Ce fichier est utilisé pour forcer la langue française dans la documentation.
-% Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf}] La documentation en français, en format PDF.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.ps}] La documentation en français, en format PostScript. N'est plus distribuée (mais
-% regardez le script \scrp{cmk}).
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.bib}] Une base de données bibliographiques pour la documentation en anglais du paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc}.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.bug}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) contenant une liste de problèmes et
-% de questions concernant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir le chapitre~\vref{FAQ}.
-% \item[\dcnt{minitocdepth}] Ce compteur contient la profondeur des minitocs.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.dtx}] Le fichier contenant la documentation et le code commenté du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% \item[\upack{minitoc-hyper}]\ipack{minitoc-hyper} Une version spéciale~\cite{minitoc-hyper} du paquetage \upack{minitoc}
-% préparée par \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne},
-% \xname{Didier}{Verna} et \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts} pour fonctionner avec le puissant paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web};
-% \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} a intégré leur travail et donc depuis la version \#31, \upack{minitoc} est compatible avec
-% \pack{hyperref}.
-% \emph{Donc le paquetage\Virage{} \pack{minitoc-hyper} est désormais obsolète et ne devrait plus être
-% utilisé. Il est encore présent sur les archives CTAN pour la compatibilité avec des anciens documents.}
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ins}] Le fichier d'installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Compiler ce fichier avec
-% \LaTeX\ produit la plupart des fichiers du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ist}] \isuffix{.ist}Ce fichier contient un style pour mettre en forme l'index dans la documentation en
-% anglais. Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.l}] Un fichier texte contenant la liste de tous les fichiers inclus dans le paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc}. Les fichiers non listés dans \xfile{minitoc.l} sont des fichiers utilisés seulement pour
-% installer le paquetage ou produire sa documentation.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.lan}]\isuffix{.lan} Ce fichier est utilisé pour forcer la langue anglaise dans la documentation.
-% Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.pdf}] La documentation en anglais, en format PDF.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.pre}]\isuffix{.pre} Ce fichier contient un préambule \LaTeX{} pour la documentation.
-% Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ps}] La documentation en anglais, en format PostScript. N'est plus distribuée (mais
-% regarde les script \scrp{cmk}).
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.sty}] Ce fichier contient la partie principale du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, avec ses
-% commentaires retirés.
-% Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.sum}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) contenant une liste commentée des commandes
-% et environnements minitoc. Voir le chapitre~\vref{c+memento}.
-% \item[\xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}] Une archive ZIP d'une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS et
-% contenant tous les fichiers du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% \item[\upack{minutes}] Le paquetage \pack{minutes}~\cite{minutes} (de \name{Knut}{Lickert}) est utilisé
-% pour préparer des comptes-rendus de conférences. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} permet d'ajouter
-% des «~pauses-café~» dans la table des matières grâce à~des commandes telles que \com{addcoffeeline} et
-% \com{coffeeline} (et des commandes internes) dont les noms contiennent la chaîne «~\texttt{coffee}~»,
-% d'où la note de bas de page sur «~cappuccino~»{\myCoffeecup} dans le chapitre sur l'installation!%
-% \IfFileExists{marvosym.sty}{\footnote{Les petites tasses \myCoffeecup{} proviennent du paquetage \pack{marvosym}~\cite{marvosym}.}}{}
-% \item[\upack{Mon\TeX}] \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} est un important paquetage utilisé
-% pour préparer des documents
-% dans divers dialectes de la langue mongole (Bicig et Bicig2, Mongol, Bithe et Manju, Buryat, Xalx et Khalkha) et dans
-% un dialecte du russe utilisé en Mongolie (Russianc). Bicig est un autre nom pour le Ouïghour.
-% Vous pourrez trouver beaucoup d'informations sur la langue mongole et la Mongolie sur le site web~\cite{mongol-web}.
-% Voir aussi:
-% {\small\froff\begin{quote}
-% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}\\
-% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_language}\\
-% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_script}\\
-% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Clear_script}\\
-% \url{http://www.indiana.edu/~mongsoc/mong/language.htm}\\
-% \mbox{\url{http://www.viahistoria.com/SilverHorde/main.html?research/MongolScripts.html}}\\
-% \url{http://www.krysstal.com/writing_evolution.html}\\
-% \url{http://mongolxel.webz.cz/qaguchin/index.htm}
-% \end{quote}}
-% La description suivante a été extraite de~\cite{montex} et traduite:
-%
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} est un paquetage qui fournit le support pour écrire des documents en mongol
-% (\emph{mongolian}), mandchou (\emph{manju}), bouriate (\emph{buryat}) et russe.
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% Le mongol peut être représenté en écriture ouïghure (\emph{uighur})
-% traditionnelle\ixgrf{mongoltr.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,height=2.5cm]{mongoltr.png}}}
-% (appelée aussi écriture classique ou traditionnelle) et en écriture cyrillique. Le mandchou
-% (\emph{manju}) ressemble à~l'écriture mongole traditionnelle (dont elle dérive) mais utilise un grand choix de
-% signes diacritiques afin d'éliminer de nombreuses ambiguïtés de son ancêtre l'écriture mongole. Le bouriate
-% (\emph{buryat}) moderne, comme le mongol dans sa forme actuelle,
-% est écrit avec un alphabet cyrillique,\ixgrf{mongolcy.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=2.5cm]{mongolcy.png}}}%
-% mais tant le mongol (35~lettres) que le bouriate (36~lettres) utilisent davantage de lettres
-% que le russe (33~lettres).
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \begin{description}
-% \item[Mongol]
-% Le terme \emph{mongol} (\emph{mongolian} en anglais) recouvre en fait plusieurs langues et n'est pas le nom précis
-% d'une seule langue. Les choses se compliquent encore lorsque des noms de groupes ethniques, de langues et de
-% systèmes d'écriture sont mélangés.
-% \begin{description}
-% \item [Xalx] ou Khalkha est le nom de la nationalité mongole résidant en Mongolie proprement dite.
-% Leur dialecte forme la base du mongol écrit avec des lettres cyrilliques.
-% Dans le présent texte, \emph{mongol moderne} est utilisé comme synonyme.
-% \item [Bouriate] (\emph{buryat}) est le nom de la nationalité mongole résidant en Bouriatie
-% (\emph{Buryatia}), au nord de la Mongolie, à~l'est du Lac Baïkal, et faisant partie de la
-% Fédération Russe. Les Bouriates se nomment eux-mêmes \emph{Buryaad} tandis que les Mongols Xlax
-% s'appellent \emph{Buriad}. Le nom anglais suit l'orthographe russe (tandis que le nom français
-% est pris phonétiquement).
-% Du point de vue linguistique, le mongol xalx et le mongol bouriate sont des langues assez proches;
-% le bouriate a un système de sons légèrement différent dans lequel le phonème~\verb|/s/| est
-% partiellement décalé vers~\verb|/h/|; l'alphabet moderne bouriate cyrillique (virtuellement
-% identique à~l'alphabet cyrillique utilisé pour écrire le mongol moderne) a une lettre
-% additionnelle (H/h, \verb|\xalx{H/h}|) pour marquer la différence avec \verb|/s/|.
-% \item [Bicig] (littéralement \emph{écriture} en mongol) désigne le texte écrit avec l'écriture mongole
-% traditionnelle, qui est aussi dénommée Ouïghour (\emph{Uighur}). Ici, le texme \emph{bicig} sera
-% utilisé sur un pied d'égalité avec le mongol \emph{classique} et \emph{traditionnel}. Ce dernier
-% terme est utilisé dans les noms du plan de caractères U1800 de Unicode/ISO10646, qui contient le
-% mongol (\emph{mongolian}), le mandchou (\emph{manju}), le Sibe et des ensembles de caractères
-% spéciaux appelés Ali Gali ou Galig. Afin d'identifier les commandes concernant l'écriture mongole
-% distinctes pour le mongol et le mandchou, les commandes mongoles (\emph{mongolian}) ont un nom
-% avec le radical \lopt{bicig} tandis que les commandes manchoues (\emph{manju}) ont un nom
-% avec le radical \lopt{bithe}.
-% \end{description}
-%
-% Le Mongol Xalx, ou Mongol Moderne Courant (\emph{Modern Colloquial Mongolian}), est à~peu près aussi différent de
-% la forme en écriture classique que l'anglais moderne est différent en orthographe phonétique (en supposant qu'il
-% soit écrit en lettres Shaviennes) de l'orthographe hautement historique de l'Anglais Standard.
-% Au-delà de ces différences. le mongol écrit en écriture classique conserve habituellement une quantité
-% substantielle des aspects grammaticaux historiques qui le font ressembler un peu à~l'anglais élizabéthain.
-%
-% \item[Manchou] Le mandchou (\emph{mandju}) est une langue du groupe toungouze (\emph{tungusic}) étroitement
-% liée au mongol. Bien que le
-% mandchou ne soit virtuellement plus parlé, il a été la langue officielle pendant 300~ans de gouvernement mandchou
-% sur la Chine de la dynastie Qing. De grandes quantités de documents officiels ont survécu, ainsi que certains
-% des meilleurs dictionnaires multilingues jamais réalisés, par exemple le Pentaglote, ou Miroir des Cinq Langues, un
-% dictionnaire avec 18671 entrées en cinq langues (mandchou, tibétain, mongol, ouïghour et chinois).
-% Voir~\cite{pentaglot} pour plus de détails. L'écriture mandchoue est dérivée du mongol ouïghour par l'ajout
-% de signes diacritiques sous la forme de points et de cercles (\emph{tongki fuka sindaha hergen}, écriture
-% avec points et cercles).
-% \end{description}
-% \item[MS-DOS] (\emph{Microsoft\textsuperscript{\textregistered} Disk Operating System}) Un ancien système
-% d'exploitation pour ordinateurs personnels (PCs). Du point de vue de \upack{minitoc}, son principal
-% inconvénient est l'utilisation de noms de fichiers avec des suffixes courts (le schéma «~8+3~»), qui limite à~99
-% le nombre de mini-tables dans chaque sorte.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-2c.tex}]\iexam{mtc-2c.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec une mise
-% en page sur deux colonnes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-2c.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-2nd.tex}]\iexam{mtc-2nd.tex} Un exemple de document utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et son option de
-% langue \lopt{french2}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-3co.tex}]\iexam{mtc-3co.tex} Un exemple de document utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour
-% préparer une minitoc sur trois colonnes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-3co.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-add.bib}]\iexam{mtc-add.bib} Une petite base de données bibliographiques pour les exemples
-% de documents \exam{mtc-add.tex} et \exam{mtc-ads.tex}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-add.tex}]\iexam{mtc-add.tex} Un exemple de document montrant comment utiliser \com{mtcaddchapter} et le
-% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} avec \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-ads.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ads.tex} Un exemple de document montrant comment utiliser \com{mtcaddsection} et le
-% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} avec \upack{minitoc}.
-% Il montre aussi quel défi représente la gestion des mini-listes de flottants au niveau des sections.
-% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-ads.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-amm.tex}]\iexam{mtc-amm.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation de l'environnement \env{appendices}
-% dans un document de classe \class{memoir} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-amm.tex}.
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-apx.tex}]\iexam{mtc-apx.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant comment utiliser l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}
-% pour masquer les entrées pour les appendices dans la table des matières principale et créer une table des
-% matières au niveau partie pour les appendices. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-apx.tex}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-art.tex}]\iexam{mtc-art.tex} Un exemple de document (classe \class{article}) utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-art.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-bk.tex}]\iexam{mtc-bk.tex} Un exemple de document (classe \class{book} ou \class{report}) utilisant le
-% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-bk.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-bo.tex}]\iexam{mtc-bo.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec une mise
-% en page sur deux colonnes et utilisant le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-bo.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-ch0.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ch0.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document
-% dont le premier chapitre est étoilé. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-ch0.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-cri.tex}]\iexam{mtc-cri.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage minitoc avec des parties et des
-% chapitres étoilés. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-cri.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-fko.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fko.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant le problème des fontes lors de
-% l'utilisation de la classe \class{scrbook}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-fko.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-fo1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fo1.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec
-% changement de quelques fontes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-fo1.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-fo2.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fo2.tex} Un autre exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec
-% changement de quelques fontes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-fo2.tex}.
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-gap.tex}]\iexam{mtc-gap.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation des commandes \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} et
-% \com{mtcgapafterheads}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-gap.tex}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-hi1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hi1.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation des environnements
-% spécialisés \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hi1.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-hi2.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hi2.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation des paires de commandes:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \com{mtchideinmainlof} et \com{endmtchideinmainlof},
-% \item \com{mtchideinmainlot} et \com{endmtchideinmainlot}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hi2.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-hia.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hia.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour masquer les
-% entrées pour certains tableaux dans la liste des tableaux principale d'un document de la classe \class{article}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hia.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-hir.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hir.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour masquer les
-% entrées pour certains tableaux dans la liste des tableaux principale d'un document de la classe \class{report}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hir.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-hop.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hop.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec la classe de
-% document \class{scrbook}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hop.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-liv.tex}]\iexam{mtc-liv.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un
-% livre avec une table des matières et des minitocs personnalisées. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-liv.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-mem.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mem.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec la
-% classe \class{memoir}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-mem.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-mm1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mm1.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec la
-% classe \class{memoir}, dans le cas où vous souhaiteriez changer quelques fontes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-mm1.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-mu.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mu.tex} Un document utilisant une minitoc composée, avec le paquetage \pack{wrapfig}~\cite{wrapfig},
-% pour être placée dans un environnement \env{wrapfigure}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-mu.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-nom.tex}]\iexam{mtc-nom.tex} Un document montrant une interaction entre le paquetage \upack{minitoc}
-% et le paquetage \pack{nomencl}~\cite{nomencl}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-nom.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-ocf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ocf.tex} Un document utilisant les dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close}
-% pour préparer une minitoc sur trois colonnes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-ofs.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ofs.tex} Un document utilisant les dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close}
-% pour préparer une minitoc sur trois colonnes et \com{mtcsetoffset} pour décaler la minitoc afin de
-% l'aligner sur la gauche. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-ofs.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-sbf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-sbf.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec le
-% paquetage \pack{subfigure}~\cite{subfigure}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-sbf.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-scr.tex}]\iexam{mtc-scr.tex} Un exemple de document montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec une
-% classe {\KOMAScript}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, \class{scrreprt}. Voir la
-% section~\vref{mtc-scr.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-syn.tex}]\iexam{mtc-syn.tex} Un exemple de document montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} lorsque
-% la table des matières est précédée de quelques chapitres étoilés. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-syn.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-tbi.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tbi.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec
-% le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-tbi.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-tlc.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tlc.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document
-% de la classe \class{article}. C'est l'exemple de~\cite[page~58]{TLC2}, modernisé. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-tlc.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-tlo.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tlo.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec le
-% paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft} et leur interaction pour les numéros de pages dans les mini-tables.
-% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-tlo.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-tsf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tsf.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec le
-% paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-tsf.tex}.
-% \item[\uexam{mtc-vti.tex}]\iexam{mtc-vti.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation de la commande \com{mtcpolymtoc}
-% et expliquant les \index{entree polymorphe=entrée polymorphe}«~entrées polymorphes~».
-% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}.
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\upack{mtcmess}]\ipack{mtcmess} Un paquetage qui est utilisé pour fournir des variantes des commandes
-% standard \com{PackageInfo}, \com{PackageWarning}, \com{PackageWarningNoLine} et \com{PackageError}
-% en leur ajoutant un argument optionnel pour un identificateur unique de message.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\upack{mtcoff}]\ipack{mtcoff} Un paquetage qui est utilisé à~la place du paquetage \upack{minitoc}
-% pour ignorer toutes les commandes et tous les environnements du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. En fait, il les
-% définit pour qu'elles/ils ne fassent rien. Utile si vous désirez une version de votre document sans aucune
-% mini-table.
-% \item[\upack{mtcpatchmem}]\ipack{mtcpatchmem} Un\SMMZ{\lmess{M0001}} petit paquetage qui est chargé automatiquement si
-% nécessaire lorsque vous utilisez la classe de document \class{memoir} dans une version \emph{incompatible}
-% avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, mais corrigible. Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item[\texttt{mu}] Une unité de longueur utilisée normalement en mode mathématique (\texttt{mu} signifie
-% «~\emph{math unit}~»); 18~unités mathématiques font \texttt{1em} (un cadratin), qui est à~peu près la
-% largeur d'un~«~m~» dans la fonte courante. Donc la taille de \texttt{1mu} dépend de la fonte.
-% La séparation entre les points des lignes de pointillés dans les mini-tables est exprimée en unités
-% mathématiques.
-% \item[\upack{multibib}] Le paquetage \pack{multibib}~\cite{multibib} permet de créer des références
-% à~plusieurs bibliographies à~l'intérieur d'un même document. Il fournit donc une fonctionnalité
-% complémentaire à~des paquetages tels que \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits} ou \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib},
-% qui permettent de créer une seule bibliographie pour plusieurs, mais différentes, parties du document.
-% \item[\upack{multicol}] Le paquetage \pack{multicol}~\cite{multicol} définit l'environnement \env{multicols}
-% (avec un~<<~\textbf{s}~>>) pour composer du texte sur plusieurs colonnes. Utilisé dans certains exemples de documents.
-% \item[\upack{multitoc}] Ce paquetage~\cite{multitoc} permet de composer seulement la table des matières, la
-% liste des figures et/ou la liste des tableaux sur deux colonnes ou plus (en utilisant le paquetage
-% pquetage \pack{multicol}~\cite{multicol}, bien sûr).
-% Le nombre de colonnes peut être configuré par des commandes; les tables multi-colonnes peuvent être choisies
-% par des options du paquetage.
-% L'exemple de document \exam{mtc-3co.tex} utilise ce paquetage; voir la section~\vref{mtc-3co.tex}.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{N}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{N}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\pack{natbib}] C'est un paquetage \LaTeXe{} (mais avec un certain support pour \LaTeX2.09)~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes}
-% qui agit comme interface généralisée pour des fichiers de styles bibliographiques standard et non-standard (\BibTeX).
-% \item[\upack{needspace}] Le paquetage \pack{needspace}~\cite{needspace} fournit des commandes pour réserver
-% de l'espace en bas d'une page. S'il n'y a pas assez d'espace sur la page (colonne) courante, une nouvelle
-% page (colonne) est commencée.
-% \item[NFSS] Le «~Nouveau Schéma de Sélection de Fonte~» (\emph{New Font Selection Scheme}).
-% Le système de sélection des fontes~\cite{fontsel} \LaTeXe{}
-% a été publié pour la première fois sous le nom de «~\emph{New Font Selection Scheme}~» (NFSS) en 1989, puis
-% dans une seconde version en 1993. \LaTeXe{} inclut NFSS version~2 de manière standard.
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% Dans \LaTeX, chaque fonte (police) textuelle a cinq \emph{attributs}:
-% \begin{description}
-% \item[codage\,\footnotemark]\footnotetext{Et non \og{} encodage~\fg, qui est un anglicisme.} (\emph{encoding})
-% Un codage spécifie
-% l'ordre selon lequel les caractères apparaissent dans la fonte. Les deux codages les plus courants
-% utilisés dans \LaTeX{} sont le codage «~texte \TeX~» de \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} (OT1) et
-% le codage «~texte \TeX{} étendu~» (T1) développé par les membres du \emph{\TeX{} Users Group} pendant une
-% conférence sur \TeX{} à~Cork en~1990 (d'où son nom informel de «~codage de Cork~»). Voir~\cite{encguide,enc-inter}.
-% \item[famille] (\emph{family}) Le nom d'une collection de fontes, habituellement groupées sous un nom commun
-% par le fondeur de ces fontes. Par exemple, «~Adobe Times~», «~ITC Garamond~» et «~Computer Modern Roman~»
-% de \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} sont toutes des familles de fontes.
-% \item[graisse] (\emph{series}) Elle détermine comment une fonte est épaisse (\emph{heavy}) ou
-% étirée (\emph{extended}). Par exemple, «~medium weight~», «~narrow~» et «~bold extended~» sont toutes des graisses.
-% \item[forme] (\emph{shape}) La forme des lettres à~l'intérieur d'une famille de fontes. Par exemple,
-% «~italique~» (\emph{italic}), «~oblique~» et «~droit~» (\emph{upright}) (parfois appelé
-% «~romain~» (\emph{roman})) sont toutes des formes de fontes.
-% \item[taille] (\emph{size}) La taille de conception (\emph{design size}) de la fonte, par exemple «~10pt~».
-% \end{description}
-%
-% \lneed{2}
-% Dans \LaTeX, les valeurs possibles pour ces attributs ont reçu des acronymes courts. Les valeurs les plus
-% courantes pour le codage d'une fonte sont données dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+1}.
-% \begin{table}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Codages de fontes les plus courants}\label{t+nfss+1}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Codage}&\textbf{Description}\\
-% \midrule
-% \texttt{T1} & texte \TeX{} étendu («~codage de Cork~») \\
-% \texttt{TS1} & codages des symboles pour \LaTeX{} (latin)\\
-% \texttt{T2A}, \texttt{T2B}, \texttt{T2C} & texte \LaTeX{} (cyrillique)\\
-% \texttt{T3} & alphabet phonétique pour \LaTeX{}\\
-% \texttt{TS3} & alphabet phonétique pour \LaTeX{}, symboles supplémentaires\\
-% \texttt{T4} & texte \LaTeX{} (langues africaines)\\
-% \texttt{T5} & texte \LaTeX{} (vietnamien)\\
-% \texttt{T7} & texte \LaTeX{} (réservé pour le grec)\\
-% \texttt{OT1} & texte \TeX{} (comme défini par \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\
-% \texttt{OT2} & texte \TeX{} pour les langues en cyrillique (obsolète)\\
-% \texttt{OT3} & Alphabet phonétique international (obsolète)\\
-% \texttt{OT4} & Texte \TeX{} avec extensions pour la langue polonaise\\
-% \texttt{OT6} & Texte \TeX{} avec extensions pour la langue arménienne\\
-% \texttt{OML} & italique mathématique \TeX\ (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\
-% \texttt{OMS} & symboles mathématiques \TeX\ (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\
-% \texttt{OMX} & grands symboles mathématiques \TeX\ (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\
-% \texttt{X2} & texte \LaTeX{} étendu (cyrillique)\\
-% \texttt{U} & inconnu \\
-% \texttt{L}\meta{xx} & un codage local\\
-% \texttt{L7x} & codage utilisé pour la langue lithuanienne\\
-% \texttt{LTH} & codage utilisé pour la langue thaïe\\
-% \texttt{LV1} & codage utilisé par quelques fontes de \texttt{VTeX}\\
-% \texttt{LY1} & alternative au \texttt{T1}, pour les logiciels Y\&Y\\
-% \texttt{PD1} & réalise le codage PDFDocEncoding pour une utilisation avec NFSS de \LaTeXe.\\
-% \texttt{PU} & réalise le codage Unicode pour une utilisation avec NFSS de \LaTeXe.\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-% ^^A \end{table}
-% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}
-% ^^A \begin{table}[!p]
-% ^^A \changeskips
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}}
-% \begin{minipage}[t]{.50\textwidth}
-% ^^A \changeskips
-% \capstart
-% \caption{Familles de fontes les plus courantes}\label{t+nfss+2}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Famille}&\textbf{Description}\\
-% \midrule
-% \texttt{cmr} & Computer Modern Roman \\
-% \texttt{cmss} & Computer Modern Sans \\
-% \texttt{cmtt} & Computer Modern Typewriter \\
-% \texttt{cmm} & Computer Modern Math Italic \\
-% \texttt{cmsy} & Computer Modern Math Symbols \\
-% \texttt{cmex} & Computer Modern Math Extensions \\
-% \texttt{ptm} & Adobe Times \\
-% \texttt{phv} & Adobe Helvetica \\
-% \texttt{pcr} & Adobe Courier\\
-% \texttt{lazy} & Symboles \LaTeX{} additionnels\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}%
-% \end{minipage}%
-% &&%
-% \begin{minipage}[t]{.45\textwidth}
-% ^^A \changeskips
-% \capstart
-% \caption{Graisses les plus courantes}\label{t+nfss+3}
-% \centering
-% \leavevmode\null\hfill\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Graisse}&\textbf{Description}\\
-% \midrule
-% \texttt{ul}&Ultra fin\\
-% \texttt{el}&Extra fin\\
-% \texttt{l}&Fin\\
-% \texttt{sl}&Semi fin\\
-% \texttt{m} & Moyen (\emph{medium})\\
-% \texttt{sb} & Demi-gras (\emph{semi-bold}) \\
-% \texttt{b} &Bold \\
-% \texttt{eb} &Extra gras \\
-% \texttt{bx} & Gras étendu (\emph{bold extended})\\
-% \texttt{ub}&Ultra gras \\
-% \texttt{c} & Condensé (\emph{condensed})\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}\hfill\null
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{table}
-% \newlength{\ww}
-% \begin{table}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}}
-% \setlength{\ww}{.64\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\ww}{-1.5em}
-% \begin{minipage}[t]{\ww}
-% \changeskips
-% \capstart
-% \caption{Formes de fontes les plus courantes}\label{t+nfss+4}
-% {\begin{tabularx}{\ww}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Forme}&\textbf{Description}\\
-% \midrule
-% \texttt{n} & Normale (c'est-à-dire «~droite~» (\emph{upright}) ou «~romaine~» (\emph{roman})) \\
-% \texttt{it} & Italique \\
-% \texttt{sl} & Penchée (\emph{slanted}) (ou «~oblique~») \\
-% \texttt{sc} & Capitales et petites capitales (\emph{caps and small caps})\\
-% \texttt{u} & Italique redressée (\emph{upright italic}) \\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}}
-% \end{minipage}%
-% &&%
-% \begin{minipage}[t]{.35\textwidth}
-% \changeskips
-% \capstart
-% \caption{Largeurs de fontes les plus courantes}\label{t+nfss+4a}
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}lcl@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Largeur}&\textbf{\%}&\textbf{Description}\\
-% \midrule
-% \texttt{uc}&50.0&Ultra condensé\\
-% \texttt{ec}&50.0&Extra condensé\\
-% \texttt{c}&50.0&Condensé\\
-% \texttt{sc}&50.0&Semi condensé\\
-% \texttt{m}&50.0&Normal\\
-% \texttt{sc}&50.0&Semi étendu\\
-% \texttt{c}&50.0&Étendu\\
-% \texttt{ec}&50.0&Extra étendu\\
-% \texttt{uc}&50.0&Ultra étendu\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{minipage}%
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \end{table}
-% Les codages «~locaux~» sont destinés aux codages de fontes qui ne sont disponibles que localement, par
-% exemple une fonte contenant le logo d'une organisation dans diverses tailles.
-%
-% \lneed{4}
-% Il y a bien trop de familles de fontes pour les lister toutes, mais certaines familles courantes sont
-% listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+2}.
-% Les valeurs les plus courantes pour les graisses (\emph{series}) sont listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+3}.
-% Les valeurs les plus courantes pour la forme de fonte sont listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+4}.
-% Les valeurs les plus courantes pour la largeur de fonte sont listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+4a}.
-%
-% La taille de fonte est spécifiée comme une dimension, par exemple \texttt{10pt} ou
-% \texttt{1.5in} ou \texttt{3mm}; si aucune unité n'est spécifiée, \texttt{pt} est pris par défaut. Ces cinq
-% paramètres spécifient chaque fonte \LaTeX{}, voir le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+5}, par exemple.
-% \begin{table}[!tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \capstart
-% \caption{Les cinq paramètres de fontes de quelques fontes}\label{t+nfss+5}
-% \centering
-% ^^A \begin{tabular}{@{}l@{\,}l@{\,}l@{\,}l@{\,}ll@{}l@{}}
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllllZ{1}l@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l}{\textbf{Spécification \LaTeX}} &
-% \textbf{Fonte} &
-% \textbf{Nom \TeX{}} \\
-% \midrule
-% \texttt{OT1} & \texttt{cmr} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{n} & \texttt{10} &
-% Computer Modern Roman 10 point &
-% \texttt{cmr10} \\
-% \texttt{OT1} & \texttt{cmss} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{sl} & \texttt{1pc} &
-% Computer Modern Sans Oblique 1 pica &
-% \texttt{cmssi12} \\
-% \texttt{OML} & \texttt{cmm} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{it} & \texttt{10pt} &
-% Computer Modern Math Italic 10 point &
-% \texttt{cmmi10} \\
-% \texttt{T1} & \texttt{ptm} & \texttt{b} & \texttt{it} & \texttt{1in} &
-% Adobe Times Bold Italic 1 inch &
-% \texttt{ptmb8t at 1in}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \end{table}
-% \begin{table}[!tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Commandes de l'utilisateur pour les fontes}\label{t+nfss+6}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Commande utilisateur} &
-% \textbf{Attribut} &
-% \textbf{Valeur dans la classe} \class{article} \\
-% \midrule
-% \com{textrm}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{rmfamily} & famille & \texttt{cmr} \\
-% \com{textsf}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{sffamily} & famille & \texttt{cmss} \\
-% \com{texttt}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{ttfamily} & famille & \texttt{cmtt} \\
-% \com{textmd}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{mdseries} & graisse & \texttt{m} \\
-% \com{textbf}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{bfseries} & graisse & \texttt{bx} \\
-% \com{textup}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{upshape} & forme & \texttt{n} \\
-% \com{textit}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{itshape} & forme & \texttt{it} \\
-% \com{textsl}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{slshape} & forme & \texttt{sl} \\
-% \com{textsc}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{scshape} & forme & \texttt{sc} \\
-% \com{tiny} & taille & \texttt{5pt} \\
-% \com{scriptsize} & taille & \texttt{7pt} \\
-% \com{footnotesize} & taille & \texttt{8pt} \\
-% \com{small} & taille & \texttt{9pt} \\
-% \com{normalsize} & taille & \texttt{10pt} \\
-% \com{large} & taille & \texttt{12pt} \\
-% \com{Large} & taille & \texttt{14.4pt} \\
-% \com{LARGE} & taille & \texttt{17.28pt} \\
-% \com{huge} & taille & \texttt{20.74pt} \\
-% \com{Huge} & taille & \texttt{24.88pt}\\
-% \com{textnormal} & normal & \textnormal{texte normal}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% Ces cinq paramètres sont affichés chaque fois que \LaTeX{} donne un avertissement de débordement de boîte,
-% par exemple:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \texttt{Overfull \bs hbox (3.80855pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 314-{}-318}\\
-% \texttt{[]\bs OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Normally [] and [] will be iden-ti-cal,}
-% \end{verse}
-% \lneed{6}
-% Le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+6} liste les commandes de fontes que l'utilisateur peut invoquer pour établir ces
-% cinq attributs\,\footnote{Les valeurs utilisées par ces commandes sont déterminées par la classe du document.}.
-%
-% \item[\uopt{nocheckfiles}]\iopt{nocheckfiles} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le contraire de l'option de
-% paquetage \optd{checkfiles} (voir plus haut).
-% \item[\uopt{nohints}]\iopt{nohints} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le contraire de l'option de
-% paquetage \optd{hints} (voir plus haut).
-% \item[\uopt{nolistfiles}]\iopt{nolistfiles} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. C'est l'opposée de
-% \optd{listfiles} ci-dessus. Voir la section~\vref{s+listfiles}.
-% \item[\uopt{notoccite}]\iopt{notoccite} Cette option du paquetage \upack{minitoc} charge le paquetage
-% \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite} (de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}). Elle évite des problèmes avec des
-% commandes \com{cite} dans des commandes de sectionnement ou dans des captions (légendes).
-% Voir la section~\vref{ss+notoccite}.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{O}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{O}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[Omega] Le système de typographie\,\footnote{L'essentiel (mais pas la totalité) de cette note provient de
-% la documentation d'Omega \cite{yannis1994b,yannis1994a,yannis1995,omega1996,yannis1998}.
-% Voir~\url{http://omega.enstb.org/} pour plus d'informations.}
-% Omega ($\mathbf{\Omega}$) (de \xname{Yannis}{Haralambous} et \xname{John}{Plaice}).
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% Omega est une extension de \TeX{} conçue surtout afin d'améliorer les capacités multilingues de TeX.
-%
-% Quand le programme \TeX{} a été développé au milieu des années [mille neuf cent] soixante-dix
-% par le professeur \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth},
-% il a surtout été conçu pour la mise en page de textes mathématiques en anglais. Depuis lors \TeX{} a fait de grandes
-% avancées dans des domaines scientifiques, littéraires et autres, dans tous
-% les pays du monde. En 1991, \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} a gelé \TeX{} avec pour objectif la
-% stabilité. Cependant, il permet que le code \TeX{} soit utilisé comme base
-% pour des développements futurs, à~condition que le système résultant
-% soit distribué sous un autre nom.
-%
-% En Omega, tous les caractères et les pointeurs dans les structures de
-% données sont de 32 bits plutôt que 8 bits, éliminant ainsi beaucoup de
-% limitations triviales de \TeX. Omega permet aussi l'utilisation de
-% multiples jeux de caractères en entrée et en sortie, et utilise des
-% filtres programmables afin de traduire d'un jeu de caractères à~un
-% autre, afin de faire de l'analyse contextuelle, etc. En interne, Omega
-% utilise le jeu de caractères Unicode/ISO-10646. Omega soutient aussi
-% l'utilisation de multiples directions d'écriture.
-%
-% Ces améliorations non seulement facilitent la tâche des utilisateurs de \TeX{}
-% pour gérer des langues multiples et complexes telles que l'arabe, les
-% langues indiennes, le khmer, le chinois, le japonais ou le coréen, dans
-% un seul document, mais aussi forment la base de développements futurs
-% dans d'autres domaines, tels le soutien de la couleur et de l'hypertexte.
-%
-% Le format (au sens \TeX\ du terme) \LaTeX{} adapté aux capacités spéciales d'Omega est
-% appelé «~\emph{Lambda}~»~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$).
-% L'ajout à~Omega des extensions de \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex} est un projet
-% distinct, connu sous le nom de «~\pack{Aleph}~» ($\aleph$)~\cite{aleph,aleph-hagen} et conduit par \xname{Giuseppe}{Bilotta}.
-% La version de \LaTeX\ pour \pack{Aleph} est connue sous le nom de
-% «~\emph{Lamed}~»~(\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[height=10pt,keepaspectratio]{lamed3.png}}\/).
-% Il~y~a un système expérimental, nommé \packa{\textsc{Lua}\TeX}{LuaTeX}~\cite{luatex,luatex2007}, qui regroupera
-% \textsc{pdf}\TeX, \pack{Aleph}, \packa{\eTeX}{etex} et d'autres développements.
-% Une voie prometteuse est \packa{\protect\XeTeX}{xetex}~\cite{xetex} par~\name{Jonathan}{Kew}, avec
-% \packa{\protect\XeLaTeX}{xelatex}.
-% \begin{table}[tp!]
-% ^^A \changeskips
-% \caption{Quelques systèmes dérivés de \TeX{} et \LaTeX}\label{t+tex-latex}
-% \centering
-% \[ \begin{array}{ccccccc}
-% \mbox{\TeX}&\longrightarrow&\mathbf{\Omega}&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mathbf{\Lambda}\\
-% &&+&&&&+\\
-% \mbox{\TeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\eTeX}&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\eLaTeX}\\
-% &&&&&&\\
-% \cline{3-3}\cline{5-5}\cline{7-7}
-% &&&&&&\\
-% &&\aleph&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,height=10pt]{lamed3.png}}}
-% \end{array} \]
-% \end{table}
-% \item[\feat{open}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté immédiatement
-% avant (ouverture, \emph{open}) l'insertion du fichier auxiliaire pour un type donné de mini-table.
-% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
-% Voir le fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, dans la section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{P}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{P}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\feat{pagestyle}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté lors de chaque occurrence d'un
-% type donné de mini-table, pour forcer le style de page à~utiliser pour la page courante.
-% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
-% \item[paquetage] (\emph{package})
-% Les paquetages\,\footnote{Ces informations ont été extraites de~\cite[page~12--13]{kopka} puis adaptées et
-% traduites.}\textsuperscript{,}\footnote{Notez que j'utilise le terme <<~paquetage~>> pour traduire
-% le terme anglais \emph{package}. D'autres
-% préféreront <<~extension~>> (qui signifie <<~suffixe~>> en anglais), <<~package~>> (anglicisme), ou <<~module~>>;
-% c'est une question de goût et d'habitude, sans plus.} sont un dispositif très important de \LaTeX. Ce sont des
-% extensions aux commandes de base de \LaTeX{} qui sont écrites dans des fichiers dont les noms se terminent par
-% \suffix{.sty} et qui sont chargés via la commande \com{usepackage} dans le préambule du document. Les paquetages
-% peuvent être classés selon leur origine:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item les paquetages \textbf{centraux} (\emph{core}) (en fait, les paquetages \textbf{basiques} et \textbf{requis})
-% sont une partie fondamentale de l'installation de base de \LaTeX{} et sont donc complètement standard;
-% \item les paquetages \textbf{outils} (\emph{tools}) forment un ensemble écrit par les membres de l'équipe
-% \LaTeX3 et devraient toujours être présents dans l'installation;
-% \item les paquetages \textbf{graphiques} (\emph{graphics}) sont un ensemble standardisé pour l'inclusion de
-% dessins produits par d'autres programmes et pour la gestion des couleurs; ils sont au même niveau que
-% les paquetages outils;
-% \item les paquetages \textbf{\AmS-\LaTeX}, publiés par
-% l'\emph{American Mathematical Society}\froff\footnote{\url{http://www.ams.org}}\fron, devraient
-% être présents dans toute installation\,\footnote{Ils sont indispensables si vous utilisez beaucoup
-% de mathématiques.};
-% \item les paquetages des \textbf{contributions} (\emph{contributed}) ont été proposés par de vrais
-% utilisateurs; certains de ces paquetages se sont révélés comme étant «~essentiels~» dans l'utilisation
-% standard de \LaTeX, mais tous sont utiles.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item[partlof] Une liste des figures pour une partie.
-% \item[\dcnt{partlofdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur des partlofs.
-% \item[partlot] Une liste des tableaux pour une partie.
-% \item[\dcnt{partlotdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur des partlots.
-% \item[parttoc] Une table des matières pour une partie.
-% \item[\dcnt{parttocdepth}] Ce compteur contient la profondeur des parttocs.
-% \item[PDF] \emph{Portable Document Format}~\cite{pdfspec}. Un descendant du langage PostScript d'Adobe,
-% optimisé pour la navigation sur l'Internet. Il ajoute des dispositifs d'hypertexte, de substitution de fontes
-% et de compression.
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\upack{placeins}] Le paquetage
-% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins}\SMM{\lmess{W0031}\\\lmess{W0032}\\\lmess{W0084}\\\lmess{W0085}}
-% permet de forcer les éléments flottants à~«~rester à~leur place~», en les empêchant de dériver au-delà d'une
-% commande \com{FloatBarrier} vers une autre section. Pour l'utiliser,
-% déclarez \com{usepackage}\texttt{\{placeins\}} dans le préambule et insérez des commandes
-% \com{FloatBarrier} aux endroits que les éléments flottants ne devraient pas franchir, peut-être
-% à~chaque \com{section}. L'option \opt{insection} du paquetage \upack{minitoc} le fait avec des
-% options adéquates de \pack{placeins}, et charge aussi le paquetage \pack{flafter};
-% voir la section~\vref{s+placing}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[\xfile{placeins.txt}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) contenant la documentation du paquetage
-% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins}.
-% \item[\upack{\PLaTeX}]\ipacka{\PLaTeX}{PLaTeX} Une\virage{} version de \LaTeX\ adaptée
-% à~la langue polonaise (\lopt{polski}). A~été remplacée par le paquetage \pack{polski}. Voir~\cite{polski,platex-pl}.
-% Mais le \emph{même} nom désignait aussi une version de \LaTeX\ adaptée à~la langue japonaise,
-% \packa{\PLaTeXe}{PLaTeX2e}~\cite{platex-jp,kakuto}.
-% \item[\uscrp{pmk}]\iscrp{pmk}
-% Un exemple de script \emph{shell} pour préparer le paquetage \upack{minitoc}
-% et sa documentation; vous devriez l'adapter à~vos besoins.
-% Voir le point~\vref{IN10}.
-% \item[points de conduite] (\emph{leaders}) Une séquence répétive de points (ou d'un autre petit caractère),
-% espacés régulièrement, utilisée pour relier deux objets sur la même ligne (conduisant d'un titre à~un
-% numéro de page dans une table des matières ou analogue).
-% \item[polymorphe (entrée)] Une entrée\index{entree polymorphe=entrée polymorphe} dans la table des matières, la
-% liste des figures ou la liste des tableaux, qui change d'aspect selon l'endroit où elle apparaît (TdM
-% principale, minitable, etc.); voir la section~\vref{ss+polym}.
-% \item[PostScript] Un langage de description de page, par Adobe. Il décrit l'apparence d'une page, y~compris
-% d'éléments tels que texte, graphiques et images scannées, vers une imprimante ou un appareil de
-% visualisation. Introduit par Adobe en 1985, il est devenu le langage de choix dans l'impression de haute
-% qualité.
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \item[préambule] (\emph{preamble}) Dans le fichier principal d'un document \LaTeX{} source, la partie de ce
-% fichier qui se trouve entre les commandes \com{documentclass}\texttt{[.{}.{}.]\{.{}.{}.\}} et
-% \ienv{document}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{document\}}. Dans le préambule, vous pouvez insérer des déclarations globales et le
-% chargement de paquetages par des commandes \com{usepackage}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[préparation] Les commandes de préparation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} préparent les fichiers auxiliaires
-% pour les mini-tables d'un type donné. Une commande de~\emph{préparation} doit avoir été invoqué
-% préalablement (et une seule fois) à~toute commande d'insertion pour le type de mini-table. Les commandes
-% de préparation sont (voir la table~\vref{t+SUC-PI}):
-% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
-% \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, \com{dopartlot},&(niveau partie)\\
-% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, \com{dominilot},&(niveau chapitre)\\
-% \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, \com{dosectlot},&(niveau section)\\
-% \com{mtcprepare}&(tous niveaux)
-% \end{tabular}
-% \item[\uclass{proc}]\iclass{proc} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX, pour préparer les comptes-rendus d'une conférence.
-% Pour le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, elle est très semblable à~la classe de document \class{article}; voir
-% plus haut.
-% \begin{table}[tp]
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Profondeurs pour les commandes de sectionnement}\label{t+j+depths}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \textbf{Classe:}&\textbf{\class{book}}&\textbf{\class{report}}&\textbf{\class{article}}\\
-% \midrule
-% \dcnt{secnumdepth}&$\phantom{-}2$&$\phantom{-}2$&$3$\\
-% \com{part}&$-1$&$-1$&$0$\\
-% \com{chapter}&$\phantom{-}0$&$\phantom{-}0$&$\times$\\
-% \com{section}&$\phantom{-}1$&$\phantom{-}1$&$1$\\
-% \com{subsection}&$\phantom{-}2$&$\phantom{-}2$&$2$\\
-% \com{subsubsection}&$\phantom{-}3$&$\phantom{-}3$&$3$\\
-% \com{paragraph}&$\phantom{-}4$&$\phantom{-}4$&$4$\\
-% \com{subparagraph}&$\phantom{-}5$&$\phantom{-}5$&$5$\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{table}
-% \item[profondeur] Dans les classes de documents standard (et dans la plupart des classes) ayant des commandes se
-% sectionnement, nous avons une notion de \textbf{profondeur} (\emph{depth}). La profondeur d'une commande de
-% sectionnement détermine le niveau jusqu'auquel descend la numérotation dans son titre (selon la valeur du compteur
-% \dcnt{secnumdepth}), et les entrées pour une commande de sectionnement données apparaissent dans la table
-% des matières principale si la profondeur de cette commande de sectionnement est inférieure ou égale à~la
-% valeur du compteur \dcnt{tocdepth}; consultez le tableau~\vref{t+j+depths} pour les profondeurs des commandes
-% de sectionnement dans les principales classes de document.
-%
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Le mécanisme est analogue pour les parttocs, minitocs et secttocs, en utilisant les valeurs des compteurs
-% \dcnt{parttocdepth}, \dcnt{minitocdepth} et \dcnt{secttocdepth}. Si vous utilisez des sous-figures ou
-% des sous-tableaux, les mini-tables correspondantes utilisent des compteurs tels que
-% \dcnt{partlofdepth}, \dcnt{partlotdepth}, \dcnt{minilofdepth}, \dcnt{minilotdepth}, \dcnt{sectlofdepth}
-% et \dcnt{sectlotdepth}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \item[pseudo-chapitre]
-% Ou chapitre étoilé. Un chapitre qui commence par une commande «~étoilée~» \com{chapter*}.
-% Par défaut, il n'a pas
-% d'entrée dans la table des matières. \com{chapter*} nécessite quelques précautions avec le paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{s+starred.chap}.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{Q}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Q}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\upack{quotchap}] Le paquetage \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} fournit des commandes pour ajouter des
-% citations à~certaines en-têtes (chapitres) dans les classes standard de document \LaTeXe:
-% \class{book} et \class{report}. Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}
-% (voir le point~\vref{h.quotchap} et la section~\vref{faq.39}).
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{R}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{R}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[README] est un fichier en texte pur (anglais) décrivant sommairement le paquetage \upack{minitoc},
-% plus quelques informations utiles.
-% \item[\uclass{report}]\iclass{report} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{classes}. Elle a des commandes de sectionnement:
-% \com{part}, \com{chapter} et \com{section} (et en dessous).
-% Elle est compatible avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et vous pouvez faire des mini-tables aux niveaux partie
-% et chapitre (mais pas au niveau section, pour éviter de trop nombreux fichiers auxiliaires).
-% \item[\uscrp{rmk}]\iscrp{rmk} Un exemple de script \emph{shell}, qui trie les fichiers
-% du paquetage \upack{minitoc} en classes (un répertoire pour chaque classe).
-% Il devrait être exécuté après les scripts
-% \scrp{imk} (obligatoire) et \scrp{emk} et/ou
-% \scrp{fmk}, dans cet ordre. Voir le point~\vref{IN10}.
-% \item[\upack{romannum}] Le paquetage \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} change les numéros (pour les commandes de
-% sectionnement) engendrés par \LaTeX{} de chiffres arabes en chiffres romains. Ce paquetage utilise le
-% paquetage \pack{stdclsdv}~\cite{stdclsdv}.
-% Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.romannum} et la
-% section~\vref{faq.40}).
-% \item[\pack{rotating}] Le paquetage \pack{rotating}~\cite{rotating} effectue toutes les sortes de rotations
-% que vous pouvez souhaiter, y~compris celles de figures complètes.
-% \item[\pack{rotfloat}] Le paquetage pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}\imess{I0053} fournit des commandes pour définir de
-% nouveaux flottants de divers styles
-% of various styles (\texttt{plain}, \texttt{boxed}, \texttt{ruled}, et des styles non définis);
-% le paquetage \pack{rotating}~\cite{rotating} fournit de nouveaux environnements (\env{sidewaysfigure}
-% et \env{sidewaystable}) qui sont tournés de $90^\circ$ ou $270^\circ$.
-% Mais qu'en est-t-il de nouveaux flottants tournés, par exemple un flottant avec filets et tourné?
-% Ce paquetage rend ceci possible; il établit un pont entre les deux paquetages et étend aussi les commandes du
-% paquetage \pack{float} pour définir des versions tournées des nouveaux flottants.
-% \item[rubber] \tool{rubber}~\cite{rubber} est un programme d'emballage (\emph{wrapper})
-% pour \LaTeX\ et ses programmes associés. Son
-% but est, étant donné un source \LaTeX\ à~traiter, de le compiler un nombre de fois suffisant pour résoudre
-% toutes les références, en exécutant éventuellement des programmes satellites tels que \textbf{\BibTeX},
-% \textbf{makeindex}, \textbf{Metapost}, etc., pour produire les fichiers de données adéquats. Il a des
-% dispositifs pour effectuer certaines actions de nettoyage en post-traitement, comme de détruire les fichiers
-% auxiliaires produits par \upack{minitoc}.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{S}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{S}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\uclass{scrartcl}]\iclass{scrartcl} Voir {\KOMAScript} plus haut.
-% \item[\uclass{scrbook}]\iclass{scrbook} Voir {\KOMAScript} plus haut.
-% \item[\uclass{scrreprt}]\iclass{scrreprt} Voir {\KOMAScript} plus haut.
-% \item[sectionnement (commandes de)] Ce sont les commandes \LaTeX\ qui spécifies la structure logique de votre document.
-% Les principales commandes de sectionnement sont \com{part}, \com{chapter}, \com{section},
-% \com{subsection}, \com{subsubsection}, \com{paragraph} et \com{subparagraph}.
-% Certaines classes standard de documents n'ont pas la commande \com{chapter} (ainsi les classes
-% \class{article} et \class{proc}), certaines n'ont pas de commandes de sectionnement (ainsi la classe
-% \class{letter}). Dans ce dernier cas, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est sans objet. Si certaines des
-% commandes \com{part}, \com{chapter} ou \com{section} ne sont pas définies, les
-% commandes de \upack{minitoc} pour le niveau associé ne sont pas disponibles. Si \com{chapter} est définie,
-% les commandes de \upack{minitoc} au niveau section ne sont pas définies dans la version courante du
-% paquetage \upack{minitoc} et les antérieures, mais si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie mais que
-% \com{section} l'est, alors les commandes de \upack{minitoc} au niveau section sont définies.
-% Voir la section~\vref{note+sectionning}.
-% Dans les classes non-standard de documents, les commandes de sectionnement portant des noms non-standard ne
-% peuvent pas être reconnues par le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% \item[sectlof] Une liste des figures pour une section.
-% \item[\dcnt{sectlofdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur des sectlofs.
-% \item[sectlot] Une liste des tableaux pour une section.
-% \item[\dcnt{sectlotdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur des sectlots.
-% \item[\upack{sectsty}] Le paquetage \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} offre un ensemble de commandes pour changer
-% la fonte utilisée pour les divers en-têtes de sectionnement dans les classes standard de document de \LaTeXe:
-% \class{article}, \class{book} et \class{report}. Ce paquetage fonctionne aussi avec
-% les classes {\KOMAScript}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}:
-% \class{scrartcl}, \class{scrbook} et \class{scrreprt}.
-% Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.sectsty} et la
-% section~\vref{faq.28}).
-% \item[secttoc] Une table des matières pour une section.
-% \item[\dcnt{secttocdepth}] Ce compteur contient la profondeur des secttocs.
-% \item[\upack{sfheaders}] Le paquetage \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} (pour \LaTeXe) emprunte
-% quelques définitions des classes standard \class{article}/\class{report}/\class{book}
-% et les modifie afin d'imprimer les en-têtes de partie, chapitre, section, sous-section\ldots{} avec la
-% variante Sans-Serif de la fonte courante.
-% Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.sfheaders} et la
-% section~\vref{faq.41}).
-% \item[shell] Dans les systèmes d'exploitation Unix, analogues à~Unix et Linux, le \emph{shell} est un programme
-% utilisé comme interface entre le système d'exploitation et l'utilisateur. Il peut aussi être utilisé comme
-% un langage de programmation pour écrire des programmes ou \emph{scripts} afin de préparer de séquences de
-% tâches utilisées de manière routinière. Les principaux \emph{shells} sont le \emph{shell} de Bourne (\textbf{sh}),
-% le C~\emph{shell} (\textbf{csh}), le \emph{shell} de Korn (\textbf{ksh}), et leurs nombreux descendants
-% (tels que \textbf{bash}, \textbf{tcsh}, etc.).
-% \item[\uopt{shortext}]\iopt{shortext} Une option\imess{W0020} du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle force l'utilisation de suffixes courts
-% (3~caractères) dans les noms des fichiers auxiliaires de minitoc. Cette option est inactive par défaut, mais
-% est automatiquement activée si votre système d'exploitation requiert des suffixes courts. Voir
-% \textbf{autoconfiguration} plus haut et la section~\vref{.8+3}.
-% \item[\upack{shorttoc}] Le paquetage \pack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc} permet de créer une autre table des
-% matières dans un document, avec un autre titre et une autre profonteur que la table des matières principale.
-% \item[SJIS] Le codage SJIS de caractères (pour le japonais), aussi connu sous le nom de MS-Kanji
-% (Kanji pour Microsoft\textsuperscript{\textregistered}),
-% consiste en deux jeux de caractères se recouvrant: celui surnommé Katakana demi-largeur (JIS X0201-1976,
-% caractères codés sur 1~octet dans l'intervalle de \texttt{0xA1} à~\texttt{0xDF}) et le jeu de caractères JIS
-% (pleine largeur) (JIS X0208-1990, associé aux points de codage restants).
-% Cette information provient de~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}.
-% \item[\upack{\SLaTeX}]\ipacka{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX} Une version of \LaTeX\ adaptée pour la langue suédoise. Voir~\cite{slatex}.
-% \item[\upack{splitbib}]\ipack{splitbib} Un paquetage~\cite{splitbib} \LaTeX\ qui permet de trier une bibliographie
-% en catégories et sous-catégories; ceci est intéressant pour des listes de publications, pour grouper les
-% références par sujet, par année,~...
-% \item[\upack{stdclsdv}] Le paquetage \pack{stdclsdv}~\cite{stdclsdv} est destiné à~être utilisé par les
-% auteurs de paquetages \LaTeX{} qui ont besoin de savoir quelles divisions de sectionnement sont fournies par
-% la classe du document.
-% provided by the document class.
-% \item[strut] Un trait vertical invisible utilisé pour forcer une séparation minimale entre deux lignes de texte.
-% Ce terme anglais signifiant «~étai~» est conservé car il fait partie du jargon \TeX{} et \LaTeX.
-% \item[\upack{subfig}] Le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig} permet l'inclusion de petites,
-% «~sous-~» figures et tables. Il en simplifie le positionnement, l'ajout de légendes (\emph{captions}) et
-% l'étiquetage à~l'intérieur d'un seul environnement \env{figure} ou \env{table}. De plus, ce paquetage
-% permet que de tels sous-captions (sous-légendes) soient écrits dans la liste des figures ou dans la liste des
-% tableaux si vous le désirez.
-% \item[\upack{subfigure}] Le paquetage \pack{subfigure}~\cite{subfigure} est une version obsolète (par le même
-% auteur) du paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}.
-% \item[suffixe] (\emph{extension}) Le nom d'un fichier est souvent constitué de 2~parties: un \emph{nom de base}
-% et un \emph{suffixe}, séparées par un point. Sous certains anciens systèmes d'exploitation, le nom de base
-% est limité à~8~caractères et le suffixe à~3~caractères (le schéma «~8+3~»). Voir aussi les sections~\vref{MS-DOS}
-% et~\vref{.8+3}. Il est fortement recommandé d'avoir au plus un seul point dans un nom de fichier.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{T}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{T}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[TDM, TdM] Acronyme pour «~table des matières~» (\emph{TOC, ``table of contents''}).
-% \item[TDS] \index{TDS}La \emph{\TeX~Directory Structure}~\cite{tds,ftds}; une structure de répertoires fortement
-% recommandée pour ranger les fichiers de macros, fontes et autres fichiers systèmes \TeX{} indépendants de
-% l'implantation; elle suggère aussi comment incorporer le reste des fichiers \TeX{} dans une seule structure;
-% la \index{TDS}TDS a été pensée pour fonctionner sur tous les systèmes modernes.
-% \item[\TeX] \TeX{} est un programme écrit par \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth}~\cite{texbook,ftb}.
-% Il est conçu pour la composition de textes et d'équations mathématiques.
-%
-% \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} a commencé le développement de \TeX{} en 1977 parce qu'il était
-% frustré par la manière avec laquelle ses articles étaient publiés par
-% l'\emph{American Mathematical Society}. Il avait arrêté de soumettre des
-% articles vers 1974 parce que \og{} le résultat final était trop pénible
-% à~regarder \fg{}. \TeX{}, tel que nous l'utilisons aujourd'hui, est sorti en
-% 1982 et a été amélioré au fil des ans. Ces dernières années \TeX{} a
-% atteint une grande stabilité. Aujourd'hui \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} affirme qu'il n'y a
-% virtuellement plus de \og{} bug \fg{}. Le numéro de version de \TeX{} tend
-% vers $\pi$ et est actuellement $3.141592$.
-%
-% \TeX{} se prononce \og{} Tech \fg{}, avec un \og{} ch \fg{} comme dans le mot
-% écossais \og{} Loch \fg{}. En alphabet phonétique cela donne
-% \textbf{[tex]}\dots Dans un environnement \texttt{ASCII}, \TeX{}
-% devient \texttt{TeX}.
-% \item[\upack{thailatex}] Le paquetage \pack{thailatex}~\cite{thailatex} permet de composer
-% des documents en langue thaïe. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser le système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}.
-% \item[\uopt{tight}]\iopt{tight} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle donne un espacement serré des lignes dans
-% les mini-tables. L'option contraire est \optd{loose}.
-% \item[\upack{titlesec}] Le\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0099}} paquetage \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc} permet de changer les titres de
-% sectionnement. Parmi ses nombreux dispositifs, il permet des titres dans la marge, un format différent dans
-% les pages de gauche et de droite, des filets au-dessus et en dessous du titre, etc.
-% Malheureusement, il est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% \item[\upack{titletoc}] Le\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0040}} paquetage \pack{titletoc} est utile pour la mise
-% en forme des entrées de la table
-% des matières, en offrant la possibilité de changer de format au milieu du document, de regrouper des entrées
-% en un seul paragraphe, d'avoir de jolies entrées en format libre, de faire des tables des matières
-% partielles, etc.
-% Malheureusement, il est avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-%
-% Le fichier \xfile{titletoc.sty} ne fait pas partie du paquetage \pack{titlesec}; c'est un paquetage
-% indépendant, mais il est décrit dans la documentation~\cite{titletoc} du paquetage \pack{titlesec}.
-% \item[\uscrp{tmk}]\iscrp{tmk} Un fichier script file qui crée une hiérarchie \index{TDS}TDS~\cite{tds,ftds} (à~adapter
-% pour votre système).
-% \item[TOC] Acronyme pour «~\emph{table of contents}~», ou «~table des matières~».
-% \item[\upack{tocbibind}] Le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind}\imess{I0046} peut être utilisé pour ajouter une
-% entrée pour la table des matières et/ou pour la bibliographie et/ou pour l'index dans la table des matières.
-% Mais il nécessite quelques précautions si vous l'utilisez avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{special.entries}.
-% \item[\dcnt{tocdepth}] Ce compteur contient la profondeur de la table des matières.
-% \item[\upack{tocloft}] Le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}\imess{I0047} offre des outils pour contrôler
-% la conception typographique de la table des matières, de la liste des figures et de la liste des tables. De
-% nouvelles sortes de «~liste des \ldots~» peuvent être définies. Si vous utilisez le paquetage
-% \pack{tocloft} et le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, regardez la section~\vref{faq+tocloft}, sur la manière de
-% traiter quelques problèmes mineurs de compatibilité.
-% \item[\xfile{TODO}] est un fichier en texte pur (anglais) qui liste quelques propositions de développement du
-% paquetage, pas encore réalisées. Commentaires et suggestions sont les bienvenus.
-% \item[token] Un \emph{token}\,\footnote{Cette définition est tirée
-% du <<~\textsl{The \TeX{}book}~>>~\cite{texbook,ftb}.}\textsuperscript{,}\footnote{Gardons cet anglicisme bien pratique!}
-% est soit (a)~un seul caractère avec son code de
-% catégorie attaché (voir «~catcode~» plus haut), soit (b)~une séquence de contrôle. \virage{} Vous \emph{devriez}
-% vous souvenir de deux choses importantes à~propos des \emph{tokens} de \TeX: (1)~Une séquence de contrôle est
-% considérée comme étant un seul objet qui n'est plus composée d'une suite de symboles. En conséquence, les noms longs
-% de séquences de contrôle ne sont pas plus difficiles à~traiter par \TeX\ que les noms courts, une fois qu'ils
-% ont été remplacés par des \emph{tokens}. De plus, les espaces ne sont pas ignorés après les séquences de
-% contrôle à~l'intérieur d'une liste de \emph{tokens}; la règle d'ignorance des espaces ne s'applique que dans un
-% fichier d'entrée, au moment où les chaînes de caractères sont découpées en \emph{tokens}. (2)~Une fois qu'un
-% code de catégorie a été attaché à~un \emph{token} caractère, cet attachement est permanent. Par exemple, si le
-% caractère~`\verb|{|' était soudainement déclaré comme étant de catégorie~12 au lieu de catégorie~1, les
-% les caractères `\verb|{|$_1$' déjà à~l'intérieur de listes de \emph{tokens} de \TeX\ resteraient encore de
-% catégorie~1; seules les listes nouvellement construites contiendraient des \emph{tokens} `\verb|{|$_{12}$'.
-% En d'autres termes, les caractères individuels reçoivent une interprétation figée dès qu'ils ont été lus depuis
-% un fichier, selon la catégorie qu'ils ont au moment de la lecture. Les séquences de contrôle sont différents,
-% car elles peuvent changer d'interprétation à~tout moment. Les processus digestifs de \TeX\ savent toujours
-% exactement ce qu'un \emph{token} signifie, parce que le code de catégorie apparaît dans le \emph{token}
-% lui-même; mais lorsque les processus digestifs rencontrent un \emph{token} séquence de contrôle, ils doivent
-% examiner la définition courante de cette séquence de contrôle afin d'en trouver la signification.
-% \item[\pack{trivfloat}] Le paquetage \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} (de \name{Joseph~A.}{Wright})\imess{I0053} fournit une
-% méthode rapide pour définir de nouveaux types de flottants en \LaTeX. Un seule commande définit un nouveau
-% flottant dans le même style que les types de flottants \env{figure} et \env{table} du noyau \LaTeX{} kernel.
-% \item[\pack{txfonts}] Le paquetage \pack{txfonts}~\cite{txfonts} fournit les fontes \texttt{TX}, qui comprennent
-% \begin{enumerate}\itemsep=0pt
-% \item des fontes romanes textuelles virtuelles utilisant Adobe Times (ou URW NimbusRomNo9L) avec quelques
-% symboles textuels modifiés ou additionnels dans les codages OT1, T1, TS1 et LY1;
-% \item {\textsf{des fontes sans empattement (sans serif) utilisant Adobe Helvetica (ou URW NimbusSanL) avec
-% quelques symboles textuels additionnels dans les codages OT1, T1, TS1 et LY1}};
-% \item {\smooth\texttt{des fontes à~chasse fixe (dites <<~machine à~écrire~>>) dans\linebreak[4] les
-% codages OT1, T1, TS1 et LY1}};
-% \item des alphabets mathématiques utilisant Adobe Times (ou URW NimbusRomNo9L) avec des métriques modifiées;
-% \item des fontes mathématiques de tous les symboles correspondant à~ceux des fontes mathématiques
-% Computer Modern (CMSY, CMMI, CMEX et les lettres grecques de CMR);
-% \item des fontes mathématiques de tous les symboles correspondant à~ceux des fontes \AmS{} fonts (MSAM et MSBM);
-% \item des fontes mathématiques de divers symboles.
-% \end{enumerate}
-% Toutes ces fontes sont en format Type~1 (dans des fichiers \suffix{.afm} et \suffix{.pfb}).
-% Les fichiers \suffix{.tfm} et \suffix{.vf} nécessaires ainsi que les fichiers de paquetage \LaTeXe{} et
-% fichiers <<~font map~>> (\suffix{.map}) pour \tool{dvips} sont fournis.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{U}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{U}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[UNIX] Un système d'exploitation moderne, disponible sur divers types d'ordinateurs et dans diverses
-% variantes. Du point de vue de \upack{minitoc}, il a l'avantage d'utiliser des noms de fichiers avec des
-% suffixes longs (la limite est trop haute pour que le nombre de mini-tables soit un problème).
-% \item[UNIX (analogues~à)] Les systèmes d'exploitation analogues à~Unix, avec les mêmes avantages. Linux en est
-% un bon exemple, mais il en existe d'autres.
-% \item[\utool{urlbst}]\itool{urlbst} Un script PERL script, par \name{Norman}{Gray}~\cite{urlbst}, pour ajouter un type
-% d'entrée \BibTeX{} \texttt{webpage},
-% et ajouter le support des champs généraux \texttt{url} et \texttt{lastchecked}, aux fichiers \suffix{.bst}
-% de \BibTeX{} (du moins à~la plupart d'entre eux). Ajoute optionnellement un support basique pour les champs
-% \texttt{eprint} et \texttt{doi}, et aussi le support pour \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}/\pack{hyperref}.
-% \item[UTF\phantom{-}8] UTF~8 (Unicode Transformation Format~8), aussi appelée UTF~2 ou FSS-UTF, est une représentation
-% spéciale d'Unicode (resp. ISO~10\,646). Elle utilise des séquences de plusieurs octets de longueurs
-% diverses, mais seules les séquences d'un, de deux ou de trois octets sont implantées dans \pack{CJK}.
-% Les caractères ASCII seront utilisés tels quels --- sans cette propriété, il serait impossible d'utiliser
-% UTF~8 avec \TeX. Voir le tableau~\vref{t+jargon+CJK}.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{V}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{V}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\upack{varsects}] Le paquetage \pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} offre un ensemble de commandes pour changer
-% la fonte utilisée pour les divers en-têtes de sectionnement dans les classes standard de document de \LaTeXe:
-% \class{article}, \class{book} et \class{report}.
-% Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.varsects} et la
-% section~\vref{faq.33}).
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{W}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{W}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \par\reversemarginpar
-% \item[Wikipédia] La \ixgrf{wikif.png}Wikipédia\index{Wikipedia=Wikipédia}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{0cm}[2.87cm][0cm]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=2.5cm]{wikif.png}}}}
-% est un projet d'encyclopédie libre, multilingue et de contenu ouvert (libre, neutre et vérifiable
-% que chacun peut éditer et améliorer) géré par la \emph{Wikimedia Foundation}
-% à~but non lucratif. Son nom est un assemblage des mots \emph{wiki} (un type de site Web collaboratif) et
-% \emph{encyclopedia}. Lancé en 2001 par \name{Jimmy}{Wales} et \name{Larry}{Sanger}, c'est le projet de travail
-% de référence général le plus vaste, celui qui croît le plus vite, et le plus populaire disponible sur l'Internet.
-% \par\normalmarginpar
-% \item[\upack{wrapfig}] Le paquetage \pack{wrapfig}~\cite{wrapfig} fournit les environnements \env{wrapfigure} et
-% \env{wraptable} pour placer une figure ou un tableau sur le côté de la page et faire que le texte
-% enveloppe cette figure ou ce tableau.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \jsection{X}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{X}
-% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
-% \item[\scrp{xmk}] Un exemple de script \emph{shell}, qui compose les fichiers exemples de documents et produit
-% des documents PDF.
-% \item[\upack{xr}] Le paquetage \pack{xr}~\cite{xr} met en place un système pour les références externes
-% (\emph{eXternal References}). J'en ai écrit la première version, mais elle avait de graves problèmes.
-% \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle} a réécrit ce paquetage d'une manière bien meilleure et plus robuste. Avec sa permission,
-% j'ai utilisé une partie de son code dans le paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour réaliser les commandes de
-% préparation (telles que \com{dominitoc}). Si vous utilisez aussi le paquetage
-% \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}, utilisez \pack{xr-hyper}~\cite{xr-hyper} au lieu du paquetage \upack{xr}.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \end{mtchideinmaintoc}
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \chapter{Installation}\label{c+installation}
-% \or\relax
-% \chapter{Installation}\label{c+installation}
-% \fi
-% \bgroup\mtcindent=0pt
-% \minilot
-% \egroup
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This chapter describes the installation of the \upack{minitoc} package (version~\#60).
-%
-% This package contains a lot of files. The list of all files is given in \xfile{minitoc.l}. See
-% tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}.
-% The files are sorted into ``classes'' below (a file can appear in more than one class). Each class specifies
-% the function and the placement of its files.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce chapitre décrit l'installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} (version~\#60).
-%
-% Ce paquetage contient de nombreux fichiers. La liste de tous les fichiers est donnée dans
-% \xfile{minitoc.l}. Voir le tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}.
-% Les fichiers sont répartis en «~classes~» ci-dessous (un même fichier peut apparaître dans plusieurs classes).
-% Chaque classe spécifie la fonction et le placement de ses fichiers.
-% \fi
-% \begin{table}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \changeskips
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \def\CLA{class}
-% ^^A \def\ET{\textrm{, and}\xspace}
-% \def\ET{\textrm{,}\xspace}
-% \caption{List of files (\uxfile{minitoc.l}), first part}\label{t+files1}\ixfile{minitoc.l}
-% \or\relax
-% \def\CLA{classe}
-% ^^A \def\ET{ \textrm{et}\xspace}
-% \def\ET{\textrm{,}\xspace}
-% \caption{Liste des fichiers (\uxfile{minitoc.l}), première partie}\label{t+files1}\ixfile{minitoc.l}
-% \fi
-% \vspace*{-1\baselineskip}
-% \medskip
-% \fboxsep=1em
-% ^^A % was -.22\textwidth
-% \null\hspace*{-.24\textwidth}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{1.32\textwidth}\footnotesize\ttfamily\upshape\mdseries
-% \flushleft
-% \noextrasfrancais
-% \smash{\vphantom{\mpfootnotemark[0]}}\vspace{-.5\baselineskip}%
-% \setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt}\raggedcolumns
-% \begin{multicols}{4}\selectlanguage{french}
-% \def\NL{\mbox{}\hfill\mbox{}\\}
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=0em
-% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN0}):}}}]\NL
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \leftmargin=0pt
-% \listparindent=1em
-% \item \xfile{minitoc.ins}
-% \item \xfile{minitoc.dtx}
-% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \medskip
-% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN1}):}}}]\NL
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \leftmargin=0pt
-% \listparindent=1em
-% \item \xfile{minitoc.sty}
-% \item \xfile{mtcoff.sty}
-% \item \xfile{mtcmess.sty}
-% \item \xfile{mtcpatchmem.sty}
-% \item \xfile{acadian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{acadien.mld}
-% \item \xfile{afrikaan.mld}
-% \item \xfile{afrikaans.mld}
-% \item \xfile{albanian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{american.mld}
-% \item \xfile{arab.mld}
-% \item \xfile{arab2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{arabi.mld}
-% \item \xfile{arabic.mld}
-% \item \xfile{armenian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{australian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{austrian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{bahasa.mld}
-% \item \xfile{bahasai.mld}
-% \item \xfile{bahasam.mld}
-% \item \xfile{bangla.mld}
-% \item \xfile{basque.mld}
-% \item \xfile{bengali.mld}
-% \item \xfile{bicig.mld}
-% \item \xfile{bicig2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{bicig3.mld}
-% \item \xfile{bithe.mld}
-% \item \xfile{brazil.mld}
-% \item \xfile{brazilian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{breton.mld}
-% \item \xfile{british.mld}
-% \item \xfile{bulgarian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{bulgarianb.mld}
-% \item \xfile{buryat.mld}
-% \item \xfile{buryat2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{canadian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{canadien.mld}
-% \item \xfile{castillan.mld}
-% \item \xfile{castillian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{catalan.mld}
-% \item \xmldo{chinese1}
-% \item \xmldo{chinese2}
-% \item \xfile{croatian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{czech.mld}
-% \item \xfile{danish.mld}
-% \item \xfile{devanagari.mld}
-% \item \xfile{dutch.mld}
-% \item \xfile{english.mld}
-% \item \xfile{english1.mld}
-% \item \xfile{english2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{esperant.mld}
-% \item \xfile{esperanto.mld}
-% \item \xfile{estonian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{ethiopia.mld}
-% \item \xfile{ethiopian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{ethiopian2.mld}
-% \item \xmldo{farsi1}
-% \item \xmldo{farsi2}
-% \item \xfile{farsi3.mld}
-% \item \xfile{finnish.mld}
-% \item \xfile{finnish2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{francais.mld}
-% \item \xfile{french.mld}
-% \item \xfile{french1.mld}
-% \item \xfile{french2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{frenchb.mld}
-% \item \xfile{frenchle.mld}
-% \item \xfile{frenchpro.mld}
-% \item \xfile{galician.mld}
-% \item \xfile{german.mld}
-% \item \xfile{germanb.mld}
-% \item \xfile{germanb2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{greek.mld}
-% \item \xfile{greek-mono.mld}
-% \item \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld}
-% \item \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}
-% \item \xfile{guarani.mld}
-% \item \xmldo{hangul1}
-% \item \xmldo{hangul2}
-% \item \xmldo{hangul3}
-% \item \xmldo{hangul4}
-% \item \xmldo{hangul-u8}
-% \item \xmldo{hanja1}
-% \item \xmldo{hanja2}
-% \item \xmldo{hanja-u8}
-% \item \xfile{hebrew.mld}
-% \item \xfile{hebrew2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{hindi.mld}
-% \item \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}
-% \item \xfile{hungarian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{icelandic.mld}
-% \item \xfile{indon.mld}
-% \item \xfile{indonesian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{interlingua.mld}
-% \item \xfile{irish.mld}
-% \item \xfile{italian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{italian2.mld}
-% \item \xmldo{japanese}
-% \item \xmldo{japanese2}
-% \item \xmldo{japanese3}
-% \item \xmldo{japanese4}
-% \item \xmldo{japanese5}
-% \item \xmldo{japanese6}
-% \item \xfile{kannada.mld}
-% \item \xfile{khalkha.mld}
-% \item \xfile{latin.mld}
-% \item \xfile{latin2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{latinc.mld}
-% \item \xfile{latinc2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{latvian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{latvian2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{letton.mld}
-% \item \xfile{letton2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{lithuanian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{lsorbian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{magyar.mld}
-% \item \xfile{magyar2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{magyar3.mld}
-% \item \xfile{malay.mld}
-% \item \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}
-% \item \xfile{malayalam-keli.mld}
-% \item \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld}
-% \item \xmldo{malayalam-omega}
-% \item \xfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}
-% \item \xfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}
-% \item \xfile{manju.mld}
-% \item \xfile{mexican.mld}
-% \item \xfile{meyalu.mld}
-% \item \xfile{mongol.mld}
-% \item \xfile{mongolb.mld}
-% \item \xfile{mongolian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{naustrian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{newzealand.mld}
-% \item \xfile{ngerman.mld}
-% \item \xfile{ngermanb.mld}
-% \item \xfile{ngermanb2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{norsk.mld}
-% \item \xfile{norsk2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{nynorsk.mld}
-% \item \xfile{nynorsk2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{occitan.mld}
-% \item \xfile{occitan2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{polish.mld}
-% \item \xfile{polish2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{polski.mld}
-% \item \xfile{portuges.mld}
-% \item \xfile{portuguese.mld}
-% \item \xfile{romanian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{romanian2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{romanian3.mld}
-% \item \xfile{russian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{russianb.mld}
-% \item \xfile{russianc.mld}
-% \item \xfile{russian2m.mld}
-% \item \xfile{russian2o.mld}
-% \item \xmldo{russian-cca}
-% \item \xmldo{russian-cca1}
-% \item \xmldo{russian-lh}
-% \item \xmldo{russian-lhcyralt}
-% \item \xmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi}
-% \item \xmldo{russian-lhcyrwin}
-% \item \xfile{samin.mld}
-% \item \xfile{scottish.mld}
-% \item \xfile{serbian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{serbianc.mld}
-% \item \xfile{slovak.mld}
-% \item \xfile{slovene.mld}
-% \item \xfile{spanish.mld}
-% \item \xfile{spanish2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{spanish3.mld}
-% \item \xfile{spanish4.mld}
-% \item \xfile{swahili.mld}
-% \item \xfile{swedish.mld}
-% \item \xfile{swedish2.mld}
-% \item \xmldo{thai}
-% \item \xfile{turkish.mld}
-% \item \xfile{uighur.mld}
-% \item \xfile{uighur2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{uighur3.mld}
-% \item \xfile{UKenglish.mld}
-% \item \xfile{ukraineb.mld}
-% \item \xfile{ukrainian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{USenglish.mld}
-% \item \xfile{usorbian.mld}
-% \item \xfile{vietnam.mld}
-% \item \xfile{vietnamese.mld}
-% \item \xfile{welsh.mld}
-% \item \xfile{xalx.mld}
-% \item \xfile{xalx2.mld}
-% \item \xfile{xalx3.mld}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \medskip
-% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN2}):}}}]\NL
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \leftmargin=0pt
-% \listparindent=1em
-% \item \xfile{INSTALL}, \xfile{README}, \xfile{TODO}, \xfile{CATALOG}
-% \item \xfile{minitoc.l}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \medskip
-% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN3}):}}}]\NL
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \leftmargin=0pt
-% \listparindent=1em
-% \item
-% \exam{mtc-2c.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-2nd.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-3co.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-add.bib},
-% \exam{mtc-add.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-ads.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-amm.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-apx.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-art.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-bo.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-bk.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-ch0.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-cri.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-fko.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-fo1.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-fo2.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-gap.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hia.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hir.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hop.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-liv.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-mem.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-mm1.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-mu.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-nom.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-ocf.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-ofs.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-sbf.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-scr.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-syn.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-tbi.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-tlc.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-tlo.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-tsf.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-vti.tex}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{multicols}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \footnotetext{See continuation in table~\vref{t+files2}.}
-% \or\relax
-% \footnotetext{Voir la suite dans le tableau~\vref{t+files2}.}
-% \fi
-% \end{minipage}}
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{table}
-% \begin{table}[!tp]
-% ^^A \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \changeskips
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \def\CLA{class}
-% ^^A \def\ET{\textrm{, and}\xspace}
-% \def\ET{\textrm{,}\xspace}
-% \caption{List of files (\uxfile{minitoc.l}), second part}\label{t+files2}\ixfile{minitoc.l}
-% \or\relax
-% \def\CLA{classe}
-% ^^A \def\ET{ \textrm{et}\xspace}
-% \def\ET{\textrm{,}\xspace}
-% \caption{Liste des fichiers (\uxfile{minitoc.l}), seconde partie}\label{t+files2}\ixfile{minitoc.l}
-% \fi
-% \vspace*{-1\baselineskip}
-% \medskip
-% \fboxsep=1em
-% ^^A % was -.22\textwidth
-% \null\hspace*{-.24\textwidth}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{1.32\textwidth}\footnotesize\ttfamily\upshape\mdseries
-% \flushleft
-% \noextrasfrancais
-% \setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt}\raggedcolumns
-% \begin{multicols}{4}\selectlanguage{french}
-% \def\NL{\mbox{}\hfill\mbox{}\\}
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=0em
-% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \medskip
-% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN4}):}}}]\NL
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \leftmargin=0pt
-% \listparindent=1em
-% \item \xfile{minitoc.bug}
-% \item \xfile{minitoc.sum}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \medskip
-% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN5}):}}}]\NL
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \leftmargin=0pt
-% \listparindent=1em
-% \item \xfile{minitoc.ins}
-% \item \xfile{minitoc.dtx}
-% \item \xfile{minitoc.bib}
-% \item \xfile{minitoc.ist}\isuffix{.ist}
-% \item \xfile{minitoc.lan}\isuffix{.lan}
-% \item \xfile{minitoc.pre}\isuffix{.pre}
-% \item \xfile{en-mtc.bst}\isuffix{.bst}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \medskip
-% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN6}):}}}]\NL
-% {\rmfamily\slshape\ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The list of the graphic and flag files is given in tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}.
-% \or\relax
-% La liste des fichiers graphiques et drapeaux est donnée dans les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}.
-% \fi}
-% \medskip
-% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN7}):}}}]\NL
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \leftmargin=0pt
-% \listparindent=1em
-% \item \xfile{minitoc.dtx}
-% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}
-% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}
-% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}\isuffix{.ist}
-% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}\isuffix{.lan}
-% \item \xfile{minitoc.pre}\isuffix{.pre}
-% \item \xfile{franc.sty}, \xfile{frbib.sty}, \xfile{frnew.sty}
-% \item \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}\isuffix{.bst}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \medskip
-% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN8}):}}}]\NL
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \leftmargin=0pt
-% \listparindent=1em
-% \item \xfile{minitoc.pdf}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \medskip
-% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN9}):}}}]\NL
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \leftmargin=0pt
-% \listparindent=1em
-% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \medskip
-% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN10}):}}}]\NL
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \leftmargin=0pt
-% \listparindent=1em
-% \item \scrp{cmk}, \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, \scrp{imk}, \scrp{pmk}, \scrp{rmk}, \scrp{tmk}, \scrp{xmk}
-% ^^A \item \xfile{duplex2v.pro}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \medskip
-% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN11}):}}}]\NL
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \leftmargin=0pt
-% \listparindent=1em
-% \item \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{multicols}
-% \end{minipage}}
-% ^^A \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{table}
-% \begin{table}[!t]
-% \changeskips
-% \centering
-% \setlength{\winf}{\textwidth}% ^^A width in frame textwidth+marginparwidth+marginparsep-2*fboxrule-2*fboxsep
-% \setlength{\winp}{\marginparwidth}% ^^A left shift (marginparwidth+marginparsep)
-% \addtolength{\winp}{\marginparsep}%
-% \addtolength{\winf}{\marginparwidth}
-% \addtolength{\winf}{\marginparsep}
-% \addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxrule}
-% \addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxsep}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[List of the graphic files]{List of the graphic files (class~\ref{IN6})}\label{t+GRF1}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Liste des fichiers graphiques]{Liste des fichiers graphiques (classe~\ref{IN6})}\label{t+GRF1}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \noindent\null\hspace*{1cm}\hspace*{-\winp}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{\winf}\footnotesize\RaggedRight
-% \noindent\null\hspace*{-.24\textwidth}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{1.32\textwidth}\footnotesize\RaggedRight
-% \columnseprule=.4pt
-% \begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns
-% \xgrf{acadian-m.pdf},
-% \xgrf{acadien-m.pdf},
-% \xgrf{africa-lf.png},
-% \xgrf{africa-lo.pdf},
-% \xgrf{afrsud-l.pdf},
-% \xgrf{afrsud-p.pdf},
-% \xgrf{albania.pdf},
-% \xgrf{alb2.png},
-% \xgrf{alba-eth.pdf},
-% \xgrf{allemand.jpg},
-% \xgrf{anglo1.pdf},
-% \xgrf{arab-l.jpg},
-% \xgrf{arabw.png},
-% \xgrf{armeniad.pdf},
-% \xgrf{armenian-l.png},
-% \xgrf{armeniar.jpg},
-% \xgrf{baltes.jpg},
-% \xgrf{bangla.png},
-% \xgrf{bangla1.png},
-% \xgrf{bangla2.png},
-% \xgrf{basque-de.png},
-% \xgrf{basque-df.png},
-% \xgrf{basque1.pdf},
-% \xgrf{basque2.pdf},
-% \xgrf{be-dg-f.png},
-% \xgrf{belgique.pdf},
-% \xgrf{bengali-m.jpg},
-% \xgrf{bosnia.pdf},
-% \xgrf{brazil.pdf},
-% \xgrf{brazilp.pdf},
-% \xgrf{bretagne.pdf},
-% \xgrf{bulgariar.jpg},
-% \xgrf{bulgarski.png},
-% \xgrf{bulgmap.png},
-% \xgrf{buryatia.pdf},
-% \xgrf{buryatia-l.pdf},
-% \xgrf{canada.pdf},
-% \xgrf{canada-l.pdf},
-% \xgrf{canada-pe.png},
-% \xgrf{canada-pf.pdf},
-% \xgrf{canada1.pdf},
-% \xgrf{catalan-d.pdf},
-% \xgrf{catalan-p.pdf},
-% \xgrf{caucasus.pdf},
-% \xgrf{china-ae.png},
-% \xgrf{china-af.png},
-% \xgrf{china-ch.png},
-% \xgrf{china-l.pdf},
-% \xgrf{china-w.png},
-% \xgrf{chine1.pdf},
-% \xgrf{chine2.pdf},
-% \xgrf{cplpmap.png},
-% \xgrf{croatia-un.png},
-% \xgrf{croatie2.png},
-% \xgrf{cyr-alf.png},
-% \xgrf{cz1.pdf},
-% \xgrf{cz3.png},
-% \xgrf{czechd.pdf},
-% \xgrf{danemark.jpg},
-% \xgrf{danishd.pdf},
-% \xgrf{danishg.pdf},
-% \xgrf{devanagari.png},
-% \xgrf{dutchw.pdf},
-% \xgrf{ecosse1.pdf},
-% \xgrf{ecosse2.pdf},
-% \xgrf{ecosse3.pdf},
-% \xgrf{espa-l.pdf},
-% \xgrf{espa-o.png},
-% \xgrf{estonia-a.pdf},
-% \xgrf{estonia-b.pdf},
-% \xgrf{eth2.png},
-% \xgrf{ethiolang.png},
-% \xgrf{ethiopia.pdf},
-% \xgrf{ethiopia-p.pdf},
-% \xgrf{euro-lan.png},
-% \xgrf{euro-lan1.png},
-% \xgrf{euro-lan2.png},
-% \xgrf{euskara.png},
-% \xgrf{farsi.pdf},
-% \xgrf{farsi-logo.png},
-% \xgrf{feroe.jpg},
-% \xgrf{finlande1.png},
-% \xgrf{finlande2.pdf},
-% \xgrf{finnishd.pdf},
-% \xgrf{finnishl.pdf},
-% \xgrf{france-lr.png},
-% \xgrf{franco.png},
-% \xgrf{fswahili.pdf},
-% \xgrf{gael-ft.pdf},
-% \xgrf{gaid.jpg},
-% \xgrf{galicia-m.pdf},
-% \xgrf{galicia-mp.pdf},
-% \xgrf{galician-l.png},
-% \xgrf{galles1.pdf},
-% \xgrf{galles2.pdf},
-% \xgrf{germ-w.png},
-% \xgrf{german-c.pdf},
-% \xgrf{german-d.pdf},
-% \xgrf{german-m.pdf},
-% \xgrf{grece1.pdf},
-% \xgrf{grece2.pdf},
-% \xgrf{greeka.png},
-% \xgrf{greekm.jpg},
-% \xgrf{hangul.png},
-% \xgrf{hanja.png},
-% \xgrf{hanzi.png},
-% \xgrf{hin.png},
-% \xgrf{hindi-b.png},
-% \xgrf{hindi-p.png},
-% \xgrf{hispano.png},
-% \xgrf{hrv.png},
-% \xgrf{hun1.png},
-% \xgrf{hun2.jpg},
-% \xgrf{inde1.pdf},
-% \xgrf{inde2.jpg},
-% \xgrf{indonesia1.pdf},
-% \xgrf{indonesia2.pdf},
-% \xgrf{iranian.jpg},
-% \xgrf{irish.png},
-% \xgrf{irlande.pdf},
-% \xgrf{islam-pbc.png},
-% \xgrf{islam-sw.pdf},
-% \xgrf{islande.png},
-% \xgrf{islandep.jpg},
-% \xgrf{isr1.pdf},
-% \xgrf{isr2.pdf},
-% \xgrf{italian.pdf},
-% \xgrf{italo1.png},
-% \xgrf{italysm.png},
-% \xgrf{ivrit.png},
-% \xgrf{japon1.pdf},
-% \xgrf{japon2.jpg},
-% \xgrf{kannada-n.png},
-% \xgrf{karnad1.jpg},
-% \xgrf{karnataka.jpg},
-% \xgrf{kerala.jpg},
-% \xgrf{khalkha.pdf},
-% \xgrf{korean1.png},
-% \xgrf{korean2.jpg},
-% \xgrf{kos-alb.png},
-% \xgrf{kos-ml.png},
-% \xgrf{lamed3.png},
-% \xgrf{lang-g.png},
-% \xgrf{latvian-d.png},
-% \xgrf{latvian-r1.png},
-% \xgrf{lettonie.jpg},
-% \xgrf{leur.png},
-% \xgrf{lituanie.png},
-% \xgrf{luso1.pdf},
-% \xgrf{luso2.pdf},
-% \xgrf{malayalam.pdf},
-% \xgrf{malayalam.png},
-% \xgrf{malaysia1.pdf},
-% \xgrf{malaysia2.pdf},
-% \xgrf{manchu.jpg},
-% \xgrf{manchuria.jpg},
-% \xgrf{manjuc.jpg},
-% \xgrf{manjui.png},
-% \xgrf{mex1.pdf},
-% \xgrf{mex2.pdf},
-% \xgrf{mex3.pdf},
-% \xgrf{mexip.pdf},
-% \xgrf{meyalu.png},
-% \xgrf{mondep.png},
-% \xgrf{mongasie.pdf},
-% \xgrf{mongolcy.png},
-% \xgrf{mongolian.pdf},
-% \xgrf{mongols.png},
-% \xgrf{mongoltr.png},
-% \xgrf{neder.pdf},
-% \xgrf{nihongo.png},
-% \xgrf{norvege-c.pdf},
-% \xgrf{norvege-t.pdf},
-% \xgrf{norway-p.pdf},
-% \xgrf{occdial1.jpg},
-% \xgrf{occdial2.png},
-% \xgrf{occitanie.png},
-% \xgrf{occtaur.jpg},
-% \xgrf{paraguay.png},
-% \xgrf{paraguayp.pdf},
-% \xgrf{polish-d.jpg},
-% \xgrf{polmin.jpg},
-% \xgrf{pologne.pdf},
-% \xgrf{portu-a.png},
-% \xgrf{portu-b.png},
-% \xgrf{portu-p.jpg},
-% \xgrf{portu-r.jpg},
-% \xgrf{portugal.pdf},
-% \xgrf{romanian.pdf},
-% \xgrf{rus-cyr.png},
-% \xgrf{rus-re.png},
-% \xgrf{rus-su.pdf},
-% \xgrf{russian.png},
-% \xgrf{russian-e.pdf},
-% \xgrf{russian-n.png},
-% \xgrf{russian-w.png},
-% \xgrf{same.png},
-% \xgrf{same-f.png},
-% \xgrf{serb-a.pdf},
-% \xgrf{serbia1.pdf},
-% \xgrf{slovak-ok.png},
-% \xgrf{slovakia.pdf},
-% \xgrf{slovenian.png},
-% \xgrf{slovenie.pdf},
-% \xgrf{sorabe-1.jpg},
-% \xgrf{sorabe-2.jpg},
-% \xgrf{sorben.jpg},
-% \xgrf{sorbian.jpg},
-% \xgrf{spain.png},
-% \xgrf{suede-a.pdf},
-% \xgrf{suede-fin.pdf},
-% \xgrf{svenska.png},
-% \xgrf{swahili.pdf},
-% \xgrf{swahili-m.png},
-% \xgrf{sweden.pdf},
-% \xgrf{thai.pdf},
-% \xgrf{thai.png},
-% \xgrf{turkish.png},
-% \xgrf{turquie.pdf},
-% \xgrf{uighur.pdf},
-% \xgrf{ukra.png},
-% \xgrf{ukraine.jpg},
-% \xgrf{ukrainep.pdf},
-% \xgrf{viet2.pdf},
-% \xgrf{viet3.pdf},
-% \xgrf{viet4.pdf},
-% \xgrf{viet-w.pdf},
-% \xgrf{wallonie.pdf},
-% \xgrf{wiki.png},
-% \xgrf{wikif.png},
-% \xgrf{wrs-a.png},
-% \xgrf{wrs-c.png},
-% \xgrf{xinjiang.png},
-% \xgrf{xinjiangc.png},
-% \xgrf{xyugo.png}.
-% \end{multicols}
-% \end{minipage}}
-% \end{table}
-% \begin{table}[!t]
-% \changeskips
-% \centering
-% \setlength{\winf}{\textwidth}% ^^A width in frame textwidth+marginparwidth+marginparsep-2*fboxrule-2*fboxsep
-% \setlength{\winp}{\marginparwidth}% ^^A left shift (marginparwidth+marginparsep)
-% \addtolength{\winp}{\marginparsep}%
-% \addtolength{\winf}{\marginparwidth}
-% \addtolength{\winf}{\marginparsep}
-% \addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxrule}
-% \addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxsep}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[List of the flag files]{List of the flag files (class~\ref{IN6})}\label{t+GRF2}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Liste des fichiers drapeaux]{Liste des fichiers drapeaux (classe~\ref{IN6})}\label{t+GRF2}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \noindent\null\hspace*{1cm}\hspace*{-\winp}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{\winf}\footnotesize\RaggedRight
-% \noindent\null\hspace*{-.24\textwidth}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{1.32\textwidth}\footnotesize\RaggedRight
-% \columnseprule=.4pt
-% \begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns
-% \xgrfl{aaland-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{acadie-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{afghan-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{albania-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{algeria-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{alsace-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{andorra-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{argentina-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{angola-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{armenia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{aruba-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{australia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{austria-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{azerbaijan-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{bahamas-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{bahrain-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{bangladesh-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{barbados-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{belarus-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{belgium-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{belize-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{benin-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{bolivia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{bolzano-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{bosnia-hz-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{bozen-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{brazil-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{brussels-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{bulgaria-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{bur-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{burkina-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{burundi-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{cambodia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{california-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{cameroon-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{canada-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{cap-verde-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{castille-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{catalonia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{central-africa-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{chad-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{chile-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{china-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{cis-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{colombia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{comoros-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{congo-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{corsica-f.jpg},
-% \xgrfl{costa-rica-f.jpg},
-% \xgrfl{cplp-0.png},
-% \xgrfl{croatia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{cuba-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{cyprus-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{czech-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{dane-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{djibouti-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{dominica-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{dominican-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{east-timor-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{ecuador-f.jpg},
-% \xgrfl{egypt-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{el-salvador-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{england-f.jpg},
-% \xgrfl{equa-guinea-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{eritrea-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{esperanto-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{estonia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{ethiopia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{eusk-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{faroe-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{fiji-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{finland-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{flanders-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{france-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{francophonie-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{gabon-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{galicia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{georgia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{germany-f.jpg},
-% \xgrfl{ghana-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{gibraltar-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{greece-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{greenland-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{guatemala-f.jpg},
-% \xgrfl{guinea-bissau-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{guinea-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{gwenn-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{haiti-f.jpg},
-% \xgrfl{honduras-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{hungary-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{iceland-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{imongolia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{india-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{indonesia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{iran-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{iraq-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{ireland-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{israel-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{italy-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{ivory-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{jamaica-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{japan-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{jordan-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{jutland-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{karnataka-f.jpg},
-% \xgrfl{kazakhstan-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{kenya-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{kerala-f.jpg},
-% \xgrfl{kiribati-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{korea-n-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{korea-s-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{kosovo-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{kuwait-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{kyrgyzstan-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{laos-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{latvia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{lebanon-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{liberia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{libya-f.jpg},
-% \xgrfl{liech-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{lithuania-f.jpg},
-% \xgrfl{lorraine-f.jpg},
-% \xgrfl{louisiana-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{ls-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{lux-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{macau-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{macedonia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{madagascar-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{maine-f.jpg},
-% \xgrfl{malawi-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{malaysia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{mali-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{malta1-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{mauritania-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{mauritius-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{mexico-f.jpg},
-% \xgrfl{moldova-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{monaco-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{mongolia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{montenegro-f.jpg},
-% \xgrfl{morocco-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{mozambique-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{namibia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{nbrunswick-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{ncyprus-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{netherlands-antilles-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{netherlands-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{new-york-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{newzealand-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{nicaragua-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{nice-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{niger-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{nigeria-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{norway-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{occ-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{oman-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{opole-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{pakistan-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{palestine-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{panama-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{paraguay-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{peru-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{philippines-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{poland-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{polski-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{portugal-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{puerto-rico-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{qatar-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{quebec-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{rdcongo-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{romania-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{russia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{rwanda-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{saint-lucia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{sami-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{samoa-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{san-marino-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{sao-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{saudi-arabia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{scotland-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{senegal-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{serbia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{serbia-f2.png},
-% \xgrfl{seychelles-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{singapore-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{slovakia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{slovenia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{solomon-islands-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{somalia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{south-africa-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{spain-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{spilhennig.png},
-% \xgrfl{start.jpg},
-% \xgrfl{stop.png},
-% \xgrfl{sudan-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{suisse-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{suriname-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{sweden-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{syria-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{taiwan-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{tajikistan-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{tanzania-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{thailand-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{togo-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{tonga-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{tunisia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{turkey-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{turkmenistan-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{tuvalu-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{uae-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{uganda-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{uighur-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{uk-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{ukraine-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{uruguay-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{us-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{usa-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{uzbekistan-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{vanuatu-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{vatican-f.jpg},
-% \xgrfl{venezuela-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{vermont-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{vietnam-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{vojvodina-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{wales-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{wallonia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{yemen-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{zambia-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{zanzibar-f.png},
-% \xgrfl{zimbabwe-f.png}.
-% \end{multicols}
-% \end{minipage}}
-% \end{table}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{enumerate}[(1)]
-% \addtocounter{enumi}{-1}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \label{IN0}The files \xfile{minitoc.ins} and \xfile{minitoc.dtx}
-% are the basic source files of this package. The file \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} loads
-% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} but selects the french documentation.
-% The language selection is done by using
-% \com{ifcase} \ldots\ \com{or} \ldots\ \com{fi} constructs.
-% \or\relax
-% \label{IN0}Les fichiers \xfile{minitoc.ins} et \xfile{minitoc.dtx}
-% sont les fichiers sources basiques de ce paquetage. Le fichier \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} charge
-% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} mais sélectionne la documentation en français. La sélection de la
-% langue est faite en utilisant des constructions \com{ifcase} \ldots\ \com{or}
-% \ldots\ \com{fi}.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \label{IN1}The files \xfile{minitoc.sty}, \xfile{mtcoff.sty},
-% \xfile{mtcmess.sty},
-% and \emph{all}\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}\\\lmess{E0036}\\\lmess{E0038}\\\lmess{W0094}}
-% \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} and \texttt{*}\suffix{.mlo} files are the package
-% itself\,\footnote{The large number of \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} files is (partially) a consequence
-% of the fact that some languages have
-% aliases (or dialects) and hence one \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} file for each name (a \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} file may load
-% another one) and, if necessary, a \suffix{.mlo} file; the english and french languages are evident examples.
-% For some languages, the multiplicity of the \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} files corresponds to a multiplicity of fonts
-% and/or encodings (chinese, greek, japanese, korean, malayalam, polish, russian, serbian), or even
-% for spelling reforms (german, greek, norsk). \emph{Note that the presence of
-% the \xfile{english.mld} file is mandatory.} Since version~\#50, the \upack{minitoc} package signals the
-% missing \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} files and gives their list in a warning message.}.
-%
-% The table~\vref{t+languages} lists the available languages; for each of these languages, a
-% \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} file is available; the languages in parentheses are aliases of a main language
-% and their \suffix{.mld} files will load the \suffix{.mld} file of that main language.
-%
-% \ipack{mtcpatchmem}\xfile{mtcpatchmem.sty} is a temporary fix for compatibility with the \class{memoir} class.
-%
-% The files of this class must be \emph{all} installed in a directory where \LaTeXe{} finds the \suffix{.sty} files.
-% \or\relax
-% \label{IN1}Les fichiers \xfile{minitoc.sty}, \xfile{mtcoff.sty},
-% \xfile{mtcmess.sty}
-% et \emph{tous}\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}\\\lmess{E0036}\\\lmess{E0038}\\\lmess{W0094}}
-% les fichiers \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} et \texttt{*}\suffix{.mlo} constituent le
-% paquetage lui-même\,\footnote{Le grand nombre de fichiers \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} est (en partie)
-% une conséquence du fait que certaines
-% langues ont des alias (ou dialectes) et donc un fichier \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} pour chaque nom (un fichier
-% \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} peut en charger un autre) et, si nécessaire, un fichier \suffix{.mlo};
-% les langues \emph{english} et \emph{french} sont des exemples évidents.
-% Pour certaines langues, la multiplicité des fichiers \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} correspond à~une multiplicité de fontes
-% et/ou de codages (chinois, grec, japonais, coréen, malayalam, polonais, russe, serbe), ou même à~des
-% réformes de l'orthographe (allemand, grec, norvégien). \emph{Notez que la présence du fichier
-% \xfile{english.mld} est obligatoire.}. Depuis la version~\#50, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} signale les
-% fichiers \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} manquants et en donne une liste dans un message d'avertissement.}.
-%
-% Le tableau~\vref{t+languages} liste les langues disponibles; pour chacune de ces langues, un fichier
-% \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} est disponible; les langues entre parenthèses sont des alias d'une langue
-% principale et leurs fichiers \suffix{.mld} chargeront le fichier \suffix{.mld} de cette langue principale.
-%
-% \ipack{mtcpatchmem}\xfile{mtcpatchmem.sty} est une correction temporaire pour compatibilité avec la classe \class{memoir}.
-%
-% Les fichiers de cette classe doivent être \emph{tous} installés dans un répertoire où \LaTeXe{} trouve
-% les fichiers \suffix{.sty}.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{4}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \label{IN2}Informative text files:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \xfile{INSTALL} is a file describing the installation of the package.
-% You are (almost) reading it (but it is shorter).
-% \item \xfile{minitoc.l} contains the list of all files of the \upack{minitoc} distribution. See
-% tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}.
-% \item \xfile{README} is a file describing briefly the \upack{minitoc} package,
-% plus some useful infos.
-% \item \xfile{CATALOG} contains basic infos about the \upack{minitoc} package (abstract, date,
-% author, version, licence).
-% \item \xfile{TODO} lists some suggested developments of the package, not yet implemented.
-% Comments and suggestions are welcome.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \or\relax
-% \label{IN2}Fichiers informatifs textuels:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \xfile{INSTALL} est un fichier décrivant l'installation du paquetage. À~part la langue,
-% vous êtes (presque) en train de le lire (mais il est plus court).
-% \item \xfile{minitoc.l} contient la liste de tous les fichiers de la distribution de
-% \upack{minitoc}. Voir les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}.
-% \item \xfile{README} est un fichier décrivant sommairement le paquetage \upack{minitoc},
-% plus quelques informations utiles.
-% \item \xfile{CATALOG} contient des informations basiques sur le paquetage \upack{minitoc}
-% (résumé, date, auteur, version, licence).
-% \item \xfile{TODO} liste quelques propositions de développement du paquetage, pas encore réalisées.
-% Commentaires et suggestions sont les bienvenus.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \fi
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \label{IN3}Examples of documents:
-% \exam{mtc-2c.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-2nd.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-3co.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-add.bib},
-% \exam{mtc-add.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-ads.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-amm.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-apx.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-art.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-bk.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-bo.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-ch0.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-cri.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-fko.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-fo1.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-fo2.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-gap.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hia.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hir.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hop.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-liv.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-mem.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-mm1.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-mu.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-nom.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-ocf.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-ofs.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-sbf.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-scr.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-syn.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-tbi.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-tlc.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-tlo.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-tsf.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-vti.tex},
-% are example files, to play with.
-% The associated \suffix{.pdf} files are provided.
-% Another (\emph{short}) examples are welcome.
-% \or\relax
-% \label{IN3}Exemples de documents:
-% \exam{mtc-2c.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-2nd.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-3co.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-add.bib},
-% \exam{mtc-add.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-ads.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-amm.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-apx.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-art.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-bk.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-bo.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-ch0.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-cri.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-fko.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-fo1.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-fo2.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-gap.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hia.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hir.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hop.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-liv.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-mem.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-mm1.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-mu.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-nom.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-ocf.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-ofs.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-sbf.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-scr.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-syn.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-tbi.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-tlc.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-tlo.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-tsf.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-vti.tex},
-% sont des exemples de fichiers, avec lesquels vous pouvez jouer.
-% Les fichiers \suffix{.pdf} associés sont fournis.
-% D'autres exemples (\emph{courts}) sont les bienvenus.
-% \fi
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \label{IN4}\xfile{minitoc.bug}, \xfile{minitoc.sum}
-% are plain text documentation: list of problems (faq, see chapter~\vref{FAQ}) and summary of commands
-% (see chapter~\vref{c+memento}).
-% \or\relax
-% \label{IN4}\xfile{minitoc.bug}, \xfile{minitoc.sum}
-% sont de la documentation en texte pur: liste des problèmes (questions fréquemment posées, voir le
-% chapitre~\vref{FAQ}) et sommaire des commandes (voir le chapitre~\vref{c+memento}).
-% \fi
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \label{IN5} \xfile{minitoc.ins}, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist},
-% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre},
-% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan}, \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{en-mtc.bst},
-% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, and
-% \xfile{minitoc.bib} are the source of the documentation in (non perfect) english.
-% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} is the common preambule code for the documentation.
-% \else\relax
-% \label{IN5} \xfile{minitoc.ins}, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist},
-% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre},
-% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan}, \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{en-mtc.bst},
-% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} et
-% \xfile{minitoc.bib} forment le code source de la documentation en anglais (ou presque).
-% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} est le code de préambule commun pour la documentation.
-% \fi
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \label{IN6}
-% {\rmfamily\slshape The list of the graphic and flag files is given in tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2};
-% they are images to include.}
-% \or\relax
-% \label{IN6}
-% {\rmfamily\slshape La liste des fichiers graphiques et drapeaux est donnée dans les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2};
-% ce sont des images à~inclure.}
-% \fi
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \label{IN7}\xfile{minitoc.dtx}, \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx},
-% \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib},
-% \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist},
-% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan},
-% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre},
-% \ipack{franc}\upack{franc.sty}, \ipack{frbib}\upack{frbib.sty},
-% \ipack{frnew}\upack{frnew.sty}, \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{fr-mtc.bst} are the source
-% (and tools) of the documentation in french\,\footnote{This seems rather strange. In fact, the english and
-% french documentations are both contained in the \xfile{minitoc.dtx} file. \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} sets
-% a flag then
-% loads \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; hence the file \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} is much smaller than \xfile{minitoc.dtx}.
-% Thus, \xfile{minitoc.ins} contains also some utilitary files which are automatically created (some
-% \suffix{.sty} files, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist},
-% \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}, \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan},
-% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}).
-% The english and french versions are not word-by-word translations, but they are in parallel in the
-% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} file, and this helps the maintenance.}.
-% \or\relax
-% \label{IN7}\xfile{minitoc.dtx}, \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx},
-% \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib},
-% \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist},
-% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan},
-% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre},
-% \ipack{franc}\upack{franc.sty}, \ipack{frbib}\upack{frbib.sty},
-% \ipack{frnew}\upack{frnew.sty}, \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{fr-mtc.bst} sont les codes sources
-% (et les outils) pour la documentation en français\,\footnote{Ceci peut sembler assez étrange. En fait, les
-% documentations en anglais et en français sont toutes deux contenues dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.dtx}.
-% \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} établit un indicateur puis charge \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; en conséquence, le fichier
-% \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} est bien plus petit que \xfile{minitoc.dtx}. Donc, \xfile{minitoc.ins}
-% contient aussi certains fichiers utilitaires qui sont créés automatiquement (quelques fichiers
-% \suffix{.sty}, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist},
-% \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist},
-% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan}, \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}).
-% Les versions anglaise et française ne sont pas des traductions mot-à-mot, mais elles sont en
-% parallèle dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, et ceci aide pour la maintenance.}.
-% \fi
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \label{IN8}\xfile{minitoc.pdf},
-% is the documentation in (non perfect) english, in PDF format.
-% \or\relax
-% \label{IN8}\xfile{minitoc.pdf}
-% forme la documentation en anglais (ou presque), en format PDF.
-% \fi
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \label{IN9}\xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf}
-% is the documentation in french, in PDF format. The french documentation and its source
-% files must not be left out.
-% \or\relax
-% \label{IN9}\xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf}
-% forme la documentation en français, en format PDF. La documentation en français
-% et ses fichiers sources ne doivent pas être omis.
-% \fi
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \label{IN10} \scrp{pmk} is a shell script\,\footnote{You can sip a big cappuccino{\myCoffeecup}
-% while this script is running! Be patient.}
-% to prepare the package and its documentation;
-% the \scrp{pmk} script uses the \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.imk}
-% and \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} directories to not waste disk space under your home directory;
-% there are also six partial scripts\footnote{In fact, \scrp{pmk} assembles the scripts
-% \scrp{imk}, \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, \scrp{xmk}, \scrp{rmk}, and \scrp{tmk} (but \emph{not} \scrp{cmk}).}
-% and a supplementary one, \scrp{cmk} (all to be adapted):
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \scrp{imk}, which prepares the package from \xfile{minitoc.ins} and
-% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; note that \scrp{imk} must be run before running
-% \scrp{emk} or \scrp{fmk}; it creates also some \suffix{.sty} files necessary to prepare
-% the documentation but that are to be installed with it;
-% the \scrp{imk} script uses the \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.imk} directory to not waste disk space
-% under your home directory;
-% \item \scrp{emk}, which prepares the english documentation from
-% \xfile{minitoc.dtx};
-% \item \scrp{fmk}, which prepares the french documentation from
-% \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} and \xfile{minitoc.dtx};
-% \item \scrp{xmk}, which typesets the example files (in PDF format);
-% \item \scrp{rmk}, which sorts the files into classes (one directory for each class);
-% \item \scrp{tmk}, which creates a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy~\cite{ftds,tds}
-% (to be tailored to your system); see table~\vref{t+TDS}; this hierarchy is saved
-% in \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip};
-% \item \scrp{cmk}, which converts the PDF documentation files into PostScript files.
-% \end{itemize}
-% These scripts are currently written in C-shell, but they are very simple, and should be easy to
-% convert in another classic shell. The documentation in PostScript format is no more distributed on
-% the CTAN archives, but the \scrp{cmk} script can prepare it from the documentation in PDF format
-% (recto-verso printing).
-% \or\relax
-% \label{IN10} \scrp{pmk} est un script \emph{shell}\,\footnote{Vous avez le temps de déguster un
-% grand cappuccino{\myCoffeecup} pendant que ce script s'exécute! Soyez patients.} pour préparer le paquetage
-% et sa documentation;
-% le script \scrp{pmk} utilise les répertoires \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.imk}
-% et \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} pour ne pas gâcher de l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base;
-% il y~a aussi six scripts partiels\,\footnote{En fait, \scrp{pmk} regroupe les scripts
-% \scrp{imk}, \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, \scrp{xmk}, \scrp{rmk} et \scrp{tmk} (mais \emph{pas}
-% \scrp{cmk}).} et un supplémentaire, \scrp{cmk} (tous à~adapter):
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \scrp{imk}, qui prépare le paquetage en partant de
-% \xfile{minitoc.ins} et \xfile{minitoc.dtx};
-% notez que \scrp{imk} doit être exécuté avant de lancer \scrp{emk} ou \scrp{fmk};
-% il crée aussi quelques fichiers \suffix{.sty} nécessaires pour préparer la documentation et
-% ils doivent être installés avec elle;
-% le script \scrp{imk} utilise le répertoire \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.imk} pour ne pas gâcher
-% de l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base;
-% \item \scrp{emk}, qui prépare la documentation anglaise en partant de
-% \xfile{minitoc.dtx};
-% \item \scrp{fmk}, qui prépare la documentation française en partant de
-% \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} et \xfile{minitoc.dtx};
-% \item \scrp{xmk}, qui compose les fichiers d'exemples (en format PDF);
-% \item \scrp{rmk}, qui trie les fichiers en classes (un répertoire pour chaque classe);
-% \item \scrp{tmk}, qui crée une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS~\cite{ftds,tds}
-% (à~adapter pour votre système); voir le tableau~\vref{t+TDS}; cette hiérarchie est sauvegardée
-% dans \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip};
-% \item \scrp{cmk}, qui convertit les fichiers PDF de la documentation en fichiers PostScript.
-% \end{itemize}
-% Ces scripts sont actuellement écrits en C-\emph{shell}, mais ils sont très simples et devraient être
-% faciles à~convertir dans tout autre \emph{shell} classique. La documentation en format PostScript
-% n'est plus distribuée sur les archives CTAN, mais le script \scrp{cmk} peut la préparer à~partir de
-% celle en format PDF (impression recto-verso).
-% \fi
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \label{IN11} \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} is a ZIP-archive file containing a
-% \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy with all the files of the \upack{minitoc} package.
-% \or\relax
-% \label{IN11} \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} est un fichier archive ZIP contenant une
-% hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS avec tous les fichiers du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-% \end{enumerate}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some remarks about the \scrp{rmk}, \scrp{tmk} and \scrp{pmk} scripts (which you should tailor to your needs):
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \textbf{with \scrp{rmk}:}
-% \nopagebreak[4]
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item the hierarchy is \emph{not} \index{TDS}TDS-compliant;
-% \item the files of~(\ref{IN0}) must be installed in a directory where \LaTeXe{} finds \suffix{.dtx}
-% and \suffix{.ins} files;
-% \item the files of~(\ref{IN1}) must be installed in a directory where \LaTeXe{} finds \suffix{.sty} files;
-% \item the files of~(\ref{IN2}), (\ref{IN3}), (\ref{IN4}), (\ref{IN5}), (\ref{IN6}), (\ref{IN7}) and~(\ref{IN10})
-% must be installed in a separate directory, but must not be left out;
-% \item the files of~(\ref{IN8}) and~(\ref{IN9}) must be installed as on-line documentation;
-% \item the directories created by the \scrp{rmk} script are under \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} to not waste disk space
-% under your home directory.
-% \end{enumerate}
-% \item \textbf{with \scrp{tmk}:}
-% \nopagebreak[4]
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item the hierarchy is \index{TDS}TDS-compliant;
-% \item each file appears only once in the hierarchy;
-% \item the installation is much easier: you only need a \suffix{.zip} or a \suffix{.tar} (or \suffix{.tgz})
-% dump file\footnote{The \scrp{tmk} script creates the \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} file.} of the hierarchy
-% to be deployed into the installed \index{TDS}TDS hierarchy; you should examine \emph{very carefully}\Virage{} (by
-% comparison with your \index{TDS}TDS installation) and tailor the \scrp{tmk} script before using it;
-% \item the directories created by the \scrp{tmk} script are under \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} to not waste disk space
-% under your home directory;
-% \item the file \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}~(\ref{IN11}) should not be installed; it is just a method to help making
-% a~\index{TDS}TDS-compliant installation.
-% \end{enumerate}
-% \nopagebreak[4]
-% \item \textbf{with \scrp{pmk}:}
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item the \scrp{pmk} script performs the actions of \scrp{imk} (preparation of the basic files), \scrp{emk} and
-% \scrp{fmk} (preparation of the english and french documentation), \scrp{xmk} (preparation of the
-% examples of documents), \scrp{rmk} and \scrp{tmk} (repartition of files into classes and in
-% a~\index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy);\par
-% \begin{RaggedRight}
-% \item the directories created by the \scrp{pmk} script are under \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} and
-% \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} to not waste disk space under your home directory;
-% ^^A \item the \scrp{pmk} script creates its directories under \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} and
-% ^^A \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} to not waste disk space under your home directory.
-% \par\end{RaggedRight}
-% \item the \emph{same precautions}\Virage{} as for \scrp{tmk} are needed.
-% \end{enumerate}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \or\relax
-% Quelques remarques sur les scripts \scrp{rmk}, \scrp{tmk} et \scrp{pmk} (que vous devriez adapter à~vos besoins):
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \textbf{avec \scrp{rmk}:}
-% \nopagebreak[4]
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item la hiérarchie \emph{n'est pas} conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS;
-% \item les fichiers de~(\ref{IN0}) doivent être installés dans un répertoire où \LaTeXe{} trouve les fichiers \suffix{.dtx}
-% et \suffix{.ins};
-% \item les fichiers de~(\ref{IN1}) doivent être installés dans un répertoire où \LaTeXe{} trouve les
-% fichiers \suffix{.sty};
-% \item les fichiers de~(\ref{IN2}), (\ref{IN3}), (\ref{IN4}), (\ref{IN5}), (\ref{IN6}), (\ref{IN7}) et~(\ref{IN10})
-% doivent être installés dans un répertoire distinct, mais ne doivent pas être omis;
-% \item les fichiers de~(\ref{IN8}) et~(\ref{IN9}) doivent être installés comme documentation en ligne;
-% \item les répertoires créés par le script \scrp{rmk} le sont sous \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} pour de pas gâcher de
-% l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base.
-% \end{enumerate}
-% \item \textbf{avec \scrp{tmk}:}
-% \nopagebreak[4]
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item la hiérarchie est conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS;
-% \item chaque fichier n'apparaît qu'une seule fois dans la hiérarchie;
-% \item l'installation est plus facile: il vous suffit d'un fichier de sauvegarde \suffix{.zip} ou \suffix{.tar}
-% (ou \suffix{.tgz}) de la hiérarchie\,\footnote{Le script \scrp{tmk} crée le fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}.}
-% pour le déployer dans la hiérarchie \index{TDS}TDS installée;
-% vous devriez examiner \emph{très soigneusement}\Virage{} (par
-% comparaison avec votre installation de la \index{TDS}TDS) et adapter le script \scrp{tmk} avant de l'utiliser;
-% \item les répertoires créés par le script \scrp{tmk} le sont sous \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} pour de pas gâcher de
-% l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base;
-% \item le fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}~(\ref{IN11}) ne devrait pas être installé; c'est juste une méthode
-% pour aider à~faire une installation conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS.
-% \end{enumerate}
-% \item \textbf{avec \scrp{pmk}:}
-% \nopagebreak[4]
-% ^^A \begin{RaggedRight}
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item le script \scrp{pmk} effectue les actions de \scrp{imk} (préparation des fichiers de base), \scrp{emk} et
-% \scrp{fmk} (préparation de la documentation en anglais et en français), \scrp{xmk} (préparation des
-% exemples de documents), \scrp{rmk} et \scrp{tmk} (répartition des fichiers en classes et dans une
-% hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS);
-% \item le script \scrp{pmk} crée ses répertoires sous \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} et
-% \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} pour de pas gâcher de l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base;
-% \item les \emph{mêmes précautions}\Virage{} que pour \scrp{tmk} sont nécessaires.
-% \end{enumerate}
-% ^^A \end{RaggedRight}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \fi
-% \begin{table}[!t]
-% \centering
-% \changeskips
-% \def\TDSPH{\vphantom{\'TDSj}}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption{A TDS-compliant hierarchy for the \upack{minitoc} files}\label{t+TDS}\index{TDS}
-% \def\tdstitle{TDS~Root~Directory\TDSPH}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption{Une hiérarchie conforme à~la TDS pour les fichiers de \upack{minitoc}}\label{t+TDS}\index{TDS}
-% \def\tdstitle{Répertoire~racine~TDS\TDSPH}
-% \fi
-% {\footnotesize\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}O{1}|O{1}|O{1}|O{1}|O{1}|O{1}|O{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \multicolumn{7}{@{}c@{}}{\large\textbf{\tdstitle}}\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c|}{\texttt{bibtex/}}&\texttt{doc/}&\texttt{makeindex/}&\texttt{scripts/}&\texttt{source/}&\texttt{tex/}\\
-% \cmidrule(r){1-2}\cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){4-4}\cmidrule(lr){5-5}\cmidrule(lr){6-6}\cmidrule(l){7-7}
-% \texttt{bib/}&\texttt{bst/}&\texttt{latex/}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{latex/}&\texttt{latex/}\\
-% \cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){4-4}\cmidrule(lr){5-5}\cmidrule(lr){6-6}\cmidrule(l){7-7}
-% \texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\textbf{(D)}&\textbf{(E)}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{minitoc/}\\
-% \cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){6-6}\cmidrule(l){7-7}%
-% \textbf{(A)}&\textbf{(B)}&\textbf{(C)}&\multicolumn{2}{c|}{}&\textbf{(F)}&\textbf{(G)}\\
-% ^^A \cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){4-4}%
-% \cmidrule{3-4}%
-% \multicolumn{2}{c|}{}&\texttt{examples/}&\texttt{images/}&\multicolumn{3}{c}{}\\
-% \cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){4-4}%
-% \multicolumn{2}{c|}{}&\textbf{(H)}&\textbf{(I)}&\multicolumn{3}{c}{}\\
-% \morecmidrules\cmidrule[\heavyrulewidth]{1-7}
-% \multicolumn{7}{@{}c@{}}{%
-% \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize
-% \raggedright
-% \setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt}
-% \begin{multicols}{2} %^^A \raggedcolumns\setcounter{unbalance}{5}
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=2em
-% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt
-% \begin{description}
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=1em
-% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=-1em \itemindent=-1em
-% \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\textbf{(H)}}
-% \parindent=0pt
-% \def\sepitem{\vspace*{-1.5\baselineskip}\item[]\null\hspace*{-2em}\hrulefill\pagebreak[1]}
-% \item[(A)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}, \xfile{minitoc.bib};
-% \sepitem
-% \item[(B)\hfill\null]~\unskip\isuffix{.bst}\xfile{en-mtc.bst}, \xfile{fr-mtc.bst};
-% \sepitem
-% \item[(C)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{INSTALL},
-% \xfile{README},
-% \xfile{TODO},
-% \xfile{CATALOG},
-% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan},
-% \xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf},
-% \xfile{minitoc.bug},
-% \xfile{minitoc.l},
-% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan},
-% \xfile{minitoc.pdf},
-% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre},
-% \xfile{minitoc.sum},
-% \ipack{franc}\upack{franc.sty},
-% \ipack{frbib}\upack{frbib.sty},
-% \ipack{frnew}\upack{frnew.sty};
-% \sepitem
-% \item[(D)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist};
-% \sepitem
-% \item[(E)\hfill\null]~\unskip\scrp{cmk}, \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, \scrp{imk}, \scrp{pmk}, \scrp{rmk},
-% \scrp{tmk}, \scrp{xmk};
-% \sepitem
-% \item[(F)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}, \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, \xfile{minitoc.ins};
-% \sepitem
-% \item[(G)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{minitoc.sty}, \xfile{mtcoff.sty}, \xfile{mtcmess.sty}, \xfile{mtcpatchmem.sty},
-% \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld}, \texttt{*}\suffix{.mlo};
-% \sepitem
-% \item[(H)\hfill\null]~\unskip\exam{mtc-2c.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-2c.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-2nd.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-2nd.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-3co.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-3co.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-add.bib},
-% \exam{mtc-add.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-add.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-ads.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-ads.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-amm.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-amm.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-apx.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-apx.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-art.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-art.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-bk.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-bk.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-bo.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-bo.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-ch0.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-ch0.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-cri.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-cri.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-fko.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-fko.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-fo1.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-fo1.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-fo2.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-fo2.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-gap.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-gap.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hi1.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hi2.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hia.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-hia.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hir.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-hir.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-hop.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-hop.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-liv.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-liv.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-mem.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-mem.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-mm1.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-mm1.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-mu.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-mu.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-nom.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-nom.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-ocf.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-ocf.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-ofs.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-ofs.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-sbf.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-sbf.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-scr.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-scr.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-syn.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-syn.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-tbi.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-tbi.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-tlc.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-tlc.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-tlo.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-tlo.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-tsf.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-tsf.tex},
-% \exam{mtc-vti.pdf},
-% \exam{mtc-vti.tex};
-% \sepitem
-% \item[(I)\hfill\null]
-% {\rmfamily\slshape\ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The list of the graphic and flag files is given in tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}.
-% \or\relax
-% La liste des fichiers graphiques et drapeaux est donnée dans les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}.
-% \fi}
-% \end{description}
-% \end{multicols}
-% \end{minipage}}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}}
-% \smash{%
-% \ixfile{acadian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{acadien.mld}%
-% \ixfile{afrikaan.mld}%
-% \ixfile{afrikaans.mld}%
-% \ixfile{albanian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{american.mld}%
-% \ixfile{arabic.mld}%
-% \ixfile{arabi.mld}%
-% \ixfile{arab.mld}%
-% \ixfile{arab2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{armenian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{australian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{austrian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{bahasai.mld}%
-% \ixfile{bahasa.mld}%
-% \ixfile{bahasam.mld}%
-% \ixfile{bangla.mld}%
-% \ixfile{basque.mld}%
-% \ixfile{bengali.mld}%
-% \ixfile{bicig.mld}%
-% \ixfile{bicig2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{bicig3.mld}%
-% \ixfile{bithe.mld}%
-% \ixfile{brazilian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{brazil.mld}%
-% \ixfile{breton.mld}%
-% \ixfile{british.mld}%
-% \ixfile{bulgarianb.mld}%
-% \ixfile{bulgarian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{buryat.mld}%
-% \ixfile{buryat2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{canadian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{canadien.mld}%
-% \ixfile{castillan.mld}%
-% \ixfile{castillian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{catalan.mld}%
-% \ixmldo{chinese1}%
-% \ixmldo{chinese2}%
-% \ixfile{croatian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{czech.mld}%
-% \ixfile{danish.mld}%
-% \ixfile{devanagari.mld}%
-% \ixfile{dutch.mld}%
-% \ixfile{english.mld}%
-% \ixfile{english1.mld}%
-% \ixfile{english2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{esperant.mld}%
-% \ixfile{esperanto.mld}%
-% \ixfile{estonian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{ethiopia.mld}%
-% \ixfile{ethiopian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{ethiopian2.mld}%
-% \ixmldo{farsi1}%
-% \ixmldo{farsi2}%
-% \ixfile{farsi3.mld}%
-% \ixfile{finnish.mld}%
-% \ixfile{finnish2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{francais.mld}%
-% \ixfile{french.mld}%
-% \ixfile{french1.mld}%
-% \ixfile{french2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{frenchb.mld}%
-% \ixfile{frenchle.mld}%
-% \ixfile{frenchpro.mld}%
-% \ixfile{galician.mld}%
-% \ixfile{german.mld}%
-% \ixfile{germanb.mld}%
-% \ixfile{germanb2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{greek.mld}%
-% \ixfile{greek-mono.mld}%
-% \ixfile{greek-polydemo.mld}%
-% \ixfile{greek-polykatha.mld}%
-% \ixfile{guarani.mld}%
-% \ixmldo{hangul1}%
-% \ixmldo{hangul2}%
-% \ixmldo{hangul3}%
-% \ixmldo{hangul4}%
-% \ixmldo{hangul-u8}%
-% \ixmldo{hanja1}%
-% \ixmldo{hanja2}%
-% \ixmldo{hanja-u8}%
-% \ixfile{hebrew.mld}%
-% \ixfile{hebrew2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{hindi.mld}%
-% \ixfile{hindi-modern.mld}%
-% \ixfile{hungarian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{icelandic.mld}%
-% \ixfile{indonesian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{indon.mld}%
-% \ixfile{interlingua.mld}%
-% \ixfile{irish.mld}%
-% \ixfile{italian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{italian2.mld}%
-% \ixmldo{japanese}%
-% \ixmldo{japanese2}%
-% \ixmldo{japanese3}%
-% \ixmldo{japanese4}%
-% \ixmldo{japanese5}%
-% \ixmldo{japanese6}%
-% \ixfile{kannada.mld}%
-% \ixfile{khalkha.mld}%
-% \ixfile{latin.mld}%
-% \ixfile{latin2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{latinc.mld}%
-% \ixfile{latinc2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{latvian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{latvian2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{letton.mld}%
-% \ixfile{letton2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{lithuanian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{lithuanian2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{lowersorbian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{lsorbian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{magyar.mld}%
-% \ixfile{magyar2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{magyar3.mld}%
-% \ixfile{malayalam-b.mld}%
-% \ixfile{malayalam-keli.mld}%
-% \ixfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{malayalam-mr.mld}%
-% \ixmldo{malayalam-omega}%
-% \ixfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}%
-% \ixfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}%
-% \ixfile{malay.mld}%
-% \ixfile{manju.mld}%
-% \ixfile{mexican.mld}%
-% \ixfile{meyalu.mld}%
-% \ixfile{mongol.mld}%
-% \ixfile{mongolb.mld}%
-% \ixfile{mongolian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{naustrian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{newzealand.mld}%
-% \ixfile{ngermanb.mld}%
-% \ixfile{ngermanb2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{ngerman.mld}%
-% \ixfile{norsk.mld}%
-% \ixfile{norsk2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{nynorsk.mld}%
-% \ixfile{nynorsk2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{occitan.mld}%
-% \ixfile{occitan2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{polish.mld}%
-% \ixfile{polish2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{polski.mld}%
-% \ixfile{portuges.mld}%
-% \ixfile{portuguese.mld}%
-% \ixfile{romanian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{romanian2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{romanian3.mld}%
-% \ixfile{russian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{russian2m.mld}%
-% \ixfile{russian2o.mld}%
-% \ixfile{russianb.mld}%
-% \ixmldo{russian-cca1}%
-% \ixmldo{russian-cca}%
-% \ixfile{russianc.mld}%
-% \ixmldo{russian-lhcyralt}%
-% \ixmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi}%
-% \ixmldo{russian-lhcyrwin}%
-% \ixmldo{russian-lh}%
-% \ixfile{samin.mld}%
-% \ixfile{scottish.mld}%
-% \ixfile{serbianc.mld}%
-% \ixfile{serbian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{slovak.mld}%
-% \ixfile{slovene.mld}%
-% \ixfile{spanish.mld}%
-% \ixfile{spanish2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{spanish3.mld}%
-% \ixfile{spanish4.mld}%
-% \ixfile{swahili.mld}%
-% \ixfile{swedish.mld}%
-% \ixfile{swedish2.mld}%
-% \ixmldo{thai}%
-% \ixfile{turkish.mld}%
-% \ixfile{uighur.mld}%
-% \ixfile{uighur2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{uighur3.mld}%
-% \ixfile{UKenglish.mld}%
-% \ixfile{ukraineb.mld}%
-% \ixfile{ukrainian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{uppersorbian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{USenglish.mld}%
-% \ixfile{usorbian.mld}%
-% \ixfile{vietnamese.mld}%
-% \ixfile{vietnam.mld}%
-% \ixfile{welsh.mld}%
-% \ixfile{xalx.mld}%
-% \ixfile{xalx2.mld}%
-% \ixfile{xalx3.mld}%
-% }%
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The file \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} contains a ZIP archive of a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy of all files of the
-% \upack{minitoc} package. It has been prepared by the \scrp{pmk} or \scrp{tmk} scripts.
-% \or\relax
-% Le fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} contient une archive ZIP d'une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS de tous les
-% fichiers du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Il a été préparé par l'un des scripts \scrp{pmk} ou \scrp{tmk}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Note that \xfile{minitoc.dtx} and hence \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} are (not so trivial) examples of using \upack{minitoc}
-% with \pack{hyperref}. They show how the combinaison of these two packages may be useful.
-% \or\relax
-% Notez que \xfile{minitoc.dtx} et donc \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} sont des exemples (non triviaux) de l'utilisation de
-% \upack{minitoc} avec \pack{hyperref}. Ils montrent combien la combinaison de ces deux paquetages peut être
-% utile.
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \chapter{Postface}\label{c+postface}
-% \or\relax
-% \chapter{Postface}\label{c+postface}
-% \fi
-% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}}
-% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
-% \bgroup\mtcindent=0pt
-% \minitoc
-% \egroup
-% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty}
-% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This chapter summarizes the evolution of the \upack{minitoc} package, year by year. A more detailed history is
-% available in ``Changes History'', page~\pageref{c+history}. Many minor changes are skipped here.
-%
-% In fact, this chapter is for the average user of the package, who wants to have an overview ot its evolution;
-% the chapter ``Changes History'' is more oriented towards peoples interested in the code of the package and the
-% problems encountered during its development.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce chapitre résume l'évolution du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, année par année. Un historique plus détaillé est
-% disponible dans «~Historique des modifications~», page~\pageref{c+history}. De nombreuses modifications mineures ne
-% sont pas citées ici.
-%
-% En fait, le présent chapitre s'adresse à~l'utilisateur normal du paquetage, qui voudrait avoir une idée générale
-% de son évolution; le chapitre «~Historique des modifications~» s'adresse par contre aux personnes qui seraient
-% intéressées par le code du paquetage et les problèmes rencontrés lors de son développement.
-% \fi
-%
-% \begin{RaggedRight}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The origins}
-% The \upack{minitoc} package was initially written by \name{Nigel}{Ward} in~1990 and~1991, with major contributions
-% by \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}. But \upack{minitoc} suffered of a major weakness: when the number of chapters
-% exceeded~9 or~10, you got a rather mysterious error message:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|No room for a new \write.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Les origines}
-% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} fut initialement écrit par \name{Nigel}{Ward}, en~1990 et~1991, avec des contributions
-% majeures de \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}. Mais \upack{minitoc} souffrait d'une faiblesse majeure: lorsque le nombre de chapitres
-% dépassait~9 ou~10, vous obteniez un message d'erreur assez mystérieux:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|No room for a new \write.|
-% \end{quote}
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% As I needed the basic fonctionnality of this package (printing mini-tables of contents for each chapter), I looked further
-% in its code and finally found the culprit: \upack{minitoc} used a \com{newwrite} command to create a new file for the
-% contents table of each chapter, allocating a new file descriptor each time. But the number of file descriptors for
-% writing is limited to~16 under \LaTeX\ (in fact, by the underlying \TeX\ program itself). As some descriptors are already
-% used by \LaTeX, writing more than 9~or~10~chapters was too much. Such errors are difficult to find when testing on
-% too small documents: with few chapters, everything goes fine. But on a real document, with many chapters, the mysterious
-% error happens.
-% \or\relax
-% Comme j'avais besoin de la fonctionnalité basique de ce paquetage (imprimer une mini-table des matières pour chaque
-% chapitre), j'ai regardé de plus près son code et finalement trouvé le maillon faible: \upack{minitoc} utilisait
-% une commande \com{newwrite} pour créer un nouveau fichier pour la table de manières de chaque chapitre,
-% en allouant un nouveau
-% descripteur de fichier chaque fois. Mais le nombre de descripteurs de fichiers en écriture est limité à~16 sous
-% \LaTeX\ (en fait, par le programme \TeX\ sous-jacent lui-même). Comme quelques descripteurs sont déjà utilisés par
-% \LaTeX, écrire plus de 9~ou~10~chapitres allait trop loin. De telles erreurs sont difficiles à~trouver lors de tests
-% sur de trop petits documents: avec peu de chapitres, tout se passe bien. Mais sur un document réel, avec de nombreux
-% chapitres, l'erreur mystérieuse survient.
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{New design in~1993}
-% So I~decided (June~1993, when I took the maintenance of the package) to change the allocation method to always
-% use the same file descriptor for all the
-% mini-table of contents files. Some major improvements happened in 1993: the addition of the \pack{mtcoff}
-% (\pack{minitocoff} at this time)
-% package and a rewrite of \upack{minitoc} to extract the data from the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} file, with a
-% selection mechanism.
-% Then a first solution for the short extension problem was added (still manual). An elementary system for the fonts
-% in the mini-tables was added. In December 1993, the minilofs and minilots were added.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Nouvelle conception en~1993}
-% Donc je décidai (en juin~1993, lorsque je repris le support du paquetage) de changer la méthode d'allocation
-% pour toujours utiliser le même descripteur de fichier pour tous les fichiers des mini-tables des matières.
-% Quelques améliorations majeures furent faites en 1993: l'addition du paquetage \pack{mtcoff} (\pack{minitocoff}
-% à~cette époque) et une ré-écriture
-% de \upack{minitoc} pour extraire les données depuis le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}, avec un mécanisme de
-% sélection. Puis une première solution
-% pour le problème des suffixes courts fut ajoutée (encore manuelle). Un système élémentaire pour les fontes dans
-% les mini-tables fut ajouté. En décembre~1993, les minilofs et minilots furent ajoutées.
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Developments in~1994}
-% The first improvements in 1994 were about the formating of the mini-tables: spacing was improved and the position
-% of the title became ajustable (with the optional parameter of \com{minitoc} or \com{dominitoc}). But a major
-% addition was done: part-level mini-tables (parttocs, partlofs, partlots) and, for articles, section-level
-% mini-tables (secttocs, sectlofs, sectlots).
-%
-% With the emergence of \LaTeXe, replacing the ageing \LaTeX2.09, some work was necessary to support the
-% compatibility with this new version. This was not easy, but \name{Denis~B.}{Roegel} and \name{Frank}{Mittelbach} gave
-% me many helpful hints.
-%
-% Another major addition is the language option feature, with the concept of the \emph{minitoc language definition
-% file} (or \suffix{.mld} file), coming from the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user},
-% by \xname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}.
-% But at this time, these files were still named as \suffix{.sty} files.
-%
-% An important simplification is introduced by the notion of ``absolute numbering'', with avoids many problems when the
-% chapters are not numbered the standard way (consecutively, starting from~1, with arabic digits).
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Développements en~1994}
-% Les premières améliorations en 1994 concernaient la mise en forme des mini-tables: l'espacement fut ajusté et la
-% position du titre devient adaptable (avec le paramètre optionnel de \com{minitoc} ou \com{dominitoc}). Mais
-% une addition majeure fut faite: les mini-tables au niveau partie (parttocs, partlofs, partlots) et, pour les articles,
-% les mini-tables au niveau section (secttocs, sectlofs, sectlots).
-%
-% Avec l'émergence de \LaTeXe, remplaçant \LaTeX2.09 vieillissant, un certain travail était nécessaire pour
-% supporter la compatibilité avec la nouvelle version. Ce ne fut pas facile, mais \name{Denis~B.}{Roegel} et
-% \name{Frank}{Mittelbach} m'apportèrent bien des conseils utiles.
-%
-% Une autre addition majeure est le système des options de langue, avec le concept de fichier minitoc de définition de
-% langue (\emph{minitoc language definition file} ou fichier \suffix{.mld}), provenant du paquetage
-% \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}, de \xname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}.
-% Mais à~cette époque, ces fichiers étaient encore nommés comme des fichiers \suffix{.sty}.
-%
-% Une simplification importante est introduite par la notion de «~numérotation absolue~», qui évite de nombreux
-% problèmes lorsque les chapitres ne sont pas numérotés de manière standard (consécutivement, en commençant à~1, avec
-% des chiffres arabes).
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{No developments in~1995}
-% Sorry, I was busy with an other project.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Pas de développements en~1995}
-% Désolé, j'étais très occupé par un autre projet.
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Developments in~1996}
-% The very annoying problem with the starred sectionning commands received some (rather primitive) solutions, but it
-% is very complex, so manual interventions are often required.
-%
-% The names of the minitoc language definition files take now the extension \suffix{.mld}, more specific, and english
-% is the default language. Some new languages are added.
-%
-% The work on the starred sectionning commands continues.
-%
-% The \pack{minitocoff} companion package is renamed \pack{mtcoff} to keep its name short.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Développements en~1996}
-% Le très gênant problème avec les commandes de sectionnement étoilées a reçu quelques solutions (assez primitives),
-% mais il est très complexe, donc des interventions manuelles sont souvent nécessaires.
-%
-% Les noms des fichiers minitoc de définition de langue prennent maintenant le suffixe \suffix{.mld},
-% plus spécifique, et l'anglais (\loptd{english}) est la langue par défaut. Quelques nouvelles langues sont
-% ajoutées (ceci continue autant que possible).
-%
-% Le travail sur les commandes de sectionnement étoilées continue.
-%
-% Le paquetage compagnon \pack{minitocoff} est renommé \pack{mtcoff} pour que son nom reste court.
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Developments in~1997}
-% The problem of short extensions for files names under some operating systems is addressed via the
-% new \opt{shortext} package option and by the new autoconfiguration feature.
-%
-% For the starred sectionning commands, the \com{addstarredchapter} command is added (with analog commands for starred
-% parts and sections).
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Développements en~1997}
-% Le problème des suffixes courts pour les noms de fichiers sous certains systèmes d'exploitation est résolu via la
-% nouvelle option de paquetage \opt{shortext} et le nouveau système d'autoconfiguration.
-%
-% Pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées, la commande \com{addstarredchapter} est ajoutée (avec des
-% commandes analogues pour les parties et sections étoilées).
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Developments in~1998}
-% The \opt{tight} and \optd{loose} package options are added to improve the line spacing in the mini-tables.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Développements en~1998}
-% Les options de paquetage \opt{tight} et \optd{loose} sont ajoutées pour changer l'interlignage dans les mini-tables.
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Developments in~1999}
-% The \optd{dotted} and \opt{undotted} package options are added to add or suppress some lines of dots
-% (leaders) in the mini-tables.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Développements en~1999}
-% Les options de paquetage \optd{dotted} et \opt{undotted} sont ajoutées pour activer ou inhiber certaines lignes de
-% points (points de conduite) dans les mini-tables.
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Developments in~2000}
-% A major addition is the compatibility with the \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web}, and I~ought to thank
-% loudly \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \name{Didier}{Verna}, \name{Bernd}{Jaehne} and \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}~\cite{minitoc-hyper}.
-%
-% Some corrections about the starred sectionning commands are added by \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}.
-%
-% The mini-tables features (\com{beforeparttoc} and co.) commands are added.
-%
-% Some adjustment commands, like \com{mtcaddchapter}, are added, again about the problem with the starred
-% sectionning commands.
-%
-% The\imess{I0046} compatibility with the \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} is documented.
-%
-% Aliases for some languages are added.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Développements en~2000}
-% Un ajout majeur est la compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}, et je dois
-% remercier chaleureusement \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \name{Didier}{Verna}, \name{Bernd}{Jaehne} et
-% \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}~\cite{minitoc-hyper}.
-%
-% Quelques corrections concernant les commandes de sectionnement étoilées ont été apportées par \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}.
-%
-% Les commandes relatives aux dispositifs pour les (\com{beforeparttoc} et co.) ont été ajoutées.
-%
-% Quelques commandes d'adjustement, telles que \com{mtcaddchapter}, sont ajoutées, encore pour le problème des
-% commandes de sectionnement étoilées.
-%
-% La\imess{I0046} compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} est documentée.
-%
-% Des alias pour certaines langues sont ajoutés.
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Developments in~2001}
-% Added the \optd{checkfiles} and \opt{nocheckfiles} package options, to avoid the insertion of (ugly) empty
-% mini-tables.
-%
-% Added the \com{mtcselectlanguage} command to change more easily the language of the mini-tables titles.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Développements en~2001}
-% Ajout des options de paquetage \optd{checkfiles} et \opt{nocheckfiles}, pour éviter d'insérer des minitables
-% vides (et laides).
-%
-% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcselectlanguage} pour changer plus facilement la langue des titres des mini-tables.
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Developments in~2002}
-% Correction of an interaction between \com{tableofcontents} (creating a hidden \com{chapter*} or
-% \com{section*} command) and the numbering of the mini-table files.
-%
-% Added the \com{mtcskip} and \com{mtcskipamount} commands.
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \section{Développements en~2002}
-% Correction d'une interaction entre \com{tableofcontents} (qui crée une commande \com{chapter*} ou
-% \com{section*} cachée) et la numérotation des fichiers mini-tables.
-%
-% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcskip} et \com{mtcskipamount}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Developments in~2003}
-% Added the \opt{insection} package option (which was temporarily done by the \opt{flsection} and \opt{flsectionb}
-% package options)
-% to deal with floats drifting out of their section. The \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} (by
-% \name{Donald}{Arseneau}) is used.
-%
-% The font commands are made compatible with the \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}.
-%
-% Added compatibility with the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Développements en~2003}
-% Ajout de l'option de paquetage \opt{insection} (qui était temporairement réalisée par les options
-% de paquetage \opt{flsection}
-% et \opt{flsectionb}) pour traiter les éléments flottants dérivant hors de leur section. Le paquetage
-% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} (de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}) est utilisé.
-%
-% Les commandes de fontes sont rendues compatibles avec la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}.
-%
-% Ajout de la compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Developments in~2004}
-% Added comments in the \suffix{.mld} files needing special fonts. Better documentation about languages.
-%
-% Added an explanation about making a local table of contents for an appendix, eventually masking it in the main
-% table of contents. Compatibility\imess{I0042} with the \pack{appendix} package~\cite{appendix}.
-%
-% A major addition is the \optd{hints} package option, to detect some programming and compatibility problems.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Développements en~2004}
-% Amélioration de la documentation sur les langues.
-%
-% Ajout d'une explication sur la manière de faire une table des matières locale pour un appendice, éventuellement en
-% la masquant dans la table des matières principale. Compatibilité\imess{I0042} avec le paquetage \pack{appendix}~\cite{appendix}.
-%
-% Un ajout majeur est l'option de paquetage \optd{hints}, pour détecter certains problèmes de programmation et de
-% compatibilité.
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \section{Developments in~2005}
-% All messages are now written via the standard interface commands (\com{PackageInfo}, \com{PackageWarning}, and
-% \com{PackageError}), so the \upack{minitoc} package is less verbose on the terminal.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Added the \com{mtcsetfont} and \com{mtcsettitlefont} commands (from a suggestion by \xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}) to
-% replace many font commands by only one command with a better user interface.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% Comments about the \AmS\ classes (some ones are incompatible with \upack{minitoc}).
-%
-% Added the \com{mtcsetformat} and \com{mtcsettitle} commands, again to have a simpler user interface.
-%
-% Added various hints (\opt{insection} package option, order of minitoc basic commands, short extensions).
-%
-% Added the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} and \com{mtcsetrules} commands, again to have a simpler user interface.
-%
-% Added the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment, to hide a group of entries in the main table of contents; added
-% also the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments.
-%
-% Added the \com{mtcfixindex} and \com{mtcsettitle} commands.
-%
-% Added the description of the installation of the package (a new chapter and the file \xfile{INSTALL}).
-%
-% Improved and added hints about consistency of \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} and co.
-%
-% Added the \com{mtcsetfeature} command (very complex).
-%
-% Added a hint about the \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract} package~\cite{abstract}.
-%
-% The \upack{minitoc} package is now written using the \suffix{.dtx}-\suffix{.ins} system.
-% Some cleanup is done in the code.
-%
-% Added the \com{mtcfixglossary} command, like \com{mtcfixindex}.
-%
-% Some improvements are made to print the documentation.
-%
-% Some new hints are added (\pack{sectsty}\imess{I0043} package~\cite{sectsty}, empty mini-tables, obsolete commands).
-%
-% Added the notion of depth for mini-tables of figures/tables. Added the \com{mtcsetdepth} command.
-%
-% The \optd{hints} package option is now the default.
-%
-% Added a method for making a bilingual documentation in one file (the \xfile{minitoc.dtx} file). This method could be used
-% for more languages.
-%
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Added or improved some adjustement commands (\com{adjustptc}, \com{incrementptc}, \com{decrementptc}, etc.).
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% Added the \opt{k-tight} and \optd{k-loose} package options, for the \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} document classes.
-%
-% Added a patch for the recent version of the \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}.
-%
-% Use \com{mtcselectlanguage} in language options and in ``secondary'' \suffix{.mld} files.
-%
-% Added the \com{mtcloadmlo} command to be used in some \suffix{.mld} files to load a \suffix{.mlo} file. The
-% extension \suffix{.mlo} means \emph{minitoc language object}; such files contains characters not easily
-% manipulated in a \suffix{.dtx} file.
-%
-% The history of changes is now displayed in a much simpler way (using a glossary was too cumbersome).
-%
-% Added the \optd{listfiles} package option, to create a list of the minitoc auxiliary files, which can be removed after
-% the \LaTeX\ compilation of the document. It is the \emph{document}\suffix{.maf} file.
-%
-% Added a remark in the FAQ chapter (and \xfile{minitoc.bug}) about precautions to take with the starred
-% sectionning commands.
-%
-% Added hints about the \pack{caption}, \pack{caption2}, \pack{ccaption}, and \pack{mcaption} packages
-% (they must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
-%
-% A ``Jargon'' chapter is added. It will grow slowly.
-%
-% Added a note about a problem with \upack{minitoc}, \pack{hyperref} and \class{memoir} used together.
-%
-% Some bugs in the \verb|\mtcset...| commands are fixed.
-%
-% Added a hint about the \pack{varsects}\imess{W0038} package~\cite{varsects}.
-%
-% Added a hint on the number of mini-tables when short extensions are used.
-%
-% Added a chapter with all the (explained) messages.
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \section{Développements en~2005}
-% Tous les messages sont désormais écrits via les commandes de l'interface standard (\com{PackageInfo},
-% \com{PackageWarning} et \com{PackageError}), donc le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est moins bavard sur le terminal.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcsetfont} et \com{mtcsettitlefont} (d'après une suggestion de \xname{Benjamin}{Bayart})
-% pour remplacer de nombreuses commandes de fontes par une seule commande avec une meilleure interface avec
-% l'utilisateur.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% Commentaires sur les classes de l'\AmS\ (certaines sont incompatibles avec \upack{minitoc}).
-%
-% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcsetformat} et \com{mtcsettitle}, encore pour avoir une meilleure interface avec
-% l'utilisateur.
-%
-% Ajout de divers \emph{hints} (option de paquetage \opt{insection}, ordre des commandes minitoc basiques, suffixes
-% courts).
-%
-% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} et \com{mtcsetrules}, encore pour avoir une meilleure interface
-% avec l'utilisateur.
-%
-% Ajout de l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}, pour masquer un groupe d'entrées dans la table des matières
-% principale; ajout aussi des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}.
-%
-% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcfixindex} et \com{mtcsettitle}.
-%
-% Ajout d'une description de l'installation du paquetage (un nouveau chapitre et le fichier \xfile{INSTALL}).
-%
-% \emph{Hints} améliorés et ajoutés sur la cohérence des commandes \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} et co.
-%
-% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature} (très complexe).
-%
-% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract}.
-%
-% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est maintenant écrit en utilisant le système \suffix{.dtx}-\suffix{.ins}. Un peu de
-% nettoyage a été fait dans le code.
-%
-% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcfixglossary}, analoque à~\com{mtcfixindex}.
-%
-% Quelques améliorations sont faites pour l'impression de la documentation.
-%
-% Ajout de quelques nouveaux \emph{hints} (paquetage\imess{I0043} \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}, mini-tables vides, commandes
-% obsolètes).
-%
-% Ajout de la notion de profondeur pour les mini-tables des figures/tableaux. Ajout de la commande \com{mtcsetdepth}.
-%
-% L'option de paquetage \optd{hints} est maintenant le choix par défaut.
-%
-% Ajout d'une méthode pour faire une documentation bilingue en un seul fichier (le fichier \xfile{minitoc.dtx}).
-% Cette méthode pourrait être utilisée pour plusieurs langues.
-%
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Ajout ou amélioration de quelques commandes d'ajustement (\com{adjustptc}, \com{incrementptc},
-% \com{decrementptc}, etc.).
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% Ajout des options de paquetage \opt{k-tight} et \optd{k-loose}, pour les classes de document
-% \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}.
-%
-% Ajout d'une correction (\emph{patch}) pour une version récente de la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}.
-%
-% Utilisation de \com{mtcselectlanguage} dans les options de langue et dans les fichiers \suffix{.mld}
-% «~secondaires~».
-%
-% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcloadmlo} à~utiliser dans certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour charger un fichier
-% \suffix{.mlo}. Le suffixe \suffix{.mlo} signifie \emph{minitoc language object} (objet de langage minitoc); de
-% tels fichiers contiennent des caractères qui ne sont pas faciles à~manipuler dans un fichier \suffix{.dtx}.
-%
-% L'historique des modifications est maintenant imprimé d'une manière bien plus simple (utiliser un glossaire était
-% trop pénible).
-%
-% Ajout de l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}, pour créer une liste des fichiers auxiliaires de minitoc, qui
-% peuvent être éliminés après la compilation \LaTeX\ du document. C'est le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}.
-%
-% Ajout d'une remarque dans le chapitre des questions fréquemment posées (et dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.bug})
-% sur les précautions à~prendre avec les commandes de sectionnement étoilées.
-%
-% Ajout de \emph{hints} sur les paquetages \pack{caption}, \pack{caption2}, \pack{ccaption} et \pack{mcaption}
-% (ils doivent être chargés \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
-%
-% Un chapitre «~Jargon~» est ajouté. Il grossira lentement.
-%
-% Ajout d'une note sur un problème avec \upack{minitoc}, \pack{hyperref} et \class{memoir} utilisés ensemble.
-%
-% Quelques erreurs dans les commandes \verb|\mtcset...| sont corrigées.
-%
-% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0038}\pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects}.
-%
-% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le nombre de mini-tables lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés.
-%
-% Ajout d'un chapitre avec tous les messages (expliqués).
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \section{Developments in~2006}
-% Added the ``\texttt{*}'' keyword as first argument of the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} and \com{mtcsetrules}
-% command, to get an action on all kinds of mini-tables.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% Corrections in the \com{mtcaddsection}, \com{mtcfixglossary}, and \com{mtcfixindex} commands.
-%
-% In the PDF documentation, the panel of bookmarks shows initialy only the bookmarks for parts and chapters, but you
-% can open them to show deeper entries.
-%
-% Added a comment about the initialization of fonts in the FAQ (point~34). It is still an open domain and I am
-% working on it.
-%
-% Added a hint about the \imess{I0043}\KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, and an entry in the FAQ chapter
-% (and in \xfile{minitoc.bug}).
-%
-% Added the ``Postface'' chapter.
-%
-% Added the \com{mtcprepare} command.
-%
-% Added an~\texttt{URL} field in the bibliography (the styles are modified with the \tool{urlbst} tool~\cite{urlbst}).
-%
-% Added the \pack{mtcmess} package to add unique identifiers to the messages.
-%
-% Suppressed the PostScript documentation files from the distribution (no more accepted on CTAN archives), but the
-% scripts still creates them.
-%
-% Corrections in the \opt{insection} package option.
-%
-% Reordering of the chapters in the user's manual (part~I).
-%
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Développements en~2006}
-% Ajout du mot-clé «~\texttt{*}~» comme premier argument des commandes \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} et \com{mtcsetrules},
-% pour avoir une action sur toutes les sortes de mini-tables.
-%
-% \begin{raggedright}
-% Corrections dans les commandes \com{mtcaddsection}, \com{mtcfixglossary} et \com{mtcfixindex}.
-%
-% \end{raggedright}
-% Dans la documentation en PDF, le panneau des signets (panneau de gauche) ne montre initialement que les signets
-% pour les parties et les chapitres, mais vous pouvez les ouvrir pour accéder aux entrées plus profondes.
-%
-% Ajout d'un commentaire sur l'initialisation des fontes dans le chapitre des questions fréquemment posées (point~34).
-% C'est encore un sujet ouvert et je travaille dessus.
-%
-% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur les classes \imess{I0043}\KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, et d'une note dans le chapitre des questions
-% fréquemment posées (et dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}).
-%
-% Ajout du chapitre «~Postface~».
-%
-% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcprepare}.
-%
-% Ajout d'un champ \texttt{URL} dans la bibliographie (les styles ont été modifiés à~l'aide de l'outil
-% \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst}).
-%
-% Ajout du paquetage \pack{mtcmess} pour ajouter des identificateurs uniques aux messages.
-%
-% Suppression des fichiers de documentation en format PostScript dans la distribution (ils ne sont plus acceptés
-% sur les archives CTAN), mais les scripts les créent encore.
-%
-% Corrections dans l'option de paquetage \opt{insection}.
-%
-% Ré-ordonnancement des chapitres du manuel de l'utilisateur (partie~I).
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Developments in~2007}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Développements en~2007}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Removed the preparation of documentation in PostScript format.
-%
-% Added the \scrp{cmk} script to convert the documentation from PDF format to PostScript format.
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{raggedright}
-% Added hints about the\SMM{\lmess{W0086}\\\lmess{W0087}\\\lmess{W0088}\\\lmess{W0089}\\\lmess{W0090}}
-% \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap},
-% \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap},
-% \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum},
-% \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders},
-% \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec},
-% and
-% \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont} packages.
-%
-% \end{raggedright}
-%
-% \begin{raggedright}
-% Added FAQ~44 and the \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} and \com{mtcgapafterheads} formatting commands.
-%
-% \end{raggedright}
-% Added the chapter~\ref{c+exdocs}, ``Examples of documents'', page~\pageref{c+exdocs}.
-%
-% Added FAQ~45 and the \com{kernafterparttoc} and co. commands for the vertical space between a minitable and
-% its bottom rule.
-%
-% Increased the text width and adjusted the format of the entries in the TOC in the documentation.
-%
-% Correction of the preamble in the generated files (spurious lines have been eliminated, at least).
-%
-% Added \xfile{devanagari.mld} and \xfile{hindi.mld}.
-% Added \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}.
-%
-% The bibliographic styles \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} and \xfile{frplain1.bst} are renamed \xfile{en-mtc.bst} and
-% \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}.
-%
-% All example documents are renamed with names beginning with ``\uexam{mtc-}''.
-%
-% The ``\optd{listfiles}'' package option is active by default.
-%
-% Better error messages about undefined preparation and insertion commands.
-%
-% Added \xfile{japanese6.mld} and \xfile{japanese6.mlo}.
-%
-% Added a hint about the \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} package~\cite{hangcaption}.
-%
-% Added (in the memento) a table of the classes and packages which are incompatible or need precautions with
-% \upack{minitoc}.
-%
-% Added a validation of the language options with the presence of the \suffix{.mld} and \suffix{.mlo} files.
-%
-% Added the \scrp{tmk} script and a table describing a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant structure for \upack{minitoc}.
-%
-% Updated the \xfile{INSTALL} file and the ``Installation'' chapter.
-%
-% Added the file \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} (a ZIP archive of a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy of all files of
-% the package) to the distribution.
-%
-% Improving the index (entries for: packages and classes, scripts, tools, names, examples, extensions, option,
-% language options).
-%
-% The names of some internal macros are shortened to fit into the margin.
-%
-% Indexing the environments and the files.
-%
-% Indexing the counters and depth counters.
-%
-% The example files are in their own directory in the (proposed) \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy.
-%
-% Indexing referenced commands (begin).
-%
-% Added \xfile{mongolb.mld} and \xfile{mongolb.mlo}.
-%
-% Removed \xfile{mongolb.mlo} (new T2 and X2 cyrillic encodings in \xfile{mongolb.mld}).
-%
-% Added the \exam{mtc-3co.tex} example file.
-%
-% Added \xfile{mongolian.mld} (loads \xfile{mongolb.mld}).
-%
-% Improved the layout of the index.
-%
-% Indexing the names of authors.
-%
-% Added the \exam{mtc-fko.tex} example file.
-%
-% Bibliographic references for packages and classes in the index.
-%
-% Features in the index.
-%
-% Added the ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features.
-%
-% Added the \exam{mtc-ocf.tex} example file.
-%
-% Added the ``\com{mtcfixnomenclature}'' command.
-%
-% Added the \exam{mtc-nom.tex} example file.
-%
-% Corrected the last argument of \com{mtcsetfeature} and siblings, using \com{mtc@toks}.
-%
-% Indexing the messages. Messages noted in the right margin.
-%
-% Added \xfile{latinc.mld} and \xfile{latinc2.mld} for classical latin.
-%
-% Added internal hyperlinks for messages.
-%
-% Added \com{mtcoffset} and co. for an horizontal offset of a mini-table.
-%
-% Added \com{mtcsetoffset} for an horizontal offset of a mini-table type.
-%
-% Added the \exam{mtc-ofs.tex} example file.
-%
-% Added flagging of macros in example files.
-%
-% Added a clickable table of all messages.
-%
-% Added a local minitoc in the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-%
-% Added \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}.
-%
-% Added \xfile{latvian2.mld} and \xfile{letton2.mld}.
-%
-% Added a hint (warning~\texttt{W0097})\imess{W0097} about the \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}
-% package (incompatible).
-%
-% Added a \emph{hint} (\texttt{I0053})\imess{I0053} about the \pack{float}~\cite{float},
-% \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}, and \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages.
-%
-% Regrouping some marginal notes about messages; improving their positions.
-%
-% Corrected a bug about minitocs in appendices for the \class{memoir} class.
-%
-% Changed the color of hyperlinks.
-%
-% Revised the format of headers.
-%
-% Corrected some \verb|\mtcset...| commands to use \com{edef} to correctly evaluate \com{mtc@toks}.
-%
-% Added \xfile{swahili.mld}.
-%
-% Added stuff (files) for maps of areas of some languages.
-%
-% Added the \lopt{bengali} language synonym of \lopt{bangla}.
-%
-% Split the list of files into two tables (tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}).
-%
-% Replaced the \suffix{.mtc1} extension by \suffix{.mtc0} in the auto-configuration test (to avoid
-% erasing (\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc1} file).
-%
-% Corrected a problem with \com{nofiles} (\name{Andreas}{Deininger}).
-%
-% The acknowledgements are moved to the ``Complements'' part.
-%
-% Added a hint (warning~\texttt{W0099})\imess{W0099} about the \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc} package.
-%
-% Complete indexing of the messages.
-%
-% Updated \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}.
-%
-% Using the \pack{chngpage} package~\cite{chngpage} to make increase the width of the pages of the bibliography.
-%
-% Renamed \ucom{if@longextensions@} as \com{if@mtc@longext@}.
-%
-% Updated \xfile{czech.mld}.
-%
-% Removed \ucom{l@xsection}.
-%
-% Graphic files are indexed separately.
-%
-% Added a specific directory for image files in the TDS hierarchy.
-%
-% Updated \xfile{galician.mld}, \xfile{lsorbian.mld}, \xfile{ukraineb.mld}, and \xfile{usorbian.mld}.
-%
-% Added \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld},
-% and \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}.
-%
-% Updated \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}.
-%
-% Suppressed parasite entries from the index.
-%
-% Added \xfile{occitan.mld}.
-%
-% Updated \xfile{croatian.mld}, \xfile{danish.mld}, \xfile{dutch.mld}, \xfile{galician.mld},
-% \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{greek.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{interlingua.mld},
-% \xfile{polish.mld}, \xfile{scottish.mld}, and \xfile{turkish.mld}.
-%
-% \or\relax
-% Retrait de la préparation de la documentation en format PostScript.
-%
-% Ajout du script \scrp{cmk} pour convertir la documentation du format PDF en format PostScript.
-%
-% \begin{raggedright}
-% Ajout de \emph{hints}\SMM{\lmess{W0086}\\\lmess{W0087}\\\lmess{W0088}\\\lmess{W0089}\\\lmess{W0090}} sur les paquetages
-% \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap},
-% \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap},
-% \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum},
-% \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders},
-% \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec}
-% et
-% \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont}.
-%
-% \end{raggedright}
-%
-% \begin{raggedright}
-% Ajout du point~44 de la FAQ et des commandes de mise en page \com{mtcgapbeforeheads}
-% et \com{mtcgapafterheads}.
-%
-% \end{raggedright}
-% Ajout du chapitre~\ref{c+exdocs}, «~Exemples de documents~», page~\pageref{c+exdocs}.
-%
-% Ajout du point~45 de la FAQ et des commandes \com{kernafterparttoc} et analogues pour l'espacement vertical
-% entre une minitable et son filet inférieur.
-%
-% Augmentation de la largeur du texte et ajustement du format des entrées dans la table des matières pour la
-% documentation.
-%
-% Correction du préambule des fichiers engendrés (les lignes superflues ont été enfin éliminées).
-%
-% Ajout de \xfile{devanagari.mld} et \xfile{hindi.mld}.
-% Ajout de \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}.
-%
-% Les styles bibliographiques \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} et \xfile{frplain1.bst} sont renommés \xfile{en-mtc.bst} et
-% \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}.
-%
-% Tous les exemples de documents sont renommés avec des noms commençant par «~\uexam{mtc-}~».
-%
-% L'option de paquetage «~\optd{listfiles}~» est active par défaut.
-%
-% Meilleurs messages d'erreur pour les commandes de préparation et d'insertion non définies.
-%
-% Ajout de \xfile{japanese6.mld} et \xfile{japanese6.mlo}.
-%
-% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption}.
-%
-% Ajout (dans le mémento) d'un tableau des classes et paquetages qui sont incompatibles ou ont besoin de
-% précautions avec \upack{minitoc}.
-%
-% Ajout d'une validation des options de langue avec la présence des fichiers \suffix{.mld} et \suffix{.mlo}.
-%
-% Ajout du script \scrp{tmk} et d'un tableau décrivant une structure \index{TDS}TDS pour \upack{minitoc}.
-%
-% Mise à~jour du fichier \xfile{INSTALL} et du chapitre «~Installation~».
-%
-% Ajout du fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} (une archive ZIP d'une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS et contenant tous
-% les fichiers du paquetage) à~la distribution.
-%
-% Amélioration de l'index (entrées pour: paquetages et classes, scripts, outils, noms, exemples, suffixes, options,
-% options de langue).
-%
-% Les noms de certaines macros internes sont raccourcis pour tenir dans la marge.
-%
-% Indexation des environnements et fichiers.
-%
-% Indexation des compteurs et compteurs de profondeur.
-%
-% Les fichiers exemples sont dans leur propre répertoire de la hiérarchie \index{TDS}TDS (proposée).
-%
-% Indexation des commandes référencées (début).
-%
-% Ajout de \xfile{mongolb.mld} et \xfile{mongolb.mlo}.
-%
-% Retrait de \xfile{mongolb.mlo} (nouveaux codages cyrilliques T2 et X2 dans \xfile{mongolb.mld}).
-%
-% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-3co.tex}.
-%
-% Amélioration de la mise en page de l'index.
-%
-% Ajout de \xfile{mongolian.mld} (charge \xfile{mongolb.mld}).
-%
-% Indexation des noms des auteurs.
-%
-% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-fko.tex}.
-%
-% Références bibliographiques pour les paquetages et les classes dans l'index.
-%
-% Dispositifs dans l'index.
-%
-% Ajout des dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~».
-%
-% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}.
-%
-% Ajout de la commande «~\com{mtcfixnomenclature}~».
-%
-% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-nom.tex}.
-%
-% Correction du dernier argument de \com{mtcsetfeature} et analogues, en utilisant \com{mtc@toks}.
-%
-% Indexation des messages. Messages notés dans la marge de droite.
-%
-% Ajout de \xfile{latinc.mld} et \xfile{latinc2.mld} pour le latin classique.
-%
-% Ajout d'hyperliens internes pour les messages.
-%
-% Ajout de \com{mtcoffset} et consorts pour un décalage horizontal d'une mini-table.
-%
-% Ajout de \com{mtcsetoffset} pour un décalage horizontal d'un type de mini-table.
-%
-% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}.
-%
-% Ajout du marquage des macros dans les fichiers exemples.
-%
-% Ajout d'une table cliquable de tous les messages.
-%
-% Ajout d'une minitoc locale dans le chapitre <<~Jargon~>>.
-%
-% Ajout de \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}.
-%
-% Ajout de \xfile{latvian2.mld} et \xfile{letton2.mld}.
-%
-% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (avertissement~\texttt{W0097})\imess{W0097} sur le
-% paquetage \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} (incompatible).
-%
-% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (\texttt{I0053})\imess{I0053} sur les paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float},
-% \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}.
-%
-% Regroupement de notes marginales concernant des messages; amélioration de leur placement.
-%
-% Correction d'un problème sur les minitocs dans les appendices pour la classe \class{memoir}.
-%
-% Changement de la couleur des hyperliens.
-%
-% Correction de quelques commandes \verb|\mtcset...| pour utiliser \com{edef} afin d'évaluer correctement \com{mtc@toks}.
-%
-% Changement du format des en-têtes.
-%
-% Ajout de \xfile{swahili.mld}.
-%
-% Ajout de ce qu'il faut (fichiers) pour des figures (cartes) de régions où certaines langues sont parlées.
-%
-% Ajout de la langue \lopt{bengali}, synonyme de \lopt{bangla}.
-%
-% Éclatement de la liste des fichiers en deux tableaux (tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}).
-%
-% Remplacement du suffixe \suffix{.mtc1} par \suffix{.mtc0} dans le test d'auto-configuration (pour éviter
-% d'écraser le fichier (\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc1}).
-%
-% Correction d'un problème avec \com{nofiles} (\name{Andreas}{Deininger}).
-%
-% Les remerciements sont déplacés vers la partie «~Compléments~».
-%
-% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (avertissement~\texttt{W0099})\imess{W0099}
-% à~propos du paquetage \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc}.
-%
-% Indexation complète des messages.
-%
-% Mise à~jour de \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}.
-%
-% Utilisation du paquetage \pack{chngpage}~\cite{chngpage} pour élargir les pages de la bibliographie.
-%
-% Renommage de \ucom{if@longextensions@} en \com{if@mtc@longext@}.
-%
-% Mise à~jour de \xfile{czech.mld}.
-%
-% Suppression de \ucom{l@xsection}.
-%
-% Les fichiers graphiques sont indexés séparément.
-%
-% Ajout d'un répertoire spécifique pour les fichiers images dans la hiérarchie TDS.
-%
-% Mise à~jour de \xfile{galician.mld}, \xfile{lsorbian.mld}, \xfile{ukraineb.mld} et \xfile{usorbian.mld}.
-%
-% Ajout de \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld} et
-% \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}.
-%
-% Mise à~jour de \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}.
-%
-% Suppression d'entrées parasites dans l'index.
-%
-% Ajout de \xfile{occitan.mld}.
-%
-% Mise à~jour de \xfile{croatian.mld}, \xfile{danish.mld}, \xfile{dutch.mld}, \xfile{galician.mld},
-% \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{greek.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{interlingua.mld},
-% \xfile{polish.mld}, \xfile{scottish.mld} et \xfile{turkish.mld}.
-%
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Developments in~2008}
-% Corrected \xfile{polski.mld}.
-%
-% Added table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}.
-%
-% Added many maps about languages and dialects, etc.
-%
-% Better captions for maps.
-%
-% Added an entry for the Wikipedia in the jargon.
-%
-% Splitted the TDS hierarchy into three tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+TDS}.
-%
-% The page numbers in the index are now hyperlinks (thanks to~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}).
-%
-% Colors added in figure~\vref{f+barrier}.
-%
-% Corrected an error of message number.
-%
-% Updated from the \pack{babel} package version~v3.8j of 2008/03/16.
-%
-% Used \ucom{vrefrange} to compress ranges of internal cross-references.
-%
-% Added flags for many countries.
-%
-% Added a figure about lusophonia (figure~\vref{f+luso-c}).
-%
-% Added a figure about germanophonia (figure~\vref{f+germano-c}).
-%
-% Added a figure about hispanophonia (figure~\vref{f+hispano-c}).
-%
-% Added a figure about italophonia (figure~\vref{f+italo-c}).
-%
-% Added a minitoc in the index to make it easier to consult (not trivial).
-%
-% Added figures about francophones countries (figures~\vrefrange{f+franco-eu-c}{f+franco-asp-c}).
-%
-% Added a figure about swahili-speaking countries (figure~\vref{f+swa-c}).
-%
-% Added a figure about arabic-speaking countries (figure~\vref{f+arabo-sp-c}).
-%
-% Added a figure about russian-speaking countries (figure~\vref{f+russ-c}).
-%
-% Added a figure about english-speaking countries (figure~\vref{f+eng-c}).
-%
-% Added flags \com{ifinparttoc}, \com{ifinpartlof}, \com{ifinpartlot},
-% \com{ifinminitoc}, \com{ifinminilof}, \com{ifinminilot},
-% \com{ifinsecttoc}, \com{ifinsectlof}, and \com{ifinsectlot}.
-%
-% Added example document~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}.
-%
-% Added commands for polymorphic entries: \com{mtcpolymtoc}, \com{mtcpolymlof}, and \com{mtcpolymlot}.
-%
-% Added a figure about dutch-speaking countries (figure~\vref{f+dutch-c}).
-%
-% Renamed \uxfile{fminitoc.dtx} and consorts as \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} and consorts.
-%
-% Added missing flag files (thanks to \namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}).
-%
-% Replaced many \suffix{.pdf} image files (most of them are flag files) by the original \suffix{.png} file
-% because they were corrupted during the conversion by \tool{ImageMagick} (\tool{xpdf} didnt see the problem but
-% \tool{Acrobat Reader} refuses to show the file); many thanks to \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}
-% and \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}.
-%
-% Back to standard colors and default \pack{hyperref} color options.
-%
-% ^^A MAJ-E
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Développements en~2008}
-% Correction de \xfile{polski.mld}.
-%
-% Ajout de nombreuses cartes pour les langues et les dialectes, etc.
-%
-% Ajout de la table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}.
-%
-% Amélioration des légendes des cartes.
-%
-% Ajout d'une entrée pour la Wikipédia dans le jargon.
-%
-% Éclatement de la hiérarchie TDS en trois tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+TDS}.
-%
-% Les numéros de pages dans l'index sont maintenant des hyperliens (grâce à~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}).
-%
-% Ajout de couleurs dans la figure~\vref{f+barrier}.
-%
-% Correction d'une erreur de numéro de message.
-%
-% Mise à~jour depuis le paquetage \pack{babel} package version~v3.8j du 2008/03/16.
-%
-% Utilisation de \ucom{vrefrange} pour compresser les intervales de références croisées internes.
-%
-% Ajout des drapeaux de nombreux pays.
-%
-% Ajout d'une figure sur la lusophonie (figure~\vref{f+luso-c}).
-%
-% Ajout d'une figure sur la germanophonie (figure~\vref{f+germano-c}).
-%
-% Ajout d'une figure sur l'hispanophonie (figure~\vref{f+hispano-c}).
-%
-% Ajout d'une figure sur l'italophonie (figure~\vref{f+italo-c}).
-%
-% Ajout d'une minitoc dans l'index pour faciliter sa consultation (pas trivial).
-%
-% Ajout de figures sur les pays francophones (figures~\vrefrange{f+franco-eu-c}{f+franco-asp-c}).
-%
-% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le swahili (figure~\vref{f+swa-c}).
-%
-% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant l'arabe (figure~\vref{f+arabo-sp-c}).
-%
-% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le russe (figure~\vref{f+russ-c}).
-%
-% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant l'anglais (figure~\vref{f+eng-c}).
-%
-% Ajout des indicateurs \com{ifinparttoc}, \com{ifinpartlof}, \com{ifinpartlot},
-% \com{ifinminitoc}, \com{ifinminilof}, \com{ifinminilot},
-% \com{ifinsecttoc}, \com{ifinsectlof} et \com{ifinsectlot}.
-%
-% Ajout de l'exemple de document~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}.
-%
-% Ajout de commandes pour les entrées polymorphes: \com{mtcpolymtoc}, \com{mtcpolymlof} et \com{mtcpolymlot}.
-%
-% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le néerlandais (figure~\vref{f+dutch-c}).
-%
-% Renommage de \uxfile{fminitoc.dtx} et consorts en \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} et consorts.
-%
-% Ajout de fichiers drapeaux manquants (merci à~\namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}).
-%
-% Remplacement de nombreux fichiers images \suffix{.pdf} (la plupart étant des fichiers drapeaux)
-% par le fichier \suffix{.png} parce qu'ils ont été corrompus lors de la conversion par \tool{ImageMagick}
-% (\tool{xpdf} ne voit pas le problème mais \tool{Acrobat Reader} refuse de montrer le fichier);
-% grands mercis à~\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} et \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}.
-%
-% Retour aux couleurs standard et aux options de couleur standard de \pack{hyperref}.
-%
-% ^^A MAJ-F
-% \fi
-% \par\end{RaggedRight}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \part{Implementation}\label{p+ID}
-% \or\relax
-% \part{Implantation}\label{p+ID}
-% \fi
-% ^^A FIX INDEX?
-% \let\macro\svmacro
-% \let\endmacro\svendmacro
-% \let\environment\svenvironment
-% \let\endenvironment\svendenvironment
-% \makeatletter
-% \def\macro{\begingroup
-% \catcode`\\12
-% \MakePrivateLetters \m@cro@ \iftrue}
-% \def\environment{\begingroup
-% \catcode`\\12
-% \MakePrivateLetters \m@cro@ \iffalse}
-% \let\endmacro \endtrivlist
-% \let\endenvironment\endmacro
-% \makeatother
-% ^^A FIX INDEX?
-% \parttoc
-% ^^A \partlof
-% ^^A \partlot
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \chapter{Commented code of the \upack{minitoc} package}\label{c+code+minitoc.sty}\ipack{minitoc}
-% \or\relax
-% \chapter{Code commenté du paquetage \upack{minitoc}}\label{c+code+minitoc.sty}\ipack{minitoc}
-% \fi
-% \minitoc
-% \mtcskip
-% \lneed{4}
-% \minilof
-% \mtcskip
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \section{Introduction}\label{s+code+intro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This very long chapter presents the code of the \upack{minitoc} package and attempts to explain it.
-% Some comments of the original source file\,\footnote{The source file of version~\#42. Version~\#43 includes the
-% conversion of the package to \isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{.dtx-.ins} format.
-% Version~\#42 has not been distributed because of that.}
-% are skipped, like the history, because they do not need further examination (they will be put in the change history).
-%
-% The code is split in sections to make the reading easier, and the sections are sometimes reordered to make the reading
-% easier.
-%
-% Most of the \upack{minitoc} external commands have \texttt{mtc}, \texttt{ptc}, \texttt{stc}, or one of the
-% mini-table names (\texttt{parttoc},\ldots, \texttt{sectlot}) in their names.
-% Most of the \upack{minitoc} internal commands
-% have \texttt{@mtc}, \texttt{@ptc}, \texttt{@stc}, or \texttt{parttoc@},\ldots, \texttt{sectlot@} in their names, or
-% a similar convention. The few exceptions should be explicit enough to not conflict with other packages.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce très long chapitre présente le code du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et tente de l'expliquer.
-% Certains commentaires du fichier source original\,\footnote{C'est-à-dire, celui de la version~\#42. La
-% version~\#43 inclut la conversion du paquetage au format \isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{.dtx/.ins}.
-% La version~\#42 n'a pas été distribuée pour cette raison.} sont sautés,
-% comme l'historique, car ils n'ont pas besoin d'être examinés davantage (ils seront mis dans l'historique des
-% modifications).
-%
-% Le code est éclaté en sections pour faciliter la lecture, et ces sections sont parfois réordonnées, dans ce même
-% but.
-%
-% La plupart des commandes externes de \upack{minitoc} ont \texttt{mtc}, \texttt{ptc}, \texttt{stc}
-% ou le nom de l'un des types de mini-tables (\texttt{parttoc},\ldots, \texttt{sectlot}) dans leurs noms. La plupart
-% des commandes internes de \upack{minitoc} ont \texttt{@mtc}, \texttt{@ptc}, \texttt{@stc} ou \texttt{parttoc@},\ldots,
-% \texttt{sectlot@} dans leurs noms, ou suivent une convention similaire. Les quelques exceptions devraient être
-% assez explicites pour ne pas entrer en conflit avec d'autres paquetages.
-% \fi
-%
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Identification code}\label{s+code+ident}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Code d'identification}\label{s+code+ident}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{9.375mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The code\ixgrfl{start.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{start.jpg}}}
-% of \xfile{minitoc.sty} starts here:
-% \or\relax
-% Le code\ixgrfl{start.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{start.jpg}}}
-% de \xfile{minitoc.sty} commence ici:
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*minitoc>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\NeedsTeXFormat}
-% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesPackage}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageInfo}
-% \begin{macro}{\RequirePackage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This\SMM{\lmess{I0000}\\\lmess{I0001}} code section identifies the package with its name, version number and date.
-% A trace is written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. This package will not work with \LaTeX2.09.
-% \or\relax
-% Cette\SMM{\lmess{I0000}\\\lmess{I0001}} section de code identifie le paquetage par son nom, son numéro de version
-% et sa date. Une trace est écrite dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}.
-% Ce paquetage ne fonctionnera pas avec \LaTeX2.09.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/02]%
-\ProvidesPackage{minitoc}%
- [2008/07/16 v60 Package minitoc (JPFD)] % message I0000
-\RequirePackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14]
-\mtcPackageInfo[I0001]{minitoc}%
- {*** minitoc package, version 60 ***\@gobble}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{A file descriptor to write}\label{s+code+fd-write}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Un descripteur de fichier pour écrire}\label{s+code+fd-write}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\newwrite}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A file descriptor is needed to write the files containing the mini-tables, it is \com{tf@mtc}.
-% The \upack{minitoc} package uses only one file descriptor for writing. See section~\vref{s+code+autoconf}.
-% \or\relax
-% Un descripteur de fichier est nécessaire pour écrire les fichiers contenant les mini-tables, c'est \com{tf@mtc}.
-% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} utilise un seul descripteur de fichier en écriture. Voir la
-% section~\vref{s+code+autoconf}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newwrite\tf@mtc
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Indentation and skip}\label{s+code+indent.skip}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Indentation et saut}\label{s+code+indent.skip}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcskipamount}
-% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\addvspace}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define the indentation \com{mtcindent} (both sides) of the mini-tables and the
-% command \com{mtcskip} to make a vertical skip before a mini-table, its value is \com{mtcskipamount}
-% (default: \com{bigskipamount}).
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons l'indentation \com{mtcindent} (des deux côtés) des mini-tables et la commande
-% \com{mtcskip} pour faire un saut vertical avant une mini-table, sa valeur est \com{mtcskipamount}
-% (défaut: \com{bigskipamount}).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\mtcindent
-\newskip\mtcskipamount
-\setlength{\mtcskipamount}{\bigskipamount}
-\def\mtcskip{{\parskip=\z@\addvspace{\mtcskipamount}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Note that \com{mtcskip} uses a local group to avoid the influence of \com{parskip}.
-% \or\relax
-% Notez que \com{mtcskip} utilise un groupe local pour éviter l'influence de \com{parskip}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define the default values for the vertical gaps before and after titles part level mini-tables.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons les valeurs par défaut pour les sauts verticaux avant et après les titres des mini-tables au
-% niveau partie.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtcgapbeforeheads{50\p@}
-\def\mtcgapafterheads{40\p@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
-% \begin{macro}{\kernafterparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\kernafterpartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\kernafterpartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminilot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define the vertical kernings between the minitables and their before the bottom rule.
-% The names of these macros is rather explicit. The values are empirical and can be changed via \com{renewcommand}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons les crênages verticaux placés entre les minitables et leurs filets horizontaux inférieurs.
-% Les noms de ces macros sont assez explicites. Les valeurs sont empiriques et peuvent être changées
-% via \com{renewcommand}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifundefined{part}{}{%
- \def\kernafterparttoc{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
- \def\kernafterpartlof{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
- \def\kernafterpartlot{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
- }%
- \@ifundefined{chapter}{%
- \@ifundefined{section}{}%
- {%
- \def\kernaftersecttoc{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
- \def\kernaftersectlof{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
- \def\kernaftersectlot{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
- }%
- }%
- {%
- \def\kernafterminitoc{\kern-.5\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
- \def\kernafterminilof{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern0.ex}%
- \def\kernafterminilot{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern0.ex}%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\pfloffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlfoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\sltoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\sfloffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\sltoffset}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We defines horizontal offets by which the margins in the mini-tables are corrected (added to the right margin and
-% substracted from the left margin). These are \emph{commands}, \emph{not} lengths\,\footnote{We avoid to
-% allocate a precious length register.}, to be redefined by \com{renewcommand}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons les décalages horizontaux servant à~corriger les marges dans les mini-tables (ajout à~la marge
-% gauche et retrait à~la marge droite). Ce sont des \emph{commandes}, \emph{pas} des longueurs\,\footnote{Nous
-% évitons d'allouer un précieux registre de longueur.}, à~redéfinir via \com{renewcommand}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifundefined{part}{}{%
- \def\ptcoffset{0pt}%
- \def\plfoffset{0pt}%
- \def\pltoffset{0pt}%
- }%
- \@ifundefined{chapter}{%
- \@ifundefined{section}{}%
- {%
- \def\stcoffset{0pt}%
- \def\slfoffset{0pt}%
- \def\sltoffset{0pt}%
- }%
- }%
- {%
- \def\mtcoffset{0pt}%
- \def\mlfoffset{0pt}%
- \def\mltoffset{0pt}%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We defines flags which will be true when inside a mini-table of the matching type, false outside.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons des indicateurs qui seront vrais à~l'intérieur d'une mini-table du type correspondant, faux
-% à~l'extérieur.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifinparttoc\inparttocfalse%
-\newif\ifinpartlof\inpartloffalse%
-\newif\ifinpartlot\inpartlotfalse%
-\newif\ifinsecttoc\insecttocfalse%
-\newif\ifinsectlof\insectloffalse%
-\newif\ifinsectlot\insectlotfalse%
-\newif\ifinminitoc\inminitocfalse%
-\newif\ifinminilof\inminiloffalse%
-\newif\ifinminilot\inminilotfalse%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Tests and flags}\label{s+code+test-flags}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Tests et indicateurs}\label{s+code+test-flags}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We need to declare some flags\,\footnote{Not so many years ago, some authors had a preference for using counters
-% rather than flags,
-% because a flag costs 3~control sequences (\ucom{iffoo}, \ucom{foofalse} and \ucom{footrue}),
-% which use memory. But the number of count registers is limited to 256 in the native \TeX\ engine (much more with
-% \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex}, but still limited in number), while memory has become rather cheap today.
-% And a code programmed with flags (\texttt{\ucom{iffoo} .{}.{}. \com{else} .{}.{}. \com{fi}}) is easier to structure
-% and debug than a code programmed with counters, \textsc{imho}.} (via \com{newif}) to detect
-% the loading of some packages or classes and the availability of some commands (this will be used by the
-% \optd{hints} option (section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}) or to allow the definition of some \upack{minitoc} commands).
-% \or\relax
-% Nous avons besoin de déclarer quelques indicateurs\,\footnote{Il n'y a pas tant d'années, certains auteurs
-% préféraient utiliser des compteurs plutôt que des indicateurs, car un indicateur coûte 3~séquences de contrôle
-% (\ucom{iftoto}, \ucom{totofalse} et \ucom{tototrue}), qui consomment de la mémoire. Mais le
-% nombre de registres compteurs est limité à~256 dans le moteur \TeX\ natif (bien plus avec
-% \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex}, mais encore en nombre limité), tandis que le coût de la mémoire a beaucoup baissé
-% aujourd'hui. Et un code programmé avec des indicateurs (\texttt{\ucom{iftoto} .{}.{}. \com{else} .{}.{}. \com{fi}}) est
-% plus facile à~structurer et à~mettre au point qu'un code programmé à~l'aide de compteurs, à~mon humble avis.}
-% (via \com{newif}) pour détecter le chargement de certains paquetages ou classes et la disponibilité de certaines
-% commandes (ceci sera utilisé par l'option \optd{hints} (voir la section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}) ou
-% pour autoriser la définition de certaines commandes de \upack{minitoc}).
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Flags for the \uopt{hints} option}\ioptd{hints}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Indicateurs pour l'option \uopt{hints}}\ioptd{hints}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@giben@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% But first, we define some flags for the \optd{hints} option:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item The flag \com{if@mtc@hints@} is true if the \optd{hints} option is required (default).
-% \item The flag \com{if@mtc@hints@w@} is set true if we detect that some sectionning commands have been
-% altered since the loading of the document class.
-% \item The flag \com{if@mtc@hints@given@} is set true if the \optd{hints} option detects something curious
-% and writes messages in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. It will be used at the end of the document to signal that
-% you should look for hints in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \or\relax
-% Mais tout d'abord, nous définissons quelques indicateurs pour l'option \optd{hints}:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@hints@} est vrai si l'option \optd{hints} est demandée (défaut).
-% \item L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@hints@w@} est forcé à~vrai si nous détectons que certaines commandes de
-% sectionnement ont été altérées depuis le chargement de la classe de document.
-% \item L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@hints@given@} est forcé à~vrai si l'option \optd{hints} détecte quelque
-% chose de curieux et écrit des messages dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}.
-% Il sera utilisé en fin de document
-% pour signaler que vous devriez chercher des \emph{hints} dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@hints@ \@mtc@hints@true
-\newif\if@mtc@hints@w@ \@mtc@hints@w@false
-\newif\if@mtc@hints@given@ \@mtc@hints@given@false
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Use of section-level mini-lists of floats}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Utilisation de mini-listes d'éléments flottants, au niveau \texorpdfstring{\mbox{section}}{section}}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sect@floats@}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We will check if the commands \com{dosectlof} and \com{dosectlot} are used:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous testerons si les commandes \com{dosectlof} et \com{dosectlot} ont été utilisées:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@sect@floats@ \@mtc@sect@floats@false
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8} %% ^^A 25
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Presence of some packages and classes}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Présence de certains paquetages et classes}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirnew@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We will check if the \pack{placeins} package is loaded, then if the \class{memoir}
-% is loaded (and if it is a recent enough version), then if the \pack{sectsty} package is loaded
-% (before or after \upack{minitoc}).
-% \or\relax
-% Nous testerons si le paquetage \pack{placeins} est chargé, puis si la classe
-% \class{memoir} est chargée (et si c'est une version suffisamment récente), puis si le
-% paquetage \pack{sectsty} est chargé (avant ou après \upack{minitoc}).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@ \@mtc@placeinsLoaded@false
-\newif\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@ \@mtc@memoirLoaded@false
-\newif\if@mtc@memoirnew@ \@mtc@memoirnew@false
-\newif\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@ \@mtc@sectstyLoaded@false
-\newif\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@ \@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@false
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We do the same for some caption-related packages:
-% \else\relax
-% Nous faisons de même pour quelques paquetages relatifs aux captions:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@captionLoaded@ \@mtc@captionLoaded@false
-\newif\if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@ \@mtc@captionLoaded@a@false
-\newif\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@ \@mtc@captionIILoaded@false
-\newif\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@ \@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@false
-\newif\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@ \@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@false
-\newif\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@ \@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@false
-\newif\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@ \@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@false
-\newif\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@ \@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@false
-\newif\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@ \@mtc@captcontLoaded@false
-\newif\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@ \@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@false
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And the \pack{varsects} package and other packages altering the sectionning commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Et pour le paquetage \pack{varsects} et
-% d'autres paquetages altérant les commandes de sectionnement:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@ \@mtc@varsectsLoaded@false
-\newif\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@ \@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@false
-\newif\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@ \@mtc@fncychapLoaded@false
-\newif\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@ \@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@false
-\newif\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@ \@mtc@HgcLoaded@false
-\newif\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@ \@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@false
-\newif\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@ \@mtc@quotchapLoaded@false
-\newif\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@ \@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@false
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And yet other packages altering the sectionning commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Et encore d'autres paquetages altérant les commandes de sectionnement:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@ \@mtc@romannumLoaded@false
-\newif\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@ \@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@false
-\newif\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@ \@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@false
-\newif\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@ \@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@false
-\newif\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@ \@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@false
-\newif\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@ \@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@false
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Flags for packages dealing with floats}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Indicateurs pour des paquetages traitant des flottants}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We must warn about a limitation with the \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow},
-% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}, and \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous devons signaler une limitation avec les paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow},
-% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@floatLoaded@ \@mtc@floatLoaded@false
-\newif\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@ \@mtc@floatrowLoaded@false
-\newif\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@ \@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@false
-\newif\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@ \@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@false
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{12}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Insertion of empty mini-tables}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Insertion de mini-tables vides}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlof@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlot@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilof@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We will check if you have attempted to insert some empty mini-tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous testerons si vous avez tenté d'insérer des mini-tables vides:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@ \@mtc@empty@parttoc@false
-\newif\if@mtc@empty@partlof@ \@mtc@empty@partlof@false
-\newif\if@mtc@empty@partlot@ \@mtc@empty@partlot@false
-\newif\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@ \@mtc@empty@minitoc@false
-\newif\if@mtc@empty@minilof@ \@mtc@empty@minilof@false
-\newif\if@mtc@empty@minilot@ \@mtc@empty@minilot@false
-\newif\if@mtc@empty@secttoc@ \@mtc@empty@secttoc@false
-\newif\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@ \@mtc@empty@sectlof@false
-\newif\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@ \@mtc@empty@sectlot@false
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Presence or absence of some sectionning commands}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Présence ou absence de certaines commandes de sectionnement}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define and set flags about the presence of the sectionning commands (in fact, the counters associated with
-% these commands).
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons et positionnons des indicateurs concernant la présence des commandes de sectionnement (en fait,
-% celle des compteurs associés à~ces commandes).
-%
-% \fi
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \cnt{part} counter:
-% \or\relax
-% Le compteur \cnt{part}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@part@def@ \@mtc@part@def@false
- \@ifundefined{part}{\@mtc@part@def@false}{\@mtc@part@def@true}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \cnt{chapter} counter:
-% \or\relax
-% Le compteur \cnt{chapter}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@chapter@def@ \@mtc@chapter@def@false
- \@ifundefined{chapter}{\@mtc@chapter@def@false}{\@mtc@chapter@def@true}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \cnt{section} counter:
-% \or\relax
-% Le compteur \cnt{section}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@section@def@ \@mtc@section@def@false
- \@ifundefined{section}{\@mtc@section@def@false}{\@mtc@section@def@true}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define and set flags about the absence of the sectionning commands.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons et positionnons des indicateurs concernant l'absence des commandes de sectionnement:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@undef@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \cnt{part} counter:
-% \or\relax
-% Le compteur \cnt{part}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@part@undef@ \@mtc@part@undef@true
- \@ifundefined{part}{\@mtc@part@undef@true}{\@mtc@part@undef@false}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@undef@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \cnt{chapter} counter:
-% \or\relax
-% Le compteur \cnt{chapter}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@chapter@undef@ \@mtc@chapter@undef@true
- \@ifundefined{chapter}{\@mtc@chapter@undef@true}{\@mtc@chapter@undef@false}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@undef@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \cnt{section} counter:
-% \or\relax
-% Le compteur \cnt{section}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@section@undef@ \@mtc@section@undef@true
- \@ifundefined{section}{\@mtc@section@undef@true}{\@mtc@section@undef@false}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Flags to check if some commands are used}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Indicateurs pour tester si certaines commandes ont été utilisées}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define a pair of flags for each mini-table type: one for the command itself and one for the preparation
-% command (\ucom{do.{}.{}.}). These flags will be used by the \optd{hints} package option
-% (section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}).
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons une paire d'indicateurs pour chaque type de mini-table: un pour la commande elle-même et un
-% pour la commande de préparation (\ucom{do.{}.{}.}). Ces indicateurs seront utilisés par l'option de
-% paquetage \optd{hints} (section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}).
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For the part level:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour le niveau partie:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@parttoc@used@ \global\@parttoc@used@false
-\newif\if@partlof@used@ \global\@partlof@used@false
-\newif\if@partlot@used@ \global\@partlot@used@false
-\newif\if@doparttoc@used@ \global\@doparttoc@used@false
-\newif\if@dopartlof@used@ \global\@dopartlof@used@false
-\newif\if@dopartlot@used@ \global\@dopartlot@used@false
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For the chapter level:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour le niveau chapitre:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@minitoc@used@ \global\@minitoc@used@false
-\newif\if@minilof@used@ \global\@minilof@used@false
-\newif\if@minilot@used@ \global\@minilot@used@false
-\newif\if@dominitoc@used@ \global\@dominitoc@used@false
-\newif\if@dominilof@used@ \global\@dominilof@used@false
-\newif\if@dominilot@used@ \global\@dominilot@used@false
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For the section level:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour le niveau section:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@secttoc@used@ \global\@secttoc@used@false
-\newif\if@sectlof@used@ \global\@sectlof@used@false
-\newif\if@sectlot@used@ \global\@sectlot@used@false
-\newif\if@dosecttoc@used@ \global\@dosecttoc@used@false
-\newif\if@dosectlof@used@ \global\@dosectlof@used@false
-\newif\if@dosectlot@used@ \global\@dosectlot@used@false
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@firstpartis@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@firstchapteris@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@firstsectionis@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We also detect the use of some obsolete commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous détectons aussi l'utilisation de certaines commandes obsolètes:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@firstpartis@used@ \global\@firstpartis@used@false
-\newif\if@firstchapteris@used@ \global\@firstchapteris@used@false
-\newif\if@firstsectionis@used@ \global\@firstsectionis@used@false
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Check if the document has exactly 2~parts}\label{ss+2parts}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Tester si le document a exactement 2~parties}\label{ss+2parts}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% In french, the ordinal adjective is ``deuxième'' if the second object is not the last object, but ``second''
-% (masculine) or ``seconde'' (feminine) when it is also the last one (see~\cite[page~204]{fnul}). So we define a specific flag:
-% \or\relax
-% En français, l'adjectif ordinal est \og deuxième \fg si le deuxième objet n'est pas le dernier objet, mais
-% \og second \fg (masculin) ou \og seconde \fg (féminin) si c'est le dernier (voir~\cite[page~204]{fnul}).
-% Donc nous définissons un indicateur
-% spécifique:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifmtcsecondpart \mtcsecondpartfalse
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% At the beginning of the document, we test this flag and make it global:
-% \or\relax
-% Au début du document, nous testons cet indicateur et le rendons global:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \ifmtcsecondpart
- \global\mtcsecondparttrue
- \else
- \global\mtcsecondpartfalse
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\@mainaux}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% At the end of the document, we set and memorize the value of the flag in the \suffix{.aux} file:
-% \or\relax
-% À~la fin du document, nous établissons et mémorisons la valeur de l'indicateur dans le fichier \suffix{.aux}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtEndDocument{%
-\ifnum\value{part}=2\relax
- \mtcsecondparttrue
-\else
- \mtcsecondpartfalse
-\fi
-\if@filesw
- \ifmtcsecondpart
- \immediate\write\@mainaux
- {\string\global\string\mtcsecondparttrue}%
- \else
- \immediate\write\@mainaux
- {\string\global\string\mtcsecondpartfalse}%
- \fi
-\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% So we need two \LaTeX\ runs to get a correct result. The \xfile{french2.mld} language definition file
-% (see section~\vref{s+mld+french2}) uses this trick to form the titles of part level mini-tables.
-% See the \exam{mtc-2nd.tex} example file in section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}.
-% \or\relax
-% Il nous faut donc deux exécutions de \LaTeX\ pour obtenir un résultat correct. Le fichier de définition de
-% langue \xfile{french2.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french2}) utilise cette astuce pour former les titres
-% des mini-tables au niveau partie.
-% Voir le fichier d'exemple \exam{mtc-2nd.tex} dans la section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Preparation for the \uopt{notoccite} option}\label{s+code+notoccite1}\iopt{notoccite}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Préparation pour l'option \uopt{notoccite}}\label{s+code+notoccite1}\iopt{notoccite}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@notoccite@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We declare a flag for the presence of this option and the new internal ``hook'' command
-% (redefinable command) \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile},
-% used by this option (this has been requested by \name{Donald}{Arseneau} for his \pack{notoccite}
-% package~\cite{notoccite}). See section~\vref{ss+notoccite}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous déclarons un indicateur pour la présence de cette option et la nouvelle commande interne «~\emph{hook}~»
-% (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} utilisée par cette option
-% (ceci a été demandé par \name{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage
-% \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}). Voir la section~\vref{ss+notoccite}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@notoccite@ \@mtc@notoccite@false
-\@ifundefined{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}%
- {\let\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile\relax}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Preparation for the \uopt{tight} and \uopt{k-tight} options}\label{s+code+tight.flag}\iopt{tight}\iopt{k-tight}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Préparation pour les options \uopt{tight} et \uopt{k-tight}}\label{s+code+tight.flag}\iopt{tight}\iopt{k-tight}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We just declare a flag for each of these options; they are set false by default (\optd{loose} and
-% \optd{k-loose} options):
-% \or\relax
-% Nous déclarons simplement un indicateur pour chacune de ces options; ils sont faux par défaut (options \optd{loose}
-% et \optd{k-loose}):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\iftightmtc \tightmtcfalse
-\newif\ifktightmtc \ktightmtcfalse
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Preparation to work with \upack{hyperref}}\label{s+code+hyperref.prep}\ipack{hyperref}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Préparation pour travailler avec \upack{hyperref}}\label{s+code+hyperref.prep}\ipack{hyperref}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This\imess{I0005} code prepares the interface with the \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web}.
-% A flag is defined, then this preparation is performed in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block if this package is loaded.
-% This action defines some commands for the \pack{hyperref} package.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce\imess{I0005} code prépare l'interface avec le paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}.
-% Un indicateur est défini, puis cette préparation est effectuée dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument} si ce
-% paquetage est chargé. Cette action définit quelques commandes pour le paquetage \pack{hyperref}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\mtcPackageInfo[I0005]{minitoc}{compatible with hyperref\@gobble}
-\newif\if@mtc@hyper@used@ \global\@mtc@hyper@used@false
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%
- \global\@mtc@hyper@used@true
- \def\toclevel@xpart{1000}%
- \def\toclevel@xchapter{1000}%
- \def\toclevel@xsect{1000}%
- \let\toclevel@starpart\toclevel@part
- \let\toclevel@starchapter\toclevel@chapter
- \let\toclevel@starsection\toclevel@section
- \let\toclevel@starsubsection\toclevel@subsection
- \let\toclevel@starsubsubsection\toclevel@subsubsection
- \let\toclevel@starparagraph\toclevel@paragraph
- \let\toclevel@starsubparagraph\toclevel@subparagraph
- }{}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \lneed{8}
-% \section{Checking the presence of some packages}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Tester la présence de certains paquetages}
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Check if the \upack{sectsty} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{sectsty}\label{s+sectsty.h1}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{sectsty} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{sectsty}\label{s+sectsty.h1}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We must test if the \pack{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
-% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
-% loaded. See section~\vref{s+sectsty.h2}.
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
-% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
-% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+sectsty.h2}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifpackageloaded{sectsty}{\@mtc@sectstyLoaded@true}{}%
- \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{sectsty}{\@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@true}{}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Check if the \upack{varsects} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{varsects}\label{s+varsects.h1}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{varsects} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{varsects}\label{s+varsects.h1}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We must test if the \pack{varsects} package~\cite{varsects} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
-% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
-% loaded. See section~\vref{s+varsects.h2}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
-% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
-% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+varsects.h2}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifpackageloaded{varsects}%{\@mtc@varsectsLoaded@true}{}
- \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{varsects}{\@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@true}{}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Check if the \upack{fncychap} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{fncychap}\label{s+fncychap.h1}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{fncychap} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{fncychap}\label{s+fncychap.h1}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We must test if the \pack{fncychap} package~\cite{fncychap} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
-% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
-% loaded. See section~\vref{s+fncychap.h2}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
-% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
-% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+fncychap.h2}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifpackageloaded{fncychap}{\@mtc@fncychapLoaded@true}{}%
- \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{fncychap}{\@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@true}{}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Check if the \upack{hangcaption} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{hangcaption}\label{s+hangcaption.h1}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{hangcaption} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{hangcaption}\label{s+hangcaption.h1}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We must test if the \pack{hangcaption} package~\cite{hangcaption} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
-% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
-% loaded. See section~\vref{s+hangcaption.h2}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
-% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
-% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+hangcaption.h2}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifpackageloaded{hangcaption}{\@mtc@HgcLoaded@true}{}%
- \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{hangcaption}{\@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@true}{}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Check if the \upack{quotchap} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{quotchap}\label{s+quotchap.h1}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{quotchap} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{quotchap}\label{s+quotchap.h1}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We must test if the \pack{quotchap} package~\cite{quotchap} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
-% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
-% loaded. See section~\vref{s+quotchap.h2}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
-% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
-% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+quotchap.h2}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifpackageloaded{quotchap}{\@mtc@quotchapLoaded@true}{}%
- \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{quotchap}{\@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@true}{}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Check if the \upack{romannum} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{romannum}\label{s+romannum.h1}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{romannum} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{romannum}\label{s+romannum.h1}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We must test if the \pack{romannum} package~\cite{romannum} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
-% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
-% loaded. See section~\vref{s+romannum.h2}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
-% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
-% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+romannum.h2}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifpackageloaded{romannum}{\@mtc@romannumLoaded@true}{}%
- \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{romannum}{\@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@true}{}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Check if the \upack{sfheaders} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{sfheaders}\label{s+sfheaders.h1}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{sfheaders} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{sfheaders}\label{s+sfheaders.h1}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We must test if the \pack{sfheaders} package~\cite{sfheaders} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
-% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
-% loaded. See section~\vref{s+sfheaders.h2}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
-% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
-% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+sfheaders.h2}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifpackageloaded{sfheaders}{\@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@true}{}%
- \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{sfheaders}{\@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@true}{}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Check if the \upack{alnumsec} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{alnumsec}\label{s+alnumsec.h1}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{alnumsec} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{alnumsec}\label{s+alnumsec.h1}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We must test if the \pack{alnumsec} package~\cite{alnumsec} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
-% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
-% loaded. See section~\vref{s+alnumsec.h2}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
-% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
-% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+alnumsec.h2}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifpackageloaded{alnumsec}{\@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@true}{}%
- \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{alnumsec}{\@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@true}{}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Check if the \upack{captcont} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{captcont}\label{s+captcont.h1}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{captcont} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{captcont}\label{s+captcont.h1}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We must test if the \pack{captcont} package~\cite{captcont} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
-% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
-% loaded. See section~\vref{s+captcont.h2}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
-% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
-% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+captcont.h2}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifpackageloaded{captcont}{\@mtc@captcontLoaded@true}{}%
- \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{captcont}{\@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@true}{}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Check if the \upack{caption} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{caption}\label{s+caption.h1}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{caption} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{caption}\label{s+caption.h1}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We must test if the \pack{caption} package~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
-% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
-% loaded. See section~\vref{s+caption.h2}.
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
-% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
-% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+caption.h2}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifpackageloaded{caption}{\@mtc@captionLoaded@true}{}%
- \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{caption}{\@mtc@captionLoaded@a@true}{}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Check if the \upack{caption2} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{caption2}\label{s+caption2.h1}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{caption2} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{caption2}\label{s+caption2.h1}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We must test if the \pack{caption2} package~\cite{caption2} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
-% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
-% loaded. See section~\vref{s+caption2.h2}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{caption2}~\cite{caption2} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
-% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
-% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+caption2.h2}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifpackageloaded{caption2}{\@mtc@captionIILoaded@true}{}%
- \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{caption2}{\@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@true}{}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Check if the \upack{ccaption} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{ccaption}\label{s+ccaption.h1}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{ccaption} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{ccaption}\label{s+ccaption.h1}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We must test if the \pack{ccaption} package~\cite{ccaption} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
-% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
-% loaded. See section~\vref{s+ccaption.h2}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
-% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
-% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+ccaption.h2}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifpackageloaded{ccaption}{\@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@true}{}%
- \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{ccaption}{\@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@true}{}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Check if the \upack{mcaption} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{mcaption}\label{s+mcaption.h1}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{mcaption} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{mcaption}\label{s+mcaption.h1}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We must test if the \pack{mcaption} package~\cite{mcaption} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
-% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
-% loaded. See section~\vref{s+mcaption.h2}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
-% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
-% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+mcaption.h2}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifpackageloaded{mcaption}{\@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@true}{}%
- \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{mcaption}{\@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@true}{}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Check if the \upack{float} package is loaded}\ipack{float}\label{s+float.h1}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{float} est chargé}\ipack{float}\label{s+float.h1}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatLoaded@}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We must test if the \pack{float} package~\cite{float} is loaded
-% in the preamble, so we use an \com{AtBeginDocument} block.
-% See section~\vref{s+float.h2}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{float}~\cite{float} est chargé dans le préambule,
-% donc nous utilisons un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+float.h2}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{float}{\@mtc@floatLoaded@true}{}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Check if the \upack{floatrow} package is loaded}\ipack{floatrow}\label{s+floatrow.h1}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{floatrow} est chargé}\ipack{floatrow}\label{s+floatrow.h1}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We must test if the \pack{floatrow} package~\cite{floatrow} is loaded
-% in the preamble, so we use an \com{AtBeginDocument} block.
-% See section~\vref{s+floatrow.h2}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow} est chargé dans le préambule,
-% donc nous utilisons un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+floatrow.h2}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{floatrow}{\@mtc@floatrowLoaded@true}{}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Check if the \upack{trivfloat} package is loaded}\ipack{trivfloat}\label{s+trivfloat.h1}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{trivfloat} est chargé}\ipack{trivfloat}\label{s+trivfloat.h1}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We must test if the \pack{trivfloat} package~\cite{trivfloat} is loaded
-% in the preamble, so we use an \com{AtBeginDocument} block.
-% See section~\vref{s+trivfloat.h2}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} est chargé dans le préambule,
-% donc nous utilisons un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+trivfloat.h2}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{trivfloat}{\@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@true}{}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Check if the \upack{rotfloat} package is loaded}\ipack{rotfloat}\label{s+rotfloat.h1}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{rotfloat} est chargé}\ipack{rotfloat}\label{s+rotfloat.h1}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We must test if the \pack{rotfloat} package~\cite{rotfloat} is loaded
-% in the preamble, so we use an \com{AtBeginDocument} block.
-% See section~\vref{s+rotfloat.h2}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} est chargé dans le préambule,
-% donc nous utilisons un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+rotfloat.h2}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{rotfloat}{\@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@true}{}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Is the \uclass{memoir} class loaded?}\label{s+code+memoir.loaded}\iclass{memoir}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{La classe \uclass{memoir} est-elle chargée?}\label{s+code+memoir.loaded}\iclass{memoir}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirnew@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcpatchmemoir@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\SMM{\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0032}}
-% test if the \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} class is loaded.
-% This class needs some compatibility adjustments or may be \emph{incompatible} if too recent.
-% In the later case, a patch
-% is inserted (see chapter~\vref{memoir-patch}). This correction is no more necessary after the 2005/09/25 version
-% of \xfile{memoir.cls}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\SMM{\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0032}} testons si la
-% classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} est chargée.
-% Cette classe nécessite certains ajustements pour la compatibilité ou peut être \emph{incompatible} si
-% elle est trop récente.
-% Dans ce dernier cas, une correction est insérée (voir le chapitre~\vref{memoir-patch}). Cette correction n'est
-% plus nécessaire après la version de \xfile{memoir.cls} datée 2005/09/25.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtcpatchmemoir@ \@mtcpatchmemoir@false
-\@ifclassloaded{memoir}{\@mtc@memoirLoaded@true\relax%
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0030]{minitoc}%
- {the memoir class is loaded:
- \MessageBreak
- compatibility attempted\@gobble}}%
- {\@mtc@memoirLoaded@false}
-\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@
- \@ifundefined{@m@mchapter}%
- {\@mtc@memoirnew@false\mtcPackageInfo[I0020]{minitoc}%
- {old version of the memoir class\@gobble}}
- {\@mtc@memoirnew@true\mtcPackageInfo[I0027]{minitoc}%
- {recent version of the memoir class\@gobble}
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0032]{minitoc}%
- {This version of the memoir class uses
- \MessageBreak
- a version of \string\chapter\space which is
- \MessageBreak
- incompatible with the minitoc package.
- \MessageBreak
- We try to patch\@gobble}%
- \@mtcpatchmemoir@true}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcpatchmemoir@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And\imess{E0028} now the patch:
-% \or\relax
-% Et\imess{E0028} voici cette correction:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtcpatchmemoir@
-\IfFileExists{mtcpatchmem.sty}{%
- \@ifclasslater{memoir}{2005/09/25}{}{\RequirePackage{mtcpatchmem}}}{%
- \mtcPackageError[E0028]{minitoc}%
- {Unable to patch the memoir class}%
- {So it remains incompatible. Sorry.}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Testing the emptiness of a file}\label{s+code+emptiness}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Tester la vacuité d'un fichier}\label{s+code+emptiness}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@xifmtarg}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@EndWhile}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhilePreCondition}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhileCondition}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhileBody}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@While}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhileNext}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some macros for testing if an argument of a macro is empty (taken from the package
-% \pack{ifmtarg}~\cite{ifmtarg}, by \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson} and
-% \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}, and from \uxfile{while.tip},
-% by \xname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}~\cite[Vol~III, page~408]{tex-bech}). The group is necessary to keep local the catcode
-% change of ``Q'', hence a \com{gdef} is needed for \com{mtc@ifmtarg}.
-% \or\relax
-% Quelques macros pour tester si un argument d'une macro est vide (elles sont tirées du paquetage
-% \pack{ifmtarg}~\cite{ifmtarg}, de \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson} et
-% \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}, et de \uxfile{while.tip},
-% de \xname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}~\cite[Vol~III, page~408]{tex-bech}). Le groupe est nécessaire pour garder local le
-% changement de «~\emph{catcode}~» de «~Q~», il faut donc utiliser un \com{gdef} pour définir \com{mtc@ifmtarg}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup
-\catcode`\Q=3
-\long\gdef\mtc@ifmtarg#1{%
-\mtc@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil}
-\long\gdef\mtc@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4}
-\endgroup
-\let\mtc@EndWhile = \fi
-\def\mtc@While #1#2#3\mtc@EndWhile{%
- \def\mtc@WhilePreCondition{#1}%
- \def\mtc@WhileCondition{#2}%
- \def\mtc@WhileBody{#3}%
- \mtc@@While
-}
-\def\mtc@@While{%
- \mtc@WhilePreCondition
- \mtc@WhileCondition
- \def\mtc@WhileNext{%
- \mtc@WhileBody
- \mtc@@While
- }%
- \else
- \def\mtc@WhileNext{}%
- \fi
- \mtc@WhileNext
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@checkfiles}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@LI}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@While}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@Body}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@EndWhile}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@Rline}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some macros to test if a file is empty or not: \com{mtc@CkFile}\verb|{|\emph{file}\verb|}| returns \com{@mtc@FEtrue} if the file
-% is empty, \com{@mtc@FEfalse} if the is file not empty. An inexistent file is empty. A file full of white
-% space (space, tabulation, newline) is empty. Comments are empty.
-% \or\relax
-% Quelques macros pour tester si un fichier est vide ou non: \com{mtc@CkFile}\verb|{|\emph{fichier}\verb|}|
-% rend \com{@mtc@FEtrue} si le fichier est vide, \com{@mtc@FEfalse} si le fichier n'est pas vide.
-% Un fichier inexistant est vide. Un
-% fichier rempli d'espace blanc (espace, tabulation, saut de ligne) est vide. Les commentaires sont vides.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \noindent
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \textbf{Note:} on a big empty file, the \com{mtc@While} loop may be
-% time consuming, but not an eternity (33\,s for
-% $10^6$~lines on my computer), and the first non-empty line stops the loop.
-% \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc} is used as scratch file. Its contents is erased after use.
-% \or\relax
-% \textbf{Note:} sur un gros fichier vide, la boucle \com{mtc@While} peut prendre du temps, mais pas une
-% éternité (33\,s pour $10^6$~lignes avec mon ordinateur), et la première ligne non vide arrête la boucle.
-% \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc} est utilisé comme fichier de travail. Son contenu est effacé après usage.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@LI\@mtc@LItrue
-\newif\if@mtc@FE\@mtc@FEtrue
-\newif\if@mtc@checkfiles\@mtc@checkfilestrue
-\def\mtc@Body{\immediate\read\@inputcheck to \mtc@Rline\relax
- \ifeof\@inputcheck\relax\@mtc@LIfalse\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\mtc@Rline\par\relax
- \def\mtc@Rline{}
- \else
- \ifeof\@inputcheck\relax\global\@mtc@LIfalse\fi
- \mtc@ifmtarg{\mtc@Rline}{\relax}{\@mtc@FEfalse\@mtc@LIfalse}
- \fi}
-\def\mtc@CkFile#1{%
- \@mtc@LItrue\@mtc@FEtrue
- \if@mtc@checkfiles
- \IfFileExists{#1}{%
- \immediate\openin\@inputcheck #1\relax
- \mtc@While{}{\if@mtc@LI\relax}{\mtc@Body}\mtc@EndWhile}%
- {\@mtc@FEtrue}%
- \else
- \@mtc@FEfalse%
- \fi}
-\closein\@inputcheck\relax
-\def\mtc@CkStr#1{%
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc
- \immediate\write\tf@mtc{#1}%
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.mtc}%
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Internal macros to decrement \upack{minitoc} counters}\label{s+code+d.count}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Macros internes pour décrémenter les compteurs de \upack{minitoc}}\label{s+code+d.count}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebackpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebackchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebacksection}
-% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% It is sometimes necessary to decrement a \upack{minitoc} counter (\cnt{ptc}, \cnt{mtc} or \cnt{stc}) by one.
-% These macros are:
-% \or\relax
-% Il est parfois nécessaire de décrémenter un compteur de \upack{minitoc} (\cnt{ptc}, \cnt{mtc} ou \cnt{stc})
-% de un. Ces macros sont:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtc@onebackpart{\addtocounter{ptc}{-1}}
-\def\mtc@onebackchap{\addtocounter{mtc}{-1}}
-\def\mtc@onebacksect{\addtocounter{stc}{-1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Patching the \ucom{part} command}\label{s+code+patching.part}\icom{part}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{part}}\label{s+code+patching.part}\icom{part}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\part}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svspart}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
-% \begin{macro}{\@part}
-% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If the \com{part} command is not defined (by the document class, usually),
-% we cannot patch it and a warning is
-% displayed\,\footnote{Document classes with sectionning commands but no \com{part} command are likely non
-% standard, hence the warning displayed on the terminal.}. Else, we patch its two branches,
-% \com{@part} (for the unstarred version) or
-% \com{@spart} (for the starred version, \com{part*}): we add \com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{ptc}\verb|}| to increment the parttoc
-% counter \cnt{ptc}. See also section~\vref{s+code+patching.part.2}.
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% The code\SMM{\lmess{W0018}\\\lmess{I0023}} of the next section (section~\vref{s+code+mtcaddpart}) is also skipped if \com{part} is not defined.
-% \or\relax
-% Si la commande \com{part} n'est pas définie (par la classe de document, habituellement), nous ne pouvons pas la
-% modifier et un avertissement est émis\,\footnote{Une classe de document ayant des commandes de sectionnement mais
-% pas de commande \com{part} est probablement non standard, d'où l'avertissement affiché sur le terminal.}.
-% Sinon, nous modifions ses deux branches, \com{@part} (pour la version non étoilée) ou \com{@spart} (pour la
-% version étoilée, \com{part*}): nous ajoutons \com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{ptc}\verb|}| pour incrémenter le compteur de parttocs
-% \cnt{ptc}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+code+patching.part.2}.
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% Le\SMM{\lmess{W0018}\\\lmess{I0023}} code de la section suivante (section~\vref{s+code+mtcaddpart}) est aussi sauté si \com{part} n'est pas
-% définie.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{part}{%
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0018]{minitoc}%
- {part level macros NOT available}
-}{%% else undefined part (\part defined)
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0023]{minitoc}%
- {part level macros available\@gobble}
- \let\mtc@svspart\@spart
- \def\@spart{\stepcounter{ptc}\mtc@svspart}
- \let\mtc@svpart\@part
- \def\@part{\stepcounter{ptc}\mtc@svpart}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Adding an entry in the TOC for a starred part}\label{s+code+mtcaddpart}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour une partie étoilée}\label{s+code+mtcaddpart}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg}
-% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@xpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@part}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% To add an entry in the TOC for a starred part, we need the \com{mtcaddpart} macro,
-% which has an optional
-% argument, the title of the part as if should appear in the TOC.
-%
-% By default, this argument is empty. If it is empty
-% (tested via \com{mtc@ifmtarg})
-% or omitted, we add a \com{contentsline}\verb|{xpart}{}...| line in the
-% \suffix{.toc} file. If it is not empty, we add a
-% \com{contentsline}\verb|{part}{title...}...| line in the \suffix{.toc} file. We always add a
-% \com{contentsline}\verb|{xpart}{}...| line in the \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files. Then we increment the
-% \cnt{ptc} counter, via \com{adjustptc}
-% (defined in section~\vref{s+code+part.level}).
-% Using \texttt{xpart} as first argument of
-% \com{contentsline} means that \com{l@xpart} will be invoked in place of
-% \com{l@part} to print the entry in
-% the TOC, but \com{l@xpart} uses a huge depth (10\,000) for this entry, hence it will never be really printed
-% (except if you cheat).
-% \or\relax
-% Pour ajouter une entrée dans la table des matières pour une partie étoilée, nous avons besoin de la macro
-% \com{mtcaddpart}, qui a un argument optionnel, le titre de la partie tel qu'il devrait apparaître dans la table
-% des matières.
-%
-% Par défaut, cet argument est vide. S'il est vide (le test est fait par \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) ou omis, nous ajoutons
-% une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{xpart}{}...| dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. S'il n'est pas vide, nous ajoutons une
-% ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{part}{titre...}...| dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. Nous ajoutons toujours une ligne
-% \com{contentsline}\verb|{xpart}{}...| dans les fichiers \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot}. Puis nous
-% incrémentons le compteur \cnt{ptc}, via \com{adjustptc} (définie dans la section~\vref{s+code+part.level}).
-% Utiliser \texttt{xpart} comme premier argument de \com{contentsline} signifie que \com{l@xpart} sera invoquée
-% au lieu de \com{l@part} pour imprimer l'entrée dans la table des matières, mais \com{l@xpart} utilise une très
-% grande profondeur (10\,000) pour cette entrée, donc celle-ci ne sera jamais vraiment imprimée (sauf si vous trichez).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\mtcaddpart}[1][]{%
- \mtc@ifmtarg{#1}{\addcontentsline{toc}{xpart}{}}%
- {\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}}%
- \addcontentsline{lof}{xpart}{}%
- \addcontentsline{lot}{xpart}{}%
- \adjustptc}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This code terminates (temporarily) the part level commands.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce code termine (temporairement) les commandes au niveau partie.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Section level macros}\label{s+code+def.section.level.macros}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Macros au niveau section}\label{s+code+def.section.level.macros}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\SMM{\lmess{I0004}\\\lmess{I0029}\\\lmess{W0017}\\\lmess{I0028}}
-% section level macros are defined if \com{chapter} is not defined and \com{section} defined, i.e.,~in
-% document classes like \class{article}, but not in document classes
-% like \class{book} or \class{report}. So we
-% test if \com{chapter} is defined and if \com{section} is defined, with adequate warnings. If neither are
-% defined, you are in big trouble to use the \upack{minitoc} package with the class of your document.
-% \or\relax
-% Les\SMM{\lmess{I0004}\\\lmess{I0029}\\\lmess{W0017}\\\lmess{I0028}}
-% macros au niveau section sont définies si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie mais \com{section} est définie,
-% c'est-à-dire dans les classes de document telles que \class{article}, mais pas dans les classes de
-% document telles que \class{book} ou \class{report}. Donc nous testons si \com{chapter}
-% est définie et si \com{section} est définie, avec les avertissements adéquats. Si aucune de ces deux commandes
-% n'est définie, vous avez un sérieux problème pour utiliser le paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec la classe de votre
-% document.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{\mtcPackageInfo[I0004]{minitoc}%
- {chapter level macros NOT available\@gobble}%
- \@ifundefined{section}{\mtcPackageInfo[I0029]{minitoc}%
- {section level macros NOT available\@gobble}%
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0017]{minitoc}%
- {no section or chapter level macros available
- \MessageBreak
- PLEASE VERIFY YOUR MAIN DOCUMENT CLASS}}%
- {\mtcPackageInfo[I0028]{minitoc}%
- {section level macros available\@gobble}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Corrections for numbering}\label{s+code+correction.numbering.sections}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Corrections pour la numérotation}\label{s+code+correction.numbering.sections}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebacksect}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsv@tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsv@listoffigures}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsv@listoftables}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% As the TOC, the LOF and the LOT are considered as (starred) sections, we must decrement the secttoc counter
-% (\cnt{stc}) via \com{mtc@onebacksect} when the corresponding commands are executed. Hence we patch these
-% commands.
-% \or\relax
-% Comme la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux sont considérées comme des sections
-% (étoilées), il nous faut décrémenter le compteur de secttocs (\cnt{stc}) via \com{mtc@onebacksect}
-% lorsque les commandes correspondantes sont exécutées. Donc nous modifions ces commandes:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \let\mtcsv@tableofcontents\tableofcontents
- \let\mtcsv@listoffigures\listoffigures
- \let\mtcsv@listoftables\listoftables
- \def\tableofcontents{\mtcsv@tableofcontents\mtc@onebacksect}
- \def\listoffigures{\mtcsv@listoffigures\mtc@onebacksect}
- \def\listoftables{\mtcsv@listoftables\mtc@onebacksect}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Patching the \ucom{section} command}\label{s+code+patching.section.1}\icom{section}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Modification de la commande \ucom{section}}\label{s+code+patching.section.1}\icom{section}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svss}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
-% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If the \com{section} command is not defined (by the document class, usually),
-% we cannot patch it and a warning is displayed.
-% Else, we patch its two branches, \com{@sect} (for the unstarred version)
-% or \com{@ssect} (for the starred version, \com{section*}): we add \com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{stc}\verb|}| to increment
-% the secttoc counter \cnt{stc},
-% only in the unstarred case\footnote{Version \#25 has removed a spurious decrementation of this counter.}.
-% \or\relax
-% Si la commande \com{section} n'est pas définie (par la classe de document, habituellement), nous ne pouvons pas
-% la modifier et un avertissement est affiché. Sinon, nous modifions ses deux branches, \com{@sect} (pour la version
-% non étoilée) ou \com{@ssect} (pour la version étoilée, \com{section*}): nous ajoutons
-% \com{stepcounter}\verb}|{|\cnt{stc}\verb|}| pour incrémenter le compteur de secttocs \cnt{stc}, seulement dans le cas non
-% étoilé\,\footnote{La version~\#25 a éliminé une décrémentation superflue de ce compteur.}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \let\mtc@svsection\section
- \def\section{\stepcounter{stc}\mtc@svsection}
- \let\mtc@svss\@ssect
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Adding an entry in the TOC for a starred section}\label{s+code+mtcaddsection}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour une section étoilée}\label{s+code+mtcaddsection}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg}
-% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@xsect}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% To add an entry in the TOC for a starred section, we need the \com{mtcaddsection} macro, which has an optional
-% argument, the title of the section as it should appear in the TOC. By default, this argument is empty. If it is empty
-% (tested via \com{mtc@ifmtarg})
-% or omitted, we add a \com{contentsline}\verb|{xsect}{}...|
-% line in the \suffix{.toc} file. If it is not empty, we add a
-% \com{contentsline}\verb|{section}{title...}...| line in the \suffix{.toc} file. We always add a
-% \com{contentsline}\verb|{xsect}{}...| line in the \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files.
-% Then we increment the
-% \cnt{stc} counter, via \com{adjuststc} (this command is defined in section~\vref{s+code+section.level.commands}).
-% Using \texttt{xsect} as first argument of
-% \com{contentsline} means that \com{l@xsect} will be invoked
-% in place of \com{l@section} to print the entry in
-% the TOC, but \com{l@xsect} uses a huge depth (10\,000) for this entry, hence it will never be really printed
-% (except if you cheat).
-% \or\relax
-% Pour ajouter une entrée dans la table des matières pour une section étoilée, nous avons besoin de la macro
-% \com{mtcaddsection}, qui a un argument optionnel, le titre de la section tel qu'il doit apparaître dans la
-% table des matières. Par défaut, cet argument est vide. S'il est vide (ce qui est testé par \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) ou
-% omis, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|xsect}{}...| dans le fichier
-% \suffix{.toc}. S'il n'est pas vide, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{section}{title...}...|
-% dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. Nous ajoutons toujours une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{xsect}{}...| dans les
-% fichiers \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot}. Puis nous incrémentons le compteur \cnt{stc},
-% via \com{adjuststc} (cette commande est définie dans la section~\vref{s+code+section.level.commands}).
-% Le fait d'utiliser
-% \texttt{xsect} comme premier argument de \com{contentsline} signifie que \com{l@xsect} sera invoquée au
-% lieu de \com{l@section} pour imprimer l'entrée dans la table des matières, mais \com{l@xsect} utilise une
-% très grande profondeur (10\,000) pour cette entrée, donc elle ne sera jamais réellement imprimée (sauf si vous
-% trichez).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\mtcaddsection}[1][]{%
- \mtc@ifmtarg{#1}{\addcontentsline{toc}{xsect}{}}%
- {\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}}%
- \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{}%
- \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{}%
- \adjuststc}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This code terminates (temporarily) the section level commands, and we continue with chapter level macros.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce code termine (temporairement) les commandes au niveau section et nous continuons avec les commandes au niveau chapitre.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- }}{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Chapter level macros}\label{s+code+def.chapter.level.macros}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Macros au niveau chapitre}\label{s+code+def.chapter.level.macros}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\imess{I0003} chapter level macros are defined if \com{chapter} is defined, i.e.,~in
-% document classes like \class{book} or \class{report}. So we
-% test if \com{chapter} is defined, with adequate warnings. The test is already done above, we are in the
-% ``else'' branch of \com{@ifundefined}\texttt{\{chapter\}}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les\imess{I0003} macros au niveau chapitre sont définies si \com{chapter} est définie, c'est-à-dire, dans les classes de
-% document telles que \class{book} ou \class{report}. Donc nous testons si \com{chapter}
-% est définie, avec les avertissements adéquats. Ce test a déjà été fait plus haut, nous sommes dans la branche
-% «~sinon~» de \com{@ifundefined}\texttt{\{chapter\}}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0003]{minitoc}{chapter level macros available\@gobble}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Patching the \ucom{chapter} command}\label{s+code+patching.chapter}\icom{chapter}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{chapter}}\label{s+code+patching.chapter}\icom{chapter}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{chapter} command is defined (by the document class, usually).
-% We patch its two branches, \com{@chapter} (for the unstarred version) or \com{@schapter} (for the
-% starred version, \com{chapter*}): we add call to \com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{mtc}\verb|}| to increment the minitoc counter \cnt{mtc}.
-% Only the unstarred branch (\com{@chapter}) is patched here.
-% The other branch is patched later (section~\vref{s+code+patching.chapter.2}).
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{chapter} est définie (par la classe de document, habituellement). Nous modifions ses deux
-% branches, \com{@chapter} (pour la version non étoilée) ou \com{@schapter} (pour la version étoilée,
-% \com{chapter*}): nous ajoutons un appel à~\com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{mtc}\verb|}| pour incrémenter le compteur de minitocs \cnt{mtc}.
-% Seule la branche non étoilée est modifiée ici. L'autre branche sera modifiée plus loin (voir la
-% section~\vref{s+code+patching.chapter.2}).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\mtc@svchapter\@chapter \def\@chapter{\stepcounter{mtc}\mtc@svchapter}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Adding an entry in the TOC for a starred chapter}\label{s+code+mtcaddchapter}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour un chapitre étoilé}\label{s+code+mtcaddchapter}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg}
-% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@xchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% To add an entry in the TOC for a starred chapter, we need the \com{mtcaddchapter} macro, which has an optional
-% argument, the title of the chapter as if should appear in the TOC. By default, this argument is empty. If it is empty
-% (tested via \com{mtc@ifmtarg})
-% or omitted, we add a \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}{}...| line
-% in the \suffix{.toc} file. If it is not empty, we add a
-% \com{contentsline}\verb|{chapter}{title...}...| line in the \suffix{.toc} file. We always add a
-% \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}{}...| line in the \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files. Then we increment the
-% \cnt{mtc} counter, via \com{adjustmtc}
-% (defined in section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}).
-% Using \texttt{xchapter} as first argument of
-% \com{contentsline} means that \com{l@xchapter} will be invoked in place of
-% \com{l@chapter} to print the entry in
-% the TOC, but \com{l@xchapter} uses a huge depth (10\,000) for this entry, hence it will never be really printed
-% (except if you cheat).
-% \or\relax
-% Pour ajouter une entrée dans la table des matières pour un chapitre étoilé, nous avons besoin de la macro
-% \com{mtcaddchapter}, qui a un argument optionnel, le titre du chapitre tel qu'il devrait apparaître dans la
-% table des matières. Par défaut, cet argument est vide. S'il est vide (ce qui est testé via \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) ou
-% omis, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}{}...| dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}.
-% S'il n'est pas vide, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{chapter}{titre...}...| dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}.
-% Nous ajoutons toujours une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}{}...| dans les fichiers \suffix{.lof} et
-% \suffix{.lot}. Puis nous incrémentons le compteur \cnt{mtc}, via \com{adjustmtc} (définie dans la
-% section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}). Le fait d'utiliser \texttt{xchapter} comme premier argument
-% de \com{contentsline} signifie que \com{l@xchapter} sera invoquée au lieu de \com{l@chapter} pour imprimer
-% l'entrée dans la table des matières, mais \com{l@xchapter} utilise une très grande profondeur (10\,000) pour cette
-% entrée, et donc elle ne sera jamais vraiment imprimée (sauf si vous trichez).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\mtcaddchapter}[1][]{%
- \mtc@ifmtarg{#1}{\addcontentsline{toc}{xchapter}{}}%
- {\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}}%
- \addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{}%
- \addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{}%
- \adjustmtc}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This code terminates (temporarily) the chapter level commands,
-% i.e.,~terminates the \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| at the beginning of
-% section~\vref{s+code+def.section.level.macros}.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce code termine (temporairement) les commandes au niveau chapitre, c'est-à-dire termine la construction
-% \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| du début de la section~\vref{s+code+def.section.level.macros}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Miscellaneous declarations}\label{s+code+misc.decls}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Déclarations diverses}\label{s+code+misc.decls}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\newread}
-% \begin{macro}{\newtoks}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strutbox}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hstrut}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hstrutbox}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{newread} command must be redeclared as being \com{outer} (as \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} told me).
-% We need a token register (\com{mtc@toks}), a temporary string (\com{mtc@string}), struts (two kinds, each
-% one using a box containing an invisible vertical rule), a rule with all
-% dimensions equal to zero (\com{mtc@zrule}) and a command discouraging page breaks (\com{mtc@BBR}, for ``bad
-% break''). For the struts, which are boxes containing an invisible vertical rule, we use ``\texttt{ex}''~units,
-% to follow the current font.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{newread} doit étre redéclarée comme étant \com{outer} (comme me l'a conseillé
-% \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}).
-% Nous avons besoin d'un registre \emph{token} (\com{mtc@toks}), d'une chaîne temporaire (\com{mtc@string}),
-% d'étais ou \emph{struts} (de deux sortes, dont chacune utilise une boîte contenant un filet vertical invisible)
-% un filet dont toutes les dimensions sont à~zéro (\com{mtc@zrule}) et d'une commande pour décourager les
-% coupures de page (\com{mtc@BBR}, pour «~\emph{bad break}~»). Pour les étais, qui sont des boîtes contenant un
-% filet vertical invisible, nous utilisons des unités «~\texttt{ex}~», pour suivre la fonte courante.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\newread{\alloc@6\read\chardef\sixt@@n}
-\newtoks\mtc@toks
-\def\mtc@string{\relax}
-\newbox\mtc@strutbox
-\setbox\mtc@strutbox=\hbox{\rule[1.8ex]{\z@}{2.5ex}}
-\def\mtc@strut{\relax\ifmmode\copy\mtc@strutbox
- \else\unhcopy\mtc@strutbox\fi}
-\newbox\mtc@hstrutbox
-\setbox\mtc@hstrutbox=\hbox{\rule[1.ex]{\z@}{1.ex}}
-\def\mtc@hstrut{\relax\ifmmode\copy\mtc@hstrutbox
- \else\unhcopy\mtc@hstrutbox\fi}
-\def\mtc@v{\leavevmode\mtc@strut}
-\def\mtc@zrule{\rule[\z@]{\z@}{\z@}}
-\def\mtc@BBR{\unpenalty\nopagebreak[4]}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Autoconfiguration of extensions}\label{s+code+autoconf}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Autoconfiguration des suffixes}\label{s+code+autoconf}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This code is a trick to determine if the operating system is able or unable to use long extensions (${}>3$~characters)
-% in file names. We define a file descriptor (\com{tf@mtc}) to write files\footnote{\samepage It is
-% the \emph{only} new
-% file descriptor created by the \upack{minitoc} package. All files written by \upack{minitoc} use this
-% descriptor, or one of the standard descriptors, e.g., for the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file.
-% In fact, \upack{minitoc} writes also in the
-% \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files, but via file descriptors already used by standard commands
-% like \com{tableofcontents}, \com{listoffigures} and \com{listoftables}. We can conclude that
-% \upack{minitoc} itself uses only one file descriptor (or write stream). Some other attempts to make per chapter
-% TOCs have failed by quickly leading to exhaustion of file descriptors (\TeX\ offers only 16~file descriptors for writing),
-% because they called the standard internal \com{@starttoc} macro, which invokes \com{newwrite},
-% for each mini-table. As \upack{minitoc} writes into only one file at a~time (and in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log}
-% file, and in the standard contents files,
-% of course), we can reuse the same file descriptor and avoid this serious problem (which was present in the
-% original version of the package).
-% The \upack{minitoc} package writes in the contents files when it encounters a major sectionning command
-% (\com{part}, \com{chapter}, or \com{section}), if necessary. It writes into the mini-table
-% auxiliary files only via the mini-table preparing commands (\com{doparttoc}, \ldots,
-% \com{dosectlot}), once at a time.
-% You do not need a new hammer for each nail.}.
-% This code is verbose if long extensions cannot
-% be used, else the messages are only written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file.
-% The sequencing of these operations is vital. The table~\vref{t+code+8.3} shows this sequence.
-% A~star~($*$) denotes which file is read in phase~3.
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{table}[t]
-% \centering
-% \changeskips
-% \caption{Trick to detect the limitation to short extensions}\label{t+code+8.3}
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1}lccc}
-% \toprule
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{Phase (time runs from left to right):}}&1&2&3\\
-% \midrule
-% \textbf{OS with long extensions}&\xfile{\bs jobname.mtc0}&TRUE&TRUE&$*$\\
-% \space &\xfile{\bs jobname.mtc}&&FALSE&\\
-% \midrule
-% \textbf{OS with short extensions}&\uxfile{\bs jobname.mtc(0)}&TRUE&FALSE&$*$\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \end{table}
-% \or\relax
-% Ce code est une astuce pour déterminer si le système d'exploitation est capable ou non d'utiliser des suffixes
-% longs (${}>3$~caractères) dans les noms de fichiers. Nous définissons un descripteur de fichier (\com{tf@mtc})
-% pour écrire des fichiers\,\footnote{C'est le \emph{seul} nouveau descripteur de fichier créé par
-% le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Tous les
-% fichiers écrits par \upack{minitoc} utilisent ce descripteur, ou l'un des descripteurs standard, comme pour le fichier
-% \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. En fait, \upack{minitoc} écrit aussi dans les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof}
-% et \suffix{.lot},
-% mais via des descripteurs de fichiers déjà utilisés par des commandes standard telles que \com{tableofcontents},
-% \com{listoffigures} et \com{listoftables}. Nous pouvons en conclure que \upack{minitoc} lui-même
-% utilise un seul descripteur de fichier (ou flux d'écriture). Certaines autres tentatives pour faire des tables des
-% matières par chapitre ont échoué en conduisant rapidement à~un épuisement des descripteurs de fichiers (\TeX\
-% offre seulement 16~descripteurs de fichiers en écriture), parce qu'elles appelaient la macro interne standard
-% \com{@starttoc}, qui invoque \com{newwrite}, pour chaque mini-table. Puisque \upack{minitoc} écrit
-% dans seulement un seul fichier à~la fois (et dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log},
-% et dans les fichiers standard de
-% contenus, bien sûr), nous pouvons réutiliser le même descripteur de fichier et éviter ce sérieux problème (qui
-% était présent dans la version originale du paquetage).
-% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} écrit dans les fichiers de contenus lorsqu'il rencontre une commande de
-% sectionnement majeure (\com{part}, \com{chapter}, ou \com{section}), si nécessaire. Il écrit
-% dans les fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-tables seulement via les commandes de préparation des mini-tables
-% (\com{doparttoc}, \ldots, \com{dosectlot}), un à~la fois. Vous n'avez pas besoin d'un nouveau
-% marteau pour chaque clou.}. Ce code est bavard si les suffixes longs ne peuvent pas être utilisés, sinon les
-% messages sont écrits seulement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. Le séquencement de ces opérations est vital.
-% Le tableau~\vref{t+code+8.3} montre ce séquencement. Un astérisque~($*$) indique quel fichier est lu lors de la phase~3.
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{table}[t]
-% \changeskips
-% \centering
-% \caption{Astuce pour détecter la limitation à~des suffixes courts}\label{t+code+8.3}
-% {\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1}lccc}
-% \toprule
-% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{Phase (le temps s'écoule de gauche à~droite):}}&1&2&3\\
-% \midrule
-% \textbf{S.E\@. avec suffixes longs}&\xfile{\bs jobname.mtc0}&VRAI&VRAI&$*$\\
-% \space &\xfile{\bs jobname.mtc}&&FAUX&\\
-% \midrule
-% \textbf{S.E\@. avec suffixes courts}&\uxfile{\bs jobname.mtc(0)}&VRAI&FAUX&$*$\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}}
-% \end{table}
-% \fi
-% \lneed{7}
-% \begin{macro}{\newif}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\immediate}
-% \begin{macro}{\openout}
-% \begin{macro}{\write}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
-% \begin{macro}{\input}
-% \begin{macro}{\jobname}
-% \begin{enumerate}[(1)]
-% \addtocounter{enumi}{-1}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% First, a message and a new flag:\imess{I0002}
-% \or\relax
-% D'abord, un message et un nouvel indicateur:\imess{I0002}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\mtcPackageInfo[I0002]{minitoc}%
- {Autoconfiguration of extensions\@gobble}
-\newif\if@mtc@longext@\@mtc@longext@false
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We write ``\com{@mtc@longext@true}'' in \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}. But if the OS has short extensions, the
-% real name of the file will be truncated to \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous écrivons «~\com{@mtc@longext@true}~» dans \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}. Mais si le système
-% d'exploitation a des suffixes courts, le vrai nom du fichier sera tronqué à~\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc0
-\immediate\write\tf@mtc{\string\@mtc@longext@true}
-\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We write ``\com{@mtc@longext@false}'' in \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous écrivons «~\com{@mtc@longext@false}~» dans \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc
-\immediate\write\tf@mtc{\string\@mtc@longext@false}
-\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We read \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}. But if the OS has short extensions, the real name of the file will be
-% truncated to \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous lisons \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}. Mais si le système d'exploitation a des suffixes courts, le vrai nom du
-% fichier sera tronqué à~\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\input{\jobname.mtc0}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Hence,\SMM{\lmess{I0012}\\\lmess{I0031}\\\lmess{W0019}} the flag is true if we read really
-% from \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}, but false if we read from
-% \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. The text and the severity of the messages are different.
-% \or\relax
-% En\SMM{\lmess{I0012}\\\lmess{I0031}\\\lmess{W0019}} conséquence,
-% l'indicateur est vrai si nous lisons effectivement depuis le fichier \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}, mais faux
-% si nous lisons depuis \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. Le texte et la sévérité des messages sont différents.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@longext@
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0012]{minitoc}%
- {Long extensions (Unix-like) will be used\@gobble}
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0031]{minitoc}%
- {==> this version is configured for UNIX-like
- \MessageBreak
- \space\space\space\space(long extensions) file names\@gobble}%
-\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0019]{minitoc}%
- {Short extensions (MSDOS-like) will be used
- \MessageBreak
- ==> this version is configured for MSDOS-like
- \MessageBreak
- \space\space\space\space(8+3) file names}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \item
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We erase the contents of the two files (because \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc} is also used later as a~scratch file,
-% see section~\vref{s+code+emptiness}).
-% \or\relax
-% Nous effaçons le contenu des deux fichiers (car \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc} est aussi utilisé comme fichier de
-% travail plus tard, voir la section~\vref{s+code+emptiness}).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc
-\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
-\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc0
-\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{enumerate}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Detecting obsolete versions of \LaTeX}\label{s+code+latex.obs}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Détection des versions obsolètes de \LaTeX}\label{s+code+latex.obs}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
-% \begin{macro}{\reset@font}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0021}\\\lmess{W0022}} code detects old versions of the \LaTeX\ kernel that are no more supported and
-% with which the \upack{minitoc}% package can hardly work. The trick is to detect the absence of some
-% internal \LaTeX\ commands, \com{@inputcheck} and \com{reset@font}.
-% If you get one of these messages, your are in bad luck and should \emph{urgently} update your
-% \LaTeX\ installation, which is just rusting since\ldots\ a~lot of years!
-% \or\relax
-% Ce\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0021}\\\lmess{W0022}} code détecte les vieilles versions du noyau \LaTeX\ qui ne sont plus maintenues
-% et avec lesquelles le paquetage \upack{minitoc} aura beaucoup de mal à~fonctionner.
-% L'astuce est de détecter l'absence de certaines commandes
-% internes de \LaTeX, \com{@inputcheck} et \com{reset@font}. Si vous recevez l'un de ces messages, vous êtes
-% dans une mauvaise situation et devriez, \emph{dans l'urgence,} mettre à~jour votre installation de \LaTeX,
-% qui rouille depuis\ldots\ pas mal d'années!
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{@inputcheck}%
- {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0021]{minitoc}%
- {Your version of latex.tex is obsolete.
- \MessageBreak
- Trying to continue..}\newread\@inputcheck\relax}{}
-\@ifundefined{reset@font}%
- {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0022]{minitoc}%
- {Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete.
- \MessageBreak
- Trying to continue... crossing fingers}%
- \let\reset@font\relax}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Adding a TOC entry without leaders nor page numbers}\label{s+code+@undottedtocline}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Ajouter une entrée dans la TdM sans points de conduite ni numéro de page}\label{s+code+@undottedtocline}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\undottedmtcfalse}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The (internal) macro \com{@undottedtocline} is a modified version of the standard command \com{@dottedtocline}.
-% It will be used in customization macros.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro (interne) \com{@undottedtocline} est une version modifiée de la commande standard \com{@dottedtocline}.
-% Elle sera utilisée dans les macros de personnalisation.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifundottedmtc\undottedmtcfalse
-\def\@undottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{%
- \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth\relax \else
- \vskip \z@ plus.2\p@
- {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip
- \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue
- \interlinepenalty\@M
- \leavevmode
- \@tempdima #3\relax \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \hbox{}%
- \hskip -\leftskip
- #4\nobreak\hfill \nobreak
- \null\par}%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Default values for the page-number customizations}\label{s+code+custom.defaults}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Valeurs par défaut pour les personnalisations des numéros de page}\label{s+code+custom.defaults}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This section defines some customization macros for the presence or
-% absence of page numbers in the mini-tables. But if the \class{memoir}
-% class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} is loaded,
-% it does the job. So, we test first \com{if@mtc@memoirLoaded@}
-% to use the commands of \class{memoir} when they are available.
-% \or\relax
-% Cette section définit quelques macros de personnalisation concernant la présence ou l'absence des numéros de
-% pages dans les mini-tables. Mais si la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} est chargée, elle
-% sait faire ce travail. Donc, nous testons d'abord \com{if@mtc@memoirLoaded@} pour utiliser les commandes de
-% \class{memoir} lorsqu'elles sont disponibles.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For entries in minitocs:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les entrées dans les minitocs:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtcpagenumbers{%
- \cftpagenumberson{section}
- \cftpagenumberson{subsection}
- \cftpagenumberson{subsubsection}
- \cftpagenumberson{paragraph}
- \cftpagenumberson{subparagraph}}
-\def\nomtcpagenumbers{%
- \cftpagenumbersoff{section}
- \cftpagenumbersoff{subsection}
- \cftpagenumbersoff{subsubsection}
- \cftpagenumbersoff{paragraph}
- \cftpagenumbersoff{subparagraph}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\nostcpagenumbers}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For entries in secttocs:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les entrées dans les secttocs:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\stcpagenumbers{%
- \cftpagenumberson{subsection}
- \cftpagenumberson{subsubsection}
- \cftpagenumberson{paragraph}
- \cftpagenumberson{subparagraph}}
-\def\nostcpagenumbers{%
- \cftpagenumbersoff{subsection}
- \cftpagenumbersoff{subsubsection}
- \cftpagenumbersoff{paragraph}
- \cftpagenumbersoff{subparagraph}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\noptcpagenumbers}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For entries in parttocs:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les entrées dans les parttocs:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ptcpagenumbers{%
- \cftpagenumberson{chapter}
- \cftpagenumberson{section}
- \cftpagenumberson{subsection}
- \cftpagenumberson{subsubsection}
- \cftpagenumberson{paragraph}
- \cftpagenumberson{subparagraph}}
-\def\noptcpagenumbers{%
- \cftpagenumbersoff{chapter}
- \cftpagenumbersoff{section}
- \cftpagenumbersoff{subsection}
- \cftpagenumbersoff{subsubsection}
- \cftpagenumbersoff{paragraph}
- \cftpagenumbersoff{subparagraph}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\slfpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\noslfpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\plfpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\noplfpagenumbers}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For entries in minilofs, sectlofs, and partlofs:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les entrées dans les minilofs, sectlofs et partlofs:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\mlfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{figure}}
- \def\nomlfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{figure}}
- \def\slfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{figure}}
- \def\noslfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{figure}}
- \def\plfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{figure}}
- \def\noplfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{figure}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\sltpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\nosltpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\nopltpagenumbers}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For entries in minilots, sectlots, and partlots:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les entrées dans les minilots, sectlots et partlots:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\mltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{table}}
- \def\nomltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{table}}
- \def\sltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{table}}
- \def\nosltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{table}}
- \def\pltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{table}}
- \def\nopltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{table}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Else, \upack{minitoc} will use its own commands.
-% \or\relax
-% Sinon, \upack{minitoc} utilisera ses propres commandes.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\else
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% First, for minitocs, secttocs and parttocs:
-% \or\relax
-% D'abord, pour les minitocs, secttocs et parttocs:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\mtcpagenumbers{\let\mtc@pgno\null}
- \def\nomtcpagenumbers{\let\mtc@pgno\relax}
- \def\stcpagenumbers{\let\stc@pgno\null}
- \def\nostcpagenumbers{\let\stc@pgno\relax}
- \def\ptcpagenumbers{\let\ptc@pgno\null}
- \def\noptcpagenumbers{\let\ptc@pgno\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then, for minilofs, sectlofs and partlofs:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis, pour les minilofs, sectlofs et partlofs:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\mlfpagenumbers{\let\mlf@pgno\null}
- \def\nomlfpagenumbers{\let\mlf@pgno\relax}
- \def\slfpagenumbers{\let\slf@pgno\null}
- \def\noslfpagenumbers{\let\slf@pgno\relax}
- \def\plfpagenumbers{\let\plf@pgno\null}
- \def\noplfpagenumbers{\let\plf@pgno\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then, for minilots, sectlots and partlots:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis, pour les minilots, sectlots et partlots:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\mltpagenumbers{\let\mlt@pgno\null}
- \def\nomltpagenumbers{\let\mlt@pgno\relax}
- \def\sltpagenumbers{\let\slt@pgno\null}
- \def\nosltpagenumbers{\let\slt@pgno\relax}
- \def\pltpagenumbers{\let\plt@pgno\null}
- \def\nopltpagenumbers{\let\plt@pgno\relax}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{9}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\plfpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\slfpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\sltpagenumbers}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then the default values are set; page numbers are present:
-% \or\relax
-% Et enfin, les valeurs par défaut sont établies; les numéros de pages sont présents:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ptcpagenumbers
-\plfpagenumbers
-\pltpagenumbers
-\mtcpagenumbers
-\mlfpagenumbers
-\mltpagenumbers
-\stcpagenumbers
-\slfpagenumbers
-\sltpagenumbers
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% ^^A \need{.85\textheight}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Features'' for the mini-tables}\label{s+code+features}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{<<~Dispositifs~>> pour les mini-tables}\label{s+code+features}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Each kind of mini-table has five ``features'': a ``\feat{before}'' feature, an ``\feat{after}'' feature,
-% an ``\feat{open}'' feature, an ``\feat{close}'' feature,
-% and a ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature.
-%
-% A ``\feat{before}'' feature is defined by a macro like \com{beforeparttoc} which contains code to be executed
-% before any mini-table of a given type: \com{beforeparttoc} is executed before each parttoc. Usually such features
-% contain only trivial commands like \icom{clearpage}\icom{cleardoublepage}\verb|\clear[double]page|, or \com{empty}.
-%
-% An ``\feat{after}'' feature is analog but its code is executed after each mini-table of a given type.
-%
-% An ``\feat{open}'' feature contains code to be executed just before the insertion of the file containing the
-% mini-table. Usally such features either do nothing, either prepare some basic formatting (like multi-column).
-% It does not concern the title of the mini-table or the decorative rules.
-%
-% An ``\feat{close}'' feature contains code to be executed just after the insertion of the file containing the
-% mini-table. Usally such features either do nothing, either finish some basic formatting (like multi-column).
-% It does not concern the title of the mini-table or the decorative rules.
-%
-% A ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature is defined by a macro like \com{thispageparttocstyle} which contains code to define the page
-% style implied by mini-tables of a given type: the command \com{thispageparttocstyle} can be defined as
-% \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{...}|. Usually, the ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature is only defined for part-level mini-tables,
-% which use page breaks in their \feat{before} and \feat{after} features. For chapter- and section-level
-% mini-tables, the ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature is usually defined as \com{empty}.
-%
-% We set the default values for the part-level features depending on the presence of the \com{chapter} command, as
-% \class{article}-like documents are different from the \class{book}- or \class{report}-like documents for the
-% layout of part-level mini-tables.
-% \or\relax
-% À~chaque type de mini-table sont associés cinq «~dispositifs~» (\emph{features}): un dispositif «~\feat{before}~»
-% (avant), un dispositif «~\feat{after}~» (après),
-% un dispositif «~\feat{open}~» (ouverture), un dispositif «~\feat{close}~» (fermeture),
-% et un dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» (style de cette page).
-%
-% Un dispositif «~\feat{before}~» est défini par une macro telle que \com{beforeparttoc} qui contient du code à~exécuter
-% avant toute mini-table d'un type donné: \com{beforeparttoc} est exécutée avant chaque parttoc. Habituellement,
-% de tels dispositifs ne contiennent que des commandes triviales telles que \icom{clearpage}\icom{cleardoublepage}\verb|\clear[double]page| ou \com{empty}.
-%
-% Un dispositif «~\feat{after}~» est analogue mais son code est exécuté après chaque mini-table d'un type donné.
-%
-% Un dispositif «~\feat{open}~» contient du code à~exécuter juste avant l'insertion du fichier contenant la
-% mini-table. Habituellement, de tels dispositifs soit ne font rien, soit préparent une mise en forme basique
-% (comme un multi-colonnage). Il ne concerne pas le titre de la mini-table ni les filets décoratifs.
-%
-% Un dispositif «~\feat{close}~» contient du code à~exécuter juste après l'insertion du fichier contenant la
-% mini-table. Habituellement, de tels dispositifs soit ne font rien, soit achèvent une mise en forme basique
-% (comme un multi-colonnage). Il ne concerne pas le titre de la mini-table ni les filets décoratifs.
-%
-% Un dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» est défini par une macro comme \com{thispageparttocstyle} qui contient du
-% code pour définir le style de page impliqué par les mini-tables d'un type donné: la commande \com{thispageparttocstyle}
-% peut être définie comme étant \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{...}|. Habituellement, le dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» n'est
-% défini que pour les mini-tables au niveau partie, qui utilisent des sauts de page dans leurs dispositifs «~\feat{before}~»
-% et «~\feat{after}~». Pour les mini-tables aux niveaux chapitre et section, le dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» est
-% habituellement défini comme étant \com{empty}.
-%
-% Nous établissons les valeurs par défaut pour les dispositifs au niveau partie selon la présence de la commande
-% \com{chapter}, car les documents du genre \class{article} sont différents des documents du genre \class{book}
-% ou \class{report} pour la mise en page des mini-tables au niveau partie.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforeparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If \com{chapter} is not defined, the part level mini-tables have no ``\feat{before}'' feature (by default):
-% \or\relax
-% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, les mini-tables au niveau partie n'ont pas de dispositif «~\feat{before}~» (par défaut):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
- \let\beforeparttoc\empty
- \let\beforepartlof\empty
- \let\beforepartlot\empty}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% But if \com{chapter} is defined, they have a \com{cleardoublepage} as default ``\feat{before}'' feature:
-% \or\relax
-% Mais si \com{chapter} est définie, elles ont \com{cleardoublepage} comme dispositif «~\feat{before}~» par défaut
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- {\let\beforeparttoc\cleardoublepage
- \let\beforepartlof\cleardoublepage
- \let\beforepartlot\cleardoublepage}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforeminitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Chapter level mini-tables have no ``\feat{before}'' feature (by default):
-% \or\relax
-% Les mini-tables au niveau chapitre n'ont (par défaut), pas de dispositif «~\feat{before}~»:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\beforeminitoc\empty
-\let\beforeminilof\empty
-\let\beforeminilot\empty
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforesecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Section level mini-tables have no ``\feat{before}'' feature (by default):
-% \or\relax
-% Les mini-tables au niveau section n'ont (par défaut), pas de dispositif «~\feat{before}~»:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\beforesecttoc\empty
-\let\beforesectlof\empty
-\let\beforesectlot\empty
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\afterparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If \com{chapter} is not defined, the part level mini-tables have no ``\feat{after}'' feature (by default):
-% \or\relax
-% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, les mini-tables au niveau partie n'ont pas de dispositif «~\feat{after}~» (par défaut):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
- \let\afterparttoc\empty
- \let\afterpartlof\empty
- \let\afterpartlot\empty}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% But if \com{chapter} is defined, they have a \com{cleardoublepage} as default ``\feat{after}'' feature:
-% \or\relax
-% Mais si \com{chapter} est définie, elles ont \com{cleardoublepage} comme dispositif «~\feat{after}~» par défaut
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- {\let\afterparttoc\cleardoublepage
- \let\afterpartlof\cleardoublepage
- \let\afterpartlot\cleardoublepage}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\afterminitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\afterminilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\afterminilot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Chapter level mini-tables have no ``\feat{after}'' feature (by default):
-% \or\relax
-% Les mini-tables au niveau chapitre n'ont, par défaut, pas de dispositif «~\feat{after}~»:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\afterminitoc\empty
-\let\afterminilof\empty
-\let\afterminilot\empty
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\aftersecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Section level mini-tables have no ``\feat{after}'' feature (by default):
-% \or\relax
-% Les mini-tables au niveau section n'ont, par défaut, pas de dispositif «~\feat{after}~»:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\aftersecttoc\empty
-\let\aftersectlof\empty
-\let\aftersectlot\empty
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{12}
-% \begin{macro}{\openparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\openpartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\openpartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\openminitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\openminilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\openminilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\opensecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\opensectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\opensectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% By default, the ``\feat{open}'' features do nothing:
-% \or\relax
-% Par défaut, les dispositifs ``\feat{open}'' ne font rien:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\openparttoc\empty
-\let\openpartlof\empty
-\let\openpartlot\empty
-\let\openminitoc\empty
-\let\openminilof\empty
-\let\openminilot\empty
-\let\opensecttoc\empty
-\let\opensectlof\empty
-\let\opensectlot\empty
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{12}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\closepartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\closepartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeminitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeminilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeminilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\closesecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\closesectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\closesectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% By default, ``\feat{close}'' features do nothing:
-% \or\relax
-% Par défaut, les dispositifs ``\feat{close}'' ne font rien:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\closeparttoc\empty
-\let\closepartlof\empty
-\let\closepartlot\empty
-\let\closeminitoc\empty
-\let\closeminilof\empty
-\let\closeminilot\empty
-\let\closesecttoc\empty
-\let\closesectlof\empty
-\let\closesectlot\empty
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{9}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispagestyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispageparttocstyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlofstyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlotstyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispageminitocstyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilofstyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilotstyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispagesecttocstyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlofstyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlotstyle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% By default, all the ``\feat{pagestyle}'' features (at part level) use the \texttt{empty} page style.
-% It affects only the first page of the mini-table. If \com{chapter} is not defined, there is no default
-% ``\feat{pagestyle}'' features at the part level.
-% \or\relax
-% Par défaut, tous les dispositifs «~\feat{pagestyle}~» (au niveau partie) utilisent le style de page \texttt{empty}.
-% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, il n'y a pas de dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» au niveau partie.
-% Ceci affecte seulement la première page de la mini-table.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
- \def\thispageparttocstyle{\empty}
- \def\thispagepartlofstyle{\empty}
- \def\thispagepartlotstyle{\empty}}%
-{\def\thispageparttocstyle{\thispagestyle{empty}}
- \def\thispagepartlofstyle{\thispagestyle{empty}}
- \def\thispagepartlotstyle{\thispagestyle{empty}}}
-\def\thispageminitocstyle{\empty}
-\def\thispageminilofstyle{\empty}
-\def\thispageminilotstyle{\empty}
-\def\thispagesecttocstyle{\empty}
-\def\thispagesectlofstyle{\empty}
-\def\thispagesectlotstyle{\empty}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% In section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}, we will define the \com{mtcsetfeature} macro which is
-% a~much easier user interface to set the mini-tables ``features''.
-% \or\relax
-% Dans la section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}, nous définirons la macro \com{mtcsetfeature} qui est une
-% interface utilisateur bien plus facile pour mettre en place les «~dispositifs~» des mini-tables.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Fake tables of contents}\label{s+code+fake}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Tables des matières invisibles}\label{s+code+fake}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures}
-% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables}
-% \begin{macro}{\fake@starttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@filesw}
-% \begin{macro}{\newwrite}
-% \begin{macro}{\immediate}
-% \begin{macro}{\openout}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If you don't want a table of contents, but want minitocs,
-% you need to create the \suffix{.toc} file, without inserting it
-% into your document. This \com{faketableofcontents} command is a stripped off version
-% of the standard command \com{tableofcontents}.
-% We define in the same way the analog commands \com{fakelistoffigures} and \com{fakelistoftables},
-% using in fact just a stripped version \com{fake@starttoc} of \com{@starttoc}. But it is nice to reset to zero the
-% \cnt{ptc}, \cnt{mtc}, and \cnt{stc} counters now, if they are defined\,\footnote{Remember the infamous
-% ``\texttt{stc0}'' bug.}.
-% \or\relax
-% Si vous souhaitez ne pas avoir de table des matières, mais avoir quand même des minitocs, il vous faut créer le
-% fichier \suffix{.toc}, sans l'insérer dans votre document. Cette commande
-% \com{faketableofcontents} est une version restreinte de la commande \com{tableofcontents} standard. Nous
-% définissons de la même manière les deux autres commandes analogues \com{fakelistoffigures} et \com{fakelistoftables},
-% en utilisant en fait simplement une version restreinte \com{fake@starttoc} de \com{@starttoc}.
-% Mais il est bon de remettre à~zéro
-% maintenant les compteurs \cnt{ptc}, \cnt{mtc} et \cnt{stc}, s'ils sont définis\,\footnote{Souvenez-vous
-% de l'infâme erreur <<~\texttt{stc0}~>>.}.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{4}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\faketableofcontents{\fake@starttoc{toc}%
- \@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\setcounter{ptc}{0}}%
- \@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{\setcounter{mtc}{0}}%
- \@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\setcounter{stc}{0}}%
- }
-\def\fakelistoffigures{\fake@starttoc{lof}}
-\def\fakelistoftables{\fake@starttoc{lot}}
-\def\fake@starttoc#1{\begingroup \makeatletter
- \if@filesw \expandafter\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname
- \immediate\openout \csname tf@#1\endcsname
- \jobname.#1\relax \fi
- \global\@nobreakfalse \endgroup}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This code uses the same file descriptors (for writing) than the original commands.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce code utilise les mêmes descripteurs de fichier (en écriture) que les commandes d'origine.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Depth counters for minilofs and minilots}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Compteurs de profondeur pour les minilofs et les minilots}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\newcounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If the counters \dcnt{lofdepth} and \dcnt{lotdepth} are defined,
-% we create the necessary new counters:
-% \dcnt{minilofdepth} and \dcnt{minilofdepth}.
-% These counters are initialized to~2.
-% This is done after the loading of the packages, in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block:
-% \or\relax
-% Si les compteurs \dcnt{lofdepth} et \dcnt{lotdepth} sont définis, nous créons
-% les nouveaux compteurs nécessaires:
-% \dcnt{minilofdepth} et \dcnt{minilofdepth}.
-% Ces compteurs sont initialisés à~2.
-% Ceci est fait après le chargement des paquetages, dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}%
- {\newcounter{minilofdepth}\setcounter{minilofdepth}{2}}%
- \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}%
- {\newcounter{minilotdepth}\setcounter{minilotdepth}{2}}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Chapter level commands}\label{s+code+chapter.level}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Commandes au niveau chapitre}\label{s+code+chapter.level}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% From here, we define the chapter-level commands.
-% \or\relax
-% À~partir d'ici, nous définissons les commandes au niveau chapitre.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth}
-% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% First, we memorize the marks (not used today, but\ldots):
-% \or\relax
-% Tout d'abord, nous mémorisons les marques (ceci n'est pas encore utilisé, mais\ldots):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth
-\global\let\@mkboth\markboth
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Starred parts, chapters or sections}\label{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Parties, chapitres et section étoilés}\label{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\addst@rred}
-% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@ptc}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@stc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define commands to manage the starred sectionning commands: \com{part*}, \com{chapter*} and \com{section*}.
-% The section-level is different depending on the presence of the \com{chapter} command.
-% Eventually, a counter is incremented.
-% A~contents line is added in the \suffix{.toc} file, with the right depth to print it (see \verb|\l@star...| later,
-% in section~\vref{s+code+necessary.l@}).
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons des commandes pour traiter les commandes de sectionnement étoilées: \com{part*}, \com{chapter*}
-% et \com{section*}. Le niveau section est différent selon que \com{chapter} est définie ou non. Éventuellement,
-% un compteur est incrémenté. Une ligne de contenu est ajoutée dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}, avec la bonne
-% profondeur pour l'imprimer (voir \verb|\l@star...| plus loin, dans la section~\vref{s+code+necessary.l@}).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\addst@rred#1#2{%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{star#1}{#2}%
- \@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax
- \stepcounter{ptc}%
- \fi
- }%
- \@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax
- \stepcounter{mtc}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\appendix\relax
- \stepcounter{mtc}%
- \fi
- }%
- \@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax
-%% \@ifundefined{chapter}{\stepcounter{stc}}{}%
- \stepcounter{stc}%
- \fi
- }%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\addst@rred}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If \com{chapter} is not defined, we just define \com{addstarredsection}:
-% \or\relax
-% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, nous définissons simplement \com{addstarredsection}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
-\gdef\addstarredsection#1{\addst@rred{section}{#1}}
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Else we begin to define the stuff for chapter-level commands (the ``else'' branch of \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}|):
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \or\relax
-% Sinon, nous commençons à~définir le matériel pour les commandes au niveau chapitre (branche «~sinon~» de
-% \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}|):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{macro}{\The@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@firstchapteris@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\newcounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\incrementmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\themtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{W0003} define now: the internal format of the \cnt{mtc} counter (\com{The@mtc}), the obsolete command
-% \com{firstchapteris} (it just emits a harmless warning), the \cnt{mtc} counter (initialized to~0),
-% the \com{adjustmtc} command (increments the \cnt{mtc} counter, by~1 by default),
-% the \com{decrementmtc} command (decrements the \cnt{mtc} counter by~1),
-% the \com{incrementmtc} command (increments the \cnt{mtc} counter by~1),
-% the format of the \cnt{mtc} counter (\com{themtc}),
-% the counter \dcnt{minitocdepth}, initialized to~2, for the depth of a minitoc
-% (analog to the standard \dcnt{tocdepth} counter).
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{W0003} définissons ensuite: le format interne du compteur \cnt{mtc} (\com{The@mtc}), la commande
-% obsolète \com{firstchapteris} (elle ne fait qu'émettre un avertissement bénin), le compteur \cnt{mtc} (initialisé
-% à~0), la commande \com{adjustmtc} (incrémente le compteur \cnt{mtc}, de~1 par défaut),
-% la commande \com{decrementmtc} (décrémente le compteur \cnt{mtc} de~1),
-% la commande \com{incrementmtc} (incrémente le compteur \cnt{mtc} de~1),
-% le format du compteur \cnt{mtc} (\com{themtc}),
-% le compteur \dcnt{minitocdepth}, initialisé à~2, pour la profondeur d'une minitoc (analogue
-% au compteur standard \dcnt{tocdepth}).
-% \fi
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\The@mtc{\arabic{mtc}}
-\def\firstchapteris#1%
- {\mtcPackageWarning[W0003]{minitoc}%
- {\string\firstchapteris \space is an obsolete (ignored)
- \MessageBreak
- command}%
- \@firstchapteris@used@true}
-\newcounter{mtc}
-\setcounter{mtc}{0}
-\newcommand{\adjustmtc}[1][1]{\addtocounter{mtc}{#1}}
-\def\decrementmtc{\addtocounter{mtc}{-1}}
-\def\incrementmtc{\addtocounter{mtc}{+1}}
-\gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}}
-\newcounter{minitocdepth}
-\setcounter{minitocdepth}{2}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlf@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlt@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\plt@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\slf@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\slt@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define the horizontal rules to draw before and after minitocs (\com{mtc@rule}), and we copy
-% that definition into analog macros for other kinds of mini-tables. We also set the default value (24pt) of
-% \com{mtcindent}, the indentation for minitocs (both sides). The rules are 0.4pt thick. They are defined via
-% \com{hrule} to stay in vertical mode for the final \com{kern}.
-% \or\relax %
-% Nous définissons les filets horizontaux à~tracer avant et après les minitocs
-% (\com{mtc@rule}), puis nous copions cette définition dans des macros analogues pour les autres sortes de
-% mini-tables. Nous établissons aussi la valeur par défaut (24pt) de \com{mtcindent}, l'indentation pour les minitocs (des
-% deux côtés). Les filets sont épais de 0.4pt. Ils sont définis via \com{hrule} pour rester en mode vertical
-% pour le \com{kern} final.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule \@width\columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}
-\let\mlf@rule\mtc@rule
-\let\mlt@rule\mtc@rule
-\let\plf@rule\mtc@rule
-\let\plt@rule\mtc@rule
-\let\slf@rule\mtc@rule
-\let\slt@rule\mtc@rule
-\mtcindent=24\p@
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{14}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Font commands for the mini-tables}\label{s+code+font.commands.ch}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Commandes de fontes pour les mini-tables}\label{s+code+font.commands.ch}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlffont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlfSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtifont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define these commands with full NFSS~\cite{fontsel} descriptions. These definitions are effective if \com{chapter} is
-% defined.
-% The fonts for titles are also defined here. See also the \com{mtcsetfont} macro
-% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}) and the \com{mtcsettitlefont} macro later
-% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}).
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons ces commandes avec des descriptions NFSS~\cite{fontsel} complètes. Ces définitions sont effectives
-% si \com{chapter}
-% est définie. Les fontes pour les titres sont aussi définies ici. Voir aussi la macro \com{mtcsetfont}
-% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}) et la macro \com{mtcsettitlefont} plus loin
-% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtcfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries}
-\def\mtcSfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}
-\let\mtcSSfont\mtcfont \let\mtcSSSfont\mtcfont
-\let\mtcPfont\mtcfont \let\mtcSPfont\mtcfont
-\let\mlffont\mtcfont \let\mlfSfont\mtcfont
-\let\mltfont\mtcfont \let\mltSfont\mtcfont
-\def\mtifont{\large\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And \com{coffeefont} is used for ``coffee breaks{\myCoffeecup}'' in the \pack{minutes}
-% package~\cite{minutes}.
-% \or\relax
-% Et \com{coffeefont} est utilisée pour les «~pauses café{\myCoffeecup}~» dans le
-% paquetage \pack{minutes}~\cite{minutes}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\coffeefont{\small\rmfamily\slshape\mdseries}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Internal commands to position the mini-table titles}\label{s+code+position.title.mini}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Commandes internes pour positionner les titres des mini-tables}\label{s+code+position.title.mini}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\df@mtitc}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilf}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilt}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilf}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilt}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The commands \verb|\miniXXX| and \verb|\dominiXXX| accept an optional argument to left justify, center,
-% right justify or omit the title of the chapter-level mini-tables. By default, these titles are left justified.
-% The choice made in a \verb|\dominiXXX| command is global and memorized in \com{df@mtitc}, \com{df@mtilf} or
-% \com{df@mtilt}; the choice made in a \verb|\miniXXX| command is local and stored in \com{do@mtitc},
-% \com{do@mtilf} or \com{do@mtilt}. See the \com{minitoc@} macro later
-% (section~\vref{s+code+minitoc.command}). An empty title needs a vertical correction (\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
-% \or\relax
-% Les commandes \verb|\miniXXX| et \verb|\dominiXXX| acceptent un argument optionnel pour justifier à~gauche,
-% centrer, justifier à~droite ou omettre le titre des mini-tables au niveau chapitre. Par défaut, ces titres sont
-% justifiés à~gauche. Le choix fait dans une commande \verb|\dominiXXX| est global et mémorisé dans \com{df@mtitc},
-% \com{df@mtilf} ou \com{df@mtilt}; le choix fait dans une commande \verb|\miniXXX| est local et rangé dans
-% \com{do@mtitc}, \com{do@mtilf} ou \com{do@mtilt}. Voir la macro \com{minitoc@} plus loin
-% (section~\vref{s+code+minitoc.command}). Un titre vide nécessite une correction verticale
-% (\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@mti}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Centering, flushleft, flushright or empty titles:
-% \or\relax
-% Titres centrés, justifiés à~gauche, justifiés à~droite ou vides:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\c@mti#1{\null\hfill #1\hfill\null}
-\def\l@mti#1{\null #1\hfill\null}
-\def\r@mti#1{\null\hfill #1\null}
-\def\e@mti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}
-\def\n@mti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@mtitc}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilf}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilf}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilt}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilt}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Default: titles on left:
-% \or\relax
-% Par défaut, les titres sont justifiés à~gauche:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\do@mtitc\l@mti
-\let\df@mtitc\l@mti
-\let\do@mtilf\l@mti
-\let\df@mtilf\l@mti
-\let\do@mtilt\l@mti
-\let\df@mtilt\l@mti
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{12}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \texttt{mtc@verse} environment}\label{s+code+mtc@verse.env}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{L'environnement \texttt{mtc@verse}}\label{s+code+mtc@verse.env}
-% \fi
-% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
-% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\\}
-% \begin{macro}{\list}
-% \begin{macro}{\itemsep}
-% \begin{macro}{\itemindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\listparindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\topsep}
-% \begin{macro}{\parsep}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Each minitoc is placed inside a \env{mtc@verse} environment. This environment is analog to the
-% standard \env{verse} environment and hence defined via two commands: \com{mtc@verse} and \com{endmtc@verse}.
-% As it is a list environment, we first define (in a local way) \verb|\\|, then call \com{list}\verb|{}| and set some
-% dimensions like \com{itemsep}, \com{itemindent}, \com{listparindent}, \com{topsep}.
-% \com{parsep} is set to zero if the \opt{tight} option is active (to reduce the spacing of the lines).
-% \com{parskip} is set to zero if the \opt{k-tight} option is active
-% (to reduce the spacing of the lines).
-% Both margins are set to \com{mtcindent}. \com{endmtc@verse} terminates the list and discourages a page break.
-% The \env{mtc@verse} environment has an argument which is an horizontal offset (a command like \com{mtcoffset}).
-% \or\relax
-% Chaque minitoc est placée à~l'intérieur d'un environnement \env{mtc@verse}. Cet environnement est analogue
-% à~l'environnement standard \env{verse} et donc il est défini à~l'aide de deux commandes: \com{mtc@verse} et
-% \com{endmtc@verse}. Comme c'est un environnement de liste, nous définissons d'abord (de manière locale) \verb|\\|,
-% puis nous appelons \com{list}\verb|{}| et établissons quelques dimensions telles que \com{itemsep}, \com{itemindent},
-% \com{listparindent}, \com{topsep}.
-% \com{parsep} est forcée à~zéro si l'option \opt{tight} est active
-% (pour réduire l'espacement des lignes).
-% \com{parskip} est forcée à~zéro si l'option \opt{k-tight} est active
-% (pour réduire l'espacement des lignes).
-% Les deux marges sont établies à~\com{mtcindent}.
-% L'environnement \env{mtc@verse} a un argument qui est un déplacement horizontal (une commande telle que \com{mtcoffset}).
-% \com{endmtc@verse} termine la liste et décourage une coupure de page.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtc@verse#1{\let\\=\@centercr
- \list{}{%
- \itemsep=\z@ \itemindent=\z@ \partopsep=\z@
- \listparindent=\itemindent \topsep=1ex
- \iftightmtc \parsep=\z@ \fi \ifktightmtc \parskip=\z@ \fi
- \leftmargin=\mtcindent \rightmargin=\leftmargin
- \addtolength{\leftmargin}{+#1}%
- \addtolength{\rightmargin}{-#1}%
- }%
- \item[]}
-\def\endmtc@verse{\nopagebreak[4]\endlist}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% ^^A \need{.5\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars.
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \ucom{minitoc}, \ucom{minilof}, and \ucom{minilot} commands}\icom{minitoc}\icom{minilof}\icom{minilot}
-% These three commands are very similar, with only cosmetic differences.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Les commandes \ucom{minitoc}, \ucom{minilof} et \ucom{minilot}}\icom{minitoc}\icom{minilof}\icom{minilot}
-% Ces trois commandes sont très similaires, avec seulement des différences de détail.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{The \ucom{minitoc} command}\label{s+code+minitoc.command}\icom{minitoc}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{La commande \ucom{minitoc}}\label{s+code+minitoc.command}\icom{minitoc}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{minitoc} command must be used after \com{chapter} if you need a minitoc (no automatic minitoc).
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{minitoc} doit être utilisée après \com{chapter} si vous voulez une minitoc (il n'y a pas de
-% minitoc automatique).
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This command accepts an optional argument, whose default value has eventually been set earlier by a
-% \com{dominitoc} command. The letter~``\texttt{d}'' represents this default value.
-% \com{dominitoc} has itself an
-% optional argument which sets the default value of the optional argument of \com{minitoc}. The default value of
-% the optional argument of the \com{dominitoc} command is~``\texttt{l}''. It seems tortuous, but it is simple to use:
-% we have a default behaviour~(\texttt{l}) which can be altered globally via the optional argument of
-% \com{dominitoc}, or locally via the optional argument of \com{minitoc}.
-% \or\relax
-% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par défaut éventuellement été établie plus tôt par
-% une commande \com{dominitoc}. La lettre~«~\texttt{d}~» représente cette valeur par défaut. \com{dominitoc} a elle-même
-% un argument optionnel qui établit la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel de \com{minitoc}. La valeur par
-% défaut de l'argument optionnel de la commande \com{dominitoc} est~«~\texttt{l}~». Ceci semble tortueux, mais
-% c'est simple à~utiliser: nous avons un comportement par défaut~(\texttt{l}) qui peut être altéré globalement via
-% l'argument optionnel de \com{dominitoc}, ou localement via l'argument optionnel de \com{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% So we define \com{minitoc} with an optional argument and its (current) default value, and call the true code in
-% the \com{minitoc@} macro (which has one delimited argument); we use the \com{@ifnextchar} trick to detect a
-% left bracket for the optional argument:
-% \or\relax
-% Donc nous définissons \com{minitoc} avec un argument optionnel et sa valeur par défaut (courante), puis
-% appelons le vrai code dans la macro \com{minitoc@} (qui a un argument délimité); nous utilisons l'astuce
-% \com{@ifnextchar} pour détecter le crochet gauche de l'argument optionnel:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\minitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\minitoc@}{\minitoc@[d]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The real code of \com{minitoc} is in \com{minitoc@}, which has a mandatory argument (delimited by brackets)
-% specifying the position of the title.
-% \or\relax
-% Le véritable code de \com{minitoc} est dans \com{minitoc@}, qui a un argument obligatoire (délimité par les
-% crochets) spécifiant la position du titre.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% First, we set the global flag \com{@minitoc@used@true} to note that \com{minitoc} has been called (this will be
-% used by a hint later, section~\vref{ss+final.coh}).
-% \or\relax
-% Nous établissons d'abord l'indicateur global \com{@minitoc@used@true} pour noter que la macro \com{minitoc} a été
-% appelée (ceci sera utilisé par une indication ou \emph{hint} plus tard, comme le décrit la section~\vref{ss+final.coh}).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\minitoc@[#1]{%
-\global\@minitoc@used@true
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The name of the file containing the minitoc is constructed from \com{jobname} and a
-% suffix \com{@tocfile}, which is \suffix{.mtc} (long extensions) or~\suffix{.M} (short extensions)
-% followed by the absolute number of the minitoc.
-% \or\relax
-% Le nom du fichier contenant la minitoc est construit à~partir de \com{jobname} et d'un suffixe \com{@tocfile},
-% qui est \suffix{.mtc} (suffixes longs) ou~\suffix{.M} (suffixes courts) suivi du numéro absolu
-% de la minitoc.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@longext@
- \def\@tocfile{mtc\The@mtc}%
-\else
- \def\@tocfile{M\The@mtc}%
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then\imess{I0006} we test (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) the emptiness of this file.
-% A warning is given if the file is empty and a flag is set (a hint will signal that an empty minitoc has been
-% requested).
-% \or\relax
-% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) la vacuité de ce fichier. Un avertissement est émis si le
-% fichier est % vide et un indicateur est établi (une indication ou \emph{hint} signalera qu'une minitoc vide
-% a été demandée).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
- \if@mtc@FE
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}%
- {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
- \@mtc@empty@minitoc@true
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispageminitocstyle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We call \com{thispageminitocstyle} to set the page style
-% (by default, this does nothing because, by default, there is no page break before a minitoc).
-% The marks are not treated, because usually there is no new page for a minitoc.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous appelons \com{thispageminitocstyle} pour établir le style de page (par défaut, ceci ne fait rien car, par
-% défaut, il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minitoc). Les marques ne sont pas traitées, car, habituellement,
-% il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minitoc.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \thispageminitocstyle
-%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\mtctitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\mtctitle}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{12}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforeminitoc}
-% \begin{environment}{samepage}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@mtic}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtifont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
-% \begin{environment}{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We call \com{beforeminitoc},
-% then begin a \env{samepage} environment (to try to discourage page breaks in a minitoc)
-% and look at the position of the title. If the title is empty, the
-% layout is corrected. We print the title with its font (\com{mtifont}),
-% then the top rule of the minitoc (if rules are present), using a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page
-% break between the title and the top rule).
-% The font is set to \com{mtcfont}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous appelons \com{beforeminitoc}, puis commençons un environnement \env{samepage} (pour essayer de
-% décourager les coupures de page à~l'intérieur d'une minitoc) et examinons la position du titre. Si le titre est
-% vide, la mise en page est corrigée. Nous imprimons le titre avec sa fonte (\com{mtifont}), puis le filet du haut
-% de la minitoc (si les filets sont présents), en utilisant un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher une
-% coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut). La fonte est établie à~\com{mtcfont}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \beforeminitoc
- \relax\begin{samepage}%
- \if #1e\let\do@mtitc\e@mti
- \else\if #1n\let\do@mtitc\n@mti
- \else\if #1c\let\do@mtitc\c@mti
- \else\if #1l\let\do@mtitc\l@mti
- \else\if #1r\let\do@mtitc\r@mti
- \else\if #1d\let\do@mtitc\df@mtitc
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \mtc@CkStr{\mtctitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@mtitc\e@mti\relax\fi
- \raggedright
- \parskip=\z@%
- \reset@font\mtcfont%
- \parindent=\z@%
- \nopagebreak[4]%
- \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
- \par\noindent %%
- \ifx\mtc@rule\relax
- \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
- \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtitc{\mtc@v\mtctitle}\\
- \end{tabular}%
- \else
- \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
- \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtitc{\mtc@v\mtctitle}\\\hline
- \end{tabular}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcoffset}
-% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We forbid a page break after the title and the top rule, then set some layout parameters and begin
-% an \env{mtc@verse} environment:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous interdisons une coupure de page après le titre et le filet supérieur, puis établissons quelques paramètres
-% de mise en page et commençons un environnement \env{mtc@verse}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR
- \leftmargin\mtcindent \rightmargin\mtcindent
- \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
- \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
- \begin{mtc@verse}{\mtcoffset}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@minitocdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\\}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We force the effective depth of the mini-table (\com{c@tocdepth}) to the required depth (\com{c@minitocdepth}),
-% so the printing is done inside the \env{mtc@verse} environment, where \dcnt{tocdepth}
-% has been forced to \dcnt{minitocdepth}, to print only the entries whose level is low enough,
-% then inhibit a page break. The blank line is necessary to avoid a parasite negative indentation.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous forçons la profondeur effective de la mini-table (\com{c@tocdepth}) à~la profondeur demandée
-% (\com{c@minitocdepth}), donc l'impression est faite à~l'intérieur de l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, où
-% \dcnt{tocdepth} a été forcée à~\dcnt{minitocdepth}, pour n'imprimer que
-% les entrées dont le niveau est assez bas, puis nous inhibons une coupure de page. La ligne blanche est nécessaire
-% pour éviter une indentation négative parasite.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \c@tocdepth=\c@minitocdepth
- \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pgno}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setform}
-% \begin{macro}{\openminitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeminitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We test the presence of leaders and page numbers, then print the minitoc by inputing the minitoc file.
-% But before reading the minitoc file, we must call the hook macro (asked for by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} for his
-% \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite})
-% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} and the macro
-% \com{mtc@setform} which adjusts some layout parameters (defined by the user via
-% some \com{mtcsetformat} commands).
-% We work in a group to keep local some macro redefinitions.
-% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous testons la présence de points de conduite et de numéros de pages, puis imprimons la minitoc en insérant le
-% fichier de minitoc. Mais avant de lire ce fichier de minitoc, nous devons appeler la macro d'attache (\emph{hook})
-% (demandée par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite})
-% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} et la macro \com{mtc@setform} qui ajuste certains paramètres de mise en page
-% (définis par l'utilisateur via quelques commandes \com{mtcsetformat}).
-% Nous travaillons dans un groupe pour que certaines redéfinitions de macros restent locales.
-% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup
- \makeatletter
- \@ifundefined{mtc@pgno}%
- {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
- \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
- \mtc@setform%
- \openminitoc \global\inminitoctrue
- \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}%
- \global\inminitocfalse\closeminitoc
- \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip}
- \leavevmode\mtc@strut
- \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\\}
-% \begin{environment}{samepage}
-% \begin{macro}{\afterminitoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We close the \env{mtc@verse} environment, add the bottomrule (while preventing a page break), then close the
-% \env{samepage} environment, and call \com{afterminitoc}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous fermons l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, ajoutons le filet inférieur (tout en évitant une coupure de page),
-% puis fermons l'environnement \env{samepage}, et enfin appelons \com{afterminitoc}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|)
-% est essentielle.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \end{mtc@verse}%
- \kernafterminitoc
- \nopagebreak[4]\mtc@bottom@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
- \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
- \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\afterminitoc\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And we define the bottom rule for a minitoc, with some space under the minitoc:
-% \or\relax
-% Et nous définissons le filet inférieur pour une minitoc, avec un peu d'espace en dessous de la minitoc:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtc@bottom@rule{%
- \ifx\mtc@rule\relax\relax\else
- \vskip -2.5ex
- \rule[2.4\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% ^^A \need{.5\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars.
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{The \ucom{minilof} command}\label{s+code+minilof.command}\icom{minilof}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{La commande \ucom{minilof}}\label{s+code+minilof.command}\icom{minilof}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{minilof} command is very similar to the \com{minitoc} command.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{minilof} est très similaire à~la commande \com{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{minilof} command must be used after \com{chapter} if you need a minilof (no automatic minilof).
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{minilof} doit être utilisée après \com{chapter} si vous voulez une minilof (il n'y a pas de
-% minilof automatique).
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This command accepts an optional argument, whose default value has eventually been set earlier by a
-% \com{dominilof} command. The letter~``\texttt{d}'' represents this default value.
-% \com{dominilof} has itself an
-% optional argument which sets the default value of the optional argument of \com{minilof}. The default value of
-% the optional argument of the \com{dominilof} command is~``\texttt{l}''. It seems tortuous, but it is simple to use:
-% we have a default behaviour~(\texttt{l}) which can be altered globally via the optional argument of
-% \com{dominilof}, or locally via the optional argument of \com{minilof}.
-% \or\relax
-% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par défaut éventuellement été établie plus tôt par
-% une commande \com{dominilof}. La lettre~«~\texttt{d}~» représente cette valeur par défaut. \com{dominilof} a elle-même
-% un argument optionnel qui établit la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel de \com{minilof}. La valeur par
-% défaut de l'argument optionnel de la commande \com{dominilof} est~«~\texttt{l}~». Ceci semble tortueux, mais
-% c'est simple à~utiliser: nous avons un comportement par défaut~(\texttt{l}) qui peut être altéré globalement via
-% l'argument optionnel de \com{dominilof}, ou localement via l'argument optionnel de \com{minilof}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilof@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% So we define \com{minilof} with an optional argument and its (current) default value, and call the true code in
-% the \com{minilof@} macro (which has one delimited argument); we use the \com{@ifnextchar} trick to detect a
-% left bracket for the optional argument:
-% \or\relax
-% Donc nous définissons \com{minilof} avec un argument optionnel et sa valeur par défaut (courante), puis
-% appelons le vrai code dans la macro \com{minilof@} (qui a un argument délimité); nous utilisons l'astuce
-% \com{@ifnextchar} pour détecter le crochet gauche de l'argument optionnel:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\minilof{\@ifnextchar[{\minilof@}{\minilof@[d]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The real code of \com{minilof} is in \com{minilof@}, which has a mandatory argument (delimited by brackets)
-% specifying the position of the title.
-% \or\relax
-% Le véritable code de \com{minilof} est dans \com{minilof@}, qui a un argument obligatoire (délimité par les
-% crochets) spécifiant la position du titre.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% First, we set the global flag \com{@minilof@used@true} to note that \com{minilof} has been called (this will be
-% used by a hint later, section~\vref{ss+final.coh}).
-% \or\relax
-% Nous établissons d'abord l'indicateur global \com{@minilof@used@true} pour noter que la macro \com{minilof} a été
-% appelée (ceci sera utilisé par une indication ou \emph{hint} plus tard, comme le décrit la section~\vref{ss+final.coh}).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\minilof@[#1]{%
-\global\@minilof@used@true
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The name of the file containing the minilof is constructed from \com{jobname} and a
-% suffix \com{@tocfile}, which is \suffix{.mlf} (long extensions) or~\suffix{.F} (short extensions)
-% followed by the absolute number of the minilof.
-% \or\relax
-% Le nom du fichier contenant la minilof est construit à~partir de \com{jobname} et d'un suffixe \com{@tocfile},
-% qui est \suffix{.mlf} (suffixes longs) ou~\suffix{.F} (suffixes courts) suivi du numéro absolu
-% de la minilof.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@longext@%
- \def\@tocfile{mlf\The@mtc}%
-\else
- \def\@tocfile{F\The@mtc}%
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilof@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then\imess{I0006} we test (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) the emptiness of this file.
-% A warning is given if the file is empty and a flag is set (a hint will signal that an empty minilof has been
-% requested).
-% \or\relax
-% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) la vacuité de ce fichier. Un avertissement est émis
-% si le fichier est vide et un indicateur est établi (une indication ou \emph{hint} signalera qu'une minilof
-% vide a été demandée).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
- \if@mtc@FE
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}%
- {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
- \@mtc@empty@minilof@true
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilofstyle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We call \com{thispageminilofstyle} to set the page style
-% (by default, this does nothing because, by default, there is no page break before a minilof).
-% The marks are not treated, because usually there is no new page for a minilof.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous appelons \com{thispageminilofstyle} pour établir le style de page (par défaut, ceci ne fait rien car, par
-% défaut, il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilof). Les marques ne sont pas traitées, car, habituellement,
-% il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilof.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \thispageminilofstyle
-%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\mlftitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\mlftitle}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{12}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilof}
-% \begin{environment}{samepage}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@mtic}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlffont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtifont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlf@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
-% \begin{environment}{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We call \com{beforeminilof},
-% then begin a \env{samepage} environment (to try to discourage page breaks in a minilof)
-% and look at the position of the title. If the title is empty, the
-% layout is corrected. We print the title with its font (\com{mtifont}),
-% then the top rule of the minilof (if rules are present), using a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit
-% a page break between the title and the top rule).
-% The font is set to \com{mlffont}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous appelons \com{beforeminilof}, puis commençons un environnement \env{samepage} (pour essayer de
-% décourager les coupures de page à~l'intérieur d'une minilof) et examinons la position du titre. Si le titre est
-% vide, la mise en page est corrigée. Nous imprimons le titre avec sa fonte (\com{mtifont}), puis le filet du haut
-% de la minilof (si les filets sont présents), en utilisant un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher
-% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut). La fonte est établie à~\com{mlffont}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \beforeminilof
- \relax\begin{samepage}%
- \if #1e\let\do@mtilf\e@mti
- \else\if #1n\let\do@mtilf\n@mti
- \else\if #1c\let\do@mtilf\c@mti
- \else\if #1l\let\do@mtilf\l@mti
- \else\if #1r\let\do@mtilf\r@mti
- \else\if #1d\let\do@mtilf\df@mtilf
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \mtc@CkStr{\mlftitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@mtilf\e@mti\relax\fi
- \raggedright
- \parskip=\z@
- \reset@font\mlffont
- \parindent=\z@
- \nopagebreak[4]%
- \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
- \par\noindent
- \ifx\mlf@rule\relax
- \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
- \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilf{\mtc@v\mlftitle}\\
- \end{tabular}%
- \else
- \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
- \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilf{\mtc@v\mlftitle}\\\hline
- \end{tabular}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlfoffset}
-% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We forbid a page break after the title and the top rule, then set some layout parameters and begin
-% an \env{mtc@verse} environment:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous interdisons une coupure de page après le titre et le filet supérieur, puis établissons quelques paramètres
-% de mise en page et commençons un environnement \env{mtc@verse}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR
- \leftmargin\mtcindent \rightmargin\mtcindent
- \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
- \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
- \begin{mtc@verse}{\mlfoffset}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@minilofdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\\}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We force the effective depth of the mini-table (\com{c@tocdepth}) to the required depth (\com{c@minilofdepth}),
-% so the printing is done inside the \env{mtc@verse} environment, where \dcnt{tocdepth}
-% has been forced to \dcnt{minilofdepth}, to print only the entries whose level is low enough,
-% then inhibit a page break. The blank line is necessary to avoid a parasite negative indentation.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous forçons la profondeur effective de la mini-table (\com{c@tocdepth}) à~la profondeur demandée
-% (\com{c@minitocdepth}), donc l'impression est faite à~l'intérieur de l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, où
-% \dcnt{tocdepth} a été forcée à~\dcnt{minilofdepth}, pour n'imprimer que
-% les entrées dont le niveau est assez bas, puis nous inhibons une coupure de page. La ligne blanche est nécessaire
-% pour éviter une indentation négative parasite.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \lneed{4}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}%
- {\c@lofdepth=\c@minilofdepth
- \ifnum\c@lofdepth<1\relax\c@lofdepth=1\fi}
- \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pgno}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlf@setform}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\openminilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeminilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We test the presence of leaders and page numbers, then print the minilof by inputing the minilof file.
-% But before reading the minilof file, we must call the hook macro (asked for by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} for his
-% \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite})
-% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} and the macro
-% \com{mlf@setform} which adjusts some layout parameters (defined by the user via some
-% \com{mtcsetformat} commands).
-% We work in a group to keep local some macro redefinitions.
-% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous testons la présence de points de conduite et de numéros de pages, puis imprimons la minilof en insérant le
-% fichier de minilof. Mais avant de lire ce fichier de minilof, nous devons appeler la macro d'attache (\emph{hook})
-% (demandée par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite})
-% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} et la macro \com{mlf@setform} qui ajuste certains paramètres de mise en page
-% (définis par l'utilisateur via quelques commandes \com{mtcsetformat}).
-% Nous travaillons dans un groupe pour que certaines redéfinitions de macros restent locales.
-% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup
- \makeatletter
- \@ifundefined{mlf@pgno}%
- {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
- \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
- \mlf@setform
- \global\openminilof\inminiloftrue
- \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}%
- \global\inminiloffalse\closeminilof
- \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip}
- \leavevmode\mtc@strut
- \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\\}
-% \begin{environment}{samepage}
-% \begin{macro}{\afterminilof}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We close the \env{mtc@verse} environment, add the bottomrule (while preventing a page break), then close the
-% \env{samepage} environment, and call \com{afterminilof}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous fermons l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, ajoutons le filet inférieur (tout en évitant une coupure de page),
-% puis fermons l'environnement \env{samepage}, et enfin appelons \com{afterminilof}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|)
-% est essentielle.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \end{mtc@verse}%
- \kernafterminilof
- \nopagebreak[4]\mlf@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
- \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
- \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\afterminilof\fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% ^^A \need{.5\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars.
-% \lneed{10}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{The \ucom{minilot} command}\label{s+code+minilot.command}\icom{minilot}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{La commande \ucom{minilot}}\label{s+code+minilot.command}\icom{minilot}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{minilot} command is absolutely similar to the \com{minilof} command:
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{minilot} est absolument similaire à~la commande \com{minilof}:
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{minilot} command must be used after \com{chapter} if you need a minilot (no automatic minilot).
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{minilot} doit être utilisée après \com{chapter} si vous voulez une minilot (il n'y a pas de
-% minilot automatique).
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This command accepts an optional argument, whose default value has eventually been set earlier by a
-% \com{dominilot} command. The letter~``\texttt{d}'' represents this default value.
-% \com{dominilot} has itself an
-% optional argument which sets the default value of the optional argument of \com{minilot}. The default value of
-% the optional argument of the \com{dominilot} command is~``\texttt{l}''. It seems tortuous, but it is simple to use:
-% we have a default behaviour~(\texttt{l}) which can be altered globally via the optional argument of
-% \com{dominilot}, or locally via the optional argument of \com{minilot}.
-% \or\relax
-% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par défaut éventuellement été établie plus tôt par
-% une commande \com{dominilot}. La lettre~«~\texttt{d}~» représente cette valeur par défaut. \com{dominilot} a elle-même
-% un argument optionnel qui établit la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel de \com{minilot}. La valeur par
-% défaut de l'argument optionnel de la commande \com{dominilot} est~«~\texttt{l}~». Ceci semble tortueux, mais
-% c'est simple à~utiliser: nous avons un comportement par défaut~(\texttt{l}) qui peut être altéré globalement via
-% l'argument optionnel de \com{dominilot}, ou localement via l'argument optionnel de \com{minilot}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilot@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% So we define \com{minilot} with an optional argument and its (current) default value, and call the true code in
-% the \com{minilot@} macro (which has one delimited argument); we use the \com{@ifnextchar} trick to detect a
-% left bracket for the optional argument:
-% \or\relax
-% Donc nous définissons \com{minilot} avec un argument optionnel et sa valeur par défaut (courante), puis
-% appelons le vrai code dans la macro \com{minilot@} (qui a un argument délimité); nous utilisons l'astuce
-% \com{@ifnextchar} pour détecter le crochet gauche de l'argument optionnel:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\minilot{\@ifnextchar[{\minilot@}{\minilot@[d]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The real code of \com{minilot} is in \com{minilot@}, which has a mandatory argument (delimited by brackets)
-% specifying the position of the title.
-% \or\relax
-% Le véritable code de \com{minilot} est dans \com{minilot@}, qui a un argument obligatoire (délimité par les
-% crochets) spécifiant la position du titre.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% First, we set the global flag \com{@minilot@used@true} to note that \com{minilot} has been called (this will be
-% used by a hint later, section~\vref{ss+final.coh}).
-% \or\relax
-% Nous établissons d'abord l'indicateur global \com{@minilot@used@true} pour noter que la macro \com{minilot} a été
-% appelée (ceci sera utilisé par une indication ou \emph{hint} plus tard, comme le décrit la section~\vref{ss+final.coh}).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\minilot@[#1]{%
-\global\@minilot@used@true
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The name of the file containing the minilot is constructed from \com{jobname} and a
-% suffix \com{@tocfile}, which is \suffix{.mlt} (long extensions) or~\suffix{.T} (short extensions)
-% followed by the absolute number of the minilot.
-% \or\relax
-% Le nom du fichier contenant la minilot est construit à~partir de \com{jobname} et d'un suffixe \com{@tocfile},
-% qui est \suffix{.mlt} (suffixes longs) ou~\suffix{.T} (suffixes courts) suivi du numéro absolu
-% de la minilot.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@longext@%
- \def\@tocfile{mlt\The@mtc}%
-\else
- \def\@tocfile{T\The@mtc}%
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilot@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then\imess{I0006} we test (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) the emptiness of this file.
-% A warning is given if the file is empty and a flag is set (a hint will signal that an empty minilot has been
-% requested).
-% \or\relax
-% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) la vacuité de ce fichier. Un avertissement est émis si le fichier
-% est vide et un indicateur est établi (une indication ou \emph{hint} signalera qu'une minilot vide a été demandée).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
- \if@mtc@FE
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}%
- {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
- \@mtc@empty@minilot@true
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilotstyle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We call \com{thispageminilotstyle} to set the page style
-% (by default, this does nothing because, by default, there is no page break before a minilot).
-% The marks are not treated, because usually there is no new page for a minilot.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous appelons \com{thispageminilotstyle} pour établir le style de page (par défaut, ceci ne fait rien car, par
-% défaut, il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilot). Les marques ne sont pas traitées, car, habituellement,
-% il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilot.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \thispageminilotstyle
-%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\mlttitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\mlttitle}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{12}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilot}
-% \begin{environment}{samepage}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@mtic}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtifont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlt@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
-% \begin{environment}{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We call \com{beforeminilot},
-% then begin a \env{samepage} environment (to try to discourage page breaks in a minilot)
-% and look at the position of the title. If the title is empty, the
-% layout is corrected. We print the title with its font (\com{mtifont}),
-% then the top rule of the minilot (if rules are present), using a \env{tabular} environment
-% (to inhibit a page break between the title and the top rule).
-% The font is set to \com{mltfont}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous appelons \com{beforeminilot}, puis commençons un environnement \env{samepage} (pour essayer de
-% décourager les coupures de page à~l'intérieur d'une minilot) et examinons la position du titre. Si le titre est
-% vide, la mise en page est corrigée. Nous imprimons le titre avec sa fonte (\com{mtifont}), puis le filet du haut
-% de la minilot (si les filets sont présents), en utilisant un environnement \env{tabular}
-% (pour empêcher une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut). La fonte est établie à~\com{mltfont}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \beforeminilot
- \relax\begin{samepage}%
- \if #1e\let\do@mtilt\e@mti
- \else\if #1n\let\do@mtilt\n@mti
- \else\if #1c\let\do@mtilt\c@mti
- \else\if #1l\let\do@mtilt\l@mti
- \else\if #1r\let\do@mtilt\r@mti
- \else\if #1d\let\do@mtilt\df@mtilt
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \mtc@CkStr{\mlttitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@mtilt\e@mti\relax\fi
- \raggedright
- \parskip=\z@%
- \reset@font\mltfont%
- \parindent=\z@%
- \nopagebreak[4]%
- \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
- \par\noindent
- \ifx\mlt@rule\relax
- \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
- \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilt{\mtc@v\mlttitle}\\
- \end{tabular}%
- \else
- \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
- \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilt{\mtc@v\mlttitle}\\\hline
- \end{tabular}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltoffset}
-% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We forbid a page break after the title and the top rule, then set some layout parameters and begin
-% an \env{mtc@verse} environment:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous interdisons une coupure de page après le titre et le filet supérieur, puis établissons quelques paramètres
-% de mise en page et commençons un environnement \env{mtc@verse}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR
- \leftmargin\mtcindent \rightmargin\mtcindent
- \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
- \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
- \begin{mtc@verse}{\mltoffset}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@minilotdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\\}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We force the effective depth of the mini-table (\com{c@lotdepth}) to the required depth (\com{c@minilotdepth}),
-% so the printing is done inside the \env{mtc@verse} environment, where \dcnt{lotdepth}
-% has been forced to \dcnt{minilotdepth}, to print only the entries whose level is low enough,
-% then inhibit a page break. The blank line is necessary to avoid a parasite negative indentation.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous forçons la profondeur effective de la mini-table (\com{c@lotdepth}) à~la profondeur demandée
-% (\com{c@minilotdepth}), donc l'impression est faite à~l'intérieur de l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, où
-% \dcnt{lotdepth} a été forcée à~\dcnt{minilotdepth}, pour n'imprimer que
-% les entrées dont le niveau est assez bas, puis nous inhibons une coupure de page. La ligne blanche est nécessaire
-% pour éviter une indentation négative parasite.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}%
- {\c@lotdepth=\c@minilotdepth
- \ifnum\c@lotdepth<1\relax\c@lotdepth=1\fi}
- \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pgno}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlt@setform}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\openminilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeminilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We test the presence of leaders and page numbers, then print the minilot by inputing the minilot file.
-% But before reading the minilot file, we must call the hook macro (asked for by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} for his
-% \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite})
-% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} and the macro
-% \com{mlt@setform} which adjusts some layout parameters (defined by the user via some
-% \com{mtcsetformat} commands).
-% We work in a group to keep local some macro redefinitions.
-% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous testons la présence de points de conduite et de numéros de pages, puis imprimons la minilot en insérant le
-% fichier de minilot. Mais avant de lire ce fichier de minilot, nous devons appeler la macro d'attache (\emph{hook})
-% (demandée par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite})
-% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} et la macro \com{mlt@setform} qui ajuste certains paramètres de mise en page
-% (définis par l'utilisateur via quelques commandes \com{mtcsetformat}).
-% Nous travaillons dans un groupe pour que certaines redéfinitions de macros restent locales.
-% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup
- \makeatletter
- \@ifundefined{mlt@pgno}%
- {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
- \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
- \mlt@setform
- \global\openminilot\inminilottrue
- \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}%
- \global\inminilotfalse\closeminilot
- \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip}
- \leavevmode\mtc@strut
- \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\\}
-% \begin{environment}{samepage}
-% \begin{macro}{\afterminilot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We close the \env{mtc@verse} environment, add the bottomrule (while preventing a page break), then close the
-% \env{samepage} environment, and call \com{afterminilot}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous fermons l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, ajoutons le filet inférieur (tout en évitant une coupure de page),
-% puis fermons l'environnement \env{samepage}, et enfin appelons \com{afterminilot}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|)
-% est essentielle.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \end{mtc@verse}%
- \kernafterminilot
- \nopagebreak[4]\mlt@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
- \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
- \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\afterminilot\fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% ^^A \need{.75\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars.
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Patching the \ucom{chapter} command, \texorpdfstring{\mbox{continued}}{continued}}\label{s+code+patching.chapter.2}\icom{chapter}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{chapter}, \texorpdfstring{\mbox{suite}}{suite}}\label{s+code+patching.chapter.2}\icom{chapter}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\l@xchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}%
-% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter}%
-% \begin{macro}{\xchapter}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% First, we define \com{l@xchapter} which is like \com{l@chapter}, but with a huge depth, to inhibit its
-% printing (except if you cheat):
-% \or\relax
-% Tout d'abord, nous définissons \com{l@xchapter} qui est semblable à~\com{l@chapter}, mais avec une profondeur
-% très grande, pour inhiber son impression (sauf si vous trichez):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\l@xchapter{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1em}{2.3em}}
-\def\xchapter{xchapter}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}%
-% \begin{macro}{\sv@chapter}%
-% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\ignorespaces}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then we patch \com{@chapter} (the non-starred branch of \com{chapter})
-% to add pseudo-chapter entries in the LOF and the LOT (these entries will be used by
-% the \verb|\dominiXXX| commands to split the LOF and the LOT into slices).
-% \or\relax
-% Puis nous modifions \com{@chapter} (la branche non étoilée de \com{chapter}) pour ajouter des entrées de
-% pseudo-chapitres dans la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux (ces entrées seront utilisées par les
-% commandes \verb|\dominiXXX| pour découper en tranches la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\sv@chapter\@chapter
-\def\@chapter[#1]#2{\sv@chapter[{#1}]{#2}\relax%
- \addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{#1}%
- \addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{#1}%
- \ignorespaces}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@schapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\@schapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapterend}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We also patch \com{@schapter} (the starred branch of \com{chapter})
-% to add marks in the TOC to delimit
-% chapters; these marks will be used by the \verb|\dominiXXX| commands to take slices from the LOF and the LOT; as
-% they are defined as \com{relax}, they should not perturbate other packages.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous modifions aussi \com{@schapter} (la branche étoilée de \com{chapter}) pour ajouter des marques dans la
-% table des matières afin de délimiter les chapitres; ces marques seront utilisées par les commandes \verb|\dominiXXX|
-% pour prélever des tranches dans la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux; comme elles sont définies comme
-% étant \com{relax}, elles ne devraient pas perturber d'autres paquetages.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\mtc@schapter\@schapter
-\def\@schapter{\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\chapterend}\mtc@schapter}
-\def\@schapter{\addtocontents{@@@}{\protect\chapterbegin}\mtc@schapter}
-\let\chapterbegin\relax
-\let\chapterend\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \ucom{addstarred.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+addstarred}\icom{addstarredpart}\icom{addstarredchapter}\icom{addstarredsection}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Les commandes \ucom{addstarred.{}.{}.}}\label{s+code+addstarred}\icom{addstarredpart}\icom{addstarredchapter}\icom{addstarredsection}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\addstarredpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\part}
-% \begin{macro}{\addst@rred}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If the command \com{chapter} is undefined, we define the command \com{addstarredsection}
-% (only if \com{section} is defined). If the command \com{chapter} is defined, we define the command
-% \com{addstarredchapter}. If the command \com{part} is defined, we define the command \com{addstarredpart}.
-% We use the utility command \com{addst@rred} defined in section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}.
-% \or\relax
-% Si la commande \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, alors nous devons définir la commande \com{addstarredsection} (mais
-% seulement si \com{section} est définie). Si la commande \com{chapter} est définie, nous définissons la
-% commande \com{addstarredchapter}. Si la commande \com{part} est définie, nous définissons la commande
-% \com{addstarredpart}. Nous utilisons la commande utilitaire \com{addst@rred} définie dans la
-% section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{chapter}%
- {\@ifundefined{section}%
- {}{\def\addstarredsection#1{\addst@rred{section}{#1}}}}%
- {\def\addstarredchapter#1{\addst@rred{chapter}{#1}}}
-\@ifundefined{part}%
- {}{\def\addstarredpart#1{\addst@rred{part}{#1}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{TOC entries without leaders}\label{s+code+TOC.entries.no.leaders}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Entrées de TdM sans points de conduite}\label{s+code+TOC.entries.no.leaders}
-% \fi
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define two internal macros to format TOC entries without leaders. The macro
-% \com{@Undottedtocline} prints no page number, but \com{@Undottedtoclinep} prints~it.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons deux macros internes pour mettre en forme des entrées de table des matières sans points de
-% conduite. La macro \com{@Undottedtocline} n'imprime pas de numéro de page, mais \com{@Undottedtoclinep}
-% l'imprime.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@Undottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{%
- \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth\relax \else
- \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@
- {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip
- \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue
- \interlinepenalty\@M
- \leavevmode
- \@tempdima #3\relax
- \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
- {\coffeefont #4}\nobreak \nobreak\null
- \par}%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtoclinep}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The same but with the page number:
-% \or\relax
-% La même chose, mais avec le numéro de page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@Undottedtoclinep#1#2#3#4#5{%
- \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth\relax \else
- \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@
- {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip
- \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue
- \interlinepenalty\@M
- \leavevmode
- \@tempdima #3\relax
- \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
- {#4}\nobreak \hfill \nobreak\null
- \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil\normalfont \normalcolor #5}%
- \par}%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Mini-tables with or without leaders}\label{s+code+mini-tables.w/wo.leaders}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Mini-tables avec ou sans points de conduite}\label{s+code+mini-tables.w/wo.leaders}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc@}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilof@}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilot@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtoclinep}
-% \begin{macro}{\sv@minitoc@}
-% \begin{macro}{\sv@minilof@}
-% \begin{macro}{\sv@minilot@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This code sets the flag to false, then patches each mini-table command (its internal part).
-% We alter the commands \com{minitoc@}, \com{minilof@}, etc., to test the flag \com{ifundottedmtc} and,
-% if true, replace locally \com{@dottedtocline} by its dotless version \com{@Undottedtoclinep}. Of course,
-% we must also test the availability of the \com{chapter}, \com{part} and \com{section} commands, to avoid to
-% define many unnecessary commands.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce code force l'indicateur à~faux, puis modifie chaque commande de mini-table (en fait, sa partie interne). Nous modifions
-% les commandes \com{minitoc@}, \com{minilof@}, etc., pour tester l'indicateur \com{ifundottedmtc} et, s'il
-% est vrai, remplacer localement \com{@dottedtocline} par sa version sans points de conduite \com{@Undottedtoclinep}.
-% Bien sûr, nous devons aussi tester la disponibilité des commandes \com{chapter}, \com{part} et \com{section},
-% pour éviter de définir de nombreuses commandes non nécessaires.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{4}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{%
- \let\sv@minitoc@\minitoc@
- \def\minitoc@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
- \sv@minitoc@[#1]}}%
- \let\sv@minilof@\minilof@
- \def\minilof@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
- \sv@minilof@[#1]}}%
- \let\sv@minilot@\minilot@
- \def\minilot@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
- \sv@minilot@[#1]}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\sv@parttoc@}
-% \begin{macro}{\sv@partlof@}
-% \begin{macro}{\sv@partlot@}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc@}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlof@}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlot@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For the part level:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour le niveau partie:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{part}{}{%
- \let\sv@parttoc@\parttoc@
- \def\parttoc@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
- \sv@parttoc@[#1]}}%
- \let\sv@partlof@\partlof@
- \def\partlof@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
- \sv@partlof@[#1]}}%
- \let\sv@partlot@\partlot@
- \def\partlot@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
- \sv@partlot@[#1]}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\sv@secttoc@}
-% \begin{macro}{\sv@sectlof@}
-% \begin{macro}{\sv@sectlot@}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\secttoc@}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlof@}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlot@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For the section level:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour le niveau section:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
- \@ifundefined{section}{}{%
- \let\sv@secttoc@\secttoc@
- \def\secttoc@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
- \sv@secttoc@[#1]}}%
- \let\sv@sectlof@\sectlof@
- \def\sectlof@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
- \sv@sectlof@[#1]}}%
- \let\sv@sectlot@\sectlot@
- \def\sectlot@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
- \sv@sectlot@[#1]}}}}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \ucom{dominitoc} command and its siblings}\label{s+code+dominitoc}\icom{dominitoc}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{La commande \ucom{dominitoc} et ses analogues}\label{s+code+dominitoc}\icom{dominitoc}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapbegin}
-% \begin{macro}{\starchapter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The three commands \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof} and \com{dominilot} are, of course, very similar.
-% They take the \com{jobname}\suffix{.toc} file (resp. the \com{jobname}\suffix{.lof} and \com{jobname}\suffix{.lot} files)
-% produced by the previous \LaTeX\ run and
-% cut it in slices (one slice per chapter or starred chapter) into the \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} files
-% (resp. the \com{jobname}\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} and \com{jobname}\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} files), using specific
-% lines in the \com{jobname}\suffix{.toc} (resp. \com{jobname}\suffix{.lof} and \com{jobname}\suffix{.lot}) file. These lines are
-% essentially chapter-level entry commands (like \com{contentsline}\verb|{chapter}...|, \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}...|,
-% \com{contentsline}\verb|{starchapter}...|, \com{chapbegin}) delimiting chapters in the TOC (or in the LOF or the
-% LOT). Analog part-level lines delimit parts, hence also chapters.
-% \or\relax
-% Les trois commandes \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof} et \com{dominilot} sont, bien sûr, très similaires.
-% Elles prennent le fichier \com{jobname}\suffix{.toc} (respectivement les fichiers \com{jobname}\suffix{.lof} et \com{jobname}\suffix{.lot})
-% produit par l'exécution précédente de \LaTeX\ et l'éclatent en tranches (une tranche par chapitre ou chapitre
-% étoilé) vers les fichiers \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} (respectivement, les fichiers \com{jobname}\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} et
-% \com{jobname}\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} files), en utilisant des lignes spécifiques dans le fichier \com{jobname}\suffix{.toc}
-% (respectivement, \com{jobname}\suffix{.lof} et \com{jobname}\suffix{.lot}). Ces lignes sont essentiellement des commandes pour
-% des entrées au niveau chapitre (telles que \com{contentsline}\verb|{chapter}...|, \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}...|,
-% \com{contentsline}\verb|{starchapter}...|, \com{chapbegin}) délimitant les chapitres dans la table des matières (ou
-% dans la liste des figures ou dans la liste des tableaux). Des lignes analogues au niveau partie délimitent les
-% parties, donc aussi les chapitres.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@@dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% As \com{dominitoc} has an optional argument, whose default value is~``\texttt{l}'' (left), it calls \com{dominitoc@}
-% with a argument delimited by brackets.
-%
-% The macros are \com{dominitoc} (user interface), which calls \com{dominitoc@}\verb|[l]| (or with the optional argument
-% of \com{dominitoc}).
-% Then \com{dominitoc@}\verb|[l]| processes its argument and calls \com{@@dominitoc}.
-% \com{@@dominitoc} calls \com{@dominitoc} (passing \com{jobname} as argument) then close the minitoc file
-% written. \com{@dominitoc} reset to zero the counter of mini-tables, calls \verb|\MTC@next#1.toc| (where
-% \verb|#1| is the value of \com{jobname}), then reset again to zero the counter of mini-tables. Each call to
-% \com{dominitoc@} (i.e.,~to \com{dominitoc}) sets the flag \com{@dominitoc@used@true}. This will be used later
-% for a hint (which detects that you have correctly called \com{minitoc} \emph{after} \com{dominitoc} and that both
-% or neither have been called). See section~\vref{ss+final.coh}.
-% The code is similar for \com{dominilof} and \com{dominilot}.
-% \or\relax
-% Puisque \com{dominitoc} a un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par défaut est~«~\texttt{l}~» (gauche), elle
-% appelle \com{dominitoc@} avec un argument délimité par des crochets.
-%
-% Les macros sont \com{dominitoc} (interface utilisateur), qui appelle \com{dominitoc@}\verb|[l]| (ou avec l'argument
-% optionnel de \com{dominitoc}). Puis \com{dominitoc@}\verb|[l]| traite son argument et appelle \com{@@dominitoc}.
-% \com{@@dominitoc} appelle \com{@dominitoc} (en passant \com{jobname} comme argument) puis ferme le fichier
-% minitoc écrit. \com{@dominitoc} remet à~zéro le compteur de mini-tables, appelle \verb|\MTC@next#1.toc| (où
-% \verb|#1| est la valeur de \com{jobname}), puis remet encore à~zéro le compteur de mini-tables. Chaque appel
-% à~\com{dominitoc@} (c'est-à-dire, à~\com{dominitoc}) établit l'indicateur \com{@dominitoc@used@true}. Ceci
-% sera utilisé plus tard pour une indication (\emph{hint}) (qui détecte si vous avez appelé correctement \com{minitoc}
-% \emph{après} \com{dominitoc} et que les deux ont été appelées). Voir la section~\vref{ss+final.coh}.
-% Le code est similaire pour \com{dominilof} et \com{dominilot}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{dominitoc} command extracts information from the \suffix{.toc} file and create the minitocs files, with the
-% adequate extension.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{dominitoc} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.toc} et crée les fichiers minitocs,
-% avec le suffixe adéquat.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dominitoc#1{{%
- \makeatletter
- \setcounter{mtc}{0}
- \MTC@next#1.toc\relax\\}\setcounter{mtc}{0}}
-\def\dominitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\dominitoc@}{\dominitoc@[l]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dominilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{dominilof} command extracts information from the \suffix{.lof} file and create the minilofs files, with the
-% adequate extension.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{dominilof} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lof} et crée les fichiers minilofs,
-% avec le suffixe adéquat.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dominilof#1{{%
- \makeatletter
- \setcounter{mtc}{0}
- \MLF@next#1.lof\relax\\}\setcounter{mtc}{0}}
-\def\dominilof{\@ifnextchar[{\dominilof@}{\dominilof@[l]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dominilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{dominilot} command extracts information from the \suffix{.lot} file and create the minilots files, with the
-% adequate extension.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{dominilot} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lot} et crée les fichiers minilots,
-% avec le suffixe adéquat.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dominilot#1{{%
- \makeatletter
- \setcounter{mtc}{0}
- \MLT@next#1.lot\relax\\}\setcounter{mtc}{0}}
-\def\dominilot{\@ifnextchar[{\dominilot@}{\dominilot@[l]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@mtitc}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\@@dominitoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some\imess{I0045} code to flag the use of the command and manage the position of the minitoc title;
-% a hint detects any spurious invocation.
-% \or\relax
-% Un\imess{I0045} peu de code pour noter que la commande a été utilisée et gérer la position du titre de la minitoc;
-% un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dominitoc@[#1]{%
-\if@mtc@hints@
- \if@dominitoc@used@
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The \string\dominitoc \space command
- \MessageBreak
- has been invoked more than once
- \MessageBreak}
- \global\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-\global\@dominitoc@used@true
-\if #1e\let\df@mtitc\e@mti%
-\else\if #1n\let\df@mtitc\n@mti%
-\else\if #1c\let\df@mtitc\c@mti%
-\else\if #1l\let\df@mtitc\l@mti%
-\else\if #1r\let\df@mtitc\r@mti%
-\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
-\@@dominitoc}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilf}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilof}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some\imess{I0045} code to flag the use of the command and manage the position of the minilof title;
-% a hint detects any spurious invocation.
-% \or\relax
-% Un\imess{I0045} peu de code pour noter que la commande a été utilisée et gérer la position du titre de la minilof;
-% un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dominilof@[#1]{%
-\if@mtc@hints@
- \if@dominilof@used@
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The \string\dominilof \space command
- \MessageBreak
- has been invoked more than once
- \MessageBreak}
- \global\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-\global\@dominilof@used@true
-\if #1e\let\df@mtilf\e@mti%
-\else\if #1n\let\df@mtilf\n@mti%
-\else\if #1c\let\df@mtilf\c@mti%
-\else\if #1l\let\df@mtilf\l@mti%
-\else\if #1r\let\df@mtilf\r@mti%
-\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
-\@@dominilof}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilt}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@mti}
-% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some\imess{I0045} code to flag the use of the command and manage the position of the minilot title;
-% a hint detects any spurious invocation.
-% \or\relax
-% Un\imess{I0045} peu de code pour noter que la commande a été utilisée et gérer la position du titre de la minilot;
-% un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dominilot@[#1]{%
-\if@mtc@hints@
- \if@dominilot@used@
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The \string\dominilot \space command
- \MessageBreak
- has been invoked more than once
- \MessageBreak}
- \global\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-\global\@dominilot@used@true
-\if #1e\let\df@mtilt\e@mti%
-\else\if #1n\let\df@mtilt\n@mti%
-\else\if #1c\let\df@mtilt\c@mti%
-\else\if #1l\let\df@mtilt\l@mti%
-\else\if #1r\let\df@mtilt\r@mti%
-\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
-\@@dominilot}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\@@dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% These macros invoke the \verb|\@domini...| macros to create the mini-table file, then close the file
-% descriptor.
-% \or\relax
-% Ces macros invoquent les macros \verb|\@domini...| pour créer le fichier de mini-table, puis ferment le
-% descripteur de fichier.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@@dominitoc{\@dominitoc{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
-\def\@@dominilof{\@dominilof{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
-\def\@@dominilot{\@dominilot{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Analysis and splitting of the TOC file}\label{s+code+an.split.TOC}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Analyse et éclatement du fichier TdM}\label{s+code+an.split.TOC}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This is done via a loop managed by the following macros\,\footnote{This code is derived from the
-% \pack{xr} package~\cite{xr}, by \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle}, with his permission.
-% Some modifications were made by \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek},
-% \xname{Didier}{Verna}, and \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne} for the support of \pack{hyperref}, essentially by adding an
-% argument to some macros, to use the hyperlink argument in the contents lines.}:
-% \or\relax
-% Ceci est fait grâce à~une boucle gérée par les macros suivantes\,\footnote{Ce code est dérivé du paquetage
-% \pack{xr}~\cite{xr}, de \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle}, avec sa permission.
-% Des modifications ont été faites par
-% \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \xname{Didier}{Verna} et \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne} pour le support de \pack{hyperref},
-% essentiellement en ajoutant un argument à~certaines macros, pour utiliser l'argument hyperlien dans les lignes de
-% contenu.}:
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@loop}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Processes the next entry in the list and removes it from the head of the list:
-% \or\relax
-% Traite l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retire de la tête de la liste:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\MTC@next#1\relax#2\\{%
- \edef\MTC@list{#2}%
- \MTC@loop{#1}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@toc}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@explist}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Check if the list is empty:
-% \or\relax
-% Teste si la liste est vide:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\MTC@toc{%
- \ifx\MTC@list\@empty\else\expandafter\MTC@explist\fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\themtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The macro \com{MTC@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the TOC file and detects interesting keywords.
-% If \com{chapter} is found, the \cnt{mtc} counter (which simulates the chapter counter, but is absolute)
-% is incremented and a new minitoc file is created.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{MTC@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues depuis le fichier table des matières et détecte les
-% mots-clés intéressants. Si \com{chapter} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{mtc} (qui simule le compteur de
-% chapitre, mais est absolu) est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier minitoc est créé.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\MTC@contentsline#1#2#3#4{%
- \gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter
- \stepcounter{mtc}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\themtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcname}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
-% \begin{macro}{\openout}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it (after
-% closing the file descriptor):
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0033} regardons si des suffixes longs ou courts ont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table,
-% puis l'ouvrir (après avoir fermé le descripteur de fichier):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \if@mtc@longext@%
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.mtc\themtc\@gobble}%
- \def\mtcname{\jobname.mtc\themtc}%
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.M\themtc\@gobble}%
- \def\mtcname{\jobname.M\themtc}%
- \fi
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mtcname
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\themtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcname}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
-% \begin{macro}{\openout}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0033} need a similar code to detect TOC entries for appendices in the \class{memoir} class\,\footnote{\name{Tim}{Arnold}
-% has signaled the problem; thanks!}:
-% \or\relax
-% Il\imess{I0033} nous faut un code similaire pour détecter les entrées dans la TdM pour les appendices dans
-% la classe \class{memoir}\,\footnote{\name{Tim}{Arnold} a signalé le problème; merci!}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\appendix
- \stepcounter{mtc}%
- \if@mtc@longext@%
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.mtc\themtc\@gobble}%
- \def\mtcname{\jobname.mtc\themtc}%
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.M\themtc\@gobble}%
- \def\mtcname{\jobname.M\themtc}%
- \fi
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mtcname
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines, the token register \com{mtc@toks} is used as a verbatim memory.
-% \or\relax
-% Maintenant, nous filtrons les lignes de contenu utiles, le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} étant utilisé
-% comme mémoire \emph{verbatim}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\paragraph}
-% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Each interesting contents line is copied, with a font command added before it. We begin with the standard
-% sectionning commands, below \com{chapter}:
-% \or\relax
-% Chaque ligne de contenu intéressante est copiée, avec une commande de fonte ajoutée devant
-% elle. Nous commençons par les commandes de sectionnement standard, en dessous de \com{chapter}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsection
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsubsection
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSSS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\paragraph
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcP}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subparagraph
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSP}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\coffee}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteCoffeeline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A coffee break contents line{\myCoffeecup} is written for \com{coffee}:
-% \or\relax
-% Une ligne de contenu de pause-café{\myCoffeecup} est écrite pour \com{coffee}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\coffee
- \MTC@WriteCoffeeline{#1}{#3}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\starchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcname}
-% \begin{macro}{\themtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
-% \begin{macro}{\openout}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If\imess{I0033} it is \com{starchapter} (for a starred chapter), we increment the \cnt{mtc} counter,
-% build a new minitoc file name, close the file descriptor and open it with this new file.
-% \or\relax
-% Si\imess{I0033} c'est \com{starchapter} (pour un chapitre étoilé), nous incrémentons le compteur \cnt{mtc},
-% construisons un nouveau nom de fichier minitoc, fermons le descripteur de fichier puis le ré-ouvrons avec ce
-% nouveau fichier.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starchapter
- \stepcounter{mtc}%
- \if@mtc@longext@
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.mtc\themtc\@gobble}%
- \def\mtcname{\jobname.mtc\themtc}%
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.M\themtc\@gobble}%
- \def\mtcname{\jobname.M\themtc}%
- \fi
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mtcname
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\starsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\starsubsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\starsubsubsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\starparagraph}
-% \begin{macro}{\starsubparagraph}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For starred sectionning commands lower than \com{chapter}, a contents line is written into the minitoc file,
-% with a font command added:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées plus basses que \com{chapter}, une ligne de contenu est écrite
-% dans le fichier minitoc, en lui ajoutant une commande de fonte:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsection
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsubsection
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSSS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starparagraph
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcP}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubparagraph
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSP}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@explist}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The loop to read the lines of the TOC file; it expands the list of entries and call \com{MTC@next} to process the
-% first one:
-% \or\relax
-% La boucle de lecture du fichier table des matières; elle expanse la liste des entrées et appelle
-% \com{MTC@next} pour traiter la première:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\MTC@explist{\expandafter\MTC@next\MTC@list\\}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@loop}
-% \begin{macro}{\openin}
-% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@toc}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@read}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If\SMM{\lmess{W0010}\\\lmess{I0024}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries.
-% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list.
-% \or\relax
-% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0010}\\\lmess{I0024}} une entrée est trouvée, on boucle ligne par ligne en cherchant des entrées
-% intéressantes. Sinon, on traite l'entrée suivante dans la liste.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\MTC@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
- \ifeof\@inputcheck
- \mtcPackageWarning[W0010]{minitoc}%
- {No file #1.
- \MessageBreak
- MINITOCS NOT PREPARED}%
- \expandafter\MTC@toc
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0024]{minitoc}{PREPARING MINITOCS FROM #1}%
- \expandafter\MTC@read
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@read}
-% \begin{macro}{\read}
-% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@line}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.toc} file.
-% \or\relax
-% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\MTC@read{%
- \read\@inputcheck to\MTC@line
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@test}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@line}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{MTC@test} has enough arguments:
-% \or\relax
-% La série de points \verb|.....| garantit que \com{MTC@test} a suffisamment d'arguments:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\MTC@test\MTC@line.....\MTC@%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@test}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@contentsline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{MTC@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the TOC file, mainly to
-% delimit chapters\footnote{The macro \com{MTC@test} has been patched to call \com{MTC@contentsline} with
-% four parameters~instead of three (thanks to \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \name{Didier}{Verna}, \name{Bernd}{Jaehne} and
-% \name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}). The same remark applies to similar macros.}:
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{MTC@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier table des matières,
-% principalement pour délimiter les chapitres\,\footnote{La macro \com{MTC@test} a été modifiée pour
-% appeler \com{MTC@contentsline} avec quatre paramètres ~au lieu de trois
-% (merci à~\name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \name{Didier}{Verna}, \name{Bernd}{Jaehne} et \name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}).
-% La même remarque s'applique aux macros similaires.}:
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{12}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@test}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
-% \begin{macro}{\@input}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapterend}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\openout}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin}
-% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@toc}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@read}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the
-% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file.
-% Finally process the next file in the list.
-% ^^A Thanks to \name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous regardons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée intéressante, nous la traitons.
-% Si c'est \com{@input}, le fichier est ajouté à~la liste. Sinon, elle est ignorée. Nous recommençons la boucle si
-% la fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin, nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste.
-% ^^A Merci à~\name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\MTC@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\MTC@{%
- \ifx#1\contentsline
- \let\mtc@string\string
- \MTC@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
- \let\mtc@string\relax
- \else\ifx#1\@input
- \edef\MTC@list{\MTC@list#2\relax}%
- \else\ifx#1\chapterend
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
- \else\ifx#1\chapterbegin
- \addtocounter{mtc}{-1}%
- \fi\fi\fi\fi
- \ifeof\@inputcheck
- \expandafter\MTC@toc
- \else
- \expandafter\MTC@read
- \fi
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Mini-lists of figures}\label{s+code+mlf}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Mini-listes des figures}\label{s+code+mlf}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The code is similar to the code for mini-tables of contents, but with less commands to recognize.
-% \or\relax
-% Le code est similaire à~celui pour les mini-tables des matières, mais avec moins de commandes à~reconnaître.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Analysis and splitting of the list of figures file}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Analyse et éclatement du fichier liste des figures}
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@loop}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This is done via a loop managed by the following macros:
-% \or\relax
-% Ceci est fait grâce à~une boucle gérée par les macros suivantes:
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Processes the next entry in the list and removes it from the head of the list:
-% \or\relax
-% Traite l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retire de la tête de la liste:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\MLF@next#1\relax#2\\{%
- \edef\MLF@list{#2}%
- \MLF@loop{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@lof}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@explist}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Checks if the list is empty:
-% \or\relax
-% Teste si la liste est vide:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\MLF@lof{%
- \ifx\MLF@list\@empty\else\expandafter\MLF@explist\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
-% \begin{macro}{\xchapter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The macro \com{MLF@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOF file and detects interesting keywords.
-% If \com{xchapter} is found, the counter \cnt{mtc} is incremented and a new minilof file is created.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{MLF@contentsline} analyse les lignes du fichier liste des figures et détecte les mots-clés
-% intéressants. Si \com{xchapter} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{mtc} est incrémenté et
-% un nouveau fichier minilof est créé.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\MLF@contentsline#1#2#3#4{%
- \gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xchapter
- \stepcounter{mtc}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\themtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlfname}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\openout}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\imess{I0033} name of the minilof file is built from \com{jobname} and a long or short extension:
-% \or\relax
-% Le\imess{I0033} nom du fichier minilof est construit avec \com{jobname} et un suffixe long ou court:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \if@mtc@longext@%
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.mlf\themtc\@gobble}
- \def\mlfname{\jobname.mlf\themtc}%
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.F\themtc\@gobble}
- \def\mlfname{\jobname.F\themtc}%
- \fi
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mlfname
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\figure}
-% \begin{macro}{\subfigure}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
-% If we found a \com{figure} entry, we copy it into the minilof file:
-% \or\relax
-% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
-% Si nous trouvons une entrée \com{figure} ou \com{subfigure}, nous la copions dans le fichier minilof:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\figure
- \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}%
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mlf}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subfigure
- \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}%
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mlfS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@explist}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The loop to read the LOF file; it expands the list of entries and calls \com{MLF@next} to process the
-% first one:
-% \or\relax
-% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des figures; elle expanse la liste des entrées et appelle
-% \com{MLF@next} pour traiter la première:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\MLF@explist{\expandafter\MLF@next\MLF@list\\}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@loop}
-% \begin{macro}{\openin}
-% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@lof}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@read}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And\SMM{\lmess{W0008}\\\lmess{I0034}} now, we scan the \suffix{.lof} file:
-% \or\relax
-% Et\SMM{\lmess{W0008}\\\lmess{I0034}} maintenant, nous examinons le fichier \suffix{.lof}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\MLF@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
- \ifeof\@inputcheck
- \mtcPackageWarning[W0008]{minitoc}%
- {No file #1.
- \MessageBreak
- MINILOFS NOT PREPARED}%
- \expandafter\MLF@lof
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0034]{minitoc}%
- {PREPARING MINILOFS FROM #1}%
- \expandafter\MLF@read\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@read}
-% \begin{macro}{\read}
-% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Read the next entry in the \suffix{.lof} file:
-% \or\relax
-% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lof}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\MLF@read{%
- \read\@inputcheck to\MLF@line
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@line}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@test}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{MLF@test} has enough arguments:
-% \or\relax
-% La série de points \verb|.....| garantit que \com{MLF@test} a suffisamment d'arguments:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\MLF@test\MLF@line.....\MLF@%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@test}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{MLF@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOF file, mainly to
-% delimit chapters.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{MLF@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des figures,
-% principalement pour délimiter les chapitres.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\@input}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapterend}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\openout}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin}
-% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@lof}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLF@read}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the
-% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file.
-% Finally process the next file in the list.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous regardons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée intéressante, nous la traitons.
-% Si c'est \com{@input}, le fichier est ajouté à~la liste. Sinon, elle est ignorée. Nous recommençons la boucle si
-% la fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin, nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\MLF@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\MLF@{%
- \ifx#1\contentsline
- \let\mtc@string\string
- \MLF@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
- \let\mtc@string\relax
- \else\ifx#1\@input
- \edef\MLF@list{\MLF@list#2\relax}%
- \else\ifx#1\chapterend
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
- \else\ifx#1\chapterbegin
- \addtocounter{mtc}{-1}%
- \fi\fi\fi\fi
- \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\MLF@lof
- \else\expandafter\MLF@read\fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Mini-lists of tables}\label{s+code+mlt}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Mini-listes des tableaux}\label{s+code+mlt}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The code is similar to the code for mini-tables of contents, but with less commands to recognize.
-% \or\relax
-% Le code est similaire à~celui pour les mini-tables des matières, mais avec moins de commandes à~reconnaître.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Analysis and splitting of the list of tables file}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Analyse et éclatement du fichier liste des tableaux}
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@loop}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This is done via a loop managed by the following macros:
-% \or\relax
-% Ceci est fait grâce à~une boucle gérée par les macros suivantes:
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Processes the next entry in the list and removes it from the head of the list:
-% \or\relax
-% Traite l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retire de la tête de la liste:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\MLT@next#1\relax#2\\{%
- \edef\MLT@list{#2}%
- \MLT@loop{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@lot}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@explist}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Checks if the list is empty:
-% \or\relax
-% Teste si la liste est vide:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\MLT@lot{%
- \ifx\MLT@list\@empty\else\expandafter\MLT@explist\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
-% \begin{macro}{\xchapter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The macro \com{MLT@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOT file and detects interesting keywords.
-% If \com{xchapter} is found, the \cnt{mtc} counter is incremented and a new minilot file is created.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{MLT@contentsline} analyse les lignes du fichier liste des tableaux et détecte les mots-clés
-% intéressants. Si \com{xchapter} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{mtc} est incrémenté et
-% un nouveau fichier minilot est créé.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\MLT@contentsline#1#2#3#4{%
- \gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xchapter
- \stepcounter{mtc}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\themtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltname}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\openout}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\imess{I0033} name of the minilot file it build from \com{jobname} and a long or short extension:
-% \or\relax
-% Le\imess{I0033} nom du fichier minilot est construit avec \com{jobname} et un suffixe long ou court:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \if@mtc@longext@%
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.mlt\themtc\@gobble}%
- \def\mltname{\jobname.mlt\themtc}%
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.T\themtc\@gobble}%
- \def\mltname{\jobname.T\themtc}%
- \fi
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mltname
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\table}
-% \begin{macro}{\subtable}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
-% If we found a \com{table} entry, we copy it into the minilot file:
-% \or\relax
-% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
-% Si nous trouvons une entrée \com{table}, nous la copions dans le fichier minilot:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\table
- \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}%
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mlt}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subtable
- \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}%
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mltS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@explist}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The loop to read the LOT file; it expands the list of entries and calls \com{MLT@next} to process the
-% first one:
-% \or\relax
-% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des tableaux; elle expanse la liste des entrées et appelle
-% \com{MLT@next} pour traiter la première:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\MLT@explist{\expandafter\MLT@next\MLT@list\\}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@loop}
-% \begin{macro}{\openin}
-% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@lot}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@read}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And\SMM{\lmess{W0009}\\\lmess{I0037}} now, we scan the \suffix{.lot} file:
-% \or\relax
-% Et\SMM{\lmess{W0009}\\\lmess{I0037}} maintenant, nous examinons le fichier \suffix{.lot}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\MLT@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
- \ifeof\@inputcheck
- \mtcPackageWarning[W0009]{minitoc}%
- {No file #1.
- \MessageBreak
- MINILOTS NOT PREPARED}%
- \expandafter\MLT@lot
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0037]{minitoc}%
- {PREPARING MINILOTS FROM #1}%
- \expandafter\MLT@read\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@read}
-% \begin{macro}{\read}
-% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Read the next entry in the \suffix{.lot} file:
-% \or\relax
-% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lot}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\MLT@read{%
- \read\@inputcheck to\MLT@line
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@line}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@test}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{MLT@test} has enough arguments:
-% \or\relax
-% La série de points \verb|.....| garantit que \com{MLT@test} a suffisamment d'arguments:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\MLT@test\MLT@line.....\MLT@%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@test}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{MLT@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOT file, mainly to
-% delimit chapters.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{MLT@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des tableaux,
-% principalement pour délimiter les chapitres.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{13}
-% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\@input}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapterend}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\openout}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin}
-% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@lot}
-% \begin{macro}{\MLT@read}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the
-% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file.
-% Finally process the next file in the list.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous regardons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée intéressante, nous la traitons.
-% Si c'est \com{@input}, le fichier est ajouté à~la liste. Sinon, elle est ignorée. Nous recommençons la boucle si
-% la fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin, nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\MLT@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\MLT@{%
- \ifx#1\contentsline
- \let\mtc@string\string
- \MLT@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
- \let\mtc@string\relax
- \else\ifx#1\@input
- \edef\MLT@list{\MLT@list#2\relax}%
- \else\ifx#1\chapterend
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
- \else\ifx#1\chapterbegin
- \addtocounter{mtc}{-1}%
- \fi\fi\fi\fi
- \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\MLT@lot
- \else\expandafter\MLT@read\fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Note that we terminate with a closing brace to end the chapter-level macros (end of the \emph{else} branch of a
-% \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| alternative).
-% \or\relax
-% Notez que nous terminons par une accolade fermante pour achever les macros du niveau chapitre (fin de la
-% branche \emph{sinon} d'une alternative \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}|).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Macro to write a contents line}\label{s+code+MTC@WriteContentsline}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Macro pour écrire une ligne de contenu}\label{s+code+MTC@WriteContentsline}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@dot}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@param}
-% \begin{macro}{\write}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\@resetfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
-% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} macro makes the definition of \com{MTC@contentsline} shorter. An extra \com{edef}
-% level is removed (\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}):
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} rend la définition de \com{MTC@contentsline} plus courte. Un niveau
-% supplémentaire de \com{edef} est retiré (\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The arguments of \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} are:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] the \texttt{\#1} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline};
-% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] font shorthand $\Longrightarrow$ \com{csname}\verb| #2font|\com{endcsname};
-% \item[\texttt{\#3}:] the \texttt{\#3} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline};
-% \item[\texttt{\#4}:] the \texttt{\#4} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline} (hyperlink).
-% \end{itemize}
-% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les arguments de \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} sont:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] l'argument \texttt{\#1} de \com{MTC@contentsline};
-% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] un raccourci pour la fonte $\Longrightarrow$ \com{csname}\verb| #2font|\com{endcsname};
-% \item[\texttt{\#3}:] l'argument \texttt{\#3} de \com{MTC@contentsline};
-% \item[\texttt{\#4}:] l'argument \texttt{\#4} de \com{MTC@contentsline} (hyperlien).
-% \end{itemize}
-% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtc@dot{.}
-\def\MTC@WriteContentsline#1#2#3#4{%
- \def\mtc@param{#4}%
- \immediate\write\tf@mtc{%
- {\string\reset@font
- \expandafter\string\csname #2font\endcsname
- \string\mtc@string
- \string\contentsline{#1}%
- {\the\mtc@toks}%
- {\string\reset@font
- \expandafter\string\csname #2font\endcsname
- \space #3%
- }%
- \ifx\mtc@dot\mtc@param
- \else
- {#4}%
- \fi
- }%
- }%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteCoffeeline}
-% \begin{macro}{\write}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\@resetfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And the same for a ``coffee''{\myCoffeecup} line. The arguments of the macro \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline} are:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] the \texttt{\#1} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline};
-% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] the \texttt{\#3} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline}.
-% \or\relax
-% Et la même chose pour une ligne de «~pause café~»{\myCoffeecup}. Les arguments de
-% la macro \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline} sont:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] l'argument \texttt{\#1} de \com{MTC@contentsline};
-% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] l'argument \texttt{\#3} de \com{MTC@contentsline}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \fi
-% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\MTC@WriteCoffeeline#1#2#3{%
- \immediate\write\tf@mtc{%
- {\string\reset@font \string\coffeefont \string\mtc@string
- {\the\mtc@toks}%
- {\string\reset@font \string\coffeefont \space #3%
- }%
- }%
- }%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Depth counters for partlofs and partlots}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Compteurs de profondeur pour les partlofs et les partlots}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\newcounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If the counters \dcnt{lofdepth} and \dcnt{lotdepth} are defined, we create the corresponding new counters:
-% \dcnt{partlofdepth} and \dcnt{partlotdepth}.
-% These counters are initialized to~2.
-% This is done after the loading of the packages, in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block:
-% \or\relax
-% Si les compteurs \dcnt{lofdepth} et \dcnt{lotdepth} sont définis, nous créons les nouveaux compteurs
-% correspondants: \dcnt{partlofdepth} et \dcnt{partlotdepth}.
-% Ces compteurs sont initialisés à~2.
-% Ceci est fait après le chargement des paquetages, dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}%
- {\newcounter{partlofdepth}\setcounter{partlofdepth}{2}}%
- \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}%
- {\newcounter{partlotdepth}\setcounter{partlotdepth}{2}}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Part level commands}\label{s+code+part.level}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Commandes au niveau partie}\label{s+code+part.level}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\xpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\theptc}
-% \begin{macro}{\Thepart}
-% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc}
-% \begin{macro}{\decrementptc}
-% \begin{macro}{\incrementptc}
-% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis}
-% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@firstpartis@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\newcounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If\imess{W0004} \com{part} is defined, we define some utility commands, a counter (\cnt{ptc})
-% for the parttocs and related commands (\com{theptc}, \com{Thepart}, \com{adjustptc}, \com{decrementptc},
-% \com{incrementptc}), the
-% obsolete command \com{firstpartis}, and the depth counter \dcnt{parttocdepth}.
-% \or\relax
-% Si\imess{W0004} \com{part} est définie, nous définissons quelques commandes utilitaires, un compteur (\cnt{ptc})
-% pour les parttocs et les commandes associées (\com{theptc}, \com{Thepart}, \com{adjustptc},
-% \com{decrementptc}, \com{incrementptc}), la commande
-% obsolète \com{firstpartis} et le compteur de profondeur \dcnt{parttocdepth}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{part}{}%
-{%
-\def\xpart{xpart}
-\def\Thepart{\arabic{ptc}}
-\def\firstpartis#1%
- {\mtcPackageWarning[W0004]{minitoc}%
- {\string\firstpartis \space is an obsolete (ignored)
- \MessageBreak
- command}%
- \@firstpartis@used@true}
-\newcounter{ptc}
-\setcounter{ptc}{0}
-\newcommand{\adjustptc}[1][1]{\addtocounter{ptc}{#1}}
-\def\decrementptc{\addtocounter{ptc}{-1}}
-\def\incrementptc{\addtocounter{ptc}{+1}}
-\def\theptc{\arabic{ptc}}
-\newcounter{parttocdepth}
-\setcounter{parttocdepth}{2}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% But, sometimes, we need to make a difference between book/report and article classes (is \com{chapter} defined?), to
-% have a different layout: the definition of \com{ptc@rule} is empty except if \com{chapter} is undefined.
-% By default, there is no rule before/after parttocs, partlofs, and partlots for books. You should redeclare
-% \com{ptc@rule} if you want these rules.
-% \or\relax
-% Mais, parfois, nous voulons faire une différence entre les classes \class{book}\texttt{/}\class{report} et \class{article}
-% (\com{chapter} est-elle définie?), pour avoir une présentation différente:
-% la définition de la macro \com{ptc@rule} est
-% vide sauf si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie. Par défaut, il n'y~a pas de filets avant et après les parttocs,
-% partlofs et partlots pour les livres. Vous devriez redéclarer \com{ptc@rule} si vous voulez ces filets.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{chapter}%
- {\def\ptc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}}%
- {\let\ptc@rule\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And we declare the default indentation (both sides) of the parttocs:
-% \or\relax
-% Et nous déclarons l'indentation (des deux côtés) par défaut des parttocs:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\ptcindent
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{\ptcindent=24\p@}{\ptcindent=\z@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{12}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Fonts for the parttocs}\label{s+code+fonts.parttocs}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Fontes pour les parttocs}\label{s+code+fonts.parttocs}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\plffont}
-% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define the fonts for the parttocs. Note that they are larger if \com{chapter} is defined
-% (\class{book}\texttt{/}\class{report}-like
-% document classes) than when it is not (\class{article}-like document classes):
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons les fontes pour les parttocs. Notez qu'elles sont plus grandes si \com{chapter} est définie
-% (classes de document analogues à~\class{book}\texttt{/}\class{report}) que lorsqu'elle ne l'est pas (classes de
-% document analogues à~\class{article}):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
- \def\ptcfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries} % the parttoc
- \def\ptcSfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% (sections)
- \let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont % (subsections)
- \let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont % (subsubsections)
- \let\ptcPfont\ptcfont % (paragraphs)
- \let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont % (subparagraphs)
- \let\plffont\ptcfont % (figures)
- \let\plfSfont\ptcfont % (subfigures)
- \let\pltfont\ptcfont % (tables)
- \let\pltSfont\ptcfont % (subtables)
- \def\ptifont{\Large\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% titles
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcCfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\plffont}
-% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If \com{chapter} is defined, the fonts are larger and \com{ptcCfont} must be defined:
-% \or\relax
-% Si \com{chapter} est définie, les fontes sont plus grandes et \com{ptcCfont} doit être définie:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-{%
- \def\ptcfont{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries} % the parttoc
- \def\ptcCfont{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% (chapters)
- \def\ptcSfont{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries}% (sections)
- \let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont % (subsections)
- \let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont % (subsubsections)
- \let\ptcPfont\ptcfont % (paragraphs)
- \let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont % (subparagraphs)
- \let\plffont\ptcfont % (figures)
- \let\plfSfont\ptcfont % (subfigures)
- \let\pltfont\ptcfont % (tables)
- \let\pltSfont\ptcfont % (subtables)
- \def\ptifont{\LARGE\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% titles
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Default titles for part-level mini-tables}\label{s+code+default.titles.part.level}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Titres par défaut pour les mini-tables au niveau partie}\label{s+code+default.titles.part.level}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define the default position, the fonts and the layout for titles of the part-level mini-tables (\com{parttoc},
-% \com{partlof} and \com{partlot}). This formating is different if \com{chapter} is defined or undefined.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons la position par défaut, les fontes et la mise en page pour les titres des mini-tables du niveau
-% partie (\com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} et \com{partlot}). Cette mise en page est différente selon que
-% \com{chapter} est définie ou non.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If \com{chapter} is undefined, the definitions are very simple, for
-% centered, flushleft, flushright or empty titles.
-% Here, empty titles need a vertical correction \linebreak[0](\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
-% \or\relax
-% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, les définitions sont très simples, pour des titres centrés, cadrés
-% à~gauche, cadrés à~droite, ou vides.
-% Ici, les titres vides auront encore besoin d'une correction verticale \linebreak[0](\nolinebreak[4]selon \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
- \def\c@pti#1{\null\hfill #1\hfill\null}
- \def\l@pti#1{\null #1\hfill\null}
- \def\r@pti#1{\null\hfill #1\null}
- \def\e@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}
- \def\n@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% But, if \com{chapter} is defined, we must simulate the formatting of a chapter head, which is more complex.
-% Here, empty titles need a vertical correction \linebreak[0](\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
-% \or\relax
-% Mais, si \com{chapter} est définie, nous devons simuler la mise en page d'une tête de chapitre, qui est plus
-% complexe.
-% Ici, les titres vides auront encore besoin d'une correction verticale \linebreak[0](\nolinebreak[4]selon \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-{%
-\def\e@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} \def\n@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn}
-% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage}
-% \begin{macro}{\@afterheading}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
-% \begin{macro}{\@makephead@l}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For a title on the left, we must test if the main text is on two columns:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour un titre cadré à~gauche, nous devons tester si le corps du texte est sur deux colonnes:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\l@pti#1{\if@twocolumn \@topnewpage[\@makephead@l{#1}]%
- \else \@makephead@l{#1}\@afterheading \fi}
-\def\@makephead@l#1{%
- \vspace*{\mtcgapbeforeheads}%
- {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \ptifont #1\par \nobreak
- \vskip \mtcgapafterheads\hbox{}
- }}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn}
-% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage}
-% \begin{macro}{\@makephead@r}
-% \begin{macro}{\@afterheading}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For a title on the right, we must also test if the main text is on two columns:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour un titre cadré à~droite, nous devons tester si le corps du texte est sur deux colonnes:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\r@pti#1{\if@twocolumn \@topnewpage[\@makephead@r{#1}]
- \else \@makephead@r{#1}\@afterheading \fi}
-\def\@makephead@r#1{%
- \vspace*{\mtcgapbeforeheads}%
- {\parindent \z@ \raggedleft \ptifont #1\par \nobreak
- \vskip \mtcgapafterheads\hbox{}
- }}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn}
-% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage}
-% \begin{macro}{\@makephead@c}
-% \begin{macro}{\@afterheading}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For a centered title, we must also test if the main text is on two columns:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour un titre centré, nous devons aussi tester si le corps du texte est sur deux colonnes:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\c@pti#1{\if@twocolumn \@topnewpage[\@makephead@c{#1}]%
- \else \@makephead@c{#1}\@afterheading \fi}
-\def\@makephead@c#1{%
- \vspace*{\mtcgapbeforeheads}%
- {\parindent \z@ \centering \ptifont #1\par \nobreak
- \vskip \mtcgapafterheads\hbox{}
- }}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@ptitc}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@ptitc}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilf}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilf}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilt}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilt}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% By default, titles are on left:
-% \or\relax
-% Par défaut, les titres sont à~gauche:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\do@ptitc\l@pti \let\df@ptitc\l@pti
-\let\do@ptilf\l@pti \let\df@ptilf\l@pti
-\let\do@ptilt\l@pti \let\df@ptilt\l@pti
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{15} ^^A many macros
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \texttt{ptc@verse} environment}\label{s+code+ptc@verse.env}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{L'environnement \texttt{ptc@verse}}\label{s+code+ptc@verse.env}
-% \fi
-% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptc@verse}
-% \begin{macro}{\endptc@verse}
-% \begin{macro}{\\}
-% \begin{macro}{\@centercr}
-% \begin{macro}{\list}
-% \begin{macro}{\itemsep}
-% \begin{macro}{\itemindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\listparindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\topsep}
-% \begin{macro}{\parsep}
-% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\partopsep}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Each parttoc is placed inside a \env{ptc@verse} environment. This environment is analog to the
-% standard \env{verse} environment and hence defined via two commands: \com{ptc@verse} and
-% \com{endptc@verse}.
-% As it is a list environment, we first define (in a local way)~\texttt{\bs\bs}, then call \com{list}\texttt{\{\}} and
-% set some dimensions like \com{itemsep}, \com{itemindent}, \com{listparindent},
-% \com{itemindent}, \com{partopsep}, \com{topsep}.
-% \com{parsep} is set to zero if
-% the \opt{tight} option is active (this reduces the spacing between the lines).
-% \com{parskip} is set to zero if
-% the \opt{k-tight} option is active (this reduces the spacing between the lines).
-% Both margins are set to \com{ptcindent}. \com{endptc@verse} terminates the list and discourages
-% a page break.
-% The \env{ptc@verse} environment has an argument which is an horizontal offset (a command like \com{ptcoffset}).
-% \or\relax
-% Chaque parttoc est placée à~l'intérieur d'un environnement \env{ptc@verse}. Cet environnement est analogue
-% à~l'environnement standard \env{verse} et est donc défini à~l'aide de deux commandes:
-% \com{ptc@verse} et \com{endptc@verse}. Puisque c'est un environnement de liste, nous définissons d'abord
-% (de manière locale)~\texttt{\bs\bs}, puis appelons \com{list}\texttt{\{\}} et établissons quelques dimensions
-% telles que \com{itemsep}, \com{itemindent}, \com{listparindent}, \com{itemindent},
-% \com{partopsep}, \com{topsep}.
-% \com{parsep} est forcée à~zéro si
-% l'option \opt{tight} est active (ceci réduit l'espacement entre les lignes).
-% \com{parskip} est forcée à~zéro si
-% l'option \opt{k-tight} est active (ceci réduit l'espacement entre les lignes).
-% Les deux marges sont
-% forcées à~\com{ptcindent}. \com{endptc@verse} termine la liste et décourage une coupure de page.
-% L'environnement \env{ptc@verse} a un argument qui est un déplacement horizontal (une commande telle que \com{ptcoffset}).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ptc@verse#1{\let\\=\@centercr
- \list{}{%
- \topsep=1ex \itemsep=\z@ \itemindent=\z@
- \listparindent=\itemindent \partopsep=\z@
- \leftmargin=\ptcindent \rightmargin=\leftmargin
- \iftightmtc \parsep=\z@ \fi
- \ifktightmtc \parskip=\z@ \fi
- \addtolength{\leftmargin}{+#1}
- \addtolength{\rightmargin}{-#1}
- }%
- \item[]}
-\def\endptc@verse{\nopagebreak[4]\endlist}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{raggedright}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The part level mini-tables: \ucom{parttoc}, \ucom{partlof}, and \ucom{partlot}}\label{s+code+parttoc.command}\icom{parttoc}\icom{partlof}\icom{partlot}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Les mini-tables au niveau partie: \ucom{parttoc}, \ucom{partlof} et \ucom{partlot}}\label{s+code+parttoc.command}\icom{parttoc}\icom{partlof}\icom{partlot}
-% \fi
-% \end{raggedright}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% These commands are essentially similar to the \com{minitoc} command, except that they should be placed after a
-% \com{part} command to produce a parttoc, a partlof or a partlot, and the formatting is different and depends on
-% the availability of the
-% \com{chapter} command (for the fonts and the horizontal rules). The code is very similar. The \com{partlof}
-% and \com{partlot} commands are siblings of the \com{parttoc} command.
-% Note that \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} and \com{partlot} use page styles, because \verb|\beforepart...| and
-% \verb|\afterpart...| commands imply usually a \icom{clearpage}\icom{cleardoublepage}\verb|\clear[double]page| command, and hence
-% \com{markboth}\verb|{...}{...}| must be called.
-% \or\relax
-% Ces commandes sont essentiellement similaires à~la commande \com{minitoc}, sauf qu'elles devraient être placées
-% après une commande \com{part} pour produire une parttoc, une partlof ou une partlot, et que la mise en page est
-% différente et dépend de la disponibilité de la commande \com{chapter} (pour les fontes et les filets
-% horizontaux). Le code est très similaire. Les commandes \com{partlof} et \com{partlof} sont les cousines
-% de la commande \com{parttoc}. Notez que \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} et \com{partlot} utilisent des styles
-% de page, car les commandes \verb|\beforepart...| et \verb|\afterpart...| impliquent habituellement une commande
-% \icom{clearpage}\icom{cleardoublepage}\verb|\clear[double]page|, et donc \com{markboth}\verb|{...}{...}| doit être appelée.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{The \ucom{parttoc} command}\icom{parttoc}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{La commande \ucom{parttoc}}\icom{parttoc}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This command must be used after \com{part} if you need a parttoc (no automatic parttoc).
-% First, \com{parttoc} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if
-% it is missing. Then, \com{parttoc@} is called with the effective position as argument:
-% \or\relax
-% Cette commande doit être utilisée après \com{part} si vous souhaitez avoir une parttoc (pas de parttoc
-% automatique). Tout d'abord, \com{parttoc} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur
-% par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il est absent. Puis, \com{parttoc@} est appelée avec la position effective comme
-% argument:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\parttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\parttoc@}{\parttoc@[d]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\Thepart}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{parttoc@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@parttoc@used@} (for a consistency
-% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the parttoc file):
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{parttoc@} fait le véritable travail.
-% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@parttoc@used@}
-% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les suffixes longs sont utilisés ou non (pour construire
-% le nom du fichier parttoc):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\parttoc@[#1]{%
-\global\@parttoc@used@true
-\if@mtc@longext@%
- \def\@tocfile{ptc\Thepart}%
-\else
- \def\@tocfile{P\Thepart}%
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence of the parttoc file and give a warning if it is not here:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis,\imess{I0006} nous vérifions la présence du fichier parttoc et donnons un avertissement s'il n'est pas là:
-% \fi
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
- \if@mtc@FE
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}%
- {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
- \@mtc@empty@parttoc@true
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforeparttoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If the parttoc file is present, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first,
-% \com{beforeparttoc}, of course:
-% \or\relax
-% Si le fichier est présent, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais devons ajouter un peu de code pour la présentation;
-% d'abord, \com{beforeparttoc}, bien sûr:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \beforeparttoc
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth}
-% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispageparttocstyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If \com{chapter} is defined, we just set the page marks with the parttoc title and set the page style:
-% \or\relax
-% Si \com{chapter} est définie, nous mettons simplement le titre de la parttoc dans les marques de page et
-% établissons le style de page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifundefined{chapter}{}{%
- \global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth \global\let\@mkboth\markboth
- \thispageparttocstyle
- \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\ptctitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\ptctitle}}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@ptitc}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
-% \begin{environment}{samepage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A \env{samepage} environment is begun, then the argument is treated to set the position of
-% the parttoc title. If the title string is empty, this forces the positionning.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis l'argument est traité pour établir la
-% position du titre de la parttoc. Si la chaîne de titre est vide, le positionnement est forcé.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \relax\begin{samepage}%
- \if #1e\let\do@ptitc\e@pti
- \else\if #1n\let\do@ptitc\n@pti
- \else\if #1c\let\do@ptitc\c@pti
- \else\if #1l\let\do@ptitc\l@pti
- \else\if #1r\let\do@ptitc\r@pti
- \else\if #1d\let\do@ptitc\df@ptitc
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \mtc@CkStr{\ptctitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@ptitc\e@pti\relax\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
-% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the parttoc, then we set the font:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la parttoc,
-% puis établissons la fonte:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \raggedright \reset@font\ptcfont \parskip=\z@ \parindent=\z@%
- \nopagebreak[4]\kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
- \par\noindent \nopagebreak[4]%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule}
-% \begin{environment}{tabular}
-% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@ptitc}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\hline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The parttoc title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between
-% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary.
-% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the parttoc.
-% \or\relax
-% Le titre de la parttoc est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher une coupure
-% de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si
-% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la parttoc.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx\ptc@rule\relax
- \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
- \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptitc{\mtc@v\ptctitle}\\
- \end{tabular}%
- \else
- \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
- \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptitc{\mtc@v\ptctitle}\\\hline
- \end{tabular}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then, we adjust the position close the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques
-% paramètres de mise en page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\*[-\baselineskip]\mtc@BBR
- \leftmargin\ptcindent \rightmargin\ptcindent
- \itemindent=\z@ \labelwidth=\z@ \labelsep=\z@ \listparindent=\z@%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@parttocdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We enter in a \env{ptc@verse} environment to format the parttoc. The toc depth is forced (locally) to
-% \dcnt{parttocdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. A blank line is
-% necessary to avoid a negative indentation.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous entrons dans un environnement \env{ptc@verse} pour mettre en page la parttoc. La profondeur de table
-% des matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{parttocdepth}. Une petite astuce est
-% nécessaire pour ajuster la position. Une ligne blanche est nécessaire pour éviter une indentation négative.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \begin{ptc@verse}{\ptcoffset}\c@tocdepth=\c@parttocdepth%
- \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptc@pgno}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptc@setform}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\openparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
-% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version.
-% For chapter-level entries, we must invoke \com{l@chapter} ignoring the page number argument.
-% A hook (redefinissable command) is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated
-% via \com{ptc@setform}.
-% Then the parttoc file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{ptc@verse} environment is terminated.
-% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file.
-% \or\relax
-% Si les lignes de contenu doivent ne pas avoir de numéros de pages, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa
-% version sans points de conduite. Pour les entrées au niveau chapitre, nous devons invoquer \com{l@chapter} en
-% ignorant l'argument numéro de page. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et
-% les choix de mise en page de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{ptc@setform}. Puis le fichier parttoc est
-% inséré, suivi d'un étai, puis l'environnement \env{ptc@verse} est terminé.
-% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup
- \makeatletter
- \@ifundefined{ptc@pgno}%
- {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
- \@ifundefined{ptc@pgno}%
- {\let\l@chapter@SVPN\l@chapter%
- \def\l@chapter##1##2{\l@chapter@SVPN{##1}{\hbox{}}}}{}
- \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
- \ptc@setform
- \openparttoc\global\inparttoctrue
- \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}%
- \global\inparttocfalse\closeparttoc
- \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-1\baselineskip}
- \leavevmode\mtc@strut
- \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
- \end{ptc@verse}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
-% \begin{environment}{samepage}
-% \begin{macro}{\afterparttoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break (if \com{chapter} is
-% not defined), and \com{afterparttoc}.
-% \or\relax
-% La partie finale consiste seulement à~ajouter le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la possibilité d'une coupure de page
-% (si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie), et \com{afterparttoc}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \kernafterparttoc
- \nopagebreak[4]\ptc@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
- \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
- \par\@ifundefined{chapter}{\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}%
- \afterparttoc\fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{The \ucom{partlof} command}\icom{partlof}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{La commande \ucom{partlof}}\icom{partlof}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlof@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This command must be used after \com{part} if you need a partlof (no automatic partlof).
-% First, \com{partlof} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if
-% it is missing. Then, \com{partlof@} is called with the effective position as argument:
-% \or\relax
-% Cette commande doit être utilisée après \com{part} si vous souhaitez avoir une partlof (pas de partlof
-% automatique). Tout d'abord, \com{partlof} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur
-% par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il est absent. Puis, \com{partlof@} est appelée avec la position effective comme
-% argument:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\partlof{\@ifnextchar[{\partlof@}{\partlof@[d]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlof@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\Thepart}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{partlof@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@partlof@used@} (for a consistency
-% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the partlof file):
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{partlof@} fait le véritable travail.
-% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@partlof@used@}
-% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les suffixes longs sont utilisés ou non (pour construire
-% le nom du fichier partlof):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\partlof@[#1]{%
-\global\@partlof@used@true
-\if@mtc@longext@%
- \def\@tocfile{plf\Thepart}%
-\else
- \def\@tocfile{G\Thepart}%
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence of the partlof file and give a warning if it is not here:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis,\imess{I0006} nous vérifions la présence du fichier partlof et donnons un avertissement s'il n'est pas là:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
- \if@mtc@FE
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}%
- {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
- \@mtc@empty@partlof@true
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlof}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If the partlof file is present, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first,
-% \com{beforepartlof}, of course:
-% \or\relax
-% Si le fichier est présent, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais devons ajouter un peu de code pour la présentation;
-% d'abord, \com{beforepartlof}, bien sûr:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \beforepartlof
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth}
-% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlofstyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase}
-% \begin{macro}{\plftitle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If \com{chapter} is defined, we just set the page marks with the partlof title and set the page style:
-% \or\relax
-% Si \com{chapter} est définie, nous mettons simplement le titre de la partlof dans les marques de page et
-% établissons le style de page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifundefined{chapter}{}%
- {\global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth
- \global\let\@mkboth\markboth
- \thispagepartlofstyle
- \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\plftitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\plftitle}}%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilf}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
-% \begin{macro}{\plftitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
-% \begin{environment}{samepage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A \env{samepage} environment is begun, then the argument is treated to set the position of
-% the partlof title. If the title string is empty, this forces the positionning.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis l'argument est traité pour établir la
-% position du titre de la partlof. Si la chaîne de titre est vide, le positionnement est forcé.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \relax\begin{samepage}%
- \if #1e\let\do@ptilf\e@pti
- \else\if #1n\let\do@ptilf\n@pti
- \else\if #1c\let\do@ptilf\c@pti
- \else\if #1l\let\do@ptilf\l@pti
- \else\if #1r\let\do@ptilf\r@pti
- \else\if #1d\let\do@ptilf\df@ptilf
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \mtc@CkStr{\plftitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@ptilf\e@pti\relax\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
-% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\plffont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the parttoc, then we set the font:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la partlof,
-% puis établissons la fonte:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \raggedright
- \parskip=\z@%
- \reset@font\plffont%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule}
-% \begin{environment}{tabular}
-% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilf}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v}
-% \begin{macro}{\plftitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\hline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The parttoc title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between the
-% title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary.
-% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the partlof.
-% \or\relax
-% Le titre de la partlof est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher une coupure
-% de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si
-% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la partlof.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \parindent=\z@%
- \nopagebreak[4]%
- \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
- \par\noindent
- \ifx\plf@rule\relax
- \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
- \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilf{\mtc@v\plftitle}\\
- \end{tabular}%
- \else
- \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
- \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilf{\mtc@v\plftitle}\\\hline
- \mtc@hstrut\\
- \end{tabular}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques
-% paramètres de mise en page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\*[-\baselineskip]\mtc@BBR
- \leftmargin\ptcindent \rightmargin\ptcindent
- \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
- \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
-% \begin{macro}{\plfoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We enter in a \env{ptc@verse} environment to format the partlof.
-% If necessary, the toc depth is forced (locally) to \dcnt{partlofdepth}.
-% A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. A blank line is necessary to avoid a negative indentation.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous entrons dans un environnement \env{ptc@verse} pour mettre en page la partlof.
-% Si nécessaire la profondeur de table des matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{partlofdepth}.
-% Une petite astuce est nécessaire pour ajuster la position. Une ligne blanche est nécessaire pour éviter une
-% indentation négative.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \begin{ptc@verse}{\plfoffset}%
- \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}%
- {\c@lofdepth=\c@partlofdepth
- \ifnum\c@lofdepth<1\relax\c@lofdepth=1\fi}
- \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\plf@pgno}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\plf@setform}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\openpartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\closepartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
-% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version.
-% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{plf@setform}.
-% Then the partlof file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{ptc@verse} environment is terminated.
-% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file.
-% \or\relax
-% Si les lignes de contenu doivent ne pas avoir de numéros de pages, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa
-% version sans points de conduite. Pour les entrées au niveau chapitre, nous devons invoquer \com{l@chapter} en
-% ignorant l'argument numéro de page. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et
-% les choix de mise en page de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{plf@setform}. Puis le fichier partlof est
-% inséré, suivi d'un étai, puis l'environnement \env{ptc@verse} est terminé.
-% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup
- \makeatletter
- \@ifundefined{plf@pgno}%
- {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
- \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
- \plf@setform
- \openpartlof\global\inpartloftrue
- \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}%
- \global\inpartloffalse\closepartlof
- \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-1\baselineskip}
- \leavevmode\mtc@strut
- \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
- \end{ptc@verse}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
-% \begin{environment}{samepage}
-% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlof}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break (if \com{chapter} is
-% not defined), and \com{afterpartlof}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential.
-% \or\relax
-% La partie finale consiste seulement à~ajouter le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la possibilité d'une coupure de page
-% (si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie), et \com{afterpartlof}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) est essentielle.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \kernafterpartlof
- \nopagebreak[4]\plf@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
- \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
- \par\@ifundefined{chapter}{\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}%
- \afterpartlof\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{The \ucom{partlot} command}\icom{partlot}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{La commande \ucom{partlot}}\icom{partlot}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlot@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This command must be used after \com{part} if you need a partlot (no automatic partlot).
-% First, \com{partlot} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if
-% it is missing. Then, \com{partlot@} is called with the effective position as argument:
-% \or\relax
-% Cette commande doit être utilisée après \com{part} si vous souhaitez avoir une partlot (pas de partlot
-% automatique). Tout d'abord, \com{partlot} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur
-% par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il est absent. Puis, \com{partlot@} est appelée avec la position effective comme
-% argument:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\partlot{\@ifnextchar[{\partlot@}{\partlot@[d]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlot@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\Thepart}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{partlot@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@partlot@used@} (for a consistency
-% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the partlot file):
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{partlot@} fait le véritable travail.
-% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@partlot@used@}
-% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les suffixes longs sont utilisés ou non (pour construire
-% le nom du fichier partlot):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%
-\def\partlot@[#1]{%
-\global\@partlot@used@true
-\if@mtc@longext@%
- \def\@tocfile{plt\Thepart}%
-\else
- \def\@tocfile{U\Thepart}%
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence of the partlot file and give a warning if it is not here:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis,\imess{I0006} nous vérifions la présence du fichier partlot et donnons un avertissement s'il n'est pas là:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
- \if@mtc@FE
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}%
- {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
- \@mtc@empty@partlof@true
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If the partlot file is present, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first,
-% \com{beforepartlot}, of course:
-% \or\relax
-% Si le fichier est présent, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais devons ajouter un peu de code pour la présentation;
-% d'abord, \com{beforepartlot}, bien sûr:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \beforepartlot
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth}
-% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlotstyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase}
-% \begin{macro}{\plttitle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If \com{chapter} is defined, we just set the page marks with the partlot title and set the page style:
-% \or\relax
-% Si \com{chapter} est définie, nous mettons simplement le titre de la partlot dans les marques de page et
-% établissons le style de page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifundefined{chapter}{}{%
- \global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth
- \global\let\@mkboth\markboth
- \thispagepartlotstyle
- \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\plttitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\plttitle}}%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilt}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
-% \begin{macro}{\plttitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
-% \begin{environment}{samepage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A \env{samepage} environment is begun, then the argument is treated to set the position of
-% the partlof title. If the title string is empty, this forces the positionning.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis l'argument est traité pour établir la
-% position du titre de la partlot. Si la chaîne de titre est vide, le positionnement est forcé.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \relax\begin{samepage}%
- \if #1e\let\do@ptilt\e@pti
- \else\if #1n\let\do@ptilt\n@pti
- \else\if #1c\let\do@ptilt\c@pti
- \else\if #1l\let\do@ptilt\l@pti
- \else\if #1r\let\do@ptilt\r@pti
- \else\if #1d\let\do@ptilt\df@ptilt
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \mtc@CkStr{\plttitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@ptilt\e@pti\relax\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
-% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the partlot, then we set the font:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la partlot,
-% puis établissons la fonte:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \raggedright
- \parskip=\z@%
- \reset@font\pltfont%
- \parindent=\z@%
- \nopagebreak[4]%
- \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
- \par\noindent
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\plt@rule}
-% \begin{environment}{tabular}
-% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilt}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v}
-% \begin{macro}{\plttitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\hline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The partlot title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between
-% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary.
-% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the partlot.
-% \or\relax
-% Le titre de la partlot est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher
-% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si
-% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la partlot.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx\plt@rule\relax
- \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
- \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilt{\mtc@v\plttitle}\\
- \end{tabular}%
- \else
- \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
- \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilt{\mtc@v\plttitle}\\\hline
- \mtc@hstrut\\
- \end{tabular}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques
-% paramètres de mise en page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\*[-\baselineskip]\mtc@BBR
- \leftmargin\ptcindent \rightmargin\ptcindent
- \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
- \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We enter in a \env{ptc@verse} environment to format the parttoc.
-% If necessary, the toc depth is forced (locally) to \dcnt{partlotdepth}.
-% A little trick is necessary to adjust the position.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous entrons dans un environnement \env{ptc@verse} pour mettre en page la partlot.
-% Si nécessaire la profondeur de table des matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{partlotdepth}.
-% Une petite astuce est nécessaire pour ajuster la position. Une ligne blanche est nécessaire pour éviter une
-% indentation négative.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \begin{ptc@verse}{\pltoffset}%
- \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}%
- {\c@lotdepth=\c@partlotdepth
- \ifnum\c@lotdepth<1\relax\c@lotdepth=1\fi}
- \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\plt@pgno}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\plt@setform}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\openpartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\closepartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
-% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version.
-% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{plt@setform}.
-% Then the partlot file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{ptc@verse} environment is terminated.
-% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file.
-% \or\relax
-% Si les lignes de contenu doivent ne pas avoir de numéros de pages, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa
-% version sans points de conduite. Pour les entrées au niveau chapitre, nous devons invoquer \com{l@chapter} en
-% ignorant l'argument numéro de page. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et
-% les choix de mise en page de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{plt@setform}. Puis le fichier partlot est
-% inséré, suivi d'un étai, puis l'environnement \env{ptc@verse} est terminé.
-% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup
- \makeatletter
- \@ifundefined{plt@pgno}%
- {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
- \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
- \plt@setform
- \openpartlot\global\inpartlottrue
- \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}%
- \global\inpartlotfalse\closepartlot
- \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-1\baselineskip}
- \leavevmode\mtc@strut
- \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
- \end{ptc@verse}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
-% \begin{environment}{samepage}
-% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break (if \com{chapter} is
-% not defined), and \com{afterpartlot}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential.
-% \or\relax
-% La partie finale consiste seulement à~ajouter le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la possibilité d'une coupure de page
-% (si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie), et \com{afterpartlot}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) est essentielle.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \kernafterpartlot
- \nopagebreak[4]\plt@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
- \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
- \par\@ifundefined{chapter}{\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}%
- \afterpartlot\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Auxiliary commands for printing parttocs}\label{s+code+aux.commands.parttoc}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Commandes auxiliaires pour l'impression des parttocs}\label{s+code+aux.commands.parttoc}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@xpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@pchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@psect}
-% \begin{macro}{\pchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\psect}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The following auxiliary commands are used in the printing of parttocs. Note that \com{l@xpart} uses a huge depth
-% to inhibit the printing of its contents line (except if you cheat). These commands are similar to
-% \com{l@subsection}, only the arguments have been altered:
-% \or\relax
-% Les commandes auxiliaires suivantes sont utilisées dans l'impression des parttocs. Notez que \com{l@xpart}
-% utilise une profondeur énorme pour inhiber l'impression de sa ligne de contenu (sauf si vous trichez). Ces
-% commandes sont similaires à~\com{l@subsection}, seuls les arguments ont été altérés:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\l@xpart{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1.0em}{2.3em}}
-\def\l@pchapter{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.0em}{2.3em}}
-\def\l@psect{\@dottedtocline{2}{1.0em}{2.3em}}
-\def\pchapter{pchapter}
-\def\psect{psect}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Patching the \ucom{part} command, continued}\label{s+code+patching.part.2}\icom{part}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{part}, suite}\label{s+code+patching.part.2}\icom{part}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\sv@part}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\@part}
-% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\sv@spart}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptc@spart}
-% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
-% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\partbegin}
-% \begin{macro}{\partend}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We patch both branches of the \com{part} command: \com{@part} (unstarred \com{part}) and \com{@spart}
-% (\com{part*}). We add the incrementation of the \cnt{ptc} counter to both branches.
-% In the unstarred branch,
-% we add \texttt{xpart} entries in the TOC, the LOF and the LOT. In the starred branch, we add a \com{partbegin}
-% line in the TOC. This command is just a marker and does nothing real (\com{relax}).
-% \or\relax
-% Nous modifions les deux branches de la commande \com{part}: \com{@part} (\com{part} non étoilée) et \com{@spart}
-% (\com{part*}). Nous ajoutons l'incrémentation du compteur \cnt{ptc} dans les deux branches. Dans
-% la branche non étoilée, nous ajoutons des entrées
-% \texttt{xpart} dans les fichiers table des matières, liste des figures et liste des tableaux. Dans la branche
-% étoilée, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{partbegin} dans le fichier table des matières. Cette commande est juste un
-% marqueur et ne fait rien de concret (\com{relax}).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\sv@part\mtc@svpart
-\def\@part[#1]#2{\sv@part[{#1}]{#2}\relax
-\addcontentsline{lof}{xpart}{#1}%
-\addcontentsline{lot}{xpart}{#1}%
-\addcontentsline{toc}{xpart}{#1}%
-\stepcounter{ptc}}
-\let\sv@spart\@spart
-\def\@spart{\stepcounter{ptc}\sv@spart}
-\let\ptc@spart\@spart
-\def\@spart{\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partend}\ptc@spart}
-\def\@spart{\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}\ptc@spart}
-\let\partend\relax
-\let\partbegin\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \ucom{doparttoc} command and its siblings}\label{s+code+doparttoc}\icom{doparttoc}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{La commande \ucom{doparttoc} et ses cousines}\label{s+code+doparttoc}\icom{doparttoc}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{doparttoc} command works like the \com{dominitoc} command, \com{dopartlof} like \com{dominilof}
-% and \com{dopartlot} like \com{dominilot}.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{doparttoc} fonctionne comme la commande \com{dominitoc}, \com{dopartlof} comme \com{dominilof}
-% et \com{dopartlot} comme \com{dominilot}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@doparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{doparttoc} command extracts information from the \suffix{.toc} file and creates the
-% \suffix{.ptc}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.ptc} becomes \suffix{.P} on MS-DOS).
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{doparttoc} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.toc} et crée les fichiers
-% \suffix{.ptc}\meta{N} (\suffix{.ptc} devient \suffix{.P} sous MS-DOS).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@doparttoc#1{{%
- \makeatletter
- \setcounter{ptc}{0}%
- \PTC@next#1.toc\relax\\}\setcounter{ptc}{0}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dopartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{dopartlof} command extracts information from the
-% \suffix{.lof} file and creates the \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.plf} becomes \suffix{.G} on MS-DOS).
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{dopartlof} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lof} et crée les fichiers
-% \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} (\suffix{.plf} devient \suffix{.G} sous MS-DOS).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dopartlof#1{{%
- \makeatletter
- \setcounter{ptc}{0}%
- \PLF@next#1.lof\relax\\}\setcounter{ptc}{0}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dopartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{dopartlot} command extracts information from the
-% \suffix{.lot} file and creates the \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.plt} becomes \suffix{.U} on MS-DOS).
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{dopartlot} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lot} et crée les fichiers
-% \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} (\suffix{.plt} devient \suffix{.U} sous MS-DOS).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dopartlot#1{{%
- \makeatletter
- \setcounter{ptc}{0}%
- \PLT@next#1.lot\relax\\}\setcounter{ptc}{0}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define the user macros, who detect the optional argument:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons les macros pour l'utilisateur, qui détectent l'argument optionnel:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\doparttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\doparttoc@}{\doparttoc@[l]}}
-\def\dopartlof{\@ifnextchar[{\dopartlof@}{\dopartlof@[l]}}
-\def\dopartlot{\@ifnextchar[{\dopartlot@}{\dopartlot@[l]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@ptitc}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{doparttoc} (it becomes the default position for titles of parttocs)
-% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{doparttoc} (il devient la position par défaut pour les
-% titres des parttocs) et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\doparttoc@[#1]{%
-\if@mtc@hints@
- \if@doparttoc@used@
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The \string\doparttoc \space command
- \MessageBreak
- has been invoked more than once
- \MessageBreak}
- \global\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-\global\@doparttoc@used@true
-\if #1e\let\df@ptitc\e@pti%
-\else\if #1n\let\df@ptitc\n@pti%
-\else\if #1c\let\df@ptitc\c@pti%
-\else\if #1l\let\df@ptitc\l@pti%
-\else\if #1r\let\df@ptitc\r@pti%
-\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
-\@@doparttoc}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilf}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dopartlof} (it becomes the default position for titles of partlofs)
-% and flag this macro as used, a hint detects any spurious invocation.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dopartlof} (il devient la position par défaut pour les
-% titres des partlofs) et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dopartlof@[#1]{%
-\if@mtc@hints@
- \if@dopartlof@used@
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The \string\dopartlof \space command
- \MessageBreak
- has been invoked more than once
- \MessageBreak}
- \global\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-\global\@dopartlof@used@true
-\if #1e\let\df@ptilf\e@pti%
-\else\if #1n\let\df@ptilf\n@pti%
-\else\if #1c\let\df@ptilf\c@pti%
-\else\if #1l\let\df@ptilf\l@pti%
-\else\if #1r\let\df@ptilf\r@pti%
-\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
-\@@dopartlof}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilt}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dopartlot} (it becomes the default position for titles of partlofs)
-% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dopartlot} (il devient la position par défaut pour les titres
-% des partlots) et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dopartlot@[#1]{%
-\if@mtc@hints@
- \if@dopartlot@used@
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The \string\dopartlot \space command
- \MessageBreak
- has been invoked more than once
- \MessageBreak}
- \global\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-\global\@dopartlot@used@true
-\if #1e\let\df@ptilt\e@pti%
-\else\if #1n\let\df@ptilt\n@pti%
-\else\if #1c\let\df@ptilt\c@pti%
-\else\if #1l\let\df@ptilt\l@pti%
-\else\if #1r\let\df@ptilt\r@pti%
-\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
-\@@dopartlot}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\@@doparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\@@dopartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\@@dopartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% These macros invoke the \verb|@dopart...| commands to create the mini-table file, then close the file
-% descriptor.
-% \or\relax
-% Ces macros invoquent les \verb|\@dopart...| pour créer le fichier de mini-table, puis ferment le descripteur de
-% fichier.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@@doparttoc{\@doparttoc{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
-\def\@@dopartlof{\@dopartlof{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
-\def\@@dopartlot{\@dopartlot{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Processing macros for the parttocs}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Macros de traitement pour les parttocs}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@loop}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste puis la retirons de la tête de liste:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\PTC@next#1\relax#2\\{%
- \edef\PTC@list{#2}%
- \PTC@loop{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@toc}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@explist}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Check if the list is empty:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous testons si la liste est vide:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\PTC@toc{%
- \ifx\PTC@list\@empty\else\expandafter\PTC@explist\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\part}
-% \begin{macro}{\theptc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcname}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\imess{I0033} macro \com{PTC@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the TOC file and detects interesting keywords.
-% If \com{part} is found, the \cnt{ptc} counter is incremented and a new partlof file is created.
-% \or\relax
-% La\imess{I0033} macro \com{PTC@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier table des matières et détecte les
-% mots-clés intéressants. Si \com{part} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{ptc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier parttoc
-% est créé.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\PTC@contentsline#1#2#3#4{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part
- \stepcounter{ptc}%
- \if@mtc@longext@%
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.ptc\theptc\@gobble}%
- \def\ptcname{\jobname.ptc\theptc}%
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.P\theptc\@gobble}%
- \def\ptcname{\jobname.P\theptc}%
- \fi
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\ptcname
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starpart\relax
- \stepcounter{ptc}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcname}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si des suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table,
-% puis nous ouvrons ce fichier:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \if@mtc@longext@%
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.ptc\theptc}%
- \def\ptcname{\jobname.ptc\theptc}%
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.P\theptc}%
- \def\ptcname{\jobname.P\theptc}%
- \fi
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\ptcname
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}:
-% \or\relax
-% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\pchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\coffee}
-% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\paragraph}
-% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines; this code extracts and writes info for chapters, sections, etc.:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées; ce code extrait et écrit les informations pour les
-% chapitres, sections, etc.:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\appendix
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\pchapter
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\coffee
- \MTC@WriteCoffeeline{#1}{#3}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsection
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsubsection
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSSS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\paragraph
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcP}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subparagraph
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSP}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\starchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\starsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\starsubsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\starsubsubsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\starparagraph}
-% \begin{macro}{\starsubparagraph}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And for the starred sectionning commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Et pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starchapter
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsection
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsubsection
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSSS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starparagraph
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcP}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubparagraph
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSP}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@explist}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The loop to read the lines of the TOC file; expands the list of entries and call \com{PTC@next} to process the
-% first one:
-% \or\relax
-% La boucle de lecture du fichier table des matières; expanse la liste des entrées et appelle \com{PTC@next} pour
-% traiter la première:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\PTC@explist{\expandafter\PTC@next\PTC@list\\}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@loop}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@toc}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@read}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If\SMM{\lmess{W0013}\\\lmess{I0025}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries.
-% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list.
-% \or\relax
-% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0013}\\\lmess{I0025}} une entrée est trouvée, on boucle ligne par ligne en recherchant des entrées
-% intéressantes. Sinon, traiter l'entrée suivante de la liste.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\PTC@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
- \ifeof\@inputcheck
- \mtcPackageWarning[W0013]{minitoc}%
- {No file #1
- \MessageBreak
- PARTTOCS NOT PREPARED}%
- \expandafter\PTC@toc
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0025]{minitoc}%
- {PREPARING PARTTOCS FROM #1}%
- \expandafter\PTC@read\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@read}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@line}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.toc} file.
-% \or\relax
-% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\PTC@read{%
- \read\@inputcheck to\PTC@line
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@test}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@line}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{PTC@test} has enough arguments:
-% \or\relax
-% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{PTC@test} a suffisamment d'arguments:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\PTC@test\PTC@line.....\PTC@%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@test}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{PTC@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the TOC file, mainly to
-% delimit parts:
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{PTC@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier table des matières,
-% principalement pour délimiter les parties:
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@toc}
-% \begin{macro}{\PTC@read}
-% \begin{macro}{\partend}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the
-% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. Finally process the next file in the
-% list.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous examinons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée «~intéressante~», nous la traitons. Si
-% c'est \com{@input}, nous ajoutons le fichier à~la liste. Sinon, nous l'ignorons. La boucle est recommencée si la
-% fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\PTC@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\PTC@{%
- \ifx#1\contentsline
- \let\mtc@string\string
- \PTC@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
- \let\mtc@string\relax
- \else\ifx#1\@input
- \edef\PTC@list{\PTC@list#2\relax}%
- \else\ifx#1\partend
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
- \else\ifx#1\partbegin
- \addtocounter{ptc}{-1}%
- \fi\fi\fi\fi
- \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\PTC@toc
- \else\expandafter\PTC@read\fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Processing macros for the partlofs}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Macros de traitement pour les partlofs}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@loop}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante de la liste et le retirons de la tête de la liste:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\PLF@next#1\relax#2\\{%
- \edef\PLF@list{#2}%
- \PLF@loop{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@lof}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@explist}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Check if the list is empty:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous testons si la liste est vide:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\PLF@lof{%
- \ifx\PLF@list\@empty\else\expandafter\PLF@explist\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\part}
-% \begin{macro}{\theptc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\plfname}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@WriteContentsLine}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The macro \com{PLF@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOF file and detects interesting keywords.
-% If \com{part} is found, the \cnt{ptc} counter is incremented and a new partlof file is created.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{PLF@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des figures et détecte les
-% mots-clés intéressants. Si \com{part} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{ptc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier partlof
-% est créé.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\PLF@contentsline#1#2#3#4{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xpart
- \stepcounter{ptc}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\plfname}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si des suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table,
-% puis nous ouvrons ce fichier:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \if@mtc@longext@%
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.plf\theptc}%
- \def\plfname{\jobname.plf\theptc}%
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.G\theptc}%
- \def\plfname{\jobname.G\theptc}%
- \fi
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\plfname
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\figure}
-% \begin{macro}{\subfigure}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
-% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines:
-% \or\relax
-% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
-% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\figure
- \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}%
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{plf}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subfigure
- \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}%
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{plfS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@explist}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The loop to read the lines of the LOF file; expands the list of entries and call \com{PLF@next} to process the
-% first one:
-% \or\relax
-% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des figures; expanse la liste des entrées et appelle \com{PLF@next} pour
-% traiter la première:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\PLF@explist{\expandafter\PLF@next\PLF@list\\}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@loop}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@lof}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@read}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If\SMM{\lmess{W0011}\\\lmess{I0035}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries.
-% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list.
-% \or\relax
-% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0011}\\\lmess{I0035}} une entrée est trouvée, on boucle ligne par ligne en recherchant des entrées
-% intéressantes. Sinon, traiter l'entrée suivante de la liste.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\PLF@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
- \ifeof\@inputcheck
- \mtcPackageWarning[W0011]{minitoc}%
- {No file #1
- \MessageBreak
- PARTLOFS NOT PREPARED}%
- \expandafter\PLF@lof
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0035]{minitoc}%
- {PREPARING PARTLOFS FROM #1}%
- \expandafter\PLF@read\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@read}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@line}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.lof} file.
-% \or\relax
-% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lof}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\PLF@read{%
- \read\@inputcheck to\PLF@line
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@test}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@line}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{PLF@test} has enough arguments:
-% \or\relax
-% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{PLF@test} a suffisamment d'arguments:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\PLF@test\PLF@line.....\PLF@%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@test}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{PLF@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOF file, mainly to
-% delimit parts:
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{PLF@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des figures,
-% principalement pour délimiter les parties:
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@lof}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLF@read}
-% \begin{macro}{\partend}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the
-% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. Finally process the next file in the
-% list.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous examinons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée «~intéressante~», nous la traitons. Si
-% c'est \com{@input}, nous ajoutons le fichier à~la liste. Sinon, nous l'ignorons. La boucle est recommencée si la
-% fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\PLF@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\PLF@{%
- \ifx#1\contentsline
- \let\mtc@string\string
- \PLF@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
- \let\mtc@string\relax
- \else\ifx#1\@input
- \edef\PLF@list{\PLF@list#2\relax}%
- \else\ifx#1\partend
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
- \else\ifx#1\partbegin
- \addtocounter{ptc}{-1}%
- \fi\fi\fi\fi
- \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\PLF@lof
- \else\expandafter\PLF@read\fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Processing macros for the partlots}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Macros de traitement pour les partlots}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@loop}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante de la liste et le retirons de la tête de la liste:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\PLT@next#1\relax#2\\{%
- \edef\PLT@list{#2}%
- \PLT@loop{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@lot}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@explist}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Check if the list is empty:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous testons si la liste est vide:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\PLT@lot{%
- \ifx\PLT@list\@empty\else\expandafter\PLT@explist\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\part}
-% \begin{macro}{\theptc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltname}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@WriteContentsLine}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The macro \com{PLT@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOT file and detects interesting keywords.
-% If \com{part} is found, the \cnt{ptc} counter is incremented and a new partlot file is created.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{PLT@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des tableaux et détecte les
-% mots-clés intéressants. Si \com{part} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{ptc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier partlot
-% est créé.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\PLT@contentsline#1#2#3#4{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xpart
- \stepcounter{ptc}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltname}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si des suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table,
-% puis nous ouvrons ce fichier:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \if@mtc@longext@%
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.plt\theptc}%
- \def\pltname{\jobname.plt\theptc}%
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.U\theptc}%
- \def\pltname{\jobname.U\theptc}%
- \fi
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\pltname
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\table}
-% \begin{macro}{\subtable}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
-% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines:
-% \or\relax
-% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
-% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\table
- \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}%
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{plt}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subtable
- \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}%
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{pltS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@explist}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The loop to read the lines of the LOT file; expands the list of entries and call \com{PLT@next} to process the
-% first one:
-% \or\relax
-% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des tableaux; expanse la liste des entrées et appelle \com{PLT@next} pour
-% traiter la première:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\PLT@explist{\expandafter\PLT@next\PLT@list\\}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@loop}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@lot}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@read}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If\SMM{\lmess{W0012}\\\lmess{I0038}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries.
-% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list.
-% \or\relax
-% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0012}\\\lmess{I0038}} une entrée est trouvée, on boucle ligne par ligne en recherchant des entrées
-% intéressantes. Sinon, traiter l'entrée suivante de la liste.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\PLT@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
- \ifeof\@inputcheck
- \mtcPackageWarning[W0012]{minitoc}%
- {No file #1
- \MessageBreak
- PARTLOTS NOT PREPARED}%
- \expandafter\PLT@lot
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0038]{minitoc}%
- {PREPARING PARTLOTS FROM #1}%
- \expandafter\PLT@read\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@read}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@line}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.lot} file.
-% \or\relax
-% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lot}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\PLT@read{%
- \read\@inputcheck to\PLT@line
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@test}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@line}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{PLT@test} has enough arguments:
-% \or\relax
-% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{PLT@test} a suffisamment d'arguments:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\PLT@test\PLT@line.....\PLT@%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@test}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{PLT@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOT file, mainly to
-% delimit parts:
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{PLT@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des tableaux,
-% principalement pour délimiter les parties:
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@lot}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@read}
-% \begin{macro}{\partend}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the
-% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. Finally process the next file in the
-% list.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous examinons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée «~intéressante~», nous la traitons. Si
-% c'est \com{@input}, nous ajoutons le fichier à~la liste. Sinon, nous l'ignorons. La boucle est recommencée si la
-% fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\PLT@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\PLT@{%
- \ifx#1\contentsline
- \let\mtc@string\string
- \PLT@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
- \let\mtc@string\relax
- \else\ifx#1\@input
- \edef\PLT@list{\PLT@list#2\relax}%
- \else\ifx#1\partend
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
- \else\ifx#1\partbegin
- \addtocounter{ptc}{-1}%
- \fi\fi\fi\fi
- \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\PLT@lot
- \else\expandafter\PLT@read\fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% End of the part level stuff (begun in section~\vref{s+code+part.level}):
-% \or\relax
-% Fin du code pour le niveau partie (débuté dans la section~\vref{s+code+part.level}):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Depth counters for sectlofs and sectlots}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Compteurs de profondeur pour les sectlofs et les sectlots}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\newcounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If the counters \dcnt{lofdepth} and \dcnt{lotdepth} are defined, we create new counters for the depths of
-% the corresponding mini-tables:
-% \dcnt{sectlofdepth} and \dcnt{sectlotdepth}.
-% These counters are initialized to~2.
-% This is done after the loading of the packages, in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block:
-% \or\relax
-% Si les compteurs \dcnt{lofdepth} et \dcnt{lotdepth} sont définis, nous créons de nouveaux compteurs pour les
-% profondeurs des mini-tables correspondantes:
-% \dcnt{sectlofdepth} et \dcnt{sectlotdepth}.
-% Ces compteurs sont initialisés à~2.
-% Ceci est fait après le chargement des paquetages, dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}%
- {\newcounter{sectlofdepth}\setcounter{sectlofdepth}{2}}%
- \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}%
- {\newcounter{sectlotdepth}\setcounter{sectlotdepth}{2}}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Section-level commands}\label{s+code+section.level.commands}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Commandes au niveau section}\label{s+code+section.level.commands}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@undef@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The section-level commands are defined only if \com{chapter} is \emph{not} defined, hence in article-like
-% document classes, and only if \com{section} is defined:
-% \or\relax
-% Les commandes au niveau section sont définies seulement si \com{chapter} \emph{n'est pas} définie, donc dans
-% les classes de document du genre article, et seulement si \com{section} est définie:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@chapter@undef@ \if@mtc@section@def@
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis}
-% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc}
-% \begin{macro}{\decrementstc}
-% \begin{macro}{\incrementstc}
-% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{W0005} define the obsolete command \com{firstsectionis} (with its harmless warning), the counter \cnt{stc}
-% of secttocs, the \com{adjuststc}, \com{decrementstc} and \com{incrementstc} commands,
-% the depth counter \dcnt{secttocdepth} and its default
-% value~2 (to include at least the subsections), the horizontal rule \com{stc@rule} (rule before/after
-% secttoc/sectlof/sectlot), the indentation (both sides) \com{stcindent} for the secttocs (with its default
-% values).
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{W0005} définissons la commande obsolète \com{firstsectionis} (avec son avertissement bénin),
-% le compteur \cnt{stc} de secttocs, les commandes \com{adjuststc}, \com{decrementstc}
-% et \com{incrementstc},
-% le compteur de profondeur \dcnt{secttocdepth} et sa valeur par défaut~2 (pour inclure au moins
-% les sous-sections), le filet horizontal \com{stc@rule} (filet avant/après la secttoc/sectlof/sectlot), l'indentation
-% (des deux côtés) \com{stcindent} pour les secttocs (avec leurs valeurs par défaut).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\firstsectionis#1{\mtcPackageWarning[W0005]{minitoc}%
- {\string\firstsectionis \space is an obsolete (ignored)
- \MessageBreak
- command}%
- \@firstsectionis@used@true}
-\newcounter{stc}\setcounter{stc}{0}%
-\newcommand{\adjuststc}[1][1]{\addtocounter{stc}{#1}}%
-\def\decrementstc{\addtocounter{stc}{-1}}%
-\def\incrementstc{\addtocounter{stc}{+1}}%
-\newcounter{secttocdepth}\setcounter{secttocdepth}{2}%
-\def\stc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}%
-\newlength\stcindent \stcindent=24\p@
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Fonts commands for secttocs and co.}\label{s+code+fonts.commands.secttocs}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Commands de fontes pour les secttocs et co.}\label{s+code+fonts.commands.secttocs}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\stcfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcSSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcSPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\slffont}
-% \begin{macro}{\slfSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\sltfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\sltSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\stifont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define the fonts commands for the secttocs, sectlofs and sectlots and their titles:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons les commandes de fontes pour les secttocs, sectlofs et sectlots et pour leurs titres:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\stcfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries} % secttoc
-\def\stcSSfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} % (subsections)
-\let\stcSSSfont\stcfont % (subsubsections)
-\let\stcPfont\stcfont % (paragraphs)
-\let\stcSPfont\stcfont % (subparagraphs)
-\let\slffont\stcfont % sectlof (figures)
-\let\slfSfont\stcfont % sectlof (subfigures)
-\let\sltfont\stcfont % sectlot (tables)
-\let\sltSfont\stcfont % sectlot (subtables)
-\def\stifont{\large\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} % titles
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Internal macros for title positionning}\label{s+code+int.macros.title.pos.secttocs}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Macros internes pour le positionnement du titre}\label{s+code+int.macros.title.pos.secttocs}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@sti}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some internal macros for title positionning, from the optional arguments of \com{dosecttoc} and \com{secttoc}
-% commands (and siblings).
-% Centering, flushleft, flushright or empty titles (with a vertical correction for empty titles,
-% from \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}):
-% \or\relax
-% Voici quelques macros internes pour le positionnement du titre, selon les arguments optionnels des
-% commandes \com{dosecttoc} et \com{secttoc} (et leurs cousines).
-% Titres centrés, cadrés à~gauche, cadrés à~droite ou vides (avec un correction verticale pour les titres vides,
-% d'après \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\c@sti#1{\null\hfill #1\hfill\null}
-\def\l@sti#1{\null #1\hfill\null}
-\def\r@sti#1{\null\hfill #1\null}
-\def\e@sti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}
-\def\n@sti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@stitc}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@stitc}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@stilf}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@stilf}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@stilt}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@stilt}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% By default, titles are flushleft.
-% \or\relax
-% Par défaut, les titres sur cadrés à~gauche.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\do@stitc\l@sti
-\let\df@stitc\l@sti
-\let\do@stilf\l@sti
-\let\df@stilf\l@sti
-\let\do@stilt\l@sti
-\let\df@stilt\l@sti
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \texttt{stc@verse} environment}\label{s+code+stc@verse}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{L'environnement \texttt{stc@verse}}\label{s+code+stc@verse}
-% \fi
-% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
-% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \env{stc@verse} environment is a very simple list environment, analog to the standard \env{verse} environment.
-% Some formatting parameters are adjusted. The \iopt{tight}\ioptd{loose}\uopt{tight/loose}
-% and \iopt{k-tight}\ioptd{k-loose}\uopt{k-tight/k-loose} package options
-% are honored.
-% The \env{stc@verse} environment has an argument which is an horizontal offset (a command like \com{stcoffset}).
-% \or\relax
-% L'environnement \env{stc@verse} est un environnement de liste très simple, analogue à~l'environnement
-% standard \env{verse}. Certains paramètres de mise en page sont ajustés. Les options de paquetage
-% \iopt{tight}\ioptd{loose}\uopt{tight/loose} et \iopt{k-tight}\ioptd{k-loose}\uopt{k-tight/k-loose} sont honorées.
-% L'environnement \env{stc@verse} a un argument qui est un déplacement horizontal (une commande telle que \com{stcoffset}).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\stc@verse#1{\let\\=\@centercr
- \list{}{%
- \itemsep=\z@ \itemindent=\z@ \topsep=1ex
- \listparindent=\itemindent \partopsep=\z@
- \iftightmtc \parsep=\z@ \fi
- \ifktightmtc \parskip=\z@ \fi
- \leftmargin=\stcindent \rightmargin=\leftmargin
- \addtolength{\leftmargin}{+#1}%
- \addtolength{\rightmargin}{-#1}%
- }%
- \item[]}%
-\def\endstc@verse{\nopagebreak[4]\endlist}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \ucom{secttoc}, \ucom{sectlof}, and \ucom{sectlot} commands}\icom{secttoc}\icom{sectlof}\icom{sectlot}
-% These three commands are very similar.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Les commandes \ucom{secttoc}, \ucom{sectlof} et \ucom{sectlot}}\icom{secttoc}\icom{sectlof}\icom{sectlot}
-% Ces trois commandes sont très similaires.
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{The \ucom{secttoc} command}\label{s+code+secttoc}\icom{secttoc}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{La commande \ucom{secttoc}}\label{s+code+secttoc}\icom{secttoc}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\secttoc@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{secttoc} command must be used after \com{section} if you need a secttoc (no automatic secttoc).
-% Its code is similar to the code of \com{minitoc} (but simpler).
-% First, \com{secttoc} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if
-% it is missing. Then, \com{secttoc@} is called with the effective position as argument:
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{secttoc} doit être utilisée après \com{section} si vous désirez une secttoc (pas de secttoc
-% automatique). Son code est similaire à~celui de \com{minitoc} (mais plus simple). Tout d'abord,
-% \com{secttoc} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il
-% est omis. Puis, \com{secttoc@} est appelée avec la position effective comme argument:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\secttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\secttoc@}{\secttoc@[d]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\secttoc@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\thestc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{secttoc@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@secttoc@used@} (for a consistency
-% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the secttoc file):
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{secttoc@} effectue le vrai travail.
-% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@secttoc@used@}
-% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les longs suffixes sont utilisés ou non (pour
-% construire le nom du fichier secttoc):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\secttoc@[#1]{%
-\global\@secttoc@used@true
-\if@mtc@longext@%
- \def\@tocfile{stc\thestc}%
-\else
- \def\@tocfile{S\thestc}%
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence and the emptiness of the secttoc file and give a warning if it is not here or is empty:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons la présence et la vacuité du fichier secttoc, en donnant un avertissement s'il est absent ou
-% est vide:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
- \if@mtc@FE
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}%
- {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
- \@mtc@empty@secttoc@true
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforesecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispagesecttocstyle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If the secttoc file is present and not empty, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first,
-% \com{beforesecttoc}, of course, and the page style feature:
-% \or\relax
-% Si le fichier secttoc est présent et non vide, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais nous devons au préalable ajouter du
-% code de présentation: d'abord, \com{beforesecttoc}, bien sûr, et le dispositif de style de page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \beforesecttoc
- \thispagesecttocstyle
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@stitc}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
-% \begin{macro}{\stctitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
-% \begin{environment}{samepage}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We begin a \env{samepage} environment, then treat the positionning argument. If the title is empty, we
-% simulate the ``\texttt{e}'' positionning.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis traitons l'argument de positionnement. Si le titre est
-% vide, nous simulons le positionnement «~\texttt{e}~».
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\stctitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\stctitle}}%
- \relax\begin{samepage}%
- \if #1e\let\do@stitc\e@sti
- \else\if #1n\let\do@stitc\n@sti
- \else\if #1c\let\do@stitc\c@sti
- \else\if #1l\let\do@stitc\l@sti
- \else\if #1r\let\do@stitc\r@sti
- \else\if #1d\let\do@stitc\df@stitc
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \mtc@CkStr{\stctitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@stitc\e@sti\relax\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
-% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the secttoc, then we set the font:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la secttoc, puis nous
-% établissons la fonte:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \raggedright
- \parskip=\z@%
- \reset@font\stcfont%
- \parindent=\z@%
- \nopagebreak[4]%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule}
-% \begin{environment}{tabular}
-% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\stifont}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@stitc}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v}
-% \begin{macro}{\stctitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\hline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The secttoc title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between
-% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary.
-% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the secttoc.
-% \or\relax
-% Le titre de la secttoc est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher
-% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si
-% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la secttoc.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
- \par\noindent
- \nopagebreak[4]%
- \ifx\stc@rule\relax
- \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
- \reset@font\stifont\do@stitc{\mtc@v\stctitle}\\
- \end{tabular}%
- \else
- \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
- \reset@font\stifont\do@stitc{\mtc@v\stctitle}\\\hline
- \end{tabular}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{5}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcindent}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques
-% paramètres de mise en page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR
- \leftmargin\stcindent \rightmargin\stcindent
- \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
- \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@secttocdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We enter in a \env{stc@verse} environment to format the secttoc. The toc depth is forced (locally) to
-% \dcnt{secttocdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous débutons un environnement \env{stc@verse} pour mettre en page la secttoc. La profondeur de table des
-% matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{secttocdepth}. Une petite astuce est nécessaire
-% pour ajuster le positionnement.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \begin{stc@verse}{\stcoffset}\c@tocdepth=\c@secttocdepth%
- \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\stc@pgno}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\stc@setform}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\opensecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\closesecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
-% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version.
-% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{stc@setform}.
-% Then the secttoc file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{stc@verse} environment is terminated.
-% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file.
-% \or\relax
-% Si les lignes de contenu ne doivent pas avoir de numéros, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa version
-% sans points de conduite. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et les choix
-% de mise en page issus de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{stc@setform}. Puis le fichier secttoc est
-% inséré, suivi d'un étai, et l'environnement \env{stc@verse} est terminé.
-% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup
- \makeatletter
- \stc@setform%
- \@ifundefined{stc@pgno}%
- {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
- \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
- \stc@setform%
- \opensecttoc\global\insecttoctrue
- \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}%
- \global\insecttocfalse\closesecttoc
- \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip}
- \leavevmode\mtc@strut
- \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
- \end{stc@verse}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
-% \begin{environment}{samepage}
-% \begin{macro}{\aftersecttoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break and \com{aftersecttoc}.
-% \or\relax
-% La partie finale ajoute le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la permission d'une coupure de page et \com{aftersecttoc}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \kernaftersecttoc
- \nopagebreak[4]\stc@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
- \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
- \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\aftersecttoc\fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{The \ucom{sectlof} command}\label{s+code+sectlof}\icom{sectlof}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{La commande \ucom{sectlof}}\label{s+code+sectlof}\icom{sectlof}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlof@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{sectlof} command must be used after \com{section} if you need a sectlof (no automatic sectlof).
-% Its code is similar to the code of \com{minilof} (but simpler).
-% First, \com{sectlof} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if
-% it is missing. Then, \com{sectlof@} is called with the effective position as argument:
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{sectlof} doit être utilisée après \com{section} si vous désirez une sectlof (pas de sectlof
-% automatique). Son code est similaire à~celui de \com{minilof} (mais plus simple). Tout d'abord,
-% \com{sectlof} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il
-% est omis. Puis, \com{sectlof@} est appelée avec la position effective comme argument:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\sectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\sectlof@}{\sectlof@[d]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlof@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\thestc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{sectlof@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@sectlof@used@} (for a consistency
-% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the sectlof file):
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{sectlof@} effectue le vrai travail.
-% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@sectlof@used@}
-% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les longs suffixes sont utilisés ou non (pour
-% construire le nom du fichier sectlof):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\sectlof@[#1]{%
-\global\@sectlof@used@true
-\if@mtc@longext@%
- \def\@tocfile{slf\thestc}%
-\else
- \def\@tocfile{H\thestc}%
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence and the emptiness of the sectlof file and give a warning if it is not here or is empty:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons la présence et la vacuité du fichier sectlof, en donnant un avertissement s'il est absent ou
-% est vide:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
- \if@mtc@FE
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}%
- {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
- \@mtc@empty@sectlof@true
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlofstyle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If the sectlof file is present and not empty, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first,
-% \com{beforesectlof}, of course, and the page style feature:
-% \or\relax
-% Si le fichier sectlof est présent et non vide, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais nous devons au préalable ajouter du
-% code de présentation: d'abord, \com{beforesectlof}, bien sûr, et le dispositif de style de page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \thispagesectlofstyle
-%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\slftitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\slftitle}}%
- \beforesectlof
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{11}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@stilf}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
-% \begin{macro}{\slftitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
-% \begin{environment}{samepage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We begin a \env{samepage} environment, then treat the positionning argument. If the title is empty, we
-% simulate the ``\texttt{e}'' positionning.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis traitons l'argument de positionnement. Si le titre est
-% vide, nous simulons le positionnement «~\texttt{e}~».
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \relax\begin{samepage}%
- \if #1e\let\do@stilf\e@sti
- \else\if #1n\let\do@stilf\n@sti
- \else\if #1c\let\do@stilf\c@sti
- \else\if #1l\let\do@stilf\l@sti
- \else\if #1r\let\do@stilf\r@sti
- \else\if #1d\let\do@stilf\df@stilf
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \mtc@CkStr{\slftitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@stilf\e@sti\relax\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
-% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\slffont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the sectlof, then we set the font:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la sectlof, puis nous
-% établissons la fonte:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \raggedright
- \parskip=\z@%
- \reset@font\slffont%
- \parindent=\z@%
- \nopagebreak[4]%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\slf@rule}
-% \begin{environment}{tabular}
-% \begin{macro}{\stifont}
-% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@stilf}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v}
-% \begin{macro}{\slftitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\hline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The sectlof title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between
-% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary.
-% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the sectlof.
-% \or\relax
-% Le titre de la sectlof est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher
-% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si
-% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la sectlof.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
- \par\noindent
- \ifx\slf@rule\relax
- \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
- \reset@font\stifont\do@stilf{\mtc@v\slftitle}\\
- \end{tabular}%
- \else
- \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
- \mtc@hstrut
- \reset@font\stifont\do@stilf{\mtc@v\slftitle}\\\hline
- \end{tabular}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcindent}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques
-% paramètres de mise en page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR
- \leftmargin\stcindent \rightmargin\stcindent
- \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
- \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
-% \begin{macro}{\slfoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@sectlofdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We enter in a \env{stc@verse} environment to format the sectlof. The toc depth is forced (locally) to
-% \dcnt{sectlofdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous débutons un environnement \env{stc@verse} pour mettre en page la sectlof. La profondeur de table des
-% matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{sectlofdepth}. Une petite astuce est nécessaire
-% pour ajuster le positionnement.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \begin{stc@verse}{\slfoffset}%
- \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}%
- {\c@lofdepth=\c@sectlofdepth
- \ifnum\c@lofdepth<1\relax\c@lofdepth=1\fi}
- \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \lneed{9}
-% \begin{macro}{\slf@pgno}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\slf@setform}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\opensectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\closesectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
-% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version.
-% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{slf@setform}.
-% Then the sectlof file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{stc@verse} environment is terminated.
-% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file.
-% \or\relax
-% Si les lignes de contenu ne doivent pas avoir de numéros, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa version
-% sans points de conduite. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et les choix
-% de mise en page issus de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{slf@setform}. Puis le fichier sectlof est
-% inséré, suivi d'un étai, et l'environnement \env{stc@verse} est terminé.
-% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup
- \makeatletter
- \@ifundefined{slf@pgno}%
- {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
- \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
- \slf@setform%
- \opensectlof\global\insectloftrue
- \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}%
- \global\insectloffalse\closesectlof
- \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
- \end{stc@verse}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
-% \begin{environment}{samepage}
-% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlof}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break and \com{aftersectlof}.
-% The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential.
-% \or\relax
-% La partie finale ajoute le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la permission d'une coupure de page et \com{aftersectlof}.
-% La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) est essentielle.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \kernaftersectlof
- \nopagebreak[4]\slf@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
- \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
- \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\aftersectlof\fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{The \ucom{sectlot} command}\label{s+code+sectlot}\icom{sectlot}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{La commande \ucom{sectlot}}\label{s+code+sectlot}\icom{sectlot}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlot@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{sectlot} command must be used after \com{section} if you need a sectlot (no automatic sectlot).
-% Its code is similar to the code of \com{minilot} (but simpler).
-% First, \com{sectlot} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if
-% it is missing. Then, \com{sectlot@} is called with the effective position as argument:
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{sectlot} doit être utilisée après \com{section} si vous désirez une sectlot (pas de sectlot
-% automatique). Son code est similaire à~celui de \com{minilot} (mais plus simple). Tout d'abord,
-% \com{sectlot} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il
-% est omis. Puis, \com{sectlot@} est appelée avec la position effective comme argument:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\sectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\sectlot@}{\sectlot@[d]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlot@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\thestc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{sectlot@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@sectlot@used@} (for a consistency
-% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the sectlot file):
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{sectlot@} effectue le vrai travail.
-% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@sectlot@used@}
-% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les longs suffixes sont utilisés ou non (pour
-% construire le nom du fichier sectlot):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\sectlot@[#1]{%
-\global\@sectlot@used@true
-\if@mtc@longext@%
- \def\@tocfile{slt\thestc}%
-\else
- \def\@tocfile{I\thestc}%
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence and the emptiness of the sectlot file and give a warning if it is not here or is empty:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons la présence et la vacuité du fichier sectlot, en donnant un avertissement s'il est absent ou
-% est vide:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
- \if@mtc@FE
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}%
- {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
- \@mtc@empty@sectlot@true
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlotstyle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If the sectlot file is present and not empty, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first,
-% \com{beforesectlot}, of course, and the page style feature:
-% \or\relax
-% Si le fichier sectlot est présent et non vide, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais nous devons au préalable ajouter du
-% code de présentation: d'abord, \com{beforesectlot}, bien sûr, et le dispositif de style de page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \thispagesectlotstyle
-%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\slttitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\slttitle}}%
- \beforesectlot
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@stilt}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
-% \begin{macro}{\slttitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
-% \begin{environment}{samepage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We begin a \env{samepage} environment, then treat the positionning argument. If the title is empty, we
-% simulate the ``\texttt{e}'' positionning.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis traitons l'argument de positionnement. Si le titre est
-% vide, nous simulons le positionnement «~\texttt{e}~».
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \relax\begin{samepage}%
- \if #1e\let\do@stilt\e@sti
- \else\if #1n\let\do@stilt\n@sti
- \else\if #1c\let\do@stilt\c@sti
- \else\if #1l\let\do@stilt\l@sti
- \else\if #1r\let\do@stilt\r@sti
- \else\if #1d\let\do@stilt\df@stilt
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \mtc@CkStr{\slttitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@stilt\e@sti\relax\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
-% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\sltfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the sectlot, then we set the font:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la sectlot, puis nous
-% établissons la fonte:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \raggedright
- \parskip=\z@%
- \reset@font\sltfont%
- \parindent=\z@%
- \nopagebreak[4]%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule}
-% \begin{environment}{tabular}
-% \begin{macro}{\stifont}
-% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\do@stilt}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v}
-% \begin{macro}{\slttitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\hline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The sectlot title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break
-% between the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary.
-% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the sectlot.
-% \or\relax
-% Le titre de la sectlot est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher
-% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si
-% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la sectlot.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
- \par\noindent
- \ifx\slt@rule\relax
- \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
- \reset@font\stifont\do@stilt{\mtc@v\slttitle}\\
- \end{tabular}%
- \else
- \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
- \mtc@hstrut
- \reset@font\stifont\do@stilt{\mtc@v\slttitle}\\\hline
- \end{tabular}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcindent}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques
-% paramètres de mise en page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR
- \leftmargin\stcindent \rightmargin\stcindent
- \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
- \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@sectlotdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We enter in a \env{stc@verse} environment to format the sectlot. The toc depth is forced (locally) to
-% \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous débutons un environnement \env{stc@verse} pour mettre en page la sectlot. La profondeur de table des
-% matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{sectlotdepth}. Une petite astuce est nécessaire
-% pour ajuster le positionnement.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \begin{stc@verse}{\sltoffset}%
- \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}%
- {\c@lotdepth=\c@sectlotdepth
- \ifnum\c@lotdepth<1\relax\c@lotdepth=1\fi}
- \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\slt@pgno}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\slt@setform}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\opensectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\closesectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
-% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version.
-% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{slt@setform}.
-% Then the sectlot file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{stc@verse} environment is terminated.
-% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file.
-% \or\relax
-% Si les lignes de contenu ne doivent pas avoir de numéros, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa version
-% sans points de conduite. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et les choix
-% de mise en page issus de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{slt@setform}. Puis le fichier sectlot est
-% inséré, suivi d'un étai, et l'environnement \env{stc@verse} est terminé.
-% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup
- \makeatletter
- \@ifundefined{slt@pgno}%
- {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
- \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}
- \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
- \slt@setform%
- \opensectlot\global\insectlottrue
- \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}%
- \global\insectlotfalse\closesectlot
- \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
- \end{stc@verse}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
-% \begin{environment}{samepage}
-% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break and \com{aftersectlot}.
-% \or\relax
-% La partie finale ajoute le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la permission d'une coupure de page et \com{aftersectlot}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \kernaftersectlof
- \nopagebreak[4]\slt@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
- \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
- \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\aftersectlot\fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Auxiliary internal commands, section level}\label{s+code+aux.int.commands.section.level}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Commandes internes auxiliaires, niveau section}\label{s+code+aux.int.commands.section.level}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\l@xsect}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@schapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\xsect}
-% \begin{macro}{\schapter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define auxiliary commands, used for the mini-tables and as delimiters in the TOC file (and LOF and LOT files).
-% The depth of \texttt{xsect} is huge to inhibit the printing of its contents line (except if you cheat).
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons quelques commandes auxiliaires, utilisées pour les mini-tables et comme délimiteurs dans le
-% fichier table des matières (et les fichiers liste des figures et liste des tableaux).
-% La profondeur de \texttt{xsect} est énorme pour inhiber l'impression de ses lignes de contenu (sauf si vous
-% trichez).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\l@xsect{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1.0em}{2.3em}}
-\def\l@xsection{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1.0em}{2.3em}}
-\def\l@schapter{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.0em}{2.3em}}
-\def\xsect{xsect} \def\schapter{schapter}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Patching the \ucom{section} command (continued)}\label{s+code+patching.section.2}\icom{section}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{section} (suite)}\label{s+code+patching.section.2}\icom{section}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
-% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We patch the both branches of the \com{section} command: \com{@sect} for the unstarred version and
-% \com{@ssect} for the starred version. First, for the unstarred version (\com{@sect}), we add a
-% \texttt{xsect} contents line in the LOF and in the LOT. The test \com{ifnum}\texttt{~\#2=1} restricts the action to the
-% section level macros (because \com{@sect} is also used by \com{subsection} and below, which have no
-% mini-tables).
-% \or\relax
-% Nous modifions les deux branches de la commande \com{section}: \com{@sect} pour la version non étoilée et
-% \com{@ssect} pour la version étoilée. Tout d'abord, pour la version non étoilée (\com{@sect}), nous ajoutons
-% une ligne de contenu \texttt{xsect} dans la liste des figures et dans la liste des tableaux.
-% Le test \com{ifnum}\texttt{~\#2=1} restreint l'action aux macros de niveau section (parce que \com{@sect} est
-% aussi utilisée par \com{subsection} et en dessous, qui n'ont pas de mini-tables).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\sv@sect\@sect
-\gdef\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
-\ifnum #2=1\relax
- \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{#7}%
- \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{#7}%
-\fi
-\sv@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#4}{#5}{#6}[{#7}]{#8}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\starsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If it is a section (unstarred or starred via \com{starsection}), we add a \texttt{xsect} entry
-% in the LOF and in the LOT.
-% \or\relax
-% Si c'est une section (non étoilée ou étoilée via \com{starsection}), nous ajoutons une entrée \texttt{xsect}
-% dans la liste des figures et dans la liste des tableaux.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{
-\expandafter
-\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax
- \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{#7}%
- \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{#7}%
-\fi
-\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection\relax
- \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{#7}%
- \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{#7}%
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@svsec}
-% \begin{macro}{\refstepcounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tempskipa}
-% \begin{macro}{\@hangfrom}
-% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\numberline}
-% \begin{macro}{\@svsechd}
-% \begin{macro}{\@xsect}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And the remainder of the section header formatting:
-% \or\relax
-% Et le reste de la mise en page d'un en-tête de section:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax
- \let\@svsec\@empty
-\else
- \refstepcounter{#1}%
- \edef\@svsec{\csname the#1\endcsname\hskip 1em}%
-\fi
-\@tempskipa #5\relax
-\ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
- \begingroup #6\relax
- \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}%
- {\interlinepenalty \@M #8\par}%
- \endgroup
- \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}\addcontentsline
- {toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax
- \else
- \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
- \fi
- #7}%
-\else
- \def\@svsechd{#6\hskip #3\relax
- \@svsec #8\csname #1mark\endcsname
- {#7}\addcontentsline
- {toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax
- \else
- \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}
- \fi
- #7}}%
-\fi
-\@xsect{#5}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectend}
-% \begin{macro}{\stc@sect}
-% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then we patch the unstarred branch (\com{@sect}). We define also the delimiting commands \com{sectbegin} and
-% \com{sectend} commands. We do not add \com{sectbegin} if it is a subsection or deeper.
-% \or\relax
-% Puis nous modifions la branche non étoilée (\com{@sect}). Nous définissons aussi les commandes de délimitation
-% \com{sectbegin} et \com{sectend}. Nous n'ajoutons pas \com{sectbegin} si c'est une sous-section ou plus
-% profond.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\stc@sect\@sect
-\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
- \ifnum #2<1 \relax
- \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\sectbegin}
- \fi
- \stc@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}[{#7}]{#8}}
-\let\sectend\relax
-\let\sectbegin\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \ucom{dosecttoc} command and siblings}\label{s+code+dosecttoc.etc}\icom{dosecttoc}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{La commande \ucom{dosecttoc} et ses cousines}\label{s+code+dosecttoc.etc}\icom{dosecttoc}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{dosecttoc} command is very similar to \com{dominitoc}.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{dosecttoc} est très similaire à~\com{dominitoc}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dosecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@next}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{dosecttoc} command extracts information from the
-% \suffix{.toc} file and creates the \suffix{.stc}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.stc} becomes \suffix{.S} on MS-DOS).
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{dosecttoc} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.toc} et crée les fichiers
-% \suffix{.stc}\meta{N} (\suffix{.stc} devient \suffix{.S} sous MS-DOS).
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dosecttoc#1{{%
- \makeatletter
- \setcounter{stc}{0}
- \STC@next#1.toc\relax\\}\setcounter{stc}{0}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dosectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@next}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{dosectlof} command extracts information from the
-% \suffix{.lof} file and creates the \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.slf} becomes \suffix{.H} on MS-DOS).
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{dosectlof} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lof} et crée les fichiers
-% \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} (\suffix{.slf} devient \suffix{.H} sous MS-DOS).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dosectlof#1{{%
- \makeatletter
- \setcounter{stc}{0}
- \SLF@next#1.lof\relax\\}\setcounter{stc}{0}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dosectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{dosectlot} command extracts information from the
-% \suffix{.lot} file and creates the \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.slt} becomes \suffix{.V} on MS-DOS).
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{dosectlot} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lot} et crée les fichiers
-% \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} (\suffix{.slt} devient \suffix{.V} sous MS-DOS).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dosectlot#1{{%
- \makeatletter
- \setcounter{stc}{0}
- \SLT@next#1.lot\relax\\}\setcounter{stc}{0}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define the user-level macros, who detect the optional argument:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons les commandes pour l'utilisateur, commandes qui détectent l'argument optionnel:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dosecttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\dosecttoc@}{\dosecttoc@[l]}}
-\def\dosectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\dosectlof@}{\dosectlof@[l]}}
-\def\dosectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\dosectlot@}{\dosectlot@[l]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@stitc}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@sti}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dosecttoc} (it becomes the default position for titles of secttocs)
-% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dosecttoc} (il devient la position par défaut pour les titres des secttocs)
-% et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dosecttoc@[#1]{%
-\if@mtc@hints@
- \if@dosecttoc@used@
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The \string\dosecttoc \space command
- \MessageBreak
- has been invoked more than once
- \MessageBreak}
- \global\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-\global\@dosecttoc@used@true
-\if #1e\let\df@stitc\e@sti%
-\else\if #1n\let\df@stitc\n@sti%
-\else\if #1c\let\df@stitc\c@sti%
-\else\if #1l\let\df@stitc\l@sti%
-\else\if #1r\let\df@stitc\r@sti%
-\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
-\@@dosecttoc}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@stilf}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@sti}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dosectlof} (it becomes the default position for titles of sectlofs)
-% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dosectlof} (il devient la position par défaut pour les titres des sectlofs)
-% et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dosectlof@[#1]{%
-\if@mtc@hints@
- \if@dosectlof@used@
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The \string\dosectlof \space command
- \MessageBreak
- has been invoked more than once
- \MessageBreak}
- \global\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-\global\@dosectlof@used@true
-\if #1e\let\df@stilf\e@sti%
-\else\if #1n\let\df@stilf\n@sti%
-\else\if #1c\let\df@stilf\c@sti%
-\else\if #1l\let\df@stilf\l@sti%
-\else\if #1r\let\df@stilf\r@sti%
-\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
-\@@dosectlof}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\df@stilt}
-% \begin{macro}{\e@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\n@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
-% \begin{macro}{\r@sti}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dosectlot} (it becomes the default position for titles of sectlofs)
-% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dosectlot} (il devient la position par défaut pour les titres des sectlots)
-% et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dosectlot@[#1]{%
-\if@mtc@hints@
- \if@dosectlot@used@
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The \string\dosectlot \space command
- \MessageBreak
- has been invoked more than once
- \MessageBreak}
- \global\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-\global\@dosectlot@used@true
-\if #1e\let\df@stilt\e@sti%
-\else\if #1n\let\df@stilt\n@sti%
-\else\if #1c\let\df@stilt\c@sti%
-\else\if #1l\let\df@stilt\l@sti%
-\else\if #1r\let\df@stilt\r@sti%
-\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
-\@@dosectlot}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\@@dosecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\@@dosectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\@@dosectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% These macros invoke the \verb|\@dosect...| commands to create the mini-table file, then close the file
-% descriptor.
-% \or\relax
-% Ces macros invoquent les commandes \verb|\@dosect...| pour créer le fichier mini-table, puis ferment le
-% descripteur de fichier.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@@dosecttoc{\@dosecttoc{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
-\def\@@dosectlof{\@dosectlof{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
-\def\@@dosectlot{\@dosectlot{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@loop}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retirons de la tête de la liste:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\STC@next#1\relax#2\\{%
- \edef\STC@list{#2}%
- \STC@loop{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@toc}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@explist}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Check if the list is empty:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous testons si la liste est vide:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\STC@toc{%
- \ifx\STC@list\@empty\else\expandafter\STC@explist\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\thestc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcname}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The macro \com{STC@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the TOC file.
-% If \com{section} is found, the \cnt{stc} counter is incremented and a new secttoc file is created.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{STC@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier table des matières.
-% Si \com{section} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{stc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier secttoc est créé.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\STC@contentsline#1#2#3#4{%
- \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section
- \stepcounter{stc}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcname}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si les suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis
-% nous l'ouvrons:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \if@mtc@longext@%
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.stc\thestc}%
- \def\stcname{\jobname.stc\thestc}%
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.S\thestc}%
- \def\stcname{\jobname.S\thestc}%
- \fi
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\stcname
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteCoffeeline}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\coffee}
-% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\paragraph}
-% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} or \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline}.
-% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines:
-% \or\relax
-% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline} ou
-% \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline}.
-% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\coffee
- \MTC@WriteCoffeeline{#1}{#3}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsection
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsubsection
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSSS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\paragraph
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcP}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subparagraph
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSP}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{macro}{\starsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
-% \begin{macro}{\thestc}
-% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcname}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
-% \begin{macro}{\openout}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A\imess{I0033} starred section terminates the current section and creates a new secttoc file:
-% \or\relax
-% Une\imess{I0033} section étoilée termine la section courante et crée un nouveau fichier secttoc:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection
- \stepcounter{stc}%
- \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}
- \if@mtc@longext@%
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.stc\thestc}%
- \def\stcname{\jobname.stc\thestc}%
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.S\thestc}%
- \def\stcname{\jobname.S\thestc}%
- \fi
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\stcname
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\starsubsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\starsubsubsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\starparagraph}
-% \begin{macro}{\starsubparagraph}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We process the entries for starred sectionning commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous traitons les entrées pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsection
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsubsection
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSSS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starparagraph
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcP}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubparagraph
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSP}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@explist}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@list}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The loop to read the lines of the TOC file; expands the list of entries and call \com{STC@next} to process the
-% first one.
-% \or\relax
-% Voici la boucle de lecture des lignes du fichier table des matières; nous expansons la liste des entrées et
-% appelons \com{STC@next} pour traiter la première.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\STC@explist{\expandafter\STC@next\STC@list\\}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@loop}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@toc}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@read}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If\SMM{\lmess{W0016}\\\lmess{I0026}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries.
-% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list.
-% \or\relax
-% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0016}\\\lmess{I0026}} une entrée est trouvée, on examine ligne par ligne, en recherchant les
-% entrées «~intéressantes~». Sinon, nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\STC@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
- \ifeof\@inputcheck
- \mtcPackageWarning[W0016]{minitoc}%
- {No file #1
- \MessageBreak
- SECTTOCS NOT PREPARED}%
- \expandafter\STC@toc
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0026]{minitoc}%
- {PREPARING SECTTOCS FROM #1}%
- \expandafter\STC@read\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@read}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@line}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.toc} file.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous lisons l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\STC@read{%
- \read\@inputcheck to\STC@line
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@test}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@line}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{STC@test} has enough arguments:
-% \or\relax
-% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{STC@test} a suffisamment d'arguments:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\STC@test\STC@line.....\STC@%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@test}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@toc}
-% \begin{macro}{\STC@read}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectend}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{STC@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the TOC file, mainly to delimit sections;
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{STC@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier table des matières,
-% essentiellement pour délimiter les sections:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\STC@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\STC@{%
- \ifx#1\contentsline
- \let\mtc@string\string
- \STC@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
- \let\mtc@string\relax
- \else\ifx#1\@input
- \edef\STC@list{\STC@list#2\relax}%
- \else\ifx#1\sectend
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
- \else\ifx#1\sectbegin
- \addtocounter{stc}{-1}%
- \fi\fi\fi\fi
- \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\STC@toc
- \else\expandafter\STC@read\fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@loop}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retirons de la tête de la liste:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\SLF@next#1\relax#2\\{%
- \edef\SLF@list{#2}%
- \SLF@loop{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@lof}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@explist}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Check if the list is empty:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous testons si la liste est vide:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\SLF@lof{%
- \ifx\SLF@list\@empty\else\expandafter\SLF@explist\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\thestc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\slfname}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The macro \com{SLF@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOF file.
-% If \com{section} is found, the \cnt{stc} counter is incremented and a new sectlof file is created.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{SLF@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des figures.
-% Si \com{section} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{stc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier sectlof est créé.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\SLF@contentsline#1#2#3#4{%
- \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xsect
- \stepcounter{stc}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\slfname}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si les suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis
-% nous l'ouvrons:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \if@mtc@longext@%
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.slf\thestc}%
- \def\slfname{\jobname.slf\thestc}%
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.H\thestc}%
- \def\slfname{\jobname.H\thestc}%
- \fi
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\slfname
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\figure}
-% \begin{macro}{\subfigure}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
-% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines:
-% \or\relax
-% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
-% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\figure
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{slf}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subfigure
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{slfS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@explist}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The loop to read the lines of the LOF file; expands the list of entries and call \com{SLF@next} to process the
-% first one.
-% \or\relax
-% Voici la boucle de lecture des lignes du fichier liste des figures; nous expansons la liste des entrées et
-% appelons \com{SLF@next} pour traiter la première.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\SLF@explist{\expandafter\SLF@next\SLF@list\\}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@loop}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@lof}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@read}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If\SMM{\lmess{W0014}\\\lmess{I0036}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries.
-% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list.
-% \or\relax
-% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0014}\\\lmess{I0036}} une entrée est trouvée, on examine ligne par ligne, en recherchant les
-% entrées «~intéressantes~». Sinon, nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\SLF@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
- \ifeof\@inputcheck
- \mtcPackageWarning[W0014]{minitoc}%
- {No file #1
- \MessageBreak
- SECTLOFS NOT PREPARED}%
- \expandafter\SLF@lof
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0036]{minitoc}%
- {PREPARING SECTLOFS FROM #1}%
- \expandafter\SLF@read\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.lof} file.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous lisons l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lof}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@read}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@test}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@line}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{SLF@test} has enough arguments:
-% \or\relax
-% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{SLF@test} a suffisamment d'arguments:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\SLF@read{%
- \read\@inputcheck to\SLF@line
- \expandafter\SLF@test\SLF@line.....\SLF@%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@test}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@lof}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLF@read}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectend}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{SLF@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOF file, mainly to delimit sections;
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{SLF@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des figures,
-% essentiellement pour délimiter les sections:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\SLF@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\SLF@{%
- \ifx#1\contentsline
- \let\mtc@string\string
- \SLF@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
- \let\mtc@string\relax
- \else\ifx#1\@input
- \edef\SLF@list{\SLF@list#2\relax}%
- \else\ifx#1\sectend
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
- \else\ifx#1\sectbegin
- \addtocounter{stc}{-1}%
- \fi\fi\fi\fi
- \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\SLF@lof
- \else\expandafter\SLF@read\fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLT@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLT@loop}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retirons de la tête de la liste:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\SLT@next#1\relax#2\\{%
- \edef\SLT@list{#2}%
- \SLT@loop{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLT@lot}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLT@explist}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Check if the list is empty:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous testons si la liste est vide:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\SLT@lot{%
- \ifx\SLT@list\@empty\else\expandafter\SLT@explist\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLT@contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\thestc}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\sltname}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The macro \com{SLT@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOT file.
-% If \com{section} is found, the \cnt{stc} counter is incremented and a new sectlot file is created.
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{SLT@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des tableaux.
-% Si \com{section} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{stc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier sectlot est créé.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\SLT@contentsline#1#2#3#4{%
- \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xsect
- \stepcounter{stc}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\sltname}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si les suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis
-% nous l'ouvrons:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \if@mtc@longext@%
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.slt\thestc}%
- \def\sltname{\jobname.slt\thestc}%
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
- {Writing\space\jobname.V\thestc}%
- \def\sltname{\jobname.V\thestc}%
- \fi
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\sltname
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
-% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\table}
-% \begin{macro}{\subtable}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
-% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines:
-% \or\relax
-% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
-% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\table
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{slt}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subtable
- \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{sltS}{#3}{#4}%
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLT@explist}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLT@next}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The loop to read the lines of the LOT file; expands the list of entries and call \com{SLT@next} to process the
-% first one.
-% \or\relax
-% Voici la boucle de lecture des lignes du fichier liste des tableaux; nous expansons la liste des entrées et
-% appelons \com{SLT@next} pour traiter la première.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\SLT@explist{\expandafter\SLT@next\SLT@list\\}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLT@loop}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLT@lot}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLT@read}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If\SMM{\lmess{W0015}\\\lmess{I0039}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries.
-% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list.
-% \or\relax
-% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0015}\\\lmess{I0039}} une entrée est trouvée, on examine ligne par ligne, en recherchant les
-% entrées «~intéressantes~». Sinon, nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\SLT@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
- \ifeof\@inputcheck
- \mtcPackageWarning[W0015]{minitoc}%
- {No file #1
- \MessageBreak
- SECTLOTS NOT PREPARED}%
- \expandafter\SLT@lot
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0039]{minitoc}%
- {PREPARING SECTLOTS FROM #1}%
- \expandafter\SLT@read\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.lot} file.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous lisons l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lot}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\SLT@read}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLT@test}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLT@line}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{SLT@test} has enough arguments:
-% \or\relax
-% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{SLT@test} a suffisamment d'arguments:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\SLT@read{%
- \read\@inputcheck to\SLT@line
- \expandafter\SLT@test\SLT@line.....\SLT@%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLT@test}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLT@contentsline}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLT@lot}
-% \begin{macro}{\SLT@read}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectend}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{SLT@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOT file, mainly to delimit sections;
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{SLT@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des tableaux,
-% essentiellement pour délimiter les sections:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\SLT@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\SLT@{%
- \ifx#1\contentsline
- \let\mtc@string\string
- \SLT@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
- \let\mtc@string\relax
- \else\ifx#1\@input
- \edef\SLT@list{\SLT@list#2\relax}%
- \else\ifx#1\sectend
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
- \else\ifx#1\sectbegin
- \addtocounter{stc}{-1}%
- \fi\fi\fi\fi
- \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\SLT@lot
- \else\expandafter\SLT@read\fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{End of section-level commands}\label{s+code+end.section.level.commands}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Fin des commandes du niveau section}\label{s+code+end.section.level.commands}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We terminate the \emph{else} branch of the test \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{section}|, the \emph{true} branch of the
-% test \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| and add an empty \emph{else} branch to that test:
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Nous terminons la branche \emph{sinon} du test \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{section}|, la branche \emph{vraie} du
-% test \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| et ajoutons une branche \emph{sinon} vide à~ce test:
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\fi% end of \if@mtc@section@def@
-\fi% end of \if@mtc@chapter@undef@
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{16}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \ucom{mtcprepare} command}\icom{mtcprepare}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{La commande \ucom{mtcprepare}}\icom{mtcprepare}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
-% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists}
-% \begin{macro}{\jobname}
-% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageInfo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This\imess{I0048} command tests the availability of the \verb|\do|\texttt{\ldots} minitoc preparation commands and
-% of the contents files, then calls as much as possible of these preparation commands. A hint is given.
-% \or\relax
-% Cette\imess{I0048} commande teste la disponibilité des commandes minitoc de préparation \verb|\do|\texttt{\ldots} et des
-% fichiers de contenu, puis appelle autant de ces commandes de préparation que possible. Un \emph{hint} est
-% émis.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtcprepare{\@ifnextchar[{\mtcprepare@}{\mtcprepare@[l]}}%
-\def\mtcprepare@[#1]{%
-\@ifundefined{part}{}{%
-\IfFileExists{\jobname.toc}{\doparttoc[#1]}{}%
-\IfFileExists{\jobname.lof}{\dopartlof[#1]}{}%
-\IfFileExists{\jobname.lot}{\dopartlot[#1]}{}%
-}%
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
- \@ifundefined{section}{}%
- {%
-\IfFileExists{\jobname.toc}{\dosecttoc[#1]}{}%
-\IfFileExists{\jobname.lof}{\dosectlof[#1]}{}%
-\IfFileExists{\jobname.lot}{\dosectlot[#1]}{}%
- }%
-}{%
-\IfFileExists{\jobname.toc}{\dominitoc[#1]}{}%
-\IfFileExists{\jobname.lof}{\dominilof[#1]}{}%
-\IfFileExists{\jobname.lot}{\dominilot[#1]}{}%
-}%
-\if@mtc@hints@
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0048]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {Using \string\mtcprepare\space may induce some
- \MessageBreak
- hints about the preparation commands,
- \MessageBreak
- because it invokes ALL the preparation
- \MessageBreak
- commands allowed by the document class,
- \MessageBreak
- without any previous check\@gobble}%
-\fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Use with \ucom{nofiles}}\label{s+nofiles}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Utilisation avec \ucom{nofiles}}\label{s+nofiles}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\nofiles}
-% \begin{macro}{\gobbleopt@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% In case the document uses the \com{nofiles} command (in its preamble), the auxiliary files for the mini-tables
-% should not be overwritten by the preparation commands, so these ones must be just faked; as these commands may
-% have an optional argument, they will be faked using the internal \LaTeX\ macro \com{@ifnextchar} (to get
-% the optional argument) and the new utility command \com{gobbleopt@}. Problem signaled by \name{Andreas}{Deininger}.
-% \or\relax
-% Dans le cas où le document utilise la commande \com{nofiles} (dans son préambule), les fichiers auxiliaires pour
-% les mini-tables ne doivent pas être ré-écrits par les commandes de préparation, donc celles-ci doivent seulement être
-% simulées; comme ces commandes peuvent avoir un argument optionnel, elles seront simulées en utilisant la
-% macro interne de \LaTeX\ \com{@ifnextchar} (pour obtenir l'argument optionnel) et la nouvelle commande
-% utilitaire \com{gobbleopt@}. Problème signalé par \name{Andreas}{Deininger}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\gobbleopt@[#1]{\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@filesw}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A test is placed in a \com{AtBeginDocument} and gives a warning if \com{nofiles} is used:
-% \or\relax
-% Un test est placé dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument} et donne un avertissement si \com{nofiles} est utilisée:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{\if@filesw\relax\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0098]{minitoc}%
- {--- You have used the \string\nofiles\space command
- \MessageBreak
- in your preamble; all preparation commands
- \MessageBreak
- in the body of the document will be ignored}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Since \com{nofiles} has been used, we must disable all the
-% preparation commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Puisque \com{nofiles} a été utilisée, nous devons inhiber
-% toutes les commandes de préparation:
-% \fi
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Commands for part level mini-tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau partie:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\doparttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-\def\dopartlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-\def\dopartlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Commands for chapter level mini-tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dominitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-\def\dominilof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-\def\dominilot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Commands for section level mini-tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau section:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dosecttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-\def\dosectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-\def\dosectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Command \com{mtcprepare}:
-% \or\relax
-% Commande \com{mtcprepare}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtcprepare{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% End of the inhibition of the preparation commands and of the \com{AtBeginDocument} block:
-% \or\relax
-% Fin de l'inhibition des commandes de préparation et du bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Necessary \ucom{l@.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+necessary.l@}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Commandes \ucom{l@.{}.{}.} nécessaires}\label{s+code+necessary.l@}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\l@listof}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@starpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@starchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@starsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsubsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@starparagraph}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubparagraph}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some \verb|\l@...| commands (analog to \com{l@section} or \com{l@paragraph}) are required to format some
-% entries in the mini-tables, for starred sectionning commands essentially:
-% \or\relax
-% Quelques commandes \verb|\l@...| (analogues à~\com{l@section} ou \com{l@paragraph}) sont requises pour
-% mettre en page certaines entrées dans les mini-tables, essentiellement pour les commandes de sectionnement
-% étoilées:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\l@listof\l@section}
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\l@listof\l@chapter}
-\@ifundefined{part}{}{\let\l@starpart\l@part}
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\l@starchapter\l@chapter}
-\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\l@starsection\l@section}
-\@ifundefined{subsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsection\l@subsection}
-\@ifundefined{subsubsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsubsection\l@subsubsection}
-\@ifundefined{paragraph}{}{\let\l@starparagraph\l@paragraph}
-\@ifundefined{subparagraph}{}{\let\l@starsubparagraph\l@subparagraph}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{13}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The horizontal rules and their default values}\label{s+code+horiz.rules.default.values}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Les filets horizontaux et leurs valeurs par défaut}\label{s+code+horiz.rules.default.values}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\noptcrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomtcrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\nostcrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define here the various commands to activate ou inhibit the horizontal rules in the various kinds of
-% mini-tables. Each such command is an indirect definition of the corresponding horizontal rule. The rules are
-% .4\,pt high horizontal rules. We begin with rules for mini-tables of contents.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons ici les diverses commandes pour activer ou inhiber les filets horizontaux dans les diverses
-% sortes de mini-tables. Chacune de ces commandes est une définition indirecte du filet horizontal correspondant.
-% Les filets sont des filets horizontaux épais de 0.4\,pt. Nous commençons par les filets pour les mini-tables des matières.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\noptcrule{\let\ptc@rule\relax}
-\def\nomtcrule{\let\mtc@rule\relax}
-\def\nostcrule{\let\stc@rule\relax}
-\def\ptcrule{\def\ptc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
-\def\mtcrule{\def\mtc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
-\def\stcrule{\def\stc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
-\def\ptc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
-\def\mtc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
-\def\stc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\noplfrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomlfrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\noslfrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\plfrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlfrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlf@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\slfrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\slf@rule}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then, the rules for mini-lists of figures:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis les filets pour les mini-listes de figures:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\noplfrule{\let\plf@rule\relax}
-\def\nomlfrule{\let\mlf@rule\relax}
-\def\noslfrule{\let\slf@rule\relax}
-\def\plfrule{\def\plf@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
-\def\mlfrule{\def\mlf@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
-\def\slfrule{\def\slf@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
-\def\plf@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
-\def\mlf@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
-\def\slf@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\nopltrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomltrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\nosltrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\plt@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlt@rule}
-% \begin{macro}{\sltrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\slt@rule}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then, the rules for mini-lists of tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis les filets pour les mini-listes de tableaux:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\nopltrule{\let\plt@rule\relax}
-\def\nomltrule{\let\mlt@rule\relax}
-\def\nosltrule{\let\slt@rule\relax}
-\def\pltrule{\def\plt@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
-\def\mltrule{\def\mlt@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
-\def\sltrule{\def\slt@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
-\def\plt@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
-\def\mlt@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
-\def\slt@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+mtcsetXXX.commands}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Les commandes \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.}}\label{s+code+mtcsetXXX.commands}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% These commands\,\footnote{The general concept of the \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} commands was proposed
-% by \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}.} have been introduced to build a nicer user interface, and each of them replaces
-% numerous user commands, offering a rather unified and logical syntax.
-% \or\relax
-% Ces commandes\,\footnote{Le concept général des commandes \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} a été proposé par
-% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}.} ont été introduites pour construire une meilleure interface utilisateur, et chacune
-% d'elles remplace de nombreuses commandes utilisateur, offrant une syntaxe assez unifiée et logique.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Keywords for the \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+keywords.mtcset}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Mots-clés pour les commandes \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.}}\label{s+code+keywords.mtcset}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@namedef}
-% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define some common keywords for the \verb|\mtcset...| commands. A keyword is created via
-% the \com{@namedef} -- \com{@nameuse} mechanism the following way:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{@namedef}\verb|{mtc@|\emph{family}\verb|@|\emph{name}\verb|}{|\emph{abbreviation}\verb|}|
-% \end{verse}
-% where \emph{family} is the name of a group of keywords relative to one or several \verb|\mtcset...| macros,
-% \emph{name} is the keyword that the user gives as argument to the \verb|\mtcset...| macro, and
-% \emph{abbreviation} is a string used to build the name of the macro effectively used. As some \verb|\mtcset...|
-% macros have several keyword parameters, this method can reduce the number of macros at the user level, at the cost
-% of few keyword families.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons quelques mots-clés communs pour les commandes \verb|\mtcset...|. Un mot-clé est créé via le
-% mécanisme \com{@namedef} -- \com{@nameuse} de la manière suivante:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{@namedef}\verb|{mtc@|\emph{famille}\verb|@|\emph{nom}\verb|}{|\emph{abréviation}\verb|}|
-% \end{verse}
-% où \emph{famille} est le nom d'un groupe de mots-clés concernent une ou plusieurs macros \verb|\mtcset...|,
-% \emph{nom} est le mot-clé que l'utilisateur donne comme argument à~la macro \verb|\mtcset...|, et
-% \emph{abréviation} est une chaîne utilisée pour construire le nom de la macro effectivement utilisée. Comme
-% certaines macros \verb|\mtcset...| ont plusieurs paramètres mots-clés, cette méthode peut réduire le nombre de
-% macros au niveau de l'utilisateur, au prix de quelques familles de mots-clés.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@namedef}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define a family (\texttt{typetable}) of keywords for the types of mini-tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons une famille (\texttt{typetable}) de mots-clés pour les types de mini-tables:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{mtc@typetable@parttoc}{ptc}\def\mtc@typetable@parttoc{ptc}
-\@namedef{mtc@typetable@partlof}{plf}\def\mtc@typetable@partlof{plf}
-\@namedef{mtc@typetable@partlot}{plt}\def\mtc@typetable@partlot{plt}
-\@namedef{mtc@typetable@minitoc}{mtc}\def\mtc@typetable@minitoc{mtc}
-\@namedef{mtc@typetable@minilof}{mlf}\def\mtc@typetable@minilof{mlf}
-\@namedef{mtc@typetable@minilot}{mlt}\def\mtc@typetable@minilot{mlt}
-\@namedef{mtc@typetable@secttoc}{stc}\def\mtc@typetable@secttoc{stc}
-\@namedef{mtc@typetable@sectlof}{slf}\def\mtc@typetable@sectlof{slf}
-\@namedef{mtc@typetable@sectlot}{slt}\def\mtc@typetable@sectlot{slt}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@namedef}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then another family (\texttt{typetitle}) for the titles of the mini-tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis une autre famille (\texttt{typetitle}) pour les titres des mini-tables:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@parttoc}{pti}\def\mtc@typetitle@parttoc{pti}
-\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@partlof}{pti}\def\mtc@typetitle@partlof{pti}
-\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@partlot}{pti}\def\mtc@typetitle@partlot{pti}
-\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@minitoc}{mti}\def\mtc@typetitle@minitoc{mti}
-\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@minilof}{mti}\def\mtc@typetitle@minilof{mti}
-\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@minilot}{mti}\def\mtc@typetitle@minilot{mti}
-\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@secttoc}{sti}\def\mtc@typetitle@secttoc{sti}
-\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@sectlof}{sti}\def\mtc@typetitle@sectlof{sti}
-\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@sectlot}{sti}\def\mtc@typetitle@sectlot{sti}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@namedef}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define a family (\texttt{YN}) of keywords to recognize the keywords ``\texttt{off}'' and ``\texttt{on}'', with their
-% many synonyms\,\footnote{This (deliberately extreme) case shows the easyness for creating synonyms of frequently
-% used keywords. Note also that when a keyword contains a non-letter character, we must use a hack with
-% \com{expandafter} \com{csname} \texttt{...} \com{endcsname}.}
-% and meaning false or true\FZ:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons une famille (\texttt{YN}) de mots-clés pour reconnaître les mots-clés «~\texttt{off}~» et
-% «~\texttt{on}~», avec leurs nombreux synonymes\,\footnote{Ce cas (délibérément extrême) montre la facilité de création de
-% synonymes pour des mots-clés fréquemment utilisés. Notez aussi que lorsqu'un mot-clé contient un caractère qui
-% n'est pas une lettre, nous devons ruser en utilisant \com{expandafter} \com{csname} \texttt{...}
-% \com{endcsname}.} et signifiant faux ou vrai\,\FZ:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@off}{no}\def\mtc@YN@off{no}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@OFF}{no}\def\mtc@YN@OFF{no}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@no}{no}\def\mtc@YN@no{no}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@NO}{no}\def\mtc@YN@NO{no}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@n}{no}\def\mtc@YN@n{no}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@N}{no}\def\mtc@YN@N{no}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@false}{no}\def\mtc@YN@false{no}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@FALSE}{no}\def\mtc@YN@FALSE{no}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@faux}{no}\def\mtc@YN@faux{no}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@FAUX}{no}\def\mtc@YN@FAUX{no}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@f}{no}\def\mtc@YN@f{no}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@F}{no}\def\mtc@YN@F{no}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@NON}{no}\def\mtc@YN@NON{no}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@non}{no}\def\mtc@YN@non{no}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@0}{no}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@0\endcsname{no}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@-}{no}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@-\endcsname{no}
-%
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@on}{}\def\mtc@YN@on{}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@ON}{}\def\mtc@YN@ON{}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@yes}{}\def\mtc@YN@yes{}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@YES}{}\def\mtc@YN@YES{}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@y}{}\def\mtc@YN@y{}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@Y}{}\def\mtc@YN@Y{}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@true}{}\def\mtc@YN@true{}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@TRUE}{}\def\mtc@YN@TRUE{}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@t}{}\def\mtc@YN@t{}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@T}{}\def\mtc@YN@T{}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@vrai}{}\def\mtc@YN@vrai{}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@VRAI}{}\def\mtc@YN@VRAI{}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@v}{}\def\mtc@YN@v{}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@V}{}\def\mtc@YN@V{}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@OUI}{}\def\mtc@YN@OUI{}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@oui}{}\def\mtc@YN@oui{}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@O}{}\def\mtc@YN@O{}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@o}{}\def\mtc@YN@o{}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@1}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@1\endcsname{}
-\@namedef{mtc@YN@+}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@+\endcsname{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetfont} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}\icom{mtcsetfont}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetfont}}\label{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}\icom{mtcsetfont}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@namedef}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define the sectionning level keywords (note that \texttt{part} is not a member of this family (\texttt{sectlevel}),
-% because no contents line for a
-% part can appear in a mini-table, part being the highest sectionning level); ``\texttt{*}''~represents ``any level'',
-% and is used to set the global default font for a given kind of mini-table.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons les mots-clés pour les niveaux de sectionnement (notez que \texttt{part} n'est pas membre de
-% cette famille (\texttt{sectlevel}), car aucune ligne de contenu pour une partie ne peut apparaître dans une
-% mini-table, la partie étant le plus haut niveau de sectionnement); <<~\texttt{*}~>>~représente <<~tout
-% niveau~>>, et est utilisée pour établir la fonte globale par défaut pour un genre donné de mini-table.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@chapter}{C}\def\mtc@sectlevel@chapter{C}
-\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@section}{S}\def\mtc@sectlevel@section{S}
-\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subsection}{SS}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subsection{SS}
-\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subsubsection}{SSS}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subsubsection{SSS}
-\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@paragraph}{P}\def\mtc@sectlevel@paragraph{P}
-\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subparagraph}{SP}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subparagraph{SP}
-\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@*}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@sectlevel@*\endcsname{}
-\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@figure}{}\def\mtc@sectlevel@figure{}
-\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@table}{}\def\mtc@sectlevel@table{}
-\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subfigure}{S}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subfigure{S}
-\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subtable}{S}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subtable{S}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mtcsetfont} command has the following syntax:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{level-name}\verb|}{|\emph{font commands}\verb|}|
-% \end{verse}
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{mtcsetfont} a la syntaxe suivante:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{nom-niveau}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes de fonte}\verb|}|
-% \end{verse}
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \verb|minitoc|, the \emph{level-name} is a sectionning level like
-% \verb|subsection| (no backslash). The \emph{font commands} are a font specification, using NFSS~\cite{fontsel} basic
-% commands usually.
-% \or\relax
-% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \verb|minitoc|, le \emph{nom-niveau} est un niveau de
-% sectionnement tel que \verb|subsection| (sans contre-oblique). Les \emph{commandes de fonte} sont une spécification
-% de fonte, utilisant habituellement des commandes basiques de NFSS~\cite{fontsel}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% First, we declare a flag, set true:
-% \or\relax
-% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, mis à~vrai:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@setfont@\@mtc@setfont@true
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then, we begin the command, which has three arguments:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis, nous commençons la commande, qui a trois arguments:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\mtcsetfont}[3]{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mta@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\imess{E0013} two first arguments of this command are keywords. They must be translated into the effective strings.
-% We process the first argument, a keyword from the \texttt{typetable} family. The result is stored in
-% \com{mtc@mta@abbrev}. Example: if \verb|#1| is \verb|minitoc|, we get \cnt{mtc}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les\imess{E0013} deux premiers arguments sont des mots-clés. Ils doivent être traduits en chaînes effectives.
-% Nous traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}. Le résultat est rangé dans
-% \com{mtc@mta@abbrev}. Exemple: si \verb|#1| est \verb|minitoc|, nous obtenons \cnt{mtc}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtc@mta@abbrev{X}
-\@mtc@setfont@true
-\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax
- \@mtc@setfont@false
- \def\mtc@mta@abbrev{X}
- \mtcPackageError[E0013]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsetfont \space has a wrong first argument
- \MessageBreak
- (#1).
- \MessageBreak
- It should be a mini-table type
- \MessageBreak
- (parttoc...sectlot)}%
- {Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
-\else
- \edef\mtc@mta@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@level@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\imess{E0014} second argument, a keyword from the family \texttt{sectlevel}, is processed the same way and
-% the result is stored into a macro \com{mtc@level@abbrev}.
-% Example: if \verb|#2| is the \verb|subparagraph| keyword, we get~\verb|SP|.
-% \or\relax
-% Le\imess{E0014} deuxième argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{sectlevel}, est traité de la même manière
-% et le résultat est rangé dans \com{mtc@level@abbrev}. Exemple: si \verb|#2| est le mot-clé \verb|subparagraph|,
-% nous obtenons~\verb|SP|.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtc@level@abbrev{X}
-\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@sectlevel@#2\endcsname\relax
- \@mtc@setfont@false
- \def\mtc@level@abbrev{X}
- \mtcPackageError[E0014]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsetfont \space has a wrong second argument
- \MessageBreak
- (#2).
- \MessageBreak
- It should be a sectionning level
- \MessageBreak
- (part...subparagraph) or * }%
- {Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
-\else
- \edef\mtc@level@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@sectlevel@#2}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmp@name}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mta@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@level@abbrev}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then, we construct the effective macro to be applied:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis nous construisons la macro effective qui sera appliquée:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtc@tmp@name{\mtc@mta@abbrev\mtc@level@abbrev font}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Example: if \verb|#1| is \verb|minitoc| and \verb|#2| is \verb|subsection|, we get \verb|mtcSSfont|, which is the
-% name of the command for the font of a subsection entry in a minitoc (the backslash is missing, but we will use
-% a \com{csname} \ldots\ \com{endcsname} pair to apply the constructed command).
-% \or\relax
-% Exemple: si \verb|#1| est \verb|minitoc| et \verb|#2| est \verb|subsection|, nous obtenons \verb|mtcSSfont|, qui
-% est le nom de la commande pour la fonte d'une entrée de sous-section dans une minitoc (il manque la
-% contre-oblique, mais nous utiliserons une paire \com{csname} \ldots\ \com{endcsname} pour appliquer la
-% commande construite).
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% But all combinaisons are not legal (the level of the entry must be lower than the level of the mini-table, and
-% the kind\,\footnote{``Kind'' being sectionning, (sub-)figure, or (sub-)table.} of the entry must be consistent
-% with that of the mini-table),
-% so we must test. Special care must be taken for testing via internal defined commands (\emph{quarks})
-% with \texttt{@mtcqk} at the end of their names).
-% \or\relax
-% Mais toutes les combinaisons ne sont pas légales (le niveau de l'entrée doit être plus bas que celui de la
-% mini-table et le genre\,\footnote{Le <<~genre~>> étant sectionnement, (sous-)figure ou (sous)-table.} de
-% l'entrée doit être cohérent avec celui de la mini-table),), donc nous devons tester.
-% Un soin particulier doit être pris pour tester en utilisant
-% des commandes internes définies (\emph{quarks} avec \texttt{@mtcqk} à~la fin de leurs noms).
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\parttoc@mtcqk{parttoc@mtcqk}
-\def\minitoc@mtcqk{minitoc@mtcqk}
-\def\secttoc@mtcqk{secttoc@mtcqk}
-\def\partlof@mtcqk{partlof@mtcqk}
-\def\minilof@mtcqk{minilof@mtcqk}
-\def\sectlof@mtcqk{sectlof@mtcqk}
-\def\partlot@mtcqk{partlot@mtcqk}
-\def\minilot@mtcqk{minilot@mtcqk}
-\def\sectlot@mtcqk{sectlot@mtcqk}
-\def\part@mtcqk{part@mtcqk}
-\def\chapter@mtcqk{chapter@mtcqk}
-\def\appendix@mtcqk{appendix@mtcqk}
-\def\section@mtcqk{section@mtcqk}
-\def\subsection@mtcqk{subsection@mtcqk}
-\def\subsubsection@mtcqk{subsubsection@mtcqk}
-\def\paragraph@mtcqk{paragraph@mtcqk}
-\def\subparagraph@mtcqk{subparagraph@mtcqk}
-\def\figure@mtcqk{figure@mtcqk}
-\def\table@mtcqk{table@mtcqk}
-\def\subfigure@mtcqk{subfigure@mtcqk}
-\def\subtable@mtcqk{subtable@mtcqk}
-\@mtc@setfont@true
-\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\parttoc@mtcqk\relax
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
-\fi
-\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\partlof@mtcqk\relax
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
-\fi
-\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\partlot@mtcqk\relax
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
-\fi
-\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\minitoc@mtcqk\relax
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
-\fi
-\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\minilof@mtcqk\relax
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
-\fi
-\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\minilot@mtcqk\relax
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
-\fi
-\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\secttoc@mtcqk\relax
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\section@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
-\fi
-\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\sectlof@mtcqk\relax
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\section@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
-\fi
-\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\sectlot@mtcqk\relax
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\section@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmp@name}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mta@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@level@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If\SMM{\lmess{I0015}\\\lmess{E0024}} the combinaison is legal,
-% we apply it, i.e.,~we redefine the meaning of the constructed macro with the sequence
-% of commands given as third argument of \com{mtcsetfont} and we log that event (we store the third argument in a
-% token register to can print it \emph{verbatim});
-% if the combinaison is not legal, an error message is displayed.
-% \or\relax
-% Si\SMM{\lmess{I0015}\\\lmess{E0024}} la combinaison est légale,
-% nous l'appliquons, c'est-à-dire que nous redéfinissons la signification de la
-% macro construite comme étant la séquence de commandes donnée en troisième argument de \com{mtcsetfont} et nous
-% notons cet événement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} (nous rangeons le troisième argument dans un registre
-% \emph{token} pour pouvoir l'écrire \emph{verbatim});
-% si la combinaison n'est pas légale, un message d'erreur est affiché.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@setfont@
- \def\mtc@tmp@name{\mtc@mta@abbrev\mtc@level@abbrev font}
- \mtc@toks{#3}
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0015]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsetfont\space redefines the macro
- \MessageBreak
- "\mtc@tmp@name" as "\the\mtc@toks"}%
- \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmp@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}%
-\else
- \mtcPackageError[E0024]{minitoc}%
- {The macro \string\mtcsetfont\space has incompatible
- \MessageBreak
- first (#1) and second (#2) arguments}%
- {Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
-\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsettitlefont} command}\label{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}\icom{mtcsettitlefont}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsettitlefont}}\label{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}\icom{mtcsettitlefont}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This command is very similar to the \com{mtcsetfont} command. Its syntax is almost identical:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \icom{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|\mtcsettitlefont{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{font commands}\verb|}|
-% \end{verse}
-% \or\relax
-% Cette commande est très similaire à~la commande \com{mtcsetfont}. Sa syntaxe est presque identique:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \icom{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|\mtcsettitlefont{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes de fonte}\verb|}|
-% \end{verse}
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitlefont@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \verb|minitoc|. The \emph{font commands} are a font specification, using
-% NFSS~\cite{fontsel} basic commands usually. The difference is the absence of the second keyword argument, because
-% the \emph{font commands} will be applied to the title of each mini-table of the given kind.
-%
-% First, we declare a flag, set true:
-% \or\relax
-% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \verb|minitoc|. Les \emph{commandes de fonte} sont une
-% spécification de fonte, utilisant habituellement des commandes basiques de NFSS~\cite{fontsel}. La différence est
-% l'absence du deuxième argument mot-clé, car les \emph{commandes de fonte} seront appliquées au titre de chaque
-% mini-table du genre donné.
-%
-% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, mis à~vrai:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@settitlefont@\@mtc@settitlefont@true
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And we begin the definition of the \com{mtcsettitlefont} command, which has two arguments:
-% \or\relax
-% Et nous commençons la définition de la commande \com{mtcsettitlefont}, qui a deux arguments:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\mtcsettitlefont}[2]{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtatf@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitlefont@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{E0022} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetitle} family, then the result is stored into
-% \com{mtc@mtatf@abbrev}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{E0022} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetitle}, puis le résultat est
-% rangé dans \com{mtc@mtatf@abbrev}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtc@mtatf@abbrev{X}
-\@mtc@settitlefont@true
-\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetitle@#1\endcsname\relax
- \@mtc@settitlefont@false
- \def\mtc@mtatf@abbrev{X}
- \mtcPackageError[E0022]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsettitlefont \space has a wrong first argument
- \MessageBreak
- (#1).
- \MessageBreak
- It should be a mini-table type
- \MessageBreak
- (parttoc...sectlot)}%
- {Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
-\else
- \edef\mtc@mtatf@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetitle@#1}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitlefont@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmptf@name}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtatf@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then\SMM{\lmess{I0018}\\\lmess{E0034}} we build the name of the effective command and apply this command:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis\SMM{\lmess{I0018}\\\lmess{E0034}} nous construisons le nom de la commande effective et appliquons cette commande:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@settitlefont@
- \def\mtc@tmptf@name{\mtc@mtatf@abbrev font}
- \mtc@toks{#2}%
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0018]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsettitlefont\space redefines the macro
- \MessageBreak
- "\mtc@tmptf@name" as
- \MessageBreak
- "\the\mtc@toks"}%
- \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmptf@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}%
-\else
- \mtcPackageError[E0034]{minitoc}%
- {The macro \string\\mtcsettitlefont\space uses
- \MessageBreak
- an illegal type of table (#1)}%
- {Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}{\relax}
-\fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsettitle} command}\label{s+code+mtcsettitle.command}\icom{mtcsettitle}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsettitle}}\label{s+code+mtcsettitle.command}\icom{mtcsettitle}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This command is very similar to the \com{mtcsettitlefont} command. Its syntax is almost identical:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \icom{mtcsettitle}\verb|\mtcsettitle{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}|
-% \end{verse}
-% \or\relax
-% Cette commande est très similaire à~la commande \com{mtcsettitlefont}. Sa syntaxe est presque identique:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \icom{mtcsettitle}\verb|\mtcsettitle{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{texte}\verb|}|
-% \end{verse}
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \verb|minitoc|. The \emph{text} is the text for a mini-table title.
-% \or\relax
-% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \verb|minitoc|. Le \emph{texte} est le texte pour un titre
-% de mini-table.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitle@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% First, we declare a flag, set true:
-% \or\relax
-% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, mis à~vrai:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@settitle@\@mtc@settitle@true
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then we define the \com{mtcsettitle} command, which has two arguments:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis nous définissons la commande \com{mtcsettitle}, qui a deux arguments:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\mtcsettitle}[2]{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtati@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitle@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{E0021} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family. The result is stored in
-% \com{mtc@mtati@abbrev}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{E0021} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}. Le résultat est rangé
-% dans \com{mtc@mtati@abbrev}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtc@mtati@abbrev{X}
-\@mtc@settitle@true
-\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax
- \@mtc@settitle@false
- \def\mtc@mtati@abbrev{X}
- \mtcPackageError[E0021]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsettitle \space has a wrong first argument
- \MessageBreak
- (#1).
- \MessageBreak
- It should be a mini-table type
- \MessageBreak
- (parttoc...sectlot)}%
- {Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
-\else
- \edef\mtc@mtati@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitle@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpti@name}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtati@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And\SMM{\lmess{I0017}\\\lmess{E0033}} we construct the name of the effective macro and apply it:
-% \or\relax
-% Et\SMM{\lmess{I0017}\\\lmess{E0033}} nous construisons le nom de la macro effective et nous l'appliquons:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@settitle@
- \def\mtc@tmpti@name{\mtc@mtati@abbrev title}%
- \mtc@toks{#2}%
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0017]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsettitle\space redefines the macro
- \MessageBreak
- "\mtc@tmpti@name" as
- \MessageBreak
- "\the\mtc@toks"}%
- \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmpti@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}%
-\else
- \mtcPackageError[E0033]{minitoc}%
- {The macro \string\mtcsettitle\space uses
- \MessageBreak
- an illegal type of table (#1)}%
- {Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}{\relax}
-\fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetformat} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetformat.command}\icom{mtcsetformat}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetformat}}\label{s+code+mtcsetformat.command}\icom{mtcsetformat}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@namedef}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define first the keywords (family \texttt{formatparam}) for the three formatting parameters that this command
-% can alter:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons d'abord les mots-clés (famille \texttt{formatparam}) pour les trois paramètres de mise en page
-% que cette commande peut altérer:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{mtc@formatparam@dotinterval}{dotsep}%
-\def\mtc@arg@dotinterval{dotsep}
-\@namedef{mtc@formatparam@tocrightmargin}{tocrmarg}%
-\def\mtc@arg@tocrightmargin{tocrightmargin}
-\@namedef{mtc@formatparam@pagenumwidth}{pnumwidth}%
-\def\mtc@arg@pagenumwidth{\mtc@arg@pagenumwidth}
-%% \@namedef{mtc@arg@numwidth}{numwidth} %not yet available
-%% \def\mtc@arg@numwidth{\mtc@arg@numwidth} %not yet available
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{13}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mtcsetformat} command needs an initialization to be done at the beginning of the document, to set the
-% defaults values of the formatting parameters:
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{mtcsetformat} a besoin qu'une initialisation soit faite en début de document pour établir les
-% valeurs par défaut des paramètes de mise en page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\@pnumwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcpnumwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcpnumwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcpnumwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\plfpnumwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlfpnumwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\slfpnumwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltpnumwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltpnumwidth}
-% \begin{macro}{\sltpnumwidth}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We take, if possible, the default value of \com{@pnumwith} for each type of mini-tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous prenons, si possible, la valeur par défaut de \com{@pnumwith} pour chaque type de mini-tables:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{ptcpnumwidth}{\let\ptcpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
-\@ifundefined{stcpnumwidth}{\let\stcpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
-\@ifundefined{mtcpnumwidth}{\let\mtcpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
-\@ifundefined{plfpnumwidth}{\let\plfpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
-\@ifundefined{mlfpnumwidth}{\let\mlfpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
-\@ifundefined{slfpnumwidth}{\let\slfpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
-\@ifundefined{pltpnumwidth}{\let\pltpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
-\@ifundefined{mltpnumwidth}{\let\mltpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
-\@ifundefined{sltpnumwidth}{\let\sltpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{9}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tocrmarg}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptctocrmarg}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtclofrmarg}
-% \begin{macro}{\stclotrmarg}
-% \begin{macro}{\plftocrmarg}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlflofrmarg}
-% \begin{macro}{\slflotrmarg}
-% \begin{macro}{\plttocrmarg}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltlofrmarg}
-% \begin{macro}{\sltlotrmarg}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We take, if possible, the default value of \com{@tocrmarg} for each type of mini-tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous prenons, si possible, la valeur par défaut de \com{@tocrmarg} pour chaque type de mini-tables:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{ptctocrmarg}{\let\ptctocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
-\@ifundefined{mtctocrmarg}{\let\mtctocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
-\@ifundefined{stctocrmarg}{\let\stctocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
-\@ifundefined{plftocrmarg}{\let\plftocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
-\@ifundefined{mlftocrmarg}{\let\mlftocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
-\@ifundefined{slftocrmarg}{\let\slftocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
-\@ifundefined{plttocrmarg}{\let\plttocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
-\@ifundefined{mlttocrmarg}{\let\mlttocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
-\@ifundefined{slttocrmarg}{\let\slttocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{9}
-% \begin{macro}{\@dotsep}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcdotsep}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcdotsep}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcdotsep}
-% \begin{macro}{\plfdotsep}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlfdotsep}
-% \begin{macro}{\slfdotsep}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltdotsep}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltdotsep}
-% \begin{macro}{\sltdotsep}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We take, if possible, the default value of \com{@dotsep} for each type of mini-tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous prenons, si possible, la valeur par défaut de \com{@dotsep} pour chaque type de mini-tables:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{ptcdotsep}{\let\ptcdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
-\@ifundefined{mtcdotsep}{\let\mtcdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
-\@ifundefined{stcdotsep}{\let\stcdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
-\@ifundefined{plfdotsep}{\let\plfdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
-\@ifundefined{mlfdotsep}{\let\mlfdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
-\@ifundefined{slfdotsep}{\let\slfdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
-\@ifundefined{pltdotsep}{\let\pltdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
-\@ifundefined{mltdotsep}{\let\mltdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
-\@ifundefined{sltdotsep}{\let\sltdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{4}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And we terminate the \com{AtBeginDocument} block:
-% \or\relax
-% Et nous terminons le bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The executive part is done via the following macros, which are invoked in the \env{mtc@verse}-like
-% environments for each kind of mini-table. These commands activate the values recorded by \com{mtcsetformat}.
-% \or\relax
-% La partie exécutive est effectuée via les macros suivantes, qui sont invoquées dans les environnements analogues
-% à~\env{mtc@verse} pour chaque genre de mini-table. Ces commandes activent les valeurs enregistrées par
-% \com{mtcsetformat}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptc@setform}
-% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{ptc@setform} macro is invoked in \env{ptc@verse} to set format parameters:
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{ptc@setform} est invoquée dans \env{ptc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ptc@setform{%
-\let\@pnumwidth\ptcpnumwidth\relax
-\let\@tocrmarg\ptctocrmarg\relax
-\let\@dotsep\ptcdotsep\relax
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setform}
-% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mtc@setform} macro is invoked in \env{mtc@verse} to set format parameters:
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{mtc@setform} est invoquée dans \env{mtc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtc@setform{%
-\let\@pnumwidth\mtcpnumwidth\relax
-\let\@tocrmarg\mtctocrmarg\relax
-\let\@dotsep\mtcdotsep\relax
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\stc@setform}
-% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{stc@setform} macro is invoked in \env{stc@verse} to set format parameters:
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{stc@setform} est invoquée dans \env{stc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\stc@setform{%
-\let\@pnumwidth\stcpnumwidth\relax
-\let\@tocrmarg\stctocrmarg\relax
-\let\@dotsep\stcdotsep\relax
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\plf@setform}
-% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{plf@setform} macro is invoked in \env{ptc@verse} to set format parameters:
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{plf@setform} est invoquée dans \env{ptc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\plf@setform{%
-\let\@pnumwidth\plfpnumwidth\relax
-\let\@tocrmarg\plftocrmarg\relax
-\let\@dotsep\plfdotsep\relax
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlf@setform}
-% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mlf@setform} macro is invoked in \env{mtc@verse} to set format parameters:
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{mlf@setform} est invoquée dans \env{mtc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mlf@setform{%
-\let\@pnumwidth\mlfpnumwidth\relax
-\let\@tocrmarg\mlftocrmarg\relax
-\let\@dotsep\mlfdotsep\relax
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\slf@setform}
-% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{slf@setform} macro is invoked in \env{stc@verse} to set format parameters:
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{slf@setform} est invoquée dans \env{stc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\slf@setform{%
-\let\@pnumwidth\slfpnumwidth\relax
-\let\@tocrmarg\slftocrmarg\relax
-\let\@dotsep\slfdotsep\relax
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\plt@setform}
-% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{plt@setform} macro is invoked in \env{ptc@verse} to set format parameters:
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{plt@setform} est invoquée dans \env{ptc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\plt@setform{%
-\let\@pnumwidth\pltpnumwidth\relax
-\let\@tocrmarg\plttocrmarg\relax
-\let\@dotsep\pltdotsep\relax
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlt@setform}
-% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mlt@setform} macro is invoked in \env{mtc@verse} to set format parameters:
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{mlt@setform} est invoquée dans \env{mtc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mlt@setform{%
-\let\@pnumwidth\plfpnumwidth\relax
-\let\@tocrmarg\plftocrmarg\relax
-\let\@dotsep\plfdotsep\relax
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\slt@setform}
-% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{slt@setform} macro is invoked in \env{stc@verse} to set format parameters:
-% \or\relax
-% La macro \com{slt@setform} est invoquée dans \env{stc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\slt@setform{%
-\let\@pnumwidth\plfpnumwidth\relax
-\let\@tocrmarg\plftocrmarg\relax
-\let\@dotsep\plfdotsep\relax
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setformat@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We now define a flag and the \com{mtcsetformat} command, with has the following syntax:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{parameter-name}\verb|}{|\emph{value}\verb|}|
-% \end{verse}
-% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family, \emph{parameter-name} is a keyword of
-% the \texttt{formatparam} family and \emph{value}, the value of this parameter for the given kind of mini-table.
-% \or\relax
-% Puis nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcsetformat}, avec syntaxe suivante:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{nom-paramètre}\verb|}{|\emph{valeur}\verb|}|
-% \end{verse}
-% où \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}, \emph{nom-paramètre} est un mot-clé de la
-% famille \texttt{formatparam} et \emph{valeur}, la valeur de ce paramètre pour le genre de mini-table donné.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@setformat@\@mtc@setformat@true
-\newcommand{\mtcsetformat}[3]{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtf@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@fparam@abbrev}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{E0021} now process the first argument and store the result in \com{mtc@mtf@abbrev}:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis\imess{E0021} nous traitons le premier argument et rangeons le résultat dans \com{mtc@mtf@abbrev}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtc@mtf@abbrev{X}
-\def\mtc@fparam@abbrev{X}
-\@mtc@setformat@true
-\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax
- \@mtc@setformat@false
- \def\mtc@mtf@abbrev{X}
- \mtcPackageError[E0015]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsetformat \space has a wrong first argument
- \MessageBreak
- (#1).
- \MessageBreak
- It should be a mini-table type
- \MessageBreak
- (parttoc...sectlot)}%
- {Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
-\else \edef\mtc@mtf@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@fparam@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then\imess{E0016} we process the second argument and store the result into a macro \com{mtc@fparam@abbrev}:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis\imess{E0016} le deuxième argument est traité et le résultat est rangé dans \com{mtc@fparam@abbrev}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@formatparam@#2\endcsname\relax
- \@mtc@setformat@false
- \def\mtc@fparam@abbrev{X}
- \mtcPackageError[E0016]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsetformat \space has a wrong second argument
- \MessageBreak
- (#2).
- \MessageBreak
- It should be a formatting param choosen from:
- \MessageBreak
- pagenumwidth, tocrightmargin, dotinterval}%
- {Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}%
-\else
- \edef\mtc@fparam@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@formatparam@#2}}%
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setformat@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpfm@name}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtf@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@fparam@abbrev}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\SMMZZ{\lmess{I0016}\\\lmess{E0025}} name of the storage macro is built and it receives the third parameter
-% as value (\emph{via}~\com{edef} because it can contain some complex code):
-% \or\relax
-% Le\SMMZZ{\lmess{I0016}\\\lmess{E0025}} nom de la macro de stockage est construit et elle reçoit le troisième paramètre
-% comme valeur (\emph{via}~\com{edef} car il peut contenir du code complexe):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@setformat@
- \mtc@toks{#3}%
- \def\mtc@tmpfm@name{\mtc@mtf@abbrev\mtc@fparam@abbrev}%
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0016]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsetformat\space redefines the macro
- \MessageBreak
- "\mtc@tmpfm@name" as "\the\mtc@toks"}
- \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmpfm@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}%
-\else
- \mtcPackageError[E0025]{minitoc}%
- {The macro \string\mtcsetformat\space has incompatible
- \MessageBreak
- first (#1) and second (#2) arguments}%
- {Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}%
-\fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetpagenumbers} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetpagenumbers.command}\icom{mtcsetpagenumbers}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetpagenumbers}}\label{s+code+mtcsetpagenumbers.command}\icom{mtcsetpagenumbers}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This command activates of inhibits page numbers in the mini-tables of a given kind. Its syntax is the following:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \verb+\mtcsetpagenumbers{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+
-% \end{verse}
-% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword for a kind of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}),
-% or \texttt{on} and
-% \texttt{off} a keyword to activate (\texttt{on}) or inhibit (\texttt{off}) the page numbers. \texttt{on} and
-% \texttt{off} have many synonyms.
-% \or\relax
-% Cette commande active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les mini-tables du genre donné. Sa syntaxe est la
-% suivante:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \verb+\mtcsetpagenumbers{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+
-% \end{verse}
-% où \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé pour un genre de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot})
-% et \texttt{on} ou \texttt{off} un mot-clé pour activer (\texttt{on}) ou inhiber (\texttt{off}) les numéros de
-% pages. \texttt{on} et \texttt{off} ont de nombreux synonymes.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setpagenumbers@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@spn@ok@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define some flags:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons quelques indicateurs:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@setpagenumbers@ \@mtc@setpagenumbers@false
-\newif\if@mtc@spn@ok@
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define the user-level macro. If the first argument is a star, we call the internal macro
-% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers@} for each type of mini-table available; else, we call this internal macro only once,
-% for the specified type of mini-table.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons la macro au niveau utilisateur. Si le premier argument est une étoile, nous appelons la macro
-% interne \com{mtcsetpagenumbers@} pour chaque type de mini-table disponible; sinon, nous appelons cette macro
-% interne une seule fois, pour le type de mini-table spécifié.
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \fi %
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\mtcsetpagenumbers}[2]{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\*\relax
- \@ifundefined{part}{}%
- {\mtcsetpagenumbers@{parttoc}{#2}
- \mtcsetpagenumbers@{partlof}{#2}
- \mtcsetpagenumbers@{partlot}{#2}}
- \@ifundefined{chapter}{}%
- {\mtcsetpagenumbers@{minitoc}{#2}
- \mtcsetpagenumbers@{minilof}{#2}
- \mtcsetpagenumbers@{minilot}{#2}}
- \@ifundefined{section}{}%
- {\mtcsetpagenumbers@{secttoc}{#2}
- \mtcsetpagenumbers@{sectlof}{#2}
- \mtcsetpagenumbers@{sectlot}{#2}}
- \else
- \mtcsetpagenumbers@{#1}{#2}%
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumber@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers@} internal macro, with two arguments:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis la macro interne \com{mtcsetpagenumbers@}, avec deux arguments:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\mtcsetpagenumbers@}[2]{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttpn@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pnsw@abbrev}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{E0017} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family, and store the result in
-% \com{mtc@mttpn@abbrev}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{E0017} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}, et rangeons le résultat dans
-% \com{mtc@mttpn@abbrev}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X}
-\@mtc@setpagenumbers@true
-\def\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{}
-\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax
- \@mtc@setpagenumbers@false
- \def\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{X}
- \def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X}
- \mtcPackageError[E0017]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsetpagenumbers \space has a wrong first
- \MessageBreak
- argument (#1)}%
- {It should be a mini-table type
- \MessageBreak
- (parttoc...sectlot)
- \MessageBreak
- Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
-\else
- \edef\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@spn@ok@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pnsw@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttpn@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setpagenumbers@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmppn@name}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then\SMM{\lmess{E0018}\\\lmess{I0022}\\\lmess{I0021}} the second argument, a keyword of the \texttt{YN} family,
-% and store the result into a macro \com{mtc@pnsw@abbrev}.
-% The name of the effective macro is built and the macro executed.
-% \or\relax
-% Puis\SMM{\lmess{E0018}\\\lmess{I0022}\\\lmess{I0021}} le second argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{YN},
-% et nous rangeons le résultat dans \com{mtc@pnsw@abbrev}.
-% Le nom de la macro effective est construit puis la macro exécutée.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@mtc@spn@ok@true
-\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@YN@#2\endcsname\relax
- \@mtc@spn@ok@false
- \def\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{X}
- \def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X}
- \@mtc@setpagenumbers@false
- \def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X}
- \mtcPackageError[E0018]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsetpagenumbers \space has a wrong second
- \MessageBreak
- argument (#2)}%
- {It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off, ...)
- \MessageBreak
- Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
-\else
- \edef\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@YN@#2}}
- \def\mtc@pnsw@abbrevX{X}
- \def\mtc@noX{mtc@noX}
- \def\mtc@tmppn@name{\mtc@pnsw@abbrev\mtc@mttpn@abbrev pagenumbers}
- \expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@\mtc@pnsw@abbrev X\endcsname\mtc@noX
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0022]{minitoc}%
- {Page numbers are inhibited
- \MessageBreak
- for the #1s}
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0021]{minitoc}%
- {Page numbers are activated
- \MessageBreak for the #1s}
- \fi
- \csname\mtc@tmppn@name\endcsname{}
-\fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetrules} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetrules.command}\icom{mtcsetrules}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetrules}}\label{s+code+mtcsetrules.command}\icom{mtcsetrules}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This macro is very similar to \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} and its syntax is the same:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \verb+\mtcsetrules{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+
-% \end{verse}
-% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword for a kind of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}),
-% or \texttt{on} and
-% \texttt{off} a keyword to activate (\texttt{on}) or inhibit (\texttt{off}) the horizontal rules. \texttt{on} and
-% \texttt{off} have many synonyms.
-%
-% Hence the code is similar.
-% \or\relax
-% Cette macro ressemble beaucoup à~\com{mtcsetpagenumbers} et sa syntaxe est la même:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \verb+\mtcsetrules{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+
-% \end{verse}
-% où \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé pour un genre de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot})
-% et \texttt{on} ou
-% \texttt{off} un mot-clé pour activer (\texttt{on}) ou inhiber (\texttt{off}) les filets horizontaux. \texttt{on} et
-% \texttt{off} ont de nombreux synonymes.
-%
-% Donc le code est similaire.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setrules@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sru@ok@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define some flags:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons quelques indicateurs:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@setrules@ \@mtc@setrules@false
-\newif\if@mtc@sru@ok@
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define the user-level macro. If the first argument is a star, we call the internal macro
-% \com{mtcsetrules@} for each type of mini-table available; else, we call this internal macro only once,
-% for the specified type of mini-table.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons la macro au niveau utilisateur. Si le premier argument est une étoile, nous appelons la macro
-% interne \com{mtcsetrules@} pour chaque type de mini-table disponible; sinon, nous appelons cette macro
-% interne une seule fois, pour le type de mini-table spécifié.
-% \fi %
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\mtcsetrules}[2]{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\*\relax
- \@ifundefined{part}{}%
- {\mtcsetrules@{parttoc}{#2}
- \mtcsetrules@{partlof}{#2}
- \mtcsetrules@{partlot}{#2}}
- \@ifundefined{chapter}{}%
- {\mtcsetrules@{minitoc}{#2}
- \mtcsetrules@{minilof}{#2}
- \mtcsetrules@{minilot}{#2}}
- \@ifundefined{section}{}%
- {\mtcsetrules@{secttoc}{#2}
- \mtcsetrules@{sectlof}{#2}
- \mtcsetrules@{sectlot}{#2}}
- \else
- \mtcsetrules@{#1}{#2}%
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then the \com{mtcsetrules@} internal macro, which has two arguments:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis la macro interne \com{mtcsetrules@}, qui a deux arguments:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\mtcsetrules@}[2]{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttru@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setrules@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rusw@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{E0019} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family and store the result in a macro
-% \com{mtc@mttru@abbrev}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{E0019} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable} puis rangeons le résultat
-% dans \com{mtc@mttru@abbrev}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtc@mttru@abbrev{X}
-\@mtc@setrules@true
-\def\mtc@rusw@abbrev{}
-\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax
- \@mtc@setrules@false
- \def\mtc@rusw@abbrev{X}
- \def\mtc@mttru@abbrev{X}
- \mtcPackageError[E0019]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsetrules \space has a wrong first argument
- \MessageBreak
- (#1)}%
- {It should be a mini-table type
- \MessageBreak
- (parttoc...sectlot)
- \MessageBreak
- Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
-\else
- \edef\mtc@mttru@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sru@ok@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rusw@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttru@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{if@setrules@false}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@noX}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmppn@name}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then\SMM{\lmess{E0020}\\\lmess{I0008}\\\lmess{I0007}} the second argument, a keyword of the \texttt{YN} family,
-% and store the result in a macro \com{mtc@rusw@abbrev}.
-% The name of the effective macro is built and the macro executed.
-% \or\relax
-% Puis\SMM{\lmess{E0020}\\\lmess{I0008}\\\lmess{I0007}} le second argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{YN},
-% et nous rangeons le résultat dans \com{mtc@rusw@abbrev}.
-% Le nom de la macro effective est construit et cette macro est exécutée.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@mtc@sru@ok@true
-\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@YN@#2\endcsname\relax
- \@mtc@sru@ok@false
- \def\mtc@rusw@abbrev{X}
- \def\mtc@mttru@abbrev{X}
- \@mtc@setrules@false
- \mtcPackageError[E0020]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsetrules \space has a wrong second argument
- \MessageBreak
- (#2)}%
- {It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off, ...)
- \MessageBreak
- Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
-\else
- \edef\mtc@rusw@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@YN@#2}}
- \def\mtc@rusw@abbrevX{X}
- \def\mtc@noX{mtc@noX}
- \def\mtc@tmppn@name{\mtc@rusw@abbrev\mtc@mttru@abbrev rule}
- \expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@\mtc@rusw@abbrev X\endcsname\mtc@noX
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0008]{minitoc}%
- {Horizontal rules are inhibited
- \MessageBreak
- for the #1s}
- \else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0007]{minitoc}%
- {Horizontal rules are activated
- \MessageBreak
- for the #1s}
- \fi
- \csname\mtc@tmppn@name\endcsname{}
-\fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetfeature} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}\icom{mtcsetfeature}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetfeature}}\label{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}\icom{mtcsetfeature}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For this command, we must define three families of keywords, but the third is just used to add the word
-% ``\texttt{style}'' for the ``\texttt{pagestyle}'' when ``\feat{pagestyle}'' is used.
-%
-% \or\relax
-% Pour cette commande, nous devons définir trois familles de mots-clés, mais la troisième ne sert qu'à~ajouter le mot
-% <<~\texttt{style}~>> pour le <<~\texttt{pagestyle}~>> lorsque <<~\feat{pagestyle}~>> est utilisé.
-%
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A family (\texttt{ltypetable}) for the long names of the types of mini-tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Une famille (\texttt{ltypetable}) pour les noms longs des types de mini-tables:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@parttoc}{parttoc}\def\mtc@ltypetable@parttoc{parttoc}
-\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@partlof}{partlof}\def\mtc@ltypetable@partlof{partlof}
-\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@partlot}{partlot}\def\mtc@ltypetable@partlot{partlot}
-\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@minitoc}{minitoc}\def\mtc@ltypetable@minitoc{minitoc}
-\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@minilof}{minilof}\def\mtc@ltypetable@minilof{minilof}
-\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@minilot}{minilot}\def\mtc@ltypetable@minilot{minilot}
-\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@secttoc}{secttoc}\def\mtc@ltypetable@secttoc{secttoc}
-\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@sectlof}{sectlof}\def\mtc@ltypetable@sectlof{sectlof}
-\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@sectlot}{sectlot}\def\mtc@ltypetable@sectlot{sectlot}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A family (\texttt{featureparam}) for the type of feature:
-% \or\relax
-% Une famille (\texttt{featureparam}) pour le type de dispositif:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@before}{before}%
- \def\mtc@featureparam@before{before}
-\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@after}{after}%
- \def\mtc@featureparam@after{after}
-\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@open}{open}%
- \def\mtc@featureparam@open{open}
-\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@close}{close}%
- \def\mtc@featureparam@close{close}
-\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@pagestyle}{thispage}%
- \def\mtc@featureparam@pagestyle{thispage}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And a family (\texttt{ft3}) to add ``style'' if it is a ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature:
-% \or\relax
-% Et une famille (\texttt{ft3}) pour ajouter <<~style~>> si c'est un dispositif <<~\feat{pagestyle}~>>:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{mtc@ft3@before}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@before\endcsname{}
-\@namedef{mtc@ft3@after}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@after\endcsname{}
-\@namedef{mtc@ft3@open}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@open\endcsname{}
-\@namedef{mtc@ft3@close}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@close\endcsname{}
-\@namedef{mtc@ft3@pagestyle}{style}%
- \expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@pagestyle\endcsname{style}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \com{mtcsetfeature} command has the following syntax:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{feature-name}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}|
-% \end{verse}
-% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword of the \texttt{ltypetable} family, \emph{feature-name} is a keyword of
-% the \texttt{featureparam} family (but also of the \texttt{ft3} family), and \emph{commands} are the commands which
-% constitute the selected feature.
-% \or\relax
-% La commande \com{mtcsetfeature} a la syntaxe suivante:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{nom-dispositif}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}|
-% \end{verse}
-% où \emph{mini-table} est une mot-clé de la famille \texttt{ltypetable} family, \emph{nom-dispositif} est un mot-clé
-% de la famille \texttt{featureparam} (mais aussi de la famille \texttt{ft3}), et \emph{commandes} sont les
-% commandes qui constituent le dispositif choisi.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfeature@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We define a flag and the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, with three arguments:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, qui a trois arguments:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@setfeature@\@mtc@setfeature@true
-\newcommand{\mtcsetfeature}[3]{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@abbrev}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{E0011} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{ltypetable} family, and store
-% the result in \com{mtc@mtfeat@abbrev}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{E0011} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{ltypetable}, et rangeons le résultat
-% dans \com{mtc@mtfeat@abbrev}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev{X}
-\def\mtc@featparam@abbrev{X}
-\@mtc@setfeature@true
-\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@ltypetable@#1\endcsname\relax
- \@mtc@setfeature@false
- \def\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev{X}
- \mtcPackageError[E0011]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsetfeature \space has a wrong first argument
- \MessageBreak
- (#1).
- \MessageBreak
- It should be a mini-table type
- \MessageBreak
- (parttoc...sectlot)}%
- {Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
-\else
- \edef\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@ltypetable@#1}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfeature@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@third}
-% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\imess{E0012} second argument is a keyword of the \texttt{featureparam} family, the result is stored in
-% \com{mtc@featparam@}; and the complement is computed from the first argument, interpreted as a keyword of the
-% \texttt{ft3} family and whose result is stored in \com{mtc@featparam@third}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le\imess{E0012} deuxième argument est un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{featureparam}, le résultat est rangé dans
-% \com{mtc@featparam@}; et le complément est calculé d'après le premier argument, interprété comme un mot-clé de
-% la famille \texttt{ft3} et dont le résultat est rangé dans \com{mtc@featparam@third}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@featureparam@#2\endcsname\relax
- \@mtc@setfeature@false
- \def\mtc@featparam@abbrev{X}
- \def\mtc@featparam@third{X}
- \mtcPackageError[E0012]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsetfeature \space has a wrong second argument
- \MessageBreak
- (#2).
- \MessageBreak
- It should be a feature param
- \MessageBreak
- (before, after, open, close, pagestyle)}%
- {Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
-\else
- \edef\mtc@featparam@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@featureparam@#2}}
- \edef\mtc@featparam@third{\@nameuse{mtc@ft3@#2}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfeature@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpfeat@name}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@third}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% The\SMM{\lmess{I0014}\\\lmess{E0023}} name of the effective macro is built by concatenating these three
-% pieces (named \com{mtc@featparam@abbrev},\space
-% \com{mtc@mtfeat@abbrev},\space and \com{mtc@featparam@third}\space respectively), then this macro is executed:
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \or\relax
-% Le\SMM{\lmess{I0014}\\\lmess{E0023}} nom de la macro effective est construit en concaténant ces trois
-% morceaux (nommés \com{mtc@featparam@abbrev},
-% \com{mtc@mtfeat@abbrev} et \com{mtc@featparam@third} respectivement), puis cette macro est exécutée:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@setfeature@
- \def\mtc@tmpfeat@name%
- {\mtc@featparam@abbrev\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev\mtc@featparam@third}%
- \mtc@toks{#3}%
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0014]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsetfeature\space redefines the macro
- \MessageBreak
- "\csname mtc@tmpfeat@name\endcsname" as
- \MessageBreak
- "\the\mtc@toks"}%
- \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmpfeat@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}%
-\else
- \mtcPackageError[E0023]{minitoc}%
- {The macro \string\mtcsetfeature\space has incompatible
- \MessageBreak
- first (#1) and second (#2) arguments}%
- {Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
-\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetdepth} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetdepth.command}\icom{mtcsetdepth}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetdepth}}\label{s+code+mtcsetdepth.command}\icom{mtcsetdepth}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This command is very similar to the \com{mtcsettitle} command. Its syntax is almost identical:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \icom{mtcsetdepth}\verb|\mtcsetdepth{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{depth}\verb|}|
-% \end{verse}
-%
-% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \texttt{minitoc}. The \emph{depth} is the depth for a mini-table.
-% If it is a mini-table for a list of figures or tables, the corresponding depth counter \virage\emph{must be
-% available}, i.e.,~must have been created (often by an adequate package, like the \pack{subfig}
-% package~\cite{subfig}).
-% \or\relax
-% Cette commande est très similaire à~la commande \com{mtcsettitle}. Sa syntaxe est presque identique:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \icom{mtcsetdepth}\verb|\mtcsetdepth{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{profondeur}\verb|}|
-% \end{verse}
-%
-% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \texttt{minitoc}. La \emph{profondeur} est la profondeur
-% pour une mini-table. Si c'est une mini-table pour une liste de figures ou de tableaux, le compteur profondeur
-% correspondant \virage\emph{doit être disponible}, c'est-à-dire qu'il doit avoir été créé (souvent par un paquetage
-% adéquat, tel que le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}).
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setdepth@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% First, we declare a flag, set true:
-% \or\relax
-% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, vrai par défaut:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@setdepth@\@mtc@setdepth@true
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then we define the \com{mtcsetdepth} command, with two arguments:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis nous définissons la commande \com{mtcsetdepth}, avec deux arguments:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\mtcsetdepth}[2]{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtade@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setdepth@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{E0009} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{ltypetable} family. The result is stored in
-% \com{mtc@mtade@abbrev}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{E0009} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{ltypetable}. Le résultat est rangé
-% dans \com{mtc@mtade@abbrev}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtc@mtade@abbrev{X}
-\@mtc@setdepth@true
-\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@ltypetable@#1\endcsname\relax
- \@mtc@setdepth@false
- \def\mtc@mtade@abbrev{X}
- \mtcPackageError[E0009]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsetdepth \space has a wrong first argument
- \MessageBreak
- (#1).
- \MessageBreak
- It should be a mini-table type
- \MessageBreak
- (parttoc...sectlot)}%
- {Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
-\else
- \edef\mtc@mtade@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@ltypetable@#1}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setdepth@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpde@name}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtade@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And\SMM{\lmess{E0008}\\\lmess{I0013}\\\lmess{E0010}} we construct the name of the effective counter
-% and gave it the value:
-% \or\relax
-% Et\SMM{\lmess{E0008}\\\lmess{I0013}\\\lmess{E0010}} nous construisons le nom du compteur effectif
-% et lui donnons la valeur:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@setdepth@
- \def\mtc@tmpde@name{\mtc@mtade@abbrev depth}
- \expandafter\noexpand\@ifundefined{c@\mtc@mtade@abbrev depth}%
- {\mtcPackageError[E0008]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsetdepth \space attempts to use
- \MessageBreak
- an undefined counter (#1depth).}%
- {Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}}{%
- \mtc@toks{#2} % trick for explicit message using \the.
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0013]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsetdepth\space redefines the counter
- \MessageBreak
- "\mtc@tmpde@name" as "\the\mtc@toks"}%
- \expandafter\csname c@\mtc@tmpde@name\endcsname=#2}%
-\else
- \mtcPackageError[E0010]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsetdepth:\space Illegal type of table (#1)}%
- {Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}{\relax}%
-\fi}% end of \mtcsetdepth
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetoffset} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetoffset.command}\icom{mtcsetoffset}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetoffset}}\label{s+code+mtcsetoffset.command}\icom{mtcsetoffset}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This command is very similar to the \com{mtcsettitle} command. Its syntax is almost identical:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \icom{mtcsetoffset}\verb|\mtcsetoffset{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{value}\verb|}|
-% \end{verse}
-%
-% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \texttt{minitoc}. The \emph{value} is the offset value for a mini-table.
-% \or\relax
-% Cette commande est très similaire à~la commande \com{mtcsettitle}. Sa syntaxe est presque identique:
-% \begin{verse}
-% \icom{mtcsetoffset}\verb|\mtcsetoffset{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{valeur}\verb|}|
-% \end{verse}
-%
-% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \texttt{minitoc}. La \emph{valeur} est celle du déplacement
-% latéral pour une mini-table.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setoffset@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% First, we declare a flag, set true:
-% \or\relax
-% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, vrai par défaut:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@setoffset@\@mtc@setoffset@true
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then we define the \com{mtcsetoffset} command, with two arguments:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis nous définissons la commande \com{mtcsetoffset}, avec deux arguments:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\mtcsetoffset}[2]{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtaof@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setoffset@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{E0042} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family. The result is stored in
-% \com{mtc@mtaof@abbrev}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{E0042} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}. Le résultat est rangé
-% dans \com{mtc@mtaof@abbrev}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtc@mtaof@abbrev{X}
-\@mtc@setoffset@true
-\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax
- \@mtc@setoffset@false
- \def\mtc@mtaof@abbrev{X}
- \mtcPackageError[E0042]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsetoffset \space has a wrong first argument
- \MessageBreak
- (#1).
- \MessageBreak
- It should be a mini-table type
- \MessageBreak
- (parttoc...sectlot)}%
- {Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
-\else
- \edef\mtc@mtaof@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setoffset@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpof@name}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtaof@abbrev}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And\SMM{\lmess{E0041}\\\lmess{I0052}\\\lmess{E0043}} we construct the name of the effective offset and gave it the value:
-% \or\relax
-% Et\SMM{\lmess{E0041}\\\lmess{I0052}\\\lmess{E0043}} nous construisons le nom du déplacement effectif
-% et lui donnons la valeur:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@setoffset@
- \def\mtc@tmpof@name{\mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset.}
- \expandafter\noexpand\@ifundefined{\mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset}%
- {\mtcPackageError[E0041]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsetoffset \space attempts to use
- \MessageBreak
- an undefined offset (\mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset).}%
- {Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}}{%
- \mtc@toks{#2} % trick for explicit message using \the.
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0052]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsetoffset\space redefines
- \MessageBreak
- "\mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset" as "\the\mtc@toks"}%
- \expandafter\def\csname \mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset\endcsname{#2}}%
-\else
- \mtcPackageError[E0043]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcsetoffset:\space Illegal type of table (#1)}%
- {Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}{\relax}%
-\fi}% end of \mtcsetoffset
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Polymorphic entries}\label{s+code+polym}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Entrées polymorphes}\label{s+code+polym}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymtoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% A toc entry should be able to have variants when it appears in the normal text (like the mandatory argument of
-% a sectionning command), in a page header or in the main TOC (like the optionnal argument of a sectionning
-% command), in a minitable (parttoc, minitoc or secttoc). Similar behaviour should be available for entries in th
-% LOF or the LOT. So we define three commands to be used inside the optionnal argument of a sectionning command or
-% of \com{caption} for a figure or a table. These commands must be robust (because used in optionnal arguments)
-% and have 4~arguments: (1)~the variant to appear in a parttoc (or partlof or partlof),
-% (2)~the variant to appear in a minitoc (or minilof or minilof),
-% (3)~the variant to appear in a secttoc (or sectlof or sectlof).
-% (4)~the variant to appear in the main TOC (or LOF or LOT).
-% The variant to appear locally as title of the sectionning unit or as local caption of the figure or table is
-% the mandatory argument of the sectionning command or of the caption command (see section~\vref{ss+polym}).
-% We use the \verb|\ifin...| flags.
-% \or\relax
-% Une entrée de table des matières devrait disposer de variantes selon qu'elle apparaît dans le texte normal
-% (comme l'argument obligatoire d'une commande de sectionnement), dans un en-tête de page ou dans la table des
-% matières principale (comme l'argument optionnel d'une commande de sectionnement), dans une minitable (parttoc, minitoc
-% ou secttoc). Un comportement similaire devrait être possible pour les entrées de la liste des figures ou des
-% tableaux. Donc nous définissons trois commandes à~utiliser à~l'intérieur de l'argument optionnel d'une commande
-% de sectionnement ou de celui de \com{caption} pour une figure ou un tableau. Ces commandes doivent être robustes
-% (car utilisées à~l'intérieur d'un argument optionnel) et ont 4~arguments: (1)~la variante apparaissant dans une
-% parttoc (ou partlof ou partlof),
-% (2)~la variante apparaissant dans une a minitoc (ou minilof ou minilof),
-% (3)~la variante apparaissant dans une secttoc (ou sectlof ou sectlof).
-% (4)~la variante apparaissant la la table des matières (ou liste des figures ou liste des tableaux) principale.
-% La variante apparaissant localement comme titre de l'unité de sectionnement ou comme légende locale de la figure
-% ou du tableau est l'argument obligatoire de la commande de sectionnement ou de la commande de caption (voir la
-% section~\vref{ss+polym}).
-% Nous utilisons les indicateurs \verb|\ifin...|.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymtoc}[4]{%
- \ifinparttoc\relax{#1}%
- \else\ifinminitoc\relax{#2}%
- \else\ifinsecttoc\relax{#3}%
- \else\relax{#4}
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlof}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For entries of the list of figures:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les entrées le la liste des figures:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymlof}[4]{%
- \ifinpartlof\relax{#1}%
- \else\ifinminilof\relax{#2}%
- \else\ifinsectlof\relax{#3}%
- \else\relax{#4}
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For entries of the list of tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les entrées le la liste des tableaux:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymlot}[4]{%
- \ifinpartlot\relax{#1}%
- \else\ifinminilot\relax{#2}%
- \else\ifinsectlot\relax{#3}%
- \else\relax{#4}
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \texttt{mtchideinmaintoc} environment and siblings}\label{s+code+mtchideinmaintoc.env}\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{L'environnement \texttt{mtchideinmaintoc} et ses comparses}\label{s+code+mtchideinmaintoc.env}\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himtoc@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The flag \com{if@mtc@Himtoc@} is used to detect an incorrect imbrication of this environment:
-% \or\relax
-% L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@Himtoc@} est utilisé pour détecter une imbrication incorrecte de cet environnement:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@Himtoc@ \@mtc@Himtoc@false
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{9}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savetocdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@restoretocdepth}
-% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himtoc@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
-% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\SMM{\lmess{E0005}\\\lmess{E0031}} define a macro \com{mtc@savetocdepth} to save the current value
-% of the counter \dcnt{tocdepth}.
-% Then we define this environment, which inserts into the TOC file this command and commands of the
-% form \com{setcounter}\verb|{|\dcnt{tocdepth}\verb|}{...}|. Note that \com{xdef} is necessary!
-% It also save and restore the value of the counter \dcnt{tocdepth}, as the optional argument is the hiding depth of
-% the entries in the main TOC.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\SMM{\lmess{E0005}\\\lmess{E0031}} définissons une macro \com{mtc@savetocdepth} pour sauvegarder la valeur
-% courante du compteur \dcnt{tocdepth}.
-% Notez que \com{xdef} est nécessaire!
-% Puis nous définissons cet environnement, qui écrit dans le fichier table des matières cette commande et
-% des commandes de la
-% forme \com{setcounter}\verb|{|\dcnt{tocdepth}\verb|}{...}|.
-% Il sauvegarde et restaure aussi la valeur du compteur \dcnt{tocdepth}, car
-% l'argument optionnel est la profondeur de masquage des entrées dans la table des matières principale.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\mtc@savetocdepth}{\xdef\mtc@sv@tocdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}}%
-\newcommand{\mtc@restoretocdepth}{\setcounter{tocdepth}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth}}%
-\newenvironment{mtchideinmaintoc}[1][-1]%
-{\if@mtc@Himtoc@\mtcPackageError[E0005]{minitoc}%
- {Imbrication of mtchideinmaintoc environments}%
- {The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect}\fi
- \global\@mtc@Himtoc@true
- \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\mtc@savetocdepth}%
- \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}%
-{\if@mtc@Himtoc@\else\mtcPackageError[E0031]{minitoc}%
- {Unbalanced mtchideinmaintoc environment}%
- {The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect}\fi
- \global\@mtc@Himtoc@false
- \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himlof@}
-% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savelofdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\empty}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@lofdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svf@tocdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
-% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments are similar, but we must verify the
-% presence of the associated depth counter, so we have two versions of each of these environments.
-% This must be done \emph{after} the loading of the packages.
-%
-% First, for the list of figures:\SMM{\lmess{E0003}\\\lmess{E0029}}
-% \or\relax
-% Les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot} sont similaires, mais nous devons
-% véfifier la présence du compteur de profondeur associé, donc nous avons deux versions de ces environnements.
-% Ceci doit être fait \emph{après} le chargement des paquetages.
-%
-% D'abord, pour la liste des figures:\SMM{\lmess{E0003}\\\lmess{E0029}}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@Himlof@ \@mtc@Himlof@false
-\AtBeginDocument{%
-\@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{%
- \providecommand{\mtc@savelofdepth}{\empty}
- \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlof}[1][-1]%
- {\if@mtc@Himlof@\mtcPackageError[E0003]{minitoc}%
- {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlof environments}%
- {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi
- \global\@mtc@Himlof@true
- \def\mtc@sv@tocdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}%
- \def\mtc@sv@lofdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}%
- \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\mtc@savetocdepth}%
- \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}%
- {\if@mtc@Himlof@\else\mtcPackageError[E0029]{minitoc}%
- {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlof environment}%
- {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi
- \global\@mtc@Himlof@false
- \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}%
-}}%
-{%
- \newcommand{\mtc@savelofdepth}{\xdef\mtc@sv@lofdepth{\arabic{lofdepth}}}%
- \newcommand{\mtc@restorelofdepth}{\setcounter{lofdepth}{\mtc@sv@lofdepth}}%
- \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlof}[1][-1]%
- {\if@mtc@Himlof@\mtcPackageError[E0003]{minitoc}%
- {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlof environments}%
- {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi
- \global\@mtc@Himlof@true
- \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\mtc@savelofdepth}%
- \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}%
- {\if@mtc@Himlof@\else\mtcPackageError[E0029]{minitoc}%
- {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlof environment}%
- {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi
- \global\@mtc@Himlof@false
- \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himlot@}
-% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savelotdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\empty}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@lotdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svt@tocdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
-% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then for the list of tables:\SMM{\lmess{E0004}\\\lmess{E0030}}
-% \or\relax
-% Puis pour la liste des tableaux:\SMM{\lmess{E0004}\\\lmess{E0030}}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@Himlot@ \@mtc@Himlot@false
-\AtBeginDocument{%
-\@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{%
- \providecommand{\mtc@savelotdepth}{\empty}
- \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlot}[1][-1]%
- {\if@mtc@Himlot@\mtcPackageError[E0004]{minitoc}%
- {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlot environments}%
- {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi
- \global\@mtc@Himlot@true
- \def\mtc@sv@tocdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}%
- \def\mtc@sv@lotdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}%
- \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\mtc@savetocdepth}%
- \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}%
- {\if@mtc@Himlot@\else\mtcPackageError[E0030]{minitoc}%
- {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlot environment}%
- {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi
- \global\@mtc@Himlot@false
- \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}%
-}}%
-{%
- \newcommand{\mtc@savelotdepth}{\xdef\mtc@sv@lotdepth{\arabic{lotdepth}}}%
- \newcommand{\mtc@restorelotdepth}{\setcounter{lotdepth}{\mtc@sv@lotdepth}}%
- \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlot}[1][-1]%
- {\if@mtc@Himlot@\mtcPackageError[E0004]{minitoc}%
- {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlot environments}%
- {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi
- \global\@mtc@Himlot@true
- \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\mtc@savelotdepth}%
- \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}%
- {\if@mtc@Himlot@\else\mtcPackageError[E0030]{minitoc}%
- {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlot environment}%
- {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi
- \global\@mtc@Himlot@false
- \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Fixing the ``Glossary'' entry in the TOC}\label{s+code+mtcfixglossary}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Correction de l'entrée <<~Glossaire~>> dans la TdM}\label{s+code+mtcfixglossary}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This macro is complex. Its syntax is:
-% \or\relax
-% Cette macro est complexe. Sa syntaxe est la suivante:
-% \fi
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{mtcfixglossary}\verb+[part|chapter|section]+
-% \end{verse}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@glofix@level}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Depending\SMM{\lmess{W0001}\\\lmess{E0001}\\\lmess{W0006}} on the document class,
-% the ``Glossary'' entry in the TOC is treated as a starred chapter or a starred
-% section. Hence we must first determine the default value of the optional argument. The default value is then
-% stored in the macro \com{mtc@glofix@level}. This is done by the following code, which eventually gives a warning
-% message:
-% \or\relax
-% Selon\SMM{\lmess{W0001}\\\lmess{E0001}\\\lmess{W0006}} la classe du document,
-% l'entrée <<~Glossaire~>> dans la table des matières est traitée comme un chapitre étoilé
-% ou une section étoilée. Donc nous devons d'abord déterminer la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel. La
-% valeur par défaut est alors rangée dans la macro \com{mtc@glofix@level}. Ceci est fait par le code suivant, qui
-% produit éventuellement un message d'avertissement:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
- \@ifundefined{section}%
- {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0001]{minitoc}%
- {\string\chapter\space and \string\section\space are undefined.%
- \MessageBreak
- Cannot use \string\mtcfixglossary \space without
- \MessageBreak
- optional argument [part]}%
- \@ifundefined{part}%
- {\mtcPackageError[E0001]{minitoc}%
- {But \string\part\space is undefined}%
- {\string\mtcfixglossary\space not usable}}%
- {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0006]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcfixglossary\space can only be used
- \MessageBreak
- with the [part] optional argument,
- \MessageBreak
- which becomes the default}%
- \def\mtc@glofix@level{part}%
- }}%
- {\def\mtc@glofix@level{section}}}%
-{\def\mtc@glofix@level{chapter}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcfixglossary@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixglossary}
-% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then\imess{E0026} we define a flag (\com{if@mtcfixglossary@}) and the command \com{mtcfixglossary}, which adds
-% the necessary lines in the TOC, the LOF and the LOT.
-% \or\relax
-% Puis\imess{E0026} nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcfixglossary}, qui ajoute les lignes
-% nécessaires dans la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtcfixglossary@ \@mtcfixglossary@false
-\newcommand{\mtcfixglossary}[1][\mtc@glofix@level]{%
- \@mtcfixglossary@false
- \expandafter%
- \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax\@mtcfixglossary@true\fi
- \expandafter%
- \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax\@mtcfixglossary@true\fi
- \expandafter%
- \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax\@mtcfixglossary@true\fi
- \if@mtcfixglossary@
- \addcontentsline{lof}{x\mtc@glofix@level}{}%
- \addcontentsline{lot}{x\mtc@glofix@level}{}%
- \csname mtcadd\mtc@glofix@level\endcsname\relax
- \else
- \mtcPackageError[E0026]{minitoc}%
- {The optional argument of \string\mtcfixglossary
- \MessageBreak
- is wrong}%
- {It must be omitted (\mtc@glofix@level), or be part, chapter or section}%
- \fi
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Fixing the ``Index'' entry in the TOC}\label{s+code+mtcfixindex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Correction de l'entrée <<~Index~>> dans la TdM}\label{s+code+mtcfixindex}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This macro is complex. Its syntax is:
-% \or\relax
-% Cette macro est complexe. Sa syntaxe est la suivante:
-% \fi
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{mtcfixindex}\verb+[part|chapter|section]+
-% \end{verse}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ixfix@level}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Depending\SMM{\lmess{W0002}\\\lmess{W0007}\\\lmess{E0002}} on the document class,
-% the ``Index'' entry in the TOC is treated as a starred chapter or a starred
-% section. Hence we must first determine the default value of the optional argument. The default value is then
-% stored in the macro \com{mtc@ixfix@level}. This is done by the following code, which eventually gives a warning message:
-% \or\relax
-% Selon\SMM{\lmess{W0002}\\\lmess{W0007}\\\lmess{E0002}} la classe du document,
-% l'entrée <<~Index~>> dans la table des matières est traitée comme un chapitre étoilé
-% ou une section étoilée. Donc nous devons d'abord déterminer la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel. La
-% valeur par défaut est alors rangée dans la macro \com{mtc@ixfix@level}. Ceci est fait par le code suivant, qui
-% produit éventuellement un message d'avertissement:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
- \@ifundefined{section}%
- {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0002]{minitoc}%
- {\string\chapter\space and \string\section\space are undefined.%
- \MessageBreak
- Cannot use \string\mtcfixindex \space without
- \MessageBreak
- optional argument [part]}%
- \@ifundefined{part}%
- {\mtcPackageError[E0002]{minitoc}%
- {But \string\part\space is undefined}%
- {\string\mtcfixindex\space not usable}}%
- {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0007]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcfixindex\space can only be used with
- \MessageBreak
- the [part] optional argument,
- \MessageBreak
- which becomes the default}%
- \def\mtc@ixfix@level{part}%
- }}%
- {\def\mtc@ixfix@level{section}}}%
-{\def\mtc@ixfix@level{chapter}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcfixindex@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex}
-% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then\imess{E0027} we define a flag and the command \com{mtcfixindex}, which adds the necessary lines in the TOC, the LOF
-% and the LOT.
-% \or\relax
-% Puis\imess{E0027} nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcfixindex}, qui ajoute les lignes nécessaires dans
-% la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtcfixindex@ \@mtcfixindex@false
-\newcommand{\mtcfixindex}[1][\mtc@ixfix@level]{%
- \@mtcfixindex@false
- \expandafter%
- \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax\@mtcfixindex@true\fi
- \expandafter%
- \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax\@mtcfixindex@true\fi
- \expandafter%
- \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax\@mtcfixindex@true\fi
- \if@mtcfixindex@
- \addcontentsline{lof}{x\mtc@ixfix@level}{}%
- \addcontentsline{lot}{x\mtc@ixfix@level}{}%
- \csname mtcadd\mtc@ixfix@level\endcsname\relax
- \else
- \mtcPackageError[E0027]{minitoc}%
- {The optional argument of \string\mtcfixindex
- \MessageBreak
- is wrong}%
- {It must be omitted (\mtc@ixfix@level), or be part, chapter or section}%
- \fi
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Fixing the ``Nomenclature'' entry in the TOC}\label{s+code+ature}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Correction de l'entrée <<~Nomenclature~>> dans la TdM}\label{s+code+ature}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This macro is complex. Its syntax is:
-% \or\relax
-% Cette macro est complexe. Sa syntaxe est la suivante:
-% \fi
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\verb+[part|chapter|section]+
-% \end{verse}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@nomenclfix@level}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Depending\SMM{\lmess{W0095}\\\lmess{E0039}\\\lmess{W0096}} on the document class,
-% the ``Nomenclature'' entry\,\footnote{If you are using the \pack{nomencl} package~\cite{nomencl} or
-% \pack{nomentbl} package~\cite{nomentbl} (\pack{nomencl} calls \pack{nomentbl}).}
-% in the TOC is treated as a starred chapter or a starred
-% section. Hence we must first determine the default value of the optional argument. The default value is then
-% stored in the macro \com{mtc@nomenclfix@level}.
-% This is done by the following code, which eventually gives a warning message:
-% \or\relax
-% Selon\SMM{\lmess{W0095}\\\lmess{E0039}\\\lmess{W0096}} la classe du document,
-% l'entrée <<~Nomenclature~>>\,\footnote{Si vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{nomencl}~\cite{nomencl} ou le
-% paquetage \pack{nomentbl}~\cite{nomentbl} (\pack{nomencl} appelle \pack{nomentbl}).}
-% dans la table des matières est traitée comme un chapitre étoilé
-% ou une section étoilée. Donc nous devons d'abord déterminer la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel. La
-% valeur par défaut est alors rangée dans la macro \com{mtc@nomenclfix@level}. Ceci est fait par le code suivant, qui
-% produit éventuellement un message d'avertissement:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
- \@ifundefined{section}%
- {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0095]{minitoc}%
- {\string\chapter\space and \string\section\space are undefined.%
- \MessageBreak
- Cannot use \string\mtcfixnomenclature \space without
- \MessageBreak
- optional argument [part]}%
- \@ifundefined{part}%
- {\mtcPackageError[E0039]{minitoc}%
- {But \string\part\space is undefined}%
- {\string\mtcfixnomclature\space not usable}}%
- {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0096]{minitoc}%
- {\string\mtcfixnomenclature\space can only be used with
- \MessageBreak
- the [part] optional argument,
- \MessageBreak
- which becomes the default}%
- \def\mtc@nomenclfix@level{part}%
- }}%
- {\def\mtc@nomenclfix@level{section}}}%
-{\def\mtc@nomenclfix@level{chapter}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcfixnomclature@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixnomenclature}
-% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then\imess{E0040} we define a flag and the command \com{mtcfixnomenclature}, which adds the necessary lines in the TOC,
-% the LOF and the LOT.
-% \or\relax
-% Puis\imess{E0040} nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcfixnomclature}, qui ajoute les lignes
-% nécessaires dans la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtcfixnomenclature@ \@mtcfixnomenclature@false
-\newcommand{\mtcfixnomenclature}[1][\mtc@nomenclfix@level]{%
- \@mtcfixnomenclature@false
- \expandafter%
- \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax\@mtcfixnomenclature@true\fi
- \expandafter%
- \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax\@mtcfixnomenclature@true\fi
- \expandafter%
- \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax\@mtcfixnomenclature@true\fi
- \if@mtcfixnomenclature@
- \addcontentsline{lof}{x\mtc@nomenclfix@level}{}%
- \addcontentsline{lot}{x\mtc@nomenclfix@level}{}%
- \csname mtcadd\mtc@nomenclfix@level\endcsname\relax
- \else
- \mtcPackageError[E0040]{minitoc}%
- {The optional argument of \string\mtcfixnomenclature
- \MessageBreak
- is wrong}%
- {It must be omitted (\mtc@nomenclfix@level), or be part, chapter or section}%
- \fi
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \ucom{mtcselectlanguage} command}\label{s+code+mtcselectlanguage.command}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{La commande \ucom{mtcselectlanguage}}\label{s+code+mtcselectlanguage.command}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@insellang@}
-% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists}
-% \begin{macro}{\@input}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This\SMM{\lmess{I0010}\\\lmess{E0006}} command loads a minitoc language definition
-% file \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} to set the language-dependent
-% titles for the mini-tables.
-% But first, we verify that this file exists.
-% The flag \com{if@mtc@insellang@} is true while we are in this macro.
-% \or\relax
-% Cette\SMM{\lmess{I0010}\\\lmess{E0006}} commande charge un fichier minitoc de définition
-% de langue \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} pour établir les
-% titres dépendants de la langue pour les mini-tables.
-% Mais au préalable, nous vérifions que ce fichier existe.
-% L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@insellang@} est vrai tant que nous sommes dans cette macro.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@insellang@ \@mtc@insellang@false
-\def\mtcselectlanguage#1{%
- \@mtc@insellang@true
- \InputIfFileExists{#1.mld}%
- {\mtcPackageInfo[I0010]{minitoc}{The #1 language is selected.%
- \MessageBreak
- }}%
- {\mtcPackageError[E0006]{minitoc}%
- {#1 is not a known language,
- \MessageBreak
- #1.mld not found.
- \MessageBreak
- Command ignored}%
- {See the minitoc documentation.
- \MessageBreak
- Correct the source using a valid language name.
- \MessageBreak
- Press RETURN}}%
- \@mtc@insellang@false
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \ucom{mtcloadmlo} internal command}\label{s+code+mtcloadmlo.command}\icom{mtcloadmlo}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{La commande interne \ucom{mtcloadmlo}}\label{s+code+mtcloadmlo.command}\icom{mtcloadmlo}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@insellang@}
-% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists}
-% \begin{macro}{\@input}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This command loads a minitoc language object file \emph{language}\suffix{.mlo} to set the language-dependent
-% titles for the mini-tables when exotic characters are needed.
-% This command is used only in some \suffix{.mld} files when the title strings can not be generated by the normal
-% processing of \xfile{minitoc.dtx}. The \suffix{.mlo} files are generated by \env{filecontents} environments in the
-% \xfile{minitoc.ins} file.
-% But first, we verify that this \suffix{.mlo} file exists.
-%
-% \emph{This command}\SMMZ{\lmess{I0011}\\\lmess{E0007}\\\lmess{E0032}}
-% \emph{should not be invoked directly by the user. This is verified via the flag
-% \com{if@mtc@insellang@}.}
-% \or\relax
-% Cette commande charge un fichier minitoc objet de langue \emph{langue}\suffix{.mlo} pour établir les
-% titres dépendants de la langue pour les mini-tables lorsque des caractères exotiques sont nécessaires.
-% Cette commande n'est utilisée que dans certains fichiers \suffix{.mld}, lorsque les chaînes de titres ne peuvent
-% pas être produites par le traitement normal de \xfile{minitoc.dtx}. Les fichiers \suffix{.mlo} sont produits
-% par des environments \env{filecontents} dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% Mais au préalable, nous vérifions que ce fichier \suffix{.mlo} existe.
-%
-% \emph{Cette commande}\SMMZ{\lmess{I0011}\\\lmess{E0007}\\\lmess{E0032}}
-% \emph{ne devrait pas être invoquée directement par l'utilisateur. Ceci est vérifié grâce
-% à~l'indicateur \com{if@mtc@insellang@}.}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtcloadmlo#1{%
- \if@mtc@insellang@
- \InputIfFileExists{#1.mlo}%
- {\mtcPackageInfo[I0011]{minitoc}%
- {#1 minitoc language object selected.
- \MessageBreak}}%
- {\mtcPackageError[E0007]{minitoc}%
- {#1 is not a known minitoc
- \MessageBreak
- language object file (.mlo),
- \MessageBreak
- #1.mlo not found.
- \MessageBreak
- Command ignored}%
- {See the minitoc documentation.
- \MessageBreak
- Correct the source using a valid language name.
- \MessageBreak
- Press RETURN}}%
- \else
- \mtcPackageError[E0032]{minitoc}%
- {You are using the \string\mtcloadmlo\space command
- \MessageBreak
- outside of a .mld file}%
- {It will be ignored}
- \@mtc@insellang@false
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The ``coffee breaks''}\label{s+cod+coffee.breaks}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Les <<~pauses café~>>}\label{s+cod+coffee.breaks}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\addcoffeeline}
-% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\coffeeline}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@coffee}
-% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtocline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For the \pack{minutes} package~\cite{minutes} (by \name{Knut}{Lickert}), we need some commands to insert special
-% entries, undotted, in the
-% TOC to mark ``coffee breaks''{\myCoffeecup} in a conference.
-% Hence we define \com{addcoffeeline}, \com{coffeeline} and
-% \com{l@coffee}, and internal commands analog to the standard internal commands to format the TOC.
-% \or\relax
-% Pour le paquetage \pack{minutes}~\cite{minutes} (de \name{Knut}{Lickert}), nous avons besoin de quelques
-% commandes pour insérer des entrées spéciales, sans points de conduite, dans la table des matières pour marquer les
-% <<~pauses café~>>{\myCoffeecup} dans une conférence. Donc nous définissons \com{addcoffeeline}, \com{coffeeline} et
-% \com{l@coffee}, et des commandes internes analogues aux commandes internes standard pour mettre en forme la
-% table des matières.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\addcoffeeline#1#2#3{%
- \addtocontents{#1}{\protect\coffeeline{#2}{#3}{\null}}}
-\def\coffeeline#1{\csname l@#1\endcsname}
-\newcommand*\l@coffee{\@Undottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Initialization of counters}\label{s+verse+init.counters}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Initialisation des compteurs}\label{s+verse+init.counters}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
-% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% At the beginning of the document, we initialize the absolute counters for parts, chapters and sections, if they
-% are defined.
-% \or\relax
-% Au début du document, nous initialisons les compteurs absolus pour les parties, chapitres et sections, s'ils
-% sont définis.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
-\@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\setcounter{ptc}{0}}
-\@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{\setcounter{mtc}{0}}
-\@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\setcounter{stc}{0}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Declarations for simple options}\label{s+code+simple.options}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Déclarations pour les options simples}\label{s+code+simple.options}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% These options are just setting a flag.
-% \or\relax
-% Ces options ne font que positionner un indicateur.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Options \uopt{tight} and \uopt{loose}, \uopt{k-tight} and \uopt{k-loose}}%
-% \iopt{tight}\ioptd{loose}\iopt{k-tight}\ioptd{k-loose}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Options \uopt{tight} et \uopt{loose}, \uopt{k-tight} et \uopt{k-loose}}%
-% \iopt{tight}\ioptd{loose}\iopt{k-tight}\ioptd{k-loose}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
-% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% These options influence the interline separation in the mini-tables.
-% \or\relax
-% Ces options influencent l'interlignage dans les mini-tables.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{tight}{\tightmtctrue}
-\DeclareOption{loose}{\tightmtcfalse} % default
-\DeclareOption{k-tight}{\ktightmtctrue}
-\DeclareOption{k-loose}{\ktightmtcfalse} % default
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Options \uopt{checkfiles} and \uopt{nocheckfiles}}\label{o+checkfiles}\ioptd{checkfiles}\iopt{nocheckfiles}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Options \uopt{checkfiles} et \uopt{nocheckfiles}}\label{o+checkfiles}\ioptd{checkfiles}\iopt{nocheckfiles}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@checkfiles}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% These options activate or inhibit the checking for empty mini-table files.
-% \or\relax
-% Ces options activent ou inhibent les tests de vacuité sur les fichiers des mini-tables.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{checkfiles}{\@mtc@checkfilestrue} % default
-\DeclareOption{nocheckfiles}{\@mtc@checkfilesfalse}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Options \uopt{dotted} and \uopt{undotted}}\ioptd{dotted}\iopt{undotted}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Options \uopt{dotted} et \uopt{undotted}}\ioptd{dotted}\iopt{undotted}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% These options activate or inhibit the leaders (lines of dots) in the mini-tables.
-% \or\relax
-% Ces options activent ou inhibent les points de conduite dans les mini-tables.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{undotted}{\undottedmtctrue}
-\DeclareOption{dotted}{\undottedmtcfalse} % default
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Option \uopt{notoccite}}\iopt{notoccite}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Option \uopt{notoccite}}\iopt{notoccite}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@notoccite@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This option will later load the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}.
-% \or\relax
-% Cette option chargera plus loin le paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{notoccite}{\@mtc@notoccite@true}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Option \uopt{shortext}}\iopt{shortext}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Option \uopt{shortext}}\iopt{shortext}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This\imess{W0020} option forces the use of short extensions.
-% \or\relax
-% Cette\imess{W0020} option force l'utilisation de suffixes courts.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{shortext}{%
- \@mtc@longext@false
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0020]{minitoc}%
- {You have forced the use of short extensions}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uopt{insection} option}\label{s+code+insection.option}\iopt{insection}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{L'option \uopt{insection}}\label{s+code+insection.option}\iopt{insection}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ss@insection@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
-% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This\imess{E0035} option is available only if \com{chapter} is not defined and \com{section} defined.
-% It is to be revised when chapter/section level commands will ever be allowed together, sometime in the far away future,
-% with a lot of luck (and work)\footnote{Please, do not dream too much!}.
-% \or\relax
-% Cette\imess{E0035} option n'est disponible que si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie et \com{section} est définie.
-% Il faudra la revoir si un jour les commandes aux niveaux chapitre et section sont éventuellement permises
-% ensemble, peut-être dans un avenir lointain, avec beaucoup de chance (et de travail)\,\footnote{Ne révez pas trop
-% quand même!}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@ss@insection@ \@mtc@ss@insection@false
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
- \@ifundefined{section}{\DeclareOption{insection}{%
- \mtcPackageError[E0035]{minitoc}%
- {You have used the `insection' option in
- \MessageBreak
- a document where chapters are defined.
- \MessageBreak
- This is not compatible: option ignored.}%
- {Remove this option.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
- }}%
- {%
- \DeclareOption{insection}%
- {\@mtc@ss@insection@true}%
- }%
-}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uopt{listfiles} and \uopt{nolistfiles} options}\label{s+code+listfiles.option}\ioptd{listfiles}\iopt{nolistfiles}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Les options \uopt{listfiles} et \uopt{nolistfiles}}\label{s+code+listfiles.option}\ioptd{listfiles}\iopt{nolistfiles}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@listfiles@}
-% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \optd{listfiles} option creates a file containing a list of the auxiliary files created
-% by the \upack{minitoc} package. This is the default.
-% This file is named \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}.
-% The \opt{nolistfiles} option inhibits this listing.
-% \or\relax
-% L'option \optd{listfiles} crée un fichier contenant une liste des fichiers auxiliaires créés par
-% le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. C'est le choix par défaut.
-% Ce fichier est nommé \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}.
-% L'option \opt{nolistfiles} inhibe ce listage.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@listfiles@ \@mtc@listfiles@true
-\DeclareOption{listfiles}{\@mtc@listfiles@true}
-\DeclareOption{nolistfiles}{\@mtc@listfiles@false}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Language options}\label{s+section+language.options}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Options pour les langues}\label{s+section+language.options}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@gobblethree}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@listmisslanguages}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@addmisslanguage}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@LML}
-% \begin{macro}{\MessageBreak}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% First, we define an utility macro (\com{@gobblethree}), a list of the missing files
-% (accumulated in the \com{mtc@listmisslanguages} macro),
-% and a macro (\com{mtc@addmisslanguage}) to add a file name to the list:
-% \or\relax
-% Tout d'abord, nous définissons une macro utilitaire (\com{@gobblethree}), une liste des fichiers manquants
-% (accumulée dans la macro \com{mtc@listmisslanguages}), et une macro pour ajouter un nom de fichier à~la liste
-% (\com{mtc@addmisslanguage}):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@gobblethree#1#2#3{\empty}
-\def\mtc@listmisslanguages{}
-\def\mtc@addmisslanguage#1{%
- \let\mtc@LML\mtc@listmisslanguages
- \edef\mtc@listmisslanguages{\mtc@LML \MessageBreak #1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@misslang}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangopt}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangopto}
-% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists}
-% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@addmisslanguage}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Before\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}} defining a language option,
-% we must verify that the corresponding \suffix{.mld} file exists, and, if
-% necessary, that the corresponding \suffix{.mlo} file exists.
-% Hence, we must first define a flag \com{if@mtc@misslang} and
-% two macros to test the presence of these files; if the files are available, we define the language option.
-% \or\relax
-% Avant\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}} de définir une option de langue,
-% nous devons vérifier si le fichier \suffix{.mld} existe, et, si
-% nécessaire, que le fichier \suffix{.mlo} correspondant existe. Donc, nous devons d'abord définir un indicateur
-% \com{if@mtc@misslang} et deux macros pour tester la présence de ces fichiers; si les fichiers sont
-% disponibles, nous définissons l'option de langue.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@misslang\@mtc@misslangfalse
-\newcommand{\mtc@setlangopt}[1]{%
- \IfFileExists{#1.mld}%
- {\DeclareOption{#1}{\mtcselectlanguage{#1}}}%
- {\@mtc@misslangtrue \mtc@addmisslanguage{#1.mld}
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0050]{minitoc}%
- {The required "#1.mld" file is missing.
- \MessageBreak
- The "#1" language option will not be available.
- \MessageBreak
- Please install it from a recent distribution
- \MessageBreak
- or from the CTAN archives\@gobble}}%
-}%
-\newcommand{\mtc@setlangopto}[1]{%
- \IfFileExists{#1.mlo}%
- {\mtc@setlangopt{#1}}%
- {\@mtc@misslangtrue \mtc@addmisslanguage{#1.mlo}
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0051]{minitoc}%
- {The required "#1.mlo" file is missing.
- \MessageBreak
- The "#1" language option will not be available.
- \MessageBreak
- Please install it from a recent distribution
- \MessageBreak
- or from the CTAN archives\@gobble}%
- \IfFileExists{#1.mld}{}%
- {\@mtc@misslangtrue
- \mtc@addmisslanguage{#1.mld}
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0050]{minitoc}%
- {The required "#1.mld" file is missing.
- \MessageBreak
- The "#1" language option will not be available.
- \MessageBreak
- Please install it from a recent distribution
- \MessageBreak
- or from the CTAN archives\@gobble}%
- }%
- }%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@misslang}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangoptm}
-% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists}
-% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageError}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@addmisslanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0038}} \suffix{.mld} files are mandatory (\xfile{english.mld} because english is the default language),
-% so their absence is a serious error:
-% \or\relax
-% Certains\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0038}} fichiers \suffix{.mld} sont obligatoires (\xfile{english.mld} car l'anglais est la langue
-% par défaut), donc leur absence est une erreur sévère):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\mtc@setlangoptm}[1]{%
- \IfFileExists{#1.mld}%
- {\DeclareOption{#1}{\mtcselectlanguage{#1}}}%
- {\@mtc@misslangtrue
- \mtc@addmisslanguage{#1.mld}
- \mtcPackageError[E0038]{minitoc}%
- {Your minitoc installation is incomplete.
- \MessageBreak
- A mandatory minitoc language object file,
- \MessageBreak
- #1.mld, is not found.
- \MessageBreak
- We will try to continue with
- \MessageBreak
- current/default values}%
- {See the minitoc documentation.
- \MessageBreak
- Please fix your minitoc installation.
- \MessageBreak
- Press <return> to continue}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\providecommand}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\plftitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\plttitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\stctitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\slftitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\slttitle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We must define the default titles (english):
-% \or\relax
-% Nous devons définir les titres par défaut (anglais):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \providecommand{\ptctitle}{Table of Contents}%
- \providecommand{\plftitle}{List of Figures}%
- \providecommand{\plttitle}{List of Tables}%
- \providecommand{\mtctitle}{Contents}%
- \providecommand{\mlftitle}{Figures}%
- \providecommand{\mlttitle}{Tables}%
- \providecommand{\stctitle}{Contents}%
- \providecommand{\slftitle}{Figures}%
- \providecommand{\slttitle}{Tables}%
-}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@misslang}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine}
-% \begin{macro}{\MessageBreak}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@listmisslanguages}
-% \begin{macro}{\@gobblethree}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If\SMM{\lmess{W0093}\\\lmess{W0094}} a \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} file is missing,
-% we signal that at the end of the document, with also the full list of the missing language files:
-% \or\relax
-% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0093}\\\lmess{W0094}} un fichier \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} est manquant,
-% nous le signalons en fin de document, avec aussi liste complète des fichiers de langue manquants:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtEndDocument{%
- \if@mtc@misslang
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0093]{minitoc}%
- {Some "*.mld" or "*.mlo" files are missing
- \MessageBreak
- in your installation.
- \MessageBreak
- Search for the I0050 and I0051 info messages
- \MessageBreak
- in the \string\jobname.log file.
- \MessageBreak
- The full list of the missing language files
- \MessageBreak
- is given in the W0094 warning message.
- \MessageBreak
- Please install the missing files from
- \MessageBreak
- a recent distribution
- \MessageBreak
- or from the CTAN archives}%
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0094]{minitoc}%
- {Missing minitoc language file(s)\string:
- \MessageBreak
- \mtc@listmisslanguages\@gobblethree}%
- \fi
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangopt}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangopto}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangoptm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Each language option reads the corresponding \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} file via
-% the specialized macro \com{mtcselectlanguage}, after verification by \com{mtc@setlangopt} or
-% \com{mtc@setlangopto} (when a \suffix{.mlo} file is required), by \com{mtc@setlangoptm} when the language is
-% mandatory. If the file
-% does not exist, a standard error message is displayed. The language options are (should be) in alphabetical order
-% (to make maintenance easier).
-% Several options could load the same file, but, by convention, there should be a \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} file for
-% each language option, given that this file may load another one (as \xfile{american.mld} loads \xfile{english.mld}).
-% \or\relax
-% Chaque option de langue lit le fichier \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} correspondant via
-% la macro spécialisée \com{mtcselectlanguage}, après vérification par \com{mtc@setlangopt} ou
-% \com{mtc@setlangopto} (lorsqu'un fichier \suffix{.mlo} est requis), par \com{mtc@setlangoptm} lorsque la
-% langue est obligatoire. Si le fichier
-% n'existe pas, un message d'erreur standard est affiché. Les options de langue sont (devraient) être par ordre
-% alphabétique (pour faciliter la maintenance). Plusieurs options pourraient charger le même fichier, mais,
-% par convention, il devrait y~avoir un
-% fichier \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} pour chaque option de langue, étant donné que ce fichier peut en charger un autre
-% (ainsi \xfile{francais.mld} charge-t-il \xfile{french.mld}).
-% \fi
-% \raggedcolumns
-% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\mtc@setlangopt{acadian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{acadien}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{afrikaan}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{afrikaans}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{albanian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{american}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{arab}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{arab2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{arabi}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{arabic}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{armenian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{australian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{austrian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{bahasa}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{bahasai}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{bahasam}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{bangla}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{basque}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{bengali}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{bicig}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{bicig2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{bicig3}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{bithe}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{brazil}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{brazilian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{breton}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{british}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{bulgarian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{bulgarianb}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{buryat}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{buryat2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{canadian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{canadien}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{castillan}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{castillian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{catalan}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{chinese1}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{chinese2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{croatian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{czech}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{danish}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{devanagari}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{dutch}%
-\mtc@setlangoptm{english}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{english1}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{english2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{esperant}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{esperanto}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{estonian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{ethiopia}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{ethiopian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{ethiopian2}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{farsi1}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{farsi2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{farsi3}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{finnish}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{finnish2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{francais}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{french}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{french1}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{french2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{frenchb}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{frenchle}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{frenchpro}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{galician}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{german}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{germanb}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{germanb2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{greek}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{greek-mono}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{greek-polydemo}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{greek-polykatha}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{guarani}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{hangul1}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{hangul2}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{hangul3}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{hangul4}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{hangul-u8}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{hanja1}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{hanja2}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{hanja-u8}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{hebrew}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{hebrew2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{hindi}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{hindi-modern}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{hungarian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{icelandic}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{indon}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{indonesian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{interlingua}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{irish}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{italian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{italian2}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{japanese}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{japanese2}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{japanese3}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{japanese4}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{japanese5}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{japanese6}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{kannada}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{khalkha}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{latin}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{latin2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{latinc}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{latinc2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{latvian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{latvian2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{letton}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{letton2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{lithuanian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{lithuanian2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{lowersorbian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{lsorbian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{magyar}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{magyar2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{magyar3}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{malay}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-b}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-keli}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-keli2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-mr}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{malayalam-omega}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-rachana}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-rachana2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-rachana3}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{manju}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{mexican}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{meyalu}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{mongol}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{mongolb}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{mongolian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{naustrian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{ngerman}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{newzealand}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{ngermanb}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{ngermanb2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{norsk}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{norsk2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{nynorsk}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{nynorsk2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{occitan}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{occitan2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{polish}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{polish2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{polski}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{portuges}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{portuguese}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{romanian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{romanian2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{romanian3}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{russian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{russianb}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{russianc}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{russian2m}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{russian2o}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{russian-cca}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{russian-cca1}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{russian-lh}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{russian-lhcyralt}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{russian-lhcyrkoi}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{russian-lhcyrwin}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{samin}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{scottish}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{serbian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{serbianc}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{slovak}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{slovene}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{spanish}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{spanish2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{spanish3}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{spanish4}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{swahili}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{swedish}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{swedish2}%
-\mtc@setlangopto{thai}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{turkish}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{uighur}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{uighur2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{uighur3}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{UKenglish}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{ukraineb}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{ukrainian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{uppersorbian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{USenglish}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{usorbian}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{vietnam}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{vietnamese}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{welsh}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{xalx}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{xalx2}%
-\mtc@setlangopt{xalx3}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uopt{hints} option}\label{s+code+hints.option}\ioptd{hints}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{L'option \uopt{hints}}\label{s+code+hints.option}\ioptd{hints}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We declare the \optd{hints} (default) and \opt{nohints} options:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous déclarons les options \optd{hints} (défaut) et \opt{nohints}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{hints}{\@mtc@hints@true}
-\DeclareOption{nohints}{\@mtc@hints@false}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \optd{hints} option is made of three parts: the first, \com{mtc@hints@begindoc}, is executed via
-% \com{AtBeginDocument} and looks if some packages or classes are loaded, then gives warnings about their compatibility
-% with \upack{minitoc}.
-% \or\relax
-% L'option \optd{hints} est constituée de trois parties: la première, \com{mtc@hints@begindoc}, est exécutée
-% via \com{AtBeginDocument} et regarde si certains paquetages ou classes sont chargés, puis donne des
-% avertissements à~propos de leur compatibilité avec \upack{minitoc}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The second part is made of tiny pieces of code inserted in the \upack{minitoc} code, to verify that some macros
-% are called in the right order.
-% \or\relax
-% La deuxième partie est faite de petits fragments de code insérés dans le code de \upack{minitoc}, pour vérifier
-% que certaines macros sont appelées dans le bon ordre.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The third and last part, \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}, is executed via \com{AtEndDocument} and examines the flags set
-% by the first and the second parts. Then, if necessary, it writes some infos in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log}
-% file and/or warnings on the screen and in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file.
-% The \optd{hints} option \virage\emph{does not signal errors}, only infos
-% and warnings, so it does not stop the \LaTeX\ run.
-% \or\relax
-% La troisième et dernière partie, \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}, est exécutée via \com{AtEndDocument} et examine
-% les indicateurs positionnés par les première et deuxième parties. Puis, si nécessaire, elle écrit quelques
-% informations dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} et/ou des avertissements sur l'écran
-% et dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}.
-% L'option \optd{hints} \virage\emph{ne signale pas d'erreurs}, seulement des informations et des avertissements, et
-% donc n'interrompt pas l'exécution de \LaTeX.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{First part: \ucom{mtc@hints@begindoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}\icom{mtc@hints@begindoc}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Première partie: \ucom{mtc@hints@begindoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}\icom{mtc@hints@begindoc}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@abstract@loaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0049} declare some flags and the first part of the \optd{hints} option (for an \com{AtBeginDocument} block):
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0049} déclarons quelques indicateurs et la première partie de l'option \optd{hints}
-% (pour un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@abstract@loaded@ \@mtc@abstract@loaded@false
-\newif\if@mtc@toc@used@ \global\@mtc@toc@used@false
-\newif\if@mtc@lof@used@ \global\@mtc@lof@used@false
-\newif\if@mtc@lot@used@ \global\@mtc@lot@used@false
-\def\mtc@hints@begindoc{%
-\mtcPackageInfo[I0049]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {==> You requested the hints option.
- \MessageBreak
- Some hints are eventually given below\@gobble}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{alphanum} package}\ipack{alphanum}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{alphanum}}\ipack{alphanum}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0025}} test the presence of the \pack{alphanum} package (part of the \class{jura} class~\cite{jura}),
-% and emit a warning, because this package is \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0025}} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{alphanum} (qui fait partie de la
-% classe \class{jura}~\cite{jura}), et émettons un avertissement, puisque ce paquetage est \emph{incompatible}
-% avec \upack{minitoc}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifpackageloaded{alphanum}%
- {\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0025]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The alphanum package is loaded.
- \MessageBreak
- It is incompatible
- \MessageBreak
- with the minitoc package}}{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{appendix} package}\ipack{appendix}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{appendix}}\ipack{appendix}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0042} test the presence of the \pack{appendix} package~\cite{appendix}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0042} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{appendix}~\cite{appendix}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifpackageloaded{appendix}{%
-\@mtc@hints@given@true
-\mtcPackageInfo[I0042]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The appendix package is loaded.
- \MessageBreak
- See the minitoc package documentation
- \MessageBreak
- for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{tocbibind} package}\ipack{tocbibind}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{tocbibind}}\ipack{tocbibind}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0046} test the presence of the \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0046} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifpackageloaded{tocbibind}%
- {\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0046]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The tocbibind package is loaded.
- \MessageBreak
- See the minitoc package documentation
- \MessageBreak
- for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Hint about the \KOMAScript{} classes}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur les classes \KOMAScript}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0043} test the presence of each \upack{minitoc}-compatible \KOMAScript{}
-% class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0043} testons la présence de chaque classe \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} compatible
-% avec \upack{minitoc}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{scrbook}%
- {\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0043]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The KOMAScript scrbook class is loaded.
- \MessageBreak
- See the minitoc package documentation
- \MessageBreak
- for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}%
-\@ifclassloaded{scrreprt}%
- {\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0043]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The KOMAScript scrreprt class is loaded.
- \MessageBreak
- See the minitoc package documentation
- \MessageBreak
- for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}%
-\@ifclassloaded{scrartcl}%
- {\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0043]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The KOMAScript scrartcl class is loaded.
- \MessageBreak
- See the minitoc package documentation
- \MessageBreak
- for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{tocloft} package}\ipack{tocloft}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{tocloft}}\ipack{tocloft}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0047} test the presence of the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0047} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifpackageloaded{tocloft}%
- {\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0047]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The tocloft package is loaded.
- \MessageBreak
- See the minitoc package documentation
- \MessageBreak
- for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{titlesec} package}\ipack{titlesec}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{titlesec}}\ipack{titlesec}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0099}} test the presence of the \pack{titlesec} package~\cite{titletoc}, and emit a warning,
-% because this package is \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0099}} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc},
-% et émettons un avertissement, puisque ce paquetage est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifpackageloaded{titlesec}%
- {\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0099]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The titlesec package is loaded.
- \MessageBreak
- It is incompatible
- \MessageBreak
- with the minitoc package}}{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{titletoc} package}\ipack{titletoc}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{titletoc}}\ipack{titletoc}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0040}} test the presence of the \pack{titletoc} package~\cite{titletoc}, and emit a warning,
-% because this package is \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0040}} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{titletoc}~\cite{titletoc},
-% et émettons un avertissement, puisque ce paquetage est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifpackageloaded{titletoc}%
- {\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0040]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The titletoc package is loaded.
- \MessageBreak
- It is incompatible
- \MessageBreak
- with the minitoc package}}{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{placeins} package}\ipack{placeins}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{placeins}}\ipack{placeins}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ss@insection@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackagewith}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\SMM{\lmess{W0031}\\\lmess{W0084}\\\lmess{W0085}\\\lmess{W0032}} test if the \pack{placeins}
-% package~\cite{placeins} is loaded and, if yes, we check if the selected options are correct (see section~\vref{rem+FB}):
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0031}\\\lmess{W0084}\\\lmess{W0085}\\\lmess{W0032}} testons si le paquetage
-% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} est chargé et, si oui, nous regardons si les options choisies
-% sont correctes (voir la section~\vref{rem+FB}):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifpackageloaded{placeins}%
- {\if@mtc@ss@insection@
- \@ifpackagewith{placeins}{section}{}%
- {\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0031]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The placeins package is loaded
- \MessageBreak
- without the section option,
- \MessageBreak
- but minitoc used the insection option
- \MessageBreak
- which implies it. Try to inverse the
- \MessageBreak
- loading order and use consistent options.
- \MessageBreak
- You may have got a message
- \MessageBreak
- ! LaTeX Error: Option clash for package placeins}%
- }%
- \@ifpackagewith{placeins}{above}%
- {\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0084]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The placeins package is loaded
- \MessageBreak
- with the above option,
- \MessageBreak
- but minitoc used the insection option
- \MessageBreak
- which is incompatible with it.
- \MessageBreak
- Try to remove the above option
- \MessageBreak
- and use consistent options}%
- }{}%
- \@ifpackagewith{placeins}{below}%
- {\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0085]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The placeins package is loaded
- \MessageBreak
- with the below option,
- \MessageBreak
- but minitoc used the insection option
- \MessageBreak
- which is incompatible with it.
- \MessageBreak
- Try to remove the below option
- \MessageBreak
- and use consistent options}%
- }{}%
- \fi
- \@ifpackagelater{placeins}{2005/04/18}{}{%
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0032]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The placeins package loaded is
- \MessageBreak
- too old. You should use a version
- \MessageBreak
- dated of 2005/04/18 at least}%
- }%
- }{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Hint about the \uclass{memoir} class}\iclass{memoir}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la classe \uclass{memoir}}\iclass{memoir}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0044} test if the \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} is loaded:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0044} testons si la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} est chargée:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{memoir}%
- {\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0044]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The memoir class is loaded.
- \MessageBreak
- See the minitoc package documentation
- \MessageBreak
- for specific precautions\@gobble}{}%
- }{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Hint about the \uclass{amsart} and \uclass{amsproc} classes}\iclass{amsart}\iclass{amsproc}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur les classes \uclass{amsart} et \uclass{amsproc}}\iclass{amsart}\iclass{amsproc}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}} test if the \class{amsart} or \class{amsproc} class is loaded and emit a warning,
-% because these classes are \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}} regardons si l'une des classes \class{amsart} ou \class{amsproc} a été chargée
-% et émettons un avertissement, puisque ces classes sont \emph{incompatibles} avec \upack{minitoc}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{amsart}%
- {\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0026]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The amsart class is loaded.
- \MessageBreak
- It is incompatible
- \MessageBreak
- with the minitoc package}}{}%
-\@ifclassloaded{amsproc}%
- {\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0027]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The amsproc class is loaded.
- \MessageBreak
- It is incompatible
- \MessageBreak with the minitoc package}}{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Hint about the \uclass{amsbook} class}\iclass{amsbook}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la classe \uclass{amsbook}}\iclass{amsbook}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0041} test if the \class{amsbook} class is loaded:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0041} testons si la classe \class{amsbook} est chargée:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{amsbook}%
- {\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0041]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The amsbook class is loaded.
- \MessageBreak
- See the minitoc package documentation
- \MessageBreak
- for specific precautions\@gobble}{}%
- }{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{abstract} package}\ipack{abstract}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{abstract}}\ipack{abstract}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackagewith}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0040} test the presence of the \pack{abstract} package~\cite{abstract}, then its options:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0040} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract}, puis ses options:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifpackageloaded{abstract}%
- {\@mtc@abstract@loaded@true%
- \@ifpackagewith{abstract}{addtotoc}%
- {\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0040]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The ``abstract'' package has been
- \MessageBreak
- loaded with the ``addtotoc'' option.
- \MessageBreak
- You need to look at the
- \MessageBreak
- documentation to adjust.
- \MessageBreak}
- }}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Hint about the \uclass{jura} class}\iclass{jura}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la classe \uclass{jura}}\iclass{jura}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0029}} test if the \class{jura} class is loaded and emit a warning, because this class is
-% \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0029}} regardons si la classe \class{jura} a été chargée et émettons un
-% avertissement, puisque cette classe est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{jura}%
- {\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0029]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The jura class is loaded.
- \MessageBreak
- It is incompatible
- \MessageBreak with the minitoc package}}{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{flowfram} package}\ipack{flowfram}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{flowfram}}\ipack{flowfram}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We \SMMZZ{\lmess{W0097}} test the presence of the \pack{flowfram} package~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide},
-% and emit a warning, because this package is \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0097}} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide},
-% et émettons un avertissement, puisque ce paquetage est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifpackageloaded{flowfram}%
- {\@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0097]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The flowfram package is loaded.
- \MessageBreak
- It is incompatible
- \MessageBreak
- with the minitoc package}}{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Hint about the alteration of the sectionning commands}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur l'altération des commandes de sectionnement}
-% \fi
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \begin{macro}{\part}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@part}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@section}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% To check if the sectionning commands \com{part}, \com{chapter} or \com{section} have been altered by some
-% package or in the preamble, we compare them (when executing an \com{AtBeginDocument} block) with their saved
-% versions (saved by the
-% \upack{minitoc} package when it is loaded) \com{mtc@hints@part}, \com{mtc@hints@chapter} and
-% \com{mtc@hints@section}. For each sectionning command, we must perform the comparaison for the command itself,
-% its unstarred branch and its starred branch. But the \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web} may interfere,
-% hence the formal precautions in the messages.
-% \or\relax
-% Pour vérifier si les commandes de sectionnement \com{part}, \com{chapter} ou \com{section} ont été altérées
-% par un paquetage ou dans le préambule, nous les comparons (lors de l'exécution d'un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument})
-% avec leurs versions sauvegardées (par le paquetage \upack{minitoc} lors de son chargement) \com{mtc@hints@part},
-% \com{mtc@hints@chapter} et \com{mtc@hints@section}. Pour chacune de ces commandes de sectionnement, nous
-% devons effectuer la comparaison pour la commande elle-même, sa branche non étoilée et sa branche étoilée. Mais le
-% paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web} peut interférer, d'où les précautions formelles dans les messages.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{13}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \paragraph{Alteration of \ucom{part}}\icom{part}
-% \or\relax
-% \paragraph{Altération de \ucom{part}}\icom{part}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
-% \begin{macro}{\part}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@part}
-% \begin{macro}{\@part}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@part}
-% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@spart}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\SMM{\lmess{W0030}\\\lmess{W0023}} check the alteration of \com{part}, \com{@part} and \com{@spart}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0030}\\\lmess{W0023}} regardons si \com{part}, \com{@part} and \com{@spart} ont été altérées:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@mtc@hints@w@false
-\@ifundefined{part}{}{\ifx\part\mtc@hints@part\relax
- \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}
-\@ifundefined{part}{}{\ifx\@part\mtc@hints@@part\relax
- \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}
-\@ifundefined{part}{}{\ifx\@spart\mtc@hints@@spart\relax
- \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}
-\if@mtc@hints@w@\@mtc@hints@given@true%
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0030]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The \string\part\space command is altered
- \MessageBreak
- after minitoc}
- \if@mtc@hyper@used@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0023]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- It may be the consequence
- \MessageBreak
- of loading the ``hyperref'' package}
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{13}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \paragraph{Alteration of \ucom{chapter}}\icom{chapter}
-% \or\relax
-% \paragraph{Altération de \ucom{chapter}}\icom{chapter}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\@schapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@schapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\SMM{\lmess{W0028}\\\lmess{W0023}} check the alteration of \com{chapter}, \com{@chapter} and \com{@schapter}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0028}\\\lmess{W0023}} regardons si \com{chapter}, \com{@chapter} and \com{@schapter} ont été altérées:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@mtc@hints@w@false
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\ifx\chapter\mtc@hints@chapter\relax
- \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}%
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\ifx\@chapter\mtc@hints@@chapter\relax
- \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}%
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\ifx\@schapter\mtc@hints@@schapter\relax
- \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}%
-\if@mtc@hints@w@\@mtc@hints@given@true%
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0028]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The \string\chapter\space command is altered
- \MessageBreak
- after minitoc}
- \if@mtc@hyper@used@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0023]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- It may be the consequence
- \MessageBreak
- of loading the ``hyperref'' package}
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{13}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \paragraph{Alteration of \ucom{section}}\icom{section}
-% \or\relax
-% \paragraph{Altération de \ucom{section}}\icom{section}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@section}
-% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@sect}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@ssect}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\SMM{\lmess{W0039}\\\lmess{W0023}} check the alteration of \com{section}, \com{@sect} and \com{@ssect}:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0039}\\\lmess{W0023}} regardons si \com{section}, \com{@sect} and \com{@ssect} ont été altérées:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@mtc@hints@w@false
-\@ifundefined{chapter}%
- {\@ifundefined{section}{}{\ifx\section\mtc@hints@section\relax\else
- \@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}
- \@ifundefined{section}{}{\ifx\@sect\mtc@hints@@sect\relax\else
- \@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}
- \@ifundefined{section}{}{\ifx\@ssect\mtc@hints@@ssect\relax\else
- \@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}
-\if@mtc@hints@w@\@mtc@hints@given@true%
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0039]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- The \string\section\space command is altered
- \MessageBreak
- after minitoc}
- \if@mtc@hyper@used@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0023]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {--- It may be the consequence
- \MessageBreak
- of loading the ``hyperref'' package}
- \fi
- \relax\else\fi}{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Hint about the consistency of the calling sequences of the commands}
-% And finally, we prepare the consistency tests about the calling sequences of triplets of associated commands
-% like \com{doparttoc}, \com{parttoc} and \fkcom{tableofcontents}, and similar: to be able to use
-% \com{parttoc}, a table of contents file must have been
-% created via \fkcom{tableofcontents} and splitted into parttoc files via \com{doparttoc}.
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la cohérence des séquences d'appel des commandes}
-% Et enfin, nous préparons les tests de cohérence sur les séquences d'appel de triplets de commandes associées
-% telles que \com{doparttoc}, \com{parttoc} et \fkcom{tableofcontents}, et similaires: pour pouvoir
-% utiliser \com{parttoc}, un fichier table des matières doit avoir été créé via \fkcom{tableofcontents} et
-% éclaté en fichiers parttocs via \com{doparttoc}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Hence we initialize some flags:
-% \or\relax
-% Donc nous initialisons quelques indicateurs:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@hints@
-\global\@mtc@toc@used@false
-\global\@mtc@lof@used@false
-\global\@mtc@lot@used@false
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@listoffigures}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@listoftables}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then we patch the involved commands to set the corresponding flag when they are used. First, the commands for
-% the main summaries:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis nous modifions les commandes concernées pour positionner l'indicateur correspondant lorsqu'elles sont
-% utilisées. Nous commençons par les commandes des sommaires principaux:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\mtc@sv@tableofcontents\tableofcontents
-\def\tableofcontents%
- {\global\@mtc@toc@used@true\mtc@sv@tableofcontents}
-\let\mtc@sv@listoffigures\listoffigures
-\def\listoffigures%
- {\global\@mtc@lof@used@true\mtc@sv@listoffigures}
-\let\mtc@sv@listoftables\listoftables
-\def\listoftables%
- {\global\@mtc@lot@used@true\mtc@sv@listoftables}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@fktableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@fklistoffigures}
-% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@fklistoftables}
-% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then, their ``fake'' siblings:
-% \or\relax
-% Puis, leurs cousines <<~fake~>>:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\mtc@sv@fktableofcontents\faketableofcontents
-\def\faketableofcontents%
- {\global\@mtc@toc@used@true\mtc@sv@fktableofcontents}
-\let\mtc@sv@fklistoffigures\fakelistoffigures
-\def\fakelistoffigures%
- {\global\@mtc@lof@used@true\mtc@sv@fklistoffigures}
-\let\mtc@sv@fklistoftables\fakelistoftables
-\def\fakelistoftables%
- {\global\@mtc@lot@used@true\mtc@sv@fklistoftables}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And the \com{mtc@hints@begindoc} definition is finished (it begins in
-% section~\vref{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}):
-% \or\relax
-% Et la définition de \com{mtc@hints@begindoc} est terminée (elle avait commencé à~la
-% section~\vref{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Final part: \ucom{mtc@hints@enddoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@enddoc}\icom{mtc@hints@enddoc}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Partie finale: \ucom{mtc@hints@enddoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@enddoc}\icom{mtc@hints@enddoc}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The final part of the \optd{hints} option is executed via \com{AtEndDocument}. Its code is in the
-% \com{mtc@hints@enddoc} macro. It is a sequence of tests on the packages or classes loaded and the flags set
-% during the first and the second parts of this option. First, we declare the \com{mtc@hints@enddoc} macro:
-% \or\relax
-% La partie finale de l'option \optd{hints} est exécutée via \com{AtEndDocument}. Son code est dans la
-% macro \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}. C'est une séquence de tests sur les paquetages et classes chargés et sur les
-% indicateurs positionnés durant les première et deuxième parties de cette option. Tout d'abord, nous déclarons
-% la macro \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtc@hints@enddoc{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Hint about \ucom{sect-lof{\BAR}lot} and the \uopt{insection} option}\iopt{insection}\icom{sectlof}\icom{sectlot}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur \ucom{sect-lof{\BAR}lot} et l'option \uopt{insection}}\iopt{insection}\icom{sectlof}\icom{sectlot}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sect@floats@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We look if some section-level lists of figures or tables have been requested.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous regardons si des listes de figures ou de tableaux ont été demandées au niveau section.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@dosectlof@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi
-\if@dosectlot@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi
-\if@sectlof@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi
-\if@sectlot@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi
-\if@mtc@section@def@
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sect@floats@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If\imess{W0056} yes, we verify that the
-% \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} has been loaded with the correct options or that the \opt{insection}
-% option of the \upack{minitoc} package has been invoked.
-% If not, a warning is given.
-% \or\relax
-% Si\imess{W0056} oui, nous
-% vérifions que le paquetage \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} a été chargé avec les options correctes ou que
-% l'option \opt{insection} du paquetage \upack{minitoc} a été invoquée.
-% Sinon, un avertissement est émis.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@ \else
- \if@mtc@sect@floats@%
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0056]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You are using \string\dosectlof\space and/or
- \MessageBreak
- \string\dosectlot, \string\sectlof\space and/or \string\sectlot,
- \MessageBreak
- hence the ``insection'' package
- \MessageBreak
- option is recommended}%
- \@mtc@hints@w@true \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Final part of the consistency tests}\label{ss+final.coh}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Partie finale des tests de cohérence}\label{ss+final.coh}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We test if \com{parttoc} has been used without \com{doparttoc}, etc., for each pair
-% of preparation/insertion commands.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous testons si \com{parttoc} a été utilisée \com{doparttoc}, etc., pour chaque paire de commandes
-% préparation/insertion.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For\SMM{\lmess{W0062}\\\lmess{W0060}\\\lmess{W0061}} the part level commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour\SMM{\lmess{W0062}\\\lmess{W0060}\\\lmess{W0061}} les commandes au niveau partie:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@part@def@
- \if@parttoc@used@
- \if@doparttoc@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0062]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\parttoc,
- \MessageBreak
- but not \string\doparttoc}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
- \if@partlof@used@
- \if@dopartlof@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0060]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\partlof,
- \MessageBreak
- but not \string\dopartlof}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
- \if@partlot@used@
- \if@dopartlot@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0061]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\partlot,
- \MessageBreak
- but not \string\dopartlot}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For\SMM{\lmess{W0059}\\\lmess{W0057}\\\lmess{W0058}} the chapter level commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour\SMM{\lmess{W0059}\\\lmess{W0057}\\\lmess{W0058}} les commandes au niveau chapitre:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@chapter@def@
- \if@minitoc@used@
- \if@dominitoc@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0059]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\minitoc,
- \MessageBreak
- but not \string\dominitoc}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
- \if@minilof@used@
- \if@dominilof@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0057]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\minilof,
- \MessageBreak
- but not \string\dominilof}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
- \if@minilot@used@
- \if@dominilot@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0058]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\minilot,
- \MessageBreak
- but not \string\dominilot}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For\SMM{\lmess{W0065}\\\lmess{W0063}\\\lmess{W0064}} the section level commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour\SMM{\lmess{W0065}\\\lmess{W0063}\\\lmess{W0064}} les commandes au niveau section:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@section@def@
- \if@secttoc@used@
- \if@dosecttoc@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0065]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\secttoc,
- \MessageBreak
- but not \string\dosecttoc}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
- \if@sectlof@used@
- \if@dosectlof@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0063]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\sectlof,
- \MessageBreak
- but not \string\dosectlof}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
- \if@sectlot@used@
- \if@dosectlot@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0064]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\sectlot,
- \MessageBreak
- but not \string\dosectlot}
- \fi
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Check if the main tables have been prepared (first part)}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Les tables principales ont-elles été préparées (première partie)?}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Now, we test if a \com{doparttoc} macro has been called but without any matching \com{parttoc}, hence it is a
-% vain call. We do the same for each analog command.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous testons maintenant si une macro \com{doparttoc} a été appelée sans aucune commande \com{parttoc}
-% correspondante, car sinon cet appel est vain. Nous faisons de même pour chaque commande analogue.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Part\SMM{\lmess{W0075}\\\lmess{W0076}\\\lmess{W0077}} level commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0075}\\\lmess{W0076}\\\lmess{W0077}} au niveau partie:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@part@def@
- \if@doparttoc@used@
- \if@parttoc@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0075]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\doparttoc,
- \MessageBreak
- but not \string\parttoc}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
- \if@dopartlof@used@
- \if@partlof@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0076]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\dopartlof,
- \MessageBreak
- but not \string\partlof}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
- \if@dopartlot@used@
- \if@partlot@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0077]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\dopartlot,
- \MessageBreak
- but not \string\partlot}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Chapter\SMM{\lmess{W0078}\\\lmess{W0079}\\\lmess{W0080}} level commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0078}\\\lmess{W0079}\\\lmess{W0080}} au niveau chapitre:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@chapter@def@
- \if@dominitoc@used@
- \if@minitoc@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0078]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\dominitoc,
- \MessageBreak
- but not \string\minitoc}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
- \if@dominilof@used@
- \if@minilof@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0079]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\dominilof,
- \MessageBreak
- but not \string\minilof}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
- \if@dominilot@used@
- \if@minilot@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0080]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\dominilot,
- \MessageBreak
- but not \string\minilot}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Section\SMM{\lmess{W0081}\\\lmess{W0082}\\\lmess{W0083}} level commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0081}\\\lmess{W0082}\\\lmess{W0083}} au niveau section:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@section@def@
- \if@dosecttoc@used@
- \if@secttoc@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0081]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\dosecttoc,
- \MessageBreak
- but not \string\secttoc}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
- \if@dosectlof@used@
- \if@sectlof@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0082]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\dosectlof,
- \MessageBreak
- but not \string\sectlof}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
- \if@dosectlot@used@
- \if@sectlot@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0083]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\dosectlot,
- \MessageBreak
- but not \string\sectlot}
- \fi
- \fi
-\fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Check if the main tables have been prepared (second part)}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Les tables principales ont-elles été préparées (seconde partie)?}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Another consistency test verifies that if the macro \com{parttoc} has been called,
-% then the macro \com{tableofcontents} or \com{faketableofcontents} has also been called
-% (to create the necessary contents file); similar tests are made
-% for the other mini-table commands.
-% \or\relax
-% Un autre test de cohérence vérifie que si la macro \com{parttoc} a été appelée,
-% alors la macro \com{tableofcontents} ou
-% \com{faketableofcontents} a aussi été appelée (créant le fichier de contenu nécessaire); des tests
-% analogues sont faits pour les autres commandes de mini-tables.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@toc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lot@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Part\SMM{\lmess{W0071}\\\lmess{W0069}\\\lmess{W0070}} level commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0071}\\\lmess{W0069}\\\lmess{W0070}} au niveau partie:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@part@def@
- \if@parttoc@used@
- \if@mtc@toc@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0071]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\parttoc\space but not
- \MessageBreak
- \string\tableofcontents
- \MessageBreak
- nor \string\faketableofcontents}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
- \if@partlof@used@
- \if@mtc@lof@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0069]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\partlof\space but not
- \MessageBreak
- \string\listoffigures
- \MessageBreak
- nor \string\fakelistoffigures}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
- \if@partlot@used@
- \if@mtc@lot@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0070]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\partlot\space but not
- \MessageBreak
- \string\listoftables
- \MessageBreak
- nor \string\fakelistoftables}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@toc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lot@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Chapter\SMM{\lmess{W0068}\\\lmess{W0066}\\\lmess{W0067}} level commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0068}\\\lmess{W0066}\\\lmess{W0067}} au niveau chapitre:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@chapter@def@
- \if@minitoc@used@
- \if@mtc@toc@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0068]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\minitoc\space but not
- \MessageBreak
- \string\tableofcontents
- \MessageBreak
- nor \string\faketableofcontents}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
- \if@minilof@used@
- \if@mtc@lof@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0066]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\minilof\space but not
- \MessageBreak
- \string\listoffigures
- \MessageBreak
- nor \string\fakelistoffigures}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
- \if@minilot@used@
- \if@mtc@lot@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0067]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\minilot\space but not
- \MessageBreak
- \string\listoftables
- \MessageBreak
- nor \string\fakelistoftables}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@toc@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lof@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lot@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Section\SMM{\lmess{W0074}\\\lmess{W0072}\\\lmess{W0073}} level commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0074}\\\lmess{W0072}\\\lmess{W0073}} au niveau section:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@section@def@
- \if@secttoc@used@
- \if@mtc@toc@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0074]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\secttoc\space but not
- \MessageBreak
- \string\tableofcontents
- \MessageBreak
- nor \string\faketableofcontents}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
- \if@sectlof@used@
- \if@mtc@lof@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0072]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\sectlof\space but not
- \MessageBreak
- \string\listoffigures
- \MessageBreak
- nor \string\fakelistoffigures}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
- \if@sectlot@used@
- \if@mtc@lot@used@\else
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0073]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used \string\sectlot\space but not
- \MessageBreak
- \string\listoftables
- \MessageBreak
- nor \string\fakelistoftables}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Check the number of mini-tables, in case of short extensions}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Tester le nombre de mini-tables, dans le cas de suffixes courts}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@checklongext}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@}
-% \begin{macro}{\value}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@true}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If\SMM{\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0055}} short extensions are used,
-% you can use only 99~mini-tables of each kind. If more are created, the auxiliary
-% files can be overwritten: the hundredth minitoc file \com{jobname}\verb|.U100| has its name truncated to
-% \com{jobname}\verb|.U10|, which is already the tenth minitoc file. Thus, we need a hint to signal this situation. The
-% code is rather simple, but the remedy is bitter and costly: either use a better operating system\,\footnote{On
-% the long term, a good investment.}, either redesign the document.
-% \or\relax
-% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0055}} les suffixes courts sont utilisés,
-% vous ne pouvez utiliser que 99~mini-tables de chaque genre. Si davantage de
-% mini-tables sont créées, les fichiers auxiliaires seront écrasés; le centième fichier minitoc \com{jobname}\verb|.U100|
-% a son nom tronqué à\com{jobname}\verb|.U10|, qui est déjà le dixième fichier minitoc. Donc nous avons besoin d'une
-% indication (\emph{hint}) pour signaler cette situation. Le code est assez simple, mais le remède est amer et
-% coûteux: soit utiliser un meilleur système d'exploitation\,\footnote{Dans le long terme, un bon investissement.},
-% soit revoir la conception du document.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtc@hints@checklongext{%
-\if@mtc@longext@
-\else
- \if@mtc@part@def@
- \ifnum 99 < \value{ptc}\relax \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0054]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used short extensions
- \MessageBreak
- and more than 99 parts (\arabic{ptc})}
- \fi
- \fi
- \if@mtc@chapter@def@
- \ifnum 99 < \value{mtc}\relax \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0053]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used short extensions
- \MessageBreak
- and more than 99 chapters (\arabic{mtc})}
- \fi
- \else
- \if@mtc@section@def@
- \ifnum 99 < \value{stc}\relax \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0055]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have used short extensions
- \MessageBreak
- and more than 99 sections (\arabic{stc})}
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
-\fi}
-\mtc@hints@checklongext
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{sectsty} package}\label{s+sectsty.h2}\ipack{sectsty}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{sectsty}}\label{s+sectsty.h2}\ipack{sectsty}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{W0037} test if \pack{sectsty} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% See section~\vref{s+sectsty.h1}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{W0037} testons si \pack{sectsty} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+sectsty.h1}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@\else
- \if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0037]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The sectsty package should be
- \MessageBreak
- loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{varsects} package}\label{s+varsects.h2}\ipack{varsects}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{varsects}}\label{s+varsects.h2}\ipack{varsects}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{W0038} test if \pack{varsects} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% See section~\vref{s+varsects.h1}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{W0038} testons si \pack{varsects} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+varsects.h1}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@\else
- \if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0038]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The varsects package should be
- \MessageBreak
- loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{fncychap} package}\label{s+fncychap.h2}\ipack{fncychap}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{fncychap}}\label{s+fncychap.h2}\ipack{fncychap}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{W0086} test if \pack{fncychap} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% See section~\vref{s+fncychap.h1}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{W0086} testons si \pack{fncychap} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+fncychap.h1}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@\else
- \if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0086]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The fncychap package should be
- \MessageBreak
- loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{hangcaption} package}\label{s+hangcaption.h2}\ipack{hangcaption}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{hangcaption}}\label{s+hangcaption.h2}\ipack{hangcaption}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{W0092} test if \pack{hangcaption} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% See section~\vref{s+hangcaption.h1}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{W0092} testons si \pack{hangcaption} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+hangcaption.h1}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@\else
- \if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0092]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The hangcaption package should be
- \MessageBreak
- loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{quotchap} package}\label{s+quotchap.h2}\ipack{quotchap}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{quotchap}}\label{s+quotchap.h2}\ipack{quotchap}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{W0087} test if \pack{quotchap} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% See section~\vref{s+quotchap.h1}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{W0087} testons si \pack{quotchap} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+quotchap.h1}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@\else
- \if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0087]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The quotchap package should be
- \MessageBreak
- loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{romannum} package}\label{s+romannum.h2}\ipack{romannum}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{romannum}}\label{s+romannum.h2}\ipack{romannum}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{W0088} test if \pack{romannum} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% See section~\vref{s+romannum.h1}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{W0088} testons si \pack{romannum} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+romannum.h1}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@\else
- \if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0088]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The romannum package should be
- \MessageBreak
- loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{sfheaders} package}\label{s+sfheaders.h2}\ipack{sfheaders}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{sfheaders}}\label{s+sfheaders.h2}\ipack{sfheaders}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{W0089} test if \pack{sfheaders} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% See section~\vref{s+sfheaders.h1}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{W0089} testons si \pack{sfheaders} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+sfheaders.h1}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@\else
- \if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0089]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The sfheaders package should be
- \MessageBreak
- loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{alnumsec} package}\label{s+alnumsec.h2}\ipack{alnumsec}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{alnumsec}}\label{s+alnumsec.h2}\ipack{alnumsec}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{W0090} test if \pack{alnumsec} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% See section~\vref{s+alnumsec.h1}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{W0090} testons si \pack{alnumsec} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+alnumsec.h1}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@\else
- \if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0090]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The alnumsec package should be
- \MessageBreak
- loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{captcont} package}\label{s+captcont.h2}\ipack{captcont}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{captcont}}\label{s+captcont.h2}\ipack{captcont}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{W0091} test if \pack{captcont} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% See section~\vref{s+captcont.h1}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{W0091} testons si \pack{captcont} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+captcont.h1}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@\else
- \if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0091]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The captcont package should be
- \MessageBreak
- loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{caption} package}\label{s+caption.h2}\ipack{caption}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{caption}}\label{s+caption.h2}\ipack{caption}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{W0033} test if \pack{caption} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% See section~\vref{s+caption.h1}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{W0033} testons si \pack{caption} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+caption.h1}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@captionLoaded@\else
- \if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0033]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The caption package should be
- \MessageBreak
- loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{caption2} package}\label{s+caption2.h2}\ipack{caption2}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{caption2}}\label{s+caption2.h2}\ipack{caption2}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{W0034} test if \pack{caption2} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% See section~\vref{s+caption2.h1}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{W0034} testons si \pack{caption2} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+caption2.h1}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@\else
- \if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0034]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The caption2 package should be
- \MessageBreak
- loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{ccaption} package}\label{s+ccaption.h2}\ipack{ccaption}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{ccaption}}\label{s+ccaption.h2}\ipack{ccaption}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{W0035} test if \pack{ccaption} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% See section~\vref{s+ccaption.h1}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{W0035} testons si \pack{ccaption} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+ccaption.h1}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@\else
- \if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0035]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The ccaption package should be
- \MessageBreak
- loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{mcaption} package}\label{s+mcaption.h2}\ipack{mcaption}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{mcaption}}\label{s+mcaption.h2}\ipack{mcaption}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{W0036} test if \pack{mcaption} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% See section~\vref{s+mcaption.h1}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{W0036} testons si \pack{mcaption} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+mcaption.h1}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@\else
- \if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0036]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {The mcaption package should be
- \MessageBreak
- loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{float} package}\label{s+float.h2}\ipack{float}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{float}}\label{s+float.h2}\ipack{float}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0053} test if \pack{float} has been loaded. See section~\vref{s+float.h1}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0053} testons si \pack{float} a été chargé. Voir la section~\vref{s+float.h1}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@floatLoaded@\
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0053]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have loaded the float package;
- \MessageBreak
- please be aware that the minitoc package
- \MessageBreak
- facilities can not be used for new types
- \MessageBreak
- of floats defined by the float package\@gobble}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{floatrow} package}\label{s+floatrow.h2}\ipack{floatrow}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{floatrow}}\label{s+floatrow.h2}\ipack{floatrow}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0053} test if \pack{floatrow} has been loaded. See section~\vref{s+floatrow.h1}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0053} testons si \pack{floatrow} a été chargé. Voir la section~\vref{s+floatrow.h1}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@\
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0053]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have loaded the floatrow package;
- \MessageBreak
- please be aware that the minitoc package
- \MessageBreak
- facilities can not be used for new types
- \MessageBreak
- of floats defined by the floatrow package\@gobble}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{trivfloat} package}\label{s+trivfloat.h2}\ipack{trivfloat}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{trivfloat}}\label{s+trivfloat.h2}\ipack{trivfloat}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0053} test if \pack{trivfloat} has been loaded. See section~\vref{s+trivfloat.h1}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0053} testons si \pack{trivfloat} a été chargé. Voir la section~\vref{s+trivfloat.h1}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@\
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0053]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have loaded the trivfloat package;
- \MessageBreak
- please be aware that the minitoc package
- \MessageBreak
- facilities can not be used for new types
- \MessageBreak
- of floats defined by the trivfloat package\@gobble}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{rotfloat} package}\label{s+rotfloat.h2}\ipack{rotfloat}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{rotfloat}}\label{s+rotfloat.h2}\ipack{rotfloat}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0053} test if \pack{rotfloat} has been loaded. See section~\vref{s+rotfloat.h1}.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0053} testons si \pack{rotfloat} a été chargé. Voir la section~\vref{s+rotfloat.h1}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@\
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0053]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have loaded the rotfloat package;
- \MessageBreak
- please be aware that the minitoc package
- \MessageBreak
- facilities can not be used for new types
- \MessageBreak
- of floats defined by the rotfloat package\@gobble}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Check if empty mini-tables have been detected}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Tester si des mini-tables vides ont été détectées}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We test for each kind of mini-tables.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous testons pour chaque sorte de mini-tables.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For parttocs:\imess{W0046}
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les parttocs:\imess{W0046}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0046]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have attempted to insert
- \MessageBreak
- empty parttocs}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlof@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For partlofs:\imess{W0044}
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les partlofs:\imess{W0044}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@empty@partlof@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0044]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have attempted to insert
- \MessageBreak
- empty partlofs}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlot@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For partlots:\imess{W0045}
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les partlots:\imess{W0045}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@empty@partlot@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0045]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have attempted to insert
- \MessageBreak
- empty partlots}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For minitocs:\imess{W0043}
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les minitocs:\imess{W0043}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0043]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have attempted to insert
- \MessageBreak
- empty minitocs}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilof@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For minilofs:\imess{W0041}
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les minilofs:\imess{W0041}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@empty@minilof@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0041]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have attempted to insert
- \MessageBreak
- empty minilofs}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilot@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For minilots:\imess{W0042}
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les minilots:\imess{W0042}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@empty@minilot@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0042]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have attempted to insert
- \MessageBreak
- empty minilots}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@secttoc@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For secttocs:\imess{W0049}
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les secttocs:\imess{W0049}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@empty@secttoc@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0049]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have attempted to insert
- \MessageBreak
- empty secttocs}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For sectlofs:\imess{W0047}
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les sectlofs:\imess{W0047}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0047]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have attempted to insert
- \MessageBreak
- empty sectlofs}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For sectlots:\imess{W0048}
-% \or\relax
-% Pour les sectlots:\imess{W0048}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0048]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have attempted to insert
- \MessageBreak
- empty sectlots}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG
-% \subsubsection{Check if obsolete commands have been used}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Tester si des commandes obsolètes ont été utilisées}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG
-% This hint is just a reminder if you have used obsolete commands, which are also signalled
-% in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce \emph{hint} est juste un rappel dans le cas où vous auriez utilisé des commandes obsolètes, qui sont aussi
-% signalées dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\if@firstpartis@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Obsolete macro \com{firstpartis}:\imess{W0051}
-% \or\relax
-% Macro obsolète \com{firstpartis}:\imess{W0051}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@firstpartis@used@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0051]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have invoked an obsolete (ignored)
- \MessageBreak
- command: \string\firstpartis}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@firstchapteris@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Obsolete macro \com{firstchapteris}:\imess{W0050}
-% \or\relax
-% Macro obsolète \com{firstchapteris}:\imess{W0050}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@firstchapteris@used@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0050]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have invoked an obsolete (ignored)
- \MessageBreak
- command: \string\firstchapteris}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\if@firstsectionis@used@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Obsolete macro \com{firstsectionis}:\imess{W0052}
-% \or\relax
-% Macro obsolète \com{firstsectionis}:\imess{W0052}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@firstsectionis@used@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0052]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {You have invoked an obsolete (ignored)
- \MessageBreak
- command: \string\firstsectionis}
- \@mtc@hints@given@true
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsubsection{Check if some hints have been written}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsubsection{Tester si des \emph{hints} ont été écrits}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\SMM{\lmess{W0024}\\\lmess{I0019}} come at the end of the third part of the \optd{hints} option:
-% if problems have been detected, a warning is displayed;
-% the warning is not displayed but only written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file if no problems have been detected.
-% And we terminate the \com{mtc@hints@enddoc} macro by a closing brace.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0024}\\\lmess{I0019}} arrivons à~la fin de la troisième partie de l'option \optd{hints}:
-% si des problèmes ont été détectés, un
-% avertissement est affiché; cet avertissement n'est pas affiché mais seulement écrit dans le fichier
-% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} si aucun problème n'a été détecté. Et nous terminons la macro \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}
-% par une accolade fermante.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@hints@given@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0024]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {Some hints have been written
- \MessageBreak
- in the \jobname.log file}
-\else
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0019]{minitoc(hints)}%
- {No hints have been written
- \MessageBreak
- in the \jobname.log file.\@gobble}
-\fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Processing of options}\label{s+code+processing.options}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Traitement des options}\label{s+code+processing.options}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\InputIfFileExists}
-% \begin{macro}{\ExecuteOptions}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% First, if possible, we apply the default language option, \loptd{english}:
-% \or\relax
-% Tout d'abord, si possible, nous exécutons l'option de langue par défaut, \loptd{english}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \InputIfFileExists{english.mld}%
- {\ExecuteOptions{english}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageError}
-% \begin{macro}{\providecommand}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\plftitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\plttitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\stctitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\slftitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\slttitle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Else,\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0036}} we signal a severe error and provide the missing default titles:
-% \else\relax
-% Sinon,\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0036}} nous signalons une erreur sévère et fournissons les titres par défaut manquants:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- {\mtcPackageError[E0036]{minitoc}%
- {Your minitoc installation is incomplete.
- \MessageBreak
- The minitoc language object file (.mld),
- \MessageBreak
- english.mld is not found.
- \MessageBreak
- We will try to continue with default values}%
- {See the minitoc documentation.
- \MessageBreak
- Please fix your minitoc installation.
- \MessageBreak
- Press <return> to continue}%
- \providecommand{\ptctitle}{Table of Contents}%
- \providecommand{\plftitle}{List of Figures}%
- \providecommand{\plttitle}{List of Tables}%
- \providecommand{\mtctitle}{Contents}%
- \providecommand{\mlftitle}{Figures}%
- \providecommand{\mlttitle}{Tables}%
- \providecommand{\stctitle}{Contents}%
- \providecommand{\slftitle}{Figures}%
- \providecommand{\slttitle}{Tables}%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\ProcessOptions*}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then, we execute all requested options: for most options, it is just setting a flag, or loading a file for the
-% language options.
-% \or\relax
-% Puis nous exécutons toutes les options demandées; pour la plupart des options, ceci consiste seulement
-% à~positionner un indicateur, ou à~charger un fichier pour les options de langue.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProcessOptions*
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We now examine the flags for some options and execute the necessary actions.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous examinons maintenant les indicateurs pour certaines options et exécutons les actions nécessaires.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Processing the \uopt{insection} option}\iopt{insection}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \uopt{insection}}\iopt{insection}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ss@insection@}
-% \begin{macro}{\RequirePackage}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For the \opt{insection} option, we load the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} with its options
-% \optp{verbose}{placeins} and \optp{section}{placeins}, after the \pack{flafter} package (described in~\cite{ltoutput}
-% and~\cite[page~286]{TLC2}); the correct loading is verified:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour l'option \opt{insection}, nous chargeons
-% le paquetage \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} avec ses options
-% \optp{verbose}{placeins} et \optp{section}{placeins}, après le paquetage \pack{flafter} (décrit dans~\cite{ltoutput}
-% et~\cite[page~292]{TLC2F}); le chargement correct est vérifié:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@ss@insection@
- \RequirePackage{flafter}[2000/07/23]%
- \RequirePackage[section,verbose]{placeins}[2005/04/18]%
- \@ifpackageloaded{placeins}%
- {\@mtc@placeinsLoaded@true}{\@mtc@placeinsLoaded@false}%
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Processing the \uopt{notoccite} option}\iopt{notoccite}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \uopt{notoccite}}\iopt{notoccite}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@notoccite@}
-% \begin{macro}{\RequirePackage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For the \opt{notoccite} option, we just load the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour l'option \opt{notoccite}, nous chargeons simplement le paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@notoccite@
- \RequirePackage{notoccite}%
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Processing the \uopt{listfiles} option}\ioptd{listfiles}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \uopt{listfiles}}\ioptd{listfiles}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@maf}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@maf@long}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@maf@short}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@addtomaf}
-% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists}
-% \begin{macro}{\jobname}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{I0009} define the \com{mtc@maf} macro which closes \com{tf@mtc}
-% and reopens it to write into the file \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}.
-% It calls \com{mtc@maf@long} or \com{mtc@maf@short} (long or short extensions), then
-% closes \com{tf@mtc}. \com{mtc@maf@long} or \com{mtc@maf@short} writes the names of the existing auxiliary
-% files using decrementing loops on the associated counters, and includes \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc} in the list
-% (but \emph{not} the \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}\,\footnote{Some users could made a cleanup using this file as a list of
-% files to delete, so it must not be in the list.} file).
-% We must also check the existence of \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0} if long extensions are used.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{I0009} définissons la macro \com{mtc@maf} qui ferme \com{tf@mtc}
-% puis le ré-ouvre pour écrire dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}.
-% Elle appelle \com{mtc@maf@long} ou \com{mtc@maf@short} (suffixes longs ou courts), puis ferme \com{tf@mtc}.
-% \com{mtc@maf@long} ou \com{mtc@maf@short} écrit les noms des fichiers auxiliaires existants en utilisant des boucles
-% par ordre décroissant sur les compteurs associés, et inclut \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc} dans la liste
-% (mais \emph{pas} le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}\,\footnote{Certains utilisateurs pourraient faire un nettoyage
-% en utilisant ce fichier comme liste des fichiers à~détruire, donc il ne doit pas être dans la liste.}).
-% Nous devons aussi tester l'existence de \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0} si les suffixes longs sont utilisés.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtc@maf{%
- \mtcPackageInfo[I0009]{minitoc}%
- {Listing minitoc auxiliary files.
- \MessageBreak
- Creating the \jobname.maf file\@gobble}
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
- \immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.maf
- \if@mtc@longext@\mtc@maf@long\else\mtc@maf@short\fi
- \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
-\def\mtc@addtomaf#1{%
- \IfFileExists{#1}{\immediate\write\tf@mtc{#1}}{}}
-\def\mtc@maf@long{%
- \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mtc}
- \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mtc0}
-\@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@ptc>\z@\relax
- \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.ptc\arabic{ptc}}
- \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.plf\arabic{ptc}}
- \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.plt\arabic{ptc}}
- \advance\c@ptc\m@ne\repeat}
-\@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{%
- \loop\ifnum\c@mtc>\z@\relax
- \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mtc\arabic{mtc}}
- \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mlf\arabic{mtc}}
- \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mlt\arabic{mtc}}
- \advance\c@mtc\m@ne\repeat}
-\@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@stc>\z@\relax
- \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.stc\arabic{stc}}
- \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.slf\arabic{stc}}
- \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.slt\arabic{stc}}
- \advance\c@stc\m@ne\repeat}}
-\def\mtc@maf@short{%
- \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mtc}
-\@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@ptc>\z@\relax
- \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.P\arabic{ptc}}
- \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.G\arabic{ptc}}
- \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.U\arabic{ptc}}
- \advance\c@ptc\m@ne\repeat}
-\@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@mtc>\z@\relax
- \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.M\arabic{mtc}}
- \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.F\arabic{mtc}}
- \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.T\arabic{mtc}}
- \advance\c@mtc\m@ne\repeat}
-\@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@stc>\z@\relax
- \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.S\arabic{stc}}
- \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.H\arabic{stc}}
- \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.V\arabic{stc}}
- \advance\c@stc\m@ne\repeat}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@listfiles@}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@maf}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% If this option is active, we call \com{mtc@maf} in an \com{AtEndDocument} block.
-% \or\relax
-% Si cette option est active, nous appellons \com{mtc@maf} dans un bloc \com{AtEndDocument}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@listfiles@{\AtEndDocument{\mtc@maf}}\else\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Processing the \uopt{hints} option}\ioptd{hints}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \uopt{hints}}\ioptd{hints}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For the \optd{hints} option, we set its first part in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block and its third (last) part
-% in an \com{AtEndDocument} block:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour l'option \optd{hints}, nous plaçons sa première partie dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument} et sa
-% troisième (dernière) partie dans un bloc \com{AtEndDocument}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@mtc@hints@
- \AtBeginDocument{\mtc@hints@begindoc}%
- \AtEndDocument{\mtc@hints@enddoc}%
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \subsection{Saving the sectionning commands}
-% \or\relax
-% \subsection{Sauvegarde des commandes de sectionnement}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And, at least, we save the definitions of sectionning commands (and of their unstarred and starred branches),
-% for comparaisons (this is a part of the \optd{hints} option executed in the preamble):
-% \or\relax
-% Et, enfin, nous sauvegardons les définitions des commandes de sectionnement (avec leurs branches non étoilées et
-% étoilées), pour des comparaisons (ceci est une partie de l'option \optd{hints} exécutée dans le préambule).
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@part}
-% \begin{macro}{\part}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@part}
-% \begin{macro}{\@part}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@spart}
-% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For the \com{part} command:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour la commande \com{part}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{part}{}{\let\mtc@hints@part\part
- \let\mtc@hints@@part\@part
- \let\mtc@hints@@spart\@spart}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \vspace{3\baselineskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@schapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\@schapter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For the \com{chapter} command:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour la commande \com{chapter}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\mtc@hints@chapter\chapter
- \let\mtc@hints@@chapter\@chapter
- \let\mtc@hints@@schapter\@schapter}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \vspace{3\baselineskip}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@section}
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@sect}
-% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@ssect}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For the \com{section} command:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour la commande \com{section}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\mtc@hints@section\section
- \let\mtc@hints@@sect\@sect
- \let\mtc@hints@@ssect\@ssect}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Trapping the undefined preparation and insertion commands}\label{s+undef+trap}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Interception des commandes de préparation et d'insertion non définies}\label{s+undef+trap}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@classck}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageError}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% It\imess{E0037} may happen that you use a preparation command (like \com{dominitoc}) or an insertion command
-% (like \com{dominitoc}) in a document using a class where that command is not available (like
-% \class{article}). To get a better diagnostic for such errors, we intercept such commands by providing a default
-% definition which just emits an error message. These default definitions are made in an \com{AtBeginDocument}
-% block.
-% \or\relax
-% Il\imess{E0037} peut arriver que vous utilisiez une commande de préparation (comme \com{dominitoc}) ou une commande
-% d'insertion (comme \com{dominitoc}) dans un document utilisant une classe pour laquelle cette commande n'est pas
-% disponible (comme \class{article}). Pour obtenir un meilleur diagnostic pour ce type d'erreurs, nous interceptons de
-% telles commandes en fournissant une définition par défaut qui émet simplement un message d'erreur. Ces définitions
-% par défaut sont faites dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtc@classck#1{%
- \mtcPackageError[E0037]{minitoc}%
- {The \csname #1\endcsname\space command is incompatible
- \MessageBreak
- with the document class}%
- {Correct the source code.
- \MessageBreak
- Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% An \com{AtBeginDocument} bloc:
-% \or\relax
-% Un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\providecommand}
-% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Part-level preparation commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Commandes de préparation au niveau partie:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \providecommand{\doparttoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{doparttoc}}%
- \providecommand{\dopartlof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dopartlof}}%
- \providecommand{\dopartlot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dopartlot}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Chapter-level preparation commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Commandes de préparation au niveau chapitre:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \providecommand{\dominitoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dominitoc}}%
- \providecommand{\dominilof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dominilof}}%
- \providecommand{\dominilot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dominilot}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Section-level preparation commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Commandes de préparation au niveau section:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \providecommand{\dosecttoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dosecttoc}}%
- \providecommand{\dosectlof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dosectlof}}%
- \providecommand{\dosectlot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dosectlot}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Part-level insertion commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Commandes d'insertion au niveau partie:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \providecommand{\parttoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{parttoc}}%
- \providecommand{\partlof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{partlof}}%
- \providecommand{\partlot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{partlot}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Chapter-level insertion commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Commandes d'insertion au niveau chapitre:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \providecommand{\minitoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{minitoc}}%
- \providecommand{\minilof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{minilof}}%
- \providecommand{\minilot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{minilot}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Section-level insertion commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Commandes d'insertion au niveau section:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \providecommand{\secttoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{secttoc}}%
- \providecommand{\sectlof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{sectlof}}%
- \providecommand{\sectlot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{sectlot}}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% ^^A \vspace{3\baselineskip}
-% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{19.45525292mm}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{9.727626459mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And\ixgrfl{stop.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{stop.png}}}
-% the package is terminated.
-% \or\relax
-% Et\ixgrfl{stop.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{stop.png}}}
-% le paquetage est terminé.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</minitoc>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{The \uxfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} file}\ixfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Le fichier \uxfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}}\ixfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\jobname}
-% \begin{macro}{\input}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This short file is necessary to create the french documentation. Its rôle is to
-% set \com{jobname} to \texttt{minitoc-fr} in place of \texttt{minitoc}. As \xfile{minitoc.ins}
-% generates the \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan} and \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan} files which set a language number \com{LANG},
-% and \xfile{minitoc.dtx} reads then the \icom{jobname}\xfile{\bs jobname.lan} file, the documentation can be in several languages
-% (english and french here) in
-% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, the language being selected by \com{ifcase}\com{LANG}\com{relax} \ldots\ \com{or}\com{relax}
-% \ldots\ \com{fi} constructs. The \com{relax} primitives are necessary to avoid bad surprises.
-% \or\relax
-% Ce court fichier est nécessaire pour créer la documentation en français. Son rôle est de forcer \com{jobname}
-% à~\texttt{minitoc-fr} au lieu de \texttt{minitoc}. Comme \xfile{minitoc.ins} engendre les fichiers
-% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan} et \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan} qui établissent un numéro de langue \com{LANG}, et comme
-% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} lit alors le fichier \icom{jobname}\xfile{\bs jobname.lan}, la documentation peut être en plusieurs langues
-% (anglais et français ici) dans \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, la langue étant choisie par des constructions
-% \com{ifcase}\com{LANG}\com{relax} \ldots\ \com{or}\com{relax} \ldots\ \com{fi}. Les primitives
-% \com{relax} sont nécessaires pour éviter de mauvaises surprises.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*minitoc-fr>
-\ProvidesFile{minitoc-fr.dtx}%
- [2008/07/16 minitoc v60 french documentation start file]
-\input{minitoc.dtx}
-%</minitoc-fr>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \chapter{Commented code of the \upack{mtcoff} package}\label{c+code+mtcoff.sty}\ipack{mtcoff}
-% \or\relax
-% \chapter{Code commenté du paquetage \upack{mtcoff}}\label{c+code+mtcoff.sty}\ipack{mtcoff}
-% \fi
-% \minitoc
-% \mtcskip
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Why \upack{mtcoff}?}\label{s+mtcoff+why}\ipack{mtcoff}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Pourquoi \upack{mtcoff}?}\label{s+mtcoff+why}\ipack{mtcoff}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \upack{minitoc} package~\cite{minitoc-fr,minitoc} requires that the user inserts many commands in the source
-% code of her/his document, and not only into the preamble of the document. Hence the concept of a replacement
-% package, \pack{mtcoff} (means ``minitoc off''), which substitutes to all commands and environments of the
-% \upack{minitoc} package some alternative commands and environments with the same names and syntaxes, but doing nothing
-% (except emitting some harmless warnings, for special cases). This way, to turn off easily the \upack{minitoc} package,
-% you just have to write, in the preamble of your document, something like:
-% \or\relax
-% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}~\cite{minitoc-fr,minitoc} requiert que l'utilisateur insère de nombreuses commandes
-% dans le code source de son document, mais pas seulement dans le préambule du document. D'où le concept d'un
-% paquetage de remplacement, \pack{mtcoff} (c'est-à-dire, «~\emph{minitoc off}~»), qui substitue à~toutes les
-% commandes et à~tous les environnements du paquetage \upack{minitoc} d'autres commandes et environnements ayant
-% les mêmes noms et syntaxes, mais ne faisant rien (sauf émettre quelques avertissements bénins, dans des cas
-% spéciaux). De cette manière, pour inhiber facilement le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, il vous suffit d'écrire,
-% dans le préambule de votre document, quelque chose comme ceci:
-% \fi
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{usepackage}\verb|[...options...]{minitoc}|\\
-% \verb|%\usepackage{mtcoff}|
-% \end{verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% then the \upack{minitoc} package is activated with the specified options. If you modify this two lines this way:
-% \or\relax
-% alors le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est activé avec les options spécifiées. Si vous modifiez ces deux lignes de
-% la manière suivante:
-% \fi
-% \begin{verse}
-% \verb|%\usepackage[...options...]{minitoc}|\\
-% \com{usepackage}\verb|{mtcoff}|
-% \end{verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% then the \upack{minitoc} package is desactivated and all its commands and environments are ignored. This is much
-% easier, faster and safer than commenting out all the commands and environments of \upack{minitoc}. Moreover,
-% this operation is reversible.
-% \or\relax
-% alors le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est désactivé et toutes ses commandes et environnements sont ignorés. Ceci
-% est beaucoup plus facile, rapide et sûr que de mettre en commentaire toutes les commandes et environnements
-% de \upack{minitoc}. De plus, cette opération est réversible.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Identification of the package}\label{s+mtcoff+ident}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Identification du paquetage}\label{s+mtcoff+ident}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\NeedsTeXFormat}
-% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesPackage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% First, we identify the package and check the version of \LaTeX\,\footnote{This checking is not really useful for
-% the \pack{mtcoff} package itself, but it is good to check that your version of \LaTeX\ is not too old to
-% support \upack{minitoc}.}; we need the \pack{mtcmess} package to write messages with unique identifiers.
-% \or\relax
-% Tout d'abord, nous identifions le paquetage et vérifions la version de \LaTeX\,\footnote{Cette vérification
-% n'est pas vraiment utile pour le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} lui-même, mais il est bon de vérifier que votre
-% version de \LaTeX\ n'est pas trop ancienne pour supporter \upack{minitoc}.}; nous avons besoin du paquetage
-% \pack{mtcmess} pour écrire des messages avec des identificateurs uniques.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtcoff>
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
-\ProvidesPackage{mtcoff}[2008/07/16 v60 The mtcoff package]
-\RequirePackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14]
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{9}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Faking counters and dimensions}\label{s+mtcoff+faking.counters.dimensions}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Simuler compteurs et dimensions}\label{s+mtcoff+faking.counters.dimensions}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\count@}
-% \begin{macro}{\dimen@}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@minitocdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcskipamount}
-% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@parttocdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@secttocdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcindent}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% As \upack{minitoc} declares some counters and dimensions registers, we fake them using \com{count@} or
-% \com{dimen@}. For \com{mtcskipamount}, we must use its default definition, \com{bigskipamount}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \or\relax
-% Puisque \upack{minitoc} déclare quelques registres compteurs et dimensions, nous les simulons en utilisant
-% \com{count@} ou \com{dimen@}. Pour \com{mtcskipamount}, nous utilisons sa définition par défaut,
-% \com{bigskipamount}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\c@minitocdepth\count@
-\let\mtcindent\dimen@
-\let\mtcskipamount\bigskipamount
-\let\c@parttocdepth\count@
-\let\ptcindent\dimen@
-\let\c@secttocdepth\count@
-\let\stcindent\dimen@
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@ptc}
-% \begin{macro}{\c@stc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The basic mini-table counters are provided by \com{count@}:
-% \or\relax
-% Les compteurs de mini-tables basiques sont fournis par \com{count@}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\c@mtc\count@ \let\c@ptc\count@ \let\c@stc\count@
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The gaps before and after parttoc heads receive their default values:
-% \or\relax
-% Les intervalles avant et après les têtes de parttocs reçoivent leurs valeurs par défaut:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtcgapbeforeheads{50\p@} \def\mtcgapafterheads{40\p@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
-% \begin{macro}{\kernafterparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\kernafterpartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\kernafterpartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminilot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{F0008} must define the macros for the vertical kernings between the minitables and their before the bottom rule.
-% The default values are used. We must issue a warning if one of these macros is used.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{F0008} devons définir les macros pour les crênages verticaux placés entre les minitables et leurs filets
-% horizontaux inférieurs. Les valeurs par défaut sont utilisées. Nous devons émettre un avertissement si l'une de ces
-% macros est utilisée.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifundefined{part}{}{%
- \def\kernafterparttoc{%
- \mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}%
- {The macro \string\kernafterparttoc
- \MessageBreak
- should not be used out of context
- \MessageBreak}%
- \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
- \def\kernafterpartlof{%
- \mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}%
- {The macro \string\kernafterpartlof
- \MessageBreak
- should not be used out of context
- \MessageBreak}%
- \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
- \def\kernafterpartlot{%
- \mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}%
- {The macro \string\kernafterpartlot
- \MessageBreak
- should not be used out of context
- \MessageBreak}%
- \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
- }%
- \@ifundefined{chapter}{%
- \@ifundefined{section}{}%
- {%
- \def\kernaftersecttoc{%
- \mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}%
- {The macro \string\kernaftersecttoc
- \MessageBreak
- should not be used out of context
- \MessageBreak}%
- \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
- \def\kernaftersectlof{%
- \mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}%
- {The macro \string\kernaftersectlof
- \MessageBreak
- should not be used out of context
- \MessageBreak}%
- \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
- \def\kernaftersectlot{%
- \mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}%
- {The macro \string\kernaftersectlot
- \MessageBreak
- should not be used out of context
- \MessageBreak}%
- \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
- }%
- }%
- {%
- \def\kernafterminitoc{%
- \mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}%
- {The macro \string\kernafterminitoc
- \MessageBreak
- should not be used out of context
- \MessageBreak}%
- \kern-.5\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
- \def\kernafterminilof{%
- \mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}%
- {The macro \string\kernafterminilof
- \MessageBreak
- should not be used out of context
- \MessageBreak}%
- \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.0ex}%
- \def\kernafterminilot{%
- \mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}%
- {The macro \string\kernafterminilot
- \MessageBreak
- should not be used out of context
- \MessageBreak}%
- \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.0ex}%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\plfoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\slfoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\sltoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\slfoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltoffset}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We\imess{F0009} must define the macros for the horizontal offsets of the mini-tables.
-% The default values are used. We must issue a warning if one of these macros is used.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous\imess{F0009} devons définir les macros pour les corrections horizontales des mini-tables.
-% Les valeurs par défaut sont utilisées. Un avertissement sera émis si l'une de ces macros est utilisée.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifundefined{part}{}{%
- \def\ptcoffset{%
- \mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}%
- {The macro \string\ptcoffset
- \MessageBreak
- should not be used out of context
- \MessageBreak}%
- 0pt}%
- \def\plfoffset{%
- \mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}%
- {The macro \string\plfoffset
- \MessageBreak
- should not be used out of context
- \MessageBreak}%
- 0pt}%
- \def\pltoffset{%
- \mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}%
- {The macro \string\pltoffset
- \MessageBreak
- should not be used out of context
- \MessageBreak}%
- 0pt}%
- }%
- \@ifundefined{chapter}{%
- \@ifundefined{section}{}%
- {%
- \def\stcoffset{%
- \mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}%
- {The macro \string\stcoffset
- \MessageBreak
- should not be used out of context
- \MessageBreak}%
- 0pt}%
- \def\slfoffset{%
- \mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}%
- {The macro \string\slfoffset
- \MessageBreak
- should not be used out of context
- \MessageBreak}%
- 0pt}%
- \def\sltoffset{%
- \mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}%
- {The macro \string\sltoffset
- \MessageBreak
- should not be used out of context
- \MessageBreak}%
- 0pt}%
- }%
- }%
- {%
- \def\mtcoffset{%
- \mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}%
- {The macro \string\mtcoffset
- \MessageBreak
- should not be used out of context
- \MessageBreak}%
- 0pt}%
- \def\slfoffset{%
- \mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}%
- {The macro \string\slfoffset
- \MessageBreak
- should not be used out of context
- \MessageBreak}%
- 0pt}%
- \def\mltoffset{%
- \mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}%
- {The macro \string\mltoffset
- \MessageBreak
- should not be used out of context
- \MessageBreak}%
- 0pt}%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Faking simple commands}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.simple.commands}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Simuler les commandes simples}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.simple.commands}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures}
-% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some user commands are easy to fake:
-% \or\relax
-% Certaines commandes utilisateur sont faciles à~simuler:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\faketableofcontents\relax
-\let\fakelistoffigures\relax
-\let\fakelistoftables\relax
-\let\mtcskip\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc}
-% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc}
-% \begin{macro}{\decrementptc}
-% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\decrementstc}
-% \begin{macro}{\incrementptc}
-% \begin{macro}{\incrementmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\incrementstc}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Basic adjustment commands are also easy:
-% \or\relax
-% Les commandes d'ajustement de base sont aussi faciles:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\adjustptc}[1][1]{\relax}
-\newcommand{\adjustmtc}[1][1]{\relax}
-\newcommand{\adjuststc}[1][1]{\relax}
-\let\decrementptc\relax \let\incrementptc\relax
-\let\decrementmtc\relax \let\incrementmtc\relax
-\let\decrementstc\relax \let\incrementstc\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\partend}
-% \begin{macro}{\partbegin}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapterend}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectend}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The following commands are not directly called by the user, in normal circumstances, but must be faked:
-% \or\relax
-% Les commandes suivantes ne sont pas appelées directement par l'utilisateur, dans des circonstances normales,
-% mais il faut les simuler:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\partend\relax \let\partbegin\relax
-\let\chapterend\relax \let\chapterbegin\relax
-\let\sectend\relax \let\sectbegin\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Faking commands with one optional argument}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.user.commands.1opt}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Simulation des commandes ayant un \texorpdfstring{\mbox{argument}}{argument} optionnel}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.user.commands.1opt}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\gobbleopt@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The user commands with an optional argument are faked using the internal \LaTeX\ macro \com{@ifnextchar} (to get
-% the optional argument) and the new utility command \com{gobbleopt@}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les commandes utilisateur ayant un argument optionnel sont simulées en utilisant la macro interne \LaTeX{}
-% \com{@ifnextchar} (pour prendre l'argument optionnel) et la nouvelle commande utilitaire \com{gobbleopt@}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\gobbleopt@[#1]{\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Commands for part level mini-tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau partie:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\doparttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-\def\dopartlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-\def\dopartlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-\def\parttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-\def\partlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-\def\partlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Commands for chapter level mini-tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dominitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-\def\dominilof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-\def\dominilot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-\def\minitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-\def\minilof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-\def\minilot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Commands for section level mini-tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau section:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dosecttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-\def\dosectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-\def\dosectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-\def\secttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-\def\sectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-\def\sectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Command \com{mtcprepare}:
-% \or\relax
-% Commande \com{mtcprepare}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mtcprepare{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Faking flags}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.iflags}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Simulation d'indicateurs}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.iflags}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We defines flags which were true when inside a mini-table of the matching type, false outside.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous définissons des indicateurs qui étaient vrais à~l'intérieur d'une mini-table du type correspondant, faux
-% à~l'extérieur.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifinparttoc\inparttocfalse%
-\newif\ifinpartlof\inpartloffalse%
-\newif\ifinpartlot\inpartlotfalse%
-\newif\ifinsecttoc\insecttocfalse%
-\newif\ifinsectlof\insectloffalse%
-\newif\ifinsectlot\insectlotfalse%
-\newif\ifinminitoc\inminitocfalse%
-\newif\ifinminilof\inminiloffalse%
-\newif\ifinminilot\inminilotfalse%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Disabling the internal commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.internal.commands}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Inhibition des commandes internes}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.internal.commands}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@gobbletwo}
-% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
-% \begin{macro}{\appendixmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@xchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\xchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\pchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\psect}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@xpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\xpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@xsect}
-% \begin{macro}{\xsect}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We need also to disable some \upack{minitoc} commands, with \com{relax} (macros with no argument) or
-% \com{@gobbletwo} (macros with two arguments):
-% \or\relax
-% Il nous faut aussi inhiber quelques commandes de \upack{minitoc}, avec \com{relax} (macros sans argument) ou
-% \com{@gobbletwo} (macros avec arguments):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\tf@mtc\count@
-\let\mtc@string\relax
-\let\appendixmtc\relax
-\let\l@xchapter\@gobbletwo
-\let\xchapter\relax
-\let\pchapter\relax
-\let\psect\relax
-\let\l@xpart\@gobbletwo
-\let\xpart\relax
-\let\l@xsect\@gobbletwo
-\let\xsect\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Disabling the font commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.font.commands}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Désactivation des commandes de fonte}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.font.commands}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\empty}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We disable the \upack{minitoc} font commands (like \com{mtcSSfont}) with \com{empty}, because some users
-% might have used:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous désactivons commandes de fonte de \upack{minitoc} (telles que \com{mtcSSfont}) avec \com{empty}, car
-% certains utilisateurs pourraient avoir utilisé:
-% \fi
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{renewcommand}\verb|{|\com{mtcSSfont}\verb|}{...}|
-% \end{verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% which will not work if we use \com{relax} here.
-% \or\relax
-% ce qui ne marcherait pas si nous utilisions \com{relax} ici.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcCfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\plffont}
-% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Fonts for part level mini-tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Fontes pour les mini-tables au niveau partie:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\ptcfont\empty
-\let\ptcCfont\empty
-\let\ptcSfont\empty
-\let\ptcSSfont\empty
-\let\ptcSSSfont\empty
-\let\ptcPfont\empty
-\let\ptcSPfont\empty
-\let\plffont\empty
-\let\plfSfont\empty
-\let\pltfont\empty
-\let\pltSfont\empty
-\let\ptifont\empty
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlffont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlfSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtifont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Fonts for chapter level mini-tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Fontes pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\mtcfont\empty
-\let\mtcSfont\empty
-\let\mtcSSfont\empty
-\let\mtcSSSfont\empty
-\let\mtcPfont\empty
-\let\mtcSPfont\empty
-\let\mlffont\empty
-\let\mlfSfont\empty
-\let\mltfont\empty
-\let\mltSfont\empty
-\let\mtifont\empty
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcSSSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcSPfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\slffont}
-% \begin{macro}{\slfSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\sltfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\sltSfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\stifont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Fonts for section level mini-tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Fontes pour les mini-tables au niveau section:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\stcfont\empty
-\let\stcSSfont\empty
-\let\stcSSSfont\empty
-\let\stcPfont\empty
-\let\stcSPfont\empty
-\let\slffont\empty
-\let\slfSfont\empty
-\let\sltfont\empty
-\let\sltSfont\empty
-\let\stifont\empty
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Font for ``coffee''{\myCoffeecup} lines:
-% \or\relax
-% Fonte pour les lignes de «~pause-café~»{\myCoffeecup}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\coffeefont\empty
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcsetXXX.commands}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Inhibition des commandes \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcsetXXX.commands}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@gobbletwo}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% These commands use two or three mandatory arguments:
-% \or\relax
-% Ces commandes utilisent deux ou trois arguments obligatoires:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\mtcsetdepth\@gobbletwo
-\let\mtcsetoffset\@gobbletwo
-\def\mtcsetfont#1#2#3{\empty}
-\let\mtcsettitlefont\@gobbletwo
-\let\mtcsettitle\@gobbletwo
-\def\mtcsetformat#1#2#3{\empty}
-\def\mtcsetfeature#1#2#3{\empty}
-\let\mtcsetpagenumbers\@gobbletwo
-\let\mtcsetrules\@gobbletwo
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcpolym.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcpolymXXX.commands}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Inhibition des commandes \ucom{mtcpolym.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcsetpolym.commands}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymtoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We simulate these commands by keeping only the fourth argument; they must still be robust.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous simulons ces commandes en ne gardant que le quatrième argument; elles doivent encore être robustes.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% \DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymtoc}[4]{{#4}}
-% \DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymlof}[4]{{#4}}
-% \DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymlot}[4]{{#4}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Disabling the new \ucom{l@.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.l@XXX.commands}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Inhibition des nouvelles commandes \ucom{l@.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.l@XXX.commands}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\l@starpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@starchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@starsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsubsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@starparagraph}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubparagraph}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \upack{minitoc} package defines the \verb|\l@starXXX| commands to format TOC entries for starred sectionning
-% commands. We reset to the unstarred version, when necessary:
-% \or\relax
-% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} définit les commandes \verb|\l@starXXX| pour la mise en forme d'entrées de la
-% table des matières pour des commandes de sectionnement étoilées. Nous revenons à~la version non étoilée, lorsque
-% cela est nécessaire:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{part}{}{\let\l@starpart\l@part}
-\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\l@starchapter\l@chapter}
-\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\l@starsection\l@section}
-\@ifundefined{subsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsection\l@subsection}
-\@ifundefined{subsubsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsubsection\l@subsubsection}
-\@ifundefined{paragraph}{}{\let\l@starparagraph\l@paragraph}
-\@ifundefined{subparagraph}{}{\let\l@starsubparagraph\l@subparagraph}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Ignore the obsolete commands}\label{s+mtcoff+ignore.obsolete.commands}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Ignorer les commandes obsolètes}\label{s+mtcoff+ignore.obsolete.commands}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@gobble}
-% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis}
-% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris}
-% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We just ignore the obsolete commands (with one mandatory argument):
-% \or\relax
-% Nous ignorons simplement les commandes obsolètes (qui ont un seul argument, obligatoire):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\firstpartis\@gobble \let\firstchapteris\@gobble \let\firstsectionis\@gobble
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcselectlanguage} and \ucom{mtcloadmlo} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcselectlanguage.command}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcloadmlo.command}\icom{mtcloadmlo}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Inhibition des commandes \ucom{mtcselectlanguage} et \ucom{mtcloadmlo}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcselectlanguage.command}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcloadmlo.command}\icom{mtcloadmlo}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@gobble}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% These command have one mandatory argument:
-% \or\relax
-% Ces commandes ont un seul argument, obligatoire:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\mtcselectlanguage\@gobble \let\mtcloadmlo\@gobble
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{16}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Disabling the commands for the horizontal rules}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+horiz.rules}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les filets horizontaux}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+horiz.rules}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\noptcrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomtcrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\nostcrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\plfrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\noplfrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlfrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomlfrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\slfrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\noslfrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\nopltrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomltrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\sltrule}
-% \begin{macro}{\nosltrule}
-% % \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% These commands have no argument:
-% \or\relax
-% Ces commandes n'ont aucun argument:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\ptcrule\relax
-\let\noptcrule\relax
-\let\mtcrule\relax
-\let\nomtcrule\relax
-\let\stcrule\relax
-\let\nostcrule\relax
-\let\plfrule\relax
-\let\noplfrule\relax
-\let\mlfrule\relax
-\let\nomlfrule\relax
-\let\slfrule\relax
-\let\noslfrule\relax
-\let\pltrule\relax
-\let\nopltrule\relax
-\let\mltrule\relax
-\let\nomltrule\relax
-\let\sltrule\relax
-\let\nosltrule\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{15}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Disabling the commands for the page numbers}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+page.numbers}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les numéros de page}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+page.numbers}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\ptcpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\noptcpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\stcpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\nostcpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\plfpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\noplfpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\slfpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\noslfpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\pltpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\nopltpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\sltpagenumbers}
-% \begin{macro}{\nosltpagenumbers}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% These commands have no argument:
-% \or\relax
-% Ces commandes n'ont aucun argument:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\mtcpagenumbers\relax
-\let\nomtcpagenumbers\relax
-\let\stcpagenumbers\relax
-\let\nostcpagenumbers\relax
-\let\ptcpagenumbers\relax
-\let\noptcpagenumbers\relax
-\let\mlfpagenumbers\relax
-\let\nomlfpagenumbers\relax
-\let\slfpagenumbers\relax
-\let\noslfpagenumbers\relax
-\let\plfpagenumbers\relax
-\let\noplfpagenumbers\relax
-\let\mltpagenumbers\relax
-\let\nomltpagenumbers\relax
-\let\sltpagenumbers\relax
-\let\nosltpagenumbers\relax
-\let\pltpagenumbers\relax
-\let\nopltpagenumbers\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Disabling the mini-table features commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.features}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les dispositifs des mini-tables}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.features}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We disable the commands for features (like \com{beforeparttoc}) with \com{empty}, because some users may have
-% used:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous inhibons les commandes pour les dispositifs (telles que \com{beforeparttoc}) avec \com{empty}, car
-% certains utilisateurs ont pu avoir fait:
-% \fi
-% \begin{verse}
-% \com{renewcommand}\verb|{|\com{beforeparttoc}\verb|}{...}|
-% \end{verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% which will not work if we use \com{relax} here. These commands have no argument,
-% \or\relax
-% ce qui ne marcherait pas si nous utilisions \com{relax} ici. Ces commandes n'ont aucun argument,
-% \fi
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\beforeparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\afterparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\openparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\openpartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\openpartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeparttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\closepartlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\closepartlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispageparttocstyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlofstyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlotstyle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Commands for part level mini-tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau partie:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\beforeparttoc\empty
-\let\beforepartlof\empty
-\let\beforepartlot\empty
-\let\afterparttoc\empty
-\let\afterpartlof\empty
-\let\afterpartlot\empty
-\let\openparttoc\empty
-\let\openpartlof\empty
-\let\openpartlot\empty
-\let\closeparttoc\empty
-\let\closepartlof\empty
-\let\closepartlot\empty
-\let\thispageparttocstyle\empty
-\let\thispagepartlofstyle\empty
-\let\thispagepartlotstyle\empty
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforeminitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\afterminitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\afterminilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\afterminilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\openminitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\openminilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\openminilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeminitoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeminilof}
-% \begin{macro}{\closeminilot}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispageminitocstyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilofstyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilotstyle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Commands for chapter level mini-tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau chapitre:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\beforeminitoc\empty
-\let\beforeminilof\empty
-\let\beforeminilot\empty
-\let\afterminitoc\empty
-\let\afterminilof\empty
-\let\afterminilot\empty
-\let\openminitoc\empty
-\let\openminilof\empty
-\let\openminilot\empty
-\let\closeminitoc\empty
-\let\closeminilof\empty
-\let\closeminilot\empty
-\let\thispageminitocstyle\empty
-\let\thispageminilofstyle\empty
-\let\thispageminilotstyle\empty
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforesecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\aftersecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\opensecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\opensectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\opensectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\closesecttoc}
-% \begin{macro}{\closesectlof}
-% \begin{macro}{\closesectlot}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispagesecttocstyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlofstyle}
-% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlotstyle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Commands for section level mini-tables:
-% \or\relax
-% Commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau section:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\beforesecttoc\empty
-\let\beforesectlof\empty
-\let\beforesectlot\empty
-\let\aftersecttoc\empty
-\let\aftersectlof\empty
-\let\aftersectlot\empty
-\let\opensecttoc\empty
-\let\opensectlof\empty
-\let\opensectlot\empty
-\let\closesecttoc\empty
-\let\closesectlof\empty
-\let\closesectlot\empty
-\let\thispagesecttocstyle\empty
-\let\thispagesectlofstyle\empty
-\let\thispagesectlotstyle\empty
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Disabling miscellaneous flags and commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.misc}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Inhibition de divers indicateurs et commandes}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.misc}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
-% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@listof}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% There are some flags and commands that it is wise to declare:
-% \or\relax
-% Il y~a quelques indicateurs et commandes qu'il est bon de déclarer:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@mtc@longext@ \@mtc@longext@true
-\newif\iftightmtc \tightmtcfalse
-\newif\ifktightmtc \ktightmtcfalse
-\newif\ifundottedmtc \undottedmtcfalse
-\newif\ifmtcsecondpart \mtcsecondpartfalse
-\let\l@listof\chapter
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Caution for some commands}\label{s+mtcoff+caution}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Précaution pour certaines commandes}\label{s+mtcoff+caution}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcoffwarn@}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Some\SMMZ{\lmess{F0007}} \upack{minitoc} commands should eventually be replaced if you decide to \emph{definitely}
-% stop using the \upack{minitoc} package with your document. So we declare a flag and an \com{AtEndDocument} block to signal
-% that you have used these commands:
-% \or\relax
-% Certaines\SMMZ{\lmess{F0007}} commandes de \upack{minitoc} devraient éventuellement être remplacées si vous décidez
-% d'arrêter \emph{définitivement} l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec votre document. Donc nous déclarons un
-% indicateur et un bloc \com{AtEndDocument} pour signaler que vous avez utilisé ces commandes:
-% \fi
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifmtcoffwarn@ \mtcoffwarn@false
-\AtEndDocument{\ifmtcoffwarn@
- \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[F0007]{mtcoff}%
- {You should scan (backwards) your .log
- \MessageBreak
- file to find some commands needing
- \MessageBreak
- to be replaced if you decide to
- \MessageBreak
- DEFINITELY stop using minitoc for this
- \MessageBreak
- document. It is more wise to keep the
- \MessageBreak
- \string\usepackage\space lines for minitoc and mtcoff
- \MessageBreak
- and to comment out only one of them}
-\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcoffwarn@}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ck}
-% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Then\SMM{\lmess{F0004}\\\lmess{F0006}\\\lmess{F0005}} these commands are disabled
-% and they set the flag and give a warning (useful to get the line number):
-% \or\relax
-% Puis\SMM{\lmess{F0004}\\\lmess{F0006}\\\lmess{F0005}} ces commandes sont inhibées
-% de manière qu'elles positionnent l'indicateur et donnent un avertissement (ce
-% qui est utile pour avoir le numéro de ligne):
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\mtcaddchapter}[1][]{\mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0004]{mtcoff}%
- {\protect\mtcaddchapter{...} should be replaced
- \MessageBreak
- by \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...}
- \MessageBreak}
-\def\mtc@ck{#1}
-\ifx\mtc@ck\empty
-\else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
-\fi}
-\newcommand{\mtcaddsection}[1][]{\mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0006]{mtcoff}%
- {\protect\mtcaddsection{...} should be replaced
- \MessageBreak
- by \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...}
- \MessageBreak}
-\def\mtc@ck{#1}
-\ifx\mtc@ck\empty
-\else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
-\fi}
-\newcommand{\mtcaddpart}[1][]{\mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0005]{mtcoff}%
- {\protect\mtcaddpart{...} should be replaced
- \MessageBreak
- by \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...}
- \MessageBreak}
-\def\mtc@ck{#1}
-\ifx\mtc@ck\empty
-\else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
-\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Disabling commands for ``coffee''}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.coffee.commands}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les <<~pauses-café~>>}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.coffee.commands}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\addcoffeeline}
-% \begin{macro}{\coffeeline}
-% \begin{macro}{\@gobble}
-% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtocline}
-% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtoclinep}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We disable the commands relative to ``coffee'' lines, and the specific version of contents lines without leaders
-% of dots:
-% \or\relax
-% Nous inhibons les commandes concernant les lignes de contenu pour les «~pauses-café~», ainsi que la version
-% spécifique de ligne de contenu sans points de conduite:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\addcoffeeline#1#2#3{\relax}
-\let\coffeeline\@gobble
-\let\l@coffee\relax
-\def\@Undottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{\relax}
-\def\@Undottedtoclinep#1#2#3#4#5{\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Disabling the \texttt{mtchideinmain.{}.{}.} environments}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtchideinmainXXX.envs}
-% ^^A \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Inhibition des environnements \texttt{mtchideinmain.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtchideinmainXXX.envs}
-% ^^A \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}
-% \fi
-% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc}
-% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlof}
-% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlot}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% These environments accept one optional argument:
-% \or\relax
-% Ces environnements acceptent un argument optionnel:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newenvironment{mtchideinmaintoc}[1][-1]{\empty}{\empty}
-\newenvironment{mtchideinmainlof}[1][-1]{\empty}{\empty}
-\newenvironment{mtchideinmainlot}[1][-1]{\empty}{\empty}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{environment}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% ^^A \section{Inhibition of the \ucom{mtc@saveXXXdepth} and \ucom{mtc@restoreXXXdepth} internal commands}
-% \section{Inhibition of the \ucom{mtc@[save\BAR{}restore]XXXdepth} internal commands}
-% \or\relax
-% ^^A \section{Inhibition des commandes internes \ucom{mtc@saveXXXdepth} et \ucom{mtc@restoreXXXdepth}}
-% \section{Inhibition des commandes internes \ucom{mtc@[save\BAR{}restore]XXXdepth}}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savetocdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savelofdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savelotdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@restoretocdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@restorelofdepth}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtc@restorelotdepth}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% We must inhibit these commands, inserted in the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files by the
-% hiding commands. So we will not have to delete these files when switching from the \upack{minitoc} package to
-% the \pack{mtcoff} package.
-% \or\relax
-% Nous devons inhiber ces commandes, insérées dans les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot} par
-% les commandes de masquage. Ainsi nous n'aurons pas à~détruire ces fichiers lors du passage du paquetage
-% \upack{minitoc} au paquetage \pack{mtcoff}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\mtc@savetocdepth\empty
-\let\mtc@savelofdepth\empty
-\let\mtc@savelotdepth\empty
-\let\mtc@restoretocdepth\empty
-\let\mtc@restorelofdepth\empty
-\let\mtc@restorelotdepth\empty
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcfixglossary} command}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixglossary.command}\icom{mtcfixglossary}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Inhibition de la commande \ucom{mtcfixglossary}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixglossary.command}\icom{mtcfixglossary}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixglossary}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This command accepts one optional argument:
-% \or\relax
-% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\mtcfixglossary}[1][]{\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcfixindex} command}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixindex.command}\icom{mtcfixindex}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Inhibition de la commande \ucom{mtcfixindex}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixindex.command}\icom{mtcfixindex}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This command accepts one optional argument:
-% \or\relax
-% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\mtcfixindex}[1][]{\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcfixnomenclature} command}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixnomenclature.command}\icom{mtcfixnomenclature}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Inhibition de la commande \ucom{mtcfixnomenclature}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixnomenclature.command}\icom{mtcfixnomenclature}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixnomenclature}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This command accepts one optional argument:
-% \or\relax
-% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\mtcfixnomenclature}[1][]{\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Disabling the \ucom{addstarred.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.addstarredXXX.commands}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Inhibition des commandes \ucom{addstarred.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.addstarredXXX.commands}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcoffwarn@}
-% \begin{macro}{\addstarredpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% These\SMM{\lmess{F0002}\\\lmess{F0001}\\\lmess{F0003}} commands should be replaced by standard commands,
-% but \pack{mtcoff} simulates and gives a warning, which will be reminded at the end of document:
-% \or\relax
-% Ces\SMM{\lmess{F0002}\\\lmess{F0001}\\\lmess{F0003}} commandes devraient être remplacées par des commandes standard,
-% mais \pack{mtcoff} les simule et donne un avertissement, qui sera rappelé en fin de document:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\addstarredpart#1{\mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0002]{mtcoff}%
- {\protect\addstarredpart{...} should be replaced by
- \MessageBreak
- \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...}
- \MessageBreak}
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}}
-\def\addstarredchapter#1{\mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0001]{mtcoff}%
- {\protect\addstarredchapter{...} should be replaced by
- \MessageBreak
- \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...}
- \MessageBreak}
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}}
-\def\addstarredsection#1{\mtcoffwarn@true
- \mtcPackageWarning[F0003]{mtcoff}%
- {\protect\addstarredsection{...} should be replaced by
- \MessageBreak
- \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...}
- \MessageBreak}
- \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% And the \pack{mtcoff} package is terminated.
-% \or\relax
-% Et le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} est terminé.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</mtcoff>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \chapter{Commented code of the \upack{mtcmess} package}\label{c+code+mtcmess.sty}\ipack{mtcmess}
-% \or\relax
-% \chapter{Code commenté du paquetage \upack{mtcmess}}\label{c+code+mtcmess.sty}\ipack{mtcmess}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageInfo}
-% \begin{macro}{\PackageInfo}
-% \begin{macro}{\MessageBreak}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarning}
-% \begin{macro}{\PackageWarning}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine}
-% \begin{macro}{\PackageWarningNoLine}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageError}
-% \begin{macro}{\PackageError}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% To make easier the search of a message in the documentation\footnote{For instance, using the search facility of some PDF
-% reader utility.}, we will assign an unique identifier to each
-% message of the \upack{minitoc} and \pack{mtcoff} packages. As the standard commands for such messages do not
-% include this feature, we make extended versions, with the same syntax, plus a first optional argument:
-% \or\relax
-% Pour faciliter la recherche d'un message dans la documentation\,\footnote{Par exemple, en utilisant le système de
-% recherche d'un utilitaire de lecture de fichier PDF.}, nous attribuerons un identificateur unique à~chaque
-% message des paquetages \upack{minitoc} et \pack{mtcoff}. Puisque les commandes standard pour de tels messages
-% n'offrent pas ce dispositif, nous en faisons des versions étendues, avec la même syntaxe, plus un premier argument
-% optionnel:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtcmess>
-\ProvidesPackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14]%
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/01]%
-\newcommand{\mtcPackageInfo}[3][]%
- {\PackageInfo{#2}{#1\MessageBreak #3}}%
-\newcommand{\mtcPackageWarning}[3][]%
- {\PackageWarning{#2}{#1\MessageBreak #3}}%
-\newcommand{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine}[3][]%
- {\PackageWarningNoLine{#2}{#1\MessageBreak #3}}%
-\newcommand{\mtcPackageError}[4][]%
- {\PackageError{#2}{#1\MessageBreak #3}{#4}}%
-%</mtcmess>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Hence the first line of the message will contain the package name and the unique identifier of the message.
-% \or\relax
-% Donc la première ligne du message contiendra le nom du paquetage et l'identificateur unique du message.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% These macros are defined in a separate package because they are used by at least two packages
-% (\upack{minitoc} and \pack{mtcoff}) and because they could be useful for other packages.
-% \or\relax
-% Ces macros sont définies dans un paquetage distinct car elles sont utilisées par au moins deux paquetages
-% (\upack{minitoc} et \pack{mtcoff}) et parce qu'elles pourraient être utiles pour d'autres paquetages.
-% \fi
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \chapter{Patch for the \uclass{memoir} class}\label{memoir-patch}\iclass{memoir}\ipack{mtcpatchmem}
-% This\SMMZZ{\lmess{M0001}} code must be loaded to fix an \emph{incompatibility} of the \upack{minitoc} package
-% with some recent versions of the \class{memoir} class.
-% This correction is no more necessary after the 2005/09/25 version of \class{memoir}.
-% \or\relax
-% \chapter{Correction pour la classe \uclass{memoir}}\label{memoir-patch}\iclass{memoir}\ipack{mtcpatchmem}
-% Ce\SMMZZ{\lmess{M0001}} code doit être chargé pour corriger une \emph{incompatibilité} du paquetage \upack{minitoc}
-% avec certaines versions récentes de la classe \class{memoir}.
-% Cette correction n'est plus nécessaire après la version datée 2005/09/25 de \class{memoir}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mtcpatchmem>
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/01]%
-\ProvidesPackage{mtcpatchmem}%
- [2008/07/16 v60 Package mtcpatchmem]
-\RequirePackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14]
-\mtcPackageInfo[M0001]{mtcpatchmem}%
- {mtcpatchmem package to patch the memoir class\@gobble}
-\renewcommand{\@m@mchapter}[1][]{%
- \def\ch@pt@c{#1}% capture first optional arg
- \@ifnextchar[{\@chapter}{\@chapter[]}%
-}
-\def\@chapter[#1]#2{%
-% if |\ch@pt@c| is empty, no [ was found at all. Use |#2| as
-% entry for all fields.
- \ifx\ch@pt@c\@empty
- \def\f@rtoc{#2}%
- \def\f@rhdr{#2}%
- \else
-% otherwise at least one [ was found. If |#1| is empty then only
-% one was found.
- \let\f@rtoc\ch@pt@c
- \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
- \let\f@rhdr\ch@pt@c
- \else
- \def\f@rhdr{#1}%
- \fi
- \fi
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne\relax
- \if@mainmatter
- \refstepcounter{chapter}%
- \fi
- \fi
- \chaptermark{\f@rhdr}%
- \ifartopt
- \@makechapterhead{#2}%
- \@afterheading
- \else
- \insertchapterspace
- \if@twocolumn
- \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
- \else
- \@makechapterhead{#2}%
- \fi
- \@afterheading
- \fi
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne\relax
- \if@mainmatter
- \ifanappendix
- \addcontentsline{toc}{appendix}{%
- \protect\chapternumberline{\thechapter}\f@rtoc}%
- \else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{%
- \protect\chapternumberline{\thechapter}\f@rtoc}%
- \fi
- \else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\f@rtoc}%
- \fi
- \else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\f@rtoc}%
- \fi
- \ifheadnameref\M@gettitle{\f@rhdr}\else\M@gettitle{\f@rtoc}\fi
-}
-%</mtcpatchmem>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \chapter{Language definition (\usuffix{.mld}) and object (\usuffix{.mlo}) files}\label{c+code+mld.files}%
-% \isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}
-% \or\relax
-% \chapter{Fichiers de définition (\usuffix{.mld}) et objets (\usuffix{.mlo}) de langue}\label{c+code+mld.files}%
-% \isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}
-% \fi
-% \minitoc
-% \mtcskip
-% \lneed{7}
-% ^^A MINILOF BLOCK WAS HERE
-% \mtcsetfeature{minilof}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns}
-% \mtcsetfeature{minilof}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
-% \mtcindent=0pt
-% \minilof
-% \mtcsetfeature{minilof}{open}{\empty}
-% \mtcsetfeature{minilof}{close}{\empty}
-% \setcounter{columnbadness}{9000}%
-% \raggedcolumns
-% \mtcskip
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{lang-g.png}\ixgrf{lang-g.png}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Language families in the world]{Language families in the world (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Language_family}; see also \url{http://www.dicts.info/img/speakers.png})\hfill\null}\label{f+lang-fam}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Familles de langues dans le monde]{Familles de langues dans le monde (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Language_family}; voir aussi \url{http://www.dicts.info/img/speakers.png})\hfill\null}\label{f+lang-fam}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[th]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{mondep.png}\ixgrf{mondep.png}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[The political world]{The political world (\url{http://www.populationdata.net/cartes/monde/monde-politique-moyen.php})\hfill\null}\label{f+polw}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Le monde politique]{Le monde politique (\url{http://www.populationdata.net/cartes/monde/monde-politique-moyen.php})\hfill\null}\label{f+polw}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1}@{}}
-% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{wrs-c.png}\ixgrf{wrs-c.png}\\{}%
-% \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\small\RaggedRight
-% \itemsep=0pt
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{wdesc}{Alphabets:X}\itemsep=0pt
-% \item[Alphabets:] latin (grey), cyrillic (blue-green), greek (blue), georgian (dark blue), armenian (darker blue);
-% \item[Abjads\,\protect\footnote{An \index{abjad}abjad is a segmental script containing symbols for consonants only,
-% or where vowels are optionally written with diacritics (``pointing'') or only written word-initially.}:]
-% arabic (green), arabic and latin (light green), hebrew and arabic (lighter green);
-% \item[Abugidas\,\protect\footnote{An \index{abugida}abugida, or \emph{alphasyllabary}, is a segmental script in which vowels are denoted
-% by diacritical marks or other systematic modification of the consonants.}:] north indic (light orange),
-% south indic (orange), ethiopic (maroon), thaana or t\=ana (Dhivehi language in Maldives) (olive), canadian syllabic (yellow);
-% \item[Logographic\,\protect\footnote{In logographic\index{logographic} systems, glyphs represent words or morphemes (meaningfull
-% components of words, as in \emph{mean-ing-ful}, rather than phonetic elements).}$+$syllabic:] pure logographic (red),
-% mixed logographic and \index{syllabary}syllabaries\,\footnote{In syllabaries, graphemes represent syllables.} (dark red),
-% featural-alphabetic: hangûl (dark mauve)$+$limited logographic:
-% hanja (light mauve);
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{wdesc}{Alphabets:X}\itemsep=0pt
-% \item[Alphabets:] latin (gris), cyrillique (bleu-vert), grec (bleu), géorgien (bleu foncé), arménien (bleu plus foncé);
-% \item[Abjads\,\protect\footnote{Un \index{abjad}abjad est une écriture segmentale contenant des symboles uniquement pour les consonnes,
-% ou dans laquelle les voyelles sont (sur option) écrites avec des diacritiques (\og pointantes\fg) ou seulement
-% écrites en début de mot.}:] arabe (vert), arabe et latin (vert clair), hébreu et arabe (vert très clair);
-% \item[Abugidas\,\protect\footnote{Un \index{abugida}abugida, ou \emph{alphasyllabaire}, est une écriture segmentale dans
-% laquelle les voyelles sont indiquées par des marques diacritiques ou une autre modification systématique des
-% consonnes.}:] indien du nord (orange clair), indien du sud (orange), éthiopien (marron), thaana ou t\=ana
-% (langue Dhivehi aux Maldives)(olive),
-% syllabique canadien (jaune);
-% \item[Logographique\,\protect\footnote{Dans les systèmes \index{logographique}logographiques, les glyphes représentent des mots ou
-% des morphèmes (composants de mots ayant un sens propre, comme dans \emph{mean-ing-ful}, plutôt que des
-% éléments phonétiques).}$+$syllabique:] logographique pur (rouge), mélange logographique et \index{syllabaire}syllabaires\,\footnote{Dans
-% les syllabaires, les graphèmes représentent des syllabes.}(rouge foncé),
-% alphabétique modifié: hangûl (mauve foncé)$+$logographique limité: hanja (mauve clair);
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \fi
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Writing systems by country]{Writing systems by country (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_alphabets})\hfill\null}\label{f+wrs-c}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Écritures~--~par~pays]{Écritures~--~par~pays (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_alphabets})\hfill\null}\label{f+wrs-c}
-% \fi
-% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}
-% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{wrs-a.png}\ixgrf{wrs-a.png}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Areas of writing systems]{Areas of writing systems (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_alphabets})\hfill\null}\label{f+wrs-a}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Écritures~--~par~régions]{Écritures~--~par~régions (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_alphabets})\hfill\null}\label{f+wrs-a}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{africa-lf.png}\ixgrf{africa-lf.png}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{africa-lo.pdf}\ixgrf{africa-lo.pdf}%
-% ^^A \IVC{\bwidth}{africa-lo.pdf}\ixgrf{africa-lo.pdf}% bad alignment
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Language families and official languages in Africa]{Language families and official languages in Africa
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_Africa})\hfill\null}\label{f+africa}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Familles de langues et langues officielles en Afrique]{Familles de langues et langues officielles en Afrique
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_Africa})\hfill\null}\label{f+africa}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{euro-lan.png}\ixgrf{euro-lan.png}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Languages in Europe]{Languages in Europe (by \name{Andrei}{Nacu}, \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_the_European_Union})\hfill\null}\label{f+euro-lan}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Les langues en Europe]{Les langues en Europe (par \name{Andrei}{Nacu}, \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_the_European_Union})\hfill\null}\label{f+euro-lan}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{euro-lan1.png}\ixgrf{euro-lan1.png}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Languages families in Europe]{Languages families in Europe (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_languages_in_Europe})\hfill\null}\label{f+euro-lan1}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Familles de langues en Europe]{Familles de langues en Europe (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_languages_in_Europe})\hfill\null}\label{f+euro-lan1}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!th]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{euro-lan2.png}\ixgrf{euro-lan2.png}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Languages in Europe]{Languages in Europe
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_languages_in_Europe})\hfill\null}\label{f+euro-lan2}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Langues en Europe]{Langues en Europe
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_languages_in_Europe})\hfill\null}\label{f+euro-lan2}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[htb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{leur.png}\ixgrf{leur.png}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Simplified Linguistic Map of Europe]{Simplified Linguistic Map of Europe
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_Europe})\hfill\null}\label{f+leur}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Carte linguistique simplifiée de l'Europe]{Carte linguistique simplifiée de l'Europe
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_Europe})\hfill\null}\label{f+leur}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{Overview}
-% This chapter shows the code of each \suffix{.mld} file. A \suffix{.mld} file is a \emph{minitoc language
-% definition} file, which defines the titles of the mini-tables for a given language. It contains often some
-% comments about its origin, if you need further details.
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% For some languages, I~have added a map (and a flag) of the country or area where the language is spoken, if it is not
-% trivial. The origin of each map is given by an URL to the graphic file or to the WEB page where I~found it.
-% Note that the~\cite{tlfq} and~\cite{LMP} Web sites are useful sources. Maps from~\cite{LMP} are under the
-% Creative Commons License, see~\url{http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/1.0/deed.en_GB}.
-% The site \url{http://www.expatries.senat.fr/pays.html} allows to look at the maps of many countries (but not of France!).
-% The Perry-Castañeda Library Map Collection~\cite{texasmaps} (The University of Texas at Austin,
-% \url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps}) contains countless maps.
-%
-% \reversemarginpar
-% Many\ixgrf{wiki.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill\raisebox{2cm}[4.5cm][-2cm]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=2.5cm]{wiki.png}}}}
-% free maps were also found by a search in the vast Wikipedia
-% (i.e. \url{http://en.wikipedia.org}, \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org},
-% \url{http://de.wikipedia.org}, \url{http://simple.wikipedia.org}, etc.).
-% If you are curious and brave, you can also find many
-% maps and documents about Eastern Europa and about Asia at \url{http://www.hunmagyar.org}; that site give many
-% historical informations.
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \normalmarginpar
-% A \suffix{.mld} file is loaded either via a
-% package option in the \com{usepackage} command
-% for the \upack{minitoc} package (or a global option for the document), either via the command:
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Généralités}
-% Ce chapitre montre le code de chaque fichier \suffix{.mld}. Un fichier \suffix{.mld} est un fichier
-% de définition de langue pour minitoc (\emph{minitoc language definition file}), qui définit les titres des
-% mini-tables pour une langue donnée. Il contient souvent quelques informations sur son origine, si vous avez
-% besoin de plus de détails.
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% Pour certaines langues, j'ai ajouté une carte (et un drapeau) du pays ou des zones où la langue est parlée, si ce n'est pas trivial.
-% L'origine de chaque carte est donnée par un URL vers le fichier graphique ou vers la page où je l'ai trouvée.
-% Notez que les sites Web~\cite{tlfq} et~\cite{LMP} sont des sources utiles. Les cartes de~\cite{LMP} sont sous la
-% \emph{Creative Commons License}, voir~\url{http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/1.0/deed.fr}.
-%
-% Le site \url{http://www.expatries.senat.fr/pays.html} permet de regarder les cartes de nombreux
-% pays (mais pas de la France!). La \emph{Perry-Castañeda Library Map Collection}~\cite{texasmaps} (Université du Texas
-% à~Austin, \url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps}) contient d'innombrables cartes.
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% De\ixgrf{wikif.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill\raisebox{2.87cm}[2.87cm][0.cm]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=2.5cm]{wikif.png}}}}
-% nombreuses cartes publiques proviennent aussi de la Wikipédia ({\froff\url{http://en.wikipedia.org}, \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org},
-% \url{http://de.wikipedia.org}, \url{http://simple.wikipedia.org}, etc.}).
-% Si vous êtes curieux et courageux, vous pourrez aussi trouver de nombreux documents et cartes concernant l'Europe de
-% l'Est et l'Asie sur le site \url{http://www.hunmagyar.org}; il donne de nombreuses informations historiques.
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \normalmarginpar
-% Un fichier \suffix{.mld} est chargé soit via une option du paquetage
-% dans la commande \com{usepackage} pour le paquetage \upack{minitoc}
-% (ou une option globale pour le document),
-% soit via la commande:
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \begin{verse}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\marg{language}
-% \or\relax
-% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\marg{langue}
-% \fi
-% \end{verse}
-% \end{macro}
-% \lneed{10}
-% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\plftitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\plttitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\stctitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\slftitle}
-% \begin{macro}{\slttitle}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Each \suffix{.mld} file must define the nine following commands (for the mini-tables of contents,
-% mini-lists of figures and mini-lists of tables, at the part, chapter and section levels):
-% \or\relax
-% Chaque fichier \suffix{.mld} doit définir les neuf commandes suivantes (pour les mini-tables des
-% matières, les mini-listes des figures et les mini-listes des tableaux, aux niveaux partie, chapitre et section):
-% \fi
-% \begin{multicols}{3}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \com{ptctitle}
-% \item \com{plftitle}
-% \item \com{plttitle}\columnbreak
-% \item \com{mtctitle}
-% \item \com{mlftitle}
-% \item \com{mlttitle}\columnbreak
-% \item \com{stctitle}
-% \item \com{slftitle}
-% \item \com{slttitle}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{multicols}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Many \suffix{.mld} files require special fonts adequate for the corresponding language; as this is a
-% language-dependent issue, the user must set up the correct language and font context for each language, like using
-% the \pack{babel} package~\cite{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,babel-user,BEP}, the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}, the
-% \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} system~\cite[in~korean]{HLATEX}, the \pack{Antomega}
-% system~\cite{antomega}, the \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}~\cite{bangtex},
-% \ipacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}\devnag{} for \TeX~\cite{devanagari},
-% \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}, \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi}{\protect\FARSINOTE}, \pack{guarani}~\cite{guarani},
-% \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} et \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o}, \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex},
-% or \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex} packages.
-% Note that it is often the \virage\emph{english} name of the language which is used to name the corresponding
-% \suffix{.mld} file.
-% \or\relax
-% De nombreux fichiers \suffix{.mld} ont besoin de fontes spéciales adéquates pour la langue
-% correspondante; comme ceci est une question concernant la langue, l'utilisateur doit mettre en place un contexte
-% linguistique et typographique correct pour la langue correspondante, en utilisant par exemple le paquetage
-% \pack{babel}~\cite{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,babel-user,BEP}, le système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}, le système
-% \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX}~\cite[en~coréen]{HLATEX}, le système \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega},
-% les paquetages \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}~\cite{bangtex},
-% \ipacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}\devnag{} for \TeX~\cite{devanagari},
-% \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop},
-% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi}\,{\protect\FARSINOTE}, \pack{guarani}~\cite{guarani}, \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam}
-% et \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o},
-% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} ou \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex}.
-% Notez que c'est souvent le nom en \virage\emph{anglais} de la langue qui est utilisé pour nommer le fichier \suffix{.mld}
-% correspondant.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{environment}{filecontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% But for some oriental languages\,\footnote{Mainly for chinese, farsi (iranian), hangûl (korean), hanja (korean), japanese,
-% \lopt{malayalam-omega}, thai, and russian variants.}, the source of the titles
-% use some \virage\emph{exotic encodings}, difficult to manipulate
-% in a \suffix{.dtx} file, the \suffix{.mld} file is then just a wrapper loading
-% a \suffix{.mlo} file\,\footnote{The extension
-% \suffix{.mlo} means \emph{minitoc language object}.}, not generated by the
-% \suffix{.dtx} files in the current version of \upack{minitoc} package.
-% To go around this limitation, the \xfile{minitoc.ins} file uses
-% \env{filecontents} environments to generate the \suffix{.mlo} files.
-% The adequate input encoding must be set up
-% by the user \emph{before}\virage{} loading the \suffix{.mld} file via the \com{mtcselectlanguage} command.
-% \or\relax
-% Mais pour certaines langues orientales\,\footnote{Principalement pour les variantes du chinois, du farsi
-% (iranien), du coréen (hangûl et hanja), du japonais, du \lopt{malayalam-omega}, du thaï et du russe.}, le code source des
-% titres utilise quelques \virage\emph{codages exotiques},
-% difficiles à~manipuler dans un fichier \suffix{.dtx}, le fichier \suffix{.mld} est alors une simple enveloppe qui charge
-% un fichier \suffix{.mlo}\,\footnote{Le suffixe \suffix{.mlo} signifie \emph{minitoc language object},
-% objet minitoc de langue.}, qui n'est pas engendré par les fichiers \suffix{.dtx} dans la version actuelle du
-% paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
-% Pour contourner cette limitation, le fichier \xfile{minitoc.ins} utilise simplement des
-% environnements \env{filecontents} pour engendrer les fichiers \suffix{.mlo}.
-% Le codage d'entrée adéquat doit être mis en place par l'utilisateur \emph{avant}\virage{} le
-% chargement du fichier \suffix{.mld} via la commande \com{mtcselectlanguage}.
-% \fi
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \lneed{4}
-% {\bfseries
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Since\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}\\\lmess{E0036}\\\lmess{E0038}\\\lmess{W0094}} version~\#49,
-% the \upack{minitoc} package checks the presence of the
-% \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} file
-% (and of the \emph{language}\suffix{.mlo} file if necessary) for each language option of the package,
-% before validating the option. If a \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} file is missing, the corresponding language option
-% is not enabled and a warning message is written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. But the presence of
-% the \xfile{english.mld} file is mandatory, because english is the default language.
-% If some \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} files are missing,
-% the list of this files is given in the \suffix{.log} file. You should find these files on CTAN.
-% \or\relax
-% À~partir\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}\\\lmess{E0036}\\\lmess{E0038}\\\lmess{W0094}} de la version~\#49,
-% le paquetage \upack{minitoc} vérifie la présence du fichier
-% \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} (et du fichier \emph{langue}\suffix{.mlo} si nécessaire) pour
-% chaque option de langue du paquetage, avant de valider l'option. Si un fichier \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo}
-% est manquant, l'option de langue correspondante n'est pas validée et un message d'avertissement est écrit dans
-% le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. Mais la présence du fichier \xfile{english.mld} est obligatoire, car
-% l'anglais est la langue par défaut.
-% Si certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} sont manquants,
-% la liste de ces fichiers est écrite dans le fichier \suffix{.log}. Vous devriez pouvoir les trouver sur CTAN.
-% \fi
-% \par} ^^A %BF>
-% ^^A \clearpage ^^A %% BEGIN OF LANGUAGE SECTIONS
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Acadian'' language: \uxfile{acadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadian}\ixfile{acadian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~acadian~>>: \uxfile{acadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadian}\ixfile{acadian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!thb]
-% \centering
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{acadian-m.pdf}\ixgrf{acadian-m.pdf}%
-% \caption[Acadia today]{Acadia today (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Acadia})}\label{f+acadien}
-% \or\relax
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{acadien-m.pdf}\ixgrf{acadien-m.pdf}%
-% \caption[Acadie actuelle]{Acadie actuelle (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Acadie})}\label{f+acadien}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\ixgrfl{acadie-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Acadia}%
-% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{acadie-f.png}}}}}
-% \lopt{acadian} language\,\FAC{}
-% is just french, so we load the \xfile{french.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
-% \or\relax
-% La\ixgrfl{acadie-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Acadie}%
-% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{acadie-f.png}}}}}
-% langue \lopt{acadian} (acadien)\,\FAC{} est simplement du français,
-% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{french.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*acadian>
-\ProvidesFile{acadian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{french}%
-%</acadian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Acadien'' language: \uxfile{acadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadien}\ixfile{acadien.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~acadien~>>: \uxfile{acadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadien}\ixfile{acadien.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\ixgrfl{acadie-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Acadia}%
-% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{acadie-f.png}}}}}
-% ``\lopt{acadien}'' language\,\FAC{}
-% is just french (``\texttt{acadien}'' is the french term for ``\texttt{acadian}''), so we load the \xfile{french.mld}
-% file (see section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
-% \or\relax
-% La\ixgrfl{acadie-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Acadie}%
-% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{acadie-f.png}}}}}
-% <<~\lopt{acadien}~>>\,\FAC{}
-% est simplement du français (<<~\texttt{acadien}~>> est le terme français pour <<~\texttt{acadian}~>>, en anglais),
-% donc nous chargons le fichier \xfile{french.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*acadien>
-\ProvidesFile{acadien.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{french}%
-%</acadien>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Afrikaan'' language: \uxfile{afrikaan.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaan}\ixfile{afrikaan.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~afrikaan~>>: \uxfile{afrikaan.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaan}\ixfile{afrikaan.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.382958802\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.617041199\iwidth}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{afrsud-l.pdf}\ixgrf{afrsud-l.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{afrsud-p.pdf}\ixgrf{afrsud-p.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Afrikaans language areas]{Afrikaans language areas (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/afriquesud.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+afrsud}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions de la langue afrikaans]{Régions de la langue afrikaans (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/afriquesud.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+afrsud}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{33.33333333mm}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% The titles\ixgrfl{south-africa-f.png}\ixgrfl{namibia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/South_Africa}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{south-africa-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Namibia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{namibia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{afrikaan}'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in South Africa and Namibia, it has dutch origins; compare with
-% section~\vref{s+mld+dutch}.
-% See also \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/afrikaans.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}. See figure~\vref{f+afrsud}.}
-% come from the \xfile{dutch.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} and \name{Stoffel}{Lombard})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,dutch}:
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \lneed{5}
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{south-africa-f.png}\ixgrfl{namibia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Afrique_du_Sud}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{south-africa-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Namibie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{namibia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{afrikaan}~>>\,\footnote{Parlée en Afrique du Sud et en Namibie, elle a des origines
-% néerlandaises; comparez avec la section~\vref{s+mld+dutch}.
-% Voir aussi \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/afrikaans.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq}. Voir la
-% figure~\vref{f+afrsud}.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{dutch.dtx}
-% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} et \name{Stoffel}{Lombard})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,dutch}:
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*afrikaan>
-\ProvidesFile{afrikaan.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Afrikaan(s) titles from dutch.dtx (babel) by Braams, Johannes~L.
-\def\ptctitle{Inhoudsopgawe}%
-\def\plftitle{Lys van figure}%
-\def\plttitle{Lys van tabelle}%
-\def\mtctitle{Inhoudsopgawe}%
-\def\mlftitle{Lys van figure}%
-\def\mlttitle{Lys van tabelle}%
-\def\stctitle{Inhoudsopgawe}%
-\def\slftitle{Lys van figure}%
-\def\slttitle{Lys van tabelle}%
-%</afrikaan>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Afrikaans'' language: \uxfile{afrikaans.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaans}\ixfile{afrikaans.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~afrikaans~>>: \uxfile{afrikaans.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaans}\ixfile{afrikaans.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The term ``\lopt{afrikaans}'' is a synonym of ``\lopt{afrikaan}'', so we just load \xfile{afrikaan.mld}
-% (see section~\vref{s+mld+afrikaan}):
-% \or\relax
-% Le terme <<~\lopt{afrikaans}~>> est un synonyme de <<~\lopt{afrikaan}~>>,
-% donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{afrikaan.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+afrikaan}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*afrikaans>
-\ProvidesFile{afrikaans.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{afrikaan}%
-%</afrikaans>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{17.25352113mm}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Albanian'' language: \uxfile{albanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+albanian}\ixfile{albanian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~albanian~>>: \uxfile{albanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+albanian}\ixfile{albanian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\ixgrfl{albania-f.png}\ixgrfl{macedonia-f.png}\ixgrfl{montenegro-f.jpg}\ixgrfl{serbia-f2.png}\ixgrfl{kosovo-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Albania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{albania-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Macedonia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{macedonia-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Montenegro}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{montenegro-f.jpg}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serbia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{serbia-f2.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kosovo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kosovo-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% albanian language (\emph{shqip}) is spoken in Albania and some regions of Macedonia, Montenegro, Serbia and Kosovo;
-% see figures~\vrefrange{f+albania}{f+alb2}.
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{albanian}'' language are taken from the \xfile{albanian.dtx} file
-% (with a contribution of \name{Adi}{Zaimi}) in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,albanian}:
-% \or\relax
-% La\ixgrfl{albania-f.png}\ixgrfl{macedonia-f.png}\ixgrfl{montenegro-f.jpg}\ixgrfl{serbia-f2.png}\ixgrfl{kosovo-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Albanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{albania-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Macédonie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{macedonia-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Monténégro}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{montenegro-f.jpg}}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serbie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{serbia-f2.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kosovo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kosovo-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% langue albanaise (\emph{shqip}) est parlée en Albanie et quelques régions de Macédoine, du Montenegro,
-% de Serbie et du Kosovo; voir les figures~\vrefrange{f+albania}{f+alb2}.
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{albanian}~>> (albanais) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{albanian.dtx}
-% (avec une contribution de \name{Adi}{Zaimi})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,albanian}:
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.468652038\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.531347962\iwidth}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{albania.pdf}\ixgrf{albania.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{alba-eth.pdf}\ixgrf{alba-eth.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Albanian language areas]{Albanian language areas
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/carte_albanophone.htm}
-% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/albaniecarte.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+albania}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions de la langue albanaise]{Régions de la langue albanaise
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/carte_albanophone.htm}
-% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/albaniecarte.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+albania}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{kos-alb.png}\ixgrf{kos-alb.png}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{kos-ml.png}\ixgrf{kos-ml.png}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Language areas in Kosovo]{Language areas in Kosovo
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/Kosovo.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+kosovo}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Les langues au Kosovo]{Les langues au Kosovo
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/Kosovo.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+kosovo}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{alb2.png}\ixgrf{alb2.png}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Albanian dialects]{Albanian dialects (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Albanian_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+alb2}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Dialectes albanais]{Dialectes albanais (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Albanian_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+alb2}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*albanian>
-\ProvidesFile{albanian.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Albanian titles from albabian.dtx (babel).
-%% Adi Zaimi (zami1st at yahoo.com / adizaimi at yahoo.com).
-\def\ptctitle{P\"ermbajta}%
-\def\plftitle{Figurat}%
-\def\plttitle{Tabelat}%
-\def\mtctitle{P\"ermbajta}%
-\def\mlftitle{Figurat}%
-\def\mltitle{Tabelat}%
-\def\stctitle{P\"ermbajta}%
-\def\slftitle{Figurat}%
-\def\slttitle{Tabelat}%
-%</albanian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{13.15625mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``American'' language: \uxfile{american.mld}}\label{s+mld+american}\ixfile{american.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~american~>>: \uxfile{american.mld}}\label{s+mld+american}\ixfile{american.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\ixgrfl{usa-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_English}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{usa-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% ``\lopt{american}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}''
-% (the languages themselves have some differences,
-% like the hyphenation rules, some spellings and phonetics),
-% so we just load \xfile{english.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
-% \or\relax
-% La\ixgrfl{usa-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_English}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{usa-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% langue <<~\lopt{american}~>> (américain) est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>
-% (les langues elles-mêmes ont quelques différences,
-% par exemple les règles de coupure des mots, l'orthographe et la prononciation),
-% donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{english.mld} (voir
-% la section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*american>
-\ProvidesFile{american.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{english}%
-%</american>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Arab'' language: \uxfile{arab.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab}\ixfile{arab.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~arab~>>: \uxfile{arab.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab}\ixfile{arab.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=.5\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{arabw.png}\ixgrf{arabw.png}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Countries where the arabic language is official]{Countries where the arabic language is official
-% (green: sole official language, blue: one of several official languages)
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arabic_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+arabic}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Pays où la langue arabe est officielle]{Pays où la langue arabe est officielle
-% (vert: seule langue officielle, bleu: une langue officielle parmi d'autres)
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arabic_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+arabic}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \vspace*{1\baselineskip}
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!tpb]
-% ^^A \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{islam-pbc.png}\ixgrf{islam-pbc.png}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Percentage of muslims by country]{Percentage of muslims by country
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Muslim_world})\hfill\null}\label{f+islam-pbc}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Pourcentage de musulmans par pays]{Pourcentage de musulmans par pays
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Muslim_world})\hfill\null}\label{f+islam-pbc}
-% \fi
-% \vspace*{1\baselineskip}
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{islam-sw.pdf}\ixgrf{islam-sw.pdf}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[The status of Islam by country]{The status of Islam by country
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Muslim_world})\hfill\null}\label{f+islam-sw}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Statut de l'Islam par pays]{Statut de l'Islam par pays
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Muslim_world})\hfill\null}\label{f+islam-sw}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% ^^A (ARAB
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% ^^A Asia
-% \ixgrfl{bahrain-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{iraq-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{israel-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{jordan-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{kuwait-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{lebanon-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{libya-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{oman-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{palestine-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{qatar-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{saudi-arabia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{sudan-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{syria-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{uae-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{yemen-f.png}%
-% ^^A Africa
-% \ixgrfl{algeria-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{chad-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{comoros-f.png}%
-% \ixgrf{djibouti-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{eritrea-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{egypt-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{mauritania-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{morocco-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{nigeria-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{somalia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{tanzania-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{tunisia-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bahrain}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bahrain-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Iraq}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{iraq-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Israel}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{israel-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Jordan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{jordan-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Bahrain}&\textbf{Iraq}&\textbf{Israel}&\textbf{Jordan}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kuwait}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kuwait-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lebanon}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lebanon-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lybia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{libya-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oman}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{oman-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Kuwait}&\textbf{Lebanon}&\textbf{Lybia}&\textbf{Oman}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Palestinian_National_Authority}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{palestine-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Qatar}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{qatar-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Saudi_Arabia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{saudi-arabia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sudan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{sudan-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Palestine}&\textbf{Qatar}&\textbf{Saudi~Arabia}&\textbf{Sudan}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Syria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{syria-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_Arab_Emirates}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uae-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Yemen}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{yemen-f.png}}}&\\%
-% \textbf{Syria}&\textbf{United~Arab~Emirates}&\textbf{Yemen}&\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Algeria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{algeria-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chad}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{chad-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comoros}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{comoros-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Djibouti}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{djibouti-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Algeria}&\textbf{Chad}&\textbf{Comoros}&\textbf{Djibouti}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Eritrea}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{eritrea-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Egypt}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{egypt-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mauritania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mauritania-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Morocco}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{morocco-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Eritrea}&\textbf{Egypt}&\textbf{Mauritania}&\textbf{Morocco}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nigeria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{nigeria-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Somalia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{somalia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tanzania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tanzania-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tunisia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tunisia-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Nigeria}&\textbf{Somalia}&\textbf{Tanzania}&\textbf{Tunisia}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Arabophone countries in Asia and Africa]{Arabophone countries in Asia and Africa
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arab} and~\cite[page~664]{comrie1990})\hfill\null}\label{f+arabo-sp-c}
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% ^^A Asia
-% \ixgrfl{bahrain-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{iraq-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{israel-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{jordan-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{kuwait-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{lebanon-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{libya-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{oman-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{palestine-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{qatar-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{saudi-arabia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{sudan-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{syria-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{uae-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{yemen-f.png}%
-% ^^A Africa
-% \ixgrfl{algeria-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{chad-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{comoros-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{djibouti-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{eritrea-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{egypt-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{mauritania-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{morocco-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{nigeria-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{somalia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{tanzania-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{tunisia-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bahrain}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bahrain-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Irak}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{iraq-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Israël}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{israel-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Jordanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{jordan-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Bahrain}&\textbf{Irak}&\textbf{Israël}&\textbf{Jordanie}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Koweït}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kuwait-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Liban}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lebanon-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Libye}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{libya-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oman}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{oman-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Koweït}&\textbf{Liban}&\textbf{Libye}&\textbf{Oman}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Palestine_(État_revendiqué)}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{palestine-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Qatar}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{qatar-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arabie_saoudite}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{saudi-arabia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Soudan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{sudan-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Palestine}&\textbf{Qatar}&\textbf{Arabie~saoudite}&\textbf{Soudan}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Syrie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{syria-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Émirats_arabes_unis}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uae-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Yémen}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{yemen-f.png}}}&\\%
-% \textbf{Syrie}&\textbf{Émirats~arabes~unis}&\textbf{Yémen}&\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Algérie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{algeria-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tchad}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{chad-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comores}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{comoros-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Djibouti}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{djibouti-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Algérie}&\textbf{Tchad}&\textbf{Comores}&\textbf{Djibouti}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Érythrée}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{eritrea-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Égypte}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{egypt-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mauritanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mauritania-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Maroc}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{morocco-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Érythrée}&\textbf{Égypte}&\textbf{Mauritanie}&\textbf{Maroc}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nigéria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{nigeria-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Somalie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{somalia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tanzanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tanzania-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tunisie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tunisia-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Nigéria}&\textbf{Somalie}&\textbf{Tanzanie}&\textbf{Tunisie}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Pays arabophones en Asie et Afrique]{Pays arabophones en Asie et Afrique
-% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Liste_des_pays_de_langue_arabe} et~\cite[page~664]{comrie1990})\hfill\null}\label{f+arabo-sp-c}
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \fi
-% ^^A ARAB)
-% \par\reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrf{arab-l.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{16mm}[28.15mm][-16mm]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arabic_language}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=2.5cm]{arab-l.jpg}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{arab}'' language (\textsf{al-'Arabiyyah}) are taken
-% from the \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX} package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}
-% (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), which should be used, with the associated fonts.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrf{arab-l.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{16mm}[28.15mm][-16mm]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arabic_language}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=2.5cm]{arab-l.jpg}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{arab}~>> (arabe) (\textsf{al-'Arabiyyah}) sont tirés
-% du paquetage \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}
-% (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), qui devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes associées.
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The arabic language is spoken in:
-% Algeria, Bahrain, Egypt, Iraq, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon, Libya, Mauritania, Morocco, Oman, Palestinian territories,
-% Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Sudan, Syria, Tunisia, United Arab Emirates, Western Sahara, Yemen by a majority; it is also
-% the liturgical language of Islam (see figures~\vrefrange{f+islam-pbc}{f+islam-sw}).
-% \or\relax
-% La langue arabe est parlée dans les pays suivants:
-% Algérie, Bahrain, Égypte, Irak, Jordanie, Koweït, Liban, Libye, Mauritanie, Maroc, Oman, Territoires Palestiniens,
-% Qatar, Arabie Saoudite, Soudan, Syrie, Tunisie, Émirats Arabes Unis, Sahara Occidental, Yémen par une
-% majorité de la population; c'est aussi la langue liturgique de l'Islam
-% (voir les figures~\vrefrange{f+islam-pbc}{f+islam-sw}).\looseness=-1
-% \fi
-% \par\normalmarginpar
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*arab>
-\ProvidesFile{arab.mld}[1999/03/16]%
-%% Arabic titles. Needs arabic fonts (cf. documentation of arabtex)
-\def\ptctitle{al-mu.htawayAtu}%
-\def\plftitle{qA'imaTu a.s-.suwari}%
-\def\plttitle{qA'imaTu al-^gadAwili}%
-\def\mtctitle{al-mu.htawayAtu}%
-\def\mlftitle{qA'imaTu a.s-.suwari}%
-\def\mlttitle{qA'imaTu al-^gadAwili}%
-\def\stctitle{al-mu.htawayAtu}%
-\def\slftitle{qA'imaTu a.s-.suwari}%
-\def\slttitle{qA'imaTu al-^gadAwili}%
-%</arab>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Arab2'' language: \uxfile{arab2.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab2}\ixfile{arab2.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~arab2~>>: \uxfile{arab2.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab2}\ixfile{arab2.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcArabTok}
-% \begin{macro}{\tcArabTok}
-% \begin{macro}{\a@tok}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{arab2}'' language are taken from the \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX} package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}
-% (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), which should be used, with the associated fonts.
-% It is a variant of the ``\lopt{arab}'' language.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{arab2}~>> (arabe, variante) sont tirés du
-% paquetage \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}),
-% qui devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes associées.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*arab2>
-\ProvidesFile{arab2.mld}[2006/03/31]%
-%% Arabic titles. Variant. Needs arabic fonts (cf. documentation of arabtex)
-{\makeatletter\global\let\mtcArabTok\a@tok}%
-\def\ptctitle{\mtcArabTok(al-muHtawayAtu)}%
-\def\plftitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu aS-Suwari)}%
-\def\plttitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu al-GadAwili)}%
-\def\mtctitle{\mtcArabTok(al-muHtawayAtu)}%
-\def\mlftitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu aS-Suwari)}%
-\def\mlttitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu al-GadAwili)}%
-\def\stctitle{\mtcArabTok(al-muHtawayAtu)}%
-\def\slftitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu aS-Suwari)}%
-\def\slttitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu al-GadAwili)}%
-%</arab2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Arabi'' language: \uxfile{arabi.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabi}\ixfile{arabi.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~arabi~>>: \uxfile{arabi.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabi}\ixfile{arabi.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\R}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{arabi}'' language are taken from the \packa{\Arabi}{arabi} package~\cite{arabi}
-% (by \name{Youssef}{Jabri}),
-% which should be used, with the associated fonts.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{arabi}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}
-% (par \name{Youssef}{Jabri}), qui devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes associées.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*arabi>
-\ProvidesFile{arabi.mld}[2006/07/27]%
-%% Arabic titles (strings taken from arabi.ldf; to be used with arabi)
-%% Needs arabic fonts (cf. documentation of the Arabi package, by Youssef Jabri)
-\def\ptctitle{\R{\alef\lam\fa\ha\ra\seen}}%
-\def\plftitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\alefhamza\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}%
-\def\plttitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}%
-\def\mtctitle{\R{\alef\lam\fa\ha\ra\seen}}%
-\def\mlftitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\alefhamza\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}%
-\def\mlttitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}%
-\def\stctitle{\R{\alef\lam\fa\ha\ra\seen}}%
-\def\slftitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\alefhamza\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}%
-\def\slttitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}%
-%</arabi>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Arabic'' language: \uxfile{arabic.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabic}\ixfile{arabic.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~arabic~>>: \uxfile{arabic.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabic}\ixfile{arabic.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{arabic}'' language is a synomym for ``\lopt{arab}'', so we just load \xfile{arab.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+arab}):
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{arabic}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{arab}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{arab.mld}
-% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+arab}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*arabic>
-\ProvidesFile{arabic.mld}[2005/02/10]\mtcselectlanguage{arab}%
-%</arabic>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Armenian'' language: \uxfile{armenian.mld}}\label{s+mld+armenian}\ixfile{armenian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~armenian~>>: \uxfile{armenian.mld}}\label{s+mld+armenian}\ixfile{armenian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{armeniar.jpg}\ixgrf{armeniar.jpg}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{caucasus.pdf}\ixgrf{caucasus.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Armenia and languages of Caucasus]{Armenia and languages of Caucasus
-% (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/armenia.html}
-% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}~--
-% and
-% \url{http://linguistics.buffalo.edu/people/faculty/dryer/dryer/dryer.htm} by \name{Matthew~S.}{Dryer},
-% link found from \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Caucasian_languages})\hfill\null}\label{f+armenia}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Arménie et langues du Caucase]{Arménie et langues du Caucase
-% (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/armenia.html}
-% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}~--
-% et
-% \url{http://linguistics.buffalo.edu/people/faculty/dryer/dryer/dryer.htm} par \name{Matthew~S.}{Dryer},
-% lien trouvé dans \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Caucasian_languages})\hfill\null}\label{f+armenia}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{armeniad.pdf}\ixgrf{armeniad.pdf}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[The Armenian diaspora]{The Armenian diaspora (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Armenian_diaspora})\hfill\null}\label{f+armeniad}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[La diaspora arménienne]{La diaspora arménienne (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Diaspora_arménienne})\hfill\null}\label{f+armeniad}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{6.213285133mm}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrf{armenian-l.png}\ixgrfl{armenia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Armenian_Language}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{armenian-l.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Armenia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{armenia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{armenian}'' language (\emph{hayeren}) are taken from the \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX} package~\cite{armtex}
-% (by \name{Sergueï}{Dachian}, \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan} and \name{Vartan}{Akopian}), which should be
-% used, with the associated fonts.
-% The armenian language is spoken in Armenia, in a part of Azerbaidjan and in the armenian diaspora;
-% see figures~\vrefrange{f+armenia}{f+armeniad}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrf{armenian-l.png}\ixgrfl{armenia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arménien}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{armenian-l.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arménie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{armenia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{armenian}~>> (arménien, \emph{hayeren}) sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex}
-% (de \name{Sergueï}{Dachian}, \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan} et \name{Vartan}{Akopian}),
-% qui devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes associées.
-% La langue arménienne est parlée en Arménie, dans une partie de l'Azerbaïdjan et dans la diaspora arménienne;
-% voir les figures~\vrefrange{f+armenia}{f+armeniad}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*armenian>
-\ProvidesFile{armenian.mld}[1999/06/28]%
-%% Armenian titles from ArmTeX. Sergueï Dachian (Serguei.Dachian@univ-lemans.fr),
-%% Arnak Dalalyan & Vartan Akopian
-\def\ptctitle{Bovandakuthyun}%
-\def\plftitle{Patkerneri cank}%
-\def\plttitle{Aghyusakneri cank}%
-\def\mtctitle{Bovandakuthyun}%
-\def\mlftitle{Patkerneri cank}%
-\def\mlttitle{Aghyusakneri cank}%
-\def\stctitle{Bovandakuthyun}%
-\def\slftitle{Patkerneri cank}%
-\def\slttitle{Aghyusakneri cank}%
-%</armenian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Australian'' language: \uxfile{australian.mld}}\label{s+mld+australian}\ixfile{australian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~australian~>>: \uxfile{australian.mld}}\label{s+mld+australian}\ixfile{australian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \ixgrfl{australia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Australia}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{australia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% ``\lopt{australian}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'', so we just load \xfile{english.mld}
-% (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
-% \or\relax
-% La\ixgrfl{australia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Australia}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{australia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% langue <<~\lopt{australian}~>> (australien) est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
-% \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{4}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*australian>
-\ProvidesFile{australian.mld}[2006/01/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}%
-%</australian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Austrian'' language: \uxfile{austrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+austrian}\ixfile{austrian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~austrian~>>: \uxfile{austrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+austrian}\ixfile{austrian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% For\ixgrfl{austria-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Austria}%
-% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{austria-f.png}}}}}
-% the mini-table titles, the ``\lopt{austrian}'' language is like the ``\lopt{german}'' language, so we load
-% \xfile{german.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+german}):
-% \or\relax
-% Pour\ixgrfl{austria-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Autriche}%
-% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{austria-f.png}}}}}
-% les titres des mini-tables, la langue <<~\lopt{austrian}~>> (autrichien) est comme la langue <<~\lopt{german}~>>
-% (allemand), donc nous chargeons \xfile{german.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+german}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{4}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*austrian>
-\ProvidesFile{austrian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{german}%
-%</austrian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Bahasa'' language: \uxfile{bahasa.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasa}\ixfile{bahasa.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~bahasa~>>: \uxfile{bahasa.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasa}\ixfile{bahasa.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{bahasa}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasai}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasai.mld}
-% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}):
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{bahasa}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{bahasai}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
-% \xfile{bahasai.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*bahasa>
-\ProvidesFile{bahasa.mld}[2006/01/11]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasai}%
-%</bahasa>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Bahasai'' language: \uxfile{bahasai.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasai}\ixfile{bahasai.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~bahasai~>>: \uxfile{bahasai.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasai}\ixfile{bahasai.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.321112516\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.678887484\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{indonesia1.pdf}\ixgrf{indonesia1.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{indonesia2.pdf}\ixgrf{indonesia2.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Indonesia]{Indonesia (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/indonesie-1_langues.htm} and
-% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/indonesie-3_Pol_ling.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+indonesia}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Indonésie]{Indonésie (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/indonesie-1_langues.htm} et
-% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/indonesie-3_Pol_ling.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+indonesia}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{indonesia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Indonesia}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{indonesia-f.png}}}}}
-% of the mini-tables for the ``\lopt{bahasai}'' language\,\footnote{Bahasa is spoken in Indonesia and Malaysia,
-% with different pronunciations and titles but the same writing. Bahasai is the indonesian variant. See
-% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/indonesie-1_langues.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}.} (bahasa indonesia / bahasa meyalu) are
-% taken from the file \xfile{bahasa.dtx} (by \name{Jörg}{Knappen} and \name{Terry}{Mart})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,bahasa}.
-% Specific fonts are needed. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}. The word ``bahasa'' means ``language'' in bahasa.
-% For other names for this language, see sections~\vref{s+mld+bahasa} and \vrefrange{s+mld+indon}{s+mld+indonesian}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{indonesia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Indonésie}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{indonesia-f.png}}}}}
-% des mini-tables pour la langue <<~\lopt{bahasai}~>>\,\footnote{Le bahasa est parlé en Indonésie et en Malaisie,
-% avec des prononciations et des titres différents mais avec la même écriture. Bahasai est la variante indonésienne.
-% Voir \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/indonesie-1_langues.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq}.}
-% (bahasa indonesia / bahasa meyalu) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{bahasa.dtx} (de \name{Jörg}{Knappen}
-% et \name{Terry}{Mart}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,bahasa}.
-% Des fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}. Le mot «~bahasa~» signifie
-% «~langage~» en bahasa. Pour d'autres noms pour cette langue, voir les sections~\vref{s+mld+bahasa} et
-% \vrefrange{s+mld+indon}{s+mld+indonesian}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*bahasai>
-\ProvidesFile{bahasai.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Bahasa Indonesia titles from bahasa.dtx in the babel package.
-%% Knappen, Jörg & Mart, Terry
-\def\ptctitle{Daftar Isi}%
-\def\plftitle{Daftar Gambar}%
-\def\plttitle{Daftar Tabel}%
-\def\mtctitle{Daftar Isi}%
-\def\mlftitle{Daftar Gambar}%
-\def\mlttitle{Daftar Tabel}%
-\def\stctitle{Daftar Isi}%
-\def\slftitle{Daftar Gambar}%
-\def\slttitle{Daftar Tabel}%
-%</bahasai>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \lneed{18}
-% \section{``Bahasam'' language: \uxfile{bahasam.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasam}\ixfile{bahasam.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \lneed{20}
-% \section{Langue <<~bahasam~>>: \uxfile{bahasam.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasam}\ixfile{bahasam.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.293413174\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.706586826\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!hb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{malaysia1.pdf}\ixgrf{malaysia1.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{malaysia2.pdf}\ixgrf{malaysia2.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Malaysia]{Malaysia (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/malaysia.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+malaysia}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Malaisie]{Malaisie (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/malaysia.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+malaysia}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \lneed{4}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrf{meyalu.png}\ixgrfl{malaysia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Malay_language}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{meyalu.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Malaysia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{malaysia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% of the mini-tables for the ``\lopt{bahasam}'' language (Bahasa Malaysia)\,\footnote{Spoken in Indonesia and Malaysia, with
-% different pronunciations and titles
-% but the same writing. Bahasam is the malaysian variant.} are taken from the file \xfile{bahasam.dtx}
-% (by \name{Jörg}{Knappen}, \name{Terry}{Mart} and \name{Bob}{Margolis})
-% in the
-% \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,bahasam}.
-% Specific fonts are needed. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bahasa}. For other names for this language, see
-% sections~\vref{s+mld+malay} and~\vref{s+mld+meyalu}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrf{meyalu.png}\ixgrfl{malaysia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Malais}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{meyalu.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Malaisie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{malaysia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% des mini-tables pour la langue <<~\lopt{bahasam}~>> (Bahasa Malaysia)\,\footnote{Parlée en Indonésie et en Malaisie, avec des
-% prononciations et des titres différents mais avec la même écriture. Bahasam est la variante malaisienne.} sont
-% tirés du fichier \xfile{bahasam.dtx}
-% (de \name{Jörg}{Knappen}, \name{Terry}{Mart} et \name{Bob}{Margolis})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,bahasam}.
-% Des
-% fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasa}. Pour d'autres noms pour cette
-% langue, voir les sections~\vref{s+mld+malay} et~\vref{s+mld+meyalu}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*bahasam>
-\ProvidesFile{bahasam.mld}[2006/12/19]%
-%% Bahasa Malaysia titles from bahasam.dtx in the babel package
-%% Knappen, Jörg & Mart, Terry & Margolis, Bob
-\def\ptctitle{Kandungan}%
-\def\plftitle{Senarai Gambar}%
-\def\plttitle{Senarai Jadual}%
-\def\mtctitle{Kandungan}%
-\def\mlftitle{Senarai Gambar}%
-\def\mlttitle{Senarai Jadual}%
-\def\stctitle{Kandungan}%
-\def\slftitle{Senarai Gambar}%
-\def\slttitle{Senarai Jadual}%
-%</bahasam>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \lneed{4}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Bangla'' language: \uxfile{bangla.mld}}\label{s+mld+bangla}\ixfile{bangla.mld}
-% \suppressfloats
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~bangla~>>: \uxfile{bangla.mld}}\label{s+mld+bangla}\ixfile{bangla.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}%
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}%
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}%
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}%
-% \begin{figure}[!ht]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{bangla1.png}\ixgrf{bangla1.png}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{bangla2.png}\ixgrf{bangla2.png}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Bangla (bengali) language areas]{Bangla (bengali) language areas
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/Bangladesh.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+bangla}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions de la langue bânglâ (bengalî)]{Régions de la langue bânglâ (bengalî)
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/Bangladesh.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+bangla}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \vspace*{1.\baselineskip}
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!tb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{bengali-m.jpg}\ixgrf{bengali-m.jpg}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[The bengalî diaspora]{The bengalî diaspora
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bengali_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+bengali-m}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[La diaspora bengalî]{La diaspora bengalî
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bengali_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+bengali-m}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0pt}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \noindent\begin{samepage}
-% The titles\ixgrf{bangla.png}\ixgrfl{bangladesh-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bengalî}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bangla.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bangladesh}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bangladesh-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{bangla}'' (\lopt{bengali}) language\,\footnote{Spoken in Bangladesh and some parts of India,
-% like Occidental Bengal~(19), Orissa~(21), Assam~(18), Bihar~(10) and Tripura~(16);
-% see figures~\vrefrange{f+bangla}{f+bengali-m}.} are taken from
-% the \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} package~\cite{bangtex} (by \name{Palash~Baran}{Pal}); they need specific fonts
-% (the bengali alphabet is derived from sanskrit).
-% \par\end{samepage}
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrf{bangla.png}\ixgrfl{bangladesh-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bengalî}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bangla.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bangladesh}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bangladesh-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{bangla}~>>\,\footnote{Parlée au Bangladesh et dans certaines parties de
-% l'Inde, comme le Bengale Occidental~(19), Orissa~(21), Assam~(18), Bihar~(10) et Tripura~(16);
-% voir les figures~\vrefrange{f+bangla}{f+bengali-m}.} (\lopt{bengali}) sont simplement tirés
-% du paquetage \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}~\cite{bangtex} (de \name{Palash~Baran}{Pal});
-% ils ont besoin de fontes spécifiques (l'alphabet bengalî est dérivé du sanskrit).
-% \fi
-% \par\normalmarginpar
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*bangla>
-\ProvidesFile{bangla.mld}[2006/03/31]%
-%% Bangla titles from BangTeX. Needs specific fonts.
-\def\ptctitle{suu\*c*ipotRo}% <-----
-\def\plftitle{cho\*b*ir ta\*l*ika}%
-\def\plttitle{cho\*k*er ta\*l*ika}%
-\def\mtctitle{suu\*c*i}%
-\def\mlftitle{cho\*b*ir ta\*l*ika}%
-\def\mlttitle{cho\*k*er ta\*l*ika}%
-\def\stctitle{suu\*c*i}%
-\def\slftitle{cho\*b*ir ta\*l*ika}%
-\def\slttitle{cho\*k*er ta\*l*ika}%
-%</bangla>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Basque'' language: \uxfile{basque.mld}}\label{s+mld+basque}\ixfile{basque.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~basque~>>: \uxfile{basque.mld}}\label{s+mld+basque}\ixfile{basque.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{basque1.pdf}\ixgrf{basque1.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{basque2.pdf}\ixgrf{basque2.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[The Basque country]{The Basque country
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagnebasque.htm} and
-% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagnenavarre.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+basque}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Pays Basque]{Pays Basque (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagnebasque.htm} et
-% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagnenavarre.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+basque}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{basque-de.png}\ixgrf{basque-de.png}%
-% \or\relax
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{basque-df.png}\ixgrf{basque-df.png}%
-% \fi
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{euskara.png}\ixgrf{euskara.png}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[The Basque dialects]{The Basque dialects
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basque_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+euskara}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Dialectes basques]{Dialectes basques
-% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Langue_basque})\hfill\null}\label{f+euskara}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{14mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{eusk-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basque_language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{eusk-f.png}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{basque}'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in the basque country, in the north of Spain and
-% south-west of France; see figure~\vref{f+basque}.} (\emph{euskara}) are taken from the \xfile{basque.dtx} file
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,basque}, by \name{Juan~M.}{Aguirregabiria}
-% and \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}, with help from \name{Zunbeltz}{Izaola~Azkona}.
-% It seems that 8~bits fonts are preferable.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{eusk-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Langue_basque}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{eusk-f.png}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{basque}~>>\,\footnote{Parlée au Pays Basque, qui est situé dans le nord de l'Espagne
-% et le sud-ouest de la France; voir la figure~\vref{f+basque}.} (\emph{euskara}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{basque.dtx} dans le paquetage
-% \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,basque}, par \name{Juan~M.}{Aguirregabiria} et \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}, avec
-% l'aide de \name{Zunbeltz}{Izaola~Azkona}.
-% Il semble que des fontes 8-bits soient préférables.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*basque>
-\ProvidesFile{basque.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Basque titles from basque.dtx (babel).
-%% Aguirregabiria, Juan M. <wtpagagj at lg.ehu.es> WWW: http://tp.lc.ehu.es/jma.html
-%% & Sanchez, Julio <jsanchez at gmv.es>,
-%% and help from Izaola Azkona, Zunbeltz <wmbizazz at lg dot ehu>
-%% Needs special fonts.
-\def\ptctitle{Gaien Aurkibidea}%
-\def\plftitle{Irudien Zerrenda}%
-\def\plttitle{Taulen Zerrenda}%
-\def\mtctitle{Gaien Aurkibidea}%
-\def\mlftitle{Irudien Zerrenda}%
-\def\mlttitle{Taulen Zerrenda}%
-\def\stctitle{Gaien Aurkibidea}%
-\def\slftitle{Irudien Zerrenda}%
-\def\slttitle{Taulen Zerrenda}%
-%</basque>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Bengali'' language: \uxfile{bengali.mld}}\label{s+mld+bengali}\ixfile{bengali.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~bengali~>>: \uxfile{bengali.mld}}\label{s+mld+bengali}\ixfile{bengali.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{bengali}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{bangla}'' language, so we load
-% the file \xfile{bangla.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+bangla}):
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{bengali}~>> (bengalî) est synonyme de la langue <<~\lopt{bangla}~>> (bânglâ),
-% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{bangla.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bangla}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*bengali>
-\ProvidesFile{bengali.mld}[2007/07/23]\mtcselectlanguage{bangla}%
-%</bengali>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Bicig'' language: \uxfile{bicig.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig}\ixfile{bicig.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~bicig~>>: \uxfile{bicig.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig}\ixfile{bicig.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\bcg}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{bicig}'' language\,\footnote{The \lopt{bicig} is a written form of the mongolian language.
-% It is also known as Uighur or Bichig. See also section~\vref{s+mld+uighur}.} are taken
-% from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. See also
-% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig2}{s+mld+bicig3}, and~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{bicig}~>>\,\footnote{Le <<~\lopt{bicig}~>> est une forme écrite de la langue mongole.
-% Il est aussi connu sous le nom de ouïghour (\emph{uighur} en anglais) ou bichig.
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+uighur}.} sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}.
-% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi les
-% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig2}{s+mld+bicig3} et~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*bicig>
-\ProvidesFile{bicig.mld}[1999/03/16]%
-%% Mongol (Bicig) titles needs mongol fonts
-\def\ptctitle{\bcg{GarciG}}%
-\def\plftitle{\bcg{zuraG-un zigsaalt}}%
-\def\plttitle{\bcg{k"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
-\def\mtctitle{\bcg{GarciG}}%
-\def\mlftitle{\bcg{zuraG-un zigsaalt}}%
-\def\mlttitle{\bcg{k"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
-\def\stctitle{\bcg{GarciG}}%
-\def\slftitle{\bcg{zuraG-un zigsaalt}}%
-\def\slttitle{\bcg{k"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
-%</bicig>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Bicig2'' language: \uxfile{bicig2.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig2}\ixfile{bicig2.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{bicig2}'' language\,\footnote{The \lopt{bicig}, or uighur, is a written form of the mongolian language,
-% \lopt{bicig2} is a variant. See also section~\vref{s+mld+uighur2}.} are taken
-% from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. See also
-% sections~\vref{s+mld+bicig}, and~\vref{s+mld+bicig3}, and~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~bicig2~>>: \uxfile{bicig2.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig2}\ixfile{bicig2.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{bicig2}~>>\,\footnote{Le <<~\lopt{bicig}~>>, ou ouïghour, est une forme écrite de la langue mongole,
-% \lopt{bicig2} en est une variante. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+uighur2}.} sont
-% tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi les
-% sections~\vref{s+mld+bicig}, \vref{s+mld+bicig3} et~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*bicig2>
-\ProvidesFile{bicig2.mld}[2005/11/16]%
-%% Mongol (Bicig2) titles (needs mongol fonts)
-\def\ptctitle{garcag}%
-\def\plftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}%
-\def\plttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}%
-\def\mtctitle{garcag}%
-\def\mlftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}%
-\def\mlttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}%
-\def\stctitle{garcag}%
-\def\slftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}%
-\def\slttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}%
-%</bicig2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{9}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Bicig3'' language: \uxfile{bicig3.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig3}\ixfile{bicig3.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{bicig3}'' language\,\footnote{The \lopt{bicig}, or uighur, is a written form of the mongolian language, \lopt{bicig3} is a
-% variant. See also section~\vref{s+mld+uighur3}.} are taken
-% from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. See also
-% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig}{s+mld+bicig2} and~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \section{Langue <<~bicig3~>>: \uxfile{bicig3.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig3}\ixfile{bicig3.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{bicig3}~>>\,\footnote{Le <<~\lopt{bicig}~>>, ou ouïghour, est une forme écrite de la langue mongole,
-% \lopt{bicig3} en est une variante. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+uighur}.} sont
-% tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi les
-% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig}{s+mld+bicig2} et~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*bicig3>
-\ProvidesFile{bicig3.mld}[2006/03/31]%
-%% Mongol (Bicig3) titles (needs mongol fonts)
-\def\ptctitle{aguulag=a}%
-\def\plftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}%
-\def\plttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}%
-\def\mtctitle{aguulag=a}%
-\def\mlftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}%
-\def\mlttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}%
-\def\stctitle{aguulag=a}%
-\def\slftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}%
-\def\slttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}%
-%</bicig3>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{41.11842105mm}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Bithe'' language: \uxfile{bithe.mld}}\label{s+mld+bithe}\ixfile{bithe.mld}
-% The titles\ixgrf{manjui.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Manchu_alphabet}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{manjui.png}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{bithe}'' language\,\footnote{The \lopt{bithe} is a written form of the \lopt{manju} variant of the mongolian language.} are taken
-% from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts.
-% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+manju} and~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
-% The Manju writing, or \emph{bithe} system is a close relative
-% of the Mongolian system; the basical letter shapes are the
-% same. Yet for Manju, a set of diacritics (\emph{dots and circles})
-% was designed to eliminate all the ambiguities of Mongolian.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~bithe~>>: \uxfile{bithe.mld}}\label{s+mld+bithe}\ixfile{bithe.mld}
-% Les titres\ixgrf{manjui.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Manchu_alphabet}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{manjui.png}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{bithe}~>>\,\footnote{Le <<~\lopt{bithe}~>> est une forme écrite de la
-% variante <<~\lopt{manju}~>> de la langue mongole.} sont
-% tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques.
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+manju} et~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
-% L'écriture Manju (Manchou), ou le système \emph{bithe}, est une proche
-% parente du système Mongol; les formes de base des lettres sont les mêmes. Mais pour le Manju, un
-% ensemble de signes diacritiques (\emph{points et cercles}) a
-% été conçu pour éliminer toutes les ambiguïtés du Mongol.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.386473430\iwidth}
-% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.613526570\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{manchuria.jpg}\ixgrf{manchuria.jpg}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{manjuc.jpg}\ixgrf{manjuc.jpg}%
-% \\
-%
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{\includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{manchu.jpg}\ixgrf{manchu.jpg}}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Manchuria]{Manchuria (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Manchuria}
-% and \url{http://www.hunmagyar.org/turan/manchu/manchuria.html})\hfill\null}\label{f+manju}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Mandchourie]{Mandchourie (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Manchuria}
-% et \url{http://www.hunmagyar.org/turan/manchu/manchuria.html})\hfill\null}\label{f+manju}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Figure\vref{f+manju} shows the extent of Manchuria according
-% to definition~1 (dark red)
-% below, definition~3 (dark plus medium red) and definition~4 (dark
-% plus medium plus light red):
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item Northeast China: generally defined as the three
-% provinces of Heilongjiang, Jilin and Liaoning.
-% \item The above, plus part of northeastern Inner Mongolia.
-% \item The above, plus the Jehol region of Hebei
-% province. The part of Manchuria in China is called
-% Inner Manchuria to contrast it with
-% Outer Manchuria (see below).
-% \item The above, plus Outer Manchuria or Russian Manchuria,
-% a region in Russia that stretches from the Amur and
-% Ussuri rivers to the Stanovoy Mountains and the
-% Sea of Japan. Russian Far East comprises Primorsky Krai,
-% southern Khabarovsk Krai, the Jewish Autonomous Oblast
-% and Amur Oblast. These were part of Manchu China
-% according to the Treaty of Nerchinsk of 1689, but were
-% ceded to Russia by the Treaty of Aigun (1858).
-% \item The above, plus Sakhalin Oblast, which is generally
-% included on Chinese maps as part of Outer Manchuria,
-% even though it is not explicitly mentioned in the
-% Treaty of Nerchinsk.
-% \end{enumerate}
-% Outer Manchuria is in light red on this map. Some also
-% consider the island of Sakhalin to be part of Outer
-% Manchuria.
-% \or\relax
-% La figure~\vref{f+manju} montre l'étendue de la Mandchourie
-% selon la définition~1 (rouge
-% sombre) ci-dessous, la définition~3 (rouge sombre plus rouge
-% moyen) et la définition~4 (rouge sombre plus rouge moyen plus
-% rouge clair):
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item Chine du Nord-Est: généralement définie comme étant
-% formée des trois provinces de Heilongjiang, Jilin et Liaoning.
-% \item Comme ci-dessus, plus une partie du nord-est de la
-% Mongolie Intérieure.
-% \item Comme ci-dessus, plud la région de Jehol de la province
-% de Hebei. La partie de la Mandchourie située en Chine
-% est appelée Mandchourie Intérieure par opposition à~la
-% Mandchourie Extérieure (voir ci-dessous).
-% \item Comme ci-dessus, plus la Mandchourie Extérieure ou
-% Mandchourie Russe, une région située en Russie et qui
-% s'étend des rivières Amur et Ussuri jusqu'aux Monts
-% Stanovoy et à~la Mer du Japon. L'Extrême Orient Russe
-% comprent le Primorsky Krai, le Khabarovsk Krai du sud,
-% l'Oblast Juif Autonome et l'Oblast de l'Amur. Ces
-% régions faisaient partie de la Chine Mandchoue selon le
-% Traité de Nerchinsk de 1689, mais furent cédées à~la
-% Russie par le Traité de Aigun (1858);
-% \item Comme ci-dessus, plus l'Oblast de Sakhalin, qui est
-% généralement inclus sur la cartes de Chine comme faisant
-% partie de la Mandchourie Extérieure, même s'il n'est pas
-% mentionné explicitement dans le Traité de Nerchinsk.
-% \end{enumerate}
-% La Mandchourie Extérieure est en rouge clair sur cette carte.
-% Certains considèrent l'île de Sakhalin comme faisant partie de la
-% Mandchourie Extérieure.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*bithe>
-\ProvidesFile{bithe.mld}[2005/11/16]%
-%% Manju (bithe) titles (needs mongol fonts)
-\def\ptctitle{garcag}%
-\def\plftitle{zirug-un? afaha}%
-\def\plttitle{kuisunukdu-yin? afaha}%
-\def\mtctitle{garcag}%
-\def\mlftitle{zirug-un? afaha}%
-\def\mlttitle{kuisunukdu-yin? afaha}%
-\def\stctitle{garcag}%
-\def\slftitle{zirug-un? afaha}%
-\def\slttitle{kuisunukdu-yin? afaha}%
-%</bithe>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Brazil'' language: \uxfile{brazil.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazil}\ixfile{brazil.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~brazil~>>: \uxfile{brazil.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazil}\ixfile{brazil.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \raisebox{-3.5mm}{\includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{brazilp.pdf}}\ixgrf{brazilp.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{brazil.pdf}\ixgrf{brazil.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Brazil]{Brazil (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/americas/brazil.jpg}
-% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}~--
-% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/amsudant/bresimapa-lingua.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})i\hfill\null}\label{f+brazil}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Brésil]{Brésil (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/americas/brazil.jpg}
-% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}~--
-% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/amsudant/bresimapa-lingua.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+brazil}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.4\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.6\iwidth}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{portu-b.png}\ixgrf{portu-b.png}%
-% \IVC{\awidth}{portu-b.png}\ixgrf{portu-b.png}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\footnotesize\selectlanguage{french}
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=0em
-% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt
-% \RaggedRight
-% \begin{enumerate}[1.~]
-% \item Caipira -- States of São Paulo (countryside;
-% the city of São Paulo and the eastern areas of the
-% state have their own dialect, called paulista);
-% southern Minas Gerais, northern Paraná, Goiás and
-% Mato Grosso do Sul.
-% \item Cearense -- Ceará.
-% \item Baiano -- Bahia.
-% \item Fluminense -- Variants spoken in the states of Rio de
-% Janeiro and Espírito Santo (excluding the
-% city of Rio de Janeiro and its adjacent
-% metropolitan areas, which have their own
-% dialect, called carioca).
-% \item Gaúcho -- Rio Grande do Sul. (There are many distinct accents
-% in Rio Grande do Sul, mainly due to the heavy
-% influx of European immigrants of diverse origins, those which have
-% settled several colonies throughout the state.)
-% \item Mineiro -- Minas Gerais (not prevalent in the Triângulo Mineiro,
-% southern and southeastern Minas Gerais).
-% \item Nordestino -- northeastern states
-% of Brazil (Pernambuco and Rio Grande do Norte have a
-% particular way of speaking).
-% \item Nortista -- Amazon Basin states.
-% \item Paulistano -- Variants spoken around São Paulo
-% city and the eastern areas of São Paulo state.
-% \item Sertanejo -- States of Goiás and Mato Grosso
-% (the city of Cuiabá has a particular way of speaking).
-% \item Sulista -- Variants spoken in the areas between the northern
-% regions of Rio Grande do Sul and southern
-% regions of São Paulo state. (The cities of Curitiba,
-% Florianópolis, and Itapetininga have fairly distinct accents
-% as well.)
-% \end{enumerate}
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption[Dialects of Portuguese in Brazil]{Dialects of Portuguese in Brazil
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portuguese_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+portu-b}
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{portu-b.png}\ixgrf{portu-b.png}%
-% \IVC{\awidth}{portu-b.png}\ixgrf{portu-b.png}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\footnotesize
-% \RaggedRight
-% \begin{enumerate}[1.~]
-% \item Caipira -- États de São Paulo (campagne;
-% la cité de São Paulo et les zones de l'est de l'état ont
-% leur propre dialecte, appelé \emph{paulista});
-% le sud de Minas Gerais, le nord du Paraná, de Goiás et
-% le Mato Grosso do Sul.
-% \item Cearense -- Ceará.
-% \item Baiano -- Bahia.
-% \item Fluminense -- Des variantes parlées dans les étas de Rio de
-% Janeiro et Espírito Santo (sauf la cité de Rio de Janeiro
-% et ses zones métropolitaines adjacentes, qui ont leur
-% propre dialecte, appelé \emph{carioca}).
-% \item Gaúcho -- Rio Grande do Sul. (Il y~a de nombreux
-% accents différents dans Rio Grande do Sul, surtout
-% à~cause du fort afflux d'immigrants européens de
-% diverses origines, ceux qui établi plusieurs colonies
-% dans tout cet état.)
-% \item Mineiro -- Minas Gerais (ne domine pas dans le
-% \emph{Triângulo Mineiro} ou «~Triangle Minier~», au sud
-% et au sud-est de Minas Gerais).
-% \item Nordestino -- États du nord-est du Brésil (Pernambuco
-% et Rio Grande do Norte ont une manière de parler
-% particulière).
-% \item Nortista -- États du bassin de l'Amazone.
-% \item Paulistano -- Des variantes sont parlées autour de
-% la cité de São Paulo et dans les régions de l'est de
-% l'état de São Paulo.
-% \item Sertanejo -- États de Goiás et du Mato Grosso
-% (la cité de Cuiabá a une manière de parler particulière).
-% \item Sulista -- Des variantes sont parlées dans les
-% zones entre les régions du nord de Rio Grande do Sul et
-% celles du sud de l'état de São Paulo. (Les cités de Curitiba,
-% Florianópolis et Itapetininga ont aussi des accents
-% assez distincts.)
-% \end{enumerate}
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption[Dialectes du portugais au Brésil]{Dialectes du portugais au Brésil
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portuguese_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+portu-b}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-%
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{17.5mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{brazil-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Brazilian_Portuguese}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{brazil-f.png}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{brazil}'' language (\emph{português brasileiro} or
-% \emph{português do Brasil})\,\footnote{It is the main portuguese dialect spoken in Brazil. Note that these titles are
-% \emph{different} in Brazil and in Portugal. \namea{Arnaldo~Viegas}{de~Lima}{deLima} contributed to brazilian translations.
-% See section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}.} are taken from the \xfile{portuges.dtx} file (for portugese titles by
-% \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete}) in the \pack{babel}
-% package~\cite{babel,babel-user,portuges}:
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{brazil-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Brazilian_Portuguese}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{brazil-f.png}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{brazil}~>> (brésilien, \emph{português brasileiro} ou
-% \emph{português do Brasil})\,\footnote{C'est le dialecte portugais principal parlé au Brésil.
-% Notez que ces
-% titres sont \emph{différents} au Brésil et au Portugal. \namea{Arnaldo~Viegas}{de~Lima}{deLima} a contribué aux
-% traductions brésiliennes. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{portuges.dtx}
-% (de \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete} pour les titres portugais)
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,portuges}:
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*brazil>
-\ProvidesFile{brazil.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Portugues (brazil) titles, from portuges.dtx (babel)
-%% Ramalhete, Jose Pedro & "de Lima", Arnaldo Viegas
-\def\ptctitle{Sum\'ario}%
-\def\plftitle{Lista de Figuras}%
-\def\plttitle{Lista de Tabelas}%
-\def\mtctitle{Sum\'ario}%
-\def\mlftitle{Lista de Figuras}%
-\def\mlttitle{Lista de Tabelas}%
-\def\stctitle{Sum\'ario}%
-\def\slftitle{Lista de Figuras}%
-\def\slttitle{Lista de Tabelas}%
-%</brazil>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Brazilian'' language: \uxfile{brazilian.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazilian}\ixfile{brazilian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~brazilian~>>: \uxfile{brazilian.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazilian}\ixfile{brazilian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{brazilian}'' language is just like ``\lopt{brazil}'', so we just load \xfile{brazil.mld}
-% (see section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}):
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{brazilian}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{brazil}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
-% \xfile{brazil.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*brazilian>
-\ProvidesFile{brazilian.mld}[2005/07/11]\mtcselectlanguage{brazil}%
-%</brazilian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Breton'' language: \uxfile{breton.mld}}\label{s+mld+breton}\ixfile{breton.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~breton~>>: \uxfile{breton.mld}}\label{s+mld+breton}\ixfile{breton.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!thb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{bretagne.pdf}\ixgrf{bretagne.pdf}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Brittany]{Brittany (\url{http://www.bretagnenet.com/scb/fgeo.html})\hfill\null}\label{f+bretagne}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Bretagne]{Bretagne (\url{http://www.bretagnenet.com/scb/fgeo.html})\hfill\null}\label{f+bretagne}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{spilhennig.png}\ixgrfl{gwenn-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Breton_Language}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{spilhennig.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Britanny}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{gwenn-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{breton}'' language (\emph{brezhoneg})\,\footnote{Spoken as a local celtic dialect in french Brittany; see
-% figure~\vref{f+bretagne}.
-% See also \url{http://www.ofis-bzh.org}, \url{http://www.geobreizh.com/breizh/images/cartes/carte-bretagne-langue-fr.jpg} and
-% \url{http://www.geobreizh.com/breizh/images/cartes/carte-bretagne-langue-br.jpg}.} are taken from the
-% \xfile{breton.dtx} file (by \name{Christian}{Rolland}) in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,breton}:
-% \or\relax
-% \lneed{2}
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{spilhennig.png}\ixgrfl{gwenn-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Breton}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{spilhennig.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bretagne}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{gwenn-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{breton}~>> (\emph{brezhoneg})\,\footnote{Parlée comme dialecte celtique local en Bretagne (France);
-% voir la figure~\vref{f+bretagne}. Voir aussi \url{http://www.ofis-bzh.org},
-% \url{http://www.geobreizh.com/breizh/images/cartes/carte-bretagne-langue-fr.jpg} et
-% \url{http://www.geobreizh.com/breizh/images/cartes/carte-bretagne-langue-br.jpg}.}
-% sont tirés du fichier \xfile{breton.dtx} (de \name{Christian}{Rolland}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,breton}:
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*breton>
-\ProvidesFile{breton.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Breton titles from breton.dtx (babel) by Rolland, Christian
-\def\ptctitle{Taolenn}%
-\def\plftitle{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}%
-\def\plttitle{Listenn an taolenno\`u}%
-\def\mtctitle{Taolenn}%
-\def\mlftitle{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}%
-\def\mlttitle{Listenn an taolenno\`u}%
-\def\stctitle{Taolenn}%
-\def\slftitle{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}%
-\def\slttitle{Listenn an taolenno\`u}%
-%</breton>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``British'' language: \uxfile{british.mld}}\label{s+mld+british}\ixfile{british.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~british~>>: \uxfile{british.mld}}\label{s+mld+british}\ixfile{british.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\ixgrfl{uk-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Great_Britain}%
-% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uk-f.png}}}}}
-% ``\lopt{british}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'', so we just load \xfile{english.mld}
-% (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
-% \or\relax
-% La\ixgrfl{uk-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Grande_Bretagne}%
-% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uk-f.png}}}}}
-% langue <<~\lopt{british}~>> est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier
-% \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*british>
-\ProvidesFile{british.mld}[2005/07/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}%
-%</british>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \lneed{5}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Bulgarian'' language: \uxfile{bulgarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarian}\ixfile{bulgarian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~bulgarian~>>: \uxfile{bulgarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarian}\ixfile{bulgarian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.317738791\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.682261209\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{bulgmap.png}\ixgrf{bulgmap.png}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{bulgariar.jpg}\ixgrf{bulgariar.jpg}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Bulgaria]{Bulgaria (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Geography_of_Bulgaria}
-% and \url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/bulgaria.html}
-% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}~--)\hfill\null}\label{f+bulgaria}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Bulgarie]{Bulgarie (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Geography_of_Bulgaria}
-% et \url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/bulgaria.html}
-% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}~--)\hfill\null}\label{f+bulgaria}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macro}{\cyr}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrf{bulgarski.png}\ixgrfl{bulgaria-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bulgarian_Language}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bulgarski.png}}\\*[2mm]%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bulgaria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bulgaria-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{bulgarian}'' language (\emph{b\u{a}lgarski}) are taken from the \xfile{bulgarian.dtx}
-% (adapted from russian by \name{Georgi~N.}{Boshnakov}) file in the
-% \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,bulgarian}; they require
-% specific cyrillic fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarianb}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrf{bulgarski.png}\ixgrfl{bulgaria-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bulgare}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bulgarski.png}}\\*[2mm]%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bulgarie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bulgaria-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{bulgarian}~>> (bulgare, \emph{b\u{a}lgarski}) sont tirés
-% du fichier \xfile{bulgarian.dtx} (adapté du russe par \name{Georgi~N.}{Boshnakov}) dans le
-% paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,bulgarian}; ils ont
-% besoin de fontes cyrilliques spécifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarianb}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*bulgarian>
-\ProvidesFile{bulgarian.mld}[2007/03/08]%
-%% Bulgarian titles from bulgarian.dtx (babel) (needs special cyrillic fonts)
-%% by Boshnakov, Georgi N. <georgi.boshnakov at umist.ac.uk>
-\def\ptctitle{%
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
-\def\plftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ %
- \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
-\def\plttitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ %
- \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
-\def\mtctitle{%
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
-\def\mlftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ %
- \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
-\def\mlttitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ %
- \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
-\def\stctitle{%
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
-\def\slftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ %
- \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
-\def\slttitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ %
- \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
-%</bulgarian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Bulgarianb'' language: \uxfile{bulgarianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarianb}\ixfile{bulgarianb.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~bulgarianb~>>: \uxfile{bulgarianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarianb}\ixfile{bulgarianb.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\cyr}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{bulgarianb}'' (upper bulgarian) language are taken from the \xfile{russianb.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, \name{Werner}{Lemberg}, and \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya})
-% of the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,russianb1,russianb};
-% they require specific cyrillic fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarian}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{bulgarianb}~>> (haut bulgare) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russianb.dtx}
-% (de \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, \name{Werner}{Lemberg} et \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,russianb1,russianb};
-% ils requièrent des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarian}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*bulgarianb>
-\ProvidesFile{bulgarianb.mld}[2006/03/06]%
-%% Upper bulgarian titles from russianb.dtx. Needs cyrillic fonts for upper bulgarian.
-\def\ptctitle{%
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
-\def\plftitle{% Figuri
- {\cyr \CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri}}%
-\def\plttitle{% Tablici
- {\cyr \CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri}}%
-\def\mtctitle{% Sydyrzhanie
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
-\def\mlftitle{% Figurite
- {\cyr \CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri}}%
-\def\mlttitle{% Tablici
- {\cyr \CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri}}%
-\def\stctitle{% Sydyrzhanie
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
-\def\slftitle{% Figuri
- {\cyr \CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri}}%
-\def\slttitle{% Tablici
- {\cyr \CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri}}%
-%</bulgarianb>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{13}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Buryat'' language: \uxfile{buryat.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat}\ixfile{buryat.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~buryat~>>: \uxfile{buryat.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat}\ixfile{buryat.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}[b]{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=.54054054\iwidth,keepaspectratio,clip,viewport= 0 0 300 203]{buryatia.pdf}\ixgrf{buryatia.pdf}%
-% &&%
-% \includegraphics[width=.45945946\iwidth,keepaspectratio,clip,viewport= 0 0 255 216]{buryatia-l.pdf}\ixgrf{buryatia-l.pdf}%
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Republic of Buryatia]{Republic of Buryatia (\url{http://russiatrek.org/rp_buryatia.shtml})}\label{f+buryat}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[République de Buryatie]{République de Buryatie (\url{http://russiatrek.org/rp_buryatia.shtml})}\label{f+buryat}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \begin{macro}{\mnr}
-% \begin{macro}{\sh}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{bur-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Buryat_language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bur-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{buryat}'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in some regions of Mongolia and in the Buryatia republic, near
-% Lake Baikal. See figure~\vref{f+buryat}.} are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}.
-% This language requires specific fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrf{bur.pdf}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Buryat_language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bur-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{buryat}~>>\,\footnote{Parlée dans certaines régions de la Mongolie et dans la république
-% de Buryatie, près du lac Baïkal. Voir la figure~\vref{f+buryat}.} (bouriate) sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}.
-% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*buryat>
-\ProvidesFile{buryat.mld}[1999/03/16]%
-%% Buryat titles. Needs special fonts.
-\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Gar{\sh}ag}}%
-\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}%
-\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}%
-\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Gar{\sh}ag}}%
-\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}%
-\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}%
-\def\stctitle{{\mnr Gar{\sh}ag}}%
-\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}%
-\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}%
-%</buryat>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Buryat2'' language: \uxfile{buryat2.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat2}\ixfile{buryat2.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~buryat2~>>: \uxfile{buryat2.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat2}\ixfile{buryat2.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mnr}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{buryat2}'' language (a variant for the ``\lopt{buryat}'' language, see section~\vref{s+mld+buryat})
-% are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts.
-% See also section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{buryat2}~>> (une variante du langage «~\lopt{buryat}~», voir la section~\vref{s+mld+buryat})
-% sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue
-% requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*buryat2>
-\ProvidesFile{buryat2.mld}[1999/03/16]%
-%% Buryat2 titles. Needs special fonts.
-\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}%
-\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}%
-\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}%
-\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}%
-\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}%
-\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}%
-\def\stctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}%
-\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}%
-\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}%
-%</buryat2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Canadian'' language: \uxfile{canadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadian}\ixfile{canadian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~canadian~>>: \uxfile{canadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadian}\ixfile{canadian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-5mm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \centering
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}c@{}}
-% \begin{tabularx}{\awidth}[c]{@{}Z{1}Z{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% Province&Official\\
-% &language(s)\\
-% \midrule
-% Alberta&english\\
-% British-Columbia&english\\
-% Island-of-Prince-Edward&english\\
-% Manitoba&english\\
-% New-Brunswick&english-french\\
-% New-Scotland&english\\
-% Ontario&english\\
-% Québec&french\\
-% Satkatchewan&english\\
-% Newfoundland&english\\
-% Federal territories&english-french\\
-% Federal government&english-french\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{canada.pdf}\ixgrf{canada.pdf}
-% \IVC{\awidth}{canada.pdf}\ixgrf{canada.pdf}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption[Official languages in Canada]{Official languages in Canada
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/amnord/canada.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+canada}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}c@{}}
-% \begin{tabularx}{\awidth}[c]{@{}Z{1}Z{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% Province&Langue(s) officielle(s)\\
-% \midrule
-% Alberta&anglais\\
-% Colombie-britannique&anglais\\
-% Île-du-Prince-Édouard&anglais\\
-% Manitoba&anglais\\
-% Nouveau-Brunswick&anglais-français\\
-% Nouvelle-Écosse&anglais\\
-% Ontario&anglais\\
-% Québec&français\\
-% Satkatchewan&anglais\\
-% Terre-Neuve&anglais\\
-% Territoires fédéraux&anglais-français\\
-% Gouvernement fédéral&anglais-français\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{canada.pdf}\ixgrf{canada.pdf}
-% \IVC{\awidth}{canada.pdf}\ixgrf{canada.pdf}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption[Langues officielles au Canada]{Langues officielles au Canada
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/amnord/canada.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+canada}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-%
-% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount}
-%
-% ^^A \begin{figure}
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{canada1.pdf}\ixgrf{canada1.pdf}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Canada]{Canada (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/cia07/canada_sm_2007.gif}
-% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps})\hfill\null}\label{f+canada1}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Canada]{Canada (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/cia07/canada_sm_2007.gif}
-% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps})\hfill\null}\label{f+canada1}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \afterpage{\clearpage}
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{canada-pe.png}\ixgrf{canada-pe.png}
-% \caption[Political map of Canada]{Political map of Canada
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Provinces_and_territories_of_Canada})\hfill\null}\label{f+canada-p}
-% \or\relax
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{canada-pf.pdf}\ixgrf{canada-pf.pdf}
-% \caption[Carte politique du Canada]{Carte politique du Canada
-% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Canada})\hfill\null}\label{f+canada-p}
-% \fi
-%
-% \vspace*{\baselineskip}
-%
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{canada-l.pdf}\ixgrf{canada-l.pdf}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Linguistic map of Canada]{Linguistic map of Canada
-% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bilinguisme_au_Canada})\hfill\null}\label{f+canada-l}
-% \vspace*{1\baselineskip}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Carte linguistique du Canada]{Carte linguistique du Canada
-% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bilinguisme_au_Canada})\hfill\null}\label{f+canada-l}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \vspace*{-3\baselineskip}
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\ixgrfl{canada-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_Canada}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{canada-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% ``\lopt{canadian}'' language \textcolor{red}{(note the final ``i\emph{a}n'')} is just the \loptd{english} language spoken
-% in Canada. We just load the file \xfile{english.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
-% \or\relax
-% La\ixgrfl{canada-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_Canada}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{canada-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% langue <<~\lopt{canadian}~>> \textcolor{red}{(notez le <<~i\emph{a}n~>> final)} est simplement la langue \emph{anglaise}
-% (\loptd{english}) parlée au Canada.
-% Nous chargeons simplement le fichier \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*canadian>
-\ProvidesFile{canadian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{english}%
-%</canadian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Canadien'' language: \uxfile{canadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadien}\ixfile{canadien.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~canadien~>>: \uxfile{canadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadien}\ixfile{canadien.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\ixgrfl{canada-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_Canada}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{canada-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% ``\lopt{canadien}'' language \textcolor{red}{(note the final ``i\emph{e}n'')} is just the \lopt{french} language spoken
-% in Canada. We just load the file \xfile{french.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
-% \or\relax
-% La\ixgrfl{canada-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_Canada}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{canada-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% langue <<~\lopt{canadien}~>> \textcolor{red}{(notez le <<~i\emph{e}n~>> final)} est simplement la langue \emph{française}
-% (\lopt{french}) parlée au Canada. Nous chargeons simplement le fichier \xfile{french.mld} (voir la
-% section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*canadien>
-\ProvidesFile{canadien.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{french}%
-%</canadien>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{19.14587332mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Castillan'' language: \uxfile{castillan.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillan}\ixfile{castillan.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~castillan~>>: \uxfile{castillan.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillan}\ixfile{castillan.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{castillan}'' language is better known as ``\lopt{spanish}'',\ixgrfl{castille-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Castille}%
-% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{castille-f.png}}}}}
-% but is spoken mainly in Castile,
-% a part of central Spain. We
-% just load the \xfile{spanish.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}):
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{castillan}~>> est mieux connue sous le nom de <<~\lopt{spanish}~>>
-% (espagnol),\ixgrfl{castille-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Castille}%
-% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{castille-f.png}}}}}
-% mais est parlée principalement
-% en Castille, une partie du centre de l'Espagne. Nous chargeons simplement le fichier
-% \xfile{spanish.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*castillan>
-\ProvidesFile{castillan.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{spanish}%
-%</castillan>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Castillian'' language: \uxfile{castillian.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillian}\ixfile{castillian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~castillian~>>: \uxfile{castillian.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillian}\ixfile{castillian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% ``Castillian'' is just the english name for ``castillan'', so
-% we just load the \xfile{spanish.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}):
-% \or\relax
-% <<~Castillian~>> est juste le nom anglais du castillan, donc
-% nous chargeons simplement le fichier
-% \xfile{spanish.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*castillian>
-\ProvidesFile{castillian.mld}[2005/07/01]\mtcselectlanguage{spanish}%
-%</castillian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Catalan'' language: \uxfile{catalan.mld}}\label{s+mld+catalan}\ixfile{catalan.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~catalan~>>: \uxfile{catalan.mld}}\label{s+mld+catalan}\ixfile{catalan.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.502354788\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.497645212\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{catalan-d.pdf}\ixgrf{catalan-d.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{catalan-p.pdf}\ixgrf{catalan-p.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Catalan language areas]{Catalan language areas
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagnecatalogne.htm} in~\cite{tlfq};
-% see also \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Catalan_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+catalan}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions de la langue catalane]{Régions de la langue catalane
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagnecatalogne.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq};
-% voir aussi \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Catalan_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+catalan}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \lneed{3}
-% The titles\ixgrfl{catalonia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Catalan_language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{catalonia-f.png}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{catalan}'' language (\emph{català, valencià})\,\footnote{Spoken in Catalunya, the eastern part of Spain,
-% around Barcelona, and in Roussillon, in France. See figure~\vref{f+catalan}.}
-% are taken from the \xfile{catalan.dtx} file (adapted from spanish by \name{Gonçal}{Badenes} and \name{Jörg}{Knappen})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,catalan}:
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{catalonia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Catalan_language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{catalonia-f.png}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{catalan}~>> (\emph{català, valencià})\,\footnote{Parlée en Catalogne,
-% la partie orientale de l'Espagne, autour
-% de Barcelone, et dans le Roussillon, en France. Voir la figure~\vref{f+catalan}.} sont tirés du
-% fichier \xfile{catalan.dtx} (adapté de l'espagnol par \name{Gonçal}{Badenes}
-% et \name{Jörg}{Knappen}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,catalan}:
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*catalan>
-\ProvidesFile{catalan.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Catalan titles from catalan.dtx (babel) (Badenes, Gonçal)
-\def\ptctitle{\'Index}%
-\def\plftitle{\'Index de figures}%
-\def\plttitle{\'Index de taules}%
-%%
-\def\mtctitle{\'Index}%
-\def\mlftitle{Figures}%
-\def\mlttitle{Taules}%
-\def\stctitle{\'Index}%
-\def\slftitle{Figures}%
-\def\slttitle{Taules}%
-%</catalan>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Chinese1'' language: \uxmldo{chinese1}}\label{s+mld+chinese1}\ixmldo{chinese1}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~chinese1~>>: \uxmldo{chinese1}}\label{s+mld+chinese1}\ixmldo{chinese1}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{hanzi.png}\ixgrf{hanzi.png}%
-% \IVC[55mm]{\awidth}{hanzi.png}\ixgrf{hanzi.png}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \begin{minipage}[c][4\baselineskip]{\bwidth}\small\RaggedRight
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Left: "Chinese character" in hànzì (Traditional Chinese);\newline
-% Right: "Chinese character" in Simplified Chinese.
-% \or\relax
-% Gauche: \og Caractère chinois\fg en hànzì (chinois traditionnel);\newline
-% Droite: \og Caractère chinois\fg en chinois simplifié.
-% \fi
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Traditional and simplified Chinese versions of the Chinese word hànzì]{Traditional and simplified
-% Chinese versions of the Chinese word hànzì
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chinese_written_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+hanzi}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Versions en chinois traditionnel et simplifié du mot chinois hànzì]{Versions en chinois traditionnel et
-% simplifié du mot chinois hànzì
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chinese_written_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+hanzi}
-% \fi
-% \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1}@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{china-ch.png}\ixgrf{china-ch.png}\\{}\small
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Areas using only Chinese characters in green; in conjunction with other scripts, dark green;\ABK maximum
-% extent of historic % usage, light green (does not include other territories annexed by Japan in World War~II).
-% \or\relax
-% Régions n'utilisant que des caractères chinois: en vert; en conjonction avec d'autres écritures: en vert foncé;
-% extension maximale de l'utilisation historique: en vert clair (n'inclut pas d'autres territoires annexés par le
-% Japon pendant la seconde guerre mondiale).
-% \fi
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Areas using Chinese characters]{Areas using Chinese characters
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chinese_character})\hfill\null}\label{f+china-ch}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions utilisant des caractères chinois]{Régions utilisant des caractères chinois
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chinese_character})\hfill\null}\label{f+china-ch}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.651554404\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.348445596\iwidth}
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{chine1.pdf}\ixgrf{chine1.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{chine2.pdf}\ixgrf{chine2.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Languages in China]{Languages in China (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/chine-map-langues.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+chine}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Langues en Chine]{Langues en Chine (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/chine-map-langues.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+chine}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{china-ae.png}\ixgrf{china-ae.png}
-% \caption[People's Republic of China (PRC)]{People's Republic of China (PRC)
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/PRC})\hfill\null}\label{f+PRC}
-% \or\relax
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{china-af.png}\ixgrf{china-af.png}
-% \caption[République Populaire de Chine (RPC)]{République Populaire de Chine (RPC)
-% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_populaire_de_Chine})\hfill\null}\label{f+PRC}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{china-l.pdf}\ixgrf{china-l.pdf}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Dialects in China]{Dialects in China
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chinese_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+china-l}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Dialectes en Chine]{Dialectes en Chine
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chinese_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+china-l}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{6.25mm}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% There\ixgrf{china-w.png}\ixgrfl{taiwan-f.png}\ixgrfl{china-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chinese_written_language}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{china-w.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/China}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{china-f.png}}}\\
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Republic_of_China}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{taiwan-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% are several variants for the chinese language.
-% The ``\lopt{chinese1}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{Bg5.cap} file
-% in the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+chinese2}.
-% See~\cite{china-h} about the history of China and the chinese language.
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm}%
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{chinese1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{chinese1.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% Il y~a\ixgrf{china-w.png}\ixgrfl{china-f.png}\ixgrfl{taiwan-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chinese_written_language}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{china-w.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{china-f.png}}}\\
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_de_Chine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{taiwan-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% plusieurs variantes pour la langue chinoise.
-% La langue <<~\lopt{chinese1}~>> (chinois première variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{Bg5.cap} du
-% système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment.
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+chinese2}.
-% Voir~\cite{china-h} sur l'histoire de la Chine et de la langue chinoise.
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{chinese1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement,
-% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{chinese1.mlo}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*chinese1>
-\ProvidesFile{chinese1.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{chinese1}%
-%% From file Bg5.cap of the CJK package for using Asian logographs with LaTeX2e
-%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
-%% Chinese captions: character set: Big 5, encoding: Big 5
-%</chinese1>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Chinese2'' language: \uxmldo{chinese2}}\label{s+mld+chinese2}\ixmldo{chinese2}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~chinese2~>>: \uxmldo{chinese2.mld}}\label{s+mld+chinese2}\ixmldo{chinese2}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{chinese2}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{Bg5.cpx} file in the \pack{CJK}
-% system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+chinese1}.
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{chinese2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{chinese2.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{chinese2}~>> (chinois seconde variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{Bg5.cpx} dans
-% le système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. Voir aussi la
-% section~\vref{s+mld+chinese1}.
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{chinese2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement,
-% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{chinese2.mlo}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*chinese2>
-\ProvidesFile{chinese2.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{chinese2}%
-%% From file Bg5.cpx of the CJK package for using Asian logographs with LaTeX2e
-%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
-%% Chinese captions: character set: Big 5, encoding: Big 5, preprocessed
-%</chinese2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{12}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Croatian'' language: \uxfile{croatian.mld}}\label{s+mld+croatian}\ixfile{croatian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~\lopt{croatian}~>>: \uxfile{croatian.mld}}\label{s+mld+croatian}\ixfile{croatian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.556818182\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.443181818\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{croatia-un.png}\ixgrf{croatia-un.png}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{croatie2.png}\ixgrf{croatie2.png}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Croatia and minorities in Croatia]{Croatia and minorities in Croatia
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Geography_of_Croatia} and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/croatieinfos.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+croatie}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Croatie et minorités en Croatie]{Croatie et minorités en Croatie
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Geography_of_Croatia} et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/croatieinfos.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+croatie}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \vspace*{1\baselineskip}
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% ^^A \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{xyugo.png}\ixgrf{xyugo.png}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Main nationalities in ex-Yugoslavia in 1998]{Main nationalities in ex-Yugoslavia in 1998
-% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Croate})\hfill\null}\label{f+xyugo}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Principales nationalités dans l'ex-Yougoslavie en 1998]{Principales nationalités dans l'ex-Yougoslavie en 1998
-% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Croate})\hfill\null}\label{f+xyugo}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{25mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrf{hrv.png}\ixgrfl{croatia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Croatian_language}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{hrv.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Croatia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{croatia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{croatian}'' language (\emph{hrvatski}) are taken from the file \xfile{croatian.dtx} file
-% (by \namea{Alan}{Pai\'{c}}{Paic})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,croatian} (see figures~\vrefrange{f+croatie}{f+xyugo}):
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrf{hrv.png}\ixgrfl{croatia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Croatian_language}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{hrv.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Croatia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{croatia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~croatian~>> (croate, \emph{hrvatski}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{croatian.dtx}
-% (de \namea{Alan}{Pai\'{c}}{Paic}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,croatian} (voir les
-% figures~\vrefrange{f+croatie}{f+xyugo}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*croatian>
-\ProvidesFile{croatian.mld}[2007/12/18]%
-%% Croatian titles from croatian.dtx (babel). Pai\'{c}, Alan.
-\def\ptctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
-\def\plftitle{Popis slika}%
-\def\plttitle{Popis tablica}%
-\def\mtctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
-\def\mlftitle{Popis slika}%
-\def\mlttitle{Popis tablica}%
-\def\stctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
-\def\slftitle{Slike}%
-\def\slttitle{Tablice}%
-%</croatian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Czech'' language: \uxfile{czech.mld}}\label{s+mld+czech}\ixfile{czech.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~czech~>>: \uxfile{czech.mld}}\label{s+mld+czech}\ixfile{czech.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!tb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{cz1.pdf}\ixgrf{cz1.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{cz3.png}\ixgrf{cz3.png}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Czech Republic]{Czech Republic (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/reptcheque.htm}
-% in~\cite{tlfq} and \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Geography_of_the_Czech_Republic})\hfill\null}\label{f+cz}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[République Tchèque]{République Tchèque (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/reptcheque.htm}
-% dans~\cite{tlfq} et \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Geography_of_the_Czech_Republic})\hfill\null}\label{f+cz}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \vspace*{1\baselineskip}
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!tb]
-% ^^A \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{czechd.pdf}\ixgrf{czechd.pdf}%
-% \IVC[40mm]{\awidth}{czechd.pdf}\ixgrf{czechd.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\footnotesize\selectlanguage{french}
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=0em
-% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item[1.~] Czech group:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item[1.a~] north-east czech subgroup,
-% \item[1.b~] center czech subgroup.
-% \item[1.c~] south-west czech subgroup,
-% \item[1.d~] morave czech subgroup.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item[2.~] Group of central Moravia.
-% \item[3.~] Group of eastern Moravia.
-% \item[4.~] Group of Silesia:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item[4.a~] subgroup of moravian Silesia,
-% \item[4.b~] subgroup of polish Silesia.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item[5.~] Miscellaneous dialects.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption[Czech dialects]{Czech dialects (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tchèque})\hfill\null}\label{f+czechd}
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{czechd.pdf}\ixgrf{czechd.pdf}%
-% \IVC[40mm]{\awidth}{czechd.pdf}\ixgrf{czechd.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\footnotesize
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item[1.~] Groupe tchèque:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item[1.a~] sous-groupe tchèque du nord-est,
-% \item[1.b~] sous-groupe tchèque du centre,
-% \item[1.c~] sous-groupe tchèque du sud-ouest,
-% \item[1.d~] sous-groupe du tchèque morave.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item[2.~] Groupe de la Moravie centrale.
-% \item[3.~] Groupe de la Moravie de l'est.
-% \item[4.~] Groupe de la Silésie:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item[4.a~] sous-groupe de la Silésie morave,
-% \item[4.b~] sous-groupe de la Silésie polonaise.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item[5.~] Dialectes divers.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption[Dialectes tchèques]{Dialectes tchèques (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tchèque})\hfill\null}\label{f+czechd}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{czech-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Czech_language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{czech-f.png}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{czech}'' language (\emph{\v{c}e\v{s}tina, \v{c}esk\'{y} jazyk}) are taken from the file \xfile{czech.dtx}
-% (contributions by \namea{Milo\v{s}~V.}{Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek}{Lokajicek})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,czech}:
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{czech-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Czech_language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{czech-f.png}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{czech}~>> (tchèque, \emph{\v{c}e\v{s}tina, \v{c}esk\'{y} jazyk}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{czech.dtx}
-% (contributions de \namea{Milo\v{s}~V.}{Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek}{Lokajicek})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,czech}:
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*czech>
-\ProvidesFile{czech.mld}[2007/12/04]%
-%% Czech titles from czech.dtx (babel). Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek, Milo\v{s} V.
-\def\ptctitle{Obsah}%
-\def\plftitle{Seznam obr\'azk\r{u}}%
-\def\plttitle{Seznam tabulek}%
-\def\mtctitle{Obsah}%
-\def\mlftitle{Seznam obr\'azk\r{u}}%
-\def\mlttitle{Seznam tabulek}%
-\def\stctitle{Obsah}%
-\def\slftitle{Seznam obr\'azk\r{u}}%
-\def\slttitle{Seznam tabulek}%
-%</czech>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Danish'' language: \uxfile{danish.mld}}\label{s+mld+danish}\ixfile{danish.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~danish~>>: \uxfile{danish.mld}}\label{s+mld+danish}\ixfile{danish.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.362204724\iwidth}
-% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.637795276\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{danemark.jpg}\ixgrf{danemark.jpg}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{feroe.jpg}\ixgrf{feroe.jpg}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Denmark and Faeroe Islands]{Denmark and Faeroe Islands
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/danemarkcarte.htm} and
-% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/feroe_carte1.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+denmark}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Danemark et Îles Féroé]{Danemark et Îles Féroé
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/danemarkcarte.htm} et
-% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/feroe_carte1.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+ddenmark}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{\includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{danishd.pdf}\ixgrf{danishd.pdf}}\\%
-% \\*[1\baselineskip]%
-% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{danishg.pdf}\ixgrf{danishg.pdf}%
-% \IVC[80mm]{\awidth}{danishg.pdf}\ixgrf{danishg.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\footnotesize
-% The distribution of one, two, and three grammatical genders in Danish dialects.
-% In Zealand (\emph{Sjælland}) the transition from three to two genders has happened fairly recently.
-% West of the red line the definite article goes before the word as in English or German;
-% east of the line it takes the form of a suffix.
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption[Danish dialects]{Danish dialects (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Danish_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+danishd}
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{\includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{danishd.pdf}\ixgrf{danishd.pdf}}\\%
-% \\*[1\baselineskip]%
-% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{danishg.pdf}\ixgrf{danishg.pdf}%
-% \IVC[80mm]{\awidth}{danishg.pdf}\ixgrf{danishg.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\footnotesize
-% La distribution d'un, deux et trois genres grammaticaux dans les dialectes danois. En Sealand (\emph{Sjælland}) la
-% transition de trois à~deux genres s'est produite assez récemment. À~l'ouest de la ligne rouge, l'article défini
-% se place avant le mot comme en anglais ou en allemend; à~l'est de la ligne, il prend la forme d'un suffixe.
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption[Dialectes danois]{Dialectes danois (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Danish_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+danishd}
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{18.9189892mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{dane-f.png}\ixgrfl{faroe-f.png}\ixgrfl{greenland-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Danish_Language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{dane-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Faroe_Islands}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{faroe-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Greenland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{greenland-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{danish}'' language\,\footnote{The danish (\emph{dansk}) language is spoken in Denmark, in the Faeroe
-% Islands and in Greenland.} are taken from the \xfile{danish.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Henning}{Larsen})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,danish}:
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{dane-f.png}\ixgrfl{faroe-f.png}\ixgrfl{greenland-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Danois}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{dane-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Îles_Féroé}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{faroe-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Groenland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{greenland-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{danish}~>> (danois\,\footnote{Le danois (\emph{dansk}) est parlé au Danemark, dans les Îles
-% Féroé et au Groenland.}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{danish.dtx}
-% (de \name{Henning}{Larsen})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,danish}:
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*danish>
-\ProvidesFile{danish.mld}[2007/12/18]%
-%% Danish titles from danish.dtx (babel). Larsen, Henning (larsen@cernvm.cern.ch)
-\def\ptctitle{Indhold}%
-\def\plftitle{Figurer}%
-\def\plttitle{Tabeller}%
-\def\mtctitle{Indhold}%
-\def\mlftitle{Figurer}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tabeller}%
-\def\stctitle{Indhold}%
-\def\slftitle{Figurer}%
-\def\slttitle{Tabeller}%
-%</danish>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Devanagari'' language: \uxfile{devanagari.mld}}\label{s+mld+devanagari}\ixfile{devanagari.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~devanagari~>>: \uxfile{devanagari.mld}}\label{s+mld+devanagari}\ixfile{devanagari.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{6.845238095mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrf{devanagari.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Devanagari}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{devanagari.png}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{devanagari}'' language are taken from the \xfile{devanagari.sty} and \xfile{captions.dn} files
-% (by \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, \name{John}{Smith},
-% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, \name{Richard}{Mahoney} and \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk})
-% in the Devan\=agar\={\i}
-% package~\cite{devanagari} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}). See also section~\vref{s+mld+hindi}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrf{devanagari.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Devanagari}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{devanagari.png}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{devanagari}~>> (hindi) sont tirés des fichiers \xfile{devanagari.sty} et \xfile{captions.dn}
-% (de \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, \name{John}{Smith},
-% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, \name{Richard}{Mahoney} et \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk})
-% dans le paquetage Devan\=agar\={\i}~\cite{devanagari} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}).
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+hindi}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\dn}
-% \begin{macro}{\qva}
-% \begin{macro}{\re}
-% \begin{macro}{\rs}
-% \begin{macro}{\8}
-% \begin{macro}{\2}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Specific fonts are required.
-% The home page of the package is~\url{http://devnag.sarovar.org}. See also~\cite{hindi99} about the hindi language.
-% \or\relax
-% Des fontes spécifiques sont requises.
-% La page Web du paquetage est~{\froff\url{http://devnag.sarovar.org}}.
-% Voir aussi~\cite{hindi99} sur la langue hindi.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*devanagari>
-\ProvidesFile{devanagari.mld}[2006/08/25]%
-%% Devanagari (hindi) titles from devanagari.sty by
-%% Pandey, Anshuman & Radhakrishnan, C.~V. & Wagner, Zden\v{e}k &
-%% Smith, John & Carmody, Kevin & Mahoney, Richard & Wujastyk, Dominik
-\def\ptctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}%
-\def\plftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}%
-\def\plttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}%
-\def\mtctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}%
-\def\mlftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}%
-\def\mlttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}%
-\def\stctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}%
-\def\slftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}%
-\def\slttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}%
-%</devanagari>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Dutch'' language: \uxfile{dutch.mld}}\label{s+mld+dutch}\ixfile{dutch.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~dutch~>>: \uxfile{dutch.mld}}\label{s+mld+dutch}\ixfile{dutch.mld}
-% \fi
-% ^^A (DU
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!bhp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{netherlands-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{belgium-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{flanders-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{brussels-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{suriname-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{aruba-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{netherlands-antilles-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Netherlands}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{netherlands-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Belgium}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{belgium-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Flanders}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{flanders-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Brussels-Capital_Region}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{brussels-f.png}}}\\
-% \textbf{Netherlands}&\textbf{Belgium}&\textbf{Flanders}&\textbf{Brussels}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Suriname}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{suriname-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Aruba}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{aruba-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Netherlands_Antilles}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{netherlands-antilles-f.png}}}&\\
-% \textbf{Suriname}&\textbf{Aruba}&\textbf{Netherlands~Antilles}&\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Dutch speaking countries]{Dutch speaking countries (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dutch})\hfill\null}\label{f+dutch-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tphb]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{netherlands-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{belgium-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{flanders-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{brussels-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{suriname-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{aruba-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{netherlands-antilles-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pays-Bas}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{netherlands-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Belgique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{belgium-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portail:Flandre}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{flanders-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Région_de_Bruxelles-Capitale}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{brussels-f.png}}}\\
-% \textbf{Pays-Bas}&\textbf{Belgique}&\textbf{Flandre}&\textbf{Bruxelles}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Suriname}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{suriname-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Aruba}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{aruba-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Antilles_néerlandaises}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{netherlands-antilles-f.png}}}&\\
-% \textbf{Suriname}&\textbf{Aruba}&\textbf{Antilles~néerlandaises}&\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Pays néerlandophones]{Pays néerlandophones (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Néerlandais})\hfill\null}\label{f+dutch-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \fi
-% ^^A DU)
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} ^^A % same sizes! (.381017882)
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} ^^A % same sizes! (.618982118)
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{neder.pdf}\ixgrf{neder.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{belgique.pdf}\ixgrf{belgique.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Languages in the Nederlands and in Belgium]{Languages in the Nederlands and in Belgium
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/paysbas_lng_Map.htm} and
-% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/belgique_lng-regionales.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+dutch}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Langues aux Pays-Bas et en Belgique]{Langues aux Pays-Bas et en Belgique
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/paysbas_lng_Map.htm} et
-% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/belgique_lng-regionales.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+dutch}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{dutchw.pdf}\ixgrf{dutchw.pdf}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[The dutch language in the world]{The dutch language in the world
-% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Néerlandais})\hfill\null}\label{f+dutchw}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Le néerlandais dans le monde]{Le néerlandais dans le monde
-% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Néerlandais})\hfill\null}\label{f+dutchw}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \lneed{3}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles
-% for the ``\lopt{dutch}'' language\,\footnote{The dutch language (\emph{nederlands}) is spoken in
-% the Netherlands and a part of Belgium; see figures~\vrefrange{f+dutch-c}{f+dutchw}.} are taken from the \xfile{dutch.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,dutch}:
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{dutch}~>> (néerlandais, \emph{nederlands})\,\footnote{La langue néerlandaise
-% est parlée aux Pays-Bas et dans une partie de la Belgique; voir les figures~\vrefrange{f+dutch-c}{f+dutchw}.} sont tirés
-% du fichier \xfile{dutch.dtx} (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) dans le
-% paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,dutch}:
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*dutch>
-\ProvidesFile{dutch.mld}[2007/12/18]%
-%% Dutch titles from dutch.dtx (babel) (Braams, Johannes~L.)
-\def\ptctitle{Inhoudsopgave}%
-\def\plftitle{L"yst van figuren}%
-\def\plttitle{L"yst van tabellen}%
-\def\mtctitle{Inhoudsopgave}%
-\def\mlftitle{L"yst van figuren}%
-\def\mlttitle{L"yst van tabellen}%
-\def\stctitle{Inhoudsopgave}%
-\def\slftitle{L"yst van figuren}%
-\def\slttitle{L"yst van tabellen}%
-%</dutch>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``English'' language: \uxfile{english.mld}}\label{s+mld+english}\ixfile{english.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~english~>>: \uxfile{english.mld}}\label{s+mld+english}\ixfile{english.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\loptd{english}'' language are taken from the \xfile{english.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}.
-% \emph{The\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0036}} presence of the \xfile{english.mld} file is mandatory, because english is the default language.}
-%
-% \reversemarginpar
-% See\ixgrfl{england-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/England}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{england-f.jpg}}}}}
-% also sections~\vref{s+mld+american},\ABK \vref{s+mld+australian},\ABK
-% \vref{s+mld+british},\ABK \vref{s+mld+canadian},\ABK \vref{s+mld+newzealand},\ABK \vref{s+mld+UKenglish},\ABK
-% and~\vref{s+mld+USenglish}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\loptd{english}~>> (anglais) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{english.dtx}
-% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}.
-% \emph{Notez que la\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0036}} présence du fichier \xfile{english.mld} est obligatoire, car l'anglais est la langue par défaut.}
-%
-% \reversemarginpar
-% Voir\ixgrfl{england-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Angleterre}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{england-f.jpg}}}}}
-% aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+american},\ABK \vref{s+mld+australian},\ABK \vref{s+mld+british},\ABK
-% \vref{s+mld+canadian},\ABK \vref{s+mld+newzealand},\ABK \vref{s+mld+UKenglish}\ABK et~\vref{s+mld+USenglish}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*english>
-\ProvidesFile{english.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% English titles from english.dtx (babel) (Braams, Johannes~L.)
-\def\ptctitle{Table of Contents}%
-\def\plftitle{List of Figures}%
-\def\plttitle{List of Tables}%
-%%
-\def\mtctitle{Contents}%
-\def\mlftitle{Figures}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tables}%
-\def\stctitle{Contents}%
-\def\slftitle{Figures}%
-\def\slttitle{Tables}%
-%</english>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{figure}[!tb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{anglo1.pdf}\ixgrf{anglo1.pdf}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Anglophone areas]{Anglophone areas
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/English_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+english}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions anglophones]{Régions anglophones
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/English_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+english}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% ^^A (ENG
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{uk-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{ireland-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{usa-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{canada-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{australia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{newzealand-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{ghana-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{liberia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{uganda-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{zimbabwe-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{jamaica-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{bahamas-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{barbados-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{dominica-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{vanuatu-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{fiji-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{solomon-islands-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{tanzania-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{cameroon-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{south-africa-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{singapore-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{philippines-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{samoa-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{kiribati-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{india-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{pakistan-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{tonga-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{tuvalu-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_Kingdom}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uk-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ireland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ireland-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/USA}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{usa-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Canada}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{canada-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{United~Kingdom~(1)}&\textbf{Ireland~(1)}&\textbf{USA}&\textbf{Canada~(2)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Australia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{australia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/New_Zealand}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{newzealand-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ghana}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ghana-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Liberia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{liberia-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Australia~(1)}&\textbf{New~Zealand~(1)}&\textbf{Ghana~(1)}&\textbf{Liberia~(1)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Uganda}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uganda-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zimbabwe}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{zimbabwe-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Jamaica}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{jamaica-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bahamas}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bahamas-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Uganda~(1)}&\textbf{Zimbabwe~(1)}&\textbf{Jamaica~(1)}&\textbf{Bahamas~(1)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Barbados}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{barbados-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dominica}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{dominica-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vanuatu}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vanuatu-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Fiji}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{fiji-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Barbados~(1)}&\textbf{Dominica~(1)}&\textbf{Vanuatu~(1)}&\textbf{Fiji~(1)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Solomon_Islands}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{solomon-islands-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tanzania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tanzania-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cameroon}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cameroon-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/South_Africa}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{south-africa-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Solomon~Islands~(1)}&\textbf{Tanzania~(2)}&\textbf{Cameroon~(2)}&\textbf{South~Africa~(2)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Singapore}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{singapore-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Philippines}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{philippines-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Samoa}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{samoa-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kiribati}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kiribati-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Singapore~(2)}&\textbf{Philippines~(2)}&\textbf{Samoa~(2)}&\textbf{Kiribati~(2)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/India}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{india-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pakistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{pakistan-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tonga}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tonga-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tuvalu}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tuvalu-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{India~(2)}&\textbf{Pakistan~(2)}&\textbf{Tonga}&\textbf{Tuvalu}\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{See~\cite[page~77]{comrie1990}~and~\cite[page~137]{LOE}}.\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(1)~English~is~the~only~official~language.}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(2)~English~is~one~of~the~official~languages.}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[English-speaking countries]{English-speaking countries (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/English_Language})\hfill\null}\label{f+eng-c}
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{uk-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{ireland-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{usa-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{canada-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{australia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{newzealand-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{ghana-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{liberia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{uganda-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{zimbabwe-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{jamaica-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{bahamas-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{barbados-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{dominica-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{vanuatu-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{fiji-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{solomon-islands-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{tanzania-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{cameroon-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{south-africa-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{singapore-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{philippines-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{samoa-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{kiribati-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{india-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{pakistan-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{tonga-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{tuvalu-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Royaume-Uni}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uk-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Irlande}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ireland-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/États-Unis}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{usa-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Canada}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{canada-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Royaume-Uni~(1)}&\textbf{Irlande~(1)}&\textbf{États-Unis}&\textbf{Canada~(2)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Australie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{australia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nouvelle-Zélande}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{newzealand-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ghana}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ghana-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Libéria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{liberia-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Australie~(1)}&\textbf{Nouvelle-Zélande~(1)}&\textbf{Ghana~(1)}&\textbf{Libéria~(1)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ouganda}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uganda-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zimbabwe}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{zimbabwe-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Jamaïque}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{jamaica-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bahamas}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bahamas-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Ouganda~(1)}&\textbf{Zimbabwe~(1)}&\textbf{Jamaïque~(1)}&\textbf{Bahamas~(1)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Barbade}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{barbados-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dominique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{dominica-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vanuatu}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vanuatu-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Fidji}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{fiji-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Barbade~(1)}&\textbf{Dominique~(1)}&\textbf{Vanuatu~(1)}&\textbf{Fidji~(1)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Salomon_(pays)}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{solomon-islands-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tanzanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tanzania-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cameroun}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cameroon-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Afrique~du~Sud}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{south-africa-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Îles~Salomon~(1)}&\textbf{Tanzanie~(2)}&\textbf{Cameroun~(2)}&\textbf{Afrique~du~Sud~(2)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Singapour}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{singapore-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Philippines}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{philippines-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Samoa}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{samoa-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kiribati}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kiribati-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Singapour~(2)}&\textbf{Philippines~(2)}&\textbf{Samoa~(2)}&\textbf{Kiribati~(2)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Inde}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{india-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pakistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{pakistan-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tonga}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tonga-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tuvalu}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tuvalu-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Inde~(2)}&\textbf{Pakistan~(2)}&\textbf{Tonga}&\textbf{Tuvalu}\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{Voir~\cite[page~77]{comrie1990}~et~\cite[page~137]{LOE}}.\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(1)~L'anglais~est~la~seule~langue~officielle.}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(2)~L'anglais~est~l'une~des~langues~officielles.}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Pays anglophones]{Pays anglophones (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Anglais})\hfill\null}\label{f+eng-c}
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \fi
-% ^^A ENG)
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``English1'' language: \uxfile{english1.mld}}\label{s+mld+english1}\ixfile{english1.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~english1~>>: \uxfile{english1.mld}}\label{s+mld+english1}\ixfile{english1.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\ifnum}
-% \begin{macro}{\value}
-% \begin{macro}{\Roman}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{english1}'' language come from the \xfile{english.dtx} file
-% (written by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}, with some adaptations for the part-level titles.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{english1}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{english.dtx}
-% (écrit par \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}, avec quelques adaptations pour les titres
-% au niveau partie.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*english1>
-\ProvidesFile{english1.mld}[2006/03/30]%
-%% English titles from english.dtx (babel) Braams, Johannes~L.
-%% ptctitle, plftitle and plttitle modified (JPFD)
-\def\ptctitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax
- Table of Contents of the First Part\relax
- \else Table of Contents of Part~\Roman{part}\fi}%
-\def\plftitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax
- List of Figures in the First Part\relax
- \else List of Figures in Part~\Roman{part}\fi}%
-\def\plttitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax
- List of Tables in the First Part\relax
- \else List of Tables in Part~\Roman{part}\fi}%
-%%
-\def\mtctitle{Contents}%
-\def\mlftitle{Figures}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tables}%
-\def\stctitle{Contents}%
-\def\slftitle{Figures}%
-\def\slttitle{Tables}%
-%</english1>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``English2'' language: \uxfile{english2.mld}}\label{s+mld+english2}\ixfile{english2.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~english2~>>: \uxfile{english2.mld}}\label{s+mld+english2}\ixfile{english2.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcEnglishIIpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifcase}
-% \begin{macro}{\value}
-% \begin{macro}{\Roman}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{english2}'' language are again taken from the \xfile{english.dtx} file
-% (written by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}, with adaptations at the part level.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{english2}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{english.dtx}
-% (écrit par \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}, avec adaptations au niveau partie.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*english2>
-\ProvidesFile{english2.mld}[2006/03/30]%
-%% English titles from english.dtx (babel) Braams, Johannes~L.
-%% ptctitle, plftitle and plttitle modified (JPFD)
-\def\mtcEnglishIIpart{\ifcase\value{part}%
-\or the First Part\or the Second Part\or the Third Part
-\or the Fourth Part\or the Fifth Part\or the Sixth Part
-\or the Seventh Part\or the Eighth Part\or the Ninth Part
-\or the Tenth Part\or the Eleventh Part\or the Twelfth Part
-\or the Thirteenth Part\or the Fourteenth Part \or the Fifteenth Part
-\or the Sixteenth Part \or the Seventeenth Part \or the Eighteenth Part
-\or the Nineteenth Part\or the Twentieth Part \else Part~\Roman{part}\fi}
-\def\ptctitle{Contents of \mtcEnglishIIpart}
-\def\plftitle{List of Figures in \mtcEnglishIIpart}
-\def\plttitle{List of Tables in \mtcEnglishIIpart}
-%%
-\def\mtctitle{Contents}%
-\def\mlftitle{Figures}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tables}%
-\def\stctitle{Contents}%
-\def\slftitle{Figures}%
-\def\slttitle{Tables}%
-%</english2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Esperant'' language: \uxfile{esperant.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperant}\ixfile{esperant.mld}
-% The titles\ixgrfl{esperanto-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Esperanto}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{esperanto-f.png}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{esperant}'' (espéranto) language are taken from the \xfile{esperanto.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Marti}{Ruiz-Altaba} and \name{Jörg}{Knappen})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,esperanto}.
-% The esperanto artificial language was created in the 1877--1885 years
-% by Doctor~\namea{Ludwig~Lejzer}{Zamenhof\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Zamenhof}\footnote{See
-% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/L.L._Zamenhof},
-% \url{http://uea.org/} and \url{http://www.esperanto-france.org/} for more information; his first names are
-% sometimes spelled ``Ludvic Lazarus'' or ``Louis-Lazare'', with small variations.} (1859--1917) of Warsaw, Poland.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~esperant~>>: \uxfile{esperant.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperant}\ixfile{esperant.mld}
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{esperanto-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Esperanto}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{esperanto-f.png}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{esperant}~>> (espéranto) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{esperanto.dtx}
-% (de \name{Marti}{Ruiz-Altaba} et \name{Jörg}{Knappen})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,esperanto}.
-% La langue artificielle esperanto a été créée dans les années 1877--1885 par le docteur
-% \namea{Ludwig~Lejzer}{Zamenhof\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Zamenhof}\,{\froff\footnote{Voir
-% \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zamenhof},
-% \url{http://uea.org/} et \url{http://www.esperanto-france.org/} pour plus d'informations. Ses prénoms sont
-% parfois écrits \og~Ludvic Lazarus~\fg{} ou \og~Louis-Lazare~\fg, avec quelques variantes.}} (1859--1917) de
-% Varsovie en Pologne.
-% \fi
-%
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*esperant>
-\ProvidesFile{esperant.mld}[2006/12/19]%
-%% Esperanto titles from esperanto.dtx (babel) Ruiz-Altaba, Marti & Knappen, Jörg
-\def\ptctitle{Enhavo}%
-\def\plftitle{Listo de figuroj}%
-\def\plttitle{Listo de tabeloj}%
-\def\mtctitle{Enhavo}%
-\def\mlftitle{Listo de figuroj}%
-\def\mlttitle{Listo de tabeloj}%
-\def\stctitle{Enhavo}%
-\def\slftitle{Listo de figuroj}%
-\def\slttitle{Listo de tabeloj}%
-%</esperant>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Esperanto'' language: \uxfile{esperanto.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperanto}\ixfile{esperanto.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~esperanto~>>: \uxfile{esperanto.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperanto}\ixfile{esperanto.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{esperanto}'' and ``\lopt{esperant}'' languages are synonyms, so we just load the
-% \xfile{esperant.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+esperant}):
-% \or\relax
-% Les langues <<~\lopt{esperanto}~>> et <<~\lopt{esperant}~>> sont synonymes, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier
-% \xfile{esperant.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+esperant}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*esperanto>
-\ProvidesFile{esperanto.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{esperant}%
-%</esperanto>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Estonian'' language: \uxfile{estonian.mld}}\label{s+mld+estonian}\ixfile{estonian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~estonian~>>: \uxfile{estonian.mld}}\label{s+mld+estonian}\ixfile{estonian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{estonia-a.pdf}\ixgrf{estonia-a.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{estonia-b.pdf}\ixgrf{estonia-b.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Estonia]{Estonia (\url{http://www.estonica.org/eng/maps/index-eng.html},
-% under the Creative Commons License,
-% see~\url{http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/1.0/deed.en_GB})\hfill\null}\label{f+estonia}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Estonie]{Estonie (\url{http://www.estonica.org/eng/maps/index-eng.html},
-% sous la \emph{Creative Commons License},
-% voir~\url{http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/1.0/deed.fr})\hfill\null}\label{f+estonia}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{estonia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Estonia}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{estonia-f.png}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{estonian}'' language\,\footnote{Estonian (\emph{eesti keel}) is \emph{not} a baltic language, but a
-% language from the uralian family.} are taken from the \xfile{estonian.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Enn}{Saar})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,estonian}:
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{estonia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Estonie}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{estonia-f.png}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{estonian}~>> (estonien\,\footnote{L'estonien (\emph{eesti keel}) \emph{n'est pas} une langue
-% balte, mais une langue de la famille ouralienne.}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{estonian.dtx}
-% (de \name{Enn}{Saar})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,estonian}:
-% \fi
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!p]
-% ^^A \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% ^^A \centering
-% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{baltic-s.jpg}\ixgrf{baltic-s.jpg}%
-% ^^A \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% ^^A \caption[Baltic Sea]{Baltic Sea (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Baltic_peoples})\hfill\null}\label{f+baltic-s}
-% ^^A \or\relax
-% ^^A \caption[Mer Baltique]{[Mer Baltique (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Baltic_peoples})\hfill\null}\label{f+baltic-s}
-% ^^A \fi
-% ^^A \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*estonian>
-\ProvidesFile{estonian.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Estonian titles from estonian.dtx (babel) Saar, Enn
-\def\ptctitle{Sisukord}%
-\def\plftitle{Joonised}%
-\def\plttitle{Tabelid}%
-\def\mtctitle{Sisukord}%
-\def\mlftitle{Joonised}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tabelid}%
-\def\stctitle{Sisukord}%
-\def\slftitle{Joonised}%
-\def\slttitle{Tabelid}%
-%</estonian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Ethiopia'' language: \uxfile{ethiopia.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopia}\ixfile{ethiopia.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~ethiopia~>>: \uxfile{ethiopia.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopia}\ixfile{ethiopia.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.447761194\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.552238806\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{ethiopia.pdf}\ixgrf{ethiopia.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{ethiopia-p.pdf}\ixgrf{ethiopia-p.pdf}\\*[\bigskipamount]
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{ethiolang.png}\ixgrf{ethiolang.png}}
-%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Ethiopian languages areas]{Ethiopian languages areas
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/ethiopie-prov.htm}
-% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/ethiopie.htm} in~\cite{tlfq};
-% see also \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Geography_of_Ethiopia})\hfill\null}\label{f+ethiopia}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions des langues éthiopiennes]{Régions des langues éthiopiennes
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/ethiopie-prov.htm}
-% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/ethiopie.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq}
-% voir aussi \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Geography_of_Ethiopia})\hfill\null}\label{f+ethiopia}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-%
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.642441860mm}
-% \begin{macro}{\eth@doaltchar}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% The titles\ixgrf{eth2.png}\ixgrfl{ethiopia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Amharic}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{eth2.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ethiopa}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ethiopia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{ethiopia}'' language (amharic, \emph{\=amari\"{n}\"{n}a}) are taken from the \pack{ethiop} package~\cite{ethiop}
-% (written by \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, \name{Olaf}{Kummer}, and \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}). Specific
-% fonts are needed. See also section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopian2}. See figure~\vref{f+ethiopia} for the repartition of
-% the various ethiopian dialects.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrf{eth2.png}\ixgrfl{ethiopia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Amharic}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{eth2.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ethiopa}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ethiopia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{ethiopia}~>> (éthiopien, amarique, \emph{amaregna}) sont tirés du paquetage \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}
-% (écrit par \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, \name{Olaf}{Kummer} et \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}).
-% Des fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopian2}.
-% Voir la figure~\vref{f+ethiopia} pour la répartition des divers dialectes éthiopiens.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ethiopia>
-\ProvidesFile{ethiopia.mld}[1999/03/16]%
-%% Ethopian titles. Needs special fonts.
-\def\ptctitle{yezate}%
-\def\plftitle{%
- ya\eth@doaltchar{85}`elo\eth@doaltchar{109} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}%
-\def\plttitle{%
- yasane\eth@doaltchar{176}ra\eth@doaltchar{149} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}%
-\def\mtctitle{yezate}%
-\def\mlftitle{%
- ya\eth@doaltchar{85}`elo\eth@doaltchar{109} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}%
-\def\mlttitle{%
- yasane\eth@doaltchar{176}ra\eth@doaltchar{149} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}%
-\def\stctitle{yezate}%
-\def\slftitle{%
- ya\eth@doaltchar{85}`elo\eth@doaltchar{109} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}%
-\def\slttitle{%
- yasane\eth@doaltchar{176}ra\eth@doaltchar{149} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}%
-%</ethiopia>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Ethiopian'' language: \uxfile{ethiopian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian}\ixfile{ethopian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~ethiopian~>>: \uxfile{ethiopian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian}\ixfile{ethopian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{ethiopian}'' language is just a synonym for the ``\lopt{ethiopia}'' language, so we just load the
-% \xfile{ethiopia.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}).
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{ethiopian}~>> (éthiopien) est un simple synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{ethiopia}~>>,
-% donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier \xfile{ethiopia.mld}
-% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}).
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ethiopian>
-\ProvidesFile{ethiopian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{ethiopia}%
-%</ethiopian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Ethiopian2'' language: \uxfile{ethiopian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian2}\ixfile{ethiopian2.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{ethiopian2}'' language (for Omega) are taken from the \pack{ethiop} package~\cite{ethiop}
-% (by \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, \name{Olaf}{Kummer}, and \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}).
-% Specific fonts are needed. See also section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~ethiopian2~>>: \uxfile{ethiopian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian2}\ixfile{ethiopian2.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{ethiopian2}~>> (éthiopien pour Omega) sont tirés
-% du paquetage \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}
-% (de \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, \name{Olaf}{Kummer} et \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}).
-% Des fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ethiopian2>
-\ProvidesFile{ethiopian2.mld}[2006/01/30]%
-%% Ethopian titles with Omega. Needs special fonts
-\def\ptctitle{^^^^12ed^^^^12d8^^^^1275}%
-\def\plftitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1225^^^^12d5^^^^120e^^^^127d ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}%
-\def\plttitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1230^^^^1295^^^^1320^^^^1228^^^^12e5
- ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}%
-\def\mtctitle{^^^^12ed^^^^12d8^^^^1275}%
-\def\mlftitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1225^^^^12d5^^^^120e^^^^127d ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}%
-\def\mlttitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1230^^^^1295^^^^1320^^^^1228^^^^12e5
- ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}%
-\def\stctitle{^^^^12ed^^^^12d8^^^^1275}%
-\def\slftitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1225^^^^12d5^^^^120e^^^^127d ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}%
-\def\slttitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1230^^^^1295^^^^1320^^^^1228^^^^12e5
- ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}%
-%</ethiopian2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{30.96125mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Farsi1'' language: \uxmldo{farsi1}}\label{s+mld+farsi1}\ixmldo{farsi1}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% There are\ixgrf{farsi-logo.png}\ixgrfl{iran-f.png}\ixgrfl{afghan-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Iran}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{iran-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Afghanistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{afghan-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://www.farsitex.org}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=2.5cm]{farsi-logo.png}}\end{tabular}}}
-% several variants for the farsi language, spoken in Iran and Afghanistan (see figure~\vref{f+farsi}).
-% The ``\lopt{farsi1}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{farsi.sty} file in the
-% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi} system{\protect\FARSINOTE}, by \xname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod},
-% \xname{Roozbeh}{Pournader},
-% \xname{Hassan}{Abolhassani}, and others.
-% Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}.
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{farsi1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{farsi1.mlo}.
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip,viewport= 0 0 365 402]{farsi.pdf}\ixgrf{farsi.pdf}%
-% \caption[Farsi language areas]{Farsi language areas (\url{http://www.farsinet.com/farsi};
-% see also \url{http://www.farsinet.com/farsi/linguistic_composition_of_iran.html})\hfill\null}\label{f+farsi}
-% \end{figure}
-%
-% \or\relax
-% \lneed{8}
-% \section{Langue <<~farsi1~>>: \uxmldo{farsi1}}\label{s+mld+farsi1}\ixmldo{farsi1}
-% \begin{figure}[!thb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip,viewport= 0 0 365 402]{farsi.pdf}\ixgrf{farsi.pdf}%
-% \caption[Régions de la langue farsi]{Régions de la langue farsi (\url{http://www.farsinet.com/farsi};
-% voir aussi \url{http://www.farsinet.com/farsi/linguistic_composition_of_iran.html})\hfill\null}\label{f+farsi}
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{30.96125mm}
-% Il y~a\ixgrf{farsi-logo.png}\ixgrfl{iran-f.png}\ixgrfl{afghan-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Iran}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{iran-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Afghanistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{afghan-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://www.farsitex.org}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=2.5cm]{farsi-logo.png}}\end{tabular}}}
-% plusieurs variantes pour la langue farsi, parlée en Iran et en Afghanistan (voir la figure~\vref{f+farsi}).
-% La langue <<~\lopt{farsi1}~>> (farsi première variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{farsi.sty} du
-% système
-% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi}\,{\protect\FARSINOTE},
-% par \xname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, \xname{Roozbeh}{Pournader}, \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod}, \xname{Hassan}{Abolhassani} et~al.
-% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}.
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{farsi1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement,
-% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{farsi1.mlo}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{iranian.jpg}\ixgrf{iranian.jpg}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Iranian tongues]{Iranian tongues (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Persan})\hfill\null}\label{f+iranian}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Langues iraniennes]{Langues iraniennes
-% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Persan})\hfill\null}\label{f+iranian}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*farsi1>
-\ProvidesFile{farsi1.mld}[2005/09/13]\mtcloadmlo{farsi1}%
-%% From farsi.sty of the FarsiTeX project by Dr Mohammad Ghodsi,
-%% Roozbeh Pournader (roozbeh@sharif.edu), Hassan Abolhassani, & others.
-%% http://www.farsitex.org
-%</farsi1>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \section{``Farsi2'' language: \uxmldo{farsi2}}\label{s+mld+farsi2}\ixmldo{farsi2}
-% There are several variants for the farsi language, spoken in Iran and Afghanistan (see figure~\vref{f+farsi}).
-% The ``\lopt{farsi2}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{farsi.sty} file in the \mbox{\packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}}
-% system~\cite{farsi}{\protect\FARSINOTE}, by \xname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, \name{Roozbeh}{Pournader},
-% \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod}, \name{Hassan}{Abolhassani}, and others.
-% Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+farsi1}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~farsi2~>>: \uxmldo{farsi2}}\label{s+mld+farsi2}\ixmldo{farsi2}
-% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour la langue farsi, parlée en Iran et en Afghanistan (voir la
-% figure~\vref{f+farsi}).
-% La langue <<~\lopt{farsi2}~>> (farsi deuxième variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{farsi.sty} du
-% système \mbox{\packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}}~\cite{farsi}\,{\protect\FARSINOTE}, développé par \xname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi},
-% \name{Roozbeh}{Pournader}, \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod}, \name{Hassan}{Abolhassani} et~al.
-% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+farsi1}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{farsi2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated,
-% hence we load \xfile{farsi2.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{farsi2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement,
-% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{farsi2.mlo}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*farsi2>
-\ProvidesFile{farsi2.mld}[2005/09/13]\mtcloadmlo{farsi2}%
-%% From farsi.sty (FarsiTeX project: http://www.farsitex.org). Dr Mohammad Ghodsi,
-%% Roozbeh Pournader (roozbeh@sharif.edu), Hassan Abolhassani, & others.
-%</farsi2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Farsi3'' language: \uxfile{farsi3.mld}}\label{s+mld+farsi3}%
-% \ixfile{farsi3.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~farsi3~>>: \uxfile{farsi3.mld}}\label{s+mld+farsi3}%
-% \ixfile{farsi3.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\FR}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% There are several variants for the farsi language, spoken in Iran and Afghanistan (see figure~\vref{f+farsi}).
-% The ``\lopt{farsi3}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{farsi.ldf} file in the \packa{\Arabi}{arabi} system\cite{arabi},
-% by \xname{Youssef}{Jabri}. Special fonts are needed, of course.
-% \or\relax
-% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour la langue farsi, parlée en Iran et en Afghanistan (voir la figure~\vref{f+farsi}).
-% La langue <<~\lopt{farsi3}~>> utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{farsi.ldf} du
-% système \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}, par \xname{Youssef}{Jabri}.
-% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*farsi3>
-\ProvidesFile{farsi3.mld}[2006/07/27]%
-%% From farsi.ldf of the Arabi system by Youssef Jabri.
-\def\ptctitle{\FR{\fa\ha\ra\seen\taa\space\meem\nun\dal\ra\jeem\alef\taa}}%
-\def\plftitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \alef\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}%
-\def\plttitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}%
-\def\mtctitle{\FR{\fa\ha\ra\seen\taa\space\meem\nun\dal\ra\jeem\alef\taa}}%
-\def\mlftitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \alef\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}%
-\def\mlttitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}%
-\def\stctitle{\FR{\fa\ha\ra\seen\taa\space\meem\nun\dal\ra\jeem\alef\taa}}%
-\def\slftitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \alef\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}%
-\def\slttitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}%
-%</farsi3>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Finnish'' language: \uxfile{finnish.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish}\ixfile{finnish.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~finnish~>>: \uxfile{finnish.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish}\ixfile{finnish.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.437269373\iwidth}
-% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.562730627\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.505\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.495\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{finlande1.png}\ixgrf{finlande1.png}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{finlande2.pdf}\ixgrf{finlande2.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Finland]{Finland (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/finlande_regions.htm} in~\cite{tlfq};
-% see also \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Baltic-Finnic_languages})\hfill\null}\label{f+finland}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Finlande]{Finlande (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/finlande_regions.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq};
-% voir aussi \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Baltic-Finnic_languages})\hfill\null}\label{f+finland}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{finnishl.pdf}\ixgrf{finnishl.pdf}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Areas of the Finnish language]{Areas of the Finnish language -- blue: official language; dark green:
-% spoken by a minority
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Finnish_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+finnishl}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions de la langue finnoise]{Régions de la langue finnoise -- bleu: langue officielle; vert foncé:
-% langue parlée par une minorité
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Finnish_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+finnishl}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{finnishd.pdf}\ixgrf{finnishd.pdf}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Finnish dialects]{Finnish dialects
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Finnish_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+finnishd}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Dialectes finnois]{Dialectes finnois
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Finnish_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+finnishd}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{15.28125mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{finland-f.png}\ixgrfl{aaland-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Finnish_Language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{finland-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Åland_Islands}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{aaland-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{finnish}'' language (\emph{suomi}) are taken from the \xfile{finnish.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Mikko}{Kanerva} and \name{Keranen}{Reino})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,finnish}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+finnish2}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{finland-f.png}\ixgrfl{aaland-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Finnois}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{finland-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Åland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{aaland-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{finnish}~>> (finnois, \emph{suomi}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{finnish.dtx}
-% (de \name{Mikko}{Kanerva} et \name{Keranen}{Reino})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,finnish}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+finnish2}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*finnish>
-\ProvidesFile{finnish.mld}[2006/03/20]%
-%% Finnish titles from finnish.dtx (babel). Kanerva, Mikko & Reino, Keranen
-\def\ptctitle{Sis\"alt\"o}%
-\def\plftitle{Kuvat}%
-\def\plttitle{Taulukot}%
-\def\mtctitle{Sis\"alt\"o}%
-\def\mlftitle{Kuvat}%
-\def\mlttitle{Taulukot}%
-\def\stctitle{Sis\"alt\"o}%
-\def\slftitle{Kuvat}%
-\def\slttitle{Taulukot}%
-%</finnish>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Finnish2'' language: \uxfile{finnish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish2}\ixfile{finnish2.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{finnish2}'' language are taken from a variant proposed by the \xfile{finnish.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Mikko}{Kanerva} and \name{Keranen}{Reino})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,finnish}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+finnish}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~finnish2~>>: \uxfile{finnish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish2}\ixfile{finnish2.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{finnish2}~>> (finnois seconde variante) sont tirés d'une variante proposée
-% par le fichier \xfile{finnish.dtx}
-% (de \name{Mikko}{Kanerva} et \name{Keranen}{Reino})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,finnish}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+finnish}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*finnish2>
-\ProvidesFile{finnish2.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Finnish titles (variant) from finnish.dtx (babel). Kanerva, Mikko & Reino, Keranen
-\def\ptctitle{Sis\"allys}%
-\def\plftitle{Kuvat}%
-\def\plttitle{Taulukot}%
-\def\mtctitle{Sis\"allys}%
-\def\mlftitle{Kuvat}%
-\def\mlttitle{Taulukot}%
-\def\stctitle{Sis\"allys}%
-\def\slftitle{Kuvat}%
-\def\slttitle{Taulukot}%
-%</finnish2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{12}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Francais'' language: \uxfile{francais.mld}}\label{s+mld+francais}\ixfile{francais.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~francais~>>: \uxfile{francais.mld}}\label{s+mld+francais}\ixfile{francais.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{francais}'' (\emph{français})
-% language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{french}'' language, so we load the file \xfile{french.mld} (see
-% section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{francais}~>> (\emph{français}) est synonyme de la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>>,
-% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{french.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*francais>
-\ProvidesFile{francais.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{french}%
-%</francais>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``French'' language: \uxfile{french.mld}}\label{s+mld+french}\ixfile{french.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~french~>>: \uxfile{french.mld}}\label{s+mld+french}\ixfile{french.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!thb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,viewport=0 0 1425 631,clip]{franco.png}\ixgrf{franco.png}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Francophone areas]{Francophone areas
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/French_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+french}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions francophones]{Régions francophones
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/French_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+french}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[htb!]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{france-lr.png}\ixgrf{france-lr.png}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Regional dialects in France]{Regional dialects in France
-% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Langues_régionales_de_France})\hfill\null}\label{f+france-lr}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Langues régionales de France]{Langues régionales de France
-% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Langues_régionales_de_France})\hfill\null}\label{f+france-lr}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% ^^A (FRANCO-EU
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{albania-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{andorra-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{belgium-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{wallonia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{bulgaria-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{france-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{greece-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{lux-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{macedonia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{moldova-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{monaco-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{romania-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{suisse-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{cyprus-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{austria-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{croatia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{hungary-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{lithuania-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{poland-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{czech-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{serbia-f2.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{slovakia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{slovenia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{ukraine-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{vatican-f.jpg}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Albania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{albania-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Andorra}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{andorra-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Belgium}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{belgium-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Walloon_Region}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{wallonia-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Albania}&\textbf{Andorra}&\textbf{Belgium}&\textbf{Walloon~Region}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bulgaria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bulgaria-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/France}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{france-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Greece}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{greece-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Luxembourg}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lux-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Bulgaria}&\textbf{France}&\textbf{Greece}&\textbf{Luxembourg}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Macedonia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{macedonia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Moldova}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{moldova-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Monaco}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{monaco-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Romania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{romania-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Macedonia}&\textbf{Moldova}&\textbf{Monaco}&\textbf{Romania}\\%
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Switzerland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{suisse-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cyprus}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cyprus-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Austria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{austria-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Croatia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{croatia-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Switzerland}&\textbf{Cyprus~(a)}&\textbf{Austria~(o)}&\textbf{Croatia~(o)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hungary}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{hungary-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lithuania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lithuania-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Poland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{poland-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Czech_Republic}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{czech-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Hungary}~(o)&\textbf{Lithuania}~(o)&\textbf{Poland}~(o)&\textbf{Czech~Rep.}~(o)\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serbia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{serbia-f2.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovakia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{slovakia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovenia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{slovenia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ukraine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ukraine-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Serbia~(o)}&\textbf{Slovakia~(o)}&\textbf{Slovenia~(o)}&\textbf{Ukraine~(o)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vatican}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vatican-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Brussels-Capital_Region}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{brussels-f.png}}}&&\\%
-% \textbf{Vatican~(v)}&\textbf{Brussels}&&\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(a)~Associated member.}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(o)~Observer.}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(v)~Vatican uses french as its official diplomatic language.}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Francophone countries in Europe]{Francophone countries in Europe (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-eu-c}
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{albania-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{andorra-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{belgium-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{wallonia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{bulgaria-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{france-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{greece-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{lux-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{macedonia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{moldova-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{monaco-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{romania-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{suisse-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{cyprus-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{austria-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{croatia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{hungary-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{lithuania-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{poland-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{czech-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{serbia-f2.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{slovakia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{slovenia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{ukraine-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{vatican-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{brussels-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Albanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{albania-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Andorre}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{andorra-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Belgique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{belgium-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Communauté_française_de_Belgique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{wallonia-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Albanie}&\textbf{Andorre}&\textbf{Belgique}&\textbf{Wallonie}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bulgarie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bulgaria-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/France}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{france-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Grèce}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{greece-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Luxembourg}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lux-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Bulgarie}&\textbf{France}&\textbf{Grèce}&\textbf{Luxembourg}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Macédoine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{macedonia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Moldavie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{moldova-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Monaco}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{monaco-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Roumanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{romania-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Macédoine}&\textbf{Moldavie}&\textbf{Monaco}&\textbf{Roumanie}\\%
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Suisse}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{suisse-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chypre}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cyprus-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Autriche}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{austria-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Croatie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{croatia-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Suisse}&\textbf{Chypre~(a)}&\textbf{Autriche~(o)}&\textbf{Croatie~(o)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hongrie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{hungary-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lituanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lithuania-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pologne}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{poland-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_tchèque}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{czech-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Hongrie}~(o)&\textbf{Lituanie}~(o)&\textbf{Pologne}~(o)&\textbf{Rép.~tchèque}~(o)\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serbie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{serbia-f2.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovaquie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{slovakia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovénie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{slovenia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ukraine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ukraine-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Serbie~(o)}&\textbf{Slovaquie~(o)}&\textbf{Slovénie~(o)}&\textbf{Ukraine~(o)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vatican}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vatican-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Région_de_Bruxelles-Capitale}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{brussels-f.png}}}&&\\%
-% \textbf{Vatican~(v)}&&&\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(a)~Membre associé.}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(o)~Observateur.}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(v)~Le Vatican utilise le français comme langue diplomatique officielle.}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Pays francophones en Europe]{Pays francophones en Europe (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-eu-c}
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \fi
-% ^^A FRANCO-EU)
-% ^^A (FRANCO-AM
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{canada-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{nbrunswick-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{quebec-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{dominica-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{haiti-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{saint-lucia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrf{california-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{louisiana-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{maine-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrf{new-york-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{vermont-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Canada}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{canada-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/New_Brunswick}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{nbrunswick-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Quebec}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{quebec-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dominica}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{dominica-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Canada}&\textbf{New~Brunswick}&\textbf{Quebec}&\textbf{Dominica}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Haiti}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{haiti-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Saint_Lucia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{saint-lucia-f.png}}}&&\\%
-% \textbf{Haiti}&\textbf{Saint~Lucia}&&\\%
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/California}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{california-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Louisiana}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{louisiana-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Maine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{maine-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/New_York}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{new-york-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Califorbia~(u)}&\textbf{Louisiana~(u)}&\textbf{Maine~(u)}&\textbf{New~York~(u)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vermont}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vermont-f.png}}}&&&\\%
-% \textbf{Vermont~(u)}&&&\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(u)~State of the USA; not member because of federal restrictions.}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Francophone countries in Americas and the Caribbean]{Francophone countries in
-% Americas and the Caribbean (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-amc-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{canada-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{nbrunswick-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{quebec-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{dominica-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{haiti-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{saint-lucia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrf{california-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{louisiana-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{maine-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrf{new-york-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{vermont-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Canada}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{canada-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nouveau_Brunswick}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{nbrunswick-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Québec}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{quebec-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dominique_(Pays)}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{dominica-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Canada}&\textbf{Nouveau~Brunswick}&\textbf{Québec}&\textbf{Dominique}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Haïti}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{haiti-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sainte-Lucie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{saint-lucia-f.png}}}&&\\%
-% \textbf{Haïti}&\textbf{Sainte-Lucie}&&\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Californie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{california-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Louisiane}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{louisiana-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Maine_(État)}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{maine-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Etat_de_New_York}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{new-york-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Californie~(u)}&\textbf{Louisiane~(u)}&\textbf{Maine~(u)}&\textbf{New~York~(u)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vermont}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vermont-f.png}}}&&&\\%
-% \textbf{Vermont~(u)}&&&\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(u)~État des États-Unis: non membre pour cause de restrictions fédérales.}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Pays francophones aux Amériques et dans les Caraïbes]{Pays francophones aux
-% Amériques et dans les Caraïbes (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-amc-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \fi
-% ^^A FRANCO-AM)
-% ^^A (FRANCO-AFN
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{egypt-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{lebanon-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{morocco-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{mauritania-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{tunisia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{algeria-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{israel-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Egypt}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{egypt-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lebanon}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lebanon-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Morocco}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{morocco-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mauritania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mauritania-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Egypt}&\textbf{Lebanon}&\textbf{Morocco}&\textbf{Mauritania}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tunisia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tunisia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Algeria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{algeria-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Israel}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{israel-f.png}}}&\\%
-% \textbf{Tunisia}&\textbf{Algeria~(p)}&\textbf{Israel~(p)}&\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(p)~Not member for political motives.}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Francophone countries in North~Africa and Middle~East]{Francophone countries in
-% North~Africa and Middle~East (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-afn-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{egypt-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{lebanon-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{morocco-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{mauritania-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{tunisia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{algeria-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{israel-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Égypte}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{egypt-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Liban}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lebanon-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Maroc}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{morocco-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mauritanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mauritania-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Égypte}&\textbf{Liban}&\textbf{Maroc}&\textbf{Mauritanie}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tunisie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tunisia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Algérie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{algeria-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Israël}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{israel-f.png}}}&\\%
-% \textbf{Tunisie}&\textbf{Algérie~(p)}&\textbf{Israël~(p)}&\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(p)~Non membre pour des motifs politiques.}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Pays francophones en Afrique du Nord et au Moyen~Orient]{Pays francophones en
-% Afrique du Nord et au Moyen~Orient (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-afn-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \fi
-% ^^A FRANCO-AFN)
-% ^^A (FRANCO-AFW
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{benin-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{burkina-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{cap-verde-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{ivory-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{guinea-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{guinea-bissau-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{mali-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{niger-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{senegal-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{togo-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{ghana-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Benin}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{benin-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Burkina_Faso}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{burkina-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cape_Verde}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cap-verde-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ivory_Coast}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ivory-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Benin}&\textbf{Burkina~Faso}&\textbf{Cape~Verde}&\textbf{Ivory~Coast}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guinea}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{guinea-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guinea-Bissau}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{guinea-bissau-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mali}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mali-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Niger}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{niger-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Guinea}&\textbf{Guinea-Bissau}&\textbf{Mali}&\textbf{Niger}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Senegal}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{senegal-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Togo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{togo-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ghana}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ghana-f.png}}}&\\%
-% \textbf{Senegal}&\textbf{Togo}&\textbf{Ghana~(a)}&\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(a)~Associated member.}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Francophone countries in West~Africa]{Francophone countries in
-% West~Africa (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-afw-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{benin-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{burkina-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{cap-verde-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{ivory-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{guinea-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{guinea-bissau-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{mali-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{niger-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{senegal-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{togo-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{ghana-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bénin}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{benin-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Burkina_Faso}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{burkina-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cap-Vert}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cap-verde-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Côte_d'Ivoire}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ivory-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Bénin}&\textbf{Burkina~Faso}&\textbf{Cap-Vert}&\textbf{Côte~d'Ivoire}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guinée}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{guinea-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guinée-bissau}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{guinea-bissau-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mali}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mali-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Niger}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{niger-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Guinée}&\textbf{Guinée-bissau}&\textbf{Mali}&\textbf{Niger}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sénégal}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{senegal-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Togo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{togo-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ghana}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ghana-f.png}}}&\\%
-% \textbf{Sénégal}&\textbf{Togo}&\textbf{Ghana~(a)}&\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(a)~Membre associé.}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Pays francophones en Afrique de l'Ouest]{Pays francophones en Afrique de l'Ouest
-% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-afw-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \fi
-% ^^A FRANCO-AFW)
-% ^^A (FRANCO-AC
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{burundi-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{cameroon-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{central-africa-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{congo-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{rdcongo-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{gabon-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{equa-guinea-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{rwanda-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{sao-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{chad-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Burundi}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{burundi-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cameroon}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cameroon-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Central_African_Republic}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{central-africa-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Republic_of_the_Congo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{congo-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Burundi}&\textbf{Cameroon}&\textbf{Central-African-Rep.}&\textbf{Congo}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Democratic_Republic_of_the_Congo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{rdcongo-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gabon}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{gabon-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Equatorial_Guinea}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{equa-guinea-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rwanda}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{rwanda-f.png}}}\\
-% \textbf{Dem.~Rep.~of~the~Congo}&\textbf{Gabon}&\textbf{Equatorial~Guinea}&\textbf{Rwanda}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/S%C3%A3o_Tomé_and_Príncipe}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{sao-f.png}}}&
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chad}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{chad-f.png}}}&&\\
-% \textbf{Sa\~o~Tomé~and~Príncipe}&\textbf{Chad}&&\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Francophone countries in Central~Africa]{Francophone countries in
-% Central~Africa (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-afc-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{burundi-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{cameroon-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{central-africa-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{congo-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{rdcongo-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{gabon-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{equa-guinea-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{rwanda-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{sao-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{chad-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Burundi}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{burundi-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cameroun}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cameroon-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_centrafricaine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{central-africa-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_du_Congo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{congo-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Burundi}&\textbf{Cameroun}&\textbf{Rép.~Centrafricaine.}&\textbf{Rép.~du~Congo}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_démocratique_du_Congo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{rdcongo-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gabon}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{gabon-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guinée_équaroriale}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{equa-guinea-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rwanda}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{rwanda-f.png}}}\\
-% \textbf{Rép.~Dém.~du~Congo}&\textbf{Gabon}&\textbf{Guinée~équaroriale}&\textbf{Rwanda}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sao_Tomé-et-Principe}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{sao-f.png}}}&
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tchad}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{chad-f.png}}}&&\\
-% \textbf{Sao~Tomé-et-Principe}&\textbf{Tchad}&&\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Pays francophones en Afrique~Centrale]{Pays francophones en Afrique~Centrale
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-afc-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \fi
-% ^^A FRANCO-AC)
-% ^^A (FRANCO-AEOI
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{comoros-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{djibouti-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{madagascar-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{mauritius-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{seychelles-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{mozambique-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comoros}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{comoros-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Djibouti}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{djibouti-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Madagascar}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{madagascar-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mauritius}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mauritius-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Comoros}&\textbf{Djibouti}&\textbf{Madagascar}&\textbf{Mauritius}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mozambique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mozambique-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Seychelles}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{seychelles-f.png}}}&&\\%
-% \textbf{Seychelles}&\textbf{Mozambique~(o)}&&\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(o)~Observer.}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Francophone countries in East~Africa and Indian~Ocean]{Francophone countries in
-% East~Africa and Indian~Ocean (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-aeoi-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{comoros-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{djibouti-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{madagascar-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{mauritius-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{seychelles-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{mozambique-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comores}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{comoros-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Djibouti}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{djibouti-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Madagascar}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{madagascar-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Île_Maurice}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mauritius-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Comores}&\textbf{Djibouti}&\textbf{Madagascar}&\textbf{Île~Maurice}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mozambique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mozambique-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Seychelles}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{seychelles-f.png}}}&&\\%
-% \textbf{Seychelles}&\textbf{Mozambique~(o)}&&\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(o)~Observateur.}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Pays francophones en Afrique~de~l'Est et dans l'Océan~Indien]{Pays francophones
-% en Afrique~de~l'Est et dans l'Océan~Indien (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-aeoi-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \fi
-% ^^A FRANCO-AEOI)
-% ^^A (FRANCO-AS
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{cambodia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{laos-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{vanuatu-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{vietnam-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{armenia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{georgia-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cambodia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cambodia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Laos}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{laos-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vanuatu}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vanuatu-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vietnam}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vietnam-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Cambodia}&\textbf{Laos}&\textbf{Vanuatu}&\textbf{Vietnam}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Armenia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{armenia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Georgia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{georgia-f.png}}}&&\\%
-% \textbf{Armenia~(o)}&\textbf{Georgia~(o)}&&\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(o)~Observer.}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Francophone countries in Asia and Pacific~Ocean]{Francophone countries in
-% Asia and Pacific~Ocean (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-asp-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{cambodia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{laos-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{vanuatu-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{vietnam-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{armenia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{georgia-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cambodge}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cambodia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Laos}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{laos-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vanuatu}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vanuatu-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vietnam}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vietnam-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Cambodge}&\textbf{Laos}&\textbf{Vanuatu}&\textbf{Vietnam}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arménie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{armenia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Géorgie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{georgia-f.png}}}&&\\%
-% \textbf{Arménie~(o)}&\textbf{Géorgie~(o)}&&\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(o)~Observateur.}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Pays francophones en Asie et dans l'Océan Pacifique]{Pays francophones en Asie et
-% dans l'Océan Pacifique (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-asp-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \fi
-% ^^A FRANCO-AS)
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \lneed{4}
-% The titles\ixgrfl{france-f.png}\ixgrfl{francophonie-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/France}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{france-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Francophonie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{francophonie-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{french}'' language are taken from the \xfile{frenchb.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Daniel}{Flipo})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}. See also
-% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+acadian}{s+mld+acadien}, \vref{s+mld+canadien}, \vref{s+mld+francais},
-% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+frenchb}{s+mld+frenchpro}.
-% \or\relax
-% \lneed{4}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{france-f.png}\ixgrfl{francophonie-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/France}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{france-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Francophonie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{francophonie-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>> (c'est-à-dire le français) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{frenchb.dtx}
-% (de \name{Daniel}{Flipo})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}. Voir aussi
-% les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+acadian}{s+mld+acadien},\ABK \vref{s+mld+canadien},\ABK \vref{s+mld+francais},\ABK
-% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+frenchb}{s+mld+frenchpro}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*french>
-\ProvidesFile{french.mld}[2006/03/21]%
-%% French titles from frenchb.dtx (babel). Flipo, Daniel
-\def\ptctitle{Table des mati\`eres}%
-\def\plftitle{Liste des figures}%
-\def\plttitle{Liste des tableaux}%
-%%
-\def\mtctitle{Sommaire}%
-\def\mlftitle{Figures}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tableaux}%
-\def\stctitle{Sommaire}%
-\def\slftitle{Figures}%
-\def\slttitle{Tableaux}%
-%</french>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``French1'' language: \uxfile{french1.mld}}\label{s+mld+french1}\ixfile{french1.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~french1~>>: \uxfile{french1.mld}}\label{s+mld+french1}\ixfile{french1.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\ifnum}
-% \begin{macro}{\value}
-% \begin{macro}{\Roman}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{french1}'' language are taken from the \xfile{frenchb.dtx}
-% (by \name{Daniel}{Flipo})
-% file in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}, with some adaptations for the part-level titles.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{french1}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{frenchb.dtx}
-% (de \name{Daniel}{Flipo})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}, avec quelques adaptations pour les titres
-% au niveau partie.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*french1>
-\ProvidesFile{french1.mld}[2006/03/29]%
-%% French titles from frenchb.dtx (babel). Flipo, Daniel
-%% ptctitle, plftitle and plttitle modified (JPFD)
-\def\ptctitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax
- Sommaire de la premi\`ere partie\relax
- \else Sommaire de la partie~\Roman{part}\fi}%
-\def\plftitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax
- Liste des figures de la premi\`ere partie\relax
- \else Liste des figures de la partie~\Roman{part}\fi}%
-\def\plttitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax
- Liste des tableaux de la premi\`ere partie\relax
- \else Liste des tableaux de la partie~\Roman{part}\fi}%
-%%
-\def\mtctitle{Sommaire}%
-\def\mlftitle{Figures}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tableaux}%
-\def\stctitle{Sommaire}%
-\def\slftitle{Figures}%
-\def\slttitle{Tableaux}%
-%</french1>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``French2'' language: \uxfile{french2.mld}}\label{s+mld+french2}\ixfile{french2.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~french2~>>: \uxfile{french2.mld}}\label{s+mld+french2}\ixfile{french2.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcFrenchIIpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart}
-% \begin{macro}{\ifnum}
-% \begin{macro}{\value}
-% \begin{macro}{\Roman}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{french2}'' language are taken from the \xfile{frenchb.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Daniel}{Flipo})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}, with some adaptations for the part-level titles\footnote{This
-% is an example of a \suffix{.mld} file needing some support from code in the \upack{minitoc} package.}.
-% See also section~\vref{ss+2parts}, for the subtle distinction between ``deuxième'' and ``seconde''.
-% See the \exam{mtc-2nd.tex} example file in section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{french2}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{frenchb.dtx}
-% (de \name{Daniel}{Flipo})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}, avec quelques adaptations pour les titres
-% au niveau partie\,\footnote{C'est un exemple de fichier \suffix{.mld} ayant besoin de code de support dans le
-% paquetage \upack{minitoc}.}.
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{ss+2parts}, pour la subtile nuance entre «~deuxième~» et «~seconde~».
-% Voir le fichier d'exemple \exam{mtc-2nd.tex} dans la section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*french2>
-\ProvidesFile{french2.mld}[2006/07/07]%
-%% French titles from frenchb.dtx (babel). Flipo, Daniel
-%% ptctitle, plftitle and plttitle modified (JPFD)
-\def\mtcFrenchIIpart{\ifcase\value{part}%
-\or premi\`ere partie\or
-{\ifmtcsecondpart seconde\else deuxi\`eme\fi} partie\or
-troisi\`eme partie\or quatri\`eme partie\or cinqui\`eme partie\or
-sixi\`eme partie\or septi\`eme partie\or huiti\`eme partie\or
-neuvi\`eme partie\or dixi\`eme partie\or onzi\`eme partie\or
-douzi\`eme partie\or treizi\`eme partie\or quatorzi\`eme partie\or
-quinzi\`eme partie\or seizi\`eme partie\or dix-septi\`eme partie\or
-dix-huiti\`eme partie\or dix-neuvi\`eme partie\or
-vingti\`eme partie\else partie~\Roman{part}\fi}%
-\def\ptctitle{\ifnum\value{part}<1\relax
- Sommaire \else Sommaire de la \mtcFrenchIIpart\fi}%
-\def\plftitle{\ifnum\value{part}<1\relax
- Liste des figures\else
- Liste des figures de la \mtcFrenchIIpart\fi}%
-\def\plttitle{\ifnum\value{part}<1\relax
- Liste des tableaux\else
- Liste des tableaux de la \mtcFrenchIIpart}%
-%%
-\def\mtctitle{Sommaire}%
-\def\mlftitle{Figures}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tableaux}%
-\def\stctitle{Sommaire}%
-\def\slftitle{Figures}%
-\def\slttitle{Tableaux}%
-%</french2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Frenchb'' language: \uxfile{frenchb.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchb}\ixfile{frenchb.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~frenchb~>>: \uxfile{frenchb.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchb}\ixfile{frenchb.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{frenchb}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{french}'' language, so we load the
-% \xfile{french.mld} file. See section~\vref{s+mld+french}.
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{frenchb}~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>>, donc nous chargeons le fichier
-% \xfile{french.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*frenchb>
-\ProvidesFile{frenchb.mld}[2003/02/11]\mtcselectlanguage{french}%
-%</frenchb>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Frenchle'' language: \uxfile{frenchle.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchle}\ixfile{frenchle.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~frenchle~>>: \uxfile{frenchle.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchle}\ixfile{frenchle.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{frenchle}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{french}'' language, so we load the
-% \xfile{french.mld} file. See section~\vref{s+mld+french}. See also~\cite{frenchle}.
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{frenchle}~» est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>>, donc nous chargeons le fichier
-% \xfile{french.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}. Voir aussi~\cite{frenchle}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*frenchle>
-\ProvidesFile{frenchle.mld}[2003/02/20]\mtcselectlanguage{french}%
-%</frenchle>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Frenchpro'' language: \uxfile{frenchpro.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchpro}\ixfile{frenchpro.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~frenchpro~>>: \uxfile{frenchpro.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchpro}\ixfile{frenchpro.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{frenchpro}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{french}'' language, so we load the
-% \xfile{french.mld} file. See section~\vref{s+mld+french}. See also~\cite{frenchpro,frenchperso}.
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{frenchpro}~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>>, donc nous chargeons le fichier
-% \xfile{french.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}. Voir aussi~\cite{frenchpro,frenchperso}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*frenchpro>
-\ProvidesFile{frenchpro.mld}[2003/02/20]\mtcselectlanguage{french}%
-%</frenchpro>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Galician'' language: \uxfile{galician.mld}}\label{s+mld+galician}\ixfile{galician.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~galician~>>: \uxfile{galician.mld}}\label{s+mld+galician}\ixfile{galician.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.556048835\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.443951165\iwidth}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{galicia-m.pdf}\ixgrf{galicia-m.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{galicia-mp.pdf}\ixgrf{galicia-mp.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Galician language areas]{Galician language areas
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagnegalice_carte.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+galician}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions de la langue galicienne]{Régions de la langue galicienne
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagnegalice_carte.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+galician}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[htb!]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{galician-l.png}\ixgrf{galician-l.png}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Linguistic map of Galician]{Linguistic map of Galician
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Galicia_(Spain)}; see also \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagnegalice.htm}
-% in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+galician-l}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Carte linguistique du galicien]{Carte linguistique du galicien
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Galicia_(Spain)}; voir aussi
-% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagnegalice.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+galician-l}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{galicia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Galician_language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{galicia-f.png}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{galician}'' language (\emph{galego})\,\footnote{Spoken in Galice, in the north-west part
-% of Spain, around Santiago de Compostela; see figure~\vref{f+galician}.} are taken from the \xfile{galician.dtx} file,
-% (by \name{Manuel}{Carriba} and \namea{Javier~A.}{Múgica~de~Rivera}{Mugica de Rivera}) derived from the
-% \xfile{spanish.dtx} file (by \name{Javier}{Bezos}) in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,galician,galician2}:
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{galicia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Galician_language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{galicia-f.png}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{galician}~>> (galicien, \emph{galego})\,\footnote{Parlée en Galice,
-% dans la partie nord-ouest de l'Espagne, autour de Saint-Jacques de Compostelle; voir la figure~\vref{f+galician}.}
-% sont tirés du fichier \xfile{galician.dtx} (de \name{Manuel}{Carriba} et
-% \namea{Javier~A.}{Múgica~de~Rivera}{Mugica de Rivera}), dérivé du fichier \xfile{spanish.dtx} (de \name{Javier}{Bezos}),
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,galician,galician2}:
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*galician>
-\ProvidesFile{galician.mld}[2007/12/18]%
-%% Galician titles from galician.dtx (babel).
-%% Carriba, Manuel (mcarriba@eunetcom.net)
-%% Javier A. Múgica de Rivera (jmugica@digi21.net)
-\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
-\def\ptctitle{\'Indice}\else \def\ptctitle{\'Indice xeral}\fi%
-\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
-\def\plttitle{\'Indice de t\'aboas}%
-\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
-\def\mtctitle{\'Indice}\else \def\mtctitle{\'Indice xeral}\fi%
-\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
-\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de t\'aboas}%
-\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
-\def\stctitle{\'Indice}\else \def\stctitle{\'Indice xeral}\fi%
-\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
-\def\slttitle{\'Indice de t\'aboas}%
-%</galician>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``German'' language: \uxfile{german.mld}}\label{s+mld+german}\ixfile{german.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~german~>>: \uxfile{german.mld}}\label{s+mld+german}\ixfile{german.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{allemand.jpg}\ixgrf{allemand.jpg}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Germanophone areas in Europa]{Germanophone areas in Europa
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/allemand-aire-lng.htm} in~\cite{tlfq};
-% see also \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/allemagne_dialectes.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+german}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions germanophones en Europe]{Régions germanophones en Europe
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/allemand-aire-lng.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq};
-% voir aussi \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/allemagne_dialectes.htm}
-% dans~\cite{tlfq}.)i\hfill\null}\label{f+german}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!thb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{germ-w.png}\ixgrf{germ-w.png}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Germanophone areas]{Germanophone areas
-% (\url{http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Deutsche_Sprache})\hfill\null}\label{f+germ-world}
-% \else\relax
-% \caption[Régions germanophones]{Régions germanophones
-% (\url{http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Deutsche_Sprache})\hfill\null}\label{f+germ-world}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{germany-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrf{be-dg-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{lux-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{suisse-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{austria-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{jutland-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{liech-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{bolzano-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{alsace-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{lorraine-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{opole-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Germany}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{germany-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/German-speaking_Community_of_Belgium}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{be-dg-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Luxembourg}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lux-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Switzerland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{suisse-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Germany}&\textbf{Belgium}&\textbf{Luxembourg}&\textbf{Switzerland}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Austria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{austria-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Jutland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{jutland-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Liechtenstein}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{liech-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bolzano}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bolzano-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Austria}&\textbf{Jutland}&\textbf{Liechtenstein}&\textbf{Bolzano}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Alsace}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{alsace-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lorraine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lorraine-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Opole}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{opole-f.png}}}&\\%
-% \textbf{Alsace}&\textbf{Lorraine}&\textbf{Opole}&\\%
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Germanophone countries and regions]{Germanophone countries and regions (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/German_Language})\hfill\null}\label{f+germano-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{germany-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrf{be-dg-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{lux-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{suisse-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{austria-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{jutland-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{liech-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{bozen-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{alsace-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{lorraine-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{opole-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Allemagne}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{germany-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Communauté_germanophone_de_Belgique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{be-dg-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Luxembourg}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lux-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Suisse}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{suisse-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Germany}&\textbf{Belgium}&\textbf{Luxembourg}&\textbf{Switzerland}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Autriche}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{austria-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Jutland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{jutland-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Liechtenstein}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{liech-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bolzano}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bozen-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Autriche}&\textbf{Jutland}&\textbf{Liechtenstein}&\textbf{Bolzano}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Alsace}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{alsace-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lorraine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lorraine-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Opole}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{opole-f.png}}}&\\%
-% \textbf{Alsace}&\textbf{Lorraine}&\textbf{Opole}&\\%
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Pays et régions germanophones]{Pays et régions germanophones(\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Allemand})\hfill\null}\label{f+germano-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{german-d.pdf}\ixgrf{german-d.pdf}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[German dialects]{German dialects
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/German_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+german-d}
-% \begin{minipage}[t]{\textwidth}\footnotesize
-% By the High German consonant shift, the map of German dialects is divided into Upper German (green), Central German (blue),
-% and Low German (yellow). The main isoglosses and the Benrath and Speyer lines are black.
-% \end{minipage}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Dialectes allemands]{Dialectes allemands
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/German_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+german-d}
-% \begin{minipage}[t]{\textwidth}\footnotesize
-% Depuis la modification des consonnes du Haut allemand, la carte des dialectes allemands se divise entre Haut
-% Allemand (vert), Allemand Central (bleu) et Bas Allemand (jaune). En noir: isoglosses principaux et lignes Benrath
-% et Speyer.
-% \end{minipage}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!htbp]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{german-m.pdf}\ixgrf{german-m.pdf}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[The spread of the German language until ca.~1945 in Central Europe]{The spread of the German language
-% until ca.~1945 in Central Europe
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/German_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+german-m}
-% \begin{minipage}[t]{\textwidth}\footnotesize
-% Orange marks Lower German, blue Middle German and green Upper German dialects.
-% \end{minipage}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[L'étendue de la langue allemande jusque vers~1945 en Europe centrale]{L'étendue de la langue allemande
-% jusque vers~1945 en Europe centrale
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/German_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+german-m}
-% \begin{minipage}[t]{\textwidth}\footnotesize
-% Orange: Bas Allemand, bleu: Bas Allemand, vert: dialectes du Haut Allemand.
-% \end{minipage}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!thb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{german-c.pdf}\ixgrf{german-c.pdf}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Distribution of the major West-Germanic dialectal varieties]{Distribution of the major West-Germanic
-% dialectal varieties
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/German_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+german-c}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Distribution des principaux dialectes germaniques occidentaux]{Distribution des principaux dialectes germaniques occidentaux
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/German_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+german-c}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{germany-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Germany}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{germany-f.jpg}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{german}'' language (\emph{deutsch}) are taken from the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
-% See also the section~\vref{s+mld+austrian}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrf{germany-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Allemagne}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{germany-f.jpg}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{german}~>> (allemand, \emph{deutsch}) sont tirés du paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+austrian}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*german>
-\ProvidesFile{german.mld}[1999/03/16]%
-%% German titles
-\def\ptctitle{Inhaltsangabe}%
-\def\plftitle{Figuren}%
-\def\plttitle{Tabellen}%
-\def\mtctitle{Inhaltsangabe}%
-\def\mlftitle{Figuren}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tabellen}%
-\def\stctitle{Inhaltsangabe}%
-\def\slftitle{Figuren}%
-\def\slttitle{Tabellen}%
-%</german>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Germanb'' language: \uxfile{germanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb}\ixfile{germanb.mld}
-% The ``\lopt{germanb}'' language is a variant for the ``german'' language. The titles come from
-% \xfile{germanb.dtx}
-% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} and \name{Bernd}{Raichle})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,germanb}:
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~germanb~>>: \uxfile{germanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb}\ixfile{germanb.mld}
-% La langue <<~\lopt{germanb}~>> (allemand, variante) est une variante de la langue <<~german~>>. Les titres sont tirés du
-% fichier \xfile{germanb.dtx}
-% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} et \name{Bernd}{Raichle})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,germanb}:
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*germanb>
-\ProvidesFile{germanb.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% German titles (variant) from germanb.dtx (babel). Braams, Johannes~L. & Raichle, Bernd
-\def\ptctitle{Inhaltsverzeichnis}%
-\def\plftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}%
-\def\plttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}%
-\def\mtctitle{Inhaltsverzeichnis}%
-\def\mlftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}%
-%%
-\def\stctitle{Inhalt}%
-\def\slftitle{Abbildungen}%
-\def\slttitle{Tabellen}%
-%</germanb>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Germanb2'' language: \uxfile{germanb2.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb2}\ixfile{germanb2.mld}
-% The ``\lopt{germanb2}'' language is a variant for the ``\lopt{german}'' language, with short titles.
-% See also section~\vref{s+mld+germanb}.
-% The titles are taken from the file \xfile{germanb.dtx}
-% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} and \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}:
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~germanb2~>>: \uxfile{germanb2.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb2}\ixfile{germanb2.mld}
-% La langue <<~\lopt{germanb2}~>> (allemand, variante) est une variante de la langue <<~german~>>, avec des titres courts.
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+germanb}.
-% Les titres sont tirés du fichier \xfile{germanb.dtx}
-% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} et \name{Bernd}{Raichle})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}:
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*germanb2>
-\ProvidesFile{germanb2.mld}[2007/12/18]%
-%% German titles (variant)
-\def\ptctitle{Inhalt}%
-\def\plftitle{Abbildungen}%
-\def\plttitle{Tabellen}%
-\def\mtctitle{Inhalt}%
-\def\mlftitle{Abbildungen}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tabellen}%
-\def\stctitle{Inhalt}%
-\def\slftitle{Abbildungen}%
-\def\slttitle{Tabellen}%
-%</germanb2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Greek'' language: \uxfile{greek.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek}\ixfile{greek.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~greek~>>: \uxfile{greek.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek}\ixfile{greek.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.6273522572\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.372647428\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{grece1.pdf}\ixgrf{grece1.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{grece2.pdf}\ixgrf{grece2.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Greece]{Greece (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/grece-admin-map.htm}
-% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/grece.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+greece}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Grèce]{Grèce (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/grece-admin-map.htm}
-% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/grece.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+greece}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-%
-% \vspace*{2\bigskipamount}
-%
-% ^^A \begin{figure}
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth]{greekm.jpg}\ixgrf{greekm.jpg}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Dialects of modern Greek]{Dialects of modern Greek
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Modern_Greek})\hfill\null}\label{f+greekdia}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Dialectes du grec moderne]{Dialectes du grec moderne
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Modern_Greek})\hfill\null}\label{f+greekdia}
-% \fi
-% \vspace*{-2\baselineskip}
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm}\reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrf{greeka.png}\ixgrfl{greece-f.png}\ixgrfl{cyprus-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Greek_language}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{greeka.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Grece}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{greece-f.png}}}\\
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cyprus}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cyprus-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{greek}'' language (modern greek,
-% $\nu\acute{\epsilon}\alpha~\epsilon\lambda\lambda\eta\nu i\kappa\acute{\alpha}$) are taken from the \xfile{greek.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Apostolos}{Syropoulos}) in the
-% \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,greek,greek-ba}.
-% Greek fonts are required.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrf{greeka.png}\ixgrfl{greece-f.png}\ixgrfl{cyprus-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Grec_moderne}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{greeka.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Grèce}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{greece-f.png}}}\\
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chypre}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cyprus-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{greek}~>> (grec moderne,
-% $\nu\acute{\epsilon}\alpha~\epsilon\lambda\lambda\eta\nu i\kappa\acute{\alpha}$) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{greek.dtx}
-% (de \name{Apostolos}{Syropoulos})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,greek,greek-ba}.
-% Des fontes grecques sont requises.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*greek>
-\ProvidesFile{greek.mld}[2007/12/18]%
-%% Greek titles from greek.dtx (babel) by Syropoulos, Apostolos. Needs greek fonts.
-\def\ptctitle{Perieq'omena}%
-\def\plftitle{Kat'alogos Sqhm'atwn}%
-\def\plttitle{Kat'alogos Pin'akwn}%
-\def\mtctitle{Perieq'omena}%
-\def\mlftitle{Kat'alogos Sqhm'atwn}%
-\def\mlttitle{Kat'alogos Pin'akwn}%
-\def\stctitle{Perieq'omena}%
-\def\slftitle{Kat'alogos Sqhm'atwn}%
-\def\slttitle{Kat'alogos Pin'akwn}%
-%</greek>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Greek-mono'' language: \uxfile{greek-mono.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-mono}\ixfile{greek-mono.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~greek-mono~>>: \uxfile{greek-mono.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-mono}\ixfile{greek-mono.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\localgreek}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{greek-mono}'' language\,\footnote{Monotonic greek, from a recent (1982) but strongly
-% contested -- and contestable -- reform of the greek language.} are taken from the \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} file
-% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
-% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}:
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{greek-mono}~>> (grec dit monotonique\,\footnote{Le grec monotonique, selon une récente
-% (1982) mais fortement contestée -- et contestable -- réforme de la langue grecque.}) sont tirés du fichier
-% \xfile{omega-greek.ldf}
-% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
-% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}:
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*greek-mono>
-\ProvidesFile{greek-mono.mld}[2005/02/08]%
-%% from omega-greek.ldf (Antomega project). Needs Omega.
-%% Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov
-\def\ptctitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^03cc^^^^03bc%
- ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
-\def\plftitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
- ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^03ac^^^^03c4^^^^03c9%
- ^^^^03bd}}%
-\def\plftitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
- ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^03ac^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
-\def\mtctitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^03cc^^^^03bc%
- ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
-\def\mlftitle%{\localgreek%
-{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
- ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^03ac^^^^03c4^^^^03c9%
- ^^^^03bd}}%
-\def\mlftitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
- ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^03ac^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
-\def\stctitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^03cc^^^^03bc%
- ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
-\def\slftitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
- ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^03ac^^^^03c4^^^^03c9%
- ^^^^03bd}}%
-\def\slftitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
- ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^03ac^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
-%</greek-mono>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Greek-polydemo'' language: \uxfile{greek-polydemo.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-polydemo}\ixfile{greek-polydemo.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~greek-polydemo~>>: \uxfile{greek-polydemo.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-polydemo}\ixfile{greek-polydemo.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\localgreek}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{greek-polydemo}'' language\,\footnote{Polytonic demotic (popular) greek, for classical greek.}
-% are taken from the file \xfile{omega-greek.ldf}
-% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
-% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}:
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{greek-polydemo}~>>\,\footnote{Grec polytonique <<~démotique~>> (populaire),
-% pour le grec classique.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{omega-greek.ldf}
-% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
-% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}:
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*greek-polydemo>
-\ProvidesFile{greek-polydemo.mld}[2005/02/08]%
-%% from omega-greek.ldf (Antomega project). Needs Omega.
-%% Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov
-\def\ptctitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc%
- ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
-\def\plftitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
- ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9%
- ^^^^03bd}}%
-\def\plttitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
- ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
-\def\mtctitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc%
- ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
-\def\mlftitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
- ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9%
- ^^^^03bd}}%
-\def\mlttitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
- ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
-\def\stctitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc%
- ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
-\def\slftitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
- ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9%
- ^^^^03bd}}%
-\def\slttitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
- ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
-%</greek-polydemo>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Greek-polykatha'' language: \uxfile{greek-polykatha.mld}}%
-% \label{s+mld+greek-polykatha}\ixfile{greek-polykatha.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~greek-polykatha~>>: \uxfile{greek-polykatha.mld}}%
-% \label{s+mld+greek-polykatha}\ixfile{greek-polykatha.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\localgreek}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{greek-polykatha}'' language\,\footnote{Polytonic greek, <<~kathaverousa~>> (purified) style,
-% a form of the Greek language created during the early \textsc{xix}-th century by \xname{Adamantios}{Korais},
-% to purify the language from the Byzantine and non-greek vocabulary.
-% It has now been obsoleted by the demotic (popular) greek, but it
-% has left a very noticeable trace in the modern Greek language.} are
-% taken from the \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} file
-% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
-% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}:
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{greek-polykatha}~>>\,\footnote{Grec polytonique, en style <<~kathaverousa~>> (purifié),
-% une forme de la langue grecque créée au début du \textsc{xix}\fup{e}~siècle par \xname{Adamantios}{Korais}, pour purifier
-% la langue du vocabulaire byzantin ou non grec. Il a maintenant été démodé par le grec démotique (populaire),
-% mais a laissé d'importantes traces dans la langue grecque moderne.}
-% sont tirés du fichier \xfile{omega-greek.ldf}
-% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
-% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}:
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*greek-polykatha>
-\ProvidesFile{greek-polykatha.mld}[2005/02/08]%
-%% from omega-greek.ldf (Antomega project). Needs Omega.
-%% Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov
-\def\ptctitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc%
- ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
-\def\plftitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
- ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
-\def\plttitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
- ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
-\def\mtctitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc%
- ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
-\def\mlftitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
- ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
-\def\mlttitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
- ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
-\def\stctitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc%
- ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
-\def\slftitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
- ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
-\def\slttitle{\localgreek%
-{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
- ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
-%</greek-polykatha>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Guarani'' language: \uxfile{guarani.mld}}\label{s+mld+guarani}\ixfile{guarani.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~guarani~>>: \uxfile{guarani.mld}}\label{s+mld+guarani}\ixfile{guarani.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{paraguayp.pdf}\ixgrf{paraguayp.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{paraguay.png}\ixgrf{paraguay.png}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Paraguay]{Paraguay (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/americas/paraguay_pol98.pdf}
-% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}~--
-% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/amsudant/paraguay.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+paraguay}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Paraguay]{Paraguay (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/americas/paraguay_pol98.pdf}
-% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}~--
-% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/amsudant/paraguay.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+paraguay}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\ixgrfl{paraguay-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Paraguay}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{paraguay-f.png}}}}}
-% ``\lopt{guarani}'' (guaraní) language is the main language spoken in Paraguay.
-% Very often, a mixture of Guaraní and Spanish, known as Jopará or Yopará, is spoken.
-% The titles are taken from the \ipack{guarani}\xfile{guarani.ldf} file by \name{Javier}{Bezos}~\cite{guarani}.
-% A special input encoding (\xfile{win-gn.def}) is needed.
-% These files are available on the CTAN archives.
-% \or\relax
-% La\ixgrfl{paraguay-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Paraguay}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{paraguay-f.png}}}}}
-% langue «~\lopt{guarani}~» (guaraní) est la langue principale parlée au Paraguay.
-% Très souvent, un mélange de guaraní et d'espagnol, appelé «~jopará~» ou «~yopará~», est utilisé.
-% Les titres sont tirés du fichier \ipack{guarani}\xfile{guarani.ldf} de \name{Javier}{Bezos}~\cite{guarani}.
-% Un codage d'entrée spécial (\xfile{win-gn.def}) est nécessaire.
-% Ces fichiers sont disponibles sur les archives CTAN.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*guarani>
-\ProvidesFile{guarani.mld}[2005/08/26]%
-%% Guaraní titles from guarani.ldf by Javier Bezos. Input encoding win-gn.def needed.
-\def\ptctitle{\'Indice general}%
-\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
-\def\plttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}%
-\def\mtctitle{\'Indice general}%
-\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
-\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}%
-\def\stctitle{\'Indice general}%
-\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
-\def\slttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}%
-%</guarani>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Hangul1'' language: \uxmldo{hangul1}}\label{s+mld+hangul1}\ixmldo{hangul1}
-% \else\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~hangul1~>>: \uxmldo{hangul1}}\label{s+mld+hangul1}\ixmldo{hangul1}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.426693630\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.573306370\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{korean1.png}\ixgrf{korean1.png}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{korean2.jpg}\ixgrf{korean2.jpg}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Korean language areas]{Korean language areas
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Korean_Language}
-% and \url{http://www.korea.net/korea/kor_loca.asp?code=A0102})\hfill\null}\label{f+korean}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions de la langue coréenne]{Régions de la langue coréenne
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Korean_Language}
-% et \url{http://www.korea.net/korea/kor_loca.asp?code=A0102})\hfill\null}\label{f+korean}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-%
-% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount}
-%
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.677187948\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.322812052\iwidth}
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{hangul.png}\ixgrf{hangul.png}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{hanja.png}\ixgrf{hanja.png}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Hangûl and hanja characters]{Hangûl and hanja characters
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hangul}
-% and \url{http://wiki.galbijim.com/Hanja}; see also \url{http://wiki.galbijim.com/Korean})\hfill\null}\label{f+kor-chars}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Caractères hangûl et hanja]{Caractères hangûl et hanja
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hangul}
-% et \url{http://wiki.galbijim.com/Hanja}; voir aussi \url{http://wiki.galbijim.com/Korean})\hfill\null}\label{f+kor-chars}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{29.15625mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\ixgrfl{korea-n-f.png}\ixgrfl{korea-s-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/North_Korea}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{korea-n-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/South_Korea}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{korea-s-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% Korean language was originally written using the Chinese characters; it is now mainly written in Hangûl, the
-% Korean writing system, optionally incorporating Hanja to write Sino-Korean words~\cite{venkatesan}.
-% See~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} and~\cite{park2003}.
-% See figure~\vref{f+kor-chars}.
-%
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul1}'' language (korean in hangûl script, first variant) are taken from the file
-% \xfile{hangul.cap} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% Special fonts are needed, of course.
-%
-% \lneed{2}
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul2}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
-%
-% \or\relax
-% La\ixgrfl{korea-n-f.png}\ixgrfl{korea-s-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_populaire_démocratique_de_Corée}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{korea-n-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Corée_du_Sud}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{korea-s-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% langue coréenne était originellement écrite en caractères chinois; elle est actuellement principalement
-% écrite en caractères hangûl, en incorporant éventuellement des caractères hanja pour écrire des mots
-% sino-coréens~\cite{venkatesan}. Voir~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} et~\cite{park2003}.
-% Voir la figure~\vref{f+kor-chars}.
-%
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul1}~>> (coréen, écriture hangûl première variante) sont tirés du fichier
-% \xfile{hangul.cap} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr.
-%
-% \lneed{2}
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul2}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{2}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{hangul1.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
-% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul1.mlo}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*hangul1>
-\ProvidesFile{hangul1.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hangul1}%
-%% From the file hangul.cap of the CJK package for using Asian logographs
-%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
-%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) Hangul captions
-%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
-%</hangul1>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Hangul2'' language: \uxmldo{hangul2}}\label{s+mld+hangul2}\ixmldo{hangul2}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~hangul2~>>: \uxmldo{hangul2}}\label{s+mld+hangul2}\ixmldo{hangul2}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul2}'' language (korean in hangûl script, second variant) are taken from the file
-% \xfile{hangul.cpx} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% Special fonts are needed, of course.
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul1} and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul3}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul2}~>> (coréen en écriture hangûl, deuxième variante) sont tirés du fichier
-% \xfile{hangul.cpx} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr.
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% Voir aussi les variantes dans les sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul1} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul3}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{hangul2.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
-% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul2.mlo}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*hangul2>
-\ProvidesFile{hangul2.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hangul2}%
-%% From the file hangul.cpx of the CJK package for using Asian logographs
-%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
-%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003), Hangul captions
-%% char. set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), encoding: EUC (=Wansung), preprocessed
-%</hangul2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{11}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Hangul3'' language: \uxmldo{hangul3}}\label{s+mld+hangul3}\ixmldo{hangul3}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~hangul3~>>: \uxmldo{hangul3}}\label{s+mld+hangul3}\ixfile{hangul3}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul3}'' language (korean in hangûl script, third variant) are taken from the file
-% \xfile{hangul2.cap} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% Special fonts are needed, of course.
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul2} and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul4}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul3}~>> (coréen en écriture hangûl, troisième variante) sont tirés du fichier
-% \xfile{hangul2.cap} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi les
-% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul2} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul4}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul3}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{hangul3.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul3}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
-% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul3.mlo}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*hangul3>
-\ProvidesFile{hangul3.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hangul3}%
-%% From the file hangul2.cap of the CJK package for using Asian logographs
-%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
-%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) Hangul captions set 2
-%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
-%</hangul3>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{11}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Hangul4'' language: \uxmldo{hangul4}}\label{s+mld+hangul4}\ixmldo{hangul4}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~hangul4~>>: \uxmldo{hangul4}}\label{s+mld+hangul4}\ixmldo{hangul4}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul4}'' language (korean in hangûl script, fourth variant) are taken from the file
-% \xfile{hangul2.cpx} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% Special fonts are needed, of course.
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul3}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul-u8}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
-%
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul4}~>> (coréen en écriture hangûl, quatrième variante) sont tirés du fichier
-% \xfile{hangul2.cpx} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi les
-% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul3} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul-u8}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
-%
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul4}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{hangul4.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul4}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
-% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul4.mlo}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*hangul4>
-\ProvidesFile{hangul4.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hangul4}%
-%% From the file hangul2.cpx of the CJK package for using Asian logographs
-%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
-%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) Hangul captions set 2,
-%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992),
-%% encoding: EUC (=Wansung), preprocessed
-%</hangul4>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \lneed{9}
-% \section{``Hangul-u8'' language: \uxmldo{hangul-u8}}\label{s+mld+hangul-u8}\ixmldo{hangul-u8}
-% \or\relax
-% \lneed{8}
-% \section{Langue <<~hangul-u8~>>: \uxmldo{hangul-u8}}\label{s+mld+hangul-u8}\ixmldo{hangul-u8}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul-u8}'' language (korean in hangûl script, for \emph{Lambda}~$\mathbf{\Lambda}$) are taken
-% from the file \xfile{u8hangul.tex} of the \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} system~\cite[in~korean]{HLATEX} by \name{Un}{Koaunghi}.
-% Special fonts are needed, of course. Input encoding is UTF-8.
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul4}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hanja1}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
-% See~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} and~\cite{park2003}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul-u8}~>> (coréen, écriture hangûl, pour \emph{Lambda}~$\mathbf{\Lambda}$) sont tirés du fichier
-% \xfile{u8hangul.tex} du système \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX}~\cite[en~coréen]{HLATEX} de \name{Un}{Koaunghi}.
-% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr.
-% Le codage en entrée est UTF-8.
-%
-% \lneed{4}
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul4} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hanja1}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
-% Voir~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} et~\cite{park2003}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{2}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul-u8}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{hangul-u8.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul-u8}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
-% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul-u8.mlo}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*hangul-u8>
-\ProvidesFile{hangul-u8.mld}[2006/02/21]\mtcloadmlo{hangul-u8}%
-%% Hangul captions for Lambda. From the file u8hangul.tex
-%% of the HLaTeX package by Koaunghi Un (koaunghi@kornet.net)
-%</hangul-u8>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Hanja1'' language: \uxmldo{hanja1.mld}}\label{s+mld+hanja1}\ixmldo{hanja1}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~hanja1~>>: \uxmldo{hanja1}}\label{s+mld+hanja1}\ixmldo{hanja1}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja1}'' language (korean in the old script hanja, first variant) are taken from the file
-% \xfile{hanja.cpx} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% Special fonts are needed, of course.
-% See figure~\vref{f+kor-chars}.
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul-u8}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hanja2}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
-%
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja1}~>> (coréen en écriture ancienne hanja, première variante) sont tirés du
-% fichier \xfile{hanja.cpx} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi
-% Voir la figure~\vref{f+kor-chars}.
-% les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul-u8} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hanja2}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{hanja1.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
-% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hanja1.mlo}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*hanja1>
-\ProvidesFile{hanja1.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hanja1}%
-%% From the file hanja.cpx of the CJK package for using Asian logographs
-%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Hanja captions.
-%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>, Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
-%% Character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992),
-%% encoding: EUC (=Wansung), preprocessed
-%</hanja1>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Hanja2'' language: \uxmldo{hanja2}}\label{s+mld+hanja2}\ixmldo{hanja2}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~hanja2~>>: \uxmldo{hanja2}}\label{s+mld+hanja2}\ixmldo{hanja2}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja2}'' language (Korean in the old script hanja, second variant) are taken from the file
-% \xfile{hanja.cap} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% Special fonts are needed, of course.
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hanja1}, and~\vref{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
-%
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja2}~>> (coréen en écriture ancienne hanja, seconde variante) sont tirés du
-% fichier \xfile{hanja.cap} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi
-% les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hanja1} et~\vref{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
-% \fi
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-%
-% \lneed{2}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{hanja2.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
-% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hanja2.mlo}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*hanja2>
-\ProvidesFile{hanja2.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hanja2}%
-%% From the file hanja.cap of the CJK package for using Asian logographs
-%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Hanja captions.
-%% Created by Werner Lemberg <a7971428@unet.univie.ac.at>.
-%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992),
-%% encoding: EUC (=Wansung). Version 4.1.3 (20-Jun-1997)
-%</hanja2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{11}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Hanja-u8'' language: \uxmldo{hanja-u8}}\label{s+mld+hanja-u8}\ixmldo{hanja-u8}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~hanja-u8~>>: \uxmldo{hanja-u8}}\label{s+mld+hanja-u8}\ixmldo{hanja-u8}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja-u8}'' language (korean in hanja script, for \emph{Lambda}~$\mathbf{\Lambda}$) are taken from the file
-% \xfile{u8hanja.tex} of the \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} system~\cite[in~korean]{HLATEX} by \name{Un}{Koaunghi}.
-% Special fonts are needed, of course.
-% Input encoding is UTF-8.
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hanja2}.
-% See~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} and~\cite{park2003}.
-%
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja-u8}~>> (coréen, écriture hanja, pour \emph{Lambda}~$\mathbf{\Lambda}$) sont tirés du fichier
-% \xfile{u8hanja.tex} du système \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX}~\cite[en~coréen]{HLATEX} de \name{Un}{Koaunghi}.
-% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr.
-% Le codage en entrée est UTF-8.
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hanja2}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja-u8}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{hanja-u8.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja-u8}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
-% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hanja-u8.mlo}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*hanja-u8>
-\ProvidesFile{hanja-u8.mld}[2006/02/21]\mtcloadmlo{hanja-u8}%
-%% Hanja captions for Lambda. From the file hanja-u8.tex of the HLaTeX package
-%% by Koaunghi Un (koaunghi@kornet.net)
-%</hanja-u8>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \lneed{5}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{29.15625mm}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Hebrew'' language: \uxfile{hebrew.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew}\ixfile{hebrew.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~hebrew~>>: \uxfile{hebrew.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew}\ixfile{hebrew.mld}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrf{ivrit.png}\ixgrfl{israel-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hebrew_language}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{ivrit.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Israel}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{israel-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{hebrew}'' language (\emph{ivrit}) are taken from
-% the \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX} package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}),
-% with the associated fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+hebrew2}.
-% See the hebrew alphabet (\emph{alefbet}): \url{http://www.jewfaq.org/graphics/hebrew.gif}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrf{ivrit.png}\ixgrfl{israel-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hebrew_language}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{ivrit.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Israel}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{israel-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{hebrew}~>> (hébreu, \emph{ivrit}) sont tirés du
-% paquetage \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}),
-% avec les fontes associées. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+hebrew2}.
-% Voir l'alphabet (\emph{alefbet}) hébreu: \url{http://www.jewfaq.org/graphics/hebrew.gif}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*hebrew>
-\ProvidesFile{hebrew.mld}[2001/02/28]%
-%% Hebrew titles. Need hebrew fonts (see arabtex documentation)
-\def\ptctitle{\tav\vav\kaf\finalnun\ \ayin\nun\yod\nun\yod\finalmem}%
-\def\plftitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \alef\yod\vav\resh\yod\finalmem}%
-\def\plttitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \tet\bet\lamed\alef\vav\tav}%
-\def\mtctitle{\tav\vav\kaf\finalnun\ \ayin\nun\yod\nun\yod\finalmem}%
-\def\mlftitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \alef\yod\vav\resh\yod\finalmem}%
-\def\mlttitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \tet\bet\lamed\alef\vav\tav}%
-\def\stctitle{\tav\vav\kaf\finalnun\ \ayin\nun\yod\nun\yod\finalmem}%
-\def\slftitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \alef\yod\vav\resh\yod\finalmem}%
-\def\slttitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \tet\bet\lamed\alef\vav\tav}%
-%</hebrew>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{isr1.pdf}\ixgrf{isr1.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{isr2.pdf}\ixgrf{isr2.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Israël]{Israël (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/israel_carte1.htm}
-% in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+israel}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Israel]{Israel (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/israel_carte1.htm}
-% dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+israel}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Hebrew2'' language: \uxfile{hebrew2.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew2}\ixfile{hebrew2.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~hebrew2~>>: \uxfile{hebrew2.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew2}\ixfile{hebrew2.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\@ensure@R}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{hebrew2}'' language are taken from the file \xfile{hebrew.dtx}
-% (by \xname{Boris}{Lavva} and \name{Rama}{Porrat})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,hebrew2}, which should be
-% used, with the associated fonts and encodings. See also section~\vref{s+mld+hebrew}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hebrew2}~>> (hébreu, une variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{hebrew.dtx}
-% (de \name{Boris}{Lavva} et \name{Rama}{Porrat}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,hebrew2}, qui
-% devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes et codages associés. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+hebrew}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*hebrew2>
-\ProvidesFile{hebrew2.mld}[2006/01/11]%
-%% From hebrew.dtx in the Babel package. Boris Lavva (lavva@tx.technion.ac.il)
-%% Need hebrew fonts.
-\def\ptctitle{\@ensure@R{\hebtav\hebvav\hebkaf\hebfinalnun\ %
- \hebayin\hebnun\hebyod\hebyod\hebnun\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}%
-\def\plftitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ %
- \hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}%
-\def\plttitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\
- \hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebalef\hebvav\hebtav}}%
-\def\mtctitle{\@ensure@R{\hebtav\hebvav\hebkaf\hebfinalnun\ %
- \hebayin\hebnun\hebyod\hebyod\hebnun\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}%
-\def\mlftitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ %
- \hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}%
-\def\mlttitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\
- \hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebalef\hebvav\hebtav}}%
-\def\stctitle{\@ensure@R{\hebtav\hebvav\hebkaf\hebfinalnun\ %
- \hebayin\hebnun\hebyod\hebyod\hebnun\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}%
-\def\slftitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ %
- \hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}%
-\def\slttitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\
- \hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebalef\hebvav\hebtav}}%
-%</hebrew2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Hindi'' language: \uxfile{hindi.mld}}\label{s+mld+hindi}\ixfile{hindi.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~hindi~>>: \uxfile{hindi.mld}}\label{s+mld+hindi}\ixfile{hindi.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{hindi}'' language is just like ``\lopt{devanagari}'',
-% so we just load \xfile{devanagari.mld}
-% (see section~\vref{s+mld+devanagari}):
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{hindi}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{devanagari}~>>, donc nous
-% chargeons \xfile{devanagari.mld} simplement (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+devanagari}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*hindi>
-\ProvidesFile{hindi.mld}[2006/08/24]\mtcselectlanguage{devanagari}%
-%</hindi>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{9}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Hindi-modern'' language: \uxfile{hindi-modern.mld}}\label{s+mld+hindi-modern}\ixfile{hindi-modern.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~hindi-modern~>>: \uxfile{hindi-modern.mld}}\label{s+mld+hindi-modern}\ixfile{hindi-modern.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.417475728\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.582524272\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{inde1.pdf}\ixgrf{inde1.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{inde2.jpg}\ixgrf{inde2.jpg}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Languages in India]{Languages in India
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/inde-carte-etats2.htm}
-% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/inde_linguistique.htm} in~\cite{tlfq};
-% see also \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/inde_cartepol.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+india}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Langues en Inde]{Langues en Inde
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/inde-carte-etats2.htm}
-% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/inde_linguistique.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq};
-% voir aussi \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/inde_cartepol.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+india}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}l@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{hindi-p.png}\ixgrf{hindi-p.png}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{hindi-b.png}\ixgrf{hindi-b.png}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Hindi proper and the hindi belt]{Hindi proper (east and west Hindi dialects) and the hindi belt (1991
-% census) (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hindi})\hfill\null}\label{f+hindi}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Hindi proprement dit et la ceinture hindi]{Hindi proprement dit (dialectes hindi de l'est et de l'ouest) et
-% la ceinture hindi (recensement de 1991) (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hindi})\hfill\null}\label{f+hindi}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \lneed{6}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% The titles\ixgrf{hin.png}\ixgrfl{india-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hindi}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{hin.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/India}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{india-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{hindi-modern}'' language are taken from the \xfile{captions.dn} file
-% (by \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, \name{John}{Smith},
-% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, \name{Richard}{Mahoney} and \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk})
-% in the Devan\=agar\={\i}
-% package~\cite{devanagari} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}) after conversion.
-% See also section~\vref{s+mld+devanagari}. Specific fonts are required.
-% The home page of the package is~\url{http://devnag.sarovar.org}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Les titres\ixgrf{hin.png}\ixgrfl{india-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hindi}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{hin.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Inde}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{india-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{hindi-modern}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{captions.dn}
-% (de \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, \name{John}{Smith},
-% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, \name{Richard}{Mahoney} et \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk})
-% dans le paquetage Devan\=agar\={\i}~\cite{devanagari} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}), après conversion.
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+devanagari}.
-% Des fontes spécifiques sont requises.
-% La page Web du paquetage est~{\froff\url{http://devnag.sarovar.org}}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macro}{\dn}
-% \begin{macro}{\qva}
-% \begin{macro}{\re}
-% \begin{macro}{\rs}
-% \begin{macro}{\2}
-% \begin{macro}{\8}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*hindi-modern>
-\ProvidesFile{hindi-modern.mld}[2006/08/29]%
-%% Hindi modern titles from captions.dn in ``Devanagari for TeX''
-%% by Pandey, Anshuman & Radhakrishnan, C.~V. & Wagner, Zden\v{e}k &
-%% Smith, John & Carmody, Kevin & Mahoney, Richard & Wujastyk, Dominik
-\def\ptctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}%
-\def\plftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}%
-\def\plttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}%
-\def\mtctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}%
-\def\mlftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}%
-\def\mlttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}%
-\def\stctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}%
-\def\slftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}%
-\def\slttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}%
-%</hindi-modern>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Hungarian'' language: \uxfile{hungarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+hungarian}\ixfile{hungarian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~hungarian~>>: \uxfile{hungarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+hungarian}\ixfile{hungarian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{hungarian}'' language is a synonym of the ``\lopt{magyar}'' language,
-% so we load \xfile{magyar.mld}.
-% See section~\vref{s+mld+magyar}.
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{hungarian}~>> (hongrois) est synonyme de la langue <<~\lopt{magyar}~>>, donc nous chargeons
-% \xfile{magyar.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+magyar}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*hungarian>
-\ProvidesFile{hungarian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{magyar}%
-%</hungarian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Icelandic'' language: \uxfile{icelandic.mld}}\label{s+mld+icelandic}\ixfile{icelandic.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~icelandic~>>: \uxfile{icelandic.mld}}\label{s+mld+icelandic}\ixfile{icelandic.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{islande.png}\ixgrf{islande.png}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{islandep.jpg}\ixgrf{islandep.jpg}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Iceland]{Iceland (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/islandecarte.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}
-% and \url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/europe/iceland_pol81.jpg}
-% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps});
-% see also \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Iceland})\hfill\null}\label{f+icelandic}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Islande]{Islande (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/islandecarte.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq}
-% et \url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/europe/iceland_pol81.jpg}
-% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps};
-% voir aussi \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Iceland})\hfill\null}\label{f+icelandic}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{18mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{iceland-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Icelandic_language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{iceland-f.png}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{icelandic}'' language (\emph{íslenska}) are taken from the \xfile{icelandic.dtx} file
-% (by \namea{Einar}{Árnason}{Arnason})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,icelandic}. See also~\cite{icelandic2}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{iceland-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Icelandic_language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{iceland-f.png}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{icelandic}~>> (islandais, \emph{íslenska}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{icelandic.dtx}
-% (par \namea{Einar}{Árnason}{Arnason})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,icelandic}. Voir aussi~\cite{icelandic2}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*icelandic>
-\ProvidesFile{icelandic.mld}[2007/12/18]%
-%% From icelandic.dtx (babel). Needs inputenc with 8-bits encoding. Árnason, Einar
-\def\ptctitle{Efnisyfirlit}%
-\def\plftitle{Myndaskr\'{a}}%
-\def\plttitle{T\"{o}fluskr\'{a}}%
-\def\mtctitle{Efnisyfirlit}%
-\def\mlftitle{Myndaskr\'{a}}%
-\def\mlttitle{T\"{o}fluskr\'{a}}%
-\def\stctitle{Efnisyfirlit}%
-\def\slftitle{Myndaskr\'{a}}%
-\def\slttitle{T\"{o}fluskr\'{a}}%
-%</icelandic>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Indon'' language: \uxfile{indon.mld}}\label{s+mld+indon}\ixfile{indon.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~indon~>>: \uxfile{indon.mld}}\label{s+mld+indon}\ixfile{indon.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{indon}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasai}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasai.mld}
-% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}):
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{indon}~>> (indon) est comme <<~\lopt{bahasai}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
-% \xfile{bahasai.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*indon>
-\ProvidesFile{indon.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasai}%
-%</indon>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Indonesian'' language: \uxfile{indonesian.mld}}\label{s+mld+indonesian}\ixfile{indonesian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~indonesian~>>: \uxfile{indonesian.mld}}\label{s+mld+indonesian}\ixfile{indonesian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{indonesian}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasai}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasai.mld}
-% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}):
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{indonesian}~>> (indonésien) est comme <<~\lopt{bahasai}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
-% \xfile{bahasai.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*indonesian>
-\ProvidesFile{indonesian.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasai}%
-%</indonesian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Interlingua'' language: \uxfile{interlingua.mld}}\label{s+mld+interlingua}\ixfile{interlingua.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{interlingua}'' language are taken from the \xfile{interlingua.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Peter}{Kleiweg})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,interlingua}.
-% Interlingua is an auxiliary language, built from the common
-% vocabulary of Spanish/Portuguese, English, Italian and French,
-% with some normalisation of spelling. The grammar is very easy,
-% more similar to English's than to neolatin languages\footnote{The site
-% \url{http://www.interlingua.com} is mostly written in interlingua
-% (as is \url{http://interlingua.altervista.org}), in case you want to read some sample of it.}.
-% See also:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interlingua}, \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interlingua},
-% \item Union Interlinguiste de France: \url{http://www.interlingua.com.fr/}
-% \item interlingua-english dictionnary: \url{http://www.interlingua.com/ied/}
-% \item interlingua grammar (in french): \url{http://filip.ouvaton.org/ia/gram/entra1.html}
-% \item somes sites in interlingua: \url{http://www.dmoz.org/World/Interlingua}
-% \item other sites about interlingua: \url{http://www.cle.unicamp.br/wcp3/interlingua.htm}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~interlingua~>>: \uxfile{interlingua.mld}}\label{s+mld+interlingua}\ixfile{interlingua.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{interlingua}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{interlingua.dtx}
-% (de \name{Peter}{Kleiweg})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,interlingua}.
-% Interlingua est une langue auxiliaire, construite à~partir du vocabulaire commun de l'espagnol/portugais, de
-% l'anglais de l'italien et du français, avec une certaine normalisation de l'orthographe. La grammaire est très
-% facile, plus similaire à~celle de l'anglais qu'à celles des langues néo-latines\,\footnote{Le site
-% {\froff\url{http://www.interlingua.com}} est écrit principalement en interlingua
-% (comme l'est {\froff\url{http://interlingua.altervista.org}}), au cas où vous souhaiteriez en lire un exemple.}.
-% Voir aussi:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interlingua}, \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interlingua},
-% \item Union Interlinguiste de France: \url{http://www.interlingua.com.fr/}
-% \item dictionnaire interlingua-anglais: \url{http://www.interlingua.com/ied/}
-% \item grammaire de l'interlingua (en français): \url{http://filip.ouvaton.org/ia/gram/entra1.html}
-% \item quelques sites en interlingua: \url{http://www.dmoz.org/World/Interlingua}
-% \item d'autres sites sur interlingua: \url{http://www.cle.unicamp.br/wcp3/interlingua.htm}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*interlingua>
-\ProvidesFile{interlingua.mld}[2007/12/18]%
-%% Interlingua titles from interlingua.dtx (babel). Kleiweg, Peter
-\def\ptctitle{Contento}%
-\def\plftitle{Lista de figuras}%
-\def\plttitle{Lista de tabellas}%
-\def\mtctitle{Contento}%
-\def\mlftitle{Figuras}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tabellas}%
-\def\stctitle{Contento}%
-\def\slftitle{Figuras}%
-\def\slttitle{Tabellas}%
-%</interlingua>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Irish'' language: \uxfile{irish.mld}}\label{s+mld+irish}\ixfile{irish.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~irish~>>: \uxfile{irish.mld}}\label{s+mld+irish}\ixfile{irish.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{irlande.pdf}\ixgrf{irlande.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{irish.png}\ixgrf{irish.png}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Ireland]{Ireland (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/irlande-comtes.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}
-% and \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Irish_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+ireland}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Irlande]{Irlande (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/irlande-comtes.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq}
-% et \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Irish_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+ireland}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrf{gael-ft.pdf}\ixgrfl{ireland-f.png}\ixgrfl{uk-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Irish_Language}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{gael-ft.pdf}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Éire}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ireland-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ireland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uk-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{irish}'' language (\emph{gaeilge}) come from the \xfile{irish.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{Marion}{Gunn} and \name{Fraser}{Grant})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,irish}:
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Les titres\ixgrf{gael-ft.pdf}\ixgrfl{ireland-f.png}\ixgrfl{uk-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Irlandais}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{gael-ft.pdf}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Éire}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ireland-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Irlande}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uk-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{irish}~>> (irlandais, \emph{gaeilge}) viennent du fichier \xfile{irish.dtx}
-% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{Marion}{Gunn} et \name{Fraser}{Grant})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,irish}:
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*irish>
-\ProvidesFile{irish.mld}[2006/02/28]%
-%% From irish.dtx (babel). Braams, Johannes~L. & Gunn, Marion & Grant, Fraser
-\def\ptctitle{Cl\'ar \'Abhair}%
-\def\plftitle{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}%
-\def\plttitle{T\'abla\'{\i}}%
-\def\mtctitle{Cl\'ar \'Abhair}%
-\def\mlftitle{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}%
-\def\mlttitle{T\'abla\'{\i}}%
-\def\stctitle{Cl\'ar \'Abhair}%
-\def\slftitle{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}%
-\def\slttitle{T\'abla\'{\i}}%
-%</irish>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Italian'' language: \uxfile{italian.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian}\ixfile{italian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~italian~>>: \uxfile{italian.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian}\ixfile{italian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.55\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.45\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{italysm.png}\ixgrf{italysm.png}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{italian.pdf}\ixgrf{italian.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Italy]{Italy (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/italy.html}
-% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~--
-% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/italieetat.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+italy}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Italie]{Italie (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/italy.html}
-% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~--
-% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/italieetat.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+italy}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!thb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,viewport=0 0 1357 628,clip]{italo1.png}\ixgrf{italo1.png}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Italophone areas in Europa]{Italophone areas in Europa
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Italian_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+italo}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions italophones en Europe]{Régions italophones en Europe
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Italian_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+italo}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{italy-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{argentina-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{croatia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{eritrea-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{malta1-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{san-marino-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{slovenia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{somalia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{suisse-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{corsica-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{vatican-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{monaco-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{albania-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{nice-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{montenegro-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{libya-f.jpg}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Italy}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{italy-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Argentina}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{argentina-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Croatia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{croatia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Eritrea}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{eritrea-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Italy}&\textbf{Argentina}&\textbf{Croatia}&\textbf{Eritrea}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Malta}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{malta1-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/San_Marino}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{san-marino-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovenia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{slovenia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Somalia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{somalia-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Malta}&\textbf{San~Marino}&\textbf{Slovenia}&\textbf{Somalia}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Switzerland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{suisse-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Corsica}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{corsica-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vatican}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vatican-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Monaco}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{monaco-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Switzerland}&\textbf{Corsica}&\textbf{Vatican}&\textbf{Monaco}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Albania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{albania-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nice}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{nice-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Montenegro}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{montenegro-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Libya}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{libya-f.jpg}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Albania}&\textbf{Nice}&\textbf{Montenegro}&\textbf{Libya}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Italophone countries and regions]{Italophone countries and regions (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Italian_Language})\hfill\null}\label{f+italo-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{italy-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{argentina-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{croatia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{eritrea-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{malta1-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{san-marino-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{slovenia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{somalia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{suisse-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{corsica-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{vatican-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{monaco-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{albania-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{nice-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{montenegro-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{libya-f.jpg}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Italie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{italy-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Argentine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{argentina-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Croatie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{croatia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Éritrée}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{eritrea-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Italie}&\textbf{Argentine}&\textbf{Croatia}&\textbf{Éritrée}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Malte}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{malta1-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Saint-Marin}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{san-marino-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovénie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{slovenia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Somalie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{somalia-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Malte}&\textbf{Saint-Marin}&\textbf{Slovénie}&\textbf{Somalie}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Suisse}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{suisse-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Corse}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{corsica-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vatican}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vatican-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Monaco}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{monaco-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Suisse}&\textbf{Corse}&\textbf{Vatican}&\textbf{Monaco}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Albanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{albania-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nice}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{nice-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Monténégro}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{montenegro-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Libye}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{libya-f.jpg}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Albanie}&\textbf{Nice}&\textbf{Monténégro}&\textbf{Libye}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Pays et régions italophones]{Pays et régions italophones(\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Italien})\hfill\null}\label{f+italo-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{italy-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Italy}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{italy-f.png}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{italian}'' language (\emph{italiano}) come from the file \xfile{italian.dtx}
-% (by \name{Maurizio}{Codogno} and \name{Claudio}{Beccari})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,italian}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+italian2}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{italy-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Italie}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{italy-f.png}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{italian}~>> (italien, \emph{italiano}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{italian.dtx}
-% (de \name{Maurizio}{Codogno} et \name{Claudio}{Beccari})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,italian}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+italian2}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*italian>
-\ProvidesFile{italian.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Italian titles from italian.dtx (babel). Same authors.
-%% Maurizio Codogno (mau@beatles.cselt.stet.it) & Claudio Beccari (beccari@polito.it)
-\def\ptctitle{Indice}%
-\def\plftitle{Elenco delle figure}%
-\def\plttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}%
-\def\mtctitle{Indice}%
-\def\mlftitle{Elenco delle figure}%
-\def\mlttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}%
-\def\stctitle{Indice}%
-\def\slftitle{Elenco delle figure}%
-\def\slttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}%
-%</italian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Italian2'' language: \uxfile{italian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian2}\ixfile{italian2.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{italian2}'' language are the same as for the ``\lopt{italian}'' language, except at the part
-% level (``Contenuto''). See also section~\vref{s+mld+italian}.\iname{Maurizio}{Codogno}\iname{Claudio}{Beccari}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~italian2~>>: \uxfile{italian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian2}\ixfile{italian2.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{italian2}~>> (italien, variante) sont les mêmes que pour la langue «~\lopt{italian}~»,
-% sauf au niveau partie («~Contenuto~»).
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+italian}.\iname{Maurizio}{Codogno}\iname{Claudio}{Beccari}
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*italian2>
-\ProvidesFile{italian2.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Italian titles. Variant, from italian.dtx (babel). Same authors.
-\def\ptctitle{Contenuto}%
-\def\plftitle{Elenco delle figure}%
-\def\plttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}%
-\def\mtctitle{Contenuto}%
-\def\mlftitle{Elenco delle figure}%
-\def\mlttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}%
-\def\stctitle{Contenuto}%
-\def\slftitle{Elenco delle figure}%
-\def\slttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}%
-%</italian2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \lneed{7}
-% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{29.15625mm}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Japanese'' language: \uxmldo{japanese}}\label{s+mld+japanese}\ixmldo{japanese}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~japanese~>>: \uxmldo{japanese}}\label{s+mld+japanese}\ixmldo{japanese}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.516379310\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.483620690\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{japon1}\ixgrf{japon1.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{japon2.jpg}\ixgrf{japon2.jpg}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Japan]{Japan (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/japoncarte.htm}
-% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/monde/famjapon.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+japon}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Japon]{Japon (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/japoncarte.htm}
-% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/monde/famjapon.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+japon}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% There\ixgrf{nihongo.png}\ixgrfl{japan-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Japanese_language}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{nihongo.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Japan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{japan-f.png}}}\\\strut\end{tabular}}}
-% are several variants for the japanese titles.
-% The titles for a first variant of the ``\lopt{japanese}'' language have been found (by a Google search) on
-% the Web site of
-% Professor \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\footnote{\url{http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}.
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% But see also other variants in sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese2}{s+mld+japanese6}.
-% \or\relax
-% Il y~a\ixgrf{nihongo.png}\ixgrfl{japan-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Japonais}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{nihongo.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Japon}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{japan-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% plusieurs variantes pour les titres en japonais.
-% Les titres pour une première variante de la langue <<~\lopt{japanese}~>> (japonais) ont été trouvés
-% (par une recherche avec Google) sur le site Web du Professeur
-% \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\,{\froff\footnote{\url{http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}}.
-%
-% Mais il faut aussi regarder les autres variantes dans les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese2}{s+mld+japanese6}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{2}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{japanese.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
-% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese.mlo}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*japanese>
-\ProvidesFile{japanese.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese}%
-%% Japanese titles. Needs japanese fonts (CJK) and special input encoding.
-%% From Kumazawa Toshiki <kumazawa@biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp>
-%% http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html
-%</japanese>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Japanese2'' language: \uxmldo{japanese2}}\label{s+mld+japanese2}\ixmldo{japanese2}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese2}'' language (japanese, second variant) are taken from file
-% \xfile{JIS.cap} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% Special fonts are needed, of course.
-% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+japanese}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese3}{s+mld+japanese6}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~japanese2~>>: \uxmldo{japanese2}}\label{s+mld+japanese2}\ixmldo{japanese2}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese2}~>> (japonais, deuxième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{JIS.cap} du
-% système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr.
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+japanese} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese3}{s+mld+japanese6}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{2}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{japanese2.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
-% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese2.mlo}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*japanese2>
-\ProvidesFile{japanese2.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese2}%
-%% From the file JIS.cap of the CJK package
-%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e.
-%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
-%% Character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990), encoding: EUC
-%</japanese2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Japanese3'' language: \uxmldo{japanese3}}\label{s+mld+japanese3}\ixmldo{japanese3}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese3}'' language (japanese, third variant) are taken from
-% file \xfile{JIS.cpx} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% Special fonts are needed, of course.
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese2}, and~\vref{s+mld+japanese4}{s+mld+japanese6}.
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese3}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{japanese3.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~japanese3~>>: \uxmldo{japanese3}}\label{s+mld+japanese3}\ixmldo{japanese3}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese3}~>> (japonais, troisième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{JIS.cpx} du
-% système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% Des fontes spéciales sont bien sûr nécessaires.
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese2} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese4}{s+mld+japanese6}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{2}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese3}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{japanese3.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% Notez que les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese3}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas
-% être générés facilement, donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese3.mlo}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*japanese3>
-\ProvidesFile{japanese3.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese3}%
-%% From the file JIS.cpx of the CJK package
-%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e.
-%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
-%% Character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990), encoding: EUC, preprocessed
-%</japanese3>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Japanese4'' language: \uxmldo{japanese4}}\label{s+mld+japanese4}\ixmldo{japanese4}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese4}'' language (japanese, fourth version) are taken from file \xfile{SJIS.cap} of the
-% \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). Special fonts are needed, of course.
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese3}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese5}{s+mld+japanese6}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~japanese4~>>: \uxmldo{japanese4}}\label{s+mld+japanese4}\ixmldo{japanese4}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese4}~>> (japonais, quatrième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{SJIS.cap}
-% du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi les
-% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese3} et~\vref{s+mld+japanese5}{s+mld+japanese6}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{2}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese4}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{japanese4.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese4}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
-% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese4.mlo}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*japanese4>
-\ProvidesFile{japanese4.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese4}%
-%% From SJIS.cap in CJK package for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean)
-%% with LaTeX2e. Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28/03/2003).
-%% Character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990), encoding: SJIS
-%</japanese4>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{12}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Japanese5'' language: \uxmldo{japanese5}}\label{s+mld+japanese5}\ixmldo{japanese5}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese5}'' (japanese, fifth variant) language are taken from file \xfile{SJIS.cpx} of
-% the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% Special fonts are needed, of course.
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese4}, and~\vref{s+mld+japanese6}.
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese5}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{japanese5.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \section{Langue <<~japanese5~>>: \uxmldo{japanese5}}\label{s+mld+japanese5}\ixmldo{japanese5}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese5}~>> (japonais, cinquième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{SJIS.cpx} du
-% système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. Regardez aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese4}
-% et~\vref{s+mld+japanese6}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{2}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese5}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{japanese5.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese5}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
-% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese5.mlo}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*japanese5>
-\ProvidesFile{japanese5.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese5}%
-%% From the file SJIS.cpx of the CJK package
-%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e.
-%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
-%% Character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990), encoding: SJIS, preprocessed
-%</japanese5>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{11}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Japanese6'' language: \uxmldo{japanese6}}\label{s+mld+japanese6}\ixmldo{japanese6}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese6}'' (japanese, sixth variant) language have been found (by a Google search)
-% on the Web site of
-% Professor \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\footnote{\url{http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}.
-% ^^A \lneed{4}
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese5}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~japanese6~>>: \uxmldo{japanese6}}\label{s+mld+japanese6}\ixmldo{japanese6}
-% Les titres pour la langue «~\lopt{japanese6}~» (japonais, sixième variante) ont été trouvés (par une recherche avec
-% Google) sur le site Web du Professeur
-% \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\,{\froff\footnote{\url{http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}}.
-% ^^A \lneed{4}
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese5}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{2}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese6}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{japanese6.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese6}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
-% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese6.mlo}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*japanese6>
-\ProvidesFile{japanese6.mld}[2006/10/31]\mtcloadmlo{japanese6}%
-%% Japanese6 titles. Needs japanese fonts (CJK) and special input encoding.
-%% From Kumazawa Toshiki <kumazawa@biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp>
-%% http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html
-%</japanese6>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Kannada'' language: \uxfile{kannada.mld}}\label{s+mld+kannada}\ixfile{kannada.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue «~kannada~»: \uxfile{kannada.mld}}\label{s+mld+kannada}\ixgrf{kannada.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{karnataka.jpg}\ixgrf{karnataka.jpg}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{karnad1.jpg}\ixgrf{karnad1.jpg}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Kannada language areas]{Kannada language areas (\url{http://www.pinkmoose.ic24.net/india/kabini.htm}
-% and \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Karnataka};
-% see also \url{http://kstdc.nic.in/pix/krnatmap.jpg}
-% and figure~\vref{f+india})\hfill\null}\label{f+kannada}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions de la langue kannada]{Régions de la langue kannada
-% (\url{http://www.pinkmoose.ic24.net/india/kabini.htm}
-% et \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Karnataka};
-% voir aussi \url{http://kstdc.nic.in/pix/krnatmap.jpg}
-% et la figure~\vref{f+india})\hfill\null}\label{f+kannada}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{7.180851064mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\ixgrf{kannada-n.png}\ixgrfl{karnataka-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kannada_script}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{kannada-n.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Karnataka}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{karnataka-f.jpg}}\end{tabular}}}
-% Kannada (``\lopt{kannada}'') (or Kannara) language is a dravidian language spoken in the Karnataka state
-% (main town: Bangalore) of India.
-% Titles are taken in the \xfile{kanlel.sty} package file from the
-% \packa{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX} project~\cite{kannadatex}\footnote{\url{http://Sarovar.org/projects/kannadatex}} by \name{C.~S.}{Yogananda} and \name{K.~K.}{Subramaniam}.
-% Specific fonts are required. See the alphabet here: \url{http://www.omniglot.com/writing/kannada.htm}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le\ixgrf{kannada-n.png}\ixgrfl{karnataka-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kannara}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{kannada-n.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Karnataka}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{karnataka-f.jpg}}\end{tabular}}}
-% «~\lopt{kannada}~» (ou kannara) est une langue dravidienne parlée dans l'état Karnataka (capitale Bangalore) de l'Inde. Les textes pour les
-% titres sont tirées du fichier paquetage \xfile{kanlel.sty} du projet
-% \packa{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX}~\cite{kannadatex}\,{\froff\footnote{\url{http://Sarovar.org/projects/kannadatex}}} de \name{C.~S.}{Yogananda} et \name{K.~K.}{Subramaniam}.
-% Des fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir l'alphabet ici: \url{http://www.omniglot.com/writing/kannada.htm}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*kannada>
-\ProvidesFile{kannada.mld}[2007/02/22]%
-%% From kanlel.sty of Kannadatex
-%% (C. S. Yogananda yoga@math.iisc.ernet.in yogacs@users.sarovar.org)
-%% (K. K. Subramaniam subbukk@users.sarovar.org)
-\def\ptctitle{pariviDi}%
-\def\plftitle{citarxgaLa paTiTx}%
-\def\plftitle{koVSaTxkagaLa paTiTx}%
-\def\mtctitle{pariviDi}%
-\def\mlftitle{citarxgaLa paTiTx}%
-\def\mlftitle{koVSaTxkagaLa paTiTx}%
-\def\stctitle{pariviDi}%
-\def\slftitle{citarxgaLa paTiTx}%
-\def\slftitle{koVSaTxkagaLa paTiTx}%
-%</kannada>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Khalkha'' language: \uxfile{khalkha.mld}}\label{s+mld+khalkha}\ixfile{khalkha.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~khalkha~>>: \uxfile{khalkha.mld}}\label{s+mld+khalkha}\ixfile{khalkha.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% ``\lopt{khalkha}'' is a synomym for ``\lopt{xalx}'',
-% so we just load \xfile{xalx.mld} (see sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+xalx}{s+mld+xalx3}):
-% \or\relax
-% Le <<~\lopt{khalkha}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{xalx}~>>,
-% donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{xalx.mld}
-% (voir les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+xalx}{s+mld+xalx3}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*khalkha>
-\ProvidesFile{khalkha.mld}[2005/11/16]\mtcselectlanguage{xalx}%
-%</khalkha>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Latin'' language: \uxfile{latin.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin}\ixfile{latin.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{latin}'' language (medieval) are taken from the \xfile{latin.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco}, and \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latin2}.
-% The latin\ixgrfl{vatican-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://www.vatican.va/latin/latin_index.html}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vatican-f.jpg}}}}}
-% language is still used by the Catholic Church and the Vatican for archives and some texts.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~latin~>>: \uxfile{latin.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin}\ixfile{latin.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latin}~>> (médiéval) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{latin.dtx}
-% (de \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco} et \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+latin2}.
-% La langue latine\ixgrfl{vatican-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://www.vatican.va/latin/latin_index.html}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vatican-f.jpg}}}}}
-% est encore utilisée par l'Église Catholique et le Vatican pour des archives et certains textes.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*latin>
-\ProvidesFile{latin.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Latin (medieval) titles from latin.dtx (babel)
-%% Beccari, Claudio & Tabacco, Raffalla & {\.Zelechowski}, Krzysztof Konrad
-\def\ptctitle{Index}%
-\def\plftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}%
-\def\plttitle{Conspectus tabularum}%
-\def\mtctitle{Index}%
-\def\mlftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}%
-\def\mlttitle{Conspectus tabularum}%
-\def\stctitle{Index}%
-\def\slftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}%
-\def\slttitle{Conspectus tabularum}%
-%</latin>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Latin2'' language: \uxfile{latin2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin2}\ixfile{latin2.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~latin2~>>: \uxfile{latin2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin2}\ixfile{latin2.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\ae}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{latin2}'' language (latin, medieval, abbreviated variant) are taken from the \xfile{latin.dtx}
-% (by \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco}, and \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski})
-% file in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}, but abbreviated. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latin}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latin2}~>> (latin, médiéval, variante abrégée) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{latin.dtx}
-% (de \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco} et \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}, mais ont été abrégés. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+latin}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*latin2>
-\ProvidesFile{latin2.mld}[2007/04/06]%
-%% Latin (medieval) titles (abbreviated) from latin.dtx (babel)
-%% Beccari, Claudio & Tabacco, Raffalla & {\.Zelechowski}, Krzysztof Konrad
-\def\ptctitle{Index}%
-\def\plftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}%
-\def\plttitle{Conspectus tabularum}%
-\def\mtctitle{Index}%
-\def\mlftitle{Descriptiones}%
-\def\mlttitle{{Tabul\ae}}%
-\def\stctitle{Index}%
-\def\slftitle{Descriptiones}%
-\def\slttitle{{Tabul\ae}}%
-%</latin2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Latinc'' language: \uxfile{latinc.mld}}\label{s+mld+latinc}\ixfile{latinc.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{latinc}'' language (classical latin) are taken from the \xfile{latin.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Claudio}{Beccari} and \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latinc2}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~latinc~>>: \uxfile{latinc.mld}}\label{s+mld+latinc}\ixfile{latinc.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latinc}~>> (latin classique) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{latin.dtx}
-% (de \name{Claudio}{Beccari} et \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+latinc2}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*latinc>
-\ProvidesFile{latinc.mld}[2007/04/13]%
-%% Latin (classical) titles from latin.dtx (babel)
-%% Beccari, Claudio & {\.Zelechowski}, Krzysztof Konrad
-\def\ptctitle{Index}%
-\def\plftitle{Conspectvs descriptionvm}%
-\def\plttitle{Conspectvs tabvlarvm}%
-\def\mtctitle{Index}%
-\def\mlftitle{Conspectvs descriptionvm}%
-\def\mlttitle{Conspectvs tabvlarvm}%
-\def\stctitle{Index}%
-\def\slftitle{Conspectvs descriptionvm}%
-\def\slttitle{Conspectvs tabvlarvm}%
-%</latinc>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Latinc2'' language: \uxfile{latinc2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latinc2}\ixfile{latinc2.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{latinc2}'' language (classical latin, abbreviated variant) are taken from the \xfile{latin.dtx}
-% (by \name{Claudio}{Beccari} and \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski})
-% file in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}, but abbreviated. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latinc}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~latinc2~>>: \uxfile{latinc2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latinc2}\ixfile{latinc2.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latinc2}~>> (latin classique, variante abrégée) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{latin.dtx}
-% (de \name{Claudio}{Beccari} et \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}, mais ont été abrégés. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+latinc}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*latinc2>
-\ProvidesFile{latinc2.mld}[2007/04/06]%
-%% Latin (classical) titles (abbreviated) from latin.dtx (babel)
-%% Beccari, Claudio & {\.Zelechowski}, Krzysztof Konrad
-\def\ptctitle{Index}%
-\def\plftitle{Conspectvs descriptionvm}%
-\def\plttitle{Conspectvs tabvlarvm}%
-\def\mtctitle{Index}%
-\def\mlftitle{Descriptiones}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tabvlae}%
-\def\stctitle{Index}%
-\def\slftitle{Descriptiones}%
-\def\slttitle{Tabvlae}%
-%</latinc2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \section{``Latvian'' language: \uxfile{latvian.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian}\ixfile{latvian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~latvian~>>: \uxfile{latvian.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian}\ixfile{latvian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.3649022507\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.635097493\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{baltes.jpg}\ixgrf{baltes.jpg}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{lettonie.jpg}\ixgrf{lettonie.jpg}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Baltic languages and Latvia]{Baltic languages and Latvia
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/monde/langues_baltes.htm}
-% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/lettoniecarte.htm} in~\cite{tlfq};
-% note that the estonian language is \emph{not} a baltic language, but a language from the
-% uralian family.)\hfill\null}\label{f+baltic-le}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Langues baltes et Lettonie]{Langues baltes et Lettonie
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/monde/langues_baltes.htm}
-% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/lettoniecarte.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq};
-% notez que l'estonien \emph{n'est pas} une langue balte, mais une langue de la famille ouralienne.)\hfill\null}\label{f+baltic-le}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{latvian-d.png}\ixgrf{latvian-d.png}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{latvian-r1.png}\ixgrf{latvian-r1.png}%
-% \\
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{%
-% \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Dialects of the Latvian language. Main dialects are titled
-% grey, subdialects are titled black, subdivisons of subdialects
-% are given in brackets. L\={\i}biskais or Livonian dialect is in
-% bluish shades, Vidus (Vidzemes) or Middle dialect is in green shades,
-% Aug\v{s}zemnieku or Highlander/Latgalian dialect is yellow-orange.
-% \or\relax
-% Dialectes de la langue lettone. Les dialectes principaux
-% sont titrés en gris, les sous dialectes sont titrés en noir,
-% les sub-divisions des sous-dialectes sont donnés entre
-% crochets. Le dialecte L\={\i}biskais ou Livonien est en tons
-% bleus. Le dialecte Vidus (Vidzemes) ou dialecte médian
-% est en tons verts, le dialecte Aug\v{s}zemnieku ou
-% dialecte des hauteurs ou Latgalien est en jaune orangé.
-% \fi
-% \end{minipage}}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Dialects and administrative regions in Latvia]{Dialects and administrative regions in Latvia
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latvian_language} and
-% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/AXL/Europe/lettonie-1gnrl.htm}
-% in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+latvian-d}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Dialectes et régions administratives de Lettonie]{Dialectes et régions administratives de Lettonie
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latvian_language} et
-% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/AXL/Europe/lettonie-1gnrl.htm}
-% dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+latvian-d}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{latvia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latvia}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{latvia-f.png}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{latvian}'' language\,\footnote{Note that ``\lopt{latvian}'' is the original name for
-% ``\lopt{letton}''.} (\emph{latvie\v{s}u valoda}) come from the \xfile{latvian.ldf} file
-% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
-% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+letton}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{latvia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lettonie}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{latvia-f.png}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{latvian}~>>\,\footnote{Notez que <<~\lopt{latvian}~>> (latvien) est
-% l'autre nom du <<~\lopt{letton}~>>.} (\emph{latvie\v{s}u valoda}) viennent du fichier \xfile{latvian.ldf}
-% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
-% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}.
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+letton}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*latvian>
-\ProvidesFile{latvian.mld}[2005/02/08]%
-%% From latvian.ldf (Antomega project).
-%% Needs Omega. Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov
-\def\ptctitle{\locallatvian{Saturs}}%
-\def\plftitle{\locallatvian{Att^^^^0113lu saraksts}}%
-\def\plttitle{\locallatvian{Tabulu saraksts}}%
-\def\mtctitle{\locallatvian{Saturs}}%
-\def\mlftitle{\locallatvian{Att^^^^0113lu saraksts}}%
-\def\mlttitle{\locallatvian{Tabulu saraksts}}%
-\def\stctitle{\locallatvian{Saturs}}%
-\def\slftitle{\locallatvian{Att^^^^0113lu saraksts}}%
-\def\slttitle{\locallatvian{Tabulu saraksts}}%
-%</latvian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \section{``Latvian2'' language: \uxfile{latvian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian2}\ixfile{latvian2.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{latvian2}'' language come from the \xfile{latvian.ldf} file
-% (by \name{Andris}{Lasis} and \namea{Ivars}{Dri\k{k}is}{Drikis})
-% at~\url{http://home.lanet.lv/~drikis/TeX/2e/latvian.ldf}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \section{Langue <<~latvian2~>>: \uxfile{latvian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian2}\ixfile{latvian2.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latvian2}~>> viennent du fichier \xfile{latvian.ldf}
-% (de \name{Andris}{Lasis} et \namea{Ivars}{Dri\k{k}is}{Drikis})
-% à~{\froff\url{http://home.lanet.lv/~drikis/TeX/2e/latvian.ldf}}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*latvian2>
-\ProvidesFile{latvian2.mld}[2007/06/05]%
-% Andris Lasis (andris_lisis@simms.lv) Ivars Drikis (drikis@lanet.lv)
-% http://home.lanet.lv/~drikis/TeX/2e/latvian.ldf
-\def\ptctitle{Saturs}%
-\def\plftitle{Att\= elu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}%
-\def\plttitle{Tabulu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}%
-\def\mtctitle{Saturs}%
-\def\mlftitle{Att\= elu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tabulu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}%
-\def\stctitle{Saturs}%
-\def\slftitle{Att\= elu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}%
-\def\slttitle{Tabulu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}%
-%</latvian2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Letton'' language: \uxfile{letton.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton}\ixfile{letton.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~letton~>>: \uxfile{letton.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton}\ixfile{letton.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{letton}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{latvian}'' language, so we just load
-% \xfile{latvian.mld}. See section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}.
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{letton}~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{latvian}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
-% \xfile{latvian.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*letton>
-\ProvidesFile{letton.mld}[2005/02/08]\mtcselectlanguage{latvian}%
-%</letton>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Letton2'' language: \uxfile{letton2.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton2}\ixfile{letton2.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~letton2~>>: \uxfile{letton2.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton2}\ixfile{letton2.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{letton2}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{latvian2}'' language, so we just load
-% \xfile{latvian2.mld}. See section~\vref{s+mld+latvian2}.
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{letton2}~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{latvian2}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
-% \xfile{latvian2.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+latvian2}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*letton2>
-\ProvidesFile{letton2.mld}[2007/06/05]\mtcselectlanguage{latvian2}%
-%</letton2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Lithuanian'' language: \uxfile{lithuanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian}\ixfile{lithuanian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~lithuanian~>>: \uxfile{lithuanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian}\ixfile{lithuanian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.442069741\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.557930259\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{baltes.jpg}\ixgrf{baltes.jpg}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{lituanie.png}\ixgrf{lituanie.png}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Baltic languages and Lithuania]{Baltic languages and Lithuania
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/monde/langues_baltes.htm}
-% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/lituaniecarte.htm} in~\cite{tlfq};
-% see also~\url{http://samogitia.mch.mii.lt/KALBA/girdstr.en.htm} by \name{Aleksas~Stanislovas}{Girdenis};
-% note that estonian is \emph{not} a baltic language, but a language from the uralian family.)\hfill\null}\label{f+baltic-li}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Langues baltiques et Lithuanie]{Langues baltiques et Lithuanie
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/monde/langues_baltes.htm}
-% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/lituaniecarte.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq};
-% voir aussi~\url{http://samogitia.mch.mii.lt/KALBA/girdstr.en.htm} par \name{Aleksas~Stanislovas}{Girdenis};
-% notez que l'estonien \emph{n'est pas} une langue balte, mais une langue de la famille ouralienne.)\hfill\null}\label{f+baltic-li}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{lithuania-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latvia}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lithuania-f.jpg}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{lithuanian}'' language (\emph{lietuvi\k{u} kalba}) are taken from the \xfile{lithuanian.ldf}
-% file\footnote{Found in \url{http://www.vtex.lt/tex/download/zip/babel.zip}.}
-% (by \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis})
-% for the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+lithuanian2}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{lithuania-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lettonie}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lithuania-f.jpg}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{lithuanian}~>> (lituanien, \emph{lietuvi\k{u} kalba}) sont simplement tirés du fichier
-% \xfile{lithuanian.ldf}\,\footnote{Trouvé dans {\froff{\url{http://www.vtex.lt/tex/download/zip/babel.zip}}}.}
-% (de \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis})
-% pour le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+lithuanian2}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*lithuanian>
-\ProvidesFile{lithuanian.mld}[2007/12/04]%
-%% Lithuanian titles from lithuanian.ldf
-%% in http://www.vtex.lt/tex/download/zip/babel.zip
-%% by Tolusis, Sigitas (sigitas@vtex.lt)
-\def\ptctitle{Turinys}%
-\def\plftitle{Paveiksl\protect\k u s\protect\k ara\protect\v sas}%
-\def\plttitle{Lentel\protect\.es}%
-\def\mtctitle{Turinys}%
-\def\mlftitle{Paveiksl\protect\k u s\protect\k ara\protect\v sas}%
-\def\mlttitle{Lentel\protect\.es}%
-\def\stctitle{Turinys}%
-\def\slftitle{Paveiksl\protect\k u s\protect\k ara\protect\v sas}%
-\def\slttitle{Lentel\protect\.es}%
-%</lithuanian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Lithuanian2'' language: \uxfile{lithuanian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian2}\ixfile{lithuanian2.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{lithuanian2}'' language (variant) are taken from the \xfile{lithuanian.ldf}
-% file, found in \url{http://www.vtex.lt/tex/littex/littex-20070713.tar.gz},
-% (by \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis})
-% for the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+lithuanian}.
-% The L7x encoding and the Latin Modern fonts are needed.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~lithuanian2~>>: \uxfile{lithuanian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian2}\ixfile{lithuanian2.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{lithuanian2}~>> (lituanien, variante) sont simplement tirés du fichier
-% \xfile{lithuanian.ldf}, trouvé dans {\froff{\url{http://www.vtex.lt/tex/littex/littex-20070713.tar.gz}}},
-% (de \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis})
-% pour le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+lithuanian}.
-% Le codage L7x et les fontes Latin Modern sont nécessaires.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*lithuanian2>
-\ProvidesFile{lithuanian2.mld}[2007/12/04]%
-%% Lithuanian titles (variant) from lithuanian.ldf
-%% in http://www.vtex.lt/tex/littex/littex-20060928.tar.gz
-%% by Tolusis, Sigitas (sigitas@vtex.lt)
-\def\ptctitle{Turinys}%
-\def\plftitle{Iliustracij\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}as}%
-\def\plttitle{Lenteli\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}}%
-\def\mtctitle{Turinys}%
-\def\mlftitle{Iliustracij\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}as}%
-\def\mlttitle{Lenteli\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}}%
-\def\stctitle{Turinys}%
-\def\slftitle{Iliustracij\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}as}%
-\def\slttitle{Lenteli\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}}%
-%</lithuanian2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \par
-%
-% \lneed{9}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Lowersorbian'' language: \uxfile{lowersorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lowersorbian}\ixfile{lowersorbian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~lowersorbian~>>: \uxfile{lowersorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lowersorbian}\ixfile{lowersorbian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{ls-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lower_Sorbian_language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ls-f.png}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{lowersorbian}'' language\,\footnote{Lower sorbian. Sorbian, or wendisch,
-% is a member of the west slavic subgroup of indo-european languages spoken in Lower Lusatia in the german
-% \emph{länder} of Saxony and Brandenburg. The Sorbs are descendents of the Wends, the german name for the slavic tribes
-% who occupied the area between the Elbe and Saale rivers in the west and the Odra (Oder) river in the east during
-% the medieval period (\textsc{vi}-th century).
-% See figures~\vrefrange{f+lusace}{f+sorben}.} (\emph{dolnoserbski, dolnoserv\v{s}\'{c}ina}) are taken from the \xfile{lsorbian.dtx} file (by \name{Eduard}{Werner})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,lsorbian}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+uppersorbian}.
-% A shorter language name is \lopt{lsorbian} (see section~\vref{s+mld+lsorbian}).
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{ls-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lower_Sorbian_language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ls-f.png}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{lowersorbian}~>> (bas sorabe)\,\footnote{%
-% ^^A \interfootnotelinepenalty=10000\interlinepenalty=10000\relax
-% Le bas sorabe, le sorabe ou wende,
-% est un membre du sous-groupe slave occidental des langues indo-européennes parlé en Basse-Lusace dans les \emph{länder}
-% allemands de Saxe et de Brandebourg. Les Sorabes sont des descendants des Wendes, nom germain des tribus slaves
-% qui occupaient la zone entre l'Elbe et la Saale à~l'ouest et l'Oder à~l'est pendant la période médiévale
-% (\textsc{vi}\fup{e}~siècle). Voir les figures~\vrefrange{f+lusace}{f+sorben}.}
-% (\emph{dolnoserbski, dolnoserv\v{s}\'{c}ina}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{lsorbian.dtx}
-% (de \name{Eduard}{Werner})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,lsorbian}.
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+uppersorbian}.
-% Un nom plus court pour cette langue est \lopt{lsorbian} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+lsorbian}).
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \begin{figure}[!tbh]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}cXc@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=.5\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{sorabe-1.jpg}\ixgrf{sorabe-1.jpg}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=.5\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{sorabe-2.jpg}\ixgrf{sorabe-2.jpg}\\
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Lusace and the Sorbians]{Lusace and the Sorbians
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/allemagne_sorabe.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+lusace}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[La Lusace et les sorabes]{La Lusace et les sorabes
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/allemagne_sorabe.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+lusace}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{sorbian.jpg}\ixgrf{sorbian.jpg}%
-% ^^A `p' option to keep the figure from drifting
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Sorbian dialects areas]{Sorbian dialects areas
-% (\url{http://www.people.ex.ac.uk/pjoyce/dialects/sorbisch.html}~(University of Exeter),
-% \url{http://www.mdr.de/sorbisches-programm/rundfunk/1913590.html},
-% \url{http://www.mdr.de/I/1940181.gif}; Niedersorbish: lower sorbian, Übergangsdialekte: transitional dialects,
-% Obersorbish: upper sorbian.)\hfill\null}\label{f+sorbian}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions des dialectes sorabes]{Régions des dialectes sorabes
-% (\url{http://www.people.ex.ac.uk/pjoyce/dialects/sorbisch.html}~(Université d'Exeter),
-% \url{http://www.mdr.de/sorbisches-programm/rundfunk/1913590.html},
-% \url{http://www.mdr.de/I/1940181.gif}; Niedersorbish: bas sorabe, Übergangsdialekte: dialectes de transition,
-% Obersorbish: haut sorabe.)\hfill\null}\label{f+sorbian}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \vspace*{-2pt} % ^^A ``Float too large''
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!tb]
-% ^^A \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{sorben.jpg}\ixgrf{sorben.jpg}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Sorbs]{Sorbs (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sorbs})\hfill\null}\label{f+sorben}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Sorabes]{Sorabes (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sorbs})\hfill\null}\label{f+sorben}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*lowersorbian>
-\ProvidesFile{lowersorbian.mld}[2006/02/28]%
-%% Lower sorbian titles from lsorbian.dtx (babel) by Werner, Eduard
-\def\ptctitle{Wop\'simje\'se}%
-\def\plftitle{Zapis wobrazow}%
-\def\plttitle{Zapis tabulkow}%
-\def\mtctitle{Wop\'simje\'se}%
-\def\mlftitle{Zapis wobrazow}%
-\def\mlttitle{Zapis tabulkow}%
-\def\stctitle{Wop\'simje\'se}%
-\def\slftitle{Zapis wobrazow}%
-\def\slttitle{Zapis tabulkow}%
-%</lowersorbian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Lsorbian'' language: \uxfile{lsorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lsorbian}\ixfile{lsorbian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~lsorbian~>>: \uxfile{lsorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lsorbian}\ixfile{lsorbian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{lsorbian}'' language is a synonym for ``\lopt{lowersorbian}'', so we just need to load \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}.
-% See section~\vref{s+mld+lowersorbian}.
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{lsorbian}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{lowersorbian}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
-% \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+lowersorbian}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{4}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*lsorbian>
-\ProvidesFile{lsorbian.mld}[2007/12/04]\mtcselectlanguage{lowersorbian}%
-%</lsorbian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Magyar'' language: \uxfile{magyar.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar}\ixfile{magyar.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~magyar~>>: \uxfile{magyar.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar}\ixfile{magyar.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.588235294\iwidth}
-% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.411764706\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{hun2.jpg}\ixgrf{hun2.jpg}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{hun1.png}\ixgrf{hun1.png}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Hungaria and magyar speaking areas]{Hungaria and magyar speaking areas
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hungaria}
-% and \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hungary_Language};
-% the magyar language is also spoken in some regions in Romania,
-% Slovakia, Serbia-Voivodina and Ukraine)\hfill\null}\label{f+hongrie}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Hongrie et régions de langue magyar]{Hongrie et régions de langue magyar
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hungaria}
-% et \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hungary_language};
-% la langue hongroise est aussi parlée dans quelques régions de Roumanie,
-% de Slovaquie, de Serbie-Voïvodine et d'Ukraine)\hfill\null}\label{f+hongrie}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm}\reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{hungary-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hungarian_language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{hungary-f.png}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{magyar}'' language are taken from the \xfile{magyar.dtx}
-% (by \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces} and \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, with help from \name{Attila}{Koppanyi})
-% file in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,magyar}. A synonym of ``\lopt{magyar}'' is
-% ``\lopt{hungarian}'' (see section~\vref{s+mld+hungarian}). See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+magyar2}{s+mld+magyar3} for variants.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{hungary-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hungarian_language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{hungary-f.png}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{magyar}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{magyar.dtx}
-% (de \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces} et \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, avec l'aide de \name{Attila}{Koppanyi})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,magyar}. Un synonyme de <<~\lopt{magyar}~>>
-% est <<~\lopt{hungarian}~>> (hongrois) (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+hungarian}).
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+magyar2}{s+mld+magyar3} pour des variantes.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{4}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*magyar>
-\ProvidesFile{magyar.mld}[2006/03/08]%
-%% Magyar titles from magyar.dtx (babel). Bíró, Árpád & Bérces, József
-\def\ptctitle{Tartalom}%
-\def\plftitle{\'Abr\'ak}%
-\def\plttitle{T\'abl\'azatok}%
-\def\mtctitle{Tartalom}%
-\def\mlftitle{\'Abr\'ak}%
-\def\mlttitle{T\'abl\'azatok}%
-\def\stctitle{Tartalom}%
-\def\slftitle{\'Abr\'ak}%
-\def\slttitle{T\'abl\'azatok}%
-%</magyar>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Magyar2'' language: \uxfile{magyar2.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar2}\ixfile{magyar2.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{magyar2}'' language are taken from a variant proposed
-% in the \xfile{magyar.dtx} file of the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} (by \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces},
-% \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, and \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}).
-% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+magyar} and~\vref{s+mld+magyar3}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~magyar2~>>: \uxfile{magyar2.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar2}\ixfile{magyar2.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{magyar2}~>> sont tirés d'une variante proposée
-% dans le fichier \xfile{magyar.dtx} du paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} (de \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces},
-% \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro} et \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}).
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+magyar} et~\vref{s+mld+magyar3}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*magyar2>
-\ProvidesFile{magyar2.mld}[2008/04/03]%
-%% Magyar2 titles (variant) from magyar.dtx (babel).
-%% Bíró, Árpád & Bérces, József
-\def\ptctitle{Tartalom}%
-\def\plftitle{\'Abr\'ak list\'aja}%
-\def\plttitle{T\'abl\'azatok list\'aja}%
-\def\mtctitle{Tartalom}%
-\def\mlftitle{\'Abr\'ak list\'aja}%
-\def\mlttitle{T\'abl\'azatok list\'aja}%
-\def\stctitle{Tartalom}%
-\def\slftitle{\'Abr\'ak list\'aja}%
-\def\slttitle{T\'abl\'azatok list\'aja}%
-%</magyar2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Magyar3'' language: \uxfile{magyar3.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar3}\ixfile{magyar3.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{magyar3}'' language (third variant of magyar) are taken
-% from the \xfile{magyar.dtx} file (by \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}, \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, and \name{Attila}{Koppanyi})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,magyar}\,\footnote{The situation of the magyar language in
-% the \pack{babel} package is not clear; some experimental versions exist.}.
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+magyar}{s+mld+magyar2}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~magyar3~>>: \uxfile{magyar3.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar3}\ixfile{magyar3.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{magyar3}~>> (troisième variante de la langue magyar) sont tirés
-% du fichier \xfile{magyar.dtx} (de \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}, \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro} et \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}).
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,magyar}\,\footnote{La situation de la langue magyar dans
-% le paquetage \pack{babel} n'est pas claire; il existe des versions expérimentales.}.
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+magyar}{s+mld+magyar2}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*magyar3>
-\ProvidesFile{magyar3.mld}[2006/03/08]%
-%% Magyar3 titles (variant) from magyar.dtx (babel).
-%% Bíró, Árpád & Bérces, József
-\def\ptctitle{Tartalomjegyz\'ek}%
-\def\plftitle{\'Abr\'ak jegyz\'eke}%
-\def\plttitle{T\'abl\'azatok jegyz\'eke}%
-\def\mtctitle{Tartalomjegyz\'ek}%
-\def\mlftitle{\'Abr\'ak jegyz\'eke}%
-\def\mlttitle{T\'abl\'azatok jegyz\'eke}%
-\def\stctitle{Tartalomjegyz\'ek}%
-\def\slftitle{\'Abr\'ak jegyz\'eke}%
-\def\slttitle{T\'abl\'azatok jegyz\'eke}%
-%</magyar3>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Malay'' language: \uxfile{malay.mld}}\label{s+mld+malay}\ixfile{malay.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~malay~>>: \uxfile{malay.mld}}\label{s+mld+malay}\ixfile{malay.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{malay}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasam}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasam.mld}
-% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}):
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{malay}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{bahasam}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
-% \xfile{bahasam.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*malay>
-\ProvidesFile{malay.mld}[2006/01/11]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasam}%
-%</malay>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Malayalam-b'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-b.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-b}\ixfile{malayalam-b.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-b~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-b.mld}}%
-% \label{s+mld+malayalam-b}\ixfile{malayalam-b.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.528700906\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.471299094\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{malayalam.pdf}\ixgrf{malayalam.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{kerala.jpg}\ixgrf{kerala.jpg}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Malayalam language areas]{Malayalam language areas
-% (\url{http://www.lmp.ucla.edu/Profile.aspx?LangID=92&menu=004} in~\cite{LMP}
-% and \url{http://keralalife.com/})\hfill\null}\label{f+malayalam}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions de la langue malayalam]{Régions de la langue malayalam
-% (\url{http://www.lmp.ucla.edu/Profile.aspx?LangID=92&menu=004} dans~\cite{LMP}
-% et \url{http://keralalife.com/})\hfill\null}\label{f+malayalam}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \begin{macro}{\mm}
-% \begin{macro}{\X}
-% \begin{macro}{\<>}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-b}'' language
-% are taken from the
-% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
-% The Malayalam language is spoken from the western coast of
-% Malabar to the extreme southern India, mainly in the Kerala state. It is one of the dravidian languages strongly
-% bound to the Tamil language.
-% The\ixgrf{malayalam.png}\ixgrfl{kerala-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Malayalam_Language}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{malayalam.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kerala}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kerala-f.jpg}}\end{tabular}}}
-% alphabet and the script are dated from the 8th or 9th centuries.
-% This language option requires specific fonts (depending on the
-% option of the \pack{malayalam} package).
-% It should be used with the following options of the
-% \pack{malayalam} package\,\footnote{There is a great variety of fonts for malayalam; hence I have attempted to limit
-% the number of \suffix{.mld} files.}:
-% \optp{aathira}{malayalam},
-% \optp{ambili}{malayalam},
-% \optp{anahka}{malayalam},
-% \optp{ashtamudi}{malayalam},
-% \optp{aswathi}{malayalam},
-% \optp{ayilyambold}{malayalam},
-% \optp{bhanu}{malayalam},
-% \optp{bhavana}{malayalam},
-% \optp{chippi}{malayalam},
-% \optp{gauri}{malayalam},
-% \optp{gopika}{malayalam},
-% \optp{indulekha}{malayalam},
-% \optp{ISMashtamudi}{malayalam},
-% \optp{ISMkarthika}{malayalam},
-% \optp{ISMkaumudi}{malayalam},
-% \optp{ISMrevathi}{malayalam},
-% \optp{jaya}{malayalam},
-% \optp{karthika}{malayalam},
-% \optp{kaumudi}{malayalam},
-% \optp{kottakkal}{malayalam},
-% \optp{makam}{malayalam},
-% \optp{malavika},
-% \optp{mridula}{malayalam},
-% \optp{payippad}{malayalam},
-% \optp{periyar}{malayalam},
-% \optp{ravivarma}{malayalam},
-% \optp{revathi}{malayalam},
-% \optp{sabari}{malayalam},
-% \optp{sarada}{malayalam},
-% \optp{sruthy}{malayalam}, and
-% \optp{triruvathira}{malayalam}.
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-keli}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-b}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
-% La langue Malayalam est
-% parlée de la côte occidentale de Malabar jusqu'à l'extrême sud de l'Inde, principalement dans l'état de Kerala.
-% C'est l'une des langues dravidiennes fortement liées au Tamoul. L'alphabet%
-% \ixgrf{malayalam.png}\ixgrfl{kerala-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Malayalam}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{malayalam.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kerala}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kerala-f.jpg}}\end{tabular}}}
-% et l'écriture datent du \textsc{viii}\fup{e} ou
-% \textsc{ix}\fup{e}~siècle.
-% Cette option de langue requiert des fontes spécifiques (selon l'option
-% du paquetage \pack{malayalam}).
-% Elle devrait être utilisée avec les options suivantes du paquetage
-% \pack{malayalam}\,\footnote{Il y~a une grande variété de fontes pour le malayalam; j'ai donc essayé de limiter
-% le nombre de fichiers \suffix{.mld}.}:
-% \optp{aathira}{malayalam},
-% \optp{ambili}{malayalam},
-% \optp{anahka}{malayalam},
-% \optp{ashtamudi}{malayalam},
-% \optp{aswathi}{malayalam},
-% \optp{ayilyambold}{malayalam},
-% \optp{bhanu}{malayalam},
-% \optp{bhavana}{malayalam},
-% \optp{chippi}{malayalam},
-% \optp{gauri}{malayalam},
-% \optp{gopika}{malayalam},
-% \optp{indulekha}{malayalam},
-% \optp{ISMashtamudi}{malayalam},
-% \optp{ISMkarthika}{malayalam},
-% \optp{ISMkaumudi}{malayalam},
-% \optp{ISMrevathi}{malayalam},
-% \optp{jaya}{malayalam},
-% \optp{karthika}{malayalam},
-% \optp{kaumudi}{malayalam},
-% \optp{kottakkal}{malayalam},
-% \optp{makam}{malayalam},
-% \optp{malavika}{malayalam},
-% \optp{mridula}{malayalam},
-% \optp{payippad}{malayalam},
-% \optp{periyar}{malayalam},
-% \optp{ravivarma}{malayalam},
-% \optp{revathi}{malayalam},
-% \optp{sabari}{malayalam},
-% \optp{sarada}{malayalam},
-% \optp{sruthy}{malayalam} et
-% \optp{triruvathira}{malayalam}.
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-keli}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*malayalam-b>
-\ProvidesFile{malayalam-b.mld}[2007/12/04]%
-\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}%
-\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}%
-\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}%
-\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}%
-\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}%
-\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}%
-\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}%
-\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}%
-\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}%
-%</malayalam-b>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Malayalam-keli'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-keli.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-keli}\ixfile{malayalam-keli.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-keli~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-keli.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-keli}\ixfile{malayalam-keli.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mm}
-% \begin{macro}{\X}
-% \begin{macro}{\<>}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-keli}'' language,
-% with the ``Keli'' fonts, are taken from the \pack{malayalam}
-% package~\cite{malayalam} by~\name{A.J.}{Alex}. This language requires specific fonts.
-% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-b} and \vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-keli}~>> (malayalam, écriture \emph{keli}), avec les fontes <<~Keli~>>,
-% sont tirés du paquetage
-% \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques.
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-b} et \vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*malayalam-keli>
-\ProvidesFile{malayalam-keli.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Malayalam: Keli fonts
-\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}%
-\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}%
-\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}%
-\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}%
-\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}%
-\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}%
-\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}%
-\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}%
-\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}%
-%</malayalam-keli>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Malayalam-keli2'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}\ixfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-keli2~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}}%
-% \label{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}\ixfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mm}
-% \begin{macro}{\X}
-% \begin{macro}{\<>}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-keli2}'' language
-% are taken from the
-% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
-% This language requires specific fonts (keli second variant).
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-keli}
-% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-mr}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-keli2}~>> sont
-% tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
-% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques (keli seconde variante).\ABK
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-keli}
-% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-mr}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*malayalam-keli2>
-\ProvidesFile{malayalam-keli2.mld}[2007/12/04]%
-% Keli fonts (mkl)
-\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}%
-\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}
-\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}%
-\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}%
-\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}
-\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}%
-\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}%
-\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}
-\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}%
-%</malayalam-keli2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Malayalam-mr'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-mr.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-mr}\ixfile{malayalam-mr.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-mr~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-mr.mld}}%
-% \label{s+mld+malayalam-mr}\ixfile{malayalam-mr.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mm}
-% \begin{macro}{\X}
-% \begin{macro}{\<>}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-mr}'' language
-% are taken from the
-% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
-% This language requires specific fonts (traditional rachana).
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}
-% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-omega}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-mr}~>> sont
-% tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
-% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques (rachana traditionnel).\ABK
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}
-% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-omega}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*malayalam-mr>
-\ProvidesFile{malayalam-mr.mld}[2007/12/04]%
-% mr fonts (rachana: mr1,...,mr6)
-\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}
-\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}
-\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}
-\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}
-\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}
-\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}
-\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}
-\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}
-\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}
-%</malayalam-mr>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Malayalam-omega'' language: \uxmldo{malayalam-omega}}%
-% \label{s+mld+malayalam-omega}\ixmldo{malayalam-omega}\label{s+mlo+malayalam-omega}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue «~malayalam-omega~»: \uxmldo{malayalam-omega}}%
-% \label{s+mld+malayalam-omega}\ixmldo{malayalam-omega}\label{s+mlo+malayalam-omega}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This is the Malayalam language implementation ``\lopt{malayalam-omega}''
-% based on \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$) (the version of \LaTeX\ for
-% Omega) via the \pack{omal} package~\cite{malayalam-o} (by~\name{A.J.}{Alex}) of the Malayalam-Omega
-% project\footnote{\url{http://Sarovar.org/projects/malayalam}}. As the titles contain characters in a special encoding,
-% we must load a \suffix{.mlo} file. A lot of fonts are available via options of the \pack{omal} package.
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-mr}
-% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
-% \or\relax
-% C'est l'implantation «~\lopt{malayalam-omega}~» de la langue malayalam lorsque vous utilisez
-% \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$) (la version de \LaTeX\ pour
-% Omega) via le paquetage \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o} (de \name{A.J.}{Alex}) du projet
-% Malayalam-Omega\,{\froff\footnote{\url{http://Sarovar.org/projects/malayalam}}}. Comme les titres contiennent des
-% caractères dans un codage spécial, nous devons charger un fichier \suffix{.mlo}. De nombreuses fontes sont disponibles
-% via des options du paquetage \pack{omal}.
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-mr}
-% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*malayalam-omega>
-\ProvidesFile{malayalam-omega.mld}[2007/12/04]\mtcloadmlo{malayalam-omega}%
-%% from omal.sty (Alex A.J. indicTeX@gmail.com)
-%</malayalam-omega>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{9}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Malayalam-rachana'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}}%
-% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-rachana~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}}%
-% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mm}
-% \begin{macro}{\X}
-% \begin{macro}{\C}
-% \begin{macro}{\F}
-% \begin{macro}{\<>}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-rachana}'' language,
-% with the traditionnal ``Rachana'' fonts (old lipi), are taken from
-% the \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by~\name{A.J.}{Alex}.
-% This language requires specific fonts.
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-omega}
-% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-rachana}~>>,
-% avec les fontes traditionnelles <<~Rachana~>> (ancien \emph{lipi}),
-% sont tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
-% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques.
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-omega}
-% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*malayalam-rachana>
-\ProvidesFile{malayalam-rachana.mld}[2005/06/07]%
-%% Malayalam: Rachana fonts, traditionnal.
-\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}%
-\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}%
-\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}%
-\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}%
-\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}%
-\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}%
-\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}%
-\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}%
-\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}%
-%</malayalam-rachana>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Malayalam-rachana2'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-rachana2~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}}%
-% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mm}
-% \begin{macro}{\X}
-% \begin{macro}{\<>}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-rachana2}'' language,
-% with the reformed ``Rachana'' fonts (new lipi), are taken from the
-% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
-% This language requires specific fonts.
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana} and~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-rachana2}~>>,
-% avec les fontes <<~Rachana~>> réformées (nouveau \emph{lipi}), sont
-% tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
-% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques.
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana} et~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*malayalam-rachana2>
-\ProvidesFile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}[2006/01/13]% %% Malayalam: Rachana fonts, reformed.
-\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}%
-\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}%
-\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}%
-\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}%
-\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}%
-\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}%
-\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}%
-\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}%
-\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}%
-%</malayalam-rachana2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{9}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Malayalam-rachana3'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-rachana3~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}}%
-% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \begin{macro}{\mm}
-% \begin{macro}{\X}
-% \begin{macro}{\<>}
-% \begin{macro}{\C}
-% \begin{macro}{\F}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-rachana3}'' language
-% are taken from the
-% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
-% This language requires specific fonts (rachana).
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-rachana3}~>> sont
-% tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
-% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques (rachana).
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*malayalam-rachana3>
-\ProvidesFile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}[2007/12/04]% % Rachana fonts (mr2,...,mr6)
-\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}%
-\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}%
-\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}%
-\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}%
-\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}%
-\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}%
-\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}%
-\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}%
-\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}%
-%</malayalam-rachana3>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Manju'' language: \uxfile{manju.mld}}\label{s+mld+manju}\ixfile{manju.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~manju~>>: \uxfile{manju.mld}}\label{s+mld+manju}\ixfile{manju.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{manju}'' language is a synomym for ``\lopt{bithe}'',
-% so we just load \xfile{bithe.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+bithe}):
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{manju}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{bithe}~>>, donc nous chargeons
-% simplement \xfile{bithe.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bithe}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*manju>
-\ProvidesFile{manju.mld}[2005/11/16]\mtcselectlanguage{bithe}%
-%</manju>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{14.28125mm}\reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Mexican'' language: \uxfile{mexican.mld}}\label{s+mld+mexican}\ixfile{mexican.mld}
-% The titles\ixgrfl{mexico-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mexican_Spanish}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mexico-f.jpg}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{mexican}'' language (\emph{español mexicano}) are taken from the \xfile{mexican.ldf} file
-% (by \name{Luis}{Rivera}) in \url{http://www.dante.de/tex-archive/language/spanish/nonstandard/mx/}.
-% Mexican is a spanish (castillan) dialect.
-% The title of the parttocs is shorter for articles. See also section~\vref{s+mld+spanish4}.
-% See figures~\vrefrange{f+mexico}{f+mexl}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~mexican~>>: \uxfile{mexican.mld}}\label{s+mld+mexican}\ixfile{mexican.mld}
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{mexico-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mexican_Spanish}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mexico-f.jpg}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{mexican}~>> (mexicain, \emph{español mexicano}) sont tirés du
-% fichier \xfile{mexican.ldf} (de \name{Luis}{Rivera})
-% dans \url{http://www.dante.de/tex-archive/language/spanish/nonstandard/mx/}. Le mexicain est un dialecte de l'espagnol
-% (castillan).
-% Le titre des parttocs est plus court dans les articles. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish4}.
-% Voir les figures~\vrefrange{f+mexico}{f+mexl}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \def\LBAS{Less than 20\,000 speakers.}
-% \def\LMED{From 20\,000 to 100\,000 speakers.}
-% \def\LHAUT{More than 100\,000 speakers.}
-% \else\relax
-% \def\LBAS{Moins de 20\,000 locuteurs.}
-% \def\LMED{De 20\,000 à~100\,000 locuteurs.}
-% \def\LHAUT{Plus de 100\,000 locuteurs.}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[htb!]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{mexip.pdf}\ixgrf{mexip.pdf}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[México]{México (\url{http://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mexico})}\label{f+mexico}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Mexique]{Mexique (\url{http://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mexique})}\label{f+mexico}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-1cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.3333333333\iwidth}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}c@{}c@{}c@{}c@{}c@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{mex1.pdf}\ixgrf{mex1.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{mex2.pdf}\ixgrf{mex2.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{mex3.pdf}\ixgrf{mex3.pdf}\\
-% {\footnotesize\LBAS}&&{\footnotesize\LMED}&&{\footnotesize\LHAUT}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Indigenous languages of México]{Indigenous languages of México
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_Mexico})\hfill\null}\label{f+mexl}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Langues indigènes du Mexique]{Langues indigènes du Mexique
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_Mexico})\hfill\null}\label{f+mexl}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mexican>
-\ProvidesFile{mexican.mld}[2008/04/03]%
-%% Spanish titles (from mexican.ldf) Rivera, Luis (jlrn77@gmail.com)
-\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
-\def\ptctitle{\'Indice} \else \def\ptctitle{\'Indice general} \fi % <----
-\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
-\def\plttitle{\'Indice de tablas}%
-\def\mtctitle{\'Indice}%
-\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
-\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de tablas}%
-\def\stctitle{\'Indice}%
-\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
-\def\slttitle{\'Indice de tablas}%
-%</mexican>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Meyalu'' language: \uxfile{meyalu.mld}}\label{s+mld+meyalu}\ixfile{meyalu.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~meyalu~>>: \uxfile{meyalu.mld}}\label{s+mld+meyalu}\ixfile{meyalu.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{meyalu}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasam}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasam.mld}
-% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}):
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{meyalu}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{bahasam}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
-% \xfile{bahasam.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*meyalu>
-\ProvidesFile{meyalu.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasam}%
-%</meyalu>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{12}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Mongol'' language: \uxfile{mongol.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongol}\ixfile{mongol.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~mongol~>>: \uxfile{mongol.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongol}\ixfile{mongol.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=.5\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{mongolian.pdf}\ixgrf{mongolian.pdf}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Mongol language areas]{Mongol language areas
-% (\url{http://www.lmp.ucla.edu/Profile.aspx?LangID=79&menu=004} in~\cite{LMP})\hfill\null}\label{f+mongolian}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions de la langue mongole]{Régions de la langue mongole
-% (\url{http://www.lmp.ucla.edu/Profile.aspx?LangID=79&menu=004} dans~\cite{LMP})\hfill\null}\label{f+mongolian}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-%
-% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount}
-%
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!thb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{mongasie.pdf}\ixgrf{mongasie.pdf}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Linguistic map of the mongol language]{Linguistic map of the mongol language
-% (\url{http://www.lexilogos.com/mongol_dictionnaire.htm})\hfill\null}\label{f+lmap-mongol}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Carte linguistique du mongol]{Carte linguistique du mongol
-% (\url{http://www.lexilogos.com/mongol_dictionnaire.htm})\hfill\null}\label{f+lmap-mongol}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!thb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{mongols.png}\ixgrf{mongols.png}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Mongolia and Mongol autonomous regions in the People's Republic of China (PRC)]{Mongolia and Mongol autonomous regions in the People's Republic of China (PRC)
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongol}, see also
-% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/chine-region-auto-Mongolie.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Mongolie et régions mongoles autonomes en République Populaire de Chine (RPC)]{Mongolie et régions mongoles
-% autonomes en République Populaire de Chine (RPC) (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongol}, voir aussi
-% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/chine-region-auto-Mongolie.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-%
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \lneed{5}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{22.8125mm}
-% \begin{macro}{\mnr}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% ^^A \begin{SMOOTH}
-% The titles\ixgrf{mongoltr.png}\ixgrfl{imongolia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{mongoltr.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Inner_Mongolia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{imongolia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{mongol}'' language are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}
-% (by \name{Oliver}{Corff} and \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}).
-% This language requires specific fonts. See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig}{s+mld+bithe},
-% \vrefrange{s+mld+buryat}{s+mld+buryat2}, and \vrefrange{s+mld+xalx}{s+mld+xalx3}.
-% ^^A \end{SMOOTH}
-% \or\relax
-% ^^A \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Les titres\ixgrf{mongoltr.png}\ixgrfl{imongolia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{mongoltr.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolie-Intérieure}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{imongolia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{mongol}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}
-% (de \name{Oliver}{Corff} et \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}).
-% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques.
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig}{s+mld+bithe}, \vrefrange{s+mld+buryat}{s+mld+buryat2} et
-% \vrefrange{s+mld+xalx}{s+mld+xalx3}.
-% ^^A \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{8}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mongol>
-\ProvidesFile{mongol.mld}[1999/03/16]%
-%% Mongol (xalx) titles. Needs mongol fonts
-\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}%
-\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}%
-\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
-\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}%
-\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}%
-\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
-\def\stctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}%
-\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}%
-\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
-%</mongol>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Mongolb'' language: \uxfile{mongolb.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongolb}\ixfile{mongolb.mld}
-% This\ixgrf{mongolcy.png}\ixgrfl{mongolia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mongolcy.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mongolia-f.png}}}\\\strut\end{tabular}}}
-% is an other variant for the mongolian titles,
-% taken from the \xfile{mongolian.dtx} file~\cite{mongolian} (by \name{Dorjgotov}{Batmunkh})
-% for the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} (hence the final ``\texttt{b}'' in ``\texttt{mongolb}'').
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~mongolb~>>: \uxfile{mongolb.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongolb}\ixfile{mongolb.mld}
-% Ceci\ixgrf{mongolcy.png}\ixgrfl{mongolia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mongolcy.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mongolia-f.png}}}\\\strut\end{tabular}}}
-% est une autre variante pour les titres en mongol.
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{mongolb}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{mongolian.dtx}~\cite{mongolian}
-% (de \name{Dorjgotov}{Batmunkh})
-% pour le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} (d'où le «~\texttt{b}~» final dans «~\texttt{mongolb}~»).
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{2}
-% \begin{macro}{\cyr}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{mongolb}'' language use cyrillic characters and the X2 and T2 encodings and are derived
-% from the \xfile{russianb.dtx} file (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich} and \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue «~\lopt{mongolb}~» utilisent des caractères cyrilliques et les codages X2 et T2
-% sont dérivés du fichier \xfile{russianb.dtx} (de \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich} et
-% \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mongolb>
-\ProvidesFile{mongolb.mld}[2007/01/29]%
-%% Mongolian titles from mongolian.dtx for the babel package
-%% Dorjgotov Batmunkh (batmunkh@num.edu.mn)
-%% Needs some cyrillic fonts and special cyrillic encoding T2 and X2.
-%% Vladimir Volovich (TeX@vvv.vsu.ru) & Werner Lemberg (wl@gnu.org)
-\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
- \def\ptctitle{{\cyr\CYRA\cyrg\cyru\cyru\cyrl\cyrg\cyra}}\relax%
-\else\relax
- \def\ptctitle{{\cyr\CYRG\cyra\cyrr\cyrch\cyri\cyrg}}\relax%
-\fi
-\def\plftitle{{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyru\cyrr\cyrg\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn
- \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}%
-\def\plttitle{{\cyr\CYRH\cyry\cyrs\cyrn\cyrerev\cyrg\cyrt\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn
- \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}%
-\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
- \def\mtctitle{{\cyr\CYRA\cyrg\cyru\cyru\cyrl\cyrg\cyra}}\relax%
-\else\relax
- \def\mtctitle{{\cyr\CYRG\cyra\cyrr\cyrch\cyri\cyrg}}\relax%
-\fi
-\def\mlftitle{{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyru\cyrr\cyrg\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn
- \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}%
-\def\mlttitle{{\cyr\CYRH\cyry\cyrs\cyrn\cyrerev\cyrg\cyrt\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn
- \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}%
-\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
- \def\stctitle{{\cyr\CYRA\cyrg\cyru\cyru\cyrl\cyrg\cyra}}\relax%
-\else\relax
- \def\stctitle{{\cyr\CYRG\cyra\cyrr\cyrch\cyri\cyrg}}\relax%
-\fi
-\def\slftitle{{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyru\cyrr\cyrg\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn
- \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}%
-\def\slttitle{{\cyr\CYRH\cyry\cyrs\cyrn\cyrerev\cyrg\cyrt\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn
- \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}%
-%</mongolb>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Mongolian'' language: \uxfile{mongolian.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongolian}\ixfile{mongolian.mld}\ilopt{mongolian}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~mongolian~>>: \uxfile{mongolian.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongolian}\ixfile{mongolian.mld}\ilopt{mongolian}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% This is an other name for the ``mongolb'' language, because
-% the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} uses the name ``\lopt{mongolian}''.
-% We just load \xfile{mongolb.mld}. See section~\vref{s+mld+mongolb}.
-% \or\relax
-% C'est un autre nom pour la langue «~mongolb~», car le paquetage
-% \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} utilise le nom «~\lopt{mongolian}~»
-% Nous chargeons simplement \xfile{mongolb.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+mongolb}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*mongolian>
-\ProvidesFile{mongolian.mld}[2007/02/05]\mtcselectlanguage{mongolb}%
-%</mongolian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Naustrian'' language: \uxfile{naustrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+naustrian}\ixfile{naustrian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~naustrian~>>: \uxfile{naustrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+naustrian}\ixfile{naustrian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{naustrian}'' language is a synonym of the ``\lopt{ngermanb}'' language
-% (a revised version of the \texttt{germanb} variant of the german language),
-% so we just load the \xfile{ngermanb.mld} file.
-% See also section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}.
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{naustrian}~>> (néo-autrichien) est un synonyme de la langue <<~\lopt{ngermanb}~>> (néo-allemand) (une
-% version réformée de la variante \texttt{germanb} de la langue allemande), donc nous chargeons simplement
-% \xfile{ngermanb.mld}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*naustrian>
-\ProvidesFile{naustrian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{ngermanb}%
-%</naustrian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Newzealand'' language: \uxfile{newzealand.mld}}\label{s+mld+newzealand}\ixfile{newzealand.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~newzealand~>>: \uxfile{newzealand.mld}}\label{s+mld+newzealand}\ixfile{newzealand.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\ixgrfl{newzealand-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/New_Zealand}%
-% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{newzealand-f.png}}}}}
-% ``\lopt{newzealand}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'',
-% so we just load \xfile{english.mld}
-% (section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
-% \or\relax
-% La\ixgrfl{newzealand-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nouvelle_Zélande}%
-% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{newzealand-f.png}}}}}
-% langue <<~\lopt{newzealand}~>> (néo-zélandais) est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
-% \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*newzealand>
-\ProvidesFile{newzealand.mld}[2006/01/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}%
-%</newzealand>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Ngerman'' language: \uxfile{ngerman.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngerman}\ixfile{ngerman.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~ngerman~>>: \uxfile{ngerman.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngerman}\ixfile{ngerman.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{ngerman}'' language is a synonym of the ``\lopt{ngermanb}'' language\,\footnote{A revised version of the
-% \lopt{germanb} variant of the german language.}, so we just load the \xfile{ngermanb.mld} file.
-% See also section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}.
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{ngerman}~>> (néo-allemand) est un synonyme de la langue
-% <<~\lopt{ngermanb}~>>\,\footnote{Une version réformée
-% de la variante \lopt{germanb} de la langue allemande.}, donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{ngermanb.mld}.
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ngerman>
-\ProvidesFile{ngerman.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{ngermanb}%
-%</ngerman>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Ngermanb'' language: \uxfile{ngermanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb}\ixfile{ngermanb.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{ngermanb}'' language\,\footnote{A variant of the german language, with revised spelling.} are
-% taken from the file \xfile{ngermanb.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Bernd}{Raichle} and \name{Walter}{Schmidt})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,ngermanb}.
-% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+naustrian}, and~\vref{s+mld+ngerman}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~ngermanb~>>: \uxfile{ngermanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb}\ixfile{ngermanb.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{ngermanb}~>>\,\footnote{Une variante pour la langue allemande, avec une orthographe
-% réformée.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{ngermanb.dtx}
-% (de \name{Bernd}{Raichle} et \name{Walter}{Schmidt})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,ngermanb}. Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+naustrian}
-% et~\vref{s+mld+ngerman}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ngermanb>
-\ProvidesFile{ngermanb.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% New german (B) titles from ngermanb.dtx (babel). Raichle, Bernd & Schmidt, Walter
-\def\ptctitle{Inhaltsverzeichnis}% % oder nur: Inhalt % <-----
-\def\plftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}%
-\def\plttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}%
-\def\mtctitle{Inhalt}%
-\def\mlftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}%
-\def\stctitle{Inhalt}%
-\def\slftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}%
-\def\slttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}%
-%</ngermanb>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Ngermanb2'' language: \uxfile{ngermanb2.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb2}\ixfile{ngermanb2.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{ngermanb2}'' language (revised spelling and
-% short titles) are taken from the \xfile{ngermanb.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Bernd}{Raichle} and \name{Walter}{Schmidt})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,ngermanb}, and abbreviated.
-% See also section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}.
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \section{Langue <<~ngermanb2~>>: \uxfile{ngermanb2.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb2}\ixfile{ngermanb2.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{ngermanb2}~>> (orthographe réformée et titres courts) sont tirés du
-% fichier \xfile{ngermanb.dtx}
-% (de \name{Bernd}{Raichle} et \name{Walter}{Schmidt})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,ngermanb}, et abrégés.
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ngermanb2>
-\ProvidesFile{ngermanb2.mld}[2005/09/27]%
-%% New german (B) short (2) titles
-\def\ptctitle{Inhalt}%
-\def\plftitle{Abbildungen}%
-\def\plttitle{Tabellen}%
-\def\mtctitle{Inhalt}%
-\def\mlftitle{Abbildungen}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tabellen}%
-\def\stctitle{Inhalt}%
-\def\slftitle{Abbildungen}%
-\def\slttitle{Tabellen}%
-%</ngermanb2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \section{``Norsk'' language: \uxfile{norsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk}\ixfile{norsk.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~norsk~>>: \uxfile{norsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk}\ixfile{norsk.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.591188475\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.408811475\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{norvege-c.pdf}\ixgrf{norvege-c.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{norvege-t.pdf}\ixgrf{norvege-t.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Languages in Norway]{Bokm{\aa}l and nynorsk languages in Norway
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/norvege-communes-lng.htm}
-% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/norvege.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+norway}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Langues en Norvège]{Langues <<~bokm{\aa}l~>> et <<~nynorsk~>> en Norvège
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/norvege-communes-lng.htm}
-% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/norvege.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+norway}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{18.1875mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{norway-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Norwegian_language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{norway-f.png}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{norsk}'' language (or \emph{bokm\r{a}l}, ``language of the kingdom'') are taken from the
-% \xfile{norsk.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen},
-% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst} and \name{Rune}{Kleveland})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, with help
-% from \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{norway-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Norwegian_language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{norway-f.png}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{norsk}~>> (norvégien, ou \emph{bokm{\aa}l}, <<~langue du royaume~>>) sont tirés du
-% fichier \xfile{norsk.dtx}
-% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen},
-% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst} et \name{Rune}{Kleveland})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk},
-% avec l'aide de \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}.
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}.
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{norway-p.pdf}\ixgrf{norway-p.pdf}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Norway]{Norway (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Norway})\hfill\null}\label{f+norway-p}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Norvège]{Norvège (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Norway})\hfill\null}\label{f+norway-p}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*norsk>
-\ProvidesFile{norsk.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Norsk titles from norsk.dtx (babel). Braams, Johannes~L. & Helstrup, Haavard
-%% & Holme, Alv Kjetil & Iversen, Per Steinar & Petterst, Terje Engeset
-%% & Kleveland, Rune. Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no)
-\def\ptctitle{Innhold}%
-\def\plftitle{Figurer}%
-\def\plttitle{Tabeller}%
-\def\mtctitle{Innhold}%
-\def\mlftitle{Figurer}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tabeller}%
-\def\stctitle{Innhold}%
-\def\slftitle{Figurer}%
-\def\slttitle{Tabeller}%
-%</norsk>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Norsk2'' language: \uxfile{norsk2.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk2}\ixfile{norsk2.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{norsk2}'' language (or \emph{bokm\r{a}l}, ``language of the kingdom'') are taken from the
-% \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, with help
-% from \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}, and abbreviated.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~norsk2~>>: \uxfile{norsk2.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk2}\ixfile{norsk2.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{norsk2}~>> (norvégien, ou \emph{bokm{\aa}l}, <<~langue du royaume~>>) sont tirés
-% du paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, avec l'aide de \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}, et abrégés.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*norsk2>
-\ProvidesFile{norsk2.mld}[2005/09/27]%
-%% Short norsk titles. Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no)
-\def\ptctitle{Innhold}%
-\def\plftitle{Figurliste}%
-\def\plttitle{Tabelliste}%
-\def\mtctitle{Innhold}%
-\def\mlftitle{Figurliste}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tabelliste}%
-\def\stctitle{Innhold}%
-\def\slftitle{Figurliste}%
-\def\slttitle{Tabelliste}%
-%</norsk2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \section{``Nynorsk'' language: \uxfile{nynorsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk}\ixfile{nynorsk.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{nynorsk}'' language\,\footnote{Created around 1800
-% by \namea{Ivar}{{\AA}ssen}{Assen} to make a real
-% independent and national norvegian language, in reaction to danish, from the various dialects spoken in the
-% country. But nynorsk has never gained much popularity outside rural regions.} are taken
-% from the \xfile{norsk.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen},
-% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst} and \name{Rune}{Kleveland})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, with help from
-% \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+norsk}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \section{Langue <<~nynorsk~>>: \uxfile{nynorsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk}\ixfile{nynorsk.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{nynorsk}~>>
-% (néo-norvégien)\,\footnote{Créée vers 1800 par \namea{Ivar}{{\AA}ssen}{Assen}
-% pour construire une vraie langue norvégienne indépendante et nationale, en réaction au danois, à~partir des
-% divers dialectes parlés dans le pays. Mais le néo-norvégien n'a jamais beaucoup gagné en popularité en dehors des régions
-% rurales.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{norsk.dtx}
-% (par \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen},
-% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst} et \name{Rune}{Kleveland})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, avec l'aide de
-% \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+norsk}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*nynorsk>
-\ProvidesFile{nynorsk.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Nynorsk titles from norsk.dtx (babel). Braams, Johannes~L. & Helstrup, Haavard
-%% & Holme, Alv Kjetil & Iversen, Per Steinar & Petterst, Terje Engeset
-%% & Kleveland, Rune. Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no)
-\def\mtctitle{Innhald}%
-\def\mlftitle{Figurar}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tabellar}%
-\def\ptctitle{Innhald}%
-\def\plftitle{Figurar}%
-\def\plttitle{Tabellar}%
-\def\stctitle{Innhald}%
-\def\slftitle{Figurar}%
-\def\slttitle{Tabellar}%
-%</nynorsk>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Nynorsk2'' language: \uxfile{nynorsk2.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk2}\ixfile{nynorsk2.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{nynorsk2}'' language are variants of the titles of the ``\lopt{nynorsk}'' language.
-% See also section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~nynorsk2~>>: \uxfile{nynorsk2.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk2}\ixfile{nynorsk2.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{nynorsk2}~>> sont des variantes des titres de la langue <<~\lopt{nynorsk}~>>.
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*nynorsk2>
-\ProvidesFile{nynorsk.mld}[1999/03/16]%
-%% Nynorsk titles. Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no)
-\def\mtctitle{Innhald}%
-\def\mlftitle{Figurliste}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tabelliste}%
-\def\ptctitle{Innhald}%
-\def\plftitle{Figurliste}%
-\def\plttitle{Tabelliste}%
-\def\stctitle{Innhald}%
-\def\slftitle{Figurliste}%
-\def\slttitle{Tabelliste}%
-%</nynorsk2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Occitan'' language: \uxfile{occitan.mld}}\label{s+mld+occitan}\ixfile{occitan.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~occitan~>>: \uxfile{occitan.mld}}\label{s+mld+occitan}\ixfile{occitan.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!htbp]
-% ^^A \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.599812559\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.400187441\iwidth}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{occitanie.png}\ixgrf{occitanie.png}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{occtaur.jpg}\ixgrf{occtaur.jpg}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Occitan in France]{Occitan in France (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Occitan})\hfill\null}\label{f+occi1}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[L'occitan en France]{L'occitan en France
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Occitan})\hfill\null}\label{f+occi1}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-%
-% \vspace*{1.\bigskipamount}
-%
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.709152542\iwidth}
-% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.290847458\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.6\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.4\iwidth}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{occdial1.jpg}\ixgrf{occdial1.jpg}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{occdial2.png}\ixgrf{occdial2.png}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Occitan dialects]{Occitan dialects (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Occitan})\hfill\null}\label{f+occi2}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Les dialectes occitans]{Les dialectes occitans (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Occitan})\hfill\null}\label{f+occi2}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\ixgrfl{occ-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Occitanie}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{occ-f.png}}}}}
-% \lopt{occitan} language\,\footnote{I~used the site {\url{http://www.panoccitan.org/diccionari.aspx}}
-% for the translations.} is still spoken in the south of France,
-% from Limoges (Letmòges), Bordeaux (Bordèu) and Toulouse
-% (Tolosa\,\footnote{\emph{Per Tolosa totjorn mai!}}) to Marseille (Marselha) and Nice (Niça), with many local variants.
-% This bilingual street sign in Toulouse (Tolosa), like many
-% such signs found in historical parts of the city, is maintained
-% primarily for its antique charm; it is typical of what little
-% remains of the ``lenga d'oc'' in southern French cities (see
-% figures~\vrefrange{f+occi1}{f+occi2}).
-% See also~\url{http://www.orbilat.com/Maps/Occitan/Occitan.gif}.
-% See also~\cite{occi}.
-% \or\relax
-% La\ixgrfl{occ-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Occitanie}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{occ-f.png}}}}}
-% langue occitane (\lopt{occitan} ou langue d'oc)\,\footnote{J'ai utilisé le site
-% {\froff\url{http://www.panoccitan.org/diccionari.aspx}} pour les traductions.}
-% est encore parlée dans le sud de la France,
-% de Limoges (Letmòges), Bordeaux (Bordèu) et Toulouse (Tolosa\,\footnote{\emph{Per Tolosa totjorn mai!}})
-% à~Marseille (Marselha) et Nice (Niça), avec de nombreuses variantes locales.
-% Ces plaques de rue en deux langues dans Toulouse (Tolosa),
-% comme de nombreux signes analogues dans les parties
-% historiques de la cité, sont conservées essentiellement pour
-% leur charme ancien; ceci est typique de ce qui subsiste de la
-% <<~lenga d'oc~>> dans les cités du Midi de la France (voir
-% les figures~\vrefrange{f+occi1}{f+occi2}).
-% Voir aussi {\froff\url{http://www.orbilat.com/Maps/Occitan/Occitan.gif}}.
-% Voir aussi~\cite{occi}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*occitan>
-\ProvidesFile{occitan.mld}[2007/12/18]%
-%% Occitan titles (translations using http://www.panoccitan.org/diccionari.aspx)
-\def\ptctitle{Ensenhador}%
-\def\plftitle{Ti\`era de las figurats}%
-\def\plttitle{Ti\`era de las taulas}%
-\def\mtctitle{Ensenhador}%
-\def\mlftitle{Ti\`era de las figurats}%
-\def\mlttitle{Ti\`era de las taulas}%
-\def\stctitle{Ensenhador}%
-\def\slftitle{Ti\`era de las figurats}%
-\def\slttitle{Ti\`era de las taulas}%
-%</occitan>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Occitan2'' language: \uxfile{occitan2.mld}}\label{s+mld+occitan2}\ixfile{occitan2.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~occitan2~>>: \uxfile{occitan2.mld}}\label{s+mld+occitan2}\ixfile{occitan2.mld}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \lopt{occitan2} language provides an example of variants for the occitan titles.
-% \or\relax
-% La langue \lopt{occitan2} donne un exemple de variantes des titres occitans.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*occitan2>
-\ProvidesFile{occitan2.mld}[2008/04/03]%
-% Occitan titles (variants)
-\def\ptctitle{Taula dels ensenhadors}%
-\def\plftitle{Lista de las figuras}%
-\def\plttitle{Lista dels tabl\`eus}%
-\def\mtctitle{Taula dels ensenhadors}%
-\def\mlftitle{Lista de las figuras}%
-\def\mlttitle{Lista dels tabl\`eus}%
-\def\stctitle{Taula dels ensenhadors}%
-\def\slftitle{Lista de las figuras}%
-\def\slttitle{Lista dels tabl\`eus}%
-%</occitan2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Polish'' language: \uxfile{polish.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish}\ixfile{polish.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~polish~>>: \uxfile{polish.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish}\ixfile{polish.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{pologne.pdf}\ixgrf{pologne.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{polmin.jpg}\ixgrf{polmin.jpg}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Poland and minorities in Poland]{Poland and minorities in Poland (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/pologne-1demo.htm}
-% in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+pologne}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Pologne et les minorités en Pologne]{Pologne et minorités en Pologne (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/pologne-1demo.htm}
-% dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+pologne}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{polish-d.jpg}\ixgrf{polish-d.jpg}\\{}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \small This map shows a division of Polish dialects onto four branches: the Lesser Polish~(B1) in the south and
-% southeast, Greater Polish~(B2) in west, Mazovian~(B3) in central and eastern parts and the \emph{New Mixed Dialects}
-% group~(B4) in southwest. Silesian~(G) and Kashubian~(F) are treated as languages rather than dialects.
-% \or\relax
-% Cette carte montre une division des dialectes polonais en quatre branches: le polonais mineur~(B1) au sud et au
-% sud-est, le polonais majeur~(B2) à~l'ouest, le mazovien~(B3) au centre et à~l'est, et le groupe des
-% \emph{nouveaux dialectes mixtes}~(B4) au sud-ouest. Le silésien~(G) et le kashubien~(F)
-% sont considérés comme des langues plutôt que comme des dialectes.
-% \fi
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Polish dialects]{Polish dialects
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Polish_dialects})\hfill\null}\label{f+polish-d}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Dialectes polonais]{Dialectes polonais
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Polish_dialects})\hfill\null}\label{f+polish-d}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{poland-f.png}\ixgrfl{polski-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Poland}%
-% {\flagboxu{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{poland-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Polish_Language}{\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{polski-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{polish}'' language (\emph{j\k{e}zyk polski}) are taken from the \xfile{polish.dtx} file
-% (by \namea{Elmar}{Schalück}{Schaluck} and \name{Michael}{Janich})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,polish}.
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+polish2}{s+mld+polski}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{poland-f.png}\ixgrfl{polski-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pologne}%
-% {\flagboxu{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{poland-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Polonais}{\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{polski-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{polish}~>> (polonais, \emph{j\k{e}zyk polski}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{polish.dtx}
-% (de \namea{Elmar}{Schalück}{Schaluck} et \name{Michael}{Janich})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,polish}.
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+polish2}{s+mld+polski}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*polish>
-\ProvidesFile{polish.mld}[2007/12/18]%
-%% Polish titles from polish.dtx (babel). Schalück, Elmar & Janich, Michael
-\def\ptctitle{Spis tre\'sci}%
-\def\plftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}%
-\def\plttitle{Spis tablic}%
-\def\mtctitle{Spis tre\'sci}%
-\def\mlftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}%
-\def\mlttitle{Spis tablic}%
-\def\stctitle{Spis tre\'sci}%
-\def\slftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}%
-\def\slttitle{Spis tablic}%
-%</polish>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Polish2'' language: \uxfile{polish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish2}\ixfile{polish2.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~polish2~>>: \uxfile{polish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish2}\ixfile{polish2.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\localpolish}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{polish2}'' language\,\footnote{``Polish2'' is a variant of ``\lopt{polish}''.} are taken from
-% the \xfile{omega-polish.ldf}
-% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
-% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. See also sections~\vref{s+mld+polish} and~\vref{s+mld+polski}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{polish2}~>> (polonais, seconde variante) sont tirés
-% du fichier \xfile{omega-polish.ldf}
-% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
-% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}.
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+polish} et~\vref{s+mld+polski}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*polish2>
-\ProvidesFile{polish2.mld}[2005/02/08]%
-%% from omega-polish.ldf (Antomega). Needs Omega. Alexej M. Kryukov, Dmitry Ivanov
-\def\ptctitle{\localpolish{Spis tre^^^^00b1ci}}%
-\def\plftitle{\localpolish{Spis rysunk^^^^00adw}}%
-\def\plttitle{\localpolish{Spis tablic}}%
-\def\mtctitle{\localpolish{Spis tre^^^^00b1ci}}%
-\def\mlftitle{\localpolish{Spis rysunk^^^^00adw}}%
-\def\mlttitle{\localpolish{Spis tablic}}%
-\def\stctitle{\localpolish{Spis tre^^^^00b1ci}}%
-\def\slftitle{\localpolish{Spis rysunk^^^^00adw}}%
-\def\slttitle{\localpolish{Spis tablic}}%
-%</polish2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Polski'' language: \uxfile{polski.mld}}\label{s+mld+polski}\ixfile{polski.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{polski}'' language (variant for polish) are taken from the \xfile{polski.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Mariusz}{Olko} and \namea{Marcin}{Woli\'nski}{Wolinski})
-% in the \pack{polski} package~\cite{polski,platex-pl}. See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+polish}{s+mld+polish2}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~polski~>>: \uxfile{polski.mld}}\label{s+mld+polski}\ixfile{polski.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{polski}~>> (autre nom du polonais) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{polski.dtx}
-% (de \name{Mariusz}{Olko} et \namea{Marcin}{Woli\'nski}{Wolinski})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{polski}~\cite{polski,platex-pl}.
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+polish}{s+mld+polish2}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*polski>
-\ProvidesFile{polski.mld}[2008/01/15]%
-%% Polski titles from polski.dtx. Olko, Mariusz & Woli\'nski, Marcin.
-\def\ptctitle{Spis tre\'sci}%
-\def\plftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}%
-\def\plttitle{Spis tabel}%
-\def\mtctitle{Spis tre\'sci}%
-\def\mlftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}%
-\def\mlttitle{Spis tabel}%
-\def\stctitle{Spis tre\'sci}%
-\def\slftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}%
-\def\slttitle{Spis tabel}%
-%</polski>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Portuges'' language: \uxfile{portuges.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuges}\ixfile{portuges.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~portuges~>>: \uxfile{portuges.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuges}\ixfile{portuges.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% The name ``\lopt{portuges}'' is another spelling for ``\lopt{portuguese}''
-% (see section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}), so we just load \xfile{portuguese.mld}:
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Le nom «~\lopt{portuges}~» est une autre orthographe pour <<~portuguese~>>
-% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}), donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{portuguese.mld}:
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*portuges>
-\ProvidesFile{portuges.mld}[2005/06/07]\mtcselectlanguage{portuguese}%
-%</portuges>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Portuguese'' language: \uxfile{portuguese.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuguese}\ixfile{portuguese.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~portuguese~>>: \uxfile{portuguese.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuguese}\ixfile{portuguese.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{portu-r.jpg}\ixgrf{portu-r.jpg}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{portugal.pdf}\ixgrf{portugal.pdf}\\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Portugal]{Portugal (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/portugal.html}
-% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps},
-% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/portugal.htm}
-% in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+portugal}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Portugal]{Portugal (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/portugal.html}
-% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps},
-% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/portugal.htm}
-% dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+portugal}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% ^^A \centering
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{luso1.pdf}\ixgrf{luso1.pdf}%
-% \caption[Lusophone areas]{Lusophone areas
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portuguese_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+luso}
-% \or\relax
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{luso2.pdf}\ixgrf{luso2.pdf}%
-% \caption[Régions lusophones]{Régions lusophones
-% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portugais})\hfill\null}\label{f+luso}\ixgrf{luso2.pdf}%
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% ^^A \def\ctextbf#1{\null\hfill\textbf{#1}\hfill\null}
-% ^^A \let\ctextbf\textbf
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{angola-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{brazil-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{cap-verde-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{east-timor-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{galicia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{guinea-bissau-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{equa-guinea-f.png}%
-% \ixgrf{macau-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{mozambique-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{portugal-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{sao-f.png}%
-% \ixgrf{cplpmap.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Angola}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{angola-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Brazil}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{brazil-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cap_Verde}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cap-verde-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/East_Timor}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{east-timor-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Angola}&\textbf{Brazil}&\textbf{Cap~Verde}&\textbf{East~Timor}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Galicia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{galicia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guinea-Bissau}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{guinea-bissau-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Equatorial_Guinea}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{equa-guinea-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Macau}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{macau-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Galicia}&\textbf{Guinea-Bissau}&\textbf{Equatorial~Guinea}&\textbf{Macaù}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mozambique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mozambique-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portugal}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{portugal-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sao_Tome-and-Principe}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{sao-f.png}}}&\\%
-% \textbf{Mozambique}&\textbf{Portugal}&\textbf{Sa\~o~Tomé-and-Príncipe}&%
-% ^^A \\\bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=\textwidth]{cplpmap.png}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \caption[Lusophone countries and regions]{Lusophone countries and regions (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+luso-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{angola-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{brazil-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{cap-verde-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{east-timor-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{galicia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{guinea-bissau-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{equa-guinea-f.png}%
-% \ixgrf{macau-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{mozambique-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{portugal-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{sao-f.png}%
-% \ixgrf{cplpmap.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Angola}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{angola-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Brésil}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{brazil-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cap_Vert}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cap-verde-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://n.wikipedia.org/wiki/Timor_Oriental}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{east-timor-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Angola}&\textbf{Brésil}&\textbf{Cap~Vert}&\textbf{Timor~Oriental}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Galice}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{galicia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guinée-Bissau}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{guinea-bissau-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guinée_Équatoriale}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{equa-guinea-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Macao}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{macau-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Galice}&\textbf{Guinée-Bissau}&\textbf{Guinée~Équatoriale}&\textbf{Macao}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mozambique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mozambique-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portugal}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{portugal-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sao_Tome-et-Principe}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{sao-f.png}}}&\\%
-% \textbf{Mozambique}&\textbf{Portugal}&\textbf{Sa\~o~Tomé-and-Príncipe}&%
-% ^^A \\\bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=\textwidth]{cplpmap.png}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}
-% \caption[Pays et régions lusophones]{Pays et régions lusophones (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+luso-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.35\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.65\iwidth}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!ht]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{portu-p.jpg}\ixgrf{portu-p.jpg}%
-% \IVC[60mm]{\awidth}{portu-p.jpg}\ixgrf{portu-p.jpg}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\footnotesize\selectlanguage{french}
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=0em
-% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt
-% \RaggedRight
-% \begin{enumerate}[1.~]
-% \item Açoriano (Azorean) -- Azores.
-% \item Alentejano -- Alentejo.
-% \item Algarvio -- Algarve (there is a particular dialect
-% in a small part of western Algarve).
-% \item Alto-Minhoto -- North of Braga (hinterland).
-% \item Baixo-Beirão; Alto-Alentejano -- Central Portugal (hinterland).
-% \item Beirão -- Central Portugal.
-% \item Estremenho -- Regions of Coimbra and Lisbon (the Lisbon dialect
-% has some peculiar features not shared with the one of Coimbra).
-% \item Madeirense (Madeiran) -- Madeira.
-% \item Nortenho -- Regions of Braga and Porto.
-% \item Transmontano -- Trás-os-Montes.
-% \end{enumerate}
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{tabular}
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{portu-p.jpg}\ixgrf{portu-p.jpg}%
-% \IVC[60mm]{\awidth}{portu-p.jpg}\ixgrf{portu-p.jpg}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\footnotesize
-% \RaggedRight
-% \begin{enumerate}[1.~]
-% \item Açoriano (Azorean) -- Açores.
-% \item Alentejano -- Alentejo.
-% \item Algarvio -- Algarve (il y~a un dialecte particulier
-% dans une petite partie de l'Algarve occidental).
-% \item Alto-Minhoto -- Nord de Braga (arrière-pays).
-% \item Baixo-Beirão; Alto-Alentejano -- Portugal central (arrière-pays).
-% \item Beirão -- Portugal central.
-% \item Estremenho -- Régions de Coimbra et Lisbonne (le dialecte
-% de Lisbonne a quelques particuliarités que ne partage
-% pas celui de Coimbra).
-% \item Madeirense (Madeiran) -- Madère.
-% \item Nortenho -- Régions de Braga et Porto.
-% \item Transmontano -- Trás-os-Montes.
-% \end{enumerate}
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{tabular}
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \fi
-% \vspace*{1.\baselineskip}
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.4\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.6\iwidth}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% ^^A \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{portu-a.png}\ixgrf{portu-a.png}%
-% \IVC[55mm]{\awidth}{portu-a.png}\ixgrf{portu-a.png}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\footnotesize\selectlanguage{french}
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=0em
-% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt
-% \begin{enumerate}[1.~]
-% \item Benguelense -- Benguela province.
-% \item Luandense -- Luanda province.
-% \item Sulista -- South of Angola.
-% \end{enumerate}
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption[Dialects of Portuguese in Portugal and in Angola]{Dialects of Portuguese in Portugal
-% and in Angola (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portuguese_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+portu-a}
-% \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% ^^A \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{portu-a.png}\ixgrf{portu-a.png}%
-% \IVC[55mm]{\awidth}{portu-a.png}\ixgrf{portu-a.png}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\footnotesize
-% \begin{enumerate}[1.~]
-% \item Benguelense -- Province de Benguela.
-% \item Luandense -- Province de Luanda.
-% \item Sulista -- Sud de l'Angola.
-% \end{enumerate}
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption[Dialectes portugais au Portugal et en Angola]{Dialectes du portugais au Portugal
-% et en Angola (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portuguese_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+portu-a}
-% \end{figure}
-% \fi
-% \reversemarginpar
-% ^^A http://www.gastronomias.com/lusofonia/
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{angola-f.png}\ixgrfl{portugal-f.png}\ixgrfl{cplp-0.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portugal}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{portugal-f.png}}}\\%
-% ^^A \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Angola}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{angola-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.or/wiki/CPLP}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cplp-0.png}}%
-% \end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{portuguese}'' language (\emph{português}) are taken from the \xfile{portuges.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,portuges}.
-% The portuguese language is spoken in Portugal (with the islands of Azores and Madeira) , in Brazil, and in
-% former portuguese colonies like Angola, Guinea-Bissau, Mozambique, Cape Verde Islands, Sa\~o~Tomé and Príncipe Islands,
-% East Timor, and some old trading posts like Macao and Goa; see figures~\vrefrange{f+luso}{f+luso-c}.
-% See also section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}, because the titles are different in Brazil, even if the language is also portuguese.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{angola-f.png}\ixgrfl{portugal-f.png}\ixgrfl{cplp-0.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portugal}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{portugal-f.png}}}\\%
-% ^^A \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Angola}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{angola-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cplp-0.png}}%
-% \end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{portuguese}~>> (portugais, \emph{português}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{portuges.dtx}
-% (de \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,portuges}.
-% Le portugais est parlé au Portugal (avec les Îles des Açores et Madère) , au Brésil, et dans les anciennes
-% colonies telles que l'Angola, la Guinée-Bissau, le Mozambique, les Îles du Cap-Vert, les Îles de Sa\~o~Tomé-et-Príncipe,
-% le Timor Oriental et quelques anciens comptoirs comme Macao et Goa; voir les figures~\vrefrange{f+luso}{f+luso-c}.
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}, parce que les titres sont différents au Brésil,
-% même si l'on y parle aussi le portugais.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*portuguese>
-\ProvidesFile{portuguese.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Portuguese titles from portuges.dtx (babel).
-%% Ramalhete, Jose Pedro
-\def\ptctitle{Conte\'udo}%
-\def\plftitle{Lista de Figuras}%
-\def\plttitle{Lista de Tabelas}%
-\def\mtctitle{Conte\'udo}%
-\def\mlftitle{Lista de Figuras}%
-\def\mlttitle{Lista de Tabelas}%
-\def\stctitle{Conte\'udo}%
-\def\slftitle{Lista de Figuras}%
-\def\slttitle{Lista de Tabelas}%
-%</portuguese>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Romanian'' language: \uxfile{romanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian}\ixfile{romanian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~romanian~>>: \uxfile{romanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian}\ixfile{romanian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{romanian.pdf}\ixgrf{romanian.pdf}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Romanian language areas]{Romanian language areas
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/roumain_aires-lng.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+romanian}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions de la langue roumaine]{Régions de la langue roumaine
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/roumain_aires-lng.htm}
-% dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+romanian}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{romania-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Romania}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{romania-f.png}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{romanian}'' language (\emph{român\u{a}}) come from the \xfile{romanian.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Umstatter}{Horst} and \name{Robert}{Juhasz})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,romanian}.
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+romanian2}{s+mld+romanian3}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{romania-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Roumanie}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{romania-f.png}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{romanian}~>> (roumain, \emph{român\u{a}}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{romanian.dtx}
-% (de \name{Umstatter}{Horst} et \name{Robert}{Juhasz})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,romanian}.
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+romanian2}{s+mld+romanian3}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*romanian>
-\ProvidesFile{romanian.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Romanian titles from romanian.dtx (babel).
-%% Horst, Umstatter & Juhasz, Robert
-\def\ptctitle{Cuprins}%
-\def\plftitle{List\u{a} de figuri}%
-\def\plttitle{List\u{a} de tabele}%
-\def\mtctitle{Cuprins}%
-\def\mlftitle{List\u{a} de figuri}%
-\def\mlttitle{List\u{a} de tabele}%
-\def\stctitle{Cuprins}%
-\def\slftitle{List\u{a} de figuri}%
-\def\slttitle{List\u{a} de tabele}%
-%</romanian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \lneed{9}
-% \section{``Romanian2'' language: \uxfile{romanian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian2}\ixfile{romanian2.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{romanian2}'' language come from the \xfile{romanian.dtx} file
-% (by \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus} and \name{Bernd}{Raichle})
-% in the \packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX} package~\cite{romaniantex}. See also sections~\vref{s+mld+romanian} and~\vref{s+mld+romanian3}.
-% Alas, \mbox{\packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}} \virage\emph{is not compatible} with the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \section{Langue <<~romanian2>>: \uxfile{romanian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian2}\ixfile{romanian2.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{romanian2}~>> (roumain, variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{romanian.dtx}
-% (de \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus} et \name{Bernd}{Raichle})
-% dans le paquetage \packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}~\cite{romaniantex}. Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+romanian}
-% et~\vref{s+mld+romanian3}.
-% Hélas, \mbox{\packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}} \virage\emph{n'est pas compatible} avec le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*romanian2>
-\ProvidesFile{romanian2.mld}[2006/08/03]%
-%% Titles in RomanianTeX (romanian.dtx). Adrian Rezus (adriaan@cs.kun.nl),
-%% Bernd Raichle (raichle@azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de)
-\def\ptctitle{Cuprins}%
-\def\plftitle{Lista de figuri}%
-\def\plttitle{Lista de tabele}%
-\def\mtctitle{Cuprins}%
-\def\mlftitle{Lista de figuri}%
-\def\mlttitle{Lista de tabele}%
-\def\stctitle{Cuprins}%
-\def\slftitle{Lista de figuri}%
-\def\slttitle{Lista de tabele}%
-%</romanian2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Romanian3'' language: \uxfile{romanian3.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian3}\ixfile{romanian3.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{romanian3}'' language come from the \xfile{romanian.dtx} file
-% (by \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus} and \name{Bernd}{Raichle})
-% in the \packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX} package~\cite{romaniantex}.
-% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+romanian}{s+mld+romanian2}.
-% Alas, \mbox{\packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}} \virage\emph{is not compatible} with the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \section{Langue <<~romanian3>>: \uxfile{romanian3.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian3}\ixfile{romanian3.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{romanian3}~>> (roumain, autre variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{romanian.dtx}
-% (de \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus} et \name{Bernd}{Raichle})
-% dans le paquetage \packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}~\cite{romaniantex}.
-% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+romanian}{s+mld+romanian3}.
-% Hélas, \mbox{\packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}} \virage\emph{n'est pas compatible} avec le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*romanian3>
-\ProvidesFile{romanian3.mld}[2006/08/03]%
-%% Romanian titles from RomanianTeX (romanian.dtx) variant.
-%% Adrian Rezus (adriaan@cs.kun.nl)
-%% Bernd Raichle (raichle@azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de)
-\def\ptctitle{Tabla de materii}%
-\def\plttitle{Indice de figuri}%
-\def\plttitle{Tabele}%
-\def\mtctitle{Tabla de materii}%
-\def\mlttitle{Indice de figuri}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tabele}%
-\def\stctitle{Tabla de materii}%
-\def\slttitle{Indice de figuri}%
-\def\slttitle{Tabele}%
-%</romanian3>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Russian'' language: \uxfile{russian.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian}\ixfile{russian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~russian~>>: \uxfile{russian.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian}\ixfile{russian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-5mm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}c@{}c@{}}
-% \toprule
-% {\IVC{\awidth}{rus-cyr.png}}\ixgrf{rus-cyr.png}&\hspace*{5mm}&%
-% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\parskip=.7\baselineskip
-% \footnotesize As in any slavic language, the russian is characterized
-% by its alphabet. Let us remember that the catholic legacy has
-% favorized the latin alphabet with croatian, polish, czech,
-% slovak, slovene and sorbian, while the legacy of the orthodox
-% world has favorized the cyrillic alphabet with russian,
-% belarusian, ukrainian, serbish (Serbia), bulgarian and
-% macedonian. However, in Russia, we speak of the russian
-% alphabet, the ``cyrillic'' appellation denoting only the
-% slavonic writing used in Russian until the beginning of the
-% \textsc{xviii}\textsuperscript{th}~century.
-% \par
-% The russian alphabet contains 33~letters, the bulgarian and
-% the serbian ~0, the ukrainian~33. The modern russian alphabet
-% has also been adapted to several non slavic languages in
-% countries of the ex-USSR by adding letters, like for ouralians
-% (votiak, erzia, ostiak, vogul), altaic languages
-% (turkmen, azeri), iranian (ossetic, kurdish, tadik), caucasian
-% (abkhaz, adyghe, ingush, avar, circassian, chechen, etc.),
-% turkish (azeri, bashkir, karakalpak, kyrgyz, nogai, tatar, turkmen, uzbek, etc.),
-% finno-ougrian (kshanti, komi, etc.),
-% samoyed (nenets, selkup),
-% mongol (mongol, buryat, etc.),
-% tunghunze (even, evenki, nanai),
-% paleo-siberian (eskimo, koryak, nivkh, chukchi),
-% roman (moldavian/moldovan, romanian),
-% and other (dungan) languages.
-% \end{minipage}\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{%
-% \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize
-% Today, it seems that most of the non slavic languages are tending to leave the cyrillic script and to go back to
-% their traditional script or to replace it by the latin alphabet. This is the case for kazakh, uzbek, mongol,
-% azeri, etc. The cyrillic script seems to survive mainly in countries of orthodox tradition (central and eastern
-% Europe): russian, ukrainian, belarusian, macedonian and serbian.
-% See also~\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cyrillic}.
-% \end{minipage}}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption[Russian alphabet russe]{Russian alphabet
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/russie-2demo.htm}
-% in~\cite{tlfq} and
-% \url{http://ras-poutine1916.blogspot.com/2007/05/lalphabet-cyrilique.html} by \name{Cezare}{Tomczak})\hfill\null}\label{f+rus-cyr}
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!tb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=\textwidth]{cyr-alf.png}\ixgrf{cyr-alf.png}
-% \caption[Distribution of the cyrillic alphabet]{Distribution of the cyrillic alphabet: this map shows in dark
-% green the countries that adopt the cyrillic alphabet as the official main script; and in light green,
-% the countries that uses officially the cyrillic alongside another script
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cyrillic})\hfill\null}\label{f+cyr-alf}
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-5mm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}c@{}c@{}}
-% \toprule
-% {\IVC{\awidth}{rus-cyr.png}}\ixgrf{rus-cyr.png}&\hspace*{5mm}&%
-% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\parskip=.7\baselineskip
-% \footnotesize Comme dans toutes les langues slaves, le russe se distingue
-% par son alphabet. Rappelons que l'héritage catholique a
-% favorisé l'alphabet latin avec le croate, le polonais, le
-% tchèque, le slovaque, le slovène et le sorabe, alors que
-% l'héritage du monde orthodoxe a favorisé l'alphabet
-% cyrillique avec le russe, le biélorusse, l'ukrainien, le
-% serbe (Serbie), le bulgare et le macédonien. Cependant,
-% en Russie, on parle d'alphabet russe, l'appellation de
-% cyrillique servant à désigner seulement la graphie du slavon
-% utilisée en Russie jusqu'au début du \textsc{xviii}\textsuperscript{e}~siècle.
-% \par
-% L'alphabet russe comprend 33~lettres, le bulgare et le serbe~30,
-% l'ukrainien~33. L'alphabet russe moderne a également été
-% adapté à plusieurs langues non slaves des pays de l'ex-URSS
-% par l'adjonction de lettres, que ce soit pour certaines
-% langues ouraliennes (votiak, mordve, ostiak, vogoul),
-% altaïques (turkmène, azéri), iraniennes (ossète,
-% kurde, tadjik), caucasiennes (abkhaz, adyguien, ingouche, avar, circassien, tchétchène, etc.),
-% turques (azéri, bachkir, karakalpak, kirghiz, nogaï, tatar, turkmène, ouzbek, etc.),
-% finno-ougriennes (khanti, komi, etc.),
-% samoyèdes (nenets, selkup),
-% mongoles (mongol, bouriate, etc.),
-% toungouzes (even, evenki, nanaï),
-% paléo-sibériennes (eskimo, koriake, nivkhe, tchouktche),
-% romanes (moldave, roumain),
-% et autres (dungan).
-% \end{minipage}\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{%
-% \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize
-% Il semble qu'aujourd'hui la plupart des langues non slaves aient tendance à~abandonner peu à~peu l'écriture cyrillique
-% pour revenir à~leur écriture traditionnelle ou à~la remplacer par l'alphabet latin. C'est le cas par exemple pour
-% le kazakh, l'ouzbek, le mongol, l'azéri, etc. L'écriture cyrillique semble persister surtout dans les pays de
-% tradition orthodoxe (Europe centrale et orientale): russe, ukrainien, biélorusse, macédonien et serbe.
-% Voir aussi~\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cyrillique}.
-% \end{minipage}}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption[Alphabet russe]{Alphabet russe
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/russie-2demo.htm}
-% dans~\cite{tlfq} et
-% \url{http://ras-poutine1916.blogspot.com/2007/05/lalphabet-cyrilique.html} de \name{Cezare}{Tomczak})\hfill\null}\label{f+rus-cyr}
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!tb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=\textwidth]{cyr-alf.png}\ixgrf{cyr-alf.png}
-% \caption[Distribution de l'alphabet cyrillique]{Distribution de l'alphabet cyrillique: le vert foncé désigne
-% les pays où il est utilisé en tant qu'écriture principale; le vert clair désigne les pays où il est utilisé
-% en même temps qu'une autre écriture officielle
-% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cyrillique})\hfill\null}\label{f+cyr-alf}
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \vspace*{1\bigskipamount}
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{russian.png}\ixgrf{russian.png}%
-%
-% \vspace*{-1\bigskipamount}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Russian language areas]{Russian language areas
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/russie-2demo.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+russian}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions de la langue russe]{Régions de la langue russe
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/russie-2demo.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+russian}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-%
-% \vspace*{2\bigskipamount}
-%
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{russian-e.pdf}\ixgrf{russian-e.pdf}%
-% \caption[Areas where the russian language is official or spoken]{Areas where the russian language is official or spoken
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russian_Language})\hfill\null}\label{f+russian-e}
-% \or\relax
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{russian-w.png}\ixgrf{russian-w.png}%
-% \caption[Régions où la langue russe est officielle ou parlée]{Régions où la langue russe est officielle ou parlée
-% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Langue_russe})\hfill\null}\label{f+russian-f}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% ^^A (RUSS
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{cis-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{russia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{armenia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{azerbaijan-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{belarus-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{bulgaria-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{czech-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{estonia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{finland-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{georgia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{israel-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{kazakhstan-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{kyrgyzstan-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{latvia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{lithuania-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{moldova-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{mongolia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{poland-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{romania-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{slovakia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{tajikistan-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{turkmenistan-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{ukraine-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{uzbekistan-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Commonwealth_of_Independent_States}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cis-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{russia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Armenia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{armenia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Azerbaijan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{azerbaijan-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{CIS~(1)}&\textbf{Russia~(2)}&\textbf{Armenia~(2)}&\textbf{Azerbaijan~(2)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Belarus}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{belarus-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bulgaria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bulgaria-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Czech_Republic}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{czech-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Estonia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{estonia-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Belarus~(2)}&\textbf{Bulgaria}&\textbf{Czech~Rep.}&\textbf{Estonia}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Finland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{finland-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Georgia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{georgia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Israel}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{israel-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kazakhstan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kazakhstan-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Finland}&\textbf{Georgia~(4)}&\textbf{Israel}&\textbf{Kazakhstan~(2)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kyrgyzstan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kyrgyzstan-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latvia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{latvia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lithuania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lithuania-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Moldova}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{moldova-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Kyrgyzstan~(2)}&\textbf{Latvia}&\textbf{Lithuania}&\textbf{Moldova~(2)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{mongolia-f.png}}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Poland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{poland-f.png}}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Romania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{romania-f.png}}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovakia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{slovakia-f.png}}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Mongolia}&\textbf{Poland}&\textbf{Romania}&\textbf{Slovakia}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tajikistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{tajikistan-f.png}}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Turkmenistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{turkmenistan-f.png}}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ukraine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{ukraine-f.png}}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Uzbekistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{uzbekistan-f.png}}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Tajikistan~(2)}&\textbf{Turkmenistan~(3)}&\textbf{Ukraine~(2)}&\textbf{Uzbekistan~(2)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{See~\cite[page~329]{comrie1990} and~\cite[page~395]{LOE}}.\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(1)~CIS:~Commonwealth~of~Independent~States.}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\phantom{(1)~}Charter:~\url{http://www.therussiasite.org/legal/laws/CIScharter.html}}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(2)~Member~of~CIS.\qquad(3)~Associated~member~(observer)~of~CIS.}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(4)~Withdrew~of~the~Council~of~Defense~in~February~2006.}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Russian-speaking countries]{Russian-speaking countries (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russian_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+russ-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{cis-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{russia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{armenia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{azerbaijan-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{belarus-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{bulgaria-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{czech-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{estonia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{finland-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{georgia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{israel-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{kazakhstan-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{kyrgyzstan-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{latvia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{lithuania-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{moldova-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{mongolia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{poland-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{romania-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{slovakia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{tajikistan-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{turkmenistan-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{ukraine-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{uzbekistan-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Communauté_des_États_indépendants}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cis-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{russia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arménie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{armenia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Azerbaïdjan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{azerbaijan-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{CEI~(1)}&\textbf{Russie~(2)}&\textbf{Arménie~(2)}&\textbf{Azerbaïdjan~(2)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Biélorussie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{belarus-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bulgarie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bulgaria-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_tchèque}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{czech-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Estonie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{estonia-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Biélorussie~(2)}&\textbf{Bulgarie}&\textbf{Rép.~tchèque}&\textbf{Estonie}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Finlande}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{finland-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Géorgie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{georgia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Israël}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{israel-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kazakhstan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kazakhstan-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Finlande}&\textbf{Géorgie~(4)}&\textbf{Israël}&\textbf{Kazakhstan~(2)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kirghizistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kyrgyzstan-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lettonie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{latvia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lituanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lithuania-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Moldavie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{moldova-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Kirghizistan~(2)}&\textbf{Lettonie}&\textbf{Lituanie}&\textbf{Moldavie~(2)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{mongolia-f.png}}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pologne}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{poland-f.png}}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Roumanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{romania-f.png}}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovaquie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{slovakia-f.png}}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Mongolie}&\textbf{Pologne}&\textbf{Roumanie}&\textbf{Slovaquie}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tadjikistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{tajikistan-f.png}}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Turkménistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{turkmenistan-f.png}}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ukraine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{ukraine-f.png}}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ouzbékistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{uzbekistan-f.png}}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Tadjikistan~(2)}&\textbf{Turkménistan~(3)}&\textbf{Ukraine~(2)}&\textbf{Ouzbékistan~(2)}\\
-% \midrule
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{Voir~\cite[page~329]{comrie1990} et~\cite[page~395]{LOE}}.\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(1)~CEI:~Communauté~des~États~indépendants.}\\
-% ^^A \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{Charte:~\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Charte_de_la_CEI&action=edit&redlink=1}}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\phantom{(1)~}Charte:~\url{http://www.therussiasite.org/legal/laws/CIScharter.html}}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(2)~Membre~de~la~CEI.\qquad(3)~Membre~associé~(observateur)~de~la~CEI.}\\
-% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(4)~S'est~retirée~du~Conseil~de~Défense~en~février~2006.}\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Pays russophones]{Pays russophones (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russe})\hfill\null}\label{f+russ-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \fi
-% ^^A RUSS)
-% \begin{figure}[!ht]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{rus-re.png}\ixgrf{rus-re.png}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Regions of Russia]{Regions of Russia (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russia})\hfill\null}\label{f+rus-re}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions de Russie]{Régions de Russie (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russia})\hfill\null}\label{f+rus-re}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!ht]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{rus-su.pdf}\ixgrf{rus-su.pdf}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Russian subjects]{Russian subjects (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russia};
-% see also~\url{http://www.monde-diplomatique.fr/IMG/artoff619.jpg})\hfill\null}\label{f+rus-su}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Sujets russes]{Sujets russes (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russia};
-% voir aussi~\url{http://www.monde-diplomatique.fr/IMG/artoff619.jpg})\hfill\null}\label{f+rus-su}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-%
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{18mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \begin{macro}{\cz}
-% \begin{macro}{\mz}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles
-% \ixgrf{russian-n.png}\ixgrfl{russia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russian_Language}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{russian-n.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{russia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{russian}'' language (\emph{russkiy yazyk}) are taken from
-% the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
-% Specific cyrillic fonts are required; see figure~\vref{f+rus-cyr}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrf{russian-n.png}\ixgrfl{russia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russe}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{russian-n.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{russia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian}~>> (russe, \emph{russkiy yazyk}) sont tirés
-% du paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
-% Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises; voir la figure~\vref{f+rus-cyr}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*russian>
-\ProvidesFile{russian.mld}[1999/03/16]%
-%% Russian titles
-\def\ptctitle{Oglavlenie}%
-\def\plftitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} risunkov}%
-\def\plttitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} tablic}%
-\def\mtctitle{Oglavlenie}%
-\def\mlftitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} risunkov}%
-\def\mlttitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} tablic}%
-\def\stctitle{Oglavlenie}%
-\def\slftitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} risunkov}%
-\def\slttitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} tablic}%
-%</russian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Russian2m'' language: \uxfile{russian2m.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2m}\ixfile{russian2m.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~russian2m~>>: \uxfile{russian2m.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2m}\ixfile{russian2m.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\localrussian}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian2m}'' language (``\lopt{russian2m}'' is a modern variant of ``\lopt{russian}'')
-% are taken from the \xfile{russian2m.ldf} file
-% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
-% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}.
-% Specific cyrillic fonts are required. See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian2m}~>> (une variante moderne de <<~\lopt{russian}~>>) sont tirés du fichier
-% \xfile{russian2m.ldf}
-% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
-% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}.
-% Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+russian}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*russian2m>
-\ProvidesFile{russian2m.mld}[2005/02/08]%
-%% from russian2m.ldf (Antomega project, russian modern)
-%% Needs Omega and cyrillic fonts. Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov
-\def\ptctitle{\localrussian%
-{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0438^^^^0435}}%
-\def\plftitle{\localrussian%
-{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0438^^^^043b%
- ^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0438^^^^0439}}%
-\def\plttitle{\localrussian%
-{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0442^^^^0430%
- ^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446}}%
-\def\mtctitle{\localrussian%
-{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0438^^^^0435}}%
-\def\mlftitle{\localrussian%
-{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0438^^^^043b%
- ^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0438^^^^0439}}%
-\def\mlttitle{\localrussian%
-{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0442^^^^0430%
- ^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446}}%
-\def\stctitle{\localrussian%
-{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0438^^^^0435}}%
-\def\slftitle{\localrussian%
-{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0438^^^^043b%
- ^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0438^^^^0439}}%
-\def\slttitle{\localrussian%
-{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0442^^^^0430%
- ^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446}}%
-%</russian2m>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Russian2o'' language: \uxfile{russian2o.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2o}\ixfile{russian2o.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~russian2o~>>: \uxfile{russian2o.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2o}\ixfile{russian2o.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\localrussian}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian2o}'' language (``\lopt{russian2o}'' is an old variant of ``\lopt{russian}'')
-% are taken from the \xfile{omega-russian.ldf} file
-% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
-% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. Specific cyrillic fonts are required.
-% See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian2o}~>> (<<~\lopt{russian2o}~>> est une ancienne variante
-% de <<~\lopt{russian}~>>) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{omega-russian.ldf}
-% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
-% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}.
-% Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+russian}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*russian2o>
-\ProvidesFile{russian2o.mld}[2005/02/08]%
-%% from russian2o.mld (Antomega project - russian old)
-%% Needs Omega and cyrillic fonts. Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov
-\def\ptctitle{\localrussian%
-{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0456^^^^0435}}%
-\def\plftitle{\localrussian%
-{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0438%
- ^^^^043b^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0456^^^^0439}}%
-\def\plttitle{\localrussian%
-{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0442%
- ^^^^0430^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446^^^^044a}}%
-\def\mtctitle{\localrussian%
-{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0456^^^^0435}}%
-\def\mlftitle{\localrussian%
-{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0438%
- ^^^^043b^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0456^^^^0439}}%
-\def\mlttitle{\localrussian%
-{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0442%
- ^^^^0430^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446^^^^044a}}%
-\def\stctitle{\localrussian%
-{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0456^^^^0435}}%
-\def\slftitle{\localrussian%
-{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0438%
- ^^^^043b^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0456^^^^0439}}%
-\def\slttitle{\localrussian%
-{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0442%
- ^^^^0430^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446^^^^044a}}%
-%</russian2o>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Russianb'' language: \uxfile{russianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianb}\ixfile{russianb.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~russianb~>>: \uxfile{russianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianb}\ixfile{russianb.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\cyr}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{russianb}'' language (``\lopt{russianb}'' is a variant of ``\lopt{russian}'')
-% are taken from the \xfile{russianb.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, \name{Werner}{Lemberg}, and \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,russianb1,russianb}.
-% Specific cyrillic fonts are required. See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. The parttoc title varies depending
-% on the presence of chapters defined or not by the document class.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russianb}~>> (<<~\lopt{russianb}~>> est une variante de <<~\lopt{russian}~>>)
-% sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russianb.dtx}
-% (de \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, \name{Werner}{Lemberg} et \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,russianb1,russianb}.
-% Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. Le titre des
-% parttocs dépend de l'existence de chapitres dans la classe de document.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*russianb>
-\ProvidesFile{russianb.mld}[2006/02/15]%
-%% Russian (russianb) titles from russianb.dtx (babel)
-%% Lapko, Olga & Volovitch, Vladimir & Lemberg, Werner
-\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
-\def\ptctitle{%
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyro\cyrd\cyre\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
-\else\def\ptctitle{%
- {\cyr \CYRO\CYRg\CYRl\CYRa\CYRv\CYRl\CYRe\CYRn\CYRi\CYRe}}%
-\fi
-\def\plftitle{%
- {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space
- \CYRi\CYRl\CYRl\CYRyu\CYRs\CYRt\CYRr\CYRa\CYRc\CYRi\CYRishrt}}%
-\def\plttitle{%
- {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space
- \CYRt\CYRa\CYRb\CYRl\CYRi\CYRc}}%
-\def\mtctitle{%
- {\cyr \CYRO\CYRg\CYRl\CYRa\CYRv\CYRl\CYRe\CYRn\CYRi\CYRe}}%
-\def\mlftitle{%
- {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space
- \CYRi\CYRl\CYRl\CYRyu\CYRs\CYRt\CYRr\CYRa\CYRc\CYRi\CYRishrt}}%
-\def\mlttitle{%
- {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space
- \CYRt\CYRa\CYRb\CYRl\CYRi\CYRc}}%
-\def\stctitle{%
- {\cyr \CYRO\CYRg\CYRl\CYRa\CYRv\CYRl\CYRe\CYRn\CYRi\CYRe}}%
-\def\slftitle{%
- {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space
- \CYRi\CYRl\CYRl\CYRyu\CYRs\CYRt\CYRr\CYRa\CYRc\CYRi\CYRishrt}}%
-\def\slttitle{%
- {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space
- \CYRt\CYRa\CYRb\CYRl\CYRi\CYRc}}%
-%</russianb>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Russianc'' language: \uxfile{russianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianc}\ixfile{russianc.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~russianc~>>: \uxfile{russianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianc}\ixfile{russianc.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\xalx}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{russianc}'' language (``\lopt{russianc}'' is a variant of ``\lopt{russian}'',
-% used in the part of Mongolia under russian influence) are taken from the file \xfile{russian.def} in the
-% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Specific cyrillic fonts are required.
-% See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russianc}~>> (<<~\lopt{russianc}~>> est une variante du russe <<~\lopt{russian}~>>,
-% utilisée dans la partie de la Mongolie sous influence russe) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russian.def} dans le paquetage
-% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la
-% section~\vref{s+mld+russian}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*russianc>
-\ProvidesFile{russianc.mld}[1999/03/16]%
-%% Russian titles (Mongolia). Needs cyrillic fonts.
-\def\ptctitle{\xalx{Oglawlenie}}%
-\def\plftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}%
-\def\plttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}%
-%%
-\def\mtctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}%
-\def\mlftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}%
-\def\mlttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}%
-\def\stctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}%
-\def\slftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}%
-\def\slttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}%
-%</russianc>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Russian-cca'' language: \uxmldo{russian-cca}}\label{s+mld+russian-cca}\ixmldo{russian-cca}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~russian-cca~>>: \uxmldo{russian-cca}}\label{s+mld+russian-cca}\ixmldo{russian-cca}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% They are several variants for the russian titles with the cmcyralt fonts.
-% The titles for a first variant of the ``\lopt{russian-cca}'' are taken from the \xfile{russian.sty}
-% (by \name{Victor}{Boyko} and \name{Vadim}{Maslov})
-% file in the \pack{cmcyralt} package~\cite{cmcyralt/russian.sty}.
-% \or\relax
-% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour les titres en russe avec les fontes cmcyralt.
-% Les titres pour une première variante de la langue <<~\lopt{russian-cca}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russian.sty}
-% (de \name{Victor}{Boyko} de \name{Vadim}{Maslov})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{cmcyralt}~\cite{cmcyralt/russian.sty}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{2}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-cca}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{russian-cca.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-cca}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
-% donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-cca.mlo}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*russian-cca>
-\ProvidesFile{russian-cca.mld}[2006/03/08]\mtcloadmlo{russian-cca}%
-%% Russian-cca titles. From russian.sty in the cmcyralt package
-%% Vadim Maslov (vadik@cs.umd.edu) & Victor Boyko (vb1890@cs.nyu.edu)
-%% Needs cmcyralt fonts and special input encoding.
-%</russian-cca>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Russian-cca1'' language: \uxmldo{russian-cca1}}\label{s+mld+russian-cca1}\ixmldo{russian-cca1}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~russian-cca1~>>: \uxmldo{russian-cca1}}\label{s+mld+russian-cca1}\ixmldo{russian-cca1}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% They are several variants for the russian titles with the cmcyralt fonts.
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-cca1}'' language are taken from the \xfile{cmcyralt.sty} file
-% (by \name{Vadim}{Maslov}, \name{Alexander}{Harin} and \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov})
-% in the \pack{cmcyralt} package\cite{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty}.
-% \or\relax
-% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour les titres en russe avec les fontes cmcyralt.
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-cca1}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{cmcyralt.sty}
-% (de \name{Vadim}{Maslov}, \name{Alexander}{Harin} et \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{cmcyralt}\cite{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{2}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-cca1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{russian-cca1.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-cca1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
-% donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-cca1.mlo}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*russian-cca1>
-\ProvidesFile{russian-cca1.mld}[2006/03/08]\mtcloadmlo{russian-cca1}%
-%% Russian-cca1 titles. From cmcyralt.sty in the cmcyralt package
-%% with cmcyr fonts in alt encoding.
-%% Vadim Maslov (vadik@cs.umd.edu) & Alexander Harin (harin@lourie.und.ac.za)
-%% & Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@phy.ncu.edu.tw)
-%</russian-cca1>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Russian-lh'' language: \uxmldo{russian-lh}}\label{s+mld+russian-lh}\ixmldo{russian-lh}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~russian-lh~>>: \uxmldo{russian-lh}}\label{s+mld+russian-lh}\ixmldo{russian-lh}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The russian titles for the LH fonts (``\lopt{russian-lh}'' language) are taken from the \xfile{russian.sty} file
-% (by \name{Sergei~O.}{Naumov})
-% in the \pack{LH} package~\cite{LH/russian.sty}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres en russe avec les fontes LH (langue <<~\lopt{russian-lh}~>>) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russian.sty}
-% (de \name{Sergei~O.}{Naumov})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{LH}~\cite{LH/russian.sty}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{2}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-lh}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{russian-lh.mlo}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-lh}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
-% donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-lh.mlo}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*russian-lh>
-\ProvidesFile{russian-lh.mld}[2006/03/08]\mtcloadmlo{russian-lh}%
-%% Russian-lh titles from russian.sty in the LH package
-%% LH fonts in special encoding. By Sergei O. Naumov (serge@astro.unc.edu)
-%</russian-lh>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Russian-lhcyralt'' language: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyralt}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyralt}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyralt}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~russian-lhcyralt~>>: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyralt}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyralt}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyralt}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The russian titles for the LHCYRALT fonts (``\lopt{russian-lhcyralt}'' language) are taken
-% from the \xfile{lhcyralt.sty} file (by \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) in the \pack{lhcyr} package~\cite{lhcyr}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres en russe avec les fontes LHCYRALT (langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyralt}~>>) sont tirés
-% du fichier \xfile{lhcyralt.sty} (de \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) dans le paquetage \pack{lhcyr}~\cite{lhcyr}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{2}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-lhcyralt}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{russian-lhcyralt.mlo}. The input encoding is ALT (code page CP866).
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyralt}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être
-% générés facilement, donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-lhcyralt.mlo}. Le codage en entrée est ALT (page de code CP866).
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*russian-lhcyralt>
-\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyralt.mld}[2006/03/10]\mtcloadmlo{russian-lhcyralt}%
-%% Russian-lhcyralt titles from lhcyralt.sty in the LHCYR package
-%% LHCYRALT fonts in special encoding ALT (CP866).
-%% Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru)
-%</russian-lhcyralt>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Russian-lhcyrkoi'' language: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyrkoi}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~russian-lhcyrkoi~>>: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyrkoi}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The russian titles for the LHCYRKOI fonts (``\lopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}'' language) are taken
-% from the \xfile{lhcyrkoi.sty} file (by \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) in the \pack{lhcyr} package~\cite{lhcyr}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres en russe avec les fontes LHCYRKOI (langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}~>>) sont tirés
-% du fichier \xfile{lhcyrkoi.sty} (de \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) dans le paquetage \pack{lhcyr}~\cite{lhcyr}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{2}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mlo}. The input encoding is KOI-8.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
-% donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mlo}. Le codage en entrée est KOI-8.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*russian-lhcyrkoi>
-\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mld}[2006/03/13]\mtcloadmlo{russian-lhcyrkoi}%
-%% Russian-lhcyrkoi titles from lhcyrkoi.sty in the LHCYR package
-%% LHCYRKOI fonts in special encoding KOI-8. Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru)
-%</russian-lhcyrkoi>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Russian-lhcyrwin'' language: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyrwin}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyrwin}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyrwin}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~russian-lhcyrwin~>>: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyrwin}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyrwin}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyrwin}
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The russian titles for the LHCYRWIN fonts (``\lopt{russian-lhcyrwin}'' language) are taken
-% from the \xfile{lhcyrwin.sty} file (by \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) in the \pack{lhcyr} package~\cite{lhcyr}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres en russe avec les fontes LHCYRWIN (langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyrwin}~>>) sont tirés
-% du fichier \xfile{lhcyrwin.sty} (de \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) dans le paquetage \pack{lhcyr}~\cite{lhcyr}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{2}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-lhcyrwin}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{russian-lhcyrwin.mlo}. The input encoding is CP1251.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyrwin}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas
-% être générés facilement, donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-lhcyrwin.mlo}.
-% Le codage en entrée est CP1251.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*russian-lhcyrwin>
-\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyrwin.mld}[2006/03/13]\mtcloadmlo{russian-lhcyrwin}%
-%% Russian titles from lhcyrwin.sty in the LHCYR package
-%% LHCYRWIN fonts in encoding CP1251. Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru)
-%</russian-lhcyrwin>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Samin'' language: \uxfile{samin.mld}}\label{s+mld+samin}\ixfile{samin.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~samin~>>: \uxfile{samin.mld}}\label{s+mld+samin}\ixfile{samin.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{same.png}\ixgrf{same.png}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{same-f.png}\ixgrf{same-f.png}%
-% \end{tabular}\\*[1\baselineskip]
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Sámi dialects areas]{Sámi dialects areas\,\mpfootnotemark{}
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sami_languages} and \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Langue_same})\hfill\null}\label{f+same}
-% \footnotetext{Sámi: 1.~Southern; 2.~Ume; 3.~Pite; 4.~Lule; 5.~Northern; 6.~Skolt; 7.~Inari; 8.~Teri. Darkened
-% area represents municipalities that recognize Sámi as an official language.}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions des dialectes sâmes]{Régions des dialectes sâmes\,\mpfootnotemark{}
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sami_languages} et \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Langue_same})\hfill\null}\label{f+same}
-% \footnotetext{Sâme: 1.~du Sud; % 2.~Ume; 3.~Pite; 4.~Lule; 5.~du Nord; 6.~Skolt; 7.~Inari; 8.~Ter. La zone
-% foncée représente les municipalités qui reconnaissent le Sâme comme une langue officielle.}
-% \fi
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{sami-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sami_languages}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{sami-f.png}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{samin}'' language come from the \xfile{samin.dtx} file (by \name{Regnor}{Jernsletten})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,samin}. Specific fonts are required.
-% ^^A
-% ^^A \lneed{3}
-% Note that several Sámi dialects/languages are spoken in Finland, Norway, Sweden,
-% and on the Kola Peninsula (Russia). The alphabets differ, so there will eventually be a need for more \suffix{.dtx}
-% files for, e.g., Lule and South Sámi.
-% Hence the (artificial) name \xfile{samin.dtx} (and not \uxfile{sami.dtx} or the like) in the North Sámi
-% case\,\footnote{Adapted from the \xfile{samin.dtx} file.}. These dialects and languages are part of
-% the Finnic group. See also \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sápmi_(area)}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{sami-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Langues_Sames}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{sami-f.png}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{samin}~>> (Sámi (ou Sâme) du Nord) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{samin.dtx}
-% (by \name{Regnor}{Jernsletten})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,samin}. Des fontes spécifiques sont requises.
-% ^^A
-% ^^A \lneed{3}
-% Notez que plusieurs dialectes ou langues Sámi/Sâme sont parlés en Finlande, Norvège, Suède et dans la péninsule
-% de Kola (Russie). Les alphabets sont différents, donc il y~aurait éventuellement besoin de plusieurs
-% fichiers \suffix{.dtx} pour, par exemple, le Lule et le Sámi (ou Sâme) du Sud.
-% D'où le nom (artificiel) \xfile{samin.dtx} (et non pas \uxfile{sami.dtx} ou analogue) dans le cas du
-% Sámi (Sâme) du Nord\,\footnote{D'après le fichier \xfile{samin.dtx}.}. Ces dialectes et langues font partie
-% du groupe finnois. Voir aussi \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sápmi_(area)}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*samin>
-\ProvidesFile{samin.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% North Sámi (samin) titles from samin.dtx (babel). Jernsletten, Regnor
-\def\ptctitle{Sisdoallu}%
-\def\plftitle{Govvosat}%
-\def\plttitle{Tabeallat}%
-\def\mtctitle{Sisdoallu}%
-\def\mlftitle{Govvosat}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tabeallat}%
-\def\stctitle{Sisdoallu}%
-\def\slftitle{Govvosat}%
-\def\slttitle{Tabeallat}%
-%</samin>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Scottish'' language: \uxfile{scottish.mld}}\label{s+mld+scottish}\ixfile{scottish.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~scottish~>>: \uxfile{scottish.mld}}\label{s+mld+scottish}\ixfile{scottish.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-1cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.275526742\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.358184765\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{.366288493\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}c@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,viewport=90 0 430 500,clip]{ecosse1.pdf}\ixgrf{ecosse1.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{ecosse2}\ixgrf{ecosse2.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\iwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{ecosse3}\ixgrf{ecosse3.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Scotland and the scottish gaelic language]{Scotland and the scottish gaelic language
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/ecossecarte.htm}, \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/ecosse.htm}
-% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/ecosse-lng-carte.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+ecosse}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Écosse et la langue gaélique écossaise]{Écosse et la langue gaélique écossaise
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/ecossecarte.htm}, \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/ecosse.htm}
-% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/ecosse-lng-carte.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+ecosse}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{5.508474576mm}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrf{gaid.jpg}\ixgrfl{scotland-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Scottish_Language}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{gaid.jpg}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Scotland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{scotland-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{scottish}'' language (gaelic scottish, \emph{gàidhlig}) come from the \xfile{scottish.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Fraser}{Grant})
-% in the \pack{babel} language~\cite{babel,babel-user,scottish}:
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrf{gaid.jpg}\ixgrfl{scotland-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Écossais}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{gaid.jpg}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Écosse}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{scotland-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{scottish}~>> (gaélique écossais, \emph{gàidhlig}) sont tirés du fichier \uxfile{scottish.dtx}
-% (de \name{Fraser}{Grant})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,scottish}:
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*scottish>
-\ProvidesFile{scottish.mld}[2007/12/18]%
-%% Scottish titles from scottish.dtx (babel). Grant, Fraser
-\def\ptctitle{Cl\`ar-obrach}%
-\def\plftitle{Liosta Dhealbh}%
-\def\plttitle{Liosta Chl\`ar}%
-\def\mtctitle{Cl\`ar-obrach}%
-\def\mlftitle{Liosta Dhealbh}%
-\def\mlttitle{Liosta Chl\`ar}%
-\def\stctitle{Cl\`ar-obrach}%
-\def\slftitle{Liosta Dhealbh}%
-\def\slttitle{Liosta Chl\`ar}%
-%</scottish>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Serbian'' language: \uxfile{serbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbian}\ixfile{serbian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~serbian~>>: \uxfile{serbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbian}\ixfile{serbian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.500713267\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.499286733\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{serbia1}\ixgrf{serbia1.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{bosnia}\ixgrf{bosnia.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Serbia and Bosnia-Herzegovina]{Serbia and Bosnia-Herzegovina
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/serbie.htm}
-% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/bosnieherzcarte_1.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+serbia}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Serbie et Bosnie-Herzégovine]{Serbie et Bosnie-Herzégovine
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/serbie.htm}
-% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/bosnieherzcarte_1.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+serbia}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{serb-a.pdf}\ixgrf{serb-a.pdf}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Serbian alphabets]{Serbian alphabets (cyrillic and latin) compared to other european alphabets
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serbian_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+serb-a}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Alphabets serbes]{Alphabets serbes (cyrillique et latin) comparés aux autres alphabets européens
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serbian_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+serb-a}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrf{serbia-f.png}\ixgrfl{serbia-f2.png}\ixgrfl{vojvodina-f.png}\ixgrfl{bosnia-hz-f.png}\ixgrfl{montenegro-f.jpg}\ixgrfl{kosovo-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serbian_Language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{serbia-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serbia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{serbia-f2.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vojvodina}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vojvodina-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bosnia-herzegovina}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bosnia-hz-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Montenegro}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{montenegro-f.jpg}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kosovo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kosovo-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{serbian}'' (serbocroatian) (\emph{srpski jezik}, \emph{srpskohrvatski jezik}) language are taken from the \xfile{serbian.dtx} file
-% (by \namea{Dejan}{Muhamedagi\'{c}}{Muhamedagic} and \name{Jankovic}{Slobodan})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,serbian}.
-% Serbocroatian is spoken by Serbs, Croats and Chernogors, but only Serbs and Chernogors use the cyrillic alphabet
-% (a variant) (see figure~\vref{f+serb-a}).
-% See also section~\vref{s+mld+serbianc} and figure~\vref{f+kosovo}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{serbia-f.png}\ixgrfl{serbia-f2.png}\ixgrfl{vojvodina-f.png}\ixgrfl{bosnia-hz-f.png}\ixgrfl{montenegro-f.jpg}\ixgrfl{kosovo-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serbe}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{serbia-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serbie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{serbia-f2.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Voïvodine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vojvodina-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bosnie-Herzégovine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bosnia-hz-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Monténégro}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{montenegro-f.jpg}}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kosovo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kosovo-f.png}}}\\\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{serbian}~>> (serbocroate) (\emph{srpski jezik}, \emph{srpskohrvatski jezik}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{serbian.dtx}
-% (de \namea{Dejan}{Muhamedagi\'{c}}{Muhamedagic} et \name{Jankovic}{Slobodan})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,serbian}.
-% Le serbocroate est parlé par les Serbes, les Croates et les Chernogores, mais seuls les Serbes et les Chernogores
-% utilisent l'alphabet cyrillique (une variante) (voir la figure~\vref{f+serb-a}).
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+serbianc} et la figure~\vref{f+kosovo}.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*serbian>
-\ProvidesFile{serbian.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Serbian titles in serbian.dtx (babel). Muhamedagi\'{c}, Dejan & Slobodan, Jankovic
-\def\ptctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
-\def\plftitle{Slike}%
-\def\plttitle{Tabele}%
-\def\mtctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
-\def\mlftitle{Slike}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tabele}%
-\def\stctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
-\def\slftitle{Slike}%
-\def\slttitle{Tabele}%
-%</serbian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{6}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Serbianc'' language: \uxfile{serbianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbianc}\ixfile{serbianc.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~serbianc~>>: \uxfile{serbianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbianc}\ixfile{serbianc.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\cyr}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{serbianc}'' language\,\footnote{The ``\lopt{serbianc}'' language is written
-% with cyrillic characters.} have been gently provided by \namea{Marko}{Èehaja}{Eehaja} and \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}.
-% Cyrillic fonts are required.
-% Serbocroatian is spoken by Serbs, Croats and Chernogors, but only Serbs and Chernogors use the cyrillic alphabet
-% (a variant).
-% See also section~\vref{s+mld+serbian}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{serbianc}~>> (serbe cyrillique)\,\footnote{La langue <<~\lopt{serbianc}~>> est
-% écrite en caractères cyrilliques.} ont été aimablement fournis par \namea{Marko}{Èehaja}{Eehaja} et
-% \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}. Des fontes cyrilliques sont requises.
-% Le serbocroate est parlé par les Serbes, les Croates et les Chernogores, mais seuls les Serbes et les Chernogores
-% utilisent l'alphabet cyrillique (une variante).
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+serbian}.
-% \fi
-% ^^A %% Abt. Biophysikalische Chemie | Küster
-% \lneed{14}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*serbianc>
-\ProvidesFile{serbianc.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Serbian cyrillic titles. Marko Èehaja Internut@Thetaworld.Org
-%% Frank Küster, Biozentrum der Univ. Basel, frank@kuesterei.ch
-\def\ptctitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyra\cyrd\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrje}}%
-\def\plftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyri\cyrk\cyre}}%
-\def\plttitle{\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyre}%
-\def\mtctitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyra\cyrd\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrje}}%
-\def\mlftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyri\cyrk\cyre}}%
-\def\mlttitle{\cyr\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyre}%
-\def\stctitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyra\cyrd\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrje}}%
-\def\slftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyri\cyrk\cyre}}%
-\def\slttitle{\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyre}%
-%</serbianc>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Slovak'' language: \uxfile{slovak.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovak}\ixfile{slovak.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~slovak~>>: \uxfile{slovak.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovak}\ixfile{slovak.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!hbt]
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[c]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{slovakia.pdf}\ixgrf{slovakia.pdf}%
-% \IVC[46mm]{\awidth}{slovakia.pdf}\ixgrf{slovakia.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{slovak-ok.png}\ixgrf{slovak-ok.png}
-% \IVC[35mm]{\bwidth}{slovak-ok.png}\ixgrf{slovak-ok.png}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Slovakia]{Slovakia
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/slovaquiecarte.htm}
-% in~\cite{tlfq} and \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Districts_of_Slovakia};
-% see also~\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_traditional_regions_of_Slovakia}
-% by~\name{Kristian}{Slimak})\hfill\null}\label{f+slovak}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Slovaquie]{Slovaquie
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/slovaquiecarte.htm}
-% dans~\cite{tlfq} et \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Districts_of_Slovakia};
-% voir aussi~\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_traditional_regions_of_Slovakia}
-% par~\name{Kristian}{Slimak})\hfill\null}\label{f+slovak}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{slovakia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovakia}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{slovakia-f.png}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{slovak}'' language (\emph{sloven\v{c}ina, slovenk\'{y} jazyk}) are taken from the \xfile{slovak.dtx} file
-% (\namea{Jana}{Chlebîková}{Chlebikova} and \name{Tobias}{Schlemmer})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,slovak}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{slovakia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovaquie}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{slovakia-f.png}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{slovak}~>> (slovaque, \emph{sloven\v{c}ina, slovenk\'{y} jazyk}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{slovak.dtx}
-% (\namea{Jana}{Chlebîková}{Chlebikova} et \name{Tobias}{Schlemmer})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,slovak}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*slovak>
-\ProvidesFile{slovak.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Slovak titles from slovak.dtx (babel). Chlebîková, Jana & Schlemmer, Tobias. T1 encoding.
-\def\ptctitle{Obsah}%
-\def\plftitle{Zoznam obr\'azkov}%
-\def\plttitle{Zoznam tabuliek}%
-\def\mtctitle{Obsah}%
-\def\mlftitle{Zoznam obr\'azkov}%
-\def\mlttitle{Zoznam tabuliek}%
-\def\stctitle{Obsah}%
-\def\slftitle{Zoznam obr\'azkov}%
-\def\slttitle{Zoznam tabuliek}%
-%</slovak>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Slovene'' language: \uxfile{slovene.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovene}\ixfile{slovene.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~slovene~>>: \uxfile{slovene.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovene}\ixfile{slovene.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{slovenie.pdf}\ixgrf{slovenie.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{slovenian.png}\ixgrf{slovenian.png}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Slovenia]{Slovenia (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/sloveniecarte.htm}
-% in~\cite{tlfq} and \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovene_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+slovene}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Slovénie]{Slovénie (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/sloveniecarte.htm}
-% in~\cite{tlfq} et \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovene_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+slovene}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \ixgrfl{slovenia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovenia}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{slovenia-f.png}}}}}
-% slovene language (\emph{sloven\v{s}\v{c}ina, slovenski jezik}) is spoken in Slovenia, but somewhat also in Italy (Frioul), in Austria (Carinthia and Styria), in
-% Hungary (Szlovénviék and Porabje), in West Germany and Sweden.
-% \or\relax
-% La\ixgrfl{slovenia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovénie}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{slovenia-f.png}}}}}
-% langue slovène (\emph{sloven\v{s}\v{c}ina, slovenski jezik}) est parlée en Slovénie, mais un peu aussi en Italie (Frioul), en Autriche (Carinthie et Styrie), en
-% Hongrie (Szlovénviék et Porabje), en Allemagne de l'Ouest et en Suède.
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{slovene}'' language come from the \xfile{slovene.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Danilo}{Zavrtanik} and \namea{Leon}{\v{Z}lajpah}{Zlajpah})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,slovene}:
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{slovene}~>> (slovène) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{slovene.dtx}
-% (de \name{Danilo}{Zavrtanik} et \namea{Leon}{\v{Z}lajpah}{Zlajpah})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,slovene}:
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*slovene>
-\ProvidesFile{slovene.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Slovene titles from slovene.dtx (babel). Zavrtanik, Danilo & \v{Z}lajpah, Leon
-\def\ptctitle{Kazalo}%
-\def\plftitle{Slike}%
-\def\plttitle{Tabele}%
-\def\mtctitle{Kazalo}%
-\def\mlftitle{Slike}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tabele}%
-\def\stctitle{Kazalo}%
-\def\slftitle{Slike}%
-\def\slttitle{Tabele}%
-%</slovene>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{10}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Spanish'' language: \uxfile{spanish.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish}\ixfile{spanish.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~spanish~>>: \uxfile{spanish.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish}\ixfile{spanish.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[p!]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{spain.png}\ixgrf{spain.png}%
-%
-% \vspace*{\bigskipamount}
-%
-% \noindent\fbox{\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\small\columnseprule=.4pt\relax
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Spain comprises 17~autonomous communities (see figure~\ref{f+17spain} above) in the whole country, including the
-% Canary Islands, near Morocco\footnote{Ceuta and Melilla are spanish enclaves on the northern coast of Morocco.}:
-% \begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns
-% \begin{itemize}\raggedright
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
-% \listparindent=0em
-% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=1em
-% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=-1em \itemindent=-2em
-% \item[--] Andalusia (\emph{Andalucía}): castillan;
-% \item[--] Aragon (\emph{Aragón}): castillan ;
-% \item[--] Principality of Asturias (\emph{Principado de Asturias}): castilan;
-% \item[--] Balearic Islands (\emph{Islas Baleares}): castilan and catalan;
-% \item[--] Basque Country (\emph{Pais Vasco, Euskadi}): castilan and basque;
-% \item[--] Canary Islands (\emph{Canarias}): castillan;
-% \item[--] Cantabria (\emph{Cantabria}): castillan;
-% \item[--] Castile-La~Mancha (\emph{Castilla y La Mancha}): castilan;
-% \item[--] Castile~and~León (\emph{Castilla y León}): castilan;
-% \item[--] Catalonia (\emph{Cataluña / Catalunya}): castilan and catalan;
-% \item[--] Estremadura (\emph{Estremadura}): castilan;
-% \item[--] Galicia (\emph{Galicia}): castilan and galician;
-% \item[--] La~Rioja: castilan;
-% \item[--] Madrid (\emph{Madrid}): castilan;
-% \item[--] Region of Murcia (\emph{Region de Murcia}): castilan.
-% \item[--] Foral Community of Navarre (\emph{Comunidad Foral de Navarra}): castilan and basque;
-% \item[--] Valencian Community (\emph{Comunidad Valenciana}): castilan and catalan (valencian);
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{multicols}
-% \or\relax
-% L'Espagne compte 17~Communautés autonomes (voir la figure~\ref{f+17spain} ci-dessus) réparties dans l'ensemble du pays
-% et incluant les îles Canaries, au large du Maroc\,\footnote{Ceuta et Melilla sont des enclaves espagnoles sur la
-% côte nord du Maroc.}:
-% \begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns
-% \begin{itemize}\raggedright
-% \item Andalousie (\emph{Andalucía}): castillan;
-% \item Aragon (\emph{Aragón}): castillan ;
-% \item Principauté des Asturies (\emph{Principado de Asturias}): castillan;
-% \item Îles Baléares (\emph{Islas Baleares}): castillan et catalan;
-% \item Pays basque (\emph{Pais Vasco, Euskadi}): castillan et basque;
-% \item Canaries (\emph{Canarias}): castillan;
-% \item Cantabrie (\emph{Cantabria}): castillan;
-% \item Vieille-Castille (\emph{Castilla y La Mancha}): castillan;
-% \item Castille-et-Léon (\emph{Castilla y León}): castillan ;
-% \item Catalogne (\emph{Cataluña / Catalunya}): castillan et catalan;
-% \item Estrémadure (\emph{Estremadura}): castillan;
-% \item Galice (\emph{Galicia}): castillan et galicien;
-% \item La Rioja: castillan;
-% \item Communauté de Madrid (\emph{Comunidad de Madrid}): castillan;
-% \item Région de Murcie (\emph{Region de Murcia}): castillan.
-% \item Communauté forale de Navarre (\emph{Comunidad Foral de Navarra}): castillan et basque;
-% \item Communauté valencienne (\emph{Comunidad Valenciana}): castillan et catalan (valencien);
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{multicols}
-% \fi
-% \end{minipage}}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[The 17~autonomous communities in Spain]{The 17~autonomous communities in Spain
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Autonomous_communities_of_Spain}
-% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagne_carte.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+17spain}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Les 17~communautés autonomes en Espagne]{Les 17~communautés autonomes en Espagne
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Autonomous_communities_of_Spain}
-% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagne_carte.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+17spain}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{espa-l.pdf}\ixgrf{espa-l.pdf}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Languages in Spain]{Languages in Spain
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagne_carte-lng.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+esp}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Langues en Espagne]{Langues en Espagne
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagne_carte-lng.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+esp}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-%
-% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount}
-%
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!thb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,viewport=0 0 1427 628,clip]{hispano.png}\ixgrf{hispano.png}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Hispanophone areas]{Hispanophone areas (\url{http://simple.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spanish_language}
-% by~\name{Onofre}{Bonvila})\hfill\null}\label{f+hispa}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions hispanophones]{Régions hispanophones
-% (\url{http://simple.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spanish_language} par~\name{Onofre}{Bonvila})\hfill\null}\label{f+hispa}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{espa-o.png}\ixgrf{espa-o.png}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[States where spanish (castillan) is an official language]{States where spanish (castillan) is an
-% official language (red: the only one, blue: co-official) (\url{http://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Idioma_español})\hfill\null}\label{f+espa-o}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[États où l'espagnol (castillan) est une langue officielle]{États où l'espagnol (castillan) est une
-% langue officielle (rouge: la seule, bleu: co-officielle)
-% (\url{http://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Idioma_español})\hfill\null}\label{f+espa-o}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{spain-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{andorra-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{argentina-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{belize-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{bolivia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{chile-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{colombia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{costa-rica-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{cuba-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{dominican-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{ecuador-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{el-salvador-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{equa-guinea-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{gibraltar-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{guatemala-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{honduras-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{mexico-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{nicaragua-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{panama-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{paraguay-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{peru-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{puerto-rico-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{uruguay-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{venezuela-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{usa-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spain}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{spain-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Andorra}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{andorra-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Argentina}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{argentina-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Belize}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{belize-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Spain}&\textbf{Andorra}&\textbf{Argentina}&\textbf{Belize}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bolivia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bolivia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chile}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{chile-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Colombia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{colombia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Costa-Rica}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{costa-rica-f.jpg}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Bolivia}&\textbf{Chile}&\textbf{Colombia}&\textbf{Costa-Rica}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cuba}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cuba-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dominican_Republic}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{dominican-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ecuador}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ecuador-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/El_Salvador}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{el-salvador-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Cuba}&\textbf{Dominican~Republic}&\textbf{Ecuador}&{El~Salvador}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Equatorial_Guinea}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{equa-guinea-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gibraltar}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{gibraltar-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guatemala}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{guatemala-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Honduras}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{honduras-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Equatorial~Guinea}&\textbf{Gibraltar}&\textbf{Guatemala}&\textbf{Honduras}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mexico}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mexico-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nicaragua}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{nicaragua-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Panama}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{panama-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Paraguay}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{paraguay-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Mexico}&\textbf{Nicaragua}&\textbf{Panama}&\textbf{Paraguay}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Peru}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{peru-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Puerto-Rico}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{puerto-rico-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Uruguay}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uruguay-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Venezuela}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{venezuela-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Peru}&\textbf{Puerto-Rico}&\textbf{Uruguay}&\textbf{Venezuela}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/USA}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{usa-f.png}}}&&&\\%
-% \textbf{USA}&&&\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Hispanophone countries and regions]{Hispanophone countries and regions (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spanish_Language})\hfill\null}\label{f+hispano-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{spain-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{andorra-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{argentina-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{belize-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{bolivia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{chile-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{colombia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{costa-rica-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{cuba-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{dominican-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{ecuador-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{el-salvador-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{equa-guinea-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{gibraltar-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{guatemala-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{honduras-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{mexico-f.jpg}%
-% \ixgrfl{nicaragua-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{panama-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{paraguay-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{peru-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{puerto-rico-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{uruguay-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{venezuela-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{usa-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Espagne}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{spain-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Andorre}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{andorra-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Argentine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{argentina-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Belize}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{belize-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Espagne}&\textbf{Andorre}&\textbf{Argentine}&\textbf{Belize}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bolivie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bolivia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chili}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{chile-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Colombie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{colombia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Costa-Rica}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{costa-rica-f.jpg}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Bolivie}&\textbf{Chili}&\textbf{Colombie}&\textbf{Costa-Rica}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cuba}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cuba-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_Dominicaine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{dominican-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Équateur_(pays)}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ecuador-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Salvador}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{el-salvador-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Cuba}&\textbf{République~Dominicaine}&\textbf{Équateur}&{Salvador}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guinée_Équatoriale}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{equa-guinea-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gibraltar}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{gibraltar-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guatemala}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{guatemala-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Honduras}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{honduras-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Guinée~Équatoriale}&\textbf{Gibraltar}&\textbf{Guatemala}&\textbf{Honduras}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Méxique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mexico-f.jpg}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nicaragua}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{nicaragua-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Panama}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{panama-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Paraguay}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{paraguay-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Méxique}&\textbf{Nicaragua}&\textbf{Panama}&\textbf{Paraguay}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pérou}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{peru-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Porto-Rico}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{puerto-rico-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Uruguay}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uruguay-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vénézuela}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{venezuela-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Pérou}&\textbf{Porto-Rico}&\textbf{Uruguay}&\textbf{Vénézuela}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/États-Unis}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{usa-f.png}}}&&&\\%
-% \textbf{États-Unis}&&&\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Pays et régions hispanophones]{Pays et régions hispanophones (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/espagnol})\hfill\null}\label{f+hispano-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \fi
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{spain-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spain}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{spain-f.png}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{spanish}'' (\emph{español, castellano}) language are taken from the \xfile{spanish.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Javier}{Bezos}, initialy by \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,spanish}.
-% Note that the ``\lopt{spanish}'' language is in
-% fact ``\lopt{castillan}'' (see section~\vref{s+mld+castillan}). But note also that other languages are spoken in Spain: ``basque''
-% (section~\vref{s+mld+basque}), ``\lopt{catalan}'' (section~\vref{s+mld+catalan}), and ``\lopt{galician}''
-% (section~\vref{s+mld+galician}); see figure~\vref{f+esp}. Note that ``\lopt{spanish2}'' is a version of ``\lopt{spanish}''
-% with shorter titles (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish2}).
-% And ``\lopt{spanish3}'' (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish3}) is a version for
-% the \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega} project; some titles are
-% differents.
-% And ``\lopt{spanish4}'' is a variant of ``\lopt{spanish}'' where \com{ptctitle} is shorter for
-% articles (section~\vref{s+mld+spanish4}).
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{spain-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Espagne}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{spain-f.png}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> (espagnol) (\emph{español, castellano}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{spanish.dtx}
-% (de \name{Javier}{Bezos}, initialement par \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,spanish}.
-% Notez que le <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> (espagnol) est en fait le <<~\lopt{castillan}~>>
-% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+castillan}).
-% Mais notez aussi que d'autres langues sont parlées en Espagne: <<~\lopt{basque}~>> (section~\vref{s+mld+basque}), <<~\lopt{catalan}~>>
-% (section~\vref{s+mld+catalan}), et <<~\lopt{galician}~>> (galicien) (section~\vref{s+mld+galician}), voir la
-% figure~\vref{f+esp}.
-% La langue <<~\lopt{spanish2}~>> est une variante de <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> avec des titres plus courts
-% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish2}).
-% La langue <<~\lopt{spanish3}~>> (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish3}) est une variante pour le
-% projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}; certains titres sont différents.
-% La langue <<~\lopt{spanish4}~>> est une variante de <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> où \com{ptctitle} est plus court
-% pour les articles (section~\vref{s+mld+spanish4}).
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*spanish>
-\ProvidesFile{spanish.mld}[2008/04/03]%
-%% Spanish titles from spanish.dtx (babel) by Bezos, Javier & CervanTeX
-\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
-\def\ptctitle{\'Indice}\else\def\ptctitle{\'Indice general}\fi
-\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
-\def\plttitle{\'Indice de tablas}%
-%%
-\def\mtctitle{\'Indice}%
-\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
-\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de tablas}%
-\def\stctitle{\'Indice}%
-\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
-\def\slttitle{\'Indice de tablas}%
-%</spanish>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Spanish2'' language: \uxfile{spanish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish2}\ixfile{spanish2.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{spanish2}'' language are taken from the \xfile{spanish.dtx} file in
-% the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,spanish},
-% but made shorter for chapter and section levels. See section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~spanish2~>>: \uxfile{spanish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish2}\ixfile{spanish2.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{spanish2}~>> (espagnol deuxième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{spanish.dtx}
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,spanish},
-% mais abrégés pour les niveaux chapitre et section. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*spanish2>
-\ProvidesFile{spanish2.mld}[2008/04/03]%
-\def\ptctitle{\'Indice general}%
-\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
-\def\plttitle{\'Indice de tablas}%
-\def\mtctitle{Contenido}%
-\def\mlftitle{Figuras}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tablas}%
-\def\stctitle{Contenido}%
-\def\slftitle{Figuras}%
-\def\slttitle{Tablas}%
-%</spanish2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Spanish3'' language: \uxfile{spanish3.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish3}\ixfile{spanish3.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~spanish3~>>: \uxfile{spanish3.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish3}\ixfile{spanish3.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\localspanish}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{spanish3}'' language are taken from the \xfile{omega-spanish.ldf} file
-% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov})
-% of the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. See section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{spanish3}~>> (espagnol troisième variante) sont tirés du fichier
-% \xfile{omega-spanish.ldf} (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov}) du projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*spanish3>
-\ProvidesFile{spanish3.mld}[2005/09/06]%
-%% Spanish titles from omega-spanish.ldf of the Antomega project.
-\def\ptctitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice general}}%
-\def\plftitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de figuras}}%
-\def\plttitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de cuadros}}%
-\def\mtctitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice general}}%
-\def\mlftitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de figuras}}%
-\def\mlttitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de cuadros}}%
-\def\stctitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice general}}%
-\def\slftitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de figuras}}%
-\def\slttitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de cuadros}}%
-%</spanish3>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Spanish4'' language: \uxfile{spanish4.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish4}\ixfile{spanish4.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{spanish4}'' language are taken from the \xfile{spanish.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Javier}{Bezos})
-% from the \packa{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX} package~\cite{spanish4}.
-% The title of the parttocs is shorter for articles. See also section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~spanish4~>>: \uxfile{spanish4.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish4}\ixfile{spanish4.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{spanish4}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{spanish.dtx}
-% (de \name{Javier}{Bezos})
-% du paquetage \packa{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX}~\cite{spanish4}.
-% Le titre des parttocs est plus court dans les articles. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*spanish4>
-\ProvidesFile{spanish4.mld}[2006/01/19]%
-%% Spanish titles (from spanish.dtx in CervanTeX) Bezos, Javier
-\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
-\def\ptctitle{\'Indice} \else \def\ptctitle{\'Indice general} \fi
-\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
-\def\plttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}%
-%%
-\def\mtctitle{\'Indice}%
-\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
-\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}%
-\def\stctitle{\'Indice}%
-\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
-\def\slttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}%
-%</spanish4>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Swahili'' language: \uxfile{swahili.mld}}\label{s+mld+swahili}\ixfile{swahili.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~swahili~>>: \uxfile{swahili.mld}}\label{s+mld+swahili}\ixfile{swahili.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!thb]
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}l@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{swahili-m.png}\ixgrf{swahili-m.png}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \includegraphics[width=.5\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{swahili.pdf}\ixgrf{swahili.pdf}%
-% \or\relax
-% \includegraphics[width=.5\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{fswahili.pdf}\ixgrf{fswahili.pdf}%
-% \fi\\
-% \multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The areas where Swahili is spoken as a native language (dark green), official or national language (medium green),
-% and trade language (light green). As a trade language, it extends some distance further to the northwest.
-% \or\relax
-% Les zones où le swahili est parlé comme langue native (vert foncé), comme langue officielle ou nationale (vert
-% moyen) et comme langue commerciale (vert clair). Comme langue commerciale, il s'étend un peu plus loin vers le nord-ouest.
-% \fi
-% \end{minipage}}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Swahili language areas]{Swahili language areas (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Swahili_language} and \url{http://si.unm.edu/linguistics/swahili/swahili})}\label{f+swahili}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions de la langue swahilie]{Régions de la langue swahilie (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Swahili_language} et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/AXL/monde/swahili.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})}\label{f+swahili}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% ^^A (SWA
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{burundi-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{comoros-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{congo-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{rdcongo-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{kenya-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{madagascar-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{malawi-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{mozambique-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{oman-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{rwanda-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{somalia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{tanzania-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{uganda-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{zambia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{zanzibar-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Burundi}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{burundi-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comoros}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{comoros-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Republic_of_the_Congo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{congo-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Democratic_Republic_of_the_Congo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{rdcongo-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Burundi}&\textbf{Comoros}&\textbf{Rep.~of~the~Congo}&\textbf{Dem.~Rep.~of~the~Congo}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kenya}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kenya-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Madagascar}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{madagascar-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Malawi}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{malawi-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mozambique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mozambique-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Kenya}&\textbf{Madagascar}&\textbf{Malawi}&\textbf{Mozambique}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oman}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{oman-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rwanda}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{rwanda-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Somalia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{somalia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tanzania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tanzania-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Oman}&\textbf{Rwanda}&\textbf{Somalia}&\textbf{Tanzania}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Uganda}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uganda-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zambia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{zambia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zanzibar}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{zanzibar-f.png}}}&\\%
-% \textbf{Uganda}&\textbf{Zambia}&\textbf{Zanzibar}&\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Swahili-speaking countries]{Swahili-speaking countries (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/swahili_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+swa-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{figure}[!tp]
-% \centering
-% \ixgrfl{burundi-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{comoros-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{congo-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{rdcongo-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{kenya-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{madagascar-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{malawi-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{mozambique-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{oman-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{rwanda-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{somalia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{tanzania-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{uganda-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{zambia-f.png}%
-% \ixgrfl{zanzibar-f.png}%
-% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}}
-% \toprule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Burundi}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{burundi-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comores}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{comoros-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_du_Congo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{congo-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_Démocrarique_du_Congo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{rdcongo-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Burundi}&\textbf{Comores}&\textbf{Rép.~du~Congo}&\textbf{Rép.~dém.~du~Congo}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kenya}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kenya-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Madagascar}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{madagascar-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Malawi}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{malawi-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mozambique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mozambique-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Kenya}&\textbf{Madagascar}&\textbf{Malawi}&\textbf{Mozambique}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oman}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{oman-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rwanda}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{rwanda-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Somalie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{somalia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tanzanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tanzania-f.png}}}\\%
-% \textbf{Oman}&\textbf{Rwanda}&\textbf{Somalia}&\textbf{Tanzania}\\
-% \midrule
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ouganda}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uganda-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zambie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{zambia-f.png}}}&%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zanzibar}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{zanzibar-f.png}}}&\\%
-% \textbf{Ouganda}&\textbf{Zambie}&\textbf{Zanzibar}&\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabular}}
-% \caption[Pays où est parlé le Swahili]{Pays où est parlé le Swahili (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/swahili_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+swa-c}
-% \end{figure}
-% \fi
-% ^^A SWA)
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{swahili}'' language (\emph{kiswahili}) are taken from the \emph{obsolete}
-% \xfile{swahili.tex} file\,\footnote{\url{http://www.dante.de/tex-archive/obsolete/macros/latex209/contrib/ml/swahili.tex}},
-% with adaptations and corrections given on the
-% \texttt{comp.text.tex} news group (messages 57662, 57713, and 57717) by \name{Giancarlo}{Bassi}
-% and \name{Enrico}{Gregorio}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{swahili}~>> (\emph{kiswahili}) sont tirés
-% du fichier \emph{obsolète} \xfile{swahili.tex}\,\footnote{\url{http://www.dante.de/tex-archive/obsolete/macros/latex209/contrib/ml/swahili.tex}\,.},
-% avec des adaptations et des corrections données sur le groupe de discussion \texttt{comp.text.tex} (messages
-% 57662, 57713 et 57717) par \name{Giancarlo}{Bassi} et \name{Enrico}{Gregorio}.
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% Swahili is the main Bantu language and is spoken in East Africa: Tanzania, Kenya,
-% Uganda, Rwanda, Burundi, Zanzibar and in the area of the Great Lakes in the Democratic Republic of Congo (Congo-Kinshasa,
-% formerly Zaire) and in the Republic of Congo (Congo-Brazzaville), in
-% the north of Mozambique and the south of Somalia\,\footnote{\RaggedRight See
-% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/AXL/monde/swahili.htm}, \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/czaire.htm} in~\cite{tlfq},
-% \url{http://www.glcom.com/hassan/swahili_history.html}, and
-% \url{http://www.omniglot.com/writing/swahili.htm}\,.}. See~\cite[page~991]{comrie1990} and figure~\vref{f+swahili}.
-% \or\relax
-% Le swahili (ou «~souaéli~») est la plus importante langue bantoue et est parlée dans l'Afrique de l'Est: Tanzanie, Kenya,
-% Ouganda, Rwanda, Burundi, Zanzibar et la région des grands lacs dans la République Démocratique du Congo (Congo-Kinshasa,
-% ex-Zaïre) et dans la République du Congo (Congo-Brazzaville), au
-% nord du Mozambique et dans le sud de la Somalie\,\footnote{\RaggedRight Voir
-% \url{http://si.unm.edu/linguistics/swahili/swahili}, \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/czaire.htm}
-% dans~\cite{tlfq}, \url{http://www.glcom.com/hassan/swahili_history.html} et
-% \url{http://www.omniglot.com/writing/swahili.htm}}. Voir~\cite[page~991]{comrie1990} et la figure~\vref{f+swahili}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*swahili>
-\ProvidesFile{swahili.mld}[2007/07/02]%
-%% Swahili titles from swahili.tex in articles: 57662,57713,57717
-%% in comp.text.tex by Giancarlo Bassi <g.bassi@iperbole.bologna.it>
-%% & Enrico Gregorio <gregorio@math.unipd.it>
-\def\ptctitle{Yaliyomo}%
-\def\plftitle{Picha zilizomo}%
-\def\plttitle{Orodha ya Mfano}%
-\def\mtctitle{Yaliyomo}%
-\def\mlftitle{Picha zilizomo}%
-\def\mlttitle{Orodha ya Mfano}%
-\def\stctitle{Yaliyomo}%
-\def\slftitle{Picha zilizomo}%
-\def\slttitle{Orodha ya Mfano}%
-%</swahili>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Swedish'' language: \uxfile{swedish.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish}\ixfile{swedish.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~swedish~>>: \uxfile{swedish.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish}\ixfile{swedish.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.450276243\iwidth}
-% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.549723757\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.42\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.58\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\cwidth}{.323437500\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\dwidth}{.676562500\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{sweden.pdf}\ixgrf{sweden.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{svenska.png}\ixgrf{svenska.png}%
-% \end{tabular}\\*[\baselineskip]
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\cwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{suede-fin.pdf}\ixgrf{suede-fin.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\dwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{suede-a.pdf}\ixgrf{suede-a.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Swedish language areas]{Swedish language areas
-% (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/sweden.html} --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries,
-% The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}, \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Swedish_language},
-% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/finlande-2demo_lng.htm}
-% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/EtatsNsouverains/aland.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+suede}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions de la langue suédoise]{Régions de la langue suédoise
-% (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/sweden.html} --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries,
-% The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}, \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Swedish_language},
-% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/finlande-2demo_lng.htm}
-% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/EtatsNsouverains/aland.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+suede}
-% \fi
-% \vspace*{-2\baselineskip}
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{sweden-f.png}\ixgrfl{finland-f.png}\ixgrfl{aaland-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Swedish_Language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{sweden-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Finland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{finland-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Åland_Islands}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{aaland-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{swedish}'' (\emph{svenska}) language come from the \xfile{swedish.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Sten}{Hellman} and \namea{Erik}{Östhols}{Osthols}, with a correction by \name{Jan~Michael}{Rynning})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,swedish}.
-% The swedish language is spoken in Sweden and in some regions of Finland like
-% the \r{A}land Islands (see figure~\vref{f+suede}). See also section~\vref{s+mld+swedish2}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{sweden-f.png}\ixgrfl{finland-f.png}\ixgrfl{aaland-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Suédois}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{sweden-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Finlande}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{finland-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Åland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{aaland-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{swedish}~>> (suédois, \emph{svenska}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{swedish.dtx}
-% (de \name{Sten}{Hellman} et \namea{Erik}{Östhols}{Osthols}, avec une correction de \name{Jan~Michael}{Rynning})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,swedish}.
-% ^^A
-% La langue suédoise est parlée en Suède et dans certaines régions de Finlande,
-% dont les Îles \r{A}land (voir la figure~\vref{f+suede}).
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+swedish2}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*swedish>
-\ProvidesFile{swedish.mld}[2006/01/13]%
-%% Swedish titles from swedish.dtx (babel). Hellman, Sten & Östhols, Erik
-\def\ptctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}%
-\def\plftitle{Figurer}%
-\def\plttitle{Tabeller}%
-\def\mtctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}%
-\def\mlftitle{Figurer}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tabeller}%
-\def\stctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}%
-\def\slftitle{Figurer}%
-\def\slttitle{Tabeller}%
-%</swedish>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Swedish2'' language: \uxfile{swedish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish2}\ixfile{swedish2.mld}
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{swedish2}'' language (variant for swedish) are taken
-% from the \xfile{rapport.doc} file (by \name{Sven}{Mattisson}) in the \packa{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX} package~\cite{slatex}.
-% See also section~\vref{s+mld+swedish}.
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~swedish2~>>: \uxfile{swedish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish2}\ixfile{swedish2.mld}
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{swedish2}~>> (suédois, variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{rapport.doc}
-% (de \name{Sven}{Mattisson})
-% dans le paquetage \packa{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX}~\cite{slatex}.
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+swedish}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*swedish2>
-\ProvidesFile{swedish2.mld}[2006/04/04]%
-%% Swedish2 titles from rapport.doc (slatex). Mattisson, Sven (sven@tde.lu.se)
-\def\ptctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}%
-\def\plftitle{Figurf\"orteckning}%
-\def\plttitle{Tabellf\"orteckning}%
-\def\mtctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}%
-\def\mlftitle{Figurf\"orteckning}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tabellf\"orteckning}%
-\def\stctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}%
-\def\slftitle{Figurf\"orteckning}%
-\def\slttitle{Tabellf\"orteckning}%
-%</swedish2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Thai'' language: \uxmldo{thai}}\label{s+mld+thai}\ixmldo{thai}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~thai~>>: \uxmldo{thai}}\label{s+mld+thai}\ixmldo{thai}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!ht]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{thai.pdf}\ixgrf{thai.pdf}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Thai language areas]{Thai language areas
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/monde/fam_tai-kadai.htm}
-% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/thailande.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+thai}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions de la langue thaïe]{Régions de la langue thaïe
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/monde/fam_tai-kadai.htm}
-% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/thailande.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+thai}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% The titles\ixgrf{thai.png}\ixgrfl{thailand-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Thai_alphabet}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{thai.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Thailand}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{thailand-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{thai}'' language come from the \xfile{thaicjk.ldf} file
-% (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg})
-% and use fonts
-% of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}.
-% The \pack{thailatex} package~\cite{thailatex} (by \name{Surapant}{Meknavin}, \name{Theppitak}{Karoonboonyanan},
-% \name{Chanop}{Silpa-Anan} and \name{Veerathanabutr}{Poonlap}) provides the same titles in its \xfile{thai.ldf} file.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Les titres\ixgrf{thai.png}\ixgrfl{thailand-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Alphabet_thaï}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{thai.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Thaïlande}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{thailand-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{thai}~>> (thaï) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{thaicjk.ldf}
-% (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg})
-% et utilisent des fontes du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}.
-% Le paquetage \pack{thailatex}~\cite{thailatex}% (by \name{Surapant}{Meknavin}, \name{Theppitak}{Karoonboonyanan},
-% \name{Chanop}{Silpa-Anan} and \name{Veerathanabutr}{Poonlap}) fournit les mêmes titres dans son
-% fichier \xfile{thai.ldf}. Voir aussi~\cite{thaistd}.
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{2}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{thai}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
-% \xfile{thai.mlo}. See also~\cite{thaistd}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{thai}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement, donc
-% nous chargeons \xfile{thai.mlo}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*thai>
-\ProvidesFile{thai.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{thai}%
-%% From thaicjk.ldf CJK 4.5.2 Thai support for the babel system
-%% by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
-%</thai>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Turkish'' language: \uxfile{turkish.mld}}\label{s+mld+turkish}\ixfile{turkish.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~turkish~>>: \uxfile{turkish.mld}}\label{s+mld+turkish}\ixfile{turkish.mld}
-% \fi
-% \newcommand{\TUL}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% {\large
-% ^^A \begin{tabular}{@{}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{}}
-% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}}
-% \toprule
-% a&b&c&\TUL{ç}&d&e&f&g&\TUL{\u{g}}&h&\TUL{\i}&\TUL{i}&j&k&l&m&n&o&\TUL{ö}&p&r&s&\TUL{\c{s}}&t&u&\TUL{ü}&v&y&z\\
-% \midrule
-% A&B&C&\TUL{Ç}&D&E&F&G&\TUL{\u{G}}&H&\TUL{I}&\TUL{\.I}&J&K&L&M&N&O&\TUL{Ö}&P&R&S&\TUL{\c{S}}&T&U&\TUL{Ü}&V&Y&Z\\
-% \bottomrule
-% \end{tabularx}}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption{The turkish alphabet}\label{f+turc-alpha}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption{L'alphabet turc}\label{f+turc-alpha}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{turquie.pdf}\ixgrf{turquie.pdf}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Turkey]{Turkey (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/turquie_1general.htm}
-% in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+turc}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Turquie]{Turquie (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/turquie_1general.htm}
-% dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+turc}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-% \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{turkish.png}\ixgrf{turkish.png}\\
-% \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize\columnseprule=.4pt
-% \begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns\RaggedRight
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \bgroup
-% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt
-% \partopsep=0pt
-% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=0em
-% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt
-% \begin{wdesc}{mediumMblueM}
-% \item[black] Official language:
-% Turkey, Cyprus, Republic of Macedonia (at municipal
-% level), Kosovo (a former part of Serbia administered by United
-% Nations as of 2006 and who proclamed independance on February~17, 2008; see figure~\vref{f+kosovo}).
-% \item[dark blue] More than 1,000,000 speakers:
-% Germany.
-% \item[blue] Between 500,000 -- 1,000,000 speakers:
-% Bulgaria.
-% \item[medium blue] Between 100,000 -- 500,000 speakers:
-% France, Netherlands, Belgium, Austria, United States,
-% Uzbekistan.
-% \item[sky blue] Between 25,000 -- 100,000 speakers:
-% Greece, United Kingdom, Australia, Canada, Russia,
-% Sweden, Denmark, Switzerland, Romania, Azerbaijan.
-% \item[white] Less than 25,000 speakers / none.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \egroup
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{wdesc}{bleuMmoyenM}
-% \item[noir] Langue officielle:
-% Turquie, Chypre, République de Macédoine (au niveau municipal),
-% Kosovo (une ancienne partie de la Serbie administrée par les
-% Nations Unies depuis 2006 et qui a proclamé son indépendance le 17~février~2008; voir la figure~\vref{f+kosovo}).
-% \item[bleu foncé] Plus de 1\,000\,000 locuteurs:
-% Allemagne.
-% \item[bleu] Entre 500\,000 et 1\,000\,000 locuteurs:
-% Bulgarie.
-% \item[bleu moyen] Entre 100\,000 et 500\,000 locuteurs:
-% France, Pays-Bas, Belgique, Autriche, États-Unis, Ouzbékistan.
-% \item[bleu ciel] Entre 25\,000 et 100\,000 locuteurs:
-% Grèce, Royaume Uni, Australie, Canada, Russie, Suède,
-% Danemark, Suisse, Roumanie, Azerbaïdjan.
-% \item[blanc] Moins de 25\,000 locuteurs / aucun.
-% \end{wdesc}
-% \fi
-% \end{multicols}
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Turkish language in the world]{Turkish language in the world
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Turkish_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+turkish}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[La langue turque dans le monde]{La langue turque dans le monde
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Turkish_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+turkish}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The
-% The\ixgrfl{turkey-f.png}\ixgrfl{ncyprus-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Turkey}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{turkey-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Northern_Cyprus}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ncyprus-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% turkish language (\emph{türkçe}) is spoken mainly in Turkey and in Cyprus.
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{turkish}'' language are taken from the \xfile{turkish.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Mustafa}{Burc}, \name{Pierre~A.}{MacKay} and \name{Turgut}{Uyar})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,turkish}.
-% \or\relax
-% La\ixgrfl{turkey-f.png}\ixgrfl{ncyprus-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Turquie}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{turkey-f.png}}}\\%
-% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chypre_du_Nord}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ncyprus-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% langue turque (\emph{türkçe}) est parlée principalement en Turquie et à~Chypre.
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{turkish}~>> (turc) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{turkish.dtx}
-% (de \name{Mustafa}{Burc}, \name{Pierre~A.}{MacKay} et \name{Turgut}{Uyar})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,turkish}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*turkish>
-\ProvidesFile{turkish.mld}[2007/12/18]%
-%% Turkish titles from turkish.dtx (babel). Burc, Mustafa
-\def\ptctitle{\.I\c cindekiler}%
-\def\plftitle{\c Sekil Listesi}%
-\def\plttitle{Tablo Listesi}%
-\def\mtctitle{\.I\c cindekiler}%
-\def\mlftitle{\c Sekil Listesi}%
-\def\mlttitle{Tablo Listesi}%
-\def\stctitle{\.I\c cindekiler}%
-\def\slftitle{\c Sekil Listesi}%
-\def\slttitle{Tablo Listesi}%
-%</turkish>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{8}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \lneed{7}
-% \section{``Uighur'' language: \uxfile{uighur.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur}\ixfile{uighur.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~uighur~>>: \uxfile{uighur.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur}\ixfile{uighur.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!thb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=.5\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{uighur.pdf}\ixgrf{uighur.pdf}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Uighur language areas]{Uighur language areas
-% (\url{http://www.lmp.ucla.edu/Profile.aspx?LangID=69&menu=004} in~\cite{LMP})\hfill\null}\label{f+uighur}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions de la langue ouïghoure]{Régions de la langue ouïghoure
-% (\url{http://www.lmp.ucla.edu/Profile.aspx?LangID=69&menu=004} dans~\cite{LMP})\hfill\null}\label{f+uighur}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.308755760\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.691244240\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{xinjiangc.png}\ixgrf{xinjiangc.png}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{xinjiang.png}\ixgrf{xinjiang.png}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Xinjiang Uygur Autonomous Region]{Xinjiang Uygur Autonomous Region
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/?title=Xinjiang}
-% and \url{http://www.tourroundchina.com/map/xinjiang.htm}; see also \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/chine-region-auto-ouigoure-Xinjiang.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+xinjiang}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Région autonome du Xinjiang ouïghour]{Région autonome du Xinjiang ouïghour
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/?title=Xinjiang}
-% et \url{http://www.tourroundchina.com/map/xinjiang.htm}; voir aussi \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/chine-region-auto-ouigoure-Xinjiang.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+xinjiang}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \lneed{3}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{20mm}
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{uighur}'' and ``\lopt{bicig}'' languages\ixgrfl{uighur-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Uyghur_people}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uighur-f.png}}}}}
-% are synonyms, so we just load the
-% \xfile{bicig.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+bicig}):
-% \or\relax
-% Les langues\ixgrfl{uighur-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ouïghour}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uighur-f.png}}}}}
-% <<~\lopt{uighur}~>> (ouïghour) et <<~\lopt{bicig}~>> sont synonymes, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier
-% \xfile{bicig.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bicig}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{4}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*uighur>
-\ProvidesFile{uighur.mld}[2006/05/31]\mtcselectlanguage{bicig}%
-%</uighur>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Uighur2'' language: \uxfile{uighur2.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur2}\ixfile{uighur2.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~uighur2~>>: \uxfile{uighur2.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur2}\ixfile{uighur2.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{uighur2}'' and ``\lopt{bicig2}'' languages are synonyms, so we just load the
-% \xfile{bicig2.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+bicig2}):
-% \or\relax
-% Les langues <<~\lopt{uighur2}~>> (ouïghour deuxième variante)
-% et <<~\lopt{bicig2}~>> sont synonymes, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier
-% \xfile{bicig2.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bicig2}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*uighur2>
-\ProvidesFile{uighur2.mld}[2006/05/31]\mtcselectlanguage{bicig2}%
-%</uighur2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Uighur3'' language: \uxfile{uighur3.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur3}\ixfile{uighur3.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~uighur3~>>: \uxfile{uighur3.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur3}\ixfile{uighur3.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{uighur3}'' and ``\lopt{bicig3}'' languages are synonyms, so we just load the
-% \xfile{bicig3.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+bicig}):
-% \or\relax
-% Les langues <<~\lopt{uighur3}~>> (ouïghour troisième variante)
-% et <<~\lopt{bicig3}~>> sont synonymes, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier
-% \xfile{bicig3.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bicig}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*uighur3>
-\ProvidesFile{uighur3.mld}[2006/05/31]\mtcselectlanguage{bicig3}%
-%</uighur3>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm}\reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``UKenglish'' language: \uxfile{UKenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+UKenglish}\ixfile{UKenglish.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~UKenglish~>>: \uxfile{UKenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+UKenglish}\ixfile{UKenglish.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The \ixgrfl{uk-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/UK_English}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uk-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% ``\lopt{UKenglish}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'' (``UK'' is for ``United Kingdom''), so we just
-% load \xfile{english.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
-% \or\relax
-% La\ixgrfl{uk-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/UK_English}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uk-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% langue <<~\lopt{UKenglish}~>> est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>> («~UK~» signifie \emph{United Kingdom},
-% le «~Royaume Uni~»), donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{english.mld}
-% (section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}\normalmarginpar
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*UKenglish>
-\ProvidesFile{UKenglish.mld}[2005/07/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}%
-%</UKenglish>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Ukraineb'' language: \uxfile{ukraineb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukraineb}\ixfile{ukraineb.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~ukraineb~>>: \uxfile{ukraineb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukraineb}\ixfile{ukraineb.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{ukraineb}'' language is a synonym for ``\lopt{ukrainian}'', so we just load \xfile{ukrainian.mld}.
-% See section~\vref{s+mld+ukrainian}.
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{ukraineb}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{ukrainian}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
-% \xfile{ukrainian.mld}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+ukrainian}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ukraineb>
-\ProvidesFile{ukraineb.mld}[2007/12/04]\mtcselectlanguage{ukrainian}%
-%</ukraineb>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Ukrainian'' language: \uxfile{ukrainian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukrainian}\ixfile{ukrainian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~ukrainian~>>: \uxfile{ukrainian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukrainian}\ixfile{ukrainian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{ukraine.jpg}\ixgrf{ukraine.jpg}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Languages in Ukraine]{Languages in Ukraine
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/ukraine-1demo.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+ukraine}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Langues en Ukraine]{Langues en Ukraine
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/ukraine-1demo.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+ukraine}
-% \fi
-% ^^A \end{figure}
-%
-% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount}
-%
-% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{ukrainep.pdf}\ixgrf{ukrainep.pdf}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Ukraine]{Ukraine
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:WikiProject_Ukraine/Subdivisions})\hfill\null}\label{f+ukrainep}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Ukraine]{Ukraine
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:WikiProject_Ukraine/Subdivisions})\hfill\null}\label{f+ukrainep}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-%
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{6mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \lneed{2}
-% \begin{macro}{\cyr}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% The titles\ixgrf{ukra.png}\ixgrfl{ukraine-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ukrainian_language}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ukra.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ukraine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ukraine-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{ukrainian}'' language (\emph{ukrayins'ka mova}) come from the \xfile{ukraineb.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Andrij~M.}{Shvaika}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, and \name{Werner}{Lemberg})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,ukraineb}. Cyrillic fonts are required.
-% Another language name is \lopt{ukraineb} (see section~\vref{s+mld+ukraineb}).
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% Les titres\ixgrf{ukra.png}\ixgrfl{ukraine-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ukrainien}%
-% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ukra.png}}\\%
-% \href{http://ft.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ukraine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ukraine-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{ukrainian}~>> (ukrainien, \emph{ukrayins'ka mova}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{ukrainian.dtx}
-% (de \name{Andrij~M.}{Shvaika}, \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich} et \name{Werner}{Lemberg})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,ukraineb}. Des fontes cyrilliques sont requises.
-% Un autre nom pour cette langue est \lopt{ukraineb} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+ukraineb}).
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*ukrainian>
-\ProvidesFile{ukrainian.mld}[2006/01/33]%
-%% Ukrainian titles from ukraineb.dtx (babel). Shvaika, Andrij & Lapko, Olga
-%% Needs cyrillic fonts
-\def\mtctitle{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}%
-\def\mlftitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
- \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}%
-\def\mlttitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
- \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}%
-\def\ptctitle{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}%
-\def\plftitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
- \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}%
-\def\plttitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
- \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}%
-\def\stctitle{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}%
-\def\slftitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
- \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}%
-\def\slttitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
- \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}%
-%</ukrainian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{12}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Uppersorbian'' language: \uxfile{uppersorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+uppersorbian}\ixfile{uppersorbian.mld}
-% The titles\ixgrfl{us-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Upper_Sorbian_language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{us-f.png}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{uppersorbian}'' language\,\footnote{Upper sorbian. Sorbian, or wendisch,
-% is a member of the west slavic subgroup of indo-european languages spoken in Upper Lusatia in the german
-% \emph{länder} of Saxony and Brandenburg. The Sorbs are descendents of the Wends, the german name for the slavic tribes
-% who occupied the area between the Elbe and Saale rivers in the west and the Odra (Oder) river in the east during
-% the medieval period (\textsc{vi}-th century).} (\emph{hornjoserbsce, hornjoserb\v{s}\'{c}iba})
-% are taken from the \xfile{usorbian.dtx} file (by \name{Eduard}{Werner})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,usorbian}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+lowersorbian}.
-% A shorter language name is \lopt{usorbian} (see section~\vref{s+mld+usorbian}).
-% \or\relax
-% \begin{SMOOTH}
-% \section{Langue <<~uppersorbian~>>: \uxfile{uppersorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+uppersorbian}\ixfile{uppersorbian.mld}
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{us-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Upper_Sorbian_language}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{us-f.png}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{uppersorbian}~>> (haut sorabe)\,\footnote{Le haut sorabe, le sorabe ou wende,
-% est un membre du sous-groupe slave occidental des langues indo-européennes parlé en Haute-Lusace dans les \emph{länder}
-% allemands de Saxe et de Brandebourg. Les Sorabes sont des descendants des Wendes, nom germain des tribus slaves
-% qui occupaient la zone entre l'Elbe et la Saale à~l'ouest et l'Oder à~l'est pendant la période médiévale
-% (\textsc{vi}\fup{e}~siècle).} (\emph{hornjoserbsce, hornjoserb\v{s}\'{c}iba}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{usorbian.dtx}
-% (de \name{Eduard}{Werner})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,usorbian}.
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+lowersorbian}.
-% Un nom plus court pour cette langue est \lopt{usorbian} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+usorbian}).
-% \end{SMOOTH}
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*uppersorbian>
-\ProvidesFile{uppersorbian.mld}[2006/02/38]%
-%% Upper sorbian titles from usorbian.dtx (babel). Needs cyrillic fonts. Werner, Eduard
-\def\ptctitle{Wobsah}%
-\def\plftitle{Zapis wobrazow}%
-\def\plttitle{Zapis tabulkow}%
-\def\mtctitle{Wobsah}%
-\def\mlftitle{Zapis wobrazow}%
-\def\mlttitle{Zapis tabulkow}%
-\def\stctitle{Wobsah}%
-\def\slftitle{Zapis wobrazow}%
-\def\slttitle{Zapis tabulkow}%
-%</uppersorbian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{13.15625mm}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``USenglish'' language: \uxfile{USenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+USenglish}\ixfile{USenglish.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~USenglish~>>: \uxfile{USenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+USenglish}\ixfile{USenglish.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The\ixgrfl{usa-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_English}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{usa-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% ``\lopt{USenglish}'' language (``US'' is for ``United States (of America))'' is just like
-% ``\loptd{english}''\footnote{It should be true for the mini-table titles; the
-% languages themselves have some differences, like the hyphenation rules,
-% see~\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_English}\,.}, so we just
-% load \xfile{english.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
-% \or\relax
-% La\ixgrfl{usa-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_English}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{usa-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}}
-% langue <<~\lopt{USenglish}~>> (américain, «~US~» signifiant «~\emph{United States (of America)}~») est
-% comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>\footnote{Ceci devrait être vrai pour les titres des mini-tables; les langues elles-mêmes
-% ont quelques différences, dont les règles de coupure des mots,
-% voir~\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_English}\,.}, donc nous chargeons simplement
-% \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*USenglish>
-\ProvidesFile{USenglish.mld}[2005/07/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}%
-%</USenglish>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Usorbian'' language: \uxfile{usorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+usorbian}\ixfile{usorbian.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~usorbian~>>: \uxfile{usorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+usorbian}\ixfile{usorbian.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{usorbian}'' language is a synonym for ``\lopt{uppersorbian}'', so we just have
-% to load \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}. See section~\vref{s+mld+uppersorbian}.
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{usorbian}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{uppersorbian}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
-% \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}.
-% Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+uppersorbian}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*usorbian>
-\ProvidesFile{usorbian.mld}[2007/12/04]\mtcselectlanguage{uppersorbian}%
-%</usorbian>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Vietnam'' language: \uxfile{vietnam.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnam}\ixfile{vietnam.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~vietnam~>>: \uxfile{vietnam.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnam}\ixfile{vietnam.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{figure}[!htbp]
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-1cm}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{.5\iwidth}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}c@{}c@{}c@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{viet2.pdf}\ixgrf{viet2.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\iwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{viet3.pdf}\ixgrf{viet3.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Vietnam]{Vietnam (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/vietnam_carte2-prov.htm}
-% in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+vietnam}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Vietnam]{Vietnam (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/vietnam_carte2-prov.htm}
-% dans~\cite{tlfq})}\label{f+vietnam}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \begin{figure}[!htbp]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{viet-w.pdf}\ixgrf{viet-w.pdf}\\
-% \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The creation of the vietnamese alphabet is officially
-% attributed to the Jesuit
-% \namea{Alexandre}{de~Rhodes\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Rhodes} in~1623.
-% Born at Avignon on March~15th, 1591, died on
-% November~5th, 1660, at Ispahan, he was a Jesuit priest who spent six years in Vietnam (1624~--~1630) for his
-% catholic missions and systematized the
-% \index{quoc ngu=\protect\leavevmode\protect\mbox{\quocngu}\hfil\null|hyperpage}%
-% ``(Ch\~u\kern-.42ex\raisebox{.07ex}{\footnotesize'}) Qu\'{\^o}c Ng\~u\kern-.42ex\raisebox{.07ex}{\footnotesize'}\,'',
-% or ``script for the natianal language'', the romanized script of the vietnamese language
-% (see~\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Alexandre_de_Rhodes}). It is a latin alphabet with the addition of many
-% diacritic marks to note the phonetic value of some letters and the tunes of the language
-% (see~\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Qu%E1%BB%91c_ng%E1%BB%AF}).
-% \par \vspace*{\baselineskip}
-% See also~\url{http://rarfaxp.riken.go.jp/~dang/rhodes_motive.html} for a resume of the modern story and
-% \url{http://www.cjvlang.com/Writing/writviet.html} for an introduction to this writing system.
-% See also~\cite{ppvl} about the portuguese predecessors of \uname{Alexandre}{de~Rhodes}.
-% \or\relax
-% La création de l'alphabet vietnamien est officiellement attribuée au
-% jésuite \namea{Alexandre}{de~Rhodes\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Rhodes} en~1623.
-% Celui-ci, né en Avignon le 15~mars 1591,
-% mort le 5~novembre 1660 à Ispahan, est un prêtre jésuite qui passa six années au Vietmam (1624~--~1630) et à~qui
-% l'on doit la systématisation du
-% \index{quoc ngu=\protect\leavevmode\protect\mbox{\quocngu}\hfil\null|hyperpage}%
-% «~(Ch\~u\kern-.42ex\raisebox{.07ex}{\footnotesize'}) Qu\'{\^o}c Ng\~u\kern-.42ex\raisebox{.07ex}{\footnotesize'}~»,
-% ou «~écriture de langue nationale~»,
-% l'écriture romanisée du vietnamien
-% (voir~\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Alexandre_de_Rhodes}). C'est un alphabet latin augmenté de nombreux
-% signes diacritiques servant à~noter tant la valeur phonétique de certaines lettres que les tons de la langue
-% (voir~\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Qu%E1%BB%91c_ng%E1%BB%AF}).
-% \par\vspace*{\baselineskip}
-% Voir aussi~\url{http://rarfaxp.riken.go.jp/~dang/rhodes_motive.html} pour un résumé de l'histoire récente (en anglais)
-% et \url{http://www.cjvlang.com/Writing/writviet.html} pour une introduction à~ce système d'écriture (en anglais aussi).
-% Voir aussi~\cite{ppvl} à~propos des prédécesseurs portugais d'\uname{Alexandre}{de~Rhodes}.
-% \fi
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[The vietnamese language in the world]{The vietnamese language in the world
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vietnamese_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+viet-w}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Le vietnamien dans le monde]{Le vietnamien dans le monde
-% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vietnamese_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+viet-w}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{vietnam-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vietnam}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vietnam-f.png}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{vietnam}'' language (\emph{ti\'{\^e}ng vi\d{\^{e}t}}) are taken from the \pack{vietnam} package~\cite{vietnam}
-% (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg} and \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han}).
-% Vietnamese fonts are required; see~\cite{han2003,han2008}. The vietnamese language is spoken in Vietnam
-% and in the vietnamese diaspora (see figures~\vrefrange{f+vietnam}{f+viet4}).
-% See also section~\vref{s+mld+vietnamese}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{vietnam-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vietnam}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vietnam-f.png}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{vietnam}~>> (vietnamien, \emph{ti\'{\^e}ng vi\d{\^{e}t}}) sont
-% tirés du paquetage \pack{vietnam}~\cite{vietnam} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg} et \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han}).
-% Des fontes vietnamiennes sont requises; voir~\cite{han2003,han2008}. Le vietnamien est parlé au Vietnam
-% et dans la diaspora vietnamienne (voir les figures~\vrefrange{f+vietnam}{f+viet4}).
-% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+vietnamese}.
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \begin{figure}[!p]
-% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{viet4.pdf}\ixgrf{viet4.pdf}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Provinces of Vietnam]{Provinces of Vietnam
-% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Administration_du_Viêt_Nam})\hfill\null}\label{f+viet4}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Provinces du Viêtnam]{Provinces du Viêtnam
-% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Administration_du_Viêt_Nam})\hfill\null}\label{f+viet4}
-% \fi
-% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
-% \end{figure}
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*vietnam>
-\ProvidesFile{vietnam.mld}[1999/03/16]% Vietnamese titles
-\def\ptctitle{M\d{u}c l\d{u}c}%
-\def\plftitle{Danh s\'ach h\`inh v\~e}%
-\def\plttitle{Danh s\'ach b\h{a}ng}%
-\def\mtctitle{M\d{u}c l\d{u}c}%
-\def\mlftitle{Danh s\'ach h\`inh v\~e}%
-\def\mlttitle{Danh s\'ach b\h{a}ng}%
-\def\stctitle{M\d{u}c l\d{u}c}%
-\def\slftitle{Danh s\'ach h\`inh v\~e}%
-\def\slttitle{Danh s\'ach b\h{a}ng}%
-%</vietnam>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Vietnamese'' language: \uxfile{vietnamese.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnamese}\ixfile{vietnamese.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~vietnamese~>>: \uxfile{vietnamese.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnamese}\ixfile{vietnamese.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The ``\lopt{vietnamese}'' language is just a synonym for the ``\lopt{vietnam}'' language.
-% So we just load \xfile{vietnam.mld}.
-% Vietnamese fonts are required. See also section~\vref{s+mld+vietnam}.
-% \or\relax
-% La langue <<~\lopt{vietnamese}~>> est simplement un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{vietnam}~>> (vietnamien). Donc nous
-% chargeons simplement \xfile{vietnam.mld}. Des fontes vietnamiennes sont requises, Voir aussi
-% la section~\vref{s+mld+vietnam}.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{4}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*vietnamese>
-\ProvidesFile{vietnamese.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{vietnam}%
-%</vietnamese>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Welsh'' language: \uxfile{welsh.mld}}\label{s+mld+welsh}\ixfile{welsh.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~welsh~>>: \uxfile{welsh.mld}}\label{s+mld+welsh}\ixfile{welsh.mld}
-% \fi
-% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
-% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
-% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.346020761\iwidth}
-% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.653979239\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\awidth}{.4\iwidth}
-% \setlength{\bwidth}{.6\iwidth}
-% \begin{figure}[!tb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}}
-% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{galles1.pdf}\ixgrf{galles1.pdf}%
-% &\hspace*{.5cm}&%
-% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{galles2.pdf}\ixgrf{galles2.pdf}%
-% \end{tabular}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Wales]{Wales (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/paysgallescarte.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}
-% and \url{http://homepage.ntlworld.com/geogdata/ngw/map.htm}
-% in the \emph{National Gazetter of Wales})\hfill\null}\label{f+wales}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Pays de Galles]{Pays de Galles (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/paysgallescarte.htm}
-% dans~\cite{tlfq} et \url{http://homepage.ntlworld.com/geogdata/ngw/map.htm}
-% dans la \emph{National Gazetter of Wales})\hfill\null}\label{f+wales}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
-% \reversemarginpar
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles\ixgrfl{wales-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wales}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{wales-f.png}}}}}
-% for the ``\lopt{welsh}'' language (\emph{cymraeg}) come from the \xfile{welsh.dtx} file
-% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams})
-% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,welsh}:
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres\ixgrfl{wales-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
-% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pays_de_Galles}%
-% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{wales-f.png}}}}}
-% pour la langue <<~\lopt{welsh}~>> (gallois, \emph{cymraeg}) proviennent du fichier \xfile{welsh.dtx}
-% (écrit par \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams})
-% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,welsh}:
-% \fi
-%
-% \normalmarginpar
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*welsh>
-\ProvidesFile{welsh.mld}[1999/12/06]%
-%% Welsh titles from welsh.dtx (babel), by Braams, Johannes~L.
-\def\ptctitle{Cynnwys}%
-\def\plftitle{Rhestr Ddarluniau}%
-\def\plttitle{Rhestr Dablau}%
-\def\mtctitle{Cynnwys}%
-\def\mlftitle{Rhestr Ddarluniau}%
-\def\mlttitle{Rhestr Dablau}%
-\def\stctitle{Cynnwys}%
-\def\slftitle{Rhestr Ddarluniau}%
-\def\slttitle{Rhestr Dablau}%
-%</welsh>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \lneed{7}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Xalx'' language: \uxfile{xalx.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx}\ixfile{xalx.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~xalx~>>: \uxfile{xalx.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx}\ixfile{xalx.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mnr}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{xalx}'' language are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}
-% (by \name{Oliver}{Corff} and \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}).
-% Xalx (Khalkha) is the name of the Mongolian nationality residing in Mongolia proper.
-% See figure~\vref{f+khalkha}.
-% Their dialect forms the basis of Mongolian written with
-% Cyrillic letters. See also sections~\vref{s+mld+khalkha} and~\vrefrange{s+mld+xalx2}{s+mld+xalx3}.
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{xalx}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}
-% (de \name{Oliver}{Corff} et \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}).
-% Xalx (Khalkha) est le nom de la nationalité Mongole qui
-% vit en Mongolie proprement dite. Voir la figure~\vref{f+khalkha}.
-% Son dialecte forme la base du Mongol écrit en lettres cyrilliques.
-% Voir les sections~\vref{s+mld+khalkha} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+xalx2}{s+mld+xalx3}.
-% \fi
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*xalx>
-\ProvidesFile{xalx.mld}[2005/11/16]%
-%% Mongol (xalx) titles
-\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}%
-\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}%
-\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
-\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}%
-\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}%
-\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
-\def\stctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}%
-\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}%
-\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
-%</xalx>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{figure}[!tb]
-% \centering
-% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{khalkha.pdf}\ixgrf{khalkha.pdf}%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \caption[Khalkha language areas]{Khalkha language areas
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/AXL/asie/Mongolie.htm})\hfill\null}\label{f+khalkha}
-% \or\relax
-% \caption[Régions de la langue khalkha]{Régions de la langue khalkha
-% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/AXL/asie/Mongolie.htm})\hfill\null}\label{f+khalkha}
-% \fi
-% \end{figure}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Xalx2'' language: \uxfile{xalx2.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx2}\ixfile{xalx2.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~xalx2~>>: \uxfile{xalx2.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx2}\ixfile{xalx2.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\mnr}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{xalx2}'' language are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}
-% (by \name{Oliver}{Corff} and \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}).
-% This is a variant for the ``\lopt{xalx}'' language (see section~\vref{s+mld+xalx}).
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{xalx2}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}
-% (de \name{Oliver}{Corff} et \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}).
-% C'est une variante de la langue ``\lopt{xalx}'' (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+xalx}).
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*xalx2>
-\ProvidesFile{xalx2.mld}[2006/03/31]%
-%% Mongol (xalx2) titles
-\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}%
-\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}%
-\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
-\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}%
-\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}%
-\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
-\def\stctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}%
-\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}%
-\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
-%</xalx2>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \lneed{5}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \section{``Xalx3'' language: \uxfile{xalx3.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx3}\ixfile{xalx3.mld}
-% \or\relax
-% \section{Langue <<~xalx3~>>: \uxfile{xalx3.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx3}\ixfile{xalx3.mld}
-% \fi
-% \begin{macro}{\xalx}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% The titles for the ``\lopt{xalx3}'' language are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}
-% (by \name{Oliver}{Corff} and \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}).
-% This is an other variant for the ``\lopt{xalx}'' language (see section~\vref{s+mld+xalx}).
-% \or\relax
-% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{xalx3}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}
-% (de \name{Oliver}{Corff} et \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}).
-% C'est une autre variante de la langue ``\lopt{xalx}'' (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+xalx}).
-% \fi
-%
-% \lneed{3}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*xalx3>
-\ProvidesFile{xalx3.mld}[2006/03/31]%
-%% Mongol (xalx3) titles
-\def\ptctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}%
-\def\plftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}%
-\def\plttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}%
-\def\mtctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}%
-\def\mlftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}%
-\def\mlttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}%
-\def\stctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}%
-\def\slftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}%
-\def\slttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}%
-%</xalx3>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \cleardoublepage
-% ^^A \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}
-% \let\NC\relax
-%
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \part{Complements}\label{p+complements}
-% \or\relax
-% \part{Compléments}\label{p+complements}
-% \fi
-% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{open}{\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns}
-% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
-% \parttoc
-% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{open}{\empty}
-% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{close}{\empty}
-%
-% ^^A \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% ^^A \backrefenglish
-% ^^A \or\relax
-% ^^A \backreffrench
-% ^^A \fi
-%
-% \nocite*
-% \def\noopsort#1{\relax}
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \FTRfalse
-% \bibliographystyle{en-mtc}
-% \begin{raggedright}
-% ^^A DO NOT INDEX AUTHORS
-% \let\name\oname
-% \let\iname\oiname
-% \let\inameA\oinameA
-% \let\inameB\oinameB
-% \let\xname\oxname
-% \let\vname\ovname
-% \bibliography{minitoc}
-%
-% \end{raggedright}
-% \or\relax
-% \FTRtrue
-% \bibliographystyle{fr-mtc}
-% \begin{raggedright}
-% ^^A DO NOT INDEX AUTHORS
-% \let\name\oname
-% \let\iname\oiname
-% \let\inameA\oinameA
-% \let\inameB\oinameB
-% \let\xname\oxname
-% \let\vname\ovname
-% \bibliography{minitoc-fr}
-%
-% \end{raggedright}
-% \fi
-% \adjustmtc
-% ^^A NEW HISTORY BEGIN
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \chapter*{Changes history\markboth{Changes history}{Changes history}}\label{c+history}
-% \markboth{Changes history}{Changes history}
-% \mtcaddchapter[Changes history]
-% \or\relax
-% \chapter*{Historique des modifications\markboth{Historique des modifications}{Historique des modifications}}\label{c+history}
-% \markboth{Historique des modifications}{Historique des modifications}
-% \mtcaddchapter[Historique des modifications]
-% \fi
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \bgroup
-% \def\labelitemi{\ensuremath{\star}~\textbf{version}}
-% \def\labelitemii{\textbullet}
-% \def\labelitemiii{\textopenbullet}
-% \def\labelitemiv{\textperiodcentered}
-% \begin{RaggedRight}
-% %
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \textbf{00}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1990/10/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Original version, by \xname{Nigel}{Ward}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1991/11/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Revised to reuse \com{chapter}, \com{section},
-% \com{subsection} commands transparently, generate toc-file-name automatically,
-% assorted other cleanup (by \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{01}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/06/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item New design, to avoid allocating a newwrite, or file descriptor,
-% for each chapter (a deadly sin!) (\uname{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert}).
-% \item Added \com{chapterend} to terminate the scope of a minitoc.
-% (\emph{If you forgot putting} \com{chapterend} at the end
-% of \emph{each} chapter, an entry for the next chapter
-% will appear in each minitoc.) (Thanks to \xname{Yufan}{Hu}).
-% \item Replaced the \env{minipage} environment by a \env{verse}
-% environment, to allow a minitoc being split across pages.
-% \item All the layout of the minitoc is in the
-% command, so if someboby wants
-% to redefine that layout, he has just to rewrite it (and only it).
-% \item You can inhibit the minitoc for the next chapter
-% by preceding it with \ucom{minitocno}. (\ucom{minitocyes}
-% is useless for the user, because it is implicit \emph{after}
-% the \com{chapter*} pseudo-chapters).
-% \item Problems: you \emph{must} have \com{chapterend} to terminate each
-% chapter with a minitoc. How about avoiding this constraint?
-% \item The depth of the minitoc is user-adjustable with
-% the counter \dcnt{minitocdepth} (similar to \dcnt{tocdepth} for the table of contents).
-% \item At least three passes (3) of \LaTeX{} are necessary to
-% get correct minitocs (the first pass creates the
-% \suffix{.mtc}\meta{X} files, the second uses them (but they may
-% contain wrong page numbers) and recreates them,
-% the third should be ok).
-% \item Works with \com{chapter}\texttt{[xxx]\{yyy\}} and floating bodies.
-% Works with two columns (but the minitoc is composed in
-% one column; how to make it to spread over the two columns?).
-% \item Some mods added to work with \pack{xr} (external
-% references). \upack{xr} version~5 is much more tolerant.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{02}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/07/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added compatibility with \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} (the package
-% \pack{hangcaption} (if present) must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package).
-% \emph{Beware} to options modifying \com{@caption}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{03}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/07/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Version 3 not released (buggy).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{04}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/07/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \ucom{if@realch} to avoid contents lines from pseudo-chapters to go into the toc.
-% \item The package \pack{mtcoff} allows you to use a \LaTeX\ document
-% with minitoc commands and to make them transparent: just replace the \upack{minitoc} package by
-% \pack{mtcoff}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{05}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/07/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added a selection mechanism to not write spurious things in the minitocs.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{06}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/07/15
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Fixed problems about chapters in the toc, removed obsolete \com{caption} stuff
-% (filters are much better) added compatibility with \pack{toch}
-% (\pack{toch} makes a table of chapters;
-% if used, must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}; in fact, it is the ancestor of
-% the \pack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc} package).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{07}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/07/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item (\emph{major differences}) Completely rewritten, using tricks from \pack{xr} (the version~5, by
-% \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle}). The info for minitocs is directly stolen from the \suffix{.toc} file.
-% \com{chapterend} and \ucom{minitocno} are suppressed, \com{minitoc}, \com{dominitoc}
-% and \com{faketableofcontents} added.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{08}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/07/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Spacing adjustements.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{09}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/08/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added mods for MS-DOS (search for MS-DOS, uncomment; search for UNIX, comment out). MS-DOS allows
-% only 3 characters for extensions in file names (what a pity!).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{10}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/08/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Works now with appendices. Detects now the obsolete versions of \xfile{latex.tex}
-% (\com{@inputcheck} or \com{reset@font} not defined).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{11}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/08/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \com{mtcSfont}, font for section entries, \com{mtcSSfont} for subsection entries,
-% \com{mtcSSSfont} for subsubsection entries, \com{mtcPfont} for paragraph entries,
-% \com{mtcSPfont} for subparagraph entries.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{12}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/12/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Use \com{kern} in place of \com{vspace*}, and added penalties (\com{nopagebreak})
-% to avoid a page break just before last \com{mtc@rule}.
-% \item Also added a \env{samepage} environnement.
-% \item Removed old commented out lines from previous versions.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{13}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/12/17
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \com{minilof} and \com{minilot} stuff. For MS-DOS, uncomment the definition of \com{SHORTEXT}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{14}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/01/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrected space under \texttt{minitoc/lof/lot} and added a \com{raggedright}
-% setting to avoid ``underfull'' warnings.
-% \item Corrected some spacing problems (avoiding~\texttt{\textasciitilde}'s).
-% \com{mtifont} is changed from \ucom{normalsize\bs bf} to \ucom{large\bs bf}.
-% \item Some modifications suggested by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} (thanks):
-% \ucom{@newread} becomes \com{newread}, not outer version of \com{newread};
-% \com{empty} replaced by \com{relax} in the spare definition of \com{reset@font}.
-% \item Removed the setting of \com{clubpenalty} and \com{widowpenalty}
-% to \texttt{10\,000} (done by \com{samepage}), and \com{noindent}.
-% \item Simplified processing of optional argument in \com{minitoc},
-% \com{minilof} and \com{minilot}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{15}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/01/27
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} and \com{partlot} for books, \com{secttoc},
-% \com{sectlof} and \com{sectlot} for articles, with some commands and parameters parallel to those
-% for mini-tables.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 1994/01/27
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} and \com{partlot} for books,
-% \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof} and \com{sectlot} for articles,
-% with some commands and parameters parallel to those for mini-tables.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{16}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/02/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Bug fixes (typos).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{17}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/06/23
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item `\texttt{n}' (null) synonym of `\texttt{e}' (empty) in the optional argument of \com{minitoc},
-% \com{dominitoc}, and siblings.
-% \item Compatibility with ``\LaTeXe''. Thanks to \xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel} (who found the problem) and
-% \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach} (who gave the hints to solve).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{18}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/06/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Make \upack{minitoc} really compatible with \LaTeXe.
-% \item Introduce the language files as options. Many thanks to \xname{Michel}{Goossens}
-% (via \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}) who was inspired by the code of the \pack{babel} package
-% (by \xname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{19}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/08/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added stuff for numbering of chapters (parts, sections) not starting at 1. \com{firstchapteris} etc.
-% commands added.
-% \item \com{mtcrule}, \com{nomtcrule} etc. commands added.
-% \item Corrected a bug in \com{c@mti}.
-% \item Corrected \xfile{mtcswedish.sty} (\xname{Jan~Michael}{Rynning}).
-% \item Corrected appendix in articles.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{20}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/08/25
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrected spacing before and after minitocs and siblings.
-% \item Added the \com{mtcpagenumbers} and \com{nomtcpagenumbers} commands
-% (and siblings) to make minitocs with/without page numbers. Default: with page numbers.
-% \item Corrected (difficult bug) appendix in articles.
-% \item Corrected vertical spacing.
-% \item Corrected a problem with chapters numbered with uppercase roman numbers.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{21}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/09/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrected typos in \upack{minitoc} and \xfile{minitoc.tex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{22}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/10/10
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrected typos in \upack{minitoc}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{23}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/11/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added a missing line in \com{sectlof}.
-% \item Works with document classes resetting chapter (or section) number at each part
-% (thanks to \xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel}).
-% \item Added the notion of ``absolute numbering'' for the mini-tables.
-% \item Removed stuff for \com{firstchapteris} and co. These commands are obsolete.
-% \item Removed appendix stuff.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{24}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/12/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item The \com{protect} commands have been removed from
-% the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lot} and \suffix{.lot} files, so some internal macros have been
-% corrected to be compatible with the \LaTeXe\ release of December 1994. Thanks to
-% \xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel} who did the work.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{25}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1996/09/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Updated \xfile{mtcnorsk.sty} and added \xfile{mtcnynorsk.sty} on a suggestion from \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{26}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1996/11/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Language specific files are now named \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} (replacing names of the form
-% \texttt{mtc}\emph{language}\suffix{.sty}) because they are not packages and it makes shorter names.
-% \item Added breton, estonian, germanb, greek, irish, russianb, scottish, lower and upper sorbian; renamed
-% ``esperanto'' by ``esperant'' like in the \pack{babel} package.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{27}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1996/12/20
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections for starred sectionning commands.
-% \item \xfile{english.mld} loaded as default language.
-% \item Added \xfile{vietnam.mld} and \xfile{arab.mld}.
-% \item Renamed \pack{minitocoff} into \pack{mtcoff} to keep the name short.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{28}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1997/10/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the afrikaan(s), brazil, and ethiopia(n) languages.
-% \item Added autoconfiguration of extensions.
-% \item Added the \opt{shortext} package option.
-% \item Added \emph{coffee} stuff.
-% \item Added \com{addstarred} stuff (for starred chapter stuff).
-% \item Fixed bug in parttocs.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 1998/06/15
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item A typo corrected by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \texttt{\{\bs let@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}}
-% \end{quote}
-% should probably be
-% \begin{quote}
-% \texttt{\{\bs let\bs@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}}
-% \end{quote}
-% (a backslash was missing after \com{let}). Thanks to him.
-% \item Added the bahasa language.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 1998/12/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the \opt{tight} and \optd{loose} package options.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{29}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1999/03/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the bicig, buryat, mongol and russianc languages.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 1999/06/28
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the armenian language (from \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 1999/07/23
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the \optd{dotted}/\opt{undotted} package options (default: \optd{dotted}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 1999/07/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{lithuanian.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{30}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1999/12/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the basque, ngermanb, serbian, ukraineb, and welsh languages.
-% \item Corrected a bug in \com{sltname} definition (\texttt{mlt} should be \texttt{slt}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{31}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2000/04/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added compatibility with the \pack{hyperref} package, thanks to \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek},
-% who has also simplified some code and fixed the infamous \com{chapter*} bug.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{32}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2000/08/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added very (too) numerous new commands for the mini-table features:
-% \com{beforeparttoc},\ABK \com{beforepartlof},\ABK \com{beforepartlot},\ABK
-% \com{afterparttoc},\ABK \com{afterpartlof},\ABK \com{afterpartlot},\ABK
-% \com{thispageparttocstyle},\goodbreak \com{thispagepartlofstyle},\ABK and \com{thispagepartlotstyle}.
-% \item Documentation improved by \xname{Stefan}{Ulrich}.
-% \item \com{nomtcrule} corrected.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{33}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2000/12/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added new adjustment commands: \com{mtcaddchapter}, \com{mtcaddsection},
-% and \com{mtcaddpart}.
-% These commands add stuff in the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files for the
-% \com{chapter*} (\com{section*} and \com{part*}) problem. From a suggestion by
-% \xname{Karl~F.}{Everitt}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2000/12/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrected a feature in \com{mtcaddchapter} and~co. with a blank optional argument.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{34}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2000/12/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added\imess{I0046} in the documentation a section for use with the \pack{tocbibind} package.
-% \item Added \suffix{.mld} files for alternate names of languages: so, \xfile{american.mld} just loads
-% \xfile{english.mld}, which contains the real definitions.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{35}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2001/01/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added macros to test if a file is ``empty'' (i.e.,~empty, blank or
-% inexistent) or ``non empty'' (i.e.,~useful). I used some code from \xname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}.
-% \item Added the \optd{checkfiles}/\opt{nocheckfiles} package options.
-% \item Replaced \ucom{The@chapter} by \com{The@mtc}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2001/02/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{bulgarian.mld}, \xfile{hebrew.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{latin.mld}, and
-% \xfile{samin.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2001/03/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \com{mtcselectlanguage}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2001/06/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Fixed the \lopt{estonian} package option (missing).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2001/07/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the interlingua language.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{36}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2002/02/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrected an interaction with \com{tableofcontents} which creates a \com{chapter*} or
-% a \com{section*}, perturbing \cnt{mtc}/\cnt{stc} counters (problem signalled by \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2002/02/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrected a spacing problem with empty titles (problem signalled by \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
-% \item Workaround for the \com{parttoc}-\com{chapter*} problem.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2002/02/19
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \com{mtcskip} and \com{mtcskipamount}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2002/02/27
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Fixed test for empty files.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2002/03/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the \lopt{bangla} language.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2002/03/15
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Reduced depth of \com{mtc@strutbox}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{37}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2003/01/24
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Version~\#37 dropped.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{38}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2003/01/24
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \texttt{pt} becomes \ucom{@pt} and \texttt{0pt} becomes \ucom{z@}.
-% \item \ucom{hrule} and \ucom{vrule} replaced by \ucom{rule} (\LaTeX).
-% \item Added \com{mtc@zrule} for zero-dims rules.
-% \item Added the frenchb language (synonym of french).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2003/01/30
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Changed the test for empty titles.
-% \item Added the \opt{flsection} and \opt{flsectionb} package options.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2003/01/31
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item The \opt{tight} and \optd{loose} package options are applied to
-% \com{parttoc} (\xname{Thomas}{Leonhardt}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2003/02/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Package options \opt{flsection} and \opt{flsectionb} removed and
-% replaced by the \opt{insection} package option (like \opt{flsectionb}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2003/02/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrected numbering of SLF, SLT.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2003/02/20
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \lopt{frenchle} and \lopt{frenchpro} language options (synonyms of \lopt{french}).
-% \item Corrected secttocs, at least.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2003/03/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrected some vertical spacings and struts
-% (I added some mods by \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}, many thanks to him.).
-% A lot of cleaning remains to do, but the release seems to be needed now.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{39}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2003/04/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Modern font commands for compatibility with the \class{memoir} class.
-% \item \com{nomtcpagenumbers} and \class{memoir} class.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2003/06/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \com{@fileswfalse} and \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
-% for the \pack{notoccite} package (requested by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}); added the
-% \opt{notoccite} package option (loads the \pack{notoccite} package).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2004/09/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added language options and \suffix{.mld} files for dialects: \lopt{canadian} (\loptd{english}), \lopt{acadian},
-% \lopt{acadien}, \lopt{canadien} (\lopt{french}), \lopt{naustrian}, \lopt{ngerman} (\lopt{ngermanb}).
-% \item Added comments in \suffix{.mld} files using special fonts.
-% \item Documentation: added a paragraph about making a TOC for
-% appendices, eventually not listed in the main TOC.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2004/09/17
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation; corrections about rules.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{40}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2004/12/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the japanese and castillan languages.
-% \item Removed the test on the presence of the \pack{multicol} package in
-% \xfile{minitoc.tex}, because \pack{multicol} is a required package.
-% \item Added a figure in \xfile{minitoc.tex} about the need of three compilations.
-% \item Added some infos in \xfile{minitoc.bug}.
-% \item Added\imess{I0042} a paragraph about a problem with the \pack{appendix} package.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2004/12/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Updated \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib} and \xfile{minitoc.bib}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2004/12/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the \optd{hints} package option. This option is still experimental; your advice is welcome.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2004/12/20
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf} (french documentation in PDF format).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{41}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in documentation.
-% \item Message added if some sectionning commands are not available.
-% \item Replaced \ucom{typeout} commands in \upack{minitoc}
-% by the \com{PackageInfo} or \com{PackageWarning} commands; with the line number when useful
-% (\com{@gobble} if no line number). Hence, the package is less verbose
-% (\com{PackageInfo} writes only in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file, not on the terminal).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the \com{mtcsetfont} (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}) and \com{mtcsettitlefont} commands,
-% with a much simpler syntax.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/10
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \AmS\ classes: \class{amsart} and \class{amsproc} are incompatible with
-% \upack{minitoc}, \class{amsbook} needs precautions.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \com{mtcsetformat}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \com{mtcsettitle}.
-% \item Added a hint for recommending the \opt{insection} package option.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/19
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added a hint about the presence of \com{dominitoc} and co.
-% \item Added a hint about consistency of \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} and co.
-% \item Improved documentation about hints.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/20
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added a hint about using short extensions with more that 99~parts or 99~chapters or 99~sections.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/25
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \com{ptifont}: \texttt{\bs Huge\bs bfseries} becomes \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs bfseries}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/28
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added many new language files: \xfile{serbianc.mld}, \xfile{chinese1.mld},
-% \xfile{chinese2.mld}, \xfile{hangul1.mld}, \xfile{hangul2.mld}, \xfile{hangul3.mld},
-% \xfile{hangul4.mld}, \xfile{hanja1.mld}, \xfile{hanja2.mld}, \xfile{japanese2.mld},
-% \xfile{japanese3.mld}, \xfile{japanese4.mld}, \xfile{japanese5.mld}, \xfile{thai.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \com{mtcsetrules}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \com{plfrule}, \com{noplfrule}, \com{mlfrule},
-% \com{nomlfrule}, \com{slfrule}, \com{noslfrule}, \com{pltrule},
-% \com{nopltrule}, \com{mltrule}, \com{nomltrule}, \com{sltrule},
-% \com{nosltrule}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{latvian.mld}, \xfile{letton.mld}, \xfile{greek-mono.mld}, \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld},
-% \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}, \xfile{polish2.mld}, \xfile{russian2m.mld}, and \xfile{russian2o.mld}
-% as new language files.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/10
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added tests on the \uenv{mtchideinmain*}\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}
-% environments.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \com{mtcfixindex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{42}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Version~42 not released.
-% \item Replaced ``language'' by ``langue'' in the french documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/15
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Fixed a minor typo.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Upgraded \com{mtcfixindex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \com{mtcsettitle}, forgotten to be inserted in v41.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{43}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Version~43: consolidation of v40, v41 and v42.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/24
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Fixed a big bug in \com{mtcsetformat}.
-% \item Fixed a bug in \xfile{mtcoff.sty} about \com{mtcfixindex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Fixed the \ucom{mtcset}\texttt{.{}.{}.}\ macros.
-% \item Moved history to the end of package code.
-% \item Added the \xfile{INSTALL} file and a chapter about installation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Fixed a typo (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}).
-% \item Completed the hint about consistency of \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} and co.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added a hint about consistency of \com{minitoc} and \com{tableofcontents}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added comments about fonts.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/10
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \com{mtcsetfeature}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{bulgarianb.mld} (upper bulgarian).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/15
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \texttt{*[-\bs baselineskip]} after the \texttt{\bs\bs} after the top rule of each part level mini-table.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the arguments of \com{mtcsetfeature}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Removed \com{markboth} for minitocs (\ldots) and secttocs (\ldots).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{spanish2.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added a hint for the \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract} package.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/04/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrected the \env{stc@verse} environment.
-% \item Added \xfile{finnish2.mld}, \xfile{latin2.mld}, and \xfile{magyar2.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/04/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Renamed \xfile{portuges.mld} as \xfile{portugues.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/04/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction in \com{mtcskip}.
-% \item First version in \suffix{.dtx} format.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/04/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Removed \ucom{ypart}, \ucom{ychapter}, \ucom{ysection}, and stuff; unused.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/05/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrected a typo in \com{@dosectlot}.
-% \item Added \com{mtcfixglossary}.
-% \item Print the documentation with ``\optp{oneside}{\protect\textsl{many classes}}'' to have all marginal notes on left.
-% Added the (extended to 54 floats) code of \pack{morefloats} (\xname{Don}{Hosek}) to allow more marginpars
-% and floats.
-% \item Added \xfile{minitoc.ist}\isuffix{.ist} to format the index correctly.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/05/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Fixed rules in parttocs, partlofs and partlots.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/05/30
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Fixed chapter-level entries in parttocs, when page numbers must be removed.
-% \item Added a hint about the \pack{sectsty}\imess{I0043} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added a hint about attempts to insert empty mini-tables.
-% \item Added a hint about the use of obsolete commands.
-% \item The mini-lists of figures or tables should not be printed empty even if \dcnt{tocdepth}${}<1$.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the notion of depth for mini-tables of figures/tables.
-% \item Added \com{mtcsetdepth}.
-% \item The \optd{hints} option is the default and no more considered as experimental.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added an error message in \com{mtcsetdepth} if the counter is not available.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{portuges.mld}, which loads \xfile{portugues.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added three variants for the malayalam language: \xfile{malayalam-keli.mld},
-% \xfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}, and \xfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added method for bilingual documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/15
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}\isuffix{.ist} to format correctly the index in french.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Changed ``Liste des Tables'' by ``Liste des Tableaux'' in \xfile{french.mld}, and in the french documentation,
-% to stick to the choices of the \pack{babel} package.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/17
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item The file \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} is now generated by \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added ``OUI'', ``NON'', ``oui'', ``non'', ``O'', and ``o'' as true/false keywords.
-% \item Compacted the code about detection of short/long extensions.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added ``VRAI'', ``FAUX'', ``vrai'', ``faux'', ``V'', and ``v'' as true/false keywords.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/23
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correctly set the \com{ifFTR} flag to have the names of months in the right language in the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Set the flag \com{mtcoffwarn@true} in \pack{mtcoff} if a command \ucom{mtcadd...} is found.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/07/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{castillian.mld}.
-% \item Renamed \xfile{portugues.mld} as \xfile{portuguese.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/07/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{brazilian.mld}, \xfile{british.mld}, \xfile{UKenglish.mld}, and \xfile{USenglish.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/07/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Suppressed ``General:'' in the changes history.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/07/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Replaced some \com{PackageWarning} commands by \com{PackageInfo}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/07/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Restoring the correspondence of each language option with a \suffix{.mld} file.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/07/20
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Improving the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/07/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Removing unused some flags \ucom{if@mtc@setpagenumbers@act@} and \ucom{if@mtc@setrules@act@}.
-% \item Added the \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, and \com{decrementstc} commands.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/07/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrected a bug in \pack{mtcoff}.
-% \item Improved some messages in \pack{mtcoff}.
-% \item Added a test on the version of the \pack{placeins} package.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/08/23
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added a note about \com{FloatBarrier}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/08/24
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added a note about an alignment problem in the minitocs. Updated \xfile{minitoc.bug}.
-% \item Made two versions of the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments,
-% depending on the presence of the corresponding depth counter.
-% \item The \class{memoir} class is incompatible if too recent.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/08/25
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added a comment about the position of the \ucom{do.{}.{}.} preparation commands.
-% \item Corrections in the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/08/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{guarani.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/08/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc}, and \com{incrementstc}.
-% \item Added an optional argument to \com{adjustptc}, \com{adjustmtc}, and \com{adjuststc}.
-% \item Added the \opt{k-tight} and \optd{k-loose} package options.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added a patch for the recent version of the \class{memoir} class.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{spanish3.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Use \com{mtcselectlanguage} in language options and in ``secondary'' \suffix{.mld} files.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \com{mtcloadmlo} to be used in some \suffix{.mld} files to load a \suffix{.mlo} file.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added a test to forbid direct calls of \com{mtcloadmlo} by the user.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{farsi1.mld}, \xfile{farsi1.mlo}, \xfile{farsi2.mld}, and \xfile{farsi2.mlo}.
-% \item Added a note about the \tool{rubber} tool.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/15
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{mtcglo.ist}\isuffix{.ist} to format the glossary.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Removed the page numbers in the glossary. Done in the \texttt{*mk} scripts.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{44}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Changes history (glossary) typeset in \texttt{RaggedRight}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/27
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{ngermanb2.mld}, \xfile{norsk2.mld}, and \xfile{nynorsk2.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/28
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item New method for history: embedded lists on 3~levels.
-% \item Removed \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{mtcglo.ist}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Cleaned the \texttt{*mk} scripts.
-% \item Added the \optd{listfiles} package option.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/30
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrected typos.
-% \item Added the name of the \suffix{.maf} file in the message of the \optd{listfiles} package option.
-% \item Improved the cleaning in the \texttt{*mk} scripts, using a~\suffix{.maf} file.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/10/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Load the patch for the \class{memoir} class only if necessary; do not load it if \class{memoir}
-% is dated after 2005/09/25.
-% \item Added a remark in the FAQ chapter (and \xfile{minitoc.bug}) about precautions to take with the starred
-% sectionning commands.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/10/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the \opt{nolistfiles} package option.
-% \item Added a hint about the \pack{caption}, \pack{caption2}, \pack{ccaption}, and \pack{mcaption} packages
-% (they must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/10/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Fixed typos in the documentation.
-% \item Fixed some marginal notes in the commented code.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/10/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Minor corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Use the \tool{xargs} Unix command in the \texttt{*mk} scripts to remove the auxiliary files.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/10/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Minor corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Added a short intro to the ``Frequently Asked Questions'' chapter and to \xfile{minitoc.bug}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Minor corrections in the documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Minor corrections in the documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Begin adding the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the french \LaTeX{} Companion~\cite{TLC2F}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \item Adding \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} in \xfile{minitoc.l}.
-% \item Adding a note about the need of running \scrp{imk} before \scrp{emk} or \scrp{fmk}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/10
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Fixed typos in the documentation.
-% \item Added a note about a problem with \upack{minitoc}, \pack{hyperref} and \class{memoir}.
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Fixed typos in the documentation.
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \item Improve the notes about the \class{memoir} class.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/15
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \item Improve the notes about the \class{memoir} class.
-% \item Added \com{plfSfont}, \com{pltSfont}, \com{mlfSfont}, \com{mltSfont},
-% \com{slfSfont}, and \com{sltSfont} for subfigures and subtables entries in the mini-tables.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \item Fixed a bug about fonts for subfigures and subtables entries in the mini-tables.
-% \item Added \xfile{bicig2.mld}, \xfile{bithe.mld}, \xfile{manju.mld}, \xfile{xalx.mld}, and
-% \xfile{khalkha.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/17
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \item Added testing via internal \emph{quarks} commands in \com{mtcsetfont}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \item Fixed typos in the documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/23
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \item Updating the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/24
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/25
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \item Changed ``table'' into ``tableau'' in the french doc, where necessary.
-% \item Updating the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/28
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \item Fixed typos in the documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \item Fixed typos in the documentation.
-% \item Fixed typos in the bibliography.
-% \item Updating the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/30
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \item Avoid some warnings ``Token not allowed'' from \texttt{pdftex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \item Reordering a long sequence of citations.
-% \item Added \og{} {\texttt{mailto:}}\fg{} in the mailing URLs.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Fixed typos in the documentation.
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0038}\pack{varsects} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \item Correcting an hyperlink in the bibliography (for the \pack{xr} package).
-% \item Attempting to avoid broken URLs, using \env{quote}, footnotes and \com{par}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \item Updating the bibliography.
-% \item Corrections of layout (some headers, a table).
-% \item In the warning message of the hint about a number of mini-tables greater than~99 (if short extensions),
-% give the effective number.
-% \item Reduce the width of some info, warning or error messages.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections of layout (some headers).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections of french quotes.
-% \item Added some PDF options.
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \item Corrected an URL to the \AmS\ in the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/19
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Made some messages shorter (mainly by removing stars).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction of typos.
-% \item Added some labels.
-% \item Added a chapter with the (explained) messages. Not yet sorted.
-% \item The documentation needs 4~\LaTeX\ runs.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Made some messages shorter.
-% \item Corrections in the list of messages.
-% \item Updating the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/23
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Improving the placement of floats on pages of floats: to the top.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation (thanks to \name{Markus}{Gleiszner}).
-% \item Added \oexam{addsec.tex}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrected the flag \com{ifundottedmtc}.
-% \item Correction to make \oexam{addsec.tex} work.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added ``\texttt{*}'' as keyword for the first argument of \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} and
-% \com{mtcsetrules} (asked by \name{Markus}{Gleiszner}).
-% \item Removed ``\com{MessageBreak}'' from the index.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \item Corrected the bibliography entry about \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Used the \pack{afterpage} package~\cite{afterpage} in the documentation to fix a float positionning problem.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Fixing a float positionning problem.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/10
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Added the bahasam language.
-% \item Added the albanian language.
-% \item Added the hebrew2 language.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Updated the documentation for the albanian, bahasa, bahasam, and hebrew2 languages.
-% \item Updated \xfile{french.mld} (removing abusive uppercase letters).
-% \item Corrected the \xfile{italian.mld} file. Added the italian2 language.
-% \item Added the australian and newzealand languages (english).
-% \item Renamed the bahasa language as bahasai; bahasa is synonym of bahasai.
-% \item Added the malay and meyalu languages, synonyms of bahasam.
-% \item Added the indon and indonesian languages, synonyms of bahasai.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Updated the acknowledgements.
-% \item Added references to the new bibliographic entries.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Fixed an instability in page breaks in the documentation of \xfile{japanese3.mld}.
-% \item Added comments in some \suffix{.mld} files.
-% \item Added \xfile{magyar3.mld}.
-% \item Updated \xfile{lithuanian.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction in \com{mtcaddsection}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/17
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction in \com{mtcfixindex} and \com{mtcfixglossary}.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Limitation of the initial depth of displayed bookmarks.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added some comments in point~34 of the FAQ (and in \xfile{minitoc.bug}) about the initialization of fonts.
-% \item Added \xfile{romanian2.mld} and \xfile{romanian3.mld}.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/19
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Load some packages before \pack{hyperref}.
-% \item Added \xfile{spanish4.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/23
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrected the table about default titles.
-% \item Corrected the keywords for \com{mtcsetfont}.
-% \item Added \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}, \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}, and \xfile{ukrainian.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/24
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Updated documentation for \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}, \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}, and \xfile{ukrainian.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/25
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added a hint about the \imess{I0043}\KOMAScript{}
-% classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, and an entry in the FAQ chapter
-% (and in \xfile{minitoc.bug}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/27
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Added a note in documentation of \xfile{serbian.mld} and \xfile{serbianc.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/30
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{ethiopian2.mld} (for Omega).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/31
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Simplifications in the ``Messages'' chapter.
-% \item Corrections in the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Added the ``Postface'' chapter.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the ``Postface'' chapter.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Added package \pack{dblaccnt}~\cite{dblaccnt} for the ``The pdf\TeX\ Program'' entry in the bibliography.
-% Its author's first name needs a double accent \mbox{(\namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han})}; je l'ai aussi
-% utilisé pour composer d'autres mots vietnamiens.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/10
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{malayalam-omega.mld} and \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{kannada.mld}.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/15
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in \xfile{russianb.mld} and \xfile{spanish.mld}.
-% \item Corrections in the documentation and the bibliography.
-% \item Place \com{mtcfixglossary} before \com{mtcfixindex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added a citation from \name{Donald}{Arseneau}.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Updated the acknowlegments.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/17
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Updated the jargon.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/20
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \uxfile{u8hangul.mld}, \uxfile{u8hangul.mlo}, \uxfile{u8hanja.mld}, and \uxfile{u8hanja.mlo}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Renamed languages \texttt{u8hangul} and \texttt{u8hanja} into \xmldo{hangul-u8} and \xmldo{hanja-u8}.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added a hint about repeated preparation commands.
-% \item Moved up the declaration of some flags relative to the \optd{hints} option.
-% \item Added \com{mtcprepare}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/23
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/24
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/27
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Added \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} to class~6.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/28
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Corrected the position of tables in the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \item Corrected \xfile{irish.mld}, \xfile{lsorbian.mld} and \xfile{usorbian.mld}.
-% \item Added \xfile{polski.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Hints about the \class{jura}\imess{W0029}\imess{W0025} class and the \pack{alphanum} package,
-% incompatible with \upack{minitoc}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Use bibliographic styles with an~\texttt{URL} field, built with the help of \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in \xfile{magyar.mld}, \xfile{magyar2.mld}, and \xfile{magyar3.mld}.
-% \item Added \xfile{russian-cca.mld}, \xfile{russian-cca1.mld}, and \xfile{russian-lh.mld}, with their
-% \suffix{.mlo} files.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/10
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \item Added \xfile{russian-lhcyralt.mld}, \xfile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mld}, and \xfile{russian-lhcyrwin.mld}, with their
-% \suffix{.mlo} files.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the \pack{mtcmess} package.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item The messages are now numbered.
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/20
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Update the jargon.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/28
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Update the jargon.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added FAQ~37 about \suffix{.mld} files and \pack{babel}.
-% \item Added \xfile{french1.mld} and \xfile{french2.mld}.
-% \item Update the jargon.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/30
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{english1.mld} and \xfile{english2.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{45}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/31
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Suppression of the PostScript versions of the documentation.
-% \item Added \xfile{arab2.mld}, \xfile{bicig3.mld}, \xfile{buryat2.mld}, \xfile{xalx2.mld}, and \xfile{xalx3.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/04/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/04/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{swedish2.mld}.
-% \item The \opt{insection} package option loads also the \pack{flafter} package.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/04/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Added \uxgrf{lamed.eps} and \uxgrf{lamed.pdf} as images for the \emph{Lamed} logo (built from \uxfile{lamed.tex}).
-% \item Reordering of the chapters in the user's manual (part~I).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/04/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Use \pack{sectsty} to better format section titles.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/04/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Added \com{ifmtcsecondpart} to check if the document has exactly 2~parts.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/04/10
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/04/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/04/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/04/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item In the \opt{insection} package option, load the \pack{flafter} package \emph{before} the
-% \pack{placeins} package.
-% \item Added a figure about the float barriers (figure~\vref{f+barrier}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/04/27
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added notes in FAQ~20, about the use with the \pack{appendix} package.
-% \item Added comments about the \opt{insection} option.
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \item Begin correction of the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/05/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added notes in \xfile{minitoc.bug}, point~20, about the use with the \pack{appendix} package.
-% \item End correction of the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment.
-% \item Analogous corrections in the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments.
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/05/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added notes about the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments.
-% \item Added \oexam{hide1.tex} and \oexam{hide2.tex}.
-% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0086}\pack{fncychap} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0087}\pack{quotchap} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/05/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0088}\pack{romannum} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0089}\pack{sfheaders} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0090}\pack{alnumsec} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/05/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/05/24
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{hide.tex} to \oexam{hide1.tex}.
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/05/30
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Use \com{MakeUpperCase} in \com{markboth} for page styles.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/05/31
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \item Added a hint about the \pack{captcont} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Added \xfile{uighur.mld}, \xfile{uighur2.mld}, and \xfile{uighur3.mld} (as synonyms for the bicig variants).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Added description of \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} in the jargon.
-% \item Added a comment about the \scrp{imk} script in \xfile{INSTALL} and the ``Installation'' chapter.
-% \item Added an entry about ``package'' in the jargon.
-% \item Added the \exam{mtc-apx.tex} example file.
-% \item Added FAQ 44 and the \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} and \com{mtcgapafterheads} commands.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \item Added the \oexam{gaps.tex} example file.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \item Spacing correction in \xfile{french2.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{46}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation and the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \item Comment about the \pack{thailatex} package.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Generate some example files with \xfile{minitoc.dtx}/\xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item Added chapter ``Example files''.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/23
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Renamed chapter ``Example files'' as ``Examples of documents''.
-% \item Use the \pack{lipsum} package~\cite{lipsum} in some of the examples of documents.
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/27
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Update the examples of documents.
-% \item Added the \oexam{second.tex} example file.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the \oexam{amem.tex}, \oexam{mem.tex} and \oexam{mem1.tex} example files.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/30
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the \oexam{fo1.tex}, \oexam{fo2.tex} and \oexam{scr.tex} example files.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the \oexam{subf.tex} example file.
-% \item Corrections about the depth of minilofs, minilots and siblings.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the \oexam{tsfc.tex} and \oexam{tbi.tex} example files.
-% \item Corrections in the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections of typos.
-% \item Corrections in the bibliography.
-% \item Added the \oexam{2c.tex} and \exam{mtc-bo.tex} example files.
-% \item Correction in \xfile{french2.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/10
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction in minilots and minilofs (and siblings) about depth.
-% \item Added the \oexam{hop.tex} and \oexam{cri.tex} example files.
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the \oexam{livre.tex}, \oexam{ch0.tex}, \oexam{tlc.tex} and \oexam{mu.tex} example files.
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Update the jargon.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation.
-% \item The not released versions are flagged by~\textbf{\textreferencemark} in place of~\ensuremath{\star}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/17
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item The ``About this document'' section becomes a starred first chapter.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the \oexam{hir.tex} and \oexam{hia.tex} example files.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/19
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \item Corrections in \oexam{add.tex} and \oexam{addsec.tex} for the index.
-% \item Added the \scrp{xmk} script to typeset the examples into PDF documents.
-% \item Updated the scripts to treat the examples.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/20
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Do not forget \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0} in the list of files.
-% \item In the scripts, the backup directory (\xfile{OLD}) is now \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`/OLD}.
-% \item In the scripts, the repartition directories (\texttt{CL[0-9]}) are
-% now \texttt{/tmp/`whoami`/CL[0-9]}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{47}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the documentation and the bibliography.
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/27
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{arabi.mld} and \xfile{farsi3.mld} (from the \packa{\Arabi}{arabi} system~\cite{arabi}).
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/28
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Update the jargon.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/31
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Fixed \com{l@xsection}.
-% \item Fixed some spacings in mini-tables.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/08/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added a \verb|\kernafter...| vertical kern between each minitable and its bottom rule.
-% \item Added point~45 of the FAQ.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/08/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Minor correction in warning message \texttt{F0008}.
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \item Fixed a bug in \xfile{romanian2.mld} and \xfile{romanian3.mld}.
-% \item Shortened the result of some example documents by using the \class{report} class in place of the
-% \class{book} class (hence using one side printing).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{48}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2006/08/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Fixed typos.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/08/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \item No preamble in \oexam{add.bib}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/08/23
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the TOC formatting.
-% \item Increasing \com{textwidth}.
-% \item Correction of the preamble problem in \oexam{add.bib} and all generated files.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/08/24
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Remove comments about spurious lines in preamble of generated files.
-% \item Added \xfile{devanagari.mld} and \xfile{hindi.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/08/25
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \item Added \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}.
-% \item Corrected the \com{name} macro (for the documentation).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/08/28
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the bibliography.
-% \item Correction (conversion) in \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/08/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added error \texttt{E0036}\imess{E0036} if \xfile{english.mld} is not found to set the default titles.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/08/31
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \item Modified the \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} to have family names of authors and editors in small caps and years in
-% old style digits. Titles are in emphasis. The \xfile{frplain1.bst} style is also updated.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \item The bibliographic styles \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} and \xfile{frplain1.bst} are renamed \xfile{en-mtc.bst} and
-% \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Update the bibliography.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{add.bib} to \exam{mtc-add.bib}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{add.tex} to \exam{mtc-add.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{addsec.tex} to \exam{mtc-ads.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{2c.tex} to \exam{mtc-2c.tex}.
-% \item The \optd{listfiles} package option is now active by default.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Renamed \oexam{app-mem.tex} to \exam{mtc-amm.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{apx.tex} to \exam{mtc-apx.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{bo.tex} to \exam{mtc-bo.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{ch0.tex} to \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{cri.tex} to \exam{mtc-cri.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{fo1.tex} to \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{fo2.tex} to \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{gaps.tex} to \exam{mtc-gap.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{hia.tex} to \exam{mtc-hia.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{hir.tex} to \exam{mtc-hir.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{hide1.tex} to \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{hide2.tex} to \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{hop.tex} to \exam{mtc-hop.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{livre.tex} to \exam{mtc-liv.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{mem.tex} to \exam{mtc-mem.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{mem1.tex} to \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{mini-art.tex} to \exam{mtc-art.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{minitoc-ex.tex} to \exam{mtc-bk.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{mu.tex} to \exam{mtc-mu.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{scr.tex} to \exam{mtc-scr.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{second.tex} to \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{subf.tex} to \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{tbi.tex} to \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{tlc.tex} to \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}.
-% \item Renamed \oexam{tsfc.tex} to \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Updated the bibliography (added the Pentaglot).
-% \item Corrected the format of two tables about NFSS.
-% \item Example documents in alphabetical order in their chapter.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added a figure about systems derived from \TeX{} and \LaTeX.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the \exam{mtc-syn.tex} example document file.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{49}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Slightly modified the layout of the list of files (``Installation'' chapter).
-% \item Simplifications in the scripts.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Added point~46 in the FAQ and example file \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Corrections in the bibliography and the bibliographic styles.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Better error messages about undefined preparation and insertion commands.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Added ``\textbf{+}'' and ``\texttt{-}'' as synonyms for ``\texttt{on}'' and ``\texttt{off}'', respectively.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/10/20
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the bibliography.
-% \item Fixed typos.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Added a table of some encodings.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/10/31
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Suppressed the ``Summary'' entry in the summary, but added it in the Table of Contents.
-% \item Improving some tables.
-% \item Added the \xfile{japanese6.mld} and \xfile{japanese6.mlo} files.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/11/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in the bibliography.
-% \item Corrections in formatting a citation from \name{Donald}{Arseneau}.
-% \item Combine four figures in one (with sub-figures).
-% \item Added (in the memento) a table of the classes and packages which are incompatible or need precautions with
-% \upack{minitoc}.
-% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/11/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Completed the list of the standard classes.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/11/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added a validation of the language options with the presence of the \suffix{.mld} and \suffix{.mlo} files.
-% \item Added\imess{E0036} notes about the mandatory presence of the \xfile{english.mld} file.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/11/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item The validation of the language options writes only informative messages in the
-% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file and, if necessary, gives only one warning message.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{50}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2006/11/17
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Removed old examples of documents: \oexam{mtc-adds.tex}, \oexam{mtc-amem.tex}, \oexam{mtc-book.tex},
-% \oexam{mtc-gaps.tex}, \oexam{mtc-mem1.tex}, \oexam{mtc-subf.tex}, and \oexam{mtc-tsfc.tex}.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Added the \scrp{tmk} script and a table describing a \index{TDS}TDS structure for \upack{minitoc}.
-% \item Added an item about the \index{TDS}TDS in the jargon.
-% \item Updated the \xfile{INSTALL} file and the ``Installation'' chapter.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/11/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the warning message \texttt{W0094} with the list of the missing minitoc languages files (\suffix{.mld}
-% and \suffix{.mlo}).
-% \item Corrections in the bibliography.
-% \item Updated the \xfile{INSTALL} file and the ``Installation'' chapter.
-% \item Changed the names of the scratch directories in some scripts.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Added the file \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} (a ZIP archive of a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy of all files of
-% the package) to the distribution.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{51}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2006/12/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Improving the index: packages and classes, scripts, tools, names, examples, extensions, options,
-% language options.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/12/20
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Improving the index: names.
-% \item Updated some \suffix{.mld} files with names of the authors of titles.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/01/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Miscellaneous corrections.
-% \item The names of some internal macros are shortened to fit into the margin.
-% \item Added a \com{ProvidesFile} command to the example files.
-% \item Indexing the environments (not perfect).
-% \item Indexing the files.
-% \item Renamed the file ``\texttt{catalog}'' into ``\xfile{CATALOG}''.
-% \item Indexing the counters and depth counters.
-% \item The example files are in their own directory in the (proposed) \index{TDS}TDS hierarchy.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{52}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2007/01/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction of index ordering.
-% \item Default option in boldface in the index.
-% \item Adding some informations about authors for language specific titles.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/01/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added fake sections in the ``Examples of documents'' chapter.
-% \item Removed the preparation of the documentation in PostScript format.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/01/15
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the \scrp{cmk} script to convert the documentation from PDF format into PostScript format.
-% \item Removed \xfile{duplex2v.pro}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/01/17
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Indexing the referenced commands.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/01/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrected the name \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han} (first name before last name, the english way).
-% \item Corrected some other names.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/01/19
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{mongolb.mld} and \xfile{mongolb.mlo}.
-% \item Removed \xfile{mongolb.mlo} (new cyrillic encodings T2 and X2 in \xfile{mongolb.mld}).
-% \item Added the example file \exam{mtc-3co.tex}.
-% \item Trying to use a recent version of the \pack{cite}~\cite{cite} package (2003/11/04, 4.01) to allow
-% sorting, but still clashes with \pack{hyperref}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/01/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Balancing the columns in the index.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/01/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction of the indexing of the environments.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/01/31
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Improving the index layout.
-% \item Updated \xfile{galician.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/02/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{mongolian.mld} which loads \xfile{mongolb.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/02/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Indexing the names of authors.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/02/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Updated the acknowledgements.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{53}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2007/02/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the example file \exam{mtc-fko.tex}.
-% \item Corrected \com{kernafterminitoc} and siblings.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/02/19
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Bibliographic references for packages and classes in the index.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/03/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added a header to the index, to explain notations.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Changed the style of page and line numbers in the index.
-% \item Updated \xfile{kannada.mld}.
-% \item Dangerous bend symbols are now in the right margin.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/03/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Improved the presentation of example files.
-% \item Using the \pack{natbib} package~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} to sort the sequences of citations.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/03/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction in table~\vref{t+TDS}.
-% \item Renamed \uxfile{minitoc-texmf.zip} into \uxfile{minitoc-tds.zip}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/03/19
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Use the \optp{sort\&compress}{natbib} option of the \pack{natbib} package~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} to compress the
-% sequences of citations; the \pack{hypernat} package must also be loaded (after \pack{natbib} and
-% \pack{hyperref}).
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/03/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added changing the title of the parttoc for appendices in \xfile{mtc-apx.tex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{54}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2007/03/27
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features.
-% \item Indexing the features.
-% \item Added the \exam{mtc-ocf.tex} example file.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/04/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added the ``\com{mtcfixnomenclature}'' command.
-% \item Added the \exam{mtc-nom.tex} example file.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Corrected the last argument of \com{mtcsetfeature} and siblings, using \com{mtc@toks}.
-% \item Some mini-tables are set on two columns in the manual.
-% \item Indexing the messages. Messages noted in the right margin.
-% \item Corrected a bug in \pack{mtcoff}.
-% \item Added \xfile{latinc.mld} and \xfile{latinc2.mld} for classical latin.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/04/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added internal hyperlinks for messages.
-% \item Load the \pack{hypcap} package for hyperlinks in the documentation.
-% ^^A \item Modification of \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, and \scrp{pmk} to remove \verb*|\ | from the index.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/06/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \com{mtcoffset} and co. for an horizontal offset of a mini-table.
-% \item Added \com{mtcsetoffset} for an horizontal offset of a mini-table type.
-% \item Added the \exam{mtc-ofs.tex} example file.
-% \item Added flagging of macros in example files.
-% \item The 2007 section in the ``Postface'' chapter was garbled.
-% \item More internal links in the documentation.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Added a clickable table of all messages.
-% \item Improved column breaks in the index.
-% \item Added a local minitoc in the ``Jargon'' chapter.
-% \item Added \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}.
-% \item Added \xfile{latvian2.mld} and \xfile{letton2.mld}.
-% \item Grouped \texttt{.mld}/\texttt{.mlo} pairs in tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{55}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2007/06/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added a hint (warning~\texttt{W0097})\imess{W0097} about the \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} package (incompatible).
-% \item Added a \emph{hint} (\texttt{I0053})\imess{I0053} about the \pack{float}~\cite{float},
-% \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}, and \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/06/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Regrouping some marginal notes about messages; improving their positions.
-% \item Improve page breaks in the documentation.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Corrected a bug about minitocs in appendices for the \class{memoir} class.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/06/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Changed the color of hyperlinks.
-% \item Revised the format of the headers.
-% \item Corrected some \verb|\mtcset...| commands to use \com{edef} to correctly evaluate \com{mtc@toks}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item \textbf{56}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2007/07/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Added \xfile{swahili.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/08/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Page headers modified in documentation.
-% \item Added stuff (files) for figures (maps) for many language areas.
-% \item Removed the \suffix{.eps} files.
-% \item Added the \lopt{bengali} language synonym of \lopt{bangla}.
-% \item Split the list of files into two tables (tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/12/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Many minor typo fixes.
-% \item Darker colors for hyperlinks.
-% \item Updated and corrected the bibliography.
-% \item Corrected a typo in the \env{ptc@verse} environment (thanks to~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}).
-% \item Corrections of typos in the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments
-% (thanks to \name{Andrew}{Bowden}).
-% \item Replaced the \suffix{.mtc1} extension by \suffix{.mtc0} in the auto-configuration test (to avoid
-% erasing the (\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc1} file).
-% \item Corrected a problem with \com{nofiles} (\name{Andreas}{Deininger}).
-% \item The acknowledgements are moved to the ``Complements'' part.
-% \item Added a hint (warning~\texttt{W0099})\imess{W0099} about the \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc} package.
-% \item Complete indexing of the messages.
-% \item Updated \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}.
-% \item Using the \pack{chngpage} package~\cite{chngpage} to increase the width of the pages of the bibliography.
-% \item Renamed \ucom{if@longextensions@} as \com{if@mtc@longext@}.
-% \item Updated \xfile{czech.mld}.
-% \item Removed \ucom{l@xsection}.
-% \item Graphic files are indexed separately.
-% \item Updated \xfile{galician.mld}.
-% \item Added a specific directory for image files in the TDS hierarchy.
-% \item Updated \xfile{lsorbian.mld}, \xfile{ukraineb.mld}, and \xfile{usorbian.mld}.
-% \item Added \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld},\ABK and \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}.
-% \item Updated \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}.
-% \item Suppressed parasite entries from the index.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item \textbf{57}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2007/12/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/12/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections in examples of documents.
-% \item Added \xfile{occitan.mld}.
-% \item Updated \xfile{croatian.mld}, \xfile{danish.mld}, \xfile{dutch.mld}, \xfile{galician.mld},
-% \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{greek.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{interlingua.mld},
-% \xfile{polish.mld}, \xfile{scottish.mld}, and \xfile{turkish.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2008/01/15
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrected \xfile{polski.mld}.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Added table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}.
-% \item Added maps of Manchuria (figure~\vref{f+manju}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2008/04/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Better captions for maps.
-% Added maps for Italy, Karnataka, Germany, Mongols and China.
-% \item Added \xfile{occitan2.mld} and \xfile{mexican.mld}.
-% \item Added a map of czech dialects (figure~\vref{f+czechd}).
-% \item Added maps of danish dialects (figure~\vref{f+danishd}).
-% \item Added a map of the dutch language (figure~\vref{f+dutchw}).
-% \item Added a map of french dialects (figure~\vref{f+france-lr}).
-% \item Added a map of galician dialects (figure~\vref{f+galician-l}).
-% \item Added maps of german dialects (figures~\vrefrange{f+german-d}{f+german-c}).
-% \item Added maps of hindi dialects (figure~\vref{f+hindi}).
-% \item Added maps of portugese dialects (figures~\vref{f+portu-b} and~\vref{f+portu-a}).
-% \item Added a map of the turkish language (figure~\vref{f+turkish}).
-% \item Added a map of the vietnamese language (figure~\vref{f+viet-w}).
-% \item Added a map of the armenian diaspora (figure~\vref{f+armeniad}).
-% \item Added a map of the sami dialects (figure~\vref{f+same}).
-% \item Added a map of the nationalities in ex-Yugoslavia (figure~\vref{f+xyugo}).
-% \item Added a map of countries where spanish is an official language (figure~\vref{f+espa-o}).
-% \item Added a map of the sorbian area (figure~\vref{f+sorben}).
-% \item Added an entry for the Wikipedia in the jargon.
-% \item Added a map of the minorities in Poland (figure~\vref{f+pologne}).
-% \item Added a map of the bengali diaspora (figure~\vref{f+bengali-m}).
-% \item Splitted the TDS hierarchy into three tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+TDS}.
-% \item Added maps of the basque dialects (figure~\vref{f+euskara}).
-% \item Added maps of the latvian dialects (figure~\vref{f+latvian-d}).
-% \item Added a map for the swahili language (figure~\vref{f+swahili}).
-% \item Added the turkish alphabet (figure~\vref{f+turc-alpha}).
-% \item The page numbers in the index are now hyperlinks (thanks to~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}).
-% \item Colors added in figure~\vref{f+barrier}.
-% \item Added maps of the languages in Europe (figure~\vrefrange{f+euro-lan1}{f+euro-lan2}).
-% \item Added maps of Kosovo (figure~\vref{f+kosovo}).
-% \item Added a map of the languages in Africa (figure~\vref{f+africa}).
-% \item Corrected an error of message number.
-% \item Added maps for Russia (figures~\vrefrange{f+rus-re}{f+rus-su}).
-% \item Added a map of the districts of Slovakia (figure~\vref{f+slovak}).
-% \item Added maps about Islam (figures~\vrefrange{f+islam-pbc}{f+islam-sw}).
-% \item Added a figure about hànzì characters (figure~\vref{f+hanzi}).
-% \item Added a figure about chinese characters usage in the world (figure~\vref{f+china-ch}).
-% \item Added a figure about chinese dialects ((figure~\vref{f+china-l}).
-% \item Added maps about writing systems (figures~\vrefrange{f+wrs-c}{f+wrs-a}).
-% \item Added a map of the regions where Finnish is spoken (figure~\vref{f+finnishl}).
-% \item Shortened the ``Installation'' chapter.
-% \item Updated from the \pack{babel} package version~v3.8j of 2008/03/16.
-% \item Files \uxgrf{lamed.pdf} and \uxfile{lamed.tex} replaced by \xgrf{lamed3.png}.
-% \item Added maps of the indigenous languages of México (figure~\vref{f+mexl}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item \textbf{58}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2008/06/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Renamed \uxfile{minitoc-tds.zip} into \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}.
-% \item Added a simplified linguistic map of Europe (figure~\vref{f+leur}).
-% \item Added a map of polish dialects (figure~\vref{f+polish-d}).
-% \item Added a figure about the russian alphabet (figure~\vref{f+rus-cyr}).
-% \item Added a map about the russian alphabet (figure~\vref{f+cyr-alf}).
-% \item Added a figure about the serbian alphabets (figure~\vref{f+serb-a}).
-% \item Added a map of the provinces of Vietnam (figure~\vref{f+viet4}).
-% \item Used \ucom{vrefrange} to compress ranges of internal cross-references.
-% \item Added a map of albanian dialects (figure~\vref{f+alb2}).
-% \item Added a map of Norway (figure~\vref{f+norway-p}).
-% \item Added flags for many countries. Added a light gray frame around the flags.
-% \item Added a figure about lusophonia (figure~\vref{f+luso-c}).
-% \item Added a figure about germanophonia (figure~\vref{f+germano-c}).
-% \item Added a figure about hispanophonia (figure~\vref{f+hispano-c}).
-% \item Added a figure about italophonia (figure~\vref{f+italo-c}).
-% \item Added a minitoc in the index to make it easier to consult.
-% \item Added figures about francophones countries (figures~\vrefrange{f+franco-eu-c}{f+franco-asp-c}).
-% \item Added a figure about swahili-speaking countries (figure~\vref{f+swa-c}).
-% \item Added a figure about arabic-speaking countries (figure~\vref{f+arabo-sp-c}).
-% \item Added a figure about russian-speaking countries (figure~\vref{f+russ-c}).
-% \item Added a figure about english-speaking countries (figure~\vref{f+eng-c}).
-% \item Added flags \com{ifinparttoc}, \com{ifinpartlof}, \com{ifinpartlot}.
-% \com{ifinminitoc}, \com{ifinminilof}, \com{ifinminilot},
-% \com{ifinsecttoc}, \com{ifinsectlof}, and \com{ifinsectlot}.
-% \item Added example document~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}.
-% \item Added a figure about dutch-speaking countries (figure~\vref{f+dutch-c}).
-% \item Renamed \uxfile{fminitoc.dtx} and consorts as \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} and consorts.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{59}:~corrupted PDF files.
-% \item \textbf{60}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2008/07/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Minor correction in figure~\vref{f+arabo-sp-c}.
-% \item Updated the bibliography.
-% \item Added missing flag files (thanks to \namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}).
-% \item Replaced many \suffix{.pdf} image files (most of them are flag files) by the original \suffix{.png} file
-% because they were corrupted during the conversion by \tool{ImageMagick} (\tool{xpdf} didnt see the problem but
-% \tool{Acrobat Reader} refuses to show the file); many thanks to \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}
-% and \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}.
-% \item Back to standard colors and default \pack{hyperref} color options.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{RaggedRight}
-% \egroup
-% ^^A MAJ-E
-% \or\relax
-% ^^A FRENCH
-% \bgroup
-% \def\labelitemi{\ensuremath{\star}~\textbf{version}}
-% \def\labelitemii{\textbullet}
-% \def\labelitemiii{\textopenbullet}
-% \def\labelitemiv{\textperiodcentered}
-% \begin{RaggedRight}
-% %
-% \lneed{5}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \textbf{00}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1990/10/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Version originale, par \xname{Nigel}{Ward}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1991/11/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Révision pour réutiliser de manière transparente les commandes
-% \com{chapter}, \com{section}, \com{subsection}, et engendrer automatiquement
-% le nom du fichier minitoc, avec en plus d'autres nettoyages (par \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{01}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/06/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Nouvelle conception, pour éviter d'allouer un newwrite, ou descripteur de fichier, pour chaque chapitre
-% (un péché mortel!) (\uname{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert}).
-% \item Ajout de \com{chapterend} pour terminer la portée d'une minitoc. (\emph{Si vous oubliez de
-% mettre} \com{chapterend} à~la fin de \emph{chaque} chapitre, une entrée pour le chapitre suivant
-% apparaîtra dans chaque minitoc.) (Merci à~\xname{Yufan}{Hu}).
-% \item Remplacement de l'environnement \env{minipage} par un environnement \env{verse}, pour qu'une
-% minitoc puisse se répartir sur plusieurs pages.
-% \item Toute la mise en page de la minitoc est dans la commande, donc si quelqu'un souhaite redéfinir cette
-% mise en page, il a juste à~la réécrire (et seulement elle).
-% \item Vous pouvez inhiber la minitoc pour le chapitre suivant en le faisant précéder par \ucom{minitocno}.
-% (\ucom{minitocyes} est sans objet pour l'utilisateur: elle est implicite \emph{après}
-% les pseudo-chapitres \com{chapter*}).
-% \item Problèmes: vous \emph{devez} avoir mis \com{chapterend} pour terminer chaque chapitre ayant une
-% minitoc. Comment éviter cette contrainte?
-% \item La profondeur de la minitoc est ajustable par l'utilisateur avec le compteur \dcnt{minitocdepth} (similaire
-% à~\dcnt{tocdepth} pour la table des matières.).
-% \item Au moins trois passes~(3) de \LaTeX{} sont nécessaires pour obtenir des minitocs correctes (la première
-% passe crée les fichiers \suffix{.mtc}\meta{X}, la deuxième les utilise (mais ils peuvent contenir des
-% numéros de pages faux) et les recrée, la troisième devrait être bonne).
-% \item Fonctionne avec \com{chapter}\texttt{[xxx]\{yyy\}} et les éléments flottants. Fonctionne en mode deux
-% colonnes (mais la minitoc est composée sur une colonne; comment faire pour qu'elle s'étende sur les deux
-% colonnes?).
-% \item Ajout de quelques modifications pour fonctionner avec \pack{xr} (références externes).
-% \upack{xr} version~5 est bien plus tolérant.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{02}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/07/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de la compatibilité avec \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} (le paquetage \pack{hangcaption} (s'il est présent)
-% doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}). \emph{Attention} aux options modifiant
-% \com{@caption}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{03}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/07/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Version~3 non distribuée (erronée).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{04}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/07/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \ucom{if@realch} pour éviter que des lignes de contenu provenant de pseudo-chapitres
-% aillent dans la table des matières.
-% \item Le fichier paquetage \pack{mtcoff} vous permet d'utiliser un document \LaTeX\ contenant des
-% commandes minitoc et de les rendre transparentes: il suffit de remplacer le paquetage \upack{minitoc}
-% par \upack{mtcoff}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{05}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/07/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'un mécanisme de sélection pour ne pas écrire des choses superflues dans les minitocs.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{06}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/07/15
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction de problèmes sur les chapitres dans la table des matières, retrait de code obsolète pour
-% \com{caption} (les filtres sont bien meilleurs), ajout de la compatibilité
-% avec \pack{toch}
-% (\pack{toch} crée une table des chapitres; si utilisé, doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc};
-% en fait, c'est l'ancêtre du paquetage \pack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{07}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/07/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item (\emph{différences majeures}) Réécriture complète, en utilisant des astuces de \pack{xr}
-% (la version~5, de \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle}). Les informations pour les minitocs sont directement prélevées dans
-% le fichier \suffix{.toc}. Suppression de \com{chapterend} et \ucom{minitocno}, ajout de
-% \com{minitoc}, \com{dominitoc} et \com{faketableofcontents}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{08}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/07/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajustements d'espacement.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{09}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/08/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de modifications pour MS-DOS (rechercher MS-DOS, et décommenter; rechercher UNIX, mettre en commentaire).
-% MS-DOS permet seulement 3~caractères pour les suffixes dans les noms de fichiers (pitoyable\ldots).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{10}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/08/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Fonctionne avec les appendices. Détecte maintenant les versions obsolètes de \xfile{latex.tex}:
-% (\com{@inputcheck} ou \com{reset@font} non définies).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{11}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/08/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \com{mtcSfont}, fonte pour les entrées de section, \com{mtcSSfont} pour les entrées
-% de sous-section, \com{mtcSSSfont} pour les entrées de sous-sous-section, \com{mtcPfont} pour
-% les entrées de paragraphe, \com{mtcSPfont} pour les entrées de sous-paragraphe.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{12}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/12/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Utilisation de \com{kern} au lieu de \com{vspace*} et ajout de pénalités
-% (\com{nopagebreak}) pour éviter une coupure de page juste avant la dernière \com{mtc@rule}.
-% \item Ajout aussi d'un environnement \env{samepage}.
-% \item Retrait de vieilles lignes mises en commentaire dans des versions précédentes.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{13}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1993/12/17
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de code pour \com{minilof} et \com{minilot}. Pour MS-DOS, décommenter la définition
-% de \com{SHORTEXT}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{14}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/01/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction de l'espacement en dessous d'une \texttt{minitoc/lof/lot} et ajout de \com{raggedright}
-% pour éviter des avertissements \og{} underfull \fg.
-% \item Correction de quelques problèmes d'espacement (en évitant des~\texttt{\textasciitilde}'s).
-% \com{mtifont} est changée de \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs bf} en \texttt{\bs large\bs bf}.
-% \item Quelques modifications suggérées par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} (merci): \ucom{@newread} devient
-% \com{newread}, une version \emph{not outer} de \com{newread}; \com{empty} remplacée
-% par \com{relax} dans la définition par défaut de \com{reset@font}.
-% \item Retrait du forçage de \com{clubpenalty} et \com{widowpenalty} à~\texttt{10\,000} (fait
-% par \com{samepage}) et \com{noindent}.
-% \item Traitement simplifié de l'argument optionnel dans les commandes \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}
-% et \com{minilot}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{15}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/01/27
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} et \com{partlot} pour la classe \class{book},
-% de \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof} et \com{sectlot} pour les articles, avec des commandes
-% et paramètres en parallèle avec ceux pour les mini-tables.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{16}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/02/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections d'erreurs (typos).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{17}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/06/23
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \og{} \texttt{n} \fg{} (nul) synonyme de \og{} \texttt{e} \fg{} (\emph{empty}, vide) dans l'argument optionnel
-% \com{minitoc}, \com{dominitoc}, et analogues.
-% \item Compatibilité avec \og{} \LaTeXe \fg. Merci à~\xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel} (qui a trouvé le problème)
-% et \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach} (qui a donné les indications pour le résoudre).
-% \item Ajout de la notion de \og{} numérotation absolue\fg{} pour les the mini-tables.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{18}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/06/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Rendu \upack{minitoc} vraiment compatible avec \LaTeXe.
-% \item Introduction des fichiers de langue comme options. Grand merci à~\xname{Michel}{Goossens}
-% (via \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}) qui a été inspiré par le code du paquetage \pack{babel}
-% (de \xname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{19}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/08/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de code pour numéroter les chapitres (parties, sections) sans commencer à~1.
-% Ajout des commandes \com{firstchapteris}, etc.
-% \item Ajout des commandes \com{mtcrule}, \com{nomtcrule}, etc.
-% \item Correction d'une erreur dans \com{c@mti}.
-% \item Correction dans \xfile{mtcswedish.sty} (\xname{Jan~Michael}{Rynning}).
-% \item Correction de l'appendice dans les articles.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{20}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/08/25
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction de l'espacement avant et après les minitocs et analogues.
-% \item Ajout des commandes \com{mtcpagenumbers} et \com{nomtcpagenumbers} (et analogues) pour faire
-% des minitocs avec ou sans numéros de pages. Défaut: avec numéros de pages.
-% \item Correction du problème (difficile) de l'appendice dans les articles.
-% \item Correction de l'espacement vertical.
-% \item Correction d'un problème avec des chapitres numérotés avec des chiffres romains majuscules.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{21}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/09/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction de typos dans \upack{minitoc} et \xfile{minitoc.tex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{22}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/10/10
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction de typos dans \upack{minitoc}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{23}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/11/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'une ligne manquante dans \com{sectlof}.
-% \item Fonctionne avec les classes de document réinitialisant le numéro de chapitre (ou de section)
-% à~chaque partie (merci à~\xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel}).
-% \item Retrait du code pour \com{firstchapteris} et compagnie. Ces commandes sont obsolètes.
-% \item Retrait du code pour l'appendice.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{24}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1994/12/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Les commandes \com{protect} ont été retirées des fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lot} et
-% \suffix{.lot}, donc certaines commandes internes on t été corrigées pour être compatibles avec la version
-% de \LaTeXe\ de décembre 1994. Merci à~\xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel} qui a fait le travail.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{25}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1996/09/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{mtcnorsk.sty} et ajout de \xfile{mtcnynorsk.sty} sur une suggestion
-% de \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{26}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1996/11/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Les fichiers spécifiques des langues sont maintenant nommés \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} (remplaçant les
-% noms de la forme \texttt{mtc}\emph{langue}\suffix{.sty}) parce que ne sont pas des paquetages
-% et que cela fait des noms plus courts.
-% \item Ajout des langues breton, estonian, germanb, greek, irish, russianb, scottish, lower- et upper-sorbian;
-% renommage de \og{} esperanto \fg{} en \og{} esperant \fg{} comme dans le paquetage \pack{babel}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{27}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1996/12/20
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées.
-% \item \xfile{english.mld} chargé comme langue par défaut.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{vietnam.mld} et \xfile{arab.mld}.
-% \item Renommage de \pack{minitocoff} en \pack{mtcoff} pour que le nom reste court.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{28}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1997/10/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout des langues afrikaan(s), brazil et ethiopia(n).
-% \item Ajout de l'autoconfiguration des suffixes.
-% \item Ajout de l'option de paquetage \opt{shortext}.
-% \item Ajout du code \emph{coffee} (pauses café).
-% \item Ajout du code de \com{addstarred} (pour ce qui concerne un chapitre étoilé).
-% \item Correction d'une erreur dans les parttocs.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Un typo corrigé par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}:
-% \begin{quote}
-% \texttt{\{\bs let@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}}
-% \end{quote}
-% devrait probablement être
-% \begin{quote}
-% \texttt{\{\bs let\bs@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}}
-% \end{quote}
-% (une contre-oblique manquait après \com{let}). Merci à~lui.
-% \item Ajout de la langue bahasa.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 1998/12/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout des options de paquetage \opt{tight} et \optd{loose}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{29}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1999/03/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout des langues bicig, buryat, mongol et russianc.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 1999/06/28
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de la langue armenian (d'après \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 1999/07/23
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout des options de paquetage \optd{dotted}/\opt{undotted} (défaut: \optd{dotted}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 1999/07/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{lithuanian.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{30}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 1999/12/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout des langues basque, ngermanb, serbian, ukraineb et welsh.
-% \item Correction d'une erreur dans la définition de \com{sltname} (\texttt{mlt} devrait être \texttt{slt}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{31}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2000/04/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de la compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, merci à~\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek},
-% qui a aussi simplifié certains morceaux de code et corrigé l'infâme erreur sur \com{chapter*}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{32}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2000/08/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de très (trop) nombreuses nouvelles commandes pour les dispositifs associés aux mini-tables:
-% \com{beforeparttoc},\ABK \com{beforepartlof},\ABK \com{beforepartlot},\ABK \com{afterparttoc},\ABK
-% \com{afterpartlof},\goodbreak \com{afterpartlot},\ABK \com{thispageparttocstyle},\ABK
-% \com{thispagepartlofstyle}\ABK et \com{thispagepartlotstyle}.
-% \item Documentation améliorée par \xname{Stefan}{Ulrich}.
-% \item Correction de \com{nomtcrule}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{33}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2000/12/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de nouvelles commandes d'ajustement: \com{mtcaddchapter}, \com{mtcaddsection} et
-% \com{mtcaddpart}. Ces commandes ajoutent des choses dans les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof}
-% et \suffix{.lot} pour le problème de \com{chapter*} (\com{section*} et \com{part*}).
-% D'après une suggestion de \xname{Karl~F.}{Everitt}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2000/12/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction d'un problème dans \com{mtcaddchapter} et~co. avec un argument optionnel blanc.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{34}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2000/12/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout\imess{I0046} dans la documentation d'une section sur l'utilisation avec le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}.
-% \item Ajout de fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour les noms alternatifs de langues: ainsi, \xfile{american.mld} ne fait
-% que charger \xfile{english.mld}, qui contient les vraies définitions.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{35}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2001/01/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de macros pour tester si un fichier est \og{} vide\fg{} (c'est-à-dire vide, blanc ou inexistant)
-% ou \og{} non vide \fg{} (c'est-à-dire utile). J'ai utilisé du code de \xname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}.
-% \item Ajout des options de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}\\opt{nocheckfiles}.
-% \item Remplacement de \ucom{The@chapter} par \com{The@mtc}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2001/02/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{bulgarian.mld}, \xfile{hebrew.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{latin.mld} et
-% \xfile{samin.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2001/03/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \com{mtcselectlanguage}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2001/06/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction de l'option de paquetage \lopt{estonian} (manquante).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2001/07/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de la langue interlingua.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{36}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2002/02/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction d'une interaction avec \com{tableofcontents} qui crée un \com{chapter*} ou
-% une \com{section*}, en perturbant les compteurs \cnt{mtc}/\cnt{stc} (problème signalé par
-% \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2002/02/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction d'un problème d'espacement avec des titres vides (problème signalé par \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
-% \item Contournement du problème \com{parttoc}-\com{chapter*}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2002/02/19
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \com{mtcskip} et \com{mtcskipamount}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2002/02/27
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction du test sur les fichiers vides.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2002/03/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de la langue \lopt{bangla}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2002/03/15
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Réduction de la profondeur de \com{mtc@strutbox}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{37}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2003/01/24
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Version~\#37 sautée.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{38}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2003/01/24
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \texttt{pt} devient \ucom{@pt} et \texttt{0pt} devient \ucom{z@}.
-% \item \ucom{hrule} et \ucom{vrule} remplacées par \ucom{rule} (\LaTeX).
-% \item Ajout de \com{mtc@zrule} pour les filets de dimensions nulles.
-% \item Ajout de la langue frenchb (synonyme de french).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2003/01/30
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Changement du test pour les titres vides.
-% \item Ajout des options de paquetage \opt{flsection} et \opt{flsectionb}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2003/01/31
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Les options de paquetage \opt{tight} et \optd{loose} sont appliquées à~\com{parttoc}
-% (\xname{Thomas}{Leonhardt}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2003/02/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Options de paquetage \opt{flsection} et \opt{flsectionb} retirées et remplacées par l'option
-% de paquetage \opt{insection} (comme \opt{flsectionb}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2003/02/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction de la numérotation des SLF, SLT.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2003/02/20
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout des langues frenchle et frenchpro (synonymes de french).
-% \item Correction des secttocs, enfin.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2003/03/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction de certains espacements verticaux et d'étais (j'ai ajouté quelques modifications
-% de \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}, grand merci à~lui.). Il reste pas mal de nettoyage à~faire, mais il semble
-% nécessaire de publier la distribution maintenant.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{39}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2003/04/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Commandes de fontes modernes pour compatibilité avec la classe \class{memoir}.
-% \item \com{nomtcpagenumbers} et la classe \class{memoir}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2003/06/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \com{@fileswfalse} et \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} pour le paquetage
-% \pack{notoccite} (demandé par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}); ajout de l'option de paquetage
-% \opt{notoccite} (charge le paquetage \pack{notoccite}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2004/09/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout des options de langue et des fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour les dialectes: \lopt{canadian} (\loptd{english}),
-% \lopt{acadian}, \lopt{acadien}, \lopt{canadien} (\lopt{french}), \lopt{naustrian}, \lopt{ngerman} (\lopt{ngermanb}).
-% \item Ajout de commentaires dans les fichiers \suffix{.mld} utilisant des fontes spéciales.
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation: ajout d'un paragraphe sur comment faire une table des matières pour
-% les appendices, éventuellement non listés dans la table des matières principale.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2004/09/17
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation; corrections sur les filets.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{40}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2004/12/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout des langues japanese et castillan.
-% \item Retrait du test sur la présence du paquetage \pack{multicol} dans \xfile{minitoc.tex},
-% puisque \pack{multicol} est un paquetage obligatoire (\emph{required}).
-% \item Ajout d'une figure dans \xfile{minitoc.tex} sur la nécessité de trois compilations.
-% \item Ajout de quelques informations dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}.
-% \item Ajout\imess{I0042} d'un paragraphe sur un problème avec le paquetage \pack{appendix}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2004/12/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib} et \xfile{minitoc.bib}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2004/12/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de l'option de paquetage \optd{hints}. Cette option est encore expérimentale; votre avis est le bienvenu.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2004/12/20
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf} (documentation en français en format PDF).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{41}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \item Message ajouté si certaines commandes de sectionnement ne sont pas disponibles.
-% \item Remplacement des commandes \ucom{typeout} dans \upack{minitoc} par les commandes
-% \com{PackageInfo} ou \com{PackageWarning}; avec le numéro de ligne lorsqu'il est utile
-% (\com{@gobble} si pas de numéro de ligne). En conséquence, le paquetage est moins bavard
-% (\com{PackageInfo} écrit seulement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, pas sur le terminal).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout des commandes \com{mtcsetfont} (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}) et \com{mtcsettitlefont},
-% avec une syntaxe beaucoup plus simple.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/10
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Classes \AmS: \class{amsart} et \class{amsproc} sont incompatibles avec \upack{minitoc},
-% \class{amsbook} demande des précautions.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetformat}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsettitle}.
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} pour recommander l'option de paquetage \opt{insection}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/19
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur la présence de \com{dominitoc} et co.
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur la cohérence de \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} et co.
-% \item Amélioration de la documentation sur les \emph{hints}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/20
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur l'utilisation des suffixes courts avec plus de 99~parties ou 99~chapitres
-% ou 99~sections.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/25
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \com{ptifont}: \texttt{\bs Huge\bs bfseries} devient \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs bfseries}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/01/28
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de nombreux fichiers de langues: \xfile{serbianc.mld}, \xfile{chinese1.mld}, \xfile{chinese2.mld},
-% \xfile{hangul1.mld}, \xfile{hangul2.mld}, \xfile{hangul3.mld}, \xfile{hangul4.mld}, \xfile{hanja1.mld},
-% \xfile{hanja2.mld}, \xfile{japanese2.mld}, \xfile{japanese3.mld}, \xfile{japanese4.mld},
-% \xfile{japanese5.mld}, \xfile{thai.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetrules}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \com{plfrule}, \com{noplfrule}, \com{mlfrule}, \com{nomlfrule},
-% \com{slfrule}, \com{noslfrule}, \com{pltrule}, \com{nopltrule},
-% \com{mltrule}, \com{nomltrule}, \com{sltrule}, \com{nosltrule}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de nouvelles langues: \xfile{latvian.mld}, \xfile{letton.mld}, \xfile{greek-mono.mld},
-% \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld}, \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}, \xfile{polish2.mld}, \xfile{russian2m.mld},
-% \xfile{russian2o.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/10
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de tests sur les environnements \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}\env{mtchideinmain*}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \com{mtcfixindex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{42}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Version~42 non distribuée.
-% \item Remplacement de \og{} language \fg{} par \og{} langue \fg{} dans la documentation française.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/15
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction d'un typo mineur.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Amélioration de \com{mtcfixindex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsettitle}, oubliée dans v41.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{43}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Version~43: consolidation de v40, v41 et v42.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/02/24
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction d'une grosse erreur dans \com{mtcsetformat}.
-% \item Correction d'une erreur dans le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} à~propos de \com{mtcfixindex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction des macros \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.}
-% \item Déplacement de l'historique vers la fin du code du paquetage.
-% \item Ajout du fichier \xfile{INSTALL} et d'un chapitre sur l'installation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction d'un typo (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}).
-% \item Compléter le \emph{hint} sur la cohérence de \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} et co.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur la cohérence entre \com{minitoc} et \com{tableofcontents}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de commentaires sur les fontes.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/10
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetfeature}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{bulgarianb.mld} (haut bulgare).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/15
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \texttt{*[-\bs baselineskip]} après le \texttt{\bs\bs} après le filet supérieur de chaque
-% mini-table au niveau partie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans les arguments de \com{mtcsetfeature}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Retrait de \com{markboth} pour les minitocs (\ldots) et secttocs (\ldots).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{spanish2.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/03/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} pour le paquetage \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/04/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction de l'environnement \env{stc@verse}.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{finnish2.mld}, \xfile{latin2.mld} et \xfile{magyar2.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/04/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Renommage de \xfile{portuges.mld} en \xfile{portugues.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/04/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction dans \com{mtcskip}.
-% \item Première version en format \suffix{.dtx}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/04/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Retrait de \ucom{ypart}, \ucom{ychapter}, \ucom{ysection}, etc., inutilisées.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/05/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction d'un typo dans \com{@dosectlot}.
-% \item Ajout de \com{mtcfixglossary}.
-% \item Impression de la documentation avec \og{} \optp{oneside}{\protect\textsl{nombreuses classes}} \fg{} pour
-% avoir toutes les notes marginales
-% sur la gauche. Ajout du code (étendu à~54 éléments flottants) de \pack{morefloats}
-% (\xname{Don}{Hosek}) pour permettre
-% davantage de notes marginales et d'éléments flottants.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{minitoc.ist}\isuffix{.ist} pour mettre en page l'index correctement.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/05/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction des filets dans les parttocs, partlofs et partlots.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/05/30
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction des entrées de niveau chapitre dans les parttocs, lorsque les numéros de pages doivent être omis.
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \pack{sectsty}\imess{I0043} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur les tentatives d'insertion de mini-tables vides.
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur l'utilisation de commandes obsolètes.
-% \item Les mini-listes de figures ou de tableaux ne doivent pas être imprimées vides même si \dcnt{tocdepth}${}<1$.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de la notion de profondeur pour les mini-listes de figures/tableaux.
-% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetdepth}.
-% \item L'option \optd{hints} est le choix par défaut et elle n'est plus considérée comme expérimentale.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'un message d'erreur dans \com{mtcsetdepth} si le compteur n'est pas disponible.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{portuges.mld}, qui charge \xfile{portugues.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de trois variantes pour la langue malayalam: \xfile{malayalam-keli.mld},
-% \xfile{malayalam-rachana.mld} et \xfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'une méthode pour documentation bilingue.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/15
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}\isuffix{.ist} pour mettre en forme correctement l'index en français.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Changement de \og{} Liste des Tables \fg{} en \og{} Liste des Tableaux \fg{} dans \xfile{french.mld} et
-% dans la documentation française, pour suivre les choix du paquetage \pack{babel}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/17
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Le fichier \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} est maintenant engendré par \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout des mots-clés \texttt{OUI}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{O} et~\texttt{o}
-% pour vrai/faux.
-% \item Condensation du code de détection des suffixes courts ou longs.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout des mots-clés \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{faux}, \texttt{V} et~\texttt{v}
-% pour vrai/faux.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/23
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Établir correctement l'indicateur \com{ifFTR} pour avoir les noms des mois dans la langue correcte dans
-% la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/06/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Établir l'indicateur \com{mtcoffwarn@true} par \pack{mtcoff} si une commande
-% \texttt{\bs mtcadd...} est trouvée.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/07/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{castillian.mld}.
-% \item Renommage de \xfile{portugues.mld} en \xfile{portuguese.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/07/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{brazilian.mld}, \xfile{british.mld}, \xfile{UKenglish.mld} et \xfile{USenglish.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/07/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Suppression de \og{} Général: \fg{} dans l'historique des modifications.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/07/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Remplacement de quelques commandes \com{PackageWarning} par \com{PackageInfo}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/07/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Restauration de la correspondance de chaque option de langue avec un fichier \suffix{.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/07/20
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Amélioration des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/07/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Retrait de deux indicateurs inutiles: \ucom{if@mtc@setpagenumbers@act@} et
-% \ucom{if@mtc@setrules@act@}.
-% \item Ajout des commandes \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc} et \com{decrementstc}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/07/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction d'une bourde dans \pack{mtcoff}.
-% \item Amélioration de quelques messages dans \pack{mtcoff}.
-% \item Ajout d'un test sur la version du paquetage \pack{placeins}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/08/23
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'une note sur \com{FloatBarrier}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/08/24
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'une note sur un problème d'alignement dans les minitocs. Mise à~jour de \xfile{minitoc.bug}.
-% \item Fait deux versions des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot},
-% selon la présence du compteur de profondeur correspondant.
-% \item La classe \class{memoir} est incompatible si elle est trop récente.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/08/25
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'un commentaire sur la position des commandes \texttt{\bs do.{}.{}.} de préparation.
-% \item Corrections dans les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/08/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{guarani.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/08/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc} et \com{incrementstc}.
-% \item Ajout d'un argument optionnel à~\com{adjustptc}, \com{adjustmtc} et \com{adjuststc}.
-% \item Ajout des options de paquetage \opt{k-tight} et \optd{k-loose}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'un patch pour la version récente de la classe \class{memoir}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{spanish3.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Utiliser \com{mtcselectlanguage} dans les options de langue et dans les fichiers
-% \suffix{.mld} \og{} secondaires\fg.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \com{mtcloadmlo} à~utiliser dans certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour charger
-% un fichier \suffix{.mlo}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'un test pour interdire les appels directs de \com{mtcloadmlo} par l'utilisateur.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{farsi1.mld}, \xfile{farsi1.mlo}, \xfile{farsi2.mld} et \xfile{farsi2.mlo}.
-% \item Ajout d'une note sur l'outil \tool{rubber}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/15
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{mtcglo.ist}\isuffix{.ist} pour formater le glossaire.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Retrait des numéros de pages dans le glossaire. Fait par les scripts \texttt{*mk}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{44}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Historique (glossaire) composé en \texttt{RaggedRight}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/27
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{ngermanb2.mld}, \xfile{norsk2.mld} et \xfile{nynorsk2.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/28
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Nouvelle méthode pour l'historique: listes imbriquées sur 3~niveaux.
-% \item Retrait de \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{mtcglo.ist}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Nettoyage des scripts \texttt{*mk}.
-% \item Ajout de l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/09/30
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction de typos.
-% \item Ajout du nom du fichier \suffix{.maf} dans le message de l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}.
-% \item Amélioration du nettoyage dans les scripts \texttt{*mk}, en utilisant un fichier \suffix{.maf}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/10/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Charger la correction pour la classe \class{memoir} seulement si nécessaire; ne pas la charger si
-% \class{memoir} est datée après 2005/09/25.
-% \item Ajout d'une remarque dans le chapitre \og{} Questions Fréquemment Posées\fg{} (et dans \xfile{minitoc.bug})
-% sur les précautions à~prendre avec les commandes de sectionnement étoilées.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/10/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de l'option de paquetage \opt{nolistfiles}.
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur les paquetages \pack{caption}, \pack{caption2}, \pack{ccaption} et
-% \pack{mcaption} (ils doivent être chargés \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/10/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation.
-% \item Correction de quelques notes marginales dans le code commenté.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/10/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections mineures dans la documentation.
-% \item Utiliser la commande Unix \tool{xargs} dans les scripts \texttt{*mk} pour détruire les fichiers
-% auxiliaires.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/10/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections mineures dans la documentation.
-% \item Ajout d'une courte introduction dans le chapitre \og{} Questions fréquemment posées\fg{} et
-% dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections mineures dans la documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections mineures dans la documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Début de l'ajout du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de la version française du \LaTeX{} Companion~\cite{TLC2F}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \item Ajout de \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} dans \xfile{minitoc.l}.
-% \item Ajout d'une note sur la nécessité d'exécuter \scrp{imk} avant \scrp{emk} ou \scrp{fmk}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/10
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation.
-% \item Ajout d'une note sur un problème avec \upack{minitoc}, \pack{hyperref} et \class{memoir}.
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation.
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \item Amélioration des notes sur la classe \class{memoir}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/15
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \item Amélioration des notes sur la classe \class{memoir}.
-% \item Ajout de \com{plfSfont}, \com{pltSfont}, \com{mlfSfont}, \com{mltSfont},
-% \com{slfSfont} et \com{sltSfont} pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tables dans
-% les mini-tables.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \item Correction d'une erreur sur les fontes pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tables dans les
-% mini-tables.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{bicig2.mld}, \xfile{bithe.mld}, \xfile{manju.mld}, \xfile{xalx.mld} et
-% \xfile{khalkha.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/17
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \item Ajout de vérifications par des commandes \emph{quarks} internes dans \com{mtcsetfont}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/23
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/24
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/25
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \item Changement de \og{} table\fg{} en \og{} tableau\fg{} dans la documentation en français, là où c'est nécessaire.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/28
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation.
-% \item Correction de typos dans la bibliographie.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/11/30
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \item Éviter quelques avertissements \og{} Token not allowed\fg{} émis par \texttt{pdftex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \item Réordonné une longue séquence de citations.
-% \item Ajout de \og{} {\froff\texttt{mailto:}}\fg{} pour les URLs de courrier.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation.
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0038}\pack{varsects} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \item Correction d'un hyperlien dans la bibliographie (pour le paquetage \pack{xr}).
-% \item Tentative pour éviter des URLs cassés, en utilisant \env{quote}, des notes infrapaginales et \com{par}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Corrections de mise en page (quelques en-têtes, un tableau).
-% \item Dans le message d'avertissement du \emph{hint} concernant un nombre de mini-tables dépassant~99 (idans
-% le cas de suffixes courts), imprimer le nombre effectif.
-% \item Réduction de la largeur de certains messages d'information, d'avertissement ou d'erreur.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections de mise en page (quelques en-têtes).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections sur les guillemets français.
-% \item Ajout de quelques options pour PDF.
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \item Correction d'un URL vers l'\AmS\ dans la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/19
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Raccourcissement de quelques messages (essentiellement en enlevant des étoiles).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction de typos.
-% \item Ajout de quelques labels.
-% \item Ajout d'un chapitre avec les messages (expliqués). Pas encore triés.
-% \item La documentation a besoin de 4~compilations par \LaTeX.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Raccourcissement de quelques messages.
-% \item Corrections dans la liste des messages.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2005/12/23
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Amélioration de la position des flottants dans les pages de flottants: en haut.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation (merci à~\name{Markus}{Gleiszner}).
-% \item Ajout de \oexam{addsec.tex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction de l'indicateur \com{ifundottedmtc}.
-% \item Correction pour faire marcher \oexam{addsec.tex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \og \texttt{*}\fg comme mot-clé pour le premier argument de \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} et
-% \com{mtcsetrules} (demandé par \name{Markus}{Gleiszner}).
-% \item Retrait de \og \com{MessageBreak}\fg de l'index.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \item Correction de l'entrée bibliographique sur \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Utilisation du paquetage \pack{afterpage}~\cite{afterpage} dans la documentation pour résoudre
-% un problème de placement de flottants.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \item Résoudre un problème de placement de flottants.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/10
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Ajout de la langue bahasam.
-% \item Ajout de la langue albanian.
-% \item Ajout de la langue hebrew2.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la documentation pour les langues albanian, bahasa, bahasam et hebrew2.
-% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{french.mld} (retrait de majuscules abusives).
-% \item Correction du fichier \xfile{italian.mld} language. Ajout de la langue italian2.
-% \item Ajout des langues australian et newzealand (english).
-% \item La langue bahasa est renommée en bahasai; bahasa est synonyme de bahasai.
-% \item Ajout des langues malay et meyalu, synonymes de bahasam.
-% \item Ajout des langues indon et indonesian, synonymes de bahasai.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Mise à~jour des remerciements.
-% \item Ajout de références aux nouvelles entrées bibliographiques.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction d'une instabilité dans les coupures de page dans la documentation de \xfile{japanese3.mld}.
-% \item Ajout de commentaires dans quelques fichiers \suffix{.mld}.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{magyar3.mld}.
-% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{lithuanian.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction dans \com{mtcaddsection}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/17
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction dans \com{mtcfixindex} et \com{mtcfixglossary}.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Limitation de la profondeur initiale d'affichage des signets.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de quelques commentaires dans le point~34 des questions fréquemment posées (et dans \xfile{minitoc.bug})
-% à~propos de l'initialisation des fontes.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{romanian2.mld} et \xfile{romanian3.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/19
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Chargement de certains paquetages avant \pack{hyperref}.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{spanish4.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/23
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction du tableau sur les titres par défaut.
-% \item Correction dans les mots-clés de \com{mtcsetfont}.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}, \xfile{uppersorbian.mld} et \xfile{ukrainian.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/24
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la documentation pour \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}, \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}
-% et \xfile{ukrainian.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/25
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur les classes \imess{I0043}\KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} et
-% d'un point dans les questions fréquemment posées (et dans in \xfile{minitoc.bug}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/27
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Ajout d'une note dans la documentation de \xfile{serbian.mld} et \xfile{serbianc.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/30
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{ethiopian2.mld} (pour Omega).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/01/31
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Simplifications dans le chapitre «~Messages~».
-% \item Corrections dans le chapitre «~Jargon~».
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \item Ajout du chapitre «~Postface~».
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans le chapitre «~Postface~».
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Ajout du pacquetage \pack{dblaccnt}~\cite{dblaccnt} pour l'entrée «~The pdf\TeX\ Program~» dans la bibliographie.
-% Le prénom de son auteur a besoin d'un double accent \mbox{(\namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han})}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/10
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{malayalam-omega.mld} et \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{kannada.mld}.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/15
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans \xfile{russianb.mld} et \xfile{spanish.mld}.
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation et la bibliographie.
-% \item Mettre \com{mtcfixglossary} avant \com{mtcfixindex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'une citation de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Mise à~jour des remerciements.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/17
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Mise à~jour du jargon.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/20
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \uxfile{u8hangul.mld}, \uxfile{u8hangul.mlo}, \uxfile{u8hanja.mld} et \uxfile{u8hanja.mlo}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Les langues \texttt{u8hangul} et \texttt{u8hanja} sont renommées \xmldo{hangul-u8} et \xmldo{hanja-u8}.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} pour des commandes de préparation répétées.
-% \item Déplacement vers le haut de la déclaration de certains indicateurs concernant l'option \optd{hints}.
-% \item Ajout de \com{mtcprepare}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/23
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/24
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/27
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \item Ajout de \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} à~la classe~6.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/02/28
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \item Correction de la position des tableaux dans le chapitre «~Jargon~».
-% \item Correction de \xfile{irish.mld}, \xfile{lsorbian.mld} et \xfile{usorbian.mld}.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{polski.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item \emph{Hints} sur la classe \class{jura}\imess{W0029}\imess{W0025} et le paquetage \pack{alphanum},
-% incompatibles avec \upack{minitoc}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Utilisation de styles bibliographiques avec un champ \texttt{URL}, construits à~l'aide de
-% \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans \xfile{magyar.mld}, \xfile{magyar2.mld} et \xfile{magyar3.mld}.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{russian-cca.mld}, \xfile{russian-cca1.mld} et \xfile{russian-lh.mld}, avec leurs
-% fichiers \suffix{.mlo}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/10
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{russian-lhcyralt.mld}, \xfile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mld} et \xfile{russian-lhcyrwin.mld}, avec
-% leurs fichiers \suffix{.mlo}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout du paquetage \pack{mtcmess}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Désormais, les messages sont numérotés.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/20
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour du jargon.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/28
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \item Mise à~jour du jargon.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de la question~37 sur les fichiers \suffix{.mld} et \pack{babel}.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{french1.mld} et \xfile{french2.mld}.
-% \item Mise à~jour du jargon.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/30
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{english1.mld} et \xfile{english2.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{45}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2006/03/31
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Suppression des versions PostScript de la documentation.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{arab2.mld}, \xfile{bicig3.mld}, \xfile{buryat2.mld}, \xfile{xalx2.mld} et \xfile{xalx3.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/04/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/04/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{swedish2.mld}.
-% \item L'option de paquetage \opt{insection} charge aussi le paquetage \pack{flafter}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/04/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \item Ajout de \uxgrf{lamed.eps} et \uxgrf{lamed.pdf} comme images pour le logo de \emph{Lamed} (construit depuis
-% \uxfile{lamed.tex}).
-% \item Ré-ordonnancement des chapitres du manuel de l'utilisateur (partie~I).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/04/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Utilisation de \pack{sectsty} pour mieux mettre en forme les titres des sections.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/04/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \item Ajout de \com{ifmtcsecondpart} pour tester si le document a exactement 2~parties.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/04/10
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/04/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/04/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/04/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Dans l'option de paquetage \opt{insection}, charger le paquetage \pack{flafter} \emph{avant} le
-% paquetage \pack{placeins}.
-% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les barrières de flottants (figure~\vref{f+barrier}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/04/27
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout\imess{I0042} de notes dans la question~20, sur l'utilisation avec le paquetage \pack{appendix}.
-% \item Ajout de commentaires pour l'option \opt{insection}.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Début de la correction de l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/05/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout\imess{I0042} de notes dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}, point~20, sur l'utilisation avec le paquetage \pack{appendix}.
-% \item Fin de la correction de l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}.
-% \item Corrections analogues dans les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/05/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de notes à~propos des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}.
-% \item Ajout de \oexam{hide1.tex} et \oexam{hide2.tex}.
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0086}\pack{fncychap} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0087}\pack{quotchap} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/05/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0088}\pack{romannum} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0089}\pack{sfheaders} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0090}\pack{alnumsec} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/05/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/05/24
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \item Renommé \oexam{hide.tex} en \oexam{hide1.tex}.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/05/30
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \item Utilisation de \com{MakeUpperCase} dans \com{markboth} pour les styles de page.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/05/31
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \pack{captcont} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{uighur.mld}, \xfile{uighur2.mld} et \xfile{uighur3.mld} (comme synonymes pour les
-% variantes de la langue bicig).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \item Ajout d'une description de \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} dans le jargon.
-% \item Ajout d'un commentaire sur le script \scrp{imk} dans \xfile{INSTALL} et le chapitre «~Installation~».
-% \item Ajout d'une entrée «~paquetage~» dans le jargon.
-% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-apx.tex}.
-% \item Ajout du point~44 de la FAQ et des commandes \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} et \com{mtcgapafterheads}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \oexam{gaps.tex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item Correction d'espacement dans \xfile{french2.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{46}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation et la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/21
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Commentaire sur le paquetage \pack{thailatex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Engendrer certains fichiers d'exemples avec \xfile{minitoc.dtx}/\xfile{minitoc.ins}.
-% \item Ajout du chapitre «~Fichiers d'exemples~».
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/23
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Renommé le chapitre «~Fichiers d'exemples~» en «~Exemples de documents~».
-% \item Utiliser le paquetage \pack{lipsum}~\cite{lipsum} dans certains des exemples de documents.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/27
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour des exemples de documents.
-% \item Ajout du fichier d'exemple \oexam{second.tex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \exam{mtc-amm.tex}, \oexam{mem.tex} et \oexam{mem1.tex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/06/30
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{fo1.tex}, \oexam{fo2.tex} et \oexam{scr.tex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout du fichier d'exemple \oexam{subf.tex}.
-% \item Corrections sur la profondeur des minilofs, minilots et similaires.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{tsfc.tex} et \oexam{tbi.tex}.
-% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections de typos.
-% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie.
-% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{2c.tex} et \exam{mtc-bo.tex}.
-% \item Correction dans \xfile{french2.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/10
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction dans les minilots et minilofs (et analogues) sur la profondeur.
-% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{hop.tex} et \oexam{cri.tex}.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{livre.tex}, \oexam{ch0.tex}, \oexam{tlc.tex} et \oexam{mu.tex}.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour du jargon.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation.
-% \item Les versions non distribuées sont marquées par~\textbf{\textreferencemark} au lieu de~\ensuremath{\star}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/17
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item La section «~À~propos de ce document~» devient un premier chapitre étoilé.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{hir.tex} et \oexam{hia.tex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/19
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Corrections dans \oexam{add.tex} et \oexam{addsec.tex} pour l'index.
-% \item Ajout du script \scrp{xmk} pour composer les exemples en documents PDF.
-% \item Mise à~jour des scripts pour traiter les exemples.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/20
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ne pas oublier \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0} dans la liste des fichiers.
-% \item Dans les scripts, le répertoire de \emph{backup} (\ixfile{OLD}) est
-% désormais \ixfile{/tmp/`whoami`/OLD}.
-% \item Dans les scripts, les répertoires de répartition (\texttt{CL[0-9]}) sont
-% désormais \texttt{/tmp/`whoami`/CL[0-9]}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{47}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la documentation et la bibliographie.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/27
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{arabi.mld} et \xfile{farsi3.mld} (d'après le système \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}).
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/28
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour du jargon.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/31
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction de \com{l@xsection}.
-% \item Correction d'espacements dans les mini-tables.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/07/31
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'un crênage vertical \verb|\kernafter...| entre chaque minitable et son filet inférieur.
-% \item Ajout du point~45 des questions fréquemment posées.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/08/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction mineure dans le message d'avertissement \texttt{F0008}.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Correction d'une erreur dans \xfile{romanian2.mld} et \xfile{romanian3.mld}.
-% \item Raccourcissement du résultat de certains exemples de documents en utilisant la classe \class{report}
-% au lieu de la classe \class{book} (d'où une impression en recto seul).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{48}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2006/08/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction de typos.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/08/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Pas de préambule dans \oexam{add.bib}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/08/23
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans le format de la table des matières.
-% \item Augmentation de \com{textwidth}.
-% \item Correction du problème de préambule dans \oexam{add.bib} et tous les fichiers générés.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/08/24
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Retrait des commentaires sur les lignes superflues dans le préambule des fichiers générés.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{devanagari.mld} et \xfile{hindi.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/08/25
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}.
-% \item Correction de la macro \com{name} (pour la documentation).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/08/28
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie.
-% \item Correction (conversion) dans \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/08/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de l'erreur \texttt{E0036}\imess{E0036} si \xfile{english.mld} n'est pas trouvé pour établir les titres par défaut.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/08/31
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Modification du style bibliographique \xfile{plainurl.bst}\isuffix{.bst} pour avoir les noms de famille des auteurs
-% et rédacteurs (\emph{editors}) en petites capitales et les années en chiffres de style ancien. Les
-% titres sont mis en emphase. Le style \xfile{frplain1.bst} est aussi mis à~jour.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/01
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Les styles bibliographiques \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} et \xfile{frplain1.bst} sont renommés \xfile{en-mtc.bst} et
-% \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{add.bib} en \exam{mtc-add.bib}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{add.tex} en \exam{mtc-add.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{addsec.tex} en \exam{mtc-ads.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{2c.tex} en \exam{mtc-2c.tex}.
-% \item L'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles} est désormais active par défaut.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/07
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{app-mem.tex} en \exam{mtc-amm.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{apx.tex} en \exam{mtc-apx.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{bo.tex} en \exam{mtc-bo.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{ch0.tex} en \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{cri.tex} en \exam{mtc-cri.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{fo1.tex} en \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{fo2.tex} en \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{gaps.tex} en \exam{mtc-gap.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{hia.tex} en \exam{mtc-hia.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{hir.tex} en \exam{mtc-hir.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{hide1.tex} en \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{hide2.tex} en \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{hop.tex} en \exam{mtc-hop.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{livre.tex} en \exam{mtc-liv.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{mem.tex} en \exam{mtc-mem.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{mem1.tex} en \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{mini-art.tex} en \exam{mtc-art.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{minitoc-ex.tex} en \exam{mtc-bk.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{mu.tex} en \exam{mtc-mu.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{scr.tex} en \exam{mtc-scr.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{second.tex} en \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{subf.tex} en \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{tbi.tex} en \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{tlc.tex} en \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}.
-% \item Renommage de \oexam{tsfc.tex} en \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/08
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie (ajout du Pentaglot).
-% \item Correction du format de deux tableaux sur NFSS.
-% \item Exemples de documents par ordre alphabétique dans leur chapitre.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les systèmes dérivés de \TeX{} et \LaTeX.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout du fichier exemple de document \exam{mtc-syn.tex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{49}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/14
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Légère modification de la mise en forme de la liste des fichiers (chapitre «~Installation~»).
-% \item Simplifications dans les scripts.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Ajout du point~46 dans les questions fréquemment posées et du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie et les styles bibliographiques.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/09/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Meilleurs messages d'erreur pour les commandes de préparation et d'insertion non définies.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Ajout de «~\textbf{+}~» et «~\texttt{-}~» comme synonymes pour «~\texttt{on}~» et «~\texttt{off}~»,
-% respectivement.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/10/20
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie.
-% \item Corrections de typos.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Ajout d'un tableau de quelques codages.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/10/31
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Suppression de l'entrée «~Sommaire~» dans le sommaire, mais elle est ajoutée dans la table des matières.
-% \item Amélioration de quelques tableaux.
-% \item Ajout des fichiers \xfile{japanese6.mld} and \xfile{japanese6.mlo}.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/11/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie.
-% \item Corrections dans la mise en page d'une citation de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}.
-% \item Combinaison de quatre figures en une (avec des sous-figures).
-% \item Ajout (dans le mémento) d'un tableau des classes et paquetages qui sont incompatibles ou ont besoin de
-% précautions avec \upack{minitoc}.
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/11/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Complété la liste des classes standard.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/11/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'une validation des options de langue avec la présence des fichiers \suffix{.mld} et \suffix{.mlo}.
-% \item Ajout\imess{E0036} de notes sur la présence obligatoire du fichier \xfile{english.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/11/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item La validation des options de langue n'écrit que des messages informatifs dans le fichier
-% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} et, si nécessaire, donne un seul message d'avertissement.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{50}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2006/11/17
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Suppression des anciens exemples de documents: \oexam{mtc-adds.tex}, \oexam{mtc-amem.tex}, \oexam{mtc-book.tex},
-% \oexam{mtc-gaps.tex}, \oexam{mtc-mem1.tex}, \oexam{mtc-subf.tex} et \oexam{mtc-tsfc.tex}.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Ajout du script \scrp{tmk} et d'un tableau décrivant une structure \index{TDS}TDS pour \upack{minitoc}.
-% \item Ajout d'un item sur la \index{TDS}TDS dans le jargon.
-% \item Mise à~jour du fichier \xfile{INSTALL} et du chapitre «~Installation~».
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/11/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout du message d'avertissement \texttt{W0094} avec la liste des fichiers minitoc de langue manquants
-% (\suffix{.mld} et \suffix{.mlo}).
-% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie.
-% \item Mise à~jour du fichier \xfile{INSTALL} et du chapitre «~Installation~».
-% \item Changement des noms des répertoires \emph{scratch} dans certains scripts.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Ajout du fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} (une archive ZIP d'une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS et
-% contenant tous les fichiers du paquetage) à~la distribution.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{51}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2006/12/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Amélioration de l'index: paquetages et classes, scripts, outils, noms, exemples, suffixes, options,
-% options de langue.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2006/12/20
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Amélioration de l'index: noms.
-% \item Mise à~jour de certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} avec les noms des auteurs des titres.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/01/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections diverses.
-% \item Les noms de certaines macros internes sont raccourcis pour tenir dans la marge.
-% \item Ajout d'une commande \com{ProvidesFile} aux fichiers exemples.
-% \item Indexation des environnements (pas parfaite).
-% \item Indexation des fichiers.
-% \item Renommage du fichier «~\texttt{catalog}~» en «~\xfile{CATALOG}~».
-% \item Indexation des compteurs et des compteurs de profondeur.
-% \item Les fichiers exemples sont dans leur propre répertoire de la hiérarchie \index{TDS}TDS (proposée).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{52}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2007/01/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction de l'ordre dans l'index.
-% \item Options par défaut en gras dans l'index.
-% \item Ajout d'informations sur les auteurs pour les titres spécifiques aux langues.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/01/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de sections bidons dans le chapitre «~Exemples de documents~».
-% \item Retrait de la préparation de la documentation en format PostScript.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/01/15
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout du script \scrp{cmk} pour convertir la documentation du format PDF en format PostScript.
-% \item Retrait de \xfile{duplex2v.pro}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/01/17
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Indexation des commandes référencées.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/01/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction du nom \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han} (le prénom avant le nom de famille, à~la française).
-% \item Correction de quelques autres noms.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/01/19
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{mongolb.mld} et \xfile{mongolb.mlo}.
-% \item Retrait de \xfile{mongolb.mlo} (nouveaux codages cyrilliques T2 et X2 dans \xfile{mongolb.mld}).
-% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-3co.tex}.
-% \item Essai d'utilisation d'une version récente du paquetage \pack{cite}~\cite{cite} (2003/11/04, 4.01) pour permettre le tri,
-% mais reste en conflit avec \pack{hyperref}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/01/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Équilibrage des colonnes de l'index.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/01/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction de l'indexation des environnements.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/01/31
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Amélioration de la mise en page de l'index.
-% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{galician.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/02/05
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{mongolian.mld} qui charge \xfile{mongolb.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/02/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Indexation des noms des auteurs.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/02/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour des remerciements.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{53}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2007/02/13
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-fko.tex}.
-% \item Correction de \com{kernafterminitoc} et consorts.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/02/19
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Références bibliographiques pour les paquetages et les classes dans l'index.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/03/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'un en-tête à~l'index, pour expliquer les notations.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Changement du style des numéros de pages et de lignes dans l'index.
-% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{kannada.mld}.
-% \item Les symboles de virages dangereux sont maintenant dans la marge de droite.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/03/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Amélioration de la présentation des exemples de fichiers.
-% \item Utilisation du paquetage \pack{natbib}~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} pour trier les séquences de citations.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/03/09
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction dans le tableau~\vref{t+TDS}.
-% \item Renommage de \uxfile{minitoc-texmf.zip} en \uxfile{minitoc.tds.zip}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/03/19
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Utilisation de l'option \optp{sort\&compress}{natbib} du paquetage \pack{natbib}~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} pour
-% compresser les séquences de citations; le paquetage \pack{hypernat} doit aussi être chargé (après \pack{natbib} et
-% \pack{hyperref}).
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/03/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout du changement de titre de la parttoc des appendices dans \xfile{mtc-apx.tex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{54}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2007/03/27
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout des dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~».
-% \item Indexation des dispositifs.
-% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/04/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de la commande «~\com{mtcfixnomenclature}~».
-% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-nom.tex}.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Correction du dernier argument de \com{mtcsetfeature} et analogues, en utilisant \com{mtc@toks}.
-% \item Certaines mini-tables sont composées sur deux colonnes dans le manuel.
-% \item Indexation des messages. Messages notés dans la marge de droite.
-% \item Correction d'une erreur dans \pack{mtcoff}.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{latinc.mld} et \xfile{latinc2.mld} pour le latin classique.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/04/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'hyperliens internes pour les messages.
-% \item Charger le paquetage \pack{hypcap} pour les hyperliens dans la documentation.
-% ^^A \item Modification de \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk} et \scrp{pmk} pour retirer \verb*|\ | de l'index.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/06/06
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \com{mtcoffset} et consorts pour un décalage horizontal d'une mini-table.
-% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetoffset} pour un décalage horizontal d'un type de mini-table.
-% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}.
-% \item Ajout du marquage des macros dans les fichiers exemples.
-% \item La section 2007 du chapitre «~Postface~» était en pagaille.
-% \item Plus de liens internes dans la documentation.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Ajout d'une table cliquable de tous les messages.
-% \item Amélioration des coupures de colonnes dans l'index.
-% \item Ajout d'une minitoc locale dans le chapitre <<~Jargon~>>.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{latvian2.mld} et \xfile{letton2.mld}.
-% \item Groupement des paires \texttt{.mld}/\texttt{.mlo} dans les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \lneed{5}
-% \item \textbf{55}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2007/06/12
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (avertissement~\texttt{W0097})\imess{W0097} sur le
-% paquetage \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} (incompatible).
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (\texttt{I0053})\imess{I0053} sur les paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float},
-% \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/06/22
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Regroupement de notes marginales concernant des messages; amélioration de leur placement.
-% \item Amélioration des coupures de page dans la documentation.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Correction d'un problème sur les minitocs dans les appendices pour la classe \class{memoir}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/06/29
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Changement de la couleur des hyperliens.
-% \item Changement du format des en-têtes.
-% \item Correction de quelques commandes \verb|\mtcset...| pour utiliser \com{edef} afin d'évaluer
-% correctement \com{mtc@toks}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item \textbf{56}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2007/07/02
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{swahili.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/08/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item En-têtes de pages modifiés dans la documentation.
-% \item Ajout de ce qu'il faut (fichiers) pour des figures (cartes) des régions où sont parlées diverses langues.
-% \item Retrait des fichiers \suffix{.eps}.
-% \item Ajout de la langue \lopt{bengali}, synonyme de \lopt{bangla}.
-% \item Éclatement de la liste des fichiers en deux tableaux (tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/12/04
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Nombreuses corrections typographiques mineures.
-% \item Couleurs plus sombres pour les hyper-liens.
-% \item Mise à~jour et correction de la bibliographie.
-% \item Correction d'un typo dans l'environnement \env{ptc@verse} (\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}).
-% \item Corrections de typos dans les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot} (merci
-% à~\name{Andrew}{Bowden}).
-% \item Remplacer le suffixe \suffix{.mtc1} par \suffix{.mtc0} dans le test d'auto-configuration (pour éviter
-% d'écraser le fichier (\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc1}).
-% \item Correction d'un problème avec \com{nofiles} (\name{Andreas}{Deininger}).
-% \item Les remerciements sont déplacés vers la partie «~Compléments~».
-% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (avertissement~\texttt{W0099})\imess{W0099}
-% à~propos du paquetage \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc}.
-% \item Indexation complète des messages.
-% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}.
-% \item Utilisation du paquetage \pack{chngpage}~\cite{chngpage} pour élargir les pages de la bibliographie.
-% \item Renommage de \ucom{if@longextensions@} en \com{if@mtc@longext@}.
-% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{czech.mld}.
-% \item Suppression de \ucom{l@xsection}.
-% \item Les fichiers graphiques sont indexés séparément.
-% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{galician.mld}.
-% \item Ajout d'un répertoire spécifique pour les fichiers images dans la hiérarchie TDS.
-% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{lsorbian.mld}, \xfile{ukraineb.mld} et \xfile{usorbian.mld}.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld} et\ABK \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}.
-% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}.
-% \item Suppression d'entrées parasites dans l'index.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item \textbf{57}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2007/12/11
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2007/12/18
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Corrections dans les exemples de documents.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{occitan.mld}.
-% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{croatian.mld}, \xfile{danish.mld}, \xfile{dutch.mld}, \xfile{galician.mld},
-% \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{greek.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{interlingua.mld},
-% \xfile{polish.mld}, \xfile{scottish.mld} et \xfile{turkish.mld}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2008/01/15
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction de \xfile{polski.mld}.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Ajout de la table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}.
-% \item Ajout de cartes de la Mandchourie (figure~\vref{f+manju}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item 2008/04/03
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Amélioration des légendes des cartes.
-% Ajout de cartes pour l'Italie , le Karnataka, l'Allemagne, les Mongols et la Chine.
-% \item Ajout de \xfile{occitan2.mld} et \xfile{mexican.mld}.
-% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes tchèques (figure~\vref{f+czechd}).
-% \item Ajout de cartes des dialectes danois (figure~\vref{f+danishd}).
-% \item Ajout d'une carte du néerlandais (figure~\vref{f+dutchw}).
-% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes français (figure~\vref{f+france-lr}).
-% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes galiciens (figure~\vref{f+galician-l}).
-% \item Ajout de cartes des dialectes allemands (figures~\vrefrange{f+german-d}{f+german-c}).
-% \item Ajout de cartes des dialectes hindi (figure~\vref{f+hindi}).
-% \item Ajout de cartes des dialectes portugais (figures~\vref{f+portu-b} et~\vref{f+portu-a}).
-% \item Ajout d'une carte de la langue turque (figure~\vref{f+turkish}).
-% \item Ajout d'une carte de la langue vietnamienne (figure~\vref{f+viet-w}).
-% \item Ajout d'une carte de la diaspora arménienne (figure~\vref{f+armeniad}).
-% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes sâmes (figure~\vref{f+same}).
-% \item Ajout d'une carte des nationalités dans l'ex-Yougoslavie (figure~\vref{f+xyugo}).
-% \item Ajout d'une carte des pays où l'espagnol est une langue officielle (figure~\vref{f+espa-o}).
-% \item Ajout d'une carte de la région sorabe (figure~\vref{f+sorben}).
-% \item Ajout d'une entrée pour la Wikipédia dans le jargon.
-% \item Ajout d'une carte des minorités en Pologne (figure~\vref{f+pologne}).
-% \item Ajout d'une carte de la diaspora bengalî (figure~\vref{f+bengali-m}).
-% \item Éclatement de la hiérarchie TDS en trois tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+TDS}.
-% \item Ajout de cartes pour les dialectes basques (figure~\vref{f+euskara}).
-% \item Ajout de cartes pour les dialectes lettons (figure~\vref{f+latvian-d}).
-% \item Ajout d'une carte pour la langue swahilie (figure~\vref{f+swahili}).
-% \item Ajout de l'alphabet turc (figure~\vref{f+turc-alpha}).
-% \item Les numéros de pages dans l'index sont maintenant des hyperliens (merci à~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}).
-% \item Ajout de couleurs dans la figure~\vref{f+barrier}.
-% \item Ajout de cartes des langues d'Europe (figure~\vrefrange{f+euro-lan1}{f+euro-lan2}).
-% \item Ajout de cartes du Kosovo (figure~\vref{f+kosovo}).
-% \item Ajout d'une carte des langues d'Afrique (figure~\vref{f+africa}).
-% \item Correction d'une erreur de numéro de message.
-% \item Ajout de cartes pour la Russie (figures~\vrefrange{f+rus-re}{f+rus-su}).
-% \item Ajout d'une carte du Kosovo (figure~\vref{f+kosovo}).
-% \item Ajout d'une carte des districts de Slovaquie (figure~\vref{f+slovak}).
-% \item Ajout de cartes sur l'Islam (figures~\vrefrange{f+islam-pbc}{f+islam-sw}).
-% \item Added a figure about hànzì characters (figure~\vref{f+hanzi}).
-% \item Ajout d'une figure sur l'utilisation des caractères chinois dans le monde (figure~\vref{f+china-ch}).
-% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les dialectes chinois (figure~\vref{f+china-l}).
-% \item Ajout de cartes sur les systèmes d'écriture (figures~\vrefrange{f+wrs-c}{f+wrs-a}).
-% \item Ajout d'une carte des régions où le finnois est parlé (figure~\vref{f+finnishl}).
-% \item Raccourcissement du chapitre «~Installation~».
-% \item Mise à~jour depuis le paquetage \pack{babel} package version~v3.8j du 2008/03/16.
-% \item Remplacement des fichiers \uxgrf{lamed.pdf} et \uxfile{lamed.tex} par \xgrf{lamed3.png}.
-% \item Ajout de cartes de langues indigènes du Mexique (figure~\vref{f+mexl}).
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item \textbf{58}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2008/06/26
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Renommage de \uxfile{minitoc-tds.zip} en \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}.
-% \item Ajout d'une carte linguistique simplifiée de l'Europe (figure~\vref{f+leur}).
-% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes polonais (figure~\vref{f+polish-d}).
-% \item Ajout d'une figure sur l'alphabet russe (figure~\vref{f+rus-cyr}).
-% \item Ajout d'une carte sur l'alphabet russe (figure~\vref{f+cyr-alf}).
-% \item Ajout d'une carte sur les alphabets serbes (figure~\vref{f+serb-a}).
-% \item Ajout d'une carte des provinces du Viêtnam (figure~\vref{f+viet4}).
-% \item Utilisation de \ucom{vrefrange} pour compresser les intervales de références croisées internes.
-% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes albanais (figure~\vref{f+alb2}).
-% \item Ajout d'une carte de la Norvège (figure~\vref{f+norway-p}).
-% \item Ajout des drapeaux de nombreux pays. Ajout d'un cadre gris clair autour des drapeaux.
-% \item Ajout d'une figure sur la lusophonie (figure~\vref{f+luso-c}).
-% \item Ajout d'une figure sur la germanophonie (figure~\vref{f+germano-c}).
-% \item Ajout d'une figure sur l'hispanophonie (figure~\vref{f+hispano-c}).
-% \item Ajout d'une figure sur l'italophonie (figure~\vref{f+italo-c}).
-% \item Ajout d'une minitoc dans l'index pour faciliter sa consultation.
-% \item Ajout de figures sur les pays francophones (figures~\vrefrange{f+franco-eu-c}{f+franco-asp-c}).
-% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le swahili (figure~\vref{f+swa-c}).
-% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant l'arabe (figure~\vref{f+arabo-sp-c}).
-% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le russe (figure~\vref{f+russ-c}).
-% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant l'anglais (figure~\vref{f+eng-c}).
-% \item Ajout des indicateurs \com{ifinparttoc}, \com{ifinpartlof}, \com{ifinpartlot},
-% \com{ifinminitoc}, \com{ifinminilof}, \com{ifinminilot},
-% \com{ifinsecttoc}, \com{ifinsectlof} et \com{ifinsectlot}.
-% \item Ajout de l'exemple de document~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}.
-% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le néerlandais (figure~\vref{f+dutch-c}).
-% \item Renommage de \uxfile{fminitoc.dtx} et consorts en \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} et consorts.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{59}:~fichiers PDF corrompus.
-% \item \textbf{60}
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item 2008/07/16
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Correction mineure dans la figure~\vref{f+arabo-sp-c}.
-% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
-% \item Ajout de fichiers drapeaux manquants (merci à~\namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}).
-% \item Remplacement de nombreux fichiers images \suffix{.pdf} (la plupart étant des fichiers drapeaux)
-% par le fichier \suffix{.png} parce qu'ils ont été corrompus lors de la conversion par \tool{ImageMagick}
-% (\tool{xpdf} ne voit pas le problème mais \tool{Acrobat Reader} refuse de montrer le fichier);
-% grands mercis à~\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} et \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}.
-% \item Retour aux couleurs standard et aux options de couleur standard de \pack{hyperref}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{itemize}
-% \end{RaggedRight}
-% \egroup
-% \fi
-% ^^A MAJ-F
-%
-% ^^A ACK
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \chapter*{Acknowledgments\markboth{Acknowledgements}{Acknowledgements}}
-% \markboth{Acknowledgements}{Acknowledgements}%
-% ^^A \enlargethispage*{1.5\baselineskip}
-% \mtcaddchapter[Acknowledgments]%
-% \noindent
-% I ought to thank the following peoples\,\footnote{And I apologize to all whose I forgot.}, for their help, their
-% questions, their interventions in the news groups\,\footnote{Mainly, \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex} (in french) and
-% \texttt{comp.text.tex} (in english), but also \texttt{de.comp.text.tex} (in german, but I do not read it well:
-% send me also a mail in french or in english).},
-% and/or for their packages, classes, documents, and tools:\hfill\mbox{}
-% \or\relax
-% \chapter*{Remerciements\markboth{Remerciements}{Remerciements}}
-% \markboth{Remerciements}{Remerciements}%
-% \mtcaddchapter[Remerciements]%
-% \noindent
-% Il me faut remercier les personnes suivantes\,\footnote{Et que toutes celles que j'ai oubliées me pardonnent.}, pour
-% leur aide, leurs questions, leurs interventions dans les groupes de discussion\,\footnote{Essentiellement,
-% \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex} (en français) et \texttt{comp.text.tex} (en anglais), mais aussi
-% \texttt{de.comp.text.tex} (en allemand, mais je le lis très mal: envoyez-moi aussi un courrier en français ou en anglais).}
-% et/ou leurs paquetages, classes, documents et outils:\hfill\mbox{}
-% \fi
-%
-% \begin{raggedright}\noindent
-% \name{Hassan}{Abolhassani},
-% \name{Paul~W.}{Abrahams},
-% \namea{Nabil}{Abu~El-Ata}{Abu~El-Ata},
-% \name{Tommaso}{Addabbo},
-% \name{Juan~M.}{Aguirregabiria},
-% \name{Stéphane}{Aicardi},
-% \name{Vartan}{Akopian},
-% \name{A.J.}{Alex},
-% \namea{Élisabeth}{Allès}{Alles},
-% \name{Mark}{Alford},
-% \name{Viviane}{Alleton},
-% \namea{Jacques}{André}{Andre},
-% \name{Jérôme}{Andrieux},
-% \name{Ralf}{Angeli},
-% \name{Walter}{Appel},
-% \name{Achod~André}{Aradian},
-% \name{Patrick}{Andries},
-% \namea{Einar}{Árnason}{Arnason},
-% \name{Tim}{Arnold},
-% \name{Jouko}{Arponen},
-% \name{Donald}{Arseneau},
-% \name{Helmer}{Aslasken},
-% \name{David}{Aspinall},
-% \namea{Ivar}{{\AA}ssen}{Assen},
-% \name{Philipp}{Bachmann},
-% \name{Gonçal}{Badenes},
-% \name{Guillaume}{Balavoine},
-% \name{Jason}{Baldridge},
-% \name{Marin}{Balgarensky},
-% \name{Leonor}{Barroca},
-% \name{Giancarlo}{Bassi},
-% \name{Pierre}{Basso},
-% \name{Dorjgotov}{Batmunkh},
-% \name{Jean-Yves}{Baudais},
-% \name{David}{Bausum},
-% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart},
-% \name{Thierry}{Bayet},
-% \name{Claudio}{Beccari},
-% \name{Beebe}{Nelson~H.~F.},
-% \name{Emmanuel}{Beffara},
-% \name{Benoît}{Belet},
-% \name{Rachid}{Belmouhoub},
-% \namea{Madeleine}{Benoît-Guyot}{Benoit-Guyot},
-% \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces},
-% \name{Alexander}{Berdnikov},
-% \name{Jens}{Berger},
-% \name{Tobias}{Berndt},
-% \name{Karl}{Berry},
-% \name{Berhanu}{Beyene},
-% \name{Javier}{Bezos},
-% \name{Giuseppe}{Bilotta},
-% \name{Olivier}{Binisti},
-% \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro},
-% \name{Justin~K.}{Bisanwa},
-% \namea{Denis}{Bitouzé}{Bitouze},
-% \name{Dr.~Barbara}{Blankenship},
-% \name{Laurent}{Bloch},
-% \namea{Aurélie}{Boissière}{Boissiere},
-% \name{Patrick}{Boman},
-% \name{Onofre}{Bonvila},
-% \name{Georgi~N.}{Boshnakov},
-% \name{Patrice}{Bougette},
-% \name{Daniel}{Bourbonnais},
-% \name{Andrew}{Bowden},
-% \name{Victor}{Boyko},
-% \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams},
-% \name{Felix}{Braun},
-% \name{Jim}{Breen},
-% \name{Peter}{Breitenlohner},
-% \name{Roland}{Breton},
-% \name{Catherine}{Bricout},
-% \name{William}{Bright},
-% \namea{Gyöngyi}{Bujdosó}{Bujdoso},
-% \name{Mimi}{Burbank},
-% \name{Mustafa}{Burc},
-% \name{Patrick}{Burgel},
-% \name{Alexey}{Burykin},
-% \name{Jean-Pierre}{Cabestan},
-% \namea{Philippe}{Cadène}{Cadene},
-% \name{Olivier}{Cardi},
-% \name{Samuele}{Carcagno},
-% \name{David}{Carella},
-% \name{David~P.}{Carlisle},
-% \name{Kevin}{Carmody},
-% \name{Manuel}{Carriba},
-% \name{Régis}{Caspar},
-% \name{Waldemar}{Celes},
-% \name{Raymond}{Chabbert\textsuperscript{\textdied}},
-% \name{Winston}{Chang},
-% \name{Jean-C{\^o}me}{Charpentier},
-% \name{Jean-Pascal}{Chauvet},
-% \name{Pehong}{Chen},
-% \name{Céline}{Chevalier},
-% \namea{Jana}{Chlebîková}{Chlebikova},
-% \name{Otfried}{Cheong},
-% \name{Jin-Hwan}{Cho},
-% \name{Pai~H.}{Chou},
-% \name{Pierre}{Chuvin},
-% \name{Yves}{Citoleux},
-% \name{Marian}{Clegg},
-% \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran},
-% \name{Maurizio}{Codogno},
-% \name{Bernard}{Comrie},
-% \name{David~B.}{Cook},
-% \name{Emmanuel}{Cornet},
-% \name{Oliver}{Corff},
-% \name{Prakash}{Countcham},
-% \namea{Olivier}{Dabène}{Dabene},
-% \name{Sergueï}{Dachian},
-% \name{Adrian}{Daerr},
-% \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan},
-% \name{Patrick~W.}{Daly},
-% \name{Peter~T.}{Daniels},
-% \name{Holger}{Danielsson},
-% \name{Alice}{Davison},
-% \namea{Luiz~Henrique}{de~Figueiro}{deFigueiro},
-% \namea{Arnaldo~Viegas}{de~Lima}{deLima},
-% \name{Sébastien}{Demoustier},
-% \name{Andreas}{Deininger},
-% \name{Éric}{Depardieu},
-% \namea{Ben}{De~Rydt}{DeRydt},
-% \name{Bernard}{Desgraupes},
-% \name{Cécile}{Desprairies},
-% \name{Sébastien}{Desreux},
-% \name{Christine}{Detig},
-% \name{Antoni~R.}{Diller},
-% \name{Gérard}{Dorel},
-% \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj},
-% \namea{Ivars}{Dri\k{k}is}{Drikis},
-% \name{Matthew~S.}{Dryer},
-% \name{Denys}{Duchier},
-% \name{Lyndon}{Dudding},
-% \namea{Marko}{Èehaja}{Eehaja},
-% \name{Ta~Quang}{Dung},
-% \name{Patrick}{Egan},
-% \namea{Victor}{E{\ij}khout}{Eijkhout},
-% \name{Brian}{Elmegaard},
-% \name{Danie}{Els}, ^^A booktabs
-% \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod},
-% \name{Thomas}{Esser},
-% \name{Gilhooly}{Etienne},
-% \name{Karl~F.}{Everitt},
-% \name{Mike}{Fabian},
-% \name{Robin}{Fairbairns},
-% \name{Christian}{Faulhammer},
-% \name{Simon}{Fear}, ^^A booktabs
-% \name{Jürgen}{Fenn}, ^^A l2tabu
-% \name{Michael~J.}{Ferguson},
-% \name{Jeff}{Fessler},
-% \name{Ulrike}{Fischer},
-% \name{Joshua-A.}{Fishman},
-% \name{Jean-Julien}{Fleck},
-% \name{Daniel}{Flipo},
-% \name{Peter~L.}{Flom},
-% \name{Peter}{Flynn},
-% \name{Jim}{Fox}, ^^A dpfloat
-% \namea{Louis}{Frédéric}{Frederic},
-% \namea{Danny~M.}{Fürniß}{Furniss},
-% \name{Tetsuo}{Furukawa},
-% \name{Federico}{Garcia},
-% \namea{Diego}{García~Morate}{Garcia~Morate},
-% \namea{Hubert}{Gäßlein}{Gasslein}, ^^A pict2e
-% \namea{Bernard}{Gaulle\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Gaulle},
-% \name{Maarten}{Gelderman},
-% \name{Chuck}{Genschte},
-% \name{Jacques}{Gernet},
-% \name{Mohammad}{Ghodsi},
-% \name{Helen}{Gilhooly},
-% \name{Henri}{Giordan}%
-% \name{Aleksas~Stanislovas}{Girdenis},
-% \name{François}{Giron},
-% \name{Markus}{Gleiszner},
-% \name{Josiane}{Gonthier},
-% \name{Vitali}{Gontsharuk},
-% \name{Michel}{Goossens},
-% \namea{Raymond~G.}{Gordon,~Jr.}{Gordon},
-% \name{Mathieu}{Goutelle},
-% \name{Bruce~K.}{Grant},
-% \name{Fraser}{Grant},
-% \namea{George}{Grätzer}{Gratzer},
-% \name{Norman}{Gray},
-% \name{George~D.}{Greenwade},
-% \name{Enrico}{Gregorio},
-% \name{Loïc}{Grenon},
-% \name{Charles}{Grether},
-% \name{Barbara~F.}{Grimes},
-% \name{Olga~A.}{Grineva},
-% \name{Sébastien}{Grot},
-% \name{Micael}{Guignard},
-% \name{Marion}{Gunn},
-% \name{Guntermann}{Klaus},
-% \name{Eitan~M.}{Gurari},
-% \name{Thomas}{Hafner},
-% \name{Hans}{Hagen},
-% \name{Reinhard~F.}{Hahn},
-% \name{Boumediene}{Hamzi},
-% \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han},
-% \name{Thorsten}{Hansen},
-% \name{Patrick}{Happel},
-% \name{Yannis}{Haralambous},
-% \name{Kathryn~A.}{Hargreaves},
-% \name{Alexander}{Harin},
-% \name{Russel~L.}{Harris},
-% \name{Michael~A.}{Harrison},
-% \name{Stephen}{Hartke},
-% \name{Danny}{Heap},
-% \name{Jim}{Hefferon},
-% \name{André}{Heider},
-% \name{Thorsten}{Hein},
-% \name{Sten}{Hellman},
-% \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup},
-% \name{Yvon}{Henel}, ^^A l2tabu
-% \name{Hartmut}{Henkel},
-% \name{Thomas}{Henlich}, ^^A marvosym%
-% \name{Stephan}{Hennig},
-% \name{Florence}{Henry},
-% \name{Stephen}{Herborn},
-% \name{Jörg}{Hesoll},
-% \name{Pr.~Thomas~J.}{Hinnenbush},
-% \name{David}{Hoadley},
-% \name{Taco}{Hoekwater},
-% \name{Alan}{Hoenig},
-% \name{Joe}{Hogg},
-% \namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm},
-% \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme},
-% \namea{Klaus}{H{\"o}ppner}{Hoppner},
-% \name{Umstatter}{Horst},
-% \name{Don}{Hosek},
-% \name{Yufan}{Hu},
-% \name{Jean-Michel}{Hufflen},
-% \name{Dave~W.}{Huseby},
-% \name{Helene}{Hyna},
-% \name{Roberto}{Ierusalimschy},
-% \name{Hiroya}{Ikeda},
-% \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov},
-% \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen},
-% \name{Victor}{Ivrii},
-% \name{Tetsuo}{Iwakuma},
-% \name{Zunbeltz}{Izaola~Azkona},
-% \name{Youssef}{Jabri}, ^^A Arabi
-% \name{Pawe\l}{Jackowski}, ^^A pearls
-% \name{Roland}{Jacques},
-% \name{Christophe}{Jacquet},
-% \name{Bernd}{Jaehne},
-% \name{Radwan}{Jalam},
-% \name{Michael}{Janich},
-% \name{Frank}{Jensen},
-% \name{Alan}{Jeffrey},
-% \name{Regnor}{Jernsletten},
-% \name{Zhuhan}{Jiang},
-% \name{Loïc}{Joly},
-% \name{David~M.}{Jones},
-% \name{Christophe}{Jorssen},
-% \name{Robert}{Juhasz},
-% \name{Jean-Joseph}{Julaud},
-% \name{Stefan}{Junge},
-% \name{Dan}{Jurafsky},
-% \name{Akira}{Kakuto},
-% \name{Mikko}{Kanerva},
-% \name{Theppitak}{Karoonboonyanan},
-% \name{David}{Kastrup},
-% \name{Ronan}{Keryell},
-% \name{Jonathan}{Kew}, ^^A xetex
-% \name{Axel}{Kielhorn},
-% \name{Ki-Joo}{Kim},
-% \name{Bil}{Kleb},
-% \name{Peter}{Kleiweg},
-% \name{Rune}{Kleveland},
-% \namea{Ingo}{Klöckl}{Klockl},
-% \name{Jörg}{Knappen},
-% \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth},
-% \name{Markus}{Kohm},
-% \name{Helmut}{Kopka},
-% \name{Attila}{Koppanyi},
-% \name{Adamantios}{Korais},
-% \name{Vincent}{Krakoviack},
-% \name{Kai}{Kratt},
-% \name{Thankmar}{Kronzucker},
-% \name{Siep}{Kroonenberg},
-% \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov},
-% \name{Manfred}{Kudlek},
-% \name{Markus~G.}{Kuhn},
-% \name{Florian}{Kulzer},
-% \name{Toshiki}{Kumazawa},
-% \name{Olaf}{Kummer},
-% \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster},
-% \name{Stéphane}{Laborde},
-% \name{Thomas}{Lachand-Robert},
-% \name{Klaus}{Lagally},
-% \name{Leslie}{Lamport},
-% \name{Fabio}{Lanari},
-% \name{Robert}{Lange},
-% \name{Dag}{Langmyhr},
-% \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko},
-% \name{Henning}{Larsen},
-% \name{Jean-Marc}{Lasgouttes},
-% \name{Andris}{Lasis},
-% \name{Christian}{Laucou},
-% \name{Jean-Philippe}{Lauffenburger},
-% \name{Arnaud}{Launay},
-% \name{Claire}{Lauvernet},
-% \name{Boris}{Lavva},
-% \name{André}{Lebacq},
-% \name{Olivier}{Lecarme},
-% \name{Jacques}{Leclerc},
-% \name{Iksop}{Lee},
-% \namea{Fabrice}{Le~Goff}{LeGoff},
-% \name{Jeanne}{Legrand},
-% \name{Philipp}{Lehman},
-% \name{Werner}{Lemberg},
-% \name{Thomas}{Leonhardt},
-% \namea{Erwan}{Le~Pennec}{LePennec},
-% \name{Stéphane}{Lepolozec},
-% \namea{Julien}{Le~Thuaut}{LeThuaut},
-% \namea{René}{Létoile}{Letoile},
-% \name{Adam}{Lewenberg},
-% \name{Knut}{Lickert},
-% \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren},
-% \name{Anselm}{Lingnau},
-% \name{Bernice~Sacks}{Lipkin},
-% \name{Pierre}{Lobel},
-% \namea{Milo\v{s}~V.}{Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek}{Lokajicek},
-% \name{Stoffel}{Lombard},
-% \name{Maurizio}{Loreti},
-% \name{Tristan}{Lorino},
-% \name{Tim}{Love},
-% \name{Vincent}{Lozano},
-% \name{Daniel~H.}{Luecking},
-% \name{Ken}{Lunde},
-% \name{Anders}{Lyhne},
-% \namea{Jean-François}{Macé}{Mace},
-% \name{Pierre~A.}{MacKay},
-% \name{Lars}{Madsen},
-% \name{Richard}{Mahoney},
-% \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya},
-% \name{Pierre}{Malecki},
-% \name{Pascal}{Marchand},
-% \name{Bob}{Margolis},
-% \name{Cécile}{Marin},
-% \name{Nicolas}{Markey},
-% \name{Marcus}{Marr},
-% \name{Françoise}{Marre-Fournier},
-% \name{Alan}{Marshall},
-% \name{Terry}{Mart},
-% \name{Éric}{Martini},
-% \name{Vadim}{Maslov},
-% \name{Henri}{Massias},
-% \name{Stephen}{Matthews},
-% \name{Andreas}{Matthias},
-% \name{Sven}{Mattisson},
-% \name{Krystyna}{Mazoyer},
-% \name{Rowland}{McDonnell},
-% \name{Ben}{McKay},
-% \name{Surapant}{Meknavin},
-% \name{Sébastien}{Mengin},
-% \name{Jochen}{Metzinger},
-% \name{Yanick}{Michou},
-% \name{Frank}{Mittelbach},
-% \name{Young~Joon}{Moon},
-% \name{Ross}{Moore},
-% \name{Jens-Uwe}{Morawski},
-% \name{Florence}{Morgiensztern},
-% \name{Lapo~Filippo}{Mori},
-% \name{Michael~A.}{Morrison},
-% \namea{Javier~A.}{Múgica~de~Rivera}{Mugica de Rivera},
-% \namea{Dejan}{Muhamedagi\'{c}}{Muhamedagic},
-% \name{Andrei}{Nacu},
-% \name{}{National Geographic Society},
-% \name{}{National Institute of the Korean},
-% \name{Sergei~O.}{Naumov},
-% \name{Lee}{Netherton},
-% \name{Frank}{Neukam},
-% \name{Cuong}{Nguyen},
-% \name{Julien}{Nicolas},
-% \name{Elke}{Niedermair},
-% \name{Michael}{Niedermair},
-% \name{Rolf}{Niepraschk}, ^^A pict2e
-% \name{Josselin}{Noirel},
-% \name{Tim}{Null},
-% \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek},
-% \name{Tobias}{Oetiker},
-% \name{Haruhito}{Okamura},
-% \name{Mariusz}{Olko},
-% \name{Tanguy}{Ortolo},
-% \namea{Erik}{Östhols}{Osthols},
-% \name{Jörg}{Ott},
-% \namea{Alan}{Pai\'{c}}{Paic},
-% \name{Scott}{Pakin},
-% \name{Palash~Baran}{Pal},
-% \name{Anshuman}{Pandey},
-% \name{Minje~Byeng-sen}{Park},
-% \name{Hubert}{Partl},
-% \name{Oren}{Patashnik},
-% \name{Jonathan}{Pechta},
-% \name{Kasper}{Peeters},
-% \namea{Manuel}{Pégourié-Gonnard}{Pegourie-Gonnard},
-% \name{Matthias}{Pelger},
-% \name{Philippe}{Pelletier},
-% \namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard},
-% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst},
-% \name{Sébastien}{Peyrouse},
-% \name{Paul}{Pichaureau},
-% \name{Éric}{Picheral},
-% \name{Bruno}{Piguet},
-% \namea{Karel}{P{\'\i}\v{s}ka}{Piska},
-% \name{John}{Plaice},
-% \name{Yves}{Plassereau},
-% \name{Ariane}{Poissonnier},
-% \name{Maria}{Polinsky},
-% \name{Philippe}{Pons},
-% \name{Monique}{Pontault},
-% \name{Veerathanabutr}{Poonlap},
-% \name{Fabrice}{Popineau},
-% \name{Nico}{Poppelier},
-% \name{Rama}{Porrat},
-% \namea{Camille-Aimé}{Possamaï}{Possamai},
-% \name{Roozbeh}{Pournader},
-% \namea{Hilmar}{Preuße}{Preusse},
-% \name{Glanville}{Price},
-% \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan},
-% \name{Sebastian}{Rahtz},
-% \name{Bernd}{Raichle},
-% \name{Claude}{Raimond},
-% \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete},
-% \name{S.~Robert}{Ramsey},
-% \name{Paul}{Rascoe},
-% \name{Keranen}{Reino},
-% \name{Arthur}{Reutenauer},
-% \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus},
-% \namea{Alexandre}{de~Rhodes\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Rhodes},
-% \name{François}{Richaudeau},
-% \name{Luis}{Rivera},
-% \name{Yuri}{Robbers},
-% \name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts},
-% \name{Will}{Robertson},
-% \name{Denis~B.}{Roegel},
-% \name{Christian}{Rolland},
-% \name{Rasmus~Pank}{Roulund},
-% \name{Chris~A.}{Rowley},
-% \name{Marti}{Ruiz-Altaba},
-% \name{Jan~Michael}{Rynning},
-% \name{Young}{Ryu}, ^^A txfonts
-% \name{Enn}{Saar},
-% \name{David}{Samsoen},
-% \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez},
-% \name{Larry}{Sanger},
-% \name{Morgan}{Sangeux},
-% \name{Thierry}{Sanjuan},
-% \name{Eddie}{Saudrais},
-% \namea{Elmar}{Schalück}{Schaluck},
-% \name{Bernd}{Schandl},
-% \name{Elisabeth}{Schlegl},
-% \name{Tobias}{Schlemmer},
-% \name{Walter}{Schmidt},
-% \name{Thomas~A.}{Schmitz},
-% \name{Uwe}{Schneider},
-% \namea{Rainer}{Schöpf}{Schopf},
-% \name{Joachim}{Schrod},
-% \namea{Martin}{Schröder}{Schroder}, ^^A everysel, ragged2e, multitoc
-% \name{Ulrich}{Schwartz},
-% \name{Elizabeth}{Scurfield},
-% \name{Michael}{Shell},
-% \vname{Shin}{Jungshik},
-% \namea{Bai}{Shouyi\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Shouyi},
-% \name{Ali}{Shoukat},
-% \name{Andrij~M.}{Shvaika},
-% \name{Chanop}{Silpa-Anan},
-% \name{Sindhu}{Singh},
-% \name{Anna}{Sitnikova-Rioland},
-% \name{Petra}{Schlager},
-% \name{Kristian}{Slimak},
-% \name{Jankovic}{Slobodan},
-% \name{John}{Smith},
-% \name{Robin~S.}{Socha},
-% \name{Nick}{Sofroniou},
-% \name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt},
-% \name{Lianyi}{Song},
-% \name{Yves}{Soulet},
-% \name{Gérard}{Sournia},
-% \name{Pierre-François}{Souyri},
-% \name{Arjen}{Steiner},
-% \name{D.~P.}{Story},
-% \name{Éric}{Streit},
-% \name{Ralf}{Stubner},
-% \name{K.~K.}{Subramaniam},
-% \name{Cyrille}{Suss},
-% \name{Robert~S.}{Sutor},
-% \name{Chris}{Swoyer},
-% \name{Apostolos}{Syropoulos},
-% \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco},
-% \name{Nicola~L.~C.}{Talbot},
-% \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin},
-% \name{Philip}{Taylor},
-% \namea{Michel}{Tétu}{Tetu},
-% \name{Yves}{Ternon},
-% \name{Manfred}{Thibud},
-% \name{Christina}{Thiele},
-% \name{Harold}{Thimbleby},
-% \name{Kresten~Krab}{Thorup},
-% \name{Aurélien}{Thureau},
-% \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld},
-% \name{Josef}{Tkadlec}, ^^A pict2e
-% \namea{Ton}{'t~Lam}{tLam},
-% \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis},
-% \name{Cezare}{Tomczak},
-% \name{Laurent}{Tordella},
-% \name{Mark}{Trettin}, ^^A l2tabu
-% \name{Antonis}{Tsolomitis},
-% \name{Ahto}{Truu},
-% \name{Stefan}{Ulrich},
-% \name{Hideo}{Umeki},
-% \name{Un}{Koaunghi},
-% \name{Turgut}{Uyar},
-% \name{Jari}{Vaario},
-% \name{Christian}{Valantin},
-% \name{Piet}{van~Oostrum},
-% \namea{Thomas}{van~Oudenhove~de~Saint~Géry}{van~Oudenhove~de~Saint~Gery},
-% \name{Timothy}{Van~Zandt},
-% \name{Vincent}{Vaquin},
-% \name{Suki~K.}{Venkatesan},
-% \name{Didier}{Verna},
-% \name{Sylvain}{Vesco},
-% \name{Boris}{Veytsman},
-% \name{Alexandre}{Vial},
-% \name{Carl~F.}{Voegelin},
-% \name{Florence M.}{Voegelin},
-% \name{Martin}{Vogel},
-% \name{Vladimir}{Volovich},
-% \name{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim},
-% \namea{Herbert}{Voß}{Voss},
-% \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner},
-% \name{David}{Walden},
-% \name{Jimmy}{Wales},
-% \name{Nigel}{Ward},
-% \name{John}{Warnock},
-% \name{Douglas}{Waud}%
-% \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz},
-% \name{Stephan~B.}{Webanck},
-% \name{Eduard}{Werner},
-% \name{Daphne}{West},
-% \name{Ferenc}{Wettl},
-% \name{Graham}{Williams},
-% \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson},
-% \namea{Jeroen}{W{\ij}nhout}{Wijnhout},
-% \name{Alexandre}{Wolf},%
-% \namea{Marcin}{Woli\'nski}{Wolinski},
-% \name{Élisabeth}{Wolkowski},
-% \name{Mark}{Wooding},
-% \name{Joseph~A.}{Wright},
-% \name{Tim}{Wright},
-% \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk},
-% \name{Damien}{Wyart},
-% \name{C.~S.}{Yogananda},
-% \name{Adi}{Zaimi},
-% \namea{Ludwig~Lejzer}{Zamenhof\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Zamenhof},
-% \name{Danilo}{Zavrtanik},
-% \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski},
-% \name{Charlie~S.}{Zender},
-% \name{Federico}{Zenith},
-% \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov},
-% \name{Uwe}{Ziegenhagen}\ifcase\LANG\relax, and\ \or\relax\ et\ \fi
-% \namea{Leon}{\v{Z}lajpah}{Zlajpah}.\par
-% \end{raggedright}
-% ^^A NEW HISTORY END
-% ^^A SEE..
-% \ifcase\LANG\relax
-% \index{Suffixes|see{Extensions}}
-% \or\relax
-% \index{Extensions|see{Suffixes}}
-% \fi
-% \iftrue % ^^A to index authors from the bibliography (citations replace the page number)
-% \bname{}{National Institute of the Korean}{korean-beg}%
-% \bname{Iksop}{Lee}{kor-lan}%
-% \bname{Bruce~K.}{Grant}{korean-chars}%
-% \bname{Philippe}{Pelletier}{pelletier2003,pelletier2004,pelletier2007}%
-% \bname{Philippe}{Pons}{pons2007}%
-% \bname{Pierre-François}{Souyri}{pons2007,souyri1999}%
-% \bnamea{Louis}{Frédéric}{Frederic}{japon-dc}%
-% \bname{Jean-Pierre}{Cabestan}{chineco}%
-% \bname{Yves}{Citoleux}{chineco}%
-% \bnamea{Élisabeth}{Allès}{Alles}{chineco}%
-% \bname{Jacques}{Gernet}{gernet1,gernet2,gernet3}%
-% \bname{Viviane}{Alleton}{alleton2008}%
-% \bnamea{Jean-François}{Macé}{Mace}{mace2008}%
-% \bname{Gérard}{Dorel}{atlasmi-us}%
-% \bnamea{Philippe}{Cadène}{Cadene}{atlas-in}%
-% \bname{Guillaume}{Balavoine}{atlas-in}%
-% \bname{Pascal}{Marchand}{atlas-ru}%
-% \bname{Cyrille}{Suss}{atlas-ru}%
-% \bnamea{Olivier}{Dabène}{Dabene}{atlas-amla}%
-% \bnamea{Aurélie}{Boissière}{Boissiere}{atlas-amla}%
-% \bname{Yves}{Plassereau}{atlasmi-eu}%
-% \bname{Henri}{Giordan}{atlasmi-eu}%
-% \bname{Yves}{Ternon}{atlasmi-eu}%
-% \bname{Cécile}{Marin}{atlasmi-eu}%
-% \bname{Thierry}{Sanjuan}{sanjuan,chineco}%
-% \bnamea{Madeleine}{Benoît-Guyot}{Benoit-Guyot}{sanjuan}%
-% \bname{Justin~K.}{Bisanwa}{bisanwa}%
-% \bnamea{Michel}{Tétu}{Tetu}{bisanwa}%
-% \bname{Victor}{Ivrii}{ivrii2007a,ivrii2007b}%
-% \bname{Roland}{Breton}{breton2003,atlasmi-mo}%
-% \bname{Krystyna}{Mazoyer}{breton2003}%
-% \bname{Joshua-A.}{Fishman}{breton2003}%
-% \bname{Stephen}{Matthews}{comrie2004}%
-% \bname{Maria}{Polinsky}{comrie2004}%
-% \bname{Catherine}{Bricout}{comrie2004}%
-% \bname{Petra}{Schlager}{schlager2007}%
-% \bname{Manfred}{Thibud}{schlager2007}%
-% \bname{Monique}{Pontault}{OIF}%
-% \bname{Alexandre}{Wolf}{OIF}%
-% \bname{Christian}{Valantin}{OIF,OIF2003}%
-% \bname{Florence}{Morgiensztern}{OIF,OIF2003}%
-% \bname{Josiane}{Gonthier}{OIF}%
-% \bname{Ariane}{Poissonnier}{AF}%
-% \bname{Gérard}{Sournia}{AF}%
-% \bnamea{Fabrice}{Le~Goff}{LeGoff}{AF}%
-% \bname{Glanville}{Price}{LOE}%
-% \bname{Peter~T.}{Daniels}{WWS}%
-% \bname{William}{Bright}{WWS}%
-% \bname{Bernard}{Comrie}{comrie1990,comrie2004}%
-% \bname{Tristan}{Lorino}{lorino2006}%
-% \bname{S.~Robert}{Ramsey}{ramsey1989,kor-lan}%
-% \bname{Pierre}{Chuvin}{chuvin2008}%
-% \bnamea{René}{Létoile}{Letoile}{chuvin2008}%
-% \bname{Sébastien}{Peyrouse}{chuvin2008}%
-% \bnamea{Manuel}{Pégourié-Gonnard}{Pegourie-Gonnard}{p-xargs,p-xargs-fr}%
-% \bname{Roberto}{Ierusalimschy}{lua2005,lua2006}%
-% \bnamea{Luiz~Henrique}{de~Figueiro}{deFigueiro}{lua2006}%
-% \bname{Waldemar}{Celes}{lua2006}%
-% \bnamea{Alexandre}{de~Rhodes\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Rhodes}{ppvl}%
-% \bname{Alan}{Marshall}{marshall1991}%
-% \bname{Patrick}{Andries}{andries2008}%
-% \bname{Roland}{Jacques}{ppvl}%
-% \bname{Tobias}{Berndt}{berndt2007}%
-% \bname{Joachim}{Schrod}{ilatex,guntermann1986,detig1994}%
-% \bname{Guntermann}{Klaus}{guntermann1986}%
-% \bname{Christine}{Detig}{detig1994}%
-% \bname{Éric}{Martini}{martini2008}%
-% \bname{Olivier}{Binisti}{rich2005}%
-% \bname{Patrick}{Boman}{boman2005}%
-% \bname{Christian}{Laucou}{boman2005}%
-% \bname{François}{Richaudeau}{rich2005}%
-% \bname{Patrick}{Burgel}{pluriels}%
-% \bname{Jin-Hwan}{Cho}{cjkomega}%
-% \bname{Haruhito}{Okamura}{cjkomega}%
-% \bname{}{National Geographic Society}{atlas-china}%
-% \bname{Beebe}{Nelson~H.~F.}{beebe}%
-% \bname{Raymond}{Chabbert\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{occi}%
-% \bname{Elke}{Niedermair}{la-praxis}%
-% \bname{Bernice~Sacks}{Lipkin}{lipkin}%
-% \bname{Michael}{Niedermair}{la-praxis}%
-% \bname{Jean-Joseph}{Julaud}{fnul,fgram,conju}%
-% \bname{Claude}{Raimond}{enul}%
-% \bname{Paul}{Rascoe}{texasmaps}%
-% \bname{Christophe}{Jacquet}{mlatex}%
-% \bname{Alice}{Davison}{hindi99}%
-% \bname{Juan~M.}{Aguirregabiria}{basque}%
-% \bname{Jonathan}{Kew}{xetex}%
-% \bname{Reinhard~F.}{Hahn}{lowlands}%
-% \bname{François}{Giron}{surlatex}%
-% \bname{Patrick}{Egan}{nomentbl}%
-% \bname{Brian}{Elmegaard}{nomentbl}%
-% \bname{Ferenc}{Wettl}{bujdoso,bujdoso-f}%
-% \bname{Stéphane}{Aicardi}{aicardi}%
-% \bname{Jouko}{Arponen}{practical}%
-% \bname{Jason}{Baldridge}{jason}%
-% \bname{Timothy}{Van~Zandt}{fancybox}%
-% \bname{Frank}{Jensen}{calc}%
-% \bname{Kresten~Krab}{Thorup}{calc}%
-% \bname{Akira}{Kakuto}{kakuto}%
-% \bname{Lee}{Netherton}{nomencl}%
-% \bname{Bernd}{Schandl}{nomencl}%
-% \bname{Vartan}{Akopian}{armtex}%
-% \bname{A.J.}{Alex}{malayalam,malayalam-o}%
-% \bnamea{Bai}{Shouyi\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Shouyi}{china-h}%
-% \bnamea{Einar}{Árnason}{Arnason}{icelandic}%
-% \bnamea{Gyöngyi}{Bujdosó}{Bujdoso}{bujdoso,bujdoso-f}%
-% \bnamea{Raymond~G.}{Gordon,~Jr.}{Gordon}{ethno}%
-% \bname{Barbara~F.}{Grimes}{ethno}%
-% \bnamea{Ingo}{Klöckl}{Klockl}{ingo}%
-% \bname{Donald}{Arseneau}{notoccite,placeins,cite,overcite,wrapfig,chapterbib,url,ifmtarg}%
-% \bname{Gonçal}{Badenes}{catalan}%
-% \bname{Pierre}{Basso}{bibtopic}%
-% \bname{Dorjgotov}{Batmunkh}{mongolian}%
-% \bname{David}{Bausum}{trm-b,trm}%
-% \bname{Benjamin}{Bayart}{JMPL1,texfaq-fr}%
-% \bname{Thierry}{Bayet}{texfaq-fr}%
-% \bname{Claudio}{Beccari}{beccari1998,latin,italian,beccari-pj-2007-1}%
-% \bname{Emmanuel}{Beffara}{rubber}%
-% \bnamea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}{magyar}%
-% \bname{Jens}{Berger}{hypernat}%
-% \bname{Alexander}{Berdnikov}{maccents,X2T2,cyri,X2ENC}%
-% \bname{Karl}{Berry}{impatient,fr-impatient,berry1990,berry2003}%
-% \bname{Berhanu}{Beyene}{ethiop}%
-% \bname{Javier}{Bezos}{spanish4,spanish,guarani,titletoc}%
-% \bname{Giuseppe}{Bilotta}{aleph}%
-% \bnamea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}{magyar}%
-% \bnamea{Denis}{Bitouzé}{Bitouze}{latex-synthex}%
-% \bname{Georgi~N.}{Boshnakov}{bulgarian}%
-% \bname{Victor}{Boyko}{cmcyralt/russian.sty}%
-% \bname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,babel-user,dutch,english,irish,norsk,welsh,basque,%
-% icelandic,catalan,latin,magyar,bulgarian,turkish,LaTeXbase,galician,galician2,slovak,italian,BEP,%
-% frenchb,scottish,swedish,romanian,samin,finnish,interlingua,bahasa,bahasam,russianb1,danish,hebrew2,%
-% czech,serbian,croatian,germanb,ngermanb,portuges,breton,esperanto,estonian,polish,ukraineb,greek,%
-% lsorbian,usorbian,albanian,slovene,i-ntg,ntg,proc,classes,letter,docstrip-prog,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F}%
-% \bname{Felix}{Braun}{jura}%
-% \bname{Jim}{Breen}{breen}%
-% \bname{Mustafa}{Burc}{turkish}%
-% \bname{Alexey}{Burykin}{X2T2,cyri,X2ENC}%
-% \bname{David}{Carella}{carella}%
-% \bname{David~P.}{Carlisle}{LaTeXbase,xr,afterpage,ltxdoc,xr-hyper,color,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F,ltclass,ifthen,backref,textcase}%
-% \bname{Manuel}{Carriba}{galician,galician2}%
-% \bname{Jean-C{\^o}me}{Charpentier}{latex-synthex,ftb,TLC2F,jcc2008,ftds}%
-% \bname{Jean-Pascal}{Chauvet}{kanji}%
-% \bname{Pehong}{Chen}{chen1988}%
-% \bnamea{Jana}{Chlebîková}{Chlebikova}{slovak}%
-% \bname{Bernard}{Desgraupes}{meta-des,desgraupes,unicode-des}%
-% \bname{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}{subfigure,captcont,subfig}%
-% \bname{Maurizio}{Codogno}{italian}%
-% \bname{Oliver}{Corff}{mlsquick,pentaglot,mongol-web,montex}%
-% \bname{Prakash}{Countcham}{texfaq-fr}%
-% \bname{Sergueï}{Dachian}{armtex}%
-% \bname{Arnak}{Dalalyan}{armtex}%
-% \bname{Patrick~W.}{Daly}{fullpage,dnatbib,natnotes,kopka,daly1998}%
-% \bnamea{Arnaldo~Viegas}{de~Lima}{deLima}{portuges}%
-% \bname{Éric}{Depardieu}{texfaq-fr}%
-% \bname{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}{montex}%
-% \bname{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert}{texfaq-fr,shorttoc,minitoc-fr,minitoc}%
-% \bnamea{Victor}{E{\ij}khout}{Eijkhout}{BEP,TBT,comment,i-ntg,ntg}%
-% \bname{Behdad}{Esfahbod}{farsi}%
-% \bname{Mike}{Fabian}{cjk-suse}%
-% \bname{Robin}{Fairbairns}{texfaq-en}%
-% \bname{Jürgen}{Fenn}{l2tabufr,l2tabuen,Fenn-pj-2006-4}%
-% \bname{Daniel}{Flipo}{frenchb,CIL2E}%
-% \bname{Peter}{Flynn}{flynn,veryshort,Flynn-pj-2005-3,Flynn-pj-2006-4}%
-% \bname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}{farsi}%
-% \bname{Michel}{Goossens}{latex-web,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F,TLGC}%
-% \bname{Mathieu}{Goutelle}{texfaq-fr}%
-% \bname{Fraser}{Grant}{irish,scottish}%
-% \bnamea{George}{Grätzer}{Gratzer}{gr-mil,gr-mmil,gr-fsl}%
-% \bname{Norman}{Gray}{urlbst}%
-% \bname{George~D.}{Greenwade}{greenwade}%
-% \bname{Enrico}{Gregorio}{gregorio-pj-2007-1,gregorio2007}%
-% \bname{Olga~A.}{Grineva}{maccents}%
-% \bname{Marion}{Gunn}{irish}%
-% \bname{Hans}{Hagen}{aleph-hagen,style-hagen,pdftex,Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis,luatex}%
-% \bname{Hartmut}{Henkel}{luatex}%
-% \bname{Taco}{Hoekwater}{luatex,luatex2007}%
-% \bnamea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han}{han,han2000,pdftex,vietnam,han2003,han2008,han2008a}%
-% \bname{Patrick}{Happel}{lipsum}%
-% \bname{Yannis}{Haralambous}{yannis1990,YH2004,YH2007,yannis1994b,yannis1994a,MAPS24-7,yannis2001,yannis1995,omega1996,yannis1998,yannis2004,yannis+a}%
-% \bname{Alexander}{Harin}{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty}%
-% \bname{Michael~A.}{Harrison}{chen1988}%
-% \bname{Sten}{Hellman}{swedish}%
-% \bname{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}{norsk}%
-% \bname{Yvon}{Henel}{texfaq-fr,l2tabufr}%
-% \bname{Thomas}{Henlich}{marvosym}%
-% \bname{Stephan}{Hennig}{mcaption}%
-% \bname{Florence}{Henry}{texfaq-fr}%
-% \bname{David}{Hoadley}{btxfaq}%
-% \bname{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}{norsk}%
-% \bname{Umstatter}{Horst}{romanian}%
-% \bname{Per~Steinar}{Iversen}{norsk}%
-% \bname{Zunbeltz}{Izaola~Azkona}{basque}%
-% \bname{Youssef}{Jabri}{arabi}%
-% \bname{Pawe\l}{Jackowski}{pearls}%
-% \bname{Michael}{Janich}{polish}%
-% \bname{Regnor}{Jernsletten}{samin}%
-% \bname{Zhuhan}{Jiang}{vruler}%
-% \bname{Loïc}{Joly}{texfaq-fr}%
-% \bname{David~M.}{Jones}{hangcaption}%
-% \bname{Christophe}{Jorssen}{texfaq-fr}%
-% \bname{Robert}{Juhasz}{romanian}%
-% \bname{Mikko}{Kanerva}{finnish}%
-% \bname{Theppitak}{Karoonboonyanan}{thailatex,thaistd}%
-% \bname{Axel}{Kielhorn}{koma,komab}%
-% \bname{Ki-Joo}{Kim}{bibtex-ki-joo-kim,pdf-ki-joo-kim,latex-fonts-ki-joo-kim}%
-% \bname{Peter}{Kleiweg}{interlingua}%
-% \bname{Rune}{Kleveland}{norsk}%
-% \bname{Jörg}{Knappen}{bahasa,bahasam,esperanto,knappen2004}%
-% \bname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}{cmt,texbook,metabook,ftb}%
-% \bname{Markus}{Kohm}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}%
-% \bname{Yuri}{Robbers}{robbers-pj-2006-3}%
-% \bname{Rasmus~Pank}{Roulund}{robbers-pj-2006-3}%
-% \bname{Helmut}{Kopka}{kopka,kopka-bd1,kopka-bd2,kopka-bd3}%
-% \bname{Attila}{Koppanyi}{magyar}%
-% \bname{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov}{antomega}%
-% \bname{Dmitry}{Ivanov}{antomega}%
-% \bname{Manfred}{Kudlek}{ethiop}%
-% \bname{Markus~G.}{Kuhn}{effective}%
-% \bname{Olaf}{Kummer}{ethiop}%
-% \bnamea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}{alnumsec}%
-% \bname{Klaus}{Lagally}{arabtex2,arabtex}%
-% \bname{Leslie}{Lamport}{LaTeXbase,lamport-mkx,latex-manual,ntg,proc,classes,letter}%
-% \bname{Olga~G.}{Lapko}{X2T2,cyri,X2ENC,russianb1,FULLCYR,floatrow,russianb,ukraineb}%
-% \bname{Henning}{Larsen}{danish}%
-% \bname{Boris}{Lavva}{hebrew2}%
-% \bname{Olivier}{Lecarme}{lecarme}%
-% \bname{Jacques}{Leclerc}{tlfq}%
-% \bname{Philipp}{Lehman}{TFIG}%
-% \bname{Werner}{Lemberg}{russianb1,cjk,cjk2,vietnam,dblaccnt,cyrguide,ukraineb}%
-% \bnamea{Erwan}{Le~Pennec}{LePennec}{texfaq-fr}%
-% \bname{Knut}{Lickert}{minutes}%
-% \bname{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}{fncychap}%
-% \bname{Anselm}{Lingnau}{float}%
-% \bnamea{Milo\v{s}~V.}{Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek}{Lokajicek}{czech}%
-% \bname{Maurizio}{Loreti}{sfheaders}%
-% \bname{Tim}{Love}{timlove1994,timlove}%
-% \bname{Vincent}{Lozano}{lozano}%
-% \bname{Ken}{Lunde}{lunde1993,lunde,lunde1999}%
-% \bname{Pierre~A.}{MacKay}{turkish}%
-% \bname{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya}{russianb}%
-% \bname{Bob}{Margolis}{bahasam}%
-% \bname{Nicolas}{Markey}{texfaq-fr,splitbib,ttb}%
-% \bname{Françoise}{Marre-Fournier}{texfaq-fr}%
-% \bname{Terry}{Mart}{bahasa,bahasam}%
-% \bname{Sven}{Mattisson}{slatex}%
-% \bname{Rowland}{McDonnell}{sectsty}%
-% \bname{Surapant}{Meknavin}{thailatex}%
-% \bname{Sébastien}{Mengin}{texfaq-fr}%
-% \bname{Jochen}{Metzinger}{ethiop}%
-% \bname{Frank}{Mittelbach}{LaTeXbase,classes,letter,FMI1990,FMI1992,slides,multicol,varioref,doc,dblaccnt,docstrip-prog,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F,FMI1997,ltclass,enc-inter,TLGC}%
-% \bname{Jens-Uwe}{Morawski}{komab,koma}%
-% \bname{Lapo~Filippo}{Mori}{gregorio-pj-2007-1,Mori1-pj-2007-1,Mori2-pj-2007-1}%
-% \bnamea{Javier~A.}{Múgica~de~Rivera}{Mugica de Rivera}{galician,galician2}%
-% \bnamea{Dejan}{Muhamedagi\'{c}}{Muhamedagic}{serbian}%
-% \bname{Sergei~O.}{Naumov}{LH/russian.sty}%
-% \bname{Frank}{Neukam}{koma,komab}%
-% \bname{Rolf}{Niepraschk}{pict2e,texfaq-de}%
-% \bname{Josef}{Tkadlec}{pict2e}%
-% \bname{Josselin}{Noirel}{texfaq-fr}%
-% \bname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}{hyperref-paper,hyperref.web,hyperref,hypcap,ifpdf,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf,makerobust}%
-% \bname{Mariusz}{Olko}{polski}%
-% \bnamea{Erik}{Östhols}{Osthols}{swedish}%
-% \bnamea{Alan}{Pai\'{c}}{Paic}{croatian}%
-% \bname{Scott}{Pakin}{dtxtut,symbols,newcommand}%
-% \bname{Palash~Baran}{Pal}{bangtex}%
-% \bname{Anshuman}{Pandey}{pandey1999,devanagari}%
-% \bname{John}{Smith}{devanagari}%
-% \bname{Harold}{Thimbleby}{seealso,seealso1}%
-% \bname{Dominik}{Wujastyk}{devanagari}%
-% \bname{Kevin}{Carmody}{devanagari}%
-% \bname{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}{devanagari}%
-% \bname{Oren}{Patashnik}{btxdoc,btxhak}%
-% \bname{Kasper}{Peeters}{hypertex}%
-% \bname{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst}{norsk}%
-% \bname{Bruno}{Piguet}{texfaq-fr}%
-% \bname{John}{Plaice}{yannis1994b,yannis1994a,MAPS24-7,yannis2001,yannis1995,omega1996,yannis1998}%
-% \bname{Veerathanabutr}{Poonlap}{thailatex,thai-how}%
-% \bname{Nico}{Poppelier}{BEP}%
-% \bname{Roozbeh}{Pournader}{farsi}%
-% \bname{Sebastian}{Rahtz}{latex-web,pdftex,hyperref.web,hyperref,TLGC,hyperref-o,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf,backref,nameref,rotating}%
-% \bname{Leonor}{Barroca}{rotating}%
-% \bname{Bernd}{Raichle}{germanb,ngermanb,texfaq-de,romaniantex}%
-% \bname{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete}{portuges}%
-% \bname{Keranen}{Reino}{finnish}%
-% \bname{Arthur}{Reutenauer}{reutenauer2008}%
-% \bnamea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus}{romaniantex}%
-% \bname{Christian}{Rolland}{breton,rolland1999}%
-% \bname{Marti}{Ruiz-Altaba}{esperanto}%
-% \bname{Young}{Ryu}{txfonts}%
-% \bname{Enn}{Saar}{estonian}%
-% \bnamea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}{basque}%
-% \bname{Eddie}{Saudrais}{saudrais2001,saudrais2005}%
-% \bnamea{Elmar}{Schalück}{Schaluck}{polish}%
-% \bname{Tobias}{Schlemmer}{slovak}%
-% \bname{Walter}{Schmidt}{ngermanb,Schmidt-pj-2006-1,psnfss,fftex}%
-% \bnamea{Martin}{Schröder}{Schroder}{multitoc,pdftex,msch2007}%
-% \bname{Michael}{Shell}{btxfaq}%
-% \bname{Andrij~M.}{Shvaika}{ukraineb}%
-% \bname{Chanop}{Silpa-Anan}{thailatex}%
-% \bname{Jankovic}{Slobodan}{serbian}%
-% \bname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}{caption2,cap-anleitung,caption,caption-eng,rotfloat}%
-% \bname{Joseph~A.}{Wright}{trivfloat}%
-% \bname{D.~P.}{Story}{dpstory}%
-% \bname{Éric}{Streit}{texfaq-fr}%
-% \bname{Apostolos}{Syropoulos}{beccari1998,greek,syro2002,greek-ba}%
-% \bnamea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}{varsects}%
-% \bnamea{Bernard}{Gaulle\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Gaulle}{frenchle,frenchpro,frenchperso}%
-% \bname{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}{quotchap}%
-% \bname{Mark}{Trettin}{l2tabufr,l2tabuen}%
-% \bname{Stefan}{Ulrich}{bibtopic}%
-% \bname{Un}{Koaunghi}{HLATEX}%
-% \bname{Turgut}{Uyar}{turkish}%
-% \bname{Piet}{van~Oostrum}{teximpl}%
-% \bnamea{Thomas}{van~Oudenhove~de~Saint~Géry}{van~Oudenhove~de~Saint~Gery}{texfaq-fr,thomasvo}%
-% \bname{Vladimir}{Volovich}{russianb1,cyrguide,ukraineb}%
-% \bname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}{Bechtolsheim+TB11-3-409,tex-bech}%
-% \bname{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}{platex-pl}%
-% \bname{Eduard}{Werner}{lsorbian,usorbian}%
-% \bname{Graham}{Williams}{tcat}%
-% \bname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}{stdclsdv,needspace,tocloft,abstract,appendix,tocbibind,tocvsec2,ccaption,docmfp,memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3,romannum,ifmtarg,ledmac,ledpar,ledarab,chngpage}%
-% \bnamea{Marcin}{Woli\'nski}{Wolinski}{docstrip-prog,polski}%
-% \bname{Damien}{Wyart}{texfaq-fr}%
-% \bname{Adi}{Zaimi}{albanian}%
-% \bname{Danilo}{Zavrtanik}{slovene}%
-% \bnamea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}{latin}%
-% \bname{Charlie~S.}{Zender}{latex-cheat}%
-% \bname{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty,lhcyr}%
-% \bnamea{Leon}{\v{Z}lajpah}{Zlajpah}{slovene}%
-% \bname{Kathryn~A.}{Hargreaves}{impatient,fr-impatient}%
-% \bname{Paul~W.}{Abrahams}{impatient,fr-impatient}%
-% \bname{Mark}{Alford}{alford}%
-% \bname{Walter}{Appel}{ltximpat}%
-% \bname{Céline}{Chevalier}{ltximpat}%
-% \bname{Emmanuel}{Cornet}{ltximpat}%
-% \bname{Sébastien}{Desreux}{ltximpat}%
-% \bname{Jean-Julien}{Fleck}{ltximpat}%
-% \bname{Paul}{Pichaureau}{ltximpat}%
-% \bname{Helmer}{Aslasken}{aslaksen,aslaksen2}%
-% \bname{Rachid}{Belmouhoub}{arabe}%
-% \bname{Cécile}{Desprairies}{arabe,japo,chinois,russe}%
-% \bname{Antoni~R.}{Diller}{diller}%
-% \bname{Fabrice}{Popineau}{ftds}%
-% \bname{Alan}{Jeffrey}{LaTeXbase,jeffrey1994,ltnews,ltclass}%
-% \bname{Chris~A.}{Rowley}{LaTeXbase,jeffrey1994,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F,FMI1997,ltclass,rowley1999,calc}%
-% \bnamea{Rainer}{Schöpf}{Schopf}{LaTeXbase,letter}%
-% \bname{Peter}{Breitenlohner}{etex}%
-% \bname{Otfried}{Cheong}{cheong}%
-% \bname{Pai~H.}{Chou}{chou}%
-% \bname{Michael~J.}{Ferguson}{fergu90}%
-% \bname{Maarten}{Gelderman}{gelderman}%
-% \bname{Chuck}{Genschte}{pdfspec}%
-% \bname{John}{Warnock}{pdfspec}%
-% \bname{Helen}{Gilhooly}{japo}%
-% \bname{Gilhooly}{Etienne}{japo}%
-% \bname{Eitan~M.}{Gurari}{latex-web}%
-% \bname{Ross}{Moore}{latex-web}%
-% \bname{Robert~S.}{Sutor}{latex-web}%
-% \bname{Thorsten}{Hansen}{multibib,bibunits}%
-% \bname{Éric}{Picheral}{yannis1995}%
-% \bname{Alan}{Hoenig}{unbound}%
-% \bname{Hiroya}{Ikeda}{platex-jp}%
-% \bname{Tetsuo}{Furukawa}{styleuse}%
-% \bname{Tetsuo}{Iwakuma}{styleuse}%
-% \bname{Siep}{Kroonenberg}{MAPS22-13}%
-% \bname{Thomas}{Lachand-Robert}{lachand}%
-% \bname{Denys}{Duchier}{docstrip-prog}%
-% \bname{Mark}{Wooding}{docstrip-prog}%
-% \bname{Young~Joon}{Moon}{young-mm}%
-% \bname{Tobias}{Oetiker}{CIL2E,NSSL2E}%
-% \bname{Hubert}{Partl}{CIL2E,NSSL2E}%
-% \bname{Helene}{Hyna}{CIL2E,NSSL2E}%
-% \bname{Elisabeth}{Schlegl}{CIL2E,NSSL2E}%
-% \bname{Tanguy}{Ortolo}{ortolo}%
-% \bname{Jeanne}{Legrand}{ortolo}%
-% \bnamea{}{{\LaTeX3}~{Project}~{Team}}{latex3}{ltnews,proc,docstrip,ltoutput,usrguide,clsguide,fontsel,encguide,cyrguide}
-% \bname{Minje~Byeng-sen}{Park}{park2003}%
-% \bname{Jonathan}{Pechta}{kile-cjk,kile-encoding,kile}%
-% \bname{Federico}{Zenith}{kile-cjk,kile-encoding,kile}%
-% \bname{Holger}{Danielsson}{kile-cjk,kile-encoding,kile}%
-% \bnamea{Jeroen}{W{\ij}nhout}{Wijnhout}{kile-cjk,kile-encoding,kile}%
-% \bnamea{Karel}{P{\'\i}\v{s}ka}{Piska}{piska}%
-% \bname{Mimi}{Burbank}{piska}%
-% \bname{Christina}{Thiele}{piska,Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis}%
-% \bname{Suki~K.}{Venkatesan}{venkatesan}%
-% \bname{Carl~F.}{Voegelin}{voeg}%
-% \bname{Florence M.}{Voegelin}{voeg}%
-% \bname{Daphne}{West}{russe}%
-% \bname{Anna}{Sitnikova-Rioland}{russe}%
-% \bname{Thomas}{Hafner}{texfaq-de}%
-% \bname{Elizabeth}{Scurfield}{chinois}%
-% \bname{Lianyi}{Song}{chinois}%
-% \bname{Charles}{Grether}{chinois}%
-% \bname{Antonis}{Tsolomitis}{syro2002}%
-% \bname{Nick}{Sofroniou}{syro2002}%
-% \bname{}{TWS-TDS}{ftds,tds}%
-% \bname{Hideo}{Umeki}{geometry}%
-% \bname{Jean-Michel}{Hufflen}{TLC2F,hufflen}%
-% \bname{Benoît}{Belet}{TLC2F}%
-% \bname{Yves}{Soulet}{TLC2F}%
-% \bnamea{Jacques}{André}{Andre}{TLC2F,jcc2008,yannis+a}%
-% \bname{Samuele}{Carcagno}{carcagno}%
-% \bname{Simon}{Fear}{booktabs}%
-% \bname{Danie}{Els}{booktabs}%
-% \bname{Martin}{Vogel}{marvosym}%
-% \bname{Don}{Hosek}{morefloats}%
-% \bname{Stephan}{Hennig}{mcaption}%
-% \bnamea{Hubert}{Gäßlein}{Gasslein}{pict2e}%
-% \bname{Winston}{Chang}{latexsheet}%
-% \bname{Didier}{Verna}{minitoc-hyper}%
-% \bname{Bernd}{Jaehne}{minitoc-hyper}%
-% \bname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}{minitoc-hyper}%
-% \bname{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}{ltx-primer,nomencl}%
-% \bname{C.~S.}{Yogananda}{kannadatex}%
-% \bname{K.~K.}{Subramaniam}{kannadatex}%
-% \bname{Vadim}{Maslov}{cmcyralt/russian.sty,cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty}%
-% \bname{Thomas~A.}{Schmitz}{Schmitz-pj-2007-1}%
-% \bname{Federico}{Garcia}{Garcia-pj-2006-4,garcia2007}%
-% \bname{Boris}{Veytsman}{Veytsman-pj-2006-4-design,nomencl}%
-% \bname{Sindhu}{Singh}{Singh-pj-2006-4}%
-% \bname{Will}{Robertson}{Robertson-pj-2006-3}%
-% \bname{Stephen}{Hartke}{Hartke-pj-2006-1}%
-% \bname{Jim}{Hefferon}{Hefferon-pj-2005-4,Hefferon-pj-2006-4}%
-% \bname{David}{Walden}{Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis}%
-% \bname{Philip}{Taylor}{Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis,taylor1996}%
-% \bname{Nicola~L.~C.}{Talbot}{Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis,talbot2004,novices,flowfram,ffuserguide,talbot-admin,talbot-phd,talbot-thesis,talbot-mini}%
-% \bname{Joe}{Hogg}{Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis}%
-% \bnamea{Klaus}{H{\"o}ppner}{Hoppner}{Hoeppner-pj-2005-3}%
-% \bname{Peter~L.}{Flom}{Flom-pj-2005-2,Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis,Flom-pj-2005-4}%
-% \bname{Douglas}{Waud}{Waud-pj-2005-1}%
-% \bname{Tim}{Null}{Waud-pj-2005-1,Null-pj-2005-2-bh02,Null-pj-2005-3-bh03}%
-% \bname{Michael~A.}{Morrison}{morrison}%
-% \bname{Denis~B.}{Roegel}{TLGC}%
-% \bnamea{Herbert}{Voß}{Voss}{TLGC,voss2006}%
-% \bname{Christian}{Faulhammer}{preusse}%
-% \bname{Ulrich}{Schwartz}{preusse}%
-% \bnamea{Hilmar}{Preuße}{Preusse}{preusse}%
-% \bname{Pr.~Thomas~J.}{Hinnenbush}{LMP}%
-% \bname{Dr.~Barbara}{Blankenship}{LMP}%
-% \bpack{xargs}{p-xargs,p-xargs-fr}%
-% \bpack{chngpage}{chngpage}%
-% \bpack{ledmac}{ledmac}%
-% \bpack{ledpar}{ledpar}%
-% \bpack{ledarab}{ledarab}%
-% \bpack{afoot}{ledarab}%
-% \bpack{frenchle}{frenchle}%
-% \bpack{frenchpro}{frenchpro,frenchperso}%
-% \bpack{flowfram}{flowfram,ffuserguide}%
-% \bpack{nomentbl}{nomentbl}%
-% \bpack{minitoc}{minitoc-fr,minitoc}%
-% \bpack{Aleph}{aleph,aleph-hagen}%
-% \bpack{dblaccnt}{dblaccnt}%
-% \bpack{nomencl}{nomencl}%
-% \bpack{hypernat}{hypernat}%
-% \bpack{fancybox}{fancybox}%
-% \bpack{shorttoc}{shorttoc}%
-% \bpack{appendix}{appendix}%
-% \bpack{babel}{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,babel-user,BEP}%
-% \bpack{hyperref}{hyperref-paper,hyperref.web,hyperref,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf}%
-% \bpack{backref}{backref}%
-% \bpack{nameref}{nameref}%
-% \bpack{rotating}{rotating}%
-% \bpack{hypcap}{hypcap}%
-% \bpack{ifpdf}{ifpdf}%
-% \bpack{notoccite}{notoccite}%
-% \bpack{placeins}{placeins}%
-% \bpack{tocbibind}{tocbibind}%
-% \bpack{tocloft}{tocloft}%
-% \bpack{titletoc}{titletoc}%
-% \bpack{titlesec}{titletoc}%
-% \bpacka{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}{arabtex2,arabtex}%
-% \bpacka{\protect\XeTeX}{xetex}{xetex}%
-% \bpack{minutes}{minutes}%
-% \bpack{needspace}{needspace}%
-% \bpack{txfonts}{txfonts}%
-% \bpack{ifmtarg}{ifmtarg}%
-% \bpack{abstract}{abstract}%
-% \bpack{xr}{xr}%
-% \bpack{textcase}{textcase}%
-% \bpack{ethiop}{ethiop}%
-% \bpack{sectsty}{sectsty}%
-% \bpack{subfig}{subfig}%
-% \bpack{comment}{comment}%
-% \bpack{ccaption}{ccaption}%
-% \bpack{caption}{caption,caption-eng}%
-% \bpack{caption2}{caption2,cap-anleitung}%
-% \bpack{bibtopic}{bibtopic}%
-% \bpack{bibunits}{bibunits}%
-% \bpack{chapterbib}{chapterbib}%
-% \bpack{multibib}{multibib}%
-% \bpack{hangcaption}{hangcaption}%
-% \bpack{varsects}{varsects}%
-% \bpack{xr-hyper}{xr-hyper}%
-% \bpack{stdclsdv}{stdclsdv}%
-% \bpack{CJK}{aslaksen,aslaksen2,chou,cjk-suse,cjk,cjk2,kile-cjk}%
-% \bpack{docstrip}{docstrip,docstrip-prog}%
-% \btool{urlbst}{urlbst}%
-% \btool{rubber}{rubber}%
-% \btool{newcommand}{newcommand}%
-% \bpack{float}{float}%
-% \bpack{floatrow}{floatrow}%
-% \bpack{trivfloat}{trivfloat}%
-% \bpack{rotfloat}{rotfloat}%
-% \bpack{fncychap}{fncychap}%
-% \bpack{quotchap}{quotchap}%
-% \bpack{romannum}{romannum}%
-% \bpack{sfheaders}{sfheaders}%
-% \bpack{alnumsec}{alnumsec}%
-% \bpack{captcont}{captcont}%
-% \bpack{vruler}{vruler}%
-% \bpack{doc}{doc}%
-% \bpack{shortverb}{doc}%
-% \bpack{tocvsec2}{tocvsec2}%
-% \bpack{thailatex}{thailatex}%
-% \bpack{lipsum}{lipsum}%
-% \bpack{subfigure}{subfigure}%
-% \bpack{multicol}{multicol}%
-% \bpack{geometry}{geometry}%
-% \bpack{wrapfig}{wrapfig}%
-% \bpacka{\eTeX}{etex}{etex,FMI1990}%
-% \bpacka{\Arabi}{arabi}{arabi}%
-% \bpack{color}{color}%
-% \bpack{docmfp}{docmfp}%
-% \bpack{splitbib}{splitbib}%
-% \bpack{afterpage}{afterpage}%
-% \bpack{multitoc}{multitoc}%
-% \bpack{cite}{cite}%
-% \bpack{booktabs}{booktabs}%
-% \bpack{url}{url}%
-% \bpack{varioref}{varioref}%
-% \bpack{fullpage}{fullpage}%
-% \bpack{marvosym}{marvosym}%
-% \bpack{guarani}{guarani}%
-% \bpacka{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}{mlsquick,montex}%
-% \bpacka{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}{armtex}%
-% \bpack{Antomega}{antomega}%
-% \bpacka{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}{bangtex}%
-% \bpacka{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX}{spanish4}%
-% \bpacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}{devanagari}%
-% \bpack{malayalam}{malayalam}%
-% \bpack{omal}{malayalam-o}%
-% \bpacka{\PLaTeXe}{PLaTeX2e}{platex-jp,kakuto}%
-% ^^A \bpacka{\PLaTeX}{PLaTeX}{polski,platex-pl}%
-% \bpack{polski}{polski,platex-pl}%
-% \bpacka{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX}{slatex}%
-% \bpacka{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}{farsi}%
-% \bpacka{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX}{HLATEX}%
-% \bpack{LH}{LH/russian.sty}%
-% \bpack{lhcyr}{lhcyr}%
-% \bpack{cmcyralt}{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty,cmcyralt/russian.sty}%
-% \bpacka{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}{romaniantex}%
-% \bpack{flafter}{ltoutput,TLC2}%
-% \bpack{alphanum}{jura}%
-% \bpack{morefloats}{morefloats}%
-% \bpack{natbib}{dnatbib,natnotes}%
-% \bpack{overcite}{overcite}%
-% \bpack{pict2e}{pict2e}%
-% \bpacka{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX}{kannadatex}%
-% \bpacka{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}{hypertex}%
-% \bpacka{\textsc{Lua}\TeX}{LuaTeX}{luatex,luatex2007}%
-% \bpack{mcaption}{mcaption}%
-% \bpack{minitoc-hyper}{minitoc-hyper}%
-% \bpack{vietnam}{vietnam}%
-% \bpack{calc}{calc}%
-% \bpack{makerobust}{makerobust}%
-% \bclass{memoir}{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}%
-% \bclass{jura}{jura}%
-% \bclass{amsart}{amslatex}%
-% \bclass{amsproc}{amslatex}%
-% \bclass{amsbook}{amslatex}%
-% \bclass{scrbook}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}%
-% \bclass{scrartcl}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}%
-% \bclass{scrreprt}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}%
-% \bclass{scrlettr}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}%
-% \bclass{scrlttr2}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}%
-% \bclass{article}{classes}%
-% \bclass{report}{classes}%
-% \bclass{book}{classes}%
-% \bclass{letter}{letter}%
-% \bclass{slides}{slides}%
-% \bclass{ltxdoc}{ltxdoc}%
-% \bclass{ltnews}{ltnews}%
-% \bclass{proc}{proc}%
-% \fi
-% \Finale
-% \endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 0316f9ea5d2..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2179 +0,0 @@
-\begin{filecontents}{./dblaccnt.sty}
-% Copyright 2000 Frank Mittelbach <frank.mittelbach@latex-project.org>.
-% License: LPPL, version 1.3a or newer, according to
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>.
-%
-%
-% This is the file dblaccnt.tex which implements support for multiple
-% accents.
-%
-%
-% The code below handles only the case of
-%
-% \acc1 \acc2 ... glyph
-%
-% with or without nesting braces.
-%
-% \acc1 {\acc2 a}
-%
-% etc. will be handled correctly by removing the brace group during
-% the scanning process. This means in particular that conceptually
-% any accent command can only handle single token arguments!
-%
-% It should also work for combinations generated from inputenc, i.e.,
-% are presented as 8bit tokens or, after passing through something like
-% an .aux file, as \IeC{\acc1} \IeC{\acc2} ...
-%
-% If you use OT1 encoding you have to explicitly reload it (with
-% \usepackage[OT1]{fontenc}).
-%
-%
-% History
-%
-% 1.0 2000/01/27
-%
-% Initial release.
-%
-% 1.1 2005/04/21
-%
-% Make it work with LaTeX release 2003/12/01.
-% Add copyright message and history.
-%
-
-\ProvidesPackage{dblaccnt}[2005/04/21 v1.1 double accent support]
-
-\endlinechar \m@ne
-
-
-% We must redefine two internal LaTeX commands to provide hooks for
-% assembling accents.
-
-% Here we test whether #1 (the command to be executed) is \chardef or
-% #3 (the encoding) is `?'. If both are false, \assemble@accent@cmds
-% will be used.
-%
-% The first case catches \DeclareTextSymbol, the second catches
-% \ProvideTextCommandDefault. Both checks are ugly hacks which hopefully
-% disappear in the near future.
-%
-\def\@dec@text@cmd#1#2#3{
- \ifx#1\chardef
- \expandafter\def\expandafter#2\expandafter{
- \csname#3-cmd\expandafter\endcsname
- \expandafter#2
- \csname#3\string#2\endcsname
- }
- \else
- \ifx#1\chardef@text@cmd
- \expandafter\def\expandafter#2\expandafter{
- \csname#3-cmd\expandafter\endcsname
- \expandafter#2
- \csname#3\string#2\endcsname
- }
- \else
- \if#3?
- \expandafter\def\expandafter#2\expandafter{
- \csname#3-cmd\expandafter\endcsname
- \expandafter#2
- \csname#3\string#2\endcsname
- }
- \else
- \expandafter\def\expandafter#2\expandafter{
- % start looking for acc tokens
- \expandafter\assemble@accent@cmds
- \csname#3-cmd\expandafter\endcsname
- \expandafter#2
- \csname#3\string#2\endcsname
- }
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \let\@ifdefinable\@rc@ifdefinable
- \expandafter#1\csname#3\string#2\endcsname
-}
-
-
-% The redefined \@tabacckludge macro below assures that the top-level
-% definition of the accents (which contains \assemble@accent@cmds)
-% will be called.
-%
-\def\@make@tabacc#1#2{
- \expandafter\def\csname @tabacc\string#1\endcsname{#2}
-}
-
-\@make@tabacc{'}{\@acci}
-\@make@tabacc{`}{\@accii}
-\@make@tabacc{=}{\@acciii}
-
-
-% Here the redefinition of second internal LaTeX macro.
-%
-\def\@tabacckludge#1{
- \csname @tabacc\string#1\endcsname
-}
-
-
-% We only look ahead for further accents if we are to typeset.
-%
-\def\assemble@accent@cmds{
- \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect
- \expandafter\assemble@tokensinit
- \fi
-}
-
-
-% The init is special as we have to parse over some of the expansion
-% of the encoding specific command; for example, \^ might expand to
-%
-% \assemble@accent@cmds \OT1-cmd \^ \OT1\^
-% ^^^^^^ one token
-%
-% We start \assemble@tokens with the number of hits so far (\@empty),
-% zero the actual code for the current, e.g., \OT1\^ in the above
-% example (resp. the corresponding macro in the current font
-% encoding), and as a third argument we will pick up the next token
-% or group in the input stream for testing.
-%
-\def\assemble@tokensinit#1#2#3{
- % the usual test for availability in the current encoding
- % similar to the test in \@changed@cmd
- \@inmathwarn#2
- \expandafter\ifx\csname\cf@encoding\string#2\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\ifx\csname ?\string#2\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\def\csname ?\string#2\endcsname{
- \TextSymbolUnavailable#2
- }
- \fi
- \global\expandafter\let
- \csname\cf@encoding \string#2\expandafter\endcsname
- \csname ?\string#2\endcsname
- \fi
-
- % here we substitute the current encoding
- \expandafter\assemble@tokens@\expandafter\@empty
- \csname\cf@encoding\string#2\endcsname
-}
-
-
-% The next commands should be considered only as a proof of concept
-% -- they can most certainly be streamlined. Here is roughly what
-% they do:
-%
-% \assemble@tokens: If the picked up token is \IeC then get rid of it
-% and parse the next token (or group) which is expected to be the
-% argument of \IeC. This is done by restarting the whole process.
-% Otherwise we have to figure out if the current token (#3) is an
-% 8-bit from inputenc, i.e., expanding to \IeC{...}. This is
-% handled by calling \assemble@tokensz passing an expansion of #3
-% as well as #3 (or more exactly, its first token since the braces
-% get removed in this process) itself.
-%
-% \assemble@tokensz: Test if the expansion start with \IeC in which
-% case it is assumed that it comes from an inputenc 8bit; the next
-% token will be considered as its argument and used for further
-% processing in \assemble@tokensx. Otherwise the unexpanded #3
-% from above is used.
-%
-% \assemble@tokensx: If this cmd is called its third argument should
-% contain a normalized token from the input stream, i.e.
-%
-% {..} -> ..
-% \IeC{..} -> ..
-% ^^xx (expanding to) \IeC{..} -> ..
-%
-% Now all :-) that remains is testing whether the expansion of this
-% token starts with \assemble@accent@cmds, since in this case we have
-% found another accent cmd.
-%
-% #1 is the number of hits, #2 is the real definition in that
-% encoding, and #3 is the next token (or group).
-%
-% The macros \assemble@tokens@ and \assemble@tokens@@ are
-% intermediate steps to test whether #3 is empty; if yes, we simply
-% expand #2.
-%
-\def\assemble@tokens@#1#2#3{
- \assemble@tokens@@{#1}{#2}{#3}{#3\@empty}
-}
-
-\def\assemble@tokens@@#1#2#3#4{
- \ifx#4\@empty
- \expandafter\@firstoftwo
- \else
- \expandafter\@secondoftwo
- \fi
- {#2{}}
- {\assemble@tokens{#1}{#2}{#3}}
-}
-
-\def\assemble@tokens#1#2#3{
- \ifx\IeC#3
- \expandafter\@firstoftwo
- \else
- \expandafter\@secondoftwo
- \fi
- % try again but pick up argument of \IeC
- {\assemble@tokens@{#1}{#2}}
- % this will get rid of a group argument -- nasty :-)
- {\expandafter\assemble@tokensz#3\relax\assemble@tokensz{#1}{#2}#3}
-}
-
-\def\assemble@tokensz#1#2\assemble@tokensz#3#4#5{
- \ifx#1\IeC
- \expandafter\@firstoftwo
- \else
- \expandafter\@secondoftwo
- \fi
- {\assemble@tokensx{#3}{#4}#2}
- {\assemble@tokensx{#3}{#4}#5}
-}
-
-% \assemble@tokensx: This passes an expanded and unexpanded version
-% of #3 to \ifassemble@tokens to do the actual processing.
-%
-% \ifassemble@tokens: If we have found another accent command then
-% keep its name and record that we had another hit and restart the
-% scanning via \assemble@tokens, i.e., we append an `x' to the
-% ``hit'' argument that we carry around for no good reason, and we
-% append the official name of the accent command (which was picked
-% up as part of the expansion of the input token) to the argument,
-% storing the list of accents found so far. Note that we do use
-% the official name, e.g. `\"', not `\OT1\"' -- the latter is only
-% used for the very first accent!
-%
-% If it turns out that we don't have an accent command here it is
-% time to stop the scanning and do some processing. Now finally the
-% ``hit'' argument and the list of collected accents comes into play:
-% We construct a command which name consists of the string
-% ``handle@accent'', followed by a number of `x's each for each hit
-% earlier on. Thus in a situation like \"\^a we would execute
-% \handle@accentx and in case of \"a \handle@accent. This command
-% gets as its arguments the collected accents followed by the token
-% which stopped the scanning proccess, e.g.
-%
-% \handle@accentx \OT1\" \^ {a}
-%
-% and its purpose is to determine how to produce a glyph from it
-% (e.g. as a composite or as a part composite or ...)
-%
-\def\assemble@tokensx#1#2#3{
- \expandafter
- \ifassemble@tokens#3\@empty\@empty\@empty\ifassemble@tokens{#1}{#2}{#3}}
-
-\def\ifassemble@tokens#1#2#3#4\ifassemble@tokens#5#6#7{
- % next token was defined via \DeclareText...
- \ifx#1\assemble@accent@cmds
- % thus #3 is its official name
- \expandafter\assemble@tokens@
- \else
- % execute what has been assembled and exit
- \csname handle@accent#5\endcsname#6{#7}
- \expandafter\@gobbletwo
- \fi
- % first two args to \assemble@tokens on next pass
- {#5x}{#6#3}
-}
-
-
-% Depending on the number of accents found, \handle@accent[x[x]] will
-% be called.
-
-% ONLY ONE: We check whether \#1-#2 is a known command (a composite)
-% and execute it, otherwise try to execute #1{#2} as an accent
-% command.
-%
-\def\handle@accent#1#2{
- \expandafter\ifx\csname\string#1-\string#2\endcsname\relax
- #1{#2}
- \else
- \csname\string#1-\string#2\endcsname
- \fi
-}
-
-% TWO IN A ROW: We check for \#1-#2-#3. If undefined, we apply #1 to
-% whatever is the result of #2{#3}. One could think of a more
-% complex algorithm here, e.g., if #1-#2 is known as a composite
-% modifier (whatever that is) apply that before trying the above but
-% this is probably not necessary.
-%
-\def\handle@accentx#1#2#3{
- \expandafter\ifx\csname\string#1-\string#2-\string#3\endcsname\relax
- #1{#2{#3}}
- \else
- \csname\string#1-\string#2-\string#3\endcsname
- \fi
-}
-
-% MORE THAN TWO: (Not handled so far.) If there are more than three,
-% then the parsing will die at some point when \handle@accentxx...
-% will turn out to be \relax, and then one accent will become an
-% argument of another -- too bad.
-%
-\def\handle@accentxx#1#2#3#4{
- % catch more than two accents in a row
- \errmessage{Too many accents, dropping first}
- #2#3#4
-}
-
-
-% This is simpler now.
-%
-\def\DeclareTextCompositeCommand#1#2#3#4{
- \expandafter\def\csname\expandafter\string\csname
- #2\endcsname\string#1-\string#3\endcsname{#4}
-}
-
-% This is new.
-%
-\def\DeclareTextDoubleCompositeCommand#1#2#3#4#5{
- \expandafter\def\csname\expandafter\string\csname
- #2\endcsname\string#1-\string#3-\string#4\endcsname{#5}
-}
-
-% This also.
-%
-\catcode\z@=11\relax
-\def\DeclareTextDoubleComposite#1#2#3#4#5{
- \def\reserved@a{\DeclareTextDoubleCompositeCommand#1{#2}{#3}{#4}}
- \bgroup
- \lccode\z@#5
- \lowercase{
- \egroup
- \reserved@a ^^@}
-}
-\catcode\z@=15\relax
-
-
-% Now we reinitialize the \@acc... macros to use our new definitions.
-%
-\AtBeginDocument{
- \let\@acci \'
- \let\@accii \`
- \let\@acciii \=
-}
-
-
-\endlinechar `\^^M
-
-\endinput
-
-% end of dblaccnt.tex
-\end{filecontents}
-\bgroup
-\catcode`\^^?=11
-\begin{filecontents}{./chinese1.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{chinese1.mlo}[2005/01/28]
-% From the file file Bg5.cap of the CJK package
-% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
-% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
-% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
-%
-% Chinese captions
-%
-% character set: Big 5
-% encoding: Big 5
-%
-\def\ptctitle{¥Ø~~¿ý}%
-\def\plftitle{¹Ï~¥Ø~¿ý}%
-\def\plttitle{ªí~¥Ø~¿ý}%
-%
-\def\mtctitle{¥Ø~~¿ý}%
-\def\mlftitle{¹Ï~¥Ø~¿ý}%
-\def\mlttitle{ªí~¥Ø~¿ý}%
-%
-\def\stctitle{¥Ø~~¿ý}%
-\def\slftitle{¹Ï~¥Ø~¿ý}%
-\def\slttitle{ªí~¥Ø~¿ý}%
-%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./chinese2.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{chinese2.mlo}[2005/01/28]
-% From the file Bg5.cpx of the CJK package
-% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
-% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
-%
-% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
-%
-% Chinese captions
-%
-% character set: Big 5
-% encoding: Big 5
-%
-% preprocessed
-%
-\def\ptctitle{¥216~~¿253}
-\def\plftitle{¹207~¥216~¿253}
-\def\plttitle{ª237~¥216~¿253}
-%
-\def\mtctitle{¥216~~¿253}
-\def\mlftitle{¹207~¥216~¿253}
-\def\mlttitle{ª237~¥216~¿253}
-%
-\def\stctitle{¥216~~¿253}
-\def\slftitle{¹207~¥216~¿253}
-\def\slttitle{ª237~¥216~¿253}
-%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./farsi1.mlo}
-\ProvidesFiles{farsi1.mlo}[2005/09/13]
-% From farsi.sty of the FarsiTeX project
-% by Dr Mohammad Ghodsi,
-% Roozbeh Pournader (roozbeh@sharif.edu),
-% Hassan Abolhassani, and others.
-% http://www.farsitex.org
-\def\ptctitle{êú¨´ õ€À¤›‘–}
-\def\plftitle{óƒÆ´ ªØ‘ñ}
-\def\plttitle{óƒÆ´ ›Àøñ}
-%
-\def\mtctitle{êú¨´ õ€À¤›‘–}
-\def\mlftitle{óƒÆ´ ªØ‘ñ}
-\def\mlttitle{óƒÆ´ ›Àøñ}
-%
-\def\stctitle{êú¨´ õ€À¤›‘–}
-\def\slftitle{óƒÆ´ ªØ‘ñ}
-\def\slttitle{óƒÆ´ ›Àøñ}
-%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./farsi2.mlo}
-\ProvidesFiles{farsi2.mlo}[2005/09/13]
-% From farsi.sty of the FarsiTeX project
-% by Dr Mohammad Ghodsi,
-% Roozbeh Pournader (roozbeh@sharif.edu),
-% Hassan Abolhassani, and others.
-% http://www.farsitex.org
-\def\ptctitle{–‘›¤¢÷õ –¨¤úê}
-\def\plftitle{ñ‘îª –¨þó}
-\def\plttitle{ñø¢› –¨þó}
-%
-\def\mtctitle{–‘›¤¢÷õ –¨¤úê}
-\def\mlftitle{ñ‘îª –¨þó}
-\def\mlttitle{ñø¢› –¨þó}
-%
-\def\stctitle{–‘›¤¢÷õ –¨¤úê}
-\def\slftitle{ñ‘îª –¨þó}
-\def\slttitle{ñø¢› –¨þó}
-%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./hangul1.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{hangul1.mlo}[2005/01/28]
-% From the file hangul.cap of the CJK package
-% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
-% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
-%
-% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
-%
-% Hangul captions
-%
-% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992)
-% encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
-%
-\def\ptctitle{¸ñÂ÷}%
-\def\plftitle{±×¸²~¸ñÂ÷}%
-\def\plttitle{Ç¥~¸ñÂ÷}%
-%
-\def\mtctitle{¸ñÂ÷}%
-\def\mlftitle{±×¸²~¸ñÂ÷}%
-\def\mlttitle{Ç¥~¸ñÂ÷}%
-%
-\def\stctitle{¸ñÂ÷}%
-\def\slftitle{±×¸²~¸ñÂ÷}%
-\def\slttitle{Ç¥~¸ñÂ÷}%
-%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./hangul2.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{hangul2.mlo}[2005/01/28]
-% From the file hangul.cpx of the CJK package
-% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
-% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
-%
-% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
-%
-% Hangul captions
-%
-% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992)
-% encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
-%
-% preprocessed
-%
-\def\ptctitle{¸241Â247}%
-\def\plftitle{±215¸178~¸241Â247}%
-\def\plttitle{Ç165~¸241Â247}%
-%
-\def\mtctitle{¸241Â247}%
-\def\mlftitle{±215¸178~¸241Â247}%
-\def\mlttitle{Ç165~¸241Â247}%
-%
-\def\stctitle{¸241Â247}%
-\def\slftitle{±215¸178~¸241Â247}%
-\def\slttitle{Ç165~¸241Â247}%
-%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./hangul3.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{hangul3.mlo}[2005/01/28]
-% From the file hangul2.cap of the CJK package
-% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
-% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
-%
-% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
-%
-% Hangul captions set 2
-%
-% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992)
-% encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
-%
-\def\ptctitle{Â÷·Ê}%
-\def\plftitle{±×¸²~Â÷·Ê}%
-\def\plttitle{Ç¥~Â÷·Ê}%
-%
-\def\mtctitle{Â÷·Ê}%
-\def\mlftitle{±×¸²~Â÷·Ê}%
-\def\mlttitle{Ç¥~Â÷·Ê}%
-%
-\def\stctitle{Â÷·Ê}%
-\def\slftitle{±×¸²~Â÷·Ê}%
-\def\slttitle{Ç¥~Â÷·Ê}%
-%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./hangul4.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{hangul4.mlo}[2005/01/28]
-% From the file hangul2.cpx of the CJK package
-% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
-% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
-%
-% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
-%
-% Hangul captions set 2
-%
-% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992)
-% encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
-%
-% preprocessed
-%
-\def\ptctitle{Â247·202}%
-\def\plftitle{±215¸178~Â247·202}%
-\def\plttitle{Ç165~Â247·202}%
-%
-\def\mtctitle{Â247·202}%
-\def\mlftitle{±215¸178~Â247·202}%
-\def\mlttitle{Ç165~Â247·202}%
-%
-\def\stctitle{Â247·202}%
-\def\slftitle{±215¸178~Â247·202}%
-\def\slttitle{Ç165~Â247·202}%
-%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./hanja1.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{hanja1.mlo}[2005/01/28]
-% From the file hanja.cpx of the CJK package
-% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
-% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
-%
-% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
-%
-% Hanja captions
-%
-% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992)
-% encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
-%
-% preprocessed
-%
-\def\ptctitle{Ù205ó173}%
-\def\plftitle{±215¸178~Ù205ó173}%
-\def\plttitle{ø250~Ù205ó173}%
-%
-\def\mtctitle{Ù205ó173}%
-\def\mlftitle{±215¸178~Ù205ó173}%
-\def\mlttitle{ø250~Ù205ó173}%
-%
-\def\stctitle{Ù205ó173}%
-\def\slftitle{±215¸178~Ù205ó173}%
-\def\slttitle{ø250~Ù205ó173}%
-%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./hanja2.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{hanja2.mlo}[2005/01/28]
-% From the file hanja.cap of the CJK package
-% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
-% created by Werner Lemberg <a7971428@unet.univie.ac.at>
-%
-% Version 4.1.3 (20-Jun-1997)
-%
-% Hanja captions
-%
-% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992)
-% encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
-%
-\def\ptctitle{ÙÍó­}$
-\def\plftitle{±×¸²~ÙÍó­}$
-\def\plttitle{øú~ÙÍó­}$
-%
-\def\mtctitle{ÙÍó­}$
-\def\mlftitle{±×¸²~ÙÍó­}$
-\def\mlttitle{øú~ÙÍó­}$
-%
-\def\stctitle{ÙÍó­}$
-\def\slftitle{±×¸²~ÙÍó­}$
-\def\slttitle{øú~ÙÍó­}$
-%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./japanese.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{japanese.mlo}[2005/01/28]
-% From the file SJIS.cap of the CJK package
-% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
-% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
-%
-% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
-%
-% Japanese captions
-%
-% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990)
-% encoding: SJIS
-%
-\def\ptctitle{–ÚŽŸ}
-\def\plftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}–ÚŽŸ}
-\def\plttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}–ÚŽŸ}
-%
-\def\mtctitle{–ÚŽŸ}
-\def\mlftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}–ÚŽŸ}
-\def\mlttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}–ÚŽŸ}
-%
-\def\stctitle{–ÚŽŸ}
-\def\slftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}–ÚŽŸ}
-\def\slttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}–ÚŽŸ}
-%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./japanese2.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{japanese2.mlo}[2005/01/28]
-% From the file JIS.cap of the CJK package
-% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
-% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
-%
-% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
-%
-% Japanese captions
-%
-% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990)
-% encoding: EUC
-%
-\def\plttitle{Ìܼ¡}%
-\def\plftitle{¿ÞÌܼ¡}%
-\def\plttitle{ɽÌܼ¡}%
-%
-\def\mlttitle{Ìܼ¡}%
-\def\mlftitle{¿ÞÌܼ¡}%
-\def\mlttitle{ɽÌܼ¡}%
-%
-\def\slttitle{Ìܼ¡}%
-\def\slftitle{¿ÞÌܼ¡}%
-\def\slttitle{ɽÌܼ¡}%
-%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./japanese3.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{japanese3.mlo}[2005/01/28]
-% From the file JIS.cpx of the CJK package
-% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
-% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
-%
-% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
-%
-% Japanese captions
-%
-% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990)
-% encoding: EUC
-%
-% preprocessed
-%
-\def\ptctitle{Ì220¼161}%
-\def\plftitle{¿222Ì220¼161}%
-\def\plttitle{É189Ì220¼161}%
-%
-\def\mtctitle{Ì220¼161}%
-\def\mlftitle{¿222Ì220¼161}%
-\def\mlttitle{É189Ì220¼161}%
-%
-\def\stctitle{Ì220¼161}%
-\def\slftitle{¿222Ì220¼161}%
-\def\slttitle{É189Ì220¼161}%
-%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./japanese4.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{japanese4.mlo}[2005/01/28]
-% From the file SJIS.cap of the CJK package
-% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
-% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
-%
-% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
-%
-% Japanese captions
-%
-% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990)
-% encoding: SJIS
-%
-\def\ptctitle{–ÚŽŸ}
-\def\plftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}–ÚŽŸ}
-\def\plttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}–ÚŽŸ}
-%
-\def\mtctitle{–ÚŽŸ}
-\def\mlftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}–ÚŽŸ}
-\def\mlttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}–ÚŽŸ}
-%
-\def\stctitle{–ÚŽŸ}
-\def\slftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}–ÚŽŸ}
-\def\slttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}–ÚŽŸ}
-%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./japanese5.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{japanese5.mlo}[[2005/01/28]
-% From the file SJIS.cpx of the CJK package
-% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
-% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
-%
-% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
-%
-% Japanese captions
-%
-% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990)
-% encoding: SJIS
-%
-% preprocessed
-%
-\def\ptctitle{–218Ž159}
-\def\plftitle{125–218Ž159}
-\def\plttitle{•92–218Ž159}
-%
-\def\mtctitle{–218Ž159}
-\def\mlftitle{125–218Ž159}
-\def\mlttitle{•92–218Ž159}
-%
-\def\stctitle{–218Ž159}
-\def\slftitle{125–218Ž159}
-\def\slttitle{•92–218Ž159}
-%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./japanese6.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{japanese6.mlo}[2006/10/31]
-%
-% Japanese captions
-%
-%% Japanese titles for minitoc.sty
-%% Needs japanese fonts (CJK) and special input encoding.
-%% From Kumazawa Toshiki
-%% kumazawa@biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp
-%% http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html
-%
-\ProvidesFile{japanese6.mlo}[2006/10/31]%
-% Japanese titles for minitoc.sty%
-\def\ptctitle{–ÚŽŸ}%
-\def\plftitle{}ˆê——}%
-\def\plttitle{•\ˆê——}%
-%
-\def\mtctitle{–ÚŽŸ}%
-\def\mlftitle{}}%
-\def\mlttitle{•\}%
-%
-\def\stctitle{–ÚŽŸ}%
-\def\slftitle{}}%
-\def\slttitle{•\}%
-%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./malayalam-omega.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{malayalam-omega.mlo}[2007/11/21]
-% From omal.sty
-% by Alex A.J. <indicTeX@gmail.com>
-%
-\def\ptctitle{\mal ഉളàµà´³à´Ÿà´•àµà´•à´‚}%
-\def\plftitle{\mal à´šà´¿à´¤àµà´°à´™àµà´™à´³àµâ€}%
-\def\plttitle{\mal ടേബിളàµà´•à´³àµâ€}%
-%
-\def\mtctitle{\mal ഉളàµà´³à´Ÿà´•àµà´•à´‚}%
-\def\mlftitle{\mal à´šà´¿à´¤àµà´°à´™àµà´™à´³àµâ€}%
-\def\mlttitle{\mal ടേബിളàµà´•à´³àµâ€}%
-%
-\def\stctitle{\mal ഉളàµà´³à´Ÿà´•àµà´•à´‚}%
-\def\slftitle{\mal à´šà´¿à´¤àµà´°à´™àµà´™à´³àµâ€}%
-\def\slttitle{\mal ടേബിളàµà´•à´³àµâ€}%
-%
-%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./russian-cca.mlo}
-%% This package redefines several LaTeX defaults for printing Russian
-%% documents in alternative encoding. Uses packages cmcyr and
-%% indentfirst. By Victor Boyko (vb1890@cs.nyu.edu). 01/18/95.
-\ProvidesFile{russian-cca.mlo}[2006/03/07]
-%% From russian.sty in the cmcyralt package
-%% Victor Boyko (vb1890@cs.nyu.edu)
-\def\ptctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥­¨¥}
-\def\plftitle{‘¯¨á®ª à¨áã­ª®¢}
-\def\plttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}
-%%
-\def\mtctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥­¨¥}
-\def\mlftitle{‘¯¨á®ª à¨áã­ª®¢}
-\def\mlttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}
-%%
-\def\stctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥­¨¥}
-\def\slftitle{‘¯¨á®ª à¨áã­ª®¢}
-\def\slttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}
-%%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./russian-cca1.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{russian-cca1.mlo}[2006/02/07]
-%% Titles for minitoc.sty
-%% using cmcyr fonts in alt encoding
-%% From the cmcyralt package
-%% (A.Harin and V.Zhytnikov)]
-%%
-\def\ptctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥­¨¥}%
-\def\plftitle{‘¯¨á®ª ¨««îáâà æ¨©}%
-\def\plttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}%
-%%
-\def\mtctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥­¨¥}%
-\def\mlftitle{‘¯¨á®ª ¨««îáâà æ¨©}%
-\def\mlttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}%
-%%
-\def\stctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥­¨¥}%
-\def\slftitle{‘¯¨á®ª ¨««îáâà æ¨©}%
-\def\slttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}%
-%%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./russian-lh.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{russian-lh.mlo}[2006/03/07]
-%% Russian (russian-lh) titles for minitoc.sty
-%% from russian.sty in the LH package
-%% Sergei O. Naoumov (serge@astro.unc.edu)
-%%
-\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
-%% for books --
-\def\ptctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥­¨¥}
-\else
-%% for articles etc.--
-\def\ptctitle{‘®¤¥à¦ ­¨¥}
-\fi
-\def\plftitle{‘¯¨á®ª à¨áã­ª®¢}
-\def\plttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}
-%%
-\def\mtctitle{‘®¤¥à¦ ­¨¥}
-\def\mlftitle{‘¯¨á®ª à¨áã­ª®¢}
-\def\mlttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}
-%%
-\def\stctitle{‘®¤¥à¦ ­¨¥}
-\def\slftitle{‘¯¨á®ª à¨áã­ª®¢}
-\def\slttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}
-%%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./russian-lhcyralt.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyralt.mlo}[2006/03/10]
-%% From lhcyralt.sty in the lhcyr package
-%% Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru)
-\def\ptctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥­¨¥}%
-\def\plftitle{‘¯¨á®ª ¨««îáâà æ¨©}%
-\def\plttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}%
-%%
-\def\mtctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥­¨¥}%
-\def\mlftitle{‘¯¨á®ª ¨««îáâà æ¨©}%
-\def\mlttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}%
-%%
-\def\stctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥­¨¥}%
-\def\slftitle{‘¯¨á®ª ¨««îáâà æ¨©}%
-\def\slttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}%
-%%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./russian-lhcyrkoi.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mlo}[2006/03/10]
-%% From lhcyrkoi.sty in the lhcyr package
-%% Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru)
-\def\ptctitle{ïÇÌÁ×ÌÅÎÉÅ}%
-\def\plftitle{óÐÉÓÏË ÉÌÌÀÓÔÒÁÃÉÊ}%
-\def\plttitle{óÐÉÓÏË ÔÁÂÌÉÃ}%
-%%
-\def\mtctitle{ïÇÌÁ×ÌÅÎÉÅ}%
-\def\mlftitle{óÐÉÓÏË ÉÌÌÀÓÔÒÁÃÉÊ}%
-\def\mlttitle{óÐÉÓÏË ÔÁÂÌÉÃ}%
-%%
-\def\stctitle{ïÇÌÁ×ÌÅÎÉÅ}%
-\def\slftitle{óÐÉÓÏË ÉÌÌÀÓÔÒÁÃÉÊ}%
-\def\slttitle{óÐÉÓÏË ÔÁÂÌÉÃ}%
-%%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./russian-lhcyrwin.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyrwin.mlo}[2006/03/10]
-%% From lhcyrwin.sty in the lhcyr package
-%% Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru)
-\def\ptctitle{Îãëàâëåíèå}%
-\def\plftitle{Ñïèñîê èëëþñòðàöèé}%
-\def\plttitle{Ñïèñîê òàáëèö}%
-%%
-\def\mtctitle{Îãëàâëåíèå}%
-\def\mlftitle{Ñïèñîê èëëþñòðàöèé}%
-\def\mlttitle{Ñïèñîê òàáëèö}%
-%%
-\def\stctitle{Îãëàâëåíèå}%
-\def\slftitle{Ñïèñîê èëëþñòðàöèé}%
-\def\slttitle{Ñïèñîê òàáëèö}%
-%%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./thai.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{thai.mlo}[2005/01/28]
-% from thaicjk.ldf CJK 4.5.2 Thai support for the babel system
-% by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
-%
-\def\ptctitle{ÊÒúѭ}%
-\def\plftitle{ÊÒúѭÃÙ»}%
-\def\plttitle{ÊÒúѭµÒÃÒ§}%
-%
-\def\mtctitle{ÊÒúѭ}%
-\def\mlftitle{ÊÒúѭÃÙ»}%
-\def\mlttitle{ÊÒúѭµÒÃÒ§}%
-%
-\def\stctitle{ÊÒúѭ}%
-\def\slftitle{ÊÒúѭÃÙ»}%
-\def\slttitle{ÊÒúѭµÒÃÒ§}%
-%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./hangul-u8.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{hangul-u8.mlo}[2006/02/21]
-%% From the file u8hangul.tex in the HLaTeX package
-%% by Koaunghi Un (koaunghi@kornet.net)
-%%
-%% Hangul captions for Lambda
-%%
-\ksnamedef{ptctitle}{목~차}
-\ksnamedef{plftitle}{그림~목차}
-\ksnamedef{plttitle}{표~목차}
-%%
-\ksnamedef{mtctitle}{목~차}
-\ksnamedef{mlftitle}{그림~목차}
-\ksnamedef{mlttitle}{표~목차}
-%%
-\ksnamedef{stctitle}{목~차}
-\ksnamedef{slftitle}{그림~목차}
-\ksnamedef{slttitle}{표~목차}
-%%
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./hanja-u8.mlo}
-\ProvidesFile{hanja-u8.mlo}[2006/02/21]
-%% From the file u8hangul.tex in the HLaTeX package
-%% by Koaunghi Un (koaunghi@kornet.net)
-%%
-%% Hanja captions for Lambda
-%%
-\ksnamedef{ptctitle}{目~次}
-\ksnamedef{plftitle}{그림~目次}
-\ksnamedef{plttitle}{表~目次}
-%%
-\ksnamedef{mtctitle}{目~次}
-\ksnamedef{mlftitle}{그림~目次}
-\ksnamedef{mlttitle}{表~目次}
-%%
-\ksnamedef{stctitle}{目~次}
-\ksnamedef{slftitle}{그림~目次}
-\ksnamedef{slttitle}{表~目次}
-%%
-\end{filecontents}
-\egroup
-\begin{filecontents}{./minitoc-fr.ist}
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000
-%% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008
-%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert
-%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr>
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
-%% --------------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the minitoc package is
-%% given in the file `minitoc.l'.
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-actual '='
-quote '!'
-level '>'
-encap '|'
-preamble
-"\\begin{theindex}\\flushcolumns\\parindent=0pt \n \\makeatletter\\scan@allowedfalse\n"
-postamble
-"\n\\end{theindex}\n"
-item_x1 "\\efill \n \\subitem "
-item_x2 "\\efill \n \\subsubitem "
-delim_0 "\\dotfill "
-delim_1 "\\dotfill "
-delim_2 "\\dotfill "
-% The next lines will produce some warnings when
-% running Makeindex as they try to cover two different
-% versions of the program:
-lethead_prefix "{\\lneed{8.5}\\vspace{\\baselineskip}\\large\\bfseries\\null\\hfill\\relax\\xhead{"
-lethead_suffix "}\\hfill\\null}\\nopagebreak\\vspace*{\\baselineskip}\n"
-lethead_flag 1
-heading_prefix "{\\lneed{8.5}\\vspace{\\baselineskip}\\large\\bfseries\\null\\hfill\\relax\\xhead{"
-heading_suffix "}\\hfill\\null}\\nopagebreak\\vspace*{\\baselineskip}\n"
-headings_flag 1
-%%
-% Added for french.
-symhead_positive "Symboles"
-symhead_negative "symboles"
-numhead_positive "Nombres"
-numhead_negative "nombres"
-%%
-%% End of file `minitoc-fr.ist'.
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./minitoc.ist}
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000
-%% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008
-%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert
-%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr>
-%%
-%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
-%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 of this license
-%% or (at your option) any later version. The latest version of this
-%% license is in:
-%%
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%%
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
-%% 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained".
-%%
-%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert.
-%%
-%% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l'
-%% distributed with it.
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-actual '='
-quote '!'
-level '>'
-encap '|'
-preamble
-"\\begin{theindex}\\flushcolumns\\parindent=0pt \n \\makeatletter\\scan@allowedfalse\n"
-postamble
-"\n\\end{theindex}\n"
-item_x1 "\\efill \n \\subitem "
-item_x2 "\\efill \n \\subsubitem "
-delim_0 "\\dotfill "
-delim_1 "\\dotfill "
-delim_2 "\\dotfill "
-% The next lines will produce some warnings when
-% running Makeindex as they try to cover two different
-% versions of the program:
-lethead_prefix "{\\lneed{8.5}\\vspace{\\baselineskip}\\large\\bfseries\\null\\hfill\\relax\\xhead{"
-lethead_suffix "}\\hfill\\null}\\nopagebreak\\vspace*{\\baselineskip}\n"
-lethead_flag 1
-heading_prefix "{\\lneed{8.5}\\vspace{\\baselineskip}\\large\\bfseries\\null\\hfill\\relax\\xhead{"
-heading_suffix "}\\hfill\\null}\\nopagebreak\\vspace*{\\baselineskip}\n"
-headings_flag 1
-%%
-%%
-%% End of file `minitoc.ist'.
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./minitoc.lan}
-\def\LANG{0}
-\endinput
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./minitoc-fr.lan}
-\def\LANG{1}
-\endinput
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./minitoc.pre}
-% chaptermark: do not uppercase the headers
-% \def\HLS{\hspace*{-\leftmargin}} % Header Left Shift
-\renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{%
- \markboth{[\thechapter]~---~#1}{[\thechapter]~---~#1}}
-% \markboth{\chaptername~\thechapter~---~#1}{\chaptername~.\thechapter~---~#1}}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% do not uppercase the headers in TOC, LOF, LOT, BIB
-\makeatletter
-\let\RELAX\relax
-% We replace \MakeUppercase by \RELAX
-% TOC
-\renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
- \if@twocolumn
- \@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
- \else
- \@restonecolfalse
- \fi
- \chapter*{\contentsname
- \@mkboth{%
- \RELAX\contentsname}{\RELAX\contentsname}}%
- \@starttoc{toc}%
- \if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi
- }
-% LOF
-\renewcommand\listoffigures{%
- \if@twocolumn
- \@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
- \else
- \@restonecolfalse
- \fi
- \chapter*{\listfigurename
- \@mkboth{\RELAX\listfigurename}{\RELAX\listfigurename}}%
- \@starttoc{lof}%
- \if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi
- }
-% LOT
-\renewcommand\listoftables{%
- \if@twocolumn
- \@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
- \else
- \@restonecolfalse
- \fi
- \chapter*{\listtablename
- \@mkboth{%
- \RELAX\listtablename}{\RELAX\listtablename}}%
- \@starttoc{lot}%
- \if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi
- }
-% BIB
-\renewenvironment{thebibliography}[1]
- {\chapter*{\bibname
- \@mkboth{\RELAX\bibname}{\RELAX\bibname}}%
- \mtcaddchapter[\bibname]%
- \bibpreamble
- \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
- {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
- \leftmargin\labelwidth
- \advance\leftmargin\labelsep
- \@openbib@code
- \usecounter{enumiv}%
- \let\p@enumiv\@empty
- \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
- \sloppy
- \clubpenalty4000
- \@clubpenalty \clubpenalty
- \widowpenalty4000%
- \sfcode`\.\@m}
- {\def\@noitemerr
- {\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}%
- \endlist}
-% Do nor slant text in headers
-\if@twoside
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
- \def\@evenhead{\bfseries\large\thepage\hfil\upshape\leftmark}%
- \def\@oddhead{\bfseries\large{\upshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\chaptermark##1{%
- \markboth {\RELAX{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \if@mainmatter
-% \@chapapp~\thechapter~---~%
- [\thechapter]~---~%
- \fi
- \fi
- ##1}}{}}%
- \def\sectionmark##1{%
- \markright {\RELAX{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
- \thesection. \ %
- \fi
- ##1}}}}
-\else
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty
- \def\@oddhead{\bfseries\large{\upshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\chaptermark##1{%
- \markright {\RELAX{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \if@mainmatter
-% \@chapapp~\thechapter~---~%
- [\thechapter]~---~%
- \fi
- \fi
- ##1}}}}
-\fi
-\def\ps@myheadings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
- \def\@evenhead{\bfseries\large\thepage\hfil\upshape\leftmark}%
- \def\@oddhead{\bfseries\large{\upshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
- \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
- \let\chaptermark\@gobble
- \let\sectionmark\@gobble
- }
-\makeatother
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% PB HYPERREF % \usepackage[position=top,farskip=3ex,captionskip=2ex]{subfig}
-\usepackage{tocbibind}
-% Do not uppercase
-\makeatletter
-\renewcommand{\tocetcmark}[1]{%
- \@mkboth{\RELAX{#1}}{\RELAX{#1}}}
-\makeatother
-\RequirePackage{fixltx2e}
-\usepackage{xspace}
-\usepackage{calc}
-\usepackage{afterpage}
-\usepackage{comment}
-\usepackage{enumerate}
-%<ADDITIONS
-\usepackage{ragged2e}
-\usepackage{array}
-% colonne de type `p', mais raggedright...
-\newcolumntype{R}[1]{>{\RaggedRight\arraybackslash}p{#1}}
-\newcolumntype{L}[1]{>{\RaggedLeft\arraybackslash}p{#1}}
-\newcolumntype{C}[1]{>{\Centering\arraybackslash}p{#1}}
-% La somme des coeffs doit être égale au nombre de colonnes Z, P et X.
-\newcolumntype{Z}[1]{>{\hsize=#1\hsize\relax\leavevmode\RaggedRight\arraybackslash}X}
-\newcolumntype{Y}[1]{>{\hsize=#1\hsize\relax\leavevmode\RaggedLeft\arraybackslash}X}
-\newcolumntype{O}[1]{>{\hsize=#1\hsize\relax\leavevmode\Centering\arraybackslash}X}
-% La somme des coeffs doit être égale au nombre de colonnes Z, O, P et X.
-\newcolumntype{P}[1]{>{\hsize=#1\hsize\relax\leavevmode\arraybackslash}X}
-%ADDITIONS>
-\usepackage{textcomp}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbackslash}{TS1}{92}
-\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textbackslash}{TS1}
-\usepackage{amsfonts}
-\IfFileExists{txfonts.sty}{\usepackage{txfonts}}{\relax}
-\IfFileExists{mflogo.sty}{\usepackage{mflogo}}%
-{\def\MF{\textbf{\texttt{METAFONT}}}
- \def\MP{\textbf{\texttt{METAPOST}}}}
-\providecommand{\fup}{\textsuperscript}
-\newif\ifDP\DPfalse
-\IfFileExists{dpfloat.sty}{\usepackage{dpfloat}\DPtrue}{\DPfalse}
-\newif\ifFLP\FLPfalse
-\IfFileExists{floatpag.sty}{\usepackage{floatpag}\FLPtrue}{\FLPfalse}
-\usepackage{nameref}
-\input{\jobname.lan}
-\newif\ifFTR
-\makeatletter % ESSAI pour tromper varioref
-\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue % ESSAI pour tromper varioref
-\makeatother % ESSAI pour tromper varioref
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\lefthyphenmin=3
-\righthyphenmin=3
-\hyphenation{Mittelbach}
-\hyphenation{Jackowski}
-\hyphenation{biblio-gra-phy}
-\hyphenation{Biblio-gra-phy}
-\hyphenation{Impatient}
-\hyphenation{make-index}
-\hyphenation{hyper-link}
-\FTRfalse
-\usepackage[english]{varioref}
-\or\relax
-\lefthyphenmin=3
-\righthyphenmin=3
-\hyphenation{Mittelbach}
-\hyphenation{Jackowski}
-\hyphenation{biblio-gra-phy}
-\hyphenation{Biblio-gra-phy}
-\hyphenation{Impatient}
-\hyphenation{make-index}
-\hyphenation{hyper-link}
-\FTRtrue
-\usepackage[french]{varioref}
-\fi
-\usepackage{frbib}
-\makeatletter % ESSAI pour tromper varioref
-\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse% ESSAI pour tromper varioref
-\makeatother % ESSAI pour tromper varioref
-\usepackage{multicol}% v40
-\usepackage[OT1,TS1,T1]{fontenc}
-\usepackage{fixfoot}
-\usepackage[bottom,hang,multiple]{footmisc}
-% \def\footnotelayout{\color[rgb]{0.37254903,0.37254903,0.37254903}}
-\renewcommand{\multfootsep}{,}
-\setlength{\footnotemargin}{.7em} %1.8em by default, much too wide.
-% Check if booktabs package is available
-\newif\ifBT \BTfalse
-\IfFileExists{booktabs.sty}{\BTtrue\usepackage{booktabs}}{\BTfalse}
-\usepackage{ifpdf}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\def\gpdftitle{The minitoc package}
-\or\relax
-\def\gpdftitle{Le paquetage minitoc}
-\fi
-\ifpdf
- \usepackage[pdftex]{color}
-% \definecolor{OliveGreen}{cmyk}{0.64,0,0.95,0.40}
-% \definecolor{Green}{cmyk}{1.,0.,1.,0.}
-% \definecolor{RedOrange}{cmyk}{0.,0.77,0.87,0.}
-% \definecolor{Cyan}{cmyk}{1.,0.,0.,0.}
-% \definecolor{light}{cmyk}{0.,0.,0.,0.05}
-% \definecolor{NavyBlue}{rgb}{0.,0,0.5}
-% basic color % \definecolor{blue}{rgb}{0.,0.,1.}
-% \definecolor{DarkGreen}{rgb}{0.,.35,0.}
-% basic color % \definecolor{green}{rgb}{0.,1.,0.}
-% \definecolor{FireBrick}{rgb}{.55,.1,.1}
-% basic color % \definecolor{red}{rgb}{1.,0.,0.}
- \usepackage[pdftex,pstarrows]{pict2e}
- \usepackage[pdftex]{graphicx}
- \usepackage[pdftex, colorlinks,%
- pdfpagelayout={SinglePage},%
-% pdfpagetransition=Dissolve,% slow
-% pdfpagetransition={Split /H /O},%
- pdfview={Fit},%
- pdfstartview={Fit},%
- pdftitle={\gpdftitle},%
- pdfsubject={minitoc},%
- pdfauthor={Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert},%
- pdfcreator={pdfLaTeX with hyperref package},%
- pdfproducer={pdflatex},%
-% pdfpagemode={UseOutlines},%
- pdfkeywords={latex,toc,table-of-contents,part,chapter,section},%
-% pdfpagescrop={53 486 389 754},%
-% pdfpagescrop={0 72 595 772},% % A4 cropped
-% pdfcompresslevel=9,%
- pagebackref=true,%
- pdfnewwindow=true,%
-%% pdffitwindow=true,%
-%% pdfcenterwindow=false,%
- pdftoolbar=true,%
- pdfmenubar=true,%
-%% pdfwindowui=false,%
- bookmarks=true,%
- unicode=true,%
- a4paper=true,%
-% plainpages=false,%
-% pageanchor=false,%
-% hyperindex=true,%
- breaklinks=true,%
- bookmarksopenlevel=0,%
- bookmarksopen,%
-% DEFAULTS % COLORS
-% DEFAULTS linkbordercolor={blue},%
-% DEFAULTS linkcolor={blue},%
-% DEFAULTS menubordercolor={blue},%
-% DEFAULTS % menucolor={FireBrick},%
-% DEFAULTS % basic color % menucolor={red},%
-% DEFAULTS pagecolor={blue},%
-% DEFAULTS % citecolor={DarkGreen},%
-% DEFAULTS citecolor={green},%
-% DEFAULTS % urlcolor={FireBrick},%
-% DEFAULTS urlcolor={red},%
-% DEFAULTS filecolor={blue},%
-% DEFAULTS % COLORS
- bookmarksnumbered=true]%
- {hyperref}%
- \IfFileExists{hypcap.sty}{\usepackage[all]{hypcap}}{}%
-\else
- \usepackage[dvips]{color}%
-% \definecolor{OliveGreen}{cmyk}{0.64,0,0.95,0.40}
-% \definecolor{Green}{cmyk}{1.,0.,1.,0.}
-% \definecolor{RedOrange}{cmyk}{0.,0.77,0.87,0.}
-% \definecolor{Cyan}{cmyk}{1.,0.,0.,0.}
-% \definecolor{light}{cmyk}{0.,0.,0.,0.05}
-% \definecolor{NavyBlue}{rgb}{0.,0.,.5}
-% basic color % \definecolor{blue}{rgb}{0.,0.,1.}
- %\definecolor{DarkGreen}{rgb}{0.,.35,0.}
-% basic color % \definecolor{green}{rgb}{0.,1.,0.}
-% \definecolor{FireBrick}{rgb}{.55,.1,.1}
-% basic color % \definecolor{red}{rgb}{1.,0.,0.}
- \usepackage[dvips,pstarrows]{pict2e}%
- \usepackage[dvips]{graphicx}%
- \usepackage{hyperref}%
- \IfFileExists{hypcap.sty}{\usepackage[all]{hypcap}}{}%
-% \usepackage{breakurl} % DOES NOT WORK
-\fi
-\makeatletter % to include some useful commands
-%avoid warnings
-\providecommand*{\toclevel@xpart}{0}
-\providecommand*{\toclevel@xchapter}{0}
-\providecommand*{\toclevel@xsect}{0}
-\providecommand*{\toclevel@starpart}{0}
-\providecommand*{\toclevel@starchapter}{0}
-\providecommand*{\toclevel@starsection}{0}
-\providecommand*{\toclevel@ppart}{0}
-\providecommand*{\toclevel@pchapter}{0}
-\providecommand*{\toclevel@psect}{0}
-\makeatother
-\usepackage{tabularx}
-\def\UrlFont{\sffamily}
-% Check if url package is available
-% \IfFileExists{url.sty}{\usepackage{url}}{\let\url\texttt}
-\def\eLaTeX{\leavevmode\hbox{$\varepsilon$}-\LaTeX}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\usepackage[french,english]{babel}
-\or\relax
-\usepackage[french,english]{babel}
-\usepackage{franc,frnew}
-% prepare a box for phonetics...
-\newsavebox{\latexbox}
-\catcode`\:=12
-\savebox{\latexbox}{\textbf{[la\i{}tex tu:i:]}}
-\catcode`\:=\active
-\fi
-%\usepackage[TS1,T1]{fontenc}
-%\def\ij{i\kern-.1ex j}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\ij}{T1}{188}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\IJ}{T1}{156}
-\usepackage[isolatin]{inputenc}
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-\or\relax
-\IfFileExists{mypatches.sty}{\usepackage{mypatches}}{\relax}
-\fi
-%\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
-% gray rules for tables/figures
-\definecolor{figrulecolor}{gray}{.82}
-%\definecolor{figrulecolor}{cmyk}{.7,.1,.1,.1} % ESSAIS
-\providecommand{\topfigrule}{\relax}
-\providecommand{\botfigrule}{\relax}
-\providecommand{\medfigrule}{\relax}
-\iffalse % NO figrules... sight
-\renewcommand{\topfigrule}{%
- \vspace*{3pt}%
- \noindent\textcolor{figrulecolor}{\rule[0pt]{\textwidth}{2pt}}%
- \vspace*{-5pt}}
-\renewcommand{\botfigrule}{%
- \vspace*{-3pt}%
- \noindent\textcolor{figrulecolor}{\rule[0pt]{\textwidth}{2pt}}%
- \vspace*{1pt}}
-\renewcommand{\medfigrule}{%
- \vspace*{-3pt}%
- \noindent\textcolor{figrulecolor}{\rule[0pt]{\textwidth}{2pt}}%
- \vspace*{-2pt}}
-\fi % NO figrules... sight
-%
-%
-\makeatletter % to include some useful commands
-\providecommand{\WEB}{\textsc{WEB}}
-\providecommand{\BibTeX}{{\rmfamily B\kern-.05em\textsc{i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em
- T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}}
-\providecommand{\SLaTeX}{{\rmfamily S\LaTeX}}
-\renewcommand{\SLaTeX}{{\sffamily S\LaTeX}} % \sffamily to be coherent with other package names
-%\renewcommand{\BibTeX}{{\rm B\kern-.05em\textsc{i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em
-% T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}}
-\renewcommand{\BibTeX}{{\upshape B\kern-.05em\textsc{i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em
- T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}}
-\let\BiBTeX\BibTeX
-\def\NTS{\leavevmode\hbox{$\cal N\kern-0.35em\lower0.5ex\hbox{$\cal T$}\kern-0.2emS$}}
-\providecommand*{\pdfTeX}{pdf\TeX}
-%\def\eTeX{\leavevmode\hbox{$\varepsilon$}-\TeX}
-\providecommand*{\eTeX}{$\csname m@th\endcsname\varepsilon$-\TeX}
-%\newcommand{\Arabi}{\L{\sffamily A\kern-.2ex\lower.25ex\hbox{r}\kern-.25exa% \L not used here
-% \kern-.22exb\kern-.15exi}} %Logo
-\newcommand{\Arabi}{\mbox{\sffamily A\kern-.2ex\lower.25ex\hbox{r}\kern-.25exa%
- \kern-.22exb\kern-.15exi}} %Logo
-\newcommand{\devnag}{Devan\=agar{\=\i}}
-\def\XeTeX{\leavevmode
- \setbox0=\hbox{X\lower.5ex\hbox{\kern-.15em\reflectbox{E}}\kern-.1667em \TeX}%
- \dp0=0pt\ht0=0pt\box0}
-\def\XeLaTeX{\leavevmode
- \setbox0=\hbox{X\lower.5ex\hbox{\kern-.15em\reflectbox{E}}\LaTeX}%
- \dp0=0pt\ht0=0pt\box0}
-% IF YOU NOT HAVE THE manfnt FONT, the dangerous bends will not be printed...
-\IfFileExists{manfnt.sty}{% does not work with .tfm
-%\typeout{manfnt.tfm FOUND}
-\def\DBEND{%
-\ifcase\LANG\relax
-{} like the one shown in the margin\virage\relax
-\or\relax
-{} comme celui montré dans la marge\virage\relax
-\fi}%
-\newfont{\manfnt}{manfnt}
-\newcommand\virage{\reversemarginpar\marginpar[\raggedleft
- {{\manfnt\symbol{'177}}~~}]{\raggedright {~~\manfnt\symbol{'177}}}\normalmarginpar}
-\def\@Vir{\hbox to12mm{\hbox{}\leaders%
- \hbox{{\manfnt\char127}\kern2pt}\hfil\hbox{}}}
-\newcommand\Virage{\reversemarginpar\marginpar[\hfill{\@Vir~~}]{{~~\@Vir}\hfill}\normalmarginpar}%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-}%ELSE
-{\let\Virage\relax \let\virage\relax \let\DBEND\relax}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% END OF REPLACE
-\def\smooth{\spaceskip=0.3em plus .8em minus .1em
-\xspaceskip=0.6em plus 1em minus .2em
-\pretolerance=10 \tolerance=10000 \looseness=-10000
-\parfillskip=0pt plus10fill\relax}%
-%%% \newenvironment{SCBOX}[1]{\mbox{\scshape #1}}{}
-\newenvironment{SMOOTH}{\bgroup\smooth}{\par\egroup}
-%
-\let\oendquote\endquote
-\def\nendquote{\oendquote\penalty-1\relax}
-%
-\newenvironment{xmessage}[1][XXXXX]{%
- \expandafter\label{mess+#1}%
- \begin{samepage}%
- \let\endquote\nendquote\relax\smooth\lneed{5}\strut\hrule\relax\jmess{#1}\penalty10000}%
-{\par\end{samepage}}
-%
-\def\Cat#1{\hbox{$\langle$\emph{#1}$\rangle$}}
-\def\<#1>{\Cat{#1}}
-%%%
-%%%% Some useful commands from Stefan Ulrich
-\newcommand\changeskips{%
- \@tempdima\abovecaptionskip
- \abovecaptionskip\belowcaptionskip
- \belowcaptionskip\@tempdima
-}
-\newcommand\thickline{%
- \noalign{\hrule\@height1pt\vskip.8ex\relax}%
-}
-\newcommand\V[1]{\texttt{\string#1}}
-\newcommand\Chap{$^*$}
-\newcommand\Sec{$^{**}$}
-\newcommand\Lang{$^\dag$}
-\newcommand\Strut{\rule[2.5ex]{0pt}{0pt}}
-\newcommand\Strutt{\rule[3.5ex]{0pt}{0pt}}
-\newcommand\FontDefault[2]{%
- \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}%
- #1\\
- \hspace*{2em}#2
- \end{tabular}%
-}
-\newcommand\FontChapSec[3]{%
- \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}%
- #1\\
- \hspace*{2em}#2\Chap\\
- \hspace*{2em}#3\Sec
- \end{tabular}%
-}
-%\makeatother
-%\makeatletter
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\def\ps@chapterverso{\ps@empty}%
-\def\cleardoublepage{\clearpage
- \if@twoside
- \ifodd\c@page\else
- \null\thispagestyle{chapterverso}\newpage
- \if@twocolumn\null\newpage\fi
- \fi
- \fi
- }%
-\def\ps@chapterverso{\ps@empty}%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\makeatother
-%old%
-\def\oname#1#2{{\protect\linebreak[0]}\mbox{\textrm{#1}~\textsc{#2}}\oinameA{#1}{#2}\oinameB{#1}{#2}}
-\def\oiname#1#2{\oinameA{#1}{#2}\oinameB{#1}{#2}}
-\newcommand{\name}[2]{{\protect\linebreak[0]}\mbox{\textrm{#1}~\textsc{#2}}\inameA{#1}{#2}\inameB{#1}{#2}}
-\newcommand{\iname}[2]{\inameA{#1}{#2}\inameB{#1}{#2}}
-\newcommand{\uname}[2]{{\protect\linebreak[0]}\mbox{\textrm{#1}~\textsc{#2}}}
-\newcommand{\namea}[3]{{\protect\linebreak[0]}\mbox{\textrm{#1}~\textsc{#2}}\inameaA{#1}{#2}{#3}\inameaB{#1}{#2}{#3}}
-\newcommand{\inamea}[3]{\inameaA{#1}{#2}{#3}\inameaB{#1}{#2}{#3}}
-%\def\xname#1#2{\mbox{\textrm{#1}~\textsc{#2}}}
-\let\oxname\oname
-\let\xname\name
-% vietnamese name: last-first
-%old%
-\def\ovname#1#2{{\protect\linebreak[0]}\mbox{\textsc{#2}~\textrm{\upshape{#1}}}\oinameA{#2}{#1}\oinameB{#2}{#1}}
-\newcommand{\vname}[2]{{\protect\linebreak[0]}\mbox{\textsc{#2}~\textrm{\upshape{#1}}}\inameA{#2}{#1}\inameB{#2}{#1}}
-\newcommand{\ivname}[2]{\inameA{#2}{#1}\inameB{#2}{#1}}
-\newcommand{\vnamea}[3]{{\protect\linebreak[0]}\mbox{\textsc{#2}~\textrm{\upshape{#1}}}\inameaA{#2}{#1}{#3}\inameaB{#2}{#1}{#3}}
-\newcommand{\ivnamea}[3]{\inameaA{#2}{#1}{#3}\inameaB{#2}{#1}{#3}}
-\parskip=12pt
-%\def\bs{{\ttfamily\char'134}}
-\def\bs{\textbackslash} %ESSAI
-\setcounter{tocdepth}{6}
-\setcounter{parttocdepth}{0} % only chapters
-\setcounter{minitocdepth}{6}
-\setcounter{secnumdepth}{6}
-\renewcommand{\textfraction}{.0}
-\renewcommand{\topfraction}{.9999}
-\renewcommand{\bottomfraction}{.9999}
-\renewcommand{\floatpagefraction}{.9999}
-\setcounter{totalnumber}{10}
-\setcounter{topnumber}{10}
-\setcounter{bottomnumber}{10}
-\makeatletter
-\setlength{\@fptop}{0pt}% to push floats to top on float pages
-\makeatother
-\clubpenalty=10000
-\widowpenalty=10000
-\let\mysize\small
-\author{\name{Jean-Pierre F.}{Drucbert}\\%
-ONERA~/~Centre de Toulouse~/~SRI\\%
-\url{mailto:jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr}}
-\date{\today}
-\title{The \texttt{minitoc} package\\(version~\#44)}
-\parindent=0pt
-\lefthyphenmin=3
-\righthyphenmin=3
-\hyphenation{Mittelbach}
-\hyphenation{Jackowski}
-\hyphenation{biblio-gra-phy}
-\hyphenation{Biblio-gra-phy}
-\hyphenation{Impatient}
-\hyphenation{make-index}
-\hyphenation{hyper-link}
-\makeatletter
-\let\o@tocrmarg\@tocrmarg
-\def\@tocrmarg{\o@tocrmarg plus 1fil}
-% macros for needed vertical space
-\def\need#1{\ifhmode\unskip\par\fi \penalty-100 \begingroup % preserve \dimen@, \dimen@i
- \ifdim\prevdepth>\maxdepth \dimen@i\maxdepth \else \dimen@i\prevdepth\fi
- \kern-\dimen@i
- \dimen@\pagegoal \advance\dimen@-\pagetotal % space left
- \ifdim #1>\dimen@
- \vfill\eject\PackageInfo{'need' macro}{WARNING- EJECT BY NEED}
- \fi
- \kern\dimen@i
- \endgroup}
-\def\lneed#1{\need{#1\baselineskip}}
-\def\sneed#1{\ifhmode\unskip\par\fi \penalty-100 \begingroup % preserve \dimen@, \dimen@i
- \ifdim\prevdepth>\maxdepth \dimen@i\maxdepth \else \dimen@i\prevdepth\fi
- \kern-\dimen@i
- \dimen@\pagegoal \advance\dimen@-\pagetotal % space left
- \ifdim #1>\dimen@
- \vfill\null\newpage\PackageInfo{'sneed' macro}{WARNING- SOFT EJECT BY NEED}
- \fi
- \kern\dimen@i
- \endgroup}
-\def\lsneed#1{\sneed{#1\baselineskip}}
-% to avoid a page break just after
-% a part/chapter/section title in a table of contents.
-\let\old@l@part\l@part
-\def\l@part{\lneed{6}\old@l@part}
-\let\old@l@chapter\l@chapter
-\def\l@chapter{\lneed{2.5}\old@l@chapter}
-%
-% %Donald Arseneau asnd@reg.triumf.ca
-% % bottomfnote.sty % replaced by footmisc.sty
-% \let\bf@makecolold=\@makecol
-% \def\@makecol{\advance\skip\footins\fill \bf@makecolold}
-% % end of bottomfnote.sty
-% indentations multiples of 1.5em.
-% enlarge section numbers (numwidth) in tocs.
-\def\l@section{\lneed{1.5}\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{3.0em}}
-\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.0em}{3.2em}}
-\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{4.5em}{4.1em}}
-\renewcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.0em}{5.0em}}
-\renewcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{7.5em}{6.0em}}
-%
-% \renewcommand*\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0.0em}{2.3em}}
-\renewcommand*\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0.0em}{3.0em}}
-\let\l@table\l@figure
-\makeatother
-\providecommand{\AmS}{$\mathcal{A}$\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{$\mathcal{M}$}%
- \kern-.125em$\mathcal{S}$}%
-%%%
-\providecommand{\BAR}{\texttt{\textbar}}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% wdesc &co
-\def\wdesclabel#1{\hspace\labelsep \bf #1}
-\def\wdesc#1{\list{}{\settowidth\labelwidth{#1}\leftmargin\labelwidth
-\advance\leftmargin\labelsep
-\let\makelabel\wdesclabel}}
-\let\endwdesc\endlist
-\def\wit[#1]{\item[{{#1}\hfill}]}
-% bulleted labels
-\def\buwdesclabel#1{\hspace\labelsep \hbox{$\bullet$~~\bf #1}}
-\def\buwdesc#1{\list{}{\settowidth\labelwidth{{$\bullet$~~#1}}\leftmargin\labelwidth
-\advance\leftmargin\labelsep
-\let\makelabel\buwdesclabel}}
-\let\endbuwdesc\endlist
-% boxed labels
-\def\bxdesclabel#1{\hspace\labelsep \fbox{\bf #1}}
-\def\bxdesc#1{\list{}{\settowidth\labelwidth{#1}\leftmargin\labelwidth
-\advance\leftmargin\labelsep
-\let\makelabel\bxdesclabel}}
-\let\endbxdesc\endlist
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\RequirePackage{boldsc}
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./mypatches.sty}
-% LOCAL PATCH
-% encoding T1 for \" (francais)
-\def\fileversion{v02}
-\def\filedate{2006/06/01}
-\ProvidesPackage{mypatches}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space
- Package mypatches]
-% dieresis accent; special case for i
-\DeclareTextCommand{\french@dieresis}{T1}[1]{{\accent"4\if#1i\i\else#1\fi}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\french@dieresis}{OT1}[1]{{\accent"7F\if#1i\i\else#1\fi}}
-% encoding T1 for \w (czech)
-\gdef\czech@w#1{\accent'06 #1}% 06 for T1, was 23 (OT1)
-\gdef\croatian@w#1{\accent'06 #1}% 06 for T1, was 23 (OT1)
-\global\let\w\czech@w
-% \q for czech
-\gdef\czech@q#1{#1\kern-2pt\char'47}%
-\global\let\q\czech@q
-% backslash character (Barre Oblique Inversée: \boi)
-\DeclareTextCommand{\boi}{T1}{{\tt\char '20}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\boi}{OT1}{{\tt\char '134}}
-%\DeclareTextCommand{\degre}{T1}{{\char '6}}
-%\DeclareTextCommand{\degre}{OT1}{{\char '27}}
-\let\degre\undefined
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\degre}{T1}{'6}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\degre}{OT1}{'27}
-%
-\DeclareTextCommand{\czech@w}{T1}[1]{{\accent'06 #1}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\czech@w}{OT1}[1]{{\accent'23 #1}}
-\global\let\w\czech@w
-%
-\DeclareTextCommand{\croatian@w}{T1}[1]{{\accent'06 #1}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\croatian@w}{OT1}[1]{{\accent'23 #1}}
-\global\let\q\czech@q
-% Pb with \No (Nobelium) in chemsym.sty
-\let\Noo\No
-\let\No\undefined
-% \textcent, \textcurrentcy, \textyen, \textbrokenbar
-\ProvideTextCommand{\textcent}{T1}{{\fontencoding{TS1}\selectfont\char162}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\textcurrency}{T1}{{\fontencoding{TS1}\selectfont\char164}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\textyen}{T1}{{\fontencoding{TS1}\selectfont\char165}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\textbrokenbar}{T1}{{\fontencoding{TS1}\selectfont\char166}}
-\RequirePackage{cmsd}
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./boldsc.sty}
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
-\ProvidesPackage{boldsc}[1996/11/12]
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{bx}{sc}{%
- <5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12>%
- <14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>genb*ecxc%
-}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{b}{sc}{<->ssub*cmr/bx/sc}{}
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./franc.sty}
-\ProvidesPackage{franc}[1994/12/16]
-\def\figurename{Figure}
-\def\tablename{Table}
-\def\contentsname{Table des Mati\`eres}
-\def\listfigurename{Liste des Figures}
-\def\listtablename{Liste des Tableaux}
-\def\bibname{Bibliographie}
-\def\indexname{Index}
-\def\chaptername{Chapitre}
-\def\appendixname{Appendice}
-\def\partname{Partie}
-\def\abstractname{R\'esum\'e}
-\def\seename{voir}
-\def\alsoseename{voir aussi}
-\def\today{\ifnum\day=1\relax 1\/$^{\rm er}$\else\number\day\fi \space\ifcase\month\or
-janvier\or f\'evrier\or mars\or avril\or mai\or juin\or
-juillet\or ao\^ut\or septembre\or octobre\or novembre\or d\'ecembre\fi
-\space\number\year}
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./frbib.sty}
-%
-% Pour la bibliographie:
-%
-% En fonction du style french, par de'faut en anglais :
-% Si on ne fait pas de traduction de mots en franc,ais ou que cette notion
-% n'existe pas, on fait tout en anglais :
-
-%%% Correction --bg 2001/08/03
-%%%\ifx\ifFTR\iftrue\else\let\ifFTR\iffalse\fi
-\def\@tempa{\let\ifFTR\iffalse}
-\ifx\ifFTR\iftrue\else\expandafter\@tempa\fi
-
-\newcommand{\andname}{\ifFTR et\else and\fi}
-\newcommand{\editorname}{\ifFTR \'editeur\else editor\fi}
-\newcommand{\editornames}{\ifFTR \'editeurs\else editors\fi}
-\newcommand{\volumename}{\ifFTR volume\else volume\fi}
-\newcommand{\Volumename}{\ifFTR Volume\else volumes\fi}
-\newcommand{\ofname}{\ifFTR de\else of\fi}
-\newcommand{\numbername}{\ifFTR num\'ero\else number\fi}
-\newcommand{\Numbername}{\ifFTR Num\'ero\else Number\fi}
-\newcommand{\inname}{\ifFTR dans\else in\fi}
-\newcommand{\Inname}{\ifFTR Dans\else In\fi}
-\newcommand{\editionname}{\ifFTR \'edition\else edition\fi}
-%\def\pagename{\ifFTR page\else page \fi} de'ja` dans french.sty.
-\newcommand{\pagesname}{\ifFTR pages\else pages\fi}
-%\newcommand{\chaptername}{\ifFTR chapitre\else \fi} de'ja` dans french.sty.
-\newcommand{\technicalreportname}{\ifFTR Rapport Technique\else Technical
- Report\fi}
-\newcommand{\revisionname}{\ifFTR R\'evision\else Revision\fi}
-\newcommand{\janname}{\ifFTR janvier\else January\fi}
-\newcommand{\febname}{\ifFTR f\'evrier\else February\fi}
-\newcommand{\marname}{\ifFTR mars\else March \fi}
-\newcommand{\aprname}{\ifFTR avril\else April\fi}
-\newcommand{\mayname}{\ifFTR mai\else May\fi}
-\newcommand{\junname}{\ifFTR juin\else June\fi}
-\newcommand{\julname}{\ifFTR juillet\else July\fi}
-\newcommand{\augname}{\ifFTR ao\^ut\else August\fi}
-\newcommand{\sepname}{\ifFTR septembre\else September\fi}
-\newcommand{\octname}{\ifFTR octobre\else October\fi}
-\newcommand{\novname}{\ifFTR novembre\else November\fi}
-\newcommand{\decname}{\ifFTR d\'ecembre\else December\fi}
-\end{filecontents}
-\begin{filecontents}{./frnew.sty}
-%permet dans la frappe de retrouver les habitudes de
-%la dactylographie francaise qui conseille de mettre
-%un espace avant les signes de ponctuation ; : ! ?
-%et d'empecher pourtant une coupure de ligne a cet
-%endroit dans le traitement
-\def\dospecials{\do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
- \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~\do\!\do\?\do\:\do\;}
-\catcode`\@=11
-\catcode`\;=\active
-\catcode`\:=\active
-\catcode`\!=\active
-\catcode`\?=\active
-\def;{\relax\ifhmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\fi\kern.25em\fi\string;}
-\def:{\relax\ifhmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\fi\penalty\@M\ \fi\string:}
-\def!{\relax\ifhmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\fi\kern.25em\fi\string!}
-\def?{\relax\ifhmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\fi\kern.25em\fi\string?}
-\let\old@C\^
-\let\old@T\"
-%\uccode"10=`I
-%\uccode"11=`J
-\uccode`\i=`I
-\uccode`\j=`J
-%\def\^#1{\ifx#1i{\old@C\i}\else{\old@C #1}\fi}
-%\def\"#1{\ifx#1i{\old@T\i}\else{\old@T #1}\fi}
-\def\og{\leavevmode\raise.3ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\langle\!\langle$}}
-\def\fg{\leavevmode\raise.3ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\,\rangle\!\rangle$}}
-\def\guill#1{\og\relax #1\relax\fg}
-\frenchspacing
-\def\fron{\catcode`\;=\active
-\catcode`\:=\active
-\catcode`\!=\active
-\catcode`\?=\active
-\frenchspacing}
-\def\froff{\catcode`\;=12
-\catcode`\:=12
-\catcode`\!=12
-\catcode`\?=12
-\nonfrenchspacing}
-\def\@tochtitle{Table des Chapitres}
-\def\@utochtitle{TABLE DES CHAPITRES}
-\def\@Hint{Indications}
-%%% Espace apres le :
-\fron
-\end{filecontents}
-%%
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000
-%% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008
-%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert
-%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr>
-%%
-%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
-%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 of this license
-%% or (at your option) any later version. The latest version of this
-%% license is in:
-%%
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%%
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
-%% 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the minitoc package
-%% given in the file `minitoc.l'.
-%%
-\input docstrip.tex
-\keepsilent
-
-%\usedir{tex/latex/minitoc}
-\usedir{.}
-
-\preamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000
-%% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008
-%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert
-%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr>
-
-This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
-the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 of this license
-or (at your option) any later version. The latest version of this
-license is in:
-
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
-2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained".
-
-This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD).
-
-This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l'
-distributed with it.
-\endpreamble
-
-\Msg{****************}
-\Msg{*** PACKAGES ***}
-\Msg{****************}
-\generate{\file{minitoc.sty}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{minitoc}}}
-\generate{\file{minitoc-fr.dtx}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{minitoc-fr}}}
-\generate{\file{mtcoff.sty}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtcoff}}}
-\generate{\file{mtcmess.sty}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtcmess}}}
-\generate{\file{mtcpatchmem.sty}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtcpatchmem}}}
-\Msg{*****************************}
-\Msg{*** EXAMPLES OF DOCUMENTS ***}
-\Msg{*****************************}
-\generate{\file{mtc-2c.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-2c}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-2nd.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-2nd}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-3co.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-3co}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-add.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-add}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-ads.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-ads}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-amm.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-amm}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-apx.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-apx}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-art.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-art}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-bk.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-bk}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-bo.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-bo}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-ch0.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-ch0}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-cri.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-cri}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-fko.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-fko}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-fo1.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-fo1}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-fo2.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-fo2}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-gap.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-gap}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-hi1.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-hi1}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-hi2.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-hi2}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-hia.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-hia}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-hir.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-hir}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-hop.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-hop}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-liv.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-liv}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-mem.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-mem}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-mm1.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-mm1}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-mu.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-mu}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-nom.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-nom}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-ocf.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-ocf}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-ofs.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-ofs}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-sbf.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-sbf}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-scr.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-scr}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-syn.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-syn}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-tbi.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-tbi}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-tlc.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-tlc}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-tlo.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-tlo}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-tsf.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-tsf}}}
-\generate{\file{mtc-vti.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-vti}}}
-\Msg{*****************}
-\Msg{*** MLD FILES ***}
-\Msg{*****************}
-\generate{\file{acadian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{acadian}}}
-\generate{\file{acadien.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{acadien}}}
-\generate{\file{afrikaan.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{afrikaan}}}
-\generate{\file{afrikaans.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{afrikaans}}}
-\generate{\file{albanian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{albanian}}}
-\generate{\file{american.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{american}}}
-\generate{\file{arab.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{arab}}}
-\generate{\file{arab2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{arab2}}}
-\generate{\file{arabi.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{arabi}}}
-\generate{\file{arabic.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{arabic}}}
-\generate{\file{armenian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{armenian}}}
-\generate{\file{australian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{australian}}}
-\generate{\file{austrian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{austrian}}}
-\generate{\file{bahasa.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bahasa}}}
-\generate{\file{bahasai.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bahasai}}}
-\generate{\file{bahasam.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bahasam}}}
-\generate{\file{bangla.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bangla}}}
-\generate{\file{basque.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{basque}}}
-\generate{\file{bengali.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bengali}}}
-\generate{\file{bicig.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bicig}}}
-\generate{\file{bicig2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bicig2}}}
-\generate{\file{bicig3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bicig3}}}
-\generate{\file{bithe.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bithe}}}
-\generate{\file{brazil.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{brazil}}}
-\generate{\file{brazilian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{brazilian}}}
-\generate{\file{breton.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{breton}}}
-\generate{\file{british.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{british}}}
-\generate{\file{bulgarian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bulgarian}}}
-\generate{\file{bulgarianb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bulgarianb}}}
-\generate{\file{buryat.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{buryat}}}
-\generate{\file{buryat2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{buryat2}}}
-\generate{\file{canadian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{canadian}}}
-\generate{\file{canadien.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{canadien}}}
-\generate{\file{castillan.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{castillan}}}
-\generate{\file{castillian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{castillian}}}
-\generate{\file{catalan.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{catalan}}}
-\generate{\file{chinese1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{chinese1}}}
-\generate{\file{chinese2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{chinese2}}}
-\generate{\file{croatian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{croatian}}}
-\generate{\file{czech.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{czech}}}
-\generate{\file{danish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{danish}}}
-\generate{\file{devanagari.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{devanagari}}}
-\generate{\file{dutch.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{dutch}}}
-\generate{\file{english.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{english}}}
-\generate{\file{english1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{english1}}}
-\generate{\file{english2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{english2}}}
-\generate{\file{esperant.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{esperant}}}
-\generate{\file{esperanto.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{esperanto}}}
-\generate{\file{estonian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{estonian}}}
-\generate{\file{ethiopia.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ethiopia}}}
-\generate{\file{ethiopian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ethiopian}}}
-\generate{\file{ethiopian2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ethiopian2}}}
-\generate{\file{farsi1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{farsi1}}}
-\generate{\file{farsi2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{farsi2}}}
-\generate{\file{farsi3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{farsi3}}}
-\generate{\file{finnish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{finnish}}}
-\generate{\file{finnish2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{finnish2}}}
-\generate{\file{francais.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{francais}}}
-\generate{\file{french.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{french}}}
-\generate{\file{french1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{french1}}}
-\generate{\file{french2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{french2}}}
-\generate{\file{frenchb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{frenchb}}}
-\generate{\file{frenchle.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{frenchle}}}
-\generate{\file{frenchpro.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{frenchpro}}}
-\generate{\file{galician.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{galician}}}
-\generate{\file{german.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{german}}}
-\generate{\file{germanb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{germanb}}}
-\generate{\file{germanb2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{germanb2}}}
-\generate{\file{greek.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{greek}}}
-\generate{\file{greek-mono.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{greek-mono}}}
-\generate{\file{greek-polydemo.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{greek-polydemo}}}
-\generate{\file{greek-polykatha.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{greek-polykatha}}}
-\generate{\file{guarani.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{guarani}}}
-\generate{\file{hangul1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hangul1}}}
-\generate{\file{hangul2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hangul2}}}
-\generate{\file{hangul3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hangul3}}}
-\generate{\file{hangul4.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hangul4}}}
-\generate{\file{hangul-u8.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hangul-u8}}}
-\generate{\file{hanja1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hanja1}}}
-\generate{\file{hanja2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hanja2}}}
-\generate{\file{hanja-u8.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hanja-u8}}}
-\generate{\file{hebrew.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hebrew}}}
-\generate{\file{hebrew2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hebrew2}}}
-\generate{\file{hindi.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hindi}}}
-\generate{\file{hindi-modern.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hindi-modern}}}
-\generate{\file{hungarian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hungarian}}}
-\generate{\file{icelandic.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{icelandic}}}
-\generate{\file{indon.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{indon}}}
-\generate{\file{indonesian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{indonesian}}}
-\generate{\file{interlingua.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{interlingua}}}
-\generate{\file{irish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{irish}}}
-\generate{\file{italian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{italian}}}
-\generate{\file{italian2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{italian2}}}
-\generate{\file{japanese.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese}}}
-\generate{\file{japanese2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese2}}}
-\generate{\file{japanese3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese3}}}
-\generate{\file{japanese4.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese4}}}
-\generate{\file{japanese5.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese5}}}
-\generate{\file{japanese6.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese6}}}
-\generate{\file{kannada.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{kannada}}}
-\generate{\file{khalkha.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{khalkha}}}
-\generate{\file{latin.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{latin}}}
-\generate{\file{latin2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{latin2}}}
-\generate{\file{latinc.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{latinc}}}
-\generate{\file{latinc2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{latinc2}}}
-\generate{\file{latvian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{latvian}}}
-\generate{\file{latvian2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{latvian2}}}
-\generate{\file{letton.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{letton}}}
-\generate{\file{letton2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{letton2}}}
-\generate{\file{lithuanian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{lithuanian}}}
-\generate{\file{lithuanian2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{lithuanian2}}}
-\generate{\file{lowersorbian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{lowersorbian}}}
-\generate{\file{lsorbian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{lsorbian}}}
-\generate{\file{magyar.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{magyar}}}
-\generate{\file{magyar2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{magyar2}}}
-\generate{\file{magyar3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{magyar3}}}
-\generate{\file{malay.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malay}}}
-\generate{\file{malayalam-b.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-b}}}
-\generate{\file{malayalam-keli.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-keli}}}
-\generate{\file{malayalam-keli2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-keli2}}}
-\generate{\file{malayalam-mr.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-mr}}}
-\generate{\file{malayalam-omega.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-omega}}}
-\generate{\file{malayalam-rachana.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-rachana}}}
-\generate{\file{malayalam-rachana2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-rachana2}}}
-\generate{\file{malayalam-rachana3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-rachana3}}}
-\generate{\file{manju.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{manju}}}
-\generate{\file{mexican.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mexican}}}
-\generate{\file{meyalu.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{meyalu}}}
-\generate{\file{mongol.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mongol}}}
-\generate{\file{mongolb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mongolb}}}
-\generate{\file{mongolian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mongolian}}}
-\generate{\file{naustrian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{naustrian}}}
-\generate{\file{newzealand.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{newzealand}}}
-\generate{\file{ngerman.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ngerman}}}
-\generate{\file{ngermanb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ngermanb}}}
-\generate{\file{ngermanb2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ngermanb2}}}
-\generate{\file{norsk.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{norsk}}}
-\generate{\file{norsk2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{norsk2}}}
-\generate{\file{nynorsk.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{nynorsk}}}
-\generate{\file{nynorsk2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{nynorsk2}}}
-\generate{\file{occitan.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{occitan}}}
-\generate{\file{occitan2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{occitan2}}}
-\generate{\file{polish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{polish}}}
-\generate{\file{polish2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{polish2}}}
-\generate{\file{polski.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{polski}}}
-\generate{\file{portuges.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{portuges}}}
-\generate{\file{portuguese.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{portuguese}}}
-\generate{\file{romanian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{romanian}}}
-\generate{\file{romanian2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{romanian2}}}
-\generate{\file{romanian3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{romanian3}}}
-\generate{\file{russian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian}}}
-\generate{\file{russian2m.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian2m}}}
-\generate{\file{russian2o.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian2o}}}
-\generate{\file{russianb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russianb}}}
-\generate{\file{russianc.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russianc}}}
-\generate{\file{russian-cca.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian-cca}}}
-\generate{\file{russian-cca1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian-cca1}}}
-\generate{\file{russian-lh.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian-lh}}}
-\generate{\file{russian-lhcyralt.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian-lhcyralt}}}
-\generate{\file{russian-lhcyrkoi.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian-lhcyrkoi}}}
-\generate{\file{russian-lhcyrwin.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian-lhcyrwin}}}
-\generate{\file{samin.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{samin}}}
-\generate{\file{scottish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{scottish}}}
-\generate{\file{serbian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{serbian}}}
-\generate{\file{serbianc.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{serbianc}}}
-\generate{\file{slovak.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{slovak}}}
-\generate{\file{slovene.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{slovene}}}
-\generate{\file{spanish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{spanish}}}
-\generate{\file{spanish2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{spanish2}}}
-\generate{\file{spanish3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{spanish3}}}
-\generate{\file{spanish4.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{spanish4}}}
-\generate{\file{swahili.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{swahili}}}
-\generate{\file{swedish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{swedish}}}
-\generate{\file{swedish2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{swedish2}}}
-\generate{\file{thai.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{thai}}}
-\generate{\file{turkish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{turkish}}}
-\generate{\file{uighur.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{uighur}}}
-\generate{\file{uighur2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{uighur2}}}
-\generate{\file{uighur3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{uighur3}}}
-\generate{\file{UKenglish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{UKenglish}}}
-\generate{\file{ukraineb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ukraineb}}}
-\generate{\file{ukrainian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ukrainian}}}
-\generate{\file{uppersorbian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{uppersorbian}}}
-\generate{\file{USenglish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{USenglish}}}
-\generate{\file{usorbian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{usorbian}}}
-\generate{\file{vietnam.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{vietnam}}}
-\generate{\file{vietnamese.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{vietnamese}}}
-\generate{\file{welsh.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{welsh}}}
-\generate{\file{xalx.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{xalx}}}
-\generate{\file{xalx2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{xalx2}}}
-\generate{\file{xalx3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{xalx3}}}
-%
-% NO preamble/postamble for mtc-add.bib
-\nopreamble
-\nopostamble
-\Msg{******************}
-\Msg{*** A BIB FILE ***}
-\Msg{******************}
-\generate{\file{mtc-add.bib}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-addbib}}}%
-\obeyspaces
-\Msg{*************************************************************}
-\Msg{* *}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to read the *}
-\Msg{* Installation chapter in minitoc.pdf (or minitoc-fr.pdf) *}
-\Msg{* or the INSTALL file. *}
-\Msg{* *}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the file minitoc.dtx *}
-\Msg{* (or minitoc-fr.dtx) through PdfLaTeX. *}
-\Msg{* *}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing! *}
-\Msg{* *}
-\Msg{*************************************************************}
-
-\endbatchfile